Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
C2025-086 - 4/29/2025 - Approved (4)
C-s RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF Wastewater Maintenance Shop PROJECT NUMBER: 22129 ARCHose CORPOR It 17 r C T iU R F Architect Interior Designer Landscape Architect 2002 N. St. Mary's, San Antonio, TX 78212 / 210.733.3535 November 20, 2024 Record Drawing Number PBG: 928 PROJECT MANUAL FOR: �veD A9C Wastewater Maintenance Shop (� O`�N E. Project Number: 22129 `� n 6541 Greenwood Drive Corpus Christi, Texas 78415 Nj 19339 CD OWNER OF City of Corpus Christi 11.20.2024 1201 Leopard Street Corpus Christi, Texas 78401 ARCHITECTURE/ INTERIOR DESIGN / LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE RVK Architecture 2002 N. St. Mary's Street San Antonio, Texas 78212 210.733.3535 CIVIL ENGINEERING Pape-Dawson Engineers, Inc. 807 N. Upper Broadway, Suite 103 Corpus Christi, Texas 78401 361.360.2209 STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING Lundy & Franke Engineering, Inc. 549 Heimer Road San Antonio, Texas 78232 210.979.7900 MEP ENGINEERING DBR Engineering Consultants 9601 McAllister Freeway, #410 San Antonio, Texas 78216 210.546.0200 IRRIGATION CONSULTANT PRA Irrigation Consultants, LLC 3619 Broadway, Suite 13 San Antonio, Texas 78209 210.788.7015 Record Drawing Number PBG: 928 August 20, 2024 RVK Project 21270.0 Re-Bid Construction Documents ��,3 ��r-Aqc C? N E. 000100 TABLE OF CONTENTS—ADDENDUM NO.4 N;X COr93 39 +Q Division/ Title TF OF Section 1.31.2025 Division 00 Preface Documents 00 00 00 Cover Sheet 000101 Title Page 000100 Table of Contents 000102 List of Drawings 003100 Available Project Information Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements 00 52 23 Agreement(Rev 12-2021) 00 72 00 General Conditions(Rev 6-2021) 00 72 00.1 Attachment: General Conditions 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions (Rev4-2022) 00 73 00.1 Attachment: Supplementary Conditions 00 74 00 Special Conditions for CC Wastewater Maintenance Shop (Rev 10-2018) Division 01 General Requirements 011100 Summary of Work(Rev 10-2018) 01 20 00 Unit Prices 01 23 10 Alternates and Allowances(Addendum No.4) 01 25 00 Substitution Procedures 01 25 00.1 Attachment A— Request for Substitution Form (During Bidding/Negotiation) (CSI) 01 25 00.2 Attachment B—Request for Substitution Form (After Bidding/Negotiation) (CSI) 01 29 01 Measurement and Basis for Payment (Addendum No.4) 01 30 00 Administrative Requirements 01 30 00.1 Attachment A- Request for Information Form 01 30 00.2 Attachment B- Electronic File Transfer Agreement 013140 SER: Shop Drawings/Field Visits 01 33 01 Submittal Register(Rev 10-2018) 01 35 00 Special Procedures 014000 Quality Requirements 014100 Regulatory Requirements Table of Contents 00 0100-1 RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents Rev 1/2022 �ARcti% Division Title Nj9T r933g Section +Q� 014533 Code-Required Special Inspections and Procedures F OF 1.31.2025 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls(Rev 8-2019) 01 56 39 Landscape Protection 01 57 00 Temporary Controls(Rev8-2019) 01 60 00 Product Requirements 01 70 00 Execution and Closeout Requirements 01 78 00 Closeout Requirements 019100 General Commissioning Requirements Division 02 Existing Conditions(Not Used) Division 03 Concrete 030100 Maintenance of Concrete 03 05 16 Underslab Vapor Barriers—STEGO 03 10 00 Concrete Forming and Accessories (CIV) 03 10 00 Concrete Forming and Accessories (ST) 03 12 00 Architectural Concrete Form Liners 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing (CIV) 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing (ST) 03 00 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete (CIV) 03 00 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete (ST) 03 30 00.10 Controlled Low Strength Backfill 03 35 11 Sealed Portland Cement Concrete Finish 03 47 13 Tilt-Up Concrete Division 04 Masonry(Not Used) Division 05 Metals 05 05 19 Post-Installed Concrete and Masonry Anchors 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing 05 12 50 Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel Framing 052100 Steel Joist Framing 053100 Steel Decking Table of Contents 00 0100-2 RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents Rev 1/2022 D ARC' CO o�,�N E. Division Title N j. r933g Section Qom' 05 40 00 Cold Formed Metal Framing qTF O F 01.31.2025 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications 05 51 33 Metal Ladders Division 06 WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES 06 10 53 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry 064100 Architectural Wood Casework 06 83 16 Fiberglass Reinforced Paneling Division 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation 07 27 26 Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barrier System 07 41 13 Metal Roof Panels 07 42 13 Metal Wall Panels (Addendum No.4) 07 54 00 Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing (Addendum No.4) 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 72 00 Roof Accessories 07 84 00 Firestopping 07 92 00 Joint Sealants Division 08 Openings 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames (Addendum No.4) 08 14 16 Flush Wood Doors 083100 Access Doors and Panels 08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors 08 43 13 Aluminum-Framed Storefronts(Addendum No.4) 08 71 00 Door Hardware (Addendum No. 1) 08 71 00.1 Door Hardware Schedule (Addendum No. 1) 08 80 00 Glazing 08 83 00 Mirrors Table of Contents 00 0100-3 RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents Rev 1/2022 QED N E. Division/ Title N 79339 Section Q' Division 09 Finishes �'9TF 0 "' 09 21 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies 1.31.2025 09 30 00 Tiling 095100 Acoustical Ceilings 09 65 00 Resilient Flooring 09 67 00 Fluid-Applied Flooring 09 91 13 Exterior Painting 09 91 23 Interior Painting 09 96 00 High Performance Coatings Division 10 Specialties 10 11 01 Visual Display Boards 10 14 19 Dimensional Letter Signage i^ PI-ast,,. , to r,^a Toilet G9MPaFtMeP"(deleted)Addendum No. 4 10 21 13.19 Plastic Toilet Compartments(Addendum No.4) 10 28 00 Toilet, Bath and Laundry Accessories 10 44 00 Fire Protection Specialties 10 51 13 Metal Lockers Division 11 Equipment 11 81 29 Facility Fall Protection Division 12 Furnishings 12 24 00 Window Shades 12 36 00 Countertops Division 13 Special Construction (Not Used) Division 14 Conveying Equipment (Not Used) Division 21 Fire Suppression 210000 Fire Protection 210529 Hangers and Supports for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment 21 13 13 Wet Pipe Sprinkler System Table of Contents 00 0100-4 RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents Rev 1/2022 i\INY� Division Section Title _ Nj"9T 19339 2i i3 io DFY Pipe SPFinW'^w SV&te,A (deleted)Addendum No.4 1.31.2025 Division 22 Plumbing 22 02 00 Basic Materials and Methods for Plumbing 22 05 13 Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment 22 05 16 Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping 22 05 29 Hangers and Support for Plumbing Piping& Equipment 22 05 48 Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping 22 05 53 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 22 07 19 Plumbing Piping Insulation 22 10 00 Plumbing Piping (ADDENDUM NO. 2) 22 11 19 Plumbing Specialties 22 11 21 Natural Gas Piping Systems 22 30 00 Plumbing Equipment 22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures 226100 Compressed Air Systems Division 23 HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) 23 02 00 Basic Materials and Methods for HVAC 23 05 13 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment 23 05 26 Variable Frequency Motor Speed Control for HVAC Equip. 23 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Piping and Equipment-HVAC 23 05 53 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 23 07 13 Duct Insulation 23 07 16 HVAC Equipment Insulation 23 07 19 HVAC Piping Insulation 23 09 63 Energy Management and Control System (EMCS) 23 21 13 Above Ground Hydronic Piping 23 23 00 Refrigerant Piping 23 31 13 Metal Ductwork 23 33 00 Ductwork Accessories 23 34 00 HVAC Fans Table of Contents 00 0100-5 RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents Rev 1/2022 c� "E. Division/ Section Title (Pjq 1933g +� Q' 23 36 13 Series Fan-Powered Terminal Units TF OF 23 37 13 Air Distribution Devices 1.31.2025 23 41 00 Air Filters 23 62 13 Air Cooled Condensing Units 23 74 19 Rooftop Units (Cooling Only) 23 81 26 Spit System Air-Conditioners 23 82 19 Fan Coil Unit 23 82 39 Electric Unit Heaters Division 26 Electrical 26 02 00 Basic Materials and Methods for Electrical 26 02-91 r^^r--'on;}'^F )faw'%- (deleted)Addendum No.4 26 05 19 Wire, Cable and Related Materials 26 05 26 Grounding 26 05 33 Raceways 26 05 73 Short-Circuit Coord. Study ARC Flash Hazard Analysis 26 06 34 Low Voltage Raceway System 26 08 00 Commissioning of Electrical Systems 26 09 13 Electrical Power Monitoring and Control 26 09 36 Lighting Controls(Stand-Alone) 2621 13 Electrical Service Entrance 26 22 13 Low Voltage Distributions Transformers 26 22 22 Low Voltage Harmonic Mitigating Distr.Transformers 26 24 16 Panelboards 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 26 28 13 Fuses 26 28 16 Safety and Disconnect Switches 26 29 01 Motors and Starters 26 29 26 Miscellaneous Electrical Controls and Wiring 26 41 13.13 Lightning Protection System 26 43 13 Surge Protective Device (SPD)—Service Entrance 26 43 13.13 Surge Protective Devices (SPD)—Standard Interrupting 26 51 19 Lighting Fixtures—Light Emitting Diode (LED) Table of Contents 00 0100-6 RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents Rev 1/2022 SD A E.ti� Division Section Title NX 1933g FpF � 0 1.31.2025 DIV 27 COMMUNICATIONS 27 02 00 Basic Materials& Methods for Communications Systems 27 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems 27 05 28 Pathways for Communications Systems 27 05 43 Underground Ducts and Raceways for Communications Systems 27 11 00 Communications Room Fittings 27 13 00 Communications Backbone Cabling 27 15 00 Communications Horizontal Cabling DIV 28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 05 00 Basic Materials and Methods for Fire Alarm 28 46 09 Fire Alarm System with Voice Evacuation DIV 31 EARTHWORK 31 10 00 Site Clearing 31 13 30 Treatment of Existing Trees 31 22 00 Grading 312316 Excavation 312316.13 Trenching 3123 16.14 Trench Excavation Protection 3123 16.16 Structural Excavation 31 23 23 Fill 3123 23.16 Structural Fill 31 37 00 Riprap 31 63 29 Drilled Concrete Footings DIV 32 Exterior Improvements 32 11 23 Aggregate Base Courses 32 12 50 Site Pavement 32 13 13.10 Concrete Curbs, Gutters and Sidewalks 32 17 13 Parking Bumpers 32 17 13.13 Pavement Markings Table of Contents 00 0100-7 RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents Rev 1/2022 A9, A ,. E. Division Section Title Nj9T r933g +Q� 32 31 13 Chain Link Fences and Gates (Addendum No.4) F O F �-32 31 19 Decorative Metal Fences and Gates (Addendum No.4) 01.31.2025 32 84 00 Landscape Irrigation 32 91 13 Soil Preparation 32 92 19 Seeding 32 92 23 Sodding 32 93 00 Exterior Plants 32 93 10 Landscape Maintenance DIV 33 Utilities 33 01 10.58 Disinfection of Water Utility Piping Systems 33 02 30 Jacking, Boring or Tunneling Pipe 33 02 73 Site Concrete Encasement, Cradles, Saddles& Collars 33 05 61 Concrete Manholes 33 14 16 Site Water Utility Distribution Piping 33 31 13 Site Sanitary Sewerage Gravity Piping 33 42 11 Stormwater Gravity Piping 33 42 13 Stormwater Culverts DIV 41 Material Processing and Handling Equipment 41 22 13.13 Single Girder Bridge Crane Appendix All Testing Reports as Applicable 1 00 3100.1 Attachment: Geotechnical Engineering Report END OF SECTION Table of Contents 00 0100-8 RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents Rev 1/2022 I I IGS DATE(MMIDD/YYYY) i ARC® CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCES 4/30/2025 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER,AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED,the policy(ies)must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER CONTACT NAME: Renee Terrell Higginbotham Insurance Agency, Inc. PHONE FAx PO Box 870 A/c No Ext: 361-561-4237 ac No:361-844-0101 Corpus Christi TX 78403-0870 E-MAIL rterrell@higginbotham.net INSURER(S)AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC# INSURER A:Texas Mutual Insurance Company 22945 INSURED BARC06 INSURER B:Starr Indemnity&Liabili Com an 38318 Barcom Construction, Inc. INSURERc:Hartford Casualty Insurance Company 29424 1146 Heinsohn Road Corpus Christi TX 78406 INSURER D:Trumbull Insurance Com an 27120 INSURER E: INSURER F: COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER:727750984 REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES.LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR TYPE OF INSURANCE ADDL SUBR POLICY EFF POLICY EXP LIMITS LTR D D POLICY NUMBER MMIDD/YYYY MM/DD/YYYY C X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY 65UEABH2PLR 9/12/2024 9/12/2025 EACH OCCURRENCE $1,000,000 DAMAGE TO RENTED CLAIMS-MADE lxl OCCUR PREMISES Ea occurrence $100,000 MED EXP(Any one person) $15,000 PERSONAL&ADV INJURY $1,000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: GENERAL AGGREGATE $2,000,000 POLICY PRO ❑ JECT LOC PRODUCTS-COMP/OP AGG $2,000,000 OTHER: $ D AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY 65UEABH2PMD 9/12/2024 9/12/2,025 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT $1,000,000 Ea accident X ANY AUTO BODILY INJURY(Per person) $ OWNED SCHEDULED BODILY INJURY(Per accident) $ AUTOS ONLY AUTOS X HIRED X NON-OWNED PROPERTY DAMAGE $ AUTOS ONLY AUTOS ONLY Per accident $ C X UMBRELLA LIAB X OCCUR 65RHABH2X6J 9/12/2024 9/12/2025 EACH OCCURRENCE $10,000,000 EXCESS LIAB CLAIMS-MADE AGGREGATE $10,000,000 DED X I RETENTION$in nnn $ A WORKERS COMPENSATION 0002020407 9/12/2024 9/12/2025 X OTH- AND EMPLOYERS'LIABILITY STER ATUTE ER ANYPROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE Y� N/A E.L.EACH ACCIDENT $1,000,000 OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? (Mandatory In NH) E.L.DISEASE-EA EMPLOYEE $1,000,000 If yes,describe under DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below E.L.DISEASE-POLICY LIMIT $1,000,000 B Builder's Risk (TH100065408624 9/12/2024 9/12/2025 Any 1 Building Limit 10,000,000 Catastrophe Limit 10,000,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONS!VEHICLES (ACORD 101,Additional Remarks Schedule,may be attached if more space is required) See Attached... CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN City of Corpus Christi-Procurement ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. Attn:Ariel Bueno-Cortinas 1201 Leopard St.-City Hall, First Floor AUTHORIZEDR RESENTATWE Corpus Christi TX 78469-9277 United States ©1988-2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. ACORD 25(2016/03) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD AGENCY CUSTOMER ID: BARC06 LOC#: AC R® ADDITIONAL REMARKS SCHEDULE Page 1 of 1 AGENCY NAMEDINSURED Higginbotham Insurance Agency,Inc. Barcom Construction,Inc. 1146 Heinsohn Road POLICY NUMBER Corpus Christi TX 78406 CARRIER NAIC CODE ' EFFECTIVE DATE: ADDITIONAL REMARKS THIS ADDITIONAL REMARKS FORM IS A SCHEDULE TO ACORD FORM, FORM NUMBER: 25 FORM TITLE: CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE General Liability policy includes a blanket automatic waiver Of subrogation endorsement that provides this feature only when there is a written contract between the insured and certificate holder that requires it.(Commercial General Liability Coverage Form-Form HG 0001 09/16). General Liability policy includes a blanket automatic additional insured endorsement that provides additional insured status to the certificate holder only when there is a written contract between the insured and certificate holder that requires such status.Commercial General Liability Coverage Form-Form HG 0001 09/16). General Liability policy includes a primary&non-contributory provision only when there is a written contract between the insured and certificate holder that requires such provision. (Commercial General Liability Coverage Form-Form HG 0001 09/16). Auto Liability policy includes a blanket automatic waiver of subrogation endorsement that provides this feature only when there is a written contract between the insured and certificate holder that requires it.(Commercial Automobile Broad Form—Form HA9916 12/21). Auto Liability policy includes a blanket automatic additional insured endorsement that provides additional insured status to the certificate holder only when there is a written contract between the insured and certificate holder that requires such status.(Commercial Automobile Broad Form—Form HA9916 12/21). Workers'Compensation policy includes a blanket automatic waiver of subrogation endorsement that provides this feature only when there is a written contract between the insured and certificate holder that requires it.(Texas Waiver of Our Right to Recover from Others Endorsement-Form WC 42 03 04B 06/14). Umbrella policy follows the terms,definitions,conditions&exclusions of the Scheduled Underlying General Liability,Auto Liability and Employers Liability Insurance.(Umbrella Liability Policy Provisions—Form XL0003 09/16). Contractors Professional Liability and Pollution Incident Liability policy: Illinois Union Insurance Company Policy#CEO G47488771 001 09/12/24-26 $3,000,000 Each Claim/$3,000,000 Aggregate Employee Theft(Crime)policy: Continental Casualty Company Policy#652369039 09/12/23-25 $1,000,000 Per Occurrence Limit Project:Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Contract No.6113 ACORD 101 (2008/01) ©2008 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD i i E I 00 61 16 PAYMENT BOND BOND NO, 108226883 . ....J net Whitehead L Contractor as Principal Surety i Narne: BarcomConstruction,Inc. j Name: irwelt:?sCr,Sitdlty ndSu�itiYC�;mpanyofAmrrica Mailing address(principol ploce of business): Mailing address(Principal plo,ce of business): i 4650 iJ stwa y Park Nvd, rio i.ui IX 72041 i 1146 Heinsohn Rd, Corpus Christi,[X 78406 Physical address(principol ploce of business): i Owner 4650 westway Park Blvd, Name: City of Corpus Christi, Texas i Houscn,ix77c41 i Mailing address (principol place of business): Contracts and Procurement Surety is a corporation organized and existing 1201 Leopard Street # under the laws of the:state of conneccEcut Corpus Christi,Texas 78401 i By submitting this Borid, Surety o 1rirrrrs its outhority to do business in the State of 7exos and Contract ;, its license to execute bonds in the Store of Texos. Project name and number: Telephone(main ournber): 281-606-7000 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Contr act No.6113 Telephone(for notice of cloirn): 860-277-01.11 i { Local Agent for Surety Name Al McClure,Attorney in tact Award Date of the Contract: 4/29/2025 1 Address: 13823 Schmidt fed. Cypress, I 77429 Contract Price: 8,476,293.00 I Bond _ Telephone: 281-890-9294 almia?southernamericanins.con1 Email Address: 5/1/2025 Date of Bond: The address of the surety company to which any (f.7nte of Bond curinat he earlier than Rworrl Dotenotice of claim should be sent may be obtained of Contract) from the Texas Dept, of Insurance by calling the following toll free number:.1-900-252-3439 i t�ayrraei�t Bcnct Form [ltJ E�1_t6 Pro; 1itle Pi oj No 2i3):t Surety and Contractor,intending to be legally bound and obligated to Owner do each cause this Payment Bond to be duly executed on its behalf by its authorized officer,agent or representative. The Principal and Surety bind themselves,and their heirs, administrators,executors,successors and assigns,jointly and severally to this bond. The condition of this obligation is such that if the Contractor as Principal pays all claimants providing labor or materials to him or to a Subcontractor in the prosecution of the Work required by the Contract then this obligation shall be null and void;otherwise the obligation is to remain in full force and effect.Provisions of the bond shall be pursuant to the terms and provisions of Chapter 2253 and Chapter 1269 of the Texas Government Code as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Chapter to the some extent as if it were copied at length herein. Venue shall lie exclusively in Nueces County,Texas for any legal action. Contractor as Principal Barcom Construction,Inc. Surety Travelers Casualty and Surety Cam an of America Signature: Signature: rName: /'?�ftt /�ouc�l�5 Name: C,A.McClure I / � Title; �42Y a! M�tiG' l� Title: Attorney In Fact Email Address: L►,"`la� bay��nt c� .GUM Email Address: alm@southernamericanins.corn JAttoch Power of Attorney and place surety seat below) i END OF SECTION 1 Payment Frond Form 0061 .16•2 Proj Title-Proj No 2021 i E Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America Travelers Casualty and Surety Company TRAVELERS J St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company POWER OF ATTORNEY r KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, and St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company are corporations duly organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut (herein collectively called the"Companies"),and that the Companies do hereby make,constitute and appoint C.A.McClure of CYPRESS Texas their true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact to sign, execute, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds, recognizances, conditional undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof on behalf of the Companies in their business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons, guaranteeing the performance of contracts and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted in any actions or proceedings allowed by law. IN WITNESS WHEREOF,the Companies have caused this instrument to be signed,and their corporate seals to be hereto affixed,this 21st day of April, 2021. gy m� t ��jjy?Nfl suxerr� �ISY AHDy� t��0 NAR/�� j •7v::••y O VP: ► •:9F1 aP: / ,qu; g SEAL SEAL SEAL Jam' ` •3 � 1�6 'rq� 66., ? �1tcSis �i6i»'' Y,•,V� 'rVV• I State of Connecticut By. City of Hartford ss. Robert L.Raney,Senior Vice President On this the 21st day of April, 2021, before me personally appeared Robert L. Raney, who acknowledged himself to be the Senior Vice President of each of the Companies, and that he, as such, being authorized so to do, executed the foregoing instrument for the purposes therein contained by signing on behalf of said Companies by himself as a duly authorized officer. IN WITNESS WHEREOF,I hereunto set my hand and official seal. color My Commission expires the 30th day of June,2026 r• in Anna P.Nowik,Notary Public This Power of Attorney is granted under and by the authority of the following resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of each of the Companies,which resolutions are now in full force and effect,reading as follows: RESOLVED, that the Chairman, the President, any Vice Chairman, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President, any Vice President, any Second Vice President, the Treasurer, any Assistant Treasurer, the Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary may appoint Attorneys-in-Fact and Agents to act for and on behalf of the Company and may give such appointee such authority as his or her certificate of authority may prescribe to sign with the Company's name and seal with the Company's seal bonds, recognizances, contracts of indemnity, and other writings obligatory in the nature of a bond, recognizance, or conditional undertaking, and any of said officers or the Board of Directors at any time may remove any such appointee and revoke the power given him or her;and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, that the Chairman, the President, any Vice Chairman, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President or any Vice President may delegate all or any part of the foregoing authority to one or more officers or employees of this Company, provided that each such delegation is in writing and a copy thereof is filed in the office of the Secretary;and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, that any bond, recognizance, contract of indemnity, or writing obligatory in the nature of a bond, recognizance, or conditional undertaking shall be valid and binding upon the Company when (a) signed by the President, any Vice Chairman, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President or any Vice President, any Second Vice President, the Treasurer, any Assistant Treasurer, the Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary and duly attested and sealed with the Company's seal by a Secretary or Assistant Secretary; or (b) duly executed (under seal, if required) by one or more Attorneys-in-Fact and Agents pursuant to the power prescribed in his or her certificate or their certificates of authority or by one or more Company officers pursuant to a written delegation of authority;and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, that the signature of each of the following officers: President, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President, any Vice President, any Assistant Vice President, any Secretary, any Assistant Secretary, and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any Power of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto appointing Resident Vice Presidents, Resident Assistant Secretaries or Attorneys-in- Fact for purposes only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company and any such power so executed and certified by such facsimile signature and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding on the Company in the future with respect to any bond or understanding to which it is attached. I, Kevin E. Hughes, the undersigned, Assistant Secretary of each of the Companies, do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of the Power of Attorney executed by said Companies,which remains in full force and effect. Dated this 1 day of May 2025 y`�p pSllR r Jl;`YhO ' Y Rlnri 9 ` SEAL .EKPY�"'� SEAL i3 SEAL .,. - Kevin E.Hughes,Assistant Secretary To verifythe authenticity of this Power of Attorney,please call us at 1-800-421-3880. Please refer to the above-named Attorney(s)-in-Fact and the details of the bond to which this Power of Attorney is attached. ANk iraveiersi IMPORTANT NOTICE 1'0 OBTAIN INEURMAJ.10N QR M&KE YOU May C011taCtTfaWlerS Casualty& Surety Company of America a, Travelcrs Cawalty & Surety Company, `Travelers Indemnity Company, Standard Fire Insurance Company and/ol-Farmington Casualty Company for information or to make complaint at: Travelers Bond Attn: Gaims 1500 Market Street WCSt TOWU, Suite 2900 Philadelphia, PA 19102 (267) 075-3000 (267)675-3102 Fax You may contact the Texas Department of insurance to obtain the information on companies,coverages, rights or coniplaint5 at: Texas Depirtmew of In.iurance P.0, Box 149104 Ausllri,'FX 'IU14-9104 (800) 252-3439 ATTAC11 THIS NOTICE TO YOUR BOND,TN5 wti,,e is Coy infomiatioti mW does not bocorno a part or a condition w' the attached document and is given to comply with Section 2253-02 1, Government Code, and Section 53.202, Pr()jxvrty Code, effective September 1, 2001. 006113 PERFORMANCE BOND 108226883 &VldZ BOND ifnet Whitehead i Contractor as Principal i Surety Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America Name: Barcom Construction, Inc. Name: Mailing address (principal place of business): cif business): 1146 Heinsohn Rd. 1650 West Park Wvd Corpus Christi,TX 78406 Fl I. 'J X -1.1 I Physical address(principal place of business): Owner A650 Name: City of Corpus Chi isti, Texas Houston,TX 710,11 Mailing address (principal place of business): Contracts and Procurement Surety 0Y IS a Coop;ration organized and existing 1201 Leopard Street under the laws of the state of: Conneticult Corpus Christi,Texas 78401 By submitting this Bond, Surety offirms its authority to do business in the State of Texas and Contract its license to execute bonds in the State of Toxos. I Project naive and number: Telephone(rnom nurnber)i 281-606-7000 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Contract No.6113 Telephone(for notice ofcloin)): Local Agent for Surely Al McClure,Attorney in fact Award Date of the Contract: 4/29/2025 Address: 13923 Schrnidt Cypi ess,TX 77429 Contract Price: $8,476,293,00 Bond Telephone: 291-290-9?94 Email Address: ilrii@soLitfiernian-)eric inifis,corii 5(1/20?.5 The address ofthe surety company to which any Date of Bond: notice of claim should be sent may be obtained I tDote of Bond cannot be earlier than Award Dote frorn the Texas Crept.of Insurance by calling the I of the Contract) following toll-freenumber: 1-800-252-3439 .......... llc-rfc;i niXice bond Proj Title—Pioj No Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound and obligated to owner do each cause this Performance Bond to be duly executed on its behalf by its authorized officer,agent or representative. The Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators,executors,successors and assigns,jointly and severally to this bond. The condition of this obligation is such that if the Contractor as Principal faithfully performs the Work required by the Contract then this obligation shall be nun and void,otherwise the obligation is to remain in full force and effect.Provisions of the bond shall be pursuant to the terms and provisions of Chapter2253 and Chapter2269 of the Texas Government Code as amended and ail liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Chapter to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. Venue shall lie exclusively in Nueces County, Texas for any legal action. Contractor as Principal Barcom Construction,Inc Surety Travelers Casualty and Sure Company of America j Signature: Signature: Name: Name: C.A.McClure Title: Title: Attorney In Fart Email Address: wr;/��aaF.rCvrt.0 c: ,Gdrt_ ! Email Address: aim@ southernamericaoins.com (� (Attoch Power ofAttorney and place suretyseol below) I 1 I 1 i F i i I END OF SECTION Performance Bond 00611.3 2 Proj Title Proj No 6/11/2021 Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America ARK Travelers Casualty and Surety Company TRAVELERS J St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company POWER OF ATTORNEY KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, and St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company are corporations duly organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut (herein collectively called the"Companies"),and that the Companies do hereby make,constitute and appoint C.A.McClure of CYPRESS , Texas , their true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact to sign, execute, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds, recognizances, conditional undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof on behalf of the Companies in their business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons, guaranteeing the performance of contracts and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted in any actions or proceedings allowed by law. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Companies have caused this instrument to be signed, and their corporate seals to be hereto affixed,this 21st day of April, 2021. 0"; SEAL EAL SEAL n 0 State of Connecticut By O City of Hartford ss. Robert L.Raney,Senior Vice President On this the 21st day of April, 2021, before me personally appeared Robert L. Raney, who acknowledged himself to be the Senior Vice President of each of the Companies, and that he, as such, being authorized so to do, executed the foregoing instrument for the purposes therein contained by signing on behalf of said Companies by himself as a duly authorized officer. //ff IN WITNESS WHEREOF,I hereunto set my hand and official seal. �f My Commission expires the 30th day of June,2026 y� vFf .� Anna P. Nowik,Notary Public This Power of Attorney is granted under and by the authority of the following resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of each of the Companies,which resolutions are now in full force and effect,reading as follows: RESOLVED, that the Chairman, the President, any Vice Chairman, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President, any Vice President, any Second Vice President, the Treasurer, any Assistant Treasurer, the Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary may appoint Attorneys-in-Fact and Agents to act for and on behalf of the Company and may give such appointee such authority as his or her certificate of authority may prescribe to sign with the Company's name and seal with the Company's seal bonds, recognizances, contracts of indemnity, and other writings obligatory in the nature of a bond, recognizance, or conditional undertaking, and any of said officers or the Board of Directors at any time may remove any such appointee and revoke the power given him or her;and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, that the Chairman, the President, any Vice Chairman, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President or any Vice President may delegate all or any part of the foregoing authority to one or more officers or employees of this Company, provided that each such delegation is in writing and a copy thereof is filed in the office of the Secretary;and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, that any bond, recognizance, contract of indemnity, or writing obligatory in the nature of a bond, recognizance, or conditional undertaking shall be valid and binding upon the Company when (a) signed by the President, any Vice Chairman, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President or any Vice President, any Second Vice President, the Treasurer, any Assistant Treasurer, the Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary and duly attested and sealed with the Company's seal by a Secretary or Assistant Secretary; or (b) duly executed (under seal, if required) by one or more Attorneys-in-Fact and Agents pursuant to the power prescribed in his or her certificate or their certificates of authority or by one or more Company officers pursuant to a written delegation of authority;and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, that the signature of each of the following officers: President, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President, any Vice President,any Assistant Vice President, any Secretary, any Assistant Secretary, and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any Power of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto appointing Resident Vice Presidents, Resident Assistant Secretaries or Attorneys-in- Fact for purposes only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company and any such power so executed and certified by such facsimile signature and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding on the Company in the future with respect to any bond or understanding to which it is attached. I, Kevin E. Hughes, the undersigned, Assistant Secretary of each of the Companies, do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of the Power of Attorney executed by said Companies,which remains in full force and effect. Dated this 1 day of May 2026 ;�OSURF�% .�titY hYO G N�.M.AR�NF� �5(�yY.• r.a 1 �,� V SEAL IKN Ct'W SEAL b SEAL o Kevin E.Hughes,Assistant Secretary To verifythe authenticity of this Power of Attorney,please call us at 1-800-421-3880. Please refer to the above-named Attorneys)-in-Fact and the details of the bond to which this Power of Attorney is attached. p9rq V A011k lravelersJ IMPORTANT NOTICE 100WIALNINFORMS11 NOR MAKLAEADRLN-M� You may contact Travelers CaRtalty& Surety Company oj'.runt ica, Travelers Casualty Surety Company Travelers Indemnity Company, Standard Fire Insurance Company and/or Farmington Casualty Company for information or-to make a complaint at: Travelers Bond Attw Gairris 1500 Market street West Tower, Suite 2900 Philadelphia, PA 19102 (267) 075-3000 (267) 675-3102 Fax You may contact the Texas Department of trisurance to obtain the information on companies,coverages, rights or complaints at: Texas Depirtinent of Insurance R0, Box 149104 Austin, X 7PI4-9104 (800)252-3439 ATT'NCH TICS NOTICE TO YOUR BONND,This wti,;e M kw onty ai,% does not become a part or a condition of the attached document and is given to comply vJth Section 2253-021, Government Code, and Section 53,2102, Property Code, effective S(,ptember 1, 2001. gYUS O v �N�OgPORPtE� 1852 00 52 23 AGREEMENT This Agreement,for the Project awarded on April 29,2025, is between the City of Corpus Christi (Owner) and Barcom Construction, Inc (Contractor). Owner and Contractor agree as follows: ARTICLE 1—WORK 1.01 Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work is generally described as: Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 ARTICLE 2—DESIGNER AND OWNER'S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE 2.01 The Project has been designed by: RVK Architecture 2002 N. St. Mary's Street San Antonio,TX 78212 liz.hurd@rvkarchitecture.com 2.02 The Owner's Authorized Representative for this Project is: Joseph Johnson,Asst. Director of Construction 4917 Holly Rd, Bldg.#5 Corpus Christi,TX,78411 9osephi2@cctexas.com ARTICLE 3—CONTRACT TIMES 3.01 Contract Times A. The Work is required to be substantially completed within 365 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in the Notice to Proceed and is to be completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions within 395 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run. B. Performance of the Work is required as shown in Paragraph 7.02 of the General Conditions. Agreement 00 52 23- 1 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Rev 12/2021 C. Milestones, and the dates for completion of each, are as defined in Section 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES. 3.02 Liquidated Damages A. Owner and Contractor recognize that time limits for specified Milestones, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness for Final Payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. Owner and Contractor recognize that the Owner will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in Paragraph 3.01 and as adjusted in accordance with Paragraph 11.05 of the General Conditions. Owner and Contractor also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof,Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty): 1. Substantial Completion: Contractor shall pay Owner$400 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete. 2. Completion of the Remaining Work: Contractor agrees to pay Owner$400 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for completion and readiness for final payment until the Work is completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions. 3. Liquidated damages for failing to timely attain Substantial Completion and Final Completion are not additive and will not be imposed concurrently. 4. Milestones: Contractor agrees to pay Owner liquidated damages as stipulated in SECTION 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES for failure to meet Milestone completions. 5. The Owner will determine whether the Work has been completed within the Contract Times. B. Owner is not required to only assess liquidated damages, and Owner may elect to pursue its actual damages resulting from the failure of Contractor to complete the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 4—CONTRACT PRICE 4.01 Owner will pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents at the unit prices shown in the attached BID FORM. Unit prices have been computed in accordance with Paragraph 15.03 of the General Conditions. Contractor acknowledges that estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and were solely for the purpose of comparing Bids, and final payment for all unit price items will be based on actual quantities, determined as provided in the Contract Documents. Total Base Bid Price $ 8,476,293.00 ARTICLE 5—PAYMENT PROCEDURES 5.01 Submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 17 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by the OAR as provided in the General Conditions. Agreement 00 52 23-2 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Rev 12/2021 5.02 Progress Payments; Retainage: A. The Owner will make progress payments on or about the 25th day of each month during performance of the Work. Payment is based on Work completed in accordance with the Schedule of Values established as provided in the General Conditions. B. Progress payments equal to the full amount of the total earned value to date for completed Work minus the retainage listed below and properly stored materials will be made prior to Substantial Completion. 1. The standard retainage is 5 percent. C. Payment will be made for the amount determined per Paragraph 5.02.13, less the total of payments previously made and less set-offs determined in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions. D. At the Owner's option, Owner may pay Contractor 100 percent of the Work completed, less amounts withheld in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions and less 200 percent of OAR's estimate of the value of Work to be completed or corrected to reach Substantial Completion. Owner may, at its sole discretion, elect to hold retainage in the amounts set forth above for progress payments prior to Substantial Completion if Owner has concerns with the ability of the Contractor to complete the remaining Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or within the time frame established by this Agreement. Release or reduction in retainage is contingent upon and consent of surety to the reduction in retainage. 5.03 Owner will pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by OAR in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions upon Final Completion and acceptance of the Work. ARTICLE 6—INTEREST ON OVERDUE PAYMENTS AND RETAINAGE 6.01 The Owner is not obligated to pay interest on overdue payments except as required by Texas Government Code Chapter 2251. Invoices must comply with Article 17 of the General Conditions. 6.02 Except as specified in Article 5, the Owner is not obligated to pay interest on moneys not paid except as provided in Texas Government Code Chapter 2252. ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS 7.01 The Contractor makes the following representations: A. The Contractor has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents and the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents. B. The Contractor has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. C. The Contractor is familiar with Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. Agreement 00 52 23-3 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Rev 12/2021 D. The Contractor has carefully studied the following Site-related reports and drawings as identified in the Supplementary Conditions: 1. Geotechnical Data Reports regarding subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; 2. Drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site; 3. Underground Facilities referenced in reports and drawings; 4. Reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site; and 5. Technical Data related to each of these reports and drawings. E. The Contractor has considered the: 1. Information known to Contractor; 2. Information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; 3. Information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; and 4. The Contract Documents. F. The Contractor has considered the items identified in Paragraphs 7.01.D and 7.01.E with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and documents on: 1. The cost, progress, and performance of the Work; 2. The means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor; and 3. Contractor's safety precautions and programs. G. Based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraphs, Contractor agrees that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. H. The Contractor is aware of the general nature of Work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents. I. The Contractor has correlated the information known to the Contractor, information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Contract Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Contract Documents. J. The Contractor has given the OAR written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that the Contractor has discovered in the Contract Documents,and the written resolution provided by the OAR is acceptable to the Contractor. K. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. L. Contractor's entry into this Contract constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Contractor that without exception all prices in the Agreement are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents. Agreement 00 52 23-4 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Rev 12/2021 M. CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY, DEFEND AND HOLD HARMLESS THE OWNER'S INDEMNITEES IN ACCORDANCE WITH PARAGRAPH 7.14 OF THE GENERAL CONDITIONS AND THE SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. ARTICLE 8—ACCOUNTING RECORDS 8.01 Accounting Record Availability: The Contractor shall keep such full and detailed accounts of materials incorporated and labor and equipment utilized for the Work consistent with the requirements of Paragraph 15.01 of the General Conditions and as may be necessary for proper financial management under this Agreement. Subject to prior written notice,the Owner shall be afforded reasonable access during normal business hours to all of the Contractor's records, books, correspondence, instructions, drawings, receipts,vouchers,memoranda,and similar data relating to the Cost of the Work and the Contractor's fee. The Contractor shall preserve all such documents for a period of 3 years after the final payment by the Owner. ARTICLE 9—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 9.01 Contents: A. The Contract Documents consist of the following: 1. Solicitation documents. 2. Specifications, forms, and documents listed in SECTION 00 0100 TABLE OF CONTENTS. 3. Drawings listed in the Sheet Index. 4. Addenda. 5. Exhibits to this Agreement: a. Contractor's Bid Form. b. Include Wastewater CD Exhibit if Project pertains to SSO CD work. c. Geotechnical Report. 6. Documentation required by the Contract Documents and submitted by Contractor prior to Notice of Award. B. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article. C. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in Article 11 of the General Conditions. Agreement 00 52 23-5 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Rev 12/2021 ARTICLE 10—CONTRACT DOCUMENT SIGNATURES ATTEST CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI '2 vhaiiie 601 f-a- WJ,4hx StephaA Box for(May 15,202516:10 C T) Jeff y Edmonds(May 14,202519:34 EDT) Rebecca Huerta 05/15/2025 Jeffrey Edmonds, P.E 05/14/2025 City Secretary Director of Engineering Services M2025-049 AUTHORIZED APPROVED AS TO LEGAL FORM: BY COUNCIL 4/29/2025 Ja4t Whitehead(May 14,2025 14:06 CDT) RH/SB Assistant City Attorney 05/14/2025 ATTEST(IF CORPORATION) CONTRACTOR fat /fO ffwd!? Pat Hoffman(May ,2025 09:04 CDT) (Seal Below) By: Patrick W. Hoffman Note: Attach copy of authorization to sign if Title: Treasurer person signing for CONTRACTOR is not President Vice President Chief Executive Officer, or Chief 1146 Heinsohn Rd. Financial Officer Address Corpus Christi Texas 78406 City State Zip 361-851-100 Phone Fax _patrickh(_)barcomcc.com Email END OF SECTION Agreement 00 52 23-6 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Rev 12/2021 CIVCAS, RFB 6113 Wastewater Maintenance Building City Project No.22129 Rebid Report Created On:2/12/2025 8:06:17 PM BID TOTALS BASE BID Total Part A- General $88,359.00 Part B- Concrete $1,788,309.00 Part C- Masonry $11,061.00 Part D- Metals $694,887.00 Part E-Wood, Plastics,and Composites $55,720.00 Part F-Thermal and Moisture Protection $438,853.00 Part G- Openings $374,143.00 Part H- Finishes $565,057.00 Part I-Specialties $98,459.00 Part J- Furnishings $16,852.00 Part K- Material Handling Equipment $89,895.00 Part L- Fire Suppression $57,018.00 Part M- Plumbing $466,235.00 Park N- Heating,Ventilation &Air Conditioning $603,399.00 Part O- Electrical $932,822.00 Part P- Communications $56,020.00 Part Q- Electronic Safety&Security $45,181.00 Part R- Earthwork $323,283.00 Part S- Exterior Improvements $83,326.00 PartT- Utilities $446,384.00 Part U-Additive Alternative#1 Epoxy Flooring $23,000.00 Part V-Additive Alternative#2 Decorative Metal Fence(V1) $210,000.00 Part W-Additive Alternative#3 Irrigation $60,600.00 Part X-Alternative#4 Mechanical Screens $115,800.00 Part Y-Allowances $422,230.00 Total $8,066,893.00 ALTERNATE 1 Total CIVCAST RFB 6113 Wastewater Maintenance Building City Project No.22129 Rebid Report Created On:2/12/2025 8:06:17 PM Part U-Additive Alternative#1 Epoxy Flooring $23,000.00 Total $23,000.00 ALTERNATE 2 Total Part V-Additive Alternative#2 Decorative Metal Fence(V1) $210,000.00 Total $210,000.00 ALTERNATE 3 Total Part W-Additive Alternative#3 Irrigation $60,600.00 Total $60,600.00 ALTERNATE 4 Total Part X-Alternative#4 Mechanical Screens $115,800.00 Total $115,800.00 Part A-General No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price Al Moblization LS 1 $11,706.00 $11,706.00 A2 Bond &Insurance AL 1 $58,525.00 $58,525.00 A3 Storm Water Pollution Prevention LS 1 $11,706.00 $11,706.00 A4 Temporary Site Facilities and Logistics LS 1 $6,422.00 $6,422.00 Subtotal: $88,359.00 Part IS-Concrete No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price B1 Cast-In-Place Concrete(Building) LS 1 $816,380.00 $816,380.00 B2 Cast-In-Place Concrete(Site) LS 1 $681,991.00 $681,991.00 B3 Concrete Staining/Polishing/Sealing LS 1 $37,893.00 $37,893.00 B4 Tilt-Up Concrete LS 1 $252,045.00 $252,045.00 Subtotal: $1,788,309.00 Part C- Masonry CIVCAST RFB 6113 Wastewater Maintenance Building City Project No.22129 Rebid Report Created On:2/12/2025 8:06:17 PM No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price C1 Unit Masonry, Mortar, and Reinforcing LS 1 $11,061.00 $11,061.00 Subtotal: $11,061.00 Part D- Metals No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price D1 Structural/Miscellaneous Steel- LS 1 $454,112.00 $454,112.00 Fabrication D2 Structural/Miscellaneous Steel- LS 1 $240,775.00 $240,775.00 Erection Subtotal: $694,887.00 Part E-Wood, Plastics,and Composites No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price E1 Rough Carpentry LS 1 $39,330.00 $39,330.00 E2 Architectural Woodwork LS 1 $14,750.00 $14,750.00 E3 Plastic Paneling LS 1 $1,640.00 $1,640.00 Subtotal: $55,720.00 Part F-Thermal and Moisture Protection No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price F1 Waterproofing/Dampproofing/Joint LS 1 $42,783.00 $42,783.00 Sealants F2 Metal Wall Panels/Metal Roof Panels LS 1 $107,805.00 $107,805.00 F3 Roofing LS 1 $283,265.00 $283,265.00 F4 Firestopping LS 1 $5,000.00 $5,000.00 Subtotal: $438,853.00 Part G-Openings No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price G1 Doors/Frames/Hardware/Access LS 1 $134,684.00 $134,684.00 Doors G2 Overhead Coiling Doors/Grilles LS 1 $84,225.00 $84,225.00 G3 Storefronts LS 1 $150,234.00 $150,234.00 CIVCAST RFB 6113 Wastewater Maintenance Building City Project No.22129 Rebid Report Created On:2/12/2025 8:06:17 PM G4 Glazing LS 1 $5,000.00 $5,000.00 Subtotal: $374,143.00 Part H- Finishes No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price 1-11 Drywall/Acoustical LS 1 $347,033.00 $347,033.00 H2 Tile LS 1 $64,514.00 $64,514.00 H3 Carpet/Resilient Flooring LS 1 $40,875.00 $40,875.00 H4 Painting/Wallcoverings LS 1 $112,635.00 $112,635.00 Subtotal: $565,057.00 Part I-Specialties No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price 11 Signage/Identification Devices LS 1 $10,743.00 $10,743.00 12 Toilet Compartments&Accessories LS 1 $30,730.00 $30,730.00 13 Fire Protection Specialites LS 1 $2,145.00 $2,145.00 14 Protective Covers/Sunscreens LS 1 $37,456.00 $37,456.00 15 Metal Lockers LS 1 $17,385.00 $17,385.00 Subtotal: $98,459.00 Part J- Furnishings No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price J1 Roller Window Shades LS 1 $9,827.00 $9,827.00 J2 Countertops LS 1 $7,025.00 $7,025.00 Subtotal: $16,852.00 Part K- Material Handling Equipment No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price K1 Single Girder Bridge Crane LS 1 $89,895.00 $89,895.00 Subtotal: $89,895.00 Part L- Fire Suppression CIVCAST RFB 6113 Wastewater Maintenance Building City Project No.22129 Rebid Report Created On:2/12/2025 8:06:17 PM No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price L1 Fire Suppression Sprinkler Systems LS 1 $57,018.00 $57,018.00 Subtotal: $57,018.00 Part M- Plumbing No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price M1 Plumbing LS 1 $281,380.00 $281,380.00 M2 Shop-Air Lines LS 1 $28,883.00 $28,883.00 M3 Plumbing Fixtures LS 1 $84,410.00 $84,410.00 M4 Water Piping LS 1 $71,562.00 $71,562.00 Subtotal: $466,235.00 Park N- Heating,Ventilation&Air Conditioning No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price N1 HVAC LS 1 $214,790.00 $214,790.00 N2 Testing,Adjusting, &Balancing LS 1 $14,631.00 $14,631.00 N3 Controls LS 1 $76,082.00 $76,082.00 N4 Ductwork and Accessories LS 1 $297,896.00 $297,896.00 Subtotal: $603,399.00 Part O- Electrical No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price 01 Electrical LS 1 $620,198.00 $620,198.00 02 Electrical Switchgear and Panels LS 1 $119,860.00 $119,860.00 03 General Grounding/Bonding LS 1 $23,410.00 $23,410.00 04 Light Fixtures LS 1 $80,297.00 $80,297.00 05 Controls LS 1 $53,551.00 $53,551.00 06 Lightning Protection LS 1 $35,506.00 $35,506.00 Subtotal: $932,822.00 Part P-Communications No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price CIVCAST RFB 6113 Wastewater Maintenance Building City Project No.22129 Rebid Report Created On:2/12/2025 8:06:17 PM P1 Communications Cabling and LS 1 $56,020.00 $56,020.00 Equipment P2 Audio-Video Systems LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 Subtotal: $56,020.00 Part Q- Electronic Safety&Security No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price Q1 Security/Access Control/Surveillance LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 Q2 Fire Alarm Systems LS 1 $45,181.00 $45,181.00 Subtotal: $45,181.00 Part R- Earthwork No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price R1 Earthwork LS 1 $297,788.00 $297,788.00 R2 Erosion Control LS 1 $21,500.00 $21,500.00 R3 Termite Control LS 1 $3,675.00 $3,675.00 R4 GREATER DEPTH of Drilled Footings Unit LF 1 $240.00 $240.00 Price per linear foot of excavation, steel &concrete in place for 18" diameter shaft R5 Unit price per linear foot of excavation, LF 1 $250.00 $250.00 steel&concrete in place for 24" diameter shaft R6 LESSER DEPTH of Drilled Footings. LF 1 ($80.00) ($80.00) Unit price per linear foot of excavation, steel&concrete in place for 18" diameter shaft R7 Unit price per linear foot of excavation, LF 1 ($90.00) ($90.00) steel&concrete in place for 24" diameter shaft R8 GREATER CASING DEPTH 5 LF 1 $0.00 $0.00 Unit price for each 5-foot increment in casing depth for 18" diameter shaft R9 Unit price for each 5-foot increment in 5 LF 1 $0.00 $0.00 casing depth for 24" diameter shaft R10 LESSER CASING DEPTH 5 LF 1 $0.00 $0.00 Unit price for each 5-foot increment in casing depth for 18" diamter shaft CIVCAST RFB 6113 Wastewater Maintenance Building City Project No.22129 Rebid Report Created On:2/12/2025 8:06:17 PM R11 Unit price for each 5-foot increment in 5 LF 1 $0.00 $0.00 casing depth for 24" diameter shaft R12 DELETION OF CASING EA. 1 $0.00 $0.00 Price deduction for each 18"diameter shaft determined not to require casing R13 Price deduction for each 24"diameter EA. 1 $0.00 $0.00 shaft determined not to require casing Subtotal: $323,283.00 Part 5- Exterior Improvements No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price S1 Traffic Markings/Signage LS 1 $19,998.00 $19,998.00 S2 Fences/Gates LS 1 $37,108.00 $37,108.00 S3 Landscaping LS 1 $13,110.00 $13,110.00 S4 Irrigation LS 1 $13,110.00 $13,110.00 Subtotal: $83,326.00 Part T- Utilities No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price T1 Domestic Water Lines LS 1 $14,667.00 $14,667.00 T2 Fire Water Lines LS 1 $45,392.00 $45,392.00 T3 Sanitary Sewer Lines LS 1 $211,750.00 $211,750.00 T4 Storm Drain Lines LS 1 $174,575.00 $174,575.00 Subtotal: $446,384.00 Part U-Additive Alternative#1 Epoxy Flooring No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price U1 Epoxy Flooring LS 1 $23,000.00 $23,000.00 Subtotal: $23,000.00 Part V-Additive Alternative*2 Decorative Metal Fence(V1) No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price V1 Ornamental Fence System LS 1 $210,000.00 $210,000.00 Subtotal: $210,000.00 CIVCAST RFB 6113 Wastewater Maintenance Building City Project No.22129 Rebid Report Created On:2/12/2025 8:06:17 PM Part W-Additive Alternative#3 Irrigation No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price W1 Irrigation &Landscape LS 1 $60,600.00 $60,600.00 Subtotal: $60,600.00 Part X-Alternative#4 Mechanical Screens No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price X1 Mechanical Screens LS 1 $115,800.00 $115,800.00 Subtotal: $115,800.00 Part Y-Allowances No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price Y1 Allowance for unforeseen building AL 1 $320,000.00 $320,000.00 conditions during construction Y2 Bonds and Insurance AL 1 $70,230.00 $70,230.00 Y3 Permitting Allowance AL 1 $32,000.00 $32,000.00 Subtotal: $422,230.00 Part U-Additive Alternative#1 Epoxy Flooring No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price U1 Epoxy Flooring LS 1 $23,000.00 $23,000.00 Subtotal: $23,000.00 Part V-Additive Alternative#2 Decorative Metal Fence(V1) No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price V1 Ornamental Fence System LS 1 $210,000.00 $210,000.00 Subtotal: $210,000.00 Part W-Additive Alternative#3 Irrigation No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price CIVCAST RFB 6113 Wastewater Maintenance Building City Project No.22129 Rebid Report Created On:2/12/2025 8:06:17 PM W1 Irrigation &Landscape LS 1 $60,600.00 $60,600.00 Subtotal: $60,600.00 Part X-Alternative#4 Mechanical Screens No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price X1 Mechanical Screens LS 1 $115,800.00 $115,800.00 Subtotal: $115,800.00 CIVCAS, RFB 6113 Wastewater Maintenance Building City Project No.22129 Rebid Report Created On:2/12/2025 8:06:17 PM ACKNOWLEDGE ADDENDA NAME ACKNOWLEDGEMENT DATE Addendum No. 1 02/12/2025 18:34:35 PM Addendum No.2 02/12/2025 18:34:36 PM Addendum No.3 02/12/2025 18:34:36 PM Addendum No.4 02/12/2025 18:34:37 PM Addendum No. 5 02/12/2025 18:34:38 PM RFB 6113 Wastewater Maintenance Building City Project No.22129 Rebid Report Created On:2/12/2025 8:06:17 PM REQUIRED DOWNLOADS TYPE NAME DOWNLOAD DATE Plans Plans/Drawings 1 2/1 0/2024 1:00:11 PM Invitation To Bid Invitation to Bid-RFB 6113 Rebid 1 2/1 0/2024 1:00:10 PM Addenda Addendum No. 1 1/7/2025 9:55:15 AM Addenda Addendum No.2 1/7/2025 9:55:22 AM Addenda Addendum No.3 1/27/2025 3:45:46 PM Addenda Addendum No.4 2/4/2025 2:01:50 PM Addenda Addendum No. 5 2/6/2025 3:50:52 PM Other Pre-Bid Presentation 1/1 5/2025 4:30:40 PM 00 30 01 BID FORM Project Name: Wastewater Maintenance Shop Project Number: 22129 Owner: City of Corpus Christi OAR: Joe Johnson Designer: RVK Architecture By its signature below, Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Bid Acknowledgement,acknowledges receipt of all Addenda to the Bid and agrees, if this Bid is accepted,to enter into a Contract with the Owner and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for the Bid price. Bidder: Barcom Construction, Inc. (full legal name of Bidder) Signature: �,G� (signature of person with authority to bind the Bidder) Name: Patrick W. Hoffman (printed name of person signing Bid Form) Title: Treasurer (title of person signing Bid Form) Attest: (signature) State of Residency: Texas Federal Tx ID No. 45-4563476 Address for Notices: 1146 Heinsohn Rd. Corpus Christi, Texas 78406 Phone: 361-851-1000 Email: patrickh@barcomcc.com Bid Form 00 30 01- 1 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Rev 8/2019 RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF Wastewater Maintenance Shop PROJECT NUMBER: 22129 Y S F IK fln } AP0RAl 1852 A R (' H ! T F r- T p I R Architect Interior Designer Landscape Architect 2002 N. St. Mary's, San Antonio, TX 78212 / 210.733.3535 November 20, 2024 Record Drawing Number PBG: 928 PROJECT MANUAL FOR: A�C' Wastewater Maintenance Shop p`�A E. Project Number: 22129 n 6541 Greenwood Drive '4 Corpus Christi, Texas 78415 19331� OWNER OF City of Corpus Christi 11.20.2024 1201 Leopard Street Corpus Christi, Texas 78401 ARCHITECTURE/ INTERIOR DESIGN / LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE RVK Architecture 2002 N. St. Mary's Street San Antonio, Texas 78212 210.733.3535 CIVIL ENGINEERING Pape-Dawson Engineers, Inc. 807 N. Upper Broadway, Suite 103 Corpus Christi, Texas 78401 361.360.2209 STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING Lundy & Franke Engineering, Inc. 549 Heimer Road San Antonio, Texas 78232 210.979.7900 MEP ENGINEERING DBR Engineering Consultants 9601 McAllister Freeway, #410 San Antonio, Texas 78216 210.546.0200 IRRIGATION CONSULTANT PRA Irrigation Consultants, LLC 3619 Broadway, Suite 13 San Antonio, Texas 78209 210.788.7015 Record Drawing Number PBG: 928 August 20, 2024 RVK Project 21270.0 Re-Bid Construction Documents w n 000100 TABLE OF CONTENTS—ADDENDUM NO.4 �✓`, �g33`3 Qco Division fl F '[ _ Title Section -01.31.2025 Division 00 Preface Documents 00 00 00 Cover Sheet 000101 Title Page 000100 Table of Contents 000102 List of Drawings 003100 Available Project Information Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements 00 52 23 Agreement(Rev 12-2021) 00 72 00 General Conditions(Rev 6-2021) 00 72 00.1 Attachment: General Conditions 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions (Rev4-2022) 00 73 00.1 Attachment: Supplementary Conditions 00 74 00 Special Conditions for CC Wastewater Maintenance Shop (Rev 10-2018) Division 01 General Requirements 011100 Summary of Work(Rev 10-2018) 01 20 00 Unit Prices 01 23 10 Alternates and Allowances(Addendum No.4) 01 25 00 Substitution Procedures 01 25 00.1 Attachment A— Request for Substitution Form (During Bidding/Negotiation) (CSI) 01 25 00.2 Attachment B—Request for Substitution Form (After Bidding/Negotiation) (CSI) 01 29 01 Measurement and Basis for Payment (Addendum No.4) 01 30 00 Administrative Requirements 01 30 00.1 Attachment A- Request for Information Form 01 30 00.2 Attachment B- Electronic File Transfer Agreement 013140 SER: Shop Drawings/Field Visits 01 33 01 Submittal Register(Rev 10-2018) 01 35 00 Special Procedures 014000 Quality Requirements 014100 Regulatory Requirements Table of Contents 00 0100-1 RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents Rev 1/2022 E.y�9 Division/ Section Title Nj�T 79339 014533 Code-Required Special Inspections and Procedures F OF 1.31.2025 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls(Rev 8-2019) 01 56 39 Landscape Protection 01 57 00 Temporary Controls(Rev8-2019) 01 60 00 Product Requirements 01 70 00 Execution and Closeout Requirements 01 78 00 Closeout Requirements 019100 General Commissioning Requirements Division 02 Existing Conditions(Not Used) Division 03 Concrete 030100 Maintenance of Concrete 03 05 16 Underslab Vapor Barriers—STEGO 03 10 00 Concrete Forming and Accessories (CIV) 03 10 00 Concrete Forming and Accessories (ST) 03 12 00 Architectural Concrete Form Liners 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing (CIV) 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing (ST) 03 00 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete (CIV) 03 00 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete (ST) 03 30 00.10 Controlled Low Strength Backfill 03 35 11 Sealed Portland Cement Concrete Finish 03 47 13 Tilt-Up Concrete Division 04 Masonry(Not Used) Division 05 Metals 05 05 19 Post-Installed Concrete and Masonry Anchors 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing 05 12 50 Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel Framing 052100 Steel Joist Framing 053100 Steel Decking Table of Contents 00 0100-2 RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents Rev 1/2022 �qN E.N� ijk ;. n� Division/ s Section Title Nj�I' 19339 05 40 00 Cold-Formed Metal Framing F OF 01.31.2025 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications 05 51 33 Metal Ladders Division 06 WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES 06 10 53 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry 064100 Architectural Wood Casework 06 83 16 Fiberglass Reinforced Paneling Division 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation 07 27 26 Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barrier System 07 41 13 Metal Roof Panels 07 42 13 Metal Wall Panels (Addendum No.4) 07 54 00 Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing (Addendum No.4) 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 72 00 Roof Accessories 07 84 00 Firestopping 07 92 00 Joint Sealants Division 08 Openings 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames (Addendum No.4) 08 14 16 Flush Wood Doors 083100 Access Doors and Panels 08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors 08 43 13 Aluminum-Framed Storefronts(Addendum No.4) 08 71 00 Door Hardware (Addendum No. 1) 08 71 00.1 Door Hardware Schedule (Addendum No. 1) 08 80 00 Glazing 08 83 00 Mirrors Table of Contents 00 0100-3 RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents Rev 1/2022 �ED Aq N E. Division/ Title Section ]� r9339 +�Q Division 09 Finishes OF 09 21 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies 01.31.2025 09 30 00 Tiling 095100 Acoustical Ceilings 09 65 00 Resilient Flooring 09 67 00 Fluid-Applied Flooring 09 91 13 Exterior Painting 09 91 23 Interior Painting 09 96 00 High Performance Coatings Division 10 Specialties 10 11 01 Visual Display Boards 10 14 19 Dimensional Letter Signage i^ PI-ast,,. , to r,^a Toilet G9MPaFtMeP"(deleted)Addendum No. 4 10 21 13.19 Plastic Toilet Compartments(Addendum No.4) 10 28 00 Toilet, Bath and Laundry Accessories 10 44 00 Fire Protection Specialties 10 51 13 Metal Lockers Division 11 Equipment 11 81 29 Facility Fall Protection Division 12 Furnishings 12 24 00 Window Shades 12 36 00 Countertops Division 13 Special Construction (Not Used) Division 14 Conveying Equipment (Not Used) Division 21 Fire Suppression 210000 Fire Protection 210529 Hangers and Supports for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment 21 13 13 Wet Pipe Sprinkler System Table of Contents 00 0100-4 RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents Rev 1/2022 c , c� N E. Division/ Title Section NIX co 2moo DFY Pipe SPFinW'^w SV&te,A (deleted)Addendum No.4 TF 00 01.31.2025 Division 22 Plumbing 22 02 00 Basic Materials and Methods for Plumbing 22 05 13 Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment 22 05 16 Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping 22 05 29 Hangers and Support for Plumbing Piping& Equipment 22 05 48 Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping 22 05 53 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 22 07 19 Plumbing Piping Insulation 22 10 00 Plumbing Piping (ADDENDUM NO. 2) 22 11 19 Plumbing Specialties 22 11 21 Natural Gas Piping Systems 22 30 00 Plumbing Equipment 22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures 226100 Compressed Air Systems Division 23 HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) 23 02 00 Basic Materials and Methods for HVAC 23 05 13 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment 23 05 26 Variable Frequency Motor Speed Control for HVAC Equip. 23 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Piping and Equipment-HVAC 23 05 53 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 23 07 13 Duct Insulation 23 07 16 HVAC Equipment Insulation 23 07 19 HVAC Piping Insulation 23 09 63 Energy Management and Control System (EMCS) 23 21 13 Above Ground Hydronic Piping 23 23 00 Refrigerant Piping 23 31 13 Metal Ductwork 23 33 00 Ductwork Accessories 23 34 00 HVAC Fans Table of Contents 00 0100-5 RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents Rev 1/2022 HD Division/ Title N r9339 CJ Section 233613 Series Fan-Powered Terminal Units 1 F OF 23 37 13 Air Distribution Devices 01.31.2025 23 41 00 Air Filters 23 62 13 Air Cooled Condensing Units 23 74 19 Rooftop Units (Cooling Only) 23 81 26 Spit System Air-Conditioners 23 82 19 Fan Coil Unit 23 82 39 Electric Unit Heaters Division 26 Electrical 26 02 00 Basic Materials and Methods for Electrical 26 02-91 r^^r--'on;}'^F )faw'%- (deleted)Addendum No.4 26 05 19 Wire, Cable and Related Materials 26 05 26 Grounding 26 05 33 Raceways 26 05 73 Short-Circuit Coord. Study ARC Flash Hazard Analysis 26 06 34 Low Voltage Raceway System 26 08 00 Commissioning of Electrical Systems 26 09 13 Electrical Power Monitoring and Control 26 09 36 Lighting Controls(Stand-Alone) 2621 13 Electrical Service Entrance 26 22 13 Low Voltage Distributions Transformers 26 22 22 Low Voltage Harmonic Mitigating Distr.Transformers 26 24 16 Panelboards 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 26 28 13 Fuses 26 28 16 Safety and Disconnect Switches 26 29 01 Motors and Starters 26 29 26 Miscellaneous Electrical Controls and Wiring 26 41 13.13 Lightning Protection System 26 43 13 Surge Protective Device (SPD)—Service Entrance 26 43 13.13 Surge Protective Devices (SPD)—Standard Interrupting 26 51 19 Lighting Fixtures—Light Emitting Diode (LED) Table of Contents 00 0100-6 RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents Rev 1/2022 c� a\�N E. %.. Division/ • Title Nj9T r9339 �+Q Section FOF � -01.31.2025 DIV 27 COMMUNICATIONS 27 02 00 Basic Materials& Methods for Communications Systems 27 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems 27 05 28 Pathways for Communications Systems 27 05 43 Underground Ducts and Raceways for Communications Systems 27 11 00 Communications Room Fittings 27 13 00 Communications Backbone Cabling 27 15 00 Communications Horizontal Cabling DIV 28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 05 00 Basic Materials and Methods for Fire Alarm 28 46 09 Fire Alarm System with Voice Evacuation DIV 31 EARTHWORK 31 10 00 Site Clearing 31 13 30 Treatment of Existing Trees 31 22 00 Grading 312316 Excavation 312316.13 Trenching 3123 16.14 Trench Excavation Protection 3123 16.16 Structural Excavation 31 23 23 Fill 3123 23.16 Structural Fill 31 37 00 Riprap 31 63 29 Drilled Concrete Footings DIV 32 Exterior Improvements 32 11 23 Aggregate Base Courses 32 12 50 Site Pavement 32 13 13.10 Concrete Curbs, Gutters and Sidewalks 32 17 13 Parking Bumpers 32 17 13.13 Pavement Markings Table of Contents 00 0100-7 RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents Rev 1/2022 Division Sect on/ Title N Q� r9339 32 31 13 Chain Link Fences and Gates (Addendum No.4) �9TF OF 32 31 19 Decorative Metal Fences and Gates (Addendum No.4) 01.31.2025 32 84 00 Landscape Irrigation 32 91 13 Soil Preparation 32 92 19 Seeding 32 92 23 Sodding 32 93 00 Exterior Plants 32 93 10 Landscape Maintenance DIV 33 Utilities 33 01 10.58 Disinfection of Water Utility Piping Systems 33 02 30 Jacking, Boring or Tunneling Pipe 33 02 73 Site Concrete Encasement, Cradles, Saddles& Collars 33 05 61 Concrete Manholes 33 14 16 Site Water Utility Distribution Piping 33 31 13 Site Sanitary Sewerage Gravity Piping 33 42 11 Stormwater Gravity Piping 33 42 13 Stormwater Culverts DIV 41 Material Processing and Handling Equipment 41 22 13.13 Single Girder Bridge Crane Appendix All Testing Reports as Applicable 1 00 3100.1 Attachment: Geotechnical Engineering Report END OF SECTION Table of Contents 00 0100-8 RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents Rev 1/2022 Pape-Dawson Engineers INDEX SECTION 030100 MAINTENANCE OF CONCRETE 03 10 00 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCING 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00.10 CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH BACKFILL 31 10 00 SITE CLEARING 31 22 00 GRADING 312316 EXCAVATION 312316.13 TRENCHING 31 23 16.14 TRENCH EXCAVATION PROTECTION 31 23 23 FILL 31 37 00 RIPRAP 32 11 23 AGGREGATE BASE COURSES 32 12 50 SITE PAVEMENT 32 13 13.10 CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS AND SIDEWALKS 32 17 13 PARKING BUMPERS 32 17 23.13 PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS 32 31 13 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 33 01 10.58 DISINFECTION OF WATER UTILITY PIPING SYSTEMS 33 02 30 JACKING, BORING OR TUNNELING PIPE 33 02 73 SITE CONCRETE ENCASEMENT, CRADLES, SADDLES AND COLLARS 33 05 61 CONCRETE MANHOLES 33 14 16 SITE WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 33 31 13 SITE SANITARY SEWERAGE GRAVITY PIPING 33 42 11 STORMWATER GRAVITY PIPING 33 42 13 STORMWATER CULVERTS OF TF�9�1 0 F. ' *.......... ...........*..I $RICARDO R. GOMQ ....127575.....���/ �CESS��' \ i 1�I�S10NAU RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi Date 11.20.2024 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents PAPE-DAWSON rzj ENGINEERS 807 N UPPER BROADWAY, STE 103 1 CORPUS CHRISTI,TX 78401 1 210.375.9000 TEXAS BOARD OF PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS,FIRM REGISTRATION#470 Lundy& Franke Engineering, Inc. INDEX TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 01 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 2200 UNIT PRICES 2 01 31 40 SER: SHOP DRAWINGS/FIELD VISITS 2 DIVISION 03 -CONCRETE 031000 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 5 03 12 10 ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE FORM LINERS 2 03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCING 4 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 14 03 47 13 TILT-UP CONCRETE 6 DIVISION 05- METALS 05 05 19 POST-INSTALLED CONCRETE AND MASONRY ANCHORS 6 051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 2 051250 ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL 7 0521 00 STEEL JOIST FRAMING 2 0531 00 STEEL DECKING 3 05 40 00 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 3 DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK 31 2316.16 STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION 1 31 2323.16 STRUCTURAL FILL 3 31 6329 DRILLED CONCRETE FOOTINGS 2 11-20-2024wiv � .:...of.rgsff+ Lvmy *........................:.*.I i SHAWN J. FRANKE do EM & FRAA" /... ............................go 82639 ENGINEERING dv +f01 '�E`'•4/C ENS E�''�'r�.. 549 HEIMER ROAD f f SSA••.....NAL.•��G� SAN ANTONIO,TEXAS 78232 f I PH.(210)979-7900 TX FIRM REG.#3388 Project ID-City of Corpus Christi 11-15-2024 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 01 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 91 00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 0000 FIRE PROTECTION 21 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 21 1313 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM 21 1316 DRY PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING 22 02 00 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 05 16 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORT FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION �`��OF•TE �S�1� 22 10 00 PLUMBING PIPING 2211 19 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES ' 22 11 21 NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEMS _ 22 30 00 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT .• ...SCQTT AIKALEY•• •. j 22 40 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES � s r ,d•. 147103 2261 00 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS �ICE NStip.•' '�•r tA DIVISION 23- HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) E 23 02 00 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR HVAC 11 12 D / 2 D 2 23 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 05 26 VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR SPEED CONTROL FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PIPING AND EQUIPMENT- HVAC 23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION 23 07 16 HVAC EQUIPMENT INSULATION 23 07 19 HVAC PIPING INSULATION DBR 236051.000—City of Corpus 00 00 01 - 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 23 09 63 ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM (EMCS) 2321 13 ABOVE GROUND HYDRONIC PIPING 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING 2331 13 METAL DUCTWORK 23 33 00 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 23 34 00 HVAC FANS 23 36 13 SERIES FAN-POWERED TERMINAL UNITS 23 37 13 AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES 2341 00 AIR FILTERS 23 62 13 AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS 23 74 19 ROOFTOP UNITS (COOLING ONLY) 2381 26 SPLIT SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS 23 82 19 FAN COIL UNIT 23 82 39 ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS DIVISION 26- ELECTRICAL 26 02 00 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 02 01 COORDINATION DRAWINGS 26 05 19 WIRE, CABLE AND RELATED MATERIALS 26 05 26 GROUNDING 26 05 33 RACEWAYS 26 05 73 SHORT CIRCUIT COORDINATION STUDY ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS 26 06 34 LOW VOLTAGE RACEWAY SYSTEM 26 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 09 13 ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL 26 09 36 LIGHTING CONTROLS (STAND-ALONE) 2621 13 ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE 26 22 13 LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTIONS TRANSFORMERS 26 22 22 LOW VOLTAGE HARMONIC MITIGATING DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES 26 28 13 FUSES 26 28 16 SAFETY AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES 26 29 01 MOTORS AND STARTERS 26 29 26 MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL CONTROLS AND WIRING 2641 13.13 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM 26 43 13 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE (SPD)- SERVICE ENTRANCE DBR 236051.000—City of Corpus 00 00 01 -2 TABLE OF CONTENTS Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 26 43 13.13 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPD) - STANDARD INTERRUPTING 2651 19 LIGHTING FIXTURES- LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (LED) DIVISION 27-COMMUNICATIONS 27 02 00 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 28 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 43 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 2711 00 COMMUNICATIONS ROOM FITTINGS 27 13 00 COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 27 15 00 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING DIVISION 28- ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 05 00 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR FIRE ALARM 28 46 09 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM WITH VOICE EVACUATION DBR 236051.000—City of Corpus 00 00 01 -3 TABLE OF CONTENTS Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents PRA IRRIGATION CONSULTANTS, LLC INDEX SECTION 32 84 00 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION ;..a..................h../ / WADE 0. RADLET . .. ��22397�� Y��� PRA 11524001 —City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 00 0102 LIST OF DRAWINGS SHEET NUMBER SHEET NAME Issue Date CCOCC CITY STANDARD INDEX CODE CODE000 CODE REVIEW CODE101 LIFE SAFETY PLAN-FIRST FLOOR GENERAL COVER INDEX CIVIL DRAWINGS C-010 GENERAL NOTES C-020 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN C-030 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN DETAILS C-031 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN DETAILS C-040 EXISTING CONDITIONS C-100 SITE PLAN C-110 FIRE PROTECTION PLAN C-120 CIVIL DETAIL SHEET C-121 CIVIL DETAIL SHEET C-200 GRADING PLAN C-300 DRAINAGE PLAN C-310 DRAINAGE DETAILS C-400 UTILITY PLAN C-410 WATER DISTRIBUTION DETAILS C-420 SANITARY SEWER DETAILS C-421 GRINDER PUMP DETAILS STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS S-101 NOTES, SECTIONS & DETAILS S-102 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS S-201 FOUNDATION PLAN S-202 ROOF FRAMING PLAN S-203 STORAGE FOUNDATION AND ROOF FRAMING PLAN S-301 SECTIONS & DETAILS S-302 SECTIONS S-303 SECTIONS S-304 SECTIONS S-305 SECTIONS S-306 SECTIONS S-307 SECTIONS S-308 SECTIONS S-309 SECTIONS S-310 SECTIONS S-311 SECTIONS S-312 SECTIONS & DETAIL S-401 CONCRETE BEAM SCHED, NOTES & DETAILS S-501 NOTES, EMBED PLATE SCHED. & DETAILS RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 0001 02-1 List of Drawings 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents S-502 PANELS S-503 PANELS S-504 PANELS S-505 PANELS S-506 PANELS S-507 PANELS SITE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS AS-101 ARCHITECTURAL SITE PLAN AS-102 SITE DETAILS ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS A-001 SLAB EDGE PLAN- FIRST FLOOR A-101 FIRST FLOOR PLAN A-102 NOTES & KEYS A-103 ROOF PLAN A-121 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN- FIRST FLOOR A-130 PARTITION LEGEND A-131 PARTITION PLAN - FIRST FLOOR A-201 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS A-301 BUILDING SECTIONS A-311 WALL SECTIONS A-401 ENLARGED PLANS A-421 MILLWORK SECTIONS A-501 PLAN DETAILS A-511 SECTION DETAILS A-521 ROOF DETAILS A-522 ROOF DETAILS A-601 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE /FINISH LEGEND A-611 DOOR SCHEDULE & DETAILS A-701 FLOOR FINISH PLAN-FIRST FLOOR MEP DRAWINGS MEP-101 MEP SITE PLAN MEP-102 MEP ROOF PLAN MECHANICAL DRAWINGS M-001 MECHANICAL SYMBOL LEGEND M-211 MECHANICAL PLAN - FIRST FLOOR M-401 MECHANICAL CONTROL SEQUENCES M-501 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES M-601 MECHANICAL DETAILS ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS E-001 ELECTRICAL SYMBOL LEGEND E-111 ELECTRICAL LIGHTING PLAN E-211 ELECTRICAL POWER PLAN E-401 ELECTRICAL ONE-LINE DIAGRAM E-501 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 00 0102-2 List of Drawings Re-Bid Construction Documents E-502 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES E-601 ELECTRICAL DETAILS E-602 ELECTRICAL DETAILS PLUMBING DRAWINGS P-001 PLUMBING SYMBOL LEGEND P-211 PLUMBING PLAN - FIRST FLOOR P-401 PLUMBING RISERS AND SCHEMATICS P-402 PLUMBING RISERS AND SCHEMATICS P-403 PLUMBING RISERS AND SCHEMATICS P-501 PLUMBING SCHEDULES P-601 PLUMBING DETAILS P-602 PLUMBING DETAILS TECHNOLOGY T-001 TECHNOLOGY SYMBOL LEGEND T-101 TECHNOLOGY SITE PLAN T-211 TECHNOLOGY PLAN - FIRST FLOOR T-401 TECHNOLOGY RISER DIAGRAMS T-601 TECHNOLOGY DETAILS T-602 SECURITY DETAILS END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop List of Drawings 0001 02-3 Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 00 31 00 AVAILABLE PROJECT INFORMATION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Certain information relating to existing surface and subsurface conditions and structures is available to bidders but will not be part of Contract Documents, as follows: B. Geotechnical Report: Titled, "Geotechnical Engineering Report, Greenwood Wastewater Treatment Plant- Proposed Building, Greenwood Drive and Saratoga, Corpus Christi, Texas, Terracon Proj. No. CD245000", prepared by Terracon, dated March 11, 2024, (40 pgs.)-copy attached as Appendix 1. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 0031 00- 1 Available Project Information Re-Bid Construction Documents s o U �N�ORPOP'S E� 1852 00 52 23 AGREEMENT This Agreement, for the Project awarded on [insert Award Date], is between the City of Corpus Christi (Owner) and (Contractor). Owner and Contractor agree as follows: ARTICLE 1—WORK 1.01 Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work is generally described as: Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 ARTICLE 2—DESIGNER AND OWNER'S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE 2.01 The Project has been designed by: RVK Architecture 2002 N. St. Marys Street San Antonio,TX 78212 liz.hurd@rvkarchitecture.com 2.02 The Owner's Authorized Representative for this Project is: Joseph Johnson,Asst. Director of Construction 4917 Holly Rd, Bldg.#5 Corpus Christi,TX,78411 josephi2@cctexas.com ARTICLE 3—CONTRACT TIMES 3.01 Contract Times A. The Work is required to be substantially completed within 365 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in the Notice to Proceed and is to be completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions within 395 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run. B. Performance of the Work is required as shown in Paragraph 7.02 of the General Conditions. Agreement 00 52 23-1 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Rev 12/2021 Re-Bid Construction Documents C. Milestones, and the dates for completion of each, are as defined in Section 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES. 3.02 Liquidated Damages A. Owner and Contractor recognize that time limits for specified Milestones, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness for Final Payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. Owner and Contractor recognize that the Owner will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in Paragraph 3.01 and as adjusted in accordance with Paragraph 11.05 of the General Conditions. Owner and Contractor also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof,Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty): 1. Substantial Completion: Contractor shall pay Owner$400 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete. 2. Completion of the Remaining Work: Contractor agrees to pay Owner$400 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for completion and readiness for final payment until the Work is completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions. 3. Liquidated damages for failing to timely attain Substantial Completion and Final Completion are not additive and will not be imposed concurrently. 4. Milestones: Contractor agrees to pay Owner liquidated damages as stipulated in SECTION 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES for failure to meet Milestone completions. 5. The Owner will determine whether the Work has been completed within the Contract Times. B. Owner is not required to only assess liquidated damages, and Owner may elect to pursue its actual damages resulting from the failure of Contractor to complete the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 4—CONTRACT PRICE 4.01 Owner will pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents at the unit prices shown in the attached BID FORM. Unit prices have been computed in accordance with Paragraph 15.03 of the General Conditions. Contractor acknowledges that estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and were solely for the purpose of comparing Bids, and final payment for all unit price items will be based on actual quantities, determined as provided in the Contract Documents. Total Base Bid Price $ ARTICLE 5—PAYMENT PROCEDURES 5.01 Submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 17 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by the OAR as provided in the General Conditions. Agreement 00 52 23-2 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Rev 12/2021 Re-Bid Construction Documents 5.02 Progress Payments; Retainage: A. The Owner will make progress payments on or about the 25th day of each month during performance of the Work. Payment is based on Work completed in accordance with the Schedule of Values established as provided in the General Conditions. B. Progress payments equal to the full amount of the total earned value to date for completed Work minus the retainage listed below and properly stored materials will be made prior to Substantial Completion. 1. The standard retainage is 5 percent. C. Payment will be made for the amount determined per Paragraph 5.02.13, less the total of payments previously made and less set-offs determined in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions. D. At the Owner's option, Owner may pay Contractor 100 percent of the Work completed, less amounts withheld in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions and less 200 percent of OAR's estimate of the value of Work to be completed or corrected to reach Substantial Completion. Owner may, at its sole discretion, elect to hold retainage in the amounts set forth above for progress payments prior to Substantial Completion if Owner has concerns with the ability of the Contractor to complete the remaining Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or within the time frame established by this Agreement. Release or reduction in retainage is contingent upon and consent of surety to the reduction in retainage. 5.03 Owner will pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by OAR in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions upon Final Completion and acceptance of the Work. ARTICLE 6—INTEREST ON OVERDUE PAYMENTS AND RETAINAGE 6.01 The Owner is not obligated to pay interest on overdue payments except as required by Texas Government Code Chapter 2251. Invoices must comply with Article 17 of the General Conditions. 6.02 Except as specified in Article 5, the Owner is not obligated to pay interest on moneys not paid except as provided in Texas Government Code Chapter 2252. ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS 7.01 The Contractor makes the following representations: A. The Contractor has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents and the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents. B. The Contractor has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. C. The Contractor is familiar with Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. Agreement 00 52 23-3 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Rev 12/2021 Re-Bid Construction Documents D. The Contractor has carefully studied the following Site-related reports and drawings as identified in the Supplementary Conditions: 1. Geotechnical Data Reports regarding subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; 2. Drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site; 3. Underground Facilities referenced in reports and drawings; 4. Reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site; and 5. Technical Data related to each of these reports and drawings. E. The Contractor has considered the: 1. Information known to Contractor; 2. Information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; 3. Information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; and 4. The Contract Documents. F. The Contractor has considered the items identified in Paragraphs 7.01.D and 7.01.E with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and documents on: 1. The cost, progress, and performance of the Work; 2. The means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor; and 3. Contractor's safety precautions and programs. G. Based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraphs, Contractor agrees that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. H. The Contractor is aware of the general nature of Work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents. I. The Contractor has correlated the information known to the Contractor, information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Contract Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Contract Documents. J. The Contractor has given the OAR written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that the Contractor has discovered in the Contract Documents,and the written resolution provided by the OAR is acceptable to the Contractor. K. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. L. Contractor's entry into this Contract constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Contractorthat without exception all prices in the Agreement are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents. Agreement 00 52 23-4 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Rev 12/2021 Re-Bid Construction Documents M. CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY, DEFEND AND HOLD HARMLESS THE OWNER'S INDEMNITEES IN ACCORDANCE WITH PARAGRAPH 7.14 OF THE GENERAL CONDITIONS AND THE SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. ARTICLE 8—ACCOUNTING RECORDS 8.01 Accounting Record Availability: The Contractor shall keep such full and detailed accounts of materials incorporated and labor and equipment utilized for the Work consistent with the requirements of Paragraph 15.01 of the General Conditions and as may be necessary for proper financial management under this Agreement. Subject to prior written notice,the Owner shall be afforded reasonable access during normal business hours to all of the Contractor's records,books, correspondence, instructions, drawings, receipts,vouchers, memoranda,and similar data relating to the Cost of the Work and the Contractor's fee. The Contractor shall preserve all such documents for a period of 3 years after the final payment by the Owner. ARTICLE 9—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 9.01 Contents: A. The Contract Documents consist of the following: 1. Solicitation documents. 2. Specifications, forms, and documents listed in SECTION 00 0100 TABLE OF CONTENTS. 3. Drawings listed in the Sheet Index. 4. Addenda. 5. Exhibits to this Agreement: a. Contractor's Bid Form. b. Include Wastewater CD Exhibit if Project pertains to SSO CD work. c. Geotechnical Report. 6. Documentation required by the Contract Documents and submitted by Contractor prior to Notice of Award. B. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article. C. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in Article 11 of the General Conditions. Agreement 00 52 23-5 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Rev 12/2021 Re-Bid Construction Documents ARTICLE 10—CONTRACT DOCUMENT SIGNATURES ATTEST CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI Rebecca Huerta Jeffrey Edmonds, P.E City Secretary Director of Engineering Services AUTHORIZED APPROVED AS TO LEGAL FORM: BY COUNCIL Assistant City Attorney ATTEST(IF CORPORATION) CONTRACTOR (Seal Below) By: Note: Attach copy of authorization to sign if Title: person signing for CONTRACTOR is not President, Vice President, Chief Executive Officer, or Chief Financial Officer Address City State Zip Phone Fax Email END OF SECTION Agreement 00 52 23-6 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Rev 12/2021 Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS FORM OF GENERAL CONDITIONS 1.01 THE GENERAL CONDITIONS APPLICABLE TO THIS CONTRACT IS ATTACHED FOLLOWING THIS PAGE. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 00 72 00- 1 General Conditions Re-Bid Construction Documents 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Table of Contents Page Article 1—Definitions and Terminology .....................................................................................................10 1.01 Defined Terms.............................................................................................................................10 1.02 Terminology................................................................................................................................15 Article2—Preliminary Matters...................................................................................................................16 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance.............................................................................16 2.02 Copies of Documents..................................................................................................................16 2.03 Project Management System......................................................................................................16 2.04 Before Starting Construction ......................................................................................................17 2.05 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives................................17 Article 3—Contract Documents: Intent, Requirements, Reuse.................................................................17 3.01 Intent...........................................................................................................................................17 3.02 Reference Standards...................................................................................................................18 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies......................................................................................19 3.04 Interpretation of the Contract Documents.................................................................................20 3.05 Reuse of Documents...................................................................................................................20 Article 4—Commencement and Progress of the Work..............................................................................20 4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed.............................................................20 4.02 Starting the Work........................................................................................................................20 4.03 Progress Schedule.......................................................................................................................21 4.04 Delays in Contractor's Progress..................................................................................................21 Article 5—Availability of Lands; Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental Conditions...................................................................................................................................................22 5.01 Availability of Lands....................................................................................................................22 5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas........................................................................................................22 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions............................................................................................23 5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions...............................................................................24 5.05 Underground Facilities................................................................................................................25 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site .............................................................................26 Article 6—Bonds and Insurance .................................................................................................................28 6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds..................................................................................28 General Conditions 00 72 00-1 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 6.02 Licensed Sureties ........................................................................................................................29 6.03 Required Minimum Insurance Coverage....................................................................................29 6.04 General Insurance Provisions......................................................................................................29 6.05 Contractor's Insurance................................................................................................................30 6.06 Property Insurance......................................................................................................................33 6.07 Waiver of Rights..........................................................................................................................34 6.08 Owner's Insurance for Project....................................................................................................34 6.09 Acceptable Evidence of Insurance..............................................................................................35 6.10 Certificate of Insurance...............................................................................................................35 6.11 Insurance Policies........................................................................................................................35 6.12 Continuing Evidence of Coverage...............................................................................................35 6.13 Notices Regarding Insurance ......................................................................................................35 6.14 Texas Workers' Compensation Insurance Required Notice .......................................................36 Article 7-Contractor's Responsibilities.....................................................................................................38 7.01 Supervision and Superintendence..............................................................................................38 7.02 Labor; Working Hours.................................................................................................................38 7.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment ...........................................................................................39 7.04 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others....................................................................39 7.05 Patent Fees and Royalties...........................................................................................................40 7.06 Permits........................................................................................................................................41 7.07 Taxes...........................................................................................................................................41 7.08 Laws and Regulations..................................................................................................................41 7.09 Safety and Protection .................................................................................................................42 7.10 Safety Representative.................................................................................................................43 7.11 Hazard Communication Programs..............................................................................................43 7.12 Emergencies................................................................................................................................43 7.13 Contractor's General Warranty and Guarantee .........................................................................43 7.14 INDEMNIFICATION......................................................................................................................44 7.15 Delegation of Professional Design Services................................................................................45 Article 8-Other Work at the Site...............................................................................................................46 8.01 Other Work.................................................................................................................................46 8.02 Coordination ...............................................................................................................................47 8.03 Legal Relationships......................................................................................................................47 General Conditions 00 72 00-2 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Article 9—Owner's and OPT's Responsibilities...........................................................................................48 9.01 Communications to Contractor ..................................................................................................48 9.02 Replacement of Owner's Project Team Members......................................................................48 9.03 Furnish Data................................................................................................................................48 9.04 Pay When Due.............................................................................................................................48 9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests...................................................................................48 9.06 Insurance.....................................................................................................................................48 9.07 Modifications..............................................................................................................................48 9.08 Inspections,Tests, and Approvals...............................................................................................48 9.09 Limitations on OPT's Responsibilities .........................................................................................48 9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition......................................................................49 9.11 Compliance with Safety Program................................................................................................49 Article 10—OAR's and Designer's Status During Construction ..................................................................49 10.01 Owner's Representative..........................................................................................................49 10.02 Visits to Site.............................................................................................................................49 10.03 Resident Project Representatives...........................................................................................49 10.04 Rejecting Defective Work........................................................................................................49 10.05 Shop Drawings, Modifications and Payments.........................................................................50 10.06 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work...................50 10.07 Limitations on OAR's and Designer's Authority and Responsibilities.....................................50 Article 11—Amending the Contract Documents; Changes in the Work ....................................................50 11.01 Amending and Supplementing the Contract Documents.......................................................50 11.02 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work................................................................................51 11.03 Unauthorized Changes in the Work........................................................................................51 11.04 Change of Contract Price ........................................................................................................52 11.05 Change of Contract Times.......................................................................................................52 11.06 Change Proposals....................................................................................................................52 11.07 Execution of Change Orders ...................................................................................................53 11.08 Notice to Surety......................................................................................................................54 Article 12—Change Management ..............................................................................................................54 12.01 Requests for Change Proposal................................................................................................54 12.02 Change Proposals....................................................................................................................54 12.03 Designer Will Evaluate Request for Modification...................................................................55 General Conditions 00 72 00-3 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 12.04 Substitutions...........................................................................................................................55 Article13—Claims.......................................................................................................................................56 13.01 Claims......................................................................................................................................56 13.02 Claims Process.........................................................................................................................57 Article 14—Prevailing Wage Rate Requirements.......................................................................................58 14.01 Payment of Prevailing Wage Rates.........................................................................................58 14.02 Records....................................................................................................................................58 14.03 Liability; Penalty; Criminal Offense.........................................................................................59 14.04 Prevailing Wage Rates.............................................................................................................59 Article 15—Cost of the Work; Allowances; Unit Price Work......................................................................59 15.01 Cost of the Work.....................................................................................................................59 15.02 Allowances..............................................................................................................................63 15.03 Unit Price Work.......................................................................................................................63 15.04 Contingencies..........................................................................................................................64 Article 16—Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal, or Acceptance of Defective Work....................65 16.01 Access to Work........................................................................................................................65 16.02 Tests, Inspections and Approvals............................................................................................65 16.03 Defective Work .......................................................................................................................65 16.04 Acceptance of Defective Work................................................................................................66 16.05 Uncovering Work....................................................................................................................66 16.06 Owner May Stop the Work.....................................................................................................67 16.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work.......................................................................................67 Article 17—Payments to Contractor; Set-Offs; Completion; Correction Period ........................................67 17.01 Progress Payments..................................................................................................................67 17.02 Application for Payment.........................................................................................................69 17.03 Schedule of Values..................................................................................................................71 17.04 Schedule of Anticipated Payments and Earned Value............................................................72 17.05 Basis for Payments..................................................................................................................73 17.06 Payment for Stored Materials and Equipment.......................................................................73 17.07 Retainage and Set-Offs ...........................................................................................................74 17.08 Procedures for Submitting an Application for Payment.........................................................74 17.09 Responsibility of Owner's Authorized Representative...........................................................75 17.10 Contractor's Warranty of Title................................................................................................76 General Conditions 00 72 00-4 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 17.11 Substantial Completion...........................................................................................................76 17.12 Partial Utilization.....................................................................................................................77 17.13 Final Inspection.......................................................................................................................77 17.14 Final Application for Payment.................................................................................................77 17.15 Final Payment..........................................................................................................................78 17.16 Waiver of Claims.....................................................................................................................78 17.17 Correction Period....................................................................................................................78 Article 18-Suspension of Work and Termination.....................................................................................79 18.01 Owner May Suspend Work.....................................................................................................79 18.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause............................................................................................79 18.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience................................................................................80 Article 19-Project Management...............................................................................................................81 19.01 Work Included.........................................................................................................................81 19.02 Quality Assurance ...................................................................................................................81 19.03 Document Submittal...............................................................................................................81 19.04 Required Permits ....................................................................................................................81 19.05 Safety Requirements...............................................................................................................82 19.06 Access to the Site....................................................................................................................82 19.07 Contractor's Use of Site..........................................................................................................82 19.08 Protection of Existing Structures and Utilities........................................................................83 19.09 Pre-Construction Exploratory Excavations..............................................................................83 19.10 Disruption of Services/Continued Operations........................................................................84 19.11 Field Measurements ...............................................................................................................84 19.12 Reference Data and Control Points.........................................................................................84 19.13 Delivery and Storage...............................................................................................................85 19.14 Cleaning During Construction.................................................................................................86 19.15 Maintenance of Roads, Driveways, and Access......................................................................86 19.16 Area Access and Traffic Control..............................................................................................87 19.17 Overhead Electrical Wires.......................................................................................................87 19.18 Blasting....................................................................................................................................87 19.19 Archeological Requirements...................................................................................................87 19.20 Endangered Species Resources...............................................................................................88 19.21 Cooperation with Public Agencies..........................................................................................88 General Conditions 00 72 00-5 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Article 20—Project Coordination................................................................................................................88 20.01 Work Included.........................................................................................................................88 20.02 Document Submittal...............................................................................................................88 20.03 Communication During Project...............................................................................................89 20.04 Project Meetings.....................................................................................................................89 20.05 Requests for Information........................................................................................................91 20.06 Decision and Action Item Log..................................................................................................91 20.07 Notification By Contractor......................................................................................................92 20.08 Record Documents..................................................................................................................92 Article 21—Quality Management...............................................................................................................94 21.01 Contractor's Responsibilities ..................................................................................................94 21.02 Quality Management Activities by OPT..................................................................................95 21.03 Contractor's Use of OPT's Test Reports..................................................................................96 21.04 Documentation .......................................................................................................................96 21.05 Standards................................................................................................................................97 21.06 Delivery and Storage...............................................................................................................97 21.07 Verification Testing for Corrected Defects..............................................................................97 21.08 Test Reports............................................................................................................................97 21.09 Defective Work .......................................................................................................................98 21.10 Limitation of Authority of Testing Laboratory........................................................................98 21.11 Quality Control Plan................................................................................................................98 21.12 Implement Contractor's Quality Control Plan ......................................................................100 Article 22—Final Resolution of Disputes..................................................................................................101 22.01 Senior Level Negotiations .....................................................................................................101 22.02 Mediation..............................................................................................................................101 Article 23—Minority/MBE/DBE Participation Policy................................................................................102 23.01 Policy.....................................................................................................................................102 23.02 Definitions.............................................................................................................................102 23.03 Goals......................................................................................................................................103 23.04 Compliance............................................................................................................................104 Article 24—Document Management........................................................................................................104 24.01 Work Included.......................................................................................................................104 24.02 Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................104 General Conditions 00 72 00-6 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 24.03 Contractor's Responsibilities ................................................................................................104 24.04 Document Submittal.............................................................................................................105 24.05 Document Numbering ..........................................................................................................105 24.06 Document Requirements......................................................................................................106 Article25—Shop Drawings.......................................................................................................................107 25.01 Work Included.......................................................................................................................107 25.02 Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................107 25.03 Contractor's Responsibilities ................................................................................................107 25.04 Shop Drawing Requirements ................................................................................................109 25.05 Special Certifications and Reports........................................................................................109 25.06 Warranties and Guarantees..................................................................................................110 25.07 Shop Drawing Submittal Procedures....................................................................................110 25.08 Sample and Mockup Submittal Procedures..........................................................................112 25.09 Equal Non Specified Products...............................................................................................113 25.10 Requests for Deviation..........................................................................................................113 25.11 Designer Responsibilities......................................................................................................114 25.12 Resubmission Requirements.................................................................................................116 Article26—Record Data...........................................................................................................................117 26.01 Work Included.......................................................................................................................117 26.02 Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................117 26.03 Contractor's Responsibilities ................................................................................................117 26.04 Record Data Requirements...................................................................................................118 26.05 Special Certifications and Reports........................................................................................118 26.06 Warranties and Guarantees..................................................................................................119 26.07 Record Data Submittal Procedures.......................................................................................119 26.08 Designer's Responsibilities....................................................................................................120 Article 27—Construction Progress Schedule............................................................................................121 27.01 Requirements........................................................................................................................121 27.02 Document Submittal.............................................................................................................121 27.03 Schedule Requirements........................................................................................................121 27.04 Schedule Revisions................................................................................................................123 27.05 Float Time..............................................................................................................................123 Article 28—Video and Photographic documentation ..............................................................................124 General Conditions 00 72 00-7 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 28.01 Work Included.......................................................................................................................124 28.02 Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................124 28.03 Document Submittal.............................................................................................................124 28.04 Photographs..........................................................................................................................125 28.05 Video Recording....................................................................................................................125 Article 29-Execution and Closeout.........................................................................................................125 29.01 Substantial Completion.........................................................................................................125 29.02 Final Inspections....................................................................................................................126 29.03 Reinspection Fees .................................................................................................................126 29.04 Closeout Documents Submittal ............................................................................................127 29.05 Transfer of Utilities ...............................................................................................................127 29.06 Warranties, Bonds and Service Agreements.........................................................................127 Article30-Miscellaneous........................................................................................................................128 30.01 Computation of Times...........................................................................................................128 30.02 Owner's Right to Audit Contractor's Records.......................................................................128 30.03 Independent Contractor.......................................................................................................129 30.04 Cumulative Remedies ...........................................................................................................129 30.05 Limitation of Damages..........................................................................................................129 30.06 No Waiver.............................................................................................................................129 30.07 Severability............................................................................................................................129 30.08 Survival of Obligations ..........................................................................................................130 30.09 No Third Party Beneficiaries .................................................................................................130 30.10 Assignment of Contract.........................................................................................................130 30.11 No Waiver of Sovereign Immunity........................................................................................130 30.12 Controlling Law.....................................................................................................................130 30.13 Conditions Precedent to Right to Sue...................................................................................130 30.14 Waiver of Trial by Jury...........................................................................................................130 30.15 Attorney Fees........................................................................................................................130 30.16 Compliance with Laws...........................................................................................................131 30.17 Enforcement..........................................................................................................................131 30.18 Subject to Appropriation.......................................................................................................131 30.19 Contract Sum.........................................................................................................................131 30.20 Contractor's Guarantee as Additional Remedy....................................................................131 General Conditions 00 72 00-8 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 30.21 Notices. .................................................................................................................................131 General Conditions 00 72 00-9 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 ARTICLE 1—DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY 1.01 Defined Terms A. Terms with initial capital letters, including the term's singular and plural forms, have the meanings indicated in this paragraph wherever used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents. In addition to the terms specifically defined, terms with initial capital letters in the Contract Documents may include references to identified articles and paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms. 1. Addenda - Documents issued prior to the receipt of Bids which clarify or modify the Bidding Requirements or the proposed Contract Documents. 2. Agreement - The document executed between Owner and Contractor covering the Work. 3. Alternative Dispute Resolution -The process by which a disputed Claim may be settled as an alternative to litigation, if Owner and Contractor cannot reach an agreement between themselves. 4. Application for Payment - The forms used by Contractor to request payments from Owner and the supporting documentation required by the Contract Documents. 5. Award Date—The date the City Council of the City of Corpus Christi (City)authorizes the City Manager or designee to execute the Contract on behalf of the City. 6. Bid —The documents submitted by a Bidder to establish the proposed Contract Price and Contract Times and provide other information and certifications as required by the Bidding Documents. 7. Bidding Documents — The solicitation documents, the proposed Contract Documents and Addenda. 8. Bidder—An individual or entity that submits a Bid to Owner. 9. Bonds - Performance Bond, Payment Bond, Maintenance Bond, and other Surety instruments executed by Surety. When in singular form, refers to individual instrument. 10. Change Order-A document issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract,which modifies the Work, Contract Price, Contract Times, or terms and conditions of the Contract. 11. Change Proposal - A document submitted by Contractor in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents: a. Requesting an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times; b. Contesting an initial decision concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents; c. Challenging a set-off against payment due; or d. Seeking a Modification with respect to the terms of the Contract. 12. City Engineer - The Corpus Christi City Engineer and/or designee as identified at the preconstruction conference or in the Notice to Proceed. General Conditions 00 72 00-10 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 13. Claim - A demand or assertion by Owner or Contractor submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. A demand for money or services by an entity other than the Owner or Contractor is not a Claim. Claims must be initiated by written notice, signed and sworn to be an authorized corporate officer, verifying the truth and accuracy of the Claim. 14. Constituent of Concern - Asbestos, petroleum, radioactive materials, polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs), hazardous wastes, and substances, products, wastes, or other materials that are or become listed, regulated, or addressed pursuant to: a. The Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act, 42 U.S.C. §§9601 et seq. ("CERCLA"); b. The Hazardous Materials Transportation Act, 49 U.S.C. §§5101 et seq.; c. The Resource Conservation and Recovery Act,42 U.S.C. §§6901 et seq. ("RCRA"); d. The Toxic Substances Control Act, 15 U.S.C. §§2601 et seq.; e. The Clean Water Act, 33 U.S.C. §§1251 et seq.; f. The Clean Air Act, 42 U.S.C. §§7401 et seq.; or g. Any other Laws or Regulations regulating, relating to, or imposing liability or standards of conduct concerning hazardous,toxic, or dangerous waste, substance, or material. 15. Contract -The entire integrated set of documents concerning the Work and describing the relationship between the Owner and Contractor. 16. Contract Amendment-A document issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract and signed by Owner and Contractor which: a. Authorizes new phases of the Work and establishes the Contract Price, Contract Times, or terms and conditions of the Contract for the new phase of Work; or b. Modifies the terms and conditions of the Contract but does not make changes in the Work. 17. Contract Documents - Those items designated as Contract Documents in the Agreement. 18. Contract Price - The monetary amount stated in the Agreement and as adjusted by Modifications,and increases or decreases in unit price quantities, if any,that Owner has agreed to pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 19. Contract Times-The number of days or the dates by which Contractor must: a. Achieve specified Milestones; b. Achieve Substantial Completion; and c. Complete the Work. 20. Contractor-The individual or entity with which Owner has contracted for performance of the Work. General Conditions 00 72 00-11 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 21. Contractor's Team - Contractor and Subcontractors, Suppliers, individuals, or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by them to perform part of the Work or anyone for whose acts they may be liable. 22. Cost of the Work -The sum of costs incurred for the proper performance of the Work as allowed by Article 15. 23. Defective - When applied to Work, refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it: a. Does not conform to the Contract Documents; b. Does not meet the requirements of applicable inspections, reference standards, tests, or approvals referred to in the Contract Documents; or c. Has been damaged or stolen prior to OAR's recommendation of final payment unless responsibility for the protection of the Work has been assumed by Owner at Substantial Completion 24. Designer - The individuals or entity named as Designer in the Agreement and the subconsultants, individuals, or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by Designer to provide design or other technical services to the Owner. Designer has responsibility for engineering or architectural design and technical issues related to the Contract Documents. Designers are Licensed Professional Engineers, Registered Architects or Registered Landscape Architects qualified to practice their profession in the State of Texas. 25. Drawings - The part of the Contract that graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the Work. Shop Drawings and other Contractor documents are not Drawings. 26. Effective Date of the Contract -The date indicated in the Agreement on which the City Manager or designee has signed the Contract. 27. Field Order-A document issued by OAR or Designer requiring changes in the Work that do not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times. 28. Hazardous Environmental Condition - The presence of Constituents of Concern at the Site in quantities or circumstances that may present a danger to persons or property exposed to Constituents of Concern. The presence of Constituents of Concern at the Site necessary for the execution of the Work or to be incorporated in the Work is not a Hazardous Environmental Condition provided these Constituents of Concern are controlled and contained pursuant to industry practices, Laws and Regulations, and the requirements of the Contract. 29. Indemnified Costs-All costs, losses,damages,and legal or other dispute resolution costs resulting from claims or demands against Owner. These costs include fees for engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals. 30. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations-Applicable laws,statutes, rules, regulations, ordinances,codes,and orders of governmental bodies,agencies,authorities,and courts having jurisdiction over the Project. 31. Liens - Charges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Contract related funds, real property, or personal property. General Conditions 00 72 00-12 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 32. Milestone-A principal event in the performance of the Work that Contractor is required by Contract to complete by a specified date or within a specified period of time. 33. Modification - Change made to the Contract Documents by one of the following methods: a. Contract Amendment; b. Change Order; c. Field Order; or d. Work Change Directive. 34. Notice of Award-The notice of Owner's intent to enter into a contract with the Selected Bidder. 35. Notice to Proceed - A notice to Contractor of the Contract Times and the date Work is to begin. 36. Owner-The City of Corpus Christi (City), a Texas home-rule municipal corporation and political subdivision organized under the laws of the State of Texas, acting by and through its duly authorized City Manager and designee, the City Engineer (the Director of Engineering Services), and the City's officers, employees, agents, or representatives, authorized to administer design and construction of the Project. 37. Owner's Authorized Representative or OAR -The individual or entity named as OAR in the Agreement and the consultants, subconsultants, individuals, or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by them to provide construction management services to the Owner. The OAR may be an employee of the Owner. 38. Owner's Project Team or OPT - The Owner, Owner's Authorized Representative, Resident Project Representative, Designer, and the consultants, subconsultants, individuals or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by them to provide services to the Owner. 39. Partial Occupancy or Use - Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which it is intended (or a related purpose) prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. 40. Progress Schedule -A schedule prepared and maintained by Contractor, describing the sequence and duration of the activities comprising the Contractor's plan to accomplish the Work within the Contract Times. The Progress Schedule must be a Critical Path Method (CPM) Schedule. 41. Project - The total undertaking to be accomplished for Owner under the Contract Documents. 42. Project Manual — That portion of the Contract Documents that may include the following: introductory information,solicitation requirements and responses, proposal, Contract forms and General and Supplementary Conditions, General Requirements, Specification, Drawings, Project Safety Manual and Addenda. 43. Resident Project Representative or RPR-The authorized representative of OPT assigned to assist OAR at the Site. As used herein, the term Resident Project Representative includes assistants and field staff of the OAR. General Conditions 00 72 00-13 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 44. Samples - Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship representing some portion of the Work that are used to establish the standards for that portion of the Work. 45. Schedule of Documents-A schedule of required documents, prepared and maintained by Contractor. 46. Schedule of Values - A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, allocating portions of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for Contractor's Applications for Payment. 47. Shop Drawings - All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or information that are specifically prepared or assembled and submitted by Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work. Shop Drawings,whether approved or not, are not Drawings and are not Contract Documents. 48. Site - Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by Owner upon which the Work is to be performed. The Site includes rights-of-way, easements, and other lands furnished by Owner which are designated for use by the Contractor. 49. Specifications -The part of the Contract that describes the requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards, and workmanship as applied to the Work, and certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable to the Work. 50. Subcontractor-An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor or with other Subcontractors or Suppliers for the performance of a part of the Work. 51. Substantial Completion - The point where the Work or a specified part of the Work is sufficiently complete to be used for its intended purpose in accordance with the Contract Documents. 52. Supplementary Conditions -The part of the Contract that amends or supplements the General Conditions. 53. Supplier - A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman, or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with Subcontractors or other Suppliers to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work. 54. Technical Data-Those items expressly identified as Technical Data in the Supplementary Conditions with respect to either: a. Subsurface conditions at the Site; b. Physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site, except Underground Facilities; or C. Hazardous Environmental Conditions at the Site. 55. Underground Facilities - All underground pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, other similar facilities or appurtenances, and encasements containing these facilities which are used to convey electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, fiber optic transmissions, cable television, water, wastewater, storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems. 56. Unit Price Work-Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. General Conditions 00 72 00-14 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 57. Work - The construction of the Project or its component parts as required by the Contract Documents. 58. Work Change Directive -A directive issued to Contractor on or after the Effective Date of the Contract ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work. The Work Change Directive serves as a memorandum of understanding regarding the directive until a Change Order can be issued. 1.02 Terminology A. The words and terms discussed in this Paragraph 1.02 are not defined, but when used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, have the indicated meaning. B. It is understood that the cost for performing Work is included in the Contract Price and no additional compensation is to be paid by Owner unless specifically stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. Expressions including or similar to "at no additional cost to Owner," "at Contractor's expense,"or similar words mean that the Contractor is to perform or provide specified operation of Work without an increase in the Contract Price. C. The terms"day"or"calendar day' mean a calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. D. The meaning and intent of certain terms or adjectives are described as follows: 1. The terms "as allowed," "as approved," "as ordered," "as directed," or similar terms in the Contract Documents indicate an exercise of professional judgment by the OPT. 2. Adjectives including or similar to "reasonable," "suitable," "acceptable," "proper," "satisfactory," or similar adjectives are used to describe a determination of OPT regarding the Work. 3. Any exercise of professional judgment by the OPT will be made solely to evaluate the Work for general compliance with the Contract Documents unless there is a specific statement in the Contract Documents indicating otherwise. 4. The use of these or similar terms or adjectives does not assign a duty or give OPT authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work, or assign a duty or give authority to the OPT to undertake responsibilities contrary to the provisions of Articles 9 or 10 or other provisions of the Contract Documents. E. The use of the words "furnish," "install," "perform," and "provide" have the following meanings when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment: 1. Furnish means to supply and deliver the specified services, materials, or equipment to the Site or other specified location ready for use or installation. 2. Install means to complete construction or assembly of the specified services, materials, or equipment so they are ready for their intended use. 3. Perform or provide means to furnish and install specified services, materials, or equipment, complete and ready for their intended use. 4. Perform or provide the specified services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use if the Contract Documents require specific services, materials, or General Conditions 00 72 00-15 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 equipment, but do not expressly use the words "furnish," "install," "perform," or "provide." F. Contract Documents are written in modified brief style: 1. Requirements apply to all Work of the same kind, class, and type even though the word "all" is not stated. 2. Simple imperative sentence structure is used which places a verb as the first word in the sentence. It is understood that the words "furnish," "install," "perform," "provide," or similar words include the meaning of the phrase "The Contractor shall..." before these words. 3. Unless specifically stated that action is to be taken by the OPT or others, it is understood that the action described is a requirement of the Contractor. G. Words or phrases that have a well-known technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with this recognized meaning unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. H. Written documents are required where reference is made to notices, reports, approvals, consents, documents, statements, instructions, opinions or other types of communications required by the Contract Documents. Approval and consent documents must be received by Contractor prior to the action or decision for which approval or consent is given. These may be made in printed or electronic format through the OPT's project management information system or other electronic media as required by the Contract Documents or approved by the OAR. I. Giving notice as required by the Contract Documents may be by printed or electronic media using a method that requires acknowledgment of the receipt of that notice. ARTICLE 2—PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance A. Provide required Bonds with the executed Agreement. B. Provide evidence of insurance required by the Contract Documents with the executed Agreement. 2.02 Copies of Documents A. OPT is to furnish one fully executed Agreement (either electronic or printed) and one copy of the executed Contract Documents in electronic portable document format (PDF). This document is the Project Record Copy of the Contract Documents. 2.03 Project Management System A. Owner shall administer its design and construction management through an internet-based project management system known as e-Builder. B. Contractor shall conduct all communication through and perform all project-related functions utilizing this project management system. This includes all correspondence, General Conditions 00 72 00-16 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 submittals, requests for information, payment requests and processing, contract amendments, change orders, delivery orders and other administrative activities. C. Owner shall administer the software and provide training to Contractor's Team. 2.04 Before Starting Construction A. Provide the following preliminary documents in accordance with the Contract Documents within 10 days after the Effective Date of the Contract: 1. Progress Schedule, which must be a Critical Path Method (CPM) Schedule; 2. Schedule of Documents; and 3. Schedule of Values and projected cash flow information. 2.05 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives A. Attend the preconstruction conference as required by the Contract Documents. B. Designate the specific individuals authorized to act as representatives of the Contractor. These individuals must have the authority to transmit and receive information, render decisions relative to the Contract, and otherwise act on behalf of the Contractor. C. Owner is to designate the specific individuals authorized to act as representatives of the Owner and the limits of their authority with regard to acting on behalf of the Owner. ARTICLE 3—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, REQUIREMENTS, REUSE 3.01 Intent A. Requirements of components of the Contract Documents are as binding as if required by all Contract Documents. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete Project. The Contract Documents do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to complete the Project. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the OPT. 1. The Contract requirements described in the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to Work regardless of where it is described in the Contract Documents, unless specifically noted otherwise. 2. In offering a Bid for this Project and in entering into this Contract,Contractor represents: a. Contractor has studied the Contract Documents, the Work, the Site, local conditions, Laws and Regulations, and other conditions that may affect the Work; b. Contractor has studied the Technical Data and other information referred to in the Contract Documents and has or will make additional surveys and investigations as deemed necessary for the performance of the Work; c. Contractor has correlated these studies and observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents; and d. Contractor has taken all of this information into consideration in developing the Contract Price offered and that the Contract Price offered provides full compensation for providing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00-17 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 3. Organization of the Contract Documents is not intended to control or lessen the responsibility of the Contractor when dividing Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers, or to establish the extent of Work to be performed by trades, Subcontractors, or Suppliers. Specifications or details do not need to be indicated or specified in each Specification or Drawing. Items shown in the Contract Documents are applicable regardless of their location in the Contract Documents. 4. Standard paragraph titles and other identifications of subject matter in the Specifications are intended to aid in locating and recognizing various requirements of the Specifications. Titles do not define, limit, or otherwise restrict Specification text. 5. Provide the labor, documentation, services, materials, or equipment that may be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or trade usage as being required to produce the indicated result, whether specifically called for in the Contract Documents or not. Include these related costs in the offered Contract Price. B. Provide equipment that is functionally complete as described in the Contract Documents. The Drawings and Specifications do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to complete the installation of products purchased by the Owner or Contractor. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the Designer through the OAR. C. Comply with the most stringent requirements where compliance with two or more standards is specified and they establish different or conflicting requirements for the Work, unless the Contract Documents indicate otherwise. D. Provide materials and equipment comparable in quality to similar materials and equipment incorporated in the Project or as required to meet the minimum requirements of the application if the materials and equipment are shown in the Drawings but are not included in the Specifications. E. The Project Record Copy of the Contract Documents governs if there is a discrepancy between the Project Record Copy of the Contract Documents and subsequent electronic or digital versions of the Contract Documents, including printed copies derived from these electronic or digital versions. F. The Contract supersedes all prior written or oral negotiations, representations, and agreements. The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The Contract Documents may be modified only by a Modification. G. Request clarification from OAR for a decision before proceeding if Contractor is not clear on the meaning of the Contract Documents. OAR is to issue clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3.02 Reference Standards A. Standard Specifications, Codes, Laws and Regulations: 1. Reference in the Contract Documents to standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, or codes of technical societies, organizations, or associations, or to Laws or Regulations,whether specific or implied, are those in effect at the time Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price unless specifically stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00-18 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 2. No provision of referenced standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, codes, or instructions of a Supplier changes the duties or responsibilities of OPT or Contractor from those described in the Contract Documents or assigns a duty to or gives authority to the OPT to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or undertake responsibilities inconsistent with the Contract Documents. 3. The provisions of the Contract Documents take precedence over standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, codes, or instructions of a Supplier unless specifically stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. B. Comply with applicable construction industry standards, whether referenced or not. 1. Standards referenced in the Contract Documents govern over standards not referenced but recognized as applicable in the construction industry. 2. Comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents if they produce a higher quality of Work than the applicable construction industry standards. 3. Designer determines whether a code or standard is applicable, which of several are applicable, or if the Contract Documents produce a higher quality of Work. C. Make copies of reference standards available if requested by OAR. 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies A. Reporting Discrepancies: 1. Carefully study the Drawings and verify pertinent figures and dimensions with respect to actual field measurements before undertaking the Work. Immediately report conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that Contractor discovers or has actual knowledge of to the OAR. Do not proceed with affected Work until the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved by a clarification or interpretation from the OAR or by a Modification to the Contract Documents issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01. 2. The exactness of existing grades, elevations, dimensions or locations given on any Drawings issued by Designer, or the work installed by other contractors, is not guaranteed by Owner. Contractor shall,therefore, satisfy itself as to the accuracy of all grades, elevations, dimensions and locations. Any errors due to Contractor's failure to verify at the site all such grades, elevations, dimensions or locations relating to such existing or other work shall be rectified by Contractor without any additional cost to Owner. 3. Immediately notify the OAR of conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies in the Contract Documents or discrepancies between the Contract Documents and: a. Applicable Laws or Regulations; b. Actual field conditions; c. Standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, or codes; or d. Instructions of Suppliers. 4. Do not proceed with affected Work until the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved by a clarification or interpretation from the OAR or by a Modification to the General Conditions 00 72 00-19 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Contract Documents issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01, except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12. 5. Contractor is liable to the OPT for failure to report conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies in the Contract Documents of which Contractor has actual knowledge. 6. Contractor is deemed to have included the most expensive item, system, procedure, etc. in the Contract Price if a conflict, error,ambiguity, or discrepancy in components of the Contract Documents was known, but not reported prior to submitting the Bid or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price. 3.04 Interpretation of the Contract Documents A. Submit questions concerning the non-technical or contractual/administrative requirements of the Contract Documents to the OAR immediately after those questions arise. OAR is to provide an interpretation of the Contract Documents regarding these questions and will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. B. Submit questions regarding the design of the Project described in the Contract Documents to the OAR immediately after those questions arise. OAR is to request an interpretation of the Contract Documents from the Designer. Designer is to respond to these questions by providing an interpretation of the Contract Documents. OAR will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. C. OPT may initiate a Modification to the Contract Documents through the OAR if a response to the question indicates that a change in the Contract Documents is required. Contractor may appeal Designer's or OAR's interpretation by submitting a Change Proposal. 3.05 Reuse of Documents A. Contractor's Team has no rights to the Contract Documents and may not use the Contract Documents, or copies or electronic media editions of the Contract Documents, other than for the construction of this Project. This provision survives final payment or termination of the Contract. B. Contractor is allowed to retain a copy of the Contract Documents for record purposes, unless specifically prohibited by the Owner for security reasons. Surrender paper and digital copies of the Contract Documents and other related documents and remove these documents from computer equipment or storage devices as a condition of final payment if the Owner so directs. ARTICLE 4—COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK 4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed A. The Contract Times commence to run on the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. 4.02 Starting the Work A. Begin performing the Work on the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Do not begin Work prior to having the insurance required in Article 6 in force or before the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. General Conditions 00 72 00-20 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4.03 Progress Schedule A. Construct the Work in accordance with the Progress Schedule established in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1. Adjust the Progress Schedule as required to accurately reflect actual progress on the Work. 2. Submit proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that change the Contract Times in accordance with the requirements of Article 11. B. Continue performing Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule during disputes or disagreements with Owner. Do not delay or postpone Work pending resolution of disputes or disagreements, or during an appeal process. 4.04 Delays in Contractor's Progress A. No Damages for Delay: Contractor shall receive no compensation for delays or hindrances to the Work,except in the case of direct interference with means and methods by the Owner. In no event shall the Contractor be entitled to any compensation or recovery of any special damages in connection with any delays, including without limitation: consequential damages, lost opportunity costs, impact damages, or other similar damages. Owner's exercise of any of its rights or remedies under the Contract Documents (including without limitation ordering changes in the Work, or directing suspension, rescheduling, or correction of the Work), regardless of the extent or frequency of Owner's exercise of such rights or remedies, shall not be construed as active interference in the Contractor's performance of the Work. An extension of Contract Time, to the extent permitted, shall be the sole remedy of the Contractor for any acknowledged delays.Contractor agrees that the extension of time provides an equitable adjustment. B. Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delays, disruptions, or interference caused by or within the control of Contractor's Team. C. No time extensions are allowed for weather conditions, other than those listed in Paragraph 4.04.D, for Projects using calendar days or a fixed date to establish the Contract Time. Contractor is to include the cost associated with weather related delays in the Contract Price and assumes the risks associated with delays related to weather conditions. D. Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Times if Contractor's performance or progress is delayed,disrupted or interfered with by unanticipated causes not the fault of and beyond the control of OPT or Contractor. These adjustments in Contract Times are the Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for the delays, disruption, and interference described in this paragraph. These unanticipated causes may include: 1. Severe and unavoidable natural catastrophes e.g. fires, floods, hurricanes, epidemics, and earthquakes; 2. Acts or failures to act of utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site; 3. Acts of war or terrorism; and 4. Rain days in excess of the number specified in a calendar year. General Conditions 00 72 00-21 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the following are governed by Article 5: 1. The existence of a differing subsurface or physical condition; 2. An Underground Facility not shown or not indicated with reasonable accuracy by the Contract Documents; and 3. Hazardous Environmental Conditions. F. Article 8 governs delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the performance of certain other work at or adjacent to the Site. G. Notify the OAR immediately of a potential delaying, disrupting, or interfering event. Submit a Change Proposal seeking an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times within 30 days of the commencement of the delaying, disrupting, or interfering event. Claims for adjustment to the Contract Price or Contract Times that do not comply with Article 13 are waived. H. Contractor is only entitled to an adjustment of the Contract Times for specific delays, disruptions, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work that can be demonstrated to directly impact the ability of the Contractor to complete the Work within the Contract Times. No adjustments in Contract Times are allowed for delays on components of the Work which were or could have been completed without impacting the Contract Times. I. Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delay, disruption, or interference caused by or within the control of the Owner if this delay is concurrent with a delay, disruption, or interference attributable to or within the control of the Contractor's Team. ARTICLE 5—AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 5.01 Availability of Lands A. Owner is to furnish the Site and inform the Contractor of encumbrances or restrictions known to Owner related to use of the Site with which Contractor must comply in performing the Work. B. Provide for additional lands and access Contractor requires for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment, other than those identified in the Contract Documents. Provide documentation of authority to use these additional lands to OAR before using them. 5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas: 1. Confine construction equipment, temporary construction facilities, the storage of materials and equipment,and the operations of workers to the Site,adjacent areas that Owner or Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or agreements, and other adjacent areas as permitted by Laws and Regulations. Assume General Conditions 00 72 00-22 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 full responsibility for damage or injuries which result from the performance of the Work or from other actions or conduct of the Contractor's Team, including: a. Damage to the Site; b. Damage to adjacent areas used for Contractor's Team's operations; C. Damage to other adjacent land or areas; and d. Injuries and losses sustained by the owners or occupants of these lands or areas. 2. Take the following action if a damage or injury claim is made by the owner or occupant of adjacent land or area because of the performance of the Work, or because of other actions or conduct of the Contractor's Team: a. Take immediate corrective or remedial action as required by Paragraph 7.09; and b. Attempt to settle the claim through negotiations with the owner or occupant, or otherwise resolve the claim by mediation or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law. 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions A. The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. Those reports known to OPT of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; 2. Those drawings known to OPT of physical conditions related to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site, except Underground Facilities; and 3. Technical Data contained in these reports and drawings. B. Data contained in boring logs, recorded measurements of subsurface water levels, and the results of tests performed on materials described in geotechnical data reports specifically prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor are defined as Technical Data, unless Technical Data has been defined more specifically in the Supplementary Conditions. C. Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data contained in these reports and drawings, but these reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Except for this reliance on Technical Data,Contractor may not rely upon or make claims against Owner with respect to: 1. The completeness of reports and drawings for Contractor's purposes, including aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, or Contractor's safety precautions and programs; 2. Other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in these reports or shown or indicated in the drawings; or 3. Contractor's interpretation of or conclusions drawn from Technical Data or other data, interpretations, opinions, or information. General Conditions 00 72 00-23 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions A. Notify OAR immediately, but in no event later than 3 days, after becoming aware of a subsurface or physical condition that is uncovered or revealed at the Site, and before further disturbing the subsurface or physical conditions or performing any related Work that: 1. Establishes that the Technical Data on which Contractor is entitled to rely as provided in Paragraph 5.03 is materially inaccurate; 2. Requires a change in the Drawings or Specifications; 3. Differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or 4. Is of an unusual nature and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents. Do not further disturb or perform Work related to this subsurface or physical condition, except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12, until permission to do so is issued by OAR. B. OAR is to notify the OPT after receiving notice of a differing subsurface or physical condition from the Contractor. Designer is to: 1. Promptly review the subsurface or physical condition; 2. Determine the necessity of OPT's obtaining additional exploration or tests with respect to the subsurface or physical condition; 3. Determine if the subsurface or physical condition falls within one or more of the differing Site condition categories in Paragraph 5.04.A; 4. Prepare recommendations to OPT regarding the Contractor's resumption of Work in connection with the subsurface or physical condition in question; 5. Determine the need for changes in the Drawings or Specifications; and 6. Advise OPT of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations. C. OAR is to issue a statement to Contractor regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question and recommend action as appropriate after review of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations. D. Possible Contract Price and Contract Times Adjustments: 1. Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times to the extent that a differing subsurface or physical condition causes a change in Contractor's cost or time to perform the Work provided the condition falls within one or more of the categories described in Paragraph 5.04.A. Any adjustment in Contract Price for Work that is paid for on a unit price basis is subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03. General Conditions 00 72 00-24 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 2. Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to a subsurface or physical condition if: a. Contractor knew of the existence of the subsurface or physical condition at the time Contractor made an offer to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times; b. The existence of the subsurface or physical condition could have been discovered or revealed as a result of examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, or studies of the Site and contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents prior to when Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price; or c. Contractor failed to give notice as required by Paragraph 5.04.A. 3. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal no later than 30 days after OAR's issuance of the OPT's statement to Contractor regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question. 4. A Change Order is to be issued by the OAR if Owner and Contractor agree that Contractor is entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times and agree to the amount or extent of adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Times. 5.05 Underground Facilities A. The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or adjacent to the Site is based on information and data furnished to OPT by the owners of these Underground Facilities or by others. OPT is not responsible for the accuracy or completeness of information or data provided by others that OPT makes available to Contractor. The Contractor is responsible for: 1. Investigating and field-verifying the location of underground facilities before beginning Work; 2. Reviewing and checking available information and data regarding existing Underground Facilities at the Site; 3. Complying with Laws and Regulations related to locating Underground Facilities before beginning Work; 4. Locating Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; 5. Coordinating the Work with the owners, including Owner, of Underground Facilities during construction; and 6. The safety and protection of existing Underground Facilities at or adjacent to the Site and repairing damage resulting from the Work. B. Notify the OAR and the owner of the Underground Facility immediately, but in no event later than 3 days, if an Underground Facility is uncovered or revealed at the Site that was not shown in the Contract Documents or was not shown with reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents. Do not further disturb conditions or perform Work affected by this discovery, except in the event of an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12. General Conditions 00 72 00-25 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. The Designer is to take the following action after receiving notice from the OAR: 1. Promptly review the Underground Facility and conclude whether the Underground Facility was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy; 2. Prepare recommendations to OPT regarding the Contractor's resumption of Work in connection with this Underground Facility; 3. Determine the extent to which a change is required in the Drawings or Specifications to document the consequences of the existence or location of the Underground Facility; and 4. Advise OAR of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations and provide revised Drawings and Specifications if required. D. OAR is to issue a statement to Contractor regarding the Underground Facility in question and recommend action as appropriate after review of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations. E. Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times as provided in Paragraphs 11.04 and 11.05 to the extent that the existing Underground Facility at the Site that was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy. Any adjustment in Contract Price for Work that is paid for on a unit price basis is subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03. F. Contractor is not entitled an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to an existing Underground Facility at the Site if: 1. Contractor knew of the existence of the existing Underground Facility at the Site at the time Contractor made an offer to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times; 2. The existence of the existing Underground Facility at the Site could have been discovered or revealed as a result of examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, or studies of the Site and contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents prior to when Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price; or 3. Contractor failed to give notice as required by Paragraph 5.05.B. G. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal regarding its entitlement to or the amount or extent of adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Times no later than 30 days after OAR's issuance of OPT's statement to Contractor regarding the Underground Facility. 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site A. The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. Those reports and drawings known to OPT relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site; and 2. Technical Data contained in these reports and drawings. B. Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data contained in reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions identified in the Supplementary General Conditions 00 72 00-26 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Conditions, but these reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Except for the reliance on expressly identified Technical Data,Contractor may not rely upon or make claims against Owner's Indemnitees with respect to: 1. The completeness of these reports and drawings for Contractor's purposes, including aspects of the means, methods,techniques, sequences and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor or Contractor's safety precautions and programs related to Hazardous Environmental Conditions; 2. Other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in these reports or shown or indicated in the drawings; or 3. Any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from Technical Data or other data, interpretations, opinions or information. C. The results of tests performed on materials described in environmental reports specifically prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor are defined as Technical Data unless Technical Data has been defined more specifically in the Supplementary Conditions. D. Contractor is not responsible for removing or remediating Hazardous Environmental Conditions encountered, uncovered or revealed at the Site unless this removal or remediation is expressly identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work. E. Contractor is responsible for controlling, containing, and duly removing and remediating Constituents of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor's Team and paying associated costs. 1. Owner may remove and remediate the Hazardous Environmental Condition and impose a set-off against payments to Contractor for associated costs if Contractor's Team creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition,and Contractor does not take acceptable action to remove and remediate the Hazardous Environmental Condition. 2. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to Hazardous Environmental Conditions are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. F. Immediately notify the OAR and take the following action if Contractor uncovers or reveals a Hazardous Environmental Condition at the Site or adjacent areas used by the Contractor's Team that was not created by the Contractor's Team: 1. Secure or otherwise isolate this condition; 2. Stop Work in affected areas or connected with the condition, except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12; and 3. Do not resume Work in connection with the Hazardous Environmental Condition or in affected areas until after OPT has obtained required permits and OAR sends notice to the Contractor: a. Specifying that this condition and affected areas are or have been rendered safe for the resumption of Work; or b. Specifying special conditions under which Work may be resumed safely. General Conditions 00 72 00-27 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4. Owner may order the portion of the Work that is in the area affected by the Hazardous Environmental Condition to be deleted from the Work following the procedures in Article 11 if Contractor does not agree to: a. Resume the Work based on a reasonable belief it is unsafe; or b. Resume the Work under the special conditions provided by the OAR. 5. Owner may have this deleted portion of the Work performed by Owner's own forces or others in accordance with Article 8. G. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal or Owner may impose a set-off if an agreement is not reached within 10 days of OAR's notice regarding the resumption of Work as to whether Contractor is entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times or on the amount or extent of adjustments resulting from this Work stoppage or special conditions under which Contractor agrees to resume Work. H. The provisions of Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.05 do not apply to the presence of Constituents of Concern or a Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site. ARTICLE 6—BONDS AND INSURANCE 6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds A. Furnish Performance and Payment Bonds, each in an amount equal to the Contract Price, as security for the faithful performance and payment of Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. These Bonds are to remain in effect until 1 year after the date of final payment. Furnish other Bonds as required by the Contract Documents. B. Bonds furnished by the Contractor must meet the requirements of Texas Insurance Code Chapter 3503, Texas Government Code Chapter 2253, and all other applicable Laws and Regulations. C. Notify OAR immediately if the surety on Bonds furnished by Contractor: 1. Is declared bankrupt, or becomes insolvent; 2. Has its right to do business in Texas terminated; or 3. Ceases to meet the requirements of Paragraph 6.02. Provide a Bond and surety which comply with the requirements of Paragraph 6.02 within 20 days after the event giving rise to this notification. D. Contractor is to use amounts paid by Owner to Contractor under the Contract for the performance of the Contract and to satisfy claims against the Payment Bond. E. Notify the OAR of claims filed against the Payment Bond. Notify the claimant and OAR of undisputed amounts and the basis for challenging disputed amounts when a claimant has satisfied the conditions prescribed by Texas Government Code Chapter 2253. Promptly pay undisputed amount. F. Owner is not liable for payment of costs or expenses of claimants under the Payment Bond. Owner has no obligations to pay, give notice or take other action to claimants under the Payment Bond. General Conditions 00 72 00-28 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 G. Owner may exclude the Contractor from the Site and exercise Owner's termination rights under Article 18 if Contractor fails to obtain or maintain required Bonds. H. OPT will provide a copy of the Payment Bond to Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other persons or entities claiming to have furnished labor or materials used in the performance of the Work that request this information in accordance with Texas Government Code Chapter 2253. 6.02 Licensed Sureties A. Provide Bonds in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents from sureties named in the list of"Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Financial Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S. Department of the Treasury. B. Provide Bonds required by the Contract Documents from surety companies that are duly licensed or authorized to provide bonds in the State of Texas. 6.03 Required Minimum Insurance Coverage A. Obtain and maintain insurance as required in this Article and in the Supplementary Conditions. B. Deliver evidence of insurance in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions to the Owner to demonstrate that Contractor has obtained and is maintaining the policies, coverages, and endorsements required by the Contract. Provide copies of these certificates to each named insured and additional insured as identified in the Supplementary Conditions or otherwise. 6.04 General Insurance Provisions A. Provide insurance coverages and limits meeting the requirements for insurance in accordance with this Article 6 and the Supplementary Conditions. B. Provide endorsements to the policies as outlined in this Article. C. Obtain insurance from companies that are duly licensed or authorized in the State of Texas to issue insurance policies for the required limits and coverages. Provide insurance from companies that have an A.M. Best rating of A-Vill or better. D. Furnish copies of endorsements and documentation of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles upon request by OPT or any named insured or additional insured. Contractor may block out (redact) any confidential premium or pricing information contained in any endorsement furnished under this Contract. E. The name and number of the Project must be referenced on the certificate of insurance. F. OPT's failure to demand such certificates or other evidence of the Contractor's full compliance with the insurance requirements or failure to identify a deficiency in compliance from the evidence provided is not a waiver of the Contractor's obligation to obtain and maintain the insurance required by the Contract Documents. G. Notify the Owner if the Contractor fails to purchase or maintain the insurance required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall not be allowed to perform any Work on the General Conditions 00 72 00-29 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Project until the required insurance policies are in effect. A Certificate of Liability Insurance shall be submitted to the OPT. H. Owner may exclude the Contractor from the Site and exercise Owner's termination rights under Article 18 if Contractor fails to obtain or maintain the required insurance. I. Owner does not represent that the insurance coverage and limits established in this Contract are adequate to protect Contractor or Contractor's interests. J. The required insurance and insurance limits do not limit the Contractor's liability under the indemnities granted to Owner in the Contract Documents. K. Provide for an endorsement that the "other insurance" clause shall not apply to the OPT where the OPT is an additional insured shown on the policy. Contractor's insurance is primary and non-contributory with respect to any insurance or self-insurance carried by the OPT for liability arising out of operations under this Contract. L. Include the Owner and list the other members of the OPT and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds on all policies with the exception of the workers' compensation policy and Contractor's professional liability policy. 6.05 Contractor's Insurance A. Purchase and maintain workers' compensation and employer's liability insurance for: 1. Claims under workers' compensation, disability benefits, and other similar employee benefit acts. Obtain workers' compensation coverage through a licensed insurance company in accordance with Texas law and written on a policy and endorsements approved by the Texas Department of Insurance. Provide insurance in amounts to meet all workers' compensation obligations. Provide an "All Other States" endorsement if Contractor is not domiciled in Texas and policy is not written in accordance with Texas Department of Insurance rules. 2. Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor's employees. 3. United States Longshoreman and Harbor Workers' Compensation Act and Jones Act coverage (if applicable). 4. Foreign voluntary worker compensation (if applicable). B. Purchase and maintain commercial general liability insurance covering all operations by or on behalf of Contractor. The expected coverage is that which would be included in a commercially available ISO Commercial General Liability policy and should provide coverage on an occurrence basis, against: 1. Claims for damages because of bodily injury,sickness or disease,or death of any person other than Contractor's employees; 2. Claims for damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liability coverage which are sustained; 3. By any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by Contractor; and General Conditions 00 72 00-30 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4. Claims for damages,other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including any resulting loss of use. C. Provide Contractor's commercial general liability policy that is written on a 1996 (or later) ISO commercial general liability form (occurrence form) and include the following coverages and endorsements: 1. Products and completed operations coverage as required in this Article and the Supplementary Conditions. Insurance is to remain in effect for 3 years after final payment. Furnish evidence of the continuation of this insurance at final payment and again each year for 3 years after final payment to Owner and each named insured or additional insured. a. If required by the Supplementary Conditions, provide and maintain Installation Floater insurance for property under the care, custody, or control of Contractor. Provide Installation Floater insurance that is a broad form or "All Peril" policy providing coverage for all materials, supplies, machinery, fixtures, and equipment which will be incorporated into the Work. 1) Provide coverage under the Contractor's Installation Floater that includes: a) Faulty or Defective workmanship, materials, maintenance, or construction; b) Cost to remove Defective or damaged Work from the Site or to protect it from loss or damage; c) Cost to cleanup and remove pollutants; d) Coverage for testing and startup; e) Any loss to property while in transit; f) Any loss at the Site; g) Any loss while in storage, both on and off the Site; and h) Any loss to temporary Project Works if their value is included in the Contract Price. 2) Coverage cannot be contingent on an external cause or risk or limited to property for which the Contractor is legally liable. Provide limits of insurance adequate to cover the value of the installation. Pay any deductible carried under this coverage and assume responsibility for claims on materials, supplies, machinery, fixtures, and equipment which will be incorporated into the Work while in transit or in storage. 2. Blanket contractual liability coverage for Contractor's contractual indemnity obligations in Paragraph 7.14, and all other contractual indemnity obligations of Contractor in the Contract Documents. Industry standard ISO Contractual Liability coverage will meet this obligation. 3. Broad form property damage coverage. 4. Severability of interest. 5. Underground explosion and collapse coverage. General Conditions 00 72 00-31 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 6. Personal injury coverage. 7. Endorsement CG 2032, "Additional Insured - Engineers, Architects or Surveyors Not Engaged by the Named Insured" or its equivalent. D. Purchase and maintain automobile liability insurance against claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. E. For Projects with a Contract Value that exceeds$5,000,000, purchase and maintain umbrella or excess liability insurance written over the underlying employer's liability, commercial general liability, and automobile liability insurance described in the paragraphs above. Provide coverage that is at least as broad as all underlying policies. Provide a policy that provides first-dollar liability coverage as needed. F. Provide Contractor's commercial general liability and automobile liability policies that: 1. Are written on an occurrence basis; 2. Include the individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds; 3. Include coverage for Owner as defined in Article 1; and 4. Provide primary coverage for all claims covered by the policies, including those arising from both ongoing and completed operations. G. Purchase and maintain insurance coverage for third-party injury and property damage claims, including clean-up costs that result from Hazardous Environmental Conditions which result from Contractor's operations and completed operations. Provide Contractor's pollution liability insurance that includes long-term environmental impacts for the disposal of pollutants/contaminants and is not limited to sudden and accidental discharge. The completed operations coverage is to remain in effect for 3 years after final payment. The policy must name OPT and any other individuals and entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds. H. Purchase and maintain applicable professional liability insurance, or have Subcontractors and Suppliers do so, if Contractor or any Subcontractor or Supplier will provide or furnish professional services under this Contract. I. The policies of insurance required by this Article must: 1. Include at least the specific coverages and be written for not less than the limits of liability provided in this Article or the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws or Regulations,whichever is greater. 2. Contain a provision that coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to Contractor, Owner, and all named insureds and additional insureds. 3. Remain in effect at all times when Contractor is performing Work or is at the Site to conduct tasks arising from the Contract Documents. 4. Be appropriate for the Work being performed and provide protection from claims resulting from the Contractor's performance of the Work and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether performed by Contractor, General Conditions 00 72 00-32 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Subcontractor, Supplier, anyone directly or indirectly employed or retained by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable. J. The coverage requirements for specific policies of insurance must be met directly by those policies and may not rely on excess or umbrella insurance provided in other policies to meet the coverage requirement. 6.06 Property Insurance A. Purchase and maintain builder's risk insurance in the amount of the full replacement cost of the Project. This policy is subject to the deductible amounts requirements in this Article and the Supplementary Conditions or those required by Laws and Regulations and must comply with the requirements of Paragraph 6.09. This insurance shall: 1. Include the OPT,Contractor,and all Subcontractors,and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, as named insureds. 2. Be written on a builder's risk "all risk" policy form that includes insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, falsework, and materials and equipment in transit, and insures against at least the following perils or causes of loss: fire; lightning; windstorm; riot; civil commotion; terrorism; vehicle impact; aircraft; smoke; theft; vandalism and malicious mischief; mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake; volcanic activity, and other earth movement; flood; collapse; explosion; debris removal; demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations; water damage (other than that caused by flood); and such other perils or causes of loss as may be specifically required by this Section. If insurance against mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake; volcanic activity, and other earth movement; or flood, are not commercially available under builder's risk, by endorsement or otherwise, this insurance may be provided through other insurance policies acceptable to Owner and Contractor. 3. Cover expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property. 4. Cover materials and equipment in transit or stored prior to being incorporated in the Work. 5. Cover Owner-furnished or assigned property. 6. Allow for partial utilization of the Work by Owner. 7. Allow for the waiver of the insurer's subrogation rights as set forth below. 8. Provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils or causes of loss covered. 9. Not include a co-insurance clause. 10. Include a broad exception for ensuing losses from physical damage or loss with respect to any Defective workmanship, design, or materials exclusions. 11. Include testing and startup. 12. Be maintained in effect until the Work as a whole is complete, unless otherwise agreed to in writing by Owner and Contractor. General Conditions 00 72 00-33 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. Evidence of insurance provided must contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to Owner and Contractor and to each named insured. C. Pay for costs not covered by the policy deductible. D. Notify builder's risk insurance provider if Owner will occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. Maintain the builder's risk insurance in effect during this Partial Occupancy or Use. E. Contractor may purchase other special insurance to be included in or to supplement the builder's risk or property insurance policies provided under this Article and the Supplementary Conditions. F. Contractor, Subcontractors, or employees of the Contractor or a Subcontractor owning property items, such as tools, construction equipment, or other personal property not expressly covered in the insurance required by the Contract Documents are responsible for providing their own insurance. 6.07 Waiver of Rights A. Insurance shall include a waiver of subrogation in favor of the additional insureds identified in the Supplementary Conditions. B. All policies purchased in accordance with this Article are to contain provisions to the effect that the insurers have no rights of recovery against OPT, named insureds or additional insureds in the event of a payment for loss or damage. Contractor and insurers waive all rights against the Owner's Indemnities for losses and damages created by or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by these policies and any other applicable property insurance. None of these waivers extend to the rights Contractor has to the proceeds of insurance as trustee. C. Contractor is responsible for assuring that agreements with Subcontractors contain provisions that the Subcontractor waive all rights against Owner,Contractor, named insureds and additional insureds, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them,for all losses and damages created by or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by builder's risk insurance and other property insurance. 6.08 Owner's Insurance for Project A. Owner is not responsible for purchasing and maintaining any insurance to protect the interest of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or others in the Work. The stated limits of insurance required are minimum only. Determine the limits that are adequate. These limits may be basic policy limits or any combination of basic limits and umbrella limits. In any event, Contractor is fully responsible for all losses arising out of, resulting from, or connected with operations under this Contract whether or not these losses are covered by insurance. The acceptance of evidence of insurance bythe OPT, named insureds,or additional insureds does not release the Contractor from compliance with the insurance requirements of the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00-34 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 6.09 Acceptable Evidence of Insurance A. Provide evidence of insurance acceptable to the Owner with the executed Contract Documents. Provide the following as evidence of insurance: 1. Certificates of Insurance on an acceptable form; 2. Riders or endorsements to policies; and 3. Policy limits and deductibles. B. Provide a list of"Additional Insureds" for each policy. C. Provide evidence that waivers of subrogation are provided on all applicable policies. D. Provide evidence of requirements for 30 days' notice before cancellation or any material change in the policy's terms and conditions, limits of coverage, or change in deductible amount. 6.10 Certificate of Insurance A. Submit Certificates of Insurance meeting the following requirements: 1. Form has been filed with and approved by the Texas Department of Insurance under Texas Insurance Code §1811.101; or 2. Form is a standard form deemed approved by the Department under Texas Insurance Code §1811.101. 3. No requirements of this Contract may be interpreted as requiring the issuance of a certificate of insurance on a certificate of insurance form that has not first been filed with and approved by the Texas Department of Insurance. B. Include the name of the Project in the description of operations box on the certificate of insurance. 6.11 Insurance Policies A. If requested by the Owner, make available for viewing a copy of insurance policies, declaration pages and endorsements, and documentation of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles. B. Contractor may block out (redact) any proprietary information or confidential premium pricing information contained in any policy or endorsement furnished under this Contract. 6.12 Continuing Evidence of Coverage A. Provide updated, revised, or new evidence of insurance in accordance this Article and the Supplementary Conditions prior to the expiration of existing policies. B. Provide evidence of continuation of insurance coverage at final payment and for the following 3 years. 6.13 Notices Regarding Insurance A. Notices regarding insurance are to be sent to the Owner at the following address: General Conditions 00 72 00-35 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 City of Corpus Christi— Engineering Attn: Construction Contract Admin. P.O. Box 9277 Corpus Christi,TX 78469-9277 B. Submit questions regarding insurance requirements to the Construction Contract Administrator by calling 361-826-3530. 6.14 Texas Workers' Compensation Insurance Required Notice A. Definitions: 1. Certificate of coverage ("certificate") -A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self-insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC- 81, TWCC-82, TWCC-83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the Project. 2. Duration of the Project-includes the time from the beginning of the Work on the Project until the Contractor's/person's Work on the Project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. 3. Persons providing services on the Project ("Subcontractor" in §406.096) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has undertaken to perform on the Project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner-operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the Project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the Project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. B. The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the Contractor providing services on the Project, for the duration of the Project. C. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the Contract. D. If the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project,the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period,file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. E. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: 1. A certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning Work on the Project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the Project; and General Conditions 00 72 00-36 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 2. No later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project. F. The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter. G. The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery,within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known,of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project. H. The Contractor shall post on each Project Site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the Project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. I. The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project,to: 1. Provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements,which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the Project,for the duration of the Project; 2. Provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning Work on the Project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the Project,for the duration of the Project; 3. Provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; 4. Obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: a. A certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning Work on the Project; and b. A new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; 5. Retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter; 6. Notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project; and 7. Contractually require each person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by this section, with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. J. By signing this Contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor who will provide services on the Project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the Project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of General Conditions 00 72 00-37 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self-insured, with the commission's Division of Self-Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. K. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the Contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the Contract void if the Contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES 7.01 Supervision and Superintendence A. Supervise, inspect, and direct the performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor is solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction. B. Provide a competent resident superintendent acceptable to the OPT. The resident superintendent or acceptable qualified assistant is to be present at all times when Work is being done. Do not replace this resident superintendent except under extraordinary circumstances. Provide a replacement resident superintendent equally competent to the previous resident superintendent if replacement is required. Notify the Owner prior to replacing the resident superintendent and obtain Owner's consent to the change in superintendent. 7.02 Labor; Working Hours A. Provide competent,suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out the Work and perform Work to complete the Project. Maintain good discipline and order at the Site. B. Perform Work at the Site during regular working hours except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent to the Site and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents. Regular working hours are between sunrise and sundown Monday through Saturday unless other times are specifically authorized in writing by OAR. C. Do not perform Work on a Sunday or legal holiday without OAR's consent. The following legal holidays are observed by the Owner: Holiday Date Observed New Year's Day January 1 Martin Luther King Jr Day Third Monday in January Memorial Day Last Monday in May Independence Day July 4 Labor Day First Monday in September Thanksgiving Day Fourth Thursday in November General Conditions 00 72 00-38 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Holiday Date Observed Friday after Thanksgiving Friday after Thanksgiving Christmas Day December 25 D. If a legal holiday falls on a Saturday, it will be observed the preceding Friday. If a legal holiday falls on a Sunday, it will be observed the following Monday. E. Pay additional cost incurred by Owner for services of the OAR or RPR to observe Work constructed outside of regular working hours. OAR will issue a Set-off in the Application for Payment for this cost per Paragraph 17.01.13 7.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment A. Provide services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and other facilities and incidentals necessary for the performance, testing, start-up, and completion of the Work, whether or not these items are specifically called for in the Contract Documents. B. Provide new materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work. Provide special warranties and guarantees required by the Contract Documents. Provide satisfactory evidence, including reports of required tests, as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment as required by the Contract Documents or as requested by the OAR. C. Store, apply, install, connect, erect, protect, use, clean, and condition materials and equipment in accordance with instructions of the applicable Supplier, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents. 7.04 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others A. Contractor may retain Subcontractors and Suppliers for the performance of parts of the Work. All Subcontractors and Suppliers must be acceptable to Owner. B. Contractor must retain specific Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities for the performance of designated parts of the Work if required to do so by the Contract Documents. C. Submit a list of proposed Subcontractors and Suppliers to OAR prior to entering into binding subcontracts or purchase orders. These proposed Subcontractors or Suppliers are deemed acceptable to Owner unless Owner raises a substantive, reasonable objection within 30 days after receiving this list. Under no circumstances shall any Subcontractor debarred under Chapter 41 of The Code of Ordinances, City of Corpus Christi, be deemed acceptable to Owner. D. Contractor is not required to retain Subcontractors,Suppliers,or other individuals or entities to furnish or perform part of the Work after the Effective Date of the Contract if Contractor has reasonable objection. E. Owner may require the replacement of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities retained by the Contractor. Provide an acceptable replacement for the rejected Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity. Owner also may require Contractor to retain specific replacements, subject to Contractor's reasonable objections. General Conditions 00 72 00-39 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 F. Contractor may be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to a replacement of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other entities required by Owner. The Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Time with respect to replacement of any individual deemed unsuitable by the OPT. Notify OAR immediately if a replacement of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other entity increases the Contract Price or Contract Times. Initiate a Change Proposal for the adjustment within 10 days of Owner's notice to replace a Subcontractor,Supplier,or other entity retained by Contractor to perform part of the Work. Do not make the replacement until the change in Contract Price or Contract Times has been accepted by the Owner if Change Proposal is to be submitted. G. Owner's initial acceptance of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities, or their replacements, does not constitute a waiver of the obligation of the Contractor to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. H. Maintain a current and complete list of Subcontractors and Suppliers that are to perform or furnish part of the Work. I. Contractor is fully responsible for the acts and omissions of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing Work. J. Contractor is solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing Work. K. Require Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing Work to communicate with OPT through Contractor. L. Contracts between the Contractor and their Subcontractors or Suppliers may specifically bind the Subcontractors or Suppliers to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. Contractor is responsible for meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents if they choose to not bind the Subcontractors or Suppliers to applicable terms or conditions of the Contract Documents. 1. All Subcontractors employed on this Project must be required to obtain Workers' Compensation Insurance. 2. Proof of this insurance will be required prior to the start of any Work. M. OPT may furnish information about amounts paid to Contractor for Work provided by Subcontractors or Suppliers to the entity providing the Work. N. Nothing in the Contract Documents: 1. Creates a contractual relationship between members of the OPT and members of the Contractor's Team. 2. Creates an obligation on the part of the Owner to pay or to see to the payment of money due members of the Contractor's Team, except as may be required by Laws and Regulations. 7.05 Patent Fees and Royalties A. Pay license fees, royalties, and costs incident to the use of inventions, designs, processes, products, or devices which are patented or copyrighted by others in the performance of the Work, or to incorporate these inventions, designs, processes, products, or devices which are patented or copyrighted by others in the Work. The Contract Documents identify inventions, General Conditions 00 72 00-40 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 designs, processes, products, or devices OPT knows are patented or copyrighted by others or that its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of a license fee or royalty to others. Contractor is to include the cost associated with the use of patented or copyrighted products or processes, whether specified or selected by the Contractor, in the Contract Price. B. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to infringement of patent rights and copyrights are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. 7.06 Permits A. Obtain and pay for construction permits and licenses. OPT is to assist Contractor in obtaining permits and licenses when required to do so by applicable Laws and Regulations. Pay governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time the Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price. This Project is not exempt from City permits and fees unless expressly stated otherwise. 7.07 Taxes A. Contractor is responsible for all taxes and duties arising out of the Work. The Owner generally qualifies as a tax exempt agency as defined by the statutes of the State of Texas and is usually not subject to any city or state sales or use taxes, however certain items such as rented equipment may be taxable even though Owner is a tax-exempt agency. Contractor is responsible for including in the Contract Price any applicable sales and use taxes and is responsible for complying with all applicable statutes and rulings of the State Comptroller. Pay sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations. B. The Owner is exempt from the Federal Transportation and Excise Tax. Contractor must comply with all federal regulations governing the exemptions. C. Products incorporated into the Work are exempt from state sales tax according to the provisions of Subchapter H, Chapter 151, of the Texas Tax Code. D. Contractor may not include any amounts for sales, use, or similar taxes for which the Owner is exempt in the Contract Price or any proposed Change Order or Application for Payment. E. Obtain tax exemption certificates or other documentation necessary to establish Owner's exemption from such taxes. 7.08 Laws and Regulations A. Give required notices and comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. OPT is not responsible for monitoring Contractor's compliance with Laws or Regulations except where expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations. B. Pay costs resulting from actions taken by Contractor that are contrary to Laws or Regulations. Contractor is not responsible for determining that the design aspects of the Work described in the Contract Documents is in accordance with Laws and Regulations. This does not relieve Contractor of its obligations under Paragraph 3.03. General Conditions 00 72 00-41 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. Owner or Contractor may give notice to the other party of changes in Laws or Regulations that may affect the cost or time of performance of the Work, including: 1. Changes in Laws or Regulations affecting procurement of permits; and 2. Sales, use, value-added, consumption, and other similar taxes which come into effect after Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price. D. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal or Owner may initiate a Claim within 30 days of this notice if Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent of adjustments in Contract Price or Contract Times resulting from these changes. 7.09 Safety and Protection A. Contractor is solely responsible for initiating,maintaining,and supervising safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. This responsibility does not relieve Subcontractors of their responsibility for the safety of persons or property in the performance of their work, nor for compliance with applicable safety Laws and Regulations. B. Take necessary precautions for the safety of persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work, and provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to: 1. Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated in the Work, whether stored on or off Site; and 2. Other property at or adjacent to the Site, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, other work in progress, utilities, and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction. C. Comply with applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety and protection of persons or property. Erect and maintain necessary safeguards for safety and protection. Notify Owner; the owners of adjacent property, Underground Facilities, and other utilities; and other contractors and utility owners performing work at or adjacent to the Site when prosecution of the Work may affect them. Cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement of their property or work in progress. 1. Comply with requirements of Underground Facility Damage Prevention and Safety Act, Texas Utilities Code Chapter 251. 2. Comply with all applicable safety rules and regulations of the Federal Occupational Health and Safety Act of 1970 and subsequent amendments (OSHA). D. Remedy damage, injury, or loss to property referred to in Paragraph 7.09.B caused by Contractor's Team. Pay remediation costs unless the damage or loss is: 1. Attributable to the fault of the Contract Documents; 2. Attributable to acts or omissions of OPT; or 3. Not attributable to the actions or failure to act of the Contractor's Team. E. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and protection of persons or the Work or property at or adjacent to the Site continues until Work is completed and resumes whenever Contractor's Team returns to the Site to fulfill warranty or correction obligations or to conduct other tasks. General Conditions 00 72 00-42 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 F. Comply with the applicable requirements of the Owner's safety program if required to do so in the Supplementary Conditions. A copy of the Owner's safety program will be provided in the Bidding Documents. 7.10 Safety Representative A. Provide a qualified and experienced safety representative at the Site whose duties and responsibilities are the prevention of accidents and maintaining and supervising safety programs. 7.11 Hazard Communication Programs A. Coordinate the exchange of material safety data sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available or exchanged between or among employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or Regulations. 7.12 Emergencies A. Act to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss in emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at or adjacent to the Site. Notify OAR immediately if Contractor believes that significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused or are required as a result of this need to act. A Modification is to be issued by OAR if OPT determines that the incident giving rise to the emergency action was not the responsibility of the Contractor and that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to this emergency. 7.13 Contractor's General Warranty and Guarantee A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner that Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents and is not Defective. Owner is entitled to rely on Contractor's warranty and guarantee. Assume and bear responsibility for costs and time delays associated with variations from the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. This Contractor's warranty and guarantee excludes defects or damage caused by improper maintenance or operation, abuse, or modification by OPT; or normal wear and tear under normal usage. C. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete Work in accordance with the Contract Documents is absolute. None of the following constitute an acceptance of Defective Work or a release of Contractor's obligation to perform Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: 1. Observations by OPT; 2. Recommendation by OAR to pay or payment by Owner of progress or final payments; 3. The issuance of a Certificate of Substantial Completion; 4. Use or occupancy of part of the Work by Owner; 5. Review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample; 6. Inspections,tests, or approvals by others; or General Conditions 00 72 00-43 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 7. Correction of Defective Work by Owner. D. The Contract Documents may require the Contractor to accept the assignment of a contract between the Owner and a contractor or supplier. The specific warranties, guarantees, and correction obligations contained in an assigned contract govern with respect to Contractor's performance obligations to Owner for the Work described in an assigned contract. 7.14 INDEMNIFICATION A. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the Owner from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorney's fees or dispute resolution costs, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work and/or failure to comply with the terms and conditions of the contract, violations of Laws or Regulations, or bodily injury, death or destruction of tangible property caused by the acts, omissions or negligence of the Contractor's Team, regardless of whether such claim, damage, loss or expense is alleged to be caused in part by an Owner hereunder, subject to the Owner's defenses and liability limits under the Texas Tort Claims Act. However, nothing herein shall be construed to require Contractor to indemnify an Owner against a claim, loss, damage or expense caused by the sole negligence of an Owner. B. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the Owner from and against Indemnified Costs, arising out of or relating to: (i) the failure to control, contain, or remove a Constituent of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor's Team or a Hazardous Environmental Condition created by Contractor's Team, (ii) Contractor's Team's action or inaction related to damages, delays, disruptions or interference with the work of Owner's employees, other contractors, or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site, or (iii) the correction of Defective Work. Nothing in this paragraph obligates the Contractor to indemnify the Owner from the consequences of the Owner's sole negligence. c. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the Owner from and against Indemnified Costs resulting from infringement on patent rights or copyrights by Contractor's Team. General Conditions 00 72 00-44 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 D. The indemnification obligations of this Paragraph 7.14 are not limited by the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for members of the Contractor's Team or other individuals or entities under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts in claims against Owner by an employee or the survivor or personal representative of employee of Contractor's Team. The indemnification obligations of this Paragraph 7.14 shall not be deemed to be released,waived or modified in any respect by reason of any surety or insurance provided by Contractor. E. The indemnification obligations of this Paragraph 7.14 do not extend to the liability of Designer arising out of the preparation of the Contract Documents or giving directions or instructions, or failing to give them, to the extent they are obligated to do so if that is the primary cause of the injury or damage. F. Notify the other party within 10 days if Owner or Contractor receives notice of any claim or circumstances that could give rise to an indemnified loss. The notice must include the following: 1. A description of the indemnification event in reasonable detail; 2. The basis on which indemnification may be due; and 3. The anticipated amount of the indemnified loss. This notice does not stop or prevent Owner from later asserting a different basis for indemnification or a different amount of indemnified loss than that indicated in the initial notice. Owner does not waive any rights to indemnification except to the extent that Contractor is prejudiced, suffers loss, or incurs expense because of the delay if Owner does not provide this notice within the 10-day period. G. Defense of Indemnification Claims: 1. Assume the defense of the claim with counsel chosen by the Contractor and pay related costs, unless Owner decides otherwise. Contractor's counsel must be acceptable to Owner. Control the defense and any negotiations to settle the claim. Advise Owner as to its defense of the claim within 10 days after being notified of the indemnification request. Owner may assume and control the defense if Contractor does not assume the defense. Pay all defense expenses of the Owner as an indemnified loss. 2. Owner may retain separate counsel to participate in, but not control, the defense and any settlement negotiations if Contractor defends the claim. Contractor may not settle the claim without the consent or agreement of Owner. Contractor may settle the claim with Owner's consent and agreement unless it: a. Would result in injunctive relief or other equitable remedies or otherwise require Owner to comply with restrictions or limitations that adversely affect Owner; b. Would require Owner to pay amounts that Contractor does not fund in full; or c. Would not result in Owner's full and complete release from all liability to the plaintiffs or claimants who are parties to or otherwise bound by the settlement. 7.15 Delegation of Professional Design Services A. Contractor is not required to provide professional design services unless these services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless these General Conditions 00 72 00-45 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 services are required to carry out Contractor's responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures. Contractor is not required to provide professional services in violation of applicable Laws and Regulations. B. The Contract Documents specify performance and design criteria related to systems, materials or equipment if professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials, or equipment are specifically required of Contractor. These services or certifications must be provided by the licensed Texas Professional Engineer or Registered Architect who prepares, signs, and seals drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings, and other documents. C. OPT is entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy, and completeness of the services, certifications, or approvals performed by Contractor's design professionals, provided OPT has specified to Contractor the performance and design criteria that these services must satisfy. D. Pursuant to this Paragraph 7.15, Designer's review and approval of design calculations and design drawings is only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with the performance and design criteria given and the design concepts expressed in the Contract Documents. Designer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and other documents is only for the purpose stated in the Contract Documents. E. Contractor is not responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria specified by OPT. Advise OPT if the performance or design criteria are known or considered likely to be inadequate or otherwise deficient. ARTICLE 8—OTHER WORK AT THE SITE 8.01 Other Work A. Owner may arrange for other work at or adjacent to the Site which is not part of the Contractor's Work. This other work may be performed by Owner's employees or through other contractors. Utility owners may perform work on their utilities and facilities at or adjacent to the Site. Include costs associated with coordinating with entities performing other work or associated with connecting to this other work in the Contract Price if this other work is shown in the Contract Documents. B. OPT is to notify Contractor of other work prior to starting the work and provide any knowledge they have regarding the start of utility work at or adjacent to the Site to Contractor. C. Provide other contractors: 1. Proper and safe access to the Site; 2. Reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment; and 3. Reasonable opportunity to execute their work. D. Provide cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work required to properly connect or integrate with other work. Do not endanger the work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering the work of others without the consent of OAR and the others whose work will be affected. General Conditions 00 72 00-46 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Inspect the work of others and immediately notify OAR if the proper execution of part of Contractor's Work depends upon work performed by others and this work has not been performed or is unsuitable for the proper execution of Contractor's Work. Contractor's failure to notify the OAR constitutes an acceptance of this other work as acceptable for integration with Contractor's Work. This acceptance does not apply to latent defects or deficiencies in the work of others. F. Take adequate measures to prevent damages, delays, disruptions, or interference with the work of Owner, other contractors, or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site. 8.02 Coordination A. Owner has sole authority and responsibility for coordination of this other work unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. The Owner is to identify the entity with authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities of the various contractors, the limitations of their authority, and the work to be coordinated prior to the start of other work at or adjacent to the Site. 8.03 Legal Relationships A. Contractor may be entitled to a change in Contract Price or Contract Times if, while performing other work at or adjacent to the Site for Owner, the OPT or other contractor retained by the City: 1. Damages the Work or property of Contractor's Team; 2. Delays, disrupts, or interferes with the execution of the Work; or 3. Increases the scope or cost of performing the Work through their actions or inaction. B. Notify the OAR immediately of the event leading to a potential Change Proposal so corrective action can be taken. Submit the Change Proposal within 30 days of the event if corrective action has not adequately mitigated the impact of the actions or inactions of others. Information regarding this other work in the Contract Documents is used to determine if the Contractor is entitled to a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. Changes in Contract Price require that Contractor assign rights against the other contractor to Owner with respect to the damage, delay, disruption, or interference that is the subject of the adjustment. Changes in Contract Times require that the time extension is essential to Contractor's ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times. C. Take prompt corrective action if Contractor's Team damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of Owner's employees, other contractors, or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site or agree to compensate other contractors or utility owners for correcting the damage. Promptly attempt to settle claims with other contractors or utility owners if Contractor damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of other contractors or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site. D. Owner may impose a set-off against payments due to Contractor and assign the Owner's contractual rights against Contractor with respect to the breach of the obligations described in this Paragraph 8.03 to other contractors if damages, delays, disruptions, or interference occur. General Conditions 00 72 00-47 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to damages, delays,disruptions,and interference with other work at the Site are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. ARTICLE 9—OWNER'S AND OPT'S RESPONSIBILITIES 9.01 Communications to Contractor A. OPT issues communications to Contractor through OAR except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 9.02 Replacement of Owner's Project Team Members A. Owner may replace members of the OPT at its discretion. 9.03 Furnish Data A. OPT is to furnish the data required of OPT under the Contract Documents. 9.04 Pay When Due A. Owner is to make payments to Contractor when due as described in Article 17. 9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests A. Owner's duties with respect to providing lands and easements are described in Paragraph 5.01. OPT will make copies of reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site available to Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 5.03. 9.06 Insurance A. Owner's responsibilities with respect to purchasing and maintaining insurance are described in Article 6. 9.07 Modifications A. Owner's responsibilities with respect to Modifications are described in Article 11. 9.08 Inspections,Tests, and Approvals A. OPT's responsibility with respect to certain inspections,tests, and approvals are described in Paragraph 16.02. 9.09 Limitations on OPT's Responsibilities A. The OPT does not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, and is not responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or related safety precautions and programs, or for failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. OPT is not responsible for Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00-48 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition A. OPT's responsibility for undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Conditions is described in Paragraph 5.06. 9.11 Compliance with Safety Program A. Contractor is to inform the OPT of its safety programs and OPT is to comply with the specific applicable requirements of this program. 9.12 Plans and Specifications A. Owner does not warrant the plans and specification. ARTICLE 10—OAR'S AND DESIGNER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 10.01 Owner's Representative A. OAR is Owner's representative. The duties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of OAR as Owner's representative are described in the Contract Documents. 10.02 Visits to Site A. Designer is to make periodic visits to the Site to observe the progress and quality of the Work. Designer is to determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents based on observations made during these visits. Designer is not required to make exhaustive or continuous inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. Designer is to inform the OPT of issues or concerns and OAR is to work with Contractor to address these issues or concerns. Designer's visits and observations are subject to the limitations on Designer's authority and responsibility described in Paragraphs 9.09 and 10.07. B. OAR is to observe the Work to check the quality and quantity of Work, implement Owner's quality assurance program, and administer the Contract as Owner's representative as described in the Contract Documents. OAR's visits and observations are subject to the limitations on OAR's authority and responsibility described in Paragraphs 9.09 and 10.07. 10.03 Resident Project Representatives A. Resident Project Representatives assist OAR in observing the progress and quality of the Work at the Site. The limitations on Resident Project Representatives' authority and responsibility are described in Paragraphs 9.09 and 10.07. 10.04 Rejecting Defective Work A. OPT has the authority to reject Work in accordance with Article 16. OAR is to issue a Defective Work Notice to Contractor and document when Defective Work has been corrected or accepted in accordance with Article 16. General Conditions 00 72 00-49 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 10.05 Shop Drawings, Modifications and Payments A. Designer's authority related to Shop Drawings and Samples are described in the Contract Documents. B. Designer's authority related to design calculations and design drawings submitted in response to a delegation of professional design services are described in Paragraph 7.15. C. OAR and Designer's authority related to Modifications is described in Article 11. D. OAR's authority related to Applications for Payment is described in Articles 15 and 17. 10.06 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work A. OAR is to render decisions regarding non-technical or contractual / administrative requirements of the Contract Documents and will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. B. Designer is to render decisions regarding the conformance of the Work to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Designer will render a decision to either correct the Defective Work or accept the Work under the provisions of Paragraph 16.04 if Work does not conform to the Contract Documents. OAR will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. C. Contractor may appeal Designer's decision by submitting a Change Proposal if Contractor does not agree with the Designer's decision. 10.07 Limitations on OAR's and Designer's Authority and Responsibilities A. OPT is not responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor's Team. No actions or failure to act, or decisions made in good faith to exercise or not exercise the authority or responsibility available under the Contract Documents creates a duty in contract, tort, or otherwise of the OPT to the Contractor or members of the Contractor's Team. ARTICLE 11—AMENDING THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS;CHANGES IN THE WORK 11.01 Amending and Supplementing the Contract Documents A. The Contract Documents may be modified by a Contract Amendment, Change Order, Work Change Directive, or Field Order. 1. Contract Amendment: Owner and Contractor may modify the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents without the recommendation of the Designer using a Contract Amendment. A Contract Amendment may be used for: a. Changes that do not involve: 1) The performance or acceptability of the Work; 2) The design as described in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise; or 3) Other engineering, architectural or technical matters. b. Authorizing new phases of the Work and establishing the Contract Price, Contract Times, or terms and conditions of the Contract for the new phase of Work when using phased construction or purchasing Goods and Special Services to be incorporated into the Project. General Conditions 00 72 00-50 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 2. Change Order: All changes to the Contract Documents that include a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times for previously authorized Work, or changes to the Work requiring Designer's approval must be made by a Change Order. A Change Order may also be used to establish modifications of the Contract Documents that do not affect the Contract Price or Contract Times. 3. Work Change Directive: A Work Change Directive does not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times, but is evidence that the parties expect that the modifications ordered or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations on the Contract Price and Contract Times. If negotiations under the terms of the Contract Documents governing adjustments, expressly including Paragraphs 11.04 and 11.05 are unsuccessful, Contractor must submit a Change Proposal seeking an adjustment of the Contract Price or the Contract Times no later than 30 days after the completion of the Work set out in the Work Change Directive. 4. Field Order: Designer may require minor changes in the Work that do not change the Contract Price or Contract Times using a Field Order. OAR may issue a Field Order for non-technical, administrative issues. Submit a Change Proposal if Contractor believes that a Field Order justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times before proceeding with the Work described in the Field Order. B. Perform added or revised Work under the applicable provisions of the Contract Documents for the same or similar Work unless different Drawings, Specifications or directions are provided in the Modification. 11.02 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work A. Owner may order additions, deletions,or revisions in the Work at any time as recommended by the Designer to the extent the change: 1. Involves the design as described in the Contract Documents; 2. Involves acceptance of the Work; or 3. Involves other engineering, architectural or technical matters. B. These changes may be authorized by a Modification. Proceed with the Work involved or, in the case of a deletion in the Work, immediately cease construction activities with respect to the deleted Work upon receipt of the Modification. Nothing in this paragraph obligates the Contractor to undertake Work that Contractor reasonably concludes cannot be performed in a manner consistent with Contractor's safety obligations under the Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations. 11.03 Unauthorized Changes in the Work A. Contractor is not entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times with respect to Work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents, except in the case of an emergency as provided in Paragraph 7.12, or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 16.05. General Conditions 00 72 00-51 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. Contractor is responsible for costs and time delays associated with variations from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless the variations are specifically approved by Change Order. 11.04 Change of Contract Price A. The Contract Price for authorized Work can only be changed by a Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Price must comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06. Any Claim for an adjustment of Contract Price must comply with the provisions of Article 13. B. An adjustment in the Contract Price is to be determined as follows: 1. By applying unit prices to the quantities of the items involved, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03, where the Work involved is covered by unit prices in the Contract Documents; 2. By a mutually agreed lump sum where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices in the Contract Documents; or 3. Payment on the basis of the Cost of the Work determined as provided in Paragraph 15.01 plus a Contractor's fee for overhead and profit determined as provided in Paragraph 15.05 when the Work involved is not covered by unit prices in the Contract Documents and the parties do not reach a mutual agreement to a lump sum. C. The original Contract Price may not be increased by more than 25 percent or the limit set out in Texas Local Government Code 252.048 or its successor statute, whichever is greater. Owner may decrease the Work by up to 25 percent of the Contract Price. 11.05 Change of Contract Times A. The Contract Times for authorized Work can only be changed by Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Times must comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times must comply with the provisions of Article 13. B. An adjustment of the Contract Times is subject to the limitations described in Paragraph 4.04. 11.06 Change Proposals A. Submit a Change Proposal in accordance with Article 12 to the OAR to: 1. Request an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times; 2. Appeal an initial decision by OPT concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or relating to the acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents; 3. Contest a set-off against payment due; or 4. Seek other relief under the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00-52 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. Notify the OAR within 3 days if a Change Proposal is to be submitted. Submit each Change Proposal to OAR no later than 30 days after the event initiating the Change Proposal. 11.07 Execution of Change Orders A. Owner and Contractor are to execute Change Orders covering: 1. Changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times, which are agreed to by Owner and Contractor, including undisputed sums or amount of time for Work actually performed in accordance with a Work Change Directive; 2. Changes in Contract Price resulting from Owner set-offs unless the set-off has been successfully challenged by Contractor; 3. Changes in the Work which are: a. Ordered by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 11.02.A, b. Required because Defective Work was accepted under Paragraph 16.04 or Owner's correction of Defective Work under Paragraph 16.07, or c. Agreed to by the Owner and Contractor; and 4. Changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or other changes under Paragraph 11.06 or Article 13. B. Acceptance of a Change Order by Contractor constitutes a full accord and satisfaction for any and all claims and costs of any kind, whether direct or indirect, including but not limited to impact, delay or acceleration damages arising from the subject matter of the Change Order. Each Change Order must be specific and final as to prices and extensions of time, with no reservations or other provisions allowing for future additional money or time as a result of the particular changes identified and fully compensated in the Change Order. The execution of a Change Order by Contractor constitutes conclusive evidence of Contractor's agreement to the ordered changes in the Work. This Contract, as amended, forever releases any claim against Owner for additional time or compensation for matters relating to or arising out of or resulting from the Work included within or affected by the executed Change Order. This release applies to claims related to the cumulative impact of all Change Orders and to any claim related to the effect of a change on unchanged Work. C. All Change Orders require approval by either the City Council or Owner by administrative action. The approval process requires a minimum of 45 days after submission in final form with all supporting data. Receipt of Contractor's submission by Owner constitutes neither acceptance nor approval of a Change Order, nor a warranty that the Change Order will be authorized by City Council or administrative action. The time required for the approval process may not be considered a delay and no extensions to the Contract Times or increase in the Contract Price will be considered or granted as a result of the process. Contractor may proceed with Work if a Work Change Directive is issued. D. If the Contractor refuses to execute a Change Order that is required to be executed under the terms of this Paragraph 11.07, the Change Order is deemed to be in full force as if executed by Contractor. Contractor may file a Claim for payment and/or time, pursuant to Article 13. General Conditions 00 72 00-53 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 11.08 Notice to Surety A. Notify the surety of Modifications affecting the general scope of the Work, changes in the provisions of the Contract Documents,or changes in Contract Price or Contract Times. Adjust the amount of each Bond when Modifications change the Contract Price. ARTICLE 12—CHANGE MANAGEMENT 12.01 Requests for Change Proposal A. Designer will initiate Modifications by issuing a Request for a Change Proposal (RCP). 1. Designer will prepare a description of proposed Modifications. 2. Designer will issue the Request for a Change Proposal form to Contractor. A number will be assigned to the Request for a Change Proposal when issued. 3. Return a Change Proposal in accordance with Paragraph 12.02 to the Designer for evaluation by the OPT. 12.02 Change Proposals A. Submit a Change Proposal (CP) to the Designer for Contractor initiated changes in the Contract Documents or in response to a Request for Change Proposal. A Change Proposal must be submitted to the OAR no later than 30 days after the event initiating the Change Proposal. 1. Use the Change Proposal form provided. 2. Assign a number to the Change Proposal when issued. 3. Include with the Change Proposal: a. A complete description of the proposed Modification if Contractor initiated or proposed changes to the OPT's description of the proposed Modification. b. The reason the Modification is requested, if not in response to a Request for a Change Proposal. c. A detailed breakdown of the cost of the change if the Modification requires a change in Contract Price. The itemized breakdown is to include: 1) List of materials and equipment to be installed; 2) Man hours for classification; 3) Equipment used in construction; 4) Consumable supplies,fuels, and materials; 5) Royalties and patent fees; 6) Bonds and insurance; 7) Overhead and profit; 8) Field office costs; and 9) Other items of cost. General Conditions 00 72 00-54 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 d. Provide the level of detail outlined in the paragraph above for each Subcontractor or Supplier actually performing the Work if Work is to be provided by a Subcontractor or Supplier. Indicate appropriate Contractor mark-ups for Work provided through Subcontractors and Suppliers. Provide the level of detail outline in the paragraph above for self-performed Work. e. Submit Change Proposals that comply with Article 15 for Cost of Work. f. Provide a revised schedule. Show the effect of the change on the Project Schedule and the Contract Times. B. Submit a Change Proposal to the OAR to request a Field Order. C. A Change Proposal is required for all substitutions or deviations from the Contract Documents. D. Request changes to products in accordance with Article 25. 12.03 Designer Will Evaluate Request for Modification A. OAR is to advise OPT regarding the Change Proposal. OPT is to review each Change Proposal and Contractor's supporting data, and within 30 days after receipt of the documents, direct the OAR to either approve or deny the Change Proposal in whole or in part. OAR is to issue a Change Order for an approved Change Proposal. The Contractor may deem the Change Proposal to be denied if OAR does not take action on the Change Proposal within 30 days and start the time for appeal of the denial under Article 13. 1. Change Orders and Contract Amendments will be sent to the Contractor for execution with a copy to the Owner recommending approval. A Work Change Directive may be issued if Work needs to progress before the Change Order or Contract Amendment can be authorized by the Owner. 2. Work Change Directives, Change Orders, and Contract Amendments can only be approved by the Owner. a. Work performed on the Change Proposal prior to receiving a Work Change Directive or approval of the Change Order or Contract Amendment is performed at the Contractor's risk. b. No payment will be made for Work on Change Orders or Contract Amendments until approved by the Owner. B. The Contractor may be informed that the Request for a Change Proposal is not approved and construction is to proceed in accordance with the Contract Documents. 12.04 Substitutions A. The products of the listed Suppliers are to be furnished where Specifications list several manufacturers but do not specifically list "or equal" or "or approved equal" products. Use of any products other than those specifically listed is a substitution. Follow these procedures for a substitution. B. Substitutions are defined as any product that the Contractor proposes to provide for the Project in lieu of the specified product. Submit a Change Proposal per Paragraph 12.02 along with a Shop Drawing as required by Article 25 to request approval of a substitution. General Conditions 00 72 00-55 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. Prove that the product is acceptable as a substitute. It is not the Designer's responsibility to prove the product is not acceptable as a substitute. 1. Indicate on a point by point basis for each specified feature that the product is acceptable to meet the intent of the Contract Documents requirements. 2. Make a direct comparison with the specified Suppliers published data sheets and available information. Provide this printed material with the documents submitted. 3. The decision of the Designer regarding the acceptability of the proposed substitute product is final. D. Provide a written certification that, in making the substitution request,the Contractor: 1. Has determined that the substituted product will perform in substantially the same manner and result in the same ability to meet the specified performance as the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranties and/or bonds for the substituted product as specified or as would be provided by the manufacturer of the specified product. 3. Will assume all responsibility to coordinate any modifications that may be necessary to incorporate the substituted product into the Project and will waive all claims for additional Work which may be necessary to incorporate the substituted product into the Project which may subsequently become apparent. 4. Will maintain the same time schedule as for the specified product. E. Pay for review of substitutions in accordance with Article 25. ARTICLE 13—CLAIMS 13.01 Claims A. Follow the Claims process described in this Article for the following disputes between Owner and Contractor: 1. Seeking an adjustment of Contract Price or Contract Times; 2. Contesting an initial decision by OAR concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents; 3. Appealing OAR's decision regarding a Change Proposal; 4. Seeking resolution of a contractual issue that OAR has declined to address; or 5. Seeking other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. B. Contractor shall be entitled to an extension of Contract Time for delays or disruptions due to unusually severe weather in excess of weather normally experienced at the job site, as determined from climatological data set forth by the National Weather Service and which affects the Project's critical path. Contractor shall bear the entire economic risk of all weather delays and disruptions. Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase in the Contract Price by reason of such delays or disruptions. Upon Contractor reaching Substantial Completion, Owner and Contractor shall look back at the entire duration of the calendar day Project and review the totality of what Contractor claims were unusually severe weather disruptions. If the Project was delayed or disrupted due to unusually severe weather in General Conditions 00 72 00-56 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 excess of weather normally experienced over the entire duration of the Project, Contractor may make a Claim for an extension of the Contract Time for delays or disruptions due to unusually severe weather in excess of weather normally experienced at the job site, as determined from climatological data set forth by the National Weather Service and which affects the Project's critical path. Any time extension granted shall be non-compensatory. 13.02 Claims Process A. Claims must be initiated by written notice. Notice must conspicuously state that it is a notice of a Claim in the subject line or first sentence. Notice must also list the date of first occurrence of the claimed event. B. Except for Claims resulting from unusually severe weather, notice of a Claim by Contractor must be in writing and delivered to the Owner, Designer and the OAR within 14 days after the start of the event giving rise to the Claim. Failure by Contractor to submit written notice of a Claim within 14 days shall constitute a waiver of such Claim. C. Submit the complete Claim with supporting documentation to Owner no later than 60 days after the start of the event giving rise to the Claim (unless Designer allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of such Claim). The Claim must be signed and sworn to by Contractor, certifying that the Claim is made in good faith, that the supporting data is accurate and complete, and that to the best of Contractor's knowledge and belief,the relief requested accurately reflects the full compensation to which Contractor is entitled. Failure by Contractor to submit the Claim within 60 days shall constitute a waiver of such Claim. D. Any Claims by Contractor that are not brought within 90 days following the termination of the Contract are waived and shall be automatically deemed denied. E. Claims by Owner must be submitted by written notice to Contractor. F. The responsibility to substantiate a Claim rests with the entity making the Claim. Claims must contain sufficient detail to allow the other party to fully review the Claim. 1. Claims seeking an adjustment of Contract Price must include the Contractor's job cost report. Provide additional documentation as requested by OAR or Designer. 2. Claims seeking an adjustment of Contract Time must include a Time Impact Analysis and native schedule files in Primavera or MS Project digital format. Provide additional documentation as requested by OAR or Designer. G. Claims by Contractor against Owner and Claims by Owner against Contractor, including those alleging an error or omission by Designer but excluding those arising under Section 7.12,shall be referred initially to Designer for consideration and recommendation. H. Designer will review a Claim by Contractor within 30 days of receipt of the Claim and take one or more of the following actions: 1. Request additional supporting data from the party who made the Claim; 2. Issue a recommendation; 3. Suggest a compromise; or General Conditions 00 72 00-57 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4. Advise the parties that Designer is not able to make a recommendation due to insufficient information or a conflict of interest. I. If the Designer does not take any action, the Claim shall be deemed denied 30 days after receipt of the Claim. J. Following receipt of Designer's initial recommendation regarding a Claim,the Contractor and the Owner shall seek to resolve the Claim through the exchange of information and direct negotiations. If no agreement is reached within 90 days, the Claim shall be deemed denied. The Owner and Contractor may extend the time for resolving the Claim by mutual agreement. Notify OAR of any actions taken on a Claim. K. If the entity receiving a Claim approves the Claim in whole or in part or denies it in whole or in part, this action is final and binding unless the other entity invokes the procedure described in Article 22 for final resolution of disputes by filing a notice of appeal within 30 days after this action. L. If the Owner and Contractor reach a mutual agreement regarding a Claim, the results of the agreement or action on the Claim will be incorporated in a Change Order by the OAR to the extent they affect the Contract Documents, the Contract Price, or the Contract Times. M. Both parties shall continue to perform all obligations under the Agreement during the pendency of any dispute or disagreement relating to this Agreement, unless performance would be impracticable or impossible under the circumstances. N. Any failure of Contractor to comply with any of the foregoing conditions precedent with regard to any such Claim shall constitute a waiver of any entitlement to submit or pursue such Claim. O. Receipt and review of a Claim by City shall not be construed as a waiver of any defenses to the Claim available to the City under the Contract Documents or at law. ARTICLE 14—PREVAILING WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS 14.01 Payment of Prevailing Wage Rates A. Contractor and any Subcontractors employed on this Project shall pay not less than the rates established by the Owner as required by Texas Government Code Chapter 2258. B. Contractor and its Subcontractors are required to pay Davis-Bacon Wage Rates. C. Contractor and its Subcontractors are required to pay laborers and mechanics an overtime rate of not less than one and one-half times the basic rate for all hours worked in excess of forty hours in a given workweek. 14.02 Records A. In accordance with Tex. Gov't Code§2258.024,the Contractor and its Subcontractors, if any, shall keep a record showing: 1. The name and occupation of each worker employed by the Contractor or Subcontractor in the construction of the Work; and 2. The actual per diem wages paid to each worker. General Conditions 00 72 00-58 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. The record shall be open at all reasonable hours to inspection by the officers and agents of the Owner. 14.03 Liability; Penalty; Criminal Offense A. Tex. Gov't Code §2258.003 — Liability: An officer, agent, or employee of the Owner is not liable in a civil action for any act or omission implementing or enforcing Chapter 2258 unless the action was made in bad faith. B. Tex. Gov't Code §2258.023(b)— Penalty: Any Contractor or Subcontractor who violates the requirements of Chapter 2258,shall pay to the Owner,on whose behalf the Contract is made, $60 for each worker employed on each calendar day or part of the day that the worker is paid less than the wage rates stipulated in the Contract. C. Tex. Gov't Code §2258.058—Criminal Offense: 1. An officer, agent, or representative of the Owner commits an offense if the person willfully violates or does not comply with a provision of Chapter 2258. 2. Any Contractor or Subcontractor, or an agent or representative of the Contractor or Subcontractor, commits an offense if the person violates Tex. Gov't Code §2258.024. 3. An offense is punishable by: a. A fine not to exceed $500; b. Confinement in jail for a term not to exceed 6 months; or c. Both a fine and confinement. 14.04 Prevailing Wage Rates A. Use the Prevailing Wage Rates specified in the Supplementary Conditions. ARTICLE 15—COST OF THE WORK;ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK 15.01 Cost of the Work A. The Cost of the Work is the sum of costs described in this Paragraph 15.01, except those excluded in Paragraph 15.01.D, necessary for the proper performance of the Work. The provisions of this Paragraph 15.01 are used for two distinct purposes: 1. To determine Cost of the Work when Cost of the Work is a component of the Contract Price under cost-plus, time-and-materials, or other cost-based terms; or 2. To determine the value of a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set-off, or other adjustment in Contract Price. B. Contractor is entitled only to those additional or incremental costs required because of the change in the Work or because of the event giving rise to the adjustment when the value of the adjustment is determined on the basis of the Cost of the Work. General Conditions 00 72 00-59 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. Costs included in the Cost of the Work may not exceed the prevailing costs in the proximate area of the Site for similar work unless agreed to by the Owner. Cost of the Work includes only the following items: 1. Payroll costs for Contractor's employees performing the Work, including one foreman per crew, and other required and agreed upon personnel for the time they are employed on the Work. Employees are to be paid according to wage rates for job classifications as agreed to by Owner. Where the Cost of the Work is being used under provisions of Paragraph 15.01.A.2, rates paid for this Work are to be the same as paid for Contract Work as established by certified payroll. Payroll costs may include: a. Actual costs paid for salaries and wages; b. Actual cost paid for fringe benefits, which may include: 1) Social security contributions, 2) Unemployment, 3) Excise and payroll taxes, 4) Workers' compensation, 5) Health and retirement benefits, 6) Bonuses, and 7) Paid time off for sick leave,vacations, and holidays; and c. Actual cost of additional compensation paid for performing Work outside of regular working hours, on Sunday or legal holidays, to the extent authorized by Owner. 2. Cost of materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, including transportation and storage costs and required Suppliers'field services. Contractor may retain cash discounts unless Owner provided funds to the Contractor for early payment of these materials and equipment. Cash discounts are to be credited to Owner if the Owner provides funds for early payment. Make provisions for trade discounts, rebates, refunds, and returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment and reduce the Cost of the Work by these amounts. 3. Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors. Obtain competitive bids from Subcontractors acceptable to Owner unless Owner agrees to use Subcontractors proposed by the Contractor. Bids are to be opened in the presence of the OAR and other designated members for the OPT. Provide copies of bids to the OAR to use in determining,with the OPT,which bids are acceptable. The Subcontractor's Cost of the Work and fee are determined in the same manner as Contractor's Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this Paragraph 15.01 if the subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee. 4. Supplemental costs including the following: a. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses of Contractor's employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work; b. Costs of materials, supplies, equipment, machinery, appliances, office, and temporary facilities at the Site including transportation and maintenance costs; General Conditions 00 72 00-60 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 c. Costs of hand tools not owned by the workers consumed in the performance of the Work. Costs of hand tools not owned by the workers which are used but not consumed in the performance of the Work and which remain the property of Contractor, less their market value when Work is completed; d. For Contractor-and Subcontractor-owned machinery,trucks, power tools or other equipment, use the FHWA rental rates found in the Rental Rate Blue Book ("Blue Book") multiplied by the regional adjustment factor and the rate adjustment factor to establish hourly rates. Use the rates in effect for each section of the Blue Book at the time of use. Payment will be made for the actual hours used in the Work. 1) Standby costs will be paid at SO% of the FHWA rental rates found in the Blue Book if Contractor is directed by Owner in writing to standby. Standby costs will not be allowed during periods when the equipment would otherwise have been idle. For a six-day work week, no more than eight hours per a 24-hour day, no more than 48 hours per week and no more than 208 hours per month shall be paid of standby time. Operating costs shall not be charged by Contractor. e. Rental of construction equipment, including the costs of transporting, loading, unloading, assembling, dismantling, and removing construction equipment, whether rented from Contractor or others, in accordance with rental agreements approved by Owner. Costs for rental of equipment will not be paid when the equipment is no longer necessary for the Work. Justify idle time for equipment by demonstrating that it was necessary to keep equipment on Site for related future Work; 1) The hourly rate shall be determined by dividing the actual invoice cost by the actual number of hours the equipment is involved in the Work. Owner reserves the right to limit the hourly rate to comparable Blue Book rates. 2) If Contractor is directed to standby in writing by Owner, standby costs will be paid at the invoice daily rate excluding operating costs, which includes fuel, lubricants, repairs and servicing. f. Applicable sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes related to the Work for which the Owner is not exempt, and which Contractor pays consistent with Laws and Regulations; g. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of Contractor's Team; h. Royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses; i. Cost of additional utilities,fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site; j. Minor expense items directly required by the Work; and k. Premiums for Bonds and insurance required by the Contract Documents. D. The Cost of the Work does not include the following items: 1. Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor's officers, executives, principals of partnerships and sole proprietorships, general managers, safety managers, superintendents, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, clerks, and other personnel employed General Conditions 00 72 00-61 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 by Contractor, whether at the Site or in Contractor's principal or branch office, for general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in Paragraph 15.01.C.1 or specifically covered by Paragraph 15.01.C.4. These administrative costs are covered by the Contractor's fee. 2. Office expenses other than Contractor's office at the Site. 3. Any part of Contractor's capital expenses, including interest on Contractor's capital employed for the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments. 4. Costs due to the actions of Contractor's Team for the correction of Defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment that do not comply with Specifications, and correcting damage to property. 5. Losses, damages, and related expenses caused by damage to the Work or sustained by Contractor in connection with the performance of the Work. Contractor is entitled to recover costs if covered by insurance provided in accordance with Article 6. Such losses may include settlements made with the approval of Owner. Do not include these losses, damages, and expenses in the Cost of the Work when determining Contractor's fee. 6. Any Indemnified Cost paid with regard to Contractor's indemnification of Owner. 7. Other overhead or general expense costs and the costs of items not described in Paragraphs 15.01.C. E. The Contractor's fee for profit and overhead is determined as follows: 1. In accordance with the Agreement when the Work is performed on a cost-plus basis; 2. A mutually acceptable fixed fee; or 3. A fee based on the following percentages of the various portions of the Cost of the Work: a. The Contractor's fee is 15 percent for costs incurred under Paragraphs 15.01.C.1, 15.01.C.2 and 15.01.C.4; b. The Contractor's fee is 5 percent for costs incurred under Paragraph 15.01.C.3; C. Fees are to be determined as follows where one or more tiers of subcontracts are used: 1) The Subcontractor's fee is 15 percent for costs incurred under Paragraphs 15.01.C.1 and 15.01.C.2 forthe Subcontractor that actually performs the Work at whatever tier; 2) The Subcontractor's fee is 5 percent for costs incurred under Paragraph 15.01.C.4 for the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work at whatever tier; and 3) The Contractor and Subcontractors of a tier higher than that of the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work are to be allowed a fee of 5 percent of the fee plus underlying costs incurred by the next lower tier Subcontractor. d. No fee is payable on the basis of costs itemized under Paragraph 15.01.D; General Conditions 00 72 00-62 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 e. Five percent of the net decrease in the cost is to be deducted for changes which result in a net decrease in Contract Price; and 4. The adjustment in Contractor's fee is based on the net change in accordance with Paragraphs 15.05.13.1 through 15.05.13.5, inclusive when both additions and credits are involved in any one change. F. Establish and maintain records in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices and submit these records, including an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting data, in a form and at intervals acceptable to OAR whenever the Cost of the Work is to be determined pursuant to this Paragraph 15.01. 15.02 Allowances A. Include allowances specified in the Contract Documents in the Contract Price and provide Work covered by the allowance as authorized by the Owner through the OAR. B. Contractor agrees that: 1. The cash allowance is used to compensate the Contractor for the cost of furnishing materials and equipment for the Work covered by the allowance item in the Contract Documents. Cost may include applicable taxes. Make provisions for trade discounts, rebates, and refunds and reduce the allowance costs by these amounts. 2. Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation, overhead, profit, and other expenses contemplated for the cash allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances; and 3. Costs for cash allowances and installation costs as described in Paragraphs 15.02.13.1 and 15.02.13.2 above are included in the Contract Price. C. OAR will issue a Change Order to adjust the Contract Price by the difference between the allowance amount and the actual amount paid by Contractor for Work covered by the allowance. The Change Order will be issued at the time costs are incurred by Contractor for Work covered by the allowance and this Work is included on the Application for Payment. 15.03 Unit Price Work A. The initial Contract Price for Unit Price Work is equal to the sum of the unit price line items in the Agreement. Each unit price line item amount is equal to the product of the unit price for each line item times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Contract. B. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparing Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Payments to Contractor for Unit Price Work are to be based on actual quantities measured for Work in place. C. Each unit price is deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. D. OAR is to determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor to be incorporated into each Application for Payment. OAR's decision on actual quantities is final and binding, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03.E. General Conditions 00 72 00-63 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal,or Owner may file a Claim,seeking an adjustment in the Contract Price within 30 days of OAR's decision under Paragraph 15.03.D, if: 1. The total cost of a particular item of Unit Price Work amounts to 20 percent or more of the total Contract Price and the variation in the quantity of that particular item of Unit Price Work performed by the Contractor differs by more than 20 percent from the estimated quantity of an item indicated in the Contract; 2. There is no corresponding adjustment with respect to other items of Work; and 3. Contractor believes it has incurred additional expense as a result of this condition or Owner believes that the quantity variation entitles Owner to an adjustment in the Contract Price. 15.04 Contingencies A. Contingency funds may be included in the Contract Price to pay for Work not defined specifically by the Contract Documents that is essential to the completion of the Project. Contingency funds will be as described in the Contract. B. The contingency funds may be used for costs incurred by the Contractor provided these costs are approved by the Owner. Costs are to be determined and documented in accordance with Paragraph 15.01. The contingency funds are not to be used for the following items: 1. Cost overruns due to changes in material costs after the Contract Price is established, unless specific price escalation provisions are made in the Contract. 2. Rework required to correct Defective Work. 3. Inefficiencies in completing the Work due to the Contractor's selected means, methods, sequences, or procedures of construction. 4. Work Contractor failed to include in the Contract Price. 5. Changes required by changes in Laws and Regulations enacted after the Contract Price is established. 6. Any Work that does not constitute a change in Scope in the Work included in the Contract Price. C. OAR is to issue a Change Order for approved expenditures from contingency funds. When the Change Order is issued, the costs are to be added to the Application for Payment. Contractor is to maintain a tabulation showing the contingency amount, adjustments to the contingency amount, and amounts remaining as the Project progresses. D. Any contingency amounts that are not included in a Change Order are retained by the Owner. A Change Order will be issued to deduct unused contingency amounts from the Contract Price prior to Final Payment. General Conditions 00 72 00-64 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 ARTICLE 16—TESTS AND INSPECTIONS;CORRECTION,REMOVAL,OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 16.01 Access to Work A. Provide safe access to the Site and the Work for the observation, inspection, and testing of the Work in progress. Contractor can require compliance with Contractor's safety procedures and programs as part of providing safe access. 16.02 Tests, Inspections and Approvals A. OPT may retain and pay for the services of an independent inspector, testing laboratory, or other qualified individual or entity to perform inspections. Notify OAR when the Work is ready for required inspections and tests. Provide adequate notice to allow for coordination with entities providing inspection or testing as determined by the OAR. Cooperate with inspection and testing personnel and assist with providing access for required inspections, tests, and handling test specimens or Samples. B. Arrange for and facilitate inspections, tests, and approvals required by Laws or Regulations of governmental entities having jurisdiction that require Work to be inspected, tested, or approved by an employee or other representative of that entity. Pay associated costs and furnish OAR with the required certificates of inspection or approval. C. Arrange, obtain, and pay for inspections and tests required: 1. By the Contract Documents, unless the Contract Documents expressly allocate responsibility for a specific inspection or test to OPT; 2. To attain OPT's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work; 3. By manufacturers of equipment furnished under the Contract Documents; 4. For testing, adjusting, and balancing of mechanical, electrical, and other equipment to be incorporated into the Work; 5. For acceptance of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work; 6. For re-inspecting or retesting Defective Work, including any associated costs incurred by the testing laboratory for cancelled tests or standby time; and 7. For retesting due to failed tests. D. Provide independent inspectors, testing laboratories, or other qualified individuals or entities acceptable to OPT to provide these inspections and tests. 16.03 Defective Work A. It is Contractor's obligation to ensure that the Work is not Defective. B. OPT has the authority to determine whether Work is Defective and to reject Defective Work. C. OAR is to notify Contractor of Defective Work of which OPT has actual knowledge. D. Promptly correct Defective Work. E. Take no action that would void or otherwise impair Owner's special warranties or guarantees when correcting Defective Work. General Conditions 00 72 00-65 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 F. Pay claims, costs, losses,and damages arising out of or relating to Defective Work, including: 1. Costs for correction, removal, and replacement of Defective Work; 2. Cost of the inspection and testing related to correction of Defective Work; 3. Fines levied against Owner by governmental authorities because of Defective Work; and 4. Costs of repair or replacement of work of others resulting from Defective Work. 16.04 Acceptance of Defective Work A. Owner may elect to accept Defective Work instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of Defective Work provided: 1. This acceptance occurs prior to final payment; 2. Designer confirms that the Defective Work is in general accordance with the design intent and applicable engineering or architectural principles; and 3. Designer confirms that acceptance of the Defective Work does not endanger public health or safety. B. Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 17 for costs associated with OPT's evaluation of Defective Work to determine if it can be accepted and to determine the diminished value of the Work. Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 17 if the parties are unable to agree as to the decrease in the Contract Price to compensate Owner for the diminished value of Defective Work accepted. OAR is to issue a Modification for acceptance of the Defective Work prior to final payment. Pay an appropriate amount to Owner if the acceptance of Defective Work occurs after final payment. 16.05 Uncovering Work A. OPT has the authority to require inspection or testing of the Work, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. B. Work that is covered prior to approval of the OAR must be uncovered for OPT's observation if requested by OAR. Pay for uncovering Work and its subsequent restoration unless Contractor has given OAR timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the Work and OAR fails to act with reasonable promptness in response to this notice. C. Provide necessary labor, material, and equipment and uncover, expose, or otherwise make available the portion of the Work suspected of being Defective for observation, inspection, or testing if OPT considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Designer or inspected or tested by others as directed by the OAR. 1. Pay for claims, costs, losses, and damages associated with uncovering, exposing, observing, inspecting, and testing if it is found that the uncovered Work is Defective. Pay costs for correction of Defective Work. Pay for reconstruction, repair, or replacement of work of others resulting from the Defective Work if it is found that the uncovered Work is Defective. General Conditions 00 72 00-66 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 16.06 Owner May Stop the Work A. Owner may order Contractor to stop the Work if: 1. The Work is Defective; 2. Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment; or 3. Contractor performs Work that may fail to conform to the Contract Documents when completed. This stop work order is to remain in effect until the reason for the stop work order has been eliminated. Owner's right to stop the Work does not create a duty to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor's Team or surety. 16.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work A. Owner may remedy deficiencies in the Work after 7 days' notice to Contractor if: 1. Contractor fails to correct Defective Work, or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by OPT; 2. Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents; or 3. Contractor fails to comply with other provisions of the Contract Documents. B. Owner may: 1. Exclude Contractor from the Site; 2. Take possession of the Work and suspend Contractor's services related to the Work; and 3. Incorporate stored materials and equipment in the Work. C. Allow OPT access to the Site and off-Site storage areas to enable Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 16.07. D. All claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 16.07 are to be charged against Contractor as a set-off against payments due under Article 17. These claims, costs, losses, and damages include costs of repair and the cost of replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of Contractor's Defective Work. E. Contractor is not allowed an extension of the Contract Times because of delays in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise of the Owner's rights and remedies under this Paragraph 16.07. ARTICLE 17—PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR;SET-OFFS;COMPLETION; CORRECTION PERIOD 17.01 Progress Payments A. Progress payment requests are to be submitted to the OAR on the Application for Payment form provided by the OAR following procedures in this Article 17. General Conditions 00 72 00-67 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 1. Progress payments for lump sum Work are to be paid on the basis of the earned value to date at the amounts shown in the Schedule of Values submitted as required by Paragraph 17.03. Final payment will be for the total lump sum amount. 2. Progress payments for Unit Price Work are based on the number of units completed as determined under the provisions of Paragraph 15.03. 3. Progress payments for Work to be paid on the basis of the Cost of the Work per Paragraphs 15.01, 15.02 and 15.04 are to be paid for Work completed by Contractor during the pay period. B. Reduction in Payment by Owner: 1. Owner is entitled to impose a set-off against payment based on the following: a. Claims made against Owner or costs, losses,or damages incurred by Owner related to: 1) Contractor's conduct in the performance of the Work, including, but not limited to, workplace injuries, non-compliance with Laws and Regulations, or patent infringement; or 2) Contractor's failure to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid damage, delay, disruption, and interference with other work at or adjacent to the Site, including but not limited to, workplace injuries, property damage, and non-compliance with Laws and Regulations. b. Owner has been required to remove or remediate a Hazardous Environmental Condition for which Contractor is responsible; c. Work is Defective, or completed Work has been damaged by Contractor's Team, requiring correction or replacement; d. Owner has been required to correct Defective Work or complete Work in accordance with Paragraph 16.07; e. The Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders; f. Events have occurred that would constitute a default by Contractor justifying a termination for cause; g. Liquidated damages have accrued as a result of Contractor's failure to achieve Milestones, Substantial Completion, or completion of the Work; h. Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of these Liens; i. Failure to submit up-to-date record documents as required by the Contract Documents; j. Failure to submit monthly Progress Schedule updates or revised schedules as requested by the OAR; k. Failure to provide Project photographs required by the Contract Documents; I. Failure to provide Certified Payroll required by the Contract Documents; General Conditions 00 72 00-68 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 m. Compensation for OPT for overtime charges of OAR or RPR, third review of documents, review of substitutions, re-inspection fees, inspections or designs related to correction of Defective Work, or other services identified as requiring payment by the Contractor; n. Costs for tests performed by the Owner to verify that Work previously tested and found to be Defective has been corrected; o. OPT has actual knowledge of the occurrence of events that would constitute a default by Contractor and therefore justify termination for cause under the Contract Documents with associated cost impacts; p. Other items entitling Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended; or q. Payment would result in an over-payment of the Contract Price. 2. Compensation for services of OPT staff is to be at the rates established by negotiations between OPT and Contractor. 3. OAR is to notify Contractor stating the amount and the reasons for an imposed set-off. The Owner is to pay the Contractor amounts remaining after deduction of the set-off. Owner is to pay the set-off amount agreed to by Owner and Contractor if Contractor remedies the reasons for the set-off. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal contesting the set-off. C. Delayed Payments: 1. No money shall be paid by Owner upon any claim, debt, demand, or account whatsoever, to any person, firm, or corporation who is in arrears to Owner for taxes; and Owner shall be entitled to counterclaim and automatically offset against any such debt, claim,demand, or account in the amount of taxes so in arrears and no assignment or transfer of such debt, claim, demand, or account after said taxes are due, shall affect the right of Owner to offset said taxes, and associated penalties and interest if applicable, against the same. 2. No payment will be made for Work authorized by a Work Change Directive until the Work Change Directive is incorporated into a Change Order. Payment can be included in an Application for payment when the Change Order is approved. D. The Owner is to pay the amount of payment recommended by the OAR within 30 days after receipt of the Application for Payment and accompanying documentation from the OAR. 17.02 Application for Payment A. Submit Applications for Payment for completed Work and for materials and equipment in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions, the Agreement, and this Article 17. The Contract Price is to include costs for: 1. Providing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents; 2. Installing Owner furnished equipment and materials; 3. Providing Work for Alternates and Allowances; 4. Commissioning, start-up,training and initial maintenance and operation; 5. Acceptance testing in manufacturer's facilities or on Site; General Conditions 00 72 00-69 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 6. All home office overhead costs and expenses, including profit made directly or indirectly for the Project; 7. Project management, Contract administration, field office, and field operations staff, including supervision, clerical support, and technology system support; 8. Professional services including design fees, legal fees, and other professional services; 9. Bonds and insurance; 10. Permits, licenses, patent fees, and royalties; 11. Taxes; 12. Providing all documents and Samples required by the Contract Documents; 13. Facilities and equipment at the Site including: a. Field offices, office furnishings, and all related office supplies, software, and equipment, b. Storage facilities for Contractor's use, storage facilities for stored materials and equipment, including spare parts storage, c. Shops, physical plant, construction equipment, small tools, vehicles, technology and telecommunications equipment, d. Safety equipment and facilities to provide safe access and working conditions for workers and for others working at the Site, e. Temporary facilities for power and communications, f. Potable water and sanitation facilities, and g. Mobilization and demobilization for all of these facilities and equipment; 14. Products, materials, and equipment stored at the Site or other suitable location; 15. Products, materials, and equipment permanently incorporated into the Project; 16. Temporary facilities for managing water, including facilities for pumping, storage, and treatment as required for construction and protection of the environment; 17. Temporary facilities for managing environment conditions and Constituents of Concern; 18. Temporary facilities such as sheeting, shoring, bracing, formwork, embankments, storage facilities, working areas, and other facilities required for construction of the Project; 19. Temporary and permanent facilities for protection of all overhead, surface, or underground structures or features; 20. Temporary and permanent facilities for removal, relocation, or replacement of any overhead, surface, or underground structures or features; 21. Products, materials, and equipment consumed during the construction of the Project; 22. Contractor labor and supervision to complete the Project, including that provided through Subcontractors or Suppliers; General Conditions 00 72 00-70 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 23. Correcting Defective Work during the Contract Times, during the Correction Period, or as required to meet any warranty provision of the Contract Documents; 24. Risk associated with weather and environmental conditions, start-up, and initial operation of facilities including equipment, processes, and systems; 25. Contractor's safety programs, including management, administration, and training; 26. Maintenance of facilities, including equipment, processes, and systems until operation is transferred to Owner; 27. Providing warranties, extended or special warranties, or extended service agreements; 28. Cleanup and disposal of any and all surplus materials; and 29. Demobilization of all physical,temporary facilities not incorporated into the Project. B. Include the cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the Contract Price. C. Provide written approval of the surety company providing Bonds for the Schedule of Values, Application for Payment form, and method of payment prior to submitting the first Application for Payment. Payment will not be made without this approval. D. OAR may withhold processing Applications for Payment if any of the following processes or documentation are not up to date: 1. Record Documents per Article 20. 2. Progress Schedule per Article 27. 3. Project photographs per Article 28. 4. Documentation required to comply with Owner's Minority / MBE / DBE Participation Policy. 5. Documentation required to substantiate any approved Project deviation, including overruns of Designer's estimated quantity. 6. Documentation required by funding agency, if applicable. 17.03 Schedule of Values A. Submit a detailed Schedule of Values for the Work at least 10 days prior to submitting the first Application for Payment. B. Submit the Schedule of Values in the form attached to the Application for Payment - Tabulation of Earned Value of Original Contract Performed. C. Do not submit an Application for Payment until the Schedule of Values has been approved by the OAR. D. If unit prices are included in the Contract, use each unit price line item in the Contract as a unit price line item in the Schedule of Values. E. Divide lump sum line items, including Subcontractor and Supplier amounts in the Schedule of Values into smaller components to allow more accurate determination of the earned value for each item. General Conditions 00 72 00-71 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 1. Provide adequate detail to allow a more accurate determination of the earned value expressed as a percentage of Work completed for each item. 2. Line items may not exceed $50,000.00, unless they are for products, materials or equipment permanently incorporated into the Project that cannot be subdivided into units or subassemblies. 3. Lump sum items may be divided into an estimated number of units to determine earned value. a. The estimated number of units times the cost per unit must equal the lump sum amount for that line item. b. Contractor will receive payment for the lump sum for the line item, regardless of the number of units installed, unless an adjustment is made by Change Order. 4. Include Contractor's overhead and profit in each line item in proportion to the value of the line item to the Contract Price. 5. Include the cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the Contract Price for each item. 6. These line items may be used to establish the value of Work to be added or deleted from the Project. 7. The sum of all values listed in the schedule must equal the total Contract Price. F. Subdivide each line item in the Schedule of Values into two payment components. The first component is the direct cost for products, materials, and equipment permanently incorporated into the Project. The second component is all other costs associated with the item in the Contract. The sum of the two components must equal the value of the line item in the Schedule of Values. G. Where a percentage of the line value is allowed for a specified stage of completion,show the value for each stage of completion as a component of that line item cost. 17.04 Schedule of Anticipated Payments and Earned Value A. Submit a schedule of the anticipated Application for Payments showing the application numbers, submission dates, and the anticipated amount to be requested. Incorporate retainage into the development of this schedule of anticipated payments. B. Submit a tabulation of the anticipated Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials to create a graphic (curve) representation of the anticipated progress on the Project each month. Adjust this table and curve to incorporate Modifications. Use this curve to compare actual progress on the Project each month by comparing the anticipated cumulative Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials to the actual Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials each month. Use the comparison of values to determine performance on budget and schedule. C. Update the Schedule of Payments as necessary to provide a reasonably accurate indication of the funds required to make payments each month to the Contractor for Work performed. General Conditions 00 72 00-72 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 17.05 Basis for Payments A. Lump Sum Contracts: 1. Payment will be made for the earned value of Work completed during the payment period expressed as a percentage of Work completed for each line item during the payment period per the Contract Documents. 2. Payment amount is the value of Work completed per the Contract Documents multiplied by the percentage of Work completed. 3. Payment for lump sum items divided into an estimated number of units to determine earned value per Paragraph 17.03 will be made for the measured number of units. 4. Payment for stored materials and equipment will be made per Paragraph 17.06. B. Unit Price Contracts: 1. Payment will be made for the actual quantity of Work completed during the payment period and for materials and equipment stored during the payment period per the Contract Documents. a. Payment amount is the Work quantity measured per the Contract Documents multiplied by the unit prices for that line item in the Contract. b. Payment for stored materials and equipment will be made per Paragraph 17.06. 2. Measure the Work described in the Contract for payment. Payment will be made only for the actual measured and/or computed length, area, solid contents, number, and weight, unless other provisions are made in the Contract Documents. Payment on a unit price basis will not be made for Work outside finished dimensions shown in the Contract Documents. Include cost for waste, overages, and tolerances in the unit price for that line item. 17.06 Payment for Stored Materials and Equipment A. Store materials and equipment properly at the Site. 1. Payment will be made for the invoice amount less the specified retainage. 2. Payment for materials and equipment shown in the Application for Payment and attachments will be made for the invoice amount,up to the value shown in the Schedule of Values for that line item. Costs for material and equipment in excess of the value shown in the Schedule of Values may not be added to other line items. 3. Payment will be made in full for the value shown in the line item for products and materials if invoices for materials and equipment are less than the amount shown in the line item and it can be demonstrated that no additional materials or equipment are required to complete Work described in that item. 4. Provide invoices at the time materials are included on the Application for Payment and attachments. Include invoice numbers so that a comparison can be made between invoices and amounts included on the Application for Payment and attachments. B. Provide a bill of sale, invoice, or other documentation warranting that Owner has received the materials and equipment free and clear of Liens. Provide documentation of payment for General Conditions 00 72 00-73 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 materials and equipment with the next Application for Payment. Adjust payment to the amount actually paid if this differs from the invoice amount. Remove items from the tabulation of materials and equipment if this documentation is not provided. Payment will not be made for material and equipment without documentation of payment. C. Contractors can be paid for non-perishable materials on hand stored at the site, provided that invoices are furnished to the City for verification of the material value, and that Contractor provides documents, satisfactory to the City,that show that the material supplier has been paid for the materials delivered to the work site. D. Provide evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance or other arrangements to protect Owner's interest. E. The Work covered by progress payments becomes the property of the Owner at the time of payment. The Contractor's obligations with regard to proper care and maintenance, insurance, and other requirements are not changed by this transfer of ownership until accepted in accordance with the General Conditions. F. Payment for materials and equipment does not constitute acceptance of the product. 17.07 Retainage and Set-Offs A. Retainage will be withheld from each Application for Payment per the Agreement. Retainage will be released per the General Conditions. B. Reduce payments for set-offs per the General Conditions. Include the appropriate attachment to the Application for Payment. 17.08 Procedures for Submitting an Application for Payment A. Submit a draft Application for Payment to the OAR each month at least 20 days before the date established in the Contract for Owner to make progress payments. Do not submit Applications for Payment more often than monthly. Review the draft Application for Payment with the OAR to determine concurrence with: 1. The earned value for each lump sum item including the value of properly stored and documented materials and equipment for each item in the original Contract. 2. The quantity of Work completed for each unit price item. 3. Set-offs included in the Application for Payment. 4. Values requested for materials and equipment consistent with invoices for materials and equipment. B. Submit Applications for Payment monthly through the OAR after agreement has been reached on the draft Application for Payment. 1. Number each application sequentially and include the dates for the application period. 2. Show the total amounts for earned value of original Contract performed, earned value for Work on approved Contract Amendments and Change Orders, retainage, and set- offs. Show total amounts that correspond to totals indicated on the attached tabulation for each. General Conditions 00 72 00-74 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 3. Include Attachment A to show the earned value on each line item in the Schedule of Values for Work shown in the original Contract. 4. Include Attachment B to show the earned value on line items for approved Change Orders. Add items to Attachment B as Change Orders are approved. Change Orders must be approved before payment can be made on Change Order items. 5. Include Attachment C to document set-offs required per the Contract Documents. Show each set-off as it is applied. Show a corresponding line item to reduce the set-off amount if a payment held by a set-off is released for payment. 6. Include Attachment D to allow tracking of invoices used to support amounts requested as materials in Attachments A and B. Enter materials to show the amount of the invoice assigned to each item in Attachment A or B if an invoice includes materials used on several line items. 7. Complete the certification stating that all Work, including materials and equipment, covered by this Application for Payment have been completed or delivered and stored in accordance with the Contract Documents,that all amounts have been paid for Work, materials, and equipment for which previous payments have been made by the Owner, and that the current payment amount shown in this Application for Payment is now due. C. Submit attachments in Portable Document Format (PDF): 1. Generate attachments to the Application for Payment using the Excel spreadsheet provided. 2. Submit PDF documents with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. 17.09 Responsibility of Owner's Authorized Representative A. OAR will review draft Application for Payment with Contractor to reach an agreement on the values that will be recommended for payment by the OAR. B. OAR will review Application for Payment submitted by Contractor to determine that the Application for Payment has been properly submitted and is in accordance with the agreed to draft Application for Payment. C. OAR is to either recommend payment of the Application for Payment to Owner or notify the Contractor of the OPT's reasons for not recommending payment. Contractor may make necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for Payment if it is not recommended within 10 days after receipt of the notice. OAR will review resubmitted Application for Payment and reject or recommend payment of the Application for Payment to Owner as appropriate. D. OAR's recommendation of the Application for Payment constitutes a representation by OPT that based on their experience and the information available: 1. The Work has progressed to the point indicated; 2. The quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents; and 3. Requirements prerequisite to payment have been met. General Conditions 00 72 00-75 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. This representation is subject to: 1. Further evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole; 2. The results of subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents; or 3. Any other qualifications stated in the recommendation. F. OPT does not represent by recommending payment: 1. Inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in progress, or involved detailed inspections of the Work; or 2. Other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle Contractor to additional compensation or entitle Owner to withhold payment to Contractor may or may not exist. G. Neither OPT's review of Contractor's Work for the purposes of recommending payments nor OAR's recommendation of payment imposes responsibility on OPT: 1. To supervise, direct, or control the Work; 2. For the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or safety precautions and programs; 3. For Contractor's failure to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to Contractor's performance of the Work; 4. To make examinations to ascertain how or for what purposes Contractor has used the monies paid on account of the Contract Price; or 5. To determine that title to the Work, materials, or equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of Liens. 17.10 Contractor's Warranty of Title A. Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to the Work, materials, and equipment furnished under the Contract is to pass to Owner free and clear of Liens, title defects, and patent, licensing, copyright, or royalty obligations no later than 7 days after the time of payment by Owner of the Application for Payment which includes these items. 17.11 Substantial Completion A. Notify OAR when Contractor considers the entire Work substantially complete and request a Certificate of Substantial Completion. B. OPT is to inspect the Work within 30 days after Contractor's notification to determine if the Work is substantially complete. OAR, within 120 days after receipt of Contractor's notification, is to either issue the Certificate of Substantial Completion which sets the date of Substantial Completion or notify Contractor of the reasons the Project is not considered to be substantially complete. General Conditions 00 72 00-76 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. The OPT and Contractor are to meet to discuss Owner's use or occupancy of the Work following Substantial Completion. Items to be discussed at this meeting include: 1. Review of insurance policies with respect to the end of the Contractor's coverage, and confirm the transition to coverage of the Work under a permanent property insurance policy held by Owner; 2. Owner's assumption of responsibility for security, operation, protection of the Work, maintenance, and utilities upon Owner's use or occupancy of the Work; 3. Contractor's obligations for operations and maintenance during performance and acceptance testing; 4. Contractor's access to the Site to complete punch list items; and 5. Procedures for correction of Defective Work during the 1-year correction period. 17.12 Partial Utilization A. Owner may use or occupy substantially completed parts of the Work which are specifically identified in the Contract Documents, or which OPT and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of the Work. Owner must be able to use that part of the Work for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work. Contractor and OPT are to follow the procedures of Paragraph 17.11 for this part of the Work. B. No use or occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work may occur prior to compliance with the requirements of Article 6. 17.13 Final Inspection A. OPT is to make a final inspection upon notice from Contractor that the entire Work or portion to be accepted is complete. OAR is to notify Contractor of Work determined to be incomplete or Defective. Immediately take corrective measures to complete the Work and correct Defective Work. 17.14 Final Application for Payment A. Include adjustments to the Contract Price in the final Application for Payment for: 1. Approved Change Orders and Contract Amendments, 2. Allowances not previously adjusted by Change Order, 3. Deductions for Defective Work that has been accepted by the Owner, 4. Penalties and bonuses, 5. Deductions for liquidated damages, 6. Deduction for all final set-offs, and 7. Other adjustments if needed. B. OAR will prepare a final Change Order reflecting the approved adjustments to the Contract Price which have not been covered by previously approved Change Orders and if necessary reconcile estimate unit price quantities with actual quantities. General Conditions 00 72 00-77 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 17.15 Final Payment A. Make final Application for Payment after completing required corrections identified during the final inspection and delivering items and documents required by the Contract Documents. Provide the following with the final Application for Payment: 1. Consent of Surety to Final Payment acknowledging unsettled disputes; and 2. Certification of Payment of Debts and Claims or Certification of Release of Liens or furnish receipts or releases in full from Subcontractors and Suppliers. B. OAR is to either recommend payment of the final Application for Payment to Owner if OPT is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled or notify the Contractor of the OPT's reasons for not recommending final payment. C. The Work is complete, subject to surviving obligations, when it is ready for final payment as established by the OAR's recommendation of payment of the final Application for Payment to Owner and the issuance of a Certificate of Final Completion. D. The Owner is to pay the amount of final payment recommended by the OAR within 30 days after receipt of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation from the OAR. 17.16 Waiver of Claims A. The making of final payment does not constitute a waiver by Owner of claims or rights against Contractor. Owner expressly reserves claims and rights arising from: 1. Unsettled Liens or claims for non-payment; 2. Defective Work appearing after final inspection; 3. Contractor's failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of specified special guarantees; or 4. Contractor's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents. B. Contractor waives claims and rights against Owner by accepting final payment with the exception of those Claims made in accordance with the provisions of Article 22 and specifically noted in the Certificate of Final Completion. 17.17 Correction Period A. Promptly correct Defective Work without cost to Owner for 1 year after the date of Substantial Completion or, in the event of a latent defect, within 1 year after discovery thereof by City. B. Promptly correct damages to the Site or adjacent areas that Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or other agreements. Promptly correct damages to Work or the work of others. Make corrections without cost to Owner. C. Owner may have the Defective Work and damages described in Paragraphs 17.17.A and 17.17.13 corrected if Contractor does not comply with the terms of OAR's instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage. General Conditions 00 72 00-78 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 D. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to the correction of Defective Work are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. E. The correction period starts to run from the date when a specific item of equipment or system is placed in continuous beneficial use by Owner before Substantial Completion of Work if so provided in the Specifications or if accepted for beneficial use by the Owner. F. Contractor's obligations under this Paragraph 17.17 are in addition to other obligations or warranties. The provisions of this Paragraph 17.17 are not a substitute for, or a waiver of, the provisions of applicable statutes of limitation or repose. ARTICLE 18—SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 18.01 Owner May Suspend Work A. Owner may suspend the Work or a portion of the Work for a period of not more than 90 consecutive days, at any time and without cause, by notice to Contractor. This notice fixes the date on which Contractor is to resume Work. Contractor is entitled to adjustments in the Contract Price and Contract Times directly attributable to this suspension only if efforts are made to mitigate the cost impacts of the suspension. Meet with the Owner within 10 days of the notice of suspension to discuss specific strategies to reduce or eliminate the cost of delays. Submit a Change Proposal seeking an adjustment no later than 30 days after the date fixed for resumption of Work. 18.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause A. The occurrence of one or more of the following events constitutes a default by Contractor and justifies termination for cause: 1. Contractor's persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, including failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment; 2. Failure to adhere to the Progress Schedule; 3. Failure of the Contractor to provide a satisfactory replacement Bond or insurance in the event either is lost or canceled; 4. Failure of Contractor to maintain financial solvency to adequately complete the Project as indicated by one or more of the following: a. A petition of bankruptcy is filed by or against Contractor, b. Contractor is adjudged as bankrupt or insolvent, c. Contractor or surety makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors, d. A receiver is appointed for the benefit of Contractor's creditors, or e. A receiver is appointed on account of Contractor's insolvency; 5. Contractor's disregard of Laws or Regulations of public bodies having jurisdiction; 6. Contractor's repeated disregard of the authority of OPT; 7. Contractor's failure to prosecute the work with diligence; or General Conditions 00 72 00-79 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 8. Contractor's other material breach of the contract. B. Contractor and surety must provide adequate assurance of future performance in accordance with the Contract Documents that is satisfactory to Owner if Contractor is believed to be in financial distress due to the existence of one or more of the indicators listed in Paragraph 18.02.A.4. Owner may terminate Contractor's performance under this Contract if Contractor and surety fail to provide adequate documentation satisfactory to Owner within 10 days of OAR's request for this information. C. Owner may declare Contractor to be in default, give notice to Contractor and surety that Contractor's performance under the Contract is terminated, and enforce the rights available to Owner under the Performance Bond after giving Contractor and surety 10 days' notice that one or more of the events identified in Paragraph 18.02.A has occurred. D. Owner may exclude Contractor from the Site, take possession of the Work, incorporate the materials and equipment stored and complete the Work as Owner may deem expedient if Owner has terminated Contractor's performance under the Contract for cause. E. Owner may elect not to proceed with termination of Contractor's performance under the Contract under this Paragraph 18.02 if Contractor begins to cure the cause for termination within 7 days of receipt of notice of intent to terminate. F. Contractor is not entitled to receive further payments until the Work is completed if Owner proceeds as provided in this Paragraph 18.02. The amount of the Contract Price remaining is to be paid to the Contractor if the unpaid balance exceeds the cost to complete the Work. The cost to complete the Work may include related claims, costs, losses, damages, and the fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals retained by Owner. Pay the difference to Owner if the cost to complete the Work including related claims, costs, losses, and damages exceeds the unpaid balance of the Contract Price. Owner is not required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed when exercising its rights or remedies under this paragraph. G. Termination of Contractor's performance does not affect the rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor or against surety under the Payment Bond or Performance Bond. Owner does not release Contractor from liability by paying or retaining money due Contractor. H. In the event the Owner terminates the contract for cause, and it is later determined that cause for termination was lacking, the termination will be deemed a termination without cause under Paragraph 18.03. 18.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience A. Owner may terminate the Contract without cause after giving 7 days' notice to Contractor of the effective date of termination. Contractor is to be paid for the following if Owner terminates for convenience: 1. Work completed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination; 2. Actual costs sustained prior to the effective date of termination for Work in progress, plus a fee calculated in accordance with Paragraph 15.05; and 3. Reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination, including costs incurred to prepare a termination for convenience cost proposal. General Conditions 00 72 00-80 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. No payment is payable to Contractor for loss of anticipated overhead, profits or revenue, or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from this termination. ARTICLE 19— PROJECT MANAGEMENT 19.01 Work Included A. Furnish resources required to complete the Project with an acceptable standard of quality within the Contract Times. B. Construct Project in accordance with current safety practices. C. Manage Site to allow access to Site and control construction operations. D. Construct temporary facilities to provide and maintain control over environmental conditions at the Site. Remove temporary facilities when no longer needed. E. Provide temporary controls for pollutions, management of water and management of excess earth. 19.02 Quality Assurance A. Employ competent workmen,skilled in the occupation for which they are employed. Provide Work meeting quality requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Remove Defective Work from the Site immediately unless provisions have been made and approved by the OPT to allow repair of the product at the Site. Clearly mark Work as Defective until it is removed or allowable repairs have been completed. 19.03 Document Submittal A. Provide documents in accordance with Article 24. 1. Provide copies of Supplier's printed storage instructions prior to furnishing materials or products and installation instructions prior to beginning the installation. 2. Incorporate field notes,sketches, recordings,and computations made by the Contractor in Record Data. 19.04 Required Permits A. Obtain building permits for the Project from the local authorities having jurisdiction. Pay building permit fees and include this cost in the Contract Price. B. Obtain environmental permits required for construction at the Site. C. Provide required permits for transporting heavy or oversized loads. D. Provide other permits required to conduct any part of the Work. E. Arrange for inspections and certification by agencies having jurisdiction over the Work. F. Make arrangements with private utility companies and pay for fees associated with obtaining services, or for inspection fees. G. Retain copies of permits and licenses at the Site and observe and comply with all regulations and conditions of the permit or license. General Conditions 00 72 00-81 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 19.05 Safety Requirements A. Manage safety to protect the safety and welfare of persons at the Site. B. Provide safe access to move through the Site. Provide protective devices to warn and protect from hazards at the Site. C. Provide safe access for those performing tests and inspections. D. Comply with latest provisions of the Occupational Health and Safety Administration and other Laws and Regulation. E. Cooperate with accident investigations. Provide two copies of all reports,including insurance company reports, prepared concerning accidents, injury, or death related to the Project to the OAR as Record Data per Article 26. 19.06 Access to the Site A. Maintain access to the facilities at all times. Do not obstruct roads, pedestrian walks, or access to the various buildings, structures, stairways, or entrances. Provide safe access for normal operations during construction. B. Provide adequate and safe access for inspections. Leave ladders, bridges, scaffolding, and protective equipment in place until inspections have been completed. Construct additional safe access if required for inspections. C. Use roadways for construction traffic only with written approval of the appropriate representatives of each entity. Obtain written approval to use roads to deliver heavy or oversized loads to the Site. Furnish copies of the written approvals to the Owner as Record Data per Article 26. 19.07 Contractor's Use of Site A. Limit the use of Site for Work and storage to those areas designated on the Drawings or approved by the OAR. Coordinate the use of the premises with the OAR. B. Provide security at the Site as necessary to protect against vandalism and loss by theft. C. Do not permit alcoholic beverages or illegal substances on the Site. Do not allow persons under the influence of alcoholic beverages or illegal substances to enter or remain on the Site at any time. Persons on Site under the influence of alcoholic beverages or illegal substances will be permanently prohibited from returning to the Site. Criminal or civil penalties may also apply. D. Park construction equipment in designated areas only and provide spill control measures. E. Park employees'vehicles in designated areas only. F. Obtain written permission of the Owner before entering privately-owned land outside of the Owner's property, rights-of-way, or easements. G. Do not allow the use of audio devices, obnoxious, vulgar or abusive language, or sexual harassment in any form. These actions will cause immediate and permanent removal of the offender from the premises. Criminal or civil penalties may apply. General Conditions 00 72 00-82 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 H. Require Workers to wear clothing that is inoffensive and meets safety requirements. Do not allow sleeveless shirts, shorts, exceedingly torn, ripped, or soiled clothing to be worn on the Project. I. Do not allow firearms or weapons of any sort to be brought on to the Site under any conditions. No exception is to be made for persons with concealed handgun permits. Remove any firearms or weapons and the person possessing these firearms or weapons immediately from the Site. 19.08 Protection of Existing Structures and Utilities A. Examine the Site and review the available information concerning the Site. Locate utilities, streets, driveways, fences, drainage structures, sidewalks, curbs, and gutters. Verify the elevations of the structures adjacent to excavations. Report any discrepancies from information in the Contract Documents to the OAR before beginning construction. B. Determine if existing structures, poles, piping, or other utilities at excavations will require relocation or replacement. Prepare a Plan of Action and coordinate Work with local utility companies and others for the relocation or replacement. C. Protect buildings, utilities, street surfaces, driveways, sidewalks, curb and gutter, fences, wells, drainage structures, piping, valves, manholes, electrical conduits, and other systems or structures unless they are shown to be replaced or relocated on the Drawings. Restore damaged items to the satisfaction of the OPT and utility owner. D. Carefully support and protect all structures and/or utilities so that there will be no failure or settlement where excavation or demolition endangers adjacent structures and utilities. Do not take existing utilities out of service unless required by the Contract Documents or approved by the OAR. Notify and cooperate with the utility owner if it is necessary to move services, poles, guy wires, pipelines, or other obstructions. E. Protect existing trees and landscaping at the Site. 1. Identify trees that may be removed during construction with OPT. 2. Mark trees to be removed with paint. 3. Protect trees to remain from damage by wrapping trunks with 2 x 4 timbers around the perimeter, securely wired in place, where machinery must operate around existing trees. Protect branches and limbs from damage by equipment. 4. Protect root zone from compaction. 19.09 Pre-Construction Exploratory Excavations A. Excavate and expose existing pipelines that cross within 20 feet of Project pipelines prior to any Work. Survey the line to determine its exact vertical and horizontal location at each point the existing pipeline may potentially conflict with the Work. B. Excavate and expose existing parallel pipelines at 300 feet intervals (maximum) for existing pipelines which are within 10 feet of Project pipelines. Survey the line to determine its exact vertical and horizontal location at each point where the line is excavated and exposed. General Conditions 00 72 00-83 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. Prepare a Plan of Action indicating the owner of pipelines excavated and surveyed and all pertinent survey data, including the station where lines cross or conflicts may exist and the distance to the pavement centerline and elevations of the top of existing pipelines. D. Do not perform Work on the Project until all exploratory excavations have been completed and the Plan of Action has been approved by the OAR. E. Unless specifically indicated otherwise in the Bid Form, no separate payment will be made for pre-construction exploratory excavations. Include the cost for pre-construction exploratory excavations in the unit price for the pipe construction or other applicable feature. When necessary, pavement repairs associated with exploratory excavations that are beyond the limits of the new pavement will be paid for at the unit prices for pavement repair when an item is included in the Bid Form. When an item for pavement repair is not included in the Bid Form, the cost should be included in the unit price for the pipe construction or other applicable feature. 19.10 Disruption of Services/Continued Operations A. Existing facilities are to continue in service as usual during the construction unless noted otherwise. Owner of utilities must be able to operate and maintain the facilities. Keep disruptions to existing utilities, piping, process piping, or electrical services to a minimum. 1. Do not restrict access to critical valves or operators. 2. Limit operations to the minimum amount of space needed to complete the specified Work. 3. Maintain storm sewers and sanitary sewers in service at all times. Provide temporary service around the construction or otherwise construct the structure in a manner that the flow is not restricted. B. Provide a Plan of Action if facilities must be taken out of operation. 19.11 Field Measurements A. Perform complete field measurements prior to purchasing products or beginning construction for products required to fit existing conditions. B. Verify property lines, control lines, grades, and levels indicated on the Drawings. C. Check Shop Drawings and indicate the actual dimensions available where products are to be installed. D. Include field measurements in Record Data as required in Article 26. 19.12 Reference Data and Control Points A. The OPT will provide the following control points: 1. Base line or grid reference points for horizontal control. 2. Benchmarks for vertical control. B. Locate and protect control points prior to starting the Work and preserve permanent reference points during construction. Designated control points may be on an existing structure or monument. Do not change or relocate points without prior approval of the OAR. General Conditions 00 72 00-84 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Notify OAR when the reference point is lost, destroyed, or requires relocation. Replace Project control points on the basis of the original survey. C. Provide complete engineering layout of the Work needed for construction. 1. Provide competent personnel. Provide equipment including accurate surveying instruments, stakes, platforms,tools, and materials. 2. Provide surveying with accuracy meeting the requirements established for Category 5 Construction Surveying as established in the Manual of Practice of Land Surveying in Texas published by the Texas Society of Professional Surveyors, latest revision. 3. Record Data and measurements per standards. 19.13 Delivery and Storage A. Deliver products and materials to the Site in time to prevent delays in construction. B. Deliver packaged products to Site in original undamaged containers with identifying labels attached. Open cartons as necessary to check for damage and to verify invoices. Reseal cartons and store properly until used. Leave products in packages or other containers until installed. C. Assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of products stored at the Site. D. Store products at locations acceptable to the OAR and to allow Owner access to maintain and operate existing facilities. E. Store products in accordance with the Supplier's storage instructions immediately upon delivery. Leave seals and labels intact. F. Provide additional storage areas as needed for construction. Store products subject to damage by elements in substantial weather-tight enclosures or storage sheds. Provide and maintain storage sheds as required for the protection of products. Provide temperature, humidity control, and ventilation within the ranges stated in the Supplier's instructions. Remove storage facilities at the completion of the Project. G. Protect the pipe interior. Keep all foreign materials such as dirt, debris, animals, or other objects out of the pipe during the Work. Cap or plug ends of installed pipe in an approved manner when pipe is not being installed. Clean or wash out pipe sections that become contaminated before continuing with installation. Take precautions to prevent the pipe from floating or moving out of the proper position during or after laying operations. Immediately correct any pipe that moves from its correct position. H. Provide adequate exterior storage for products that may be stored out-of-doors. 1. Provide substantial platforms, blocking, or skids to support materials and products above ground which has been sloped to provide drainage. Protect products from soiling or staining. 2. Cover products subject to discoloration or deterioration from exposure to the elements, with impervious sheet materials. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation below covering. 3. Store loose, granular materials on clean, solid surfaces, or on rigid sheet materials, to prevent mixing with foreign matter. General Conditions 00 72 00-85 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4. Provide surface drainage to prevent erosion and ponding of water. 5. Prevent mixing of refuse or chemically injurious materials or liquids with stored materials. 6. Pipes and conduits stored outdoors are to have open ends sealed to prevent the entrance of dirt, moisture, and other injurious materials. Protect PVC pipe from ultraviolet light exposure. 7. Store light weight products to prevent wind damage. I. Maintain storage facilities. Inspect stored products on a weekly basis and after periods of severe weather to verify that: 1. Storage facilities continue to meet specified requirements; 2. Supplier's required environmental conditions are continually maintained; and 3. Products that can be damaged by exposure to the elements are not adversely affected. J. Replace any stored item damaged by inadequate protection or environmental controls. K. Payment may be withheld for any products not properly stored. 19.14 Cleaning During Construction A. Provide positive methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations and provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from disbursing into the atmosphere. Control dust and dirt from demolition, cutting, and patching operations. B. Clean the Project as Work progresses and dispose of waste materials, keeping the Site free from accumulations of waste or rubbish. Provide containers on Site for waste collection. Do not allow waste materials or debris to blow around or off of the Site. Control dust from waste materials. Transport waste materials with as few handlings as possible. C. Comply with Laws and Regulations. Do not burn or bury waste materials. Remove waste materials, rubbish and debris from the Site and legally dispose of these at public or private disposal facilities. D. Provide a final cleaning to thoroughly clean the entire Site and make ready for acceptance. 1. Remove construction debris, boxes, and trash from the Site. 2. Remove construction storage sheds and field offices. 3. Restore grade to match surrounding condition and remove excess dirt. 4. Sweep all drives and parking lots clean of dirt and debris. Use water trucks or hose down paved site to like new appearance. 19.15 Maintenance of Roads, Driveways, and Access A. Maintain roads and streets in a manner that is suitable for safe operations of public vehicles during all phases of construction unless the Owner approves a street closing. Do not close public roads overnight. B. Submit a Notification by Contractor for Owner's approval of a street closing. The request shall state: General Conditions 00 72 00-86 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 1. The reason for closing the street. 2. How long the street will remain closed. 3. Procedures to be taken to maintain the flow of traffic. C. Construct temporary detours, including by-pass roads around construction,with adequately clear width to maintain the free flow of traffic at all times. Maintain barricades, signs, and safety features around the detour and excavations. Maintain barricades, signs, and safety features around the Work in accordance with all provisions of the latest edition of the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD). D. Assume responsibility for any damage resulting from construction along roads or drives. 19.16 Area Access and Traffic Control A. Provide traffic control measures to assure a safe condition and to provide a minimum of inconvenience to motorists and the public. Provide all-weather access to all residents and businesses at all times during construction. Provide temporary driveways and/or roads of approved material during wet weather. Maintain a stockpile of suitable material on the Site to meet the demands of inclement weather. B. Schedule operations to minimize adverse impact on the accessibility of adjoining properties. Sequence construction to build driveways in half widths, construct temporary ramps, or any other measure required to maintain access to adjoining properties. C. Comply with the Owner's Uniform Barricading Standards and Practices. Copies of this document are available through the Owner's Traffic Engineering Department. Secure required permits from the Owner's Traffic Engineering Department. 19.17 Overhead Electrical Wires A. Comply with OSHA safety requirements regarding construction equipment working beneath overhead electrical wires. Prevent and pay for repairs for damage to existing overhead electrical wires or facilities. B. Provide for adequate safety with regard to overhead lines whether overhead lines are or are not shown in the Contract Documents. 19.18 Blasting A. Blasting is not allowed for any purpose. 19.19 Archeological Requirements A. Cease operations immediately and contact the Owner for instructions if historical or archaeological artifacts are found during construction. B. Conduct all construction activities to avoid adverse impact on the Sites where significant historical or archaeological artifacts are found or identified as an area where other artifacts could be found. 1. Obtain details for Working in these areas. 2. Maintain confidentiality regarding the Site. General Conditions 00 72 00-87 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 3. Adhere to the requirements of the Texas Historical Commission. 4. Notify the OAR and the Texas Historical Commission. C. Do not disturb archaeological sites. 1. Obtain the services of a qualified archaeological specialist to instruct construction personnel on how to identify and protect archaeological finds on an emergency basis. 2. Coordinate activities to permit archaeological work to take place within the area. a. Attempt to archaeologically clear areas needed for construction as soon as possible. b. Provide a determination of priority for such areas. D. Assume responsibility for any unauthorized destruction that might result to such Sites by construction personnel, and pay all penalties assessed by the State or Federal agencies for non-compliance with these requirements. E. Contract Times will be modified to compensate for delays caused by such archaeological finds. No additional compensation will be paid for delays. 19.20 Endangered Species Resources A. Do not perform any activity that is likely to jeopardize the continued existence of a threatened or endangered species as listed or proposed for listing under the Federal Endangered Species Act (ESA), and/or the State of Texas Parks and Wildlife Code on Endangered Species, or to destroy or adversely modify the habitat of such species. B. Cease Work immediately in the area of the encounter and notify the OAR if a threatened or endangered species is encountered during construction. OPT will implement actions in accordance with the ESA and applicable State statutes. Resume construction in the area of the encounter when authorized to do so by the OAR. 19.21 Cooperation with Public Agencies A. Cooperate with all public and private agencies with facilities operating within the limits of the Project. B. Provide a 48-hour notice to any applicable agency when work is anticipated to proceed in the vicinity of any facility by using Texas 811 at 811 and the Lone Star Notification Company at 1-800-669-8344. ARTICLE 20—PROJECT COORDINATION 20.01 Work Included A. Administer Contract requirements to construct the Project. Provide documentation per the requirements of this Section. Provide information as requested by the OPT. 20.02 Document Submittal A. Provide documents in accordance with Article 24. General Conditions 00 72 00-88 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. Use the forms provided for Contract administration, applications for payment, document submittals, documentation of test results, equipment installation and documentation, and Project closeout. A digital copy of the required forms will be provided to the Contractor before or at the pre-construction conference. 20.03 Communication During Project A. The OAR is to be the first point of contact for all parties on matters concerning this Project. B. The OAR will coordinate correspondence concerning: 1. Documents, including Applications for Payment. 2. Clarification and interpretation of the Contract Documents. 3. Contract Modifications. 4. Observation of Work and testing. 5. Claims. C. The OAR will normally communicate only with the Contractor. Any required communication with Subcontractors or Suppliers will only be with the direct involvement of the Contractor. D. Direct written communications to the OAR at the address indicated at the pre-construction conference. Include the following with communications as a minimum: 1. Name of the Owner. 2. Project name. 3. Contract title. 4. Project number. 5. Date. 6. A reference statement. 20.04 Project Meetings A. Pre-Construction Conference: 1. Attend a pre-construction conference. 2. The location of the conference will be determined by the OAR. 3. The time of the meeting will be determined by the OAR but will be after the Notice of Award is issued and not later than 15 days after the Notice to Proceed is issued. 4. The OPT, Contractor's project manager and superintendent, representatives of utility companies, and representatives from major Subcontractors and Suppliers may attend the conference. 5. Provide and be prepared to discuss: a. Preliminary construction schedule per Article 27. b. Schedule of Values and anticipated Schedule of Payments per Article 17. C. List of Subcontractors and Suppliers. General Conditions 00 72 00-89 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 d. Contractor's organizational chart as it relates to this Project. e. Letter indicating the agents of authority for the Contractor and the limit of that authority with respect to the execution of legal documents,Contract Modifications, and payment requests. B. Progress Meetings: 1. Attend meetings with the OAR and Owner. a. Meet on a monthly basis or as requested by the OAR to discuss the Project. b. Meet at the Site or other location as designated by the OAR. c. Contractor's superintendent and other key personnel are to attend the meeting. Other individuals may be requested to attend to discuss specific matters. d. Notify the OAR of any specific items to be discussed a minimum of 1 week prior to the meeting. 2. Provide information as requested by the OAR or Owner concerning this Project. Prepare to discuss: a. Status of overall Project schedule. b. Contractor's detailed schedule for the next month. c. Anticipated delivery dates for equipment. d. Coordination with the Owner. e. Status of documents. f. Information or clarification of the Contract Documents. g. Claims and proposed Modifications to the Contract. h. Field observations, problems, or conflicts. i. Maintenance of quality standards. 3. OAR will prepare minutes of meetings. Review the minutes of the meeting and notify the OAR of any discrepancies within 10 days of the date of the meeting memorandum. The minutes will not be corrected after the 10 days have expired. Corrections will be reflected in the minutes of the following meeting or as an attachment to the minutes. C. Pre-Submittal and Pre-Installation Meetings: 1. Conduct pre-submittal and pre-installation meetings as required in the individual technical Specifications or as determined necessary by the OAR (for example, instrumentation, roofing, concrete mix design, etc.). 2. Set the time and location of the meetings when ready to proceed with the associated Work. Submit a Notification by Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 20.07 for the meeting 2 weeks before the meeting. OPT must approve of the proposed time and location. 3. Attend the meeting and require the participation of appropriate Subcontractors and Suppliers in the meeting. General Conditions 00 72 00-90 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4. Prepare minutes of the meeting and submit to the OPT for review. OPT will review the minutes of the meeting and notify the Contractor of any discrepancies within 10 days of the date of the meeting memorandum. The minutes will not be corrected after the 10 days have expired. Corrections will be reflected in a revised set of meeting minutes. 20.05 Requests for Information A. Submit Request for Information (RFI) to the OAR to obtain additional information or clarification of the Contract Documents. 1. Submit a separate RFI for each item on the form provided. 2. Attach adequate information to permit a written response without further clarification. OAR will return requests that do not have adequate information to the Contractor for additional information. Contractor is responsible for all delays resulting from multiple document submittals due to inadequate information. 3. A response will be made when adequate information is provided. Response will be made on the RFI form or in attached information. B. Response to an RFI is given to provide additional information, interpretation, or clarification of the requirements of the Contract Documents, and does not modify the Contract Documents. C. Designer will initiate a Request for a Change Proposal (RCP) per Article 12 if the RFI indicates that a Contract Modification is required. D. Use the Project Issues Log to document decisions made at meetings and actions to be taken in accordance with Paragraph 20.06. E. Use the Action Item Log to document assignments for actions to be taken in accordance with Paragraph 20.06. 20.06 Decision and Action Item Log A. OAR will maintain a Project Decision Log to document key decisions made at meetings, telephone conversation or Site visits using the format provided: 1. Review the log prior to each regular meeting. 2. Report any discrepancies to the OAR for correction or discussion at the next monthly meeting. B. OAR will maintain an Action Item log in conjunction with the Project Decision Log to track assignments made at meetings, telephone conversation, or Site visits using the format provided: 1. Review the Action Item Log prior to each regular meeting. 2. Report actions taken subsequent to the previous progress meeting on items in the log assigned to the Contractor or through the Contractor to a Subcontractor or Supplier to the OAR. Report on status of progress 1 week prior to each progress meeting established in Paragraph 20.04 to allow OAR to update the log prior to the Progress meetings. 3. Be prepared to discuss the status at each meeting. General Conditions 00 72 00-91 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. Decisions or action items in the log that require a change in the Contract Documents will have the preparation of a Modification as an action item if appropriate. The Contract Documents can only be changed by a Modification. 20.07 Notification By Contractor A. Notify the OAR of: 1. Need for testing. 2. Intent to work outside regular working hours. 3. Request to shut down facilities or utilities. 4. Proposed utility connections. 5. Required observation by OAR, Designer, or inspection agencies prior to covering Work. 6. Training. B. Provide notification a minimum of 2 weeks in advance in order to allow OPT time to respond appropriately to the notification. C. Use "Notification by Contractor" form provided. 20.08 Record Documents A. Maintain at the Site one complete set of printed Record Documents including: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Modifications. 5. Record Data and approved Shop Drawings. 6. Construction photographs. 7. Test Reports. 8. Clarifications and other information provided in Request for Information responses. 9. Reference standards. B. Store printed Record Documents and Samples in the Contractor's field office. 1. Record Documents are to remain separate from documents used for construction. 2. Provide files and racks for the storage of Record Documents. 3. Provide a secure storage space for the storage of Samples. 4. Maintain Record Documents in clean, dry, legible conditions, and in good order. 5. Make Record Documents and Samples available at all times for inspection by the OPT. C. Maintain a digital record of Specifications and Addenda to identify products provided in PDF format. General Conditions 00 72 00-92 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 1. Reference the Record Data number, Shop Drawings number,and O&M manual number for each product and item of equipment furnished or installed. 2. Reference Modifications by type and number for all changes. D. Maintain a digital record of Drawings in PDF format. 1. Reference the Record Data number, Shop Drawings number,and O&M manual number for each product and item of equipment furnished or installed. 2. Reference Modifications by type and number for all changes. 3. Record information as construction is being performed. Do not conceal any Work until the required information is recorded. 4. Mark Drawings to record actual construction, including the following: a. Depths of various elements of the foundation in relation to finished first floor datum or the top of walls. b. Horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances constructed and existing utilities encountered during construction. C. Location of utilities and appurtenances concealed in the Work. Refer measurements to permanent structures on the surface. Include the following equipment: 1) Piping. 2) Ductwork. 3) Equipment and control devices requiring periodic maintenance or repair. 4) Valves, unions,traps, and tanks. 5) Services entrance. 6) Feeders. 7) Outlets. d. Changes of dimension and detail. e. Changes by Modifications. f. Information in Request for Information or included in the Project Issues Log. g. Details not on the original Drawings. Include field verified dimensions and clarifications, interpretations, and additional information issued in response to RFIs. 5. Mark Drawings with the following colors: a. Highlight references to other documents, including Modifications in blue; b. Highlight mark ups for new or revised Work(lines added) in yellow; C. Highlight items deleted or not installed (lines to be removed) in red; and d. Highlight items constructed per the Contract Documents in green. General Conditions 00 72 00-93 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 6. Submit Record Documents to Designer for review and acceptance 30 days prior to Final Completion of the Project. E. Applications for Payment will not be recommended for payment if Record Documents are found to be incomplete or not in order. Final payment will not be recommended without complete Record Documents. ARTICLE 21—QUALITY MANAGEMENT 21.01 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Review the OPT's Quality Management Program and prepare and submit the Contractor's Quality Control Plan. B. Implement the Contractor's Quality Control Plan to control the quality of the Work and verify that the Work meets the standards of quality established in the Contract Documents. 1. Inspect products to be incorporated into the Project. Ensure that Suppliers have adequate quality control systems to ensure that products that comply with the Contract Documents are provided. 2. Integrate quality control measures into construction activities to produce Work which meets quality expectations of the Contract Documents. Inspect the Work of the Contractor, Subcontractors, and Suppliers. Correct Defective Work. 3. Provide and pay for the services of an approved professional materials testing laboratory acceptable to the OPT to provide testing that demonstrates that products proposed in Shop Drawings and Record Data for the Project fully comply with the Contract Documents. 4. Provide facilities, equipment, and Samples required for quality control inspections and tests: a. Give the OAR adequate notice before proceeding with Work that would interfere with inspections or testing; b. Notify the OAR and testing laboratories prior to the time that testing is required, providing adequate lead time to allow arrangements for inspections or testing to be made; C. Do not proceed with any Work that would impact the ability to correct defects or Work that would require subsequent removal to correct defects until testing services have been performed and results of tests indicate that the Work is acceptable; d. Cooperate fully with the performance of sampling, inspection, and testing; e. Provide personnel to assist with sampling or to assist in making inspections and field tests; f. Obtain and handle Samples for testing at the Site or at the production source of the product to be tested; g. Provide adequate quantities of representative products to be tested to the laboratory at the designated locations; General Conditions 00 72 00-94 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 h. Provide facilities required to store and cure test Samples; i. Provide calibrated scales and measuring devices for the OPT's use in performing inspections and testing; j. Provide adequate lighting to allow OPT observations; and k. Make Contract Documents available to testing agencies when requested. 5. Provide safe access for all inspection and testing activities, including those to be conducted as part of the OPT's Quality Management Program. 6. Document Defective Work through Certified Test Reports and Defective Work Notices. Document that corrective actions have been taken to correct any defects and that corrected Work is in compliance with the Contract Documents. 7. Apply quality control measures to documentation provided for the Project. 8. Implement countermeasures to prevent future Defective Work. C. Perform tests as indicated in this and other Sections of the Specifications. Technical Specifications govern if any testing and inspection requirements of this Section conflict with the testing and inspection requirements of the technical Specifications. D. All verification testing is to be observed by the OAR or designated representative. E. Send test reports to the OAR and the Designer. F. Provide an update on quality control activities at monthly progress meetings. G. Owner will withhold payment for Defective Work, or Work that has not been tested or inspected in accordance with the Contractor's Quality Control Plan,the OPT's Quality Control Program, or the Contract Documents. H. Owner will withhold payment for additional testing fees incurred due to Contractor noncompliance with OPT's Quality Control Program, including retesting fees, standby time, cancellation charges, and trip fees for retesting or cancellations. I. Work performed that is connected or adjacent to Defective Work or Work that would have to be removed to correct Defective Work is also considered to be Defective. Contractor is responsible for all cost with replacing any acceptable Work that must be removed or might be damaged by corrective actions. 21.02 Quality Management Activities by OPT A. OPT will perform its own quality assurance tests independent of the Contractor's Quality Control Program. Assist the OPT and testing organizations in performing quality assurance activities per Paragraph 21.01. B. Quality assurance testing performed by the OPT will be paid for by the Owner, except for verification testing required per Paragraph 21.07. C. Quality assurance activities of the OPT, through their own forces or through contracts with consultants and materials testing laboratories are for the purpose of monitoring the results of the Contractor's Work to see that it is in compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Quality assurance activities or non-performance of quality assurance activities by the OPT do not: General Conditions 00 72 00-95 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 1. Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility to provide Work or furnish products that conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents; 2. Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for providing adequate quality control measures; 3. Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for damage to or loss of Work or products before OPT's acceptance; 4. Constitute or imply OPT's acceptance; and 5. Affect the continuing rights of the Owner after OPT's acceptance of the completed Work. D. Work is subject to OPT's quality assurance observations or testing at any time. Products which have been tested or inspected and approved by OPT at a supply source or staging area may be inspected or tested again by the OPT before, during or after incorporation into the Work and rejected if products do not comply with the Contract Documents. 21.03 Contractor's Use of OPT's Test Reports A. OPT has prepared a Quality Management Plan that describes, in general, the OPT's anticipated quality assurance testing program for this Project. This testing program will be made available to Bidders during the bidding phase. This plan outlines only the testing in general terms and may not reflect actual testing. Actual testing will depend on the Contractors means, methods and procedures of construction which will not be known until the Contractor begins Work and submits their own Quality Control Plan for review. There is no guarantee that all testing will be performed. B. Contractor will receive copies of all test reports documenting OPT's quality assurance activities. Contractor is entitled to rely on the accuracy of these test results and use these as part of their quality control efforts. C. Contractor is to determine additional testing or inspections that may be required to implement the Contractor's Quality Control Plan. Include cost for additional testing and inspections required to meet Contractors quality control obligations, including the cost for correcting Defective Work in the Contract Price. D. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal if OPT's quality assurance testing program deviates significantly from the OPT's Quality Management Plan, and Contractor can demonstrate that additional cost was incurred to implement the Contractor's Quality Control Plan resulting from these deviations. 21.04 Documentation A. Provide documentation which includes: 1. Contractor's Quality Management Plan that establishes the methods of assuring compliance with the Contract Documents. Submit this plan as a Shop Drawings per Article 25. 2. A Statement of Qualification for any proposed testing laboratories that includes a list of the engineers and technical staff that will provide testing services on the Project, descriptions of the qualifications of these individuals, list of tests that can be performed, General Conditions 00 72 00-96 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 equipment used with date of last certification, and a list of recent projects for which testing has been performed with references for those projects. 3. Provide Certified Test Reports for products to be incorporated into the Project. Provide reports to indicate that proposed products comply with the Contract Documents or indicate that proposed products do not comply with the Contract Documents and why it does not comply. Submit these test reports as part of a Shop Drawings submitted per Article 25. 4. Provide Certified Test Reports for inspection and testing required in this Section and in other Specification Sections. Provide reports to indicate that Work complies with the Contract Documents or indicate that Work does not comply with the Contract Documents and why it does not comply. Submit these test reports on forms provided per Article 24. 21.05 Standards A. Provide testing laboratories that comply with the American Council of Independent Laboratories (ACIL) "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualifications." B. Perform testing per recognized test procedures as listed in the various Sections of the Specifications, standards of the State Department of Highways and Public Transportation, American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM), or other testing associations. Perform tests in accordance with published procedures for testing issued by these organizations. 21.06 Delivery and Storage A. Handle and protect test specimens of products and construction materials at the Site in accordance with recognized test procedures. Provide facilities for storing, curing, and processing test specimens as required by test standard to maintain the integrity of Samples. 21.07 Verification Testing for Corrected Defects A. Provide verification testing on Work performed to correct Defective Work to demonstrate that the Work is now in compliance with the Contract Documents. Document that Defective Work has been corrected and verify that the OAR closes the item in the Defective Work Register. B. Pay for verification testing. OPT may perform verification testing as part of their Quality Management Program and impose a Set-off to recover the cost for this testing. C. Conduct the same tests or inspections used to determine that the original Work was Defective. Different tests or methods may be used if approved by the OPT. 21.08 Test Reports A. Certified Test Reports are to be prepared for all tests. 1. Tests performed by testing laboratories may be submitted on their standard test report forms if acceptable to the OPT. These reports must include the following: a. Name of the Owner, Project title and number and Contractor; General Conditions 00 72 00-97 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 b. Name of the laboratory, address, and telephone number; C. Name and signature of the laboratory personnel performing the test; d. Description of the product being sampled or tested; e. Date and time of sampling, inspection, and testing; f. Date the report was issued; g. Description of the test performed; h. Weather conditions and temperature at time of test or sampling; i. Location at the Site or structure where the sample was taken; j. Standard or test procedure used in making the test; k. A description of the results of the test; I. Statement of compliance or non-compliance with the Contract Documents; and m. Interpretations of test results, if appropriate. 2. Submit reports on tests performed by Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers on the forms provided by the OAR. 3. OPT will prepare test reports on test performed by the OPT. B. Send test report to Designer within 24 hours of completing the test. Flag tests reports with results that do not comply with Contract Documents for immediate attention. C. Payment for Work may be withheld until test reports indicate that the Work is not Defective. 21.09 Defective Work A. Immediately correct any Defective Work or notify the OAR why the Work is not to be corrected immediately and when corrective action will be completed. B. No payment will be made for Defective Work. Remove Work from the Application for Payment if Work paid for on a previous Application for Payment is found to be Defective. 21.10 Limitation of Authority of Testing Laboratory A. The testing laboratory representatives are limited to providing testing services and interpreting the results of the test performed. B. The testing laboratory is not authorized to: 1. Alter the requirements of the Contract Documents; 2. Accept or reject any portion of the Work; 3. Perform any of the duties of the Contractor; or 4. Direct or stop the Work. 21.11 Quality Control Plan A. Submit the Contractor's Quality Control Plan for approval as a Shop Drawing per Article 25. Use Contractor's Quality Control Plan Checklist provided to review the document before General Conditions 00 72 00-98 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 submitting and include a copy of the completed checklist with the Contractor's Quality Control Plan. Do not begin Work until the Contractor's Quality Control Plan is approved. Submit an interim plan covering only the portion of Work to be performed if the Contractor plans to begin Work prior to submitting the Contractor's Quality Control Plan for the Project. Do not begin Work on other parts of the Project until the Contractor's Quality Control Plan is approved or another interim plan covering the additional Work to be started is approved. B. Provide a Contractor's Quality Control Plan that incorporates construction operations at both the Site and production Work at remote locations and includes Work by Subcontractors and Suppliers. The Contractor's Quality Control Plan is to include: 1. A description of the quality control organization, including an organization chart showing lines of authority to control the quality of Work; 2. Documentation describing name, qualifications (in resume format), duties, responsibilities, and level of authority of the Quality Control Manager; 3. The name, qualifications (in resume format), duties, responsibilities, and authorities of other persons assigned a quality control function; 4. Procedures for scheduling, reviewing, certifying, and managing documentation, including documentation provided by Subcontractors and Suppliers; 5. Control,verification, and acceptance testing procedures for each specific test. Include: a. Name of tests to be performed, b. Specification paragraph requiring test, C. Parameters of Work to be tested, d. Test frequency, e. Persons responsible for each test, and f. Applicable industry testing standards and laboratory facilities to be used for the test; 6. Integrate the OPT quality assurance testing into the Contractor's Quality Control Plan, specifically identifying the tests or inspections in Paragraph 21.11.13.5 that will be provided by the OPT as part of their Quality Management Program; 7. Procedures for tracking and documenting quality management efforts. 8. Procedures for tracking Defective Work from initial identification through acceptable corrective action. Indicate how documentation of the verification process for deficiencies will be made. 9. Reporting procedures which incorporate the use of forms provided by the OAR. 10. The name of the proposed testing laboratories along with documentation of qualifications per Paragraph 21.04. C. The Quality Control Manager must have authority to reject Defective Work and redirect the efforts of the Contractor's Team to prevent or correct Defective Work. D. Notify the Designer of any changes to the Contractor's Quality Control Plan or quality control personnel. General Conditions 00 72 00-99 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Meet with the OPT 7 days after Contractor's Quality Control Plan is submitted and before start of construction to discuss the Contractor's Quality Control Plan and expedite its approval. 21.12 Implement Contractor's Quality Control Plan A. Perform quality control observations and testing as required in each Section of the Specifications and where indicated on the Drawings. B. Include the following phases for each definable Work task. A definable Work task is one which is separate and distinct from other tasks, has separate control requirements, may be provided by different trades or disciplines, or may be Work by the same trade in a different environment. 1. Planning Phase: Perform the following before beginning each definable Work task: a. Review the Contract Drawings. b. Review documents and determine that they are complete in accordance with the Contract Documents. c. Check to assure that all materials and/or equipment have been tested, submitted, and approved. d. Examine the work area to assure that all required preliminary Work has been completed and complies with the Contract Documents. e. Examine required materials, equipment, and Sample Work to assure that they are on hand, conform to Shop Drawings and Record Data, and are properly stored. f. Review requirements for quality control inspection and testing. g. Discuss procedures for controlling quality of the Work. Document construction tolerances and workmanship standards for the Work task. h. Check that the portion of the plan for the Work to be performed incorporates document review comments. i. Discuss results of planning phase with the OAR. Conduct a meeting attended by the Quality Control Manager, the OAR, superintendent, other quality control personnel as applicable, and the foreman responsible for the Work task. Instruct applicable workers as to the acceptable level of workmanship required in order to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. Document the results of the preparatory phase actions by separate meeting minutes prepared by the Quality Control Manager and attached to the quality control report. j. Do not move to the next phase unless results of investigations required for the planning phase indicate that requirements have been met. 2. Work Phase: Complete this phase after the Planning Phase: a. Notify the OAR at least 24 hours in advance of beginning the Work and discuss the review of the planning effort to indicate that requirements have been met. b. Check the Work to ensure that it is in full compliance with the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00-100 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 c. Verify adequacy of controls to ensure full compliance with Contract Documents. Verify required control inspection and testing is performed. d. Verify that established levels of workmanship meet acceptable workmanship standards. Compare with required Sample panels as appropriate. e. Repeat the Work phase for each new crew to work on-site, or any time acceptable specified quality standards are not being met. 3. Follow-up Phase: Perform daily checks to assure control activities, including control testing, are providing continued compliance with contract requirements: a. Make checks daily and record observations in the quality control documentation. b. Conduct follow-up checks and correct all deficiencies prior to the start of additional Work tasks that may be affected by the Defective Work. Do not build upon nor conceal Defective Work. c. Conduct a review of the Work with the OPT one month prior to the expiration of the correction period. Correct defects as noted during the review. C. Conduct additional planning and Work phases if: 1. The quality of on-going Work is unacceptable; 2. Changes are made in applicable quality control staff, on-site production supervision or crews; 3. Work on a task is resumed after a substantial period of inactivity; or 4. Other quality problems develop. ARTICLE 22—FINAL RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES 22.01 Senior Level Negotiations A. Each party is required to continue to perform its obligations under the Contract pending the final resolution of any dispute arising out of or relating to the Contract, unless it would be impossible or impracticable under the circumstances then present. B. All negotiations pursuant to Article 22 are confidential and shall be treated as compromise and settlement negotiations for purposes of applicable rules of evidence. C. Before invoking mediation, Owner and Contractor agree that they first shall try to resolve any dispute arising out of or related to this Contract through discussions directly between those senior management representatives within their respective organizations who have overall managerial responsibility for similar projects. Both Owner and Contractor agree that this step shall be a condition precedent to use of any other alternative dispute resolution process. If the parties' senior management representatives cannot resolve the dispute within 45 calendar days after a party delivers a written notice of such dispute to the other, then the parties shall proceed with mediation. 22.02 Mediation A. In the event that Owner and/or Contractor contend that the other has committed a material breach of the Contract or the parties cannot reach a resolution of a claim or dispute pursuant General Conditions 00 72 00-101 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 to Article 13, as a condition precedent to filing a lawsuit,either party shall request mediation of the dispute with the following requirements: 1. The request for mediation shall be in writing and shall request that the mediation commence not less than 30 calendar days or more than 90 calendar days following the date of the request, except upon agreement of the parties. 2. In the event Owner and Contractor are unable to agree to a date for the mediation or to the identity of the mediator within 30 calendar days following the date of the request for mediation, all conditions precedent shall be deemed to have occurred. 3. Owner and Contractor are to each pay one-half of the mediator's fees and costs.Venue for any mediation or lawsuit filed under this Contract shall be in Nueces County,Texas. Any agreement reached in mediation shall be enforceable as a settlement in any court having jurisdiction thereof. 4. Nothing in this Contract shall be construed as consent to a lawsuit. No provision of the Contract shall waive any immunity or defense. ARTICLE 23—MINORITY/MBE/DBE PARTICIPATION POLICY 23.01 Policy A. It is the policy of the City of Corpus Christi that maximum opportunity is afforded minorities, women, low income persons and Minority/Disadvantaged Business Enterprises (M/DBE) to participate in the performance of contracts awarded by the City of Corpus Christi in support of Equal Employment Opportunity goals and objectives. In accordance with such policy,the City has established goals, as stated herein, both for minority and female participation by trade and for Minority Business Enterprise. 23.02 Definitions A. Prime Contractor: Any person, firm, partnership, corporation, association, or joint venture as herein provided which has been awarded a City contract. B. Subcontractor: Any named person, firm, partnership, corporation, association, or joint venture herein identified as providing work, labor, services, supplies, equipment, materials, or any combination of the foregoing under contract with a prime contractor on a City contract. C. Minority/Disadvantaged Business Enterprise: A business enterprise that is owned and controlled by one or more minority person(s) or socially and economically disadvantaged individual(s). Minority/Disadvantaged person(s) must collectively own, operate and/or actively manage, and share in payments from such an enterprise in the manner hereinafter set forth: 1. Owned: a. For a sole proprietorship to be deemed a minority business enterprise, it must be owned by a minority person. b. For an enterprise doing business as a partnership, at least 51 percent of the assets or interest in the partnership property must be owned by one or more minority person(s). General Conditions 00 72 00-102 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. For an enterprise doing business as a corporation, at least 51 percent of the assets or interest in the corporate shares must be owned by one or more minority person(s). 2. Controlled: a. The primary power, direct or indirect,to manage a business enterprise rests with a minority person(s). 3. Share in Payments: a. Minority partners, proprietors, or stockholders of the business enterprise must be entitled to receive 51 percent or more of the total profits, bonuses, dividends, interest payments, commissions, consulting fees, rents, procurement, and subcontract payments, and any other monetary distribution paid by the business enterprise. D. Minority: Minority persons include Blacks, Mexican-Americans and other persons of Hispanic origin, American Indians, Alaskan Natives, and Asians or Pacific Islanders. For the purposes of this policy,women are also considered as minorities. E. Socially and economically disadvantaged individual:Any individual who is a citizen (or lawfully admitted permanent resident) of the United States and who has been subjected to racial or ethnic prejudice or cultural bias within American society because of his or her identity as a member of a group and without regard to his or her individual qualities.The social disadvantage must stem from circumstances beyond the individual's control. F. Female Owned Business Enterprise: A sole proprietorship that is owned and controlled by a woman,a partnership at least 51 percent of whose assets or partnership interests are owned by one or more women, or a corporation at least 51 percent of whose assets or interests in the corporate shares are owned by one or more women. G. Joint Venture: A joint venture means an association of two or more persons, partnerships, corporations, or any combination thereof, founded to carry on a single business activity which is limited in scope and direction. The degree to which a joint venture may satisfy the stated MBE goal cannot exceed the proportionate interest of the MBE as a member of the joint venture in the Work to be performed by the joint venture. For example,a joint venture which is to perform 50 percent of the Work itself and in which a minority joint venture partner has a 50 percent interest, shall be deemed equivalent to having minority participation in 25 percent of the Work. Minority members of the joint venture must have financial, managerial, or technical skills in the Work to be performed by the joint venture. 23.03 Goals A. The goals for participation by minorities and Minority Business Enterprises expressed in percentage terms for the Contractor's aggregate workforce on all construction Work for the Contract award shall be 1. Minority participation goal is 45%. 2. Minority Business Enterprise participation goal is 15%. B. These goals are applicable to all the construction work (regardless of federal participation) performed in the Contract, including approved Change Orders. The hours of minority General Conditions 00 72 00-103 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 employment must be substantially uniform throughout the length of the Contract and in each trade. The transfer of minority employees from Contractor to Contractor or from project to project for the sole purpose of meeting the Contractor's percentage is prohibited. 23.04 Compliance A. Upon completion of the Project, a final breakdown of MBE participation, substantiated by copies of paid invoices, shall be submitted by the Contractor to the City Engineer. B. Make bi-weekly payroll submittals to the City Engineer. The Contractor is to indicate the percent of minority and female participation, by trade, which has been utilized on the Project. Along with the request for final payment on the Project,the Contractor will indicate, in writing, the overall participation in these areas which have been achieved. The City Engineer may withhold monthly or final payments to the Contractor for failure to submit bi- weekly payrolls in a timely fashion or to submit overall participation information as required. ARTICLE 24—DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT 24.01 Work Included A. Submit documentation as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the OPT. 24.02 Quality Assurance A. Submit legible, accurate, complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Documents not meeting these criteria will be returned without review. 24.03 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Review documents prior to submitting. Make certifications as required by the Contract Documents and as indicated on forms provided. B. Provide a Schedule of Documents to list the documents that are to be submitted, the dates on which documents are to be sent to the Designer for review, and proposed dates that documents must be returned to comply with the Project schedule. Use the form provided for this list. C. Incorporate the dates for processing documents into the Progress Schedule required by Article 27. 1. Provide documents in accordance with the schedule so construction of the Project is not delayed. 2. Allow a reasonable time for the review of documents when preparing the Progress Schedule. Assume a 14 day review cycle for each document unless a longer period of time is indicated in the Contract Documents or agreed to by Designer and Contractor. 3. Schedule submittal of documents to provide all information for interrelated Work at one time. 4. Allow adequate time for processing documents so construction of the Project is not delayed. General Conditions 00 72 00-104 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 24.04 Document Submittal A. Submit documents through the Designer. Send all documents in digital format for processing. 1. Provide all information requested with a completed Document Transmittal form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable, enter NA in the space provided. 2. The Document Transmittal form is to be the first page in the document submitted. 3. Submit all documents in Portable Document Format (PDF). a. Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. b. Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. c. Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. d. Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the document. e. Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. f. Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. g. Use software to reduce file size using default settings except the option for "Drop Metadata." Uncheck the "Drop Metadata" box when reducing file size. h. Add footers to each document with the Project name. 24.05 Document Numbering A. Assign a number to the documents originated to allow tracking of the documents during the review process. 1. Assign the number consisting of a prefix, a sequence number, and a letter suffix. Prefixes shall be as follows: Prefix Description Originator AP Application for Payment Contractor CO Change Order OAR CID Change Proposal Contractor CTR Certified Test Report Contractor FO Field Order OAR NBC Notification by Contractor Contractor PD Photographic Documentation Contractor General Conditions 00 72 00-105 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Prefix Description Originator RCP Request for a Change Proposal OAR RD Record Data Contractor RFI Request for Information Contractor SD Shop Drawing Contractor SCH Schedule of Progress Contractor 2. Issue sequence numbers in chronological order for each type of document. 3. Issue numbers for resubmittals that have the same number as the original document followed by an alphabetical suffix indicating the number of times the same document has been sent to the Designer for processing. For example: SD 025 A represents Shop Drawing number 25 and the letter "A" designates that this is the second time this document has been sent for review. 4. Clearly note the document number on each page or sheet of the document. 5. Correct assignment of numbers is essential since different document types are processed in different ways. B. Include reference to the Drawing number and/or Specification Section, detail designation, schedule, or location that corresponds with the data on the document transmittal forms. Other identification may also be required, such as layout drawings or schedules to allow the reviewer to determine where a particular product is to be used. 24.06 Document Requirements A. Furnish documents as indicated below or in individual Specification Sections. Submit documents per the procedures described in the Contract Documents. B. Submit documents per the Specification Section shown in the following table: Document Type Section Application for Payment Article 17 Change Proposal Article 12 Certified Test Report Article 25 for approval of product Article 21 to demonstrate compliance Notification by Contractor Article 20 Photographic Documentation Article 28 Progress Schedules Article 27 Record Data Article 26 Request for Information Article 20 Shop Drawing Article 25 Schedule of Values Article 17 Substitutions Article 12 General Conditions 00 72 00-106 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Document Type Section Suppliers and Subcontractors Articles 20 and 26 ARTICLE 25—SHOP DRAWINGS 25.01 Work Included A. Shop Drawings are required for those products that cannot adequately be described in the Contract Documents to allow fabrication, erection, or installation of the product without additional detailed information from the Supplier. B. Submit Shop Drawings as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the OPT to: 1. Record the products incorporated into the Project for the Owner; 2. Provide detailed information for the products proposed for the Project regarding their fabrication, installation, commissioning, and testing; and 3. Allow the Designer to advise the Owner if products proposed for the Project by the Contractor conform, in general,to the design concepts of the Contract Documents. C. Contractor's responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents is not relieved by the review of Shop Drawings, Samples, or mockups. Contract modifications can only be approved by Change Order or Field Order. 25.02 Quality Assurance A. Submit legible, accurate, and complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Shop Drawings not meeting these criteria will be rejected. B. Demonstrate that the proposed products are in full and complete compliance with the design criteria and requirements of the Contract Documents or will be if deviations requested per Paragraph 25.10 are approved. C. Furnish and install products that fully comply with the information included in the document submittal. 25.03 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Provide Shop Drawings as required by Paragraph 25.03 of the Supplementary Conditions. B. Include Shop Drawings in the Schedule of Documents required by Article 24 to indicate the Shop Drawings to be submitted,the dates on which documents are to be sent to the Designer for review and proposed dates that the product will be incorporated into the Project. C. Incorporate the dates for processing Shop Drawings into the Progress Schedule required by Article 27. 1. Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with the schedule so construction of the Project is not delayed. 2. Allow a reasonable time for the review of Shop Drawings when preparing the Progress Schedule. Include time for making revisions to the Shop Drawings and resubmitting the Shop Drawing for a least a second review. Assume a 14-day review cycle for each time General Conditions 00 72 00-107 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 a Shop Drawing is submitted for review unless a longer period of time is indicated in the Contract Documents. 3. Schedule document submittals to provide all information for interrelated Work at one time. 4. Allow adequate time for ordering, fabricating, delivering, and installing product so construction of the Project is not delayed. D. Complete the following before submitting a Shop Drawing or Sample: 1. Prepare Shop Drawing Review and coordinate the Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents; 2. Determine and verify specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials,catalog numbers, and similar information with respect to Shop Drawings and Samples; 3. Determine and verify the suitability of materials and equipment offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and 4. Determine and verify information relative to Contractor's responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. E. Determine and verify: 1. Accurate field measurements, quantities, and dimensions are shown on the Shop Drawings; 2. Location of existing structures, utilities, and equipment related to the Shop Drawing have been shown and conflicts between the products existing structures, utilities, and equipment have been identified; 3. Conflicts that impact the installation of the products have been brought to the attention of the OPT through the Designer; 4. Shop Drawings are complete for their intended purpose; and 5. Conflicts between the Shop Drawings related to the various Subcontractors and Suppliers have been resolved. F. Review Shop Drawings prior to submitting to the Designer. Certify that all Shop Drawings have been reviewed by the Contractor and are in strict conformance with the Contract Documents as modified by Addenda, Change Order, Field Order, or Contract Amendment when submitting Shop Drawings except for deviations specifically brought to the Designer's attention on an attached Shop Drawing Deviation Request form in accordance with Paragraph 25.09. G. Fabrication or installation of any products prior to the approval of Shop Drawings is done at the Contractor's risk. Defective products may be rejected at the Owner's option. H. Payment will not be made for products for which Shop Drawings or Samples are required until these are approved by the Designer. General Conditions 00 72 00-108 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 25.04 Shop Drawing Requirements A. Provide adequate information in Shop Drawings and Samples so Designer can: 1. Assist the Owner in selecting colors,textures, or other aesthetic features. 2. Compare the proposed features of the product with the specified features and advise Owner that the product does, in general, conform to the Contract Documents. 3. Compare the performance features of the proposed product with those specified and advise the Owner that the product does, in general,conform to the performance criteria specified in the Contract Documents. 4. Review required certifications, guarantees, warranties, and service agreements for compliance with the Contract Documents. B. Include a complete description of the product to be furnished, including: 1. Type, dimensions, size, arrangement, and operational characteristics of the product; 2. Weights,gauges,materials of construction,external connections,anchors,and supports required; 3. All applicable standards such as ASTM or Federal specification numbers; 4. Fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, manufacturing instructions, templates, patterns, and coordination drawings; 5. Mix designs for concrete, asphalt, or other materials proportioned for the Project; and 6. Complete and accurate field measurements for products which must fit existing conditions. Indicate on the document submittal that the measurements represent actual dimensions obtained at the Site. C. Submit Shop Drawings that require coordination with other Shop Drawings at the same time. Shop Drawings requiring coordination with other Shop Drawings will be rejected until a complete package is submitted. 25.05 Special Certifications and Reports A. Provide all required certifications with the Shop Drawings as specified in the individual Specification Sections: 1. Certified Test Reports (CTR): A report prepared by an approved testing agency giving results of tests performed on products to indicate their compliance with the Specifications. This report is to demonstrate that the product when installed will meet the requirements and is part of the Shop Drawing. Field tests may be performed by the Owner to determine that in place materials or products meet the same quality as indicated in the CTR submitted as part of the Shop Drawing. 2. Certification of Local Field Service (CLS): A certified letter stating that field service is available from a factory or supplier approved service organization located within a 300 mile radius of the Site. List names, addresses, and telephone numbers of approved service organizations on or attach it to the certificate. 3. Certification of Adequacy of Design (CAD): A certified letter from the manufacturer of the equipment stating that they have designed the equipment to be structurally stable General Conditions 00 72 00-109 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 and to withstand all imposed loads without deformation, failure, or adverse effects to the performance and operational requirements of the unit. The letter shall state that mechanical and electrical equipment is adequately sized to be fully operational for the conditions specified or normally encountered by the product's intended use. 25.06 Warranties and Guarantees A. Provide all required warranties, guarantees, and related documents with the Shop Drawing. The effective date of warranties and guarantees will be the date of acceptance of the Work by the Owner. B. Identify all Extended Warranties, defined as any guarantee of performance for the product or system beyond the 1-year correction period described in the General Conditions. Issue the warranty certificate in the name of the Owner. Provide a Warranty Bond for Extended Warranties if required by Specification Sections. C. Provide a copy of all warranties in a separate document in accordance with Article 29. 25.07 Shop Drawing Submittal Procedures A. Submit Shop Drawings through the Designer. Send all documents in digital format for processing. 1. Provide all information requested in the Shop Drawing submittal form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable,enter NA in the space provided. The Shop Drawing submittal form is to be the first document in the file submitted. 2. Submit all documents in Portable Document Format(PDF). a. Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. b. Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. c. Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. d. Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the Shop Drawing. Submit Samples and color charts per Paragraph 25.08.A. e. Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. f. Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. g. Use software to reduce file size using default settings except the option for "Drop Metadata." Uncheck the "Drop Metadata" box when reducing file size. h. Add footers to each document with the Project name. General Conditions 00 72 00-110 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 3. Submit each specific product or class of material separately so these can be tracked and processed independently. Do not submit Shop Drawings for more than one product in the same Shop Drawing. 4. Submit items specified in different Specification Sections separately unless they are part of an integrated system. 5. Define abbreviations and symbols used in Shop Drawings. a. Use terms and symbols in Shop Drawings consistent with the Contract Drawings. b. Provide a list of abbreviations and their meaning as used in the Shop Drawings. c. Provide a legend for symbols used on Shop Drawings. 6. Mark Shop Drawings to reference: a. Related Specification Sections, b. Drawing number and detail designation, c. Product designation or name, d. Schedule references, e. System into which the product is incorporated, and f. Location where the product is incorporated into the Project. B. Use the following conventions to markup Shop Drawings for review: 1. Make comments and corrections in the color blue. Add explanatory comments to the markup. 2. Highlight items in black that are not being furnished when the Supplier's standard drawings or information sheets are provided so that only the products to be provided are in their original color. 3. Make comments in the color yellow where selections or decisions by the Designer are required, but such selections do not constitute a deviation from the Contract Documents. Add explanatory comments to the markup to indicate the action to be taken by the Designer. 4. Make comments in the color orange that are deviation requests. Include the deviation request number on the Shop Drawing that corresponds to the deviation request on the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. Include explanatory comments in the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. 5. Mark dimensions with the prefix FD to indicate field verified dimensions on the Shop Drawings. C. Submit a Change Proposal per Article 12 to request modifications to the Contract Documents, including those for approval of"or equal" products when specifically allowed by the Contract Documents or as a substitution for specified products or procedures. D. Designate a Shop Drawing as requiring priority treatment in the comment section of the Shop Drawing submittal form to place the review of the Shop Drawing ahead of other Shop Drawings previously delivered. Shop Drawings are typically reviewed in the order received, unless Contractor requests that a different priority be assigned. Priority Shop Drawings will General Conditions 00 72 00-111 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 be reviewed before other Shop Drawings for this Project already received but not yet reviewed. Use of this priority designation for Shop Drawings may delay the review of Shop Drawings previously submitted, pushing the processing of Shop Drawings beyond the 14-day target. Contractor is responsible for delays resulting from the use of the priority designation status on Shop Drawings. E. Complete the certification required by Paragraph 25.03. 25.08 Sample and Mockup Submittal Procedures A. Submit color charts and Samples for every product requiring color, texture, or finish selection. 1. Submit color charts and Samples only after Shop Drawings for the products have been approved. 2. Deliver all color charts and Samples at one time. 3. Provide Samples of adequate size to clearly illustrate the functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and attachment devices. 4. Indicate the full range of color, texture, and patterns. 5. Deliver color charts and Samples to the field office and store for the duration of the Project 6. Notify the Designer that color charts and Samples have been delivered for approval using the Notification by Contractor form. 7. Submit color charts and Samples not less than 30 days prior to when these products are to be ordered or released for fabrication to comply with the Project schedule. 8. Remove Samples that have been rejected. Submit new Samples following the same process as for the initial Sample until Samples are approved. 9. Dispose of Samples when related Work has been completed and approved and disposal is approved by the Designer. At Owner's option, Samples will become the property of the Owner. B. Construct mockups for comparison with the Work being performed. 1. Construct mockups from the actual products to be used in construction per detailed Specification Sections. 2. Construct mockups of the size and in the area indicated in the Contract Documents. 3. Construct mockups complete with texture and finish to represent the finished product. 4. Notify the Designer that mockups have been constructed and are ready for approval using the Notification by Contractor form. Allow 2 weeks for OPT to approve of the mockup before beginning the Work represented by the mockup. 5. Remove mockups that have been rejected. Construct new mockups following the same process as for the initial mockup until mockup is approved. 6. Protect mockups until Work has been completed and accepted by the OPT. General Conditions 00 72 00-112 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 7. Dispose of mockups when related Work has been completed and disposal is approved by the Designer. 25.09 Equal Non Specified Products A. Contractor may submit other manufacturers' products that are in full compliance with the Specification where Specifications list one or more manufacturers followed by the phase "or equal" or"or approved equal." 1. Submit a Shop Drawing as required by this article to document that the proposed product is equal or superior to the specified product. 2. Prove that the product is equal. It is not the OPT's responsibility to prove the product is not equal. a. Indicate on a point by point basis for each specified feature that the product is equal to the Contract Document requirements. b. Make a direct comparison with the specified manufacturer's published data sheets and available information. Provide this printed material with the Shop Drawing. c. The decision of the Designer regarding the acceptability of the proposed product is final. 3. Provide a typewritten certification that, in furnishing the proposed product as an equal, the Contractor: a. Has thoroughly examined the proposed product and has determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to the product specified. b. Has determined that the product will perform in the same manner and result in the same process as the specified product. c. Will provide the same warranties and/or bonds as for the product specified. d. Will assume all responsibility to coordinate any modifications that may be necessary to incorporate the product into the construction and will waive all claims for additional Work which may be necessary to incorporate the product into the Project which may subsequently become apparent. e. Will maintain the same time schedule as for the specified product. 25.10 Requests for Deviation A. Submit requests for deviation from the Contract Documents for any product that does not fully comply with the Contract Documents. B. Submit requests for deviation using the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form provided. Identify each deviation request as a separate item. Include all requested deviations that must be approved as a group together and identify them as a single item. C. Include a description of why the deviation is required and the impact on Contract Price or Contract Times. Include the amount of any cost savings to the Owner for deviations that result in a reduction in cost. D. Submit as a Change Proposal prior to submitting the Shop Drawing if the deviation will result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. General Conditions 00 72 00-113 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. A Modification must be issued by the Designer for approval of a deviation. Approval of a requested Shop Drawing deviation by the Designer on the Shop Drawings Deviation Request form indicates approval of the requested deviation only on its technical merits as generally conforming to the Contract Documents. Deviations from the Contract Documents can only be approved by a Modification. 25.11 Designer Responsibilities A. Shop Drawings will be received by the Designer. Designer will log the documents and review per this Article for general conformance with the Contract Documents. 1. Designer's review and approval will be only to determine if the products described in the Shop Drawing or Sample will, after installation or incorporation into the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. 2. Designer's review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences,or procedures of construction or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. 3. Designer's review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. B. Comments will be made on items called to the attention of the Designer for review and comment. Any marks made by the Designer do not constitute a blanket review of the document submittal or relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors or deviations from the Contract requirements. 1. Designer will respond to Contractor's markups by either making markups directly in the Shop Drawings file using the color green or by attaching a Document Review Comments form with review comments. 2. Shop Drawings that are reviewed will be returned with one or more of the following status designations: a. Approved: Shop Drawing is found to be acceptable as submitted. b. Approved as Noted: Shop Drawing is Approved so long as corrections or notations made by Designer are incorporated into the Show Drawing. C. Not Approved: Shop Drawing or products described are not acceptable. 3. Shop Drawing will also be designated for one of the following actions: a. Final distribution: Shop Drawing is acceptable without further action and has been filed as a record document. b. Shop Drawing not required: A Shop Drawing was not required by the Contract Documents. Resubmit the document per Article 26. c. Cancelled: This action indicates that for some reason, the Shop Drawing is to be removed from consideration and all efforts regarding the processing of that document are to cease. General Conditions 00 72 00-114 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 d. Revise and resubmit: Shop Drawing has deviations from the Contract Documents, significant errors, or is inadequate and must be revised and resubmitted for subsequent review. e. Resubmit with corrections made: Shop Drawing is "Approved as Noted," but has significant markups. Make correction and notations to provide a revised document with markup incorporated into the original document so that no markups are required. f. Returned without review due to excessive deficiencies: Document does not meet the requirement of the Specifications for presentation or content to the point where continuing to review the document would be counterproductive to the review process or clearly does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. Revise the Shop Drawing to comply with the requirements of this Section and resubmit. g. Actions a through c will close out the Shop Drawing review process and no further action is required as a Shop Drawing. Actions d through f require follow up action to close out the review process. 4. Drawings with a significant or substantial number of markings by the Contractor may be marked "Approved as Noted" and "Resubmit with corrections made." These drawings are to be revised to provide a clean record of the Shop Drawing. Proceed with ordering products as the documents are revised. 5. Dimensions or other data that does not appear to conform to the Contract Documents will be marked as "At Variance With" (AVW) the Contract Documents or other information provided. The Contractor is to make revisions as appropriate to comply with the Contract Documents. C. Bring deviations to the Shop Drawings to the attention of the Designer for approval by using the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. Use a single line for each requested deviation so the Status and Action for each deviation can be determined for that requested deviation. If approval or rejection of a requested deviation will impact other requested deviations, then all related deviations should be included in that requested deviation line so the status and action can be determined on the requested deviation as a whole. D. Requested deviations will be reviewed as possible Modification to the Contract Documents. 1. A Requested deviation will be rejected as "Not Approved" if the requested deviation is unacceptable. Contractor is to revise and resubmit the Shop Drawing with corrections for approval. 2. A Field Order will be issued by the Designer for deviations approved by the Designer if the requested deviation is acceptable and if the requested deviation will not result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. Requested deviations from the Contract Documents may only be approved by Field Order. 3. A requested deviation will be rejected if the requested deviation is acceptable but the requested deviation will or should result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. Submit any requested deviation that requires a change in Contract Price or Contract Times as a Change Proposal for approval prior to resubmitting the Shop Drawing. General Conditions 00 72 00-115 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Contractor is to resubmit the Shop Drawing until it is acceptable and marked Approved or Approved as Noted and is assigned an action per Paragraph 25.11 that indicates that the Shop Drawing process is closed. F. Information that is submitted as a Shop Drawings that should be submitted as Record Data or other type of document, or is not required may be returned without review, or may be deleted. No further action is required and the Shop Drawing process for this document will be closed. 25.12 Resubmission Requirements A. Make all corrections or changes in the documents required by the Designer and resubmit to the Designer until approved. 1. Revise initial drawings or data and resubmit as specified for the original document. 2. Highlight or cloud in green those revisions which have been made in response to the previous reviews by the Designer. This will include changes previously highlighted or clouded in yellow to direct attention to Designer to items requiring selections or decisions by the Designer or highlighted or clouded in orange for a requested deviation from the Contract Documents. 3. Highlight and cloud new items in yellow where selections or decisions by the Designer are required, but such selections do not constitute a deviation from the Contract Documents. Add explanatory comments to the markup to indicate the action to be taken by the Designer. 4. Highlight and cloud new items in orange that are deviation requests. Include the deviation request number on the Shop Drawing that corresponds to the deviation request on the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. Numbering for these new items is to start with the next number following the last Shop Drawing deviation requested. Include explanatory comments in the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. B. Pay for excessive review of Shop Drawings. 1. Excessive review of Shop Drawings is defined as any review required after the original review has been made and the first resubmittal has been checked to see that corrections have been made. 2. Review of Shop Drawings or Samples will be an additional service requiring payment by the Contractor if the Contractor submits a substitution for a product for which a Shop Drawing or Sample has previously been approved, unless the need for such change is beyond the control of Contractor. 3. Cost for additional review time will be billed to the Owner by the Designer for the actual hours required for the review of Shop Drawings by Designer and in accordance with the rates listed in SECTION 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. 4. A Set-off will be included in each Application for Payment to pay costs for the additional review to the Owner on a monthly basis. The Set-off will be based on invoices submitted to Owner for these services. General Conditions 00 72 00-116 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 5. Need for more than one resubmission or any other delay of obtaining Designer's review of Shop Drawings will not entitle the Contractor to an adjustment in Contract Price or an extension of Contract Times. ARTICLE 26—RECORD DATA 26.01 Work Included A. Submit Record Data as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the OPT. Provide Record Data for all products unless a Shop Drawing is required for the same item. B. Submit Record Data to provide documents that allow the Owner to: 1. Record the products incorporated into the Project for the Owner; 2. Review detailed information about the products regarding their fabrication,installation, commissioning, and testing; and 3. Provide replacement or repair of the products at some future date. C. Contractor's responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents is not relieved by the receipt or cursory review of Record Data. Contract modifications can only be approved by Change Order or Field Order. D. Provide various reports or other documents that Contract Documents require for record purposes. 26.02 Quality Assurance A. Submit legible, accurate, and complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Record Data not meeting these criteria will be rejected. 26.03 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Submit Record Data in accordance with SECTION 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. B. Include Record Data in the Schedule of Documents required by Article 24 to indicate the Record Data to be submitted,the dates on which documents are to be sent to the Designer for review, and proposed dates that the product will be incorporated into the Project. C. Complete the following before submitting Record Data: 1. Prepare Record Data and coordinate with Shop Drawings or Samples, other Record Data, and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents; 2. Determine and verify specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar information; 3. Determine and verify the suitability of materials and equipment offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and 4. Determine and verify information relative to Contractor's responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. General Conditions 00 72 00-117 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 D. Determine and verify: 1. Accurate field measurements, quantities, and dimensions are shown on the Record Data; 2. Location of existing structures, utilities, and equipment related to the Record Data have been shown and conflicts between the products existing structures, utilities, and equipment have been identified; 3. Conflicts that impact the installation of the products have been brought to the attention of the OPT through the Designer; 4. Record Data are complete for their intended purpose; and 5. Conflicts between the Record Data related to the various Subcontractors and Suppliers have been resolved. E. Review Record Data prior to submitting to the Designer. Certify that all Record Data has been reviewed by the Contractor and is in strict conformance with the Contract Documents as modified by Addenda, Change Order, Field Order, or Contract Amendment when submitting Record Data. 26.04 Record Data Requirements A. Include a complete description of the material or equipment to be furnished, including: 1. Type,dimensions,size,arrangement,model number,and operational parameters of the components; 2. Weights,gauges,materials of construction,external connections,anchors,and supports required; 3. All applicable standards such as ASTM or Federal specification numbers; 4. Fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, manufacturing instructions, templates, patterns, and coordination drawings; 5. Mix designs for concrete, asphalt or other materials proportioned for the Project; and 6. Complete and accurate field measurements for products which must fit existing conditions. Indicate on the document submittal that the measurements represent actual dimensions obtained at the Site. 26.05 Special Certifications and Reports A. Provide all required certifications with the Record Data as specified in the individual Specification Sections: 1. Certified Test Reports (CTR): A report prepared by an approved testing agency giving results of tests performed on products to indicate their compliance with the Specifications. This report is to demonstrate that the product when installed will meet the requirements and is part of the Record Data. Field tests may be performed by the Owner to determine that in place materials or products meet the same quality as indicated in the CTR submitted as part of the Record Data. General Conditions 00 72 00-118 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 26.06 Warranties and Guarantees A. Provide all required warranties, guarantees, and related documents with the Record Data. The effective date of warranties and guarantees will be the date of acceptance of the Work by the Owner. B. Identify all Extended Warranties, defined as any guarantee of performance for the product or system beyond the 1 year correction period described in the General Conditions. Issue the warranty certificate in the name of the Owner. Provide a Warranty Bond for Extended Warranties if required. C. Provide a copy of all warranties in a separate document in accordance with Article 29. 26.07 Record Data Submittal Procedures A. Submit Record Data through the Designer. Send all documents in digital format for processing. 1. Provide all information requested in the Record Data submittal form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable,enter NA in the space provided. The Record Data submittal form is to be the first document in the file. 2. Submit all documents in Portable Document Format (PDF). a. Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. b. Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. c. Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. d. Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the Record Data. e. Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. f. Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. g. Use software to reduce file size using default settings except the option for "Drop Metadata." Uncheck the "Drop Metadata" box when reducing file size. h. Add footers to each document with the Project name. 3. Submit each specific product, class of material, or product separately so these can be tracked and processed independently. Do not submit Record Data for more than one system in the same Record Data. 4. Submit items specified in different Specification Sections separately unless they are part of an integrated system. 5. Define abbreviations and symbols used in Record Data. General Conditions 00 72 00-119 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 a. Use terms and symbols in Record Data consistent with the Contract Drawings. b. Provide a list of abbreviations and their meaning as used in the Record Data. C. Provide a legend for symbols used on Record Data. 6. Mark Record Data to reference: a. Related Specification Sections, b. Drawing number and detail designation, c. Product designation or name, d. Schedule references, e. System into which the product is incorporated, and f. Location where the product is incorporated into the Project. B. Submit a Change Proposal per Article 12 to request modifications to the Contract Documents, including those for approval of"or equal" products when specifically allowed by the Contract Documents or as a substitution for specified products or procedures. Deviations from the Contract Documents can only be approved by a Modification. C. Complete the certification required by Paragraph 26.03. 26.08 Designer's Responsibilities A. Record Data will be received by the Designer, logged, and provided to Owner as the Project record. 1. Record Data may be reviewed to see that the information provided is adequate for the purpose intended. Record Data not meeting the requirements of Paragraph 26.02 may be rejected as unacceptable. 2. Record Data is not reviewed for compliance with the Contract Documents. Comments may be returned if deviations from the Contract Documents are noted during the cursory review performed to see that the information is adequate. 3. Contractor's responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents is not relieved by the review of Record Data. Contract modifications can only be approved by a Modification. B. Designer may take the following action in processing Record Data: 1. File Record Data as received if the cursory review indicates that the document meets the requirements of Paragraph 26.02. Document will be given the status of "Filed as Received" and no further action is required on that Record Data. 2. Reject the Record Data for one of the following reasons: a. The document submittal requirements of the Contract Documents indicate that the document submitted as Record Data should have been submitted as a Shop Drawing. The Record Data will be marked "Rejected" and "Submit Shop Drawing." No further action is required on this document as Record Data and the Record Data process will be closed. Resubmit the document as a Shop Drawing per Article 25. General Conditions 00 72 00-120 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 b. The cursory review indicates that the document does not meet the requirements of Paragraph 26.02. The Record Data will be marked "Rejected" and "Revise and Resubmit." Contractor is to resubmit the Record Data until it is acceptable and marked "Filed as Received." When Record Data is filed, no further action is required, and the Record Data process will be closed. c. The Record Data is not required by the Contract Documents nor is the Record Data applicable to the Project. The Record Data will be marked "Rejected" and "Cancel -Not Required." No further action is required,and the Record Data process will be closed. C. Contractor is to resubmit the Record Data until it is acceptable and marked "Filed as Received." ARTICLE 27—CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 27.01 Requirements A. Prepare and submit a Progress Schedule for the Work and update the schedule on a monthly basis for the duration of the Project. B. Provide schedule in adequate detail to allow Owner to monitor progress and to relate document processing to sequential activities of the Work. C. Incorporate and specifically designate the dates of anticipated submission of documents and the dates when documents must be returned to the Contractor into the schedule. D. Assume complete responsibility for maintaining the progress of the Work per the schedule submitted. E. Schedule Work based upon a six day work week. 27.02 Document Submittal A. Submit Progress Schedules in accordance with Article 24. B. Submit a preliminary schedule within 10 days after the Notice of Award. The schedule is to be available at the pre-construction conference. C. Submit a detailed schedule at least 10 days prior to the first payment request. D. Submit Progress Schedule updates monthly with Applications for Payment to indicate the progress made on the Project to that date. Failure to submit the schedule may cause delay in the review and approval of Applications for Payment. 27.03 Schedule Requirements A. Schedule is to be in adequate detail to: 1. Assure adequate planning, scheduling, and reporting during the execution of the Work; 2. Assure the coordination of the Work of the Contractor and the various Subcontractors and Suppliers; 3. Assist in monitoring the progress of the Work; and General Conditions 00 72 00-121 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4. Assist in evaluating proposed changes to the Contract Times and Project schedule. B. Provide personnel with 5 years' minimum experience in scheduling construction work comparable to this Project. Prepare the schedule using acceptable scheduling software. C. Provide the schedule in the form of a computer generated critical path schedule which includes Work to be performed on the Project. It is intended that the schedule accomplish the following: 1. Give early warning of delays in time for correction. 2. Provide detailed plans for the execution of the Work in the form of future activities and events in sequential relationships. 3. Establish relationships of significant planned Work activities and provide a logical sequence for planned Work activities. 4. Provide continuous current status information. 5. Allow analysis of the Contractor's program for the completion of the Project. 6. Permit schedules to be revised when the existing schedule is not achievable. 7. Log the progress of the Work as it actually occurs. D. Prepare a time scaled CPM arrow or precedence diagram to indicate each activity and its start and stop dates. 1. Develop Milestone dates and Project completion dates to conform to time constraints, sequencing requirements and Contract completion date. 2. Use calendar day durations while accounting for holidays and weather conditions in the projection of the duration of each activity. 3. Clearly indicate the critical path for Work to complete the Project. E. Provide a time scaled horizontal bar chart which indicates graphically the Work scheduled at any time during the Project. The chart is to indicate: 1. Complete sequence of construction by activity; 2. Identification of the activity by structure, location, and type of Work; 3. Chronological order of the start of each item of Work; 4. The activity start and stop dates; 5. The activity duration; 6. Successor and predecessor relationships for each activity; 7. A clearly indicated single critical path; and 8. Projected percentage of completion, based on dollar value of the Work included in each activity as of the first day of each month. F. Provide a schedule incorporating the Schedule of Documents provided in accordance with Article 24 indicating: 1. Specific date each document is to be delivered to the Designer. 2. Specific date each document must be received in order to meet the proposed schedule. General Conditions 00 72 00-122 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 3. Allow a reasonable time to review documents, taking into consideration the size and complexity of the document, other documents being processed, and other factors that may affect review time. 4. Allow time for re-submission of each document. Contractor is responsible for delays associated with additional time required to review incomplete or erroneous documents and for time lost when documents are submitted for products that do not meet Specification requirements. 27.04 Schedule Revisions A. Revise the schedule if it appears that the schedule no longer represents the actual progress of the Work. 1. Submit a written report if the schedule indicates that the Project is more than 30 days behind schedule. The report is to include: a. Number of days behind schedule; b. Narrative description of the steps to be taken to bring the Project back on schedule; and c. Anticipated time required to bring the Project back on schedule. 2. Submit a revised schedule indicating the action that the Contractor proposes to take to bring the Project back on schedule. B. Revise the schedule to indicate any adjustments in Contract Times approved by Modification. 1. Include a revised schedule with Change Proposals if a change in Contract Times is requested. 2. OPT will deem any Change Proposal that does not have a revised schedule and request for a change in Contract Times as having no impact on the ability of the Contractor to complete the Project within the Contract Times. C. Updating the Project schedule to reflect actual progress is not considered a revision to the Project schedule. D. Applications for Payment may not be recommended for payment without a revised schedule and if required, the report indicating the Contractor's plan for bringing the Project back on schedule. 27.OS Float Time A. Define float time as the amount of time between the earliest start date and the latest start date of a chain of activities on the construction schedule. B. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either the Contractor or Owner. C. Where several subsystems each have a critical path, the subsystem with the longest time of completion is the critical path and float time is to be assigned to other subsystems. D. Contract Times cannot be changed by the submission of a schedule. Contract Times can only be modified by a Change Order or Contract Amendment. General Conditions 00 72 00-123 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Schedule completion date must be the same as the Contract completion date. Time between the end of construction and the Contract completion date is float time. ARTICLE 28—VIDEO AND PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 28.01 Work Included A. Provide a video recording of the Site prior to the beginning of construction. 1. Record the condition of all existing facilities in or abutting the construction area (right- of-way)including but not limited to streets,curb and gutter, utilities,driveways,fencing, landscaping, etc. 2. Record after construction staking is complete but prior to any clearing. 3. Provide one copy of the recording, dated and labeled to the OAR before the start of construction. Provide additional recording as directed by the OAR if the recording provided is not considered suitable for the purpose of recording pre-existing conditions. B. Furnish an adequate number of photographs of the Site to clearly depict the completed Project. 1. Provide a minimum of ten different views. 2. Photograph a panoramic view of the entire Site. 3. Photograph all significant areas of completed construction. 4. Completion photographs are not to be taken until all construction trailers, excess materials, trash, and debris have been removed. 5. Employ a professional photographer approved by the OAR to photograph the Project. 6. Provide one aerial photograph of the Site from an angle and height to include the entire Site while providing adequate detail. C. All photographs, video recordings, and a digital copy of this media are to become the property of the Owner. Photographs or recordings may not be used for publication,or public or private display without the written consent of the Owner. 28.02 Quality Assurance A. Provide clear photographs and recordings taken with proper exposure. View photographs and recordings in the field and take new photographs or recordings immediately if photos of an adequate print quality cannot be produced or video quality is not adequate. Provide photographs with adequate quality and resolution to permit enlargements. 28.03 Document Submittal A. Submit photographic documentation as Record Data in accordance with Article 24. B. Submit two DVDs of the video recording as Record Data in accordance with Article 24. General Conditions 00 72 00-124 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 28.04 Photographs A. Provide photographs in digital format with a minimum resolution of 1280 x 960, accomplished without a digital zoom. B. Take photographs at locations acceptable to the OAR. C. Provide two color prints of each photograph and a digital copy on a DVD of each photograph taken. D. Identify each print on back with: 1. Project name. 2. Date,time, location, and orientation of the exposure. 3. Description of the subject of photograph. E. Submit photographs in clear plastic sheets designed for photographs. Place only one photograph in each sheet to allow the description on the back to be read without removing the photograph. F. Final photographs are to include two 8-by-10-inch glossy color prints for each of ten photographs selected by the OAR. These photographs are in addition to normal prints. 28.05 Video Recording A. Provide digital format on DVD that can be played with Windows Media Player in common format in full screen mode. B. Identify Project on video by audio or visual means. C. Video file size should not exceed 400 MB. D. Video resolution shall be 1080p. E. The quality of the video must be sufficient to determine the existing conditions of the construction area. Camera panning must be performed while at rest, do not pan the camera while walking or driving. Camera pans should be performed at intervals sufficient to clearly view the entire construction area. F. DVD shall be labeled with construction stationing and stationing should be called out, voice recorded, in the video. G. The entire construction area recording shall be submitted at once. Sections submitted separately will not be accepted. H. Pipeline projects should be recorded linearly from beginning to end. ARTICLE 29—EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT 29.01 Substantial Completion A. Notify the OAR that the Work or a designated portion of the Work is substantially complete per the General Conditions. Include a list of the items remaining to be completed or corrected before the Project will be considered to be complete. General Conditions 00 72 00-125 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. OPT will visit the Site to observe the Work within 30 days after notification is received to determine the status of the Project. C. OAR will notify the Contractor, within 120 days after notification, that the Work is either substantially complete or that additional Work must be performed before the Project will be considered substantially complete. 1. OAR will notify the Contractor of items that must be completed before the Project will be considered substantially complete. 2. Correct the noted deficiencies in the Work. 3. Notify the OAR when the items of Work in the OAR's notice have been completed. 4. OPT will revisit the Site and repeat the process. 5. OAR will issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion to the Contractor when the OPT considers the Project to be substantially complete. The Certificate will include a tentative list of items to be corrected before Final Payment will be recommended. 6. Review the list and notify the OAR of any objections to items on the list within 10 days after receiving the Certificate of Substantial Completion. 29.02 Final Inspections A. Notify the OAR when: 1. Work has been completed in compliance with the Contract Documents; 2. Equipment and systems have been tested per Contract Documents and are fully operational; 3. Final Operations and Maintenance Manuals have been provided to the Owner and all operator training has been completed; 4. Specified spare parts and special tools have been provided; and 5. Work is complete and ready for final inspection. B. OPT will visit the Site to determine if the Project is complete and ready for Final Payment within 30 days after the notice is received. C. Designer will notify the Contractor that the Project is complete or will notify the Contractor that Work is Defective. D. Take immediate steps to correct Defective Work. Notify the Designer when Defective Work has been corrected. OPT will visit the Site to determine if the Project is complete and the Work is acceptable. OAR will notify the Contractor that the Project is complete or will notify the Contractor that Work is Defective. E. Submit the Request for Final Payment with the closeout documents described in Paragraph 29.04 if notified that the Project is complete, and the Work is acceptable. 29.03 Reinspection Fees A. Owner may impose a Set-off against the Application for Payment in accordance with the General Conditions to compensate the OPT for additional visits to the Project if additional Work is required. General Conditions 00 72 00-126 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 29.04 Closeout Documents Submittal A. Record Documents per Article 20. B. Warranties and bonds. C. Equipment installation reports on equipment. D. Shop Drawings, Record Data, and other documents as required by the Contract Documents. E. Evidence of continuing insurance and bond coverage as required by the Contract Documents. F. Final Photographs per Article 28. 29.05 Transfer of Utilities A. If applicable to the Project,transfer utilities to the Owner when the Certificate of Substantial Completion has been issued and the Work has been occupied by the Owner. B. Submit final meter readings for utilities and similar data as of the date the Owner occupied the Work. 29.06 Warranties, Bonds and Service Agreements A. Provide warranties, bonds, and service agreements required by the Contract Documents. B. The date for the start of warranties, bonds, and service agreements is established per the Contract Documents. C. Compile warranties, bonds, and service agreements and review these documents for compliance with the Contract Documents. 1. Provide a log of all equipment covered under the 1-year correction period specified in the Contract Documents and all products for which special or extended warranties or guarantees are provided. Index the log by Specification Section number on forms provided. Include items 2.e through 2.g below in the tabulation. 2. Provide a copy of specific warranties or guarantees under a tab indexed to the log. Each document is to include: a. A description of the product or Work item; b. The firm name with the name of the principal, address, and telephone number; c. Signature of the respective Supplier or Subcontractor to acknowledge existence of the warranty obligation for extended warranties and service agreements; d. Scope of warranty, bond, or service agreement; e. Indicate the start date for the correction period specified in the Contract Documents for each product and the date on which the specified correction period expires. f. Indicate the start date for extended warranties for each product and the date on which the specified extended warranties period expires. g. Start date, warranty or guarantee period, and expiration date for each warranty, bond, and service agreement; General Conditions 00 72 00-127 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 h. Procedures to be followed in the event of a failure; and i. Specific instances that might invalidate the warranty or bond. D. Submit digital copies of the documents to the Designer for review. E. Submit warranties, bonds, and service agreements within 10 days after equipment or components are placed in service. ARTICLE 30—MISCELLANEOUS 30.01 Computation of Times A. Exclude the first day and include the last day when determining dates for a period of time referred to in the Contract Documents by days. The last day of this period is to be omitted from the determination if it falls on a Sunday or a legal holiday. B. All references and conditions for a Calendar Day Contract in the Contract Documents apply for a Fixed Date Contract. A Fixed Date Contract is one in which the calendar dates for reaching Substantial Completion and/or final completion are specified in lieu of identifying the number of days involved. 30.02 Owner's Right to Audit Contractor's Records A. By execution of the Contract, Contractor grants Owner the right to audit, examine, inspect and/or copy, at Owner's election at all reasonable times during the term of this Contract and for a period of four (4) years following the completion or termination of the Work, all of Contractor's written and electronically stored records and billings relating to the performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. The audit, examination or inspection may be performed by an Owner designee,which may include its internal auditors or an outside representative engaged by Owner. Contractor agrees to retain its records for a minimum of four(4)years following termination of the Contract, unless there is an ongoing dispute under the Contract,then, such retention period must extend until final resolution of the dispute. As used in these General Conditions, "Contractor written and electronically stored records" include any and all information, materials and data of every kind and character generated as a result of the work under this Contract. Examples of Contractor written and electronically stored records include, but are not limited to:accounting data and reports, billings, books, general ledgers, cost ledgers, invoices, production sheets, documents, correspondence, meeting notes, subscriptions, agreements, purchase orders, leases, contracts, commitments, arrangements, notes, daily diaries, reports, drawings, receipts, vouchers, memoranda, time sheets, payroll records, policies, procedures, Subcontractor agreements, Supplier agreements, rental equipment proposals, federal and state tax filings for any issue in question, along with any and all other agreements, sources of information and matters that may, in Owner's sole judgment, have any bearing on or pertain to any matters, rights, duties or obligations under or covered by any Contract Documents. B. Owner agrees to exercise the right to audit, examine or inspect Contractor's records only during regular business hours. Contractor agrees to allow Owner and/or Owner's designee access to all of the Contractor's Records, Contractor's facilities, and current or former employees of Contractor, deemed necessary by Owner or its designee(s), to perform such audit, inspection or examination. Contractor also agrees to provide adequate and General Conditions 00 72 00-128 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 appropriate work space necessary for Owner or its designees to conduct such audits, inspections or examinations. C. Contractor must include this Paragraph 30.02 in any Subcontractor, supplier or vendor contract. 30.03 Independent Contractor A. Contractor is to perform its duties under this Contract as an independent contractor. The Contractor's Team and their personnel are not considered to be employees or agents of the Owner. Nothing in this Contract is to be interpreted as granting Contractor's Team the right or authority to make commitments for the Owner. This Contract does not constitute or create a joint venture, partnership or formal business organization of any kind. 30.04 Cumulative Remedies A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies available to the Owner or Contractor by these General Conditions are in addition to, and are not a limitation of,the rights and remedies which are otherwise imposed or available by: 1. Laws or Regulations; 2. Special warranties or guarantees; or 3. Other provisions of the Contract Documents. B. The provisions of this Paragraph 30.04 are as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty, obligation, right and remedy to which they apply. 30.05 Limitation of Damages A. Owner is not liable to Contractor for claims, costs, losses or damages sustained by Contractor's Team associated with other projects or anticipated projects. B. Contractor waives claims for consequential damages, incidental or special damages arising out of or relating to this Contract, whether the damages are claimed in contract, tort or on any other basis. 30.06 No Waiver A. The failure of Owner or Contractor to enforce any provision of this Contract does not constitute a waiver of that provision or affect the enforceability of that provision or the remainder of this Contract. 30.07 Severability A. If a court of competent jurisdiction renders a part of this Contract invalid or unenforceable, that part is to be severed and the remainder of this Contract continues in full force. General Conditions 00 72 00-129 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 30.08 Survival of Obligations A. Representations, indemnifications, warranties, guarantees and continuing obligations required by the Contract Documents survive completion and acceptance of the Work or termination of the Contract. 30.09 No Third Party Beneficiaries A. Nothing in this Contract can be construed to create rights in any entity other than the Owner and Contractor. Neither the Owner nor Contractor intends to create third party beneficiaries by entering into this Contract. 30.10 Assignment of Contract A. This Contract may not be assigned in whole or in part by the Contractor without the prior written consent of the Owner. 30.11 No Waiver of Sovereign Immunity A. The Owner has not waived its sovereign immunity by entering into and performing its obligations under this Contract. B. This Contract is to perform a governmental function solely for the public benefit. 30.12 Controlling Law A. This Contract is governed by the laws of the State of Texas without regard to its conflicts of laws. Venue for legal proceedings lies exclusively in Nueces County, Texas. Cases must be filed and tried in Nueces County and cannot be removed from Nueces County,Texas. 30.13 Conditions Precedent to Right to Sue A. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary,Contractor will have at least 90 days to give notice of a claim for damages as a condition precedent to the right to sue on the Contract, subject to the contractual Claims and Alternative Dispute Resolution processes set forth herein. 30.14 Waiver of Trial by Jury A. Owner and Contractor agree that they have knowingly waived and do hereby waive the right to trial by jury and have instead agreed, in the event of any litigation arising out of or connected to this Contract, to proceed with a trial before the court, unless both parties subsequently agree otherwise in writing. 30.15 Attorney Fees A. The Parties expressly agree that, in the event of litigation, all parties waive rights to payment of attorneys' fees that otherwise might be recoverable, pursuant to the Texas Civil Practice and Remedies Code Chapter 38, Texas Local Government Code §271.153, the Prompt Payment Act, common law or any other provision for payment of attorney's fees. General Conditions 00 72 00-130 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 30.16 Compliance with Laws A. Comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 as amended (ADA) and Texas Architectural Barriers Act and all regulations relating to either statute. B. No qualified person shall on the basis of race, color, religion, national origin, gender, age or disability be excluded from participation in, be denied the benefits of, or be subjected to discrimination under any program or activity which receives or benefits from federal financial assistance. C. Comply with all applicable federal, state and city laws, rules and regulations. D. Each applicable provision and clause required by law to be inserted into the Contract shall be deemed to be enacted herein,and the Contract shall be read and enforced as though each were physically included herein. 30.17 Enforcement A. The City Manager or designee and the City Attorney or designee are fully authorized and will have the right to enforce all legal rights and obligations under the Contract without further authorization from City Council. 30.18 Subject to Appropriation A. Funds are appropriated by the Owner on a yearly basis. If for any reason, funds are not appropriated in any given year,the Owner may direct immediate suspension or termination of the Contract with no additional liability to the Owner. If the Contractor is terminated or suspended and the Owner requests remobilization at a later date, the Contractor may request payment for reasonable demobilization/remobilization costs. Such costs shall be addressed through a Change Order to the Contract. Under no circumstances may a provision or obligation under this Contract be interpreted as contrary to this paragraph. 30.19 Contract Sum A. The Contract Sum is stated in the Contract and, including authorized adjustments,is the total maximum not-to-exceed amount payable by Owner to Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. Contractor accepts and agrees that all payments pursuant to this Contract are subject to the availability and appropriation of funds by the Corpus Christi City Council. If funds are not available and/or appropriated,this Contract shall immediately be terminated with no liability to any party to this Contract. 30.20 Contractor's Guarantee as Additional Remedy A. The Contractor's guarantee is a separate and additional remedy available to benefit the Owner. Neither the guarantee nor the expiration of the guarantee period will operate to reduce, release or relinquish any rights or remedies available to the Owner for any claims or causes of action against the Contractor or any other individual or entity. 30.21 Notices. A. Any notice required to be given to Owner under any provision in this Contract must include a copy to OAR by mail or e-mail. General Conditions 00 72 00-131 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 30.22 Public Information A. The requirements of Subchapter J, Chapter 552, Government Code, may apply to this contract, and Contractor agrees that the contract can be terminated if Contractor knowingly or intentionally fails to comply with a requirement of that subchapter. END OF SECTION General Conditions 00 72 00-132 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 SECTION 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. These Supplementary Conditions amend and supplement the General Conditions defined in Document 00 72 00 -General Conditions and other provisions of Contract Documents as indicated below. Provisions that are not so amended or supplemented remain in full force and effect. B. The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions that are defined in the General Conditions have the meanings assigned to them in the General Conditions. 1.02 MODIFICATIONS TO GENERAL CONDITIONS PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 00 73 00- 1 Supplementary Conditions Re-Bid Construction Documents 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS and other provisions of the Contract Documents. All provisions not amended or supplemented in these Supplementary Conditions remain in effect. The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated in the General Conditions. Additional terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated below. ARTICLE 1—DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY SC-1.01 DEFINED TERMS A. The members of the OPT as defined in Paragraph 1.01.A.41 consists of the following organizations: City of Corpus Christi,Texas RVK Architecture B. Paragraph 1.01.A.54"Substantial Completion" is more specifically defined for this Project as: 1. The following items are fully functional and suitable for operation in accordance with the Contract Documents: a. The Facility is fully functional and is complete for the Owner to fully inhabit and utilize,with the exception of minor punch list items. b. Certificate of Occupancy from the AHJ is required. ARTICLE 4—COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK SC-4.04 DELAYS IN CONTRACTOR'S PROGRESS A. The allocation for delays in the Contractor's progress for rain days as set forth in General Conditions Paragraph 4.04.1) are to be determined as follows: 1. Include rain days in developing the schedule for construction. Schedule construction so that the Work will be completed within the Contract Times assuming that these rain days will occur. Incorporate residual impacts following rain days such as limited access to and within the Site, inability to work due to wet or muddy Site conditions, delays in delivery of equipment and materials, and other impacts related to rain days when developing the schedule for construction. Include all costs associated with these rain days and residual impacts in the Contract Price. 2. A rain day is defined as any day in which the amount of rain measured by the National Weather Services at the Power Street Stormwater Pump Station is 0.50 inch or greater. Records indicate the following average number of rain days for each month: Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-1 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Re-Bid Construction Documents /2023 Month Day Month Days January 3 July 3 February 3 August 4 March 2 September 7 April 3 October 4 May 4 November 3 June 4 December 3 1. A total of[43] rain days have been set for this Project. An extension of time due to rain days will be considered only after [43] rain days have been exceeded in a calendar year and the OAR has determined that a detrimental impact to the construction schedule resulted from the excessive rainfall. Rain days are to be incorporated into the schedule and unused rain days will be considered float time which may be consumed by the Owner or Contractor in delay claims. ARTICLE 5 — AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS SC-5.03 SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS A. This Supplementary Condition identifies documents referenced in General Conditions Paragraph 5.03.A which describe subsurface and physical conditions. 1. Geotechnical Reports include the following: Wastewater Maintenance Shop (22129)— Terracon#CD245000 2. Drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities) include the following: "None" "5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions A. No reports of explorations or tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site, or drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site, are known to Owner." SC-5.06 HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS AT SITE A. This Supplementary Condition identifies documents referenced in General Conditions Paragraph 5.06 which describe Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site. 1. Environmental Reports include the following: "None" 2. Drawings of physical conditions relating to known Hazardous Environmental Conditions at the Site include the following: "None" B. No reports of explorations or tests for Hazardous Environmental Conditions at or contiguous to the Site are known to Owner. Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-2 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Rev 3/2023 Re-Bid Construction Documents ARTICLE 6—BONDS AND INSURANCE SC-6.03 REQUIRED MINIMUM INSURANCE COVERAGE INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE AMOUNTS Provide the insurance coverage for at least the following amounts unless greater amounts are required by Laws and Regulations: Type of Insurance Minimum Insurance Coverage Commercial General Liability including 1. Commercial Broad Form 2. Premises—Operations 3. Underground Hazard 4. Products/Completed Operations $1,000,000 Per Occurrence 5. Contractual Liability $2,000,000 Aggregate 6. Independent Contractors 7. Personal &Advertising Injury Business Automobile Liability-Owned, Non- $500,000 Combined Single Limit Owned, Rented and Leased Workers' Compensation Statutory Employer's Liability $500,000/500,000/500,000 Excess Liability/Umbrella Liability $1,000,000 Per Occurrence Required if Contract Price>$5,000,000 Contractor's Pollution Liability / $1,000,000 Per Claim Environmental Impairment Coverage Not limited to sudden and accidental 0 Required ❑ Not Required discharge. To include long-term environmental impact for the disposal of pollutants/contaminants. Required if excavation > 5 ft or asbestos present Builder's Risk(All Perils including Collapse) Coverage limit shall be in the amount of the total cost of the project. Required for vertical structures and bridges ❑X Required ❑ Not Required Installation/Equipment Floater Equal to Contract Price Required if installing city-owned equipment or storing contractor equipment on city- 0 Required ❑ Not Required owned property Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-3 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Rev 3/2023 Re-Bid Construction Documents ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES SC-7.04 CONCERNING SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS,AND OTHERS A. Add the following sentence to the end of Paragraph 7.04.A: "The Contractor goal is to perform at least [30] percent of the Work, measured as a percentage of the Contract Price, using its own employees." ARTICLE 14—PREVAILING WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS SC-14.04 PREVAILING WAGE RATES A. The minimum rates for various labor classifications as established by the Owner are shown below: Wage Determination Construction Type Project Type (WD) No TX288 Building Building Construction Projects (does not include single family homes or apartments up to and including 4 stories) "General Decision Number:TX20240288 01/05/2024 Superseded General Decision Number:TX20230288 State:Texas Construction Type: Building Counties:Aransas, Nueces and San Patricio Counties in Texas. BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (does not include single family homes or apartments up to and including 4 stories). Note: Contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act are generally required to pay at least the applicable minimum wage rate required under Executive Order 14026 or Executive Order 13658. Please note that these Executive Orders apply to covered contracts entered into by the federal government that are subject to the Davis-Bacon Act itself, but do not apply to contracts subject only to the Davis-Bacon Related Acts, including those set forth at 29 CFR 5.1(a)(1). Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-4 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Rev 3/2023 Re-Bid Construction Documents If the contract is entered Executive Order 14026 into on or after January 30, generally applies to the 2022, or the contract is contract. renewed or extended (e.g., an. The contractor must pay option is exercised) on or all covered workers at after January 30, 2022: least $17.20 per hour (or the applicable wage rate listed on this wage determination, if it is higher) for all hours spent performing on the contract in 2024. If the contract was awarded on. Executive Order 13658 or between January 1, 2015,and generally applies to the January 29, 2022, and the contract. contract is not renewed or. The contractor must pay all extended on or after January covered workers at least 30, 2022: $12.90 per hour(or the applicable wage rate listed on this wage determination, if it is higher) for all hours spent performing on that contract in 2024. The applicable Executive Order minimum wage rate will be adjusted annually. If this contract is covered by one of the Executive Orders and a classification considered necessary for performance of work on the contract does not appear on this wage determination, the contractor must still submit a conformance request. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the Executive Orders is available at http://www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Modification Number Publication Date 0 01/05/2024 BOI L0074-003 07/01/2023 Rates Fringes BOILERMAKER...................... $ 37.00 24.64 ---------------------------------------------------------------- ELECO278-002 08/27/2023 Rates Fringes ELECTRICIAN...................... $ 29.50 8.94 ---------------------------------------------------------------- ENGI0178-005 06/01/2020 Rates Fringes Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-5 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Rev 3/2023 Re-Bid Construction Documents POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR (1)Tower Crane............. $ 32.85 13.10 (2) Cranes with Pile Driving or Caisson Attachment and Hydraulic Crane 60 tons and above..... $ 28.75 10.60 (3) Hydraulic cranes 59 Tons and under.............. $ 32.35 13.10 ---------------------------------------------------------------- I RO N 0084-011 06/01/2023 Rates Fringes IRONWORKER, ORNAMENTAL........... $ 27.51 8.13 ---------------------------------------------------------------- SUTX2014-068 07/21/2014 Rates Fringes BRICKLAYER....................... $ 20.04 0.00 CARPENTER........................ $ 15.21 ** 0.00 CEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER... $ 15.33 ** 0.00 Rates Fringes INSULATOR—MECHANICAL (Duct, Pipe & Mechanical System Insulation)............... $ 19.77 7.13 IRONWORKER, REINFORCING.......... $ 12.27 ** 0.00 IRONWORKER, STRUCTURAL........... $ 22.16 5.26 Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-6 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Rev 3/2023 Re-Bid Construction Documents LABORER: Common or General...... $ 9.68 ** 0.00 LABORER: Mason Tender- Brick... $ 11.36 ** 0.00 LABORER: Mason Tender- Cement/Concrete.................. $ 10.58 ** 0.00 LABORER: Pipelayer.............. $ 12.49 ** 2.13 LABORER: Roof Tearoff........... $ 11.28 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: Backhoe/Excavator/Trackhoe....... $ 14.25 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: Bobcat/Skid Steer/Skid Loader................ $ 13.93 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: Bulldozer............. $ 18.29 1.31 OPERATOR: Drill................. $ 16.22 ** 0.34 OPERATOR: Forklift.............. $ 14.83 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: Grader/Blade.......... $ 13.37 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: Loader................ $ 13.55 ** 0.94 OPERATOR: Mechanic.............. $ 17.52 3.33 OPERATOR: Paver (Asphalt, Aggregate, and Concrete)......... $ 16.03 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: Roller................ $ 12.70 ** 0.00 Rates Fringes PAINTER (Brush, Roller, and Spray)........................... $ 14.45 ** 0.00 PIPEFITTER....................... $ 25.80 8.55 PLUMBER.......................... $ 25.64 8.16 ROOFER........................... $ 13.75 ** 0.00 SHEET METAL WORKER (HVAC Duct Installation Only)............... $ 22.73 7.52 Rates Fringes SHEET METALWORKER, Excludes HVAC Duct Installation........... $ 21.13 6.53 TILE FINISHER.................... $ 11.22 ** 0.00 TILE SETTER...................... $ 14.74 ** 0.00 TRUCK DRIVER: Dump Truck........ $ 12.39 ** 1.18 Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-7 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Rev 3/2023 Re-Bid Construction Documents TRUCK DRIVER: Flatbed Truck..... $ 19.65 8.57 TRUCK DRIVER: Semi-Trailer Truck............................ $ 12.50 ** 0.00 TRUCK DRIVER: Water Truck....... $ 12.00 ** 4.11 ---------------------------------------------------------------- WELDERS- Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. ---------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------------------- ** Workers in this classification may be entitled to a higher minimum wage under Executive Order 14026 ($17.20) or 13658 ($12.90). Please see the Note at the top of the wage determination for more information. Please also note that the minimum wage requirements of Executive Order 14026 are not currently being enforced as to any contract or subcontract to which the states of Texas, Louisiana, or Mississippi, including their agencies, are a party. Note: Executive Order (EO) 13706, Establishing Paid Sick Leave for Federal Contractors applies to all contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2017. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must provide employees with 1 hour of paid sick leave for every 30 hours they work, up to 56 hours of paid sick leave each year. Employees must be permitted to use paid sick leave for their own illness,injury or other health- related needs, including preventive care; to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is ill, injured, or has other health-related needs, including preventive care; or for reasons resulting from, or to assist a family member(or person who is like family to the employee)who is a victim of, domestic violence, sexual assault, or stalking. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at https://www.dol.gov/agencies/whd/government- contracts. Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (iii)). ---------------------------------------------------------------- The body of each wage determination lists the classification and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the cited type(s) of construction in the area covered by the wage determination. The classifications are listed in alphabetical order of""identifiers""that indicate whether the particular rate is a union rate (current union negotiated rate for local), a survey rate (weighted average rate) or a union average rate (weighted union average rate). Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-8 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Rev 3/2023 Re-Bid Construction Documents Union Rate Identifiers A four-letter classification abbreviation identifier enclosed in dotted lines beginning with characters other than "SU"" or ""UAVG"" denotes that the union classification and rate were prevailing for that classification in the survey. Example: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2014. PLUM is an abbreviation identifier of the union which prevailed in the survey for this classification, which in this example would be Plumbers. 0198 indicates the local union number or district council number where applicable, i.e., Plumbers Local 0198. The next number, 005 in the example, is an internal number used in processing the wage determination.07/01/2014 is the effective date of the most current negotiated rate,which in this example is July 1, 2014. Union prevailing wage rates are updated to reflect all rate changes in the collective bargaining agreement (CBA) governing this classification and rate. Survey Rate Identifiers Classifications listed under the ""SU"" identifier indicate that no one rate prevailed for this classification in the survey and the published rate is derived by computing a weighted average rate based on all the rates reported in the survey for that classification. As this weighted average rate includes all rates reported in the survey, it may include both union and non-union rates. Example: SULA2012-007 5/13/2014. SU indicates the rates are survey rates based on a weighted average calculation of rates and are not majority rates. LA indicates the State of Louisiana. 2012 is the year of survey on which these classifications and rates are based. The next number, 007 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination.5/13/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. Survey wage rates are not updated and remain in effect until a new survey is conducted. Union Average Rate Identifiers Classification(s) listed under the UAVG identifier indicate that no single majority rate prevailed for those classifications; however, 100% of the data reported for the classifications was union data. EXAMPLE: UAVG-OH-0010 08/29/2014. UAVG indicates that the rate is a weighted union average rate. OH indicates the state. The next number, 0010 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 08/29/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. A UAVG rate will be updated once a year, usually in January of each year,to reflect a weighted average of the current negotiated/CBA rate of the union locals from which the rate is based. ---------------------------------------------------------------- Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-9 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Rev 3/2023 Re-Bid Construction Documents WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter?This can be: * an existing published wage determination * a survey underlying a wage determination * a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter * a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys,should be with the Wage and Hour National Office because National Office has responsibility for the Davis-Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory,then the process described in 2.) and 3.) should be followed. With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an interested party (those affected by the action) can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to: Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-10 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Rev 3/2023 Re-Bid Construction Documents The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and by any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. 3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 4.)All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final. ---------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------------------- END OF GENERAL DECISION" ARTICLE 19—PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION SC-19.21 COOPERATION WITH PUBLIC AGENCIES C. For the Contractor's convenience, the following telephone numbers are listed: Public Agencies/Contacts Phone Number City Engineer 361-826-3500 RVK Architecture 210-733-3535 Elizabeth Hurd 210-733-3535 Traffic Engineering 361-826-3547 Police Department 361-882-2600 361-826-1800 (361-826-1818 after Water/Wastewater/Stormwater hours) Gas Department 361-885-6900 (361-885-6942 after hours) Parks& Recreation Department 361-826-3461 Street Department 361-826-1875 City Street Div.for Traffic Signals 361-826-1610 Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-11 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Rev 3/2023 Re-Bid Construction Documents Public Agencies/Contacts Phone Number Solid Waste & Brush 361-826-1973 IT Department(City Fiber) 361-826-1956 AE P 1-877-373-4858 AT&T 361-881-2511 (1-800-824-4424 after hours) Grande Communications 1-866-247-2633 Spectrum Communications 1-800-892-4357 Crown Castle Communications 1-888-632-0931 (Network Operations Center) Centu ryLi n k 361-208-0730 Windstream 1-800-600-5050 Regional Transportation Authority 361-289-2712 Port of Corpus Christi Authority Engr. 361-882-5633 TxDOT Area Office 361-808-2500 Corpus Christi ISD 361-695-7200 ARTICLE 25—SHOP DRAWINGS SC-25.03 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Provide Shop Drawings for the following items: Refer to 0133 01 Submittal Register SC-25.12 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS B. Pay for excessive review of Shop Drawings. 1. Cost for additional review time will be billed to the Owner by the Designer for the actual hours required for the review of Shop Drawings by Designer and in accordance with the rates listed below: ARTICLE 26—RECORD DATA SC-26.03 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Submit Record Data for the following items: Refer to 0133 01 Submittal Register SC-30.21 Notices. B. Strict compliance is required for all notice provisions in this Contract. END OF SECTION Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-12 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Rev 3/2023 Re-Bid Construction Documents 00 74 00 SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI 22129 WASTEWATER MAINTENANCE SHOP Note to Specifier: The City may participate in a grant or loan program. Grants and Loans from governmental entities(Funding Agency)often require that their conditions and reporting requirements be included in the Contract Documents as a condition of the grant or loan. This Specification Section provides a location for any policies,forms,or other requirements of the Funding Agency to be inserted exactly as required by that entity. Since precedence is given to these documents,they must be reviewed to determine that there are no significant conflicts with the documents prepared for that project. Resolve any conflicts as soon as possible, but unless the conflict represents a significant risk to the Designer or the City,the grant or loan agency provisions will govern. Note to Specifier: Notice that the Project is being funded by the Funding Agency and any forms or other documentation that must be submitted with the Bid should be noted and discussed in SECTION 00 21 13 INVITATION TO BID AND INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS. Limit any other discussion of program changes to keep these conditions contained. Change the title of this Specification Section,and in other locations that reference the program to use the grant or loan agency nomenclature. ARTICLE 1—GENERAL 1.01 FUNDING AGENCY REQUIREMENTS A. This Project is funded in whole or in part by [Name of Funding Agency] (Funding Agency). The Funding Agency requires specific conditions and reporting as a condition for providing this funding. The conditions and reporting forms of the Funding Agency are included in the Contract Documents. The Funding Agency requirements govern in the event of any conflict between the Funding Agency requirements and any other provision of the Contract Documents. Note to Specifier: Funding Agency documents must have their own number in the Section 00 74 XX series to make sure they are indexed properly in the Table of Contents (and thus made a part of the Contract Documents). This will also put them in proper order when downloaded or stored digitally. Use the Funding Agency document name as the title and reference the Funding Agency document number to make sure documents track properly. B. The applicable Funding Agency conditions and reporting forms are as follows: Specification Title Funding Agency Section Document No. END OF SECTION Special Conditions for[Funding Agency] 00 74 00-1 RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents Rev 10/2018 011100 SUMMARY OF WORK 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Construct Work as described in the Contract Documents. 1. Provide the materials, equipment, and incidentals required to make the Project completely and fully useable. 2. Provide the labor, equipment, tools, and consumable supplies required for a complete Project. 3. The Contract Documents do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to complete the Project. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the OAR. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Work is described in general, non-inclusive terms as: 1. The proiect consists of the construction of a new 16,178 s.f. office warehouse facility and a truck wash on a 3-acre site on Greenwood Drive,Corpus Christi,Texas. 1.03 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. The following items of work are not included in this Contract, but may impact construction scheduling and completion: 1. Signage—Design team will provide designs for only code required signage. 2. Construction Testing B. In the case of a disagreement between the above list and those specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the Contractor is to base his Proposal on the most expensive listing. C. Completion of the Work described in this Contract may impact the construction and testing of the items listed above. 1. Coordinate construction activities through the OAR. 2. Pay claims for damages which result from the late completion of the Project or any specified Milestones. 1.04 WORK BY OWNER A. The Owner plans to perform the following items of work which are not included in this Contract, but may impact the construction scheduling and completion: 1. Furniture, Fixtures, and Equipment WIFE) 2. Small Equipment—vending machines,appliances at break room, maintenance bay equipment. Summary of Work 01 1100-1 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Rev 10/2018 Re-Bid Construction Documents B. Completion of the Work described in this Contract may impact the construction of the items listed above. 1. Coordinate construction activities through the OAR. 2. Pay claims for damages which result from the late completion of the Project or any specified Milestones. C. Owner will provide normal operation and maintenance of the existing facilities during construction, unless otherwise stated. 1.05 CONSTRUCTION OF UTILITIES A. Pay for temporary power, including but not limited to construction cost, meter connection fees, and permits. 1.06 USE PRIOR TO FINAL COMPLETION A. Owner has the right to use or operate any portion of the Project that is ready for use after notifying the Contractor of its intent to do so. B. The execution of Bonds is understood to indicate the consent of the surety to these provisions for use of the Project. C. Provide an endorsement from the insurance carrier permitting use of Project during the remaining period of construction. D. Conduct operations to ensure the least inconvenience to the Owner and general public. 1.07 INFORMATIONAL POLICIES A. COCC STREET CUT POLICY 1. *** for any additional pavement cut/utility excavation that the project will require outside of the bond limits*** 2. Any street excavation/cut shall repair not only the impacted trench but also 3. New street(Any street 0-6 years & PCI >_80) 4. Width: Curb to Curb 5. Length: 25 FT beyond the outer most edge of excavation in both directions 6. Thickness: to match existing HMAthickness 7. Old street (Any street >6 years or PCI <80) 8. Width: Full Lane (depending on excavation limits & location) 9. Length: 10 FT beyond the outer most edge of excavation in both directions 10. Thickness: to match existing HMAthickness Summary of Work 01 1100-2 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Rev 10/2018 Re-Bid Construction Documents B. ROW DEVELOPMENT NOTES 1. Proposed construction entrance requires a ROW Permit, ROW permitting process please contact ROW Management @ ROWMANAGEMENT@CCTEXAS.COM 2. Ingress and egress from construction zone using construction entrance can have impact on existing roadway, impact to existing roadway will be the responsibility of the contractor to mitigate and/or repair. C. SEC. 49-103—DEFINITIONS 1. Public right-of-way means the surface of, and the space above and below any street road, avenue, alley, highway, public thoroughfare, bridge,tunnel, sidewalk, path,trail, channel, drainage ditch, public utility easement or other easement now or hereafter held by the city or over which the city exercises any rights of management or control within the present limits of the city and within said limits as may be extended.The public right-of-way includes the entire area between the boundary lines of every right- of-way. D. SEC. 49-2—OBSTRUCTION CLOSURES, OR ENCROACHMENTS IN THE CITY RIGHT-OF-WAY. 1. It shall be unlawful for any person to obstruct, construct, encroach, place or permit to be placed any object, obstruction, infrastructure or facility upon, in, under or even any street, sidewalk, space between sidewalk and curbing,travel lane or commonly traveled portion of a street, alley or other public right-of-way. E. SEC. 49-112—RIGHT-OF-WAY MANAGEMENT FEES. 1. Non-compliance fee. A fee of one thousand five hundred dollars ($1,500.00) per day shall be assessed to the violator for any work performed without a permit, for any permit that has not been extended before its expiration date, and for any permit wherein work has not been completed by the expiration date provided for in the permit. The fee shall be paid within the timeframe provided on notice from the city. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Summary of Work 01 1100-3 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Rev 10/2018 Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 01 22 00 UNIT PRICES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. List of unit prices, for use in preparing Bids. B. Measurement and payment criteria applicable to Work performed under a unit price payment method. 1.02 COSTS INCLUDED A. Unit Prices included on the Bid Form shall include full compensation for all required labor, products, tools, equipment, plant, transportation, services and incidentals; erection, application or installation of an item of the Work; overhead and profit. 1.03 UNIT QUANTITIES SPECIFIED A. Quantities indicated in the Bid Form are for bidding and contract purposes only. Quantities and measurements of actual Work will determine the payment amount. 1.04 MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES A. Take all measurements and compute quantities. Measurements and quantities will be verified by Architect/Structural Engineer of Record . B. Assist by providing necessary equipment, workers, and survey personnel as required. 1.05 PAYMENT A. Payment for Work governed by unit prices will be made on the basis of the actual measurements and quantities of Work that is incorporated in or made necessary by the Work and accepted by the Architect/Structural Engineer of Record , multiplied by the unit price. 1.06 SCHEDULE OF UNIT PRICES A. Unit prices for drilled footing shall be based on the difference between actual depth vs. base bid depth (shown on drawings), treating each footing individually. Refer to Section 31 63 29- Drilled Concrete Footings for additional requirements. 1. GREATER DEPTH Unit price per linear foot of excavation, steel and concrete in place: a. 18" diameter shaft:($ ) b. 24" diameter shaft:($ ) 2. LESSER DEPTH Unit price per linear foot of excavation, steel and concrete in place: a. 18" diameter shaft:($ ) b. 24" diameter shaft:($ ) THE UNIT PRICE FOR LESSER DEPTH SHALL NOT BE LESS THAN 50% OF THE UNIT PRICE FOR GREATER DEPTH. 1.07 CASING A. Base bid price shall include casing of all piers to a depth of 12 feet below grade. 1. GREATER CASING DEPTH Unit price for each 5 foot increment of casing depth: a. 18" diameter shaft:($ ) LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 01 22 00- 1 Unit Prices 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS b. 24" diameter shaft:($ ) 2. LESSER CASING DEPTH Unit price for each 5 foot increment of casing depth: a. 18" diameter shaft:($ ) b. 24" diameter shaft:($ ) 3. DELETION OF CASING Price deduction for each footing determined not to require casing: a. 18" diameter shaft:(Deduct$ ) b. 24" diameter shaft:(Deduct$ ) PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 01 22 00-2 Unit Prices 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS ADDENDUM NO.4 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Alternates: 1. This Section describes each alternate by number and describes the basic changes to be incorporated into the Work when this alternate is made a part of the Work in the Agreement. 2. Drawings and Specifications will outline the extent of Work to be included in the alternate Contract Price. 3. Coordinate related Work and modify surrounding Work as required to properly integrate the Work under each alternate,and provide a complete and functional Project as required by the Contract Documents. 4. Bids for alternates may be accepted or rejected at the option of the Owner. 5. Owner may incorporate these alternates in the Contract when executed, or may issue a Change Order to incorporate these alternates within 120 days at the prices offered in the Bid, unless noted otherwise. A Request for a Change Proposal may be issued after 120 days or other designated time period to negotiate a new price for incorporating the Work into the Project. B. The Bid Items described as"Allowances" have been set as noted in Section 00 30 01 Bid Form and shall be included in the Total Base Bid of the Bid Form for each Bidder. These Allowances may be used at the Owner's discretion in the event that unforeseen conditions or conflicts are encountered during construction that warrants the use of the Allowance funds. If the use of Allowance funds becomes necessary, the OAR will provide written authorization at a cost negotiated between Owner and Contractor, using unit prices in the Bid Form when applicable. No work is to be performed under the Allowance items without written authorization from the OAR. There is no guarantee that any of these funds will need to be used during the course of the Work. 1.02 DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS A. Provide documents for materials furnished as part of the alternate in accordance with Article 24 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. 1.03 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERNATES A. Alternate 1 -€pe)(y Sealed Concrete Flooring 1. Provideepexy sealed concrete flooring at the following areas:Corridors 124,130,139A, 139B, 139C, and 143. 2. Refer to 0129 01 Measurement and Basis for Payment. Alternates and Allowances 01 23 10-1 [Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129] Rev 5/2020 ADDENDUM NO.4 B. Alternate 2 - Decorative Metal Fence: 1. Provide ornamental fence system Ameristar Genesis(or Equal) at the main entrance as shown on architectural site plan. 2. Refer to 0129 01 Measurement and Basis for Payment. C. Alternate 3—Irrigation and Landscape 1. Irrigation is not required for RS-6 zoning. Provide irrigation design as indicated on irrigation and landscape drawings. 2. Refer to 0129 01 Measurement and Basis for Payment. D. Alternate 4—Mechanical Screens 1. Provide Cityscapes Envisor Rooftop Screens (or Equal) unit attached to rooftop mechanical units as shown on roof plan. 2. Refer to 0129 01 Measurement and Basis for Payment. 1.04 DESCRIPTION OF ALLOWANCES A. Allowance A — Construction Contingency Allowance for unforeseen building conditions during construction -$320,000.00. B. Allowance B—Permitting Allowance -$32,000.00. END OF SECTION Alternates and Allowances 01 23 10-2 [Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129] Rev S/2020 SECTION 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Procedural requirements for proposed substitutions. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Fundamental product requirements, product options, delivery, storage, and handling. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Substitutions: Changes from Contract Documents requirements proposed by Contractor to materials, products, assemblies, and equipment. 1. Substitutions for Cause: Proposed due to changed Project circumstances beyond Contractor's control. a. Unavailability. b. Regulatory changes. 2. Substitutions for Convenience: Proposed due to possibility of offering substantial advantage to the Project. a. Substitution requests offering advantages solely to the Contractor will not be considered. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. CSI/CSC Form 1.5C- Substitution Request (During the Bidding/Negotiating Stage); Current Edition. B. CSI/CSC Form 13.1A- Substitution Request(After the Bidding/Negotiating Phase); Current Edition. PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. A Substitution Request for products, assemblies, materials, and equipment constitutes a representation that the submitter: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product, equipment, assembly, or system. 2. Agrees to provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product. 3. Agrees that, should a substitution be accepted and this substitution prove within the Warranty Period, the Contractor's standard one-year warranty or the product's warranty beyond one year whichever is greater, to be defective or otherwise unsatisfactory for service for which it was intended, the Contractor shall replace defective material with material originally specified at no additional cost. 4. Agrees to coordinate installation and make changes to other work that may be required for the work to be complete, with no additional cost to Owner. 5. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become apparent. 6. Agrees to reimburse Owner and Architect for review or redesign services associated with re-approval by authorities. B. Complete the Substitution Request Form (Sample Attachment A or B). 1. Forms are available from the Architect. To initiate this process contact the Architect's representative and the form(s)will be sent to entity requesting a substitution. These forms provided are licensed to RVK for use in this project only. Any other use will violate copyright protections. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 01 25 00- 1 Substitution Procedures Re-Bid Construction Documents C. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. Burden of proof is on proposer. D. Content: Include information necessary for tracking the status of each Substitution Request, and information necessary to provide an actionable response. 1. Forms indicated in the Project Manual are adequate for this purpose, and must be used, and include the following: a. Substitution Request Information: 1) Indication of whether the substitution is for cause or convenience. 2) Reference to particular Contract Document(s) specification section number, title, and article/paragraph(s). 3) Description of Substitution. 4) Reason why the specified item cannot be provided. b. Attached Comparative Data: Provide point-by-point, side-by-side comparison addressing essential attributes specified, as appropriate and relevant for the item: 1) Physical characteristics. 2) In-service performance. 3) Expected durability. 4) Visual effect. 5) Warranties. 6) Other salient features and requirements. 7) Include, as appropriate or requested, the following types of documentation: (a) Product Data: (b) Certificates, test, reports or similar qualification data. (c) Drawings, when required to show impact on adjacent construction elements. 8) Impact of Substitution: (a) Savings to Owner for accepting substitution. (b) Change to Contract Time due to accepting substitution. E. Limit each request to a single proposed substitution item. 1. Submit an electronic document, combining the request form with supporting data into single document. 3.02 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES DURING PROCUREMENT A. Submittal Time Restrictions: B. Submittal Form (before award of contract): 1. Submit substitution requests by completing CSI/CSC Form 1.5C- Substitution Request (During the Bidding/Negotiating Stage). See this form for additional information and instructions. Use only this form; other forms of submission are unacceptable. See sample attached to this section. C. Architect will consider requests for substitution only if submitted at least 10 days prior to the date for receipt of bids. 3.03 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Submittal Form (after award of contract): 1. Submit substitution requests by completing CSI/CSC Form 13.1A- Substitution Request. See this form for additional information and instructions. Use only this form; other forms of submission are unacceptable. See sample attached to this section. B. Submit request for Substitution for Cause within 14 days of discovery of need for substitution, but not later than 14 days prior to time required for review and approval by Architect, in order to stay on approved project schedule. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 01 25 00-2 Substitution Procedures Re-Bid Construction Documents C. Submit request for Substitution for Convenience immediately upon discovery of its potential advantage to the project, but not later than 14 days prior to time required for review and approval by Architect, in order to stay on approved project schedule. 1. In addition to meeting general documentation requirements, document how the requested substitution benefits the Owner through cost savings, time savings, greater energy conservation, or in other specific ways. 2. Document means of coordinating of substitution item with other portions of the work, including work by affected subcontractors. 3. Bear the costs engendered by proposed substitution of: a. Owner's compensation to the Architect for any required redesign, time spent processing and evaluating the request. D. Substitutions will not be considered under one or more of the following circumstances: 1. When they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals, without having received prior approval. 2. Without a separate written request. 3.04 RESOLUTION A. Architect may request additional information and documentation prior to rendering a decision. Provide this data in an expeditious manner. B. Architect will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject request. 1. Architect's decision following review of proposed substitution will be noted on the submitted form. 3.05 ACCEPTANCE A. Accepted substitutions change the work of the Project. They will be documented and incorporated into work of the project by Change Order, Construction Change Directive, Architectural Supplementary Instructions, or similar instruments provided for in the Conditions of the Contract. 3.06 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Include completed Substitution Request Forms as part of the Project record. Include both approved and rejected Requests. 3.07 ATTACHMENTS A. A facsimile of the Substitution Request Forms required to be used on the Project are included after this section. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 01 25 00-3 Substitution Procedures Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 0125 00.1—ATTACHMENT A SUBSTITUTION REQUEST (During the Bidding/Negotiating Stage) Project: Substitution Request Number: From: To: Date: A/E Project Number: Re: Contract For: Specification Title: Description: Section: Page: Article/Paragraph: Proposed Substitution: Manufacturer: Address: one: Trade Name: M el No. Attached data includes product description,specifications,drawings,photographs,and per man e an est data adequate for evaluation of the request;applicable portions of the data are clearly identified. Attached data also includes a description of changes to the Contract oc is at the propo ed substitution will require for its proper installation. The Undersigned certifies: • Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and termined to b qua r superior in all respects to specified product. • Same warranty will be furnished for proposed subs do s for specific r ct. • Same maintenance service and source of replaceme s, applicable,is available. • Proposed substitution will have no adverse e on ade nd will not affect or delay progress schedule. • Proposed substitution does not affect dime ion n c 1 c rances. • Payment will be made for changes to bu ing i c g A/E design, detailing, and construction costs caused by the substitution. Submitted by: Signed by: Firm: Address: Telephone: A/E's REVIEW AND ACTION ❑ Substitution approved-Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01 30 00 Administrative Requirements. ❑ Substitution approved as noted-Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01 30 00 Administrative Requirements. ❑ Substitution rejected-Use specified materials. ❑ Substitution Request received too late-Use specified materials. Signed by: Date: Supporting Data Attached: ❑ Drawings ❑ Product Data ❑ Samples ❑ Tests ❑ Reports ❑ ©Copyright 2013,CSI, Page of Form Version:September 2013 110 South Union St.,Suite 100,Alexandria,VA 22314 This is not an official CS1 Construction Contract Administration(CCA)Form.Please use CSI's official CCA Forms if required by your project needs. SECTION 0125 00.2—ATTACHMENT B SUBSTITUTION REQUEST (After the Bidding/Negotiating Phase) Project: Substitution Request Number: From: To: Date: A/E Project Number: Re: Contract For: Specification Title: Description: Section: Page: Article/Paragrapb: Proposed Substitution: Manufacturer: Address: ne- Trade Name: Mode Installer: Address: Phone: History: ❑ New product ❑ 1-4 years old ❑ 5-10 years old ❑X ore n 10 years old Differences between proposed substitution and specific rodu ❑Point-by-point comparative data attached—REQ E Noe Reason for not providing specific .te Similar Installation: Projec \T— Architect: Addre s: Owner: Date Installed: Proposed substitution affA�sothcr parts of Work: ❑No ❑ Yes;explain Savings to Owner for accepting substitution: Proposed substitution changes Contract Time: ❑ No ❑ Yes [Add] [Deduct] days. Supporting Data Attached: ❑Drawings ❑Product Data ❑ Samples ❑ Tests ❑ Reports ❑ CD Copyright 2013,CST, Page of Form Version:September 2013 110 S.Union St.,Suite 100,Alexandria,VA 22314 This is not an official CST Construction Contract Administration(CCA)Form.Please use CST's official CCA Forms if required by your project needs. SUBSTITUTION REQUEST (After the Bidding/Negotiating Phase—Continued) The Undersigned certifies: • Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to specified product. • Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified product. • Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts,as applicable,is available. • Proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on other trades and will not affect or delay progress schedule. • Cost data as stated above is complete. Claims for additional costs related to accepted substitution which may subsequently become apparent are to be waived. • Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions and functional clearances. • Payment will be made for changes to building design,including A/E design,detailing,and construction^caused by the substitution. • Coordination,installation,and changes in the Work as necessary for accepted substitution will be co let n all respects. Submitted by: Signed by: Firm: Address: Telephone: Attachments: ❑ A/E's REVIEW AND RECOMMENDATION ❑ Approve Substitution-Make submittals in accorda e w>dcewith fication Section 01 30 00 Administrative Requirements. ❑ Approve Substitution as noted- e submittals in ac Specification Section 01 30 00 Administrative Requirements. ❑ Reject Substitution-Use spec' ied mat 1s. ❑ Substitution Request received to IaJse s hied materials. Signed by: Date: OWNER'S REVS- ake N ❑ Substitution psubmittals in accordance with Specification Section 01 30 00 Administrative Requirements. Prepare Change Order.❑ Substitution app - Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01 30 00 Administrative Requirements. Prepare Change ❑ Substitution rejected-Use specified materials. Signed by: Date: Additional Comments: El Contractor El Subcontractor ❑Supplier El Manufacturer ❑A/E (0 Copyright 2013,CST, Page of Form Version:September 2013 110 S.Union St.,Suite 100,Alexandria,VA 22314 This is not an official CST Construction Contract Administration(CCA)Form.Please use CST's official CCA Forms if required by your project needs. ADDENDUM NO.4 01 29 01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENTS ON LUMP SUM ITEMS A. Include all cost for completing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for lump sum payment items. Include all direct cost for the Work associated with that lump sum item and a proportionate amount for the indirect costs as described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS for each lump sum item. Include cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the lump sum price. B. Measurement for progress payments will be made on the basis of the earned value for each item shown as a percentage of the cost for the lump sum item as described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. Payment at Final Completion will be equal to the total lump sum amount for that item. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENTS ON UNIT PRICE ITEMS A. Include all cost for completing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents in unit price payment items. Include all direct cost for the Work associated with that unit price item and a proportionate amount for the indirect costs as described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS for each unit price item. Include cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the unit price. B. Measurement for payments will be made only for the actual measured and/or computed length, area, solid contents, number, and weight, unless other provisions are made in the Contract Documents. Payment on a unit price basis will not be made for Work outside finished dimensions shown in the Contract Documents. Include cost for waste, overages, and tolerances in the unit price for that line item. Measurement will be as indicated for each unit price item. 1.03 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT FOR BASE BID ITEMS A. Bid Item A-1—Mobilization (Maximum S%): 1. Include the following costs in this Bid item: a. Transportation and setup for equipment; b. Transportation and/or erection of all field offices, sheds, and storage facilities; c. Salaries for preparation of documents required before the first Application for Payment; d. Salaries for field personnel assigned to the Project related to the mobilization of the Project; e. Demobilization; and f. Mobilization may not exceed 5 percent of the total Contract Price. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-1 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Rev 5/2020 ADDENDUM NO.4 2. Measurement for payment will be made per lump sum on the following basis: When at least 5% of the adjusted contract amount for construction is earned, 75% of the mobilization lump sum bid amount will be eligible for payment, minus retainage. Upon substantial completion of all work under this Contract and removal of all equipment and materials from the Project site, the remaining 25% of the mobilization lump sum bid amount will be eligible for payment, minus retainage. B. Bid Item A-2— Bonds and Insurance 1. Payment shall include all bonds and insurance required under the Contract Documents. 2. Payment for bonds and insurance will be based on the receipt of documentation of actual costs. Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence of the rate or rates paid for all bonds and insurance. Contractor will be reimbursed for the actual cost of unique insurance as required and obtained specifically forthis Project, not including the routine and general company insurance policies that are maintained for the course of conducting normal business operations. Contractor will be reimbursed for the actual cost of project specific bonds and insurance, not to exceed the bid amount or the verifiable costs of Project specific bonds and insurance incurred by the Contractor. C. Bid Item A-3—Storm Water Pollution Prevention 1. Payment shall include but not be limited to furnishing and submitting the SWPPP to TCEQ and Owner and updating the Plan during the Project as needed. All permits and required fees related to the SWPPP will be included in this item. 2. Measurement for payment will be made per lump sum on the following basis: The initial pay application will include 50%of the lump sum bid amount minus retainage. The balance will be paid according to the percent of construction completion after 50%completion has occurred, minus retainage. D. Bid Item A-4-Temporary Site Facilities and Logistics 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. E. Bid Item B-1—Cast-In-Place Concrete (Building) 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. F. Bid Item B-2—Cast-In-Place Concrete (Site) 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-2 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Rev 5/2020 ADDENDUM NO.4 G. Bid Item B-3—Concrete Staining/ Polishing/Sealing 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. H. Bid Item B-4—Concrete Tilt-Up Concrete 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. I. Bid Item C-1— Unit Masonry, Mortar, and Reinforcing 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. J. Bid Item D-1—Structural/ Miscellaneous Steel—Fabrication 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. K. Bid Item D-2—Structural/ Miscellaneous Steel - Erection 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. L. Bid Item E-1—Rough Carpentry 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. M. Bid Item E-2—Architectural Woodwork 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-3 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Rev 5/2020 ADDENDUM NO.4 N. Bid Item E-3—Plastic Paneling 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. O. Bid Item F-1—Waterproofing/ Dampproofing/Joint Sealers 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. P. Bid Item F-2—Metal Wall Panels/ Metal Roof Panels 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. Q. Bid Item F-3—Roofing 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. R. Bid Item F-4—Firestopping 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. S. Bid Item G-1—Doors/Frames/ Hardware/Access Doors 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. T. Bid Item G-2—Overhead Coiling Doors/Grilles 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-4 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Rev 5/2020 ADDENDUM NO.4 U. Bid Items G-3—Storefronts 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. V. Bid Item G-4—Glazing 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. W. Bid Item H-1—Drywall/Acoustical 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. X. Bid Item H-2—Tile 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. Y. Bid Item H-3—Carpet/Resilient Flooring 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. Z. Bid Item H-4—Painting/Wallcoverings 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. AA. Bid Item 1-1—Signage/ Identification Devices 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-5 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Rev 5/2020 ADDENDUM NO.4 BB. Bid Item 1-2—Toilet Compartments&Accessories 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. CC. Bid Item 1-3—Fire Protection Specialties 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. DD. Bid Item 1-4—Protective Covers/Sunscreens 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. EE. Bid Item 1-5—Metal Lockers 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. FF. Bid Item J-1—Roller Shades 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. GG. Bid Item J-2 Countertops 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. HH. Bid Item K-1 Single Girder Bridge Crane 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-6 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Rev 5/2020 ADDENDUM NO.4 II. Bid Item L-1—Fire Suppression Sprinkler Systems 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. JJ. Bid Item M-1—Plumbing 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. KK. Bid Item M-2—Shop-Air Lines 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. LL. Bid Item M-3—Plumbing Fixtures 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. MM. Bid Item M-4—Water Piping 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. NN. Bid Item N-1— HVAC 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. 00. Bid Item N-2—Testing,Adjusting, & Balancing 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-7 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Rev 5/2020 ADDENDUM NO.4 PP. Bid Item N-3—Controls 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. QQ. Bid Item N-4—Ductwork and Accessories 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. RR. Bid Item 0-1—Electrical 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. SS. Bid Item 0-2—Electrical Switchgear and Panels 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. TT. Bid Item 0-3—General Grounding and Bonding 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. UU. Bid Item 0-4—Light Fixtures 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. VV. Bid Item 0-5—Controls 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-8 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Rev 5/2020 ADDENDUM NO.4 WW. Bid Items 0-6 Lightning Protection 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. XX. Bid Items P-1—Communications Cabling and Equipment 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. YY. Bid Items P-2—Audio-Video Systems 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. ZZ. Bid Items Q-1—Security/Access Control/Surveillance 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. AAA. Bid Items Q-2—Fire Alarm Systems 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. BBB.Bid Item R-1—Earthwork 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. CCC.Bid Item R-2—Erosion Control 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-9 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Rev 5/2020 ADDENDUM NO.4 DDD. Bid Item R-3—Termite Control 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. EEE. Bid Item R-4—Greater depth of drilled footings. Unit price per linear foot of excavation, steel & concrete in place for 18" diameter shaft 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. FFF. Bid Item R-5—Unit price per linear foot of excavation, steel & concrete in place for a 24" diameter shaft 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. GGG. Bid Item R-6—Lesser Depth of drilled footings. Unit price per linear foot of excavation, steel & concrete in place for 18" diameter shaft 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. HHH. Bid Item R-7—Unit price per linear foot of excavation, steel &concrete in place for 24" diameter shaft. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. III. Bid Item R-8—Greater casing depth. Unit price for each 5-foot increment in casing depth for 18" diameter shaft 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-10 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Rev 5/2020 ADDENDUM NO.4 JJJ. Bid Item R-9—Unit price for each 5-foot increment in casing depth for 24" diameter shaft 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. KKK.Bid Item R-10—Lesser casing depth. Unit price for each 5-foot increment in casing depth for 18" diameter shaft 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. LLL. Bid Item R-11—Unit price for each 5-foot increment in casing depth for 24" diameter shaft 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. MMM. Bid Item R-12—Deletion of casing. Price deduction for each 18" diameter shaft determined not to require casing 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. NNN. Bid Item R-13—Price deduction for each 24" diameter shaft determined not require casing 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect 000. Bid Item 5-1—Traffic Markings/Signage 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-11 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Rev 5/2020 ADDENDUM NO.4 PPP.Bid Item S-2—Fences/Gates 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. QQQ. Bid Item S-3—Landscaping 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. RRR.Bid Items S-4—Irrigation 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. SSS. Bid Items T-1—Domestic Water Lines 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. TTT. Bid Items T-2—Fire Water Lines 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. UUU. Bid Items T-3—Sanitary Sewer Lines 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. VVV.Bid Items T-4—Storm Drain Lines 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-12 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Rev 5/2020 ADDENDUM NO.4 WWW. Additive Alternate#1—€pex Sealed Concrete Flooring 1. Upon acceptance of the alternate items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. XXX.Additive Alternate#2—Decorative Metal Fence 1. Upon acceptance of the alternate items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. YYY. Additive Alternate#3—Irrigation and Landscape 1. Upon acceptance of the alternate items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. ZZZ. Additive Alternate#4—Mechanical Screens 1. Upon acceptance of the alternate items above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. END OF SECTION Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-13 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Rev 5/2020 SECTION 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. General administrative requirements. B. Electronic document submittal procedures. C. Preconstruction meeting. D. Site mobilization meeting. E. Progress meetings. F. Construction progress schedule. G. Contractor's daily reports. H. Progress photographs. I. Submittals for review, information, and project closeout. J. Requests for Information (RFI) procedures. K. Submittal procedures. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: General product requirements. B. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Additional coordination requirements. C. Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals: Project record documents; operation and maintenance data; warranties and bonds. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AIA G716 - Request for Information; 2004. 1.04 GENERAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with requirements of Section 01 70 00- Execution and Closeout Requirements for coordination of execution of administrative tasks with timing of construction activities. B. Make the following types of submittals to Architect: 1. Requests for Interpretation (RFI). 2. Requests for substitution. 3. Shop drawings, product data, and samples. 4. Test and inspection reports. 5. Design data. 6. Manufacturer's instructions and field reports. 7. Applications for payment and change order requests. 8. Progress schedules. 9. Coordination drawings. 10. Correction Punch List and Final Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion. 11. Closeout submittals. 1.05 DEFINITIONS A. Shop Drawings: Drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specifically prepared for the Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work. B. Product Data: Illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 01 30 00- 1 Administrative Requirements Re-Bid Construction Documents C. Samples: Physical examples which illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship and establish standards by which the Work will be judged. D. Governmental Review Comments: Written comments and process stamps by authorized governmental representatives on or accompanying returned documents previously submitted for building permits, operating licenses, code or ordinance approvals or variances, or other similar or related governmental reviews or approvals. E. "A ACTION": Fabrication, manufacture and/or construction may proceed, providing the Work is in accordance with all requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect's final acceptance of the Work will be contingent upon such compliance. F. "B ACTION": Manufacture and fabrication for construction may proceed. The Architect's final acceptance of the Work will be contingent upon compliance with all notations and all requirements of the Contract Documents. G. "C ACTION": No work shall be fabricated, manufactured and/or constructed. The Contractor shall redraw and resubmit the Shop Drawings or other submittals to conform with all requirements of the Contract Documents. Resubmit to the Architect, until resubmission is not required. Submittals marked "C ACTION" are not permitted on the construction site. PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ELECTRONIC DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. All documents transmitted for purposes of administration of the contract are to be in electronic (PDF)format and transmitted via email at a minimum. At Contractor's option, an Internet-based submittal service or project management software that receives, logs and stores documents, provides electronic stamping and signatures, and notifies addressees via email may be used.. 1. Besides submittals for review, information, and closeout, this procedure applies to Requests for Information (RFIs), progress documentation, contract modification documents (e.g. supplementary instructions, change proposals, change orders), applications for payment, field reports and meeting minutes, Contractor's correction punchlist, and any other document any participant wishes to make part of the project record. 2. It is Contractor's responsibility to submit documents in allowable format. 3. All users need an email address, internet access, and PDF review software that includes ability to mark up and apply electronic stamps (such as Adobe Acrobat, www.adobe.com, or Bluebeam PDF Revu, www.bluebeam.com), unless such software capability is provided by the project management software. 4. Paper document transmittals will not be reviewed; emailed electronic documents will not be reviewed. 5. All other specified submittal and document transmission procedures apply, except that electronic document requirements do not apply to samples or color selection charts. 3.02 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Owner will schedule a meeting after Notice of Award. B. Attendance Required: 1. Owner. 2. Architect. 3. Contractor. C. Agenda: 1. Submission of list of subcontractors, list of products, schedule of values, and progress schedule. 2. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures. 3. Scheduling. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 01 30 00-2 Administrative Requirements Re-Bid Construction Documents D. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.03 SITE MOBILIZATION MEETING A. Owner will schedule meeting at the Project site prior to Contractor mobilization. B. Attendance Required: 1. Contractor. 2. Owner. 3. Architect. 4. Special consultants. 5. Contractor's superintendent. 6. Major subcontractors. C. Agenda: 1. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor. 2. Owner's requirements. 3. Construction facilities and controls. 4. Temporary utilities. 5. Security and housekeeping procedures. 6. Schedules. 7. Application for payment procedures. 8. Procedures for testing. 9. Procedures for maintaining record documents. D. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.04 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the work at maximum bi-monthly intervals. B. Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at meetings. C. Attendance Required: 1. Contractor. 2. Owner. 3. Architect. 4. Contractor's superintendent. 5. Major subcontractors. D. Recommended Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of work progress. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems that impede, or will impede, planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review of RFIs log and status of responses. 7. Maintenance of progress schedule. 8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 9. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 10. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 11. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 12. Other business relating to work. E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 01 30 00-3 Administrative Requirements Re-Bid Construction Documents 3.05 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE A. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment. 3.06 DAILY CONSTRUCTION REPORTS A. Include only factual information. Do not include personal remarks or opinions regarding operations and/or personnel. B. Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site and project progress: 1. Date. 2. High and low temperatures, and general weather conditions. 3. List of subcontractors at Project site. 4. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. a. Include a breakdown for supervisors, laborers,journeymen, equipment operators, and helpers. 5. Major equipment at Project site. 6. Material deliveries. 7. Safety, environmental, or industrial relations incidents. 8. Meetings and significant decisions. 9. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. Include comparison between scheduled work activities (in Contractor's most recently updated and published schedule) and actual activities. Explain differences, if any. Note days or periods when no work was in progress and explain the reasons why. 10. Testing and/or inspections performed. 11. Signature of Contractor's authorized representative. 3.07 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS A. Submit new photographs at least once a month, within 3 days after being taken. B. Photography Type: Digital; electronic files. C. Provide photographs of site and construction throughout progress of work produced by an experienced photographer, acceptable to Architect. D. In addition to periodic, recurring views, take photographs of each of the following events: 1. Completion of site clearing. 2. Excavations in progress. 3. Foundations in progress and upon completion. 4. Structural framing in progress and upon completion. 5. Enclosure of building, upon completion. 6. Final completion, minimum of ten (10) photos. E. Views: 1. Provide non-aerial photographs from four cardinal views at each specified time, until date of Substantial Completion. 2. Consult with Architect for instructions on views required. 3. Provide factual presentation. 4. Provide correct exposure and focus, high resolution and sharpness, maximum depth of field, and minimum distortion. F. Digital Photographs: 24 bit color, minimum resolution of 1024 by 768, in JPG format; provide files unaltered by photo editing software. 1. Delivery Medium: Via email. 2. File Naming: Include project identification, date and time of view, and view identification. 3. PDF File: Assemble all photos into printable pages in PDF format, with 2 to 3 photos per page, each photo labeled with file name; one PDF file per submittal. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 01 30 00-4 Administrative Requirements Re-Bid Construction Documents 3.08 GOVERNMENTAL REVIEW COMMENTS A. Submit within seven (7) days of receipt from governmental agency. 3.09 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFI) A. Definition: A request seeking one of the following: 1. An interpretation, amplification, or clarification of some requirement of Contract Documents arising from inability to determine from them the exact material, process, or system to be installed; or when the elements of construction are required to occupy the same space (interference); or when an item of work is described differently at more than one place in Contract Documents. 2. A resolution to an issue which has arisen due to field conditions and affects design intent. B. Whenever possible, request clarifications at the next appropriate project progress meeting, with response entered into meeting minutes, rendering unnecessary the issuance of a formal RFI. C. Preparation: Prepare an RFI immediately upon discovery of a need for interpretation of Contract Documents. Failure to submit a RFI in a timely manner is not a legitimate cause for claiming additional costs or delays in execution of the work. 1. Prepare a separate RFI for each specific item. a. Review, coordinate, and comment on requests originating with subcontractors and/or materials suppliers. b. Do not forward requests which solely require internal coordination between subcontractors. 2. Prepare in a format and with content acceptable to Owner. a. Use AIA G716 - Request for Information . 3. Combine RFI and its attachments into a single electronic file. PDF format is preferred. D. Reason for the RFI: Prior to initiation of an RFI, carefully study all Contract Documents to confirm that information sufficient for their interpretation is definitely not included. 1. Unacceptable Uses for RFIs: Do not use RFIs to request the following: a. Approval of submittals (use procedures specified elsewhere in this section). b. Approval of substitutions (see Section -01 60 00 - Product Requirements) c. Changes that entail change in Contract Time and Contract Sum (comply with provisions of the Conditions of the Contract). d. Different methods of performing work than those indicated in the Contract Drawings and Specifications (comply with provisions of the Conditions of the Contract). 2. Improper RFIs: Requests not prepared in compliance with requirements of this section, and/or missing key information required to render an actionable response. They will be returned without a response, with an explanatory notation. 3. Frivolous RFIs: Requests regarding information that is clearly indicated on, or reasonably inferable from, Contract Documents, with no additional input required to clarify the question. They will be returned without a response, with an explanatory notation. E. Content: Include identifiers necessary for tracking the status of each RFI, and information necessary to provide an actionable response. 1. Official Project name and number, and any additional required identifiers established in Contract Documents. 2. Owner's, Architect's, and Contractor's names. 3. Discrete and consecutive RFI number, and descriptive subject/title. 4. Issue date, and requested reply date. 5. Reference to particular Contract Document(s) requiring additional information/interpretation. Identify pertinent drawing and detail number and/or specification section number, title, and paragraph(s). 6. Annotations: Field dimensions and/or description of conditions which have engendered the request. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 01 30 00-5 Administrative Requirements Re-Bid Construction Documents 7. Contractor's suggested resolution: A written and/or a graphic solution, to scale, is required in cases where clarification of coordination issues is involved, for example; routing, clearances, and/or specific locations of work shown diagrammatically in Contract Documents. If applicable, state the likely impact of the suggested resolution on Contract Time or the Contract Sum. F. Attachments: Include sketches, coordination drawings, descriptions, photos, submittals, and other information necessary to substantiate the reason for the request. G. RFI Log: Prepare and maintain a tabular log of RFIs for the duration of the project. 1. Indicate current status of every RFI. Update log promptly and on a regular basis. 2. Note dates of when each request is made, and when a response is received. 3. Highlight items requiring priority or expedited response. 4. Highlight items for which a timely response has not been received to date. 5. Identify and include improper or frivolous RFIs. H. Review Time: Architect will respond and return RFIs to Contractor within seven calendar days of receipt. For the purpose of establishing the start of the mandated response period, RFIs received after 12:00 noon will be considered as having been received on the following regular working day. 1. Response period may be shortened or lengthened for specific items, subject to mutual agreement, and recorded in a timely manner in progress meeting minutes. I. Responses: Content of answered RFIs will not constitute in any manner a directive or authorization to perform extra work or delay the project. If in Contractor's belief it is likely to lead to a change to Contract Sum or Contract Time, promptly issue a notice to this effect, and follow up with an appropriate Change Order request to Owner. 1. Response may include a request for additional information, in which case the original RFI will be deemed as having been answered, and an amended one is to be issued forthwith. Identify the amended RFI with an R suffix to the original number. 2. Do not extend applicability of a response to specific item to encompass other similar conditions, unless specifically so noted in the response. 3. Upon receipt of a response, promptly review and distribute it to all affected parties, and update the RFI Log. 3.10 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. Submit to Architect for review a schedule for submittals in tabular format. 1. Account for time required for preparation, review, manufacturing, fabrication and delivery when establishing submittal delivery and review deadline dates. a. For assemblies, equipment, systems comprised of multiple components and/or requiring detailed coordination with other work, allow for additional time to make corrections or revisions to initial submittals, and time for their review. 3.11 PRE-SUBMITTAL COORDINATION A. Conduct pre-submittal conference at Project site to coordinate with appropriate trades that require coordination before proceeding with final submittal preparation and subsequent submission for review and approval. B. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and it coordination or integration with other materials and installations. Advise Architect and/or Engineer of scheduled meeting dates. C. Pre-submittal coordination conference will be required for the following: 1. Division 21 - Fire Suppression: Review proposed pipe routing, both exposed and concealed, to ascertain compliance with architect/engineer design intent. 2. Division 23 - HVAC Piping and Air Distribution. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 01 30 00-6 Administrative Requirements Re-Bid Construction Documents 3.12 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review: 1. Product data. 2. Shop drawings. 3. Samples for selection. 4. Samples for verification. B. With the exception of structural and building envelope materials, product data submittal review will be waived when named or basis of design product is used as certified by the contractor; but will not be waived for unnamed products of named manufacturers. C. Should the Contractor, Sub-contractor or material supplier desire to obtain the Architect's or Engineer's drawing in an electronic format(CADD drawings)for use as an aid in preparing shop drawings, the Contractor shall complete the ELECTRONIC FILE TRANSFER AGREEMENT, See Section 01 30 00 Attachment"B." Submit the completed ELECTRONIC FILE TRANSFER AGREEMENT directly to the Architect. When the files are ready for pick-up at the design professional's office, the Contractor, Sub-contractor or material supplier will be notified by telephone, or if e-mail option is selected, the files will be forwarded by e-mail. D. Submit to Architect for review for the limited purpose of checking for compliance with information given and the design concept expressed in Contract Documents. E. Samples will be reviewed for aesthetic, color, or finish selection. F. DO NOT SUBMIT MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS, unless specifically requested. Inclusion of material safety datas (MSDS or SIDS) in submittal may result in rejection of submittal. G. After review, distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article belowand for record documents purposes described in Section 01 78 00- Closeout Submittals. 3.13 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for information: 1. Design data. 2. Certificates. 3. Test reports. 4. Inspection reports. 5. Manufacturer's instructions. 6. Manufacturer's field reports. 7. Other types indicated. B. Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner. 3.14 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Submit Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion. B. Submit Final Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion. C. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout in compliance with requirements of Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals: 1. Project record documents. 2. Operation and maintenance data. 3. Warranties. 4. Bonds. 5. Other types as indicated. D. Submit for Owner's benefit during and after project completion. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 01 30 00-7 Administrative Requirements Re-Bid Construction Documents 3.15 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS A. Electronic Documents: Submit one electronic copy in PDF format; an electronically-marked up file will be returned. Create PDFs at native size and right-side up; illegible files will be rejected. B. Samples: Submit the number specified in individual specification sections; one of which will be retained by Architect. 1. After review, produce duplicates. 2. Retained samples will not be returned to Contractor unless specifically so stated. 3.16 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General Requirements: 1. Use a separate transmittal for each item. 2. Transmit using approved form. a. Use Contractor's form, subject to prior approval by Architect. 3. Sequentially identify each item. For revised submittals use original number and a sequential numerical suffix. 4. Identify: Project; Contractor; subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number; and specification section number and article/paragraph, as appropriate on each copy. 5. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction work, and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the work and Contract Documents. a. Submittals from sources other than the Contractor, or without Contractor's stamp will not be acknowledged, reviewed, or returned. 6. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and coordinate submission of related items. a. For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor. b. For sequential reviews involving Architect's consultants, Owner, or another affected party, allow an additional 7 days. 7. Identify variations from Contract Documents by clouding around or highlighting the variation and product or system limitations that may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed work. Use of submittals as a substitution process will not be accepted. Substitution procedures must be adhered to prior to submittals. 8. Provide space for Contractor and Architect review stamps. 9. When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission. 10. Distribute reviewed submittals. Instruct parties to promptly report inability to comply with requirements. 11. Incomplete submittals will not be reviewed, unless they are partial submittals for distinct portion(s)of the work, and have received prior approval for their use. B. Product Data Procedures: 1. Submit only information required by individual specification sections. 2. Collect required information into a single submittal. 3. Do not submit(Material) Safety Data Sheets for materials or products. C. Shop Drawing Procedures: 1. Prepare accurate, drawn-to-scale, original shop drawing documentation by interpreting Contract Documents and coordinating related work. 2. Do not reproduce Contract Documents to create shop drawings. 3. Generic, non-project-specific information submitted as shop drawings do not meet the requirements for shop drawings. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 01 30 00-8 Administrative Requirements Re-Bid Construction Documents D. Samples Procedures: 1. Transmit related items together as single package. 2. Identify each item to allow review for applicability in relation to shop drawings showing installation locations. 3.17 SUBMITTAL REVIEW A. Submittals for Review: Architect will review each submittal, and approve, or take other appropriate action. B. Submittals for Information: Architect will acknowledge receipt and review. See below for actions to be taken. C. Architect's actions will be reflected by marking each returned submittal using virtual stamp on electronic submittals. D. Architect's and consultants' actions on items submitted for review: 1. Authorizing purchasing, fabrication, delivery, and installation: a. "A Action (Approved)", or language with same legal meaning. b. "B Action (Approved as Noted)", or language with same legal meaning. 1) At Contractor's option, submit corrected item, with review notations acknowledged and incorporated. c. "Approved as Noted, Resubmit for Record", or language with same legal meaning. 1) Resubmit corrected item, with review notations acknowledged and incorporated. Resubmit separately, or as part of project record documents. 2. Not Authorizing fabrication, delivery, and installation: a. "C Action (Revise and Resubmit)". 1) Resubmit revised item, with review notations acknowledged and incorporated. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 01 30 00-9 Administrative Requirements Re-Bid Construction Documents 01 30 00.1 .1.1- Document G716TM - 2004 Request for Information (RFI) TO: FROM: PROJECT: ISSUE DATE: R IN o.: REQUESTED REPLY DATE. PROJECT NUMBERS: COPIES TO• RFI DESCRIPTION: (Fully describe the question or type of fern ation r esi dg REFERENCESlATTACHMENTS: (List spec Ic o cnnents rese r• Ied +hen seeking the information requested) SPECIFICATIONS •RA I GS OTHER ME DATI N: 1 I oncert s for construction condition the sender naa rovide a SENDER'S RECOM N � ,(f yp recornrnerl etl�it-h ll j inclu {ng c st nd/or,ch dule considerations.) l I RECEIVER'S REP Y:(Pro i e a swer to RFI, including cost and/or schedule considerations.) By: Date: Copies to: NOTE:This reply is not an authorization to proceed with work involving additional cost,time or both.If any reply requires a change to the Contract Documents,a Change Order,Construction Change Directive or a Minor Change in the work must be executed in accordance with the Contract Documents. AIA Document G718^"—2004.Copyright 02004 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This Ale Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this A100ocument,or any portion of It, may result In severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.Purchasers are permitted to reproduce ten(10)copies of this document when completed.To report copyright violations of AIA Contract Documents,a-mall The American Institute of Architects'legal counsel,copyrights@ala.org. MMACZ44 SECTION 01 30 00.2 ATTACHMENT B ELECTRONIC FILE TRANSFER AGREEMENT Pursuant to the request of ("Contractor")for RVK Architecture and its consultants ("Architect")will deliver BIM model and/or AutoCadd files ("Files")subject to the following terms and conditions: The Files are not Contract Documents for the Project. Data contained on the electronic Files are instruments of service and are transmitted for Contractor's information only. Only hard copy drawings and specifications are Contract Documents. These Files were created by the Architect for the express purpose of creating 2D contract documents. No implication is intended for any purpose beyond the production of 2D documents. The Contractor agrees that the Files, except as expressly set forth above, are not fit for any particular purpose, including, but not limited to, quantity take offs, clash detection, ascertainment of construction or installation tolerances and clearances, preparation of shop drawings, coordination drawings,fabrication drawings, or the manufacture of any building components or system. No representation is made regarding the accuracy or completeness of the Files. In the event that a conflict arises between the signed or sealed hard copy documents prepared by the Architect and its consultants and the electronic Files,the hard copy documents shall govern. As such, any omissions or conflicts with the Files,with respect to the content of the Contract Documents, shall not be used as a basis for an increase in the Contract Sum or Time. The Contractor acknowledges that the model Files do not account for or incorporate means, methods, shop standards, and routing economies required by individual subcontractors for the scope of work. Modifications to the information and routings of selected components may be required and are the responsibility of the Contractor. Therefore,the Contractor agrees that by the use of these Files,the Contractor is not relieved of its duty to fully comply with the Contract Documents, including and without limitation, the need to check, confirm and coordinate all dimensions and determine field measurements, verification of the field conditions and the coordination of the Work. The Files to be furnished include work prepared by the Architect, Structural, Mechanical, Electrical, and Plumbing consultants only. Files will be furnished in Autodesk®.rvt and/or.dwg format only. One set of electronic Files will be furnished. Contractor assumes responsibility for distributing pertinent Files to its subcontractors. The Contractor further acknowledges that the Architect makes no representations as to the compatibility of the Files with the user's hardware, software, and other systems. Additionally, the Files are not warranted to be free of any anomalies, errors,viruses, malware or other unintended defects. Furthermore,the Contractor shall,to the fullest extent permitted by law, indemnify and hold those providing the Files harmless against all damages,liability or costs, including reasonable attorneys'fees and defense costs, arising out of or resulting from the Contractor and its Subcontractor's use of the requested electronic Files. The Contractor shall require each subcontractor,to the extent of the work to be performed by the subcontractor, to be bound by the terms and conditions of this Agreement. Because information presented on the electronic files can be modified, unintentionally or otherwise,we reserve the right to remove all indicia of ownership and/or involvement from each electronic display. Upon receipt of the signed Agreement, the Files will be transmitted to the undersigned via electronic media as requested and appropriate to the size of the Files. Agreed: Date (Contractor firm name and contact name) RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 01 30 00.2- 1 ELECTRONIC FILE TRANSFER AGMT. SECTION 01 31 40 SER: SHOP DRAWINGS/FIELD VISITS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. This section defines and clarifies specific items of the Contract that are peculiar to the structural engineer's responsibilities. Refer to General Conditions for overall contractual agreements and to appropriate section of this specification for specifics on shop drawing, product data, and samples submitted. PART 2 -GENERAL DEFINITIONS 2.01 STRUCTURAL ENGINEER OF RECORD A. The engineer responsible for the design of the primary structural system and whose seal/signature appears on the contract structural drawings. Responsibility for any secondary structural and non-structural systems not shown on the structural drawings rests with the prime professional, the architect. 2.02 SPECIALTY ENGINEER A. The engineer who is lawfully eligible to seal plans and designs for pre-engineered elements on systems which become part of the overall building. 2.03 GRADUATE ENGINEER A. The engineer who is an Engineer-In-Training and working under the direct supervision of a Licensed Engineer. 2.04 SUBMITTALS A. Items identified in the contract documents to be submitted by the contractor. Refer to individual sections of the specifications for specific items to be submitted. 2.05 FIELD OBSERVATIONS A. Visits to the jobsite by the structural engineer-of-record or his authorized representative to ascertain whether the work is generally in accordance with the structural contract documents. These observations are not exhaustive nor continuous. PART 3 - PROCEDURAL REQUIREMENTS 3.01 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Refer to applicable section for specific requirements for number of copies to be submitted, time for review, etc. All submittals must come by way of the general contractor though the architect. Certain submittals, identified in specific sections of the specifications, generally regarding pre- engineered elements, will require a specialty engineer's seal and signature. 3.02 FIELD OBSERVATIONS A. Structural engineer shall be notified at least 24 hours in advance of any concrete pour or other action that will cover up structural elements that have not been reviewed by the structural engineer. Refer to individual sections for specific stages of construction which require observation. 3.03 ENGINEER'S ACTIONS A. SHOP DRAWINGS 1. As per General or Special Conditions, the structural engineer will review shop drawings for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. 2. The structural engineer-of-record shall review the submittals and return them to the architect with one of the following statements checked off on the stamp: 3. "NO exceptions Taken" informs the Architect that the structural engineer takes no exception to the submittal being approved as per and in accordance with AIA Document LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 01 31 40- 1 SER: SHOP DRAWINGS/FIELD VISITS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 201,section 4.2.7. 4. "Make Corrections Noted" informs the Architect that the structural engineer has made corrections on the submittals but otherwise takes no exception to the submittal being approved as per and in accordance with AIA Document 201, section 4.2.7. 5. "Revise and Resubmit" indicates important items must be corrected and resubmitted. Marks on the submittal may not necessarily cover all of the defects of the submittal. This action expresses the structural engineer's concern and his recommendation to the Architect that the submittal be reviewed and resubmitted as per and in accordance with AIA Document 201, section 4.2.7. 6. "Return One Corrected Copy For File" informs the Architect that the submittal may be approved as per AIA Document 201, section 4.2.7, but a corrected copy showing that corrections have been acknowledged must be returned for the structural engineer's file. 3.04 SHOP DRAWINGS WITH SPECIALTY ENGINEER'S SEAL AND SIGNATURE A. Certain shop drawings may be identified in specific sections of the specifications pertaining to pre-engineered structural elements specified by the structural engineer-of-record and designed by specialty engineers. The structural engineer shall verify that submittals have received prior approvals as required by the contract documents. Submittals shall bear the signature and professional seal of the specialty engineer responsible for the design as required by the contract documents. The structural engineer shall review the submittal for type, position, and connection to other elements within the primary structural system, and for criteria and loads used for their design. Action on these submittals will be the same as for other shop drawings. 1. SHOP DRAWINGS FOR NON-STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS a. Submittal of shop drawings covering items not shown or specified on structural plans by the Structural Engineer will be reviewed only to verify that the specialty engineer sealing the drawings/calculations has generally followed usual and customary application of code-mandated loads and design procedures. These submittals will be stamped "REVIEWED" indicating that the items listed interface with the primary structural framing without deleterious effect and no further action is taken. 3.05 SITE VISITS A. The structural engineer-of-record ("SER")will make site visits at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction and as defined by the contract to visually observe the quality and the progress of the construction work relative to the primary structural system. The general contractor is responsible to notify the SER when structural elements are ready for review and prior to their being covered up. Failure to do so may result in key observations not being made, preventing the engineer from recommending acceptance of the work. A written report will be made of each visit listing discrepancies, if any, and describing what was observed. One copy will be given to contractor's representative at the jobsite, and one copy will be mailed to the Architect. If a follow-up visit is necessary it will be so noted on the report. 1. The SER shall not have control over or charge of and shall not be responsible for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work for This Part of the Project, since these are solely the Contractor's responsibility under the Contract for Construction. The SER shall not be responsible for the Contractor's or a Subcontractor's schedule or failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The SER shall not have control over or charge of acts or omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractors, their agents or employees or other persons performing portions of the Work. END OF SECTION LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 01 31 40-2 SER: SHOP DRAWINGS/FIELD VISITS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 0133 01 Submittal Register Types of Submittals Required Specification Paragraph Specification Description Product Sample or Operations Section No. Information Mockup Data 0157 13 Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control N/A None 01 60 00 Product Requirement Record Data 01 60 00 Product Requirement Shop Drawing 03 01 00 Maintenance of Concrete 1.06 Record Data O&M Manual 03 05 16 Underslab Vapor Barrier-Stego Record Data 03 1000 Concrete Forming&Accessories(CIV) 1.05 Record Data 03 1000 Concrete Forming&Accessories(CIV) 1.05 Shop Drawing 03 1000 Concrete Forming&Accessories(ST) 1.04 B.C.D. Shop Drawing 03 1000 Concrete Forming&Accessories(ST) Shop Drawing 03 1000 Concrete Forming&Accessories(ST: Engineer's seal on 1.05 A. None ea.Dwg.) 03 1000 Concrete Forming&Accessories(ST: Design 1.05 None Qualifications) 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing(CIV) 1.05 Record Data 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing(CIV) 1.05 Shop Drawing 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing(ST) 1.04 B.C.D. Shop Drawing 03 2000 Concrete Reinforcing(ST: Manufacturer's Certificate) 1.04 E. None 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing(ST:Certified copies of Mill Test 1.04 F. None Rprt.) 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete(CIV) 1.05 Record Data 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete(CIV) 1.05 Shop Drawing 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete(ST) 1.02 Record Data 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete(ST:For Curing Compounds- 2.07 None method of removal in event of incompatibility with floor 3.11 cover adhesives) 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete(ST:Test Reports) 1.05 None 3.01 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete(ST:Sustainable Design) 1.04 F. None 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete(ST:Mock-Ups) 1.06 None 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete(ST:Construct&Erect Mock-Ups) 1.06 A. None 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete(ST:Panel Size sufficient to 1.06 A.1 None illustrate full range of treatment) 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete(ST:Panel Size:6 by 6 feet) 1.06 A.2 None 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete(ST:Number of Panels:2) 1.06A.3 None 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete(ST:If requested by Architect/ST 1.06 B. None Engineer,cast concrete against mock-up panel;obtain acceptance) 03 30 00.10 Controlled Low Strength Backfill 1.06 Record Data 03 35 11 Sealed Portland Cement Concrete Finish Record Data 03 47 13 Tilt-Up Concrete(ST) 1.04 Shop Drawing 03 47 13 Tilt-Up Concrete(ST: Fabricator Qualifiations) 1.05 B. None 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications Shop Drawing 05 21 00 Steel Joist Framing(ST: Fabricator Qualifications) 1.05 Shop Drawing 05 2100 Steel Joist Framing(ST: Manufacturer's Qualifications) 1.05 A. None 05 2100 Steel Joist Framing(ST: Erector Qualifications) 1.05 B. None 05 31 00 Steel Decking(ST) 1.01 Shop Drawing 05 31 00 Steel Decking(ST Submit Manufacturer's installation 2.01 None instructions Submittal Register Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 01 33 01-1 Re-Bid Construction Documents 10/2018 0133 01 Submittal Register Types of Submittals Required Specification Paragraph Specification Description Product Sample or Operations Section No. Information Mockup Data 05 31 00 Steel Decking(ST Submit Installer Qualifications) 1.05 A. None 05 40 00 Cold-Formed Metal Framing(ST: Factory-Made Framing) 1.04 Record Data 2.03 05 40 00 Cold-Formed Metal Framing(ST) 1.01 Shop Drawing 05 40 00 Cold-Formed Metal Framing(ST: Indicate Stud Layout) 1.04 D.1 None 05 40 00 Cold-Formed Metal Framing(ST: Describe Method for 1.04 D.2 None Securing Studs) 05 40 00 Cold-Formed Metal Framing(ST: Design Data-Calcs for 1.04 D.3,.4 None loadings&Stresses of specially fabricated Framing- sealed by Engineer) 05 40 00 Cold-Formed Metal Framing(ST: Manufacturer's 1.04 E. None Installation Instructions) 05 40 00 Cold-Formed Metal Framing(ST: Designer Qualifications) 1.04 A. None 05 40 00 Cold-Formed Metal Frming(ST:Installer's Qualifications) 1.05 B. None 05 51 33 Metal Ladders 1.04 B Shop Drawing 06 10 53 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry 1.03 B. Record Data 06 41 00 Architectural Wood Casework 1.05 B. Shop Drawing 06 41 00 Architectural Wood Casework 1.05 C. Record Data 06 83 16 Fiberglass Reinforcing Paneling 1.03 B. Record Data 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation 1.04 B. Record Data 07 27 26 Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barrier System 105 B.C.D. Record Data 07 27 26 Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barrier System 1.05 E. Shop Drawing 07 27 26 Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barrier System 1.07 Mockup 07 41 13 Metal Roof Panels 1.03 B.C.D Shop Drawing 07 41 13 Metal Roof Panels 1.06 0&M Manual 07 42 13 Metal Wall Panels 1.03 B Shop Drawing 07 54 00 Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 1.03 B. Record Data 07 54 00 Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 1.03 C. Shop Drawing 07 54 00 Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 1.07 0&M Manual 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 1.04 C. Shop Drawing 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 1.08 0&M Manual 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 1.07 Mockup 07 72 00 Roof Accessories 1.03 B. Record Data 07 72 00 Roof Accessories 1.03 C. Shop Drawing 07 72 00 Roof Accessories 2.01 B. 0&M Manual 07 92 00 Joint Sealants(include data for Accessory Products) Record Data 07 92 00 Joint Sealants 1.06 B. O&M Manual 07 92 00 Joint Sealants 1.04 B.8./D. Sample 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 1.04 B. Record Data 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 1.04 C. Shop Drawing 08 14 16 Flush Wood Doors 1.03 B. Record Data 08 14 16 Flush Wood Doors 1.03 C. Shop Drawing 08 14 16 Flush Wood Doors 1.03 D.E. Sample 08 31 00 Access Doors and Panels 1.04 B.D. Record Data 08 31 00 Access Doors and Panels 1.04 C. Shop Drawing 08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors 1.03 B. Record Data 08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors 1.03 C. Shop Drawing 08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors 1.05 B. O&M Manual Submittal Register Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 01 33 01-2 Re-Bid Construction Documents 10/2018 0133 01 Submittal Register Types of Submittals Required Specification Paragraph Specification Description Product Sample or Operations Section No. Information Mockup Data 08 43 13 Aluminum-Framed Storefronts 1.05 B. Record Data 1.05 E. 08 43 13 Aluminum-Framed Storefronts 1.05 C. Shop Drawing 08 43 13 Aluminum-Framed Storefronts 1.06 D. Mockup 08 71 00 Door Hardware 1.04 B Record Data 08 71 00 Door Hardware 1.04 C Shop Drawing 08 71 00 Door Hardware Maintenance Materials&Tools 1.04 D Sample 08 71 00 Door Hardware 1.07 B. O&M Manual 08 80 00 Glazing(Insulating Glass Unit,Glazing Unit,Plastic Sheet 1.04 B.C. Record Data Glazing Unit and Plastic Film Glazing Types) 08 80 00 Glazing(Compounds and Accessories) 1.06 Mockup 08 80 00 Glazing 1.04 D Sample 08 80 00 Glazing 108 B.C.D. O&M Manual 09 21 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies 1.04 B.C. Record Data 09 30 00 Tiling 1.05 B. Record Data 09 30 00 Tiling 1.08 B. 0&M Manual 09 30 00 Tiling 1.05 C. Sample 09 51 00 Acoustical Ceilings 104.13.D. Record Data 09 51 00 Acoustical Ceilings 1.04 C. Sample 09 65 00 Resilient Flooring 1.03 B. Record Data 09 65 00 Resilient Flooring 1.06 B. C&M Manual 09 65 00 Resilient Flooring 1.03 C. Sample 09 67 00 Fluid-Applied Flooring 1.02 B. Record Data 09 67 00 Fluid-Applied Flooring 1.02 C. Sample 0991 13 Exterior Painting Record Data 09 91 13 Exterior Painting 1.08 Mockup 0991 13 Exterior Painting 1.06 C. Sample 09 91 23 Interior Painting 1.04 B.C.D. Record Data 09 96 00 High-Performance Coatings 1.03 B.0 Record Data 10 11 01 Visual Display Boards 1.04 B.E. Record Data 10 11 01 Visual Display Boards 1.04 C. Shop Drawing 10 11 01 Visual Display Boards 1.05 B. 0&M Manual 10 11 01 Visual Display Boards 1.04 D. Sample 10 14 19 Dimensional Letter Signage 1.02 B. Record Data 10 14 19 Dimensional Letter Signage(include dimensions, 1.02 C. Shop Drawing locations,elevations,materials,text and graphic layout, attachment details,locations of electrical service connections;include diagrams for power,signal and control wiring. 10 14 19 Dimensional Letter Signage 1.02 D. Sample 10 21 13.16 Plastic-Laminate-Clad Toilet Compartments 1.05 B. Shop Drawing 10 28 00 Toilet,Bath and Laundry Accessories 1.04 B. Record Data 10 44 00 Fire Protection Specialties 1.04 B. Record Data 10 44 00 Fire Protection Specialties 1.04 C. Shop Drawing 10 51 13 Metal Lockers 1.03 B. Record Data 10 51 13 Metal Lockers 1.03 C. Shop Drawing 11 81 29 Facility Fall Protection 1.04 B. Record Data 118129 Facility Fall Protection 1.04 C.D.E.F. Shop Drawing 12 24 00 1 Window Shades-M ECHO 1.04 B. Record Data Submittal Register Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 01 33 01-3 Re-Bid Construction Documents 10/2018 0133 01 Submittal Register Types of Submittals Required Specification Paragraph Specification Description Product Sample or Operations Section No. MMMInformation Mockup Data 12 24 00 Window Shades-MECHO(Include one-line diagrams,wire 1.04 C. Shop Drawing counts,coverage patterns and physical dimensions of each item.Include location plan showing all switch and control zones,switches,sensors and other control accessories. 12 24 00 Window Shades-MECH 1.07 B O&M Manual 12 24 00 Window Shades-MECH 1.04 D Sample 12 36 00 Countertops 1.04 B.E. Record Data 12 36 00 Countertops 1.04 C. Shop Drawing 12 36 00 Countertops 1.04 D. Sample 31 10 00 Site Clearing 1.04 None 31 13 30 Treatment of Existing Trees 1.07 A.B. Sample 31 22 00 Grading 1.04 Record Data 312316 Excavation N.A. None 3123 16.13 Trenching 1.06 Record Data Sample 31 23 16.14 Trench Excavation Protection N.A. None 31 23 23 Fill 1.06 Record Data Sample 31 23 23.16 Structural Fill(ST:Fill Composition Test Reports) 1.04 C. None 31 23 23.16 Structural Fill(ST:Compaction Density Reports) 1.04 D. None 31 37 00 Riprap N.A. None 32 1123 Aggregate Base Courses 1.05 Record Data Sample 32 1250 Site Pavement 1.04 Record Data 32 1250 Site Pavement 1.04 Shop Drawing 32 13 13.10 Concrete Cubs,Gutters and Sidewalks 1.05 Record Data Sample 32 13 13.10 Concrete Cubs,Gutters and Sidewalks 1.05 Shop Drawing 32 17 13 Parking Bumpers 1.04 Record Data 32 1723.13 Pavement Markings 1.05 None 32 31 13 Chain Link Fences and Gates 1.05 Record Data Sample 32 31 13 Chain Link Fences and Gates 1.05 Shop Drawing 32 31 19 Decorative Metal Fences and Gates 1.03 B. Record Data 32 31 19 Decorative Metal Fences and Gates 1.03 B. Shop Drawing 32 84 00 Landscape Irrigation 1.06 D.E. 0&M Manual 32 91 13 Soil Preparation 1.06 S. Sample 32 91 13 Soil Preparation 1.10 0&M Manual 32 92 19 Seeding 1.09 A.B. Sample 32 92 19 Seeding 1.14 0&M Manual 32 92 23 Sodding 1.08 A.B. Sample 32 92 23 Sodding 1.12 A.B. 0&M Manual 32 93 00 Exterior Plants 1.06 D. Sample 1.09 A. 32 93 00 Exterior Plants 1.13 0&M Manual 32 93 10 Landscape Maintenance 1.06 Sample 33 01 10.58 Disenfection of Water Utility Piping System 1.05 Record Data 33 02 30 Jacking,Boring or Tunneling Pipe 1.05 Record Data 33 02 30 Jacking,Boring or Tunneling Pipe 1.05 Shop Drawing 33 02 73 Site Concrete Encasement,Cradles,Saddles and Collars 1.05 Record Data 33 05 61 Concrete Manholes 1.05 Record Data 33 05 61 Concrete Manholes 1.05 Shop Drawing 33 14 16 Site Water Utility Distribution Piping 1.05 Record Data 33 31 13 Site Sanitary Sewerage Gravity Piping 1.06 Record Data Submittal Register Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 01 33 01-4 Re-Bid Construction Documents 10/2018 0133 01 Submittal Register Types of Submittals Required Specification Paragraph Specification Description Product Sample or Operations Section No. Information Mockup Data 3342 11 Stormwater Gravity Piping 1.06 Record Data 3342 13 Stormwater Culverts 1.07 Record Data 4122 13.13 Single Girder Bridge Crane 1.04 B Record Data 4122 13.13 Single Girder Bridge Crane 1.04 C Shop Drawing 4122 13.13 Single Girder Bridge Crane-Testing Results) 1.04 D 4122 13.13 Single Girder Bridge Crane 1.05 O&M Manual I END OF SECTION Submittal Register Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 01 33 01-5 Re-Bid Construction Documents 10/2018 01 35 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE A. Perform the Work as required to complete the entire Project within the Contract Times and in the sequence stipulated below: B. Consider the sequences, duration limitations, and governing factors outlined in this Section to prepare the schedule for the Work. 1.02 PLAN OF ACTION A. Submit a written plan of action for approval for shutting down essential services. These include: 1. Electrical power, 2. Control power, 3. Pipelines or wastewater systems, 4. Communications equipment, and 5. Other designated functions. B. Describe the following in the plan of action: 1. Scheduled dates for construction; 2. Work to be performed; 3. Utilities, piping, or services affected; 4. Length of time the service or utility will be disturbed; 5. Procedures to be used to carry out the Work; 6. Plan of Action to handle emergencies; 7. List of manpower, equipment, and ancillary supplies; 8. Backups for key pieces of equipment and key personnel; 9. Contingency plan that will be used if the original schedule cannot be met; and C. Submit plan 1 month prior to beginning the Work. Special Procedures 0135 00-1 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Rev 10/2018 Re-Bid Construction Documents 1.03 CRITICAL OPERATIONS A. The Owner has identified critical operations that must not be out of service longer than the designated maximum time out of service and/or must be performed only during the designated times. These have been identified in the table below: Max.Time Hours Operation Liquidated Critical Operation Damages Out of Operation can be Shut Down ($ per hour) B. Submit a written plan of action per Paragraph 1.02 for approval for critical operations. C. Work affecting critical operations is to be performed on a 24-hour a day basis until Owner's normal operations have been restored. D. Provide additional manpower and equipment as required to complete the Work affecting critical operations within the allotted time. END OF SECTION Special Procedures 0135 00-2 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Rev 10/2018 Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Submittals. B. Quality assurance. C. References and standards. D. Testing and inspection agencies and services. E. Contractor's construction-related professional design services. F. Contractor's design-related professional design services. G. Control of installation. H. Mock-ups. I. Manufacturers'field services. J. Defect Assessment. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Document 00 31 00 -Available Project Information: Soil investigation data. B. Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures. C. Section 01 45 33 -Code-Required Special Inspections and Procedures: Inspection reports. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ICC (IECC)-2021 - International Energy Conservation Code; 2021. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Contractor's Professional Design Services: Design of some aspect or portion of the project by party other than the design professional of record. Provide these services as part of the Contract for Construction. 1. Design Services Types Required: a. Construction-Related: Services Contractor needs to provide in order to carry out the Contractor's sole responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures. b. Design-Related: Design services explicitly required to be performed by another design professional due to highly-technical and/or specialized nature of a portion of the project. Services primarily involve engineering analysis, calculations, and design, and are not intended to alter the aesthetic aspects of the design. B. Design Data: Design-related, signed and sealed drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, shop drawings and other submittals provided by Contractor, and prepared directly by, or under direct supervision of, appropriately licensed design professional. 1.05 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION-RELATED PROFESSIONAL DESIGN SERVICES A. Coordination: Contractor's professional design services are subject to requirements of project's Conditions for Construction Contract. B. Provide such engineering design services as may be necessary to plan and safely conduct certain construction operations, pertaining to, but not limited to the following: 1. Temporary sheeting, shoring, or supports. 2. Temporary scaffolding. 3. Temporary bracing. 4. Temporary stairs or steps required for construction access only. 5. Temporary hoist(s) and rigging. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 01 40 00- 1 Quality Requirements Re-Bid Construction Documents 1.06 CONTRACTOR'S DESIGN-RELATED PROFESSIONAL DESIGN SERVICES A. Coordination: Contractor's professional design services are subject to requirements of project's Conditions for Construction Contract. B. Base design on performance and/or design criteria indicated in individual specification sections. C. Scope of Contractor's Professional Design Services: Provide for the following items of work: 1. Structural Design of Metal Framing: As described in Section 05 40 00- Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 2. Structural Design: Include physical characteristics, engineering calculations, and resulting dimensional limitations as described in Section 08 43 13-Aluminum-Framed Storefronts. 3. Sprinkler Layout: Coordinate with ceiling installation, detailed pipe layout, and hydraulic calculations as described in Section 21 13 00 - Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Designer's Qualification Statement: Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator, or for Owner's information. 1. Include information for each individual professional responsible for producing, or supervising production of, design-related professional services provided by Contractor. a. Full name. b. Professional licensure information. c. Statement addressing extent and depth of experience specifically relevant to design of items assigned to Contractor. C. Design Data: Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator for the limited purpose of assessing compliance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents, or for Owner's information. D. Test Reports: After each test/inspection, promptly submit two copies of report to Architect and to Contractor. 1. Include: a. Date issued. b. Project title and number. c. Name of inspector. d. Date and time of sampling or inspection. e. Identification of product and specifications section. f. Location in the Project. g. Type of test/inspection. h. Date of test/inspection. i. Results of test/inspection. j. Compliance with Contract Documents. k. When requested by Architect, provide interpretation of results. 2. Test report submittals are for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator for the limited purpose of assessing compliance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents, or for Owner's information. E. Certificates: When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the manufacturer and Contractor or installation/application subcontractor to Architect, in quantities specified for Product Data. 1. Indicate material or product complies with or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 01 40 00-2 Quality Requirements Re-Bid Construction Documents F. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit reports for Architect's benefit as contract administrator or for Owner. 1. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing compliance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. G. Erection Drawings: Submit drawings for Architect's benefit as contract administrator or for Owner. 1. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing compliance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. 2. Data indicating inappropriate or unacceptable Work may be subject to action by Architect or Owner. 1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Designer Qualifications: Where professional engineering design services and design data submittals are specifically required of Contractor by Contract Documents, provide services of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this type of work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located. 1.09 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS A. For products and workmanship specified by reference to a document or documents not included in the Project Manual, also referred to as reference standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B. Comply with reference standard of date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except where a specific date is established by applicable code. C. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections. D. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. E. Neither the contractual relationships, duties, or responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor those of Architect shall be altered from Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. 1.10 TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES AND SERVICES A. Owner will employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency to perform specified testing and inspection, including, but not limited to: 1. Special Inspections outlined in Section 01 45 33 and structural drawings. 2. Air barrier and building envelope performance verification in accordance with ICC (IECC)- 2021, Chapter4, paragraph C402.5. B. Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce work of specified quality. B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 01 40 00-3 Quality Requirements Re-Bid Construction Documents E. Have work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality. F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer. G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement. 3.02 MOCK-UPS A. Integrated Exterior Mock-ups: construct integrated exterior envelope mock-up. Coordinate installation of exterior envelope materials and products as required in individual Specification Sections. Provide adequate supporting structure for mock-up materials as necessary. 1. Construct exterior wall mock-up in phases that will mimic the means and methods of the actual wall construction to allow the Architect to inspect each component, or system mock- up prior to proceeding to the next phase and/or concealing importants components of the envelope design. 2. All exterior integrated mock-up assemblies must be constructed with exterior facing south as much as possible. B. Tests shall be performed under provisions identified in this section and identified in the respective product specification sections. C. Assemble and erect specified items with specified attachment and anchorage devices, flashings, seals, and finishes. D. Architect will use accepted mock-ups as a comparison standard for the remaining Work. E. Where mock-up has been accepted by Architect and is specified in product specification sections to be removed, protect mock-up throughout construction, remove mock-up and clear area when directed to do so by Architect. 3.03 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. See individual specification sections for testing required. B. Testing Agency Duties: 1. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of services. 2. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards. 3. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. 4. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-compliance of Work or products. 5. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Architect. 6. Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified. C. Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority: 1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor. 4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work. D. Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be used that require testing, along with proposed mix designs. 2. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to manufacturers'facilities. 3. Provide incidental labor and facilities: a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected. b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested/inspected. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 01 40 00-4 Quality Requirements Re-Bid Construction Documents c. To facilitate tests/inspections. d. To provide storage and curing of test samples. 4. Notify Architect and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring testing/inspection services. 5. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. 6. Arrange with Owner's agency and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. E. Re-testing required because of non-compliance with specified requirements shall be performed by the same agency on instructions by Architect. F. Re-testing required because of non-compliance with specified requirements shall be paid for by Contractor. 3.04 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust, and balance equipment as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary. B. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers'written instructions. 3.05 DEFECT ASSESSMENT A. Replace Work or portions of the Work not complying with specified requirements. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 01 40 00-5 Quality Requirements Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 01 41 00 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Regulatory requirements applicable to this project are the following: B. 28 CFR 36 - Nondiscrimination by Public Accommodations and in Commercial Facilities; Final Rule; Department of Justice; current edition. C. 36 CFR 1191 -Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA)Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA)Accessibility Guidelines; current edition. D. 29 CFR 1910 -Occupational Safety and Health Standards; Current Edition. E. ICC (IFC)-2018 - International Fire Code; 2018. F. NFPA 101-2018 - Life Safety Code; 2018. G. ICC (IBC)-2018- International Building Code; 2018. H. ICC (IPC)-2018- International Plumbing Code; 2018. I. ICC (IMC)-2018- International Mechanical Code; 2018. J. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. K. ICC (IECC)-2018- International Energy Conservation Code; 2018. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 40 00 -Quality Requirements. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor's Designer Qualifications: Refer to Section -01 40 00- Quality Requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 01 41 00- 1 Regulatory Requirements Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 01 45 33 CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Code-required special inspections. B. Testing services incidental to special inspections. C. Submittals. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures. B. Section 01 40 00 -Quality Requirements. C. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for material and product quality. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Code or Building Code: 2018 Edition of the International Building Code and, more specifically, Chapter 17- Structural Tests and Inspections, of same. B. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ): Agency or individual officially empowered to enforce the building, fire and life safety code requirements of the permitting jurisdiction in which the Project is located. C. Special Inspection: 1. Special inspections are inspections and testing of materials, installation, fabrication, erection or placement of components and connections mandated by the AHJ that also require special expertise to ensure compliance with the approved Contract Documents and the referenced standards. 2. Special inspections are separate from and independent of tests and inspections conducted by Owner or Contractor for the purposes of quality assurance and contract administration. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete; 2019 (Reapproved 2022). B. AISC 360- Specification for Structural Steel Buildings; 2022. C. ASTM D3740- Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction; 2023. D. ASTM E329 -Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection, Testing, or Special Inspection; 2023. E. ASTM E543 -Standard Specification for Agencies Performing Nondestructive Testing; 2021. F. ASTM E2174 -Standard Practice for On-Site Inspection of Installed Firestop Systems; 2020a. G. ASTM E2393 -Standard Practice for On-Site Inspection of Installed Fire Resistive Joint Systems and Perimeter Fire Barriers; 2020a. H. AWS D1.1/D1.1 M -Structural Welding Code- Steel; 2020, with Errata (2023). I. AWS D1.3/D1.3M -Structural Welding Code- Sheet Steel; 2018, with Errata (2022). J. AWS D1.4/D1.4M -Structural Welding Code- Steel Reinforcing Bars; 2018, with Amendment (2020). K. IAS AC291 -Accreditation Criteria for Special Inspection Agencies AC291; 2019. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 01 45 33- 1 Code-Required Special Inspections and Procedures Re-Bid Construction Documents 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Fabricator's Qualification Statement: Fabricator is required to submit documentation of fabrication facilities and methods as well as quality control procedures. Include documentation of AHJ approval. C. Special Inspection Reports: After each special inspection, Special Inspector is required to promptly submit at least two copies of report; one to Architect and one to the AHJ. 1. Include: a. Date issued. b. Project title and number. c. Name of Special Inspector. d. Date and time of special inspection. e. Identification of product and specifications section. f. Location in the Project. g. Type of special inspection. h. Date of special inspection. i. Results of special inspection. j. Compliance with Contract Documents. D. Fabricator Special Inspection Reports: After each special inspection of fabricated items at the Fabricator's facility, Special Inspector is required to promptly submit at least two copies of report; one to Architect and one to AHJ. 1. Include: a. Date issued. b. Project title and number. c. Name of Special Inspector. d. Date and time of special inspection. e. Identification of fabricated item and specification section. f. Location in the Project. g. Results of special inspection. h. Verification of fabrication and quality control procedures. i. Compliance with Contract Documents. j. Compliance with referenced standard(s). E. Test Reports: After each test or inspection, promptly submit at least two copies of report; one to Architect and one to AHJ. 1. Include: a. Date issued. b. Project title and number. c. Name of inspector. d. Date and time of sampling or inspection. e. Identification of product and specifications section. f. Location in the Project. g. Type of test or inspection. h. Date of test or inspection. i. Results of test or inspection. j. Compliance with Contract Documents. F. Certificates: When specified in individual special inspection requirements, Special Inspector shall submit certification by the manufacturer, fabricator, and installation subcontractor to Architect and AHJ, in quantities specified for Product Data. 1. Indicate material or product complies with or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 01 45 33-2 Code-Required Special Inspections and Procedures Re-Bid Construction Documents 1.06 SPECIAL INSPECTION AGENCY A. Owner or Architect will employ services of a Special Inspection Agency to perform inspections and associated testing and sampling in accordance with ASTM E329 and required by the building code. B. The Special Inspection Agency may employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency to perform testing and sampling associated with special inspections and required by the building code. C. Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Special Inspection Agency Qualifications: 1. Independent firm specializing in performing testing and inspections of the type specified in this section. 2. Accredited by IAS according to IAS AC291. PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SCHEDULE OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS, GENERAL A. Frequency of Special Inspections: Special Inspections are indicated as continuous or periodic. 1. Continuous Special Inspection: Special Inspection Agency is required to be present in the area where the work is being performed and observe the work at all times the work is in progress. 2. Periodic Special Inspection: Special Inspection Agency is required to be present in the area where work is being performed and observe the work part-time or intermittently and at the completion of the work. 3.02 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS FOR STEEL CONSTRUCTION A. High-Strength Bolt, Nut and Washer Material: 1. Verify identification markings comply with ASTM standards specified in the approved contract and to AISC 360, Section A3.3; periodic. 2. Submit manufacturer's certificates of compliance; periodic. B. High-Strength Bolting Installation: Verify items listed below comply with AISC 360, Section M2.5. 1. Snug tight joints; periodic. C. Structural Steel and Cold Formed Steel Deck Material: 1. Structural Steel: Verify identification markings comply with AISC 360, Section M3.5; periodic. 2. Other Steel: Verify identification markings comply with ASTM standards specified in the approved Contract Documents; periodic. 3. Submit manufacturer's certificates of compliance and test reports; periodic. D. Weld Filler Material: 1. Verify identification markings comply with AWS standards specified in the approved Contract Documents and to AISC 360, Section A3.5; periodic. 2. Submit manufacturer's certificates of compliance; periodic. E. Welding: 1. Structural Steel and Cold Formed Steel Deck: a. Complete and Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welds: Verify compliance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M; continuous. b. Multipass Fillet Welds: Verify compliance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M; continuous. c. Single Pass Fillet Welds Less than 5/16 inch Wide: Verify compliance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M; periodic. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 01 45 33-3 Code-Required Special Inspections and Procedures Re-Bid Construction Documents d. Plug and Slot Welds: Verify compliance with AWS D1.1/D1.1 M; continuous. e. Single Pass Fillet Welds 5/16 inch or Greater: Verify compliance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M; continuous. f. Floor and Roof Deck Welds: Verify compliance with AWS D1.3/D1.3M; continuous. 2. Reinforcing Steel: Verify items listed below comply with AWS D1.4/D1.4M and ACI 318, Section 3.5.2. a. Verification of weldability; periodic. b. Reinforcing steel resisting flexural and axial forces in intermediate and special moment frames as well as where it is referenced in older codes. Elements of special structural walls of concrete and shear reinforcement; continuous. c. Shear reinforcement; continuous. d. Other reinforcing steel; periodic. F. Steel Frame Joint Details: Verify compliance with approved Contract Documents. 1. Details, bracing and stiffening; periodic. 2. Member locations; periodic. 3. Application of joint details at each connection; periodic. 3.03 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS FOR CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION A. Reinforcing Steel, Including Prestressing of Tendons and Placement: Verify compliance with approved Contract Documents and ACI 318, Sections 3.5 and 7.1 through 7.7; periodic. B. Reinforcing Steel Welding: Verify compliance with AWS D1.4/D1.4M and ACI 318, Section 3.5.2; periodic. C. Bolts Installed in Concrete: Where allowable loads have been increased or where strength design is used, verify compliance with approved Contract Documents and ACI 318, Sections 8.1.3 and 21.2.8 prior to and during placement of concrete; continuous. D. Anchors Installed in Hardened Concrete: Verify compliance with ACI 318, Sections 3.8.6, 8.1.3, and 21.2.8; periodic. E. Design Mix: Verify plastic concrete complies with the design mix in approved Contract Documents and with ACI 318, Chapter 4 and 5.2; periodic. F. Specified Curing Temperature and Techniques: Verify compliance with approved Contract Documents and ACI 318, Sections 5.11 through 5.13; periodic. G. Concrete Strength in Situ: Verify concrete strength complies with approved Contract Documents and ACI 318, Section 6.2, for the following. H. Formwork Shape, Location and Dimensions: Verify compliance with approved Contract Documents and ACI 318, Section 6.1.1; periodic. 3.04 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS FOR SOILS A. Materials and Placement: Verify each item below complies with approved construction documents and approved geotechnical report. 1. Design bearing capacity of material below shallow foundations; periodic. 2. Design depth of excavations and suitability of material at bottom of excavations; periodic. 3. Materials, densities, lift thicknesses; placement and compaction of backfill: continuous. 4. Subgrade, prior to placement of compacted fill verify proper preparation; periodic. B. Testing: Classify and test excavated material; periodic. 3.05 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS FOR CAST-IN-PLACE DEEP FOUNDATIONS A. Materials, Equipment and Final Placement: Verify each item below complies with approved construction documents and approved geotechnical report. 1. Element length; continuous. 2. Element diameters and bell diameters; continuous. 3. Embedment into bedrock; continuous. 4. End bearing strata capacity; continuous. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 01 45 33-4 Code-Required Special Inspections and Procedures Re-Bid Construction Documents 5. Placement locations and plumbness; continuous. 6. Type and size of hammer; continuous. B. Drilling Operations: Observe and maintain complete and accurate records for each element; continuous. C. Material Volume: Record concrete and grout volumes. D. Concrete Elements Associated with Cast-in-Place Deep Foundations: Perform additional inspections as required by the Special Inspections for Concrete Construction article of this section. 3.06 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS FOR FIRE RESISTANT PENETRATIONS AND JOINTS A. Verify penetration firestops in accordance with ASTM E2174. B. Verify fire resistant joints in accordance with ASTM E2393. 3.07 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS FOR WIND RESISTANCE A. Wind Resisting Components: 1. Roof covering, roof deck, and floor framing connections; periodic. 2. Exterior wall covering and wall connections to roof and floor diaphragms and framing; periodic. B. Structural Observations for Wind Resistance: Visually observe structural system for general compliance with the approved Contract Documents; periodic. 3.08 SPECIAL INSPECTION AGENCY DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES A. Special Inspection Agency shall: 1. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of services. 2. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified reference standards. 3. Ascertain compliance of materials and products with requirements of Contract Documents. 4. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-compliance of work or products. 5. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Architect. 6. Submit reports of all tests or inspections specified. B. Re-testing required because of non-compliance with specified requirements shall be performed by the same agency on instructions by Architect. C. Re-testing required because of non-compliance with specified requirements shall be paid for by Contractor. 3.09 CONTRACTOR DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES A. Contractor Responsibilities, General: 1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials for special inspections that require material verification. 2. Cooperate with agency and laboratory personnel; provide access to approved documents at project site, to the work, to manufacturers'facilities, and to fabricators'facilities. 3. Provide incidental labor and facilities: a. To provide access to work to be tested or inspected. b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested or inspected. c. To facilitate tests or inspections. d. To provide storage and curing of test samples. 4. Notify Architect and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring testing or inspection services. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 01 45 33-5 Code-Required Special Inspections and Procedures Re-Bid Construction Documents 5. Arrange with Owner's agency and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 01 45 33-6 Code-Required Special Inspections and Procedures Re-Bid Construction Documents 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide temporary facilities, including and the Contractor's field offices, storage sheds, and temporary utilities needed to complete the Work. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide a total electrical heating and cooling system for the field office capable of maintaining the following conditions: 1. Heating: Minimum 75 degrees ID temp at 10 degrees ambient. 2. Cooling: Minimum 75 degrees ID temp at 105 degrees ambient. 3. Relative humidity: 48 to 54 percent. B. Inspect and test each service before placing temporary utilities in use. Arrange for all required inspections and tests by regulatory agencies, and obtain required certifications and permits for use. 1.03 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Arrange transportation, loading, and handling of temporary buildings and sheds. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS A. Locate buildings and sheds at the Site as indicated or as approved by the OPT. B. Prepare the Site by removing trees, brush, or debris and performing demolition or grubbing needed to clear a space adequate for the structures. C. Pay for the utilities used by temporary facilities during construction. D. Provide each temporary service and facility ready for use at each location when the service or facility is first needed to avoid delay in the performance of the Work. E. Maintain, expand as required, and modify temporary services and facilities as needed throughout the progress of the Work. F. Remove services and facilities when approved by the OAR. G. Operate temporary facilities in a safe and efficient manner. 1. Restrict loads on temporary services or facilities to within their designed or designated capacities. 2. Provide sanitary conditions. Prevent public nuisance or hazardous conditions from developing or existing at the Site. 3. Prevent freezing of pipes,flooding, or the contamination of water. 4. Maintain Site security and protection of the facilities. Temporary Facilities and Controls 0150 00-1 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Rev 8/2019 Re-Bid Construction Documents 1.05 OPTIONS A. Construction offices may be prefabricated buildings on skids or mobile trailers. B. Storage sheds may be prefabricated buildings on skids or truck trailers. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 TEMPORARY FIELD OFFICES A. The field office must contain at least 120 square feet of useable space. The field office must be air-conditioned and heated and must be furnished with an inclined table that measures at least 30 inches by 60 inches and two chairs. The Contractor shall move the field office on the Site as required by the OAR. There is no separate pay item for the field office. Provide access to contractor's field office and space for inspector. B. Furnish a field office of adequate size for Contractor's use. Provide conference room space for a minimum of 10 people. C. Other trades may provide their own offices only when space is available at the Site, and the OPT agrees to its size, condition, and location. 2.02 TEMPORARY STORAGE BUILDINGS A. Furnish storage buildings of adequate size to store any materials or equipment delivered to the Site that might be affected by weather. 2.03 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide sanitary facilities at the Site from the commencement of the Project until Project conclusion. Maintain these facilities in a clean and sanitary condition at all times,and comply with the requirements of the local health authority. On large sites, provide portable toilets at such locations that no point in the Site shall be more than 600 feet from a toilet. B. Use these sanitary facilities. Do not use restrooms within existing or Owner-occupied buildings. 2.04 TEMPORARY HEAT A. Provide heating devices needed to protect buildings during construction. Provide fuel needed to operate the heating devices and attend the heating devices at all times they are in operation, including overnight operations. Temporary Facilities and Controls 0150 00-2 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Rev 8/2019 Re-Bid Construction Documents 2.05 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Provide the temporary utilities for administration, construction, testing, disinfection, and start-up of the Work, including electrical power, water, and telephone. Pay all costs associated with furnishing temporary utilities. 1. Provide a source of temporary electrical power of adequate size for construction procedures. a. Use existing power systems where spare capacity is available. Provide temporary power connections that do not adversely affect the existing power supply. Submit connections to the OAR for approval prior to installation. b. Provide electrical pole and service connections that comply with Laws and Regulations and the requirements of the power company. 2. Provide telephone service to the Site and install telephones inside the Contractor's field office. 2.06 WATER FOR CONSTRUCTION A. Provide temporary water. Potable water may be purchased from the Owner by obtaining a water meter from the Owner and transporting water from a water hydrant. Non-potable water may be used for hydraulic testing of non-potable basins or pipelines. Include the cost of water in the Contract Price. B. Contractor must comply with the City of Corpus Christi's Water Conservation and Drought Contingency Plan as amended (the "Plan"). This includes implementing water conservation measures established for changing conditions. The City Engineer will provide a copy of the Plan to Contractor at the pre-construction meeting. The Contractor will keep a copy of the Plan on the Site throughout construction. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 LOCATION OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Locate temporary facilities in areas approved by the OAR. Construct and install signs at locations approved by the OAR. Install informational signs so they are clearly visible. 3.02 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS A. Any construction signs by the contractor, architects and engineers must meet the City of Corpus Christi sign ordinance. 3.03 TEMPORARY LIGHTING A. Provide temporary lighting inside buildings once buildings are weatherproof. B. Provide lighting that is adequate to perform Work within any space. Temporary lights may be removed once the permanent lighting is in service. C. Provide portable flood lights at any time that Work will be performed outside the structure at night. Provide adequate lighting at any location Work is being performed. Temporary Facilities and Controls 0150 00-3 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Rev 8/2019 Re-Bid Construction Documents 3.04 DRINKING WATER A. Provide all field offices with potable water. Provide a dispenser and cooling apparatus if bottled drinking water is provided. B. Pay for water services and maintain daily. 3.05 CONSTRUCTION FENCE A. Install and maintain a construction fence around the Site and off-site storage yards. Fence must be a minimum 6 feet high chain link construction unless shown otherwise. Provide gates with padlocks. 3.06 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Remove temporary buildings,sheds,and utilities at the conclusion of the Project and restore the Site to original condition or finished in accordance with the Drawings. B. Remove informational signs upon completion of construction. C. Remove Project identification signs, framing, supports, and foundations upon completion of the Project. 3.07 MAINTENANCE AND JANITORIAL SERVICE A. Provide janitorial service (sweeping/mopping) for the field office on a weekly basis or as requested. Empty trash receptacles daily or as needed. B. Maintain signs and supports in a neat, clean condition. Repair damage to structures, framings, or signs. C. Repair any damage to Work caused by placement or removal of temporary signage. END OF SECTION Temporary Facilities and Controls 0150 00-4 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Rev 8/2019 Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 01 56 39 LANDSCAPE PROTECTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Install landscape protection and institute landscape protection program. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements B. Section 31 13 30 -Treatment of Existing Trees 1.03 QUALITY CONTROL A. All tree pruning work or root pruning/repair shall be performed by a professional Arborist approved by the Landscape Architect. 1. Refer to Section 31 13 30- Treatment of Existing Trees, for qualifications of Arborist. 2. Submit name and company for acceptance before commencing work at the site. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Tree Barricade Fencing: 1. Posts: Studded steel T-posts, 2 lbs. per linear foot; painted finish for rust protection. 2. Fabric: 4'-0" height chain link fence or 4'-0" height high density polyethylene netting with 5-7 year life (international orange color). B. Tree Armor: 1. Wood: SPFA utility grade, 2 x 4. 2. Wire: Annealed steel wire, 16 gauge minimum. 3. Burlap: 10 oz. natural fiber jute burlap; biodegradable. C. Mulch: 1. Native double shredded hardwood mulch. D. Tree Wound Paint: Black enamel-based spray paint or asphaltic based tree paint such as Treeheal or Ortho. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 LANDSCAPE PROTECTION A. During the construction of this project, it is the Owner's expressed goal to prevent damage and/or destruction of any trees and understory vegetation to be preserved which are not within the building line. 1. It shall be the Contractor's sole responsibility to employ whatever means are necessary to prevent damage and/or destruction of any trees and understory vegetation except as expressly stated in the contract documents. 2. At a minimum, protection encompasses: a. Prohibit earth stockpiling and material storage within drip line of trees. b. Prohibit dumping of refuse, chemicals, other materials, and puddling or running water which may injure plant growth including root systems. c. Prohibit unnecessary cutting, breaking, and skinning of branches and roots. d. Prohibit skinning and bruising of bark. e. Prohibit fires, high heat, and smoke adjacent to trees or beneath tree canopies. f. Prohibit vehicle and equipment parking and storage within the drip line of trees except vehicles actively engaged in construction. g. Prohibit traffic within the drip line of trees. h. Refer to 31 13 30-Treatment of Existing Trees for additional requirements. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 01 56 39- 1 LANDSCAPE PROTECTION 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 3. Routing of underground utilities and overhead utilities shall be staked in the field by the Contractor for review and approval by the Landscape Architect and Arborist prior to initiation of utility related work, e.g. trenching and drilling piers and pole bases. B. Scheduling: 1. Erect landscape protection prior to beginning any clearing or construction activity. Unless otherwise instructed by Landscape Architect or Owner, maintain in place until construction and surface restoration is complete 2. Remove landscape protection after completion of finish grading. C. Tree Barricade Fencing: 1. Placement: a. All trees and vegetation to remain on site, as shown on the Tree Preservation Plan. 2. Erect tree protection barricade: a. Place fence posts spaced at maximum 6'-0" o.c. b. If construction is scheduled to encroach on planting, install fencing at the limits of construction. c. Position top of barrier at 4'-0" above finish grade. d. Follow edge of existing plantings/landscape. e. Follow edge of drip line at existing trees. f. If wooden post and rails are employed, install a second rail at 2'-0" above finish grade. 3. In extreme circumstances and with the approval of the Landscape Architect, fencing may be located at the edge of the root protection zone (refer to Section 31 13 30 for Root Protection Zone). a. For trees 10 inch caliper and less, the minimum distance the barrier shall be erected is five (5)feet from the trunk of the tree. 4. No material shall be stored or construction operation shall be carried on within the tree protection barricade. D. Tree Armor: 1. Placement at trees: a. Exposed to construction activity within the dripline. b. When tree is located within twenty-five (25)feet of any construction activity in addition to barricade fencing. 2. Placed to a height of 8' or to the limits of lower branching with 2x4's butted side to side completely around trunk. a. Wrap trunk with burlap as detailed prior to placement of 2x4's. b. Wire wrap/tie, do not nail, around trees. 3. The tree protection barricade shall be placed before any excavating or grading is begun and maintained in repair for the duration of the construction work unless otherwise directed. 4. Tree armor shall remain until all work is completed. E. Placement of Mulch: 1. Schedule: a. Tree Barricade Condition: Install 6" depth of mulch over area to limits of tree dripline unless noted otherwise. b. Tree Armor Condition: Install 8" depth of mulch over area to limits of tree dripline unless noted otherwise. c. At root zone areas outside of barricade fencing , cover areas with eight(8) inches of organic mulch to minimize soil compaction. 2. Place beneath the canopy of all existing trees as shown on the plan. 3. Coordinate with placement of barricade fencing and tree armor. a. Extend placement of mulch to cover ground 10' -0" beyond edge of drip line. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 01 56 39-2 LANDSCAPE PROTECTION 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 4. Keep mulch 12" clear of base of tree trunk. 5. Except in areas where native understory is to be preserved. 6. Maintain scheduled depth of mulch throughout construction. 3.02 WATERING AND FERTILIZATION A. Water and fertilize trees within limits of construction area. B. Fertilize trees before commencement of clearing, demolition, excavation or construction activities. 1. Refer to Section 31 13 30- Treatment of Existing Trees. C. Fertilize trees being impacted by construction activities including but not limited to clearing, demolition and excavation. 1. Refer to Section 31 1330- Treatment of Existing Trees. D. Water trees within construction area during entire construction period. 1. Frequency: a. Between April 15 and October 15, water once per week. b. Between October 16 and April 14, water every other week. 3.03 EXCAVATION AROUND TREES A. Excavate within drip line of trees only where required and when absolutely necessary. B. Refer to Section 31 13 30 -Treatment of Existing Trees, for full requirements. C. Where excavating within drip line of trees is required for new construction, hand excavate to minimize damage to root systems. 1. Complete root pruning per Section 31 13 30. D. Where excavating within drip line of trees is required for new construction major utilities or cutting grade, complete initial cut on side of excavation/trench towards tree with rock wheel trencher. 1. Clean cut frayed ends of roots using sharp pruning instruments to be flush with surface of soil. 2. Seal ends of roots 1 inch diameter and greater with tree wound paint within 30 minutes of cutting. 3.04 PRUNING A. Except where indicated to be removed, prune and protect existing trees against damage. B. Prune back all damaged and dead tree branches, branches required to provide access to the Work. 1. Refer to Section 31 13 30 for pruning. 2. Cleanly cut and repair all ragged wounds. C. Where roots have been severely cut or lost, prune corresponding tree branches to compensate. D. Cut branches with sharp pruning instruments; do not break or chop. E. Paint cuts on all oak species immediately with TREE WOUND PAINT. 3.05 REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT OF LANDSCAPE COMPONENTS A. Repair or replace landscape components or features damaged or destroyed by construction operations. 1. Landscape components include, but are not limited to: irrigation system, paving, trees, shrubs, ground covers, turf/grass, utility systems and other forms of existing construction to remain. B. Make repairs promptly after damage occurs to prevent progressive tree deterioration. Seal all wounds immediately. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 01 56 39-3 LANDSCAPE PROTECTION 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents C. Remove and replace dead and damaged landscape materials and other landscape components or features which are determined by Landscape Architect to be incapable of restoration to normal growth pattern or restoration to acceptable condition. D. Trees and other landscape materials so damaged that the character of the existing trees or landscape materials have been lost shall be replaced with trees and landscape materials of the same species of equal or greater size and character at no additional cost to Owner. 1. Landscape Architect and Arborist shall be the sole judge of the quality and acceptability of replacement material. E. Replacement material shall be guaranteed for 12 full months from time of replacement. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 01 56 39-4 LANDSCAPE PROTECTION 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 01 57 00 TEMPORARY CONTROLS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to construct temporary facilities to provide and maintain control over environmental conditions at the Site. Remove temporary facilities when no longer needed. B. Construct temporary impounding works, channels, diversions, furnishing and operation of pumps, installing piping and fittings, and other construction for control of conditions at the Site. Remove temporary controls at the end of the Project. C. Provide a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) as required by Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (TPDES) General Permit No. TXR150000 for stormwater discharges from construction activities as applicable to the nature and size of the Project. Comply with all requirements of the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ)and Laws and Regulations. File required legal notices and obtain required permits prior to beginning any construction activity. D. Provide labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to prevent stormwater pollution for the duration of the Project. Provide and maintain erosion and sediment control structures as required to preventive sediment and other pollutants from the Site from entering any stormwater system including open channels. Remove pollution control structures when no longer required to prevent stormwater pollution. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Construct and maintain temporary controls with adequate workmanship using durable materials to provide effective environmental management systems meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents and Laws and Regulations. Use materials that require minimal maintenance to prevent disruption of construction activities while providing adequate protection of the environment. B. Periodically inspect systems to determine that they are meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.03 DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL A. Provide documents requiring approval by the OPT as Shop Drawings in accordance with Article 2S of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. B. Provide copies of notices, records, and reports required by the Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations as Record Data in accordance with Article 26 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. Temporary Controls 0157 00-1 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Rev 8/2019 Re-Bid Construction Documents 1.04 STANDARDS A. Provide a SWPPP that complies with all requirements of TPDES General Permit No. TXR150000 and any other applicable Laws and Regulations. B. Perform Work to comply with the City of Corpus Christi Code of Ordinances, Part III, Chapter 14, Article X - titled "STORM WATER QUALITY MANAGEMENT PLANS" and any other applicable Laws and Regulations. 1.05 PERMITS A. As applicable, submit the following to the TCEQ and the Operator of any Municipal Separate Storm Sewer System (MS4) receiving stormwater discharges from the Site: 1. Notice of Intent (NOI) at least 48 hours prior to beginning construction activity. Construction activity may commence 24 hours after the submittal of an electronic NOI. 2. Notice of Change (NOC) letter when relevant facts or incorrect information was submitted in the NOI, or if relevant information in the NOI changes during the course of construction activity. 3. Notice of Termination (NOT) when the construction Project has been completed and stabilized. B. Post a copy of the NOI at the Site in a location where it is readily available for viewing by the general public, and as required by Laws and Regulations prior to starting construction activities and maintain the posting until completion of the construction activities. C. Maintain copies of a schedule of major construction activities, inspection reports, and revision documentation with the SWPPP. 1.06 STORMWATER POLLUTION CONTROL A. Comply with the current requirements of TPDES General Permit No. TXR150000 as set forth by the TCEQ for the duration of the Project as applicable to the nature of the work and the total disturbed area: 1. Develop a SWPPP meeting all requirements of the TPDES General Permit. 2. Submit of a Notice of Intent to the TCEQ. 3. Develop and implement appropriate Best Management Practices as established by local agencies of jurisdiction. 4. Provide all monitoring and/or sampling required for reporting to the TCEQ. 5. Submit reports to the TCEQ as required as a condition of the TPDES General Permit. 6. Submit copies of the reports to the Designer as Record Data in accordance with Article 26 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. Temporary Controls 0157 00-2 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Rev 8/2019 Re-Bid Construction Documents 7. Retain copies of these documents at the Site at all times for review and inspection by the OPT or regulatory agencies. Post a copy of the permit as required by Laws and Regulations. 8. Assume sole responsibility for implementing, updating, and modifying the TPDES General Permit per Laws and Regulations for the SWPPP and Best Management Practices. B. Use forms required by the TCEQ to file the Notice of Intent. Submit the Notice of Intent at least 2 days prior to the start of construction. Develop the SWPPP prior to submitting the Notice of Intent. Provide draft copies of the Notice of Intent,SWPPP,and any other pertinent TCEQ submittal documents to Owner for review prior to submittal to the TCEQ. C. Return any property disturbed by construction activities to either specified conditions or pre- construction conditions as set forth in the Contract Documents. Provide an overall erosion and sedimentation control system that will protect all undisturbed areas and soil stockpiles/spoil areas. Implement appropriate Best Management Practices and techniques to control erosion and sedimentation and maintain these practices and techniques in effective operating condition during construction. Permanently stabilize exposed soil and fill as soon as practical during the Work. D. Assume sole responsibility for the means, methods,techniques, sequences, and procedures for furnishing, installing, and maintaining erosion and sedimentation control structures and procedures and overall compliance with the TPDES General Permit. Modify the system as required to effectively control erosion and sediment. E. Retain copies of reports required by the TPDES General Permit for 3 years from date of Final Completion. 1.07 POLLUTION CONTROL A. Prevent the contamination of soil, water, or atmosphere by the discharge of noxious substances from construction operations. Provide adequate measures to prevent the creation of noxious air-borne pollutants. Prevent dispersal of pollutants into the atmosphere. Do not dump or otherwise discharge noxious or harmful fluids into drains or sewers, nor allow noxious liquids to contaminate public waterways in any manner. B. Provide equipment and personnel and perform emergency measures necessary to contain any spillage. 1. Contain chemicals in protective areas and do not dump on soil. Dispose of such materials at off-site locations in an acceptable manner. 2. Excavate contaminated soil and dispose at an off-site location if contamination of the soil does occur. Fill resulting excavations with suitable backfill and compact to the density of the surrounding undisturbed soil. 3. Provide documentation to the Owner which states the nature and strength of the contaminant, method of disposal, and the location of the disposal site. 4. Comply with Laws and Regulations regarding the disposal of pollutants. Temporary Controls 0157 00-3 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Rev 8/2019 Re-Bid Construction Documents C. Groundwater or run-off water which has come into contact with noxious chemicals, sludge, or sludge-contaminated soil is considered contaminated. Contaminated water must not be allowed to enter streams or water courses, leave the Site in a non-contained form, or enter non-contaminated areas of the Site. 1. Pump contaminated water to holding ponds constructed by the Contractor for this purpose, or discharge to areas on the interior of the Site, as designated by the OAR. 2. Construct temporary earthen dikes or take other precautions and measures as required to contain the contaminated water and pump to a designated storage area. 3. Wash any equipment used for handling contaminated water or soil within contaminated areas three times with uncontaminated water prior to using such equipment in an uncontaminated area. Dispose of wash water used to wash such equipment as contaminated water. 1.08 EARTH CONTROL A. Remove excess soil, spoil materials, and other earth not required for backfill at the time of generation. Control stockpiled materials to eliminate interference with Contractor and Owner's operations. B. Dispose of excess earth off the Site. Provide written approval from the property owner for soils deposited on private property. Obtain approval of the Owner if this disposal impacts the use of Site or other easements. 1.09 OZONE ADVISORY DAYS A. Do not conduct roofing, priming, or hot-mix paving operations, except for repairs, on days the City Engineer has notified Contractor that an ozone advisory is in effect. An extension of time will be allowed for each day for which priming or hot mix paving was scheduled, crews were prepared to perform this Work and the City Engineer issued ozone alert prevents this Work. Contractor will be compensated at the unit price indicated in the Bid for each day for which an extension of time was granted due to an ozone alert. 1.10 MANAGEMENT OF WATER A. Manage water resulting from rains or ground water at the Site. Maintain trenches and excavations free of water at all times. B. Lower the water table in the construction area by acceptable means if necessary to maintain a dry and workable condition at all times. Provide drains, sumps, casings, well points, and other water control devices as necessary to remove excess water. C. Provide continuous operation of water management actions. Maintain standby equipment to provide proper and continuous operation for water management. D. Ensure that water drainage does not damage adjacent property. Divert water into the same natural watercourse in which its headwaters are located, or other natural stream or waterway as approved by the Owner. Assume responsibility for the discharge of water from the Site. E. Remove the temporary construction and restore the Site in a manner acceptable to the OAR and to match surrounding material at the conclusion of the Work. Temporary Controls 0157 00-4 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Rev 8/2019 Re-Bid Construction Documents 1.11 DEWATERING A. This item is considered subsidiary for all dewatering methods other than "well pointing" to the appropriate bid items as described in the Bid Form where dewatering is needed to keep the excavation dry, as approved by the Designer, and shall include all costs to provide a dry foundation for the proposed improvements. B. Storm water that enters an excavation can be pumped out as long as care is taken to minimize solids and mud entering the pump suction and flow is pumped to a location that allows for sheet flow prior to entering a storm water drainage ditch or storm water inlet. C. An alternative to sheet flow is to pump storm water to an area where ponding occurs naturally without leaving the designated work area or by a manmade berm(s) prior to entering the storm water system. Sheet flow and ponding is to allow solids screening and/or settling prior to entering a storm water conduit or inlet. D. Storm water or groundwater shall not be discharged to private property without permission. It is the intent that Contractor discharges groundwater primarily into the existing storm water system, provided that the quality of groundwater is equal to or better than the receiving stream,the Corpus Christi Bay. E. Testing of groundwater quality is to be performed by the Contractor, at the Contractor's expense, prior to commencing discharge and shall be retested by the Contractor, at the Contractor's expense, a minimum of once a week. Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner on all testing. Tests will also be performed as each new area of construction is started. F. Another option for disposal of groundwater by Contractor would include pumping to the nearest wastewater system. If discharging to temporary holding tanks and trucking to a wastewater or wastewater plant, the costs for these operations shall be negotiated. Other groundwater disposal alternatives or solutions may be approved by the Designer on a case by case basis. G. Prior to pumping groundwater from a trench to the wastewater system the Contractor shall contact Wastewater Pre-treatment Coordinator at 826-1817 to obtain a "no cost" permit from the Owner's Wastewater Department. Contractor will pay for any water quality testing or water analysis cost required. The permit will require an estimate of groundwater flow. Groundwater flow can be estimated by boring a hole or excavating a short trench then record water level shortly after completion, allow to sit overnight, record water level again, pump hole or trench dry to a holding tank or vacuum truck then record how long it takes to fill to original level and overnight level. 1.12 DISPOSAL OF CONTAMINATED GROUNDWATER A. An allowance will be included in the Bid for the unanticipated disposal of contaminated groundwater. This allowance may not be needed but is provided in case contaminated groundwater is encountered during the course of the Project and does not meet the water quality requirements for discharge into the storm water or wastewater systems. This allowance includes all materials, tools, equipment, labor, transportation, hauling, coordination, and proper disposal of the contaminated water at an approved landfill, deep water injection well, or other site as agreed to by the Designer. Suggested disposal facilities would be Texas Molecular in Corpus Christi,Texas. Temporary Controls 0157 00-5 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Rev 8/2019 Re-Bid Construction Documents B. The payment for this Work will be based on the Contractor's actual costs and will be negotiated. Payment will not include costs associated with routine dewatering, which is considered subsidiary to the appropriate bid items as described in Paragraph 1.11. 1.13 DISPOSAL OF HIGHLY CHLORINATED WATER A. Dispose of water used for testing, disinfection, and line flushing. Comply with Owner's requirements and Laws and Regulation regarding the disposal of contaminated water, including water with levels of chlorine,which exceed the permissible limits for discharge into wetlands or environmentally sensitive areas. Comply with the requirements of all regulatory agencies in the disposal of all water used in the Project. Include a description and details for disposal of this water in a Plan of Action per SECTION 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES. Do not use the Owner's wastewater system for disposal of contaminated water. 1.14 WINDSTORM CERTIFICATION A. All affected materials and installation shall comply with Texas Department of Insurance Requirements for windstorm resistant construction for design wind speed as required by the current version of the International Building Code (IBC). When applicable, [Owner] shall be responsible for contracting with a licensed structural engineer in the State of Texas to perform all inspections and provide documentation for windstorm certification to the Texas Board of Insurance. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all necessary design/assembly documentation for all new windows, doors, louvers, etc. to the windstorm engineer/inspectors required to conform with the requirements of the Texas Department of Insurance. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide materials that comply with Laws and Regulations. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTING, MAINTAINING AND REMOVING TEMPORARY CONTROLS A. Construct temporary controls in accordance with Laws and Regulations. B. Maintain controls in accordance with regulatory requirements where applicable, or in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. C. Remove temporary controls when no longer required, but before the Project is complete. Correct any damage or pollution that occurs as the result of removing controls while they are still required. END OF SECTION Temporary Controls 0157 00-6 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 22129 Rev 8/2019 Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. General product requirements. B. Transportation, handling, storage and protection. C. Product option requirements. D. Substitution limitations. E. Maintenance materials, including extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 25 00 -Substitution Procedures: Substitutions made during procurement and/or construction phases. B. Section 01 40 00 -Quality Requirements: Product quality monitoring. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project. B. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project; indicate utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. C. Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. 1. For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the manufacturer's standard colors, textures, and patterns. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 NEW PRODUCTS A. Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by Contract Documents. B. Use of products having any of the following characteristics is not permitted: 1. Made using or containing CFC's or HCFC's. 2. Made of wood from newly cut old growth timber. C. Where other criteria are met, Contractor shall give preference to products that: 1. If used on interior, have lower emissions, as defined in Section 01 61 16. 2. If wet-applied, have lower VOC content, as defined in Section 01 61 16. 3. Are extracted, harvested, and/or manufactured closer to the location of the project. 4. Result in less construction waste. See Section 01 74 19 2.02 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting those standards or description. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named. C. Products specified by brand name establish the level of quality desired but are in no way intended to limit competition unless substitutions is specifically excluded with a statement similar to "NO SUBSTITUTIONS ALLOWED." RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 01 60 00- 1 Product Requirements Re-Bid Construction Documents 2.03 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS A. PCB or items containing PCB shall not be used or incorporated into the Work. B. Asbestos containing materials shall not be incorporated into the Work. Asbestos containing materials shall be defined as materials containing asbestos fibers in an amount greater than 1%, as defined by the asbestos National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (asbestos NESHAP), 40 Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) pt. 61, subp. M, which has been incorporated into Minnesota Rule 7011.9920. C. Urea formaldehyde or materials containing urea formaldehyde shall not be incorporated into the Work, except that plywood and particleboard materials containing urea formaldehyde may be used, providing said materials do not give gaseous emissions in excess of the following levels, as defined by the United States Department of Housing and Urban Development standards for testing these products under controlled air chamber conditions and HUD-specified pressures. 1. Plywood - 0.2 ppm 2. Particleboard - 0.3 ppm D. Dispose of excess or unused hazardous materials and waste products resulting from work of Subcontract in compliance with governmental regulations. Hazardous materials may not be placed in Contractor's trash facilities. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SUBSTITUTION LIMITATIONS A. See Section 01 25 00- Substitution Procedures. 3.02 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Package products for shipment in manner to prevent damage; for equipment, package to avoid loss of factory calibration. B. If special precautions are required, attach instructions prominently and legibly on outside of packaging. C. Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site storage time and potential damage to stored materials. D. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering of surrounding areas. F. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. G. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage, and to minimize handling. H. Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically feasible. 3.03 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to excessive materials handling and misapplication. See Section 01 74 19. B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. C. Store with seals and labels intact and legible. D. Store sensitive products in weathertight, climate-controlled enclosures in an environment favorable to product. E. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. F. Protect products from damage or deterioration due to construction operations, weather, precipitation, humidity, temperature, sunlight and ultraviolet light, dirt, dust, and other contaminants. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 01 60 00-2 Product Requirements Re-Bid Construction Documents G. Comply with manufacturer's warranty conditions, if any. H. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products. I. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining. J. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. K. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 01 60 00-3 Product Requirements Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 01 70 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures. B. Pre-installation meetings. C. Cutting and patching. D. Surveying for laying out the work. E. Cleaning and protection. F. Starting of systems and equipment. G. Demonstration and instruction of Owner personnel. H. Closeout procedures, including Contractor's Correction Punch List, except payment procedures. I. General requirements for maintenance service. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 78 00 -Closeout Submittals: Project record documents, operation and maintenance data, warranties, and bonds. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Survey work: Submit name, address, and telephone number of Surveyor before starting survey work. 1. On request, submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work. 2. Submit a copy of site drawing signed by the Land Surveyor, that the elevations and locations of the work are in compliance with Contract Documents. 3. Submit surveys and survey logs for the project record. C. Cutting and Patching: Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration that affects: 1. Structural integrity of any element of Project. 2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element. 4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements. 5. Work of Owner or separate Contractor. 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS A. For surveying work, employ a land surveyor registered in the State in which the Project is located and acceptable to Architect. Submit evidence of surveyor's Errors and Omissions insurance coverage in the form of an Insurance Certificate. Employ only individual(s)trained and experienced in collecting and recording accurate data relevant to ongoing construction activities, B. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil erosion. C. Erosion and Sediment Control: Plan and execute work by methods to control surface drainage from cuts and fills, from borrow and waste disposal areas. Prevent erosion and sedimentation. D. Pollution Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by construction operations. Comply with federal, state, and local regulations. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 01 70 00- 1 Execution and Closeout Re-Bid Construction Documents Requirements 1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. B. Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements. C. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. D. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work that are indicated diagrammatically on drawings. Follow routing indicated for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. E. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. F. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections. G. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS A. New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patching and extending work. B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing products where necessary, referring to existing work as a standard. C. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution described in Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work. Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions. B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being applied or attached. C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. D. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize waste due to over-ordering or misfabrication. E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct locations. F. Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work, assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 01 70 00-2 Execution and Closeout Re-Bid Construction Documents Requirements 3.03 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. When required in individual specification sections, convene a preinstallation meeting at the site prior to commencing work of the section. B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific section. C. Notify Architect four days in advance of meeting date. D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting: 1. Review conditions of examination, preparation and installation procedures. 2. Review coordination with related work. E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.04 LAYING OUT THE WORK A. Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work. B. Promptly notify Architect of any discrepancies discovered. C. Protect survey control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent reference points during construction. D. Promptly report to Architect the loss or destruction of any reference point or relocation required because of changes in grades or other reasons. E. Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no changes without prior written notice to Architect. F. Utilize recognized engineering survey practices. G. Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar appropriate means: 1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement; utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations. 2. Grid or axis for structures. 3. Building foundation, column locations, ground floor elevations. H. Periodically verify layouts by same means. I. Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses. 3.05 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement. B. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated. C. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and horizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated. D. Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated. E. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance. 3.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Whenever possible, execute the work by methods that avoid cutting or patching. B. Perform whatever cutting and patching is necessary to: 1. Complete the work. 2. Fit products together to integrate with other work. 3. Provide openings for penetration of mechanical, electrical, and other services. 4. Match work that has been cut to adjacent work. 5. Repair areas adjacent to cuts to required condition. 6. Repair new work damaged by subsequent work. 7. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 01 70 00-3 Execution and Closeout Re-Bid Construction Documents Requirements 8. Remove and replace defective and non-complying work. C. Execute work by methods that avoid damage to other work and that will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore to original condition. D. Employ original installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces. E. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval. F. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. G. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. H. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire rated material in accordance with Section 07 84 00, to full thickness of the penetrated element. I. Patching: 1. Finish patched surfaces to match finish that existed prior to patching. On continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit. 2. Match color, texture, and appearance. 3. Repair patched surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections due to patching work. If defects are due to condition of substrate, repair substrate prior to repairing finish. 3.07 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site periodically and dispose off-site; do not burn or bury. 3.08 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations. B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage. D. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections,jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. E. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. F. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. G. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle coverings if possible. 3.09 SYSTEM STARTUP A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. B. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions that may cause damage. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 01 70 00-4 Execution and Closeout Re-Bid Construction Documents Requirements C. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. D. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. E. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable Contractor personnel and manufacturer's representative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. F. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation. G. Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. 3.10 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION A. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at scheduled time, at equipment location. B. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season within six months. C. Provide a qualified person who is knowledgeable about the Project to perform demonstration and instruction of Owner's personnel. D. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owner's personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. 3.11 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. 3.12 FINAL CLEANING A. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous. B. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. C. Remove all labels that are not permanent. Do not paint or otherwise cover fire test labels or nameplates on mechanical and electrical equipment. D. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface and material being cleaned. E. Clean filters of operating equipment. F. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, scuppers, overflow drains, area drains, and drainage systems. G. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. H. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site; dispose of in legal manner; do not burn or bury. 3.13 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities. 1. Provide copies to Architect and Owner. B. Accompany Owner's representative on preliminary inspection to determine items to be listed for completion or correction in the Contractor's Correction Punch List for Contractor's Notice of Substantial Completion. C. Notify Architect when work is considered ready for Architect's Substantial Completion inspection. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 01 70 00-5 Execution and Closeout Re-Bid Construction Documents Requirements D. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, work has been inspected, and that work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect's Substantial Completion review. 1. Submit Contractor's Substantial Completion inspection punch list listing all items to be repaired or completed after Substantial Completion. Organize list by room, in walking order, to allow for ease of verification. 2. After Substantials Completion inspection by the Architect and Owner, add any additional item to the Contractor's punch list. Add additional items under the appropriate room for ease of verification. Architect will provide his punch list, including consultants under his purview, by electronic means for Contractor's convenience in combining said list into one document. E. Conduct Substantial Completion inspection and create Final Correction Punch List containing Architect's and Contractor's comprehensive list of items identified to be completed or corrected and submit to Architect. F. Correct items of work listed in Final Correction Punch List and comply with requirements for access to Owner-occupied areas. G. Notify Architect when work is considered finally complete and ready for Architect's Substantial Completion final inspection. H. Complete items of work determined by Architect listed in executed Certificate of Substantial Completion. I. Schedule follow-up meeting to conduct a one-year warranty punch list no later than eleven (11) months from date of Substantial Completion. 3.14 MAINTENANCE A. Provide service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections. B. Maintenance Period: As indicated in specification sections or, if not indicated, not less than one year from the Date of Substantial Completion or the length of the specified warranty, whichever is longer. C. Examine system components at a frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean, adjust, and lubricate as required. D. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or replace parts whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the original component. E. Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or subcontractor without prior written consent of the Owner. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 01 70 00-6 Execution and Closeout Re-Bid Construction Documents Requirements SECTION 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Project record documents. B. Operation and maintenance data. C. Warranties and bonds. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures, shop drawings, product data, and samples. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Submit documents to Architect with claim for final Application for Payment. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before start of Work. Architect will review draft and return one copy with comments. 2. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by Owner, submit completed documents (hard copy)within ten days after acceptance. 3. Submit one digital copy of completed documents 15 days prior to final inspection. This copy will be reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Architect comments. Revise content of all document sets as required prior to final submission. 4. Submit two sets of revised final documents in final form within 10 days after final inspection. C. Warranties and Bonds: 1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with Owner's permission, submit documents within 10 days after acceptance. 2. Make other submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final Application for Payment. 3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submit within 10 days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period. PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Drawings: Maintain on site a current Revit (BIM) model or AutoCad files (depending on discipline) and a hard copy version. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. 6. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting. B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner. C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction. D. Record information concurrent with construction progress. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 01 78 00- 1 Closeout Submittals Re-Bid Construction Documents E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products installed, including the following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2. Changes made by Addenda and modifications. F. Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Record actual construction including: 1. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 2. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. 3. Field changes of dimension and detail. 4. Details not on original Contract drawings. G. Compile all final Revit model files (or AutoCad files, whichever applies) of each discipline and store on CD-ROM(s). H. All project record documents shall be saved as electronic Adobe Acrobat .pdf format with text recognition and the following criteria: 1. Separate files segregated by discipline. 2. Individual sheet bookmarked within each file. 3. Capable of printing a single page or multiple pages within a file. 3.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Source Data: For each product or system, list names, addresses and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts. B. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information. C. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings. D. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. For Each Product, Applied Material, and Finish: 1. Information for re-ordering custom manufactured products. B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental cleaning agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. C. Additional information as specified in individual product specification sections. D. Where additional instructions are required, beyond the manufacturer's standard printed instructions, have instructions prepared by personnel experienced in the operation and maintenance of the specific products. 3.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. For Each Item of Equipment and Each System: 1. Description of unit or system, and component parts. 2. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. 3. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests. 4. Complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts. B. Where additional instructions are required, beyond the manufacturer's standard printed instructions, have instructions prepared by personnel experienced in the operation and maintenance of the specific products. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 01 78 00-2 Closeout Submittals Re-Bid Construction Documents C. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and communications; typed. D. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions. E. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative maintenance and trouble shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions. F. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required. G. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions. H. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer. I. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance. J. Provide control diagrams by controls manufacturer as installed. K. Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and control diagrams. L. Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. M. Include test and balancing reports. N. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections. 3.05 ASSEMBLY OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Assemble operation and maintenance data into durable manuals (one set only)for Owner's personnel use, with data arranged in the same sequence as, and identified by, the specification sections. B. Where systems involve more than one specification section, provide separate tabbed divider for each system. C. Binders: Commercial quality, 8-1/2 by 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers; 2 inch maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings. D. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS; identify title of Project; identify subject matter of contents. E. Project Directory: Title and address of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect, Consultants, Contractor and subcontractors, with names of responsible parties. F. Tables of Contents: List every item separated by a divider, using the same identification as on the divider tab; where multiple volumes are required, include all volumes Tables of Contents in each volume, with the current volume clearly identified. G. Dividers: Provide tabbed dividers for each separate product and system; identify the contents on the divider tab; immediately following the divider tab include a description of product and major component parts of equipment. H. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 20 pound paper. I. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size of text pages. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 01 78 00-3 Closeout Submittals Re-Bid Construction Documents J. Arrangement of Contents: Organize each volume in parts as follows: 1. Project Directory. 2. Table of Contents, of all volumes, and of this volume. 3. Operation and Maintenance Data: Arranged by system, then by product category. a. Source data. b. Product data, shop drawings, and other submittals. c. Operation and maintenance data. d. Field quality control data. e. Photocopies of warranties and bonds. K. Arrange content by systems under section numbers, including subdivisions within each section, and sequence of Table of Contents of this Project Manual. L. Prepare all of the Record Documents data, as described in previous paragraphs, in Adobe Acrobat or Bluebeam .pdf format cataloged and stored on CD-ROM disks with appropriate labels. 3.06 WARRANTIES AND BONDS A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within 10 days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until Date of Substantial completion is determined. B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. C. Co-execute submittals when required. D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal. E. Manual: Bind in commercial quality 8-1/2 by 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers. F. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title WARRANTIES AND BONDS, with title of Project; name, address and telephone number of Contractor and equipment supplier; and name of responsible company principal. G. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the Table of Contents of the Project Manual, with each item identified with the number and title of the specification section in which specified, and the name of product or work item. H. Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to the Table of Contents listing. Provide full information, using separate typed sheets as necessary. List Subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone number of responsible principal. I. Prepare copies of the warranties and bonds, in addition to the originals, in Adobe Acrobat .pdf format on CD-ROM disk placed in the appropriate binder. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 01 78 00-4 Closeout Submittals Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 01 91 00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This section includes general requirements that apply to implementation of the commissioning process without regard to systems, subsystems, and equipment being commissioned. B. Commissioning is systematic process to provide documented confirmation the building systems perform according to the criteria set forth in the design documents and satisfy the Owner's Project Requirements and the facility's operational needs. C. Commissioning during the construction phase is intended to achieve the following specific objectives according to the Contract Documents: 1. Verify that applicable equipment and systems are installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations and to industry accepted minimum standards and that they receive adequate operational checkout by installing contractors. 2. Verify and document proper performance of equipment and systems. 3. Verify that O&M documentation provided to the Owner and is complete. 4. Verify that the Owner's operating personnel are adequately trained. D. The commissioning process does not take away from or reduce the responsibility of the system designers or installing contractors to provide a finished and fully functioning product. 1. Related Sections include, but not limited to the following: a. Section 22 08 00 - Commissioning of Plumbing Systems b. Section 23 08 00 - Commissioning of HVAC Systems c. Section 23 09 63- Energy Management and Control System (EMCS) d. Section 26 08 00 - Commissioning of Electrical Systems E. Owner's Project Requirements (OPR) and Basis of Design (BOD) documentation are included by reference for information only. F. The specified commissioning process shall be performed by an impartial technical firm hired by the owner. The commissioning firm shall be certified under one or more of the following certifications: G. CxA- Certified Commissioning Authority-ACG H. CBCP- Certified Building Commissioning Professional -AEE I. CCP- Certified Commissioning Professional - BCA J. CPMP- Certified Process Management Professional -ASHRAE K. BSC- Building System Commissioning Certification - NEBB L. The commissioning firm (Commissioning authority)shall be responsible for leading the entire construction team through the commissioning process including, but not limited to, conducting the commissioning kick-off meeting, preparing the commissioning plan, preparing pre-functional checklists, preparing functional test scripts, participation in functional testing and preparation of required documentation and reports. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Approval: Acceptance that a piece of equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning in tested modes according to Contract Documents. B. Basis of Design: Documentation of primary thought processes and assumptions behind design decisions that were made to meet design intent and satisfy applicable regulatory requirements, standards, and guidelines. Describes systems, components, conditions, and methods chosen to meet intent. The document includes both narrative descriptions and lists of individual items that support the design process. C. Building Commissioning: A joint team effort to ensure that all mechanical equipment, controls, and systems function together properly to meet the design intent, to document system performance parameters and to ensure that personnel are adequately trained to operate DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus GENERAL COMMISSIONING Christi 01 91 00- 1 REQUIREMENTS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents systems. D. Commissioning Authority: The independent commissioning provider, hired by the owner that will oversee the entire commissioning process. E. Commissioning Process (Cx): A process which coordinates the traditionally separate functions of system documentation, equipment start-up, control system calibration, testing and balancing, training and performance testing. Commissioning requirements do not supersede other requirements of the specifications, but may expand on some of them. F. Commissioning Agent(CxA): Independent agent hired by Owner. Under Owner's direction, and not Contractor's direction, CA will direct and coordinate day-to-day commissioning activities without assuming oversight responsibilities. G. Commissioning Team: Consists of Commissioning Agent, the Owner or Owner's Representative, Design Team, Contractors, Subcontractors, and Vendors. H. Owner's Project Requirements (OPR): A document that details the functional requirements of a project and the expectations of how it will be used and operated. These include Project goals, measurable performance criteria, cost considerations, benchmarks, success criteria, and supporting information. I. Functional Performance Test (FPT): Test of the function of systems, as opposed to components, under full operation in various modes through all control system's sequences of operation using manual (direct observation)or monitoring methods following prescribed test procedures in sequential written form. J. Pre-Functional Checklist(PFC): Checklist provided by Commissioning Agent, of items to inspect and elementary component tests to conduct to verify proper installation of equipment prior to functional testing. K. Sampling: Functionally testing only a fraction of total number of identical or near identical pieces of equipment. L. Seasonal Testing: Testing of equipment which can be done only during periods of peak heating or cooling, when HVAC equipment is operating at full-load or heavy-load conditions. M. Simulated Condition: Condition created for purpose of testing response of system. N. Trending: System monitoring using the Building Automation System. 1.03 RESPONSIBILITIES A. The Commissioning Agent: Responsibilities of the CxA include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Coordinate and direct each step of the Commissioning Process for systems being commissioned for this project. Coordinate commissioning work schedule with Project Manager and Contractor. 2. Attend planning and job-site meetings as required to obtain information relating to Commissioning Process. 3. Plan and conduct commissioning scoping and coordination meetings. Provide notice to all Team members to attend scheduled commissioning meetings. 4. Ensure all information required for Commissioning Process from manufacturers, Contractors, and A/E design team is available. 5. Review A/E design documents to gain clear understanding of design intent. 6. Review Contractor submittals for compliance with commissioning needs. 7. Verify that systems and equipment have been installed and started in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and with generally recognized construction standards and that documentation of such has been provided. 8. Prepare Pre-Functional Checklists to ensure systems have been installed according to project specifications. Verify that Pre-Functional Checklists have been completed by Contractor and are accurate. 9. Prepare Functional Testing procedures to demonstrate performance of systems according to project specifications. Observe and document performance of systems, as per process detailed in Functional Test procedures. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus GENERAL COMMISSIONING Christi 01 91 00-2 REQUIREMENTS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 10. Review Testing and Balancing (TAB) reports, notify Owner of deficiencies. 11. Recommend acceptance or non-acceptance of systems to Owner. 12. Verify that Operations and Maintenance (O&M)documentation is acceptable. Operations and Maintenance manuals shall be submitted simultaneously to CxA and to Design Professionals for review. 13. Verify that Owner training is completed for all systems to be commissioned. 14. Compile and maintain commissioning record. 15. Provide final Commissioning Report to Owner. 16. Prepare and maintain commissioning "Issues Log". B. Contractor: Responsibilities of the Contractor as relate to Commissioning Process include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Facilitate coordination of commissioning work by CxA. 2. Attend Commissioning meetings or other meetings called by CxA to facilitate the Commissioning Process. 3. Review Functional Testing procedures for feasibility, safety, and impact on warranty, and provide CxA with written comment on same. 4. Provide all documentation relating to manufacturer's recommended performance testing of equipment and systems. 5. Provide Operations and Maintenance Data to CxA for preparation of checklists and training manuals. 6. Provide testing and balancing report. 7. Assure and facilitate participation and cooperation of subcontractors (electrical, mechanical, controls, etc.) and equipment suppliers as required for the Commissioning Process. 8. Certify to CxA that installation work listed in Pre-functional Checklists has been completed. 9. Install systems and equipment in strict conformance with project specifications, manufacturer's recommended installation procedures, and Pre-Functional Checklists, as prepared by CxA. 10. Provide data concerning performance, installation, and start-up of systems. 11. Provide copy of manufacturer's filled-out start-up forms for equipment and systems. 12. Ensure systems have been started and fully checked for proper operation prior to arranging for Functional Testing with CxA. Prepare and submit to CxA written certification that each piece of equipment and/or system has been started according to manufacturer's recommended procedure, and that system has been tested for compliance with operational requirements. a. Contractor shall carry out manufacturer's recommended start-up and testing procedures, regardless of whether or not they are specifically listed in Functional Test procedures. b. Contractor is not relieved of obligation for systems/equipment demonstration where performance testing is required by specifications, but a Functional Performance Test is not specifically designated by CxA. c. Submit Certification of Readiness to CxA to show equipment/system has been reviewed and is ready for functional testing. 13. Coordinate with CxA to determine mutually acceptable date of Functional Performance Tests. 14. Provide test instruments and communications devices, as prescribed by CxA, required for carrying out Functional Testing of systems. 15. Ensure deficiencies found in the Commissioning Process are corrected within the time schedule shown in the CA report. 16. Provide CxA with all submittals, start-up instructions manuals, operating parameters, and other pertinent information related to Commissioning Process. This information shall be routed through Architect. 17. Prepare and submit to CxA proposed Training Program outline for each system. 18. Coordinate and provide training of Owner's personnel. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus GENERAL COMMISSIONING Christi 01 91 00-3 REQUIREMENTS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 19. Prepare Operation and Maintenance manuals and As-Built drawings in accordance with specifications; submit copy to CxA in addition to other contractually required submissions. Revise and resubmit manuals in accordance with A/E and CxAs comments. 20. All costs associated with the participation of Contractor, Sub-Contractors, Design Professionals, and Equipment Vendors in the Commissioning Process shall be included in the scope of this contract. 21. Provide written response to resolution of items listed in "Issue Log". C. Subcontractors and vendors shall prepare and submit to Commissioning Agent proposed Pre- Functional and Functional Performance Test procedures to demonstrate performance of systems according to these specifications and checklists prepared by Commissioning Agent. D. Owner's Representative: Responsibilities of the Owner's Representative as related to Commissioning Process include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Manage contracts of Architect and Contractor. 2. Arrange for facility operating and maintenance personnel to attend various field commissioning activities and field training sessions. 3. Provide final approval for completion of commissioning Work. 4. Warranty Period: Ensure that seasonal or deferred testing and deficiency issues are addressed. E. Architect: Responsibilities of the Architect as related to the Commissioning Process shall include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Attend commissioning scoping meeting and other commissioning team meetings as requested by Commissioning Agent and as selected by Architect. 2. Perform normal submittal review, construction observation, record drawing preparation, and operations and maintenance data preparation, as required by Contract Documents. 3. Provide design narrative documentation requested by Commissioning Agent. 4. Coordinate resolution of system deficiencies identified during commissioning, as required by Contract Documents. 5. Prepare and submit final as-built design intent documentation for inclusion in Operation and Maintenance Data Manual, and review and approve Operation and Maintenance Data Manual. 6. Warranty Period: Coordinate resolution of design non-conformance and design deficiencies identified during warranty period commissioning. F. Mechanical, Electrical, and Plumbing Engineers: Responsibilities of the Engineers as related to the Commissioning Process shall include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Perform normal submittal review, construction observations, and record drawing preparation, as required by Contract Documents. Perform site observation immediately preceding system startup. 2. Provide design narrative and sequence documentation requested by Commissioning Agent. Assist, along with Contractor, in clarifying operation and control of commissioned equipment in areas where specifications, control drawings, or equipment documentation are not sufficient for writing detailed testing procedures. 3. Attend commissioning scoping meetings and other commissioning team meetings as requested by Commissioning Agent and as selected by Architect or responsible design professional. 4. Participate in resolution of system deficiencies identified during commissioning, as required by Contract Documents. 5. Prepare and submit final as-built design intent and operating parameters documentation for inclusion in Operation and Maintenance Manual, and review and approve Operation and Maintenance Manual. 1.04 COMMISSIONING PLAN A. Commissioning Process tasks and activities: 1. Commissioning kick-off meeting: Conducted by commissioning authority and attended by construction team and design team. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus GENERAL COMMISSIONING Christi 01 91 00-4 REQUIREMENTS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 2. Pre-functional checklists: Prepared by the commissioning authority and filled out by subcontractors performing the work that is applicable. 3. Site visits to review installation of applicable systems and progress of checklist documentation performed and reported by commissioning authority. 4. Functional testing: Commissioning authority shall conduct functional testing with assistance of applicable subcontractors and document successful results as well as deficiencies (issues). Functional performance testing shall demonstrate the installation and operation of components, systems, and system-to-system interfacing in accordance with plans and specifications. Testing shall include all modes and sequence of operation, including under full-load, part-load and emergency conditions (including all alarms). Controls system shall be tested to document that control devices, components, equipment and systems are calibrated and adjusted and operate in accordance with the plans and specifications. Sequences shall be functionally tested to document they operate in accordance with plans and specifications. 5. Preliminary commissioning report: Commissioning authority shall issue a preliminary commissioning report to the owner that has results of the first round of functional testing including deficiencies discovered. 6. Air and hydronic system balancing: Air and water flow rates shall be measured and adjusted to deliver final flow rates within the tolerances provided in the contract documents. System balancing shall be performed by T.A.B. contractor as specified in 23 05 93 -Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing. 7. Systems manual: Commissioning authority shall compile the systems manual using submittal data provided by the general contractor and applicable subcontractors. 8. Final commissioning report: Commissioning authority shall issue final commissioning report documenting the entire process and final results of functional testing. Report shall include final testing and balancing report. B. Mechanical System equipment to be tested 1. Energy Management and Control System: a. Graphical User Interface b. Automation Software c. Field Level Controllers d. Field Level Devices e. Control Sequences 2. Chilled Water Systems (All chillers and pumps) 3. Condenser Water Systems (All towers and pumps) 4. Heating Water Systems (All boilers and pumps) 5. Air Handling Systems (All AHU and 10% of terminal units) 6. Energy Recovery Systems (100%) 7. Water Treatment Systems (Verify vendors completion of scope) 8. Service water heating systems (100%) 9. Service water heating circulation systems (100%). 10. Domestic water booster pumps (100%). C. Electrical System Equipment to be tested 1. Occupancy sensors. 2. Time switch controls 3. Daylighting controls. D. Testing functions and conditions 1. Energy conservation programs (economizer, optimal start, etc) 2. Verify shutdown of systems when scheduled. 3. Calibration of sensors 4. Testing shall affirm winter and summer design conditions. 5. Test under full outside air conditions. 6. Confirm functionality of all specified sequences of operations. 7. Verify the functionality of all alarms. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus GENERAL COMMISSIONING Christi 01 91 00-5 REQUIREMENTS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 8. Verify daylighting control devices have been calibrated, properly located, adjusted and respond as specified. 9. Verify time switch schedule, time, date and programming is accurate. Verify override time limit is set, battery is installed and switch operates the lights that are specified in the design documents. 10. Verify that occupant sensor has been located and aimed in accordance with manufacturer instructions. Testing shall be done for each unique combination of sensor type and space geometry. E. Performance criteria 1. Air and water temperatures shall be within tolerances specified in the contract documents. 2. Space temperatures shall be maintained within 1 degree of specified set points. 3. Space humidity shall be maintained within 5% of specified levels. 4. Heating water recovery shall be within specified time frame and temperature. 5. Daylighting controls shall maintain specified light levels within 5% of design. 6. All time switches shall be accurate to time on cellular network devices. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Contractor shall coordinate with sub-Contractors and equipment vendors/representatives to set aside adequate time to address Pre-Functional Testing, Functional Testing, Operations and Maintenance Training, and associated coordination meetings. B. CxA may also conduct site inspections at critical times and issue Cx Field Reports with observations on installation deficiencies so that they may be issued by Architect as deemed appropriate. 3.02 MEETINGS A. A commissioning team scoping meeting shall be held at a time and place agreed upon shortly after the beginning of the construction phase of the project. Owner, Commissioning Agent, General Contractor, Architect, Mechanical Subcontractor, and Electrical Subcontractor shall be present at this meeting. The purpose of the meeting is to familiarize all parties with the requirements of the commissioning process, and to ensure that the responsibilities of each party are clearly understood. B. Separate meetings including individual equipment suppliers and subcontractors shall be held prior to commissioning of their systems at the discretion of CxA. C. Miscellaneous Meetings. The CxA shall plan and conduct other meetings as required as construction progresses. Meetings will cover coordination, deficiency resolution, and planning issues with particular subcontractors. CxA will plan meetings to minimize unnecessary time being spent by subcontractors. 3.03 PRE-FUNCTIONAL CHECKLISTS (PFC) A. General 1. Pre-functional checklists are important to ensure that equipment and systems are properly connected and operational, and installed in accordance with specifications, drawings, manufacturer's requirements, and all applicable codes. 2. Checklists ensure that functional performance testing (in-depth checkout) may proceed without unnecessary delays. 3. Performance of pre-functional checklists, startup, and checkout shall be directed and executed by subcontractor or vendor. Only individuals that have direct knowledge and who witnessed that line item task on pre-functional checklist was performed shall initial or check item off. 4. Each piece of equipment receives full pre-functional checkout. No sampling strategies are used. 5. Pre-functional checkout for given system must be successfully completed prior to formal functional performance testing of equipment or subsystems of given system. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus GENERAL COMMISSIONING Christi 01 91 00-6 REQUIREMENTS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop B. Pre-Functional Checklist 1. Pre-functional performance tests shall be documented in a checklist format, as prepared and provided by CxA, for each piece of equipment. Each checklist shall be initialed by Contractor. 2. Commissioning Pre-functional checklists are not to preclude Contractor from applying his own construction inspection checklists. 3. All system elements shall be checked to verify that they have been installed, adjusted, and calibrated properly, that all connections have been made correctly, and that it is ready to function as specified. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, control sequence, and other conditions which may cause damage. 4. Verify that tests, meter readings and specific electrical characteristics agree with those required by equipment or system manufacturer. 5. All discrete elements and sub-systems shall be adjusted and shall be checked for proper operation. Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. 6. Conduct start-up procedure recommended by equipment/system manufacturer. 7. Subcontractors shall clearly list outstanding items of initial start-up and pre-functional procedures that were not completed successfully at bottom of procedures form or on separate sheet attached to form. Completed form and attached sheets shall be provided to Commissioning Agent within 2 days of test completion. Installing subcontractor or vendor shall correct deficient or incomplete areas in timely manner and shall submit updated pre-functional checklist and startup report with statement of correction on original non-compliance report. 3.04 SYSTEM START-UP A. Contractor will arrange for start-up of operating equipment and systems prior to scheduling Functional Testing. B. Start-up of equipment and systems shall be performed only by a manufacturer's representative, or person(s)who are specifically manufacturer-approved. All start-up personnel shall be trained and authorized, experienced and knowledgeable in the operations of such equipment and systems. C. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems so that subsystems required for major systems operation are tested first. D. Manufacturer's start-up reports must be submitted to CxA prior to scheduling Functional Testing. 3.05 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING A. General 1. The objective of Functional Testing is to demonstrate that each system is operating according to documented design intent and Contract Documents, through all possible modes of operation. 2. Contractor and sub-Contractors shall include in his bid proposal all costs associated with preparation and execution of Testing Procedures. 3. Functional Testing is intended to begin upon completion of each system. Functional Testing may proceed prior to completion of systems or sub-systems at discretion of Commissioning Agent and Construction Administrator. Beginning system testing before completion, does not relieve Contractor from fully completing system, including pre- functional checklists as early as possible. 4. Contractor and sub-Contractors shall provide detailed Testing Procedures that will allow all items on checklists to be verified. 5. Testing shall be conducted under specified operating conditions as recommended or approved by Commissioning Agent. 6. A Functional Performance Test shall be performed on each complete system. Each function shall be demonstrated to the satisfaction of Commissioning Agent in accordance with proposed test procedures developed to demonstrate compliance with specifications. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus GENERAL COMMISSIONING Christi 01 91 00-7 REQUIREMENTS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 7. Each Functional Test shall be witnessed and signed off by Owner and Commissioning Agent upon satisfactory completion. 8. All elements of system shall be tested to demonstrate that total systems satisfy all requirements of these specifications. Testing shall be accomplished on hierarchical basis. Test each piece of equipment for proper operation, followed by each subsystem, followed by the entire system, followed by any inter-ties to other major systems. 9. All major testing materials and equipment shall be provided by contractor. B. Notification, Scheduling of Functional Testing and Re-Testing 1. Notify CxA and Owner, in writing, of request for scheduling Functional Testing. Submit request no fewer than five business days prior to desired day of testing. a. Contractor must certify that systems and equipment are functioning satisfactorily, according to specifications and design intent, prior to requesting Functional Testing by submitting a certification or readiness. Upon receipt of such certification, CxA will schedule with Contractor a time for the particular system test. b. CxA will attempt to schedule Functional Testing when convenient for Contractor and his vendors. c. Contractor will resolve all deficiencies identified during initial test prior to submitting request, in writing, for re-testing. Such request for re-testing shall certify that Contractor has resolved all deficiencies, or list reason why any deficiencies remain which cannot be resolved. d. CxA will re-test to ensure that all deficiencies have been resolved. e. Deficiencies that were not detected in first Functional Test, but are discovered in subsequent re-testing, are to be resolved by Contractor as if they had been discovered in initial testing. C. Functional Testing Requirements and Procedures 1. Contractor and Subcontractors shall perform tests in the presence of CxA. Tests not witnessed by CxA shall not be considered complete. 2. To facilitate Functional Testing, when requested by CxA, Contractor shall provide services of personnel to accompany CxA for the duration of Functional Testing, including any follow-up testing. Such personnel must be experienced, qualified, and intimately familiar with the system being tested. a. Participation by representative(s) of the Building Automation Contractor is of particular importance in Functional Testing. All systems which are controlled and /or monitored by BAS are to be thoroughly tested, point by point, through all modes of operation, with the assistance of the Contractor's representative. Graphics, setpoints, and programming are to be included as a part of Functional Testing as well. b. Contractors must provide services of personnel to accompany CxA for equipment and systems which may pose particular health and safety concerns, such as boilers. c. Should he fail to provide representative to accompany CxA during Functional Testing, Contractor continues to bear full responsibility for equipment warranty. Owner and CxA will not be held responsible for damage to equipment, or other actions which might impact warranty, when performing Functional Testing of systems where Contractor has not provided authorized accompanying representative to operate equipment. 3. Each system shall be operated through all modes of operation including, but not limited to seasonal, occupied, unoccupied, warm-up, cool-down, part-load, and full-load, where system response is specified. a. For multiple units, sampling strategy established by Commissioning Agent and subject to approval of Construction Administrator may be used. b. Verification of each sequence in sequences of operation is required. c. Proper responses to such modes and conditions as power failure, freeze condition, low oil pressure, no flow, equipment failure, and the like, shall also be tested. 4. Functional Testing is to be dedicated solely to testing of equipment and systems, and not to resolution of deficiencies. Deficiencies identified during testing process must be corrected by Contractor at a time other than during Functional Testing. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus GENERAL COMMISSIONING Christi 01 91 00-8 REQUIREMENTS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 5. CxA shall issue test reports with readings and checklists and a listing of any deficiencies that must be addressed by Contractor or sub-Contractors. 6. Commissioning Agent shall submit a Final Report to Owner recommending acceptance or non-acceptance of individual system components as well as the systems as a whole. 7. DBR has included a small contingency for limited retesting, however DBR reserves the right to stop testing on a system when the system: a. Does not have the correct graphics programmed. b. Does not have the correct data trends programmed. c. Does not have the correct set points programmed. d. Does not have the equipment or system safeties installed and programmed correctly. e. The TAB data forms have not been submitted to our firm or the performance of the system listed on the TAB forms is not per project requirements. f. Line items of the functional performance test have failed. 8. Sampling a. Multiple identical pieces of non-life-safety or otherwise non-critical equipment may be functionally tested using a sampling strategy. b. Significant application differences and significant sequence of operation differences in otherwise identical equipment invalidates their common identity. A small size or capacity difference, alone, does not constitute a difference. It is noted that no sampling by Subs is allowed in prefunctional checklist execution. c. A common sampling strategy is the "xx% Sampling -yy% Failure Rule", defined by the following example. 1) xx= the percent of the group of identical equipment to be included in each sample. 2) yy= the percent of the sample that if failing, will require another sample to be tested. 3) The example below describes a 20% Sampling - 10% Failure Rule. (a) Randomly test at least 20% (xx)of each group of identical equipment. In no case test less than three units in each group. This 20%, or three, constitute the "first sample." (b) If 10% (yy) of the units in the first sample fail the functional tests, test another 20% of the group (the second sample). (c) If 10% of the units in the second sample fail, test all remaining units in the whole group. (d) If at any point, frequent failures are occurring and testing is becoming more troubleshooting than verification, the CxA may stop the testing and require the responsible Sub to perform and document a checkout of the remaining units, prior to continuing with functionally testing the remaining units. 4) If a second sampling and a whole group round of testing is required, the commissioning agent will charge the contractor an hourly rate of$150.00 for time and expenses associated with the testing. D. Re-Testing and Failure to Remedy Deficiencies 1. Despite Contractor's best efforts to ensure systems are problem-free, it is expected that some deficiencies will be found during initial inspection of Pre-functional Checklist, and during initial Functional Testing; such deficiencies are expected to be minimal. 2. It is Contractor's responsibility to remedy identified deficiencies, both in Pre-functional Checklist and in Functional Testing phases of work, in a timely and thorough manner. 3. It is Contractor's responsibility to ensure that all deficiencies are corrected prior to requesting a re-inspection or re-test of systems and equipment. Do not request re- inspection or re-test until deficiencies are corrected. a. At his discretion, CxA may agree to re-testing systems or equipment where deficiencies remain which are beyond Contractor's control to resolve expeditiously. b. Typically such re-testing of incomplete systems and equipment will take place only if remaining deficiencies are minor in scope and nature, and are of such nature that they cannot be resolved in a timely manner(such as those due to difficulties in DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus GENERAL COMMISSIONING Christi 01 91 00-9 REQUIREMENTS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop obtaining parts, or where Owner has requested a change that has delayed work, etc.) 4. CxA will carry out a second re-inspection or re-test of systems and equipment subsequent to receiving Contractor's request. a. If CxA finds deficiencies identified in initial inspection or test have not been remedied (with exception of un-resolvable deficiencies in 3.b. above), and such remaining deficiencies are significant enough to require additional inspection or re-testing, Contractor will be back-charged for CxA's expenses, and time at a rate of$150.00 per hour and $100.00 expenses, for a third and any subsequent re-inspections and re-tests. E. Deferred Testing 1. Seasonal Commissioning" pertains to testing during peak heating or cooling seasons when HVAC equipment is operating at full-load or heavy-load conditions. Initial commissioning will be done as soon as contract work is completed, regardless of season. Seasonal Commissioning under full- or heavy-load conditions other than the current season will be handled at later time by GC and CxA. 2. If adequate load may be artificially placed upon heating or cooling equipment, CxA, at his discretion, may perform functional testing during non-peak load periods. 3. GC is to provide services of personnel and participate in seasonal testing process in the same manner as he would in non-seasonal testing. 4. Until off-season commissioning can be accomplished, Owner may retain an amount from GC's payment sufficient to cover the cost of off-season testing. 5. Unforeseen Deferred Tests: If any check or test cannot be completed due to building structure, required occupancy condition, or other reason, execution of checklists and functional testing may be delayed upon approval of Owner. Tests shall be conducted in same manner as seasonal tests, as soon as possible. Services of required parties will be negotiated. Make final adjustments to Operation and Maintenance Manuals and record drawings due to unforeseen deferred tests. 6. GC is to provide services of personnel and participate in deferred testing in the same manner as he would for normal commissioning. 7. Until deferred testing can be accomplished, Owner may retain an amount from GC's payment sufficient to cover the cost of deferred testing. 3.06 TRAINING A. Scheduling 1. Provide a proposed schedule and outline of training of Owner's personnel for Commissioning Agent's review approximately 30 days before project completion. The Commissioning Agent will review the submittal. 2. Submit revised outline and fully developed training materials for review by Commissioning Agent, 10 business days prior to scheduled training sessions. 3. Organize training to fit Owner's schedule and to optimize the learning experience. Limit continuous sessions to no more than three hours at a time, or otherwise only as approved by Owner and/or Architect/Engineer. B. Training Materials 1. Develop Training Manuals to meet requirements of individual equipment specification sections. 2. Operating and Maintenance Manuals alone are NOT considered training manuals. O&M Manuals may be used as reference, but shall not be considered to meet requirements for training materials. 3. Develop a detailed outline showing how training program will be organized, including classroom and hands-on training as required by individual specifications sections. 4. Provide with training materials, a quick-reference "how-to" index which will allow operators to easily access information included in Training Manuals and/or O&M Manuals. This reference will include, as a minimum; routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions. 5. Refer to individual equipment or system specifications for minimum material to be covered as part of the training program. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus GENERAL COMMISSIONING Christi 01 91 00- 10 REQUIREMENTS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop C. Training session agenda 1. The training agenda (plan)shall include, at a minimum, the following elements: 2. Purpose of equipment. 3. Principle of how the equipment works. 4. Important parts and assemblies. 5. How the equipment achieves its purpose and necessary operating conditions. 6. Most likely failure modes, causes and corrections. 7. On site demonstration. 3.07 DOCUMENTATION A. Commissioning authority shall provide documentation of process as follows: 1. Preliminary commissioning report including test procedures, results of testing, itemization of deficiencies, deferred tests and climatic conditions required for performance of deferred tests. Preliminary commissioning report shall be issued to owner to demonstrate the first pass of testing has occurred and to demonstrate compliance with applicable codes. 2. Final commissioning report shall include the final test and balance report, final results of functional testing, disposition of deficiencies discovered during testing, including the details of corrective measures used and functional testing procedures used for repeatability of testing in the future. 3.08 CERTIFICATE OF READINESS A. Make copies of attached form to submit for functional testing. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus GENERAL COMMISSIONING Christi 01 91 00- 11 REQUIREMENTS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop CERTIFICATE OF READINESS Contractor has verified that the following prerequisite items have been completed in preparation for the functional testing phase of the commissioning process. System to be Commissioned: ❑ The system to be commissioned, including all equipment, ductwork, piping, electrical, plumbing, and interfaces to other systems is complete, installed per the Contract Documents, and any issues previously identified by the Commissioning Team have been addressed. ❑ All equipment has been properly started up by qualified personnel. Where specified, the startup was conducted by the manufacturer. Startup procedures and reports have been documented and provided to the CxA. ❑ All outstanding issues have been addressed. ❑ For HVAC Systems, the Test and Balance work is complete, all issues have been corrected, and a final (draft) report has been provided to the CxA. ❑ For Building Automation system (BAS), the BAS contractor has completed their own checkout procedures, including but not limited to the following: • Calibration of all sensors. • Point-to-Point checks of all sensors and devices. • Checks of all devices (dampers, control valves, etc.)for proper operation, fail position, and verification of no leakage. • Programming of all sequences of operations, alarms, and setpoints. • Completion and check of all graphics. • Interface with other systems (lighting, plumbing, metering, etc.) ❑ All equipment and systems are online and operating with no restrictions for testing. ❑ All necessary notifications, coordination and scheduling have been considered that might be required for functional testing of this system (e.g. Owner, Fire Marshal, Occupants, etc.) Attach a list of any known exceptions or outstanding issues related to the above statements. List name, title, company, date: I have verified that the above statements are true and that the system is ready for functional testing by the CxA, except for those items noted as attached. I understand that if it is found that the system has not been properly prepared as per the above, necessitating one or more return site visits by the CxA, the Construction Team may be charged by the Owner for the cost of the trip, set at$250/hr including travel time plus travel expenses. Signature: END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus GENERAL COMMISSIONING Christi 01 91 00- 12 REQUIREMENTS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SECTION 03 0100 MAINTENANCE OF CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 Section Includes A. Cleaning of existing concrete surfaces. B. Repair of exposed structural, shrinkage, and settlement cracks. C. Resurfacing of concrete surfaces having spalled areas and other damage. D. Repair of deteriorated concrete. E. Repair of internal concrete reinforcement. F. Restoration and patching of concrete surfaces. 1.02 Related Requirements A. Section 03 1000-Concrete Forming and Accessories. B. Section 03 2000-Concrete Reinforcing. C. Section 03 3000-Cast-in-Place Concrete. 1.03 Price and Payment Procedures A. Repair Surface: By the square foot. Includes surface preparation, repair,finishing. B. Preparation for Resurfacing: By the square foot. Includes surface preparation, cleaning. 1.04 Reference Standards A. ASTM A82/A82M -Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain,for Concrete Reinforcement, 2007. B. ASTM A615/A615M -Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2015. C. ASTM A767/A767M -Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2009. D. ASTM A775/A775M -Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars; 2007b (Reapproved 2014). E. ASTM A996/A996M -Standard Specification for Rail-Steel and Axle-Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2014. F. ASTM A1064/A1064M -Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete; 2015. G. ASTM C33/C33M -Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2016. H. ASTM C150/C150M -Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2016. I. ASTM C348-Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Hydraulic-Cement Mortars; 2014. J. ASTM C404-Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout; 2011. K. ASTM C882-Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy-Resin Systems Used with Concrete by Slant Shear; 2012. L. ASTM C928/C928M -Standard Specification for Packaged, Dry, Rapid-Hardening Cementitious Material for Concrete Repairs; 2013. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 03 01 00-1 MAINTENANCE OF CONCRETE 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents M. ASTM C1059/C1059M -Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened Concrete; 2013. N. ASTM D3039/D3039M -Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Polymer Matrix Composite Materials; 2017. O. ASTM D638-Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics; 2010. P. ASTM D695 -Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics; 2010. Q. AWS D1.4/D1.4M -Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel; 2011. R. ICC-ES AC178-Acceptance Criteria for Inspection and Verification of Concrete and Reinforced and Unreinforced Masonry Strengthening Using Fiber-Reinforced Polymer(FRP) or Steel- Reinforced Polymer(SRP) Composite Systems; 2017, with Editorial Revision 2020. 1.05 Administrative Requirements A. Scheduling: Perform work during a time period allowed by authority having jurisdiction of road right-of-way. 1.06 Submittals A. Product Data: Indicate product standards, physical and chemical characteristics,technical specifications, limitations, maintenance instructions, and general recommendations regarding each material. B. Field quality control submittals. C. Field quality control submittals for CFRP. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that specified products meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of structural reinforcement repairs and type of repair. 1.07 Quality Assurance A. Designer Qualifications: Design reinforcement splices under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this type of work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section. C. Cleaner Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified. D. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified. E. Perform welding work in accordance with AWS D1.4. 1.08 Delivery,Storage, and Handling A. Comply with manufacturers' instructions for storage, shelf life limitations, and handling of products. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 Cleaning Materials A. Detergent: Non-ionic detergent. B. Blasting Medium: Sand. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 03 01 00-2 MAINTENANCE OF CONCRETE 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 2.02 Cementitious Patching and Repair Materials A. Cementitious Resurfacing Mortar: One-or two-component,factory-mixed, polymer-modified cementitious mortar designed for continuous thin-coat application. 1. In-place material resistant to freezing conditions. 2. Mixed with water or latex type bonding agent in proportions as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Integral corrosion inhibitor. 4. Recommended Thickness: Feather edge to 1/8 inch. 5. Color: Gray. B. Cementitious Repair Mortar,Trowel Grade: One-or two-component,factory-mixed, polymer- modified cementitious mortar. 1. In-place material resistant to freezing conditions. 2. Mixed with water or latex type bonding agent in proportions as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Dry Material: Complies with ASTM C928/C928M. 4. Integral corrosion inhibitor. C. Cementitious Repair Mortar, Form and Pour/Pump Grade: Flowable, one-or two-component, factory-mixed, polymer-modified cementitious mortar; in-place material resistant to freezing conditions. 1. Mixed with water in proportions as recommended by manufacturer. D. Cementitious Pavement Repair Mortar: Fast hardening, flowable; composed of cement, sand, and additives; capable of setting in cold weather conditions without the aid of chloride-or gypsum-based accelerators; in-place material resistant to freezing conditions. 1. Dry Material: Complies with ASTM C928/C928M. 2. Integral corrosion inhibitor. 3. Time To Open To Traffic: 1 hour, maximum. 4. Time to Top-Coating: 4 hours, maximum. E. Cementitious Hydraulic Waterstop: Very fast setting, low slump, hand formable, and capable of stopping active water leaks; in-place material resistant to freezing conditions. F. Mix cementitious mortar and grout in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for purpose intended. G. Include bonding agent as additive to mix. 2.03 Epoxy Patching and Repair Materials A. Epoxy Repair Mortar: Epoxy resin mixed with aggregate and other materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for purpose intended; comply with pot life and workability limits. B. Mix epoxy mortars in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for purpose intended. C. Mix components in clean equipment or containers. Conform to pot life and workability limits. D. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: Non-sag,two-component, 100 percent solids; recommended by manufacturer for purpose and conditions under which used. 1. Bond Strength (ASTM C882): 1,500 psi, minimum. 2. Tensile Strength (ASTM D638): 6,600 psi, minimum. 3. Percent Elongation (ASTM D638): 3.3 percent at 7 days at 70 degrees F, maximum. 4. Compressive Strength (ASTM D695): 10,000 psi, minimum. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 03 01 00-3 MAINTENANCE OF CONCRETE 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 2.04 Accessories A. Anchoring Adhesive: Self-leveling or non-sag as applicable. B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150,Type I, II, or III; gray or white. C. Sand: ASTM C33/C33M or ASTM C404; uniformly graded, clean. D. Water: Clean and potable. E. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M Grade 40 (40,000 psi) billet-steel deformed bars, unfinished. F. Reinforcing Steel: Deformed bars,ASTM A996/A996M Grade 40 (280),Type A. 1. Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 767/A 767M, Class I or II. G. Stirrup Steel: ASTM A1064/A1064M. H. Splicing Sleeves: Per shop drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 Examination A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate. 3.02 Cleaning Existing Concrete A. Provide enclosures, barricades, and other temporary construction as required to protect adjacent work from damage. B. Clean concrete surfaces of dirt or other contamination using the gentlest method that is effective. 1. Try the gentlest method first,then, if not clean enough, use a less gentle method taking care to watch for impending damage. 2. Clean out cracks and voids using same methods. C. The following are acceptable cleaning methods, in order from gentlest to less gentle: 1. Water washing using low-pressure, maximum of 100 psi, and, if necessary, brushes with natural or synthetic bristles. 2. Increasing the water washing pressure to maximum of 400 psi. 3. Adding detergent to washing water; with final water rinse to remove residual detergent. 4. Steam-generated low-pressure hot-water washing. 5. Abrasive blasting: Use sand. 3.03 Concrete Structural Member Repair A. See drawings for specific areas to be repaired. B. Remove broken and soft concrete at least 1/4 inch deep. C. Mechanically cut away damaged portions of reinforcement. D. Remove corrosion from steel and clean mechanically. E. Blast clean remaining exposed reinforcement surfaces. F. Repair by welding new bar reinforcement to existing reinforcement using sleeve splices. 1. Perform welding work in accordance with AWS D1.4/D1.4M. 2. Make welded sleeve splices to achieve strength to exceed strength of new reinforcement. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 03 01 00-4 MAINTENANCE OF CONCRETE 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents G. Cover exposed steel reinforcement with epoxy mortar. H. Work epoxy mortar into broken surface and build up patch to match original. I. Feather edges of repairs flush to sound surface and trowel surface to match surrounding area. 3.04 Crack Repair Using Epoxy Adhesive Injection A. Repair exposed cracks. B. Provide temporary entry ports spaced to accomplish movement of fluids between ports; no deeper than the depth of the crack to be filled or port size diameter no greater than the thickness of the crack. Provide temporary seal at concrete surface to prevent leakage of adhesive. C. Inject adhesive into ports under pressure using equipment appropriate for particular application. D. Begin injection at lower entry port and continue until adhesive appears in adjacent entry port. Continue from port to port until entire crack is filled. E. Remove temporary seal and excess adhesive. F. Clean surfaces adjacent to repair and blend finish. 3.05 Concrete Surface Repair Using Cementitious Materials A. Clean concrete surfaces, cracks, and joints of dirt, laitance, corrosion, and other contamination using method(s) specified above and allow to dry. B. Apply coating of bonding agent to entire concrete surface to be repaired. C. Fill voids with cementitious mortar flush with surface. D. Apply repair mortar by steel trowel to a minimum thickness of 1/4 inch over entire surface, terminating at a vertical change in plane on all sides. E. Trowel finish to match adjacent concrete surfaces. F. Damp cure for four days. 3.06 Field Quality Control A. See Section 014000-Quality Requirements for additional requirements. B. An independent testing agency will perform field inspection and testing. 1. Test concrete for calcium chloride content during the execution of the Work. 2. Field Quality Control for CFRP: a. Inspect installation and test for compliance with ICC-ES AC178. b. Inspect for voids, bubbles, and delaminations by performing a visual and acoustic tap test of layered surface after 24 hours of initial resin saturant cure. c. Test for material properties of CFRP in accordance with ASTM D3039/D3039M. d. Nonconforming Work: Repair defective work after minimum cure time for CFRP laminates. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 03 01 00-5 MAINTENANCE OF CONCRETE 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 03 05 16 UNDERSLAB VAPOR BARRIER-STEGO PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sheet vapor barrier under concrete slabs on grade. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 30 00 -Cast-in-Place Concrete: Preparation of subgrade, granular fill, placement of concrete. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM E1643 -Standard Practice for Selection, Design, Installation, and Inspection of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs; 2018a. B. ASTM E1745-Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs; 2017 (Reapproved 2023). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on manufactured products. C. Samples: Submit samples of underslab vapor barrier to be used. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation procedures and interface required with adjacent construction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Underslab Vapor Barrier: 1. Water Vapor Permeance: Not more than 0.010 perms, maximum. 2. Thickness: 15 mils. 3. Basis of Design: a. Stego Industries LLC; Stego Wrap Vapor Barrier(15-mil): www.stegoindustries.com/#sle. B. Accessory Products: Vapor barrier manufacturer's recommended tape, adhesive, mastic, etc., for sealing seams and penetrations in vapor barrier. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install vapor barrier in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM E1643. B. Install vapor barrier under interior slabs on grade; lap sheet over footings and seal to foundation walls. C. Lap joints minimum 6 inches. D. Seal joints, seams and penetrations watertight with manufacturer's recommended products and follow manufacturer's written instructions. E. No penetration of vapor barrier is allowed except for reinforcing steel and permanent utilities. F. Repair damaged vapor retarder before covering with other materials. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 03 05 16- 1 Underslab Vapor Barrier-Stego Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 03 10 00 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 Section Includes A. Formwork for cast-in-place concrete,with shoring, bracing and anchorage. B. Openings for other work. C. Form accessories. D. Form stripping. 1.02 Related Requirements A. Section 03 2000-Concrete Reinforcing. B. Section 03 3000-Cast-in-Place Concrete. 1.03 Price and Payment Procedures A. See Section 012200- Unit Prices,for additional unit price requirements. B. Measurement and payment of forming work will be by the unit price method. C. Formwork(Vertical Structures): Measure by the square foot. Includes form materials, placement, placing accessories, stripping. D. Formwork(Horizontal Structures): Measure by the square foot. Includes form materials, placement, placing accessories, stripping. 1.04 Reference Standards A. ACI CODE-318- Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; 2019 (Reapproved 2022). B. ACI PRC-347-Guide to Formwork for Concrete; 2014 (Reapproved 2021). C. ACI SPEC-117-Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 (Reapproved 2015). D. ACI SPEC-301 -Specifications for Concrete Construction; 2020. E. ACI 117-Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010. F. ACI 301-Specifications for Structural Concrete; 2010 (Errata 2012). G. ACI 318- Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; 2011. H. ACI 347R-Guide to Formwork for Concrete; 2014. I. ASME A17.1 -Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators; 2013. J. PS 1 -Structural Plywood; 2009. 1.05 Submittals A. Product Data: Provide data on void form materials and installation requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensions, materials, bracing, and arrangement of joints and ties. C. Permanent Insulated Foam Panel Formwork Shop Drawings: Include calculations or selections from manufacturer's prescriptive design tables that indicate compliance with applicable building code and manufacturer's requirements. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 03 10 00-1 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 1. Include test reports for performance criteria specified. 2. Include the design engineer's stamp or seal on each sheet of shop drawings. D. Design Data: As required by authorities having jurisdiction. E. Construction Joints: Submit diagram of proposed construction joints not shown on the Drawings prior to or concurrent with reinforcing bar shop drawings. 1.06 Quality Assurance A. Perform work of this section in accordance with Texas Department of Transportation standards. B. Maintain one copy of each installation standard on site throughout the duration of concrete work. 1.07 Delivery,Storage, and Handling A. Deliver prefabricated forms and installation instructions in manufacturer's packaging. B. Store prefabricated forms off ground in ventilated and protected manner to prevent deterioration from moisture. C. Protect plastic foam products from damage and exposure to sunlight. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 Formwork-General A. Provide concrete forms, accessories, shoring, and bracing as required to accomplish cast-in- place concrete work. B. Design and construct concrete that complies with design with respect to shape, lines, and dimensions. C. Chamfer outside corners of beams,joists, columns, and walls. D. Comply with applicable state and local codes with respect to design, fabrication, erection, and removal of formwork. E. Comply with relevant portions of ACI CODE-318, ACI PRC-347, and ACI SPEC-301. F. Comply with Texas Department of Transportation standards. G. Use the following form types: 1. Walls Not Exposed To View: Site fabricated plywood of sufficient thickness capable of sustaining the loads. 2. Walls Exposed To View: Commercial grade, moisture resistant, smooth-faced plywood of sufficient thickness capable of sustaining the loads. 3. Elevated Floor/Roof Slabs: Permanent prefabricated foam panel formwork;formwork to remain. H. Form Ties: 1. Form ties for exposed concrete surfaces shall be manufactured to allow a positive break back of no less than one inch (1") inside the concrete surface. 2. Ties shall be equipped with a plastic cone of not less than five-eighths inch (5/8") diameter and one inch (1") long which will completely cover the hole and prevent the leakage of any mortar. 3. Form ties for unexposed surfaces shall be bolt rods or patented devices having a minimum tensile strength of three thousand (3,000) pounds when fully assembled. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 03 10 00-2 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 4. Ties shall be adjustable in length and free of lugs, cones, washers or other features which would leave a hole larger than seven-eighths inch (7/8") in diameter, or depressions back of the exposed surface of the concrete. 5. Ties shall be of such construction that, when the forms are removed,there will be no metal remaining within one inch (1") of the finished surface of the concrete. 2.02 Wood Form Materials A. Softwood Plywood: PS 1, B-B High Density Concrete Form Overlay, Class I. B. Plywood: Douglas Fir, Spruce, or Yellow Pine species; solid one side grade; sound undamaged sheets with clean,true edges. C. Lumber: Yellow Pine species; #2 grade; with grade stamp clearly visible. 2.03 Removable Prefabricated Forms A. Preformed Steel Forms: Minimum 16 gauge, 0.0598 inch thick, matched,tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of finished surfaces. B. Preformed Plastic Forms: Thermoplastic polystyrene,thermoplastic, thermosetting,filled polyurethane elastomer; or polyurethane elastomer form liner,tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of finished surfaces. C. Glass Fiber Fabric Reinforced Plastic Forms: Matched,tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of finished concrete surfaces. D. Pan Type: Steel or glass fiber, of size and profile indicated. E. Tubular Column Type: Round, Spirally wound laminated fiber, wood, or glass fiber material, surface treated with release agent, non-reusable, of sizes indicated. F. Void Forms: Moisture resistant treated paper faces, biodegradable, structurally sufficient to support weight of wet concrete mix until initial set. 2.04 Permanent Prefabricated Foam Panel Formwork A. Floor/Roof Deck Forms: Pre-engineered expanded polystyrene foam plastic deck and beam/joist forms with factory installed metal channel furring strips flush with face of panel and field installed form stiffener slots. 1. Structural Performance: In accordance with applicable code. 2. Form Cross Section: As indicated on drawings; flat-bottomed solid foam blocks with voids only for stiffeners and beam/joist cross-section; interlocking long edges. 2.05 Formwork Accessories A. Form Ties: Removable or snap-off type, galvanized metal or plastic, fixed length, cone type, 1 inch back break dimension,free of defects that could leave holes larger than 1 inch in concrete surface. B. Form Release Agent: Colorless mineral oil that will not stain concrete, absorb moisture, impair natural bonding of concrete finish coatings, or affect color characteristics of concrete finish coatings. C. Filler Strips for Chamfered Corners: Rigid plastic or wood strip type. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 03 10 00-3 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents D. Dovetail Anchor Slot: Galvanized steel, at least 22 gauge, 0.0299 inch thick,foam filled, release tape sealed slots, anchors for securing to concrete formwork. E. Flashing Reglets: Galvanized steel, at least 22 gauge, 0.0299 inch thick, longest possible lengths, with alignment splines for joints,foam filled, release tape sealed slots, anchors for securing to concrete formwork. F. Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts,Through Bolts,Anchorages: Sized as required, of sufficient strength and character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete. G. Waterstops: Rubber or polyvinyl chloride, minimum 1,750 psi tensile strength, minimum 50 degrees F to plus 175 degrees F working temperature range. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 Examination A. Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with formwork. Ensure that dimensions agree with drawings. 3.02 Earth Forms A. Hand trim sides and bottom of earth forms. Remove loose soil prior to placing concrete. 3.03 Erection- Formwork A. Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with requirements of ACI SPEC-301. B. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Shore or strengthen formwork subject to overstressing by construction loads. C. Install permanent insulated foam panel formwork per manufacturer's recommendations. D. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping. Do not damage concrete during stripping. Permit removal of remaining principal shores. E. Align joints and make watertight. Keep form joints to a minimum. F. Obtain approval before framing openings in structural members that are not indicated on drawings. G. Install void forms in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Protect forms from moisture or crushing. H. Coordinate this section with other sections of work that require attachment of components to formwork. I. If formwork is placed after reinforcement, resulting in insufficient concrete cover over reinforcement, request instructions from Engineer before proceeding. 3.04 Application - Form Release Agent A. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Apply prior to placement of reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items. C. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces will receive special finishes or applied coverings that are affected by agent. Soak inside surfaces of untreated forms with clean water. Keep surfaces coated prior to placement of concrete. 3.05 Inserts, Embedded Parts,and Openings A. Provide formed openings where required for items to be embedded in passing through concrete work. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 03 10 00-4 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents B. Locate and set in place items that will be cast directly into concrete. C. Coordinate with work of other sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets, recesses, sleeves, bolts, anchors, other inserts, and components of other work. D. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, so they are straight, level, and plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement. E. Install waterstops in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, so they are continuous without displacing reinforcement. Heat seal joints so they are watertight. F. Provide temporary ports or openings in formwork where required to facilitate cleaning and inspection. Locate openings at bottom of forms to allow flushing water to drain. G. Close temporary openings with tight fitting panels,flush with inside face of forms, and neatly fitted so joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces. 3.06 Form Cleaning A. Clean forms as erection proceeds,to remove foreign matter within forms. B. Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete. 1. Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure that water and debris drain to exterior through clean-out ports. 2. During cold weather, remove ice and snow from within forms. Do not use de-icing salts. Do not use water to clean out forms, unless formwork and concrete construction proceed within heated enclosure. Use compressed air or other means to remove foreign matter. 3.07 Formwork Tolerances A. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI SPEC-117, unless otherwise indicated. B. Construct permanent insulated foam panel formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI SPEC-301. C. Construct and align formwork for elevator hoistway in accordance with ASME A17.1. D. Camber slabs and beams in accordance with ACI SPEC-301. 3.08 Field Quality Control A. Inspect erected formwork, shoring, and bracing to ensure that work is in accordance with formwork design, and to verify that supports,fastenings,wedges, ties, and items are secure. 3.09 Form Removal A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own weight and imposed loads. B. Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finish concrete surfaces scheduled for exposure to view. C. Store removed forms to prevent damage to form materials or to fresh concrete. Discard damaged forms. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 03 10 00-5 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 03 10 00 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Formwork for cast-in-place concrete, with shoring, bracing and anchorage. B. Openings for other work. C. Form accessories. D. Form stripping. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 20 00- Concrete Reinforcing. B. Section 03 30 00- Cast-in-Place Concrete. C. Section 05 12 00-Structural Steel Framing: Placement of embedded steel anchors and plates in cast-in-place concrete. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 117 -Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010 (Reapproved 2015). B. ACI 301 -Specifications for Concrete Construction; 2020. C. ACI 318- Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete; 2019 (Reapproved 2022). D. ACI 347R- Guide to Formwork for Concrete; 2014 (Reapproved 2021). E. ASME A17.1 -Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators Includes Requirements for Elevators, Escalators, Dumbwaiters, Moving Walks, Material Lifts, and Dumbwaiters with Automatic Transfer Devices; 2019, with Errata (2021). F. ASTM A653/A653M -Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)or Zinc- Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2022. G. COE CRD-C 572 - Handbook for Concrete and Cement Corps of Engineers Specifications for Polyvinylchloride Waterstop; 1974. H. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009 (Revised 2019). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensions, materials, bracing, and arrangement of joints and ties. C. Suspended One-way, Two-way and Removeable Panormwork Shop Drawings: Include calculations or selections from manufacturer's prescriptive design tables that indicate compliance with applicable building code and manufacturer's requirements. 1. Include the design engineer's stamp or seal on each sheet of shop drawings. D. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of prefabricated forms, including beams, drops and proposed concrete pour breaks. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Designer Qualifications: Design formwork under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of concrete formwork and licensed in Texas. B. Maintain one copy of each installation standard on site throughout the duration of concrete work. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver prefabricated forms and installation instructions in manufacturer's packaging. B. Store prefabricated forms off ground in ventilated and protected manner to prevent deterioration from moisture. LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 03 10 00- 1 Concrete Forming and Accessories 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMWORK-GENERAL A. Provide concrete forms, accessories, shoring, and bracing as required to accomplish cast-in- place concrete work. B. Design and construct concrete that complies with design with respect to shape, lines, and dimensions. C. Comply with applicable state and local codes with respect to design, fabrication, erection, and removal of formwork. D. Comply with relevant portions of ACI 347R, ACI 301, and ACI 318. 2.02 WOOD FORM MATERIALS A. Softwood Plywood: PS 1, B-B High Density Concrete Form Overlay, Class I. B. Lumber: Yellow Pine or equal species; no. 2 grade; with grade stamp clearly visible. 2.03 PREFABRICATED FORMS A. Manufacturers: 1. SureVoid Products, Inc: www.surevoid.com/#sle. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Void Forms: Moisture resistant treated paper faces, biodegradable, structurally sufficient to support weight of wet concrete mix until initial set; 8 inches thick. 2.04 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES A. Form Ties: Removable Removable type, galvanized metal galvanized metal, fixed fixed length, cone type, cone type, with waterproofing washer, with waterproofing washer, free of defects that could leave holes larger than 1 inch 1 inch in concrete surface. B. Form Release Agent: Capable of releasing forms from hardened concrete without staining or discoloring concrete or forming bugholes and other surface defects, compatible with concrete and form materials, and not requiring removal for satisfactory bonding of coatings to be applied. 1. Do not use materials containing diesel oil or petroleum-based compounds. 2. Products: a. SpecChem, LLC; Bio Strip WB (water-based): www.specchemllc.com/#sle. b. W. R. Meadows, Inc; Duogard II (water-based): www.wrmeadows.com/#sle. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. C. Form Release Agent: Colorless mineral oil that will not stain concrete. D. Filler Strips for Chamfered Corners: Wood strip type; 3/4 x 3/4 inch size; maximum possible lengths. E. Dovetail Anchor Slot: Galvanized steel, at least 22 gauge, 0.0299 inch thick, foam filled, release tape sealed slots, anchors for securing to concrete formwork. F. Flashing Reglets: Galvanized steel, at least 22 gauge, 0.0299 inch thick, longest possible lengths, with alignment splines for joints, foam filled, release tape sealed slots, anchors for securing to concrete formwork. G. Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorages: Sized as required, of sufficient strength and character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete. H. Embedded Anchor Shapes, Plates, Angles and Bars: As specified in Section 05 12 00. I. Waterstops: PVC, complying with COE CRD-C 572. 1. All horizontal and vertical construction joints shall contain a rubber water stop. LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 03 10 00-2 Concrete Forming and Accessories 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2. Configuration: As indicated on drawings. 3. Size: As indicated on drawings. If not shown use 4" minimum bulb tee type. 4. Manufacturers: a. BoMetals, Inc: www.bometals.com/#sle. b. Greenstreak: www.usa.sika.com/en/construction/concrete/concrete- accessories/waterstop-systems/pvc-waterstop/greenstreak-pvc-waterstop.html. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with formwork. Ensure that dimensions agree with drawings. 3.02 EARTH FORMS A. Hand trim sides and bottom of earth forms. Remove loose soil prior to placing concrete. 3.03 ERECTION -FORMWORK A. Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with requirements of ACI 301. B. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Shore or strengthen formwork subject to overstressing by construction loads. C. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping. Do not damage concrete during stripping. Permit removal of remaining principal shores. D. Align joints and make watertight. Keep form joints to a minimum. E. Obtain approval before framing openings in structural members that are not indicated on drawings. F. Install void forms in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Protect forms from moisture or crushing. G. Coordinate this section with other sections of work that require attachment of components to formwork. H. If formwork is placed after reinforcement, resulting in insufficient concrete cover over reinforcement, request instructions from Architect/Structural Engineer of Record before proceeding. 3.04 APPLICATION -FORM RELEASE AGENT A. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Apply prior to placement of reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items. C. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces will receive special finishes or applied coverings that are affected by agent. Soak inside surfaces of untreated forms with clean water. Keep surfaces coated prior to placement of concrete. 3.05 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. Side forms of beams, walls and columns may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 degrees F (10 degrees C)for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. B. Wall, beam,joist and slab soffits may be removed when all of the following conditions are satisfied: LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 03 10 00-3 Concrete Forming and Accessories 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Strength of concrete as shown by standard cylinder test has reached at least 2,500 psi and at least 75% of specified design strength. 2. Concrete has cured at least 7 days (4 days for type 3 cement) or additional time as required if during cold weather. 3. Soffit forms shall not be removed from members that are supporting any load such as construction materials or shoring for floor or roof above unless it can be determined that the member as sufficient strength to support such loading. 3.06 INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS A. Provide formed openings where required for items to be embedded in passing through concrete work. B. Locate and set in place items that will be cast directly into concrete. C. Coordinate with work of other sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets, recesses, sleeves, bolts, anchors, other inserts, and components of other work. D. Position recessed anchor slots for brick veneer masonry anchors to spacing and intervals specified in Section 04 26 13. E. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, so they are straight, level, and plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement. F. Install waterstops in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, so they are continuous without displacing reinforcement. Heat seal joints so they are watertight. G. Provide temporary ports or openings in formwork where required to facilitate cleaning and inspection. Locate openings at bottom of forms to allow flushing water to drain. H. Close temporary openings with tight fitting panels, flush with inside face of forms, and neatly fitted so joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces. 3.07 FORM CLEANING A. Clean forms as erection proceeds, to remove foreign matter within forms. B. Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete. 1. Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure that water and debris drain to exterior through clean-out ports. 2. During cold weather, remove ice and snow from within forms. Do not use de-icing salts. Do not use water to clean out forms, unless formwork and concrete construction proceed within heated enclosure. Use compressed air or other means to remove foreign matter. 3.08 FORMWORK TOLERANCES A. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 117, unless otherwise indicated. B. Construct and align formwork for elevator hoistway in accordance with ASME A17.1. C. Camber slabs and beams 1/4 inch per 10 feet. 3.09 FORMWORK FINISH A. Construct formwork in accordance with ACI 347, unless otherwise indicated. B. Refer to architectural drawings for exposure of formed surfaces. 1. The following defines class of finish: a. Class A-Surfaces prominently exposed to public view where appearance is of special importance, typically noted on architectural drawings as "exposed" b. Class B -Coarse textured concerete formed surfaced intended to receive plaster, stucco or wainscoting. LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 03 10 00-4 Concrete Forming and Accessories 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS c. Class C- General standard for permanently exposed surfaces where other finishes are not specified. d. Class D - Minimal quality requirement for surfaces where roughness is not objectionable, usually applied where surface will be permanently concealed. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01 40 00- Quality Requirements. B. Inspect erected formwork, shoring, and bracing to ensure that work is in accordance with formwork design, and to verify that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties, and items are secure. C. Do not reuse wood formwork more than 2 times for concrete surfaces to be exposed to view. Do not patch formwork. 3.11 FORM REMOVAL A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own weight and imposed loads. B. Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finish concrete surfaces scheduled for exposure to view. C. Store removed forms to prevent damage to form materials or to fresh concrete. Discard damaged forms. END OF SECTION LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 03 10 00-5 Concrete Forming and Accessories 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 03 12 10 ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE FORM LINERS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Plastic form liners. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03 30 00- Cast-in-Place Concrete. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog data, detail sheets, and specifications. 1.04 MOCK-UP A. Construct and erect mock-up panel for architectural concrete surfaces indicated to receive special treatment or finish as result of formwork. 1. Panel Size: 6 x 6 feet. 2. Number of Panels: 2. 3. Locate as indicated on drawings. B. If requested by Architect/Structural Engineer of Record , cast concrete against mock-up panel. Obtain acceptance of resulting surface finish prior to erecting formwork. C. Accepted mock-up panel is considered basis of quality for the finished work. Keep mock-up exposed to view for duration of concrete work. D. Mock-up may not remain as part of the Work. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inspect the materials upon delivery to assure that specified products have been received. B. Store form liners in closed shipping crates until needed on work site; protect from sunlight, dirt, and debris. C. Once attached to formwork, store form liners on edge. Avoid striking face with heavy, sharp, or heated objects that could cause permanent damage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Fitzgerald Formliners, 1500 East Chestnut Avenue, Santa Ana, CA 92701, 800-547-7760, www.formliners.com 1. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2. Provide all architectural form liners from a single manufacturer. B. Contractor my construct form liner using aged wood form material as approved by Architect. 2.02 FORM LINERS A. Stone Pattern Form Liners: 1. Split Slate, Pattern 16989 (Fitzgerald Formliners) , no reveal. 2.03 MATERIALS A. SPS: Polystyrene. B. ABS: Premium quality ABS. C. Dura-Tex(R): Polyurethane Elastomer. LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 03 12 10- 1 Architectural Concrete Form Liners 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS D. Elasto-Tex(R): Premium Polyurethane Elastomer. E. Form Release: Liner Kote(tm)or Magic Kote(R), as recommended by liner manufacturer. F. Silicone Calking: G. Adhesive: H. Solvent: I. Staples: 9/16 inch or 3/4 inch, depending on pattern thickness. J. Nails: PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Before using for the first time, work form release into all areas of form liner, especially pattern recesses. B. Apply form release to form liners before each use and within the same day that concrete is placed. 1. Use form release sprayer and vary spray angle to ensure complete coverage of all pattern features. 2. Use a brush for deep or rough patterns. C. Repair of damaged form liners is prohibited. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Handset Systems; Plastic Form Liners: 1. Apply foam tape to plate or sill supporting formwork to prevent grout leakage at base of plastic form liner. 2. Assemble and brace the architectural side of the formwork first; attach form liner before setting ties or opposite formwork side. 3. Apply foam tape to back side of form liner along all edges; allow foam tape to extend beyond the edge when the form liner will be jointed. 4. Work with one sheet at a time; position form liner against formwork so that edges, pattern, and joints are square. 5. Staple form liner on 3 inch centers and around all tie locations; using adequate electrical power, drive staple heads flush with surface. 6. Position foam tape behind the joint of two pieces and press down firmly. 7. Ribbed Liners: Insert grout seal block to support joint and prevent grout seepage. 8. Other Styles: Insert grout seal blocks as required to seal tie holes, fill voids in boxouts and open-ended patterns, or support especially deep patterns. END OF SECTION LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 03 12 10-2 Architectural Concrete Form Liners 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 Section Includes A. Reinforcing steel for cast-in-place concrete. B. Supports and accessories for steel reinforcement. 1.02 Related Requirements A. Section 03 1000-Concrete Forming and Accessories. B. Section 03 3000-Cast-in-Place Concrete. 1.03 Price and Payment Procedures A. Bar Reinforcement: By the ton. Includes reinforcement, placement, and accessories. B. Welded Wire Reinforcement: By the square foot. Includes welded wire reinforcement, placement, and accessories. 1.04 Reference Standards A. ACI MNL-66-ACI Detailing Manual; 2020. B. ACI 301 -Specifications for Structural Concrete; 2010 (Errata 2012). C. ACI 318- Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; 2011. D. ACI SP-66-ACI Detailing Manual; 2004. E. ACI SPEC-301 -Specifications for Concrete Construction; 2020. F. ASTM A82/A82M -Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain,for Concrete Reinforcement; 2007. G. ASTM A184/A184M -Standard Specification for Welded Deformed Steel Bar Mats for Concrete Reinforcement; 2006 (Reapproved 2011). H. ASTM A185/A185M -Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain,for Concrete; 2007. I. ASTM A497/A497M -Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Deformed, for Concrete; 2007. J. ASTM A615/A615M -Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2015. K. ASTM A641/A641M -Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire; 2009a (Reapproved 2014). L. ASTM A704/A704M -Standard Specification for Welded Steel Plain Bar or Rod Mats for Concrete Reinforcement; 2006 (Reapproved 2011). M. ASTM A706/A706M -Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2014. N. ASTM A767/A767M -Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2009. O. ASTM A775/A775M -Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars; 2007b (Reapproved 2014). RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 03 20 00-1 CONCRETE REINFORCING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents P. ASTM A884/A884M -Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement; 2014. Q. ASTM A996/A996M -Standard Specification for Rail-Steel and Axle-Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2014. R. ASTM A1064/A1064M -Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete; 2015. S. ASTM D3963/D3963M -Standard Specification for Fabrication and Jobsite Handling of Epoxy- Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars; 2001 (Reapproved 2007). T. AWS D1.4/D1.4M -Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel; 2011. U. CRSI (DA4)- Manual of Standard Practice; 2009. V. CRSI (P1) - Placing Reinforcing Bars; 2011. 1.05 Submittals A. Shop Drawings: Comply with requirements of ACI MNL-66. Include bar schedules, shapes of bent bars, spacing of bars, and location of splices. 1. Prepare shop drawings under seal of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of work of this type and licensed in the State in which the Project is located. B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that reinforcing steel and accessories supplied for this project meet or exceed specified requirements. C. Reports: Submit certified copies of mill test report of reinforcement materials analysis. 1.06 Quality Assurance A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI SPEC-301. 1. Maintain one copy of each document on project site. B. Provide Engineer with access to fabrication plant to facilitate inspection of reinforcement. Provide notification of commencement and duration of shop fabrication in sufficient time to allow inspection. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 Reinforcement A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615/A 615M Grade 40 (280), Unfinished. B. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed low-alloy steel bars, Unfinished. C. Reinforcing Steel: Deformed bars,ASTM A996/A996M Grade 40 (280),Type A. 1. Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A767/A767M, Class I. D. Reinforcing Steel Mat: ASTM A704/A704M, using ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 40 (40,000 psi) steel bars or rods, unfinished. E. Stirrup Steel: ASTM A1064/A1064M steel wire, unfinished. F. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement (WWR): Galvanized, deformed type; ASTM A1064/A1064M. 1. Form: Flat Sheets. 2. WWR Style: 4 x 8-W6 x W10. 3. Wire Gage: W4xW4 unless otherwise indicated on drawings. G. Reinforcement Accessories: 1. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gauge, 0.0508 inch. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 03 20 00-2 CONCRETE REINFORCING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of reinforcement during concrete placement. 3. Provide stainless steel, galvanized, plastic, or plastic coated steel components for placement within 1-1/2 inches of weathering surfaces. 2.02 Fabrication A. Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with CRSI (DA4) - Manual of Standard Practice. B. Welding of reinforcement is permitted only with the specific approval of Engineer. Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.4/D1.4M. 1. Galvanized and Epoxy Coated Reinforcement: Clean surfaces, weld and re-protect welded joint in accordance with CRSI (DA4). C. Fabricate and handle epoxy-coated reinforcing in accordance with ASTM D3963/D3963M. D. Locate reinforcing splices not indicated on drawings at point of minimum stress. 1. Review locations of splices with Engineer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 Placement A. Place, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from required position. B. Do not displace or damage vapor barrier. C. Accommodate placement of formed openings. D. Maintain concrete cover around reinforcing as follows: 1. Beams: 2 inch or per Engineer's drawings. 2. Supported Slabs and Joists: 2 inch or per Engineer's drawings. 3. Column Ties: 2 inch or per Engineer's drawings. 4. Walls (exposed to weather or backfill): 2 inch or per Engineer's drawings. 5. Footings and Concrete Formed Against Earth: 2 inch or per Engineer's drawings. 6. Slabs on Fill: 2 inch or per Engineer's drawings. E. Reinforcement shall be accurately placed and securely saddle tied at every other intersection with No. 18 gauge black annealed wire, and shall be rigidly held in place during the placing of the concrete by means of metal chairs or spacers. F. Bars in concrete walls shall be held in position, and to proper clearance, by means of concrete or metal spacer made especially for the locations where spacers are required. G. Bars in beams and slabs shall be held to exact location during placing of concrete by spacers, chairs, or other necessary supports. H. Comply with applicable code for concrete cover over reinforcement. I. Bond and ground all reinforcement. 3.02 Field Quality Control A. An independent testing agency will inspect installed reinforcement for conformance to contract documents before concrete placement. 3.03 Schedules A. Reinforcement For Superstructure Framing Members: Deformed bars, unfinished. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 03 20 00-3 CONCRETE REINFORCING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents B. Reinforcement For Foundation Wall Framing Members and Slab-on-Grade: Deformed bars and welded wire reinforcement,galvanized finish. C. Reinforcement For Parking Structure Framing Members: Deformed bars, epoxy coated finish. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 03 20 00-4 CONCRETE REINFORCING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Reinforcing steel for cast-in-place concrete. B. Supports and accessories for steel reinforcement. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 10 00- Concrete Forming and Accessories. B. Section 03 30 00- Cast-in-Place Concrete. C. Section 04 20 00- Unit Masonry: Reinforcement for masonry. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 301 -Specifications for Concrete Construction; 2020. B. ACI 318- Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete; 2019 (Reapproved 2022). C. ACI SP-66-ACI Detailing Manual; 2004. D. ASTM A82/A82M - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement; 2007. E. ASTM Al84/A184M -Standard Specification for Welded Deformed Steel Bar Mats for Concrete Reinforcement; 2019. F. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2022. G. ASTM A996/A996M -Standard Specification for Rail-Steel and Axle-Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2016. H. ASTM Al064/A1064M - Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete; 2022. I. AWS D1.4/D1.4M - Structural Welding Code- Steel Reinforcing Bars; 2018, with Amendment (2020). J. CRSI (DA4)- Manual of Standard Practice; 2009. K. CRSI (P1)- Placing Reinforcing Bars, 10th Edition; 2019. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Comply with requirements of ACI SP-66. Include bar schedules, shapes of bent bars, spacing of bars, and location of splices. C. The Contractor shall obtain completely detailed shop drawings showing placement plans, bar bending lists, etc. Include the specific location and size of all accessories, chairs and bar supports. The Contractor shall carefully check these drawings, then submit them to the Architect/Engineer. The Architect/Engineer may conduct limited spot checks aimed solely at determining general comprehension of the design intent, then return them to the Contractor. The Contractor shall then carefully recheck the shop drawings and approve them prior to fabrication. 1. NOTE: Regardless of the fabricators standard policy or other industry standards of practice, all straight and bent bars shall be tagged with the member mark. If the fabricator elects to use member marks other than those shown on the structural drawings, the members must also be labeled with the original engineer's member marks in addition to those of the fabricator. D. The Engineer's spot check shall not relieve the Contractor from correcting, at his own expense, any items that may thereafter be found not to comply with the plans and specifications. LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 03 20 00- 1 Concrete Reinforcing 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that reinforcing steel and accessories supplied for this project meet or exceed specified requirements. F. Reports: Submit certified copies of mill test report of reinforcement materials analysis. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REINFORCEMENT A. ALL REINFORCING (Unless noted otherwise) 1. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60 (60,000 psi). a. Plain billet-steel bars. B. BEAM STIRRUPS and COLUMN TIES 1. Reinforcing Steel: Deformed bars, ASTM A996/A996M Grade 40 (280), Type A. C. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement(WWR): Galvanized, deformed type; ASTM Al 064/A1064M. 1. Form: Flat Sheets. 2. WWR Style: As indicated on drawings. D. Reinforcement Accessories: 1. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gauge, 0.0508 inch. 2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of reinforcement during concrete placement. 2.02 RE-BAR SPLICING: A. Coupler Systems: Mechanical devices for splicing reinforcing bars; capable of developing full steel reinforcing design strength in tension and compression. 1. Products: a. Dayton Superior Corporation: www.daytonsuperior.com/#sle. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Dowel Bar Splicer with Dowel-Ins: Mechanical devices for connecting dowels; capable of developing full steel reinforcing design strength in tension and compression. 1. Products: a. Dayton Superior Corporation: www.daytonsuperior.com/#sle. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with CRSI (DA4)- Manual of Standard Practice. B. Welding of reinforcement is not permitted. C. Locate reinforcing splices not indicated on drawings at point of minimum stress. 1. Review locations of splices with Architect/Structural Engineer of Record . LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 03 20 00-2 Concrete Reinforcing 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PLACEMENT A. Place, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from required position. B. Do not displace or damage vapor barrier. C. Accommodate placement of formed openings. 3.02 FABRICATION A. Reinforcing shall be fabricated in accordance with "Manual of Standard Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete" (ACI 318), latest edition. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining properly fabricated reinforcing and placing it properly. B. Reinforcing steel, at the time concrete is placed, shall be free from excessive rust, scale, dried concrete, or other coatings that will destroy or reduce bond, in the opinion of the Engineer. C. Reinforcing steel shall be accurately shop bent and placed in position, securely tied or supported to prevent movement during placing of concrete. Field bends will not be permitted without prior approval from Engineer. Authorized field bends shall be performed cold; no heating is permitted. Spacer bars, supports and accessories are not scheduled but are to be furnished and placed as described under MATERIALS paragraph in this Section. Raising of reinforcement (including welded wire fabric)during the pour will not be permitted. 3.03 CONCRETE COVER A. SLAB AND BEAMS ON FILL 1. Chair and/or block reinforcing securely in position with concrete cover as follows: a. Beam stirrups; top, 1-1/2", bottom and sides 3". b. Slab bars; 1-1/2"from top. 2. Support reinforcing steel on concrete blocks or bricks spaced at approximately 4'-0" o.c. in each direction. 3.04 SPLICES A. Necessary splices not shown on drawings or otherwise noted shall be in accordance with ACI specifications for bar sizes up to#11 size, but not less than 40 bar diameters. Splices in bars larger than #11 shall be made with approved thermal or mechanical coupling devices. Welding wire fabric shall be lapped 1-1/2 meshes, with a minimum lap of 8". All lap splices shall be contact type secured with annealed tie wire. 3.05 SLAB OPENINGS A. Unless shown otherwise, at slab openings of 12" or less, spread main reinforcing around opening. At slab openings greater than 12", provide 2#4x4'-0" bottom placed diagonally at each corner. At sides of openings, provide one full bar for each bar cut at opening. No main bars shall be cut without Engineer's approval. 3.06 CONDUITS IN SLABS A. Electrical and mechanical conduit in slabs or joists shall run under upper layer of reinforcing or wire mesh; provide a minimum of 1-1/2" clear between conduits and between conduit and parallel reinforcing. Do not"bundle" conduits. See CONCRETE FORMWORK Section for thickened slab required at large conduits. 3.07 BEAM INTERSECTIONS A. Unless shown otherwise on plans, at corners, angle bends and at junction with other beams, provide four#7x6'-0" "corner bars" (3 ft. each leg) , 2 top and 2 bottom. For deep beams with scheduled intermediate bars, provide matching 80 diameter corner bars"of the same size. At "T" intersection, place all "corner bars" so that one leg is in outside face of outside beam. LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 03 20 00-3 Concrete Reinforcing 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.08 WALL INTERSECTIONS A. Unless shown otherwise, at corners, angle bends, and at junction with other walls, lap all horizontal bars in both faces 30 diameters or use matching 80 diameter"Corner Bars". 3.09 BEAM TO WALL CONNECTION A. Unless shown otherwise, where beam abuts or frames into concrete wall, extend beam bars 30 diameters into wall, or use 60 diameter dowels or 60 diameter"corner bars"with 30 diameter embedment into both beam and wall; bar size and quantity shall match beam bars. See CONCRETE FORMWORK section for key seat at construction joint. 3.10 WALL ENDS A. Unless shown otherwise, where walls stop, position two (2) of the wall vertical bars at the end of the wall; provided that vertical bars are#6 or larger. If wall vertical bars are smaller that#6, use 2#6 at wall ends in lieu of wall vertical bars. Provide#4 U-bars (30 diameter laps) enclosing vertical bars at end faces, same spacing as horizontal bars. 3.11 OPENINGS IN CONCRETE WALLS A. Unless shown otherwise, Add 2#6 bars in each face over opening, extending 30 diameters beyond limits of opening, and add 2#5x5'-0" placed diagonally at each corner of opening. Provide#4 U-bars (30 diameter laps) at end faces for each bar(horizontal or vertical) interrupted by opening. U-bars shall enclose horizontal or vertical bars at opening. 3.12 WALL DOWELS A. Unless shown otherwise, provide 60 diameter wall dowels from beam or footing to match the size and spacing of all vertical bars in wall above; extend 30 diameters into wall. At construction joints, either continue all vertical bars or provide for 30 diameter laps of all vertical bars into wall above. 3.13 TOPPING REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcement (including welded wire fabric)shall be chaired to proper depth as shown on plans and sections. Raising of reinforcement during pour is not acceptable. B. CONSTRUCTION JOINTS C. Provide and locate as necessary in CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section. D. All reinforcing shall continue through the joint. E. Add extra reinforcing if so directed by Engineer. 3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency, as specified in Section 01 40 00- Quality Requirements, will inspect installed reinforcement for compliance with contract documents before concrete placement. END OF SECTION LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 03 20 00-4 Concrete Reinforcing 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 Section Includes A. Concrete formwork. B. Concrete shear walls, elevator shaft walls, and foundation walls. C. Joint devices associated with concrete work. D. Miscellaneous concrete elements. E. Concrete curing. 1.02 Related Requirements A. Section 03 1000-Concrete Forming and Accessories. B. Section 03 2000-Concrete Reinforcing. C. Section 07 9200-Joint Sealants: Products and installation for sealants and joint fillers for saw cut joints and isolation joints in slabs. D. Section 32 1250-Site Pavement. 1.03 Price and Payment Procedures A. Cement: By the cubic yard. 1.04 Reference Standards A. ACI 117-Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010. B. ACI 211.1 -Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete; 1991 (Reapproved 2009). C. ACI 211.2 -Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Structural Lightweight Concrete; 1998 (Reapproved 2004). D. ACI CODE-318- Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; 2019 (Reapproved 2022). E. ACI PRC-211.1 -Selecting Proportions for Normal-Density and High Density-Concrete-Guide; 2022. F. ACI 301-Specifications for Structural Concrete; 2010 (Errata 2012). G. ACI 302AR-Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; 2004(Errata 2007). H. ACI 304R-Guide for Measuring, Mixing,Transporting, and Placing Concrete; 2000. I. ACI 305R- Hot Weather Concreting; 2010. J. ACI 306R-Cold Weather Concreting; 2010. K. ACI 308R-Guide to Curing Concrete; 2001 (Reapproved 2008). L. ACI 318- Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; 2011. M. ACI 347R-Guide to Formwork for Concrete; 2014. N. ACI PRC-304- Heavyweight Concrete: Measuring, Mixing,Transporting and Placing; 2020. O. ACI PRC-305 -Guide to Hot Weather Concreting; 2020. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 03 30 00-1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents P. ACI PRC-306-Guide to Cold Weather Concreting; 2016. Q. ACI PRC-308-Guide to External Curing of Concrete; 2016. R. ACI SPEC-301 -Specifications for Concrete Construction; 2020. S. ASTM A185/A185M -Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain,for Concrete; 2007. T. ASTM A497/A497M -Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Deformed, for Concrete; 2007. U. ASTM A615/A615M -Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2015. V. ASTM A767/A767M -Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2009. W. ASTM A775/A775M -Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars; 2007b (Reapproved 2014). X. ASTM A884/A884M -Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement; 2014. Y. ASTM C33/C33M -Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2016. Z. ASTM C39/C39M -Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens; 2015a. AA. ASTM C94/C94M -Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2015. AB. ASTM C109/C109M -Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. or(50-mm) Cube Specimens); 2013. AC. ASTM C143/C143M -Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete; 2012. AD. ASTM C150/C150M -Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2016. AE. ASTM C171-Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete; 2007. AF. ASTM C173/C173M -Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method; 2014. AG. ASTM C260/C260M -Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 2010a. AH. ASTM C309-Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete; 2011. Al. ASTM C330/C330M -Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete; 2014. AJ. ASTM C494/C494M -Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2013. AK. ASTM C618-Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete; 2015. AL. ASTM C685/C685M -Standard Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching and Continuous Mixing; 2014. AM.ASTM C881/C881M -Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete; 2014. AN. ASTM C979/C979M -Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete; 2010. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 03 30 00-2 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents AO. ASTM C1059/C1059M -Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened Concrete; 2013. AP. ASTM C1107/C1107M -Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink); 2014. AQ. ASTM C1240-Standard Specification for Silica Fume Used in Cementitious Mixtures; 2014. AR. ASTM C1602/C1602M -Standard Specification for Mixing Water Used in the Production of Hydraulic Cement Concrete; 2012. AS. ASTM D994/D994M -Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type); 2011. AT. ASTM D1751-Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types); 2004 (Reapproved 2013). AU. ASTM D2103 -Standard Specification for Polyethylene Film and Sheeting; 2015. AV. ASTM D3963/D3963M -Standard Specification for Fabrication and Jobsite Handling of Epoxy- Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars; 2001 (Reapproved 2007). AW.ASTM E154/E154M -Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth Under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as Ground Cover; 2008a (Reapproved 2013). AX, ASTM E1155-Standard Test Method for Determining F(F) Floor Flatness and F(L) Floor Levelness Numbers; 1996 (Reapproved 2008). AY. ASTM E1643 -Standard Practice for Selection, Design, Installation and Inspection of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs; 2011. AZ. ASTM E 1155M -Standard Test Method for Determining F(F) Floor Flatness and F(L) Floor Levelness Numbers [Metric]; 1996 (Reapproved 2008). BA. ASTM E1745-Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs; 2011. BB. ASTM E1993/E1993M -Standard Specification for Bituminous Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs; 1998 (Reapproved 2013). BC. COE CRD-C 48- Method of Test for Water Permeability of Concrete; 1992. BD. COE CRD-C 513 -COE Specifications for Rubber Waterstops; 1974. BE. COE CRD-C 572-Corps of Engineers Specifications for Polyvinylchloride Waterstop; 1974. BF. NSF 61- Drinking Water System Components- Health Effects; 2014 (Errata 2015). 1.05 Submittals A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on manufactured products showing compliance with specified requirements and installation instructions. 1. For curing compounds, provide data on method of removal in the event of incompatibility with floor covering adhesives. B. Construction Joints: Submit drawing of proposed construction joints for slab on grade, etc. where they are not indicated on the drawings. C. Laboratory Test Reports and Mix Design: Submit laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix designs as specified in the Testing Laboratory section of the Specifications. D. Test Reports: Submit report for each test or series of tests specified. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 03 30 00-3 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: For concrete accessories, indicate installation procedures and interface required with adjacent construction. F. Sustainable Design Submittal: If any fly ash, ground granulated blast furnace slag, silica fume, rice hull ash, or other waste material is used in mix designs to replace Portland cement, submit the total volume of concrete cast in place, mix design(s) used showing the quantity of portland cement replaced, reports showing successful cylinder testing, and temperature on day of pour if cold weather mix is used. 1.06 Quality Assurance A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI SPEC-301 and ACI CODE-318. 1. Maintain one copy of each document on site. B. Follow recommendations of ACI PRC-305 when concreting during hot weather. C. Follow recommendations of ACI PRC-306 when concreting during cold weather. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 Formwork A. Form Materials: Contractor's choice of standard products with sufficient strength to withstand hydrostatic head without distortion in excess of permitted tolerances. 1. Form Facing for Exposed Finish Concrete: Contractor's choice of materials that will provide smooth, stain-free final appearance. 2. Earth Cuts: Do not use earth cuts as forms for vertical surfaces. Natural rock formations that maintain a stable vertical edge may be used as side forms. 3. Form Coating: Release agent that will not adversely affect concrete or interfere with application of coatings. 4. Form Ties: Cone snap type that will leave no metal within 1-1/2 inches of concrete surface. 2.02 Reinforcement Materials A. Comply with requirements of Section 03 2000. B. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60 (60,000 psi). 1. Type: Deformed billet-steel bars. 2. Finish: Unfinished, unless otherwise indicated. C. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain type. 1. Form: Flat sheets or coiled rolls. 2. Mesh Size: 6"x6", unless otherwise noted on drawings. 3. Wire Gage: W 4 x W 4, unless otherwise noted on drawings. D. Reinforcement Accessories: 1. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gauge, 0.0508 inch. 2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of reinforcement during concrete placement. 3. Provide stainless steel, galvanized, plastic, or plastic coated steel components for placement within 1-1/2 inches of weathering surfaces. 2.03 Concrete Materials A. Cement: ASTM C 150,Type I - Normal portland type. Use one brand of cement throughout project. 1. Acquire cement for entire project from same source. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 03 30 00-4 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33/C33M. 1. Acquire all aggregates for entire project from same source for exposed concrete only. C. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C330/C330M. D. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F. E. Calcined Pozzolan: ASTM C618, Class N. F. Silica Fume: ASTM C1240, proportioned in accordance with ACI PRC-211.1. G. Waterproofing Additive: Crystalline waterproofing intended for mixing into concrete to close concrete pores by growth of crystals, with no decrease in concrete strength or chemical resistance. 1. Permeability of Cured Concrete: No measurable leakage when tested in accordance with COE CRD-C 48 at 350 feet of head; provide test reports. 2. Potable Water Contact Approval: NSF certification for use on structures holding potable water, based on testing in accordance with NSF 61. H. Water: ASTM C1602/C1602M; clean, potable, and not detrimental to concrete. I. Fiber Reinforcement: Synthetic fiber shown to have long-term resistance to deterioration when exposed to moisture and alkalis; 1/2 inch length. 2.04 Admixtures A. Prohibited Admixtures: Calcium chloride,thiocyanates or admixtures containing more than 0.05%chloride irons are not permitted. B. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight of cement. C. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C260/C260M. D. High Range Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type G. E. High Range Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type F. F. Water Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type E. G. Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type D. H. Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type C. I. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type B. J. Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type A. 2.05 Accessory Materials A. Non-Shrink Cementitious Grout: Premixed compound consisting of nonmetallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents. 1. Grout: Comply with ASTM C1107/C1107M. 2. Minimum Compressive Strength at 48 Hours,ASTM C109/C109M: 2,000 pounds per square inch. 3. Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 Days,ASTM C109/C109M: 7,000 pounds per square inch. B. Non-Shrink Epoxy Grout: Moisture-insensitive,two-part; consisting of epoxy resin, nonmetallic aggregate, and activator. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 03 30 00-5 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 2.06 Bonding and Jointing Products A. Latex Bonding Agent: Non-redispersable acrylic latex, complying with ASTM C1059/C1059M, Type II. B. Epoxy Bonding System: C. Waterproofing Admixture Slurry: Slurry coat of Portland cement, sand, and crystalline waterproofing additive, mixed with water in proportions recommended by manufacturer to achieve waterproofing at cold joints in concrete. D. Waterstops: Rubber, complying with COE CRD-C 513. 1. Configuration: As indicated on drawings. 2. Size: As indicated on drawings. E. Waterstops: PVC, complying with COE CRD-C 572. 1. Configuration: As indicated on drawings. 2. Size: As indicated on drawings. F. Reglets: Formed steel sheet, galvanized,with temporary filler to prevent concrete intrusion during placement. 1. Size: As indicated on drawings. G. Slab Contraction Joint Device: Preformed linear strip intended for pressing into wet concrete to provide straight route for shrinkage cracking. H. Slab Construction Joint Devices: Combination keyed joint form and screed, galvanized steel, with rectangular or round knockout holes for conduit or rebar to pass through joint form at 6 inches on center; ribbed steel stakes for setting. 1. Provide removable plastic cap strip that forms wedge-shaped joint for sealant installation. 2. Height: To suit slab thickness. 2.07 Curing Materials A. Evaporation Reducer: Liquid thin-film-forming compound that reduces rapid moisture loss caused by high temperature, low humidity, and high winds; intended for application immediately after concrete placement. B. Curing Compound, Naturally Dissipating: Clear,water-based, liquid membrane-forming compound; complying with ASTM C309. C. Curing and Anti-Spalling Compound: Boiled linseed oil compound. 1. Application: Use on roadway, bridge deck, parking deck, and ramps. D. Curing and Sealing Compound, Low Gloss: Liquid, membrane-forming, clear, non-yellowing acrylic; complying with ASTM C1315 Type 1 Class A. 1. Vehicle: Water-based. 2. Solids by Mass: 25 percent, minimum. 3. VOC Content: OTC compliant. E. Curing and Sealing Compound, High Gloss: Liquid, membrane-forming, clear, nonyellowing acrylic; complying with ASTM C1315 Type 1 Class A. 1. Vehicle: Solvent-based. 2. Solids by Mass: 25 percent, minimum. 3. VOC Content: Ozone Transport Commission (OTC) compliant. F. Moisture-Retaining Sheet: ASTM C171. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 03 30 00-6 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 1. Curing paper, regular. 2. Polyethylene film, white opaque, minimum nominal thickness of 4 mil, 0.004 inch. 3. White-burlap-polyethylene sheet, weighing not less than 3.8 ounces per square yard. G. Polyethylene Film: ASTM D2103,4 mil, 0.004 inch thick, clear. H. Water: Potable, not detrimental to concrete. 2.08 Concrete Mix Design A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI PRC-211.1 recommendations. 1. Replace as much Portland cement as possible with fly ash, ground granulated blast furnace slag, silica fume, or rice hull ash as is consistent with ACI recommendations. B. Proportioning Structural Lightweight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.2 recommendations. 1. Replace as much Portland cement as possible with fly ash, ground granulated blast furnace slag, silica fume, or rice hull ash as is consistent with ACI recommendations. C. Concrete Strength: Establish required average strength for each type of concrete on the basis of field experience or trial mixtures, as specified in ACI SPEC-301. 1. For trial mixtures method, employ independent testing agency acceptable to Engineer for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. D. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI PRC-211.1 and at rates recommended or required by manufacturer. E. Normal Weight Concrete: 1. Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C39/09M at 28 days: 3,000 pounds per square inch or as indicated on drawings. 2. Calcined Pozzolan Content: Maximum 10 percent of cementitious materials by weight. 3. Silica Fume Content: Maximum 5 percent of cementitious materials by weight. 4. Cement Content: Minimum 5 sacks per cubic yard. 5. Water-Cement Ratio: Maximum 59 percent by weight. 6. Total Air Content: 4 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM C173/C173M. 7. Maximum Slump: 4 inches. 8. Maximum Aggregate Size: 5/8 inch. 2.09 Mixing A. On Project Site: Mix in drum type batch mixer, complying with ASTM C685/C685M. Mix each batch not less than 1-1/2 minutes and not more than 5 minutes. B. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C94/C94M. C. Adding Water: If concrete arrives on-site with slump less than suitable for placement, do not add water that exceeds the maximum water-cement ratio or exceeds the maximum permissible slump. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 Examination A. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section. 3.02 Preparation A. Formwork: Comply with requirements of ACI SPEC-301. Design and fabricate forms to support all applied loads until concrete is cured and for easy removal without damage to concrete. B. Verify that forms are clean and free of rust before applying release agent. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 03 30 00-7 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents C. Coordinate placement of embedded items with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories. D. Where new concrete is to be bonded to previously placed concrete, prepare existing surface by cleaning and applying bonding agent in according to bonding agent manufacturer's instructions. 1. Use epoxy bonding system for bonding to damp surfaces, for structural load-bearing applications, and where curing under humid conditions is required. 2. Use latex bonding agent only for non-load-bearing applications. E. Where new concrete with integral waterproofing is to be bonded to previously placed concrete, prepare surfaces to be treated in accordance with waterproofing manufacturer's instructions. Saturate cold joint surface with clean water, and remove excess water before application of coat of waterproofing admixture slurry. Apply slurry coat uniformly with semi- stiff bristle brush at rate recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. F. In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, insert steel dowels and pack solid with non-shrink grout. 3.03 Installing Reinforcement and Other Embedded Items A. Fabricate and handle epoxy-coated reinforcing in accordance with ASTM D3963/D3963M. B. Comply with requirements of ACI SPEC-301. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, and accurately position, support, and secure in place to achieve not less than minimum concrete coverage required for protection. C. Install welded wire reinforcement in maximum possible lengths, and offset end laps in both directions. Splice laps with tie wire. D. Verify that anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not interfere with concrete placement. 3.04 Placing Concrete A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI PRC-304. B. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken. C. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, waterstops, embedded parts, and formed construction joint devices will not be disturbed during concrete placement. D. Place concrete continuously without construction (cold)joints wherever possible; where construction joints are necessary, before next placement prepare joint surface by removing laitance and exposing the sand and sound surface mortar, by sandblasting or high-pressure water jetting. E. Finish concert within the tolerances specified below. 3.05 Slab Jointing A. Locate joints as indicated in the geotechnical report unless otherwise shown on the drawings. B. Anchor joint fillers and devices to prevent movement during concrete placement. C. Saw Cut Contraction Joints: Saw cut joints before concrete begins to cool, within 4 to 12 hours after placing; use 3/16 inch thick blade and cut at least 1 inch deep but not less than one quarter(1/4) the depth of the slab. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 03 30 00-8 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents D. Construction Joints: Where not otherwise indicated, use metal combination screed and key form,with removable top section for joint sealant. E. Extend joint filler from bottom of slab to within 1/4 inch of finished slab surface. Conform to manufacturer's requirements for joint sealer finish. 3.06 Concrete Finishing A. Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing formwork. B. Unexposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in height. C. Exposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off and smooth fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in height. Provide finish as follows: 1. Smooth Rubbed Finish: Wet concrete and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive, not more than 24 hours after form removal. 2. Grout Cleaned Finish: Wet areas to be cleaned and apply grout mixture by brush or spray; scrub immediately to remove excess grout. After drying, rub vigorously with clean burlap, and keep moist for 36 hours. 3. Cork Floated Finish: Immediately after form removal, apply grout with trowel or firm rubber float; compress grout with low-speed grinder, and apply final texture with cork float. D. Concrete Slabs: Finish to requirements of ACI 302.113. E. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to drains as indicated on drawings. 3.07 Curing and Protection A. Comply with requirements of ACI PRC-308. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete. 1. Normal concrete: Not less than seven days. 2. High early strength concrete: Not less than four days. C. Formed Surfaces: Cure by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period. D. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms: 1. Final Curing: Begin after initial curing but before surface is dry. a. Moisture-Retaining Cover: Seal in place with waterproof tape or adhesive. b. Curing Compound: Apply in two coats at right angles, using application rate recommended by manufacturer. 3.08 Field Quality Control A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests. B. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm. C. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for review prior to commencement of concrete operations. D. Tests of concrete and concrete materials may be performed at any time to ensure compliance with specified requirements. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 03 30 00-9 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents E. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C39/C39M, for each test, mold and cure three concrete test cylinders. Obtain test samples for every 100 cubic yards or less of each class of concrete placed. F. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents. G. Perform one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken, following procedures of ASTM C143/C143M. 3.09 Defective Concrete A. Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to Engineer and Contractor within 24 hours of test. B. Defective Concrete: Concrete not complying with required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements. C. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Engineer. The cost of additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified. D. Do not patch, fill,touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of Engineer for each individual area. 3.10 Schedule-Concrete Types and Finishes A. Structural Walls: 3,000 psi 28 day concrete or as indicated on drawings. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 03 30 00-10 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete building frame members. B. Concrete for composite floor construction. C. Floors and slabs on grade. D. Concrete shear walls and foundation walls. E. Joint devices associated with concrete work. F. Miscellaneous concrete elements, including equipment pads, equipment pits, light pole bases, flagpole bases, thrust blocks, and manholes. G. Concrete curing. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 10 00- Concrete Forming and Accessories: Forms and accessories for formwork. B. Section 03 20 00- Concrete Reinforcing. C. Section 03 35 11 - Concrete Floor Finishes: Densifiers, hardeners, applied coatings, and polishing. D. Section 07 92 00-Joint Sealants: Products and installation for sealants and joint fillers for saw cut joints and isolation joints in slabs. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C595/C595M Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements-2021 Edition, July 15, 2021 B. ACI CODE-318- Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; 2019 (Reapproved 2022). C. ACI PRC-211.1 - Selecting Proportions for Normal-Density and High Density-Concrete- Guide; 2022. D. ACI PRC-302.1 - Guide to Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; 2015. E. ACI PRC-304 - Heavyweight Concrete: Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing; 2020. F. ACI PRC-305-Guide to Hot Weather Concreting; 2020. G. ACI PRC-306 -Guide to Cold Weather Concreting; 2016. H. ACI PRC-308 -Guide to External Curing of Concrete; 2016. I. ACI SPEC-301 - Specifications for Concrete Construction; 2020. J. ASTM Al85/A185M -Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete; 2007. K. ASTM A497/A497M -Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Deformed, for Concrete; 2007. L. ASTM C33/C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2018. M. ASTM C39/C39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens; 2021. N. ASTM C94/C94M -Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2022a. O. ASTM C109/C109M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. or[50 mm] Cube Specimens); 2021. P. ASTM C143/C143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete; 2020. Q. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2022. R. ASTM C260/C260M - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 2010a (Reapproved 2016). LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 03 30 00- 1 Cast-in-Place Concrete 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS S. ASTM C309- Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete; 2019. T. ASTM C494/C494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2019, with Editorial Revision (2022). U. ASTM C618- Standard Specification for Coal Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete; 2023. V. ASTM C685/C685M - Standard Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching and Continuous Mixing; 2017. W. ASTM C881/C881 M - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete; 2020a. X. ASTM C1059/C1059M - Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened Concrete; 2021. Y. ASTM C1107/C1107M - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink); 2020. Z. ASTM C1602/C1602M -Standard Specification for Mixing Water Used in the Production of Hydraulic Cement Concrete; 2018. AA. ASTM D994/D994M - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type); 2011 (Reapproved 2022). BB. ASTM D1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types); 2018. CC. ASTM D2103- Standard Specification for Polyethylene Film and Sheeting; 2015. DD. ASTM E1155- Standard Test Method for Determining FF Floor Flatness and FL Floor Levelness Numbers; 2020. EE. ASTM E1155M -Standard Test Method for Determining FF Floor Flatness and FL Floor Levelness Numbers (Metric); 2014. FF. ASTM E1745- Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs; 2017. GG. COE CRD-C 513 - Handbook for Concrete and Cement Corps of Engineers Specifications for Rubber Waterstops; 1974. HH. COE CRD-C 572 - Handbook for Concrete and Cement Corps of Engineers Specifications for Polyvinylchloride Waterstop; 1974. II. ICRI 310.2R-Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface Preparation for Sealers, Coatings, Polymer Overlays, and Concrete Repair; 2013. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components- Health Effects; 2022, with Errata. JJ. NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content; 2022. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Mix Design: Submit mix design for each type of concrete proposed. C. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on manufactured products showing compliance with specified requirements and installation instructions. 1. For curing compounds, provide data on method of removal in the event of incompatibility with floor covering adhesives. D. Mix Design: Submit proposed concrete mix design. 1. Indicate proposed mix design complies with requirements of ACI SPEC-301, Section 4- Concrete Mixtures. 2. Indicate proposed mix design complies with requirements of ACI CODE-318, Chapter 5 - Concrete Quality, Mixing and Placing. LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 03 30 00-2 Cast-in-Place Concrete 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS E. Test Reports: Submit report for each test or series of tests specified. F. Sustainable Design Submittal: If any fly ash, ground granulated blast furnace slag, silica fume, rice hull ash, or other waste material is used in mix designs to replace Portland cement, submit the total volume of concrete cast in place, mix design(s) used showing the quantity of portland cement replaced, reports showing successful cylinder testing, and temperature on day of pour if cold weather mix is used. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI SPEC-301 and ACI CODE-318. B. Follow recommendations of ACI PRC-305 when concreting during hot weather. C. Follow recommendations of ACI PRC-306 when concreting during cold weather. 1.06 MOCK-UPS A. Construct and erect mock-up panel for architectural concrete surfaces indicated to receive special treatment or finish as result of formwork. 1. Panel Size: Sufficient to illustrate full range of treatment. 2. Panel Size: 6 by 6 feet. 3. Number of Panels: Two. B. If requested by Architect/Structural Engineer of Record , cast concrete against mock-up panel. Obtain acceptance of resulting surface finish prior to erecting formwork. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMWORK A. Comply with requirements of Section 03 10 00. 2.02 REINFORCEMENT MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements of Section 03 20 00. 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C150, Type I - Normal Portland type. 1. Acquire cement for entire project from same source. B. Cement: ASTM C150, Type II - Moderate Portland type. 1. Acquire cement for entire project from same source. C. Cement: ASTM C150, Type III - High Early Strength Portland type. 1. Acquire cement for entire project from same source. D. Cement: ASTM C150, Type V- Sulfate Resistant Portland type. 1. Acquire cement for entire project from same source. E. Blended Cement: ASTM C595, Type IL Portland type. 1. Acquire cement for entire project from same source. F. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33/C33M. 1. Acquire aggregates for entire project from same source. G. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F. 1. Fly Ash may not be combined in mix with Type IL Cement. H. Water: ASTM C1602/C1602M; clean, potable, and not detrimental to concrete. LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 03 30 00-3 Cast-in-Place Concrete 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 2.04 ADMIXTURES A. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight of cement. B. High Range Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type G. C. High Range Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type F. D. Water Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type E. E. Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type D. F. Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type C. G. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type B. H. Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type A. I. Shrinkage Reducing Admixture: 1. ASTM C494/C494M, Type S. J. Waterproofing Admixture: Admixture formulated to reduce permeability to liquid water, with no adverse effect on concrete properties. 1. Potable Water Contact Approval: National Science Foundation (NSF)certification for use on structures holding potable water, based on testing in accordance with NSF 61 and NSF 372 2. Products: a. Aquafin, Inc: www.aquafin.net/#sle. b. Xypex Chemical Corporation; XYPEX Admix C-500: www.xypex.com/#sle. 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Underslab Vapor Barrier(Slab on Grade): 1. Materials a. Sheet Retarder: Polyolefin film, 15 mil thick minimum; able to maintain water vapor permeance of 0.01 perms tested in accordance with mandatory conditioning tests per ASTM E1745, Section 7.1 (7.1.1-7.1.5) , tensile strength conforming with ASTM E1745 Class A and ACI 302.1 R. 2. MANUFACTURERS / PRODUCTS a. Henry Company; Fortifiber Moistop Ultra: www.henry.com. b. Reef Industries /Vaporguard; www.reefindustries.com c. Stego Industries LLC/Stego Wrap Vapor Barrier; www.stegoindustries.com. (Basis of Design) d. Reef Griffolyn "15 mil green" by Reef Industries e. Substitutions: No substitutions. B. Non-Shrink Cementitious Grout: Premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents. 1. Minimum Compressive Strength at 48 Hours: 2,000 pounds per square inch. 2. Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 Days: 7,000 pounds per square inch. LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 03 30 00-4 Cast-in-Place Concrete 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3. Products containing aluminum powder are not permitted. 4. Flowable Products: a. Dayton Superior Corporation: www.daytonsuperior.com/#sle. b. Euclid Chemical Company; NS GROUT: www.euclidchemical.com/#sle. c. W. R. Meadows, Inc; Speed-E-Roc: www.wrmeadows.com/#sle. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 5. Low-Slump, Dry Pack Products: a. Euclid Chemical Company; DRY PACK GROUT: www.euclidchemical.com/#sle. b. Dayton Superior Corporation: www.daytonsuperior.com/#sle. c. W. R. Meadows, Inc; PAC-IT: www.wrmeadows.com/#sle. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.06 BONDING AND JOINTING PRODUCTS A. Latex Bonding Agent: Non-redispersable acrylic latex, complying with ASTM C1059/C1059M, Type II. 1. Products: a. Euclid Chemical Company; AKKRO-7T: www.euclidchemical.com/#sle. b. SpecChem, LLC; Strong Bond Acrylic Bonder: www.specchemllc.com/#sle. c. W. R. Meadows, Inc; ACRY-LOK-: www.wrmeadows.com/#sle. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Epoxy Bonding System: 1. Complying with ASTM C881/C881 M and of Type required for specific application. 2. Products: a. Euclid Chemical Company; DURAL FAST SET LV: www.euclidchemical.com/#sle. b. Dayton Superior Corporation: www.daytonsuperior.com/#sle. c. SpecChem, LLC; SpecPoxy 1000, SpecPoxy 2000, SpecPoxy 3000, or SpecPoxy 3000FS: www.specchemllc.com/#sle. d. W. R. Meadows, Inc; Rezi-Weld Gel Paste, Rezi-Weld Gel Paste State, Rezi-Weld 1000: www.wrmeadows.com/#sle. e. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. C. Waterproofing Admixture Slurry: Slurry coat of Portland cement, sand, and crystalline waterproofing additive, mixed with water in proportions recommended by manufacturer to achieve waterproofing at cold joints in concrete. 1. Products: LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 03 30 00-5 Cast-in-Place Concrete 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS a. Aquafin, Inc: www.aquafin.net/#sle. b. W. R. Meadows, Inc; ADI-CON CW Plus: www.wrmeadows.com/#sle. c. Xypex Chemical Corporation; XYPEX Concentrate: www.xypex.com/#sle. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. D. Waterstops: Rubber, complying with COE CRD-C 513. 1. All construction joints, pour breaks, etc. with soil on one side or other shall have a waterstop. All waterstops are not shown on drawings. a. Configuration: Ribbed with centerbulb b. Size: 6". c. Products: 1) Greenstreak Model 705. 2) Greenstreak Model 724 (for form saver). 3) Greestreak Model 698 (for base seal) 4) Greenstreak Model 667 (for retrofit systems) d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. E. Reglets: Formed steel sheet, galvanized, with temporary filler to prevent concrete intrusion during placement. 1. Size: As indicated on drawings. F. Joint Filler: Compressible asphalt mastic with felt facers, complying with ASTM D 994, thickness as indicated on drawings and full depth of slab less 1/2 inch. G. Slab Construction Joint Devices: Combination keyed joint form and screed, galvanized steel, with rectangular or round knockout holes for conduit or rebar to pass through joint form at 6 inches on center; ribbed steel stakes for setting. 2.07 CURING MATERIALS A. Evaporation Reducer: Liquid thin-film-forming compound that reduces rapid moisture loss caused by high temperature, low humidity, and high winds; intended for application immediately after concrete placement. 1. Products: a. Dayton Superior Corporation: www.daytonsuperior.com/#sle. b. Euclid Chemical Company ; www.euclidchemical.com/#sle. c. SpecChem, LLC; SpecFilm Concentrate or SpecFilm: www.specchemllc.com/#sle. d. W. R. Meadows, Inc ; Evapre or Evapre-RTU: www.wrmeadows.com/#sle. e. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Curing Compound, Naturally Dissipating: Clear, water-based, liquid membrane-forming compound; complying with ASTM C309. 1. Product dissipates within 4 to 6 weeks. 2. Products: LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 03 30 00-6 Cast-in-Place Concrete 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS a. Dayton Superior Corporation: www.daytonsuperior.com. b. Euclid Chemical Company; www.euclidchemical.com. c. SpecChem, LLC; SpecRez: www.specchemllc.com. d. W. R. Meadows, Inc; 1100-Clear: www.wrmeadows.com. e. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. C. Curing Compound, Non-dissipating: Liquid, membrane-forming, clear, non-yellowing acrylic; complying with ASTM C309. 1. Vehicle: Water-based. 2. Gloss: Low. 3. Solids by Mass: 15 percent, minimum. 4. VOC Content: OTC compliant. 5. Products: a. Dayton Superior Corporation: www.daytonsuperior.com/#sle. b. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc, a subsidiary of Laticrete International, Inc; Dress & Seal: www.Imcc.com/#sle. c. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc, a subsidiary of Laticrete International, Inc; Dress & Seal WB: www.Imcc.com/#sle. D. Moisture-Retaining Sheet: ASTM C171. 1. Curing paper, regular. 2. Polyethylene film, white opaque, minimum nominal thickness of 4 mil, 0.004 inch. 3. White-burlap-polyethylene sheet, weighing not less than 3.8 ounces per square yard. E. Polyethylene Film: ASTM D2103, 4 mil, 0.004 inch thick, clear. F. Water: Potable, not detrimental to concrete. 2.08 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI PRC-211.1 recommendations. B. Concrete Strength: Establish required average strength for each type of concrete on the basis of field experience or trial mixtures, as specified in ACI SPEC-301. 1. For trial mixtures method, employ independent testing agency acceptable to Architect/Structural Engineer of Record for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. C. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI PRC-211.1 and at rates recommended or required by manufacturer. D. Normal Weight Concrete: 1. Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 39/C 39M at 28 days: 3000 psi. a. Fly Ash Content: Maximum 20 percent of cementitious materials by weight. 1) Fly Ash is not allowed in Type IL Cement mix designs. LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 03 30 00-7 Cast-in-Place Concrete 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS b. Cement Content: Minimum 470 lb per cubic yard. c. Maximum Slump: 5 inches.+/- 1/2" 1) Slump shall be increased to 8 inches for drilled footings by means of chemical admixtures. d. Maximum Aggregate Size: 1) SLAB AND BEAMS ON FILL (a) Unless detailed otherwise on plans maximum aggregate size shall be as follows: (1) Beams and slabs, 1". 2. Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C39/C39M at 28 days: 4,000 psi. a. Fly Ash Content: Maximum 20 percent of cementitious materials by weight. 1) Fly Ash is not allowed in Type IL Cement mix designs. b. Cement Content: Minimum 517 pounds per cubic yard. c. Water-Cement Ratio: Maximum 40 percent by weight. d. Maximum Slump: 5 inches.+/- 1/2" 1) Slump shall be increased to 8 inches for drilled footings by means of chemical admixtures. e. Maximum Aggregate Size: 1) SLAB AND BEAMS ON FILL (a) Unless detailed otherwise on plans maximum aggregate size shall be as follows: (1) Tilt-Wall Panels, 3/4". E. Control Low Strength Material (Flowable Fill): 1. Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 39/C 39M at 28 days: 50 to 100 psi. 2. Cement Content: Minimum 100 lb per cubic yard. 3. Fly Ash Content: Minimum 300 lb per cubic yard. 4. Sand Content: Minimum 2,600 lb per cubic yard. 5. Added Water Minimum 500 lb per cubic yard. 2.09 MIXING A. On Project Site: Mix in drum type batch mixer, complying with ASTM C685/C685M. Mix each batch not less than 1-1/2 minutes and not more than 5 minutes. B. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C94/C94M. C. Adding Water: If concrete arrives on-site with slump less than suitable for placement, do not add water that exceeds the maximum water-cement ratio or exceeds the maximum permissible slump. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section. LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 03 30 00-8 Cast-in-Place Concrete 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Verify condition of substrate and adjacent materials under provisions of Section 01 40 00- Quality Requirements. 3.02 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS A. Provide in monolithic concrete framing so that not more than 400 cubic yards is placed in one day and no side dimension of the section being concreted is greater than 150 feet. Larger areas shall be approved by the Engineer. B. Locate so as not to impair the strength of the structure, and coordinate the location and details with the Architect/Engineer. Location shall generally be near the middle of the spans of slabs and beams with wood or steel-formed soffits. When soffits are formed with cardboard cartons, locate construction joint on centerline of pier. C. Provisions shall be made for transfer of shear and other forces through the joint. Generally this shall consists of forming horizontal keyways at mid-depth, 1-1/2" deep X 1/3 of beam or slab depth and allowing all reinforcing to continue through the joint. Add extra reinforcing if so directed by Engineer. D. Follow procedure for"Bonding new concrete to old", as described herein. E. Provide waterstops at all construction joints with soil or water on one side or other. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Formwork: Comply with requirements of ACI SPEC-301. Design and fabricate forms to support all applied loads until concrete is cured and for easy removal without damage to concrete. B. Verify that forms are clean and free of rust before applying release agent. C. Coordinate placement of embedded items with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories. D. Prepare existing concrete surfaces to be repaired according to ICRI 310.2R. E. Where new concrete is to be bonded to previously placed concrete, prepare existing surface by cleaning and applying bonding agent in according to bonding agent manufacturer's instructions. 1. Use epoxy bonding system for bonding to damp surfaces, for structural load-bearing applications, and where curing under humid conditions is required. 2. Use latex bonding agent only for non-load-bearing applications. F. Where new concrete with integral waterproofing is to be bonded to previously placed concrete, prepare surfaces to be treated in accordance with waterproofing manufacturer's instructions. Saturate cold joint surface with clean water, and remove excess water before application of coat of waterproofing admixture slurry. Apply slurry coat uniformly with semi-stiff bristle brush at rate recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. G. In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, insert steel dowels and pack solid with non-shrink grout. 3.04 INSTALLING VAPOR RETARDER A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM E1643. B. Install vapor retarder with long dimension in direction of pour. C. Extend vapor retarder to the perimeter of the slab. If practicable, terminate it at approximately the level of finish grade or slightly below, otherwise (a)at a point acceptable to the structural engineer or(b)where obstructed by impediments, such as dowels, waterstops, or any other site conditions requiring early termination of the vapor retarder. At the point of termination, seal vapor retarder to the slab itself using Stego Crete Claw tape, per manufacturer's instructions. D. Overlap vapor retarder 6 inches where jointing is required. Seal with manufacturer's tape. E. Seal all penetrations (including pipes) per manufacturer's instructions. F. Penetrations through the vapor barrier are prohibited except reinforcing steel and permanent G. Repair damaged areas in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 03 30 00-9 Cast-in-Place Concrete 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS H. Contact the manufacturer's representative to coordinate a review of the vapor retarder installation either by digital review or in person. 3.05 INSTALLING REINFORCEMENT AND OTHER EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Comply with requirements of ACI SPEC-301. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, and accurately position, support, and secure in place to achieve not less than minimum concrete coverage required for protection. B. Install welded wire reinforcement in maximum possible lengths, and offset end laps in both directions. Splice laps with tie wire. C. Verify that anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not interfere with concrete placement. D. Provide waterstop material at all joints below grade. 3.06 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI PRC-304. B. Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI PRC-302.1. C. Notify Architect/Structural Engineer of Record not less than 24 hours prior to commencement of placement operations. D. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, waterstops, embedded parts, and formed construction joint devices will not be disturbed during concrete placement. E. Finish floors level and flat, unless otherwise indicated, within the tolerances specified below. F. Carbon Monoxide and Carbon Dioxide Exposure: General Contractor shall be responsible for monitoring interior concrete floor exposure to excessive exhaust gases containing carbon dioxide (CO2) or carbon monoxide (CO) during delivery, placement and finishing of concrete and until concrete floor is protected by specified curing method. 1. CO2 levels shall not exceed 4,500 parts per million. CO levels shall not exceed 15 parts per million at concrete surface within 5 feet of any source of exhaust gases. a. Levels shall be monitored utilizing appropriate meter from company similar to CEA Instruments, Inc., 16 Chestnut Street, Emerson, NJ 07630; Phone (201-967-5660); 2. Unvented combustion heaters shall not be in operation during concrete placement. 3. Limit combustion engine equipment inside building during concrete to only that equipment necessary to place and finish concrete. 4. Only two concrete trucks shall be in building at any given time and under no circumstance shall there be any earth moving equipment, dump trucks, grading equipment, or any other motorized equipment in operation until after the interior concrete floor is placed and protected by specified curing method.email: 3.07 SLAB JOINTING A. Locate joints as indicated on drawings or as submitted and approved by Architect/Engineer. B. Provide waterstop material per paragraph above at all joints below grade and joints shown to have waterstop. C. Anchor joint fillers and devices to prevent movement during concrete placement. D. Isolation Joints: Use preformed joint filler with removable top section for joint sealant, total height equal to thickness of slab, set flush with top of slab. E. Load Transfer Construction and Contraction Joints: Install load transfer devices as indicated; saw cut joint at surface as indicated for contraction joints. F. Saw Cut Contraction Joints: Saw cut joints before concrete begins to cool, within 4 to 12 hours after placing; use 3/16 inch thick blade and cut at least 1 inch deep but not less than one LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 03 30 00- 10 Cast-in-Place Concrete 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS quarter(1/4)the depth of the slab. G. Construction Joints: Where not otherwise indicated, use metal combination screed and key form, with removable top section for joint sealant. H. Repair underslab vapor retarder damaged during placement of concrete reinforcing. Repair with vapor retarder material; lap over damaged areas minimum 6 inches and seal watertight. I. Separate slabs on grade from vertical surfaces with joint filler. J. Place joint filler in floor slab pattern placement sequence. Set top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete. K. Extend joint filler from bottom of slab to within 1/2 inch of finished slab surface. Conform to Section 07 90 05 for finish joint sealer requirements. L. Install joint devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. M. Install construction joint devices in coordination with floor slab pattern placement sequence. Set top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete. N. Apply sealants in joint devices in accordance with Section 07 90 05. O. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken. P. Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control, and construction joints. O. Do not interrupt successive placement; do not permit cold joints to occur. 3.08 FLOOR FLATNESS AND LEVELNESS A. Flatness and levelness tolerances for floors shall conform to the requirements set forth in ACI 117, "Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials", particularly section 4.5.6 and 4.5.7. Either of the following specifications is acceptable. 1. Face Floor Profile Numbers (F-Numbers): a. CONVENTIONAL, BULL-FLOATED; Flatness Ff= 15 Level A = 13 b. CONVENTIONAL STRAIGHTEDGED; Flatness Ff= 20 Level FI = 15 c. FLAT; Flatness Ff= 30 Level FI = 20 d. VERY FLAT; Flatness Ff= 50 Level FI = 30 2. 10-ft. Straightedge Method: a. CONVENTIONAL, BULL-FLOATED; 1/2 in. b. CONVENTIONAL, STRAIGHTEDGED; 5/16 in. C. FLAT; 3/16 in. d. VERY FLAT; 1/8 in. B. Unless noted otherwise, slab surfaces shall conform to the following criteria: 1. Offices, classrooms, corridors, etc: FLAT. 2. Slabs (permanent or temporary)to be used as casting beds for job cast tilt walls. VERY FLAT 3. Warehouses, storerooms, equipment rooms: STRAIGHTEDGED. 4. Sidewalks, plazas, pavement: BULL-FLOATED. LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 03 30 00- 11 Cast-in-Place Concrete 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 5. Gymnasium Floors: VERY FLAT C. Measure F(F) Floor Flatness and F(L) Floor Levelness in accordance with ASTM E1155 (ASTM El 155M), within 48 hours after slab installation; report both composite overall values and local values for each measured section. D. Correct the slab surface if composite overall value is less than specified and if local value is less than two-thirds of specified value or less than F(F) 13/F(L) 10. 3.09 SEPARATE FLOOR TOPPINGS A. Prior to placing floor topping, roughen substrate concrete surface and remove deleterious material. Broom and vacuum clean. B. Place required dividers, edge strips, reinforcing, and other items to be cast in. C. Apply bonding agent to substrate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Place concrete floor toppings to required lines and levels. 1. Place topping in checkerboard panels not to exceed 20 feet in either direction. 3.10 CONCRETE FINISHING A. Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing formwork. B. Unexposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in height. C. Exposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off and smooth fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in height. Provide finish as follows: 1. Smooth Rubbed Finish: Wet concrete and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive, not more than 24 hours after form removal. D. Concrete Slabs: Finish to requirements of ACI PRC-302.1 and as follows: 1. Surfaces to Receive Thick Floor Coverings: "Wood float" as described in ACI PRC-302.1; thick floor coverings include quarry tile, ceramic tile, and Portland cement terrazzo with full bed setting system. 2. Surfaces to Receive Thin Floor Coverings: "Steel trowel" as described in ACI PRC-302.1; thin floor coverings include carpeting, resilient flooring, seamless flooring, resinous matrix terrazzo, thin set quarry tile, and thin set ceramic tile. 3. Other Surfaces to Be Left Exposed: Trowel as described in ACI PRC-302.1, minimizing burnish marks and other appearance defects. a. Chemical Hardener: See Section 03 35 11. E. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to drains at 1:100 nominal. 3.11 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with requirements of ACI PRC-308. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete. 1. Normal concrete: Not less than seven days. 2. High early strength concrete: Not less than four days. C. Formed Surfaces: Cure by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period. D. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms: LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 03 30 00- 12 Cast-in-Place Concrete 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Initial Curing: Start as soon as free water has disappeared and before surface is dry. Keep continuously moist for not less than three days by water ponding, water-saturated sand, water-fog spray, or saturated burlap. a. Spraying: Spray water over floor slab areas and maintain wet. or b. Saturated Burlap: Saturate burlap-polyethylene and place burlap-side down over floor slab areas, lapping ends and sides; maintain in place. 2. Final Curing: Begin after initial curing but before surface is dry. a. Moisture-Retaining Sheet: Lap strips not less than 3 inches and seal with waterproof tape or adhesive; secure at edges. or b. Curing Compound: Apply in two coats at right angles, using application rate recommended by manufacturer. 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01 40 00- Quality Requirements. B. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm. C. Concrete testing shall be at point of discharge. If concrete it pumped concrete shall be tested at the end of the discharge hose. If deposited directly from truck test may be made at truck. D. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for review prior to commencement of concrete operations. E. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M. For each test, mold and cure four concrete test cylinders. Obtain test samples for every 80 cu yd or less of each class of concrete placed each day with a minimum of 50 cu yd between each test. F. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents. G. Perform one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken, following procedures of ASTM C143/C143M. Slump test shall be at point of discharge. 3.13 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to Arch itect/Stru ctu ra I Engineer of Record and Contractor within 24 hours of test. B. Defective Concrete: Concrete not complying with required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements. C. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect/Structural Engineer of Record . The cost of additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified. D. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of Architect/Structural Engineer of Record for each individual area. 3.14 PROTECTION A. Do not permit traffic over unprotected concrete floor surface until fully cured. LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 03 30 00- 13 Cast-in-Place Concrete 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.15 BELOW STRENGTH CONCRETE A. If the 28-day cylinder strengths fall below the specified strength, the concrete represented by such test cylinders shall be considered unacceptable and subject to removal. Consideration will be given to the acceptance of such concrete if it can be demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the cylinder tests do not accurately represent the strength of the concrete in place, or that the structure is fully capable of carrying the loads for which it was designed. This data may be obtained by a series of non-destructive tests and core tests in accordance with ASTM C-42 of the concrete in place, and/or by load testing in accordance with applicable codes. All costs in connection with this additional testing and/or removal and replacement of defective concrete shall be paid by the Contractor. END OF SECTION LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 03 30 00- 14 Cast-in-Place Concrete 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 03 30 00.10 CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH BACKFILL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as shown, specified and required to provide for the proportioning, mixing, transportation and placement of Controlled Low Strength Backfill at the specified locations and dimensions shown on the plans, or as directed by the Engineer. B. The Controlled Low Strength Backfill shall be composed of portland cement, fly ash, natural fine aggregate and water, proportioned and mixed as herein specified. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 312200—Grading. B. Section 312316—Excavation. C. Section 31 2316.13—Trenching. D. Section 31 2316.14—Trench Excavation Protection. E. Section 312323 - Fill. 1.03 QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing 1. Test materials for compliance with technical requirements of the Specifications shall be performed by a testing laboratory. 2. Testing Services Include: a. Test the Contractor's proposed materials in the laboratory and/or field for compliance with the Specifications. b. Report test results to the Engineer and the Contractor. 1.04 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Cement: By the cubic yard. 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Comply with applicable provisions and recommendation of the following, except as otherwise shown or specified. 1. ASTM C 150, Portland Cement. 2. ASTM C 618, Fly Ash. 3. ASTM C 494,Water Reducing Admixtures. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Certificates: Submit certificates of compliance with referenced standards. B. The testing laboratory shall submit copies of the reports directly to the Engineer, with copy to the Contractor. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Cement: Furnish hydraulic cement that meets the requirements of TxDOT's DMS-4600, "Hydraulic Cement," TxDOT's Hydraulic Cement Quality Monitoring Program (HCQMP), and RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 03 30 00.10-1 CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH BACKFILL 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents ASTM C-150 Type I Portland Cement. Sources not on the HCQMP or other sources to be used in combination with an approved source will require approval before use. B. Fly Ash: Furnish fly ash conforming to TxDOT DMS-4610, "Fly Ash". C. Chemical Admixtures: Furnish chemical admixtures conforming to TxDOT DMS-4640, "Chemical Admixtures for Concrete." D. Fine Aggregate: Provide fine aggregate that will stay in suspension in the mortar to the extent required for proper flow and that meets the gradation requirements of Table 1.Test fine aggregate gradation in accordance with TxDOT standard laboratory test procedure Tex-401-A. Plasticity Index (PI) must not exceed 6 when tested in accordance with TxDOT standard laboratory test procedure Tex-106-A. TABLE 1-GRADATION FOR FINE AGGREGATE SIEVE SIZE PERCENT BY WEIGHT PASSING SIEVES 3/8 inch 100 No. 8 80-100 No. 16 60-100 No. 30 45-80 No. 50 12-40 No. 100 1.5-25 No. 200 0-5 E. Admixtures 1. The use of any material added to the Controlled Low Strength Backfill shall be reviewed by the Engineer. 2. Water-reducing, set-controlling admixtures shall meet the requirements of ASTM C494, Type A,water-reducing, or Type D,water reducing and retarding. Water reducing admixtures shall be added to the mixer in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. F. Water 1. Water used in mixing shall be as clean and free of oil, salt, acid, alkali, sugar, vegetable, or other substances injurious to the finished product as possible. 2. Water will be tested and shall meet the suggested requirements of AASHTO T26. 3. Water known to be of potable quality may be used without testing. PART 3 EXECUTIONS 3.01 MIXING AND PROPORTIONING A. The Contractor or Controlled Low Strength Backfill supplier shall submit for acceptance test data from prior experience if available. B. The supplier also must provide 5 copies of the recommended mix proportions and trial batch test results prepared by an independent testing laboratory three weeks prior to use. C. Submitted data should include product performance curves indicating 1, 7 and 28 day unconfined compressive strengths. D. Proportions must be selected to produce the specified unconfined compressive strength and workability designed below. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 03 30 00.10-2 CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH BACKFILL 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents E. Proportions shall be selected on the basis of unconfined compressive strength tests of specimens continuously moist cured,for testing at the age or ages specified below. 3.02 PERFORMANCE A. Strengths: for trench backfill, the Controlled Low Strength Backfill shall have an unconfined compressive strength of 21 psi minimum, no more than 24 hours after watering. The 28 day unconfined compressive strength shall not exceed 500 psi. B. Workability: The Controlled Low Strength Backfill shall be flowable and shall have an initial slump greater than 9" and a minimum slump of 4-%" after one hour. C. When a sample of Controlled Low Strength Backfill is poured out on the ground,the aggregate and mortar should stay well mixed with no separation. The Engineer may reject the mix if excessive separation is found. 3.03 PLACING A. For pipe trench backfill, provide bulkheads at units of fill placement sufficient to confine backfill to area designated in the plans. Bulkheads may be structural or earthen. B. During placement, station workers in a safe location where they can view inside of pipe to check for leakage. When any leakage into pipe is discovered, stop placement and repair leak before resuming placement. 3.04 TESTING A. A minimum of three test cylinders per 1000 cubic yards of Controlled Low Strength Backfill shall be drawn and tested for 7 and 28 day unconfined compressive strengths by the independent testing laboratory engaged by the Owner. 3.05 COVERING A. Controlled Low Strength Backfill placed in pipe trenches may be covered when it adequately supports the weight of construction equipment, no less than 24 hours after completion of placement. B. Other Controlled Low Strength Backfill should be allowed to cure for a minimum of 72 hours before covering. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 03 30 00.10-3 CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH BACKFILL 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 03 35 11 SEALED PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE FINISH PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Special sealed concrete finish for concrete flooring. B. Protection. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 30 00- Cast-In-Place Concrete: Substrate and finish troweling. B. Section 07 92 00 -Joint Sealers: Control joint filler. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM D2047- Standard Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish-Coated Flooring Surfaces as Measured by the James Machine; 2017. B. ASTM C39/C39M -Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens; 2023. C. ASTM D3359- Standard Test Methods for Rating Adhesion by Tape Test; 2023. D. ASTM C 779 -Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Horizontal Concrete Surfaces. E. ASTM G23-Standard for Operating Light-Exposure Apparatus (Carbon-Arc Type)With and Without Water for Exposure 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years documented experience and approved by manufacturer. C. Supervisor: Trained by product manufacturer. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Procedures: Submittal Procedures for submittal requirements. B. Product Data: Provide data on materials, describing sealant properties. 1.06 MOCK-UP A. Construct field sample in accordance with Section 01 40 00. B. Construct 10 X 10 foot field sample of floor finish. Locate where directed by Architect/Engineer. Illustrate finished final appearance. C. Accepted field samples sets a standard of quality for the remainder of the project, and may remain as a portion of the completed work. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's sealed packaging, including application instructions. 1.08 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent materials and surfaces from contamination during staining and sealing. B. Remove protection at completion of staining and sealing. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 03 35 11 - 1 Sealed Portland Cement Concrete Finish Re-Bid Construction Documents 1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain light level equivalent to a minimum 200 W light source at 8 feet above the floor surface over each 20 foot square area of floor being finished. B. Do not finish floors until interior heating system is operational. C. Maintain ambient temperature of 50 degrees F minimum. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS/PRODUCTS A. Curecrete Distribution Inc. /Ashford Formula. B. Euclid Chemical Company/ Diamond Hard Liquid Densifier and Sealer. C. Substitutions: In conformance with Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Liquid Densifier and Sealer: water-based chemically reactive penetrating sealer and hardner. 1. Abrasion/Wear Resistance, ASTM C 779: Minimum 32% improvement over untreated samples. 2. Surface Adhesion: At least a 22% increase in adhesion for epoxy when tested in accordance with ASTM D3359. 3. Hardening: An increase of at least 38% over untreated samples; ASTM C39/C39M. 4. Coefficient of Friction, ASTM D2047: Dry: 0.86 minimum; Wet: 0.69 minimum; ASTM C 1028. 5. Light Exposure Degradation: No evidence of adverse effects on treated samples when tested in accordance with ASTM G23. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PROTECTION A. If concrete surface is not retreated immediately after placement and finishing of concrete, to the greatest extent possible protect concrete surfaces scheduled for sealed concrete finish. 1. Protect concrete surfaces from mechanical and chemical injury during the construction process. Provide protective cover over areas to be sealed to prevent mechanical and chemical injury. 2. Protect surface from paints, oils, greases, tars, bleaches and other forms of chemical contamination. B. When possible, route movements of heavy equipment or materials around areas to sealed. Provide smooth rollers for moving heavy items. Do not drag. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove surface contaminants from areas to be sealed. Prepare concrete surface in accordance with concrete sealer manufacturer's instructions. B. Allow floors to dry thoroughly. Clean surface of all chemical residue. Vacuum or sweep floor thoroughly to remove all dust and dirt. 3.03 SEALING CONCRETE FLOORS A. Seal concrete floors scheduled to be finished with a "Hardener and Sealer." Apply and install in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Do not omit any steps or procedures. B. Apply one uniform sealer coat free of lap marks, puddles and runs. Apply at a rate of 200-250 sq. ft. per gallon in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Scrub into surface and flush with water, vacuum or squeegee to remove excess material at completion of treatment. 3.04 CONTROL/EXPANSION JOINTS A. Install epoxy filler in control and/or expansion joints as specified in Section 07 92 00. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 03 35 11 -2 Sealed Portland Cement Concrete Finish Re-Bid Construction Documents 3.05 PROTECTION A. Immediately after placement of sealer, protect floors from damage from subsequent construction operations. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 03 35 11 -3 Sealed Portland Cement Concrete Finish Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 03 47 13 TILT-UP CONCRETE PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Tilt-up, site cast concrete wall panels, integrally insulated, load bearing, erected from forms to final position. B. Supports, devices, load bearing supports, and attachments. C. Grouting under panels. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 10 00- Concrete Forming and Accessories: Formwork requirements. B. Section 03 20 00- Concrete Reinforcing: Reinforcing steel and welding requirements. C. Section 03 30 00- Cast-in-Place Concrete: Requirements for concrete for tilt-up panels. D. Section 03 30 00- Cast-in-Place Concrete: Requirements for casting slab. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 301 -Specifications for Concrete Construction; 2020. B. ACI 304R- Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; 2000 (Reapproved 2009). C. ACI 305R- Guide to Hot Weather Concreting; 2020. D. ACI 306R- Guide to Cold Weather Concreting; 2016. E. ACI 318- Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete; 2019 (Reapproved 2022). F. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2019. G. ASTM A123/A123M -Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2017. H. ASTM Al53/A153M -Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip)on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2016a. I. ASTM Al84/A184M -Standard Specification for Welded Deformed Steel Bar Mats for Concrete Reinforcement; 2019. J. ASTM C94/C94M -Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2022a. K. ASTM C309- Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete; 2019. L. ASTM C1107/C1107M - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink); 2020. M. AWS D1.1/D1.1 M - Structural Welding Code- Steel; 2020, with Errata (2022). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout, tilt-up unit locations, configuration, unit identification marks, reinforcement, integral insulation, insulated panel system connectors, connection details, support items, location of lifting devices, dimensions, openings, and relationship to adjacent components. C. Proposed Mix Design: Submit proposed mix design for each tilt-up unit type before starting work, complying with Section 01 40 00- Quality Requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with ACI 318. B. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in site-cast tilt-up concrete construction with minimum 5 years of documented experience. LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 03 47 13- 1 Tilt-Up Concrete 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handling Tilt-up Units: Lift units to position, consistent with their shape and design. Lift and support only from support points. B. Blocking and Lateral Support During Erection: Use materials that are clean and non-staining. Provide temporary lateral support to prevent bowing, warping, or cracking. C. Protect units from staining, chipping, or spalling. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Adverse Weather: Do not construct formwork, place reinforcing steel or concrete, or erect panels during adverse weather unless measures acceptable to Architect/Structural Engineer of Record are taken to prevent damage. B. Cold Weather: Comply with provisions of ACI 306R for freezing or near-freezing conditions. 1. Provide adequate equipment for heating and protecting concrete materials. 2. Do not use concrete materials, reinforcing steel, forms, fillers, ground surface, or other materials that are frozen, frost-covered or that contain ice. C. Hot Weather: Comply with provisions of ACI 305R for high temperature conditions. 1. During periods of dry winds, low humidity, and other conditions that cause rapid drying, protect fresh concrete with an evaporation retardant or fine fog spray of water applied immediately after screeding and bull floating. 2. Maintain protection until final finishing and curing compounds are applied. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TILT-UP PANEL UNITS A. Tilt-Up Panel Units: 1. Concrete: Minimum 4,000 psi, 28 day strength, comply with ACI 301. 2. Design Loads: Static loads, anticipated dynamic loading, including positive and negative wind loads, thermal movement loads, and erection forces as defined by applicable code. 3. Calculate structural properties of units in accordance with ACI 318. 4. Accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members, and clearances of intended openings. 5. Provide connections that accommodate building movement and thermal movement and adjust to misalignment of structure without unit distortion or damage. 6. Provide lifting hardware and lifting system appropriate to panel size and configuration. 2.02 PANEL MATERIALS A. Forms: Provide formwork in accordance with Section 03 10 00. B. Forms: Design to withstand stresses resulting from concrete casting process and to maintain panels within 1/4 inch deflection limit; construct from steel or wood, rigidly braced and with precise corners. 1. Include blockouts as required to provide openings detailed on drawings, designed to limit deflection during pouring to maximum of 1/8 inch. 2. Provide smooth and clean forming surfaces. 3. Panels may be stacked for ease of casting. LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 03 47 13-2 Tilt-Up Concrete 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 4. For forms attachment to slab, use non-intrusive glues or adhesives whenever possible, in lieu of nails and bolts. C. Concrete: Provide concrete materials in accordance with Section 03 30 00. D. Reinforcing Steel: As specified in Section 03 20 00. E. Curing Compound: Liquid membrane-forming compound complying with ASTM C309, Type I and ID, Class B. F. Non-Shrink Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M; premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents. G. Reveals: For reveals or relief in panel face, provide materials of adequate strength to withstand construction traffic and loads without damage. 2.03 SUPPORT AND LIFTING DEVICES A. Lifting Hardware, Connecting, and Support Devices: ASTM A36/A36M steel; hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153/A153M. 1. For support of reinforcing steel, plastic-tipped steel or all plastic supports are also acceptable. B. All-Plastic Supports: Provide units of adequate strength, with surface contact of not more than 0.10 sq. inches per contact point, and colored to blend with concrete. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that building structure, anchors, devices, and openings are ready to receive work of this section. B. Verify that casting slab is cured and ready for work of this section. Fill cracks, saw cuts,joints, or defects that would adversely affect appearance of tilt-up panels. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate site cast tilt-up operations with work of other sections to expedite the Work and avoid omissions and delays. B. Apply bondbreaker to casting slab in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. Provide for erection procedures and induced loads during erection, and provide for temporary bracing that will remain in place until roof diaphragm has been completely installed and connected. 3.03 FORMING PANELS A. General: Maintain environmental records and quality control program during production of tilt-up units. Make records available upon request. B. Lay out panels in manner that will minimize joints in panel faces. Coordinate installation of inserts and anchorages. C. Maintain consistent quality during construction of forms. D. Fabricate connecting devices, plates, angles, items fit to steel framing members, inserts, bolts, and accessories. Fabricate to permit initial placement and final attachment. E. Embed reinforcing steel, anchors, inserts plates, angles, and other cast-in items as indicated. F. Locate hoisting devices to permit removal after erection. G. Work concrete thoroughly around reinforcement, around embedded items, and into corners of the forms. Consolidate concrete in accordance with ACI recommendations. H. Cold joints are not permitted in any individual panel. 3.04 PLACING AND CURING CONCRETE A. Mix and deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M, Option A, and in compliance with recommendations of ACI 304R. LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 03 47 13-3 Tilt-Up Concrete 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS B. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessively hot or cold temperatures. C. Cure units to develop concrete quality, and to minimize appearance blemishes such as non- uniformity, staining, or surface cracking. D. Apply liquid membrane curing compound in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.05 FINISHING CONCRETE A. Finish exposed surfaces of panels as indicated on drawings. B. Grade A-Architectural Finish: 1. Panel surfaces must be free of voids, holes, pockets, and other surface deformations greater than 1/8 inch and must not telegraph imperfections from the casting surface, including floor joints. 2. Cracks in excess of 1/32 inch width are not acceptable. 3. Reveals may not deviate from their correct position by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet. 4. Repairs must not be apparent from a minimum distance of 10 feet. C. Interior Finish: Floated. 3.06 SITE FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Unless otherwise approved by Architect/Structural Engineer of Record , provide panels complying with casting tolerances as specified below. B. Panel Height and Width: 1. Up to 20 feet: 1/4 inch maximum. 2. 20 to 30 feet: 3/8 inch maximum. 3. Each additional 10 ft increment: 1/8 inch maximum. C. Panel Thickness: 3/16 inch maximum average variation through any vertical or horizontal cross section. D. Skew of Panel or Opening: Measured as difference in length of the two diagonals: 1. Per 6 feet of diagonal dimension: 1/8 inch maximum. 2. Maximum total difference: 1/2 inch. E. Panel Openings: 1. Size: 1/4 inch maximum. 2. Location of Centerline: 1/4 inch maximum. F. Location and Placement of Embedded Items: 1. Inserts, Bolts, and Pipe Sleeves: 3/8 inch. 2. Lifting and Bracing Inserts: As specified by manufacturer. 3. Weld Plate Embedments: 1 inch for location; 1/4 inch for tipping and flushness. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency, as specified in Section 01 40 00- Quality Requirements, will perform concrete mix testing. LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 03 47 13-4 Tilt-Up Concrete 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.08 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Defective Concrete: If test results indicate concrete does not comply with specified requirements, Contractor with the agreement of Architect/Structural Engineer of Record must adjust mix to provide acceptable concrete on subsequent work. For concrete not meeting specified requirements, Owner may require core specimens to be taken and tested, at Contractor's expense. Concrete cores that test below specified requirements will be deemed to be defective. B. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect/Structural Engineer of Record and will be paid for by Contractor. The cost of additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified. C. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace damaged or defective concrete except upon express direction of Architect/Structural Engineer of Record for each individual area. 3.09 ERECTION A. Before beginning erection operations, verify that site conditions are appropriate for the work. Mark elements to comply with designations indicated on approved shop drawings. B. Employ erection equipment that will prevent damage to existing construction, permanent floor slabs, and tilt-up panels. Protect panels to prevent staining, warping, or cracking. C. Set panels in assigned positions. Erect members level and plumb within allowable tolerances. Grout space under panels for full bearing, or provide additional support until subsequent grouting operations are completed. D. Align and maintain uniform horizontal and vertical joints, as erection progresses. E. When members require adjustment beyond design or tolerance criteria, discontinue affected work; advise Architect/Structural Engineer of Record . F. Brace panels not attached to building frame at time of erection, using a bracing system designed to resist wind and other applicable loads until all structural connections have been made. Provide minimum of two braces per panel and maintain connections daily. G. Patch holes, cut-off anchors, surface defects, and damaged corners to match panel with epoxy/cement paste adhesive. 3.10 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Unless otherwise approved by Architect/Structural Engineer of Record , install site-cast tilt-up panels within erection tolerances as specified below. B. Replace panels that cannot be installed within specified tolerances. C. Joint Width Variation: 1. Up to 20 feet tall panels: 1/4 inch maximum. 2. Each additional 10 ft increment: 1/8 inch maximum. 3. Do not increase or decrease joint width more than 50 percent from specified joint width in any case, as measured between panels at exterior face. D. Joint Taper: 1. Up to 20 feet tall panels: 1/4 inch maximum. 2. Each additional 10 ft increment: 1/8 inch maximum. 3. Maximum for entire length of panel: 3/8 inch width difference for non-parallel panel edges. E. Panel Alignment: 1. Horizontal and Vertical Joints: 1/4 inch maximum. 2. Offset in Adjacent Exterior Panel Faces: 1/4 inch. LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 03 47 13-5 Tilt-Up Concrete 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.11 PROTECTION A. Protect units from damage by subsequent construction activities. END OF SECTION LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 03 47 13-6 Tilt-Up Concrete 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 05 05 19 POST-INSTALLED CONCRETE AND MASONRY ANCHORS PART 1 —GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Cast-in and drilled in anchors for concrete. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 3 Concrete Sections. 2. Divison 4 Masonry Sections. 3. Division 5 Metals Sections. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Submittal Procedures Section. 1. Samples: Representative length and diameters of each type anchor shown on the Drawings. 2. Quality Assurance Submittals: a. Test Reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. 3. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 4. Installer Qualifications & Procedures: Submit installer qualifications as stated in Section 1.03.13. Submit a letter of procedure stating method of drilling, the product proposed for use, the complete installation procedure, manufacturer training date, and a list of the personnel to be trained on anchor installation. 5. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: a. Record Documents: Project record documents for installed materials in accordance with Division 1 Closeout Submittals Section. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Drilled-in anchors shall be installed by a [contractor] [installer] with at least three years of experience performing similar installations. 2. Installer Training: Conduct a thorough training with the manufacturer or the manufacturer's representative for the [contractor] [installer] on the project. Training to consist of a review of the complete installation process for drilled-in anchors, to include but not limited to: a. hole drilling procedure b. hole preparation & cleaning technique c. adhesive injection technique & dispenser training / maintenance d. rebar dowel preparation and installation LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 05 05 19- 1 POST-INSTALLED CONCRETE AND MASONRY ANCHORS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Division 1 Section Product Storage and Handling Requirements. 1. Store anchors in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Bolts and Studs: ASTM A307; ASTM A449 where "high strength" is indicated on the Drawings. 2. Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts: ASTM A563. 3. Carbon Steel Washers: ASTM F436. 4. Carbon Steel Threaded Rod: ASTM A36; or ASTM A193 Grade 137; or ISO 898 Class 5.8. 5. Wedge Anchors: ASTM A510; or ASTM A108. 6. Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs: ASTM F593. 7. Stainless Steel Nuts: ASTM F594. 8. Zinc Plating: ASTM B633. 9. Hot-Dip Galvanizing: ASTM A153. 10. Reinforcing Dowels: ASTM A615 2.02 CAST-IN-PLACE BOLTS A. Anchors, Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Bolts and studs, nuts, and washers shall conform to ASTM A307, Grade A, and ASTM A449, ASTM A563, and ASTM F436, as applicable. Hot-dip galvanized bolts and studs including associated nuts and washers in accordance with ASTM A153. 2.03 DRILLED-IN ANCHORS A. Wedge Anchors: Wedge type, torque-controlled, with impact section to prevent thread damage complete with required nuts and washers. Provide anchors with length identification markings. Type and size as indicated on Drawings. 1. Where anchor manufacturer is not indicated, subject to compliance with requirements and acceptance by the Engineer, provide the following: a. Hilti Kwik Bolt 3. b. Hilti Kwik Bolt TZ (carbon steel and AISI Type 304 Stainless Steel). c. STRONG-BOLT 2 WEDGE ANCHOR (ICC-ES ESR 3037) BY SIMPSON STRONG- TIE CO., INC 2. Interior Use: Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, provide carbon steel anchors manufactured from materials conforming to ISO 898 Part 1, with zinc plating equivalent to ASTM B633, Type III Fe/Zn 5 (5 m min.). 3. Exterior Use: As indicated on the Drawings, provide stainless steel anchors. Stainless steel anchors shall be manufactured from materials conforming to ISO 3506 Part 1 and LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 05 05 19-2 POST-INSTALLED CONCRETE AND MASONRY ANCHORS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS having corrosion resistance equivalent to AISI [Type 304] [and] [Type 316] stainless steel. Stainless steel anchors shall be provided with stainless steel nuts and washers of matching alloy group and minimum proof stress equal to or greater than the specified minimum full-size tensile strength of the externally threaded fastener. All nuts shall conform to ISO 3506 Part 2 unless otherwise specified. Avoid installing stainless steel anchors in contact with galvanically dissimilar metals. B. Screw Anchors: screw type. Pre-drilling of the hole requires a standard ANSI drill bit with the same diameter as the anchor and installing the anchor will be done with an impact wrench. Provide anchors with a diameter and anchor length marking on the head. Type and size as indicated on Drawings 1. Interior Use: Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, provide carbon steel anchors with zinc plating equivalent to DIN EN ISO 4042 (8mm min.). 2. Exterior Use: As indicated on the Drawings, provide stainless steel anchors. Stainless steel anchors shall be manufactured from materials conforming to ISO 3506 Part 1 and having corrosion resistance equivalent to AISI [Type 304] [and] [Type 316] stainless steel. Stainless steel anchors shall be provided with stainless steel nuts and washers of matching alloy group and minimum proof stress equal to or greater than the specified minimum full-size tensile strength of the externally threaded fastener. All nuts shall conform to ISO 3506 Part 2 unless otherwise specified. Avoid installing stainless steel anchors in contact with galvanically dissimilar metals. 3. Where anchor manufacturer is not indicated, subject to compliance with requirements and acceptance by the Engineer, provide the following: a. Hilti Kwik-HUS-EZ. b. Hilti Kwik-HUS EZ-I. c. Hilti Kwik-HUS. d. TITEN HD SCREW ANCHORS BY SIMPSON STRONG-TIE CO., INC. (ICC REPORT NO. 1067) C. Heavy Duty Undercut Anchors: Bearing-type. Installed anchor shall have a minimum tension bearing area in the concrete, measured as the horizontal projection of the bearing surface, not less than two times the net tensile area of the anchor bolt. The installed anchor shall exhibit a form fit between the bearing elements and the undercut in the concrete. Type and size as indicated on Drawings. 1. Where anchor manufacturer is not indicated, subject to compliance with requirements and acceptance by the Engineer, provide the following: a. Hilti HDA. 2. Interior Use: Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, provide carbon steel anchors manufactured from materials conforming to ISO 898 Part 1, with zinc plating equivalent to ASTM B633, Type III Fe/Zn 5 (5 m min.). 3. Exterior Use: As indicated on the Drawings, provide sherardized or stainless steel anchors. Sherardized anchors shall be manufactured from materials conforming to ISO 898 Part 1 and having corrosion resistance equivalent to ASTM A153 with sherardized dry diffusion zinc coating (50 m min.). Stainless steel anchors shall be manufactured from materials conforming to ISO 3506 Part 1 and having corrosion resistance equivalent to LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 05 05 19-3 POST-INSTALLED CONCRETE AND MASONRY ANCHORS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AISI [Type 316] stainless steel. Stainless steel anchors shall be provided with stainless steel nuts and washers of matching alloy group and minimum proof stress equal to or greater than the specified minimum full-size tensile strength of the externally threaded fastener.All nuts shall conform to ISO 3506 Part 2 unless otherwise specified. Avoid installing stainless steel anchors in contact with galvanically dissimilar metals. D. Cartridge Injection Adhesive Anchors: Threaded steel rod, inserts or reinforcing dowels, complete with nuts, washers, polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive injection system, and manufacturer's installation instructions. Type and size as indicated on Drawings. 1. Where anchor manufacturer is not indicated, subject to compliance with requirements and acceptance by the Engineer, provide the following: a. Threaded rods with adhesive using Hollow Drill Bit System for anchorage to concrete or masonry. b. SIMPSON ACRYLIC-TIE ADHESIVE ANCHORING SYSTEM BY SIMPSON STRONG-TIE CO., INC. (ICBO REPORT NO. 5791), c. SIMPSON SET EPDXY ANCHORING SYSTEM BY SIMPSON STRONG-TIE CO., INC. (ICBO REPORT NO. 5279), d. HILTI HIT HY-70 (MASONRY ONLY) e. HILTI HIT-RE 500 f. HILTI HIT-HY 200 (ICC-ES REPORT NO.: ESR.3187) g. SIMPSON ET EPDXY ANCHORING SYSTEM BY SIMPSON STRONG-TIE CO., INC. (ICBO REPORT NO. 4945 2. Interior Use: Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, provide carbon steel threaded rods conforming to ASTM A36, ASTM A 193 Type B7 or ISO 898 Class 5.8 with zinc plating in accordance with ASTM B633, Type III Fe/Zn 5 (SC1) [or carbon steel rods conforming to ASTM A510 with chemical composition of AISI 1038]. 3. Exterior Use: As indicated on the Drawings, provide stainless steel anchors. Stainless steel anchors shall be AISI [Type 304] [and] [Type 316] stainless steel provided with stainless steel nuts and washers of matching alloy group and minimum proof stress equal to or greater than the specified minimum full-size tensile strength of the externally threaded fastener. All nuts shall conform to ASTM F594 unless otherwise specified. Avoid installing stainless steel anchors in contact with galvanically dissimilar metals. 4. Reinforcing dowels shall be A615 Grade 60. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Cast-In-Place Bolts: Use templates to locate bolts accurately and securely in formwork. 1. Drilled-In Anchors: a. Drill holes with rotary impact hammer drills using [carbide-tipped bits], [hollow drill bit system], [and][or] [core drills using diamond core bits]. Drill bits shall be of diameters as specified by the anchor manufacturer. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, all holes shall be drilled perpendicular to the concrete surface. LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 05 05 19-4 POST-INSTALLED CONCRETE AND MASONRY ANCHORS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1) Cored Holes: Where anchors are permitted to be installed in cored holes, use core bits with matched tolerances as specified by the manufacturer. Properly clean cored hole per manufacturer's instructions. 2) Embedded Items: Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Exercise care in coring or drilling to avoid damaging existing reinforcing or embedded items. Notify the Engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Take precautions as necessary to avoid damaging prestressing tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines. 3) Base Material Strength: Unless otherwise specified, do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength. b. Perform anchor installation in accordance with manufacturer instructions. c. Wedge Anchors, Heavy-Duty Sleeve Anchors, and Undercut Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in part to be fastened. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench. Following attainment of 10% of the specified torque, 100% of the specified torque shall be reached within 7 or fewer complete turns of the nut. If the specified torque is not achieved within the required number of turns, the anchor shall be removed and replaced unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. d. Cartridge Injection Adhesive Anchors: Clean all holes per manufacturer instructions to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to installation of adhesive. Inject adhesive into holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive. Follow manufacturer recommendations to ensure proper mixing of adhesive components. Sufficient adhesive shall be injected in the hole to ensure that the annular gap is filled to the surface. Remove excess adhesive from the surface. Shim anchors with suitable device to center the anchor in the hole. Do not disturb or load anchors before manufacturer specified cure time has elapsed. e. Capsule Anchors: Perform drilling and setting operations in accordance with manufacturer instructions. Clean all holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to installation of adhesive. Remove water from drilled holes in such a manner as to achieve a surface dry condition. Capsule anchors shall be installed with equipment conforming to manufacturer recommendations. Do not disturb or load anchors before manufacturer specified cure time has elapsed. f. Observe manufacturer recommendations with respect to installation temperatures for cartridge injection adhesive anchors and capsule anchors. 3.02 REPAIR OF DEFECTIVE WORK A. Remove and replace misplaced or malfunctioning anchors. Fill empty anchor holes and patch failed anchor locations with high-strength non-shrink, nonmetallic grout. Anchors that fail to meet proof load or installation torque requirements shall be regarded as malfunctioning. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: 10% of each type and size of drilled-in anchor shall be proof loaded by the independent testing laboratory. Adhesive anchors and capsule anchors shall not be torque tested unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. If any of the tested anchors fail to achieve the specified torque or proof load within the limits as defined on the Drawings, all anchors of the same diameter and type as the failed anchor shall be tested, unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer. LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 05 05 19-5 POST-INSTALLED CONCRETE AND MASONRY ANCHORS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Tension testing should be performed in accordance with ASTM E488. 2. Torque shall be applied with a calibrated torque wrench. 3. Proof loads shall be applied with a calibrated hydraulic ram. Displacement of adhesive and capsule anchors at proof load shall not exceed D/10, where D is the nominal anchor diameter. 4. Minimum anchor embedments, proof loads and torques shall be as shown on the Drawings. END OF SECTION LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 05 05 19-6 POST-INSTALLED CONCRETE AND MASONRY ANCHORS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Structural steel framing members. B. Base plates, shear stud connectors and expansion joint plates. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 05 21 00-Steel Joist Framing. B. Section 05 31 00-Steel Decking: Support framing for small openings in deck. C. Section 05 50 00- Metal Fabrications: Steel fabrications affecting structural steel work. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AISC (MAN) -Steel Construction Manual; 2017. B. AISC 303 -Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges; 2016. C. AISC S348- Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts; 2004. D. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2019. E. ASTM A108-Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-Finished; 2018. F. ASTM A514/A514M -Standard Specification for High-Yield-Strength, Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Plate, Suitable for Welding; 2022. G. ASTM A992/A992M - Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes; 2022. H. AWS A2.4 -Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; 2020. I. AWS D1.1/D1.1 M - Structural Welding Code- Steel; 2020, with Errata (2022). J. IAS AC172-Accreditation Criteria for Fabricator Inspection Programs for Structural Steel AC172; 2019. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, locations of structural members, openings, attachments, and fasteners. 2. Connections not detailed. 3. Indicate cambers and loads. 4. Indicate welded connections with AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. C. Manufacturer's Mill Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC (MAN) "Steel Construction Manual." B. Structural steel members designated as architecturally-exposed structural steel (AESS)to also comply with Section 05 12 13. C. Fabricator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years of documented documented experience. D. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified steel fabricator that is accredited by the AISC 1. As an alternate the fabricator shall fabricate all steel under the review of a special inspector at the cost of the fabricator. LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 05 12 00- 1 Structural Steel Framing 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.06 ERECTOR: COMPANY SPECIALIZING IN PERFORMING THE WORK OF THIS SECTION WITH MINIMUM 5 YEARS OF DOCUMENTED DOCUMENTED EXPERIENCE. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Steel Angles and Plates: ASTM A36/A36M. B. Steel W Shapes and Tees: ASTM A992/A992M. C. Rolled Steel Structural Shapes: ASTM A992/A992M. D. Steel Plate: ASTM A514/A514M. E. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1 M; type required for materials being welded. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Shop fabricate to greatest extent possible. B. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds. Grind exposed welds smooth. C. Fabricate connections for bolt, nut, and washer connectors. D. Develop required camber for members. 2.03 FINISH A. Shop prime structural steel members. Do not prime surfaces that will be fireproofed, field welded, in contact with concrete, or high strength bolted. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION A. Erect structural steel in compliance with AISC 303. B. Allow for erection loads and provide sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure in safe condition, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. C. Field weld components and shear studs indicated on shop drawings. D. Use carbon steel bolts only for temporary bracing during construction, unless otherwise specifically permitted on drawings. Install high-strength bolts in accordance with AISC "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts". Bolts in connections not within the slip critical category nor subject to tension loads shall be installed in properly aligned holes and need only be tightened to the snug tight condition. The snug tight condition is defined as the tightness that existis when all plies in a joint are in firm contact. This may be attained by a few impacts of an impact wrench or the full effort of a man using an ordinary spud wrench. Slip critical connections will be identified on the drawings. E. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect/Structural Engineer of Record . F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. 3.02 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01 40 00- Quality Requirements. END OF SECTION LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 05 12 00-2 Structural Steel Framing 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 05 12 50 ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This Section includes requirements regarding the appearance and surface preparation of Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel (AESS). 1. Refer to Division 5, Section "Structural Steel'for all other requirements regarding steelwork not included in this section. 2. This section applies to any members noted on Architectural (and Structural) drawings as AESS (and in the areas defined as AESS below). 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05 12 00-Structural Steel Framing: B. Section 05 50 00- Metal Fabrications: C. Section 05300 - Metal Deck: D. Division 9 Section " Special Coatings"for finish coat requirements and coordination with primer and surface preparation specified in this section. E. Division 9 Section "Painting"for finish coat requirements and coordination with primer and surface preparation specified in this section. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item below according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data for each type of product specified. C. Shop Drawings detailing fabrication of AESS components. 1. Provide erection drawings clearly indicating which members are considered as AESS members. 2. Include details that clearly identify all of the requirements listed in sections 2.3 "Fabrication" and 3.3 "Erection"of this specification. Provide connections for exposed AESS consistent with concepts shown on the architectural or structural drawings. 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length and type of each weld. Identify grinding, finish and profile of welds as defined herein. 4. Indicate type, size, finish and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify high-strength bolted slip-critical, direct-tensioned shear/bearing connections. (Indicate to which direction bolt heads should be oriented.) 5. Clearly, indicate which surfaces or edges are exposed and what class of surface preparation is being used. 6. Indicate special tolerances and erection requirements as noted on the drawings or defined herein. D. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance"Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects names and address, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. 1. (For each project, submit photographs showing detail of installed AESS.) LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 05 12 50- 1 Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: In addition to those qualifications listed in Division 5 Section "Structural Steel," engage a firm experienced in fabricating AESS similar to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to fabricate AESS without delaying the Work. B. Erector Qualifications: In addition to those qualifications listed in Division 5 Section "Structural Steel," engage an experienced Erector who has completed AESS work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicted for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. C. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. AISC Code of Standard Practice, latest edition, Section 10 as amended herein. D. Mock-ups: At least four weeks prior to fabricating AESS, the contractor shall construct mock- ups to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials and execution. A mock-up for each of the following elements shall be constructed: 1. Build mock-ups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for final unit of Work. 2. Locate mock-ups on-site or in the fabricator's shop as directed by Architect. Mock-ups shall be full-size pieces unless the Architect approves smaller models. 3. Notify the Architect one-week in advance of the dates and times when mock-ups will be available for review. 4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects regarding each element listed under the fabrication heading below. 5. Mock-up will have finished surface (including surface preparation and paint system). 6. Obtain Architect's approval of mock-ups before starting fabrication of final units. 7. Retain and maintain mock-ups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard forjudging the completed work. a. Approved mock-ups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial completion may become part of the completed work. 1.05 REFERENCES A. SSPC-Paint 15 -Steel Joist Shop Paint; Society for Protective Coatings; 1999 (Ed. 2004). B. AISC (MAN) -Steel Construction Manual; American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.; 2005. C. AWS D1.1/D1.1 M - Structural Welding Code-Steel; American Welding Society; 2006. D. ASTM A780 - Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings. 1.06 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING A. Convene one week before starting work of this section. B. Pre-installation Conference: The General Contractor shall schedule and conduct conference at the project site to comply with requirements of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings."As a minimum, the meeting shall include the General Contractor, Fabricator, Erector, the finish- painting subcontractor, and the Architect. Coordinate requirements for shipping, special handling, attachment of safety cables and temporary erection bracing; touch up painting and other requirements for AESS. LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 05 12 50-2 Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver AESS to project site in such quantities and at such times to ensure continuity of installation. B. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground by using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. Use special care in handling to prevent twisting or warping of AESS members. C. Erect pre-painted finish pieces using padded slings or other methods such that they are not damaged. Provide padding as required to protect while rigging and aligning member's frames. Weld tabs for temporary bracing and safety cabling only at points concealed from view in the completed structure or where approved by the Architect during the pre-installation meeting. Methods of removing temporary erection devices and finishing the AESS members shall be approved by the Architect prior to erection. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Where AESS is indicated to fit against walls and other construction, verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the work. 1.09 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchors for AESS members that connect to the work of other trades. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchors, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to the project site in time for installation. (Anchorage concepts shall be as indicated on drawings and approved on final shop drawings.) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: 1. Meet requirements Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" as amended below. 2. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Per Section 05120 heavy hex heads and nuts (Provide rounded bolt heads with twist bolts): Provide standard carbon steel (Cadmium plated) (Mechanically galvanized)finish. B. PRIMERS 1. Compatibility: The General Contractor shall submit all components/procedures of the paint system for AESS as a single coordinated submittal. As a minimum, identify required surface preparation, primer, and intermediate coat(if applicable)and finish coat. All of the items shall be coordinated with the finish coat specified in Division 9. 2. Primer: Fabricator's standard alkyd red oxide, rust inhibiting primer. 3. Primer: Fast curing, universal modified alkyd, rust inhibiting shop coat with good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion. Primer shall comply with all federal standards for VOC, lead and chromate levels. 4. Primer: Acrylic water-soluble shop coat with good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion. Primer shall comply with all federal standards for VOC, lead and chromate levels. 5. Primer: Fast-curing two-part epoxy. Primer shall comply with all federal standards for VOC, lead and chromate levels. LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 05 12 50-3 Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 6. Primer: Organic, epoxy/zinc-rich, meeting class B surface requirements for slip-critical connections. Primer shall comply with all federal standards for VOC, lead and chromate levels. 7. Primer: Inorganic zinc-rich meeting class B surface requirements for slip-critical connections. Primer shall comply with all federal standards for VOC, lead and chromate levels. 8. Galvanizing Repair Paint; High-zinc-dust-content paint for galvanizing welds and repair- painting galvanized steel, with dry-film coating not less than 90-percent zinc dust by weight. C. FABRICATION 1. Fabricate and assemble AESS in the shop to the greatest extent possible. Locate field joints in AESS assemblies at concealed locations or as approved by the Architect. Detail AESS assemblies to minimize field handling and expedite erection. 2. Fabricate AESS with exposed surfaces smooth, square and of surface quality consistent with the approved mock-up. Use special care in handling and shipping of AESS both before and after shop painting. 3. In addition to special care used to handle and fabricate AESS, employ the following fabrication techniques. 4. a. Fabrication Tolerance: Fabricate steel to one half the normal tolerance as specified in the Code of Standard Practice Section 10. b. Welds ground smooth: Fabricator shall grind welds of AESS smooth. For groove welds, the weld shall be made flush to the surfaces each side and be within +1/16"/- 0" of plate thickness. c. Contouring and blending of welds: Where fillet welds are indicated to be ground- contoured, or blended, oversize welds as required and grind to provide a smooth transition and to match profile on approved mock-up. d. Continuous Welds: Where welding is noted on the drawings, provide continuous welds of a uniform size and profile. e. Minimize Weld Show Through: At locations where welding on the far side of an exposed connection occurs, grind distortion and marking of the steel to a smooth profile with adjacent material. f. Coping and Blocking Tolerance: Maintain a uniform gap of 1/8" & 1/32"at all copes and blocks. g. Joint Gap Tolerance: Maintain a uniform gap of 1/8" & 1/32". h. Piece Marks Hidden: Fabricate such that piece marks are fully hidden in the final structure or made with such media to permit full removal after erection. i. Mill Mark Removal: Fabricator shall deliver steel with no mill marks (stenciled, stamped, raised, etc) in exposed locations. Mill marks shall be omitted by cutting of mill material to appropriate lengths where possible. Where not possible, the fabricator can fill and /or grind to a surface finish consistent with the approved mock-up. LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 05 12 50-4 Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS j. Grinding of sheared edges: Fabricator shall grind all edges of sheared, punched or flame-cut steel to match approved mock-up. k. Rolled Members: Member specified to be rolled to a final curved shape shall be fully shaped in the shop and tied during shipping to prevent stress relieving. Distortion of the web or stem and of outstanding flanges or legs of angles shall be visibly acceptable to the Architect from a distance of 20' under any lighting condition determined by the Architect. Tolerances for the vertical and horizontal walls of rectangular HSS members after rolling shall be the specified dimension & 'h". I. Seal weld open ends of round and rectangular hollow structural section with 3/8" closure plates. Provide continuous, sealed welds at angle to gusset-plate connections and similar locations where AESS is exposed to weather. 2.02 SHOP CONNECTIONS A. Bolted Connections: Make in accordance with Section 05120. Provide bolt type, finish as noted herein and align bolt heads as indicated on the approved shop erection drawings. B. Welded Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 and Section 05120. Appearance and quality of welds shall be consistent with the mock-up. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain alignment of members without warp exceeding the tolerance of this section. 2.03 SHOP PRIMING A. Shop-prime steel surfaces, except the following: 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2". 2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections, if primer does not meet the specified AISC slip coefficient. B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to SSPC Specifications as follows: C. 1. SSPC-SP 1 "Solvent Cleaning" 2. SSPC-SP 2 "Hand Tool Cleaning." (This level of surface preparation will not be adequate for most paint systems for AESS construction.) 3. SSPC-SP 3 "Power Tool Cleansing" (This level of surface prep is the minimum for most AESS projects. It may be acceptable for alkyd primers and acrylic or alkyd finish coats, particularly in interior applications.) 4. SSPC-SP 6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning." (This level of surface prep adds significantly to the total cost of the steel. It is required for epoxy primer s to allow adequate bonding to the steel. Recommended for locations where a rust inhibitive primer will be used in an exterior application. It is also required where polyurethane finish coats will be used over the primer.) 5. Coordinate the required blast profile with the approved paint submittal prior to beginning surface preparation. D. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's instructions to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 05 12 50-5 Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 2. Apply two coats of shop primer to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection. 2.04 GALVANIZING A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to AESS 1. Indicated for galvanizing according to ASTM A 123. Fabricate such that all connections of assemblies are made in the field with bolted connections. Provide galvanized finish or members and assemblies within the range of color and surface textures presented in the mock-ups. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. The erector shall check all AESS members upon delivery for twist, kinks, gouges 1. or other imperfections which might result in rejection of the appearance of the member. Coordinate remedial action with fabricator prior to erecting steel. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide connections for temporary shoring, bracing and supports only where noted on the approved shop drawings. Temporary connections not shown shall be made at locations not exposed to view in the final structure or as approved by the Architect. Handle, lift and align pieces using padded slings and/or other protection required to maintain the appearance of the AESS through the process of erection. 3.03 ERECTION A. Set AESS accurately in locations and to elevations indicated, and according to AISC specifications referenced in this Section. B. In addition to the special care used to handle and erect AESS, employ the following erection techniques: 1. AESS erection tolerances: Erection tolerances shall meet the requirements of standard frame tolerances for structural steel per Chapter 7 of the AISC Code of Standard Practice. C. Field welding: Weld profile, quality, and finish shall be consistent with mock-ups approved prior to fabrication. D. Splice members only where indicated. E. Obtain permission for any torch cutting or field fabrication from the Architect. Finish sections thermally cut during erection to a surface appearance consistent with the mock up. F. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. Replace connection plates that are misaligned where holes cannot be aligned with acceptable final appearance. 3.04 FIELD CONNECTIONS A. Bolted Connections: Install bolts of the specified type and finish in accordance with Division 5 section "Structural Steel." B. Welded Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures, and appearance. Refer to Division 5 section "Structural Steel"for other requirements. 1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without warp. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for AESS will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. 2. Obtain Architect's approval for appearance of welds in repaired or field modified work. LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 05 12 50-6 Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3. Provide continuous all around, sealed welds at angle to gusset-plate connections, tube to tube, and similar locations where connection will allow moisture to get between members and where AESS is exposed to weather or visible to view. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Structural requirements: The Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field inspections and tests and to prepare test reports. Refer to Division 5 section "Structural Steel"for detailed bolt and weld testing requirements. B. AESS acceptance: The Architect shall observe the AESS steel in place and determine acceptability based on the mock-up. The Testing Agency shall have no responsibility for enforcing the requirements of this section. 3.06 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touch-up painting: Cleaning and Touch-up painting for field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint shall be completed to blend with the adjacent surfaces of AESS. Such touch up work shall be done in accordance with manufacturer's instructions as specified in Division 9, Section "Painting." B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780. 1. Repair Materials for Galvanized Surfaces Exposed to View: ASTM A780, zinc based solder, color matched to material being repaired. END OF SECTION LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 05 12 50-7 Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 05 21 00 STEEL JOIST FRAMING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Open web steel joists, with bridging, attached seats and anchors. B. Loose bearing members, such as plates or angles, and anchor bolts for site placement. C. Supplementary framing for floor and roof openings greater than 18 inches. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 05 12 00-Structural Steel Framing: Superstructure framing. B. Section 05 31 00-Steel Decking: Support framing for openings less than 18 inches in decking. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AISC S348- Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts; 2004. B. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2019. C. ASTM A108-Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-Finished; 2018. D. ASTM A123/A123M -Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2017. E. ASTM A307-Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength; 2021. F. AWS D1.1/D1.1 M - Structural Welding Code- Steel; 2020, with Errata (2022). G. SJI Technical Digest No. 9- Handling and Erection of Steel Joists and Joist Girders; 2008. H. SSPC-Paint 15 -Steel Joist Shop Primer/Metal Building Primer; 2004. I. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; 1982 (Ed. 2004). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate standard designations,joist coding, configurations, sizes, spacings, cambers, locations of joists,joist leg extensions, bridging, connections, and attachments. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years documented experience. B. Erector Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Transport, handle, store, and protect products to SJI requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Steel Joists: 1. Canam Group Inc: www.canam-steeljoists.ws 2. Nucor-Vulcraft Group: www.vulcraft.com/#sle. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Open Web Joists: SJI Type K Joists: 1. Provide bottom chord extensions as indicated. 2. End bearing of 2-1/2 inches on steel supports. LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 0521 00- 1 Steel Joist Framing 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3. Finish: Shop primed. 4. End bearing of 2-1/2 inches on steel supports. B. Anchor Bolts, Nuts and Washers: ASTM A307 hot-dip galvanized per ASTM Al53/A153M Class C. C. Structural Steel For Supplementary Framing and Joist Leg Extensions: ASTM A 36/A 36M. D. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1 M; type required for materials being welded. E. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.03 FINISH A. Shop prime joists as specified. 1. Do not prime surfaces that will be fireproofed. B. Prepare surfaces to be finished in accordance with SSPC-SP 2. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work. 3.02 ERECTION A. Erect joists with correct bearing on supports. B. Allow for erection loads. Provide sufficient temporary bracing to maintain framing safe, plumb, and in true alignment. C. Coordinate the placement of anchors for securing loose bearing members furnished as part of the work of this section. D. After joist alignment and installation of framing, field weld joist seats to steel bearing surfaces. E. Install supplementary framing for floor and roof openings greater than 18 inches. F. Do not permit erection of decking until joists are braced, bridged, and secured or until completion of erection and installation of permanent bridging and bracing. G. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of joist manufacturer. H. After erection, prime welds, damaged shop primer, damaged galvanizing, and surfaces not shop primed , except surfaces specified not to be primed. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch. END OF SECTION LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 0521 00-2 Steel Joist Framing 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 05 31 00 STEEL DECKING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Composite floor deck. B. Metal form deck. C. Supplementary framing for openings up to and including 18 inches. D. Bearing plates and angles. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 20 00- Concrete Reinforcing. B. Section 03 30 00- Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete topping over metal deck. C. Section 05 12 00-Structural Steel Framing: Support framing for openings larger than 18 inches and shear stud connectors. D. Section 05 21 00-Steel Joist Framing: Support framing for openings larger than 18 inches and shear stud connectors. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2019. B. ASTM A653/A653M -Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)or Zinc- Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2022. C. AWS D1.1/D1.1 M - Structural Welding Code- Steel; 2020, with Errata (2022). D. AWS D1.3/D1.3M - Structural Welding Code- Sheet Steel; 2018. E. SDI (DM)- Publication No.30, Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, and Roof Decks; 2007. F. SSPC-Paint 15 -Steel Joist Shop Primer/Metal Building Primer; 2004. G. SSPC-Paint 20 -Zinc-Rich Coating (Type I - Inorganic, and Type II - Organic); 2019. H. SSPC-Paint 25 -Zinc Oxide, Alkyd, Linseed Oil Primer for Use Over Hand Cleaned Steel, Type I and Type II; Society for Protective Coatings; 1997 (Ed. 2004). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittals procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate deck plan, support locations, projections, openings, reinforcement, pertinent details, and accessories. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum 5 years of experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Steel Deck: 1. Nucor-Vulcraft Group: www.vulcraft.com/#sle. 2. Wheeling Corrugating Co: www.wheelingcorrugating.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.02 STEEL DECK A. 1 1/2" Roof Deck(1.513): Non-composite type, steel sheet. LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 0531 00- 1 Steel Decking 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS) Grade 33/230, with G90/Z275 galvanized coating. 2. Structural Properties: a. Span Design: Double. 3. Minimum Metal Thickness, Excluding Finish: 20 gage. 4. Nominal Height: 1-1/2 inch. 5. Profile: Fluted; SDI WR; 1.513. 6. Formed Sheet Width: 36 inch. 7. Side Joints: Lapped, welded. 8. End Joints: Lapped, welded. 9. Fasten deck to steel support members at ends and intermediate supports with 36/4 pattern. Where deck is continuously supported weld 12 inches on center. a. Welding: Use fusion welds, 3/4" dia puddle welds. 10. Provide 1 -# 10 TEK screws minimum per side lap. B. Metal Form Deck(0.6C): Corrugated sheet steel, with provision for ventilation of concrete: 1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Structural Steel (SS) Grade 33/230, with G90/Z275 galvanized coating. 2. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 26 gauge. 3. Nominal Height: 9/16 inch. 4. Profile: Non-Composite Form Deck; 0.6C. 5. Formed Sheet Width: 30 inch. 6. Side Joints: Lapped mechanically fastened. 7. End Joints: Lapped, welded. 8. Fasten deck to steel support members at ends and intermediate supports with 30/4 pattern. Where deck is continuously supported weld 12 inches on center. a. Welding: Use fusion welds through weld washers, 5/8" dia puddle welds. 2.03 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Bearing Plates and Angles: ASTM A36/A36M steel unfinished. B. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1 M. C. Fasteners: Galvanized hardened steel, self tapping. D. Weld Washers: Mild steel, uncoated, 3/4 inch outside diameter, 1/8 inch thick. E. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. F. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 0531 00-2 Steel Decking 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS G. Acoustical Insulation: Glass fiber type, minimum 1.1 Ib/cu ft density; profiled to suit deck. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Erect metal deck in accordance with SDI Design Manual and manufacturer's instructions. Align and level. B. On concrete and masonry surfaces provide minimum 4 inch bearing. C. On steel supports provide minimum 1-1/2 inch bearing. D. At cellular/plated deck level and align deck within 1/8 inch horizontally and vertically. Butt ends, allow for maximum 1/8 inch gap. Install sheet steel covers over gaps wider than 1/8 inch. Tape and seal joints watertight. E. At mechanically fastened male/female side laps fasten at 24 inches on center maximum. F. At welded male/female side laps weld at 18 inches on center maximum. G. Weld deck in accordance with AWS D1.3/D1.3M. H. At deck openings less than 6 inches in size, provide additional sheet of deck lapped 24" each side of hole and a minimum two flutes beyond each side of opening. Attach to base deck with #10 TEK screws at 12" o.c. I. At deck openings from 6 inches to 18 inches in size, provide 2 by 2 by 1/4 inch steel angle reinforcement. Place angles perpendicular to flutes; extend minimum two flutes beyond each side of opening and fusion weld to deck at each flute. J. Where deck changes direction, install 8 inch minimum wide by 1/4 inch thich sheet steel cover plates. Fusion weld 12 inches on center maximum. K. At openings between deck and walls, columns, and openings, provide sheet steel closures and angle flashings to close openings. L. Immediately after welding deck and other metal components in position, coat welds, burned areas, and damaged surface coating, with touch-up primer. END OF SECTION LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 0531 00-3 Steel Decking 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 05 40 00 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Formed steel stud exterior wall and interior wall framing. B. Steel Stud exterior wall framing. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 05 31 00-Steel Decking. B. Section 09 21 16- Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum-based sheathing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AISI S100 - North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members; 2016, with Supplement (2020). B. ASTM Al53/A153M -Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip)on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2016a. C. ASTM A653/A653M -Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)or Zinc- Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2022. D. ASTM A1008/A1008M -Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Required Hardness, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable; 2021a. E. ASTM C955- Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Steel Structural Framing Members; 2018, with Editorial Revision. F. ASTM C1007- Standard Specification for Installation of Load Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs and Related Accessories; 2020. G. AWS D1.1/D1.1 M - Structural Welding Code- Steel; 2020, with Errata (2022). H. AWS D1.3/D1.3M - Structural Welding Code- Sheet Steel; 2018. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on standard framing members; describe materials and finish, product criteria, limitations. C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on factory-made framing connectors, showing compliance with requirements. D. Shop Drawings: Indicate component details, framed openings, bearing, anchorage, loading, welds, and type and location of fasteners, and accessories or items required of related work. 1. Indicate stud layout. 2. Describe method for securing studs to tracks and for welded framing connections. 3. Design data: 4. Calculations for loadings and stresses of specially fabricated framing, signed and sealed by a professional structural engineer. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, conditions requiring special attention . 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Designer Qualifications: Design framing system under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in Texas. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 05 40 00- 1 Cold-Formed Metal Framing 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Metal Framing: 1. The Steel Network, Inc: www.SteelNetwork.com/#sle. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Framing Connectors and Accessories: 2.02 FRAMING SYSTEM A. Provide primary and secondary framing members, bridging, bracing, plates, gussets, clips, fittings, reinforcement, and fastenings as required to provide a complete framing system. B. Design Requirements: Provide completed framing system having the following characteristics: 1. Design: Calculate structural characteristics of cold-formed steel framing members according to AISI S100. 2. Structural Performance: Design, engineer, fabricate, and erect to withstand specified design loads for project conditions within required limits. 3. Design Loads: In accordance with applicable codes. 4. Deflections: a. Exterior Walls: Maximum horizontal deflection under wind load: 1) Brick- 1/600 of span. 2) EIFS and Stucco- 1/360 of span. 3) Wood or Metal Siding - 1/180 of span. 5. Able to tolerate movement of components without damage, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners, or other detrimental effects when subject to seasonal or cyclic day/night temperature ranges. 6. Able to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members, and clearances of intended openings. 2.03 FRAMING MATERIALS A. Studs and Track: ASTM C955; studs formed to channel, C-or Sigma-shaped with punched web; U-shaped track in matching nominal width and compatible height. 1. Gauge and Depth: As required to meet specified performance levels. 2. Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, G90/Z275 coating. 3. Provide components fabricated from ASTM A1008/A1008M Designation SS (structural steel). B. Framing Connectors: Factory-made, formed steel sheet. 1. Material: ASTM A653/A653M SS Grade 33 and 40 (minimum), with G90/Z275 hot dipped galvanized coating for base metal thickness less than 10 gauge, 0.1345 inch, and factory punched holes and slots. 2. Structural Performance: Maintain load and movement capacity required by applicable code, when evaluated in accordance with AISI S100. 3. Movement Connections: Provide mechanical anchorage devices that accommodate movement using slotted holes, shouldered screws or screws and anti-friction or stepped LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 05 40 00-2 Cold-Formed Metal Framing 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS bushings, while maintaining structural performance of framing. Provide movement connections where indicated on drawings. a. Where continuous studs bypass elevated floor slab, connect stud to slab in manner allowing vertical and horizontal movement of slab without affecting studs; allow for minimum movement of 1/2 inch. b. Where top of stud wall terminates below structural floor or roof, connect studs to structure in manner allowing vertical and horizontal movement of slab without affecting studs; allow for minimum movement of 1/2 inch. c. Provide top track preassembled with connection devices spaced to fit stud spacing indicated on drawings; minimum track length of 10 feet. 4. Fixed Connections: Provide non-movement connections for tie-down to foundation, floor- to-floor tie-down, roof-to-wall tie-down,joist hangers, gusset plates, and stiffeners. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF STUDS A. Install components in accordance with ASTM C1007 requirements and ASTM C1007 requirements. B. Align floor and ceiling tracks; locate to wall layout. Secure in place with fasteners at maximum 24 inches on center. Coordinate installation of sealant with floor and ceiling tracks. C. Place studs at 16 inches minimum on center; not more than 2 inches from abutting walls and at each side of openings. Connect studs to tracks using clip and tie method. D. Construct corners using minimum of three studs. Install double studs at wall openings, door and window jambs. E. Install intermediate studs above and below openings to align with wall stud spacing. F. Provide deflection allowance in stud track, directly below horizontal building framing at non-load bearing framing. G. Install framing between studs for attachment of mechanical and electrical items, and to prevent stud rotation. H. Touch-up field welds and damaged galvanized surfaces with primer. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/4 inch. B. Maximum Variation of any Member from Plane: 1/4 inch. END OF SECTION LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 05 40 00-3 Cold-Formed Metal Framing 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Shop fabricated steel items. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 91 13 - Exterior Painting: Paint finish. B. Section 09 91 23 - Interior Painting: Paint finish. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A36/A36M -Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2019. B. ASTM A53/A53M -Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2022. C. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc(Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2017. D. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2023. E. ASTM A283/A283M - Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates; 2018. F. ASTM A501/A501 M - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing; 2021. G. ASTM B211/13211 M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Rolled or Cold Finished Bar, Rod, and Wire; 2019. H. ASTM F3125/F3125M - Standard Specification for High Strength Structural Bolts and Assemblies, Steel and Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, Inch Dimensions 120 ksi and 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength, and Metric Dimensions 830 MPa and 1040 MPa Minimum Tensile Strength; 2023. I. AWS D1.1/D1.1 M -Structural Welding Code- Steel; 2020, with Errata (2023). J. SSPC-Paint 15- Steel Joist Shop Primer/Metal Building Primer; 2004. K. SSPC-Paint 20-Zinc-Rich Coating (Type I - Inorganic, and Type II - Organic); 2019. L. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; 2018. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS -STEEL A. Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A36M. B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A501/A501M hot-formed structural tubing. C. Plates: ASTM A283/A283M. D. Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B Schedule 40, black finish. E. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F3125/F3125M, Type 1, plain. F. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1 M; type required for materials being welded. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 05 50 00- 1 Metal Fabrications Re-Bid Construction Documents G. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. H. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. C. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. D. Furnish components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. 2.03 FABRICATED ITEMS A. Bollards: Steel pipe, concrete filled, crowned cap, as detailed; galvanized finish. B. Door Frames for Overhead Door Openings: Channel sections; galvanized finish. 2.04 FINISHES-STEEL A. Prime paint steel items. 1. Exceptions: Galvanize items to be embedded in concrete, items to be embedded in masonry, and items specified for painted finish. B. Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC-SP2. C. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. D. Prime Painting: One coat. E. Galvanizing of Non-structural Items: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M requirements. 2.05 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements. B. Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch. C. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch. D. Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches. E. Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. B. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. C. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. D. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed , except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 05 50 00-2 Metal Fabrications Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 05 51 33 METAL LADDERS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Prefabricated ladders. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 11 81 29 - Facility Fall Protection: Ladder safety systems. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 29 CFR 1910.23 - Ladders; Current Edition. B. 29 CFR 1926.1053- Ladders; Current Edition. C. ANSI A14.3 -American National Standard for Ladders-- Fixed -- Safety Requirements; 2008 (Reaffirmed 2018). D. ASTM A36/A36M -Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2019. E. ASTM A53/A53M -Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2022. F. ASTM A283/A283M - Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates; 2018. G. ASTM A501/A501 M - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing; 2021. H. AWS A2.4- Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; 2020. I. AWS D1.1/D1.1 M -Structural Welding Code- Steel; 2020, with Errata (2023). J. SSPC-Paint 15- Steel Joist Shop Primer/Metal Building Primer; 2004. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. 2. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FABRICATION A. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. C. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. D. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. 2.02 PREFABRICATED LADDERS A. Prefabricated Ladder: Welded metal unit complying with ANSI A14.3; factory fabricated to greatest degree practical and in the largest components possible. 1. Components: Manufacturer's standard rails, rungs, treads, handrails. returns, platforms and safety devices complying with the requirements of the MATERIALS article of this section. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 0551 33- 1 Metal Ladders Re-Bid Construction Documents 2. Finish: Mill finish aluminum. 3. Manufacturers: a. O'Keeffe's Inc: Model 503A: www.okeeffes.com/#sle. b. Precision Ladders, LLC: www.precisionladders.com/#sle. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. B. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. C. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 0551 33-2 Metal Ladders Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 06 10 53 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Roofing nailers. B. Preservative treated wood materials. C. Communications and electrical room mounting boards. D. Concealed wood blocking, nailers, and supports. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI/SPRI/FM 4435/ES-1 -Test Standard for Edge Systems Used with Low Slope Roofing Systems; 2022. B. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2023. C. ASTM E84- Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2023c. D. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; 2023. E. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2023. F. PS 20-American Softwood Lumber Standard; 2021. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide technical data on wood preservative materials. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent deformation and to allow air circulation. B. Fire Retardant Treated Wood: Prevent exposure to precipitation during shipping, storage, and installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies. 1. If no species is specified, provide species graded by the agency specified; if no grading agency is specified, provide lumber graded by grading agency meeting the specified requirements. 2. Grading Agency: Grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org) and who provides grading service for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless otherwise indicated. 2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER FOR CONCEALED APPLICATIONS A. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S. B. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19. C. Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring: 1. Lumber: S4S, No.2 or Standard Grade. 2. Boards: Standard or No.3. 2.03 CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: PS 1, A-D plywood, or medium density fiberboard; 3/4 inch thick; flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 06 10 53- 1 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry Re-Bid Construction Documents 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Metal and Finish: Stainless steel for high humidity and preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere. B. Separation Membrane Tape: Self-adhesive, fabric reinforced polyethylene tape, i.e., duct tape, for placement between preservative treated wood members and galvanized steel. 2.05 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications. 1. Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an ALSC-accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with AWPA standards. B. Preservative Treatment: 1. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade: AWPA U1, Use Category UC313, Commodity Specification A. a. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. b. Treat lumber in contact with roofing, flashing, or waterproofing. c. Treat lumber in contact with masonry or concrete. 2. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Plywood Above Grade: AWPA U1, Use Category UC2 and UC313, Commodity Specification F using waterborne preservative to 0.25 Ib/cu ft retention. a. Kiln dry plywood after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Select material sizes to minimize waste. B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking. C. Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants. 3.02 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS A. Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. B. In metal stud walls, provide continuous blocking around door and window openings for anchorage of frames, securely attached to stud framing. C. In walls, provide blocking attached to studs as backing and support for wall-mounted items, unless item can be securely fastened to two or more studs or other method of support is explicitly indicated. 3.03 ROOF-RELATED CARPENTRY A. Coordinate installation of roofing carpentry with deck construction, framing of roof openings, sheet metal fabrications (copings, edge metal and gutters) and roofing assembly installation. 1. Anchor roofing carpentry for copings and low-slope roof edge metals for resistance to design wind loads in accordance with ANSI/SPRI/FM 4435/ES-1. B. Place separation membrane over galvanized metal surfaces prior to installation of roofing carpentry. Use only stainless steel screws or anchors in these locations. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 06 10 53-2 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry Re-Bid Construction Documents 3.04 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: Secure with screws to studs with edges over firm bearing; space fasteners at maximum 24 inches on center on edges and into studs in field of board. 1. At fire-rated walls, install board over wall board indicated as part of the fire-rated assembly. 2. Where boards are indicated as full floor-to-ceiling height, install with long edge of board parallel to studs. 3. Install adjacent boards without gaps. 3.05 CLEANING A. Do not leave wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill. B. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 06 10 53-3 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 06 41 00 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Specially fabricated cabinet units. B. Hardware. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 10 53 - Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry : Support framing, grounds and concealed blocking. B. Section 12 36 00 -Countertops. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Wet locations: Counters which contain sinks, lavatories, and/or counter mounted drinking fountains. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A208.1 -American National Standard for Particleboard; 2022. B. ANSI A208.2 - Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF)for Interior Applications; 2022. C. BHMA A156.9- Cabinet Hardware; 2020. D. NEMA LD 3- High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; 2005. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods,jointing details, and accessories. 1. Scale of Drawings: 1-1/2 inch to 1 foot, minimum. 2. Provide the information required by AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS). C. Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect units from moisture damage. B. Do not deliver casework to the site until doors and windows are installed and temperature and humidity control can be assured. Maintain minimum temperature of 60 degrees F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent for not less than 2 days prior to delivery of millwork and for the remainder of the construction period. Place casework in areas where it will be installed and allow to acclimate for not less than 48 hours before beginning installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CABINETS A. Quality Grade: Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by AWI//AWMAC/WI (AWS)for Custom Grade. B. Plastic Laminate Faced Cabinets: Custom grade. C. Cabinets: 1. Finish - Exposed Exterior Surfaces: Decorative laminate. 2. Finish - Exposed Interior Surfaces: Melamine. 3. Finish - Concealed Surfaces: Manufacturer's option. 4. Door and Drawer Front Edge Profiles: Square edge with thin applied band. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 0641 00- 1 Architectural Wood Casework Re-Bid Construction Documents 5. Door and Drawer Front Retention Profiles: Fixed panel. 6. Casework Construction Type: Type A- Frameless. 7. Interface Style for Cabinet and Door: Style 1 -Overlay; flush overlay. 8. Cabinet Doors and Drawer Fronts: Flush style. 9. Drawer Side Construction: Multiple-dovetailed. 10. Drawer Construction Technique: Dovetail joints. 2.02 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTS A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. 2.03 PANEL CORE MATERIALS A. Particleboard: Composite panel composed of cellulosic particles, additives, and bonding system; comply with ANSI A208.1. 1. Grade: M-2; moisture resistance: MR10. 2. Panel Thickness: 3/4 inch. B. Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF): Composite panel composed of cellulosic fibers, additives, and bonding system; cured under heat and pressure; comply with ANSI A208.2. 1. Grade: 115; moisture resistance: MR10. 2. Panel Thickness: 3/4 inch. 2.04 THERMALLY FUSED LAMINATE PANELS A. Thermally Fused Laminate (TFL): Melamine-resin-saturated decorative papers; for fusion to composite wood substrates under heat and pressure. 1. Test in accordance with NEMA LID 3 Section 3. 2. Panel Core Substrate: Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF). 3. Color: White. 2.05 LAMINATE MATERIALS A. High Pressure Decorative Laminate (HPDL): NEMA LD 3, types as recommended for specific applications. 2.06 COUNTERTOPS A. Countertops: See Section 12 36 00. 2.07 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Type recommended by fabricator to suit application. B. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application. C. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. D. Removable Panel Clip Brackets: Aluminum panel clip bracket, 1-3/8 x 2 inches screw mounted; mill finish. 1. Product: Hafele#290.11.020, or approved equivalent. E. Sealant: Single component silicone, clear/transparent in color. 2.08 HARDWARE A. Hardware: BHMA A156.9, types as indicated for quality grade specified. B. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Standard side-mounted system using multiple holes for pin supports and coordinated self rests, satin chrome finish, for nominal 1 inch spacing adjustments. 1. Product: 282.40.708 manufactured by Hafele. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 0641 00-2 Architectural Wood Casework Re-Bid Construction Documents C. Vanity Brackets: Fixed, ADA-compliant, face-of-stud mounting. 1. Material and Shape: Steel; formed compound shapes. a. Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied, textured powder coat. b. Color: Black. 2. Products: a. A&M Hardware, Inc; ADA Vanity Brackets: www.aandmhardware.com/#sle. b. Rakks/Rangine Corporation; ADA Compliant EHV Vanity Supports: www.rakks.com/#sle. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. D. Countertop Brackets: Fixed, concealed vertical leg, side-of-stud mounting. 1. Materials: Steel L-and T-shapes. a. Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied, powder coat. b. Vertical Leg: 20 inches. c. Support Member Depth: 1 inch. d. Support Member Width: 1 inch e. Support Member Length: 21 inches. 2. Products: a. A&M Hardware, Inc; Concealed Flat Brackets: www.aandmhardware.com/#sle. b. Rakks/Rangine Corporation; Inside Wall Flush Mount Brackets: www.rakks.com/#sle. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. E. Drawer and Door Pulls: "U" shaped wire pull, steel with satin finish, 4 inch centers. F. Drawer Slides: 1. Type: Full extension with overtravel. 2. Static Load Capacity: Commercial grade. 3. Mounting: Side mounted. 4. Stops: Integral type. 5. Manufacturers: a. Accuride International, Inc: www.accuride.com. b. Knape &Vogt Manufacturing Company: www.knapeandvogt.com. G. Hinges: European style concealed self-closing type, steel with nickel-plated finish. 1. Manufacturers: a. Hafele; 329.17.507: www.hafele.com. 2.09 FABRICATION A. Assembly: Shop assemble cabinets for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings. B. Fitting: When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide matching trim for scribing and site cutting. C. Plastic Laminate: Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel arises. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut-outs. D. Mechanically fasten back splash to countertops as recommended by laminate manufacturer at 16 inches on center. E. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions. Prime paint cut edges. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 0641 00-3 Architectural Wood Casework Re-Bid Construction Documents PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Set and secure custom cabinets in place, assuring that they are rigid, plumb, and level. B. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose. C. Secure cabinets to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages. D. Mechanically fasten side splash to countertops with steel brackets at 16 inches on center. Apply silicone sealant into joint before attaching side splash to counter. Remove excess sealant. 3.02 ADJUSTING A. Adjust installed work. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 0641 00-4 Architectural Wood Casework Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 06 83 16 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PANELING PART 1GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fiberglass reinforced plastic panels. B. Trim. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D5319- Standard Specification for Glass-Fiber Reinforced Polyester Wall and Ceiling Panels; 2022. B. ASTM E84- Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2023c. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Panels: 1. Crane Composites, Inc: www.cranecomposites.com/#sle. 2. Marlite, Inc: www.marlite.com/#sle. 3. Nudo Products, Inc: www.nudo.com/#sle. 4. Panolam Industries International, Inc: www.panolam.com/#sle. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000- Product Requirements. 2.02 PANEL SYSTEMS A. Wall Panels: 1. Panel Size: 4 by 8 feet. 2. Panel Thickness: 0.10 inch. 3. Surface Design: Embossed. 4. Color: White. 5. Attachment Method: Adhesive only, sealant joints, no trim. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Panels: Fiberglass reinforced plastic(FRP), complying with ASTM D5319. 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread index of 25 and smoke developed index of 450; when system tested in accordance with ASTM E84. B. Trim: Vinyl; color coordinating with panel. C. Sealant: Type recommended by panel manufacturer; white. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION -WALLS A. Install panels in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Cut and drill panels with carbide tipped saw blades, drill bits, or snips. C. Apply adhesive to the back side of the panel using trowel as recommended by adhesive manufacturer. D. Apply panels to wall with seams plumb and pattern aligned with adjoining panels. E. Install panels with manufacturer's recommended gap for panel field and corner joints. F. Place trim on panel before fastening edges, as required. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 06 83 16- 1 Fiberglass Reinforced Paneling Re-Bid Construction Documents G. Fill channels in trim with sealant before attaching to panel. H. Install trim with adhesive and screws or nails, as required. I. Seal gaps at floor, ceiling, and between panels with applicable sealant to prevent moisture intrusion. J. Remove excess sealant after paneling is installed and prior to curing. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 06 83 16-2 Fiberglass Reinforced Paneling Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Board insulation at exterior wall behind metal panel wall finish and Interior face of tilt wall panels. B. Batt insulation in exterior wall and wall construction. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Mineral Fiber Material Composition: Insulation referred to as mineral fiber block, board, and blanket insulation is composed of fibers from mineral based substances such as rock, slag, or glass and processed from the molten state into fibrous form. 1. Based on type of insulation substance, the material will be referred to as a mineral fiber when having a rock or slag base, and glass fiber with a glass or silica sand base, also considered a mineral. 2. Insulation blankets are flexible units consisting of felted, bonded, or unbonded fibers formed into rolls or flat cut pieces referred to as batts; rolls are simply longer versions of batts. 3. For additional information about mineral fiber and the various classification types, refer to the following reference standards; ASTM C553, ASTM C612, ASTM C665, and ASTM C726. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C553-Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications; 2013 (Reapproved 2019). B. ASTM C578-Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation; 2023. C. ASTM C612 -Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation; 2014 (Reapproved 2019). D. ASTM C665-Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2023. E. ASTM C726 -Standard Specification for Mineral Wool Roof Insulation Board; 2017. F. ASTM C1289- Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board; 2023a. G. ASTM E84- Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2023c. H. ASTM E136 -Standard Test Method for Assessing Combustibility of Materials Using a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750 Degrees C; 2024. I. ICC (IBC)- International Building Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. J. ICC (IECC)- International Energy Conservation Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. K. NFPA 285- Standard Fire Test Method for Evaluation of Fire Propagation Characteristics of Exterior Wall Assemblies Containing Combustible Components; 2023. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, and product limitations. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 0721 00- 1 Thermal Insulation Re-Bid Construction Documents 1.05 INSULATION CERTIFICATION A. Identification: All thermal insulation materials must be identified in accordance with ICC (IECC), Section 303.1. 1. Building thermal envelope insulation: An R-value identification mark must be applied by the manufacturer to each piece of building thermal envelope insulation 12 inch or greater in width. a. For roof insulation installed above the deck, the R-value must be labeled as required by the material standards in accordance with Table 1508.2 of the ICC (IBC). 2. Installed envelope insulation certification: Provide a certification listing the type, manufacturer, and R-value of insulation installed in each element of the building thermal envelope. The insulation installer must sign, date and post the certification adjacent to the Thermal Envelope Certificate provided by a third-party consultant or agency for the building envelope performance verification. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install insulation adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental to successful installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 APPLICATIONS A. Insulation Over Metal Stud Framed Walls, Continuous: Polyisocyanurate board faced with fire- treated plywood. B. Insulation on Inside of Concrete Exterior Walls: Extruded polystyrene. C. Insulation in Metal Framed Walls: Batt insulation with integral vapor retarder. 2.02 FOAM BOARD INSULATION MATERIALS A. Extruded Polystyrene (XPS) Board Insulation: Comply with ASTM C578 with either natural skin or cut cell surfaces. 1. Type and Thermal Resistance, R-value: Type IV, 5.0 (0.88), minimum, per 1 inch thickness at 75 degrees F mean temperature. 2. Complies with fire resistance requirements for code compliance as part of an exterior non- load-bearing exterior wall assembly when tested in accordance with NFPA 285. 3. Board Edges: Square. 4. Type and Water Absorption: Type XI 1, 0.3 percent by volume, maximum, by total immersion. 5. Products: a. Dow Chemical Company; STYROFOAM Cavitymate XPS: www.dowbuildingsolutions.com/#sle. b. Owens Corning Corporation; FOAMULAR Type IV Extruded Polystyrene (XPS) Insulation: www.ocbuildingspec.com/#sle. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Rigid Cellular Polyisocyan u rate (ISO)Thermal Insulation Board Faced with Plywood: Complying with ASTM C1289. 1. Classifications: a. Type V: Faced with fire-treated plywood on one major surface of core foam and glass fiber reinforced cellulosic felt or uncoated or coated polymer-bonded glass fiber mat facer on other major surface of core foam. 1) Compressive Strength: 16 psi, minimum. 2. Smoke Developed Index (SDI): 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Complies with fire resistance requirements specified as part of an exterior non-load- bearing exterior wall assembly when tested in accordance with NFPA 285. 4. Board Size: 48 inch by 96 inch. 5. Plywood Thickness: 5/8 inch. 6. Insulation Board Thickness: 1 inches. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 0721 00-2 Thermal Insulation Re-Bid Construction Documents 7. Board Edges: Square. 8. Products: a. Atlas Roofing Corporation; EnergyShield Ply Pro: www.atlasroofing.com/#sle. b. Hunter Panels; Xci Ply: www.hunterpanels.com/#sle. c. Carlisle; R2 + Base: www.carlisle.com. d. Substitutions: Not permitted. 2.03 MINERAL FIBER BLANKET INSULATION MATERIALS A. Flexible Glass Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation: Preformed insulation, complying with ASTM C665; friction fit. 1. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Combustibility: Non-combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E136, except for facing, if any. 4. Formaldehyde Content: Less than 0.05 ppm. 5. Thermal Resistance: R-value of 19. 6. Thickness: 6 inch. 7. Facing: Unfaced. 8. Products: a. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. b. Johns Manville: www.jm.com. c. Owens Corning Corporation: www.ocbuildingspec.com/sle. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Insulation Fasteners: Appropriate for purpose intendedas approved by insulated sheathing manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 BOARD INSTALLATION AT EXTERIOR WALLS A. Install boards horizontally on walls. 1. Install in running bond pattern. 2. Align all vertical panel joints on studs. 3. Butt edges and ends tightly to adjacent boards and protrusions. 4. End panels at outside corners shall be mitered at 45 degree angle. No styrofoam edge shall be exposed. B. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane. 3.02 BATT INSTALLATION A. Install insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in exterior wall spaces without gaps or voids. Do not compress insulation. C. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids. D. Fit insulation tightly in cavities and tightly to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services within the plane of the insulation. 3.03 PROTECTION A. Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 0721 00-3 Thermal Insulation Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 07 27 26 FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIER SYSTEM PART 1GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Materials and installation methods supplementing a one-component vapor permeable, liquid applied elastic air and water barrier, vapor retarder materials and assemblies. B. Materials and installation to bridge and seal the following air leakage pathways and gaps: 1. Connections of the walls to the foundations. 2. Expansion joints. 3. Openings and penetrations of window frames, store front, curtain wall. 4. Door frames. 5. Piping, conduit, duct and similar penetrations. 6. Masonry ties, screws, bolts and similar penetrations. 7. All other air leakage pathways in the building envelope. 8. Sealing flashing to wall surface. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07 92 00 -Joint Sealants. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REFERENCES A. AATCC Test Method 127-Test Method for Water Resistance: Hydrostatic Pressure; 2018, with Editorial Revision (2019). B. ASTM D1970/D1970M - Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection; 2021. C. ASTM D412 -Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers-- Tension; 2016 (Reapproved 2021). D. ASTM E2178 -Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage Rate and Calculation of Air Permeance of Building Materials; 2021 a. E. ASTM E2357 -Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage Rate of Air Barrier Assemblies; 2024. F. ASTM E283 -Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen; 2004 (Reapproved 2012). G. ASTM E331 -Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000 (Reapproved 2023). H. ASTM E84- Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2023c. I. ASTM E96/E96M -Standard Test Methods for Gravimetric Determination of Water Vapor Transmission Rate of Materials; 2022a, with Editorial Revision (2023). J. ICC-ES AC212 -Acceptance Criteria for Water-Resistive Coatings Used as Water-Resistive Barriers over Exterior Sheathing; 2015, with Editorial Revision (2020). K. NFPA 285- Standard Fire Test Method for Evaluation of Fire Propagation Characteristics of Exterior Wall Assemblies Containing Combustible Components; 2023. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 07 27 26- 1 Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barrier Re-Bid Construction Documents System 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide an air barrier system constructed to perform as a continuous elastic air barrier, and as a liquid water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior any incidental condensation or water penetration. Membrane shall accommodate movements of building materials by providing expansion and control joints as required, with accessory air seal materials at such locations, changes in substrate and perimeter conditions. 1. The air barrier shall have the following characteristics: a. It must be continuous, with all joints made air-tight. b. It shall be capable of withstanding positive and negative combined design wind, fan and stack pressures on the envelope without damage or displacement, and shall transfer the load to the structure. It shall not displace adjacent materials under full load. The air barrier shall be joined in an airtight and flexible manner to the air barrier material of adjacent assembly, allowing for the relative movement of assembly due to thermal and moisture variations and creep. Connection shall be made between: 1) Foundation and walls. 2) Walls and windows or doors. 3) Different wall assembly. 4) Wall and roof. 5) Walls, floor and roof across construction, control and expansion joints. 6) Walls, floors and roof to utility, pipe and duct penetrations. 7) Flashing to wall surface. 2. All penetrations of the air barrier and paths of air infiltration/exfiltration shall be made air- tight. B. Performance Criteria: 1. Air Permeability: Maximum 0.04 cfm/sq.ft. @ 10.5 psf per ASTM E283. 2. Air Permeability: Less than 0.0004 cfm/ft2 pressure differential of 1.57 Ib/sf in accordance with ASTM E2178 3. ASTM E2357, Full Scale Wall Testing of the Air Barrier System a. System Air Leakage, Requirement—less than 0.004 cfm/ft2 pressure diffential of 1.57 Ib/sf. 4. ASTM E331, Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference- 10 psf for 2 hours. 5. Elongation: Minimum 100% per ASTM D412. 6. AATCC Test Method 127 Water Resistance— Pass 7. ASTM D1970/D1970M Self Sealability— Pass 8. ICC-ES AC212, Freeze Thaw, Crack Bridging— Pass 9. Fire Testing: Air Barrier, as a component of a wall assembly, shall have passed a NFPA 285. 10. ASTM E84 Class A fire resistant. 11. Permanent UV exposure under open joint cladding. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 30 00—Administrative Requirements: Submittal Procedures. B. Quality Assurance Program: Submit evidence of current Contractor accreditation and Installer certification under the Air Barrier Association of America's (ABAA) Quality Assurance Program (QAP). Submit accreditation number of the Contractor and certification number(s)of the ABAA Certified Installer(s). C. Submit documentation certifying that the air barrier system has been tested independently, indicating compliance with the performance requirements of the Air Barrier Association of America. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 07 27 26-2 Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barrier Re-Bid Construction Documents System D. Product Data: Submit material Manufacturer's Product Data, material manufacturer's instructions for evaluating, preparing and treating substrate, temperature and other limitations of installation conditions, Technical Data and tested physical and performance properties. 1. Submit letter from primary air barrier material manufacturer indicating approval of accessory materials that are proposed to be used that are not currently manufactured by the primary air barrier material manufacturer. E. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturers' complete set of standard details for air barrier/vapor retarders. The manufacturer's representative shall review the contract drawings and note any modifications required to make the system air and water tight. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Listed as an evaluated assembly by the Air Barrier Association at www.airbarriers.org B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide primary products, including each component of the air barrier membrane system, which has been commercially available for a minimum of 3 years. C. Submit in writing, a document stating that the applicator of the primary air barrier membrane specified in this section is recognized by the manufacturer as suitable for the execution of the Work, and must be: 1. An ABAA Certified Contractor, specific certification for liquid applied and approved by letter from the manufacturer. D. Field Quality Assurance: Implement the ABAA Quality Assurance Program (QAP) Field Inspection Program auditing and testing if a non-certified ABAA contractor is procured to perform the work of this section. The cost of this auditing and testing of the air barrier by an ABAA certified inspector in accordance with the ABAA QAP Program must be included in the bid. E. Perform Work in accordance with the printed requirements of the air barrier manufacturer and this specification. F. Maintain one copy of manufacturer instructions on site. G. At the beginning of the Work and at all times during the execution of the Work, allow access to Work site by the air barrier membrane manufacturer's representative. H. Components used in this section shall be sourced from one manufacturer, including sheet membrane, air barrier sealants, primers, mastics, tapes and adhesives as listed as an evaluated air barrier assembly by the Air Barrier Association of America. When not using all components from one manufacturer, submit documentation certifying material chemical compatiblity across all components in contact with each other. 1.07 MOCK-UP A. Construct mock-up in accordance with Section 01 40 00—Quality Requirements: Requirements for a mock-up. B. Items to be incorporated in mock-up include: 1. Where directed by Architect, construct typical exterior wall panel, 8 foot long by 8 foot high, incorporating masonry veneer system, through wall flexible flashing, glass-faced gypsum sheathing, wall ties, board insulation, metal studs, aluminum curtain wall frame, aluminium window frame, showing air barrier membrane application details and transition membranes. C. Allow 24 hours for inspection of mock-up by Architect and Third Party Consultant before proceeding with air barrier work. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 07 27 26-3 Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barrier Re-Bid Construction Documents System 1.08 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Convene four weeks prior to commencing work of this section, under provisions of Section 01 30 00—Administrative Requirements: Pre-Installation Meeting. Attendance required by the Architect, Third Party Consultant, manufacturer's representative, installer and related trade contractors is mandatory. 1. DO NOT PROCEED WITH THE INSTALLATION OF THE AIR BARRIER MEMBRANE AND THE THROUGH WALL FLASHING MEMBRANE PRIOR TO THE PRE- INSTALLATION CONFERENCE. 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the job site in undamaged and original packaging indicating the name of the manufacturer and product. B. All pail goods shall bear the ABAA Evaluated Air Barrier label C. Store roll materials on end in original packaging. D. Keep all products stored at above 40°F. Apply to a substrate with a surface T°F of 40°F and rising. DO NOT ALLOW PRODUCT TO FREEZE. E. Protect rolls from direct sunlight until ready for use. F. Do not double stack pail goods. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work of the Section with Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry for Concrete Masonry Units B. Ensure continuity of the air seal throughout the scope of this section. PART2PRODUCTS 2.01 MEMBRANES A. Liquid air barrier: One component elastomeric membrane, spray, trowel or brush applied, having the following characteristics and have passed all evaluations by the Air Barrier Association of America (ABAA) and be listed on their web site as having passed all the evaluations listed in the performance criteria. 1. Air permeability: a. Air Leakage Thru Cured Films: <0.04 cfm/ft2 @ 10.5 Ibs/ft2 or<0.005 L/sm2 @ 75 Pa to ASTM E283 (Modified)24 hours, +/- 10%. b. Air Leakage per ASTM E 2178, dry film, delta P of 0.3 inches of water, 0.002 +/- 10% 2. Air Barrier System Test on Full Scale Wall Assembly, ASTM E 2357 a. System Air Leakage, 0.0008 CFM/ft2 +/- 10% b. Penetrations Check, MUST PASS ASTM E 2357 requirements 3. Water Vapor permeance: (704 ng/Pa.m2.s.) 10 to 20 perms, ASTM E96 Method B. NOTE: THE MATERIAL SPECIFIED IS VAPOR PERMEABLE. 4. Elongation (ASTM D412: >50%) 5. ASTM D 1970, Self Sealability— Pass 6. ASTM E84, Class A Fire Resistant B. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Kemper System America; Wall Guardian FW-100A: www.wallguardian.com 2. Tremco; ExoAir 230: www.tremcosealants.com. 3. Henry Company; Air-Bloc All Weather STPE: www.henry.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements for substitution procedures. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 07 27 26-4 Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barrier Re-Bid Construction Documents System C. Transition Membrane: Self-Adhering metal membrane with a flexible 2 mil sheet of Type 304 stainless steel, 10 mils of butyl adhesive and siliconized release liner. See Section 07 65 26. 1. Thickness: 12 mils. 2. Width: 4 or 6 inch. 2.02 PRIMER A. Primer for self-adhering membranes: Synthetic polymer-based adhesive type, quick setting, having the following characteristics: 1. Acceptable material: As manufactured and/or recommended by the Air Barrier System manufacturer. Note: Primer shall be compatible with specified glass faced gypsum sheathing. 2. Verify compatibility of self-adhering membranes with preservative treated materials specified in Section 06 10 00. Prime preservative treated materials as required using primer recommended by self-adhering membrane manufacturer. 2.03 SEALANTS A. Sealants shall be compatible with air barrier assembly and shall be approved by the air barrier manufacturer. B. Primers: As recommended by manufacturer for surfaces to be sealed. C. Backer Rods: As recommended by sealant manufacturer. D. Others as recommended by manufacturer PART 3EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept the Work of this section. Notify Architect in writing of any discrepancies. Commencement of the work or any parts thereof shall mean acceptance of the prepared substrate. 3.02 PREPARATION A. All surfaces must be sound, dry, clean and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar or other contaminants. Fill spalled areas in substrates to provide an even plane. B. All joints between gypsum sheathing, roof board, masonry and concrete and other substrate joints up to 1/4"wide shall be treated with manufacturer's seam tape: C. All joints between gypsum sheathing, roof board, masonry and concrete and other substrates wider than 1/4" shall be sealed with manufacturer's transition membrane: 1. Others as recommended by manufacturer D. Install backer rod and sealant at the following joints: 1. All expansion/control/erection joints between concrete wall panels. 2. All expansion/control joints in concrete block back-up. 3. All joints between concrete wall panels and concrete block back-up. 3.03 PRIMER FOR TRANSITION MEMBRANE (SELF-ADHERING TYPE ONLY) A. Apply primer for self-adhering membranes at rate recommended by manufacturer. B. Apply primer to all areas to receive transition sheet membrane as indicated in Drawings by roller or spray and allow minimum 30 minute open time. Primed surfaces not covered by transition membrane during the same working day must be re-primed. 3.04 TRANSITION MEMBRANE (SELF-ADHERING TYPE) A. Align and position self-adhering transition membrane, remove protective film and press firmly into place. Ensure minimum 2 inch overlap at all end and side laps unless otherwise noted. B. Tie-in to roofing system and at the interface of dissimilar materials as indicated in Drawings. C. Promptly roll all laps and membrane with a counter top roller to affect seal. D. Seal any edges of transition membrane not adhering to substrate. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 07 27 26-5 Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barrier Re-Bid Construction Documents System E. Ensure all preparatory work is complete prior to applying liquid membrane. 3.05 PRIMARY AIR BARRIER A. Apply by spray or roller, a complete and continuous unbroken film at a temperature of 40°F and rising with less than a 30% chance of rain in the next 18 hours and apply at the same rate as listed in the Air Barrier Association of America evaluation 3.06 INSPECTION A. Notify Architect when sections of work are complete so as to allow for review prior to installing insulation. The manufacturer's representative shall be on site to review the installation along with the Architect. B. Notify third party inspection consultant for inspection to comply with ABAA Quality Assurance Program (QAP) Field Inspection, Auditing and Testing. 1. Auditing and testing performed on every wall elevation and 10,000 sf of wall area. 2. Non-accredited ABAA contractor inspection requirements by third party inspection consultant: a. Periodic observation and field testing at following phases of work: Start-up, every elevation, 50% & 100% completion, punch list, and final acceptance prior to being covered up. 3.07 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Liquid membranes are not designed for permanent exposure. Cover the liquid membrane, as recommended by the manufacturer, within the following time frames. Contractor shall verify the number of calendar days with the air barrier manufacturer: 1. Cover the fluid-applied air barrier system materials within 180 calendar days after installation. The nature of this product is such that some surface weathering may become apparent during exposure. This is a surface effect only and does not impact air barrier system performance. 2. Transition membranes shall be covered within 180 days after installation B. Prepare, treat and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through the air barrier and at protrusions according to air barrier manufacturer's written instructions. 3.08 SCHEDULE A. Install liquid membrane system over the entire surface of the sheathing in the following area. Seal any masonry anchor penetrations air tight. 1. In the masonry cavity wall. B. Install liquid membrane system over the entire surface of the outer surface of the inner wythe of masonry. Seal any masonry anchor penetrations air tight. C. Install liquid membrane system over the entire surface of the plywood sheathing. Seal any penetrations air tight. D. Hollow Metal Door Frames: Seal door frame to wall surface with transition membrane. E. Seal the top of sheathing to the underside of the roof assembly with foam or polyether sealant. F. Openings: Seal around the perimeter of all openings with transition membrane. G. Perimeter wood nailers at wall openings: Cover all exposed surfaces of wood nailers with transition membrane. Extend membrane over sheathing, masonry and metal framing as shown. H. Aluminum window frames with flashing flanges: Seal the flashing flanges to the wall surface with transition membrane. I. Aluminum window frames without flashing flanges: Seal frames to the wall surface with transition membrane. J. Aluminum storefront frames: Seal frames to the wall surface with transition membrane. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 07 27 26-6 Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barrier Re-Bid Construction Documents System SECTION 07 41 13 METAL ROOF PANELS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal roof panel system of preformed steel panels. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASCE 7- Minimum Design Loads and Associated Criteria for Buildings and Other Structures; Most Recent Edition Cited by Referring Code or Reference Standard. B. ASTM A792/A792M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process; 2023. C. ASTM D1970/D1970M - Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection; 2021. D. ASTM D2244- Standard Practice for Calculation of Color Tolerances and Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates; 2023. E. ASTM D4214- Standard Test Methods for Evaluating the Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films; 2023. F. ASTM E1592 -Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2005 (Reapproved 2017). G. ASTM E1646 -Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 1995 (Reapproved 2018). H. ASTM E1680 -Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems; 2016 (Reapproved 2022). I. NRCA( National Roofing Contractors Association) Roofing Manual: Architectural Metal Flashing, Condensation and Air Leakage Control & Re-roofing -2014. J. NRCA( National Roofing Contractors Association) Roofing Manual: Metal Panel and SPF Roof Systems-2012. K. SMACNA(Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association)-Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; current edition. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Include layouts of roof panels, details of edge and penetration conditions, side- seam and end-lap joints, panel profiles, spacing and type of connections, flashings, underlayments, and details of special conditions. 1. Show work to be field-fabricated or field-assembled. 2. All components and cladding listed in the Texas Windstorm Approved Materials catalog shall have the appropriate evaluation number indicated on the submittal. 3. Components and cladding not listed will require certification that they meet or exceed the wind speed design as indicated on structural engineering drawings by the manufacturer. C. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans, drawn to scale, on which the following are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved: 1. Roof panels and attachments. 2. Purlins and rafters. 3. Roof-mounted items including roof hatches, equipment supports, pipe supports and penetrations, lighting fixtures and items mounted on roof curbs. D. Test Reports: Indicate compliance of metal roofing system to specified requirements. E. Warranty: Submit specified manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and are registered with manufacturer. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 0741 13- 1 Metal Roof Panels Re-Bid Construction Documents 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Pre-Installation Conference: 1. No roofing Work shall begin prior to the Pre-Roofing Conference. 2. Required attendees: Owner's representative, Architect, Roofing consultant (if applicable), metal roof panel manufacturer representative, roofing installer, and installers of roofing accessories affected by this Section. 3. Agenda: a. Finalize installation schedule and verify availability/delivery of materials, installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make on progress. b. Review methods and procedures related to metal roof panel installation, including manufacturer's written instructions. c. Review flashings, special roof details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect metal roof panels. d. Review foor observation and repair procedures after metal roof panel installation. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide strippable plastic protection on prefinished roofing panels for removal after installation. B. Store roofing panels on project site as recommended by manufacturer to minimize damage to panels prior to installation. 1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00- Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements. B. Finish Warranty: Provide manufacturer's special warranty covering failure of factory-applied exterior finish on metal roof panels and agreeing to repair or replace panels that show evidence of finish degradation, including significant fading, chalking, cracking, or peeling within specified warranty period of 25 year period from date of Substantial Completion. 1. Color Fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D2244. 2. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D4214. C. Waterproofing Warranty: Provide roofer's warranty for weathertightness of roofing system, and faulty or defective materials and workmanship, including agreement to repair or replace roofing that fails to keep out water within specified warranty period of 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. Warranty shall not contain exclusions for wind speeds below the design wind speed for the location of the project as stipulated by the applicable International Building Code edition, or design wind speed as stipulated by the structural drawings, whichever is greater. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Architectural Metal Roof Panel Manufacturers: 1. Berridge Manufacturing Company; Double-Lock Zee-Lock Panel: www.berridge.com/#sle. 2. McElroy Metals: www.mcelroymetal.com. 3. Petersen Aluminum Corporation: www.pac-clad.com/#sle. 4. Metal Sales Manufacturing; Product: www.metalsales.us.com. B. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Metal Roof Panels: Provide complete roofing assemblies, including roof panels, clips, fasteners, connectors, and miscellaneous accessories, tested for compliance with the following minimum standards: 1. Structural Design Criteria: Provide panel assemblies designed to safely support design loads at support spacing indicated, with deflection not to exceed L/180 of span length(L) when tested in accordance with ASTM E1592. a. Live Loads: As required by ASCE 7. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 0741 13-2 Metal Roof Panels Re-Bid Construction Documents 2. Overall: Complete weathertight system tested and approved in accordance with ASTM E 1592. 3. Wind Uplift: Provide system designed to withstand wind uplift pressures for design wind speeds noted on Structural drawings. System to have either Texas Dept. of Insurance approval or Florida Product/system approval. 4. Air Infiltration: Maximum 0.06 cfm/sq ft at air pressure differential of 6.24 Ibf/sq ft, when tested according to ASTM E1680. 5. Water Penetration: No water penetration when tested in accordance with procedures and recommended test pressures of ASTM E1646; perform test immediately following air infiltration test. 6. Thermal Movement: Design system to accommodate without deformation anticipated thermal movement over ambient temperature range of 100 degrees F. 2.03 METAL ROOF PANELS A. Metal Panels: Factory-formed panels with factory-applied finish. 1. Steel Panels: a. Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel complying with ASTM A792/A792M; minimum AZ50 coating. b. Steel Thickness: Minimum 24 gauge, 0.024 inch. 2. Profile: Standing seam, with minimum 2.0 inch seam height; concealed fastener system for field seaming with special tool. 3. Texture: Smooth. 4. Length: Full length of roof slope, without lapped horizontal joints. 5. Width: Maximum panel coverage of 18 inches. 2.04 ATTACHMENT SYSTEM A. Concealed System: Provide manufacturer's standard stainless steel or nylon-coated aluminum concealed anchor clips designed for specific roofing system and engineered to meet performance requirements, including anticipated thermal movement. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Panels: Provide factory fabricated panelswith applied finish and accessory items, using manufacturer's standard processes as required to achieve specified appearance and performance requirements. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Items: Provide flashings, gutters, downspouts, trim, and closure strips of the same material, thickness, and finish as used for the roofing panels. Items completely concealed after installation may optionally be made of stainless steel. B. Rib and Ridge Closures: Provide prefabricated, close-fitting components of steel with corrosion resistant finish or combination steel and closed-cell foam, cut or premolded to match metal roof panel profile. C. Sealants: Metal Panel Sealants: 1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Permanently elastic, non-sag, non-toxic, non- staining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick. 2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C920; elastomeric silicone sealant; of type, grade, class and use classifications required to seal joints in metal roof panels and remain weathertight; as recommended and submitted by metal roof panel manufacturer. 3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent Release Sealant-ASTM C1311. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 0741 13-3 Metal Roof Panels Re-Bid Construction Documents D. Undedayment: Self-adhering polymer modified asphalt sheet complying with ASTM D1970/D1970M, with strippable release film and top surface of woven polypropylene sheet. 1. Sheet Thickness: 22 mil, 0.022 inch minimum total thickness. 2. Self Sealability: Nail seal ability in accordance with ASTM D1970/D1970M. 3. Products: a. Carlisle Coatings &Waterproofing; CCW WIP 300HT. b. Grace Construction Products; Grace Ice &Water Shield HT. c. Henry Company; Blueskin PE200HT: www.henry.com/#sle. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 25 00 Substitution Procedures. E. Flashing and Trim: Formed from same material as roof panels. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and provided finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fascia, and fillers. F. Roof Curbs: Fabricated from same material as roof panels; minimum 18-gauge thick, with bottom of skirt profiled to match roof panel profile, and welded top box, and integral full-length cricket. Fabricate curb subframing of minimum .0598 inch thick, angle, C-, or Z-shaped steel sheet of appropriate length to attach to purlins. Insulate roof curb with 1-inch thick, rigid insulation. G. Pipe Flashing: Use graduated rubber flashing boots at pipes; Dektite manufactured by ITW Buildex, or approved equivalent. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Overall: Install roofing system in accordance with approved shop drawings and metal roof panel manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, as applicable to specific project conditions; securely anchor components of roofing system in place allowing for thermal and structural movement. 1. Install roofing system with concealed clips and fasteners, except as otherwise recommended by manufacturer for specific circumstances. 2. Install pressure plates at locations indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. 3. Minimize field cutting of panels. Where field cutting is required, use methods that will not distort panel profiles. Use of torches for field cutting is prohibited. B. Accessories: Install necessary components that are required for complete roofing assembly, including flashings, gutters, downspouts, trim, moldings, closure strips, preformed crickets, caps, equipment curbs, rib closures, ridge closures, and similar roof accessory items. C. Roof Panels: Install metal roof panels in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, minimizing transverse joints except at junction with penetrations. 1. Form weathertight standing seams incorporating concealed clips, using an automatic mechanical seaming device approved by panel manufacturer. 2. Hand crimp seams around the clips, end laps and end of seam in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and "Field Seaming Tool Manual". 3. Provide sealant tape or other approved joint sealer at lapped panel joints. 4. Install sealant or sealant tape at end laps and side joints as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. D. Accessory Installation: 1. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA Architectural Sheet Manual Manual. Install Work with laps,joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. a. Expansion provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 18 inches of a corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 0741 13-4 Metal Roof Panels Re-Bid Construction Documents joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant(concealed within joints). 2. Pipe Flashing: Seal pipe penetrations and lightning protection penetrations using graduated rubber flashing boots, installed in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and recommendations. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect metal roof panel installation, including accessories. Report results in writing and submit to Owner and Architect. B. Remove and replace applications of metal roof panels where inspections indicated that they do not comply with specified requirements. C. Prior to installing and prior to covering or concealing the fasteners or connectors, the contractor shall notify the architect and engineer. Do not cover up fasteners without having them reviewed by the delegated design engineer. D. Contractor shall include in their bid amount the cost of windstorm-related construction observations and windstorm certification by an approved Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Texas. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean exposed sheet metal work at completion of installation. Remove grease and oil films, excess joint sealer, handling marks, and debris from installation, leaving the work clean and unmarked, free from dents, creases, waves, scratch marks, or other damage to the finish. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 0741 13-5 Metal Roof Panels Re-Bid Construction Documents ADDENDUM NO. 4 SECTION 07 42 13 METAL WALL PANELS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Manufactured metal panels for exterior wall panels, interior liner panels, soffit panels, retrofit panels, and subgirt framing assembly, with insulation, related flashings, and accessory components. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A792/A792M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process; 2023. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, layout,joints, construction details, methods of anchorage. 1. All components and cladding listed in the Texas Windstorm Approved Materials catalog shall have the appropriate product evaluation number indicated on the submittal. 2. Components and cladding not listed will require certification that they meet or exceed the wind speed design as indicated on structural engineering drawings by the manufacturer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Metal Wall Panels- Concealed Fasteners: 1. Berridge Manufacturing Company; HC-16 Panel: www.berridge.com/#sle. 2. McElroy Metal: www.mcelroymetal.com/#sle. B. Metal Soffit Panels: 1. Berridge Manufacturing Company; FW-12 Panel: www.berridge.com/#sle. 2. McElroy Metal: www.mcelroymetal.com/#sle. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.02 METAL WALL PANEL SYSTEM A. Wall Panel System: Factory fabricated prefinished metal panel system, site assembled. 1. Provide exterior wall panels, interior liner panels, soffit panels, retrofit wall panels, and subgirt framing assembly. 2. Design and size components to support assembly dead loads, and to withstand live loads caused by positive and negative wind pressure acting normal to plane of wall. 3. Maximum Allowable Deflection of Panel: L/180 for length(L) of span. 4. Movement: Accommodate movement within system without damage to components or deterioration of seals, movement between system and perimeter components when subject to seasonal temperature cycling; dynamic loading and release of loads; and deflection of structural support framing. 5. Drainage: Provide positive drainage to exterior for moisture entering or condensation occurring within panel system. 6. Fabrication: Formed true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects; pieces of longest practical lengths. 7. Corners: Factory-fabricated in one continuous piece with minimum 2-inch returns. 8. Wind Loads: Design wind loads as noted on structurel drawings. B. Exterior Wall Panels: 1. Profile: Horizontal; style as indicated. 2. Side Seams: Double-interlocked, tight-fitting, sealed with continuous gaskets. 3. Panel Width: 16 inches. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 0742 13- 1 Metal Wall Panels Re-Bid Construction Documents ADDENDUM NO. 4 C. Interior Liner Panels: 1. Profile: Horizontal; style as indicated. 2. Side Seams: Interlocking, sealed with continuous bead of sealant. 3. Panel Width: 16 inch. D. Soffit Panels: 1. Profile: Style as indicated, with venting provided. E. Subgirt Framing Assembly: hat channels, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 hot-dip galvanized coating designation. Provide manufacturer's standard sections as required for support and alignment of metal panel system. Provide fastener type and spacing as required for wind load design as noted on structural drawings. F. Internal and External Corners: Same material, thickness, and finish as exterior sheets; profile to suit system; shop cut and factory mitered to required angles. G. Expansion Joints: Same material, thickness and finish as exterior sheets; 22 gauge thick; manufacturer's standard brake formed type, of profile to suit system. H. Anchors: Galvanized steel. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Precoated Steel Sheet: Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet, ASTM A792/A792M, Commercial Steel (CS))or Forming Steel (FS), with AZ50/AZM150 coating; continuous-coil- coated on exposed surfaces with specified finish coating and on panel back with specified panel back coating. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that building framing members are ready to receive panels. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Install subgirts perpendicular to panel length, securely fastened to substrates and shimmed and leveled to uniform plane, and spaced as required for wind load design as noted on structural drawings. B. Protect surrounding areas and adjacent surfaces from damage during execution of this work. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install panels on walls and soffits in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Protect surfaces in contact with cementitious materials and dissimilar metals with bituminous paint; allow to dry prior to wall panel installation. C. Fasten panels to structural supports; aligned, level, and plumb. D. Locate joints over supports. E. Seal and place gaskets to prevent weather penetration. Maintain neat appearance. F. Prior to installing and prior to covering or concealing the fasteners or connectors, the contractor shall notify the architect and engineer. Do not cover up fasteners without having the reviewed by the delegated design engineer. G. Contractor shall include in their bid amount the cost of windstorm-related construction observations and windstorm certification by an approved Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Texas. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 0742 13-2 Metal Wall Panels Re-Bid Construction Documents ADDENDUM NO. 4 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove site cuttings from finish surfaces. B. Remove protective material from wall panel surfaces. C. Clean and wash prefinished surfaces with mild soap and water; rinse with clean water. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 0742 13-3 Metal Wall Panels Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 07 54 00 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Adhered system with thermoplastic roofing membrane. B. Insulation, flat and tapered. C. Cover boards. D. Flashings. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C1177/C1177M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing; 2017. B. ASTM C1289- Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board; 2023a. C. ASTM D6878/D6878M - Standard Specification for Thermoplastic Polyolefin-Based Sheet Roofing; 2021. D. ASTM E1980 -Standard Practice for Calculating Solar Reflectance Index of Horizontal and Low-Sloped Opaque Surfaces; 2011 (Reapproved 2019). E. FM IDS 1-28 -Wind Design; 2015, with Editorial Revision (2024). F. NRCA(RM)-The NRCA Roofing Manual; 2024. G. NRCA(WM)-The NRCA Waterproofing Manual; 2021. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating membrane materials, flashing materials, insulation, surfacing, and fasteners, sufficient to show that all components of roofing system comply with the specified requirements and with the manufacturer's requirements and recommendations for the system type specified; include data for each product used in conjuctions with roofing membrane. 1. Where UL or FM requirements are specified, provide documentation that shows that the roofing system to be installed is UL-Classified or FM-approved, as applicable; include data itemizing the components of the classified or approved system. C. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings that indicate joint or termination detail conditions, conditions of interface with other materials, setting plan for tapered insulation, and mechanical fastener layout. 1. All components and cladding listed in the Texas Windstorm Approved Materials catalog shall have the appropriate product evaluation number indicated on the submittal. 2. Components and cladding not listed will require certification that they meet or exceed the wind speed design as indicated on structural engineering drawings by the manufacturer. D. Installer's qualification statement. E. Warranty Documentation: 1. Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 2. Submit installer's written verification that installation complies with warranty conditions for waterproof membrane. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 07 54 00- 1 Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing Re-Bid Construction Documents 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of this section with at least five years of documented experience. B. Pre-Installation Conference: Before start of roofing work, Contractor shall schedule and hold a meeting to discuss the proper installation of materials and requirements to achieve the warranty. 1. Require the attendance of all parties directly influencing the quality of roofing work or affected by the performance of roofing work. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original containers, dry and undamaged, with seals and labels intact, unless otherwise indicated. B. Store materials in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture. C. Ensure storage and staging of materials does not exceed static and dynamic load-bearing capacities of roof decking. D. Protect foam insulation from direct exposure to sunlight. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not apply roofing membrane during unsuitable weather. B. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface or when precipitation is expected or occurring. C. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be weatherproofed the same day. D. Schedule applications so that no partially completed sections of roof are left exposed at end of workday. 1.07 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00- Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements. B. System Warranty: Provide manufacturer's system warranty agreeing to repair or replace roofing that leaks or is damaged due to wind or other natural causes. 1. Warranty Term: 20 years. 2. For repair and replacement include costs of both material and labor in warranty. 3. Exceptions are not Permitted: a. Damage due to wind speed greater than 72 mph but less than 81 mph. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Membrane Roofing Materials: 1. Carlisle SynTec Systems; Sure-Weld TPO: www.carlisle-syntec.com/#sle. 2. Elevate: www.holcimelevate.com/#sle. 3. GAF; EverGuard Extreme TPO 80 mil: www.gaf.com/#sle. 4. Versico Roofing Systems; VersiWeld TPO: www.versico.com/#sle. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Insulation: 1. Carlisle SynTec Systems; SecurShield Insulation: www.carlisle-syntec.com/#sle. 2. GAF: www.gaf.com/#sle. 3. Versico Roofing Systems; SecurShield Insulation: www.versico.com/#sle. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 07 54 00-2 Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing Re-Bid Construction Documents 2.02 ROOFING A. Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing: One ply membrane, fully adhered, over insulation. B. Roofing Assembly Requirements: 1. Solar Reflectance Index (SRI): 78, minimum, calculated in accordance with ASTM E1980. a. Field applied coating may not be used to achieve specified SRI. 2. Factory Mutual Classification: Class 1 and windstorm resistance of 1-90, in accordance with FM DS 1-28. Must be an approved assembly for Very Severe Hail (VSH). C. Acceptable Insulation Types- Constant Thickness Application: 1. Minimum 2 layers of polyisocyanurate board. D. Acceptable Insulation Types- Tapered Application: Polyisocyanurate . 2.03 MEMBRANE ROOFING AND ASSOCIATED MATERIALS A. Membrane Roofing Materials: 1. TPO: Thermoplastic polyolefin (TPO) complying with ASTM D6878/D6878M, sheet contains reinforcing fabrics or scrims. a. Thickness: 80 mil, 0.080 inch, minimum. 2. Sheet Width: a. Adhered Application: Limit width to 120 inches, maximum, when ambient temperatures are less than 40 degrees F for extended period of time during installation. 3. Color: White. B. Seaming Materials: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. C. Membrane Fasteners: As recommended and approved by membrane manufacturer. D. Flexible Flashing Material: Same material as membrane. 2.04 COVER BOARDS A. Cover Boards: Glass-mat faced gypsum panels complying with ASTM C1177/C1177M. 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch, fire-resistant. 2. Products: a. Georgia-Pacific; DensDeck: www.densdeck.com/#sle. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.05 INSULATION A. Polyisocyanurate (ISO) Board Insulation: Rigid cellular foam, complying with ASTM C1289. 1. Classifications: a. Type II: Faced with either cellulosic facers or glass fiber mat facers on both major surfaces of the core foam. 1) Class 1 - Faced with glass fiber reinforced cellulosic facers on both major surfaces of the core foam. 2) Compressive Strength: Classes 1-2-3, Grade 1, 16 psi (110 kPa), minimum. 3) Thermal Resistance, R-value: At 1-1/2 inches thick; Class 1, Grades 1-2-3, 8.4 (1.48), minimum, at 75 degrees F. 2. Board Size: 48 by 96 inches. 3. Board Thickness: 2.2 inch. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Stack Boots: Prefabricated flexible boot and collar for pipe stacks through membrane; same material as membrane. B. Insulation Fasteners: Appropriate for purpose intended and approved by roofing manufacturer. C. Membrane Adhesive: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. D. Sealants: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 07 54 00-3 Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing Re-Bid Construction Documents E. Conduit penetration flashing: Cast urethane flexible castings with horizontal sealant fill, color as selected; with manufacturer's recommended adhesive: Lockin Pocket System manufactured by WTT Systems or ChemCurb System manuactured by Chemlink, or approved equivalent. F. Fluid-Applied Membrane Penetration Flashing: Polyester fleece reinforcement encapsulated by a thixotropic material consisting of two coats of catalyzed PMMA resin. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work. B. Verify deck is supported and secure. C. Verify deck is clean and smooth, flat, free of depressions, waves, or projections, properly sloped and suitable for installation of roof system. D. Verify deck surfaces are dry and free of snow or ice. E. Verify that roof openings, curbs, and penetrations through roof are solidly set, and cant strips are in place. 3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Perform work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NRCA (RM), and NRCA(WM) applicable requirements. B. Do not apply roofing membrane during cold or wet weather conditions. C. Do not apply roofing membrane when ambient temperature is outside the temperature range recommended by manufacturer. D. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface or when precipitation is expected or occurring. E. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be weatherproofed the same day. F. Prior to installing and prior to covering or concealing the fasteners or connectors, the contractor shall notify the architect and engineer. Do not cover up fasteners without having them reviewed by the delegated design engineer. G. Contractor shall include in their bid amount the cost of windstorm-related construction observations and windstorm certification by an approved Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Texas. 3.03 INSTALLATION - MEMBRANE A. Membrane Application: Apply roofing in accordance with roofing system manufacturer's instructions and the following requirements. Application of roofing membrane components shall immediately follow application of base sheet and/or insulation as a continuous operation. B. Aesthetic Considerations: Construction of an aesthetically pleasing overall appearance of the finished roof application is a standard requirement for this project. Make necessary preparations, utilize recommended application techniques, apply the specified materials, and exercise care in ensuring that the finished application is acceptable to the Owner. C. Roll out membrane, free from wrinkles or tears. Place sheet into place without stretching. D. Shingle joints on sloped substrate in direction of drainage. E. Fully Adhered Application: Apply adhesive to substrate at rate as required by manufacturer to meet wind uplift requirements. F. Overlap edges and ends and seal seams by contact adhesive, minimum 3 inches. Seal permanently waterproof. Apply uniform bead of sealant to joint edge. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 07 54 00-4 Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing Re-Bid Construction Documents G. At intersections with vertical surfaces: 1. Extend membrane over cant strips and up a minimum of 4 inches onto vertical surfaces. 2. Fully adhere flexible flashing over membrane and up to nailing strips. H. Around roof penetrations, seal flanges and flashings with flexible flashing. I. Coordinate installation of roof drains and sumps and related flashings. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 40 00- Quality Requirements for additional requirements. B. Owner will provide testing services, and Contractor to provide temporary construction and materials for testing in accordance with requirements. C. Provide daily on-site attendance of roofing and insulation manufacturer's representative during installation of this work. 3.05 CLEANING A. See Section 01 70 00- Execution and Closeout Requirements for additional requirements. B. Remove bituminous markings from finished surfaces. C. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by work of this section, consult manufacturer of surfaces for cleaning advice and comply with their documented instructions. D. Repair or replace defaced or damaged finishes caused by work of this section. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect installed roofing and flashings from construction operations. B. Where traffic must continue over finished roof membrane, protect surfaces using durable materials. C. Where traffice must continue over finished roof membrane, protect surfaces as required to maintain roof membrane's initial Solar Reflective Index. D. Repair or replace uncleanable, defaced or damaged finishes caused by work of other construction operations. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 07 54 00-5 Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fabricated sheet metal items, including flashings, counterflashings, gutters, downspouts, and edge systems. B. Sealants for joints within sheet metal fabrications. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 10 53 - Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry: Wood nailers for sheet metal work. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA 2605-Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels (with Coil Coating Appendix); 2022. B. ANSI/SPRI/FM 4435/ES-1 -Test Standard for Edge Systems Used with Low Slope Roofing Systems; 2022. C. ASTM 13209/13209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2021 a. D. ASTM C920 -Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2018. E. ASTM D4586/D4586M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free; 2007 (Reapproved 2018). F. CDA A4050- Copper in Architecture- Handbook; current edition. G. ICC (IBC)- International Building Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. H. SMACNA(ASMM)-Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; 2012. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data Sheets: For each type of product indicated, include material descriptions, ASTM standards, and dimensions of individual components and profiles. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile,jointing pattern,jointing details, fastening methods, flashings, terminations, and installation details. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA(ASMM) requirementsand standard details, except as otherwise indicated. B. All sheet metal copings, fascia, gravel guards, and other metal edges must be designed and installed for wind loads in accordance with Chapter 16 of the ICC (IBC)and tested for resistance in accordance with Test Methods RE-1, RE-2, and RE-3 of ANSI/SPRI/FM 4435/ES- 1 to confirm and demonstrate performance under wind pressures generated by design wind speeds. C. Gutters that are used to secure the perimeter edge of the roof membrane on low-slope roofs (less than 2:12 slope) must be designed, constructed and installed to resist wind loads in accordance with Section 1609 of the ICC (IBC)and must be tested in accordance with Test Methods G-1 and G-2 of SPRI GT-1. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 07 62 00- 1 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Re-Bid Construction Documents 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage. B. Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration or staining. 1.07 MOCK-UPS A. Build in-place mock-ups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. Mock-ups to include each unique flashing condition, coping and other unique details. Approved mock-ups may remain as part of the Work. B. Additional mock-ups may be required to properly demonstrate acceptable workmanship. C. Approval of mock-ups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mock-ups unless Architect/Engineer specifically approves such deviations in writing. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Finish Warranty: Provide manufacturer's special warranty covering failure of factory-applied exterior finish on pre-finished metal that show evidence of finish degradation, including significant fading, chalking, cracking, or peeling within specified warranty period of 20 year period from date of Substantial Completion. 1. Color Fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D2244. 2. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D4214. B. Watertightness Warranty: Provide inclusive warranty with roofing system for flashings and copings associated with specified roofing. See roofing systems specified for warranty period. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET MATERIALS A. Pre-Finished Aluminum: ASTM 13209/13209M, 3005 alloy, H12 or H14 temper; 18 gauge, 0.040 inch thick; plain finish shop pre-coated with silicone modified polyester coating. 1. Polyvinylidene Fluoride (PVDF) Coating: Superior performing organic powder coating, AAMA 2605; pretreated metal with two-coat system including primer and color coat with at least 70 percent PVDF coating. 2. Color: As indicated on drawings. 2.02 GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS A. Gutters: SMACNA(ASMM), Rectangular profile; Style A, or as indicated on drawings. B. Downspouts: Rectangular profile. C. Gutters and Downspouts: Size for rainfall intensity determined by a storm occurrence of 1 in 10 years in accordance with SMACNA (ASMM). D. Accessories: Profiled to suit gutters and downspouts. 1. Anchorage Devices: In accordance with SMACNA(ASMM) requirements. 2. Gutter Supports and Wind Straps: Straps. 3. Downspout Supports: Brackets. E. Seal metal joints. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Galvanized steel, with soft neoprene washers. B. Secondary Waterproofing Membrane: Self-adhering, high-temperature sheet, 30 to 40 mils thick minimum consisting of slip-resisting, polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive with release paper backing; cold applied. C. Primer Type: Zinc chromate. D. Concealed Sealants: Non-curing butyl sealant. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 07 62 00-2 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Re-Bid Construction Documents E. Sealant Tape: Polyisobutylene butyl elastic tape; 1/8 inch thickness x 3/4 inch minimum width for use between metal connections, behind flashing termination bars, lap joints in metal flashings and at coping seams. F. Exposed Sealants: ASTM C920; elastomeric sealant, with minimum movement capability as recommended by manufacturer for substrates to be sealed; color to match adjacent material. G. Asphalt Roof Cement: ASTM D4586/D4586M, Type I, asbestos-free. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Fabricate all sheet metal to exact, uniform and consistent dimensions and ensure that all profiles are properly fitted and well seated, particularly backer plates and cover plates. B. Form pieces in longest possible lengths to minimize joints. C. Terminations and Intersections: Where flashings terminate or intersect, utilize and comply with methods and procedures as outlined in the latest editions of SMACNA's Architectural Sheet Metal Manual and the NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manuals. Construct terminations and intersections as separate, fixed components independent from intersecting, continuous flashings in such a manner as to absorb thermal movement of adjacent components without stress on on mitered joints of terminations and intersections. Each corner leg shall be approximately 18-inch long on each leg. D. Conflict Resolution and Authority: If any metal flashing component of any flashing is not specifically covered by these Specifications or Drawings, each shall comply with the theory and intent of construction details published by SMACNA's Architectural Sheet Metal Manual and National Roofing Contractor's Association. E. Dissimilar Metals: In no case, shall dissimilar metals come into contact with each other, nor shall a flashing be constructed in such a way as to permit water from running off of one type of metal onto another where chemical reaction or corrosion may occur. F. Lumber: Galvanized steel or sheet metal components, other than screw or anchors, shall not come into contact with lumber. A separation barrier, such as self-adhering waterproof membrane, duct tape, or a#30 asphalt saturated felt, shall be used as a permanent separator. G. Use of Sealants: Sealants shall be used to provide secondary moisture protection, not primary. Wherever elastomeric sealant is used, it shall be applied beneath the components to be sealed and both surfaces primed in accordance with sealant manufacturer's recommendations. Failure to prime surfaces of components to be sealed will be grounds for removal. Where the sealant cannot be removed or the surface cleaned, the substrate material, or sheet metal shall be removed and replaced with clean material in its entirety. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, reglets in place, and nailing strips located. B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure. C. Ensure that all wood blocking and nailers are secured properly to structure or metal deck. Blocking for coping and metal parapet caps is installed in a continuously level, smooth elevation and properly sloped for drainage. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation. B. Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil, 0.015 inch. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 07 62 00-3 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Re-Bid Construction Documents 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Gutters and Downspouts: 1. Gutters shall be fabricated from pre-finished 24 gauge galvanized metal. Downspouts shall be made of the same material, except interior or concealed downspouts, which shall be PVC, or cast iron as may be required by local codes or specified differently elsewhere. 2. Gutters shall be formed in such a manner as to provide positive slope to downspouts. Standing water in gutters will not be acceptable. 3. Support spacers shall be 1/8 inch thick galvanized metal and attached with stainless steel screws, not pop rivets. 4. Gutter support brackets consisting of 1/8 inch galvanized metal shall be installed every 36 inches and 6 inches from each end. Support brackets shall be covered with prefinished metal of matching color to the gutter. Gutter wind straps (separate from the hangers/spacers) spaced not more than 72 inches on center. 5. Downspouts shall be supported with a minimum of two straps per downspout regardless of length and shall have additional straps as required by SMACNA for greater lengths. Straps shall be be the same finish as the downspout and be fastened behind the downspout to conceal the flanges. 6. Gutters shall have expansion joints at a minimum spacing of 30-foot on-center or as specified by SMACNA, whichever is more stringent. Expansion joints shall be lap type or butt type, contractor's option, in accordance with SMACNA Plate 7 or 8. 7. Unless otherwise detailed on the drawings, the maximum downspout spacing permitted is 30 feet on-center.. 8. Gutters shall be formed and joined in such a manner as not to leak at the joints. Leaking gutter joints are a defect and will not be accepted. B. Copings and Cap Flashings: 1. Secondary waterproofing membrane shall be installed over the wood blocking and extending down to 1 inch below bottom of nailer and over the top of base flashing or other wall moisture protection a minimum of 1 inch. 2. A continuous metal clip, made one full guage heavier than metal coping, shall be attached to the outside of the nailer. Extend clip a minimum of 1-1/2 inch below wood blocking and anchored at 6 inches o.c. 3. Joints shall be secured by means of a single lock, button punched standing seam or a mininum 2-1/2 inch width cover plate with tape sealant on each side of joint. Cover plate shall match profile of coping and shall be continuous front to back. 4. Coping to be secured on the outside face by means of crimping the outside flange tightly over the continuous clip and on reverse side with screws through a slotted hole with neoprene washers at 24 inches on center. C. Expansion Joints: 1. Factory-made Components: All terminations, tees, crossovers, and other necessary assemblies shall be as manufactured for that purpose, and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, SMACNA or NRCA, whichever is the more stringent. 2. Shop Fabricated Sheet Metal Type: Where shown in the Drawings, expansion joint covers shall be constructed of 24 gauge, G-90 galvanized metal. Joint covers shall have vertical standing seam ribs at all end laps or joints. 3. Roof-to-Wall Expansion Joints: Where shown on drawings, roof-to-wall expansion joints shall have secondary waterproofing beneath the metal cover. D. Fit flashings tight in place; make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles. E. Counterflashings: 1. Walls and elevation changes: Fabricate sheet metal counterflashings of the approximate dimensions and configurations shown on the Drawings, or as necessary to overlap base flashings a minimum of 4 inches. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 07 62 00-4 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Re-Bid Construction Documents 2. Equipment: Equipment flanges cannot be a substitute for separate two-piece counterflashing. All equipment must have a separate receiver and counterflashing beneath the equipment flange. 3. Expansion Provisions: Fabricate all counterflashings in such a manner that each may be removed and reinstalled if necessary. Provide for differential movement between base flashing and counterflashing assemblies at all locations. 4. Wind Clips: All counterflashings at walls shall have a 2 inch wide wind clips at 24 inches o.c. in accordance with SMACNA. F. Seal metal joints watertight. G. Secure gutters and downspouts in place with fasteners. 1. Gutter support brackets to be installed at 3 feet o.c., and 6 inches from each end. 2. Gutters shall have expansion joints at a maximum spacing of 30 feet o.c. 3. Gutter joints shall be formed and joined in such a manner as not to leak at the joints. 4. Downspouts shall be supported with a minimum of two straps per downspout. 5. Downspout spacing shall not be greater than 30 feet on center. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 07 62 00-5 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 07 72 00 ROOF ACCESSORIES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non-penetrating pedestals. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc(Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2017. B. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2023. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used. 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. 4. Maintenance requirements. C. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed layout developed for this project. Show dimensioned location and number for each type of roof accessory. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Store products under cover and elevated above grade. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 NON-PENETRATING ROOFTOP SUPPORTS/ASSEMBLIES A. Non-Penetrating Rooftop Support/Assemblies: Manufacturer-engineered and factory- fabricated, with pedestal bases that rest on top of roofing membrane, and not requiring any attachment to roof structure and not penetrating roofing assembly. 1. Design Loadings and Configurations: As required by applicable codes. 2. Height: Provide minimum clearance of 6 inches under supported items to top of roofing. 3. Support Spacing and Base Sizes: As required to distribute load sufficiently to prevent indentation of roofing assembly. 4. Steel Components: Stainless steel, or carbon steel hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM Al23/A123M. 5. Hardware, Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Stainless steel, or carbon steel hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM Al 53/A153M. 6. Products: a. PHP Systems/Design: www.phpsd.com/#sle. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Non-Penetrating Pedestals: Steel pedestals with square, round, or rectangular bases. 1. Bases: High density polypropylene. 2. Base Sizes: As required to distribute load sufficiently to prevent indentation of roofing assembly. 3. Steel Components: Stainless steel, or carbon steel hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM Al23/A123M. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 07 72 00- 1 Roof Accessories Re-Bid Construction Documents PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using methods recommended by manufacturer for achieving acceptable results for applicable substrate under project conditions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install all products and components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, in manner that maintains roofing weather integrity. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Clean installed work to like-new condition. B. Protect installed products until completion of project. C. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 07 72 00-2 Roof Accessories Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Firestopping of all joints and penetrations in fire resistance rated and smoke resistant assemblies, whether indicated on drawings or not, and other openings indicated. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM E814 -Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Penetration Firestop Systems; 2023a. B. ASTM E2837 -Standard Test Method for Determining the Fire Resistance of Continuity Head- of-Wall Joint Systems Installed between Rated Wall Assemblies and Nonrated Horizontal Assemblies; 2023a. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Schedule of Firestopping: List each type of penetration. C. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance ratings, and limitations. D. Installer's qualification statement. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire Testing: Provide firestopping assemblies of designs that provide the scheduled fire ratings when tested in accordance with methods indicated. 1. Valid evaluation report published by ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (ICC-ES)at www.icc- es.org will be considered as constituting an acceptable test report. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section and: 1. Trained by manufacturer. 1.05 MOCK-UPS A. Install one firestopping assembly representative of each fire rating design required on project. 1. Where one design may be used for different penetrating items or in different wall constructions, install one assembly for each different combination. 2. Where firestopping is intended to fill a linear opening, install at least 1 linear foot of firestopping. B. If accepted, mock-up will represent minimum standard for this work. C. If accepted, mock-up may remain as part of this work. Remove and replace mock-ups not accepted. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with firestopping manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and conditions during and after installation; maintain minimum temperature before, during, and for three days after installation of materials. B. Provide ventilation in areas where solvent-cured materials are being installed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Firestopping Manufacturers: 1. 3M Fire Protection Products: www.3m.com/firestop/#sle. 2. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc: www.adfire.com/#sle. 3. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com/#sle. 4. Nelson FireStop Products: www.nelsonfirestop.com/#sle. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 07 84 00- 1 Firestopping Re-Bid Construction Documents 5. Specified Technologies Inc: www.stifirestop.com/#sle. 6. Tremco Commercial Sealants &Waterproofing; TREMstop Acrylic: www.tremcosealants.com/#sle. 7. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Firestopping Materials: Any materials meeting requirements. B. Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Provide type of materials as required for tested firestopping assembly. C. Fire Ratings: Refer to drawings for required systems an ratings. 2.03 FIRESTOPPING ASSEMBLY REQUIREMENTS A. Head-of-Wall (HW)Joint System Firestopping at Joints Between Fire-Rated Wall Assemblies and Non-Rated Horizontal Assemblies: Use system that has been tested according to ASTM E2837 to have fire resistance F Rating equal to required fire rating of wall assembly. B. Through Penetration Firestopping: Use system that has been tested according to ASTM E814 to have fire resistance F Rating equal to required fire rating of penetrated assembly. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify openings are ready to receive the work of this section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other materials that could adversely affect bond of firestopping material. B. Remove incompatible materials that could adversely affect bond. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in manner described in fire test report and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, completely closing openings. B. Do not cover installed firestopping until inspected by authorities having jurisdiction. C. At completion of each penetration seal, apply a label/sticker in a concealed location adjacent to the seal/sticker. Each label/sticker shall indicate: 1. UL system number, 2. hourly rating, 3. system manufacturer, and 4. installing contractor. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 07 84 00-2 Firestopping Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Nonsag gunnable joint sealants. B. Self-leveling pourable joint sealants. C. Joint backings and accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 21 16 -Gypsum Board Assemblies: Sealing acoustical and sound-rated walls and ceilings. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C661 -Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Elastomeric-Type Sealants by Means of a Durometer; 2015 (Reapproved 2022). B. ASTM C794 -Standard Test Method for Adhesion-in-Peel of Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2018 (Reapproved 2022). C. ASTM C834 -Standard Specification for Latex Sealants; 2017 (Reapproved 2023). D. ASTM C919-Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications; 2022. E. ASTM C920 -Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2018. F. ASTM C1087- Standard Test Method for Determining Compatibility of Liquid-Applied Sealants with Accessories Used in Structural Glazing Systems; 2023. G. ASTM C1193- Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2016 (Reapproved 2023). H. ASTM C1248- Standard Test Method for Staining of Porous Substrate by Joint Sealants; 2022. I. ASTM C1311 - Standard Specification for Solvent Release Sealants; 2022. J. ASTM C1330- Standard Specification for Cylindrical Sealant Backing for Use with Cold Liquid- Applied Sealants; 2023. K. ASTM D2240- Standard Test Method for Rubber Property--Durometer Hardness; 2015 (Reapproved 2021). L. SWRI (VAL)-SWR Institute Validated Products Directory; Current Edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical datasheets for each product to be used; include the following: 1. Physical characteristics, including movement capability, VOC content, hardness, cure time, and color availability. 2. List of backing materials approved for use with the specific product. 3. Backing material recommended by sealant manufacturer. 4. Substrates that product is known to satisfactorily adhere to and with which it is compatible. 5. Substrates the product should not be used on. 6. Substrates for which use of primer is required. 7. Installation instructions, including precautions, limitations, and recommended backing materials and tools. 8. Sample product warranty. 9. SWRI Validation: Provide currently available sealant product validations as listed by SWRI (VAL)for specified sealants. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 07 92 00- 1 Joint Sealants Re-Bid Construction Documents C. Product Data for Accessory Products: Submit manufacturer's technical data sheet for each product to be used, including physical characteristics, installation instructions, and recommended tools. D. Samples for Verification: Where custom sealant color is specified, obtain directions from Architect and submit at least two physical samples for verification of color of each required sealant. E. Preconstruction Laboratory Test Reports: Submit at least four weeks prior to start of installation. F. Executed warranty. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section and with at least three years of documented experience. B. Preconstruction Laboratory Testing: Arrange for sealant manufacturer(s)to test each combination of sealant, substrate, backing, and accessories. 1. Adhesion Testing: In accordance with ASTM C794. 2. Compatibility Testing: In accordance with ASTM C1087. 3. Stain Testing: In accordance with ASTM C1248; required only for stone substrates. 4. Allow sufficient time for testing to avoid delaying the work. 5. Deliver sufficient samples to manufacturer for testing. 6. Report manufacturer's recommended corrective measures, if any, including primers or techniques not indicated in product data submittals. 7. Testing is not required if sealant manufacturer provides data showing previous testing, not older than 24 months, that shows satisfactory adhesion, lack of staining, and compatibility. 1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00- Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements. B. Manufacturer Warranty: Provide 2-year manufacturer warranty for installed sealants and accessories that fail to achieve a watertight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. Complete forms in Owner's name and register with manufacturer. C. Correct defective work with a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Nonsag Sealants: Permits application in joints on vertical surfaces without sagging or slumping. 1. Dow: www.dow.com/#sle. 2. Master Builders Solutions: www.master-builders-solutions.com/en-us/#sle. 3. Momentive Performance Materials, Inc (formerly GE Silicones): www.momentive.com/#sle. 4. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com/#sle. 5. Sika Corporation: www.usa.sika.com/#sle. 6. Tremco Commercial Sealants &Waterproofing: www.tremcosealants.com/#sle. 7. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Self-Leveling Sealants: Pourable or self-leveling sealant that has sufficient flow to form a smooth, level surface when applied in a horizontal joint. 1. Dow Corning Coporation: www.dowcorning.com/#sle. 2. Tremco Commercial Sealants &Waterproofing: www.tremcosealants.com/#sle. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 07 92 00-2 Joint Sealants Re-Bid Construction Documents 2.02 JOINT SEALANT APPLICATIONS A. Scope: 1. Exterior Joints: a. Seal open joints except open joints indicated on drawings as not sealed. b. Seal the following joints: 1) Wall expansion and control joints. 2) Joints between doors, windows, and other frames or adjacent construction. 3) Joints between different exposed materials. 4) Otherjoints indicated below. 2. Interior Joints: a. Do not seal interior joints indicated on drawings as not sealed. b. Seal the following joints: 1) Joints between door frames and window frames and adjacent construction. 2) In sound-rated wall and ceiling assemblies, gaps at electrical outlets, wiring devices, and piping penetrations. 3. Do Not Seal: a. Intentional weep holes in masonry. b. Joints indicated to be covered with expansion joint cover assemblies. c. Joints where sealant is specified to be furnished and installed by manufacturer of product to be sealed. d. Joints where sealant installation is specified in other sections. e. Joints between suspended ceilings and walls. B. Type 1 - Exterior Joints: Use nonsag nonstaining silicone sealant, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Type 6- Lap Joints in Sheet Metal Fabrications: Butyl rubber, noncuring. 2. Type 6- Lap Joints between Manufactured Metal Panels: Butyl rubber, noncuring. 3. Type 7- Control and Expansion Joints in Concrete Paving: Self-leveling polyurethane traffic-grade sealant. C. Type 3- Interior Joints: Use nonsag polyurethane sealant, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Type 4-Wall and Ceiling Joints in Nonwet Areas: Acrylic emulsion latex sealant. 2. Type 2-Wall and Ceiling Joints in Wet Areas: Nonsag polyurethane sealant for continuous liquid immersion. 3. Type 5- Floor Joints in Wet Areas: Nonsag polyurethane non-traffic-grade sealant suitable for continuous liquid immersion. 4. Type 5- In Sound-Rated Assemblies: Acrylic emulsion latex sealant. D. Interior Wet Areas: Bathrooms, restrooms, kitchens, and food service areas; fixtures in wet areas include plumbing fixtures, food service equipment, countertops, cabinets, and other similar items. E. Sound-Rated Assemblies: Walls and ceilings identified as STC-rated, sound-rated, or acoustical. 2.03 NONSAG JOINT SEALANTS A. Type 1 - Nonstaining Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Uses M and A; not expected to withstand continuous water immersion or traffic. 1. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 50 percent, minimum. 2. Nonstaining to Porous Stone: Nonstaining to light-colored natural stone when tested in accordance with ASTM C1248. 3. Dirt Pick-Up: Reduced dirt pick-up compared to other silicone sealants. 4. Hardness Range: 15 to 35, Shore A, when tested in accordance with ASTM C661. 5. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. 6. Products: a. Dow; DOWSIL 795 Silicone Building Sealant: www.dow.com/#sle. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 07 92 00-3 Joint Sealants Re-Bid Construction Documents b. Tremco Commercial Sealants &Waterproofing; Spectrem 4-TS: www.tremcosealants.com/#sle. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Type 2- Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Uses M and A; single component, mildew resistant; not expected to withstand continuous water immersion or traffic. 1. Color: White. C. Type 3- Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Uses M and A; single or multi- component; not expected to withstand continuous water immersion or traffic. 1. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 50 percent, minimum. 2. Hardness Range: 20 to 35, Shore A, when tested in accordance with ASTM C661. 3. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. 4. Products: a. Tremco Commercial Sealants &Waterproofing; Dymonic 100: www.tremcosealants.com/#sle. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. D. Type 4-Acrylic-Urethane Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Uses M and A; single component; paintable; not expected to withstand continuous water immersion or traffic. 1. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 12-1/2 percent, minimum. 2. Products: a. Sherwin-Williams Company; Shermax Urethanized Elastomeric Sealant: www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. E. Type 5-Acrylic Emulsion Latex: Water-based; ASTM C834, single component, nonstaining, nonbleeding, nonsagging; not intended for exterior use. 1. Grade: ASTM C834; Grade 0 Degrees F (Minus 18 Degrees C). 2. Products: a. Hilti, Inc; CP 506 Smoke and Acoustical Sealant: www.us.hilti.com/#sle. b. Specified Technologies Inc; Smoke N' Sound Acoustical Sealant: www.stifirestop.com/#sle. c. Tremco Commercial Sealants &Waterproofing; Tremstop Smoke and Sound: www.tremcosealants.com/#sle. F. Type 6- Noncuring Butyl Sealant: Solvent-based, single component, nonsag, nonskinning, nonhardening, nonbleeding; nonvapor permeable; intended for fully concealed applications. 1. Products: a. Tremco Commercial Sealants &Waterproofing; Acoustical/Curtainwall Sealant: www.tremcosealants.com/#sle. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.04 SELF-LEVELING JOINT SEALANTS A. Type 7- Self-Leveling Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade P, Uses M and A; single or multicomponent; explicitly approved by manufacturer for traffic exposure; not expected to withstand continuous water immersion . 1. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent, minimum. 2. Hardness Range: 35 to 55, Shore A, when tested in accordance with ASTM C661. 3. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to 180 degrees F. 5. Products: a. Sika Corporation; Sikaflex-1c SL: www.usa.sika.com/#sle. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 07 92 00-4 Joint Sealants Re-Bid Construction Documents B. Type 8- Semi-Rigid Self-Leveling Epoxy Joint Filler: Epoxy or epoxy/polyurethane copolymer; intended for filling cracks and control joints not subject to significant movement; rigid enough to support concrete edges under traffic. 1. Composition: Multicomponent, 100 percent solids by weight. 2. Durometer Hardness: Minimum of 85 for Type A or 35 for Type D, after seven days when tested in accordance with ASTM D2240. 3. Color: Concrete gray. 4. Joint Width, Minimum: 1/8 inch. 5. Joint Width, Maximum: 1/4 inch. 6. Joint Depth: Provide product suitable for joints from 1/8 inch to 2 inches in depth including space for backer rod. 7. Products: a. Dayton Superior Corporation: www.daytonsuperior.com/#sle. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Sealant Backing Materials, General: Materials placed in joint before applying sealants; assists sealant performance and service life by developing optimum sealant profile and preventing three-sided adhesion; type and size recommended by sealant manufacturer for compatibility with sealant, substrate, and application. B. Sealant Backing Rod, Closed-Cell Type: 1. Cylindrical flexible sealant backings complying with ASTM C1330 Type C. 2. Size: 25 to 50 percent larger in diameter than joint width. C. Sealant Backing Rod, Bi-Cellular Type: 1. Cylindrical flexible sealant backings complying with ASTM C1330 Type B. 2. Size: 25 to 33 percent larger in diameter than joint width. D. Backing Tape: Self-adhesive polyethylene tape with surface that sealant will not adhere to and recommended by tape and sealant manufacturers for specific application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that joints are ready to receive work. B. Verify that backing materials are compatible with sealants. C. Verify that backer rods are of the correct size. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant. B. Clean joints, and prime as necessary, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193. D. Mask elements and surfaces adjacent to joints from damage and disfigurement due to sealant work; be aware that sealant drips and smears may not be completely removable. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install this work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions. B. Provide joint sealant installations complying with ASTM C1193. C. Install acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C919. D. Install bond breaker backing tape where backer rod cannot be used. E. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags, and without getting sealant on adjacent surfaces. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 07 92 00-5 Joint Sealants Re-Bid Construction Documents F. Do not install sealant when ambient temperature is outside manufacturer's recommended temperature range, or will be outside that range during the entire curing period, unless manufacturer's approval is obtained and instructions are followed. G. Nonsag Sealants: Tool surface concave, unless otherwise indicated; remove masking tape immediately after tooling sealant surface. H. Concrete Floor Joint Filler: After full cure, shave joint filler flush with top of concrete slab. 3.04 POST-OCCUPANCY A. Post-Occupancy Inspection: Perform visual inspection of entire length of project sealant joints at a time that joints have opened to their greatest width, i.e., at low temperature in thermal cycle. Report failures immediately and repair them. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 07 92 00-6 Joint Sealants Re-Bid Construction Documents ADDENDUM NO. 4 SECTION 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non-fire-rated hollow metal doors and frames. B. Hollow metal frames for wood doors. C. Thermally insulated hollow metal doors with frames. D. Hurricane-resistant hollow metal doors and frames. E. Accessories, including glazing. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware. B. Section 08 80 00 -Glazing: Glass for doors and borrowed lites. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ADA Standards-2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design; 2010. B. ANSI/SDI A250.4 -Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel Doors, Frames and Frame Anchors; 2022. C. ANSI/SDI A250.8-Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames (SDI-100); 2023. D. ANSI/SDI A250.10-Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames; 2020. E. ASCE 7- Minimum Design Loads and Associated Criteria for Buildings and Other Structures; Most Recent Edition Cited by Referring Code or Reference Standard. F. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc- Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2023. G. ASTM A1008/A1008M -Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Required Hardness, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable; 2023, with Editorial Revision. H. ASTM Al011/A1011 M -Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength; 2023. I. ASTM E330/E330M - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2014 (Reapproved 2021). J. BHMA Al56.115- Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Frames; 2016. K. FBC TAS 201 - Impact Test Procedures; Testing Application Standard; 1994. L. FBC TAS 202 - Criteria for Testing Impact and Non-Impact Resistant Building Envelope Components Using Uniform Static Air Pressure; Testing Application Standard; 1994. M. FBC TAS 203- Criteria for Testing Products Subject To Cyclic Wind Pressure Loading; Testing Application Standard; 1994. N. FLA(PAD)- Florida Building Code Online- Product Approval Directory; Current Edition. O. ICC A117.1 -Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; 2017. P. Miami (APD)-Approved Products Directory; Miami-Dade County; Current Edition. Q. NAAMM HMMA 830- Hardware Selection for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; 2002. R. NAAMM HMMA 831 - Hardware Locations for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; 2011. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 08 11 13- 1 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Re-Bid Construction Documents ADDENDUM NO. 4 S. NAAMM HMMA 840- Guide Specifications For Receipt, Storage and Installation of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; 2017. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations, reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes; and one copy of referenced standards/guidelines. C. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and any indicated finish requirements. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with NAAMM HMMA 840 or ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100) in accordance with specified requirements. B. Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion and adverse effects on factory applied painted finish. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: 1. Assa Abloy Ceco, Curries, or Fleming: www.assaabloydss.com. 2. Republic Doors, an Allegion brand: www.republicdoor.com/#sle. 3. Steelcraft, an Allegion brand: www.allegion.com/us. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Hurricane-Resistant and Tornado-Resistant Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: 1. Republic Doors, an Allegion brand: www.republicdoor.com/#sle. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Requirements for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: 1. Steel Sheet: Comply with one or more of the following requirements; galvannealed steel complying with ASTM A653/A653M, cold-rolled steel complying with ASTM A1008/A1008M, or hot-rolled pickled and oiled (HRPO) steel complying with ASTM A1011/A1011 M, commercial steel (CS)Type B, for each. 2. Accessibility: Comply with ICC A117.1 and ADA Standards. 3. Exterior Door Top Closures: Flush end closure channel, with top and door faces aligned. 4. Door Edge Profile: Manufacturers standard for application indicated. 5. Typical Door Face Sheets: Flush. 6. Hardware Preparations, Selections and Locations: Comply with NAAMM HMMA 830 and NAAMM HMMA 831 or BHMA Al56.115 and ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-1 00) in accordance with specified requirements. 7. Galvanizing : Components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness a. Based on SDI Standards: Provide at least A40/ZF120 (galvannealed)when necessary, coating not required for typical interior door applications, and at least A60/ZF180 (galvannealed)for corrosive locations. B. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more than one type of requirement, comply with the specified requirements for each type; for instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with the requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound-rated doors; where two requirements conflict, comply with the most stringent. C. Comply with Texas Windstorm detail Standards. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 08 11 13-2 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Re-Bid Construction Documents ADDENDUM NO. 4 2.03 HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. Door Finish: Factory primed and field finished. B. ExteFOOF Dews: TheFFnally insulated. 1. vrctaera,vrrvv -c259.8-(SDI r1-vv)i Level r Heavy-Duty,-r-rrys+6arr v^mM.c".Ree Lea/£r DQ nnedel 1 Full Cr a. . b. ZiRG GeatingAF0rZ=Fn�alvannealed Gea ' ncTnn na inati nn 2. Gere: Pely rn+hnnn. 3. flnnr Thn al Re Vall Un of S2 7 fnr i + cSS-0f S+St&ram.: R , , "'et ed pelyureth'unne. 4. _Deer Th lrukpess: 1_3/4 ho I rr�-n=rvc r, S�ivrrtnic'lr. 5. 1A/ R for+ C +inn nQ 71 nn C. Interior Doors, Non-Fire-Rated: 1. Based on SDI Standards: ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100). a. Level 2 - Heavy-duty. b. Physical Performance Level C, 250,000 cycles; in accordance with ANSI/SDI A250.4. C. Model 1 - Full Flush. d. Door Face Metal Thickness: 20 gauge, 0.032 inch, minimum. 2. Door Core Material: Manufacturers standard core material/construction and in compliance with requirements. 3. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inches, nominal. D. All Exterior Doors , Hurricane-Resistant Doors: 1. Door Core Material: Vertical steel stiffeners with mineral wool batts. 2. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. 3. Comply with Florida Building Code (FBC) test protocols for High Velocity Hurricane Zone (HVHZ) FBC TAS 201, FBC TAS 202 and FBC TAS 203. 4. Design and size door and frame components to withstand the specified load requirements without damage or permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E330/E330M. a. Design Wind Loads: Comply with requirements of ASCE 7. b. Wind-Borne Debris Resistance: Door and frame components shall have FLA (PAD) approval or Miami (APD) approval for Large and Small Missile impact and pressure cycling at design wind loads. 5. Based on SDI Standards: ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100). a. Level 3 -Extra Heavy-duty. b. Physical Performance Level A, 1,000,000 cycles; in accordance with ANSI/SDI A250.4. c. Model 1 - Full Flush. d. Door Face Metal Thickness: 16 gauge, 0.053 inch, minimum. 6. Door Core Material: Manufacturers standard core material/construction and in compliance with requirements. 7. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inches, nominal. 2.04 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. Comply with standards and/or custom guidelines as indicated for corresponding door in accordance with applicable door frame requirements. B. Frame Finish: Factory primed and field finished. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 08 11 13-3 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Re-Bid Construction Documents ADDENDUM NO. 4 C. Exterior Door Frames: Full profile/continuously welded type, with custom backbend as detailed on drawaings 1. Galvanizing: Components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with A40/ZF120 coating. 2. Frame Metal Thickness: 16 gage, 0.053 inch, minimum. 3. Profile: As indicated on drawings with custom backbend at exterior face for flashing. 4. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 71 00. D. Interior Door Frames, Non-Fire Rated: Full profile/continuously welded type. 1. Frame Metal Thickness: 18 gauge, 0.042 inch, minimum. E. Hurricane-Resistant Door Frames: With same hurricane resistance as door; full profile/continuously welded construction, ground smooth, fully prepared and reinforced for hardware installation. 1. Frame Metal Thickness: 16 gauge, 0.053 inch, minimum. F. Frames for Wood Doors: Comply with frame requirements in accordance with corresponding door. 2.05 FINISHES A. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Door Window Frames: Door window frames with glazing securely fastened within door opening. 1. Size: As indicated on drawings. 2. Frame Material: 20 gage, .0329 inch, galvanized steel, factory primed for field painting. 3. Glazing: 1/4 inch thick, tempered glass, in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Manufacturers: a. Anemostat Door Products; LoPro-IS Style: www.anemostat.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 80 00, field installed. C. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; provide three on strike side of single door, three on center mullion of pairs, and two on head of pairs without center mullions. D. Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for factory-or shop-assembled frames. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Prep door and frame to accommodate existing hardware configuration. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install doors and frames in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and related requirements of specified door and frame standards or custom guidelines indicated. B. Coordinate frame anchor type, quantity and placement with wall construction. C. Install door hardware as specified in Section 08 71 00. D. Touch up damaged factory finishes. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 08 11 13-4 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 08 1416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART1 GENERAL A. Flush wood doors; flush configuration; fire rated and non-rated. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. B. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NEMA LID 3- High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; 2005. B. NFPA 80-Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2022. C. UL 10C- Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. D. WDMA I.S. 1A- Interior Architectural Wood Flush Doors; 2021, with Errata (2022). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and characteristics. C. Shop Drawings: Show doors and frames, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts, beveling, blocking for hardware, factory machining, factory finishing, cutouts for glazing and other details. D. Samples: Submit two samples of door construction, 5 by 5 inches in size cut from top corner of door. E. Samples: Submit two samples of door veneer, 8 by 10 inches in size illustrating wood grain, stain color, and sheen. F. Specimen warranty. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum five years ofdocumented experience. B. Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard. 1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00- Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Wood Veneer Faced Doors: 1. Haley Brothers: www.haleybros.com. 2. Marshfield DoorSystems, Inc; a Masonite Architectural company: www.marshfielddoors.com. Contact Amanda Barkema; (541) 647.3285. 3. VT Industries, Inc: www.vtindustries.com/#sle. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.02 DOORS AND PANELS A. Doors: See drawings for locations and additional requirements. 1. Quality Standard: Custom Grade, Heavy Duty performance, in accordance with WDMA I.S. 1A. 2. Wood Veneer Faced Doors: 5-ply unless otherwise indicated. 3. High Pressure Decorative Laminate (HPDL) Faced Doors: 5-ply unless otherwise indicated. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 08 14 16- 1 Flush Wood Doors Re-Bid Construction Documents B. Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches thick unless otherwise indicated; flush construction. 1. Provide solid core doors at each location. 2. Fire Rated Doors: Tested to ratings indicated on drawings in accordance with UL 10C- Positive Pressure; Underwriters Laboratories Inc(UL) or Intertek/Warnock Hersey (WHI) labeled without any visible seals when door is open. 3. High pressure decorative laminate (HPDL)finish as indicated on drawings. 2.03 DOOR AND PANEL CORES A. Non-Rated Solid Core and 20 Minute Rated Doors: Type structural composite lumber core (SCLC), plies and faces as indicated. B. Fire-Rated Doors: Mineral core type, with fire resistant composite core (FD), plies and faces as indicated above; with core blocking as required to provide adequate anchorage of hardware without through-bolting. 2.04 DOOR FACINGS A. Veneer Facing for Transparent Finish: White birch, veneer grade in accordance with quality standard indicated, select rotary, with book match between leaves of veneer, running match of spliced veneer leaves assembled on door or panel face. 2.05 DOOR CONSTRUCTION A. Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified. B. Cores Constructed with stiles and rails: 1. Provide solid blocks at lock edge for hardware reinforcement. C. Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface-mounted hardware, in accordance with hardware requirements and dimensions. D. Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings, with edge clearances in accordance with specified quality standard. E. Provide edge clearances in accordance with the quality standard specified. 2.06 FINISHES-WOOD VENEER DOORS A. Finish work in accordance with WDMA I.S. 1A for grade specified and as follows: 1. Transparent: a. System -TR-8, UV Cured Acrylated Polyester/Urethane. b. Sheen: Flat. B. Factory finish doors in accordance with approved sample. C. Seal door top edge with color sealer to match door facing. 2.07 ACCESSORIES A. Hollow Metal Door Frames: See Section 08 11 13. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standard. 1. Install fire-rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80 requirements. B. Factory-Finished Doors: Do not field cut or trim; if fit or clearance is not correct, replace door. C. Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware. D. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware. 3.02 SCHEDULE-SEE DRAWINGS END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 08 14 16-2 Flush Wood Doors Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 08 31 00 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall- and ceiling-mounted access units. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 91 23 - Interior Painting: Field paint finish. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ITS (DIR)- Directory of Listed Products; Current Edition. B. UL (FRD)- Fire Resistance Directory; Current Edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide sizes, types, finishes, hardware, scheduled locations, and details of adjoining work. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate exact position of each access door and/or panel unit. D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of each access unit. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS ASSEMBLIES A. Wall-Mounted Units: 1. Panel Material: Steel, hot-dipped zinc or zinc-aluminum-alloy coated. 2. Size: 12 by 12 inches. B. Wall-Mounted Units in Wet Areas: 1. Panel Material: Stainless steel, Type 304. 2. Size: 12 by 12 inches. 3. Door/Panel: Hinged, standard duty, with tool-operated spring or cam lock and no handle. C. Fire-Rated Wall-Mounted Units: 1. Wall Fire-Rating: As indicated on drawings. 2. Size: 12 by 12 inches. D. Ceiling-Mounted Units: 1. Panel Material: Aluminum extrusion with gypsum board inlay. 2. Size- Lay-In Grid Ceilings: To match module of ceiling grid. 3. Size-Other Ceilings: 18 by 18 inches. 4. Door/Panel: Hinged, standard duty, with tool-operated spring or cam lock and no handle. 2.02 WALL-AND CEILING-MOUNTED ACCESS UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Activar Construction Products Group, Inc. -JL Industries: www.activarcpg.com/#sle. 2. ACUDOR Products Inc: www.acudor.com/#sle. a. Wall-Mounted Units: ACUDOR UF500. b. Ceiling Mounted Units (Drywall): ACUDOR DW-5058. 3. Babcock-Davis: www.babcockdavis.com/#sle. 4. Cendrex, Inc: www.cendrex.com/#sle. a. Wall-Mounted Units: Cendrex AHD, flush door, face frame, hinged. b. Recess-Mounted Units for Wall Finish: Cendrex RAL-ALUMI, with aluminum frame and drywall inlay. c. Ceiling-Mounted Units: Cendrex GFRG-PUR, with push up radius corners. 5. Nystrom, Inc: www.nystrom.com/#sle. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 0831 00- 1 Access Doors and Panels Re-Bid Construction Documents 6. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Wall- and Ceiling-Mounted Units: Factory-fabricated door and frame, fully assembled units with corner joints welded, filled and ground flush; square and without rack or warp; coordinate requirements with type of installation assembly being used for each unit. 1. Style: Exposed frame with door surface flush with frame surface. a. Gypsum Board Mounting Criteria: Use drywall bead type frame. 2. Door Style: Single thickness with rolled or turned in edges. 3. Frames: 16-gauge, 0.0598-inch minimum thickness. 4. Single Steel Sheet Door Panels: 16-gauge, 0,0625-inch minimum thickness. 5. Units in Fire-Rated Assemblies: Fire rating as required by applicable code for fire-rated assembly that access doors are being installed. 6. Hardware: a. Hardware for Fire-Rated Units: As required for listing. b. Hinges for Non-Fire-Rated Units: Concealed, constant force closure spring type. c. Latch/Lock: Tamperproof tool-operated cam latch. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that rough openings are correctly sized and located. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install frames plumb and level in openings, and secure units rigidly in place. C. Position units to provide convenient access to concealed equipment when necessary. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 0831 00-2 Access Doors and Panels Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 08 33 23 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Exterior coiling doors. B. Electric operators and control stations. C. Wiring from electric circuit disconnect to operators and control stations. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A36/A36M -Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2019. B. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc(Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2017. C. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc- Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2023. D. ASTM E330/E330M - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2014 (Reapproved 2021). E. ITS (DIR)- Directory of Listed Products; Current Edition. F. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2020. G. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems Controllers, Contactors and Overload Relays Rated 600 Volts; 2008 (Reaffirmed 2020). H. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; 2021. I. UL (DIR)- Online Certifications Directory; Current Edition. J. UL 325- Standard for Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide general construction, electrical equipment, and component connections and details. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensioning, anchorage methods, hardware locations, and installation details. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by ITS (DIR) or UL (DIR)as suitable for purpose specified and indicated. 1.05 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00- Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements. B. Manufacturer Warranty: Provide 2-year manufacturer warranty for roller shaft counterbalance assembly. Complete forms in Owner's name and register with manufacturer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Overhead Coiling Doors: 1. Clopay Building Products; CPSD361, Storm Defender Door: www.clopaydoor.com/#sle. 2. Overhead Door Company; Stormtite AP 627. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 08 33 23- 1 Overhead Coiling Doors Re-Bid Construction Documents 2.02 COILING DOORS A. Exterior Coiling Doors: Steel slat curtain. 1. Capable of withstanding positive and negative wind loads of 57.6 psf without undue deflection or damage to components. Door design to wind speeds noted on structural drawings; ASTM E330/E330M 2. Sandwich Slats: Manufacturer's standard, with core of foamed-in-place polyurethane insulation; minimum R-value of 10.9. 3. Nominal Slat Size: 2 5/8" inches wide by required length. 4. Finish: Factory painted, color as selected. 5. Guide, Angles: Galvanized steel. 6. Hood Enclosure: Manufacturer's standard; primed steel. 7. Electric operation. 8. Mounting: Surface mounted. 2.03 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS A. Metal Curtain Construction: Interlocking slats. 1. Slat Ends: Alternate slats fitted with end locks to act as wearing surface in guides and to prevent lateral movement. 2. Curtain Bottom for Slat Curtains: Fitted with angles to provide reinforcement and positive contact in closed position. 3. Weatherstripping for Exterior Doors: Moisture and rot proof, resilient type, located at jamb edges, bottom of curtain, and where curtain enters hood enclosure of exterior doors. 4. Steel Slats: Minimum thickness, 24 gauge, 0.0239 inch; ASTM A653/A653M galvanized steel sheet. a. Galvanizing: Minimum G90 coating. B. Guide Construction: Continuous, of profile to retain door in place with snap-on trim, mounting brackets of same metal. C. Guides-Angle: ASTM A36/A36M metal angles, size as required for wind loading. 1. Hot-dip galvanized in compliance with ASTM A123/A123M. D. Hood Enclosure and Trim: Internally reinforced to maintain rigidity and shape. 1. Minimum thickness; 24 gauge, 0.0239 inch. 2. Prime painted. 2.04 ELECTRIC OPERATION A. Operator, Controls, Actuators, and Safeties: Comply with UL 325; provide products listed by ITS (DIR), UL (DIR), or testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Electric Operators: 1. Mounting: Side mounted. 2. Motor Enclosure: a. Exterior Coiling Doors: NEMA MG 1, Type 4; open drip proof. 3. Motor Rating: 1/2 HP; continuous duty. 4. Motor Voltage: 280 volts, three phase, 60 Hz. 5. Motor Controller: NEMA ICS 2, full voltage, reversing magnetic motor starter. 6. Controller Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4. 7. Opening Speed: 12 inches per second. 8. Brake: Manufacturer's standard type, activated by motor controller. 9. Manual override in case of power failure. 10. See Section 26 05 83 for electrical connections. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 08 33 23-2 Overhead Coiling Doors Re-Bid Construction Documents C. Control Station: Provide standard three button, 'Open-Close-Stop' momentary-contact control device for each operator complying with UL 325. 1. 24 volt circuit. 2. Surface mounted, at interior doorjamb. 3. Entrapment Protection Devices: Provide sensing devices and safety mechanisms complying with UL 325. a. Primary Device: Provide electric sensing edge, wireless sensing, NEMA 1 photo eye sensors, or NEMA 4X photo eye sensors as required with momentary-contact control device. D. Safety Edge: Located at bottom of coiling door, full width, electro-mechanical sensitized type, wired to stop and reverse door direction upon striking object, hollow neoprene covered. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building framing without distortion or stress. C. Securely and rigidly brace components suspended from structure. Secure guides to structural members only. D. Fit and align assembly including hardware; level and plumb, to provide smooth operation. E. Coordinate installation of electrical service with Section 26 05 83. F. Complete wiring from disconnect to unit components. G. Install enclosure and perimeter trim. 3.02 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating assemblies for smooth and noiseless operation. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean installed components. B. Remove labels and visible markings. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 08 33 23-3 Overhead Coiling Doors Re-Bid Construction Documents ADDENDUM NO. 4 SECTION 08 43 13 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Aluminum-framed storefront, with vision glass. B. Aluminum doors. C. Weatherstripping. D. Door hardware. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware: Hardware items other than specified in this section. B. Section 08 80 00 -Glazing: Glass and glazing accessories. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA CW-10- Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum from Shop to Site; 2015. B. AAMA 501.2 -Quality Assurance and Diagnostic Water Leakage Field Check of Installed Storefronts, Curtain Walls, and Sloped Glazing Systems; 2015. C. AAMA 611 -Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; 2020. D. AAMA 1503-Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections; 2009. E. ASCE 7- Minimum Design Loads and Associated Criteria for Buildings and Other Structures; Most Recent Edition Cited by Referring Code or Reference Standard. F. ASTM B209/B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2021 a. G. ASTM B221 -Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2021. H. ASTM B221 M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes (Metric); 2021. I. ASTM E330/E330M - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2014 (Reapproved 2021). J. ASTM E331 -Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000 (Reapproved 2023). K. FLA (PAD)- Florida Building Code Online- Product Approval Directory; Current Edition. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate with installation of other components that comprise the exterior enclosure. B. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting two weeks before starting work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly, anchorage and fasteners, glass and infill, internal drainage details. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements, details and tolerances, affected related Work, expansion and contraction joint location and details, and field welding required. D. Design Data: Provide framing member structural and physical characteristics, engineering calculations, and dimensional limitations. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 08 43 13- 1 Aluminum-Framed Storefronts Re-Bid Construction Documents ADDENDUM NO. 4 E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that the products supplied meet or exceed the specified requirements. 1. Glass Manufacturer's Acceptance: Submit a letter from the glass manufacturer certifying their review and acceptance of the shop drawings. Include documentation of the glass manufacturer's recommendations for setting block types, lengths, placement, etc. F. Field Quality Control Submittals: Report of field testing for water penetration and air leakage. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Designer Qualifications: Design structural support framing components under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of type specified and with at least ten years ofdocumented experience. C. Installer Qualifications: Company, approved by framing manufacturer, who trained and authorized for installation of units required for the Work of this Project. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW-10. B. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather. 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00- Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Structural Failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. 2. Noise or vibrations caused by thermal movements. 3. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas. 4. Failure of operating components. C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish. Include provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BASIS OF DESIGN --FRAMING FOR INSULATING GLAZING A. Center-Set Style, Thermally-Broken; Hurricane rated system: 1. Basis of Design: Tubelite ForceFront Storm T34000. 2. Vertical Mullion Dimensions: 2-1/2 inches wide by 5 inches deep. B. Other Manufacturers: Provide either the product identified as "Basis of Design" or an equivalent product of one of the manufacturers listed below: 1. Kawneer North America: www.kawneer.com. 2. YKK AP, Inc.: www.ykk-ap.com. 2.02 BASIS OF DESIGN --SWINGING DOORS A. Wind-Borne-Debris Resistance Tested; Wide Stile, Insulated Glazing: 1. Basis of Design: Tubelite ForceFront Storm T34000. 2. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. B. Other Manufacturers: Provide either the product identified as "Basis of Design" or an equivalent product of one of the manufacturers listed below: 1. Kawneer North America: www.kawneer.com. 2. YKK-AP: www.ykk-ap.com. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 08 43 13-2 Aluminum-Framed Storefronts Re-Bid Construction Documents ADDENDUM NO. 4 2.03 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONT A. Aluminum-Framed Storefront: Factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing members with infill, and related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. 1. Glazing Rabbet: For 1-5/16 inch insulating glazing. 2. Finish: Class I natural anodized. a. Factory finish all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies. 3. Fabrication: Joints and corners flush, hairline, and weatherproof, accurately fitted and secured; solid back(open back not accepatable); prepared to receive anchors and hardware; fasteners and attachments concealed from view; reinforced as required for imposed loads. 4. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture occurring within system. Use manufacturer's drainable sub-sill option. 5. Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over a 12 hour period without causing detrimental effect to system components, anchorages, and other building elements. 6. Movement: Allow for movement between storefront and adjacent construction, without damage to components or deterioration of seals. 7. Perimeter Clearance: Minimize space between framing members and adjacent construction while allowing expected movement. B. Performance Requirements: 1. Wind Loads: Design and size components to withstand the specified load requirements without damage or permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E330/E330M, using loads 1.5 times the design wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum load. a. Design Wind Loads: Comply with requirements of ASCE 7 and design wind speeds noted on the Structural drawings. b. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to 1/175 in any direction, with full recovery of glazing materials, up to a clear span of 13 feet 6 inches. For spans greater than 13 feet 6 inches, limit deflection to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch, or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is less. c. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to amount not exceeding that which reduces glazing bite to less than 75% of design dimension and that which reduces edge clearance between framing members and glazing or other fixed components directly below them to less than 1/8 inch and clearance between members and operable units directly below them to less than 1/16 inch. 2. Wind-Borne-Debris Resistance: Identical full-size glazed assembly without auxiliary protection, having Florida Building Code FLA(PAD)approval or Texas Dept. of Insurance approval for Large and Small Missile impact and pressure cycling at design wind pressure. 3. Water Penetration Resistance under Static Pressure: No uncontrolled water on interior face, when tested in accordance with ASTM E331 at pressure differential of 12 Ibf/sq ft. 4. Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: No evidence of water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to AAMA 505.1 under dynamic pressure equal to 20% of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 10.0 Ibf/sq.ft. 5. Air Leakage Laboratory Test: Maximum of 0.06 cu ft/min sq ft of wall area, when tested in accordance with ASTM E283 at 6.24 psf pressure differential across assembly. 6. Condensation Resistance Factor of Framing: 50, minimum, measured in accordance with AAMA 1503. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 08 43 13-3 Aluminum-Framed Storefronts Re-Bid Construction Documents ADDENDUM NO. 4 2.04 COMPONENTS A. Glazing: See Section 08 80 00. B. Swing Doors: Glazed aluminum. 1. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. 2. Top Rail: 4 inches wide. 3. Vertical Stiles: 4-1/2 inches wide. 4. Bottom Rail: 10 inches wide. 5. Glazing Stops: Square. 6. Glazing Depth: Accept up to 1-1/6 inch IGU. 7. Finish: Same as storefront. 2.05 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221 M). B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B209/B209M. C. Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration requirements. D. Glazing Accessories: See Section 08 80 00. 2.06 FINISHES A. Class I Natural Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A41 Clear anodic coating not less than 0.7 mils thick. 2.07 HARDWARE A. For each door, include weatherstripping. B. Other Door Hardware: See Section 08 71 00. C. Weatherstripping: Wool pile, continuous and replaceable; provide on all exterior doors. 2.08 FABRICATION A. Provide solid backed assembly with continuous extrusion designed for unit. B. Shop assemble into largest units possible for unitized field installation. Shop seal joint assemblies where possible. C. Mount flashing fin on solid backs and set in continuous bead of sealant during mounting. Mechanically attach flashing fins and seal over fasteners on wet-side of fin with sealant. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. C. Do not expose fasteners except in conformance with requirements for FABRICATION, Part 2 of this specification. D. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure. E. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. F. Seal over fasteners subject to exposure to moisture with sealant. G. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. H. Install glass in accordance with Section 08 80 00, using dry glazing method. 1. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 08 43 13-4 Aluminum-Framed Storefronts Re-Bid Construction Documents ADDENDUM NO. 4 3.02 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inch per 3 feet non-cumulative or 0.06 inch per 10 feet, whichever is less. B. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 40 00- Quality Requirements for independent field testing and inspection requirements, and requirements for monitoring quality of specified product installations. B. Water-Spray Test: Provide water spray quality test of installed storefront components in accordance with AAMA 501.2 during construction process and before installation of interior finishes. 1. Perform a maximum of two tests at openings as directed by Architect. C. Repair or replace storefront components that have failed designated field testing, and retest to verify performance complies with specified requirements. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation. 3.05 CLEANING A. Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces. B. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths, and take care to remove dirt from corners and to wipe surfaces clean. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage until Date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 08 43 13-5 Aluminum-Framed Storefronts Re-Bid Construction Documents ADDENDUM NO. 1 SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Hardware for wood, aluminum, and hollow metal doors. B. Thresholds. C. Weatherstripping and gasketing. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ADA Standards-2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design; 2010. B. BHMA A156.1 -Standard for Butts and Hinges; 2021. C. BHMA A156.3- Exit Devices; 2020. D. BHMA A156.4 - Door Controls- Closers; 2019. E. BHMA A156.5- Cylinders and Input Devices for Locks; 2020. F. BHMA A156.6-Standard for Architectural Door Trim; 2021. G. BHMA A156.7-Template Hinge Dimensions; 2016. H. BHMA A156.8- Door Controls- Overhead Stops and Holders; 2021. I. BHMA A156.13- Mortise Locks & Latches Series 1000; 2022. J. BHMA A156.16- Standard for Auxiliary Hardware; 2023. K. BHMA A156.21 -Thresholds; 2019. L. BHMA A156.22 - Standard for Gasketing; 2021. M. BHMA A156.25- Electrified Locking Devices; 2023. N. BHMA A156.26- Standard for Continuous Hinges; 2021. O. BHMA A156.28- Standard for Recommended Practices for Mechanical Keying Systems; 2023. P. BHMA A156.36-Auxiliary Locks; 2020. Q. BHMA Al56.115- Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Frames; 2016. R. BHMA Al56.115W- Hardware Preparation in Wood Doors with Wood or Steel Frames; 2006. S. DHI (H&S)-Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule; 2019. T. DHI (LOCS)- Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; 2004. U. DHI WDHS.3- Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Flush Wood Doors; 1993; also in WDHS-1/WDHS-5 Series, 1996. V. ICC A117.1 -Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; 2017. W. ITS (DIR)- Directory of Listed Products; Current Edition. X. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. Y. UL (DIR)- Online Certifications Directory; Current Edition. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 08 71 00- 1 Door Hardware Re-Bid Construction Documents ADDENDUM NO. 1 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Furnish hardware specified herein and noted on drawings for a complete and operational system, including any electrified hardware components, controls and hardware for aluminim entrance doors. Any door shown on the drawings and not specifically referenced in the hardware sets shall be provided with identical hardware as specified on other similar openings and included in bid price. All fire rated doors shall be provided with fire rated hardware as required by code and included in base price. Hardware supplier to verify all cylinder types specifed for locking devices supplied as part of the door system with the door manufacturer and/or door supplies. B. Finish hardware specified and scheduled is not intended to be an all-inclusive list of components but general in intent, which includes any Windstorm components to meet Texas Department of Insurance approved assemblies. Notify the Architect of any discrepancies that could and/or would result in hardware being supplied that is none functional, hardware specified and/or has not been specified that will result in any code violations and any door that is not covered in the hardware schedule. C. Coordinate the manufacture, fabrication, and installation of products that door hardware is installed on. D. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner. E. Furnish templates for door and frame preparation to manufacturers and fabricators of products requiring internal reinforcement for door hardware. F. Keying Requirements Meeting: 1. Schedule meeting at project site prior to ordering hardware. 2. Attendance Required: a. Contractor. b. Owner. c. Architect. d. Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC). e. Hardware Installer. f. Owner's Security Consultant. 3. Agenda: a. Establish keying requirements. b. Verify locksets and locking hardware are functionally correct for project requirements. c. Verify that keying and programming complies with project requirements. 4. Incorporate "Keying Requirements Meeting" decisions into keying submittal upon review of door hardware keying system including, but not limited to, the following: a. Access control requirements. b. Key control system requirements. 5. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 6. Deliver established keying requirements to manufacturers. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog literature for each type of hardware, marked to clearly show products to be furnished for this project, and includes construction details, material descriptions, finishes, and dimensions and profiles of individual components. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 0871 00-2 Door Hardware Re-Bid Construction Documents ADDENDUM NO. 1 C. Shop Drawings - Door Hardware Schedule: Submit detailed listing that includes each item of hardware to be installed on each door. Use door numbering scheme as included in Contract Documents. 1. Prepared by or under supervision of Architectural Hardware Consultant(AHC). 2. Comply with DHI (H&S) using door numbers and hardware set numbers as indicated in construction documents. 3. List groups and suffixes in proper sequence. 4. Provide complete description for each door listed. D. Maintenance Materials and Tools: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Lock Cylinders: Ten for each master keyed group. 3. Tools: One set of each special wrench or tool applicable for each different or special hardware component, whether supplied by hardware component manufacturer or not. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Supplier Qualifications: Company to be a qualified, Factor Authorized, direct distributor of the products to be furnished. In addition, the supplier to have in their regular employment and Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC)and Electrified Hardware Consultant(EHC)to assist in work of this section. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door opening code to match door hardware schedule. 1.07 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00- Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements. B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide warranty against defects in material and workmanship for period indicated. Complete forms in Owner's name and register with manufacturer. 1. Closers: Ten years, minimum. 2. Exit Devices: Five years, minimum. 3. Grade 1 Locksets and Cylinders: Ten years, minimum. 4. Other Hardware: Two years, minimum. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA A. Provide specified door hardware as required to make doors fully functional, compliant with applicable codes, and secure to extent indicated. B. Provide individual items of single type, of same model, and by same manufacturer. C. Provide door hardware products that comply with the following requirements: 1. Applicable provisions of federal, state, and local codes. 2. Accessibility: ADA Standards and ICC A117.1. 3. Applicable provisions of NFPA 101. 4. Hardware Preparation for Steel Doors and Steel Frames: BHMA A156.115. 5. Hardware Preparation for Wood Doors with Wood or Steel Frames: BHMA Al 56.115W. 6. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL (DIR)as suitable for the purpose specified. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 0871 00-3 Door Hardware Re-Bid Construction Documents ADDENDUM NO. 1 D. Fasteners: 1. Provide fasteners of proper type, size, quantity, and finish that comply with commercially recognized standards for proposed applications. a. Aluminum fasteners are not permitted. b. Provide phillips flat-head screws with heads finished to match door surface hardware unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide stainless steel machine screws and lead expansion shields for concrete and masonry substrates. 2.02 HINGES A. Manufacturers: 1. Basis of Design: Hager Companies: www.hagerco.com. 2. McKinney; an Assa Abloy Group company: www.assaabloydss.com. 3. Hager Companies: www.hagerco.com. 4. Stanley, dormakaba Group: www.stanleyhardwarefordoors.com/#sle. B. Hinges: Comply with BHMA A156.1, Grade 1. 1. Butt Hinges: Comply with BHMA A156.1 and BHMA A156.7 for templated hinges. a. Provide hinge width required to clear surrounding trim. 2. Continuous Hinges: Comply with BHMA A156.26. 3. Provide hinges on every swinging door. 4. Provide five-knuckle full mortise butt hinges unless otherwise indicated. 5. Provide ball-bearing hinges at each door with closer. 6. Provide power transfer hinges where electrified hardware is mounted in door leaf. 7. Hinge (Hager)types as follows: a. Type B: BB1279 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 NRP US26D. b. Type C: BB1168 5 x 4-1/2 NRP US26D. c. Type D: 790-900 x height of door; US32D. d. Type E: ETW BB1279 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 NRP US26D. e. Type F: ETW 790-900 x height of door; US32D. 2.03 FLUSH BOLTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Basis of Design: Trimco: www.trimcohardware.com. 2. Hager Companies: www.hagerco.com. 3. Ives, an Allegion brand: www.allegion.com/us. B. Flush Bolts: Comply with BHMA A156.16, Grade 1. 1. Flush Bolt Throw: 3/4 inch, minimum. 2. Provides extension bolts in leading edge of door, one bolt into floor, one bolt into top of frame. a. Pairs of Swing Doors: At inactive leaves, provide flush bolts of type as required to comply with code. 3. Provide dustproof floor strike for bolt into floor, except at metal thresholds. 4. Manual Flush Bolts: Provide lever extensions for top bolt at over-sized doors. 5. Flushbolt(Trimco)types as follows: a. Type A: 3916 x US26D (wood door). b. Type B: 3915 x US26D (metal door). RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 0871 00-4 Door Hardware Re-Bid Construction Documents ADDENDUM NO. 1 2.04 EXIT DEVICES A. Manufacturers: 1. Basis of Design: Precision, dormakaba Group: www.precisionhardware.com. 2. Sargent; an Assa Abloy Group company: www.assaabloydss.com. 3. Von Duprin, an Allegion brand: www.allegion.com/us/#sle. B. Exit Devices: Comply with BHMA A156.3, Grade 1. 1. Lever design to match lockset trim. 2. Provide cylinder with cylinder dogging or locking trim. 3. Provide exit devices properly sized for door width and height. 4. Provide strike as recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. 5. Provide UL (DIR) listed exit device assemblies for fire-rated doors and panic device assemblies for non-fire-rated doors. 6. Exit Device (Precision)types as follows: a. Type A: HC S2103 x 4900B x 630 (rim) b. Type B: HC ELR S2103 x 4900B x 630 (rim) 2.05 LOCK CYLINDERS A. Lock Cylinders: Provide key access on outside of each lock, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide full size interchangeable core (FSIC)type cylinders, Grade 1, with six-pin core in compliance with BHMA A156.5 at locations indicated. 2. Provide cylinders from same manufacturer as locking device. 3. Provide cams and/or tailpieces as required for locking devices. 2.06 MORTISE LOCKS A. Manufacturers: 1. Basis of Design: Best, dormakaba Group: www.bestaccess.com. 2. Sargent; an Assa Abloy Group company: www.assaabloydss.com. 3. Best, dormakaba Group: www.bestaccess.com/#sle. 4. Schlage, an Allegion brand: www.allegion.com/us/#sle. B. Mortise Locks: Comply with BHMA A156.13, Grade 1, Security, 1000 Series. 1. Latchbolt Throw: 3/4 inch, minimum. 2. Deadbolt Throw: 1 inch, minimum. 3. Backset: 2-3/4 inch unless otherwise indicated. 4. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each Iatchset or Iockset with strike box and curved lip extending to protect frame in compliance with indicated requirements. a. Finish: To match lock or latch. 5. Mortise Lock (BEST)types as follows: a. Type A: 45H 7 D 14H 626 (storeroom) 1) Provide WS -windstorm label at all exterior doors. b. Type B: 45H 7 R 14H 626 (classroom) c. Type C: 45H 7 A 14H 626 (office) d. Type E: 45H 0 N 14H 626(passage). 2.07 ELECTROMECHANICAL LOCKS A. Manufacturers: 1. Basis of Design: Best, dormakaba Group: www.bestaccess.com. 2. Best, dormakaba Group: www.bestaccess.com/#sle. B. Electromechanical Locks: Comply with BHMA A156.25, Grade 1. 1. Provide motor-driven or solenoid-driven locks, with strike that is applicable to frame. 2. Type F: 45HW 7 TDEU 14H 626 (electrified, windstorm label at all exterior doors). RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 0871 00-5 Door Hardware Re-Bid Construction Documents ADDENDUM NO. 1 2.08 AUXILIARY LOCKS (DEADLOCKS) A. Manufacturers: 1. Basis of Design: Schlage, an Allegion brand; B571; www.allegion.com/us/. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Auxiliary Locks (Deadlocks): Comply with BHMA A156.36, Grade 1. 1. Type: Bored (cylindrical). 2. Backset: 2-3/4 inch, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Bolt Throw: 1/2 inch, with latch made of hardened steel. 4. Provide strike that matches frame. 5. Provide type with occupancy indicator. 2.09 DOOR PULLS AND PUSH PLATES A. Manufacturers: 1. Basis of Design: Trimco: www.trimcohardware.com. 2. Rockwood; an Assa Abloy Group company: www.assaabloydss.com. 3. Hager Companies: www.hagerco.com. B. Door Pulls and Push Plates: Comply with BHMA A156.6. 1. Pull Type: Straight, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Push Plate Type: Flat, with square corners, unless otherwise indicated. a. Edges: Beveled, unless otherwise indicated. C. Pulls/Push Plate (Trimco)types as follows: 1. Type B: 1896-4B US32D. 2.10 REMOVABLE MULLION A. Manufacturers: 1. Basis of Design: BEST Precision, dormakaba Group: KR822. 2. Von Duprin, an Allegion brand: www.allegion.com/us. B. Removable Mullions: Provide on pairs of doors with strikes for rim devices. 1. Material: Aluminum. 2. Function: Keyed and removable. 2.11 CLOSERS A. Manufacturers; Surface Mounted: 1. Basis of Design: BEST, dormakaba Group: www.bestaccess.com. 2. Sargent; an Assa Abloy Group company: www.assaabloydss.com. 3. LCN, an Allegion brand: www.allegion.com/us/#sle. B. Closers: Comply with BHMA A156.4, Grade 1. 1. Type: Surface mounted to door. 2. Provide door closer on each exterior door. 3. Provide door closer on each fire-rated and smoke-rated door. 4. At corridor entry doors, mount closer on room side of door. 5. At outswinging exterior doors, mount closer on interior side of door. 6. Closer(BEST)types as follows: a. Type A: EHD9000 Series x 626. 2.12 OVERHEAD STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Basis of Design: Glynn-Johnson, an Allegion brand: www.allegion.com/us. 2. Rixson; an Assa Abloy Group company: www.assaabloydss.com. B. Overhead Stops and Holders (Door Checks): Comply with BHMA A156.8, Grade 1. 1. Overhead stops/holders types as follows: a. Type A: GJ 90MA Series. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 0871 00-6 Door Hardware Re-Bid Construction Documents ADDENDUM NO. 1 2.13 PROTECTION PLATES A. Manufacturers: 1. Basis of Design: Trimco: www.trimcohardware.com. 2. Hager Companies: www.hagerco.com. 3. Ives, an Allegion brand: www.allegion.com/us. B. Protection Plates: Comply with BHMA A156.6. C. Metal Properties: Stainless steel. 1. Metal, Standard Duty: Thickness 0.050 inch, minimum. D. Edges: Beveled, on four sides unless otherwise indicated. E. Fasteners: Countersunk screw fasteners. F. Drip Guard: Provide at head of exterior doors unless covered by roof or canopy. 1. Pemko 346D. 2.14 ARMOR PLATES A. Manufacturers: 1. Basis of Design: Trimco: www.trimcohardware.com. B. Armor Plates: Provide on bottom half of push side of doors that require protection from objects moving through openings that may damage door surface. 1. Size: 36 inch high by 1-1/2 inch LDW on push side of door. 2.15 KICK PLATES A. Kick Plates: Provide along bottom edge of push side of every door with closer, except aluminum storefront and glass entry doors, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Size: 8 inch high by 2 inch less door width (LDW)on push side of door. 2.16 DOOR HOLDERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Basis of Design: Trimco. 2. Trimco; 1220-5: www.trimcohardware.com/#sle. B. Door Holders: Comply with BHMA A156.16, Grade 1. 1. Type: Lever, or kick down stop,with rubber bumper at bottom end. 2. Material: Aluminum. 2.17 FLOOR STOPS A. Manufacturers: 1. Basis of Design: Trimco: www.trimcohardware.com. 2. Hager Companies: www.hagerco.com. 3. Ives, an Allegion brand: www.allegion.com/us. B. Floor Stops: Comply with BHMA Al56.16, Grade 1 , Grade 1 and Resilient Material Retention Test as described in this standard. 1. Floor stop: Trimco W1211. 2.18 WALL STOPS A. Manufacturers: 1. Basis of Design: Trimco: www.trimcohardware.com. 2. Hager Companies: www.hagerco.com. 3. Ives, an Allegion brand: www.allegion.com/us. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 0871 00-7 Door Hardware Re-Bid Construction Documents ADDENDUM NO. 1 B. Wall Stops: Comply with BHMA Al56.16, Grade 1 and Resilient Material Retention Test as described in this standard. 1. Type: Bumper, concave, wall stop. 2. Material: Aluminum housing with rubber insert. 3. Wall stop: Trimco 1270CV. 2.19 THRESHOLDS A. Manufacturers: 1. Basis of Design: Pemko; an Assa Abloy Group Company: www.pemko.com. 2. National Guard Products, Inc: www.ngpinc.com. 3. Zero International, Inc: www.zerointernational.com. B. Thresholds: Comply with BHMA A156.21. 1. Provide threshold at each exterior door, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Material: Aluminum. 3. Threshold Surface: Fluted horizontal grooves across full width. 4. Field cut threshold to profile of frame and width of door sill for tight fit. 5. Provide non-corroding fasteners at exterior locations. 6. Threshold types as follows: a. Type A: Pemko 2727A + 1842AS. 2.20 WEATHERSTRIPPING AND GASKETING A. Manufacturers: 1. Basis of Design: Pemko; an Assa Abloy Group company: www.assaabloydss.com. 2. National Guard Products, Inc: www.ngpinc.com. 3. Zero International, Inc: www.zerointernational.com. B. Weatherstripping and Gasketing: Comply with BHMA Al56.22. 1. Provide weatherstripping on each exterior door at head,jambs, and meeting stiles of door pairs, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide door bottom sweep on each exterior door, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Gasketing & Door bottom sweep (Pemko)types as follows: a. Type B Gasketing: 303DS. b. Type A Door bottom: 3452AV. 2.21 SILENCERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Ives, an Allegion brand: www.allegion.com/us. 2. Rockwood; an Assa Abloy Group company: www.assaabloydss.com. B. Silencers: Provide at equal locations on door frame to mute sound of door's impact upon closing. 1. Single Door: Provide three on strike jamb of frame. 2. Pair of Doors: Provide two on head of frame, one for each door at latch side. 3. Material: Rubber, gray color. 2.22 KEY CONTROL SYSTEMS A. Key Control Systems: Comply with guidelines of BHMA Al56.28. 1. Keying: Master keyed. 2. Include construction keying and control keying with removable core cylinders. 3. Deliver keys with identifying tags to Owner by security shipment direct from hardware supplier. 4. Permanent Keys and Cores: Stamped with applicable key marking for identification. Do not include actual key cuts within visual key control marks or codes. Stamp permanent keys "Do Not Duplicate." RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 0871 00-8 Door Hardware Re-Bid Construction Documents ADDENDUM NO. 1 2.23 KEY CABINET A. Manufacturers: 1. Basis of Design: Lund Key Cabinet 1203. B. Key Cabinet: Sheet steel construction, piano hinged door with key lock; BHMA A156.28. 1. Mounting: Wall-mounted. 2. Capacity: Actual quantity of keys, plus 25 percent additional capacity. 3. Size key hooks to hold 6 keys each. 4. Finish: Baked enamel, manufacturer's standard color. 5. Key cabinet lock to building keying system. 2.24 FIRE DEPARTMENT LOCK BOX A. Manufacturers: 1. Knox Company; Knox-Box Rapid Entry System, 3200 Series: www.knoxbox.com. B. Fire Department Lock Box: 1. Heavy-duty, surface mounted, solid stainless-steel box with hinged door and interior gasket seal; single drill resistant lock with dust covers and tamper alarm. 2. Capacity: Holds 10 keys. 3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard dark bronze. 2.25 POWER SUPPLY A. Manufacturers: 1. Basis of Design: Best, dormakaba. B. Power Supply: Hard wired, with multiple zones providing eight (8) breakers for each output panel with individual control switches and LED's; UL (DIR) Class 2 listed. 1. Operating Temperature: 32 to 110 degrees F. 2. Provide with emergency release terminals that release devices upon activation of fire alarm system. 3. Product: DKPS 6A 2.26 FINISHES A. Finishes: Identified in paragraphs covering specific hardware types. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable codes. B. Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer. C. Door Hardware Mounting Heights: Distance from finished floor to center line of hardware item. As indicated in following list; unless noted otherwise in Door Hardware Schedule or on drawings. 1. For Steel Doors and Frames: Install in compliance with DHI (LOCS) recommendations. 2. For Wood Doors: Install in compliance with DHI WDHS.3 recommendations. 3. Mounting heights in compliance with ADA Standards: a. Locksets: 40-5/16 inch. b. Push Plates/Pull Bars: 42 inch. c. Deadlocks (Deadbolts): 48 inch. d. Exit Devices: 40-5/16 inch. D. Set exterior door thresholds with full-width bead of elastomeric sealant at each point of contact with floor providing a continuous weather seal; anchor thresholds with stainless steel countersunk screws. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 0871 00-9 Door Hardware Re-Bid Construction Documents ADDENDUM NO. 1 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC)to inspect installation and certify that hardware and installation has been furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01 70 00- Execution and Closeout Requirements. B. Adjust hardware for smooth operation. C. Adjust gasketing for complete, continuous seal; replace if unable to make complete seal. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean finished hardware in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions after final adjustments have been made. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements. B. Do not permit adjacent work to damage hardware or finish. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 0871 00- 10 Door Hardware Re-Bid Construction Documents ADDENDUM NO. 1 08 71 00.1 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE G. D145 pair to have: 1. Hinges type C: 8 A. D104, D105, D106, D108, D111, D114, 2. Lockset type A(storeroom): 1 at D115, D118, D119, D120, D121, D141; active leaf each to have: 3. Flush Bolts type B: 2 1. Hinges type B: 4 4. Armor Plate: 2 2. Lockset Type C (office): 1 5. Door Holder: 2 3. Wall Stop: 1 6. Silencer: 6 4. Silencer: 3 7. Overhead stop: 1 B. D102, D122A, D123A; each to have: H. D146 pair to have: 1. Hinges type B: 4 1. Hinges type C: 8 2. Lockset E (passage): 1 2. Lockset type A (storeroom): 1 at 3. Closer type A: 1 active leaf 4. Wall Stop: 1 3. Flush Bolts type B: 2 5. Silencer: 3 4. Armor Plate: 2 5. Kick Stops: 2 6. Silencer: 6 C. D109, D110, D128, D129, D132, D133; 7. Wall Stop: 1 each to have: 8. Overhead stop: 1 1. Hinges type B: 4 2. Push/ Pull Plates: 1 set I. D112 3. Closer type A: 1 1. Hinges type B: 4 4. Kick plate: 1 2. Lockset type B (classroom): 1 5. Wall Stop: 1 3. Closer type A: 1 6. Silencer: 3 4. Wall Stop: 1 5. Silencer: 3 D. D116, D117; each to have: 1. Hinges type C: 4 1 D144 pair to have: 2. Lockset type A(storeroom): 1 1. Hinges type B: 7 3. Closer type A: 2. Hinge type E: 1 4. Wall Stop: 1 3. Lockset type F (electrified):1 5. Kick Plate: 1 4. Lockset type E (passage):1 on 6. Silencer: 3 inactive door 5. Closer: 1 with cush stop E. D140, D142; each to have: 6. Overhead stop: 1 on inactive 1. Hinges type B: 4 door 2. Lockset type C (Office): 1 7. Flush Bolts type B: 1 set on 3. Closer type A: 1 with cush stop and inactive door hold open 8. Armor Plate: 2 4. Silencer: 3 9. Gasketing type B: 1 set 10. Card reader: 1 by owner security F. D126, D127, D131, D136, D138; each system to have: 11. Power Supply: 1 1. Hinges type B: 4 2. Lockset type A(storeroom): 1 K. D135 3. Closer type A: 1 1. Hinges type D: 1 4. Wall Stop: 1 2. Exit device type A: 1 5. Armor Plate: 1 3. Closer type A: 1 6. Silencer: 3 4. Gasketing type B: 1 set 5. Overhead drip: 1 6. Door bottom sweep: 1 7. Threshold type A: 1 RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 0871 00.1 - 1 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop ADDENDUM NO. 1 L. D125, D147E; ea. to have: 9. Card Reader: 1 by owner 1. Hinges type D: 1 security system 2. Lockset type A(storeroom): 1 10. Power Supply: 1 (windstorm label) 3. Closer type A: 1 Q. D143A, D14313; ea. to have: 4. Gasketing type B: 1 set 1. Hinges type F: 1 5. Overhead drip: 1 2. Exit Device type B (electrified): 1 6. Door bottom sweep: 1 3. Closer type A: 1 7. Threshold type A: 1 4. Gasketing type B: 1 set 5. Overhead drip: 1 M. D134, D148; each pair to have: 6. Door bottom sweep: 1 1. Hinges type D: 2 7. Threshold type A: 1 2. Lockset type A(storeroom): 2 8. Card Reader: 1 by owner (windstorm label) security system 3. Removeable Mullion: 1 9. Power supply: 1 4. Closer type A: 2 5. Threshold type A: 1 frame width R. D101 (storefront) pair to have: 6. Overhead drip: 1 frame width 1. Hinge type F: 1 7. Door bottom sweep: 2 2. Hinge type D: 1 8. Gasketing type B: 1 set 3. Exit Device type A: 1 4. Exit Device type 13:1 N. D122B, D123B each to have 5. Closer: 2 (storefront) 6. Removeable Mullion: 1 1. Hinges type D: 1 7. Overhead drip: 1 frame width 2. Exit Device type A: 1 8. Door bottom sweep: 2 3. Closer: 1 9. Threshold type A: 1 frame width 4. Overhead drip: 1 10. Gasketing: See Aluminum- 5. Door bottom sweep: 1 Framed Storefronts 6. Threshold type A: 1 11. Floor stop: 2 7. Gasketing: See Aluminum-Framed 12. Card Reader: 1 by owner Storefronts security system 8. Floor stop: 1 13. Power supply: 1 O. D137 1. Hinges type B: 3 2. Hinge type E: 1 3. Lockset type F (electrified): 1 END OF HARDWARE SCHEDULE 4. Closer type A: 1 5. Wall Stop: 1 6. Armor Plate: 1 7. Silencer: 3 B. Card reader: 1 by owner security system 9. Power supply: 1 P. D124, D130 each to have (storefront) 1. Hinges type F: 1 2. Exit Device type B: 1 3. Closer: 1 4. Overhead drip: 1 5. Door bottom sweep: 1 6. Threshold type A: 1 7. Gasketing: See Aluminum- Framed Storefronts 8. Floor stop: 1 RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 0871 00.1 -2 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Insulating glass units. B. Glazing units. C. Glazing compounds. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Glazed lites in doors and borrowed lites. B. Section 08 14 16 - Flush Wood Doors: Glazed lites in doors. C. Section 08 43 13 -Aluminum-Framed Storefronts: Glazing provided as part of storefront assembly. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 16 CFR 1201 -Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; Current Edition. B. ANSI Z97.1 -American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings- Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test; 2015 (Reaffirmed 2020). C. ASCE 7- Minimum Design Loads and Associated Criteria for Buildings and Other Structures; Most Recent Edition Cited by Referring Code or Reference Standard. D. ASTM C864 -Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers; 2005 (Reapproved 2019). E. ASTM C1048- Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass; 2018. F. ASTM C1172 - Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass; 2019. G. ASTM C1376- Standard Specification for Pyrolytic and Vacuum Deposition Coatings on Flat Glass; 2021a. H. ASTM E1300 -Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings; 2016. I. ASTM E1996 -Standard Specification for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors, and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Windborne Debris in Hurricanes; 2023. J. ASTM E2190 -Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation; 2019. K. NFRC 100 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product U-factors; 2023. L. NFRC 200 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Solar Heat Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence; 2023. M. NFRC 300 -Test Method for Determining the Solar Optical Properties of Glazing Materials and Systems; 2023. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data on Insulating Glass Unit and Glazing Unit Glazing Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling and installation requirements. C. Product Data on Glazing Compounds and Accessories: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements, and identify available colors. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 08 80 00- 1 Glazing Re-Bid Construction Documents D. Samples: Submit two samples 12 by 12 inch in size of glass units. E. Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications for Insulating-Glass Units with low-E coatings: A qualified insulating-glass manufacturer who is approved and certified by the coated glass manufacturer. B. Source Limitations: Obtain insulating glass from a single source from single manufacturer for each glass type. C. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glazed material type, tape sealant, gasket, glazing accesory, and glass-framing member for adhesion to and compatibility with elastomeric glazing sealants. 1. Testing will not be required if data submitted are based on previous testing of current sealant products and glazing materials matching those submitted performed within the last 24 months. 2. Use ASTM C794 and ASTM C1135 to determine whether priming and other specific joint- preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazing sealants to to glass, tape sealants, gaskets, and glazing channel substrates. 3. Use ASTM C1087 to verify the compatibility of structural sealant with accessories in contact with the structural sealant materials. 4. Test no fewer than six samples of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials. 5. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 6. For materials failing test, submit sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures including substrate preparation and the use of specially formulated primers. 1.06 MOCK-UPS A. Provide on-site glazing mock-up with the specified glazing components. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds. 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00- Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements. B. Insulating Glass Units: Provide a five (5)year manufacturer warranty to include coverage for seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, including providing products to replace failed units. C. Laminated Glass: Provide a five (5)year manufacturer warranty to include coverage for delamination, including providing products to replace failed units. D. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form in which coated-glass manufacturer agrees to furnish FOB to the job site replacement coated- glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 08 80 00-2 Glazing Re-Bid Construction Documents E. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which coated-glass manufacturer agrees to furnish FOB to the job site replacement insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS - EXTERIOR GLAZING ASSEMBLIES A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand thermal movement, wind, gravity, and impact loads (where required by code or herein)without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: deflective, manufacture, fabrication or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. B. Provide type and thickness of exterior glazing assemblies to support assembly dead loads, and to withstand live loads caused by positive and negative wind pressure acting normal to plane of glass. 1. Design Pressure: Calculated in accordance with ASCE 7. 2. Comply with ASTM E1300 for design load resistance of glass type, thickness, dimensions, and maximum lateral deflection of supported glass. 3. Provide glass edge support system sufficiently stiff to limit the lateral deflection of supported glass edges to less than 1/175 of their lengths under specified design load. 4. Glass thicknesses listed are minimum. C. Thermal and Optical Performance: Provide exterior glazing products with performance properties as indicated. Performance properties are in accordance with manufacturer's published data as determined with the following procedures and/or test methods: 1. Center of Glass U-Value: Comply with NFRC 100 using Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (LBNL)WINDOW 6.3 computer program. 2. Center of Glass Solar Heat Gain Coefficient(SHGC): Comply with NFRC 200 using Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (LBNL)WINDOW 6.3 computer program. 3. Solar Optical Properties: Comply with NFRC 300 test method. 2.02 GLASS MATERIALS A. Float Glass: Provide float glass based glazing unless otherwise indicated. 1. Kind HS - Heat-Strengthened Type: Complies with ASTM C1048. 2. Kind FT- Fully Tempered Type: Complies with ASTM C1048. 3. Fully Tempered Safety Glass: Complies with ANSI Z97.1 or 16 CFR 1201 criteria for safety glazing used in hazardous locations. B. Laminated Glass: Float glass laminated in accordance with ASTM C1172. 1. Laminated Safety Glass: Complies with ANSI Z97.1 - Class A or 16 CFR 1201 -Category II impact test requirements. 2. Polyvinyl Butyral (PVB) Interlayer: 0.030 inch thick, minimum. 2.03 BASIS OF DESIGN -INSULATING GLASS UNITS A. Basis of Design - Insulating Glass Units: Vision glazing, with low-e coating. 1. Applications: Exterior insulating glass glazing unless otherwise indicated. 2. Space between lites filled with argon. 3. Total Thickness: 1-5/16 inch for windows; 1-1/16 inch for doors. 4. Thermal Transmittance (U-Value), Summer-Center of Glass: 0.24, nominal. 5. Visible Light Transmittance (VLT): 35 percent, nominal. 6. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): 0.24, nominal. 7. Glazing Method: Dry glazing method, gasket glazing. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 08 80 00-3 Glazing Re-Bid Construction Documents 8. Durability: Certified by an independent testing agency to comply with ASTM E2190. 9. Coated Glass: Comply with requirements of ASTM C1376 for pyrolytic (hard-coat)or magnetic sputter vapor deposition (soft-coat)type coatings on flat glass; coated vision glass, Kind CV; coated overhead glass, Kind CO; or coated spandrel glass, Kind CS. 10. Warm-edge Spacers: Flexible silicone with polyisobutylene (PIB) primary seal. a. Spacer Width: As required for specified insulating glass unit. b. Spacer Height: 0.27 inch. 11. Spacer Color: Black. 12. Edge Seal: a. Dual-Sealed System: Provide polyisobutylene sealant as primary seal applied between spacer and glass panes, and silicone, polysulfide, or polyurethane sealant as secondary seal applied around perimeter. 13. Color: Black. 14. Purge interpane space with dry air, hermetically sealed. 15. Basis of Design -Vitro Architectural Glass (formerly PPG Glass): www.vitroglazings.com/#sle. 16. Outboard Lite: Fully tempered float glass, 1/4 inch thick, minimum. a. Low-E Coating: Vitro Architectural Glass (formerly PPG Glass) Solarban 60 on#2 surface. b. Glass Tint: Solargray (light-gray). 17. Inboard Lite: Heat-strengthened laminated float glass, 9/16 inch thick. a. Coating: No coating on inboard lite. b. Hurricane Impact Resistance Glazing: Laminated glass, 3-Ply. 1) Applications: Exterior glazing. 2) Tint: Clear. 3) Layer#1: Heat-strengthened glass; 1/4 inch thickness. 4) Interlayer: Polyvinyl butyral (PVB), thickness as required to meet performance criteria. 5) Layer#2: Heat-strengthened glass; 1/4 inch thickness. 6) Performance Criteria: (a) Hurricane Impact Resistance: Comply with ASTM E1996 windborne debris requirements for"Enhanced Protection"within Wind Zone 1. 18. Substitution Procedures: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.04 GLAZING UNITS A. Type G-1 - Monolithic Safety Glazing: Non-fire-rated. 1. Applications: a. Glazed lites in doors, except fire doors. b. Glazed sidelights to doors, except in fire-rated walls and partitions. c. Other locations required by applicable federal, state, and local codes and regulations. d. Other locations indicated on drawings. 2. Glass Type: Fully tempered safety glass as specified. 3. Tint: Clear. 4. Thickness: 1/4 inch, nominal. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Setting Blocks: Silicone, with 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness; ASTM C864 Option II. Length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch by width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch by height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area. B. Glazing Tape, Back Bedding Mastic Type: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids compound with integral resilient spacer rod applicable to application indicated; 5 to 30 cured Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; black color. C. Glazing Gaskets: Resilient silicone extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; ASTM C864 Option II; color black. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 08 80 00-4 Glazing Re-Bid Construction Documents PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. C. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may impede moisture movement; weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing. D. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. E. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing. 3.02 INSTALLATION - DRY GLAZING METHOD (GASKET GLAZING) A. Application - Exterior and/or Interior Glazed: Set glazing infills from either the exterior or the interior of the building. B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inch from corners. C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure on gasket to attain full contact. D. Install removable stops without displacing glazing gasket; exert pressure for full continuous contact. 3.03 INSTALLATION - DRY GLAZING METHOD (TAPE AND TAPE) A. Application - Interior Glazed: Set glazing infills from the interior of the building. B. Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, projecting 1/16 inch above sight line. C. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inch from corners. D. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape for full contact at perimeter of pane or unit. E. Place glazing tape on free perimeter of glazing in same manner described above. F. Install removable stop without displacement of tape. Exert pressure on tape for full continuous contact. G. Carefully trim protruding tape with knife. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove excess glazing materials from finish surfaces immediately after application using solvents or cleaners recommended by manufacturers. B. Remove nonpermanent labels immediately after glazing installation is complete. C. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces after sealants are fully cured. D. Clean glass on both exposed surfaces not more than 4 days prior to Date of Substantial Completion in accordance with glass manufacturer's written recommendations. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 08 80 00-5 Glazing Re-Bid Construction Documents 3.05 PROTECTION A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste; do not mark heat absorbing or reflective glass units. B. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period prior to Date of Substantial Completion. C. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from the glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. D. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances to come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. E. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped or cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 08 80 00-6 Glazing Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 08 83 00 MIRRORS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass mirrors. 1. Tempered safety glass. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 10 28 00 -Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories: Metal mirror frames. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data on Mirror Types: Submit structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling and installation requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Mirror Design Criteria: Select materials and/or provide supports as required to limit mirror material deflection to 1/200, or to the flexure limit of glass, with full recovery of glazing materials, whichever is less. B. Mirror Glass : Clear float type with copper and silver coating, organic overcoating, arrised edges, 1/4 inch ( 6 mm)thick minimum. 1. Size: As indicated on drawings. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Mirror Adhesive: Chemically compatible with mirror coating and wall substrate; Mirror Mastic manufactured by Palmer Products Corporation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install mirrors in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Set mirrors plumb and level, and free of optical distortion. C. Set mirrors with edge clearance free of surrounding construction including countertops or backsplashes. D. Mirror Installation 1. Set mirrors with "J" mold continuous at top and bottom. Anchor rigidly to wall construction. 2. Place plumb and level. 3. Set mirrors in "J" mold and adhere with adhesive applied in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's instructions. 4. Block and brace mirrors in place until adhesive takes its final set. 3.02 CLEANING A. Remove labels after work is complete. B. Clean mirrors and adjacent surfaces. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 08 83 00- 1 Mirrors Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Performance criteria for gypsum board assemblies. B. Metal stud wall framing. C. Metal channel ceiling framing. D. Gypsum sheathing. E. Cementitious backing board. F. Gypsum wallboard. G. Joint treatment and accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 05 40 00 -Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Structural steel stud framing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AISI S220 - North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Nonstructural Framing; 2020. B. AISI S240 - North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Structural Framing; 2015, with Errata (2020). C. ANSI A108.11 -American National Standard Specifications for Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units; 2018. D. ANSI A118.9-American National Standard Specifications for Test Methods and Specifications for Cementitious Backer Units; 2019. E. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc- Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2023. F. ASTM A1003/A1003M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon, Metallic- and Nonmetallic-Coated for Cold-Formed Framing Members; 2015. G. ASTM C1007- Standard Specification for Installation of Load Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs and Related Accessories; 2020. H. ASTM C475/C475M -Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board; 2017 (Reapproved 2022). I. ASTM C754 -Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products; 2020. J. ASTM C840 -Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2023. K. ASTM C954 -Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from 0.033 in. (0.84 mm)to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm) in Thickness; 2022. L. ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; 2022. M. ASTM C1047- Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base; 2019. N. ASTM C1177/C1177M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing; 2017. O. ASTM C1280- Standard Specification for Application of Exterior Gypsum Panel Products for Use as Sheathing; 2018 (Reapproved 2023). P. ASTM C1325- Standard Specification for Fiber-Mat Reinforced Cementitious Backer Units; 2022, with Editorial Revision (2023). RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 0921 16- 1 Gypsum Board Assemblies Re-Bid Construction Documents Q. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2017. R. ASTM D3273- Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber; 2021. S. GA-216 -Application and Finishing of Gypsum Panel Products; 2021. T. UL (FRD)- Fire Resistance Directory; Current Edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: 1. Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, accessories, and joint finishing system. 2. Provide manufacturer's data on partition head to structure connectors, showing compliance with requirements. C. Test Reports: For stud framing products that do not comply with AISI S220 or ASTM C754, provide independent laboratory reports showing maximum stud heights at required spacings and deflections. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store gypsum products and accessories indoors and keep above freezing. Elevate boards above floor, on nonwicking supports, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Store metal products to prevent corrosion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216. 1. See PART 3 for finishing requirements. B. Fire Rated Assemblies: Provide completed assemblies complying with applicable code. 1. Fire Rated Partitions: UL listed assembly No. U-419; 1 hour rating. 2.02 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A1003/A1003M, subject to the ductility limitations indicated in AISI S220 or equivalent. 1. Corrosion Protection Coating Designation: G60, or equivalent in accordance with AISI S220. B. Manufacturers- Metal Framing, Connectors, and Accessories: 1. Clarkwestern Dietrich Building Systems LLC: www.clarkdietrich.com. 2. Steel Construction Systems: www.steelconsystems.com/#sle. 3. Mill Steel Framing: www.millsteelframing.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. C. Non-structural Framing System Components: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 for the spacing indicated, with maximum deflection of wall framing of L/240 at 5 psf. 1. Studs: C-shaped with knurled or embossed faces. D. Partition Head To Structure Connections: Provide track fastened to structure with legs of sufficient length to accommodate deflection, for friction fit of studs cut short and screwed to secondary deflection channel set inside but unattached to top track. 1. Product: ClarkDietrich; MaxTrak System. - OR- E. Partition Head to Structure Connection: Provide slotted deflection track fastened to structure with legs of sufficient length to accomodate deflection for attachement of studs cut short and screwed to studs through slots. 1. Product: ClarkDietrich; Double Track System. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 0921 16-2 Gypsum Board Assemblies Re-Bid Construction Documents - OR- F. Partition Head to Structure Connection: Provide deep leg deflection track fastened to structure with legs of sufficient length for friction fit of studs cut short with 1-1/2 cold-rolled bridging channel placed horizontally just below partition head. 1. Product: ClarkDietrich; Deep Leg Deflection Track System. G. Deflection and Firestop Track: Intumescent strip factory-applied to track flanges expands when exposed to heat or flames to provide a perimeter joint seal. 1. Products: a. ClarkDietrich; BlazeFrame Firestop Deflection Track: www.clarkdietrich.com/#sle. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. H. Non-structural Framing Accessories: 1. Ceiling Hangers: Type and size as specified in ASTM C754 for spacing required. I. Framing Connectors: ASTM A653/A653M G90 galvanized steel clips; secures cold rolled channel to wall studs for lateral bracing. 1. Products: a. ClarkDietrich; FastBridge Clip (FB33): www.clarkdietrich.com/#sle. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.03 BOARD MATERIALS A. Manufacturers- Gypsum-Based Board: 1. American Gypsum Company: www.americangypsum.com/#sle. 2. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com/#sle. 3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum: www.gpgypsum.com/#sle. 4. National Gypsum Company: www.nationalgypsum.com/#sle. 5. USG Corporation: www.usg.com/#sle. 6. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Gypsum Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273. a. Mold-resistant board is required whenever board is being installed before the building is enclosed and conditioned. 3. Thickness: a. Vertical Surfaces: 5/8 inch. C. Backing Board For Wet Areas: One of the following products: 1. Application: Surfaces behind tile in wet areas including tub and shower surrounds and shower ceilings. 2. ANSI Cement-Based Board: Non-gypsum-based; aggregated Portland cement panels with glass fiber mesh embedded in front and back surfaces complying with ANSI A118.9 or ASTM C1325. a. Thickness: 1/2 inch. b. Products: 1) PermaBASE Building Products, LLC provided by National Gypsum Company; PermaBase Cement Board: www.goldbondbuiIding.com/#sle. 2) Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 0921 16-3 Gypsum Board Assemblies Re-Bid Construction Documents D. Backing Board For Non-Wet Areas: Water-resistant gypsum backing board as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimum joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Vertical surfaces behind thinset tile, except in wet areas. 2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273. 3. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire-Resistance Rating: Use type required by indicated tested assembly; if no tested assembly is indicated, use Type X board, UL or WH listed. 4. Type: Regular and Type X, in locations indicated. 5. Type X Thickness: 5/8 inch. 6. Regular Board Thickness: 5/8 inch. 7. Edges: Tapered. E. Ceiling Board: Special sag resistant gypsum ceiling board as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Ceilings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 3. Edges: Tapered. F. Exterior Sheathing Board: Sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Exterior sheathing, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273. 3. Glass Mat Faced Sheathing: Glass mat faced gypsum substrate as defined in ASTM C1177/C1177M. 4. Core Type: Regular, as indicated. 5. Regular Board Thickness: 1/2 inch. 6. Edges: Square. 2.04 GYPSUM BOARD ACCESSORIES A. Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C665; preformed glass fiber, friction fit type, unfaced. Thickness: 3 inch. B. Beads, Joint Accessories, and Other Trim: ASTM C1047, galvanized steel or rolled zinc, unless noted otherwise. C. Joint Materials: ASTM C475/C475M and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions. 1. Paper Tape: 2 inch wide, creased paper tape for joints and corners, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound. 3. Joint Compound: Drying type, vinyl-based, ready-mixed. D. Screws for Fastening of Gypsum Panel Products to Cold-Formed Steel Studs Less than 0.033 inches in Thickness and Wood Members: ASTM C1002; self-piercing tapping screws, corrosion-resistant. E. Screws for Fastening of Gypsum Panel Products to Steel Members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch in Thickness: ASTM C954; steel drill screws, corrosion-resistant. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 0921 16-4 Gypsum Board Assemblies Re-Bid Construction Documents 3.02 FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Metal Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM C1007AISI S220 and manufacturer's instructions. B. Suspended Ceilings and Soffits: Space framing and furring members as indicated. C. Studs: Space studs at 16 inches on center. 1. Extend partition framing as indicated on drawings. 2. Partitions Terminating at Structure: Attach extended leg top runner to structure, maintain clearance between top of studs and structure, and brace both flanges of studs with continuous bridging. D. Openings: Reinforce openings as required for weight of doors or operable panels, using not less than double studs at jambs. 3.03 BOARD INSTALLATION A. Comply with ASTM C840, GA-216, and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end joints, especially in highly visible locations. B. Single-Layer Nonrated: Install gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. C. Double-Layer Non-Rated: Use gypsum board for first layer, placed parallel to framing or furring members, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. Place second layer perpendicular to framing or furring members. Offset joints of second layer from joints of first layer. D. Double-Layer Rated: Apply laminating compound over entire surface of first layer gypsum board in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; laminate face panel to base layer using moderate pressure and temporary nailing or shoring to ensure adequate bond. E. Exterior Sheathing: Comply with ASTM C1280. Install sheathing vertically, with edges butted tight and ends occurring over firm bearing. F. Cementitious Backing Board: Install over steel framing members and plywood substrate where indicated, in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's instructions. G. Installation on Metal Framing: Use screws for attachment of gypsum board except face layer of nonrated double-layer assemblies, which may be installed by means of adhesive lamination. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as indicated. 1. Not more than 30 feet apart on walls and ceilings over 50 feet long. B. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths. 3.05 JOINT TREATMENT A. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, as follows: 1. Level 5: Walls and ceilings to receive semi-gloss or gloss paint finish and other areas specifically indicated. 2. Level 4: Walls and ceilings to receive paint finish or wall coverings, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Level 2: In utility areas, behind cabinetry, and on backing board to receive tile finish. 4. Level 1: Wall areas above finished ceilings, whether or not accessible in the completed construction. B. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes. 1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch. C. Where Level 5 finish is indicated, spray apply high build drywall surfacer over entire surface after joints have been properly treated; achieve a flat and tool mark-free finish. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 0921 16-5 Gypsum Board Assemblies Re-Bid Construction Documents 3.06 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 0921 16-6 Gypsum Board Assemblies Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 09 30 00 TILING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Tile for floor applications. B. Tile for wall applications. C. Non-ceramic trim. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 21 16 -Gypsum Board Assemblies: Tile backer board. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A108/A118/A136.1 - Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile; 2020. 1. ANSI A108.1a-American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method, with Portland Cement Mortar; 2017 (Reaffirmed 2022). 2. ANSI A108.1 b- Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set, Modified Dry-Set, or Improved Modified Dry-Set Cement Mortar; 2023. 3. ANSI A108.1c-Contractor's Option: Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar or Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set, Modified Dry-Set, or Improved Modified Dry-Set Cement Mortar; 2023. 4. ANSI A108.2 -American National Standard General Requirements: Materials, Environmental and Workmanship; 2019. 5. ANSI A108.4 -American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Organic Adhesive or Water Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive; 2023. 6. ANSI A108.5-Setting of Ceramic Tile with Dry-Set Cement Mortar, Modified Dry-Set Cement Mortar, EGP (Exterior Glue Plywood) Modified Dry-Set Cement Mortar, or Improved Modified Dry-Set Cement Mortar; 2023. 7. ANSI A108.6 -American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and -Grout Epoxy; 2023. 8. ANSI A108.8 -American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant Furan Resin Mortar and Grout; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2019). 9. ANSI A108.9 -American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout; 2023. 10. ANSI A108.10 -American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tilework; 2017 (Reaffirmed 2022). 11. ANSI A108.12 - Installation of Ceramic Tile with EGP (Exterior Glue Plywood) Modified Dry-Set Mortar; 2023. 12. ANSI A108.13 -American National Standard for Installation of Load Bearing, Bonded, Waterproof Membranes for Thin-Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone; 2005 (Reaffirmed 2021). 13. ANSI A108.19-American National Standard Specifications for Interior Installation of Gauged Porcelain Tiles and Gauged Porcelain Tile Panels/Slabs by the Thin-Bed Method Bonded with Modified Dry-Set Cement Mortar or Improved Modified Dry-Set Cement Mortar; 2020. 14. ANSI A108.20 -American National Standard Specifications for Exterior Installation of Gauged Porcelain Tiles and Gauged Porcelain Tile Panels/Slabs; 2020. 15. ANSI A118.7 -American National Standard Specifications for High Performance Cement Grouts for Tile Installation; 2019. 16. ANSI A118.10 -American National Standard Specifications for Load Bearing, Bonded, Waterproof Membranes for Thin-Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone; 2014 (Reaffirmed 2019). RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 09 30 00- 1 Tiling Re-Bid Construction Documents 17. ANSI A118.15-American National Standard Specifications for Improved Modified Dry-Set Cement Mortar; 2019. 18. ANSI A137.1 -American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile; 2022. 19. ASTM C373 -Standard Test Methods for Determination of Water Absorption and Associated Properties by Vacuum Method for Pressed Ceramic Tiles and Glass Tiles and Boil Method for Extruded Ceramic Tiles and Non-tile Fired Ceramic Whiteware Products; 2018 (Reapproved 2023). B. ASTM C642 -Standard Test Method for Density, Absorption, and Voids in Hardened Concrete; 2021. C. TCNA(HB)- Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation; 2024. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of this section; require attendance by affected installers. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers' data sheets on tile, mortar, grout, and accessories. Include instructions for using grouts and adhesives. C. Samples: Mount tile and apply grout on two plywood panels, minimum 18 by 18 inches in size illustrating pattern, color variations, and grout joint size variations. D. Installer's Qualification Statement: 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Company specializing in performing tile installation, with minimum of five years of documented experience. a. Accredited Five-Star member of the National Tile Contractors Association (NTCA) or Trowel of Excellence member of the Tile Contractors' Association of America (TCAA) 2. Installer Certification: a. Ceramic Tile Education Foundation (CTEF): Certified Tile Installer(CTI). b. Apprenticeship Program: Installer has achieved Journeyworker status through an apprenticeship from the International Union of Bricklayers and Allied Craftworkers (IUBAC) or a U.S. Department of Labor(DOL)-recognized program. c. Advanced Certifications for Tile Installers (ACT): Certification in the installation of membranes, mortar bed (mud)floors, mortar(mud)walls, shower receptors, large format tile, gauged porcelain tile/panels/slabs, and grouts. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00- Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Standard manufacturing defect warranties shall convey within the guidelines of this specification, irrespective of site concrete slab moisture levels, and/or other site specific conditions. Each respective materal installation organization shall warrant the quality of workmanship to be professional and in keeping with industry standards. Conditions such as lack of climate control after installation, improper maintenance or cleaning, abuse, movement or warping of the substrate, excessive moisture and subfloor hydrostatic pressure are not subject to this warranty. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 09 30 00-2 Tiling Re-Bid Construction Documents PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TILE A. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: ANSI A137.1, standard grade. 1. Moisture Absorption: 0 to 0.5 percent as tested in accordance with ASTM C373. B. Glazed Wall Tile: ANSI A137.1, standard grade. 1. Moisture Absorption: 7.0 to 20.0 percent as tested in accordance with ASTM C373. C. Porcelain Tile: ANSI A137.1, standard grade. 1. Moisture Absorption: 0 to 0.5 percent as tested in accordance with ASTM C373. 2. Applications: a. Open edges of wall tile. b. Transition between floor finishes of different heights. c. Borders and other trim as indicated on drawings. 3. Manufacturers: a. Custom Building Products: www.custombuildingproducts.com. b. Loxscreen Flooring Group: www.loxscreenflooring.com. c. Schluter-Systems: www.schluter.com/#sle. d. Triton Watertight: www.tritonwatertight.com. e. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.02 SETTING MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. ARDEX Engineered Cements: www.ardexamericas.com/#sle. 2. Custom Building Products: www.custombuildingproducts.com. 3. LATICRETE International, Inc: www.laticrete.com/sle. 4. MAPEI: www.mapei.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Improved Latex-Portland Cement Mortar Bond Coat: ANSI Al18.15. 1. Products: a. ARDEX Engineered Cements; X 77: www.ardexamericas.com/#sle. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. C. Mortar Bed Materials: Pre-packaged mix of Portland cement, sand, and water. 1. Products: a. ARDEX Engineered Cements; X 32: www.ardexamericas.com/#sle. 2.03 GROUTS A. Manufacturers: 1. ARDEX Engineered Cements: www.ardexamericas.com/#sle. 2. Custom Building Products: www.custombuildingproducts.com. 3. LATICRETE International, Inc: www.laticrete.com/#sle. 4. MAPEI: www.mapei.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. High Performance Polymer Modified Grout: ANSI A118.7 polymer modified cement grout. 1. Use sanded grout for joints 1/8 inch wide and larger; use unsanded grout for joints less than 1/8 inch wide. 2. Color(s): As indicated on drawings. 3. Products: a. ARDEX Engineered Cements; ARDEX FL: www.ardexamericas.com/#sle. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 09 30 00-3 Tiling Re-Bid Construction Documents 2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Waterproofing Membrane at Shower floors and walls: Specifically designed for bonding to cementitious substrate under thick mortar bed or thin-set tile; complying with ANSI Al 18.10. 1. Fluid or Trowel Applied Type: a. Products: 1) ARDEX Engineered Cements; ARDEX 8+9: www.ardexamericas.com/#sle. B. Underlayment at Floors: Specifically designed for bonding to thin-set setting mortar; not primarily a waterproofing material and having the following characteristics: 1. Uncoupling Function: Allow for separation between membrane and the mortar adhering tile to the membrane when subjected to excessive substrate movement. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that subfloor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive tile. B. Prior to any installation, perform substrate absorption/substrate porosity testing in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and ASTM C642. C. Prior to full installation, perform bond/adhesion testing as recommended by the manufacturers of the approved submitted products. D. Record and report and ambient humidity, ambient temperature, and substrate temperature prior to and through the duration of all flooring installations. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protect surrounding work from damage. B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean. C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances. 3.03 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Install tile, thresholds, and stair treads and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108.1a through ANSI A108.20, manufacturer's instructions, and TCNA(HB) recommendations. B. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings. C. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases neatly. Align floorjoints. D. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make grout joints without voids, cracks, excess mortar or excess grout, or too little grout. E. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed. F. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units. G. Keep control and expansion joints free of mortar, grout, and adhesive. H. Provided expansions joints at 24 feet on center. Align joints in floors and walls. I. Provided expansion joints at the perimeter of tile installation, at intersection of vertical and horizontal planes and at penetrations through tile surfaces. J. Prior to grouting, allow installation to completely cure; minimum of 48 hours. K. Grout tile joints unless otherwise indicated. Use standard grout unless otherwise indicated. L. At changes in plane and tile-to-tile control joints, use tile sealant instead of grout, with either bond breaker tape or backer rod as appropriate to prevent three-sided bonding. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 09 30 00-4 Tiling Re-Bid Construction Documents 3.04 INSTALLATION - FLOORS -THIN-SET METHODS A. Over interior concrete substrates, install in accordance with The Tile Council of North America Handbook Method F113, dry-set or latex-Portland cement bond coat, with grout, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use uncoupling membrane under all tile unless other underlayment is indicated. 3.05 INSTALLATION - FLOORS - MORTAR BED METHODS A. Over interior concrete substrates, install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method F111, with cleavage membrane, unless otherwise indicated. B. Cleavage Membrane: Lap edges and ends. C. Mortar Bed Thickness: 5/8 inch, unless otherwise indicated. 3.06 INSTALLATION -SHOWERS AND BATHTUB WALLS A. At tiled shower receptors install in accordance with TCNA(HB) Method B415, mortar bed floor, and W244, thin-set over cementitious backer unit walls. B. At bathtub walls install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method B412, over cementitious backer units with waterproofing membrane. C. Grout with standard grout as specified above. 3.07 INSTALLATION -WALL TILE A. Over coated glass mat backer board on studs, install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method W245. 3.08 CLEANING AND SEALING A. Clean tile and grout surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Remove all grout residue from face of tiles. B. When tile and grout are thoroughly dry, seal tile and grout with sealer. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 09 30 00-5 Tiling Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system. B. Acoustical units. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C635/C635M -Standard Specification for Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings; 2022. B. ASTM E1264 -Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products; 2023. 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved. B. Do not install acoustical units until after interior wet work is dry. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on suspension system components and acoustical units. C. Samples: Submit two samples 6 by 6 inch in size illustrating material and finish of acoustical units. D. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. Extra Acoustical Units: 1 carton (64 sf). 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and maximum humidity of 40 percent prior to, during, and after acoustical unit installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acoustic Tiles/Panels: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc: www.armstrong.com/#sle. 2. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com/#sle. 3. USG: www.usg.com/#sle. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Suspension Systems: 1. Same as for acoustical units. 2.02 ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Acoustical Panels, Type 1: Painted mineral fiber, with the following characteristics: 1. Classification: ASTM E1264 Type III. 2. Size: 24 by 24 inches. 3. Light Reflectance: 88 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM E1264. 4. NRC Range: .75 to .80, determined in accordance with ASTM E1264. 5. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): 35, determined in accordance with ASTM E1264. 6. Panel Edge: Beveled Tegular. 7. Color: White. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 0951 00- 1 Acoustical Ceilings Re-Bid Construction Documents 8. Suspension System Type 1: Exposed grid. 9. Products: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc; Ultima, #1911: www.armstrongceilings.com/#sle. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.03 SUSPENSION SYSTEM(S) A. Exposed Suspension System, Type 1: Hot-dipped galvanized steel grid and cap. 1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty, when tested in accordance with ASTM C635/C635M. 2. Profile: Tee; 15/16 inch face width. 3. Finish: Baked enamel. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application, seismic requirements, and ceiling system flatness requirement specified. B. Hanger Wire: 12 gauge, 0.08 inch galvanized steel wire. C. Perimeter Moldings: Same metal and finish as grid. 1. Angle Molding: L-shaped, for mounting at same elevation as face of grid. D. Touch-up Paint: Type and color to match acoustical and grid units. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION -SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for maximum deflection of 1:360. B. Lay out system to a balanced grid design with edge units no less than 50 percent of acoustical unit size. C. Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with other interruptions. 1. Use longest practical lengths. 2. Overlap and rivet corners. D. Suspension System, Non-Seismic: Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. E. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance. F. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. G. Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner, or support components independently. H. Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners. 3.02 INSTALLATION -ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function. C. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces. D. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents. E. Cutting Acoustical Units: 1. Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 0951 00-2 Acoustical Ceilings Re-Bid Construction Documents 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. B. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 0951 00-3 Acoustical Ceilings Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Resilient tile flooring. B. Static control resilient tile flooring. C. Resilient base. D. Installation accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 05 26 -Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems: Grounding and bonding of static control flooring to building grounding system. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM F150- Standard Test Method for Electrical Resistance of Conductive and Static Dissipative Resilient Flooring; 2006 (Reapproved 2018). B. ASTM F1066- Standard Specification for Vinyl Composition Floor Tile; 2023. C. ASTM F1861 - Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base; 2021. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions. C. Verification Samples: Submit two samples, 12 by 12 inch in size illustrating color and pattern for each resilient flooring product specified. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Upon receipt, immediately remove any shrink-wrap and check materials for damage and the correct style, color, quantity and run numbers. B. Store all materials off of the floor in an acclimatized, weather-tight space. C. Maintain temperature in storage area between 55 degrees F and 90 degrees F. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a temperature of 70 degrees F to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain conditions above 55 degrees F. 1.07 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00- Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Standard manufacturing defect warranties must convey within the guidelines of this specification, irrespective of site concrete slab moisture levels, and/or other site specific conditions. Each respective materal installation organization shall warrant the quality of workmanship to be professional and in keeping with industry standards. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 09 65 00- 1 Resilient Flooring Re-Bid Construction Documents PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TILE FLOORING A. Vinyl Composition Tile: Homogeneous, with color extending throughout thickness Homogeneous, with color extending throughout thickness. 1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F1066, of Class corresponding to type specified. 2. Size: As indicated on drawings. 3. Thickness: 0.125 inch. 4. Pattern: As indicated on drawings. 5. Color: As indicated on drawings. B. Static Control Tile: Homogeneous; color and pattern throughout thickness. 1. Minimum Requirements: Vinyl composition tile complying with ASTM F1066, Class 2. 2. Electrical Resistance: a. Dissipative Tile: Resistance between 1.0 megohms and 1000 megohms as tested in accordance with ASTM F150. 3. Tile Size: 12 by 12 inch. 4. Total Thickness: 0.125 inch. 5. Pattern: As scheduled on drawings. 6. Color: As scheduled on drawings. 2.02 RESILIENT BASE A. Resilient Base: ASTM F1861, Type TS, rubber, vulcanized thermoset; style as scheduled. 1. Height: 4 inches. 2. Thickness: 0.125 inch. 3. Finish: Satin. 4. Length: Roll. 5. Color: As indicated on drawings. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof; epoxy type recommended by flooring manufacturer. B. Copper Grounding Strips: Type and size as recommended by static control flooring manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer, free of cracks that might telegraph through flooring, clean, dry, and free of curing compounds, surface hardeners, and other chemicals that might interfere with bonding of flooring to substrate. B. Cementitious Subfloor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are ready for resilient flooring installation by testing for moisture and alkalinity(pH). 1. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove subfloor ridges and bumps. Fill minor low spots, cracks,joints, holes, and other defects with subfloor filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. B. Prohibit traffic until filler is fully cured. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 09 65 00-2 Resilient Flooring Re-Bid Construction Documents 3.03 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Adhesive-Applied Installation: 1. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set. 2. Place copper grounding strip in conductive adhesive and apply additional adhesive to top side of strip before installing static control flooring. Allow strip to extend beyond flooring in accordance with static control flooring manufacturer's instructions. Refer to Section 26 05 26 for grounding and bonding to building grounding system. 3. Fit joints and butt seams tightly. 4. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion. C. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set. 3.04 INSTALLATION -TILE FLOORING A. Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent when tile is placed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's installation instructions. 3.05 INSTALLATION - RESILIENT BASE A. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints. B. Miter internal corners. At external corners, 'V' cut back of base strip to 2/3 of its thickness and fold. At exposed ends, use premolded units. C. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces. 3.06 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. B. Clean in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 09 65 00-3 Resilient Flooring Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 09 67 00 FLUID-APPLIED FLOORING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fluid-applied flooring and base. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; sizes, patterns and colors available. C. Samples: Submit two samples, 12" by 12" inch in size illustrating color and pattern for each floor material for each color specified. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store resin materials in a dry, secure area. 1.04 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Store materials in area of installation for minimum period of 24 hours prior to installation. B. Maintain ambient temperature required by manufacturer 72 hours prior to, during, and 24 hours after installation of materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FLUID-APPLIED FLOORING SYSTEMS A. Fluid-Applied Flooring: Epoxy base coat(s), polyurethane top coat, no aggregate. 1. System Thickness: 30 mils, nominal, dry film thickness (DFT). 2. Texture: Smooth. 3. Sheen: High gloss. 4. Color: As selected by Architect. 5. Products: a. Key Resin Company; Key High-Build Coating System: www.keyresin.com/#sle. b. Sherwin-Williams Company; Armorseal WB Epoxy/Polyurethane: www.protective.sherwin-williams.com/#sle. c. Sika Corporation; Sikafloor Morritex Coating System: www.sikafloorusa.com/#sle. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Subfloor Filler: Type recommended by fluid-applied flooring manufacturer. B. Primer: Type recommended by fluid-applied flooring manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that subfloor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive flooring. B. Cementitious Subfloor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are ready for fluid-applied flooring installation by testing for moisture and alkalinity(pH). 1. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by fluid-applied flooring manufacturer. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove subfloor ridges and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks,joints, holes, and other defects with subfloor filler. B. Apply primer to surfaces required by flooring manufacturer. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 09 67 00- 1 Fluid-Applied Flooring Re-Bid Construction Documents 3.03 INSTALLATION - FLOORING A. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Apply each coat to minimum thickness required by manufacturer. C. Finish to smooth level surface. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 09 67 00-2 Fluid-Applied Flooring Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 09 91 13 EXTERIOR PAINTING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation. B. Field application of paints. C. Scope: Finish exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and unless otherwise indicated. D. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items: 1. Items factory-finished unless otherwise indicated; materials and products having factory- applied primers are not considered factory finished. 2. Items indicated to receive other finishes. 3. Items indicated to remain unfinished. 4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of equipment. 5. Non-metallic roofing and flashing. 6. Stainless steel, anodized aluminum, bronze, terne-coated stainless steel, zinc, and lead. 7. Glass. 8. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits. E. See Schedule for surfaces to be finished at the end of this Section. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Shop-primed items. B. Section 09 96 00 - High-Performance Coatings. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Comply with ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this section. 1.04 ABBREVIATIONS A. DFT: Dry film thickness in mils. B. WFT: Wet film thickness in mils. 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D- National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; Current Edition. B. ASTM D16 -Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications; 2024. C. MPI (APSM) - Master Painters Institute Architectural Painting Specification Manual; Current Edition. D. SSPC-SP 1 -Solvent Cleaning; 2015, with Editorial Revision (2016). 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide complete list of products to be used, with the following information for each: 1. Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product category (e.g. "alkyd enamel"). 2. Cross-reference to specified paint system(s) product is to be used in; include description of each system. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 0991 13- 1 Exterior Painting Re-Bid Construction Documents C. Samples: Submit two painted samples, illustrating selected colors and textures for each color and system selected with specified coats cascaded. Submit on aluminum sheet, 12"x 12" in size. D. Coating Maintenance Manual: Upon completion of the project, the Contractor, or paint manufacturer/supplier shall furnish a coating maintenance manual, such as Sherwin-Williams' "Custodian Project Color and Product Information" report or equivalent. Manual shall include an Area Summary with a finish schedule, Area Detail designating where each product/color/finish was used, product data pages, MSDS sheets, care and cleaning instructions, touch-up procedures, and color samples of each color and finish used. E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Extra Paint and Finish Materials: 1 gallon of each color; from the same product run, store where directed. 3. Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified with minimum five years experience. 1.08 MOCK-UPS A. Provide panel, 8 feet long by 4 feet wide, illustrating paint color, texture, and finish. B. Locate where directed by Architect. C. Mock-up may remain as part of the work. 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions. 1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the paint product manufacturer's temperature ranges. B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations. C. Do not apply exterior paint and finishes during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside the humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. D. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 50 degrees F for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide paints and finishes from the same manufacturerunless noted otherwise on the Schedule. 1. If a single manufacturer cannot provide specified products, minor exceptions will be permitted provided approval by Architect is obtained using the specified procedures for substitutions. B. Paints: 1. PPG Paints: www.ppgpaints.com/#sle. 2. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 0991 13-2 Exterior Painting Re-Bid Construction Documents C. Primer Sealers: Same manufacturer as top coats. D. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.02 PAINTS AND FINISHES -GENERAL A. Paints and Finishes: Ready-mixed, unless required to be a field-catalyzed paint. 1. Provide paints and finishes of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties, and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. 2. Supply each paint material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a single production run. 3. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute paint or finishes or add materials unless such procedure is described explicitly in manufacturer's product instructions. B. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: 1. Provide paints and finishes that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the following: a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings. 2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added at project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Sheens: Provide the sheens specified; where sheen is not specified, sheen will be selected later by Architect from the manufacturer's full line. 2.03 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Accessory Materials: Provide primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding materials, and clean-up materials as required for final completion of painted surfaces. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. C. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. D. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. E. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Masonry Units: 12 percent. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to application. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. C. Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces for finishing. D. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat. E. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 0991 13-3 Exterior Painting Re-Bid Construction Documents F. Concrete: 1. Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be coated exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Clean surfaces with pressurized water. Use pressure range of 1,500 to 4,000 psi at 6 to 12 inches. Allow to dry. G. Galvanized Surfaces: 1. Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent according to SSPC-SP 1. H. Ferrous Metal: 1. Solvent clean according to SSPC-SP 1. 2. Shop-Primed Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Re-prime entire shop-primed item. I. Metal Doors to be Painted: Prime metal door top and bottom edge surfaces. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Apply each coat to uniform appearance. C. Dark Colors and Deep Clear Colors: Regardless of number of coats specified, apply additional coats until complete hide is achieved. D. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat. E. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing. 3.04 CLEANING A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes until completion of project. B. Touch-up damaged finishes after Substantial Completion. 3.06 SCHEDULE - EXTERIOR A. Steel - Unprimed. See Section 09 96 00. PPG Pitt-Tech Waterborne Acrylic Primer/Finish. 402OPF 2.2 DFT Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial Water-based Alkyd Urethane Enamel, 5.0 WFT/ 1.6 DFT per coat. PPG Speedhide Interior/Exterior WB Alkyd Semi-gloss, 6-1510XI. 4.6 WFT/ 1.6 DFT per coat. B. Steel - Shop primed and previously painted surfaces (all steel doors/frames, handrails/guardrails, etc., other miscellaneous steel, including mechanical equipment if applicable). See Section 09 96 00. Sherwin-Williams Pro-Cryl Universal Primer, 5 WFT/3.8 DFT per coat. PPG Pitt-Tech Waterborne Acrylic Primer/Finish. 402OPF 2.2 DFT. Sherwin-Williams Pro-Industrial DTM Acrylic, Eg-Shel; 8.0 WFT per coat. PPG Pitt-Tech Plus Int./Ext. Semi-Gloss DTM Industrial Enamel 90-1610, 2.0 DFT. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 0991 13-4 Exterior Painting Re-Bid Construction Documents C. Architectural Steel - Shop primed; high performance coating (urethane type). See Section 09 9600. 1. One coat primer; PPG Pitt-Tech Plus Waterborne Acrylic Primer/Finish 402OPF 2.2 DFT. 2. Two coats high performance acrylic; Sherwin-Williams Water-based Alkyd Urethane Enamel , Semi-gloss; 5 WFT/ 1.6 DFT per coat. PPG Speedhide Interior/Exterior WB Alkyd Semi-gloss, 6-1510XI. 4.6 WFT/2.0 DFT per coat. D. Steel - Galvanized (if indicated to be painted). 1. One coat base coat: Sherwin-Williams Galvite HS, 3.8 MDF PPG Pitt-Tech Plus Waterborne Acrylic Primer/Finish 402OPF 2.2 DFT. 2. One coats high performance alkyd enamel; Sherwin-Williams Waterbased Alkyd Urethane Enamel, 1.6 MDF per coat. PPG Speedhide Interior/Exterior WB Alkyd Semi-gloss, 6-1510X1. 4.6 WFT/2.0 DFT per coat. E. Concrete Panels 1. One coat primer: Sherwin-Williams Loxon Concrete & Masonry Primer/Sealer. PPG Perma-Crete Interior/Exterior Alkali Resistant Primer, 4-603XI, WFT 4.0/ DFT 1.6 2. Two coats elastomeric acrylic coating: One coat Sherwin-Williams Conflex XL High Build, 13 WFT/6.0 DFT. One coat Sherwin-Williams Conflex XL Textured High Build, 20 WFT/8.8 DFT. One coat PPG Perma-Crete PITT-FLEX Elastomeric Coating, Smooth; 4-110XI; 16 DFT/7.2 DFT. One coat PPG Perma-Crete Masonry Coating Textured Coating 4-50; 16 WFT/9.3 DFT. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 0991 13-5 Exterior Painting Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation. B. Field application of paints. C. Scope: Finish interior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and unless otherwise indicated. 1. Both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telecom equipment before installing equipment. 2. Prime surfaces to receive wall coverings. 3. Mechanical and Electrical: a. In finished areas, paint insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, mechanical equipment, and electrical equipment, unless otherwise indicated. b. In finished areas, paint shop-primed items. c. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint to visible surfaces. d. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, to match face panels. D. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items: 1. Items factory-finished unless otherwise indicated; materials and products having factory- applied primers are not considered factory finished. 2. Items indicated to receive other finishes. 3. Items indicated to remain unfinished. 4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, bar code labels, and operating parts of equipment. 5. Stainless steel, anodized aluminum, bronze, terne-coated stainless steel, and lead items. 6. Marble, granite, slate, and other natural stones. 7. Floors, unless specifically indicated. 8. Ceramic and other tiles. 9. Brick, architectural concrete, cast stone, integrally colored plaster, and stucco. 10. Glass. 11. Acoustical materials, unless specifically indicated. 12. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits. 13. Exposed data cabling, control wiring, and security/fire alarm cables. E. See Schedule at the end of this Section for surfaces to be finished. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Comply with ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this section. B. WFT: Wet film thickness in mils. C. DFT: Dry film thickness in mils. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D- National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; Current Edition. B. ASTM D16 -Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications; 2024. C. ASTM D4258- Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating; 2023. D. ASTM D4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and Wood-Based Materials; 2020. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 0991 23- 1 Interior Painting Re-Bid Construction Documents E. SSPC-SP 1 -Solvent Cleaning; 2015, with Editorial Revision (2016). F. SSPC-SP 13 -Surface Preparation of Concrete; 2018. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide complete list of products to be used, with the following information for each: 1. Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product category (e.g., "alkyd enamel"). 2. Cross-reference to specified paint system products to be used in project; include description of each system. C. Coating Maintenance Manual: Upon completion of the project, the Contractor, or paint manufacturer/supplier shall furnish a coating maintenance manual, such as Sherwin-Williams' "Custodian Project Color and Product Information" report or equivalent. Manual shall include an Area Summary with a finish schedule, Area Detail designating where each product/color/finish was used, product data pages, MSDS sheets, care and cleaning instructions, touch-up procedures, and color samples of each color and finish used. D. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Extra Paint and Finish Materials: 1 gal of each color; from the same product run, store where directed. 3. Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations. C. Do not apply materials when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, at temperatures less than 5 degrees F above the dew point, or to damp or wet surfaces. D. Minimum Application Temperatures for Paints: 50 degrees F for interiors unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. E. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish Finishes: 65 degrees F for interior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. F. Provide lighting level of 80 fc measured mid-height at substrate surface. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide paints and finishes from the same manufacturer to the greatest extent possible. 1. If a single manufacturer cannot provide specified products; minor exceptions will be permitted provided approval by Architect is obtained using the specified procedures for substitutions. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 0991 23-2 Interior Painting Re-Bid Construction Documents B. Paints: 1. Base Manufacturer: Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com. 2. Behr Process Corporation: www.behr.com/#sle. 3. PPG Paints: www.ppgpaints.com/#sle. 2.02 PAINTS AND FINISHES -GENERAL A. Paints and Finishes: Ready-mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed paint. 1. Provide paints and finishes of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties, and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. 2. Supply each paint material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a single production run. 3. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute paint or finishes or add materials unless such procedure is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions. B. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: 1. Provide paints and finishes that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the following: a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings. 2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added at project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Sheens: Provide the sheens specified; where sheen is not specified, sheen will be selected later by Architect from the manufacturer's full line. D. Colors: As indicated on drawings. 1. In finished areas, finish pipes, ducts, conduit, and equipment the same color as the wall/ceiling under which they are mounted. 2. In utility areas, finish equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed duct work in colors according to the color coding scheme indicated. 2.03 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Accessory Materials: Provide primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding materials, and clean-up materials as required for final completion of painted surfaces. B. Patching Material: Latex filler. C. Textured Finish Materials: Latex-based compound; plain. D. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin application of paints and finishes until substrates have been adequately prepared. B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. D. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. E. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. F. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces is below the following maximums: 1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. 2. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Masonry Units: 12 percent. 3. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 0991 23-3 Interior Painting Re-Bid Construction Documents 4. Concrete Floors and Traffic Surfaces: 8 percent. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to application. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. C. Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. D. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat. E. Concrete: 1. Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be coated exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Clean concrete according to ASTM D4258. Allow to dry. 3. Prepare surface as recommended by top coat manufacturer and according to SSPC-SP 13. F. Masonry: 1. Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content, alkalinity of surfaces, or if alkalinity of mortar joints exceed that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. Allow to dry. 2. Prepare surface as recommended by top coat manufacturer. G. Gypsum Board: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair. H. Ferrous Metal: 1. Solvent clean according to SSPC-SP 1. I. Metal Doors to be Painted: Prime metal door top and bottom edge surfaces. 3.03 TEXTURE FINISH A. Create finish texture in paint coats by means of a heavy nap roller in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and to match approved sample. 3.04 APPLICATION A. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately. B. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. C. Where adjacent sealant is to be painted, do not apply finish coats until sealant is applied. D. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied. E. Apply each coat to uniform appearance in thicknesses specified by manufacturer. F. Dark Colors and Deep Clear Colors: Regardless of number of coats specified, apply as many coats as necessary for complete hide. G. Sand metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish. H. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat. I. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing. 3.05 CLEANING A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 0991 23-4 Interior Painting Re-Bid Construction Documents 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes until completion of project. B. Touch-up damaged finishes after Substantial Completion. 3.07 SCHEDULE -INTERIOR A. Steel - Unprimed 1. One coat primer: Sherwin-Williams Pro-Cryl Universal Primer, 10.0 WFT/3.8 DFT PPG Pitt-Tech Plus Waterborne Acrylic Primer/Finish 4020PF; 2.2 DFT. 2. Two coats high performance acrylic: Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial Multi-Surface Acrylic Semi-Gloss; 3.75 WFT/ 1.5 DFT per coat. PPG Pitt-Tech Plus Int./Ext. Semi-Gloss DTM Industrial Enamel B. Steel - Shop primed (including fire extinguisher cabinets and all steel doors/frames, railings, etc.) 1. Touch-up with one coat primer: Sherwin-Williams Pro-Cryl Universal Primer, 2.0 DFT. PPG Pitt-Tech Plus Waterborne Acrylic Primer/Finish 4020PF; 2.2 DFT. 2. Two coats high performance acrylic: Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial Multi-Surface Acrylic Semi-Gloss; 3.75 WFT/ 1.5 DFT per coat. PPG Pitt-Tech Plus Int./Ext. Semi-gloss DTM Industrial Enamel. C. Gypsum Board -Typical 1. One coat primer/sealer: Sherwin-Williams ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Wall primer; 4.0 WFT/ 1.0 DFT. PPG Speedhide Zero Interior Latex Sealer 6-4900XI; 4.0 WFT/ 1.4 DFT. 2. Two coats acrylic latex: Sherwin-Williams Pro Mar 200 HP Zero VOC Interior Acrylic Eg-Shel; 4.0 WFT/ 1.4 DFT per coat. PPG Speedhide Max Interior Latex EggShell, 6-9310; 4.0 WFT/ 1.3 DFT. D. Gypsum Board - Epoxy(if scheduled) 1. One coat PVA primer/sealer: Sherwin-Williams ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Wall primer; 4.0 WFT/ 1.4 DFT. PPG Speedhide Zero Interior Latex Sealer 6-4900XI; 4.0 WFT/ 1.4 DFT. 2. Two coats water-based epoxy: Sherwin-Williams Pro-Industrial Pre-Catalyzed WB Epoxy, Eg-Shel; 4.0 WFT/ 1.4 per coat. a. PPG Pit-Glaze WB1 Pre-Catalyzed Acrylic Waterborne Epoxy Eggshell 16-310; 4.0 WFT/ 1.5 DFT per coat. E. Gypsum Board to Receive Wall Covering 1. One coat primer/sealer: Sherwin-Williams PrepRite PreWallcovering Primer; 1.2 DFT. PPG Seal Grip Gripper Interior/Exterior 100%Acrylic Latex Primer, 17-921XI. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 09 91 23-5 Interior Painting Re-Bid Construction Documents F. Concrete Masonry Units-Acrylic(typical). 1. One coat block filler/primer: Sherwin-Williams Loxon Acrylic Block Surfacer; 16.0 WFT/ 6.8 DFT. PPG Perma-Cretre Concrete Block& Masonry Surface/Filler 4-100XI; 4.0 WFT/ 1.2 DFT. 2. Two coats acrylic latex: Sherwin-Williams Pro Mar 200 HP Zero VOC Interior Acrylic Eg-Shel; 4.0 WFT/ 1.4 DFT per coat. PPG Speedhide Max Interior Latex EggShell, 6-9310; 4.0 WFT/ 1.3 DFT. G. Concrete Masonry Units- Epoxy (if scheduled) 1. One coat block filler/primer: Sherwin-Williams Loxon Acrylic Block Surfacer; 16.0 WFT/6.8 DFT. PPG Perma-Cretre Concrete Block& Masonry Surface/Filler 4-100X1; 4.0 WFT/ 1.2 DFT. 2. Two coats water-based epoxy: Sherwin-Williams Pro-Industrial Pre-Catalyzed WB Epoxy, Eg-Shel; 4.0 WFT/ 1.4 per coat. PPG Pit-Glaze WB1 Pre-Catalyzed Acrylic Waterborne Epoxy Eggshell 16-310; 4.0 WFT/ 1.5 DFT per coat. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 09 91 23-6 Interior Painting Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 09 96 00 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. High performance coatings. B. Surface preparation. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D- National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; Current Edition. B. MPI (APSM) - Master Painters Institute Architectural Painting Specification Manual; Current Edition. C. SSPC-SP 1 -Solvent Cleaning; 2015, with Editorial Revision (2016). 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide complete list of all products to be used, with the following information for each: 1. Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product category (e.g. "alkyd enamel"). 2. Cross-reference to specified coating system(s) product is to be used in; include description of each system. 3. Manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. Extra Coating Materials: 1 gallon of each type and color. 2. Label each container with manufacturer's name, product number, color number, and room names and numbers where used. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum ten years documented experience. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of coating, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. C. Coating Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations. B. Do not install materials when temperature is below 55 degrees F or above 90 degrees F. C. Maintain this temperature range, 24 hours before, during, and 72 hours after installation of coating. D. Restrict traffic from area where coating is being applied or is curing. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 09 96 00- 1 High-Performance Coatings Re-Bid Construction Documents PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide high performance coating products from the same manufacturer to the greatest extent possible. 1. Substitution of other products by the same manufacturer is preferred over substitution of products by a different manufacturer. B. High-Performance Coatings: 1. PPG Paints: www.ppgpaints.com/#sle. 2. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.protective.sherwin-wiIIiams.com/industries/#sle. 3. Tnemec Company, Inc: www.tnemec.com/#sle. 4. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.02 TOP COAT MATERIALS A. Coatings- General: Provide complete multi-coat systems formulated and recommended by manufacturer for the applications indicated, in the thicknesses indicated; number of coats specified does not include primer or filler coat. 1. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: a. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the following: 1) 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings. b. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added at project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Urethane Coating for exposed structural steel and other steel components in high humidity/ coastal environments: 1. Number of Coats: 2 coat primer, 2 coats topcoat. 2. Topcoat Product Characteristics: a. Percentage of solids by volume: 60%, minimum. b. Dry film thickness, per coat: 4.5 mils, minimum. 3. Top Coat(s): Polysiloxane, Two-Component. a. Sheen: Gloss. b. Products: 1) Sherwin-Williams Hi Solids Polyurethane 250, B65 Series: www.protective.sherwin-wiIIiams.com/#sle. 2) Substitutions: Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 4. Primers: a. Exposed structural steel and other steel components: 1) One coat Zinc-rich primer: Sherwin Williams Zinc Clad 4100 2) One coat epoxy primer: Sherwin Williams Macropoxy 646. 2.03 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Accessory Materials: Provide primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding materials, and clean-up materials as required for final completion of coated surfaces. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Do not begin application of coatings until substrates have been properly prepared. C. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the coating manufacturer. Obtain and follow manufacturer's instructions for examination and testing of substrates. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 09 96 00-2 High-Performance Coatings Re-Bid Construction Documents D. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. E. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces of loose foreign matter. B. Remove substances that would bleed through finished coatings. If unremovable, seal surface with shellac. C. Remove finish hardware, fixture covers, and accessories and store. D. Ferrous Metal: 1. Solvent clean according to SSPC-SP 1. 3.03 PRIMING A. Apply primer to all surfaces, unless specifically not required by coating manufacturer. Apply in accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions. 3.04 COATING APPLICATION A. Apply coatings in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, to thicknesses specified. B. Apply in uniform thickness coats, without runs, drips, pinholes, brush marks, or variations in color, texture, or finish. Finish edges, crevices, corners, and other changes in dimension with full coating thickness. 3.05 CLEANING A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site. B. Clean surfaces immediately of overspray, splatter, and excess material. C. After coating has cured, clean and replace finish hardware, fixtures, and fittings previously removed. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect finished work from damage. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 09 96 00-3 High-Performance Coatings Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 10 11 01 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Porcelain enamel steel markerboards. B. Glass markerboards. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 10 53 - Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry: Blocking and supports. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 16 CFR 1201 -Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; Current Edition. B. ANSI Z97.1 -American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings- Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test; 2015 (Reaffirmed 2020). C. ASTM A424/A424M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, for Porcelain Enameling; 2018. D. ASTM C1172 - Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass; 2019. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on markerboard, trim, and accessories. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate wall elevations, dimensions,joint locations , special anchor details. D. Samples: Submit color charts for selection of color and texture of markerboard and trim. E. Test Reports: Show compliance to specified surface burning characteristics requirements. 1.05 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00- Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide five year warranty for markerboard to include warranty against discoloration due to cleaning, crazing or cracking, and staining. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS A. Porcelain Enamel Steel Markerboards: 1. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range. 2. Height: 48 inches. 3. Length: As indicated on drawings. 4. Frame: Extruded aluminum , with concealed fasteners. 5. Frame Finish: Anodized, natural. 6. Accessories: Provide marker tray and map rail. B. Magnetic Glass Markerboards: 1. Glass: Laminated, low iron, 1/4 inch thick, with bevel edges and radiused corners, laminated to steel backing sheet for use with magnets. Coated or treated for use as dry erase board or projection surface. 2. Glass Finish: White back-coating. 3. Steel Backing Sheet Thickness: 24 gauge, 0.0239 inch . 4. Size: As indicated on drawings. 5. Frame: No frame, with concealed fasteners. 6. Mounting: Stainless steel standoffs. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 10 11 01 - 1 Visual Display Boards Re-Bid Construction Documents 2.02 MATERIALS A. Porcelain Enameled Steel Sheet: ASTM A424/A424M, Type I, Commercial Steel, with fired-on vitreous finish. B. Float Glass: Provide float-glass-based glazing unless otherwise indicated. C. Laminated Glass: Float glass laminated in accordance with ASTM C1172. 1. Laminated Safety Glass: Comply with ANSI Z97.1 -Class B or 16 CFR 1201 - Category I impact test requirements. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Mounting Brackets: Concealed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install boards in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install with top of marker tray at 30 inches above finished floor. C. Secure units level and plumb. 3.02 CLEANING A. Clean board surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 10 1101 -2 Visual Display Boards Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 10 1419 DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Dimensional letter signage. B. Illumination system. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's product literature for each type of dimensional letter sign, indicating style, font, colors, locations, and overall dimensions of each sign. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Include dimensions, locations, elevations, materials, text and graphic layout, and attachment details. 2. Show locations of electrical service connections. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. D. Selection Samples: Where materials, colors, and finishes are not specified, submit two sets of selection charts or chips. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Package dimensional letter signs as required to prevent damage before installation. B. Store under cover and elevated above grade. C. Store tape adhesive at a normal room temperature of 68 to 72 degrees F. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install tape adhesive when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by manufacturer. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature during and after installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Flat Signs: Inpro Santa Cruz Standard Sign Design B. Products 1. Inpro Corporation: www.inprocorp.com/#sle. 2. Best Sign System, Inc.. 2.02 DIMENSIONAL LETTERS A. Metal Letters: 1. Material: Stainless steel sheet, fabricated reverse channel. 2. Thickness: 1/8 inch minimum. 3. Letter Height: As indicated on drawings. 4. Text and Typeface: a. Character Font: Helvetica, Arial, or other sans serif font. 5. Finish: Brushed, satin. 6. Color: As selected. 7. Mounting: Concealed screws. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 10 14 19- 1 Dimensional Letter Signage Re-Bid Construction Documents 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Concealed Screws: Noncorroding metal; stainless steel, galvanized steel, chrome plated, or other. B. Exposed Screws: Stainless steel. 2.04 SIGNAGE APPLICATIONS A. Accessibility Compliance: Signs are required to comply with ADA Standards and ICC A117.1 Texas Accessibility Standards, unless otherwise indicated; in the event of conflicting requirements, comply with the most comprehensive and specific requirements. B. Room and Door Signs: Provide a sign for all Permanent Rooms. 1. Sign Type: Flat signs with photopolymer panel media mounted to an injection modled frame as specified. 2. Provide "tactile" signage, with letters raised minimum 1/32 inch and Grade II braille. 3. Toilet Rooms: Idendify with pictograms, the names "Men" and "Women", room numbers as determined by owner, and braille. C. Emergency Evacuation Maps: 1. Map content as indicated on drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install with horizontal edges level. C. Protect from damage; repair or replace damaged items. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 10 14 19-2 Dimensional Letter Signage Re-Bid Construction Documents ADDENDUM NO. 4 SECTION 10 21 13.19 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Solid plastic toilet compartments. B. Urinal screens. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 10 53 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry: Blocking and supports. B. Section 10 28 00 -Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 286- Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Evaluating Contribution of Wall and Ceiling Interior Finish to Room Fire Growth; 2024. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on panel construction, hardware, and accessories. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate partition plan, elevation views, dimensions, details of wall supports, door swings. D. Samples: Submit two samples of partition panels, 3 by3 inch in size illustrating panel finish, color, and sheen. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Solid Plastic Toilet Compartments: 1. Scranton Products; Hiny Hiders Partitions: www.scrantonproducts.com/#sle. a. Bold Color Collection, orange peel texture. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.02 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS A. Solid Plastic Toilet Compartments: Factory fabricated doors, pilasters, and divider panels made of solid molded high density polyethylene (HDPE), tested in accordance with NFPA 286; floor-mounted head rail-braced. 1. Color: as indicated on drawings. B. Doors: 1. Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Width: 24 inch. 3. Width for Handicapped Use: 36 inch, out-swinging. 4. Height: 55 inch. C. Panels: 1. Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Height: 55 inch. 3. Depth: As indicated on drawings. D. Pilasters: 1. Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Width: As required to fit space; minimum 3 inch. E. Screens: Without doors; to match compartments; mounted to wall with two panel brackets, 18" by 55". RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 10 21 13.19- 1 Plastic Toilet Compartments Re-Bid Construction Documents ADDENDUM NO. 4 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Pilaster Shoes: Stainless steel, satin finish, 3 inches high; concealing floor fastenings. B. Head Rails: Extruded aluminum, anti-grip profile. 1. Size: Manufacturer's standard size. C. Wall and Pilaster Brackets: Stainless steel; manufacturer's standard type for conditions indicated on drawings. D. Attachments, Screws, and Bolts: Stainless steel , tamper proof type. E. Hinges: Stainless steel, manufacturer's standard finish. 1. Continuous-type hinge, self closing. F. Door Hardware: Stainless steel, manufacturer's standard finish. 1. Door Latch: Slide type with exterior emergency access feature. 2. Door Strike and Keeper with Rubber Bumper: Mount on pilaster in alignment with door latch. 3. Provide door pull for outswinging doors. G. Coat Hook: One per compartment, mounted on door. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install partitions secure, rigid, plumb, and level in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Maintain 3/8 inch to 1/2 inch space between wall and panels and between wall and end pilasters. C. Attach panel brackets securely to walls using anchor devices. D. Attach panels and pilasters to brackets. Locate head rail joints at pilaster center lines. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 10 21 13.19-2 Plastic Toilet Compartments Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 10 28 00 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Commercial toilet accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 10 53 - Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry: Concealed supports for accessories, including in wall framing and plates and above ceiling framing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc(Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2017. B. ASTM A269/A269M - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service; 2022. C. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc- Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2023. D. ASTM A666 -Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2023. E. ASTM B456 -Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium; 2017 (Reapproved 2022). F. ASTM C1036- Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2021. G. ASTM C1503- Standard Specification for Silvered Flat Glass Mirror; 2024. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, and attachment methods. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Commercial Toilet, Shower, and Bath Accessories: 1. American Specialties, Inc: www.americanspecialties.com. 2. Bradley Corporation: www.bradleycorp.com. 3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.: www.bobrick.com. 4. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Accessories -General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged complete with anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. 1. Grind welded joints smooth. 2. Fabricate units made of metal sheet of seamless sheets with flat surfaces. B. Keys: Provide 2 keys for each accessory to Owner; master key lockable accessories. C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666, Type 304. D. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A269/A269M, Grade TP304 or TP316. E. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 coating. F. Mirror Glass: Annealed float glass, ASTM C1036 Type I, Class 1, Quality Q2, with silvering, protective and physical characteristics complying with ASTM C1503. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 10 28 00- 1 Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories Re-Bid Construction Documents G. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized; tamper-proof; security type. H. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component and substrate. 2.03 FINISHES A. Stainless Steel: Satin finish, unless otherwise noted. B. Chrome/Nickel Plating: ASTM B456, SC 2, polished finish, unless otherwise noted. C. Baked Enamel: Pretreat to clean condition, apply one coat primer and minimum two coats epoxy baked enamel. D. Galvanizing for Items Other than Sheet: Comply with ASTM A123/A123M; galvanize ferrous metal and fastening devices. 2.04 COMMERCIAL TOILET ACCESSORIES -SEE DRAWINGS FOR SCHEDULE A. Mirrors: Stainless steel framed, 1/4 inch thick annealed float glass; ASTM C1036. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation. B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' instructions in locations indicated on drawings. B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. C. Mounting Heights: As required by accessibility regulations, and as indicated on the drawings. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 10 28 00-2 Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 10 44 00 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fire extinguishers. B. Fire extinguisher cabinets. C. Accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 10 53 - Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking product and execution requirements. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 10-Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers; 2022. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate locations of cabinets, cabinet physical dimensions, rough-in measurements for recessed cabinets, and accessories required for complete installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Fire Extinguishers: 1. Nystrom, Inc; EX-3005: www.nystrom.com. 2. Potter-Roemer: www.potterroemer.com/#sle. 3. Pyro-Chem, a Tyco Business: www.pyrochem.com. 4. JL Industries, Inc; Cosmic 10E: www.jlindustries.com. 5. Larsens Manufacturing Co; MP10: www.larsensmfg.com. 6. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets and Accessories: 1. JL Industries, Inc; Ambassdor Series: www.jlindustries.com. 2. Larsen's Manufacturing Co; Architectural Series: www.larsensmfg.com. 3. Nystrom, Inc; Alpine Series: www.nystrom.com. 2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Fire Extinguishers- General: Comply with product requirements of NFPA 10 and applicable codes, whichever is more stringent. B. Multipurpose Dry Chemical Type Fire Extinguishers: Carbon steel tank, with pressure gauge. 1. Class: A:B:C type. 2. Size: 10 pound. 3. Finish: Baked polyester powder coat, color as selected. 4. Temperature range: Minus 40 degrees F to 120 degrees F. 2.03 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS A. Cabinet Configuration: Semi-recessed type. 1. Interior nominal dimensions of 9-1/2 inch wide x 24 inch high x 5 inch deep. 2. Trim: Returned to wall surface, with 5/16 inch projection, 1-3/8 inch wide face. 3. Provide cabinet enclosure with right angle inside corners and seams, and with formed perimeter trim and door stiles. B. Door: 0.036 inch thick, Solid door design, reinforced for flatness and rigidity; latch. Hinge doors for 180 degree opening with two butt hinge. Provide nylon catch. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 10 44 00- 1 Fire Protection Specialties Re-Bid Construction Documents C. Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet, with pre-drilled holes for placement of anchors. D. Finish of Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door: Primed for field paint finish. E. Finish of Cabinet Interior: White colored enamel. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Graphic Identification: Cut vinyl lettering. B. Pull: Manufacturer's standard wire pull, US26 finish. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Secure rigidly in place. C. Provide fire rated cabinets in fire rated walls. D. Install extinguisher mounting bracket to position top of fire extinguisher at 48 inches above finished floor. E. Apply cabinet signage after completion of field painting. Apply square and plumb. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 10 44 00-2 Fire Protection Specialties Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 10 51 13 METAL LOCKERS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal lockers. B. Locker benches. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ADA Standards-2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design; 2010. B. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc- Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2023. C. ASTM A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Required Hardness, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable; 2023, with Editorial Revision. D. ICC A117.1 -Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; 2017. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's published data on locker construction, sizes, and accessories. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate locker plan layout, numbering plan. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Protect locker finish and adjacent surfaces from damage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LOCKER APPLICATIONS A. Type 1: Metal lockers, free-standing with matching closed base. 1. Width: 15 inches. 2. Depth: 18 inches. 3. Height: 66 inches. 4. Configuration: Two tier. 5. Fittings: Size and configuration as indicated on drawings. a. Hooks: One single prong. 6. Ventilation: Louvers at top and bottom of door panel. 7. Locking: Padlock hasps, for padlocks provided by Owner. 8. Provide sloped top. 9. Provide knock-out panel for electrical /data outlets. 2.02 METAL LOCKERS A. Accessibility: Design units indicated on drawings as 'accessible'to comply with ICC A117.1 and ADA Standards. 1. Provide at least 5% accessible lockers, but no fewer than one, of each type of use in each cluster. B. Locker Case Construction: 1. Heavy-Duty, Welded Construction: Made of formed and welded together sheet steel; metal edges finished smooth without burrs; baked enamel or powder coat finished inside and out. a. Assembly: Do not use bolts, screws, or rivets to assemble locker bodies. b. Locker Body Components: Formed and flanged from steel sheet of the following type and minimum thicknesses: 1) Unperforated Steel Sheet: Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, supplied for exposed applications and complying with ASTM A1008/A1008M and the RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 1051 13- 1 Metal Lockers Re-Bid Construction Documents following: (a) Zinc-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process: Comply with ASTM A653/A653M, coating designation G60/Z180. c. Frames: Formed channel shape, welded and ground flush, welded to body, resilient gaskets and latching for quiet operation. 1) Door Frame: 16 gauge, 0.0598 inch, minimum. C. Doors: Channel edge; welded construction, manufacturer's standard stiffeners, grind and finish edges smooth. 1. Door Thickness: 16 gauge, 0.0598 inch, minimum. 2. Form recess for operating handle and locking device. D. Doors at Vented Lockers: Hollow double pan, sandwich construction, 1-3/16 inch thick; welded construction, channel reinforced top and bottom with intermediate stiffener ribs, grind and finish edges smooth. 1. Door Outer Face: 14 gauge, 0.0747 inch, minimum. 2. Door Inner Face: 20 gauge, 0.0359 inch, minimum. 3. Form recess for operating handle and locking device. E. Latches and Door Handles: Manufacturer's standard. F. Hinges: Heavy-duty, 7-knuckle type; two for doors under 42 inches high; three for doors over 42 inches high. G. Sloped Top: 20 gauge, 0.0359 inch, with closed ends. H. Coat Hooks: Stainless steel or zinc-plated steel. I. Number Plates: Provide rectangular shaped aluminum plates. Form numbers 1 inch high of block font style with ADA designation, in contrasting color. J. Locks: Locker manufacturer's standard type indicated in Applications article above. 2.03 LOCKER BENCHES A. Locker Benches: Stationary type; bench top of 1-1/4 inch laminated maple with eased edges; painted steel pedestals. 1. Height: 17- 19 inch. 2. Length: 42-48 inch. 3. Depth: 20-24 inch. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Place and secure on prepared base. C. Install lockers plumb and square. D. Install fittings if not factory installed. E. Replace components that do not operate smoothly. 3.02 CLEANING A. Clean locker interiors and exterior surfaces. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 1051 13-2 Metal Lockers Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 11 81 29 FACILITY FALL PROTECTION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Ladder safety systems. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 05 51 33 - Metal Ladders. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 29 CFR 1910.29 - Fall Protection Systems and Falling Object Protection- Criteria and Practices; Current Edition. B. 29 CFR 1926.1053- Ladders; Current Edition. C. ANSI A14.3 -American National Standard for Ladders-- Fixed -- Safety Requirements; 2008 (Reaffirmed 2018). D. ANSI/ASSP Z359.15- Safety Requirements for Single Anchor Lifelines and Fall Arresters for Personal Fall Arrest Systems; 2014. E. ANSI/ASSP Z359.16- Safety Requirements for Climbing Ladder Fall Arrest Systems; 2016. F. ASTM A666 -Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2023. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Material, equipment, and fixture lists. Manufacturer's catalog data indicating the sizes, descriptions, capacities, test certifications, and other descriptive data showing in sufficient detail that product complies with contract requirements. Equipment and performance data including but not limited to lifeline anchors, safety tieback anchors, and lifeline cable. C. Shop Drawings: Installation details: plan showing locations and types of anchorage points for personal fall protection systems and building maintenance equipment. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Instructions indicating recommended method and sequence of installation for lifeline anchors, safety tieback anchors, energy-absorbing devices, and lifeline cable. E. Manufacturer's qualification statement. F. Installer's qualification statement. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with at least five years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of type specified and with at least three years of documented experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LADDER SAFETY SYSTEMS A. Climbing Ladder Fall Arrest System (CLAFS): 1. Manufacturers: a. 3M Personal Safety Division: www.3M.com/FallProtection/#sle. b. MSA Safety Incorporated: www.msasafety.com/#sle. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2. Description: Climbing ladder fall arrest system allows worker to climb up and down using both hands; does not require employee continuously, hold, push, or pull any part of system while climbing. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 11 81 29- 1 Facility Fall Protection Re-Bid Construction Documents 3. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.29, 29 CFR 1926.1053, Section 7 of ANSI A14.3 and ANSI/ASSP Z359.16. 4. Install on new fixed ladders over 24 feet in height. 5. Rigid Carrier: Fixed 304 stainless steel U-shaped slotted track with top, bottom, and intermediate supports, meeting requirements of ANSI/ASSP Z359.16. a. Provide with stainless steel extension post at top of ladder, meeting requirements of ANSI/ASSP Z359.16. 6. Fall Arrester: Stainless steel and aluminum automatic pass-through carrier sleeve fall arrester meeting requirements of ANSI/ASSP Z359.15 and ANSI/ASSP Z359.16; compatible with carrier. a. If designed to be removable from carrier, arrester removable only by at least two deliberate manual action(s) by user. b. Includes an anti-inversion device to prevent installation of carrier sleeve upside down on carrier. c. Carrier sleeve movement is automatic and does not require continuous manual intervention during climbing or descending. B. Ladder Safety Post: 1. Install on new fixed vertical ladders less than 23 feet in height. 2. Performance characteristics: a. Tubular post shall lock automatically when fully extended. b. Safety post shall have controlled upward and downward movement. c. Release lever shall disengage the post to allow it to be returned to its lowered position. d. Post shall have adjustable mounting brackets to fit ladder rung spacing up to 14 inches on center and clamp brackets to accomodate ladder rungs up to 1-3/4 inch in diameter. 3. Post: High strength steel square tubing. A pull up loop shall be provided at the upper end of the post to facilitate raising the post. 4. Balancing spring: A stainless steel spring balancing mechanism shall be provided to provide smooth, easy, controlled operation when raising and lowering the safety post. 5. Hardware: All mounting hardware shall be Type 316 stainless steel. 6. Finishes: Factory finish shall be yellow powder coat steel. 7. Product: Bilco Model LU-1 as basis of design. 2.02 MATERIALS -ALUMINUM A. Aluminum Non-Welded Mechanical Fittings: Slip-on cast aluminum, for Schedule 40 pipe, with flush set screws for tightening by standard hex wrench, no bolts or screw fasteners. B. Aluminum Welded Fittings: No exposed fasteners; cast aluminum. 2.03 MATERIALS -STAINLESS STEEL A. Stainless Steel, General: ASTM A666, Type 304. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Fabricate work true to dimension, square, plumb, level, and free from distortion or defects detrimental to appearance and performance. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine area for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions related to this work. B. Confirm that the ladder structure to which the ladder safety system is installed can withstand the loads applied by the system in the event of a fall. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 11 81 29-2 Facility Fall Protection Re-Bid Construction Documents 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install anchorage and fasteners in accordance with shop drawings and manufacturer's recommendations to obtain allowable working loads published in product literature and in accordance with this specification. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust fall protection components to function smoothly and safely. 3.04 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Demonstration: Demonstrate operation of system to Owner's personnel. 1. Use operation and maintenance data as reference during demonstration. 2. Briefly describe function, operation, and maintenance of each component. B. Training: Train Owner's personnel on operation and maintenance of system. 1. Use operation and maintenance manual as training reference, supplemented with additional training materials as required. 2. Provide minimum of two hours of training. 3. Instructor: Manufacturer's training personnel. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 11 81 29-3 Facility Fall Protection Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 12 24 00 WINDOW SHADES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Manual roller shades and accessories. B. Motorized roller shades and accessories. C. Motor controls, interfaces, and accessories. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. B. NFPA 701 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame Propagation of Textiles and Films; 2023, with Errata. C. WCMA A100.1 -Standard for Safety of Window Covering Products; 2022. 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide rough-in of electrical wiring as required for installation of hardwired motorized shades. B. Sequencing: 1. Do not fabricate shades until field dimensions for each opening have been taken with finished conditions in place. "Hold to" dimensions are not acceptable. 2. Do not install shades until final surface finishes and painting are complete. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for each product to be used including materials, finishes, fabrication details, dimensions, profiles, mounting requirements, and accessories. 1. Motorized Shades: Include power requirements and standard wiring diagrams solely for the specified products. C. Shop Drawings: Include shade schedule indicating size, location and keys to details. 1. Motorized Shades: Include one-line diagrams, wire counts, coverage patterns, and physical dimensions of each item. Include location plan showing all switch and control zones, switches, sensors and other control accessories. D. Verification Samples: Minimum size 6 inches square, representing actual materials, color and pattern. E. Warranty: Submit sample of manufacturer's warranty and documentation of final executed warranty completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Motorized Shades: Comply with NFPA 70. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than ten years of documented experience. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of this type with minimum ten years of documented experience with shading systems of similar size, type, and complexity; manufacturer's authorized representative. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 12 24 00- 1 Window Shades Re-Bid Construction Documents 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver shades in manufacturer's unopened packaging, labeled to identify each shade for each opening. B. Handle and store shades in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 1.07 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00- Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide manufacturer's standard, non-depreciating warranty, for interior shading only, covering the following: 1. Shade Hardware: 10 years unless otherwise indicated. a. Mecho/7 with ThermoVeil, EuroVeil, EuroTwill, Soho, Equinox, Midnite, Chelsea, or Classic Blackout shade fabric: 25 years. b. ElectroShade with ThermoVeil, EuroVeil, EuroTwill, Soho, Equinox, Midnite, Chelsea, or Classic Blackout shade fabric: 25 years. 2. Shade Fabric: 10 years unless otherwise indicated. 3. Electric Motors, Controls, and Accessories: Five years. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design: MechoShade Systems LLC; www.mechoshade.com/#sle. B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Draper, Inc. 2. Products by listed manufacturers are subject to compliance with specified requirements. 2.02 ROLLER SHADES A. General: 1. Provide shade system components that are capable of being removed or adjusted without removing mounted shade brackets or cassette support channel. 2. Provide shade system that operates smoothly when shades are raised or lowered. 3. Electrical Components: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. Individual testing of components will not be acceptable in lieu of system testing. Where applicable, system components to be FCC compliant. B. Roller Shades- Basis of Design: MechoShade Systems LLC; Mecho/7 System; www.mechoshade.com/#sle. 1. Description: Single roller, manually operated fabric window shades. a. Provide universal drive capability to offset drive chain for reverse roll or regular roll shades. b. Drop Position: Regular roll. c. Mounting: Window jamb mounted. d. Fabric: As indicated under Shade Fabric article. 2. Brackets and Mounting Hardware: As recommended by manufacturer for mounting indicated and to accommodate shade fabric roll-up size and weight. 3. Roller Tubes: a. Material: Extruded aluminum. b. Size: As recommended by manufacturer; selected for suitability for installation conditions, span, and weight of shades. c. Fabric Attachment: Utilize extruded channel in tube to accept vinyl spline welded to fabric edge. Shade band to be removable and replaceable without removing roller tube from brackets or inserting spline from the side of the roller tube. d. Roller tubes to be capable of being removed and reinstalled without affecting roller shade limit adjustments. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 12 24 00-2 Window Shades Re-Bid Construction Documents 4. Hembars: Designed to maintain bottom of shade straight and flat. a. Style: Full wrap fabric covered bottom bar, flat profile with heat sealed closed ends. 5. Clutch Operator: Manufacturer's standard material and design integrated with bracket/brake assembly. a. Provide a permanently lubricated brake assembly mounted on a oil-impregnated hub with wrapped spring clutch. b. Brake must withstand minimum pull force of 50 pounds in the stopped position. c. Mount clutch/brake assembly on the support brackets, fully independent of the roller tube components. 6. Drive Chain: Continuous loop stainless steel beaded ball chain, 95 pound minimum breaking strength. Provide upper and lower limit stops. a. Chain Retainer: Chain tensioning device complying with WCMA A100.1. 7. Accessories: a. Fascia: Removable extruded aluminum fascia, size as required to conceal shade mounting, attachable to brackets without exposed fasteners; clear anodized finish. 1) Fascia to be capable of installation across two or more shade bands in one piece. 2) Provide single fascia to accommodate regular roll shades. 2.03 SHADE FABRIC A. Fabric: Non-flammable, color-fast, impervious to heat and moisture, and able to retain its shape under normal operation. 1. Material Composition: a. Fiberglass with acrylic backing. 2. Performance Requirements: a. Flammability: Pass NFPA 701 large or small scale test. 3. Openness Factor: 3%, nominal. 4. Fabrication: 5. Products: a. MechoShade Systems LLC Inc; EcoVeil Screens- 1550 Series (3% open): www.mechoshade.com/#sle. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.04 ROLLER SHADE FABRICATION A. Field measure finished openings prior to ordering or fabrication. B. Dimensional Tolerances: Fabricate shades to fit openings within specified tolerances. 1. Vertical Dimensions: Fill openings from head to sill with 1/2 inch space between bottom bar and window stool. 2. Horizontal Dimensions- Inside Mounting: Fill openings from jamb to jamb. 3. Horizontal Dimensions- Outside Mounting: Cover window frames, trim, and casings completely. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings, using mounting devices as indicated. B. Adjust level, projection, and shade centering from mounting bracket. Verify there is no telescoping of shade fabric. Ensure smooth shade operation. 3.02 SYSTEM STARTUP A. Motorized Shade System: Provide services of a manufacturer's authorized representative to perform system startup. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 12 24 00-3 Window Shades Re-Bid Construction Documents 3.03 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Demonstration: Demonstrate operation and maintenance of window shade system to Owner's personnel. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from subsequent construction operations. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 12 24 00-4 Window Shades Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 12 36 00 COUNTERTOPS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Countertops for architectural cabinet work. B. Wall-hung counters and vanity tops. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 41 00 -Architectural Wood Casework. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A208.2 - Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF)for Interior Applications; 2022. B. ASTM E84- Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2023c. C. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS)-Architectural Woodwork Standards, 2nd Edition; 2014, with Errata (2016). D. AWMAC/WI (NAAWS)- North American Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2021, with Errata. E. ISFA 2-01 -Classification and Standards for Solid Surfacing Material; 2013. F. NEMA LD 3- High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; 2005. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Specimen warranty. C. Shop Drawings: Complete details of materials and installation ; combine with shop drawings of cabinets and casework specified in other sections. D. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, minimum size 6 inches square, representing actual product, color, and patterns. E. Test Reports: Chemical resistance testing, showing compliance with specified requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator of Solid Surface Counters: Trained and approved by product manufacturer and holding a current and valid certificate from the manufacturer. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation)within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 12 36 00- 1 Countertops Re-Bid Construction Documents PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 COUNTERTOPS A. Quality Standard: Custom Grade, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS)or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS), unless noted otherwise. B. Plastic Laminate Countertops: High-pressure decorative laminate (HPDL)sheet bonded to substrate. 1. Laminate Sheet: NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS, 0.048 inch nominal thickness. a. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25, maximum; smoke developed index of 450, maximum; when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. b. Finish: Matte or suede, gloss rating of 5 to 20. c. Surface Color and Pattern: As indicated on drawings. 2. Exposed Edge Treatment: Postformed laminate; front edge substrate built up to minimum 1-1/4 inch thick with raised radiused edge, integral coved backsplash with radiused top edge. 3. Back and End Splashes: Same material, same construction. C. Solid Surfacing Countertops: Solid surfacing sheet or plastic resin casting over continuous substrate. 1. Flat Sheet Thickness: 3/4 inch, minimum. 2. Solid Surfacing Sheet and Plastic Resin Castings: Complying with ISFA 2-01 and NEMA LID 3; acrylic or polyester resin, mineral filler, and pigments; homogenous, non-porous and capable of being worked and repaired using standard woodworking tools; no surface coating; color and pattern consistent throughout thickness. a. Finish on Exposed Surfaces: Matte, gloss rating of 5 to 20. b. Color/Pattern Family: Solid color, light colors. 3. Other Components Thickness: 1/2 inch, minimum. 4. Exposed Edge Treatment: As indicated on drawings. 5. Back and End Splashes: Same sheet material, square top; minimum 4 inches high. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Medium Density Fiberboard for Supporting Substrate: ANSI A208.2. B. Adhesives: Chemical resistant waterproof adhesive as recommended by manufacturer of materials being joined. C. Grommets: Injection molded plastic grommet with slotted cover; 2" holes with 1-7/8' inside diameter, colors as selected; TG Series manufactured by Doug Mockett& Company, Inc. D. Manufactured Counter Supports: Refer to Section 06 41 00 -Architectural Wood Casework. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabricate tops and splashes in the largest sections practicable, with top surface of joints flush. 1. Join lengths of tops using best method recommended by manufacturer. 2. Fabricate to overhang fronts and ends of cabinets 1 inch, unless otherwise indicated, except where top butts against cabinet or wall. 3. Prepare all cutouts accurately to size; replace tops having improperly dimensioned or unnecessary cutouts or fixture holes. B. Provide back/end splash wherever counter edge abuts vertical surface unless otherwise indicated. 1. Secure to countertop with concealed fasteners and with contact surfaces set in waterproof glue. 2. Height: 4 inches, unless otherwise indicated. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 12 36 00-2 Countertops Re-Bid Construction Documents PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Securely attach countertops to cabinets using concealed fasteners. Make flat surfaces level; shim where required. B. Cut holes and install grommets in locations directed by Architect/Engineer. Provide one grommet per counter and one additional grommet for each 6'-0" of counter length. C. Seal joint between back/end splashes and vertical surfaces. Remove excess sealant. 3.02 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 12 36 00-3 Countertops Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 21 00 00 FIRE PROTECTION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 22 02 00, are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE A. The scope of the work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the fire protection piping, valves, hose connections, and equipment covered by this Section, with all appurtenances, ready for owner's use. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Section 210201 B. Section 21 05 29- Hangers and Supports for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment C. Section 21 13 13-Wet Pipe Sprinkler System D. Section 21 13 16- Dry Pipe Sprinkler Systems E. Section 213113 F. Section 221200 1.04 REFERENCES A. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless B. ASTM Al35/A135M -Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe C. ASTM A795/A795M -Standard Specification for Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe for Fire Protection Use D. FM Global Fire Protection Standards E. NFPA 13- Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems F. NFPA 14- Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems G. UL- Underwriters Laboratories 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: For each product specified, provide components by the same manufacturer throughout. B. Valves: Manufacturer's name, size, and pressure rating shall be cast or marked on valve body or handle. C. Piping shall be labeled along its entire length indicating size, class, material specification, manufacturer's name and country of origin. D. Domestic Manufacture: All valves, pipe, fittings, hose connections, and equipment shall be by a domestic manufacturer. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 22 02 00 and as described below. B. Submit shop drawings of entire water-based building fire protection system with all standpipe, hose valve, and hose connection locations, including the accompanying hydraulic calculations to the Architect/Engineer for review. A current and fully documented fire hydrant flow test must be included. C. Submit complete product data for 213113 concurrently with the submittal for this Section, for all systems served by such equipment. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 21 00 00- 1 FIRE PROTECTION 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents D. Service Utility Diagram: Furnish Architect with an accurately marked print showing location of underground pipes and valves as installed upon completion of underground work. E. Submit product data to include pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, hose connections, waterflow and alarm devices, and other appurtenances. Provide manufacturer's catalog information, product certifications, and country of origin. Indicate valve data and ratings. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Work in accordance with: 1. NFPA 13- Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems. 2. NFPA 14- Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems 3. NFPA 24- Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances 4. NFPA 25- Standard for the Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire Protection Systems 5. Local codes that have jurisdiction. B. Products in accordance with: 1. UL (Underwriters Laboratories) listed. 2. FM (Factory Mutual) approved. 3. Requirements of the local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). 1.08 CERTIFICATE OF TESTING A. Furnish Owner with test certificate certifying the system approved by: 1. Fire Marshal. 2. Insurance Services Officials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Work included: 1. The Drawings provide a preliminary layout with locations of water service entry/water supply, control valves, hose connections, and fire department connection(s). These are a guide for the subsequent preparation of the Licensed Fire Sprinkler Contractor's detailed working drawings. 2. Coordinate work and installation with electrical and fire alarm contractors accordingly to interface system with the building fire and smoke alarm systems. B. Requirements: 1. Materials and installation to meet or exceed the requirements of NFPA 13 and 14, (prevailing editions)and the local authority having jurisdiction (AHJ). 2. All components of the system shall be UL listed for the intended service. 3. Provide components with minimum pressure ratings as suited for system working pressure(s). 4. All hose connections shall be provided with approved threads, caps, and chains. 2.02 FIRE HOSE VALVES, CONNECTIONS, AND EQUIPMENT A. General requirements: All hose valves shall be listed. All hose connections shall be provided complete with connections, caps and chains conforming to local Fire Department requirements. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Potter-Roemer 2. Dixon 3. Elkhart Brass 4. Croker C. FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS: No less than 4" and two-way type, with additional connections and in larger size in accordance with system demand per NFPA. Polished chrome plated brass with lettering consistent with system type and service. Back, top, or bottom outlet as required for placement and wall construction for building mounted variations. Provide DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 21 00 00 -2 FIRE PROTECTION 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop complete with accessibly located, listed check valve with approved automatic drip valve. Potter- Roemer Model 5751 (building mounted), Model 5761 (free-standing)or similar model with features as required and as described above. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 DESIGN A. The Contractor shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 14 for standpipe and hose system design and installation. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to determine if any deficiency or deviations exist, such as an inadequate water supply, or any other item which would materially affect the acceptability of the system. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install all items in accordance with applicable codes. B. Piping shall be protected accordingly where subject to mechanical damage and/or fire damage. C. Do not install risers or mains in MDF/IDF/Data closets or electrical rooms. Where sprinkler protection is provided, only the associated branch lines and sprinkler heads shall be allowed in such spaces. D. Piping (mains and standpipes)shall be protected accordingly from freezing temperature with the use of supervised and listed heat tracing with insulation and jacketing. E. In all locations subject to corrosive conditions, ensure to provide a suitable epoxy (spray) coating to all exposed surfaces of pipe and fittings. All job-applied protective coatings shall be provided as approved and only after verification that the proper piping has been installed, per the markings along the length of the pipe. F. Piping in finished spaces shall be routed concealed. This shall not include areas such as mechanical spaces, parking garages, and stairways. Exact routing of piping shall be approved by Architect or relocated as required at no additional cost to Owner. G. All standpipes shall be provided with a means of draining and shall be arranged to discharge water at an approved location. H. Identify all locations requiring coordination with the electrical and fire alarm contractors accordingly to ensure connectivity with the building fire and smoke alarm systems. This shall include, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: water flow switches, alarm bells, and tamper/supervisory switches at control valves. I. At building expansion joints provide approved system expansion joint fittings/assemblies accordingly and per manufacturer's recommendations and NFPA 13 requirements. Victaulic Style 155 carbon steel expansion joint for sizes up to and including 12" pipe. 3.03 PAINTING AND PIPE IDENTIFICATION A. Painting of fire protection piping and appurtenances shall be provided as follows: 1. Surfaces to be painted shall be cleaned as necessary to ensure they are free from dirt and oils. 2. Unless directed otherwise by Architect, heat and water resistant, air-cured, high performance one-part epoxy paint shall be provided. Coating shall be high-gloss, lead- free, suited for indoor and outdoor use, and USDA approved. Armor-Poxy or similar. 3. Exposed fire sprinkler risers and associated alarm valves and related piping shall be painted red. 4. Exposed fire protection and sprinkler piping in finished areas shall be painted as directed by Architect. 5. All fire protection and sprinkler piping in un-finished areas but visible to building occupants shall be painted red unless directed otherwise by Architect. Such spaces shall include but not necessarily be limited to: parking garages and stairwells. B. Identification of fire protection piping shall be provided as follows: 1. All interior visible piping located in accessible spaces shall be provided with pipe markers. Accessible spaces shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following: above accessible ceilings, inside equipment rooms and utility spaces, in attic spaces, in crawl DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 21 00 00-3 FIRE PROTECTION 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop spaces, and in chase spaces, etc. viewable via access panels. 2. All exterior visible piping shall be provided with pipe markers. 3. Peel-off, self-adhesive, sticker type labels shall not be acceptable. 4. Pipe markers shall be manufactured with rigid vinyl PVC, printed with UV resistant ink, abrasion and chemical resistant, suited for indoor or outdoor use and for a service temperature of-40 degrees F to 160 degrees F. a. For pipes up to 6" provide cylindrically pre-coiled markers that snap into place without the need for tape or adhesives. b. For pipes 6" and larger provide flat snap-around markers installed using manufacturer's heavy-duty nylon ties or stainless steel strapping. c. Markers shall indicate the pipe service, include flow directional arrows, and meet ANSI/ASME A13.1-2015. 5. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Seton Setmark Pipe Markers b. Brimar Industries Pipemarker System 1 Pipe Markers c. Brady Corporation 6. Markers shall be provided after final insulating, painting,jacketing, etc. of piping and per manufacturer's installation instructions. Strapping (applies to large diameter markers only) shall be snug but shall not compromise any insulation. All such strapping shall also be cleanly trimmed of excess material. 7. Markers shall be provided in accordance with ANSI/ASME A13.1-2015 requirements. Specific items indicated below are not intended as a substitute for this complete standard. Markers shall be provided: a. On both sides of each floor or wall penetration. b. On each side of each tee. c. On each side of each valve and/or valve group. d. On each side of each piece of equipment. e. On straight pipe runs at equally spaced intervals not to exceed 50 feet. f. In congested areas, on each pipe at the point it enters and exits the area. g. At the point of connection to each piece of equipment and automatic control valve. h. Where they are readily visible to personnel from the point of normal approach. i. With letter height and length of color field according to the size of the pipe served. 8. Color scheme of markers shall be as indicated below and otherwise in accordance with ANSI/ASME color recommendations. Legend color indicates color of legend text and flow directional arrow: SYSTEM LABEL COLOR LEGEND LEGEND COLOR Fire Protection Red Fire Protection White Red Fire Sprinkler White 3.04 REPLACEMENT A. Upon receipt of written notice of failure of any part of the guaranteed equipment during the guaranteed period, the Contractor will replace the affected part or parts promptly at no additional cost. 3.05 TESTING A. Upon completion of the installation, test the system and obtain approval of the local fire insurance rating organization having jurisdiction. 3.06 TRAINING A. Owner's people shall be fully briefed in the normal start-up of the system, operation, normal and emergency shutdown, and maintenance of the system. B. Routine maintenance, yearly maintenance, winterization, and spring start-up shall be fully discussed and documented. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 21 00 00-4 FIRE PROTECTION 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop C. Names of those instructed and dates, as well as a list of information handed over to the owner, shall be included in the final report. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 21 00 00 -5 FIRE PROTECTION 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SECTION 21 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Pipe hangers, supports, and associated appurtenances. B. Sleeves and seals. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 21 00 00- Fire Protection B. Section 21 13 13-Wet Pipe Sprinkler System C. Section 21 13 16- Dry Pipe Sprinkler Systems D. Section 213113 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASME B31.1 - Power Piping. B. NFPA 13- Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems. C. NFPA 14- Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Supports for Sprinkler Piping: In conformance with NFPA 13. B. Supports for Standpipes: In conformance with NFPA 14. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division One. B. Indicate hanger and support framing and attachment methods. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hangers for Pipe Sizes up through 2 Inch: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel ring type with rounded edge design, UL listed and FM approved. Anvil International Figure 69. B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2-1/2 Inch and larger: 1. Carbon steel, adjustable clevis type, UL listed and FM approved. Anvil International Figure 260. 2. Carbon steel, adjustable swivel ring type, UL listed and FM approved. Anvil International Figure 69. 3. Carbon steel, UL listed straps & hangers with beveled edge design and/or plastic coating for abrasion protection of and intended for use with CPVC piping (only where such pipe material is specified). Anvil International. C. Building structure attachments for hangers: Ductile iron, universal C-type clamps, UL listed and FM approved. Anvil International Figure 92, 93, 94. D. Vertical Piping Supports: Carbon steel riser clamp.Anvil International Figure 40. E. Floor Supports for pipe headers and similar horizontal runs of pipe: Steel pipe stand assembly. 1. Cylindrical pipe stanchion assembly complete with malleable iron flange or welded steel flange base plate secured to the floor by an approved method with listed anchors. 2. Each base plate shall be attached to the floor with a minimum of four(4) anchors no smaller than 1/2" diameter, per NFPA 13. 3. Provide pipe saddle support with steel U-bolt yoke and nuts to attach piping to each stand. 4. Anvil International Figure 63, Type P with Figure 259 saddle support. F. Equivalent UL listed, FM approved hanger and support products by Eaton B-Line shall also be acceptable. G. For installation of protective shields refer to Article 3.3. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR Christi 21 05 29- 1 FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop AND EQUIPMENT 2.02 HANGER RODS A. Galvanized or cadmium plated carbon steel hanger rods: Threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded. Provide rod couplings in matching finish. 2.03 INSERTS/FASTENERS A. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods. B. Fasteners: For wood construction and for metal purlin and metal deck applications only, the use of appropriate self-drilling fasteners (UL listed, FM approved, manufactured in USA) provided in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations shall be acceptable. ITW Buildex"Sammys" products or pre-approved equal. 2.04 SLEEVES A. All pipe penetrations through walls, floors, floor-ceiling assemblies, etc. shall be sleeved to ensure no direct contact between the pipe and that which it passes through. All installations shall be provided consistent with the fire and smoke safeguards required by the building code per the fire-resistance rating as indicated on the architectural drawings and shall be provided consistent with the assemblies/methods indicated on the architectural drawings. B. Unless required otherwise (the most stringent requirement shall govern), sleeves for pipes: 1. Through nonfire-resistance-rated floors shall be formed with 18 gage galvanized steel, tack welded to form a uniform sleeve. 2. Through nonfire-resistance-rated walls, through grade beams and foundation walls, and through potentially wet floors shall be formed with schedule 40 steel pipe, galvanized. 3. Through assemblies including but not limited to fire-resistance-rated walls-barriers- partitions, smoke barriers-partitions, etc. shall be schedule 40 steel pipe securely fastened to the rated assembly. All annular spaces shall be firestopped with an approved penetration firestop system (UL listed) compatible with the pipe material and installed per the manufacturer's recommendations. C. Fire Stopping Insulation: Glass fiber type, non-combustible, UL listed. D. Caulk: Paintable 25-year acrylic sealant. E. Pipe Alignment Guides: Factory fabricated, of cast semi-steel or heavy fabricated steel, consisting of bolted, two-section outer cylinder and base with two-section guiding spider that bolts tightly to pipe. Length of guides shall be as recommended by manufacturer to allow indicated travel. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping. B. Design hangers without disengagement of supported pipe. 2.06 FINISH A. Exposed steel hangers, supports, and appurtenances shall be hot-dipped galvanized. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSERTS A. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. Coordinate with structural engineer for placement of inserts. B. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches. C. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, provide inserts to be flush with slab surface. D. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide thru-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut recessed into and grouted flush with slab. Verify with DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR Christi 21 05 29-2 FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop AND EQUIPMENT structural engineer prior to start of work. 3.02 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Support horizontal piping with maximum distance between hangers and minimum hanger rod diameters as follows: Pipe Size Max. Hanger Spacing Min. Rod Diameter (Steel Pipe) 1 to 1-1/4 inch 10'-01, 3/8" 1-1/2 to 3 inch 12'-0" 3/8" 4 to 6 inch 12'-0" 1/2" 8 to 10 inch 12'-0" 5/8" 12 to 14 inch 12'-0" 3/4" (CPVC Pipe, only where specified) 3/4 to 1 inch 4'-0" 3/8" 1-1/4 to 1-1/2 inch 4'-0" 3/8" 2 to 3 inch 6-0" 3/8" B. Where a listed CPVC pipe manufacturer's maximum hanger spacing is more stringent than the spacing above, it shall be followed. C. Spacing of hangers for unbroken lengths of CPVC pipe shall be permitted to be increased to a maximum of 5-6"for 3/4" piping and 6'-0"for 1"through 1-1/2" piping. D. Ensure to adequately secure sprinkler piping to restrict the movement of piping upon sprinkler operation. Where listed CPVC pipe is specified, supports must be provided as required in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. E. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. F. Place a hanger within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow and at the vertical to horizontal transition. G. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. H. Ensure that hanger rods are only loaded axially (along the rod). Provide additional hangers or restraints as necessary to minimize non-axial loads I. Threaded sections of rod shall not be formed or bent, neither prior to nor as a result of installation. J. Support vertical piping at every floor. Distances between supports for risers shall not exceed 25 feet. K. In multi-story buildings (in addition to at every floor) riser supports shall be provided at the lowest level, above and below offsets, and at the top of the riser. L. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. M. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. N. Install hangers with a nut at the base and above the hanger; tighten upper nut to hanger after final installation adjustments. O. Where piping is subject to seismic activity, ensure to provide protection measures in accordance with NFPA 13 requirements. 3.03 INSULATED PIPING A. Comply with the following installation requirements. B. Clamps: Attach galvanized clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps projecting through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ASME B31.9. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR Christi 21 05 29- 3 FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop AND EQUIPMENT C. Saddles: Install galvanized protection saddles MSS Type 39 where insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with segments of insulation that match adjoining pipe insulation. D. Shields: Install protective shields MSS Type 40 on cold and chilled water piping that has vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees and shall have dimensions in inches not less than the following: Nominal Pipe Size Length Thickness 1/4 through 3-1/2 inch 12 inch 0.048 inch 4 inch 12 inch 0.060 inch 5 through 6 inch 18 inch 0.060 inch 8 through 14 inch 24 inch 0.075 inch 16 through 24 inch 24 inch 0.105 inch E. Piping 2" and larger provide galvanized sheet metal shields with calcium silicate at hangers/supports. F. Insert material shall be at least as long as the protective shield. G. Thermal Hanger Shields: Install where indicated, with insulation of same thickness as piping. 3.04 EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS A. Provide equipment bases of concrete. B. Provide templates, anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment. C. Construct support of steel members. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure. 3.05 SEALS A. Provide flexible watertight sealant where piping penetrates waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs. B. Where dry sprinklers are connected to wet pipe sprinkler systems protecting areas subject to freezing temperatures (such as, but not necessarily limited to, insulated freezer structures) ensure that the clearance space around the sprinkler barrel is completely sealed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.06 SLEEVES A. Set sleeves in position in formwork. Provide reinforcing around sleeves. B. Extend sleeves through floors minimum one inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves full depth with fire rated thermafiber and 3M caulking and provide floor plate. C. Where piping penetrates a floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe and adjacent work with UL listed fire stopping insulation and caulk seal air tight. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration. D. Fire protection sleeves may be flush with floor of stairways. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR Christi 21 05 29-4 FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop AND EQUIPMENT Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 21 13 13 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 22 02 00, are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. C. Refer to Section 21 00 00 for integral requirements. 1.02 SCOPE A. Scope of the work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the fire protection piping, valves, sprinkler heads, and equipment covered by this Section, with all appurtenances, ready for owner's use. B. The scope of work shall include the painting and pipe marking of fire sprinkler system piping as described in Section 21 00 00. C. The scope of work shall include providing UL listed, FM approved factory-assembled automatic release air vents on sprinkler branch lines for the reduction of trapped air in the sprinkler system. Provide each complete with isolation valve, union or quick connect, wye strainer with valve, and drain line to drain in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and local requirements. D. The provision of air vents shall be coordinated with any other systems or treatment for general corrosion or MIC (Microbiologically Influenced Corrosion)that may be specified. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Section 21 00 00- Fire Protection B. Section 210201 C. Section 21 05 29- Hangers and Supports for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment D. Section 211350 E. Section 21 13 16- Dry Pipe Sprinkler Systems F. Section 211317 G. Section 213113 1.04 REFERENCES A. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2022. B. ASTM Al35/A135M -Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe; 2021. C. ASTM A795/A795M -Standard Specification for Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe for Fire Protection Use; 2021. D. ASTM F439 -Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80; 2019. E. AWS B2.1/B2.1M -Specification for Welding Procedure and Performance Qualification; 2021. F. NFPA 13- Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. G. NFPA 14- Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems; 2024. H. NFPA 24- Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances; 2025. I. NFPA 25- Standard for the Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire Protection Systems; 2023. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus WET PIPE SPRINKLER Christi 21 13 13- 1 SYSTEM 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: For each product specified, provide components by the same manufacturer throughout. B. Valves: Manufacturer's name, size, and pressure rating shall be cast or marked on valve body or handle. C. Piping shall be labeled along its entire length indicating size, class, material specification, manufacturer's name and country of origin. D. Domestic Manufacture: All valves, pipe, fittings, sprinkler heads, and equipment shall be by a domestic manufacturer. E. Welding Procedures and Performance: 1. Meet or exceed the requirements of AWS 132.1/132.1 M "Welding and Brazing Qualifications"; as well as any local AHJ requirements. 2. Maintain and be able to produce complete certified records, including, but not necessarily limited to, the following: Welding Procedure Specifications (WPS's), Procedure Qualification Records (PQR's), and welder qualification records. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 22 02 00 and as described below. B. Submit product data with manufacturer's catalog information, product certifications, and country of origin identified. Indicate valve data and ratings. Product data to be submitted shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following: 1. Pipe material 2. Pipe fittings and couplings 3. Sprinkler heads and guards 4. Valves, air release vents, and backflow preventers 5. Waterflow, supervisory and alarm devices 6. Fire-stopping sealant and pipe marker products 7. Spare sprinkler head box, signage, and other accessories 8. Include a schedule of wall sleeves to be provided C. Product data for hangers and and supports may be submitted under this section, although these items are specified under Section 21 05 29— Hangers and Supports for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment D. Submit shop drawings of entire sprinkler system with all head locations and including accompanying hydraulic calculations to the Architect/Engineer for review. A current and fully documented fire hydrant flow test must be included. E. Submit complete product data for 213000 concurrently with the submittal for this Section, for all systems served by such equipment. F. Provide Architect with six complete sets of final approved shop drawings before starting the installation. Include details of the sprinkler system showing sections, light fixtures, ducts, and a plan indicating fire department connections, location of all exposed structures within twenty feet of this structure, and other equipment to be used. Drawings shall bear the stamp of review of the local fire insurance rating organization having jurisdiction. G. Service Utility Diagram: Furnish Architect with an accurately marked print showing location of underground pipes and valves as installed upon completion of underground work. H. Where a project is required to comply with FM Global requirements, ensure to submit a set of drawings, hydraulic calculations, and other required documentation to a designated representative of FM Global for review and acceptance prior to the start of any system installation. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Work in accordance with: 1. NFPA 13 DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus WET PIPE SPRINKLER Christi 21 13 13-2 SYSTEM 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 2. NFPA 14 3. NFPA 24 4. NFPA 25 5. Requirements of the local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). 6. FM Global Datasheet 2-0. B. Products in accordance with: 1. UL listed. 2. FM (Factory Mutual) approved. 3. Requirements of the local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). 1.08 CERTIFICATE OF TESTING A. Furnish the Owner with test certificate certifying the system approved by: 1. Fire Marshal 2. Insurance Services Officials PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Work included: 1. Design, coordination, furnishing, and installation of inside and outside piping, valves, sprinkler heads, hangers, supports, and sleeves. 2. The sprinkler system is an automatic wet pipe type system and shall be designed to provide coverage for the entire building unless specifically indicated otherwise. a. The Contract Drawings indicate the general extent and arrangement. b. The Contract Drawings identify rooms and spaces, which may aid in the determination of the various occupancy hazard classifications. c. Sprinkler heads are not shown. 3. The Drawings provide a preliminary layout with locations of water service entry/water supply, control valves, riser assembly/zone valves, and fire department connection(s). These are a guide for the subsequent preparation of the Licensed Fire Sprinkler Contractor's detailed working drawings. 4. Coordinate work and installation with electrical and fire alarm contractors accordingly. Ensure that power is provided at required locations. Ensure that system is interfaced with the building fire and smoke alarm systems. This shall include, but not necessarily be limited to: a. Flow and tamper switches- including any remote locations such as backflow preventer vaults, water supply post indicating valves, etc. b. Waterflow signals ensure the immediate shut down of associated HVLS fans per NFPA 13, 11.1.7. B. Requirements: 1. Materials and installation to meet or exceed the requirements of NFPA 13, prevailing edition and the local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). 2. All components of the system shall be UL listed for the intended service. 3. Provide components with minimum pressure ratings as suited for system working pressure(s). 2.02 VALVES A. General requirements: 1. Valves shall be rated for no less than 175 psi. 2. All valves controlling connections to water supplies and to supply pipes to sprinklers shall be listed indicating valves. 3. Drain and test valves shall be approved. 4. All control, drain, venting, and test connection valves shall be provided with permanently marked weatherproof metal identification signs. 5. Provide as indicated on the Drawings and configured in accordance with the requirements of the local Authority Having Jurisdiction. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus WET PIPE SPRINKLER Christi 21 13 13-3 SYSTEM 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 6. A listed relief valve not less than 1/2" in size shall be provided on each wet pipe system, in accordance with NFPA 13 requirements. Provide a piped drain line to the outdoors for each such valve. B. Alarm Valves 1. Riser alarm valves shall be UL listed, FM approved alarm check valve type complete with pressure actuated switch or riser check valve type with a listed vane type waterflow alarm switch. a. Approved pressure gauges shall be provided on both the supply and system sides of the valve. b. Valve body shall include a removable cover for check clapper access. 2. Local waterflow alarm devices shall be a listed water-motor operated device or an electrified bell type for outdoor installation. Additionally, provide an electrified bell for indoor installation. System Sensor, Potter, or Reliable. 3. Provide connectivity to the building fire alarm system. 4. Acceptable valve manufacturers: a. Reliable b. Viking c. Tyco-Grinnell d. Victaulic (acceptable for alarm check valve variations only) C. Control Valves (Gate) 1. Control valves shall be UL listed, FM approved bronze trimmed resilient wedge gate type. 2. Provide bronze bodied, rising stem, inside screw type for sizes 2" and smaller. Provide ductile iron bodied, rising stem, outside screw and yoke type for sizes 2-1/2" and larger. 3. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Mueller Company b. Kennedy Valve c. Victaulic d. Nibco D. Control Valves (Butterfly) 1. Control valves shall be UL listed, FM approved ductile iron bodied, gear operated with flag, butterfly type. 2. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Reliable b. Kennedy Valve c. Tyco-Grinnell d. Victaulic e. Nibco E. Check Valves 1. Check valves shall be UL listed, FM approved ductile or cast iron bodied, bronze fitted, non-slam type, suited for horizontal or vertical installation. 2. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Mueller Company b. Kennedy Valve c. Victaulic d. Nibco e. Tyco-Grinnell F. Test and Drain Valve Assemblies shall be UL listed, FM approved bronze bodied ball valve type complete with tamper resistant test orifice and sight glasses. AGF Manufacturing, Inc. G. Automatic air release valve and vent assemblies shall be UL listed, FM approved and provided complete with brass or bronze bodied ball valves, stainless steel mesh strainers, and float operated air release valves. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Engineered Corrosion Solutions PAV-W. 2. Tyco TAV-W. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus WET PIPE SPRINKLER Christi 21 13 13-4 SYSTEM 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 3. Potter PAAR-B. H. Backflow Preventers: Provide as indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with the requirements of the water supplier and public health authority having jurisdiction. All such devices shall be listed for fire protection service. 2.03 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Underground service entry shall be: UL listed, FM approved, NFPA 24 compliant, type 304 stainless steel, pre-fabricated in-building riser. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Ames Fire &Waterworks 2. Zurn Wilkins B. All sprinkler system piping above grade shall be (refer to 21 00 00 for standpipe system piping): 1. ASTM Al35/A135M /ASTM A53/A53M schedule 10 black steel pipe with roll-grooved ends,joined with mechanical couplings and with manufactured carbon steel grooved fittings with matching mechanical couplings for pipe 2-1/2" and larger. Fittings shall be fully metallically formed type with an independent gasket and coupling at each pipe connection.All coupling assembly points shall have bolts and nuts. 2. ASTM Al35/A135M /ASTM A795/A795M schedule 40 black steel threaded pipe and cast iron or malleable iron fittings for pipe 2" and smaller. 3. For gridded systems, the use of an approved grooved mechanical coupling shall be acceptable at one end of each branch line to facilitate the connection of such branch lines to a system main. 4. Welding shall be acceptable only for providing ASTM A53/A53M shop welded, branch outlet fittings, UL Listed and FM Approved for use in fire sprinkler systems, in accordance with NFPA 13 and local AHJ requirements. a. Merit Manufacturing Corporation or pre-approved equal. b. In no case shall butt-welding of pipe ends be allowed. C. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Wheatland Tube Company 2. Bull Moose Tube Company 3. Tex-Tube 4. Allied Tube D. Acceptable mechanical coupling manufacturers: 1. Victaulic 2. Tyco-Grinnell 3. Anvil Gruvlok E. Regardless of manufacturer, the use of pipe hole-cut, gasketed bolt-on branch outlets shall not be permitted. This prohibition includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: clamp-T, mechanical-T, outlet-T, strap-T, and U-bolt-T outlet connectors. F. In all locations subject to corrosive conditions, ensure to provide a suitable epoxy (spray) coating to all exposed surfaces of pipe and fittings. Such locations shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following: natatoriums, pool equipment rooms, chemical and metal process areas, and animal pens. All job-applied protective coatings shall be provided as approved and only after verification that the proper piping has been installed, per the markings along the length of the pipe. 2.04 SPRINKLER HEADS A. Suspended Ceiling Type: Standard concealed pendent type with white cover plate. B. Exposed Area Type: Standard upright type with brass finish. C. Sidewall Type: Chrome plated finish with matching escutcheon. D. Where maximum ceiling temperatures exceed 100 degrees F, sprinklers with temperature ratings in accordance with maximum ceiling temperatures as tabulated in NFPA 13 shall be provided. Sprinkler heads within a given compartment must all be of the same temperature DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus WET PIPE SPRINKLER Christi 21 13 13- 5 SYSTEM 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop rating. Ambient ceiling temperatures expected in the vicinity of the sprinklers must be considered accordingly. Possible high ambient temperature areas may include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following: electrical equipment rooms, kiln rooms, sauna rooms, and manufacturing/process spaces. E. Sprinkler heads of the "O"-ring seal type are not acceptable. F. In all locations subject to corrosive conditions provide heads entirely constructed of stainless steel or heads with polyester coated finish and dipped in wax. Such locations shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following: natatoriums, pool equipment rooms, chemical and metal process areas, and animal pens. G. In all locations subject to occupant abuse or vandalism provide institutional type sprinkler heads with tamper-resistant construction and suitable "break-away"weight test documentation from the manufacturer. Such locations shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following: patient areas of institutional mental health occupancies, prisoner areas (cells, etc.)of correctional facilities—jails, prisons,juvenile detention facilities. H. Flexible type sprinkler head connections are not acceptable. I. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Tyco-Grinnell 2. Viking 3. Victaulic 4. Reliable 5. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation 2.05 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS A. Refer to Section 21 00 00 for all such requirements. 2.06 INSULATION A. All piping and valves exposed to the weather or within building and exposed to the weather shall be insulated with phenolic foam with ASJ and all joints sealed. Insulation density shall not be less than 1.5 pounds per cubic foot, and conductivity(K) not higher than 0.25 and 75 degrees F mean temperature difference, with factory applied all weather vapor barrier jacket. B. All insulated pipe and valves subject to damage shall be protected with an aluminum jacket with sealed joints. C. Refer to Section 22 07 19 for detailed specifications. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. All equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and printed installation instructions. B. All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Provide all items as required by NFPA 13 and installed as per manufacturer's recommendations. C. For any area requiring sprinkler protection and where the piping will be subject to freezing, the expectation is that a dry pipe system will be provided. This shall apply whether or not such an area has been identified on the Drawings and whether or not such a system has been specified under a separate Section. 3.02 DESIGN A. Design spacing of sprinkler heads and selection sizes shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 13 for the occupancy hazard. B. Uniform discharge density design shall be based on hydraulic calculations utilizing the method outlined in NFPA 13. Density of discharge from sprinkler heads shall conform to NFPA 13. C. Friction losses in pipe will be based on a value of"C" =120 in the Hazen -Williams formula for steel pipe and "C" =150 for listed CPVC pipe (only if specified). DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus WET PIPE SPRINKLER Christi 21 13 13-6 SYSTEM 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop D. Design and install the system so that no part will interfere with doors, windows, heating, plumbing, or electrical equipment. Do not locate sprinkler heads within 6 inches of lighting fixtures, HVAC diffusers and other obstructions. Sprinkler piping cannot penetrate ductwork, structural members, or lighting fixtures. E. The Contractor shall conform to NFPA 13, prevailing edition. Special attention shall be given to the Chapters on Plans and Calculations and on Systems Acceptance. It shall be the Licensed Fire Sprinkler Contractor's responsibility to determine if any deficiencies exist, such as an inadequate water supply, or any other item which would materially affect the acceptability of the system. F. Design sprinkler system piping accordingly and provide hose connections complete with valves, hoses, and cabinets where and as required by code.Adhere to the acceptable manufacturers listed in Section 21 00 00. Locations shall include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following: theatrical stages greater than 1,000 square feet. G. Reference the latest architectural reflected ceiling plans. Extend branch lines accordingly to provide sprinklers both above and below"cloud" ceilings, where present and as required. H. Ensure to provide sprinklers under fixed obstructions (such as ductwork)over 48 inches wide. 3.03 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Install all items in accordance with applicable codes. B. Install piping so that mains and branches are not located directly underneath HVAC equipment or other items needing access. C. Do not install risers or mains in MDF/IDF/Data closets or electrical rooms. Where sprinkler protection is provided, only the associated branch lines and sprinkler heads shall be allowed in such spaces. D. Furnish additional heads which may be required for coordinated ceiling patterns without added cost, even though number of heads may exceed minimum code requirements. E. All sprinkler heads shall be located as near the center of ceiling tiles as is practical (±1/2"). Location shall present a uniform pattern with all heads aligned when completely installed. F. Run piping concealed above furred ceilings and in joist space to minimize obstructions. Expose only heads. Exact routing of piping shall be approved by Architect or relocated as required at no additional cost to Owner. G. Provide wire guards on all non-concealed pendent and upright sprinklers heads subject to damage, including, but not necessarily limited to, the following locations: mechanical rooms, gymnasiums, athletic areas, wood and metal shops. H. Locate outside alarms on wall of building adjacent to sprinkler riser room. I. Provide on wall near the sprinkler valve(s): a clearly labeled and suitably sized cabinet containing (a minimum of 5% but no less than four)spare sprinkler heads of each type and a wrench suitable for each head type. J. Provide one case of spare escutcheons for each type of sprinkler head. K. Provide 1 inch diameter nipple and 1 inch x 1/2 inch reducing fitting for each upright head. 3.04 INSTALLATION -DRAINAGE A. All sprinkler pipe and fittings shall be installed so that the system can be drained. B. Unless not practicable, all piping shall be arranged to drain to the main drain valve for each sprinkler system. Make provisions accordingly for any trapped piping and provide auxiliary drains as necessary, complete with signage, and in accordance with NFPA 13 requirements. C. Unless noted otherwise on the Drawings or in conflict with Owner requirements, all drains shall discharge to the outdoors at locations free from the possibility of causing water damage. Each such drain shall be provided with a chrome wall escutcheon and 45 degree galvanized ell turned down. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus WET PIPE SPRINKLER Christi 21 13 13-7 SYSTEM 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 3.05 INSTALLATION -AIR VENTS A. Each system shall be provided with at least one (1)automatic air vent, however more than one (1) may be required on a given system in order to exhaust the trapped air. B. Each air vent shall be located near a high point in the system it serves. Provide each such vent where it will be most effective and locate it off the top of the horizontal piping in an accessible location and a level position. 3.06 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION A. Provide a printed sheet giving brief instructions relative to all necessary aspects of sprinkler controls and emergency procedures next to sprinkler riser mains. Instruction sheet shall be laminated or protected by a transparent plastic cover. B. Provide laminated zone map(s) at the riser location(s) clearly indicating the geographical area protected by each zone valve/floor control assembly. Floor plan shall include the locations of all valves (marked and labeled). C. Provide an additional laminated map as described above at the fire alarm control panel. D. All hydraulic calculation plates must be engraved. E. Each system valve (indoor and outdoor) must be permanently labeled with the system information. F. Signage: 1. Each riser room door must have a 2'-0"x S-0" sign provided on the outside with the wording "SPRINKLER RISER ROOM." 2. Each fire department connection shall have a sign with the street address on it. 3. Signage provided shall comply with NFPA and local AHJ requirements. 3.07 PAINTING AND PIPE IDENTIFICATION A. Refer to Section 21 00 00 for all such requirements. 3.08 REPLACEMENT A. Upon receipt of written notice of failure of any part of the guaranteed equipment during the guaranteed period, the Contractor will replace the affected part or parts promptly at no additional cost. 3.09 TESTING A. Prior to testing, the entire sprinkler system shall be thoroughly flushed clean. B. Upon completion of the installation and flushing, test the system and obtain approval of the local fire insurance rating organization having jurisdiction. Particular attention is called to the acceptance requirements of NFPA 13. C. Testing and acceptance must be provided for underground and aboveground piping per NFPA 13 and local AHJ requirements. Documentation of such shall be provided to the Owner. 3.10 TRAINING A. The Owner's maintenance staff shall be fully briefed in the normal start-up of the system, operation, normal and emergency shutdown, and maintenance of the system. B. Routine maintenance, yearly maintenance, and any seasonal requirements or considerations shall be fully discussed and documented. C. Names of those instructed and dates, as well as a list of information provided to the Owner shall be included in the final report. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus WET PIPE SPRINKLER Christi 21 13 13-8 SYSTEM 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SECTION 22 02 00 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR PLUMBING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all Work herein. B. The Contract Drawings indicate the extent and general arrangement of the systems. If any departure from the Contract Drawings is deemed necessary by the Contractor, details of such departure and the reasons therefore shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for approval as soon as reasonably practicable. No such departures shall be made without the prior written approval of the Architect/Engineer. C. Notwithstanding any reference in the Specifications to any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of construction by name, make or catalog number, such reference shall not be construed as limiting competition; and the Contractor, in such cases, may at his option use any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of construction which in the judgment of the Architect/Engineer, expressed in writing, is equal to that specified. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Work included under this Contract consists of the furnishing and installation of all equipment and material necessary and required to form the complete and functioning systems in all of their various phases, all as shown on the accompanying Drawings and/or described in these Specifications. The Contractor shall review all pertinent Drawings, including those of other contracts, prior to commencement of Work. B. This Division requires the furnishing and installing of all items as specified herein, indicated on the Drawings, or reasonably inferred as necessary for safe and proper operation; including every article, device or accessory (whether or not specifically called for by item) reasonably necessary to facilitate each system's functioning as indicated by the design and the equipment specified. Elements of the work include, but are not limited to: materials, labor, supervision, transportation, storage, equipment, utilities, all required permits, licenses and inspections.All work performed under this Section shall be in accordance with the Project Manual, Drawings and Specifications and is subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract. C. The approximate locations of Plumbing and Fire Protection items are indicated on the Drawings. These Drawings are not intended to give complete and accurate details with regards to location of outlets, apparatus, etc. Exact locations are to be determined by actual measurements at the building/job-site, and will in all cases be subject to the Review of the Owner or Engineer, who reserves the right to make any reasonable changes in the locations indicated without additional cost to the Owner. D. Items specifically mentioned in the Specifications but not shown on the Drawings and/or items shown on Drawings but not specifically mentioned in the Specifications shall be installed by the Contractor under the appropriate section of work as if they were both specified and shown. E. All discrepancies between the Contract Documents and actual job-site conditions shall be reported to the Owner or Engineer so that they will be resolved prior to bidding. Where this cannot be done at least seven (7)working days prior to bid; the greater or more costly of the discrepancy shall be bid. All labor and materials required to perform the work described shall be included as part of this Contract. F. It is the intention of this Section of the specifications to outline minimum requirements to furnish the Owner with a turn-key and fully operating system in cooperation with other trades. G. It is the intent of the above "Scope"to give the Contractor a general outline of the extent of the Work involved; however, it is not intended to include each and every item required for the Work. Anything omitted from the "Scope" but shown on the Drawings, or specified elsewhere, or necessary for complete and functioning plumbing systems shall be considered a part of the overall "Scope". DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 22 02 00- 1 METHODS FOR PLUMBING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents H. The Contractor shall rough-in fixtures and equipment furnished by others from rough-in and placement drawings furnished by others. The Contractor shall make final connection to fixtures and equipment furnished by others. I. The Contractor shall participate in the Commissioning process as required; including, but not necessarily limited to: meeting attendance, completion of checklists, and participation in functional testing. 1.03 SCHEMATIC NATURE OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The contract documents are schematic in nature in that they are only to establish scope and a minimum level of quality. They are not to be used as actual working construction drawings. The actual working construction drawings shall be the reviewed Shop Drawings. B. All piping, fixture, or equipment locations as indicated on the documents do not indicate every transition, offset, or exact location. All transitions, offsets, clearances and exact locations shall be established by actual field measurements, coordination with the structural, architectural and reflected ceiling plans, and other trades. Submit Shop Drawings for review. C. All transitions, offsets and relocations as required by actual field conditions shall be performed by the Contractor at no additional cost to the owner. D. Additional coordination with Electrical Subcontractor may be required to allow adequate clearances of electrical equipment, fixtures, and associated appurtenances. Contractor to notify Architect and Engineer of unresolved clearances, conflicts, or equipment locations. 1.04 SITE VISIT AND FAMILIARIZATION A. Before submitting a bid, it will be necessary for each Contractor whose work is involved to visit the site and ascertain for himself the conditions to be met therein in installing his work and make due provision for same in his bid. It will be assumed that this Contractor in submitting his bid has visited the premises and that his bid covers all work necessary to properly install the piping, fixtures and equipment shown. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with this requirement shall not be considered justification for the omission or faulty installation of any work covered by these Specifications and Drawings. B. Understand the existing utilities from which services will be supplied; verify locations of utility services, and determine requirements for connections. C. Determine in advance that equipment and materials proposed for installation fit into the confines indicated. 1.05 WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Finish painting is specified. Prime and protective painting is included in the work of this Division. B. Owner and General Contractor furnished equipment shall be properly connected to plumbing systems. C. Furnishing and installing all required plumbing equipment, control relays and electrical interlock devices, conduit, wire and junction boxes are included in the Work of this Division. 1.06 PERMITS, TESTS, INSPECTIONS A. Arrange and pay for all permits, fees, tests, and all inspections as required by governmental authorities. 1.07 DATE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. The date of final acceptance shall be the date of Owner occupancy, or the date all punch list items have been completed, or the date final payment has been received. Refer to Division 01 for additional requirements. B. The date of final acceptance shall be documented in writing and signed by the Architect, Owner and Contractor. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and other information needed for identification. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 22 02 00-2 METHODS FOR PLUMBING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop B. Deliver products to the project at such times as the project is ready to receive the equipment, pipe or valves- properly protected from incidental damage and weather damage. C. Damaged equipment, valves or pipe shall be promptly removed from the site and new, undamaged equipment, valves and pipe shall be provided in its place promptly with no additional charge to the Owner. 1.09 NOISE AND VIBRATION A. The plumbing systems and the component parts thereof shall be guaranteed to operate without objectionable noise and vibration. B. Provide foundations, supports and isolators as specified or indicated, properly adjusted to prevent transmission of vibration to the building structure, piping and other items. C. Carefully fabricate pipe and fittings with smooth interior finish to prevent turbulence and generation or regeneration of noise. D. All equipment shall be selected to operate with minimum of noise and vibration. If, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer, objectionable noise or vibration is produced or transmitted to or through the building structure by equipment, piping or other parts of the Work, the Contractor shall rectify such conditions without extra cost to the Owner. 1.10 APPLICABLE CODES A. Obtain all required permits and inspections for all work required by the Contract Documents and pay all required fees in connection thereof. B. Arrange with the serving utility companies for the connection, relocation, and upgrade of all required utilities and pay all charges, meter charges, connection fees and inspection fees, if required. C. Comply with all applicable codes, specifications, local ordinances, industry standards, utility company regulations and the applicable requirements of the nationally accepted codes and standards. D. Such codes and standards shall include, but not necessarily be limited to: 1. American Standards Association, ASA. 2. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc., AS H RAE. 3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers, ASME. 4. American Society of Plumbing Engineers, ASPE. 5. American Society of Testing Materials, ASTM. 6. American Water Works Association, AWWA. 7. National Bureau of Standards, NBS. 8. National Fire Protection Association, NFPA. 9. UL, LLC (formerly Underwriters Laboratories). 10. FM Global. 11. International Energy Conservation Code, IECC. 12. International Fire Code. 13. International Fuel Gas Code. 14. International Plumbing Code. E. Where differences exist between the Contract Documents and applicable state or city building codes, state and local ordinances, industry standards, utility company regulations and the applicable requirements of the above listed nationally accepted codes and standards, the more stringent or costly application shall govern. Promptly notify the Architect/Engineer in writing of all differences. F. When directed in writing by the Architect/Engineer, remove all work installed that does not comply with the Contract Documents and applicable state or city building codes, state and local ordinances, industry standards, utility company regulations and the applicable requirements of the above listed nationally accepted codes and standards. Correct the deficiencies and complete the work at no additional cost to the Owner. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 22 02 00-3 METHODS FOR PLUMBING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 1.11 DEFINITIONS AND SYMBOLS A. General Explanation: A substantial amount of construction and Specification language constitutes definitions for terms found in other Contract Documents, including Drawings which must be recognized as diagrammatic and schematic in nature and not completely descriptive of requirements indicated thereon. Certain terms used in Contract Documents are defined generally in this article, unless defined otherwise in Division 01. B. Definitions and explanations of this Section are not necessarily either complete or exclusive, but are general for work to the extent not stated more explicitly in another provision of the Contract Documents. C. Indicated: The term "Indicated" is a cross-reference to details, notes or schedules on the Drawings, to other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications and to similar means of recording requirements in Contract Documents. Where such terms as "Shown", "Noted", "Scheduled", "Specified" and "Detailed" are used in lieu of"Indicated", it is for the purpose of helping the reader locate cross-reference material, and no limitation of location is intended except as specifically shown. D. Directed: Where not otherwise explained, terms such as "Directed", "Requested", "Accepted", and "Permitted" mean by the Architect or Engineer. However, no such implied meaning will be interpreted to extend the Architect's or Engineer's responsibility into the Contractor's area of construction supervision. E. Reviewed: Where used in conjunction with the Engineer's response to submittals, requests for information, applications, inquiries, reports and claims by the Contractor the meaning of the term "Reviewed"will be held to limitations of Architect's and Engineer's responsibilities and duties as specified in the General and Supplemental Conditions. In no case will "Reviewed" by Engineer be interpreted as a release of the Contractor from responsibility to fulfill the terms and requirements of the Contract Documents. F. Furnish: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term "Furnish" is used to mean supply and deliver new to the project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, etc., as applicable in each instance. G. Install: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term "Install" is used to describe operations at the project site including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protection, cleaning and similar operations, as applicable in each instance. H. Provide: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term "Provide" is used to mean "Furnish and Install", complete and ready for intended use, as applicable in each instance. I. Installer: Entity(person or firm) engaged by the Contractor or its Subcontractor for performance of a particular unit of work at the project site, including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protection, cleaning and similar operations, as applicable in each instance. It is a general requirement that such entities (Installers) be expert in the operations they are engaged to perform. J. Imperative Language: Used generally in Specifications. Except as otherwise indicated, requirements expressed imperatively are to be performed by the Contractor. For clarity of reading at certain locations, contrasting subjective language is used to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor, or when so noted by other identified installers or entities. K. Minimum Quality/Quantity: In every instance, the quality level or quantity shown or specified is intended as minimum quality level or quantity of work to be performed or provided. Except as otherwise specifically indicated, the actual work may either comply exactly with that minimum (within specified tolerances), or may exceed that minimum within reasonable tolerance limits. In complying with requirements, indicated or scheduled numeric values are either minimums or maximums as noted or as appropriate for the context of the requirements. Refer instances of uncertainty to Owner or Engineer via a request for information (RFI) for decision before proceeding. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 22 02 00-4 METHODS FOR PLUMBING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop L. Abbreviations and Symbols: The language of Specifications and other Contract Documents including Drawings is of an abbreviated type in certain instances, and implies words and meanings which will be appropriately interpreted.Actual word abbreviations of a self- explanatory nature have been included in text of Specifications and Drawings. Specific abbreviations and symbols have been established, principally for lengthy technical terminology and primarily in conjunction with coordination of Specification requirements with notations on Drawings and in Schedules. These are frequently defined in Section at first instance of use or on a Legend and Symbol Drawing. Trade and industry association names and titles of generally recognized industry standards are frequently abbreviated. Singular words will be interpreted as plural and plural words will be interpreted as singular where applicable and where full context of Contract Documents so indicate. Except as otherwise indicated, graphic symbols and abbreviations used on Drawings and in Specifications are those recognized in construction industry for indicated purposes. Where not otherwise noted symbols and abbreviations are defined by 2009 ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook, chapter 34 "Abbreviations and Symbols", ASME and ASPE published standards. 1.12 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. These Specifications are intended to supplement the Drawings. It will not be the province of the Specifications to address any part of the work which the Drawings can fully convey in every particular and such omission shall not to relieve the Contractor from carrying out portions of work indicated on the Drawings only. B. Should items be required by these Specifications and not indicated on the Drawings, they are to be supplied even if of such nature that they could have been indicated thereon. In case of disagreement between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Drawings or Specifications, the better quality or greater quantity of work shall be estimated and the matter referred to the Architect or Engineer for review with a request for information and clarification at least seven (7)working days prior to bid opening date for issuance of an addendum. C. The listing of product manufacturers, materials and methods in the various sections of the Specifications, and indicated on the Drawings, is intended to establish a standard of quality only. It is not the intention of the Owner or Engineer to discriminate against any product, material or method that is equal to the standards as indicated and/or specified, nor is it intended to preclude open, competitive bidding. The fact that a specific manufacturer is listed as an acceptable manufacturer should not be interpreted to mean that the manufacturers'standard product will meet the requirements of the project design, Drawings, Specifications and space constraints. D. The Architect or Engineer and Owner shall be the sole judge of quality and equivalence of equipment, materials and methods. E. Products by other reliable manufacturers, other materials, and other methods, will be accepted as outlined, provided they have equal capacity, construction, and performance. However, under no circumstances shall any substitution by made without the written permission of the Architect or Engineer and Owner. Request for prior approval must be made in writing at least ten (10) days prior to the bid date without fail. F. Wherever a definite product, material or method is specified and there is not a statement that another product, material or method will be acceptable, it is the intention of the Owner or Engineer that the specified product, material or method is the only one that shall be used without prior approval. G. Wherever a definite material or manufacturer's product is specified and the Specification indicates that products of similar design and equal construction from the list of acceptable manufacturers may be used, it is the intention of the Owner or Engineer that products of manufacturers that are specified are the only products that will be acceptable and that products of other manufacturers will not be considered for substitution without approval. H. Wherever a definite product, material or method is specified and there is a statement that"OR EQUAL" product, material or method will be acceptable, it is the intention of the Owner or Engineer that the specified product, material or method or an "OR EQUAL" product, material or method may be used if it complies with the specifications and is submitted for review to the DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 22 02 00-5 METHODS FOR PLUMBING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Engineer as outlined herein. I. Where equipment other than that used in the design as specified or shown on the Drawings is provided (either from an acceptable manufacturer list or by submittal review), it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate space requirements, building provisions and connection requirements with all trades bear any additional costs. J. Where permission to use a substitution product, material, or method is granted by the Owner or Engineer in writing, the Contractor shall bear full responsibility for the implementation of that substitution. Specific responsibilities shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following: 1. Verifying that the substituted item will fit in the space available. This shall include allowances for all code required clearances and manufacturer's maintenance and service clearances. 2. The coordination and provision of all necessary supports, hangers, and appurtenances. Hanger spacing shall be adjusted accordingly and any additional hangers or supports required shall be provided. 3. The coordination and provision of all necessary insulation, firestopping provisions, etc. 4. Adherence to manufacturer's published installation recommendations. 5. Adherence to requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) and provision of a code compliant installation. 6. Changes to architectural, structural, electrical, mechanical, and plumbing requirements as a result of the substitution. 7. Bearing any additional costs and time impact and providing any necessary redesign. The Owner will bear no such cost and make no time allowances. 8. Coordination of plumbing and electrical requirements and utility provisions with the Mechanical and Plumbing Design Documents and all other trades, including Division 26. K. If any request for a substitution of product, material or method is rejected, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the Specifications. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. L. The Owner or Engineer will investigate all requests for substitutions when submitted in accordance with above and if accepted, will issue a written acceptance allowing the substitutions. 1.13 SUBMITTALS A. Coordinate with Division 01 for submittal timetable requirements, unless noted otherwise within thirty(30) days after the Contract is awarded. The Contractor shall submit an electronic copy of a complete set of Shop Drawings and complete data covering each item of equipment or material. The submittal of each item requiring a submittal must be received by the Architect or Engineer within the above thirty (30) day period. The Architect or Engineer shall not be responsible for any delays or costs incurred due to excessive Shop Drawing review time for submittals received after the thirty (30)day time limit. The Architect and Engineer will retain a copy of all Shop Drawings for their files. All literature pertaining to items subject to Shop Drawing submittal shall be submitted at one time. Submittals shall be placed in one electronic file in PDF 8.0 format and bookmarked for individual specification sections. Individual electronic files of submittals for individual specifications shall not be permitted. Each submittal shall include the following items: 1. A cover sheet with the names and addresses of the Project, Architect, MEP Engineer, General Contractor and the Subcontractor making the submittal. The cover sheet shall also contain the section number covering the item or items submitted and the item nomenclature or description. 2. An index page with a listing of all data included in the Submittal. 3. A list of variations page with a listing all variations, including unfurnished or additional required accessories, items or other features, between the submitted equipment and the specified equipment. If there are no variations, then this page shall state "NO VARIATIONS". Where variations affect the work of other Contractors, then the Contractor shall certify on this page that these variations have been fully coordinated with the affected Contractors and that all expenses associated with the variations will be paid by DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 22 02 00-6 METHODS FOR PLUMBING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop the submitting Contractor. This page will be signed by the submitting Contractor. 4. Equipment information including manufacturer's name and designation, size, performance and capacity data as applicable. All applicable Listings, Labels, Approvals and Standards shall be clearly indicated. 5. Dimensional data and scaled drawings as applicable to show that the submitted equipment will fit the space available with all required Code and maintenance clearances clearly indicated and labeled at a minimum scale of 1/4" = 1'-0", as required to demonstrate that the alternate or substituted product will fit in the space available. 6. Identification of each item of material or equipment matching that indicated on the Drawings. 7. Sufficient pictorial, descriptive and diagrammatic data on each item to show its conformance with the Drawings and Specifications. Any options or special requirements or accessories shall be so indicated. All applicable information shall be clearly indicated with arrows or another approved method. 8. Additional information as required in other Sections of this Division. 9. Certification by the General Contractor and Subcontractor that the material submitted is in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications, signed and dated in long hand. Submittals that do not comply with the above requirements shall be returned to the Contractor and shall be marked "REVISE AND RESUBMIT". B. Refer to Division 00 and Division 01 for additional information on Shop Drawings and submittals. C. Equipment and materials submittals and Shop Drawings will be reviewed for compliance with design concept only. It will be assumed that the submitting Contractor has verified that all items submitted can be installed in the space allotted. Review of Shop Drawings and submittals shall not be considered as a verification or guarantee of measurements or building conditions. D. Where Shop Drawings and submittals are marked "REVIEWED", the review of the submittal does not indicate that submittals have been checked in detail nor does it in any way relieve the Contractor from his responsibility to furnish material and perform work as required by the Contract Documents. E. Shop Drawings shall be reviewed and returned to the Contractor with one of the following categories indicated: 1. REVIEWED: Contractor need take no further submittal action, shall include this submittal in the O&M manual and may order the equipment submitted on. 2. REVIEWED AS NOTED: Contractor shall submit a letter verifying that required exceptions to the submittal have been received and complied with including additional accessories or coordination action as noted, and shall include this submittal and compliance letter in the O&M manual. The Contractor may order the equipment submitted on at the time of the returned submittal providing the Contractor complies with the exceptions noted. 3. NOT APPROVED: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material, equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is not approved, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the Specifications and/or Drawings. Contractor shall not order equipment that is not approved. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. 4. REVISE AND RESUBMIT: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material, equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is marked revise and resubmit, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the Specifications and/or provide as noted on previous Shop Drawings. Contractor shall not order equipment marked revise and resubmit. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. 5. CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION REQUIRED: Contractor shall resubmit submittal on material, equipment or method of installation. The Contractor's stamp is required stating the submittal meets all conditions of the contract documents. The stamp shall be signed by the General Contractor. The submittal will not be reviewed if the stamp is not placed and signed on all Shop Drawings. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 22 02 00-7 METHODS FOR PLUMBING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 6. MANUFACTURER NOT AS SPECIFIED: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material, equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is marked manufacturer not as specified, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the specifications. Contractor shall not order equipment where submittal is marked manufacturer not as specified. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. F. Materials and equipment which are purchased or installed without Shop Drawing review shall be at the risk of the Contractor and the cost for removal and replacement of such materials and equipment and related work which is judged unsatisfactory by the Owner or Engineer for any reason shall be at the expense of the Contractor. The responsible Contractor shall remove the material and equipment noted above and replace with specified equipment or material at his own expense when directed in writing by the Architect or Engineer. G. Shop Drawing Submittals shall be complete and checked prior to submission to the Engineer for review. H. Submittals are required for, but not necessarily limited to, the following items: 1. Basic Materials. 2. Plumbing Fixtures and Valves. 3. Supports and Carriers. 4. Floor Drains, Roof Drains, and Cleanouts. 5. Interceptors/Traps (All Types). 6. Water Heaters and Boilers. 7. Expansion Tanks. 8. Water Softeners. 9. Water Treatment Equipment. 10. Water Filters. 11. Domestic Water Booster Pumps. 12. Fire Pumps and Jockey Pumps. 13. Storm, Sanitary, and Wastewater Pumps and Ejectors. 14. Fire Pump and Jockey Pump Controllers. 15. Domestic Water and Fire Protection Break Tanks. 16. Backflow Preventers. 17. Plumbing Piping. 18. Piping, Vessel, and Equipment Insulation. 19. Air Compressors and Air Dryers. 20. Expansion Fittings and Devices. 21. Variable Frequency Drives. 22. Noise and Vibration Controls. 23. Pipe and Equipment Hangers and Supports. 24. Plumbing Specialties. 25. Test, Adjust and Balance Reports. 26. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Contractor Qualifications. 27. Coordination Drawings. I. Refer to other Division 22 sections for additional Shop Drawing and submittal requirements. Provide samples of actual materials and/or equipment to be used on the Project upon request of the Owner or Engineer. 1.14 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Prepare coordination drawings to a scale of 1/4"=V-0" or larger; detailing major elements, components, and systems of plumbing equipment and materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and building components. Indicate locations where space is limited for installation and access and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the Work, including (but not necessarily limited to)the following: DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 22 02 00-8 METHODS FOR PLUMBING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 1. Indicate the proposed locations of pipe, equipment, and other materials. Include the following: a. Wall locations and types. b. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation. c. Locations of light fixtures and sprinkler heads. d. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, including tube removal and space for equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance. e. Equipment connections and support details. f. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations. g. Routing of storm, sanitary sewer piping and plumbing piping. h. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations. i. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases. j. Valve stem movement. k. Structural floor, wall and roof opening sizes and details. 2. Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction. 3. Prepare floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations. B. This Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of all items that will affect the installation of the work of this Division. This coordination shall include, but not be limited to: voltage, ampacity, capacity, electrical and piping connections, space requirements, sequence of construction, building requirements and special conditions. C. By submitting Shop Drawings on the project, this Contractor is indicating that all necessary coordination has been completed and that the systems, products and equipment submitted can be installed in the building and will operate as specified and intended, in full coordination with all other Contractors and Subcontractors. 1.15 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Prepare Record Documents in accordance with the requirements of Division 00 and Division 01, in addition to the requirements specified in Division 22. B. The Contractor shall maintain a separate set of clearly and legibly marked Record Drawings on the job site to record all changes and modifications, including, but not limited to the following: work details, alterations to meet site conditions, and changes made by "Change Order" notices. Mark the drawings with colored pencil(s). These shall be available for review by the Owner, Architect or Engineer during the entire construction stage. C. The Record Drawings shall be updated concurrently as construction progresses, and in no case less frequently than a daily basis. They shall indicate accurate dimensions for all buried or concealed work; precise locations of all concealed pipe; locations of all valves, controls and operable devices; and any deviations from the work shown on the Construction Documents. All dimensions shall include at least two dimensions to permanent structure points. D. Record Drawings shall indicate, at a minimum, the following installed conditions: 1. Mains and branches of piping systems, with valves and control devices located and numbered, unions located, and with items requiring maintenance located (i.e., traps, strainers, expansion fittings, tanks, etc.). Valve location diagrams, complete with valve tag chart. Indicate actual inverts and horizontal locations of underground piping. 2. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent building lines. 3. Approved substitutions, Contract Modifications, and actual equipment and materials installed. 4. Contract Modifications, actual equipment and materials installed. E. Engage the services of a Land Surveyor or Professional Engineer registered in the state in which the project is located as specified herein to record the locations and invert elevations of underground installations. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 22 02 00-9 METHODS FOR PLUMBING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop F. If the Contractor does not keep an accurate set of Record Documents, the pay request may be altered or delayed at the request of the Architect. Delivery of Record Documents is a condition of final acceptance. Record Drawings shall be furnished in addition to Shop Drawings. G. Upon completion of the Work, the Contractor shall submit three (3)full size sets of Record Drawing prints to the Architect or Engineer for review prior to scheduling the final inspection at the completion of the work. The drawings shall have the name(s) and seal(s)of the Engineer(s) removed or blanked out and shall be clearly marked and signed on each sheet as follows: CERTIFIED RECORD DRAWINGS DATE: (NAME OF GENERAL CONTRACTOR) BY: (SIGNATURE) (NAME OF GENERAL CONTRACTOR) BY: (SIGNATURE) 1.16 CERTIFICATIONS AND TEST REPORTS A. Submit a detailed schedule for completion and testing of each system indicating scheduled dates for completion of system installation and outlining tests to be performed and scheduled dates for each test. This detailed completion and test schedule shall be submittal at least ninety (90) days before the projected Project completion date. B. Test result reporting forms shall be submitted for review no later than the date of the detailed schedule submitted. C. Submit four(4) copies of all certifications and test reports to the Architect or Engineer for review adequately in advance of completion of the Work to allow for remedial action as required to correct deficiencies discovered in equipment and systems. D. Certifications and test reports to be submitted shall include, but not be limited to those items outlined in other Sections of Division 22. 1.17 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Prepare Operations and Maintenance manuals in accordance with the requirements of Division 01 and Division 22. In addition to the requirements of other Sections, this shall include operational, trouble-shooting, and routine maintenance information for fixtures, specialties, and equipment. 1. Identifying names, name tags designations and locations for all equipment. 2. Valve tag lists with valve number, type, color coding, location and function. 3. Reviewed Shop Drawing submittals with exceptions noted compliance letter. 4. Fabrication drawings. 5. Equipment and device bulletins and data sheets clearly highlighted to show equipment installed on the project and including performance curves and data as applicable, i.e., description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and model numbers of replacement parts. 6. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions. 7. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions. 8. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules. 9. Equipment and motor name plate data. 10. Wiring diagrams. 11. Exploded parts views and parts lists for all equipment and devices. 12. Color coding charts for all painted equipment and conduit. 13. Location and listing of all spare parts and special keys and tools furnished to the Owner. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 22 02 00- 10 METHODS FOR PLUMBING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 14. Furnish recommended lubrication schedule for all required lubrication points with listing of type and approximate amount of lubricant required. B. Coordinate with Division 01 for Operations and Maintenance manual requirements. Unless noted otherwise, bind together in "D ring" style three-ring binders (National model no. 79-883 or equivalent). Binders shall be large enough to allow 1/4" of spare capacity. Include three (3)sets with all approved Shop Drawing submittals, fabrication drawings, bulletins, maintenance instructions, operating instructions and parts exploded views and lists for each and every piece of equipment furnished under this Specification. All sections shall be typed and indexed into sections with tabbed insertable dividers, labeled for easy reference. Utilize the individual specification section numbers shown in the Plumbing Specifications as an organization guideline. Bulletins containing information about equipment that is not installed on the project shall be properly marked up or stripped and reassembled. All pertinent information required by the Owner for proper operation and maintenance of equipment supplied by Division 22 shall be clearly and legibly set forth in memoranda that shall, likewise, be bound with bulletins. C. In addition to the bound "hard-copy" Operation and Maintenance manuals referenced above, provide an identical electronic copy in searchable PDF format, with all sections bookmarked within the file for easy reference. Provide a USB flash drive with the final manual to the Owner. D. Operating and Maintenance Manuals shall be turned over to the Owner or Engineer for review a minimum of fourteen (14)working days prior to the beginning of the operator training period. E. Operating and Maintenance Manuals which the Engineer deems incomplete, poorly organized, or otherwise unacceptable will be rejected in writing. The Contractor will subsequently be required to again turn over Operating and Maintenance Manuals, with all deficiencies corrected, until deemed acceptable by the Engineer. 1.18 OPERATOR TRAINING A. The Contractor shall furnish the services of factory trained specialists to instruct the Owner's operating personnel. B. The Owner's operator training shall include a minimum of 12 hours of on- site training in three (3) shifts of four(4) hours each. C. Before proceeding with the instruction of Owner's Personnel, prepare a typed outline in triplicate, listing the subjects that will be covered in this instruction, and submit the outline for review by the Owner. At the conclusion of the instruction period, obtain the signature of each person being instructed on each copy of the reviewed outline to signify that he or she has a proper understanding of the operation and maintenance of the systems and then resubmit the signed outlines. D. Refer to other Sections of Division 22 for additional Operator Training requirements. 1.19 FINAL COMPLETION A. At the completion of the work, all equipment, operable appurtenances, and systems shall be tested. All faulty equipment and material shall be repaired or replaced. Refer to other Sections of Division 22 for additional requirements. B. Clean and adjust all fixtures, flushometers, valves and operable devices. Replace faulty or otherwise damaged parts immediately prior to final acceptance. C. Touch up and/or refinish any scratched equipment and devices immediately prior to final acceptance. This shall be acceptable only for minor superficial scratches, the determination of which rests solely on the judgment of the Architect or Engineer. 1.20 CONTRACTOR'S GUARANTEE A. Use of the Plumbing systems to provide temporary service during the construction period shall not be allowed without written permission from the Owner, and, if granted, shall not be cause for the warranty period to start, except as defined below. B. Contractor shall guarantee to keep the entire installation in repair and perfect working order for a period of one (1)year after its completion and final acceptance, and shall furnish free of additional cost to the Owner all materials and labor necessary to comply with the above DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 22 02 00- 11 METHODS FOR PLUMBING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop guarantee throughout the year beginning from the date of issue of Substantial Completion, Beneficial Occupancy by the Owner, or the Certificate of Final Payment as agreed upon by all parties. C. This guarantee shall not include cleaning or changing filters except as required by testing, adjusting and balancing. D. All air compressors shall have parts and labor guarantees for a period of not less than five (5) years beyond the date of final acceptance. E. Refer to other Sections of Division 22 for additional guarantee or warranty requirements. 1.21 TRANSFER OF ELECTRONIC FILES A. Project documents are not intended or represented to be suitable for re-use by Architect/Owner or others on extensions of this project or on any other project. Any such re-use or modification without written verification or adaptation by Engineer, as appropriate for the specific purpose intended, will be at Architect/Owner's risk and without liability or legal exposure to Engineer or its consultants from all claims, damages, losses and expense, including attorney's fees arising out of or resulting thereof. B. Because data stored in electric media format can deteriorate or be modified inadvertently, or otherwise without authorization of the data's creator, the party receiving the electronic files agrees that it will perform acceptance tests or procedures within sixty(60) days of receipt, after which time the receiving party shall be deemed to have accepted the data thus transferred to be acceptable. Any errors detected within the sixty (60)day acceptance period will be corrected by the party delivering the electronic files. Engineer is not responsible for maintaining documents stored in electronic media format after acceptance by the Architect/Owner. C. When transferring documents in electronic media format, Engineer makes no representations as to the long-term compatibility, usability or readability of documents resulting from the use of software application packages, operating systems, or computer hardware differing from those used by Engineer at the beginning of the Project. D. Any re-use or modifications will be Contractor's sole risk and without liability or legal exposure to Architect, Engineer or any consultant. E. The Texas Board of Architectural Examiners (TBAE) has stated that it is in violation of Texas law for persons other than the Architect of record to revise the Architectural drawings without the Architect's written consent. 1. It is agreed that"MEP" hard copy or computer-generated documents will not be issued to any other party except directly to the Architect/Owner. The Contract Documents are contractually copyrighted and cannot be used for any other project or purpose except as specifically indicated in AIA B-141 Standard Form of Agreement Between Architect and Owner. 2. If the client, Architect or Owner of the project requires electronic media for"record purposes", then AutoCAD/ Revit documents will be prepared by Engineer on electronic media such as removable memory devices, flash drives or CD's. These documents can also be submitted via file transfer protocols. AutoCAD/ Revit files will be submitted with all title block references intact to permit the end user to only view and plot the drawings. Revisions will not be permitted in this configuration. 3. At the Architect/Owner's request, Engineer will assist the Contractor in the preparation of the submittals and prepare one copy of AutoCAD/ Revit files on electronic media or submit through file transfer protocols. The electronic media will be prepared with all indicia of documents ownership removed. The electronic media will be prepared in a ".rvt"or".dwg" format to permit the end user to revise the drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide materials and equipment manufactured by a domestic United States manufacturer and assembled in the United States for all local and Federal Government projects. These materials and equipment shall comply with "Buy American Act." DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 22 02 00- 12 METHODS FOR PLUMBING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop B. Access Doors: Provide access doors as required for access to equipment, valves, controls, cleanouts and other apparatus where concealed.Access doors shall have concealed hinges and screw driver cam locks unless indicated otherwise. C. All access panels located in wet areas such as toilet rooms, locker rooms, shower rooms, natatoriums, kitchens, and any other wet areas shall be constructed of stainless steel. D. Access doors shall be as follows: 1. Plastic Surfaces: Milcor Style K. 2. Ceramic Tile Surfaces: Milcor Style M. 3. Drywall Surfaces: Milcor Style DW. 4. Install panels only in locations approved by the Architect. 2.02 EQUIPMENT PADS A. Provide four(4) inch high concrete pads for indoor floor mounted equipment. Pads shall conform to the shape of the equipment with a minimum extension of six (6) inches beyond the equipment. Top and sides of pads shall be troweled to a smooth finish, equivalent to the floor. External corners shall be bull-nosed to a 3/4" radius, unless shown otherwise. B. Provide six (6) inch high concrete pads for all exterior mounted equipment. Pads shall conform to the shape of the equipment with a minimum extension of six(6) inches beyond the equipment. Provide a four(4)foot monolithic extension to the pad in front of the equipment for service when mounted on a non-finished area (i.e. landscape, gravel, clay, etc.)Top and sides of pads shall be troweled to a smooth finish. External corners shall be bull-nosed to a 3/4" radius, unless shown otherwise. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ROUGH-IN A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected via reviewed submittals. B. Refer to equipment specifications in other Divisions (10, 11, 12, 13, 21, 22, etc.)for additional rough-in requirements as necessary and provide accordingly. 3.02 PLUMBING INSTALLATIONS A. General: Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of plumbing and fire systems, materials, and equipment. Comply with the following requirements: 1. Coordinate plumbing and fire protection systems, equipment, and materials installation with other building components. 2. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. 3. Arrange for chases, slots, leave-outs, and other openings in building components during progress of construction to allow for plumbing installations. 4. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices, sleeves, and pathways to be set in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. 5. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of plumbing materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building. 6. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials, and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. 7. Coordinate connection of plumbing and fire protection systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service. 8. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with architectural action markings on submittal, including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, resolve conflicts and submit proposed solution to the Architect for review. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 22 02 00- 13 METHODS FOR PLUMBING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 9. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, where installed exposed in finished spaces. 10. Install equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. Extend grease fittings to an accessible location and label. 11. Install access panels or doors where valves, operable devices, and equipment are concealed behind finished surfaces. Refer to Article 2.1 of this Section and to Architectural documents for specifications and locations. 12. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required to be installed at a specified slope. 13. Provide roof curbs for all roof mounted equipment. Coordinate with roof construction for pitched roof. Provide roof curb to match roof slope. Refer to architectural drawings and details. 14. The equipment to be furnished under this Specification shall be essentially the standard product of the manufacturer. Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are required, these units shall be products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the system need not be the product of the same manufacturer. 15. The architectural and structural features of the building and the space limitations shall be considered in selection of all equipment. No equipment shall be furnished which will not suit the arrangement and space limitations indicated. 16. Lubrication: Prior to start-up, check and properly lubricate all bearings as recommended by the manufacturer. 17. Where the word "Concealed" is used in these Specifications in connection with insulating, painting, piping, valves, etc., it shall be understood to mean hidden from sight as in chases, furred spaces or suspended ceilings. "Exposed" shall be understood to mean the opposite of concealed. 18. Identification of Plumbing Equipment: a. Plumbing equipment shall be identified by means of nameplates permanently attached to the equipment. Nameplates shall be engraved laminated plastic or etched metal. Shop Drawings shall include dimensions and lettering format for approval. Attachments shall be with escutcheon pins, self-tapping screws, or machine screws. b. Tags shall be attached to all valves, including control valves, with nonferrous chains. Tags shall be brass and at least 1-1/2 inches in diameter. Nameplate and tag symbols shall correspond to the identification symbols on the Record Drawings. 3.03 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Protection of Installed Work: During cutting and patching operations, protect adjacent installations. B. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of plumbing equipment and materials required to: 1. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work. 2. Remove and replace defective Work. 3. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing. 5. Install equipment and materials in existing structures. 6. Upon written instructions from the Engineer, uncover and restore Work to provide for Engineer/Owner's observation of concealed Work, without additional cost to the Owner. 7. Patch existing finished surfaces and building components using new materials matching existing materials and experienced Installers. Patch finished surfaces and building components using new materials specified for the original installation and experienced Installers; refer to the materials and methods required for the surface and building components being patched; Refer to Article 1.11 DEFINITIONS AND SYMBOLS for definition of"Installer." C. Cut, remove and legally dispose of selected plumbing equipment, components, and materials as indicated, including but not limited to removal of plumbing piping, equipment, plumbing fixtures and trim, and other plumbing items made obsolete by the new Work. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 22 02 00- 14 METHODS FOR PLUMBING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop D. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to be removed. E. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas. 3.04 WORK SEQUENCE, TIMING, COORDINATION WITH OWNER,ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER A. The Owner will cooperate with the Contractor, however, the following provisions must be observed: 1. A meeting will be held at the project site, prior to any construction, between the Owner's Representative, the General Contractor, the Subcontractors and the Architect/Engineer to discuss Contractor's employee parking space, access, storage of equipment or materials, and use of the Owner's facilities or utilities. The Owner's decisions regarding such matters shall be final. 2. During the construction of this project, normal facility activities will continue in existing buildings until renovated areas are completed. Plumbing, fire protection, lighting, electrical, communications, heating, air conditioning, and ventilation systems will have to be maintained in service within the occupied spaces of the existing building. B. Start-up for major plumbing and fire protection equipment shall be performed by a factory authorized technician. Such equipment shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following: domestic water boilers and packaged water heating systems, water softeners, ultra- pure water equipment systems, domestic water booster pumps, fire pumps, and break tank level alarm systems. Refer to other Sections of Divisions 21 and 22 for additional requirements. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 22 02 00- 15 METHODS FOR PLUMBING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SECTION 22 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 22 02 00, are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE A. Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use. Provide electric motors, control panels, control and safety devices, and control wiring when specified or as required for proper operation of electrical systems associated with plumbing equipment and appurtenances. B. WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: 1. Painting. 2. Power control wiring to motors and equipment. 1.03 WARRANTY A. Warrant the Work specified herein for one year and motors for five years beginning on the date of substantial completion against becoming unserviceable or causing an objectionable appearance resulting from either defective or nonconforming materials and workmanship. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Indicate size material, and finish. Show locations and installation procedures. Include details of joints, attachments, and clearances. B. PRODUCT DATA: Submit schedules, charts, literature, and illustrations to indicate the performance, fabrication procedures variations, and accessories. C. MOTOR NAMEPLATE INFORMATION: Manufacturer's name, address, utility and operating data. D. Refer to Division One for additional information. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. DELIVERY: Deliver clearly labeled, undamaged materials in the manufacturers' unopened containers. B. TIME AND COORDINATION: Deliver materials to allow for minimum storage time at the project site. Coordinate delivery with the scheduled time of installation. C. STORAGE: Store materials in a clean, dry location, protected from weather and abuse. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ELECTRIC MOTORS A. APPROVED MANUFACTURERS: Provide motors by a single manufacturer as much as possible. 1. Baldor 2. Marathon 3. Leeson-Lincoln Electric 4. General Electric 5. Westinghouse B. TEMPERATURE RATING: Provide insulation as follows: 1. CLASS B: 40 degrees C maximum. 2. CLASS F: a. Between 40 degrees C and 65 degrees C maximum. b. Totally enclosed motors. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus COMMON MOTOR Christi 22 05 13- 1 REQUIREMENTS FOR 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop PLUMBING EQUIPMENT Re-Bid Construction Documents C. STARTING CAPABILITY: As required for service indicated five starts minimum per hour. D. PHASES AND CURRENT: Verify electrical service compatibility with motors to be used. 1. UP TO 3/4 HP: Provide electronically commutated brushless DC single phase motors with built-in inverter and microprocessor-based control. 2. 1 HP AND LARGER: Provide squirrel-cage AC induction polyphase motors. 3. Name plate voltage shall be the same as the circuit's normal voltage, serving the motor. E. SERVICE FACTOR: 1.15 for polyphase; 1.35 for single phase. F. FRAMES: U-frames 1.5 hp. and larger. G. BEARINGS: Provide sealed re-greasable ball bearings; with top mounted zerc lubrication fittings and bottom side drains minimum average life 100,000 hours typically, and others as follows: 1. Design for thrust where applicable. 2. PERMANENTLY SEALED: Where not accessible for greasing. 3. SLEEVE-TYPE WITH OIL CUPS: Light duty fractional horsepower motors or polyphase requiring minimum noise level. H. ENCLOSURE TYPE: Provide enclosures per applications as follows: 1. CONCEALED INDOOR: Open drip-proof(ODP). 2. EXPOSED INDOOR: Splash-proof. 3. OUTDOOR TYPICAL: Type III, totally enclosed fan-cooled (TEFC). 4. OUTDOOR WEATHER PROTECTED: Weather protected II (WPII). 5. HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS: Explosion-proof. I. OVERLOAD PROTECTION: Built-in sensing device for stopping motor in all phase legs and signaling where indicated for fractional horse power motors. J. NOISE RATING: "Quiet" except where otherwise indicated. K. EFFICIENCY: Minimum full load efficiency listed in the following table, when tested in accordance with IEEE Test Procedure 112A, Method B, including stray load loss measure. NEMA Efficiency- 1800 RPM Synchronous Speed Motor Horsepower Index Letter Minimum Efficiency% 3 -5 G 89.5 7.5 G 91.0 10 F 91.7 15-20 E 93.0 25-30 E 93.6 40 D 94.1 50 C 94.5 60 C 95.0 75 C 95.0 100 - 125 B 95.4 150 -200 B 95.8 NEMA Efficiency - 1200 RPM Synchronous Speed Motor Horsepower Index Letter Minimum Efficiency% 3 -5 G 89.5 7.5 G 90.2 10 F 91.7 15 F 91.7 20 E 92.4 25-30 E 93.6 40 -50 D 94.1 DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus COMMON MOTOR Christi 22 05 13-2 REQUIREMENTS FOR 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 60 D 94.5 75 C 94.5 100 - 125 C 95.0 150 -200 B 95.4 2.02 MOTOR CONTROLLERS (STARTERS) A. All motor controllers (for equipment furnished under Division 22) shall be furnished under Division 22 and installed under Division 26 unless otherwise noted on the plans. 1. Starters shall be provided for 3 phase motors 1 horsepower and greater. B. Motor starters shall be furnished as follows. 1. GENERAL: Motor starters shall be Square D Company Class 8536 across-the-line magnetic type, full-voltage, non-reversing (FAVOR)starter. All starters shall be constructed and tested in accordance with the latest NEMA standards, sizes and horsepower. ICE sizes are not acceptable. Starters shall be mounted in a general purpose dead front, painted steel enclosure and surface-mounted. Provide size and number of poles as shown and required by equipment served. Provide two speed, two winding or two speed, single winding motor starter as required for two speed motors. 2. CONTACTS: Magnetic starter contacts shall be double break solid silver alloy. All contacts shall be replaceable without removing power wiring or removing starter from panel. The starter shall have straight-through wiring. 3. OPERATING COILS: Operating coils shall be 120 volts and shall be of molded construction. When the coil fails, the starter shall open and shall not lock in the closed position. 4. OVERLOAD RELAYS: Provide manual reset, trip-free Class 20 overload relays in each phase conductor in of all starters. Overload relays shall be melting alloy type with visual trip indication.All 3 phase and single phase starters shall have one overload relay in each underground conductor. Relay shall not be field adjustable from manual to automatic reset. Provide 6 overload relays for two speed motor starters. 5. PILOT LIGHTS: Provide a red running pilot light for all motor starters. Pilot lights shall be mounted in the starter enclosure cover. Pilot lights shall be operated from an interlock on the motor starter and shall not be wired across the operating coil. 6. CONTROLS: Provide starters with HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC switches. Coordinate additional motor starter controls with the requirements of Division 22. Motor starter controls shall be mounted in the starter enclosure cover. 7. CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMER: Provide a single-phase 480 volt control power transformer with each starter for 120 volt control power. Connect the primary side to the line side of the motor starter. The primary side shall be protected by a fuse for each conductor. The secondary side shall have one leg fused and one leg grounded. Arrange transformer terminals so that wiring to terminals will not be located above the transformer. 8. AUXILIARY CONTACTS: Each starter shall have one normally open and one normally closed convertible auxiliary contact in addition to the number of contacts required for the "holding interlock", remote monitoring, and control wiring. In addition, it shall be possible to field-install three more additional auxiliary contacts without removing existing wiring or removing the starter from its enclosure. 9. UNIT WIRING: Unit shall be completely pre-wired to terminals to eliminate any interior field wiring except for line and load power wiring and HVAC control wiring. 10. ENCLOSURES: All motor starter enclosures shall be NEMA 1, general purpose enclosures or NEMA-3R if mounted exposed to high moisture conditions. Provide NEMA 4X when located by cooling towers, fountains, or similar locations. 11. POWER MONITOR: Provide a square "D" 8430 MPS phase failure and under-voltage relay, base and wiring required for starters serving all 3 phase motors. Set the under- voltage setting according to minimum voltage required for the motor to operate within its range. C. APPROVED MANUFACTURERS: Controller numbers are based on first named manufacturer. Provide one of the following manufacturers. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus COMMON MOTOR Christi 22 05 13- 3 REQUIREMENTS FOR 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 1. Siemens. 2. Square D. 3. General Electric. 4. Eaton. 2.03 COMBINATION MOTOR STARTERS A. GENERAL: Combination motor starters shall consist of a magnetic starter and a fusible or non- fusible disconnect switch in a dead front, painted steel NEMA 1 enclosure unless otherwise noted and shall be surface-mounted. Size and number of poles shall as shown and required by equipment served. Combination motor starters shall be as specified for motor starters in Paragraph 2.1/13, except as modified herein. B. DISCONNECT SWITCH: Disconnect switches shall be as specified in Division 26. C. APPROVED MANUFACTURERS: Controller numbers are based on first named manufacturer. Provide one of the following manufacturers. 1. Siemens. 2. Square D. 3. General Electric. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and printed installation instructions. B. All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Contractors' price shall include all items required as per manufacturer's requirements. C. Install in a professional manner. Any part or parts not meeting this requirement shall be replaced or rebuilt without extra expense to Owner. D. Install rotating equipment in static and dynamic balance. E. Provide foundations, supports, and isolators properly adjusted to allow minimum vibration transmission within the building. F. Correct objectionable noise or vibration transmission in order to operate equipment satisfactorily as determined by the Engineer. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus COMMON MOTOR Christi 22 05 13-4 REQUIREMENTS FOR 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop PLUMBING EQUIPMENT SECTION 22 05 16 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 22 02 00, are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE A. The scope of the work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the fittings and items covered by this Section, with all appurtenances, ready for the Owner's use. B. Include the following work in addition to items normally part of this Section: 1. Expansion joints and compensators. 2. Pipe loops, offsets, and swing joints. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Section 22 02 00- Basic Materials and Methods for Plumbing B. Section 22 05 29- Hangers and Support for Plumbing Piping and Equipment C. Section 22 10 00- Plumbing Piping 1.04 REFERENCES A. IAPMO (UPC)- Uniform Plumbing Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. B. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components- Health Effects; 2022, with Errata. 1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide structural work and equipment required to control expansion and contraction of piping. Verify that anchors, guides, and expansion joints provided, adequately protect system. B. Expansion Calculations: 1. Installation Temperature: 50 degrees F (10 degrees C). 2. Hot Water Heating: 210 degrees F (99 degrees C). 3. Domestic Hot Water: 140 degrees F (60 degrees C). 4. Safety Factor: 30 percent. C. Pipe sizes indicated are to establish a minimum quality of compensator. Refer to manufacturer's literature for model series for different pipe sizes. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Division One. B. Product Data: 1. Expansion Joints: Indicate maximum temperature and pressure rating, and maximum expansion compensation. 2. Pipe loops, offsets, and swing joints: Indicate temperature rise, developed lengths, pipe size, material expansion coefficient-allowable stress-modulus of elasticity, and final calculated amount of expansion. Indicate bend, loop, offset& return dimensions coinciding with the calculated expansion. C. Design Data: Indicate selection calculations. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and external controls. 1.07 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Division One. B. Record actual locations of expansion joints, fittings, anchors, and guides. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus EXPANSION FITTINGS AND Christi 22 05 16- 1 LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 1.08 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Division One. B. Maintenance Data: Include adjustment instructions. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience. B. Design expansion compensation system under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the state where the project is located. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, project and handle products to site under provisions of Division One. B. Accept expansion joints on site in factory packing with shipping bars and positioning devices intact. Inspect for damage. C. Protect equipment from exposure by leaving factory coverings, pipe end protection, and packaging in place until installation. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Provide five year warranty under provisions of Division One. B. Warranty: Include coverage for leak free performance of packed expansion joints. 1.12 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of Division One. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 EXPANSION JOINTS A. Bellows Type (Based on 4" Pipe): 1. Manufacturers: a. VMC Group, Style EB b. Triplex, Model Resistoflex R6905 c. Mercer Rubber Company, Style 803 or 805 (Mason Industries) d. Metraflex 2. Body: Monel wire reinforced molded TFE teflon bellows, multiple arch. 3. Pressure Rating: 70 psig WSP and 250 degrees F (66 degrees C). 4. Maximum Compression: 1 inch. 5. Maximum Extension: 1 inch. 6. Maximum Offset: 1/2 inch. 7. Joint: ASA standard ductile iron flanges, integral molded gasket. 8. Size: Use pipe sized units. 9. Accessories: Control rod limit bolts. 10. Application: Steel piping 8 inch and under. B. Pre-manufactured Loop Type: 1. Manufacturers: a. Flexicraft Industries b. Metraflex MLS-UPC-80 series 2. Materials of construction: Copper custom 180 degrees bend (or 90 degree elbows with spool), copper 90 degree elbows for connections to piping, bronze hose and braid. 3. Certifications: NSF 61 lead-free compliant, IAPMO (UPC) approved. 4. Working Pressure: No less than 200 psi at 250 degrees F. 5. Allowable Movement: +/-4 inches. 6. Labeled from the manufacturer and provided complete with attached support bracket and drain plug. 7. Size: Same as piping being served. 8. Installation: In strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, including support. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus EXPANSION FITTINGS AND Christi 22 05 16-2 LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 9. Application: Copper piping 4 inch and under. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Pipe Alignment Guides to Direct Axial Movement: 1. Manufacturers: a. Triplex, Model Flexonics b. Metraflex 2. Welded steel construction bolt together two piece design, frame with four mounting holes, shop painted, spider type guide, exact style/model as necessary for bare or insulated pipe to match size and thickness as appropriate, 4 inch movement standard. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide miscellaneous metals to rigidly anchor pipe to building structure. Provide pipe guides so that movement takes place along axis of pipe only. Erect piping such that strain and weight is not on cast connections or apparatus. C. Provide support and equipment required to control expansion and contraction of piping. Provide loops, pipe offsets, and swing joints, or expansion joints where required. This shall include where piping crosses expansion joints in the building. 3.02 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Prepare and start systems under provisions of Division One. B. Provide inspection services by manufacturer's representative for final installing and to certify the installation is in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and expansion joints and accessories are performing satisfactorily. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus EXPANSION FITTINGS AND Christi 22 05 16-3 LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SECTION 22 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORT FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 22 02 00, are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Pipe, and equipment hangers, supports, and associated anchors. B. Sleeves and seals. C. Flashing and sealing equipment and pipe stacks. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Section 22 02 00- Basic Materials and Methods for Plumbing B. Section 22 07 19- Plumbing Piping Insulation C. Section 22 10 00- Plumbing Piping D. Section 22 11 21 - Natural Gas Piping Systems 1.04 REFERENCES A. ASME B31.1 - Power Piping; 2022. B. ASME B31.9- Building Services Piping; 2020. C. MSS SP-58- Pipe Hangers and Supports- Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation; 2018, with Amendment (2019). 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping: In conformance with ASME B31.1 and ASME B31.9. B. Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping: In conformance with MSS SP-58. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division One. B. Indicate hanger and support framing and attachment methods. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring. B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 Inches Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. C. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron roll, double hanger. D. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods; cast iron roll and stand for pipe sizes 6 inches and over. E. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook. F. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roller. G. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. H. Floor Support for Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, locknut nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus HANGERS AND SUPPORT FOR Christi 22 05 29 - 1 PLUMBING PIPING AND 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop EQUIPMENT Re-Bid Construction Documents I. Floor Support for Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Adjustable cast iron roll and stand, steel screws, and concrete pier or steel support. J. Roof Pipe Supports and Hangers: Free-standing manufactured pipe support system with hot dip galvanized steel components and hardware with UV-inhibited injection molded high density/high impact black polypropylene base material. Portable Pipe Hangers, Inc. or approved equal. For pipes 2-1/2" and smaller Type PP10-R, with pipe roller support For pipes 3"through 8" Type PS-1-2, with pipe roller support For multiple pipes Type PSE- Custom K. Copper Pipe Support and Hangers: Electro-galvanized with thermoplastic elastomer cushions; Unistrut"Cush-A-Clamp" or equal. Hangers: Plastic coated; Unistrut or equal. L. For installation of protective shields also reference Section 22 07 19. M. Shields for Vertical Copper Pipe Risers: Sheet lead. N. Pipe Rough-In Supports in Walls/Chases: Provide pre-formed plastic pipe supports, Sioux Chief "Pipe Titan", Hold Rite or equal. 2.02 HANGER RODS A. Galvanized Hanger Rods: Threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded. 2.03 INSERTS A. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods. 2.04 FLASHING A. Metal Flashing: 20 gage galvanized steel. B. Lead Flashing: 4 lb./sq. ft. sheet lead for waterproofing. C. Caps: Steel, 20 gauge minimum; 16 gage at fire resistant elements. D. Coordinate with roofing contractor/architect for type of flashing on metal roofs. 2.05 EQUIPMENT CURBS A. Fabricate curbs of hot dipped galvanized steel. 2.06 ROOFTOP PIPE SUPPORTS A. All roof-mounted piping shall be supported with engineered pre-fabricated piping support systems specifically designed to be installed on the roof without roof penetrations, flashing, or damage to the roofing material. 1. Bases shall be made of UV protected HDPE. 2. Frames shall be made of hot dipped galvanized strucutral steel. 3. Nuts, threads, and washers shall be hot dipped galvanized steel. 4. System shall be specifically designed to fit the piping and the actual conditions of service. 5. Wood supports are not acceptable. 6. Portable Pipe Hanger(PHP)system or pre-approved equal, installed per manufacturer's instructions. 2.07 SLEEVES A. All pipe penetrations through walls, floors, floor-ceiling assemblies, etc. shall be sleeved to ensure no direct contact between the pipe and that which it passes through. All installations shall be provided consistent with the fire and smoke safeguards required by the building code per the fire-resistance rating as indicated on the architectural drawings and shall be provided consistent with the assemblies/methods indicated on the architectural drawings. B. Unless required otherwise (the most stringent requirement shall govern), sleeves for pipes: 1. Through nonfire-resistance-rated floors shall be formed with 18 gage galvanized steel, tack welded to form a uniform sleeve. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus HANGERS AND SUPPORT FOR Christi 22 05 29-2 PLUMBING PIPING AND 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop EQUIPMENT 2. Through nonfire-resistance-rated walls, through grade beams and foundation walls, and through potentially wet floors shall be formed with schedule 40 steel pipe, galvanized. 3. Through assemblies including but not limited to fire-resistance-rated walls-barriers- partitions, smoke barriers-partitions, etc. shall be schedule 40 steel pipe securely fastened to the rated assembly. All annular spaces shall be firestopped with an approved penetration firestop system (UL listed) compatible with the pipe material and installed per the manufacturer's recommendations. C. Fire Stopping Insulation: Glass fiber type, non-combustible, UL listed. D. Caulk: Paintable 25-year acrylic sealant. E. Pipe Alignment Guides: Factory fabricated, of cast semi-steel or heavy fabricated steel, consisting of bolted, two-section outer cylinder and base with two-section guiding spider that bolts tightly to pipe. Length of guides shall be as recommended by manufacturer to allow indicated travel. 2.08 FABRICATION A. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping. B. Design hangers without disengagement of supported pipe. C. Design roof supports without roof penetrations, flashing or damage to the roofing material. 2.09 FINISH A. Exposed steel hangers, supports, and appurtenances shall be hot-dipped galvanized. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSERTS A. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. Coordinate with structural engineer for placement of inserts. B. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches. C. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, provide inserts to be flush with slab surface. D. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide thru-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut recessed into and grouted flush with slab. Verify with structural engineer prior to start of work. 3.02 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Support horizontal piping as follows: PIPE SIZE MAX/ HANGER SPACING HANGER DIAMETER (Steel Pipe) 1/2 to 1-1/4 inch 7'-0" 3/8" 1-1/2 to 3 inch 10'-01, 3/8" 4 to 6 inch 10'-01, 1/2" 8 to 10 inch 10'-01, 5/8" 12 to 14 inch 10'-01, 3/4" 15 inch and over 10'-01, 7/8" (Copper Pipe) 1/2 to 1-1/4 inch 5'-0" 3/8" 1-1/2 to 2-1/2 inch 8'-01, 3/8" 3 to 4 inch 10'-01, 3/8" 6 to 8 inch 10'-01, 1/2" (Cast Iron Pipe) DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus HANGERS AND SUPPORT FOR Christi 22 05 29- 3 PLUMBING PIPING AND 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop EQUIPMENT 2 to 3 inch 5'-0" 3/8" 4 to 6 inch 10'-01, 1/2" 8 to 10 inch 10'-01, 5/8" 12 to 14 inch 10'-01, 3/4" 15 inch and over 10'-01, 7/8" (PVC Pipe) 1-1/2 to 4 inch 4'-0" 3/8" 6 to 8 inch 4'-0" 1/2" 10 inch and over 4'-0" 5/8" B. Sagging of horizontal pipe is unacceptable. C. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. D. Place a hanger within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow and at the vertical horizontal transition. E. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. F. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet maximum spacing between hangers. Also reference specific requirements for cast iron piping installation in Section 22 10 00, Part 3 Execution. G. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at hub. H. For vertical shaft or chase applications where floor slab supported riser clamps cannot be provided to keep the pipe in alignment and to support the weight of the pipe and its contents, ensure to provide suitable fasteners and hardware, braces, unistrut, structural steel members, etc. to accommodate the pipe installation. Coordinate all such work with the project structural engineer to ensure that necessary members and attachment points are provided accordingly to bear the weight of the functioning piping. I. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. J. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. K. Install hangers with nut at base and above hanger; tighten upper nut to hanger after final installation adjustments. 3.03 INSULATED PIPING A. Clamps: Attach galvanized clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps projecting through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ASME B31.9. B. Saddles: Install galvanized protection saddles MSS Type 39 where insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with segments of insulation that match adjoining pipe insulation. Secure the full contact area of the saddle to the pipe insulation with 1/8" thick coat of mastic. C. Shields: Install protective shields MSS Type 40 on insulated piping that has vapor barrier. Secure the full contact area of the shield to the pipe insulation with 1/8" thick coat of mastic. D. Galvanized sheet metal shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees and shall have dimensions not less than the following: Nominal Pipe Size Shield Length Gauge Thickness 1/4 through 3-1/2 inch 12 inch 18 4 inch 12 inch 16 5 through 6 inch 18 inch 16 8 through 14 inch 24 inch 14 16 through 24 inch 24 inch 12 DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus HANGERS AND SUPPORT FOR Christi 22 05 29-4 PLUMBING PIPING AND 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop EQUIPMENT E. Ensure to provide an insert of high density insulation (calcium silicate)at each hanger/support to prevent the weight of the pipe from otherwise crushing the insulation. This insert material shall be at least as long as the associated protective shield. F. Thermal Hanger Shields: Install where indicated, with insulation of same thickness as piping. 3.04 EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS A. Provide equipment bases of concrete. B. Provide templates, anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment. C. Construct support of steel members. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure. D. Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed. 3.05 FLASHING A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counter flashing where piping penetrates weather or waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs. B. Flash vent and soil pipes projecting 8 inches minimum above finished roof surface with lead worked one inch minimum into hub, 8 inches minimum clear on sides with 24 x 24 inches sheet size. For pipes through outside walls, turn flanges back into wall and caulk, metal counter flash and seal. C. Flash floor drains in floors with topping over finished areas with lead, 10 inches clear on sides with minimum 36 x 36 inch sheet size. Fasten flashing to drain clamp device. D. Seal floor shower mop sink and all other drains watertight to adjacent materials. E. Provide curbs for mechanical roof installations 8 inches minimum high above roofing surface. Contact architect for all flashing details and roof construction. Seal penetrations watertight. 3.06 SLEEVES A. Set sleeves in position in formwork. Provide reinforcing around sleeves. B. Extend sleeves through floors minimum one inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves full depth with fire rated thermafiber and 3M caulking and provide floor plate. C. Where piping penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe and adjacent work with UL listed fire stopping insulation and caulk seal air tight. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus HANGERS AND SUPPORT FOR Christi 22 05 29-5 PLUMBING PIPING AND 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop EQUIPMENT SECTION 22 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 22 02 00, are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE A. The scope of the work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of vibration &sound control products and seismic controls covered by this Section, with all appurtenances, ready for the Owner's use. B. Include the following work in addition to items normally part of this Section: 1. Vibration and shock mounting. 2. Flexible pipe connectors. 3. Seismic restraints. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Section 22 05 29- Hangers and Support for Plumbing Piping and Equipment B. Section 22 10 00- Plumbing Piping C. Section 22 30 00- Plumbing Equipment 1.04 REFERENCES A. ICC (IBC)- International Building Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. B. NFPA 99- Health Care Facilities Code; 2024, with Errata. C. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components- Health Effects; 2022, with Errata. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of vibration control and seismic products, of type, size, and capacity required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Vibration and sound control products shall conform to ASHRAE criteria for average noise criteria (NC) curves for all equipment at full load conditions. C. Unless indicated otherwise, sound and vibration control products and seismic products shall be provided by a single manufacturer. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Indicate size, material, and finish. Show locations and installation procedures. Include details of joints, attachments, and clearances. B. PRODUCT DATA: Submit schedules, charts, literature, and illustrations to indicate the performance, fabrication procedures, product variations, and accessories. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. VMC Group B. Mason Industries, Inc. C. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. D. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. E. Unisource Manufacturing (as specifically noted below) DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus VIBRATION AND SEISMIC Christi 22 05 48- 1 CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop PIPING Re-Bid Construction Documents 2.02 GENERAL A. Provide vibration isolation supports for equipment, piping and appurtenances to prevent transmission of vibration and noise to the building structure that may cause discomfort to the occupants. B. Provide seismic restraints, supports, and attachments suitable for the applicable seismic loads in seismic design category areas as required by the ICC (IBC) and local code requirements. C. Where Basis of Design manufacturer and model numbers are indicated, the products of the other listed manufacturers above will be acceptable provided they comply with all of the requirements of this specification. 2.03 BASE MOUNTED PUMPS A. Provide VMC Group model SP-NR, style E, elastomeric isolation pads consisting of two layers of 3/8" thick alternate ribbed elastomeric pad bonded to a 16 gauge galvanized steel separator plate. B. Pads shall be sized for approximately 40 psi loading and 1/8" deflection. C. Provide inertia bases for all base mounted pump applications in which the pumps are to be installed on any floor level other than the ground floor or grade level. Inertia bases shall also be provided for base mounted pump applications in which the associated room where they are housed is in a noise sensitive location, regardless of floor level. 2.04 FLOOR MOUNTED AIR COMPRESSORS, VACUUM PUMPS, AND SIMILAR EQUIPMENT A. Provide VMC Group model CAL-2 aluminum housed isolators sized for 2" static deflection. Cast iron or steel housings may be used provided they are hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. B. If floor mounted equipment is furnished with an internal vibration isolation option, provide VMC Group model SP-NRC, style E, consisting of two layers of 1"thick ribbed elastomeric pad bonded to a 16 gauge galvanized steel separator plate to address high frequency breakout and afford additional unit elevation for required drains. Ribbed elastomeric pads shall be located in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's recommendations. 2.05 PIPING A. Provide line size stainless steel flexible connectors at connections to air compressors, domestic boosters, and other pumps (excluding submersible pumps and small circulators). 1. Type 321 SS annular corrugated interior hose. 2. Type 304 SS single braid exterior hose. 3. End connection type(s) as suited for the application and the equipment and piping being served, but in no case welded or soldered ends. 4. Ensure NSF 61 compliance for all potable water applications. 5. When applied with dissimilar pipe materials, dielectric connections must be provided at both ends. B. For medical gas applications (or similar), flexible connectors at intake and outlet of medical air compressors and vacuum pumps shall be specifically produced for such use: 1. They shall be documented, purged, and brazed to NFPA 99 standards. 2. They shall be cleaned, capped, and bagged in accordance with CGA(Compressed Gas Association) G-4.1. 3. Bronze hose and braid, copper return elbow, and copper sweat end connections. Sizes 2-1/2"through 4" shall utilize stainless steel hose and braid, stainless steel return elbow, and copper sweat end fittings silver brazed to the assembly. 4. Unisource Manufacturing Series 455 "MedFlex" 2.06 CORROSION PROTECTION A. All vibration isolators shall be designed and treated for resistance to corrosion. B. Steel components: PVC coated or phosphated and painted with industrial grade enamel. Nuts, bolts, and washers: zinc-electroplated. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus VIBRATION AND SEISMIC Christi 22 05 48-2 CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop PIPING PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and printed installation instructions. B. All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturer's requirements. C. The vibration isolation supplier shall certify in writing that he has inspected the installation and that all external isolation materials and devices are installed correctly and functioning properly. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus VIBRATION AND SEISMIC Christi 22 05 48-3 CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop PIPING SECTION 22 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 22 02 00, are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE A. The scope of the work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the items covered by this Section, with all appurtenances, ready for owner's use. B. All plumbing piping shall be appropriately labeled. C. Refer to Architectural Sections for any additional requirements. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Section 22 10 00- Plumbing Piping B. Section 22 07 19- Plumbing Piping Insulation 1.04 REFERENCES A. ASME A13.1 -Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; 2023. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 VALVE AND PIPE IDENTIFICATION A. Valves: 1. All valves shall be identified with a 1-1/2" diameter brass valve tag with stamped, black or red filled characters. Service designations shall be 1/4" letters and valve numbers shall be 1/2" numbers. Secure tags to valve handles by use of use of copper or Monel wire seals. For any services not identified below, contact Engineer in advance for approval. Service designations: a. Domestic cold water: DCW b. Domestic hot water: DHW c. Domestic hot water return: DHWR d. Natural gas: GAS e. Compressed air: AIR 2. All valves on the project shall be numbered sequentially, with valves for any one system and/or trade grouped together. 3. Valve tags are not required if the valve is located within 3'-0" of the equipment being served and the service is obvious. 4. Catalog a complete written record of all valves on the project, whether tagged or not. Include manufacturer, model number, size, service, system pressure (if like services with differing pressures are present on the project), location, valve tag data, and a description of the equipment/room/area served. Any valves which must be operated in sequence shall be indicated as such. Prepare a valve chart/schedule with all such information and include this chart/schedule in the project Operating and Maintenance Manual. 5. Mark all valve locations on the record drawings with appropriate identifying symbols or information to align with the above referenced valve chart/schedule. In addition to the O&M submission, provide the Owner with a digital copy (PDF format)of all such information in high-resolution, suitable for printing as full size drawings. 6. Tags and fastenings shall be manufactured by the Seton Nameplate Corporation or approved equal. 7. In addition to tags, all isolation valves serving emergency safety fixtures shall be provided with immediately adjacent clear and permanent signage indicating their purpose so as to avoid accidental shut-off. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus IDENTIFICATION FOR Christi 22 05 53- 1 PLUMBING PIPING AND 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop EQUIPMENT Re-Bid Construction Documents B. Pipe Marking: 1. All interior visible piping located in accessible spaces shall be provided with pipe markers. Accessible spaces shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following: above accessible ceilings, inside equipment rooms and utility spaces, in attic spaces, in crawl spaces, and in chase spaces, etc. viewable via access panels. 2. All exterior visible piping shall be provided with pipe markers. 3. Peel-off, self-adhesive, sticker type labels shall not be acceptable. 4. Pipe markers shall be manufactured with rigid vinyl PVC, printed with UV resistant ink, abrasion and chemical resistant, suited for indoor or outdoor use and for a service temperature of-40 degrees F to 160 degrees F. a. For pipes up to 6" provide cylindrically pre-coiled markers that snap into place without the need for tape or adhesives. b. For pipes 6" and larger provide flat snap-around markers installed using manufacturer's heavy-duty nylon ties or stainless steel strapping. c. Markers shall indicate the pipe service, include flow directional arrows, and meet ASME A13.1. 5. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Seton Setmark Pipe Markers b. Brimar Industries Pipemarker System 1 Pipe Markers c. Brady Corporation 6. Markers shall be provided after final insulating, painting,jacketing, etc. of piping and per manufacturer's installation instructions. Strapping (applies to large diameter markers only) shall be snug but shall not compromise any insulation. All such strapping shall also be cleanly trimmed of excess material. 7. Markers shall be provided in accordance with ASME A13.1 requirements. Specific items indicated below are not intended as a substitute for this complete standard. Markers shall be provided: a. On both sides of each floor or wall penetration. b. On each side of each tee. c. On each side of each valve and/or valve group. d. On each side of each piece of equipment. e. On straight pipe runs at equally spaced intervals not to exceed 50 feet. f. In congested areas, on each pipe at the point it enters and exits the area. g. At the point of connection to each piece of equipment and automatic control valve. h. Where they are readily visible to personnel from the point of normal approach. i. With letter height and length of color field according to the size of the pipe served. j. For non-potable water not less than once per room and at equally spaced intervals not to exceed 20 feet. 8. Color scheme of markers shall be as indicated below and otherwise in accordance with ANSI/ASME color recommendations. Legend color indicates color of legend text and flow directional arrow: SYSTEM LABEL LEGEND LEGEND COLOR COLOR Sanitary Sewer Green Sanitary Sewer White Green Plumbing Vent White Storm Drain Green Storm Drain White Green Overflow White Domestic Water Green Domestic Cold Water White Domestic Hot Water Green Domestic Hot Water White Domestic Hot Water Return Green Domestic Hot Water Return White Fire Protection Red Fire Protection White Red Fire Sprinkler White Fuel Gas Yellow Natural Gas Black DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus IDENTIFICATION FOR Christi 22 05 53-2 PLUMBING PIPING AND 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop EQUIPMENT Yellow Propane Gas Black Diesel Yellow Diesel Oil Black Compressed Air Blue Compressed Air White Nitrogen Orange Nitrogen Black Carbon Dioxide Orange Carbon Dioxide Black Non-Potable Water Yellow Caution: Non-Potable Water, Black Do Not Drink Deionized Water Green Deionized Water White Reverse Osmosis Water Green R.O. Water White Acid Waste Orange Acid Waste Black Acid Vent Black C. Pipe Painting: 1. The entire fire protection piping system shall be painted red. 2. Pipe painting shall be per the color schedule below or as directed by the Architect. Confirm all color selections with Architect prior to installation, in particular for exposed piping in publicly occupiable areas. 3. All exterior piping shall be painted. 4. All piping subject to corrosive conditions shall be painted. This shall include, but not necessarily be limited to: natatoriums, pool equipment rooms, chemical and metal processing areas, and animal pens. 5. All exposed piping shall be painted (including, but not limited to: piping in mechanical rooms, kitchens, and storage rooms). 6. Paint color schedule: System Color Storm Sewer White Sanitary Sewer Waste and Vent Light Gray Domestic Cold Water Dark Blue Domestic Hot Water Supply and Return Orange Yellow, unless specifically Fuel Gas (except for utility provider installed piping) indicated/required otherwise by Architect or AHJ 2.02 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Plumbing equipment shall be identified by means of nameplates permanently attached to the equipment. Nameplates shall be engraved laminated plastic or etched metal. Submittals shall include dimensions and lettering format for approval.Attachment shall be with escutcheon pins, self-tapping screws, or machine screws. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. All labeling equipment shall be installed per manufacturer's printed installation instructions. B. All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Contractor's price shall include all items as required per manufacturers' requirements. C. All piping to be painted shall be cleaned of rust, dirt, oil and all other contaminants prior to painting. Install primer and a quality latex paint over all surfaces of pipe. For piping subject to corrosive conditions provide a suitable epoxy(spray)coating to all exposed surfaces. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus IDENTIFICATION FOR Christi 22 05 53- 3 PLUMBING PIPING AND 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop EQUIPMENT SECTION 22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 22 02 00, are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE A. Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use. B. Furnish and install piping insulation to: 1. Interior domestic hot water and hot water return piping. 2. Interior domestic cold water piping located in exterior walls and to a point no less than 8'-0" inside the building. 3. Exterior domestic cold water piping. 4. Drain bodies and associated piping. 5. Condensate drainage piping. 6. All pipes subject to freezing conditions shall be insulated. C. Work specified elsewhere. 1. Painting. 2. Pipe hangers and supports. D. For insulation purposes, piping is defined as the complete piping system including supplies and returns, pipes, valves, automatic control valve bodies, fittings, flanges, strainers, thermometer wells, unions, pressure reducing stations, and orifice assemblies. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 22 05 29- Hangers and Support for Plumbing Piping and Equipment B. Section 22 05 53- Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment C. Section 22 10 00- Plumbing Piping 1.04 REFERENCES A. ASHRAE Std 90.1 I-P- Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. B. ASTM C534/C534M - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form; 2023. C. ASTM C547- Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation; 2022a. D. ASTM C1126- Standard Specification for Faced or Unfaced Rigid Cellular Phenolic Thermal Insulation; 2019. E. ASTM C1136- Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation; 2023. F. ASTM E84 -Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2023c. G. ASTM E136-Standard Test Method for Assessing Combustibility of Materials Using a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750 Degrees C; 2024. H. ICC (IECC)- International Energy Conservation Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. I. SCAQMD 1168 -Adhesive and Sealant Applications; 1989, with Amendment(2022). DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus PLUMBING PIPING Christi 22 07 19- 1 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop INSULATION Re-Bid Construction Documents J. UL 723-Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Warrant the Work specified herein for one year against becoming unserviceable or causing an objectionable appearance resulting from either defective or nonconforming materials or workmanship. B. Defects shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Mildewing. 2. Peeling, cracking, and blistering. 3. Condensation on exterior surfaces. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Indicate size, material, and finish. Show locations and installation procedures. Include details of joints, attachments, and clearances. B. PRODUCT DATA: Submit schedules, charts, literature, and illustrations to indicate the performance, fabrication procedures, project variations, and accessories. 1.07 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver undamaged materials in the manufacturer's unopened containers. Containers shall be clearly labeled with the insulation's flame and smoke ratings. B. Protect insulation against dirt, water and chemical and mechanical damage. Do not install damaged or wet insulation; remove such from project site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING INSULATION A. It is the intent of these specifications to secure superior quality workmanship resulting in an absolutely satisfactory installation of insulation from the standpoint of both function and appearance. Particular attention shall be given to valves, fittings, pumps, etc., requiring low temperature insulation to insure full thickness of insulation and proper application of the vapor seal. All flaps of vapor barrier jackets and/or canvas covering must be neatly and securely smoothed and sealed down. B. The type of insulation and its installation shall be in strict accordance with these specifications for each service, and the application technique shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. All insulation types, together with adhesives and finishes shall be submitted and approved prior to installation. C. A sample quantity of each type of insulation and each type application shall be installed and approval secured prior to proceeding with the main body of the work. Condensation caused by improper installation of insulation shall be corrected by Installing Contractor. Any damage caused by condensation shall be made good at no cost to the Owner or Architect/Engineer. D. All insulation shall be listed and labeled to have a composite (insulation,jacket or facing, and adhesive used to adhere the facing or jacket to insulation)flame spread index of not more than 25 and smoke-developed index of not more than 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723. E. All piping insulation shall comply with minimum requirements of International Energy Conservation Code ICC (IECC) and ASHRAE Std 90.1 I-P. F. Accessories, such as adhesives, mastics and cements shall have the same component ratings as listed above. Additionally, all adhesives and sealants used on the interior of the building (i.e., inside of the weatherproofing system and applied on-site) shall be comprised of low-emitting materials that comply with VOC limits prescribed by SCAQMD 1168. G. All products or their shipping cartons shall have a label affixed, indicating flame and smoke ratings do not exceed the above requirements. H. Any existing piping located in an air plenum that is comprised of materials that do not comply with the 25/50 flame and smoke rating per ASTM E84 testing requirements shall be provided DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus PLUMBING PIPING Christi 22 07 19-2 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop INSULATION with a single layer of high-temperature insulation to establish a noncombustible rating per ASTM E136. Insulation products which are approved for such non-compliant combustible piping materials located air plenums shall be 3M Fire Barrier Plenum Wrap 5A+ or Unifrax FyreWrap 0.5 Plenum. Insulation products for this application shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 2.02 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Glass mineral wool materials shall be as manufactured by Knauf Insulation, Johns Manville or Owens-Corning and shall have the same thermal properties, density, fire rating, vapor barrier, etc., as the types specified herein, subject to review by the Engineer. All glass mineral wool insulation shall be UL GREENGUARD Gold certified. B. Adhesives shall be as manufactured by Childers, Foster, HB Fuller or Armacell, and shall have the same adhesive properties, fire rating, vapor seal, etc., as the types specified herein, subject to review by the Engineer. C. Armaflex elastomeric cellular thermal insulation by Armacell. D. Phenolic foam insulation shall be as manufactured by Resolco, Inc. (Insul-Phen)or Polyguard (Poly-phen). E. Metal jacketing and fitting covers shall be as manufactured by Childers or RPR Products, Inc. 2.03 MATERIALS A. INTERIOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPE: Provide glass mineral wool pipe insulation in accordance with ASTM C547 with ASJ+ SSL+jacket. B. EXTERIOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPE: Provide flexible elastomeric cellular thermal insulation in accordance with ASTM C534/C534M, model "AP Armaflex"with secured aluminum jacketing, or preformed phenolic foam in accordance with ASTM C1126 with secured aluminum jacketing. C. DRAIN BODIES AND DOWNSPOUTS: Insulate underside of roof and overflow drain bodies, associated horizontal piping, including first turn down to vertical conductor. Insulate chilled water waste lines from drinking fountain to junction with main waste stacks. Insulate branch lines including traps and exposed underside of floor drains receiving cooling coil condensate, same as water piping where exposed to building occupant view. When concealed, insulation may be same as specified for external duct wrap. D. CONDENSATE DRAINAGE PIPING: Provide flexible elastomeric cellular thermal insulation in accordance with ASTM C534/C534M, model "Armaflex Ultra", fire rated for use in environmental air plenums; insulation not required when piping is exposed on roof. E. ALUMINUM OR STAINLESS STEEL JACKETING: Utilize strap-on type jacketing, banding, and accessories. Provide pre-formed fitting covers for all elbows and tees. F. ALL SERVICE JACKETING (ASJ+): Vapor retarder jacket for interior applications shall be composed of an aluminum foil layer, reinforced with glass scrim, bonded to a layer of white kraft paper, interleaving with an outer polymer film leaving no paper exposed, complying with ASTM C1136. Vapor retarder jacket for exterior applications shall be composed of a 3-ply composite membrane consisting of a white 0.5 mil polyester film, 1.0 mil aluminum foil, and one 0.5 mil clear polyester film; complying with ASTM C1136. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. All insulation shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations and printed installation instructions, including high density inserts at all hangers and pipe supports to prevent compression of insulation. B. All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturer's requirements. C. Pipes located outdoors, in tunnels or crawlspaces shall be insulated same as concealed piping; and in addition shall have a jacket of 0.016 inch thick, smooth aluminum with longitudinal modified Pittsburg Z-Lock seam and 2 inch overlap. Jacketing shall be easily removed and replaced without damage. All butt joints shall be sealed with gray silicone. Galvanized banding DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus PLUMBING PIPING Christi 22 07 19-3 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop INSULATION is not acceptable. D. All insulated piping located over driveways shall have an aluminum shield permanently banded over insulation to protect it from damage from car antennas. E. Provide all piping insulation to comply with the ASHRAE Std 90.1 I-P Minimum Thickness Schedule and as indicated below. 1. Low temperature surfaces- Minimum Insulation Thickness a. Exposed exterior domestic water pipe: 1-112 inch b. Interior domestic cold water pipe: 1 inch c. Condensate drain lines: 3/4 inch d. Drains receiving condensate: 1 inch e. Concealed piping from roof drains: 1-1/2 inch blanket wrap f. Exposed piping from roof drains: 1 inch thick rigid with all service jacket 2. Domestic Hot Water and Return Piping- Minimum Insulation Thickness a. Pipe sizes 1-1A inch and smaller with operating temperatures of 140°F or less: 1 inch b. Pipe sizes 1-1/2 inch and larger with operating temperatures of 140°F or less: 1-1/2 inch c. Pipe sizes 1-1A inch and smaller with operating temperatures greater than 140°F: 1-1/2 inch d. Pipe sizes 1-1/2 inch and larger with operating temperatures greater than 140°F: 2 inch 3.02 WATER PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. The insulation shall be applied to clean, dry pipes with all joints firmly butted together. Where piping is interrupted by fittings, flanges, valves or hangers and at intervals not to exceed 25 feet on straight runs, a vapor dam shall be formed between the vapor retarder jacket and the bare pipe. The seal shall be by the applications of vapor retarder mastic to the exposed insulation joint faces, carried continuously down to and along 4 inches of pipe and up to and along 2 inches of jacket. B. Pipe fittings and valves shall be insulated with pre-molded or shop fabricated glass fiber covers finished with two brush coats of vapor retarder mastic reinforced with glass fabric. C. All under lap surfaces shall be clean and free of dust, etc. before the SSL is sealed. These laps shall be firmly rubbed to insure a positive seal. A brush coat of vapor retarder shall be applied to all edges of the vapor retarder jacket. D. At hangers and supports, provide a high density foam insulation insert that extends 2" beyond the shield on each side and a protective shield/saddle to prevent compression/damage. Secure shield/saddle to insulation using mastic. Also reference specific requirements in Section 22 05 29, Part 3 Execution. 3.03 FIRE RATED INSULATION A. All pipe penetrations through walls and concrete floors shall be fire rated by applying Owens Corning Thermafiber in the space between the concrete and the pipe. B. The fire rating shall be additionally sealed by using 3M brand model CP 25 or 303 fire barrier caulk and putty. C. All fire rating material shall be insulated in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus PLUMBING PIPING Christi 22 07 19-4 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop INSULATION ADD 02 SECTION 22 10 00 PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 22 02 00, are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE A. The scope of the work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the piping covered by this Section, with all appurtenances, ready for the Owner's use. B. Include the following work in addition to items normally part of this Section: 1. Pipe and pipe fittings: a. Sanitary drainage piping system. b. Domestic water piping system. 2. Adapters, Transitions, Unions, Couplings, Flanges, Connectors 3. Valves 4. Excavation, Bedding, and Backfill 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Section 22 05 29- Hangers and Support for Plumbing Piping and Equipment B. Section 22 05 48-Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping C. Section 22 05 53- Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment D. Section 22 07 19- Plumbing Piping Insulation E. Section 221112 F. Section 22 11 19- Plumbing Specialties G. Section 22 30 00- Plumbing Equipment H. Section 22 40 00- Plumbing Fixtures 1.04 REFERENCES A. ASME B16.1 - Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and 250; 2020. B. ASME B16.5- Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 through NPS 24 Metric/Inch Standard; 2020. C. ASME B16.14- Ferrous Pipe Plugs, Bushings, and Locknuts With Pipe Threads; Current Edition. D. ASME B16.15- Cast Copper Alloy Threaded Fittings: Classes 125 and 250; 2018. E. ASME B16.18- Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; 2021. F. ASME 1316.22 -Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings; 2021. G. ASME B16.23- Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings: DWV; 2021. H. ASME B16.24- Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges, Flanged Fittings, and Valves: Classes 150, 300, 600, 900, 1500, and 2500; 2021. I. ASME B16.29-Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings—DWV; 2022. J. ASME B16.39- Malleable Iron Threaded Pipe Unions: Classes 150, 250, and 300; 2019. K. ASME B16.50-Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Braze-Joint Pressure Fittings; 2013. L. ASME BPVC- Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; 2023. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 22 10 00- 1 PLUMBING PIPING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop ADD 02 M. ASME BPVC-IX- Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX-Qualification Standard for Welding, Brazing, and Fusing Procedures; Welders; Brazers; and Welding, Brazing, and Fusing Operators; 2023. N. ASSE 1079 - Performance Requirements for Dielectric Pipe Unions; 2012. O. ASTM A74 -Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings; 2021. P. ASTM A126-Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings; 2004 (Reapproved 2023). Q. ASTM A312/A312M -Standard Specification for Seamless, Welded, and Heavily Cold Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes; 2022a. R. ASTM A403/A403M -Standard Specification for Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping Fittings; 2022b. S. ASTM A536-Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings; 1984, with Editorial Revision (2019). T. ASTM A582/A582M -Standard Specification for Free-Machining Stainless Steel Bars; 2022. U. ASTM A733-Standard Specification for Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel and Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe Nipples; 2016 (Reapproved 2022). V. ASTM A865/A865M -Standard Specification for Threaded Couplings, Steel, Black or Zinc- Coated (Galvanized)Welded or Seamless, for Use in Steel Pipe Joints; 2023. W. ASTM A888-Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications; 2020. X. ASTM B32 -Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2020. Y. ASTM B43 -Standard Specification for Seamless Red Brass Pipe, Standard Sizes; 2020. Z. ASTM B62 -Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings; 2017. AA. ASTM 1375/1375M - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube; 2020. BB. ASTM B88 -Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2022. CC. ASTM B306-Standard Specification for Copper Drainage Tube (DWV); 2020. DD. ASTM B828-Standard Practice for Making Capillary Joints by Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube and Fittings; 2016. EE. ASTM C564- Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings; 2020a. FF. ASTM C1053- Standard Specification for Borosilicate Glass Pipe and Fittings for Drain, Waste, and Vent (DWV)Applications; 2000 (Reapproved 2015). GG. ASTM C1173- Standard Specification for Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Piping Systems; 2018. HH. ASTM C1460- Standard Specification for Shielded Transition Couplings for Use With Dissimilar DWV Pipe and Fittings Above Ground; 2017. II. ASTM C1540- Standard Specification for Heavy-Duty Shielded Couplings Joining Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings; 2020. JJ. ASTM D635- Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Plastics in a Horizontal Position; 2022. KK. ASTM D698- Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort(12,400 ft-Ibf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)); 2012 (Reapproved 2021). LL. ASTM D1599- Standard Test Method for Resistance to Short-Time Hydraulic Pressure of Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings; 2018. MM.ASTM D1784- Standard Classification System and Basis for Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds; 2020. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 22 10 00-2 PLUMBING PIPING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop ADD 02 NN. ASTM D1785- Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120; 2021 a. 00. ASTM D2122- Standard Test Method for Determining Dimensions of Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings; 2022. PP. ASTM D2321 - Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications; 2020. QQ. ASTM D2466- Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40; 2023. RR. ASTM D2564- Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems; 2020. SS. ASTM D2665- Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings; 2020. TT. ASTM D3034- Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings; 2023. UU. ASTM D3139- Standard Specification for Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes using Flexible Elastomeric Seals; 2019. VV. ASTM D3212- Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals; 2007. WW. ASTM D3222 -Standard Specification for Unmodified Poly(Vinylidene Fluoride) (PVDF) Molding Extrusion and Coating Materials; 2021. XX. ASTM D3311 - Standard Specification for Drain, Waste, and Vent (DWV) Plastic Fittings Patterns; 2017 (Reapproved 2021). YY. ASTM D4101 - Standard Classification System and Basis for Specification for Polypropylene Injection and Extrusion Materials; 2017, with Editorial Revision (2019). ZZ. ASTM D4976- Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Molding and Extrusion Materials; 2012. AAA. ASTM D5926 -Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Gaskets for Drain, Waste, and Vent(DWV), Sewer, Sanitary, and Storm Plumbing Systems; 2015. BBB. ASTM D6707/D6707M - Standard Specification for Circular-Knit Geotextile for Use in Subsurface Drainage Applications; 2016. CCC. ASTM E84 -Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2023c. DDD. ASTM E438- Standard Specification for Glasses in Laboratory Apparatus; 1992 (Reapproved 2018). EEE. ASTM F439 -Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80; 2019. FFF. ASTM F441/F441 M - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80; 2023. GGG. ASTM F477 -Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets)for Joining Plastic Pipe; 2014 (Reapproved 2021). HHH. ASTM F493 -Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings; 2022. III. ASTM F656 -Standard Specification for Primers for Use in Solvent Cement Joints of Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings; 2021. JJJ. ASTM F1290 -Standard Practice for Electrofusion Joining Polyolefin Pipe and Fittings; 2019. KKK. ASTM F1412 -Standard Specification for Polyolefin Pipe and Fittings for Corrosive Waste Drainage Systems; 2016. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 22 10 00- 3 PLUMBING PIPING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop ADD 02 LLL.ASTM F1476 -Standard Specification for Performance of Gasketed Mechanical Couplings for Use in Piping Applications; 2007 (Reapproved 2019). MMM. ASTM F1548-Standard Specification for Performance of Fittings for Use with Gasketed Mechanical Couplings Used in Piping Applications; 2001. NNN. ASTM F1673-Standard Specification for Polyvinylidene Fluoride (PVDF) Corrosive Waste Drainage Systems; 2010, with Editorial Revision (2021). 000. ASTM F2618-Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Pipe and Fittings for Chemical Waste Drainage Systems; 2019. PPP. AWS A5.8/A5.8M -Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding.; 2011 and errata. QQQ. AWS A5.9/A5.9M -Welding Consumables-Wire Electrodes, Strip Electrodes, Wires, and Rods for Arc Welding of Stainless and Heat Resisting Steels- Classification; 2017. RRR. AWS A5.31 M/A5.31 -Specification for Fluxes for Brazing and Braze Welding; 2012. SSS. AWWA C105/A21.5- Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems; 2018. TTT. AWWA C110/A21.10 - Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings; 2021. UUU. AWWA C111/A21.11 - Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings; 2023. VVV. AWWA C151/A21.51 - Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast; 2023. WWW. AWWA C209-Tape Coatings for Steel Water Pipe and Fittings; 2019. XXX. AWWA C219- Bolted Sleeve-Type Couplings for Plain-End Pipe; 2023. YYY. AWWA C509- Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service; 2023. ZZZ. AWWA C515- Reduced-Wall, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service; 2020. AAAA. AWWA C600 - Installation of Ductile-Iron Mains and Their Appurtenances; 2023. BBBB. AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains; 2023. CCCC. AWWA C900 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fabricated Fittings, 4 In. through 60 In. (100 mm through 1500 mm); 2022. DDDD. CISPI 301 - Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications; 2021. EEEE. NFPA 13 -Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. FFFF. NFPA 20 -Standard for the Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection; 2025. GGGG. NFPA 24 -Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances; 2025. HHHH. NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components- Lead Content; 2024. IIII. UL 94-Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. JJJJ. UL 1285-Safety Pipe and Couplings, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC), and Oriented Polyvinyl Chloride (PVCO)for Underground Fire Service; 2016. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: For each product specified, provide components by the same manufacturer throughout. B. Valves: Manufacturer's name, size, and pressure rating shall be cast or marked on valve body or handle. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 22 10 00-4 PLUMBING PIPING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop ADD 02 C. Piping shall be labeled along its entire length indicating size, class, material specification, manufacturer's name and country of origin. D. Foreign pipe, fittings or valves are unacceptable. E. All cast iron soil pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI) and shall be listed by NSF International. F. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME BPVC and applicable state labor regulations. G. Welders Certification: In accordance with ASME BPVC-IX. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division One. B. Submit product data and video inspection report under provisions of Division One. C. Include pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Provide manufacturer's catalog information, product certifications, and country of origin. Indicate valve data and ratings. D. Submit dimensioned detailed drawings and material specifications for pipe isolation and protection systems being provided for void form/carton form/void box installations. 1.07 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Division One. B. Record actual locations of valves. C. Include written report and digital video record of waste piping inspection. 1.08 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Division One. B. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with a minimum of 5 years documented experience and must be a domestic manufacturer. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with a minimum of 5 years documented experience. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. DELIVERY: Deliver clearly labeled piping and valves to; and store, protect and handle products on site in accordance with the provisions of Division One. B. TIMING AND COORDINATION: Arrange for delivery of materials to allow for minimum storage time at the project site. Coordinate with the scheduled time of installation. C. ACCEPTANCE: Accept product on site in original factory packaging. Receive valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage. Damaged valves shall not be acceptable. D. STORAGE: Store materials in a clean, dry location, protected from weather and damage. E. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. F. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. G. Protect installed piping systems from entry of foreign materials by providing temporary covers, as completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed systems. Tape will not be allowed as an acceptable end cover. 1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of Division One. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 22 10 00- 5 PLUMBING PIPING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop ADD 02 1.12 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Perform work in accordance with plumbing and building codes having jurisdiction. B. PVC pipe, fittings, or similar un-rated material shall not be installed in a return air plenum unless the entire length of all such piping is encased within a minimum two (2) hour fire rated enclosure. C. Provide water pressure regulating valves: 1. At the service entry where incoming water supply pressure is greater than 70 psi. 2. Anywhere else in the distribution system where delivered water pressure is excessive relative to the fixture or equipment it serves, based on the fixture or equipment manufacturer's recommendations. Examples may include dish machines, booster heaters, food waste disposers, etc. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SANITARY SOIL, WASTE AND VENT PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D1785/ASTM D2665 schedule 40 solid wall; installed per ASTM D2321. 1. Fittings: PVC, ASTM D3311 /ASTM D2665 drainage pattern, with bell and spigot ends. Furnished by the same manufacturer as pipe or approved equal. 2. Joints: solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement, clear, medium bodied, for sizes 3" and smaller and gray, heavy bodied, for sizes 4" and larger. Mating surfaces shall be prepared with ASTM F656 purple primer immediately prior to cement application. 2.02 SANITARY SOIL, WASTE AND VENT PIPING, WITHIN BUILDING, NOT BURIED A. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301 or ASTM A888, hubless. 1. Fittings: Cast iron, CISPI 301 or ASTM A888 drainage pattern. 2. Acceptable manufacturers (all pipe and fittings shall be from a single manufacturer): a. Tyler Pipe b. Charlotte Pipe c. AB&I Foundry 3. Joints: No hub, ASTM C564 neoprene gaskets with ASTM C1540 heavy duty wide bodied stainless steel clamp and solid shield assembly constructed of type 300 series stainless steel. Couplings shall have four clamps for pipe sizes up to and including 4" and shall have six clamps for pipe sizes larger than 4". Clamp assemblies shall conform to FM 1680 Class 1 where required by the administrative authority. Torque all clamps per manufacturer's recommendations. B. Copper Tubing: ASTM B306, DWV, for sizes 2" and smaller. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.23 cast copper alloy solder joint drainage fittings (DWV), or ASME B16.29, wrought copper and wrought copper alloy solder joint drainage fittings (DWV). 2. Joints between copper pipe and fittings shall be made in accordance with ASTM B828 using ASTM B32 Alloy Grade Sn 50 solder(50-50 tin-lead). 3. Joints between copper and cast iron pipe shall be made by way of copper soldered to a brass ferrule and the ferrule joined to the cast iron hub by a compression or caulked joint. C. Brass Pipe: ASTM B43, chrome plated 1. Fittings: ASME B16.23 cast bronze, chrome plated. 2. Joints: In accordance with ASTM B828 using ASTM B32 Alloy Grade Sn 50 solder(50-50 tin-lead)or as recommended by the manufacturer. 3. Applies to exposed piping applications (such as kitchens), wherever required by the prevailing code or by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 2.03 DOMESTIC WATER PIPE, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING EDGE A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type K. Provide soft annealed for pipe sizes up to and including 2" and hard drawn for sizes 2-1/2" and larger. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.22 wrought copper pressure fittings. 2. Joints shall be as follows: DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 22 10 00- 6 PLUMBING PIPING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop ADD 02 a. No joints shall be permitted for pipe sizes 2" and smaller. All such piping must be run continuous where buried and brought up to no less than 12" above the finished floor before any joint is provided. b. For sizes larger than 2",joints between copper pipe and fittings shall be brazed and shall be made in accordance with all the applicable portions of ASTM B828, manufacturer's recommendations, and AWS requirements. Brazing filler metal shall be in accordance with AWS A5.8/A5.8M and any required flux shall meet AWS A5.31 M/A5.31, Type FB3-A or FB3-C. 3. Beginning at no closer than the 5'-0" mark from the building, all piping buried or in contact with concrete shall be provided with one of the following, which shall also extend to a minimum of 6" above the finished floor: a. AWWA C209 cold-applied, integrated primer type, elastomeric adhesive, laminate polymeric tape coating, minimum 35 mil nominal thickness, in accordance with manufacturer's installation guidelines. Chase Construction Products Tapecoat H35 or approved equivalent. b. Continuous polyethylene lining, minimum 60 mil nominal thickness. B. Stainless Steel Pre-Fabricated In-Building Riser(acceptable for sizes 2"through 10") 1. Corrosion resistant Type 304 stainless steel construction single, extended 90 degree fitting. 2. UL listed, FM approved and NFPA 24 compliant. 3. Lead free and NSF 61 / NSF 372 certified. 4. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Ames Fire &Waterworks Series IBR(4"through 10")and IBR2 (2", 2-1/2", and 3") b. Zurn Wilkins Model WBR (4" through 10") 5. For sizes 3" and smaller, ensure to provide riser with an (inlet)end connection type as appropriate for the site water service pipe material. Provide an adapter fitting at each end of the riser if/as necessary. All such fittings shall be approved for installation with the piping material being installed, code accepted, and NSF 61 compliant. 6. Note: For this application, the inlet joint for larger diameter(4" through 10") piping (which shall not be located below a building slab or foundation) can be rubber gasketed push-on type, ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11. Installation shall be in accordance with AWWA C600. 7. Provide continuous polyethylene encasement for all piping buried or in contact with concrete in accordance with AWWA C105/A21.5, beginning at no closer than the 5-0" mark from the building and to a minimum of 6" above the finished floor. 2.04 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, WITHIN BUILDING, BURIED A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type K, soft annealed. 1. No joints allowed buried, run tubing continuous. 2. Provide AWWA C209 cold-applied, integrated primer type, elastomeric adhesive, laminate polymeric tape coating, minimum 35 mil nominal thickness, in accordance with manufacturer's installation guidelines, for all piping buried or in contact with concrete, to a minimum of 6" above finished floor. Chase Construction Products Tapecoat H35 or approved equivalent. 3. Applies to installations including services to island sinks and trap primer lines. 2.05 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, WITHIN BUILDING, NOT BURIED A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22 wrought copper alloy solder joint pressure fittings. 2. Joints between copper pipe and fittings shall be made in accordance with ASTM B828 using ASTM B32 Alloy HB lead-free solder. 3. Rolled groove type fittings and joints shall be acceptable for copper pipe sizes 2-1/2 inch and larger, with all tools, couplings, adapters, fittings, and gaskets the product of a single system manufacturer. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 22 10 00- 7 PLUMBING PIPING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop ADD 02 a. Fittings shall be cast bronze using lead-free alloys per ASTM B584 or copper wrought copper constructed to ASTM B75/B75M, compliant with NSF 61 for potable water service applications, and meet ASTM F1548. b. Couplings shall be epoxy/enamel (rust-inhibiting) coated ductile iron housings conforming to ASTM A536. c. Gaskets shall be EPDM for potable water, meeting ASTM F1476, and NSF 61 / NSF 372 certified for potable water service from 30 degrees to 180 degrees F. d. Acceptable system manufacturers: Victaulic, Shurjoint, Anvil Gruvlok. B. Stainless Steel Pipe: ASTM A312/A312M, schedule 10S, welded or seamless pipe, Type 304/L. 1. Fittings: ASTM A403/A403M, wrought stainless steel butt-welding fittings of same Type and wall thickness as piping. Manufactured to the dimensional requirements of ASME B16.9. Chemical composition of the filler metal shall comply with AWS A5.9/A5.9M based on the alloy content of the piping. 2. Alternatively, rolled grooving with grooved NSF approved stainless steel fittings of the same Type and wall thickness as the piping, complete with the couplings and gaskets of a single approved system manufacturer may be provided throughout. a. Such mechanical joints shall comply with ASTM F1476 and ASTM F1548. b. Acceptable system manufacturers: Victaulic, Anvil Gruvlok, Shurjoint. 3. Joints between pipe and fittings and transition joints to other materials shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions and using fittings, etc. designed for the specific transition. 4. All pipe, fittings, and installation shall be compliant with NFPA 20, NSF 372, and shall be in accordance with the requirements of NSF 61. 2.06 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, WITHIN BUILDING -SPECIAL APPLICATIONS A. For filtered and/or reverse osmosis conditioned water applications such as commercial kitchen, break room, and central drinking water treatment systems, copper water piping shall not be employed for post-system distribution unless specifically noted otherwise. B. For such special applications, provide approved plastic pipe and fittings consistent with the treatment system manufacturer's recommendations, the particular installation setting (buried or not buried, return air plenum or non-plenum space, etc.) and local AHJ requirements. C. For applications, pressures, and temperatures consistent with the piping manufacturer's recommendations, Uponor PEX-A pipe and fittings (straight lengths for sizes 1" and larger, coiled form for sizes 3/4" and smaller), complete with insulation and supports as required, is preferred. 2.07 ADAPTERS, TRANSITIONS, UNIONS, COUPLINGS, FLANGES, CONNECTORS A. (Non-Acid Waste) Drainage Applications: 1. Provide approved listed adapter and transition fittings appropriate to the specific pipe transition and in accordance with code requirements. 2. For dissimilar piping above ground, provide stainless steel shielded, molded elastomeric couplings and adapters meeting ASTM C564 and ASTM C1460. Applies to installations including cast iron to PVC transitions immediately adjacent to the building floor where piping below is buried. 3. For dissimilar buried piping not below building slab, provide shear resistant.012"thick 300 series stainless steel shielded, PVC gasketed flexible couplings and adapters meeting ASTM D5926 and ASTM C1173. For direct-bury applications, provide AWWA C209 cold- applied, integrated primer type, elastomeric adhesive, laminate polymeric tape coating, minimum 35 mil nominal thickness, in accordance with manufacturer's installation guidelines, to completely wrap the shield, banding, and screws. Chase Construction Products Tapecoat H35 or approved equivalent. 4. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Anaco-Husky/Cremco b. Mission Rubber Company LLC DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 22 10 00- 8 PLUMBING PIPING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop ADD 02 c. Fernco, Inc. d. Fernco, Inc. Strong Back RC 1000 Series (buried piping beyond limits of building; or readily accessible buried piping transitions in backwater valve pits, etc.) 5. Adapters, couplings, bushings for copper DWV pipe shall be cast bronze or wrought copper, ASME B16.23/ASME B16.29. B. Domestic Water Applications: 1. Provide joints between various materials with approved adapter and transition fittings appropriate to the specific pipe transition and in accordance with code requirements and the manufacturer's instructions. 2. For copper tube and pipe: adapters, bushings, plugs, caps, and couplings shall be wrought copper or cast bronze; flanges (minimum class 150) and unions shall be cast bronze. Provide with solder or threaded connections as necessary and as produced to applicable standards ASME B16.15, ASME B16.18, ASME B16.22, ASME B16.24, ASME B16.50 ASME B16.50, ASME B1.20.1. All such appurtenances shall be for use in above ground potable water systems. 3. Buried to not buried transitions for water service entries: a. 100%fusion bonded epoxy coated ASTM A536 cast ductile iron construction coupling with acrylonitrile butadiene rubber(NBR)gaskets and EPDM insulating boot for water service. 5/8 inch high strength stainless steel bolts and nuts. Coupling shall meet AWWA C219. Romac Industries, Inc. IC501 or pre-approved equivalent. b. 100%fusion bonded 14 mil epoxy coated coupling with ASTM A536 cast ductile iron rings. Complete with acrylonitrile butadiene rubber(NBR)gaskets and type 304 stainless steel bridge, spacers, nuts, and bolts. Coupling shall meet AWWA C219, NSF 61, and NSF 372. Krausz USA Hymax Grip Coupling Restraint or pre-approved equivalent. 4. Dielectric connections: a. For pipe sizes 2 inch and smaller, provide lead-free dielectric unions, rated to 180 F at 250 psi and compliant to ASSE 1079. b. For pipe sizes larger than 2 inches, provide lead-free dielectric flanged pipe fittings, rated to 180 F at 175 psi and meeting ASME B16.1. c. For grooved copper joining systems, provide grooved end dielectric transition fitting from system manufacturer, with virgin polypropylene internal lining, meeting NSF 61. C. General: 1. Unions for ferrous pipe shall be ASME B16.39 galvanized malleable iron, threaded, minimum pressure class 150. 2. Plugs and bushings for ferrous pipe shall be ASME B16.14 galvanized malleable iron, threaded. 3. Nipples for ferrous pipe shall be schedule 40, galvanized, ASTM A53/A53M welded steel pipe nipples, threaded, meeting ASTM A733. 4. Couplings for ferrous pipe shall be galvanized steel, threaded, manufactured in accordance with ASTM A865/A865M. 5. Flanges for ferrous pipe shall be galvanized forged steel construction, either socket weld or slip-on weld type, minimum pressure class 150, manufactured to ASME B16.5. 6. Bolts, nuts, and gaskets for flanged connections shall be appropriate to the pipe material, fluid type, temperature, and pressure. 1/16"thick pre-formed neoprene, typical. 7. Provide flexible stainless steel connectors at pumps and other such equipment, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Connectors shall have corrugated hose and braided 300 series stainless steel jacketing. Carbon steel flanged or grooved ends as appropriate. NSF 372 lead-free for all potable water applications. Metraflex Company or pre-approved equivalent. 2.08 BALL VALVES A. All bronze cast construction two-piece 600 psi body, blow-out proof stem, Teflon seated, lead- free, with stainless steel trim (including ball, stem, and valve handle). Threaded connections. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 22 10 00- 9 PLUMBING PIPING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop ADD 02 Certified lead-free to NSF 61 / NSF 372 and suited to 180 degrees F. B. Basis of design (bronze valves): 1. NIBCO T-585-66-LF (full port)for all sizes up through 2". 2. NIBCO T-580-66-LF (conventional port)for sizes 2-1/2" and 3". C. Valves 4" and larger shall be split body stainless steel construction, 275 psi cold working pressure, blow-out proof stem, PTFE seated, type 316 stainless steel trimmed, class 150, full port design with manual gear operator. NIBCO F-515-S6-F-66-FS. D. Acceptable alternate manufacturers: 1. Apollo 77 CLF-A series (full port)for all sizes up through 2". 2. Milwaukee UPBA-400S (full port)for all sizes up through 2". 3. Apollo 77 CLF-A series (full port)for size 2-1/2" and Apollo 70LF-140 series (standard port)for 3". 4. Milwaukee UPBA-100S (standard port)for sizes 2-1/2" and 3". E. Applies to domestic water system installations. F. Provide valves complete with extended lever handles as required to accommodate insulation and full valve operation. G. Provide valves complete with memory stop kit where used for balancing applications. 2.09 CHECK VALVES (BRONZE) A. ASTM B62/ASTM B584 bronze body and disc, minimum 200 psi (cold working pressure)Y- pattern horizontal swing type check valve with removable bronze bonnet, Type 300 series stainless steel nuts and hinge pin, and PTFE disc seat. Threaded connections. Certified lead- free to NSF 61 / NSF 372 and suited to 180 degrees F. B. ASTM A126 cast iron bodied, (minimum)class 125 globe style spring loaded (silent) check valve with ASTM B584 bronze disc and seat. Flanged connections. Certified lead-free to NSF 61 / NSF 372 and suited to 200 degrees F. C. Basis of design: 1. NIBCO T-413-Y-LF (Y-pattern swing type)for sizes up through 2". 2. NIBCO F-910-B-LF (globe style spring loaded type)for sizes 2-1/2" and larger. D. Acceptable alternate manufacturers: 1. Apollo (for sizes up through 2") E. Applies to domestic water system installations including associated pump discharge lines. Valves shall be suited for installation in both horizontal lines and vertical lines with upward flow, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2.10 BALANCING VALVES A. Self-contained, fully automatic thermally actuated balancing valve shall continuously adjust flow to maintain the desired domestic hot water temperature within the branch line, regardless of system operating pressure. Valve shall modulate between open and closed position within a 10 degrees F range. The valve set-point (closing temperature) shall be the hot water system supply temperature. Valve body and all internal components shall be constructed of stainless steel with major components constructed of Type 303 stainless. Rated for 200 psi maximum working pressure and no less than 250 degrees F maximum working temperature. Lead-free NSF 372 and NSF 61 compliant. Threaded connections. B. Basis of design: 1. ThermOmegaTech Circuit Solver, sizes 1/2"through 2". Provide a union and ball type shutoff valve on both sides of the balancing valve. 2. ThermOmegaTech Circuit Solver with integrated union (CSU)assembly, sizes 1/2" and 3/4". Balancing valve assembly shall come complete with union body and ball type shutoff valves on both sides. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 22 10 00- 10 PLUMBING PIPING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop ADD 02 3. Provide complete with an integral check valve from the manufacturer, positioned after the balancing valve. For balancing valves not available with an integral check valve as part of the manufacturer's assembly, ensure to provide a lead-free swing type check valve on the downstream side of the balancing valve component. C. Applies to circulated domestic hot water system installations including multi-branch parallel piping circuits and single-loop piping circuits. 1. Provide balancing valve at end of each domestic hot water supply line (after last fixture served)just prior to the hot water return line, as indicated on Drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's installation recommendations. 2. Provide a pipe tee or elbow with bushing as appropriate, 3/4"threaded thermowell, and bi- metal adjustable angle 3 inch dial thermometer upstream of each balancing valve. Thermowell stem length and thermometer temperature probe length to be suited for pipe size, insulation thickness, and to ensure clearance for maintenance access and easy viewing of thermometer. Trerice bimetal/sensor, threaded-stepped shank thermowell (style 76) of lead-free brass (PBF) material. Trerice Model B836 thermometer with 300 stainless steel case and stem, hermetically sealed, double strength glass windowed, aluminum white-faced dial, complete with external reset and 0 to 200 degrees F range. Thermowell and thermometer face to be oriented upright for readability. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATION, BEDDING AND BACKFILL A. This section shall apply for the excavation, bedding, and backfill of all buried piping unless specifically noted otherwise. All work shall be coordinated with any job site subsurface drainage/dewatering and adjusted accordingly. B. Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure the following: 1. Not less than 2 feet of cover, or not less than maximum depth of frost penetration, whichever is the greater. 2. For water lines intended for fire protection service, the depth of cover shall be: a. Not less than 2'-6" in those locations where frost is not a factor. b. Not less than V-0" below the frost line for the locality. c. Not less than 3'-0"for piping under driveways. d. Not less than V-0" below the bottom of the building foundation/footers. e. In full compliance with the requirements of NFPA 13 and NFPA 24. C. Excavation: 1. Excavate trenches for underground piping to the required depths. 2. The bottom of the trench or excavation shall be cut to a uniform grade. 3. Should rock be encountered, excavate 6 inches below grade, fill with bedding material and tamp to existing density. 4. Coordinate alignment of pipe trenches to avoid obstructions. Ensure that proposed routing of pipe will not interfere with building foundation before any trenching has begun. Should conflicts occur, contact Architect/Engineer before proceeding. 5. Should any sleeving of the building foundation be required, this shall be provided as directed by the structural engineer of record AND in accordance with the prevailing code, but in no case shall the sleeve be any less than two (2) pipe sizes greater than the pipe it serves. D. Bedding and Backfill: 1. Backfill shall not be placed until the piping has been inspected, tested and approved. Complete backfill to the surface of natural ground or to the lines and grades indicated on drawings. Provide 6 inch stabilized sand bed with 4 inch stabilized sand cover around each pipe. Provide select fill up to finished surface or grade, unless indicated otherwise by project geotechnical report or specified otherwise in Division 02. 2. Compacting Backfill: Place material in uniform layers of 8 inches maximum, loose measure and compact to not less than 95% of maximum soil density as determined by DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 22 10 00- 11 PLUMBING PIPING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop ADD 02 ASTM D698 Standard Proctor. 3. Restoration: Compact backfill, where trenching or excavation is required in improved areas such as pavements, walks and similar areas, to a condition equal to the adjacent undisturbed earth and restore surface of the area to the condition existing prior to trenching or excavating operation. 4. A clay fill "trench plug" extending 3 feet inside the building line and 5 feet outside the building line shall be placed to completely surround utility lines passing beneath the foundation and grade beam. The materials shall consist of on-site soils with a plasticity index (PI) between 30 and 40 percent compacted to at least 95 percent of the Standard Proctor and maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D698. E. Cement Stabilized Sand: 1. Materials: a. Cement shall be Type I Portland cement conforming to ASTM C150/C150M. b. Sand shall be clean, durable sand meeting grading requirements for fine aggregates of ASTM C33/C33M and free of organic matter and deleterious substances. c. Water shall be potable and free of oils, acids, alkalis, organic matter, or other deleterious substances, meeting requirements of ASTM C94/C94M. 2. Mixture: a. Product shall consist of not less than 1.5 sacks of Portland cement per ton of dry sand. b. Mixture shall contain sufficient water to hydrate the cement and be thoroughly mixed in a pugmill type mixer. F. For water lines (including In-Building Risers) intended for fire protection service, provide joint restraints by way of concrete thrust blocks in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 13 and NFPA 24. G. Aggressive Soil Conditions: Soil shall be considered aggressive and protection of buried metallic piping shall be provided as specified if any of the following situations exist: 1. Conditions are identified as such by the project geotechnical report or project geotechnical engineer. 2. The soil environment is a landfill area, swamp, marsh, polluted river bottom, cinder bed, or has alkaline soils. 3. A score of ten or higher is tallied when applying the soil assessment tool detailed in Appendix A of AWWA C105/A21.5. An excerpt of this evaluation procedure is provided below for reference but is not intended as a substitute for the complete and latest Standard: DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 22 10 00- 12 PLUMBING PIPING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop ADD 02 NUMERICAL CORROSIVITY SCALE Soil Parameter Assigned Points Resistivity(ohm-cm) < 700 10 700- 1,000 8 1,000- 1,200 5 1,200- 1,500 2 1,500-2,000 1 > 2,000 0 pH 0-2 5 2-4 3 4- 6.5 0 6.5- 7.5 0 7.5- 8.5 0 > 8.5 3 Redox Potential (mV) > 100 0 50- 100 3.5 0- 50 4 < 0 5 Sulfides Positive 3.5 Trace 2 Negative 0 Moisture Poor drainage continuously wet 2 Fair drainage generally moist 1 i I H. Void Form/Carton Form/Void Box Installations 1. Where piping will be installed in a such a setting, steps shall be taken to isolate and protect the piping from expansive soil conditions. This work shall be fully coordinated with the building slab/floor construction, the project geotechnical report, and the structural Drawings and specifications. The most stringent conditions/recommendations shall govern. 2. All piping below slab shall be supported by an approved suspended system. 3. System structure: a. Shall provide a dimensionally stable underground void space that is independent from the overhead structural slab. The subterranean system shall support the weight of suspended lateral pipes and fittings, including all imposed loads, throughout the construction process. b. The system shall be designed to have the ability to temporarily position and suspend the lateral pipes and fittings to the required height/depth and slope until permanently Christi 22 10 00- 13 PLUMBING PIPING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop ADD 02 anchored to the overhead structural slab via the securing hanger system. The open, underground system will then remain independent from the securing hangers. c. The open space of the system beneath the structural slab shall be designed to receive the infill of vertical expansion from the underlying soils. If vertical pressure is applied to the edges of the system in contact with the soil, the uplifting soil pressure will become separate and allow the lateral pipes and fittings to be totally independent from the system. 4. System components: a. The system shall have waterproof components related to its intended performance. b. The system must maintain its structural integrity in all humid environments. c. The system must have industry-proven performance in any and all inclement conditions. d. The system shall be able to perform if and when submerged in water. e. All independent components not included in the system shall comply with the project specifications in order to achieve the intended results of the designed system. f. All vertical all-thread rod must have a component secured toward the top end and be permanently affixed into the concrete slab in order to maintain the required elevations. g. All system components, excluding all-thread rod, nuts/washers, shall be furnished by the designed, system manufacturer. h. Galvanized steel all thread-rod and hardware shall be provided and these materials shall be coordinated with the system manufacturer's related components. i. The system shall be installed per the manufacturer's requirements and recommendations. 5. Submittals: The exact system to be provided, complete with dimensioned detailed drawings and material specifications, shall be submitted for review by the Architect, MEP engineer, structural engineer, and project geo-technical engineer. 6. Acceptable System Manufacturers: a. SuperVoid Systems, LLC b. Void Form Products, Inc. c. Other pre-approved system providers. 7. Manufacturer Training: The system manufacturer shall provide on-site training, support, and guidance to the Contractor regarding the recommended installation of their products. I. ipe Penetra ions o Buried xterior a Is or oundations 1. Unless specifically indicated otherwise on the Drawings, each pipe penetration shall be provided with a schedule 40 steel pipe sleeve no less than two (2) pipe sizes larger than pipe itself. 2. At each penetration provide GPT Industries ("Thunderline") Link Seal Modular Seal LS series. The exact model shall be as required for the pipe material, pipe size, and sleeve length for the penetration. Provide complete with EPDM sealing element and model "C" zinc coated carbon steel hardware. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General requirements for piping: 1. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. 2. Remove any scale, oil and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. 3. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 4. Confirm pipe placement, depth/elevation, and flow lines prior to any installation. B. General requirements for valves: 1. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. 2. Valves shall be line-sized unless specifically noted otherwise. 3. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and operable fittings. Valves installed beyond reasonable reach shall be provided with a chain operator. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 22 10 00- 14 PLUMBING PIPING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop ADD 02 4. Provide access doors where valves and operable fittings are not otherwise accessible. Access doors shall be of approved types set in locations pre-approved by submittal to the Architect. 5. Gate valves installed buried shall be covered with an adjustable cast iron roadway box extended to grade. Cover shall be cast iron with 'water' cast on top of cover and shall be set flush to finished paving or 2" above finished earthen grade. Box shall be supported from undisturbed soil or concrete base and shall not introduce any stress to piping under all traffic conditions. C. Install all materials in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions. D. Unburied piping inside the building shall be installed concealed, out of public view wherever possible (above ceilings, inside walls and chases, within casework, etc.). This requirement shall not apply to fixture supplies & stops and chrome plated tubular brass drainage piping. E. All exposed sewer and water pipe in toilet rooms or other finished areas of the building shall be chrome plated. F. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever joining dissimilar metals. G. Route piping in an orderly manner, parallel and perpendicular to building column grid lines, unless indicated otherwise on drawings, and maintain gradients. H. Install piping to conserve building space and not conflict with other trades or interfere with intended use of space. I. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. J. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe,joints, or connected equipment. K. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. L. Provide encasement for and support for utility meters in accordance with the requirements of utility companies. M. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories not pre-finished, ready for finish painting. N. Maintain uniformity in the installation of piping materials and joining methods. Do not mix material types. O. Where connecting new underground sanitary, storm, or vent piping to existing piping of dissimilar material, provide suitable mechanical transition fittings complete with corrosion protection for metallic elements. Chase Construction Products Tapecoat H35 or approved equivalent and a final coat of coal tar to completely cover the transition. P. Solder joints shall be wiped clean at each joint, remove excess metal while molten and flux residue when cooled. Q. Waste nipple from wall to tapped tee shall be schedule 40 threaded galvanized steel pipe or brass or copper with threaded adapter. R. General requirements for cast iron piping installation: 1. Install all pipe and fittings in accordance with published recommendations from the manufacturer and the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI). Specific items referenced below are not intended as a substitute for the complete and latest recommendations. 2. Install bell and spigot type pipe with bell end upstream. 3. Above ground horizontal pipe (suspended) shall: a. Be supported at no less than at every joint, and within 18" of the hub or coupling. b. Be maintained in alignment. Sagging or grade reversal shall be unacceptable. c. Be supported at terminal ends of all runs or branches and at each change of direction or alignment. d. Have all closet bends, traps, trap arms, and similar branches firmly secured. e. Be braced to prevent movement or joint separation. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 22 10 00- 15 PLUMBING PIPING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop ADD 02 f. Be provided with suitable sway bracing (such as clamps, rods, and hardware)where pipe and fittings are suspended in excess of 18" by means of non-rigid hangers. 4. Above ground vertical pipe shall: a. Be secured at each stack base. b. Be secured at each floor and riser clamps shall be provided on no greater than 15'-0" intervals. c. Be adequately supported to keep the system (pipe and contents) in alignment. 5. Provide seismic restraints in seismically active areas, whether specifically required by the prevailing code or not. S. Provide approved heavy duty transition coupling at each transition from cast iron pipe not buried to buried PVC pipe as specified elsewhere in this section. Transition shall be made as close as possible to the floor for sanitary DWV piping systems and at test tee "minimum 12 inches A.F.F."for storm drainage piping. Support vertical cast iron pipe from floor anchors using riser clamp and galvanized all thread rod as specified in Section 22 05 29. T. All grooved system tools and components (couplings, adapters, fittings, gaskets, and specialties)shall be the product of a single domestic system manufacturer. U. Grooved pipe system manufacturer shall provide on-site training for contractor's field personnel by a factory trained representative in the proper use of grooving tools, application of groove, and product installation. Factory trained representative shall periodically visit the job site and inspect installation. Contractor shall remove and replace any improperly installed products at no additional cost to the owner. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Provide union downstream of all valves at equipment or apparatus connections. B. Provide unions downstream of all threaded isolation valves in the domestic water system to facilitate any future valve replacement. C. Provide male adapters each side of threaded valves in copper piped system. Sweat solder adapters to tube prior to make-up of threaded connections. D. Provide approved isolation valves for shut-off and to isolate all equipment items and distinct parts of systems. Isolation valves shall be provided for both hot and cold water in locations including, but not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. At the domestic water service entry. 2. At each wing of the building. 3. At each floor for each domestic water tap branching off from a vertical riser. 4. At each domestic water branch line capped for future use. 5. At each restroom or restroom group. 6. At each hose bibb, wall hydrant, roof hydrant, hose reel, and trap primer device (except for flush valve or tailpiece type trap primer devices). 7. At each domestic water branch line within 24" of the corresponding main. 8. At each plumbing fixture not otherwise served by a localized fixture group isolation valve. 9. At each kitchen or similar food service space. E. Each plumbing water rough-in stub out shall be fitted with a supply stop. F. Valves installed in insulated piping shall be fitted with extended lever operators of sufficient length to raise handle above the insulation jacket material. Where valve is used for throttling service, the valve handle shall be equipped with adjustable memory stop device. G. Provide non-slam type check valves on discharge lines from all water pumps. Install at a minimum length of 5 times the pipe diameter from the pump and in accordance with manufacturer's installation recommendations. 3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. All gravity drainage piping shall be provided at a uniform and continuous slope in accordance with the prevailing plumbing code and as described below. If any of the criteria below conflicts DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 22 10 00- 16 PLUMBING PIPING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop ADD 02 with the prevailing code then the code requirements shall govern: 1. Gravity piping 3" and smaller shall be provided at no less than 1/4" per foot slope. 2. Gravity piping 4" and larger shall be provided at no less than 1/8" per foot slope. 3. Where the code allows for a shallower slope than indicated above, this shall be allowed if required per project conditions. 4. Where the code requires a steeper slope than inidcated above (such as for grease waste piping)than such requirements shall control. B. All vent and branch vent pipes shall be graded and connected as to drip back by gravity to the drainage pipe it serves. A slope of 1 inch per 40 feet will suffice for this requirement, subject to the approval of the local Authority Having Jurisdiction. C. Slope all horizontal water piping with uniform pitch of 1/8 inch per 10 feet to low points to allow for complete system drainage. For long runs, where constant pitch cannot be maintained, provide intermediate low points and rise up again from such locations. Slope horizontal branches back to mains or risers. Provide clearly identified supplementary drain valves where hose bibbs, hydrants, or sill cocks will not suffice for this requirement. 3.05 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM A. Prior to starting work, all domestic water systems shall be complete, thoroughly flushed clean and free of all foreign matter or erection residue. B. Ensure PH of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric). C. On building side of the main shut off valve, provide a 3/4" connection through which chlorine can be introduced into the water piping D. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, in sufficient quantity to obtain 50 to 80 mg/L residual free chlorine solution throughout the entire domestic water piping systems. E. Bleed water from outlets as required to ensure complete distribution and test for disinfectant residual at a minimum 15 percent of total outlets. F. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours. G. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment. H. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L. I. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 5 percent of outlets and from water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651. 3.06 SERVICE CONNECTIONS A. Provide new sanitary and storm sewer services connecting to existing building services or utility lines as shown on the drawings. B. Before commencing work, field verify invert elevations required for sewer connections, confirm inverts and ensure that these can be properly connected with slope for drainage and cover as required. C. Provide new domestic water service connecting to existing building services or utility lines as shown on plans.Assure connections are in compliance with requirements of the jurisdiction having authority. D. Extension of services to the building shall be fabricated from the same materials as the utility service lines or those materials specified herein. E. Should points of connection vary from those indicated on the drawings contractor shall properly allow for this in the actual connections field fabricated. 3.07 RODDING SEWERS A. All sanitary soil and waste lines, both in the building and out, shall be rodded out after completion of the installation. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 22 10 00- 17 PLUMBING PIPING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop ADD 02 B. This Work shall be done, as part of the contract, to make certain that all lines are clear, and any obstruction that may be discovered shall be removed immediately. Rodding shall be accomplished by utilizing a rotary cutter, which shall be full size of pipe being cleaned. 3.08 VIDEO INSPECTION AND DOCUMENTATION A. It shall be the responsibility of the plumbing contractor to retain the services of a qualified, independent company (other than the installing plumbing contractor)with no less than ten (10) years of experience in digital video camera inspection/investigation of plumbing drainage waste and vent lines for commercial/institutional building projects. B. The independent company shall perform a complete video camera inspection of all waste piping buried inside the building. This shall include sanitary waste and any specialty waste (grease waste, oily waste, etc.) systems and shall extend from the building all the way to any associated outdoor traps/interceptors. C. The independent company shall create a permanent digital video record of their inspection with accompanying definitive identification (audio or visual)to indicate different systems and different areas of the systems inspected. D. The independent company shall prepare a comprehensive written report including, but not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Complete company contact information. 2. Project name and address. 3. Date(s), time(s), and conditions during the inspection(s). 4. Name(s)of the operator(s) performing the inspection(s). 5. A general summary of the inspection results. 6. A written description of any and all material and/or installation deficiencies or irregularities found, with accompanying pictorial documentation. This shall include conditions such as: a. Deformed or damaged piping b. Full or partial blockage of piping c. Deleterious material or debris within the piping d. Slope deficiencies (inadequate, inconsistent, or absent slope) e. Valleys or"dips" in the piping f. Improper fittings in the piping including reductions in pipe size in the direction of flow E. The written report shall be submitted under this Section but separately from other submittals of this Section. This shall occur immediately prior to substantial completion. F. The written report and the digital video record (DVD or USB flash drive) shall also be submitted as part of the Project Record Documents. 3.09 TESTING OF PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS A. During the progress of the work and upon completion, tests shall be made as specified herein and as required by Authorities Having Jurisdiction, including Inspectors, Owner or Architect. The Architect or duly authorized Construction Inspector shall be notified in writing at least 2 working days prior to each test or other Specification requirement which requires action on the part of the Construction Inspector. B. Tests shall be conducted as part of this work and shall include all necessary instruments, equipment, apparatus, and service as required to perform the tests with qualified personnel. Submit proposed test procedures, recording forms, and test equipment for approval prior to the execution of testing. C. Tests shall be performed before piping of various systems have been covered or furred-in. For insulated piping systems testing shall be accomplished prior to the application of insulation. D. All piping systems shall be tested and proved absolutely tight for a period of not less than 24 hours. Tests shall be witnessed by the Architect or an authorized representative and pronounced satisfactory before pressure is removed or any water drawn off. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 22 10 00- 18 PLUMBING PIPING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop ADD 02 E. Leaks, damage or defects discovered or resulting from test shall be repaired or replaced to a like new condition. Leaking pipe joints, or defective pipe, shall be removed and replaced with acceptable materials. Test shall be repeated after repairs are completed and shall continue until such time as the entire test period expires without the discovery of any leaks. F. Wherever conditions permit, each piping system shall thereafter be subjected to its normal operating pressure and temperature for a period of no less than five 5 days. During that period, it shall be kept under the most careful observation. The piping systems must demonstrate the propriety of their installation by remaining absolutely tight during this period. G. Domestic Water: Pressure test at one and one half times the normal working pressure or 125 psig, whichever is the greater, for 24 hours. H. Sanitary Soil, Waste and Vents and Storm Sewer: 1. After the rough-in soil, waste and vent and other parts of the sanitary sewer including branch laterals have been set from the lowest level, at point of connection to existing utility lines, to above the floor line, all outlets shall be temporarily plugged or capped, except as are required for testing as described herein. Ground work shall not permit the backfill of trenches to cover any joints until the completion of testing. Back fill shall be limited to mid sections of full joints of piping only. For pipe in ground the piping shall be readied as described herein and filled with water to a verifiable and visible level to 10' above the lowest portions of the system being tested. 2. On multi-level buildings only one floor level shall be tested at a time. Each floor shall be tested from a level below the structure of the floor, or the outlet of the building in the case of the lowest level, to a level of 12 inches above the floor immediately above the floor being tested, or the top of the highest vent in the case of the highest building level. The pipes for the level being tested shall be filled with water to a verifiable and visible level as described above and be allowed to remain so for 24 hours. If after 24 hours the level of the water has been lowered by leakage, the leaks must be found and stopped, and the water level shall again be raised to the level described, and the test repeated until, after a 24 hour retention period, there shall be no perceptible lowering of the water level in the system being tested. 3. Should the completion of these tests leave any reasonable question or doubt of the integrity of the installation, additional tests including peppermint smoke, or other measures shall be performed to demonstrate the reliability of these systems to the complete satisfaction of the Owner's duly authorized representative. Such tests shall be conducted and completed before any joints in plumbing are concealed or made inaccessible. 3.10 COMPLETE FUNCTIONING OF WORK A. All work reasonably implied as essential to the complete functioning of the systems shown on the Drawings and Specification shall be completed as part of the work of this Division, unless specifically stated otherwise. It is the intention of the Drawings and Specification to establish the type and function of systems but not to set forth each item essential to the functioning of any system. In case of doubt as to the work intended or in the event of amplification or clarification thereof, the Contractor shall call upon the Architect for Supplementary Instructions and Drawings, etc. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 22 10 00- 19 PLUMBING PIPING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SECTION 22 11 19 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 22 02 00, are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE A. The scope of the work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the specialties covered by this Section, with all appurtenances, ready for the Owner's use. B. Include the following work in addition to items normally part of this Section: 1. Hose Bibbs and Hydrants 2. Backflow Preventers 3. Water Hammer Arresters 4. Strainers and Filters 5. Thermostatic Mixing Valves 6. Floor Drains and Floor Sinks 7. Cleanouts 8. Trap Primers 9. Interceptors and Separators 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Section 22 05 29- Hangers and Support for Plumbing Piping and Equipment B. Section 22 10 00- Plumbing Piping C. Section 22 30 00- Plumbing Equipment D. Section 22 40 00- Plumbing Fixtures 1.04 REFERENCES A. ASME Al 12.6.3 - Floor Drains; 2022. B. ASME Al 12.1070 - Performance requirements for water temperature limiting devices; 2020. C. ASSE 1010 - Performance Requirements for Water Hammer Arresters; 2004. D. ASSE 1011 - Performance Requirements for Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers; 2023. E. ASSE 1013 - Performance Requirements for Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Prevention Assemblies; 2021. F. ASSE 1019 - Performance Requirements for Wall Hydrant with Backflow Protection and Freeze Resistance; 2023. G. ASSE 1052 - Performance Requirements for Hose Connection Backflow Preventers; 2016. H. ASSE 1060 - Performance Requirements for Outdoor Enclosures for Fluid Conveying Components; 2017 (Reaffirmed 2021). I. ASSE 1069 - Performance Requirements for Automatic Temperature Control Mixing Valves; 2020. J. ASSE 1070 - Performance Requirements for Water Temperature Limiting Devices; 2020. K. ASSE 1071 - Performance Requirements for Temperature Actuated Mixing Valves for Plumbed Emergency Equipment; 2012. L. IAPMO (UPC)- Uniform Plumbing Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 2211 19- 1 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents M. ICC (IPC)- International Plumbing Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. N. NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content; 2022. O. PDI-WH 201 -Water Hammer Arresters; 2017. P. ASME Al 12.6.7 -Sanitary Floor Sinks Q. ASSE 1057 - Performance Requirements for Freeze Resistant Sanitary Yard Hydrants with Backflow Protection R. ASSE 1069 - Performance Requirements for Automatic Temperature Control Mixing Valves S. AWWA C510 -Standard for Double Check Valve Backflow Prevention Assembly T. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components- Health Effects 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: For each product specified, provide components by the same manufacturer throughout. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division One. B. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division One. C. Include component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate assembly and support requirements. 1.07 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Division One. B. Record actual locations of equipment and backflow preventers. 1.08 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Division One. B. Operation Data: Indicate frequency of treatment required for interceptors and separators. C. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views. 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. DELIVERY: Deliver clearly labeled specialties to; and store, protect and handle products on site in accordance with the provisions of Division One. B. TIMING AND COORDINATION: Arrange for delivery of materials to allow for minimum storage time at the project site. Coordinate with the scheduled time of installation. C. ACCEPTANCE: Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage. Damaged specialties shall not be acceptable. D. STORAGE: Store materials in a clean, dry location, protected from weather and damage. 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of Division One. B. Provide two loose keys for hose bibbs and hydrants and spare hose end vacuum breakers. 1.11 OPERATIONS PERSONNEL TRAINING A. Provide a training session for the owner's operations personnel. Training session shall be performed by a qualified person who is knowledgeable in the subject system/equipment. Submit a training agenda two weeks prior to the proposed training session for review and approval. Training session shall include at the minimum: 1. Purpose of equipment. 2. Principle of how the equipment works. 3. Important parts and assemblies. 4. How the equipment achieves its purpose and necessary operating conditions. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 2211 19-2 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 5. Most likely failure modes, causes, and corrections. 6. On site demonstration. 1.12 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable codes for the provision and installation of all required backflow prevention devices. B. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of installation of backflow prevention devices. C. Provide backflow prevention assembly test and maintenance report for all devices. A printed and signed form by the licensed tester that performed the work shall be provided both to the Owner and to the Public Water System in accordance with TCEQ (Texas Commission on Environmental Quality) requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 HOSE BIBBS/HYDRANTS A. General: Provide an operating handle for each loose keyed device on the project. B. Hose Bibb: Bronze or brass construction, replaceable stem assembly, hose thread spout, complete with vandal resistant lockshield and ASSE 1011 integral vacuum breaker. Provide chrome plated and with removable key where exposed in public areas. C. Wall Hydrant: Bronze or brass construction, replaceable stem assembly, hose thread spout, non-freeze, self-draining type with integral vacuum breaker. ASSE 1019. Unless specifically noted otherwise, provide recessed complete with heavy cast aluminum or nickel plated brass lockable box and loose key operator. D. Roof/Post Hydrant: Free-standing, low-lead, self-draining, non-freeze hydrant with cast iron handle and hose thread brass spout atop galvanized pipe riser. Complete with ASSE 1052 anti-siphon vacuum breaker. For rooftop applications provide complete with manufacturer's recommended mounting hardware for a secure installation and coordinate with roofing contractor to ensure a watertight seal is provided per the roofing system and any local code requirements. E. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: 1. J.R. Smith 2. Zurn 3. Mifab 4. Watts 5. Wade 6. Josam 7. Chicago (interior use hose bibbs only) 8. Woodford 9. Prier 2.02 RECESSED VALVE BOX A. Refrigerator: Pre-formed galvanized or stainless steel rough-in box with brass long shank valve with wheel or quarter-turn handle and matching secured faceplate. PVC constructed box, faceplate, and bracket will be acceptable within dwelling units only, in residential occupancies only. B. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: 1. Guy Gray 2. Mifab 3. Sioux Chief 4. Oatey 2.03 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. General Requirements: All assemblies shall be suited for the system anticipated working pressure and temperature as well as the intended orientation (vertical or horizontal)of the DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 2211 19 -3 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop installation. All assemblies shall be lead-free per NSF 372, unless specifically noted otherwise on the Drawings. B. Strainer Requirements: Lead-free compliant strainers shall be provided at all backflow preventers on the upstream side of each assembly. Strainer bodies shall be either bronze/cast copper alloy or of cast iron/ductile iron construction with an FDA approved epoxy coating. Screens and internal components shall be stainless steel. C. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers: ASSE 1013; Bronze or FDA approved epoxy coated cast iron body with corrosion resistant internal parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating, spring loaded check valves; intermediate internal pressure intermediate relief valve with water outlet; test cocks and isolation valves. D. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: 1. Watts 2. Wilkins 3. Ames 4. Febco 5. Conbraco 2.04 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS A. Engineered water hammer arresters: ASSE 1010 listed, lead-free, pre-charged, permanently sealed, maintenance-free, suited for concealed installation, with a working temperature range of 33 to no less than 212 degrees F and a maximum working pressure of no less than 250 psi during pressure surges. Stainless steel or copper body construction. Shall be sized and located in accordance with Plumbing Drainage Institute standard PDI-WH 2O1. B. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: 1. J.R. Smith 2. Zurn 3. Mifab 4. Wade 5. Josam 6. P.P.P. 7. Sioux Chief 2.05 THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVES A. Provide thermostatic mixing valves in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as indicated and scheduled on Drawings. 1. Unless scheduled otherwise, all units other than under-counter point of use units shall be provided complete in lockable cabinet of 16 gage (1.5 mm) prime coated steel when located in finished areas. 2. All under-counter point of use units shall be provided complete with integral checks and dual stainless steel strainers on inlets for protection against fouling. B. Types and Requirements: 1. Where hot and cold water is supplied to emergency safety fixtures, the temperature shall be controlled by a temperature actuated mixing valve complying with ASSE 1071. 2. Valves for individual showers are addressed in Section 22 40 00- Plumbing Fixtures 3. (Master) mixing valves serving multiple showers, each with a single tempered water supply pipe, shall conform to ASSE 1069 or CSA B125.3. Such valves shall be provided complete with unions, checks, and ball valves at all connections as well as a temperature gauge on the outgoing water line. 4. Mixing valves serving (athletic area)whirlpool applications shall conform to ASSE 1070/ ASME Al 12.1070/CSA B125.70 or CSA B125.3. Such valves shall also be configured with appurtenances as described above. 5. Mixing valves supplying tempered water to lavatories and sinks shall conform to ASSE 1070/ASME Al 12.1070/CSA B125.70 or CSA B125.3. C. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 2211 19 -4 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 1. Bradley 2. Powers 3. Symmons 4. Acorn 2.06 FLOOR DRAINS AND FLOOR SINKS A. Provide floor drains and floor sinks in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, as appropriate for floor construction per ASME Al 12.6.3, and as indicated and scheduled on Drawings. B. Provide clamping devices for all drains in membrane floor areas. C. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: 1. J.R. Smith 2. Zurn 3. Mifab 4. Watts 5. Wade 6. Josam D. Provide drains of suitable and compatible material for specialized piping systems conveying acid waste. 2.07 CLEANOUTS A. General: Provide cleanouts as indicated and scheduled on Drawings and also as required by the prevailing code, whether shown on the Drawings or not. B. Construction: All cleanouts shall have tapered PVC, ABS, or polypropylene plugs. C. Provide clamping devices for all cleanouts in membrane floor areas. D. Provide cleanouts of suitable and compatible material for specialized piping systems conveying acid waste. E. Types: 1. Finished floor cleanouts: Provide cast iron body, with adjustable floor level assembly, and round nickel bronze scoriated top. 2. Resilient or tile finished floor cleanouts: Provide cast iron body, with adjustable floor level assembly, and round nickel-bronze top with gasketed water tight cover and depressed top to receive flooring finish material. 3. Interior finished wall cleanouts: Provide cast iron tee body or cleanout ferrule as required for wall construction and provide counter-sunk plug with stainless steel access cover and securing screw(s). 4. Interior unfinished accessible cleanouts: Calked or threaded type. Provide bolted stack cleanouts on vertical rainwater leaders. F. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: 1. J.R. Smith 2. Zurn 3. Mifab 4. Watts 5. Wade 6. Josam 2.08 TRAP PRIMERS A. General: Provide trap primers as indicated and scheduled on Drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: 1. J.R. Smith 2. Zurn 3. Mifab DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 2211 19 -5 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 4. Watts 5. Wade 6. Josam 7. P.P.P. 8. Sioux Chief 2.09 INTERCEPTORS A. General requirements: 1. Provide in type, materials of construction, and with appurtenances as indicated on the Drawings and as required for a complete, functioning, and compliant installation. This shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following: venting, flow control, inlet and outlet piping adapters/transitions, and cleanouts. 2. Unless specifically noted otherwise, each interceptor shall be provided with an approved sampling well/sampling port in accordance with local AHJ requirements. 3. All interceptors shall be a of flow rate/capacity, size, and design as suited to the waste stream being served and in accordance with local AHJ requirements. 4. Buried interceptors shall be provided with suitable extensions up to finished grade/paving. 5. Buried interceptors shall be provided with approved and suitable access lids/manhole covers. a. In vehicular traffic areas these shall be provided in material and load rating accordingly, suited for the weight of the traffic to be encountered. b. In no case shall lids be rated for anything less than pedestrian traffic. c. All lids shall be lined/gasketed for odor control. 6. Interceptors shall not be provided of a material or at an installed depth they are not suited for. Maximum installation depths and bedding-backfill-bury requirements shall be adhered to in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 7. Buried interceptors in high water table locations shall be provided complete with the manufacturer's approved anchoring kit. The same shall apply to unburied interceptors in flood prone locations. 8. Interceptor placement and installation shall be coordinated accordingly with adjacent items and equipment, floor/slab construction, site paving/grading, etc. to ensure a compliant installation and all required service and maintenance access. 9. IAPMO (UPC), ICC (IPC), and local AHJ approval. 10. Polyethylene constructed interceptors shall be lifetime guaranteed. B. Acceptable manufacturers (where such units are detailed/specified on the Drawings): 1. Precast concrete constructed: Park-USA, Old Castle Precast 2. Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP)constructed: Zurn Proceptor, Green Turtle Technologies 3. Polyethylene constructed: Schier, Striem (also acceptable for point-of-use PVC constructed) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION AND APPLICATION A. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to provide intended performance. B. Install equipment specific drains appropriately located to serve the equipment. Drain placement shall not conflict with housekeeping pads, casework, equipment access, clear space for foot travel, etc. In kitchens and similar settings final drain locations must be carefully coordinated to ensure that equipment casters, table legs, etc. do not bear upon drain grates. C. Water hammer arresters: 1. The contractor shall provide water hammer arresters as shown on Drawings and also in accordance with PDI-WH 2O1, whether shown on Drawings or not. 2. Water hammer arresters shall be PDI certified and sized and placed as recommended by manufacturer. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 2211 19-6 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 3. Provide above lay-in ceiling, within chase or wall or above solid ceiling complete with access panel, or otherwise accessible location complete with isolation valve to facilitate replacement. 4. Provide for both domestic hot and cold water services. 5. The provision of air chambers for the control of water hammer shall not be acceptable, but for within dwelling units only, in residential occupancies only. D. Backflow preventers: 1. Provide strainers at all backflow preventers. 2. Contractor shall certify all newly installed backflow preventers and provide proof of certification to the Owner. 3. Pipe relief line from backflow preventer via manufacturer's air gap assembly, full size to nearest suitable drain. Such routing shall not pose a trip hazard. Where a suitable drain of appropriate size is not provided, route line to the outdoors. 4. All backflow preventers shall be securely supported with wall supports and/or pipe stands as appropriate for the size and weight of the unit and shall be installed with sufficient access and clearance for testing and maintenance. 5. Unless specifically noted otherwise on the Drawings, outdoor installations shall be housed within an appropriately sized, ASSE 1060 Class I freeze and vandal protective insulated, marine grade aluminum constructed enclosure complete with drain panel and removable/movable panel(s)for device maintenance and testing. Provide complete with manufacturer's recommended electric heater. Safe-T-Cover by Hydrocowl. E. Cleanouts: 1. Provide two-way cleanouts at all waste outfalls from the building. 2. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at all cleanouts for access and for rodding of drainage system. 3. Wall cleanouts provided at the end of horizontal piping runs shall be installed vertically above the flow line of the pipe served. 4. All cleanouts outside of building on grade shall be set in an 18"x 18"x 4"thick concrete pad, flush with final grade/paving. 5. All cleanouts shall be the same nominal size as the pipe they serve, up to 4 inches. For pipes larger than 4 inches, provide a 4 inch cleanout. F. Interceptors: 1. Provide approved sampling well downstream of centralized interceptors and separators and in all such locations where required by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction. 2. Installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3. The following general installation requirements shall apply to concrete constructed interceptors, however these requirements are not intended to supercede the manufacturer's recommendations, which shall govern. a. The bottom of the excavation shall be covered with clean sand or pea gravel to a depth of no less than one foot, suitably graded and leveled. Limestone shall not be acceptable. b. If the installation location has significant variation in ground water levels, the bedding material shall be fine gravel or pea gravel rather than sand. c. The backfill shall be free from any material which may cause damage to the tank coating (if any)and placed accordingly. G. Trap primers: 1. In unfinished areas such as mechanical rooms, such devices may be installed exposed. 2. In finished areas, all devices must be installed concealed from public view. If not readily accessible (such as above a lay-in ceiling) ensure to provide an access door. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 2211 19-7 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SECTION 22 11 21 NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 22 02 00, are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE A. The scope of the work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the piping system covered by this section, with all appurtenances, ready for the Owner's use. This shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following: 1. Pipe and pipe fittings. 2. Adapters, transitions, final flexible connectors. 3. Valves, regulators, and regulator vents. 4. Metering. 5. Testing. B. Coordinate in advance with the local gas utility provider and: 1. Ensure an unobstructed and acceptable pathway for the incoming gas service. 2. Ensure compliant gas meter location(s)with all required clearances and maintenance access. 3. Pay for all fees & inspections and secure all necessary permits required for a complete and operating gas service to the project. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Section 22 05 29- Hangers and Support for Plumbing Piping and Equipment B. Section 22 05 53- Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment C. Section 22 30 00- Plumbing Equipment 1.04 REFERENCES A. ANSI Z21.80/CSA 6.22 - Line Pressure Regulators; 2019. B. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: Classes 150 and 300; 2021. C. ASME B16.11 - Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded; 2021. D. ASME B31.1 - Power Piping; 2022. E. ASME B31.8- Gas Transmission and Distribution Piping Systems; 2022. F. ASME BPVC- Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; 2023. G. ASME BPVC-IX- Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX-Qualification Standard for Welding, Brazing, and Fusing Procedures; Welders; Brazers; and Welding, Brazing, and Fusing Operators; 2023. H. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2022. I. ASTM A105/A105M - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for Piping Applications; 2023. J. ASTM A126-Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings; 2004 (Reapproved 2023). K. ASTM D2513- Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Gas Pressure Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings; 2020. L. ASTM D2683- Standard Specification for Socket-Type Polyethylene Fittings for Outside Diameter-Controlled Polyethylene Pipe and Tubing; 2020. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus NATURAL GAS PIPING Christi 2211 21 - 1 SYSTEMS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents M. NFPA 54- National Fuel Gas Code; 2024. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: For each product specified, provide components by the same manufacturer throughout. B. Valves: Manufacturer's name, size, and pressure rating shall be cast or marked on valve body or handle. C. Piping shall be labeled along its entire length indicating size, class, material specification, manufacturer's name and country of origin. D. Foreign pipe, fittings or valves are unacceptable. E. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME BPVC and applicable state labor regulations. F. Welders Certification: In accordance with ASME BPVC-IX. G. Materials, design, fabrication, and testing-inspection shall conform to the requirements of ASME B31.1. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Division One. B. Include pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, regulators, and accessories. Provide manufacturer's catalog information, product certifications, and country of origin. Indicate valve data and ratings. 1.07 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Division One. B. Record actual locations of valves, regulators, and meter(s). 1.08 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Division One. B. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with a minimum of 5 years documented experience and must be a domestic manufacturer. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with a minimum of 5 years documented experience. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. DELIVERY: Deliver clearly labeled piping and valves to; and store, protect and handle products on site in accordance with the provisions of Division One. B. TIMING AND COORDINATION: Arrange for delivery of materials to allow for minimum storage time at the project site. Coordinate with the scheduled time of installation. C. ACCEPTANCE: Accept product on site in original factory packaging. Receive valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage. Damaged valves shall not be acceptable. D. STORAGE: Store materials in a clean, dry location, protected from weather and damage. E. Provide temporary protective coating on steel valves. F. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. G. Protect installed piping systems from entry of foreign materials by providing temporary covers, as completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed systems. Tape will not be allowed as an acceptable end cover. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus NATURAL GAS PIPING Christi 22 11 21 -2 SYSTEMS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of Division One. 1.12 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Perform and provide all work in accordance with plumbing and building codes having jurisdiction. B. Ensure compliance with fire marshal, utility provider, and Texas Railroad Commission requirements. C. All sleeves passing through return air plenum space shall be of compliant material. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING AND FITTINGS A. All gas piping not buried shall be ASTM A53/A53M schedule 40 black steel pipe as manufactured by U.S. Steel Tubular Products, Republic Steel, Youngstown Pipe & Steel, or approved equal domestic manufacturer. B. All gas piping larger than 2" shall have welded fittings. Threaded fittings and joints will only be permitted for sizes 2" and smaller. Unions and valves will not be permitted above ceilings or in walls or chases. C. All steel pipe fittings shall be as follows: 1. All dimensions and design for forged steel fittings shall conform to ASME B16.11. 2. The material for all forged carbon steel fittings shall conform to ASTM A105/A105M. 3. All welding fittings shall be factory-made and shall be full line size, for each tee, branch, elbow, etc., with reducers after fittings, if required. 4. All threads shall be taper pipe threads and conform to ASME 131.20.1. 5. All threaded fittings shall be ASME B16.3 Class 150 malleable iron by Ward Manufacturing or approved equal. Threaded joints shall be made up with graphite and oil or Teflon tape. 6. All pipe fittings shall be from a domestic manufacturer. D. All gas piping buried outside the building with 5 pound working pressure or less shall be as follows: 1. The pipe shall be yellow medium density polyethylene (MDPE)with socket heat fusion joints and fittings per ASTM D2513. Pipe sizes 1-1/2" and 2" shall be SDR 11, (PE 2708) and pipe sizes 3" and 4" shall be SDR 11.5 (PE 2708). 2. All socket heat fusion fittings shall be D.O.T. approved and meet ASTM D2513, ASTM D2683 and ASME B31.8 codes. 3. All gas valves below grade shall be ASTM D2513 polyethylene constructed ball type with NBR seat and seals, rated for natural gas use. Hubbell/Lyall or approved equivalent. All such valves shall be placed in a cast-iron valve box of an adequate size for accessibility and maintenance. 4. All transition meter riser shall be 100% pressure tested, D.O.T. approved, IAPMO/UPC and CSA listed, anodeless service type, fusion coupled only. All gas carrying steel parts shall meet or exceed ASTM A53/A53M and all polyethylene components shall conform to ASTM D2513. Electrostatically bonded epoxy coated exterior steel casing. Hubbell/Continental Industries or approved equal. 5. The contractor shall take thermal expansion under consideration during installation. The contractor shall follow all requirements set by the manufacturer to protect the system from damage due to thermal expansion. 6. The contractor shall provide detector tape approximately 12" above all gas piping. 7. Wrap pipe with 18 gauge minimum copper tracer wire. Tracer wire shall be secured to piping where it extends above buried location and tagged. E. Gas piping installed in unventilated spaces shall be routed in properly vented continuous sleeve where required by the building code. F. Gas valves shall be UL listed as follows: DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus NATURAL GAS PIPING Christi 22 11 21 -3 SYSTEMS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 1. Ball Valves: Nibco T585-70-UL for 1/4"to 1" and T580-70-UL for 1-1/4"to 3". 2. Plug Valves: ASTM A126 cast iron quarter turn plug valve with no less than 175 psi maximum cold working pressure (CWP). a. DeZurik Eccentric plug valve b. Flowserve/Nordstrom short pattern all-iron lubricated plug valve, Super Nordstrom or Nordstrom Bolted Gland type. G. Gas pressure regulators: 1. Shall be capable of reducing the incoming gas pressure to the intended outgoing gas pressure at the capacities required by the system gas demand. 2. Shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, accessible for servicing, and protected against physical damage accordingly. 3. Shall not be located above ceilings or in similar installations. 4. Shall be provided with factory-installed overpressure protection devices (OPD's)where required. Reference NFPA 54, Section 5.8 in particular. 5. Line pressure regulators shall be listed in accordance with ANSI Z21.80/CSA 6.22. 6. Each regulator shall be provided complete with: a. An upstream shutoff valve b. A capped test tee fitting oriented downward for sediment trap and testing purposes, located between the regulator and upstream shutoff valve c. Unions on both sides of and within 1 foot of the regulator d. A capped test tee fitting not less than 10 pipe diameters downstream of the regulator outlet, for testing purposes 7. Shall be as manufactured by Sensus/Rockwell, Emerson/Fisher, Maxitrol, or approved equal. H. All gas regulators located inside the building shall be vented to the outdoors with schedule 40 black steel pipe. This includes all regulators provided with mechanical and plumbing equipment and all other regulators provided under this contract. 1. Vent piping shall be the full size of regulatory port opening, or as recommended by the regulator manufacturer. 2. Each vent shall be run independently of any other regulator vents. 3. Each vent shall terminate at a height and in a location no less than 10'-0"from any door/window/outside air intake and no less than 3'-0"from a possible source of ignition. 4. Each vent shall be located and designed to prevent the entry of water, insects, or other foreign materials that could cause blockage. Each vent shall terminate with an elbow oriented downward, fitted with 12x12 mesh stainless steel screen in the outlet. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. All piping, valves, and appurtenances shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and printed installation instructions. B. All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturer's requirements. C. All underground gas piping shall be laid on 6" of wet compact banksand approximately 24" below grade and buried in a manner to protect it from damage. Backfill trench with wet compacted banksand to 6" above pipe. The remainder of backfill shall be selected backfill and shall meet all compaction requirements set forth by the general trenching and backfill requirements. D. Provide lever handle gas valve, drip leg and union at each piece of equipment and where indicated. E. At kitchen appliances provide commercial grade, ANSI Z21.69/ANSI Z21.24 compliant flexible connections, stationary or moveable (as necessary for the equipment served)of suitable lengths. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus NATURAL GAS PIPING Christi 22 11 21 -4 SYSTEMS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop F. All gas lines entering building shall be valved on the exterior of the building above grade. All gas lines entering (or leaving) buildings shall be sleeved through the exterior wall above grade and sealed watertight. G. Refer to Section 22 05 53 for valve and piping identification requirements, including painting and labeling (pipe markers). Provide as specified. H. Refer to Section 22 05 29 for pipe hanger and support requirements. Provide as specified. I. Gas piping shall not be routed through or beneath a building slab unless specifically indicated as such on the Drawings. For such installations: 1. The gas piping shall be sleeved, sealed, and vented to the outdoors in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 54 or the prevailing gas code, or whichever is the more stringent requirement. 2. All sleeves must be of suitable material for the installed location. This shall include, but is not necessarily limited to, providing sleeves of compliant material and construction where passing through return air plenum spaces. J. Provide an accessibly located valved and capped test tee for each distinct system to facilitate regular pressure testing of all gas piping from the outlet of the meter to each inlet valve of each appliance. Reference Texas Administrative Code Title 16, Part 1, Chapter 8, Subchapter C, Rule 8.230 for additional information as necessary. 3.02 TESTING OF GAS PIPING SYSTEMS A. All gas system testing shall be in compliance with local codes or as required in NFPA 54 National Fuel Gas Code, whichever is the more stringent requirement. Additionally, in school facilities all such testing shall be performed in accordance with the Texas Administrative Code, Railroad Commission of Texas testing requirements for natural gas piping systems. Reference Rule 8.230 in particular. B. All work shall be performed by a Journeyman Plumber holding current State and local licenses. C. All tests shall be accomplished during normal working hours and after having given due notification to building owner, construction manager or designee, of tests to be performed. All tests shall be performed in the presence of and witnessed by the building owner's representative or designee. D. All gas system piping shall be subjected to a pneumatic test pressure of 60 psig for not less than 2 hours upon completion of all rough-in work and prior to covering. While the systems are subjected to this air pressure test, all joints shall have a soapy water solution applied and shall be observed for leaks. During test period there shall be no perceptible drop in test gage pressure. E. A final test shall be performed after all portions of the piping system are completely installed and covered. The entire system shall be tested, with all system outlets plugged or capped, before any equipment or appliances are connected to the piping. 1. Final test shall be with mercury, measured with a manometer or slope gage. Test pressures shall in no case be less than one and one half times the normal operating pressure or as listed below; which ever is the greater: a. 10.5 inches mercury (5 psig)for systems designed for 0.25 psig or less b. 21.0 inches mercury (10 psig)for systems designed for greater than 0.25 psig 2. Tests shall prove absolutely tight, showing no perceptible drop for the entire test period, which shall be as follows: a. No less than 30 minutes for systems designed for less than 5psig b. No less than 60 minutes for systems designed for 5psig or greater F. Purge air from test piping before connecting equipment or appliances. Purge air to outdoors or to ventilated space of sufficient volume to prevent accumulation of flammable mixtures. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus NATURAL GAS PIPING Christi 22 11 21 -5 SYSTEMS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SECTION 22 30 00 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 22 02 00, are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE A. The scope of the work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section, with all appurtenances, ready for the Owner's use. B. Include the following work in addition to items normally part of this Section: 1. Domestic Water Heaters 2. In-line Circulator Pumps 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 11 40 00- Foodservice Equipment B. Section 22 05 29- Hangers and Support for Plumbing Piping and Equipment C. Section 22 05 48-Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping D. Section 22 10 00- Plumbing Piping E. Section 22 11 19- Plumbing Specialties F. Section 26 05 19-Wire, Cable and Related Materials 1.04 REFERENCES A. 10 CFR 430, Appendix E to Subpart B- Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Water Heaters; Current Edition. B. ANSI Z21.10.3 -Gas-Fired Water Heaters, Volume III, Storage Water Heaters with Input Ratings Above 75,000 Btu Per Hour, Circulating and Instantaneous; 2019. C. ASHRAE Std 90.1 I-P- Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. D. ASME BPVC-VIII-1 - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1: Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels; 2023. E. ASTM E84 -Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2023c. F. ICC (IECC)- International Energy Conservation Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. G. NFPA 54- National Fuel Gas Code; 2024. H. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. I. SCAQMD 1146.2- Emissions of Oxides of Nitrogen from Large Water Heaters and Small Boilers and Process Heaters; 1998, with Amendment(2024). J. UL 1453 -Standard for Electric Booster and Commercial Storage Tank Water Heaters; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: For each product specified, provide components by the same manufacturer throughout. B. Perform Work in accordance with Authorities Having Jurisdiction. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 22 30 00 - 1 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents C. Provide pumps with manufacturer's name, model number, and rating/capacity identified. D. Ensure products and installation of specified products are in conformance with recommendations and requirements of the following organizations: 1. American Gas Association (AGA). 2. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF). 3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). 4. National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors (NBBPVI). 5. National Electrical Manufacturers'Association (NEMA). 6. Underwriters Laboratories (UL). 7. American Society of Plumbing Engineers (ASPE) E. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division One. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include water heater and packaged heating system dimensions, sizes and locations of all connections, and performance data. 2. Include dimensions of tanks, tank lining and insulation methods, anchors, attachments, lifting points, sizes and locations of all connections and drains. 3. Include water softening equipment dimensions, sizes and locations of all connections, performance data and capacities, backwash requirements. 4. Include booster system skid dimensions, sizes and locations of all connections, and performance data. Include such information for any field connected items, including, but not necessarily limited to, hydro-pneumatic tanks. 5. Include manufacturer's recommended space requirements, clearances, and maintenance access. C. Product Data: 1. Include dimension drawings of water heaters indicating components and connections to other equipment and piping. 2. Indicate pump type, materials of construction, capacity, power requirements, and any affected adjacent construction. 3. Submit certified pump curves showing pump performance characteristics with pump and system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable. 4. Provide electrical characteristics and power and controls connection requirements/capabilities. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions. 1.07 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Division One. B. Record actual locations of equipment. C. Provide written start-up reports. 1.08 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Division 22. B. Operation Data: Include manufacturer's operating instructions, common trouble conditions and remedies, and trouble-shooting protocols. C. Maintenance Data: Include routine maintenance items and corresponding intervals, identify typical replacement parts including part numbers and availability. Provide location and full contact information including after-hours maintenance/support telephone numbers for manufacturer authorized maintenance and repair companies. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 22 30 00 -2 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. DELIVERY: Deliver clearly labeled equipment to; and store, protect and handle products on site in accordance with the provisions of Division One. B. TIMING AND COORDINATION: Arrange for delivery of equipment to allow for minimum storage time at the project site. Coordinate with the scheduled time of installation. C. ACCEPTANCE: Accept equipment on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage. Damaged equipment shall not be acceptable. D. STORAGE: Store equipment in a clean, dry location, protected from weather and damage. 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of Division One. B. Provide two sets of electric water heater elements. 1.11 OPERATIONS PERSONNEL TRAINING A. Provide a training session for the owner's operations personnel. Training session shall be performed by a qualified person who is knowledgeable in the subject system/equipment. Submit a training agenda two weeks prior to the proposed training session for review and approval. B. Training session shall include at the minimum: 1. Purpose of equipment. 2. Principle of how the equipment works. 3. Important parts and assemblies. 4. How the equipment achieves its purpose and necessary operating conditions. 5. Most likely failure modes, causes, and corrections. 6. On site demonstration. 1.12 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to AGA, NSF, NFPA 54, NFPA 70 and UL 1453 requirements for water heaters. B. Conform to ASME BPVC-VIII-1 for manufacture of pressure vessels for heat exchangers. C. Conform to water heater minimum efficiency requirements prescribed by ICC (IECC) and ASHRAE Std 90.1 I-P D. Water heaters shall be tested and rated in compliance with 10 CFR 430, Appendix E to Subpart B or ANSI Z21.10.3 as applicable. 1.13 WARRANTY A. Provide one year warranty under provisions of Division One, unless specifically noted otherwise. B. Warranty: Include coverage of domestic water heaters and packaged systems, water storage tanks, water softeners, and domestic pressure booster systems. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 COMMERCIAL GAS FIRED WATER HEATER(STORAGE TYPE) A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. A.O. Smith 2. State 3. Rheem 4. Lochinvar 5. Bradford White 6. Bock B. Type: Automatic, natural gas-fired, vertical storage. C. Tank: Seamless Glass lined steel tank construction, ASME labeled (unless indicated otherwise on Drawings). Factory applied foam insulation and trim with a heavy gauge, corrosion-resistant DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 22 30 00-3 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop enameled steel jacket. D. Burner and heat exchanger: High efficiency, modulating gas burner that automatically adjusts the input based on demand. Submerged combustion chamber within tank. Direct spark ignition. Long life, scale resistant heat exchanger lined both externally and internally. E. Accessories: Maintenance free, non-sacrificial powered anodes; brass water connections and dip tube, drain valve, ASME rated temperature and pressure relief valve, hand-hole cleanout, condensate neutralization kit. F. Approvals: 1. Design certified by Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Inc. to ANSI Z21.10.3 2. Thermal efficiency and standby loss requirements of the U.S. Department of Energy and current edition of ASHRAE Std 90.1 I-P 3. Design certified by Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Inc. to NSF Standard 5 for 180 degrees F water. 4. Complies with SCAQMD 1146.2 and the prevailing local requirements for low-NOx emissions. 5. By AGA as automatic storage water heater and automatic circulating tank water heater for operation at 180 degrees F. 6. Approval for 0" clearance to combustibles G. Controls: Integrated solid-state temperature and ignition control device with integral diagnostics, precise adjustable temperature control to 180 degrees F, graphic user interface, fault history display, and digital temperature readout. Capability for remote monitoring. H. Provide training per 1.11. 2.02 DIAPHRAGM-TYPE COMPRESSION TANKS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Watts 2. Amtrol 3. Elbi 4. Bell and Gossett B. Rating: Ensure suitable pressure rating of tank for expected system pressure. C. Construction: Welded steel construction, corrosion-proof anti-microbial polypropylene liner, long-life butyl diaphragm, stainless steel system connection, factory pre-charged, complete with welded air charge fitting with protective cap. Suitable for in-line installation or factory provided with stand/legs for floor-mounted installation. 2.03 IN-LINE CIRCULATOR PUMPS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Grundfos 2. Bell &Gossett 3. Armstrong B. Type: Canned motor type. C. Housing: Bronze or stainless steel, rated for 125 psig working pressure. D. Impeller: 304 stainless steel. E. Shaft: Stainless steel or aluminum oxide ceramic. F. Thermal Protection: Internal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION A. Install water heaters in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and to AGA, NSF, NFPA 54 and UL requirements. B. Coordinate with plumbing piping and related work to achieve operating system. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 22 30 00-4 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop C. Provide venting and vent piping in accordance with both code requirements and manufacturer's recommendations. The material and installation provided must not only be compatible with the equipment served but must also be suited to and acceptable per project conditions. Any material to be provided in a return air plenum must be compliant for such use. D. Provide a properly sized thermal expansion tank downstream of the associated check valve in the cold water supply to the heater. E. Provide a thermometer at the hot water outlet piping from each water heater. F. Provide a line sized shut-off valve in the cold water supply to and in the hot water outlet from each heater, close to each heater. G. Provide approved heat traps at all storage type water heaters not furnished from the manufacturer with integral heat traps or heat trap nipples. H. Provide a line size plug cock in the gas supply close to each gas-fired water heater. I. Provide approved dielectric couplings at all hot and cold water connections to each heater/tank, and at the T&P relief valve connection. J. All tank type water heaters with more than 20 gallons of storage capacity shall be floor mounted on a concrete housekeeping pad, unless specifically indicated otherwise on the Drawings. K. Each tank type water heater shall be installed within a suitably sized galvanized drain pan. Securely elevate the base of each heater above the floor of the drain pan with structurally sound, non-ferrous, non-absorbent supports. Drain pan shall have no less than a 3/4" piped drain outlet. L. All water heater drain lines shall be full size, copper, and routed to indirect waste receptors. M. Startup: 1. Startup of all water heaters shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Ensure that storage type water heaters are full of water and downstream fixtures have been run for no less than 3 minutes in order to purge any trapped air from the water heater tank prior to heater startup. 3.02 PUMP INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide air cock and drain connection on horizontal pump casings. C. Provide line sized isolating valve and strainer on suction and line sized soft seated check valve and balancing valve on discharge. D. Provide line sized isolating valve and line sized soft seated check valve on each submersible or sump pump discharge. Ensure to drill a 3/16" diameter horizontal weep hole near the base of the discharge piping to allow for venting and prevent air lock of the pump. E. Provide line sized isolating valve and strainer at inlet and line sized soft seated check valve and line sized isolating valve at outlet of each in line circulator pump. Provide unions on both sides of pump. F. Decrease from line size with long radius reducing elbows or reducers. Support piping adjacent to pump such that no weight is carried on pump casings. Provide supports under elbows on pump suction and discharge line sizes 4 inches and over. G. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve. H. Align and verify alignment of base mounted pumps prior to start-up. Provide alignment certificate to engineer prior to start-up. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 22 30 00-5 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SECTION 22 40 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. Section 22 02 00- Basic Materials and Methods for Plumbing shall be included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE A. The scope of the work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the fixtures covered by this Section, with all appurtenances, ready for the Owner's use. B. Include the following work in addition to items normally part of this Section: 1. Plumbing Fixtures 2. Fixture Carriers 3. Faucets, Supplies, and Trim 4. Flushometers 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Section 22 05 29- Hangers and Support for Plumbing Piping and Equipment B. Section 22 10 00- Plumbing Piping C. Section 22 11 19- Plumbing Specialties D. Section 22 30 00- Plumbing Equipment 1.04 REFERENCES A. ASME Al 12.4.3 - Plastic Fittings for Connecting Water Closets to the Sanitary Drainage System B. ASME Al 12.6.1 M - Floor-Affixed Supports for Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use; 1997 (Reaffirmed 2017). C. ASME Al 12.18.1 - Plumbing Supply Fittings D. ASME Al 12.18.2 - Plumbing Waste Fittings E. ASME Al 12.18.9- Protectors/Insulators for Exposed Waste and Supplies on Accessible Fixtures F. ASME Al 12.19.1 - Enameled Cast Iron and Enameled Steel Plumbing Fixtures G. ASME Al 12.19.2 - Ceramic Plumbing Fixtures H. ASME Al 12.19.3-Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures I. ASME Al 12.19.7- Hydromassage Bathtub Systems J. NSF/ANSI 61 - Drinking Water System Components- Health Effects K. ANSI Z358.1 - Emergency Eyewash and Shower Equipment L. ASSE 1016 - Performance Requirements for Individual Thermostatic, Pressure Balancing, and Combination Pressure Balancing and Thermostatic Control Valves for Individual Fixture Fittings. M. ASSE 1037 - Performance Requirements for Pressurized Flushing Devices for Plumbing Fixtures N. ADA(Americans with Disabilities Act) O. TAS (Texas Accessibility Standards) DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 22 40 00 - 1 PLUMBING FIXTURES 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: For each product specified, provide components by the same manufacturer throughout. B. Warranty: Warrant the work specified herein for one year against becoming unserviceable or causing an objectionable appearance resulting from defective or non-conforming materials and workmanship. C. Defects shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following: 1. Noisy operation. 2. Noticeable deterioration of finish. 3. Leakage of water. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division One. B. Submit product data under provisions of Division One. C. Include component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, finishes, materials, dimensions, performance information, and accessories. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate assembly and support requirements. 1.07 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Division One. B. Provide pre-printed operating and maintenance instructions for each item specified. Instruct and demonstrate the proper operation and maintenance to the Owner's designated representative. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. DELIVERY: Deliver clearly labeled specialties to; and store, protect and handle products on site in accordance with the provisions of Division One. B. TIMING AND COORDINATION: Arrange for delivery of materials to allow for minimum storage time at the project site. Coordinate with the scheduled time of installation. C. ACCEPTANCE: Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage. Damaged specialties shall not be acceptable. D. STORAGE: Store materials in a clean, dry location, protected from weather and damage. 1.09 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on the Contract Documents. B. Confirm and field coordinate that millwork is constructed with adequate provisions for the installation of counter top lavatories and sinks. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PLUMBING FIXTURES A. GENERAL: Provide plumbing fixtures in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as indicated and scheduled on Drawings. Acceptable manufacturers of each fixture type are as indicated below. 1. Provide floor-affixed fixture carriers as appropriate for all wall-hung plumbing fixtures unless specifically noted otherwise. 2. Fixture drilling shall match faucet spread and match any related trim and accessories. B. WATER CLOSETS, URINALS, LAVATORIES (Vitreous China) 1. American Standard 2. Kohler 3. Zurn 4. Sloan 5. Toto C. SINKS- COUNTER MOUNTED (Stainless Steel) DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 22 40 00-2 PLUMBING FIXTURES 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 1. Elkay 2. Just 3. Moen Commercial D. MOP SINKS 1. Stern-Williams 2. Fiat 3. E.L. Mustee &Sons E. DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS 1. Halsey Taylor 2. Elkay 3. Haws 4. Oasis 2.02 FAUCETS, SUPPLIES, AND TRIM A. GENERAL: Provide faucets, supplies, and trim in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, as appropriate for fixtures to be served, and as indicated and scheduled on Drawings. Acceptable manufacturers for each type of appurtenance are as indicated below. 1. Flushometer flush rate shall match gallon-per-flush criteria of fixtures served. 2. Strainers shall be heavy cast brass chrome plated with matching grid type strainer, with or without overflow as required, 17 gauge seamless brass tailpiece of length determined by installation requirements. Provide complete with washers and brass locknut. 3. P-traps shall be 17 gauge seamless chrome plated brass, adjustable type. Provide complete with cleanout plug, chrome plated brass slip nuts, wall bend, and wrought brass escutcheon of depth determined by installation requirements. 4. Angle stops shall be lead-free commercial pattern chrome plated brass, quarter turn ball type with loose key handles. Provide complete with chrome plated copper supply risers and wrought brass escutcheon of depth determined by installation requirements. 5. Toilet seats shall be commercial grade and provided complete with stainless steel posts and self-sustaining check hinges. 6. Pipe trim insulation shall be compliant, white molded vinyl, fade/discoloration-resistant, bacteria/fungal-resistant insulation. 7. Where an exposed flush valve assembly will conflict with the installation height of a grab bar or where there will be insufficient clearance above the top cover of an exposed flush valve for maintenance access relative to the installation height of a grab bar, provide an offset type flush valve tube. Make water rough-in and other adjustments as necessary for a compliant and functioning installation. B. FAUCETS 1. Chicago 2. T&S Brass 3. Zurn 4. Moen Commercial 5. Delta Commercial 6. American Standard 7. Kohler 8. Symmons Commercial 9. Speakman C. SHOWER VALVES 1. Acorn 2. Bradley 3. Symmons Commercial 4. Chicago 5. Powers 6. Zurn 7. Speakman DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 22 40 00 -3 PLUMBING FIXTURES 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop D. FLUSHOMETERS 1. Sloan 2. Zurn 3. Moen Commercial 4. Delta Commercial 5. American Standard 6. Toto E. SUPPLY STOPS 1. McGuire 2. Zurn 3. Chicago F. CHROME PLATED TUBULAR BRASS 1. McGuire 2. Zurn 3. Kohler G. TOILET SEATS 1. Church 2. Bemis 3. American Standard 4. Zurn 5. Toto 6. Centoco H. PIPE TRIM INSULATION 1. Truebro 2. McGuire 3. Plumberex 2.03 FIXTURE CARRIERS A. GENERAL: ASME Al 12.6.1 M; Provide floor-affixed fixture carriers as appropriate for all wall- hung plumbing fixtures unless specifically noted otherwise. Fixture carrier foot supports shall be securely anchored to the floor with 1/2" bolts and anchors at all locations. 1. Lavatory carriers shall be adjustable, with steel uprights and welded base feet, coated cast iron support brackets, cast or ductile iron concealed support arms, alignment rod, complete with leveling and support hardware. Provide single or back to back configuration as required. 2. Drinking fountain and urinal carriers shall be adjustable, with steel uprights and welded base feet, upper and lower bearing plates, threaded rods, and mounting hardware. Provide single or side-by-side configuration as required B. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 1. J.R. Smith 2. Zurn 3. Mifab 4. Watts 5. Wade 6. Josam PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. EXAMINATION OF CONDITIONS: Examine conditions affecting this work. Report unsatisfactory conditions to the proper authority and do not proceed until those conditions have been corrected. Commencing work implies acceptance of existing conditions as satisfactory to the outcome of this work. B. Coordinate cutting of floor construction to receive drains to required invert elevations. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 22 40 00-4 PLUMBING FIXTURES 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install fixtures in locations and heights as shown on Drawings and as directed by the Architect. B. Install materials plumb, level, securely, and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. All rough-in pipe openings for final connections with supply, waste, vent, and storm systems shall be closed with caps or plugs during early stages of construction and installation. Tape shall not be considered sufficient protection. D. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture rough-in schedule for particular fixtures. E. Provide ball valves in piping serving batteries of fixtures. Label stops "Hot" and "Cold."Valves shall be located above accessible ceilings. If ceilings are not accessible, provide access panels of adequate size to ensure valves are fully accessible and can be fully operated. F. Provide lockable ball valves in piping serving emergency safety fixtures and clearly label such valves as to the fixtures served. G. Plumbing fixtures shall be supported by a concealed carrier where required to properly support the fixture specified. All carriers to be securely mounted, bolted and checked prior to concealment. H. Caulk around fixtures with best grade white silicone caulking. Do not use grout. I. All handles on supply and drainage fittings or other brass items shall be properly lined up and adjusted. Fittings shall not be left in any haphazard manner. J. All fixtures shall have individual chrome plated heavy pattern loose key quarter-turn cutoff stops on supply lines, complete with escutcheons. Where same are not specified as a part of the fixture trim, they shall be installed as close to fixtures as possible in the hot and cold water supply. A loose key for each stop shall be provided to the Owner. K. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning. L. All showers and similar installations shall be installed with type "L" copper pipe between shower valve and shower head rough-in. The termination point shall have a brass drop ear elbow for shower head arm connection. Contractor shall provide proper anchoring support. 3.03 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough-in and installation. B. Review architectural drawings. Confirm configuration and orientation of shower controls and trim prior to rough-in and installation. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Division One. B. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of Division One. B. At completion clean plumbing fixtures and appurtenances. 3.06 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Division One. B. Do not permit use of fixtures. 3.07 ADA ACCESSIBLE FIXTURES A. At all locations required to be accessible, such fixtures, controls, and final installations shall comply with the requirements of ADA and any applicable state accessibility standards. Install fixtures to heights, indicated on architectural drawings. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 22 40 00-5 PLUMBING FIXTURES 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop B. All exposed water supply and drain pipes under accessible lavatories and sinks shall be insulated with securely fastened pipe trim insulation kits of the proper model for the fixtures specified. C. Wall mounted drinking fountains and coolers which protrude into passages or corridor space, whether single or paired with an adjacent accessible fixture, shall be supplied with a matching skirt or apron to lower the underside clearance of the non-accessible fixture equal to that required for accessible fixture. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 22 40 00 -6 PLUMBING FIXTURES 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SECTION 22 61 00 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. Section 22 02 00- Basic Materials and Methods for Plumbing shall be included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE A. The scope of the work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the system covered by this Section, with all appurtenances, ready for the Owner's use. B. Include the following work in addition to items normally part of this Section: 1. Compressed air pipe and fittings. 2. Transitions, connectors, and valves. 3. Filters, regulators, pressure gauges. 4. Compressor and air dryer equipment. C. Refer to Division 26 sections for the following work not covered by this Section, and coordinate accordingly. 1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on compressed air equipment. Include starters, disconnects, and required electrical devices, except where furnished or factory-installed by equipment manufacturer. 2. Interlock wiring between electrically-operated compressed air equipment units and between equipment and any field-installed control devices, except where factory-installed by equipment manufacturer. D. Provide the following electrical work as part of this section, complying with requirements of Division 26 sections: Control wiring between field-installed controls, indicating devices, and unit control panels. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Section 22 05 29- Hangers and Support for Plumbing Piping and Equipment B. Section 22 05 48-Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping C. Section 22 05 53- Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 1.04 REFERENCES A. ASME B16.18- Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; 2021. B. ASME B16.22 -Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings; 2021. C. ASME B31.3 - Process Piping; 2022, with Errata (2023). D. ASME B31.9- Building Services Piping; 2020. E. ASME BPVC- Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; 2023. F. ASTM B32 -Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2020. G. ASTM B88 -Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2022. H. ASTM B828-Standard Practice for Making Capillary Joints by Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube and Fittings; 2016. I. CAGI - The Compressed Air and Gas Handbook; 2003. J. CAGI 3075- B19.1 - Safety Standard for Compressor Systems; 2011. K. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components- Health Effects; 2022, with Errata. L. NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content; 2022. M. ASME Section IX-Welding and Brazing Qualifications. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 2261 00- 1 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents N. ASME B16.14- Ferrous Pipe Plugs, Bushings, and Locknuts with Pipe Threads. O. ASTM A47 -Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings. P. ASTM B62 -Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings. Q. ASTM B584 -Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications. R. AWS A5.8 -Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding. S. AWS 5.31 -Specification for Fluxes for Brazing and Braze Welding. T. ASSE 1079 -Performance Requirements for Dielectric Pipe Unions. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Valves: Manufacturer's name, size, and pressure rating shall be cast or marked on valve body or handle. B. Piping shall be labeled along its entire length indicating size, class, material specification, manufacturer's name and country of origin. C. Foreign pipe, fittings or valves are unacceptable. D. Codes and Standards: 1. ASME Compliance: Provide compressed air pressure vessels and relief valves in accordance with ASME BPVC; provide ASME Code Symbol Stamp. 2. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and install compressed air systems in accordance with ASME B31.3 and ASME B31.9. 3. CAGI Compliance: Fabricate and install compressed air systems in accordance with Compressed Air and Gas Institute Standards CAGI 3075- B19.1. 4. UL Compliance: Provide electrical components which are UL listed and have UL label affixed. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division One. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for compressed air pipe and fittings, connectors, filters, regulators, equipment and tanks. Include installation instructions for filters, regulators, equipment and tanks. C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring to equipment. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory-installed and portions to be field- installed. 1.07 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Division One. B. Record actual locations of valves. 1.08 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Division One. B. Operation Data: Include manufacturers' instructions, start-up data, and trouble-shooting check lists for compressors, tanks, air dryers, and regulators. C. Maintenance Data: Include manufacturers' literature, cleaning and maintenance procedures, replacement parts lists, and repair data for compressors, tanks, air dryers, regulators, and filters. Include wiring diagrams for electrically powered equipment. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company regularly engaged in the manufacture of compressed air systems equipment and products, of the types, materials, and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Installer: Firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on projects with compressed air systems work similar to that required for the project. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 2261 00-2 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. DELIVERY: Deliver clearly labeled equipment, tanks, piping and valves to; and store, protect and handle products on site in accordance with the provisions of Division One. B. TIMING AND COORDINATION: Arrange for delivery of materials to allow for minimum storage time at the project site. Coordinate with the scheduled time of installation. C. ACCEPTANCE: Accept equipment, tanks, and products on site in original factory packaging. Receive equipment, tanks, and valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage. Damaged equipment, tanks, or valves shall not be acceptable. D. STORAGE: Store materials in a clean, dry location, protected from weather and damage. E. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. F. Protect installed piping systems from entry of foreign materials by providing temporary covers, as completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed systems. Tape will not be allowed as an acceptable end cover. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE, FITTINGS, CONNECTORS,AND VALVES A. Pipe and fittings shall be: 1. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn. 2. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast bronze or ASME B16.22 wrought copper alloy solder joint pressure fittings. 3. Joints between copper pipe and fittings shall be made in accordance with ASTM B828 using ASTM B32 Alloy HB lead-free solder. B. Connectors at all piping to air compressors shall be: 1. Flexible metallic type (no rubber or plastic components)connectors, capable of compensating for lateral movement and vibration. 2. Suited for the maximum system operating pressure. 3. Manufactured complete with section of 300 series stainless corrugated steel hose with outer braid, with inlet and outlet connections as required based on equipment connection size. 4. Provided with double braid design to increase working pressure rating as necessary. 5. Metraflex Company SSTC series or approved equivalent. C. Valves shall be: 1. Ball type, all bronze cast construction two-piece 600 psi body, blow-out proof stem, Teflon seated, lead-free, with stainless steel trim (including ball, stem, and valve handle). Threaded connections. Certified lead-free to NSF 61/NSF 372 and suited to 180 degrees F. 2. Basis of design (bronze valves): a. NIBCO T-585-66-LF (full port)for all sizes up through 2". 3. Acceptable alternate manufacturers: Apollo, Milwaukee. 2.02 AIR COMPRESSORS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Ingersoll Rand 2. Champion 3. Gardner Denver 4. Quincy Compressor 5. Saylor-Beall B. Reciprocating type, electric driven, tank mounted air compressor assembly complete with: 1. Cast iron constructed compressor pump(s) 2. NEMA rated ODP electric motor DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 2261 00 -3 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 3. ASME coded receiver tank with 0-300 psi air pressure gauge, ASME safety relief valve, manual drain and automatic tank drain 4. Mounted and wired motor starter(s), magnetic 5. Industrial grade intake filter and silencer 6. Air cooled aftercooler 7. Automatic start/stop operation with NEMA 1 pressure switch 8. Vibration isolators 9. Single point electrical connection, voltage indicated on Drawings. C. Compressor shall be designed to deliver the scheduled capacity as indicated on the Drawings. 2.03 AIR DRYERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Ingersoll Rand 2. Champion 3. Gardner Denver 4. Quincy Compressor 5. Saylor-Beall B. Unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings: Refrigerated type, floor mounted, electric-powered air dryer from the same manufacturer as the associated compressor unit and matched to the scheduled compressor capacity. Single point electrical connection, voltage indicated on Drawings. 2.04 APPURTENANCES A. Provide in-line central system air filters (1 micron rating unless indicated otherwise on Drawings), suited for the system demand, complete with pressure gauge and isolation valves. Located both upstream and downstream of the air dryer. B. Provide a regulator based, single point air system pressure controller, downstream of the final filter to adjust outgoing system pressure as indicated on the Drawings or as indicated by the Owner. Provide complete with pressure gauges on both sides of unit. C. Provide final filter/regulators, each complete with isolation valve, drain valve, and quick connect fitting(s) at each general purpose air drop. 2.05 BASIC VIBRATION CONTROL A. Provide heavy duty rubber vibration isolators beneath each air compressor unit complete with lag screws and other required hardware to mount the equipment to a concrete housekeeping pad in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Provide spring type hanger accessories for air system piping hangers adjacent to the compressor for a distance of no less than 20 feet. Eaton B-Line B3262 series or equivalent. C. General: Adhere to the requirements of Section 22 05 48. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. General requirements for piping: 1. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. 2. Remove any scale, oil and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. 3. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 4. Confirm pipe placement and elevation prior to any installation. 5. All piping shall be installed free of sags and bends. 6. Make branch connections from the top of the associated main. 7. Provide piping with 1% downward slope in the direction of flow 8. Provide a drip leg with drain valve at starting point of air system piping and provide auxiliary drain points as necessary (bottoms of risers and at low points). B. General requirements for valves: 1. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 2261 00 -4 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 2. Valves shall be line-sized unless specifically noted otherwise. 3. Provide clearance for access to valves and operable fittings. Valves that must be installed beyond reasonable reach shall be provided with a chain operator. 4. Provide access doors where valves and operable fittings are not otherwise accessible. Access doors shall be of approved types set in locations pre-approved by submittal to the Architect. C. Install all materials in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions. D. Route piping in an orderly manner, parallel and perpendicular to building column grid lines, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings, and maintain gradients. E. Install piping to conserve building space and not conflict with other trades or interfere with intended use of space. F. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. G. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe,joints, or connected equipment. H. Support and label all piping, valves, and equipment in accordance with the requirements of related Sections. I. Provide male adapters each side of threaded valves in copper piped system. Sweat solder adapters to tube prior to make-up of threaded connections J. Solder joints shall be wiped clean at each joint, remove excess metal while molten and flux residue when cooled. K. Route drain lines to approved disposal points or indirect waste receptors. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT A. Ensure all compressed air equipment is provided with sufficient clearances for installation, operation, inspection, and maintenance and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Provide 4"thick reinforced concrete housekeeping pad(s)for base-mounted equipment, to extend no less than 4"from equipment footprint on all sides. Cast anchor bolt inserts into pad(s). C. Provide compressor air intake from the outside air, with open end of intake pipe well hooded and screened to prevent rain and dust or dirt from entering. Route intake piping full size and as short and direct as possible, with long radius elbows where bends are necessary. For long lengths of run, piping shall be upsized accordingly. D. Intake pipe shall be located no less than 6 feet above ground and located clear from any exhaust outlets to prevent contamination. E. Slope discharge piping away from the compressor with sufficient pitch to prevent either condensate or oil draining back into the compressor. F. Provide union downstream of all valves at equipment or apparatus connections. G. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not provided factory- mounted. Furnish a copy of the manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to the Electrical Installer. H. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with the manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements of Division 26 sections. Do not proceed with equipment start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to the equipment installer. 3.03 CLEANING, TESTING,AND FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Blow out the system piping to ensure it is clear and free of all foreign matter or installation residue prior to connecting equipment or filters. B. Provide Architect/Engineer with reasonable advance notice of system testing, no less than 48 hours prior. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 2261 00 -5 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop C. Piping system shall be tested for leaks and integrity with clean, dry air at 150% of the system working pressure (but in no case less than 150 psi)for no less than one hour, with no leakage detected. If leaks are present, they shall be repaired. Test shall be repeated after repairs are completed and shall continue until such time as the entire test period expires without the discovery of any leaks. D. Gauges for pressure testing shall be incremented for 2% or less of the required test pressure with a pressure range not exceeding twice the test pressure applied. E. Start-up and test equipment for proper operation in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Test all alarms for both high pressure and low pressure conditions. F. Prior to turnover of the system to the Owner, ensure that all system filters are new and clean. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 2261 00 -6 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SECTION 23 02 00 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR HVAC PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all Work herein. B. The Contract Drawings indicate the extent and general arrangement of the systems. If any departure from the Contract Drawings is deemed necessary by the Contractor, details of such departures and the reasons therefore, shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for review as soon as practicable. No such departures shall be made without the prior written approval of the Architect/Engineer. C. Notwithstanding any reference in the Specifications to any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of construction by name, make or catalog number, such reference shall not be construed as limiting competition; and the Contractor, in such cases, may at his option use any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of construction which in the judgment of the Architect/Engineer, expressed in writing, is the equivalent of that specified. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Work included under this Contract consists of the furnishing and installation of all equipment and material necessary and required to form complete and functioning systems in all of their various phases, all as shown on the accompanying Drawings and/or described in these Specifications. The Contractor shall review all pertinent drawings, including those of other contracts, prior to commencement of Work. B. This Division requires the furnishing and installing of all items as specified herein, indicated on the Drawings or reasonably inferred as necessary for safe and proper operation; including every article, device or accessory (whether or not specifically called for by item) reasonably necessary to facilitate each system's functioning as indicated by the design and the equipment specified. Elements of the work include, but are not limited to, materials, labor, supervision, transportation, storage, equipment, utilities, all required permits, licenses and inspections. All work performed under this Section shall be in accordance with the Project Manual, Drawings and Specifications and is subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract. C. The approximate locations of Mechanical (HVAC) items are indicated on the Drawings. These Drawings are not intended to give complete and accurate details in regard to location of outlets, apparatus, etc. Exact locations are to be determined by actual measurements at the building, and will in all cases be subject to the review of the Owner or Engineer, who reserves the right to make any reasonable changes in the locations indicated without additional cost to the Owner. D. Items specifically mentioned in the Specifications but not shown on the Drawings and/or items shown on Drawings but not specifically mentioned in the Specifications shall be installed by the Contractor under the appropriate section of work as if they were both specified and shown. E. All discrepancies between the Contract Documents and actual job-site conditions shall be reported to the Owner or Engineer so that they will be resolved prior to bidding. Where this cannot be done at least 7 working days prior to bid; the greater or more costly of the discrepancy shall be bid. All labor and materials required to perform the work described shall be included as part of this Contract. F. It is the intention of this Section of the Specifications to outline minimum requirements to furnish the Owner with a turn-key and fully operating system in cooperation with other trades. G. It is the intent of the above "Scope"to give the Contractor a general outline of the extent of the Work involved; however, it is not intended to include each and every item required for the Work. Anything omitted from the "Scope" but shown on the Drawings, or specified later, or necessary for a complete and functioning heating, ventilating and air conditioning system shall be considered a part of the overall "Scope". H. The Contractor shall rough-in fixtures and equipment furnished by others from rough-in and placement drawings furnished by others. The Contractor shall make final connection to fixtures DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 23 02 00- 1 METHODS FOR HVAC 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents and equipment furnished by others. I. The Contractor shall participate in the commissioning process as required; including, but not limited to, meeting attendance, completion of checklists, and participation in functional testing. 1.03 SCHEMATIC NATURE OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Contract Documents are schematic in nature in that they are only to establish scope and a minimum level of quality. They are not to be used as actual working construction drawings. The actual working construction drawings shall be the reviewed shop drawings. B. All duct or pipe or equipment locations as indicated on the documents do not indicate every transition, offset, or exact location. All transitions, offsets, clearances and exact locations shall be established by actual field measurements, coordination with the structural, architectural and reflected ceiling plans, and other trades. Submit shop drawings for review. C. All transitions, offsets and relocations as required by actual field conditions shall be performed by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Additional coordination with electrical contractor may be required to allow adequate clearances of electrical equipment, fixtures and associated appurtenances. Contractor to notify Architect and Engineer of unresolved clearances, conflicts or equipment locations. 1.04 SITE VISIT AND FAMILIARIZATION A. Before submitting a bid, it will be necessary for each Contractor whose work is involved to visit the site and ascertain for himself the conditions to be met therein in installing his work and make due provision for same in his bid. It will be assumed that this Contractor in submitting his bid has visited the premises and that his bid covers all work necessary to properly install the equipment shown. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with this requirement shall not be considered justification for the omission or faulty installation of any work covered by these Specifications and Drawings. B. Understand the existing utilities from which services will be supplied; verify locations of utility services, and determine requirements for connections. C. Determine in advance that equipment and materials proposed for installation fit into the confines indicated. 1.05 WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Finish painting is specified. Prime and protective painting are included in the work of this Division. B. Owner and General Contractor furnished equipment shall be properly connected to Mechanical (HVAC)systems. C. Furnishing and installing all required Mechanical (HVAC)equipment control relays and electrical interlock devices, conduit, wire and J-boxes are included in the Work of this Division. 1.06 PERMITS, TESTS, INSPECTIONS A. Arrange and pay for all permits, fees, tests, and all inspections as required by governmental authorities. 1.07 DATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. The date of final acceptance shall be the date of substantial completion. Refer to Division One for additional requirements. B. The date of final acceptance shall be documented in writing and signed by the Architect, Owner and Contractor. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and other information needed for identification. B. Deliver products to the project at such time as the project is ready to receive the equipment, pipe or duct- properly protected from incidental damage and weather damage. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 23 02 00-2 METHODS FOR HVAC 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop C. Damaged equipment, duct or pipe shall be promptly removed from the site and new, undamaged equipment, pipe or duct shall be installed in its place promptly with no additional charge to the Owner. 1.09 NOISE AND VIBRATION A. The heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems, and the component parts thereof, shall be guaranteed to operate without objectionable noise and vibration. B. Provide foundations, supports and isolators as specified or indicated, properly adjusted to prevent transmission of vibration to the building structure, piping and other items. C. Carefully fabricate ductwork and fittings with smooth interior finish to prevent turbulence and generation or regeneration of noise. D. All equipment shall be selected to operate with minimum of noise and vibration. If, in the opinion of the Architect, objectionable noise or vibration is produced or transmitted to or through the building structure by equipment, piping, ducts or other parts of the Work, the Contractor shall rectify such conditions without extra cost to the Owner. 1.10 DELEGATED DESIGN FOR ANCHORAGE OF ROOF MOUNTED EQUIPMENT A. The Contractor shall engage a qualified professional engineer to design all roof mounted equipment curbs, equipment supports, equipment tie downs, equipment connections, and methods of attachment for components that are to be anchored to the building structure. The design shall comply with wind load and uplift requirements utilizing design criteria per ICC (IBC) and ASCE 7 unless criteria is otherwise indicated in the Construction Documents. B. Submittal: Signed and sealed engineering analysis data and accompanying details, drawings, and supplemental installation information shall be submitted to the engineer for review. 1.11 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS A. Obtain all required permits and inspections for all work required by the Contract Documents and pay all required fees in connection thereof. B. Arrange with the serving utility companies for the connection of all required utilities and pay all charges, meter charges, connection fees and inspection fees, if required. C. Comply with all applicable codes, specifications, local ordinances, industry standards, utility company regulations and the applicable requirements which includes and is not limited to the following nationally accepted codes and standards: 1. Air Moving & Conditioning Association, AMCA. 2. American Standards Association, ASA. 3. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc., AS H RAE. 4. American Society of Mechanical Engineers, ASME. 5. American Society of Plumbing Engineers, ASPE. 6. American Society of Testing Materials, ASTM. 7. American Water Works Association, AWWA. S. National Bureau of Standards, NBS. 9. National Fire Protection Association, NFPA. 10. Sheet Metal &Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association, SMACNA. 11. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., UL. 12. International Building Code, IBC. 13. International Energy Conservation Code, IECC. 14. International Fire Code, IFC. 15. International Fuel Gas Code, IFGC. 16. International Mechanical Code, IMC. D. Where differences existing between the Contract Documents and applicable state or city building codes, state and local ordinances, industry standards, utility company regulations and the applicable requirements of the nationally accepted codes and standards, the more stringent or costly application shall govern. Promptly notify the Engineer in writing of all differences. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 23 02 00-3 METHODS FOR HVAC 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop E. When directed in writing by the Engineer, remove all work installed that does not comply with the Contract Documents and applicable state or city building codes, state and local ordinances, industry standards, utility company regulations and the applicable requirements of the above listed nationally accepted codes and standards, correct the deficiencies, and complete the work at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.12 DEFINITIONS AND SYMBOLS A. General Explanation: A substantial amount of construction and Specification language constitutes definitions for terms found in other Contract Documents, including Drawings which must be recognized as diagrammatic and schematic in nature and not completely descriptive of requirements indicated thereon. Certain terms used in Contract Documents are defined generally in this article, unless defined otherwise in Division 01. B. Definitions and explanations of this Section are not necessarily either complete or exclusive, but are general for work to the extent not stated more explicitly in another provision of the Contract Documents. C. Indicated: The term "Indicated" is a cross-reference to details, notes or schedules on the Drawings, to other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications and to similar means of recording requirements in Contract Documents. Where such terms as "Shown", "Noted", "Scheduled", "Specified" and "Detailed" are used in lieu of"Indicated", it is for the purpose of helping the reader locate cross-reference material, and no limitation of location is intended except as specifically shown. D. Directed: Where not otherwise explained, terms such as "Directed", "Requested", "Accepted", and "Permitted" mean by the Architect or Engineer. However, no such implied meaning will be interpreted to extend the Architect's or Engineer's responsibility into the Contractor's area of construction supervision. E. Reviewed: Where used in conjunction with the Engineer's response to submittals, requests for information, applications, inquiries, reports and claims by the Contractor the meaning of the term "Reviewed"will be held to limitations of Architect's and Engineer's responsibilities and duties as specified in the General and Supplemental Conditions. In no case will "Reviewed" by Engineer be interpreted as a release of the Contractor from responsibility to fulfill the terms and requirements of the Contract Documents. F. Furnish: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term "Furnish" is used to mean supply and deliver to the project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, etc., as applicable in each instance. G. Install: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term "Install" is used to describe operations at the project site including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protection, cleaning and similar operations, as applicable in each instance. H. Provide: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term "Provide" is used to mean "Furnish and Install", complete and ready for intended use, as applicable in each instance. I. Installer: Entity (person or firm)engaged by the Contractor, or its Subcontractor or Sub- subcontractor for performance of a particular unit of work at the project site, including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protection, cleaning and similar operations, as applicable in each instance. It is a general requirement that such entities (Installers) be expert in the operations they are engaged to perform. J. Imperative Language: Used generally in Specifications. Except as otherwise indicated, requirements expressed imperatively are to be performed by the Contractor. For clarity of reading at certain locations, contrasting subjective language is used to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor or, when so noted, by other identified installers or entities. K. Minimum Quality/Quantity: In every instance, the quality level or quantity shown or specified is intended as minimum quality level or quantity of work to be performed or provided. Except as DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 23 02 00-4 METHODS FOR HVAC 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop otherwise specifically indicated, the actual work may either comply exactly with that minimum (within specified tolerances), or may exceed that minimum within reasonable tolerance limits. In complying with requirements, indicated or scheduled numeric values are either minimums or maximums as noted or as appropriate for the context of the requirements. Refer instances of uncertainty to Owner or Engineer via a request for information (RFI) for decision before proceeding. L. Abbreviations and Symbols: The language of Specifications and other Contract Documents including Drawings is of an abbreviated type in certain instances, and implies words and meanings which will be appropriately interpreted. Actual word abbreviations of a self- explanatory nature have been included in text of Specifications and Drawings. Specific abbreviations and symbols have been established, principally for lengthy technical terminology and primarily in conjunction with coordination of Specification requirements with notations on Drawings and in Schedules. These are frequently defined in Section at first instance of use or on a Legend and Symbol Drawing. Trade and industry association names and titles of generally recognized industry standards are frequently abbreviated. Singular words will be interpreted as plural and plural words will be interpreted as singular where applicable and where full context of Contract Documents so indicate. Except as otherwise indicated, graphic symbols and abbreviations used on Drawings and in Specifications are those recognized in construction industry for indicated purposes. Where not otherwise noted symbols and abbreviations are defined by the latest ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook, chapter 34 "Abbreviations and Symbols", ASME and ASPE published standards. 1.13 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. These Specifications are intended to supplement the Drawings and it will not be the province of the Specifications to mention any part of the Work which the Drawings are competent to fully explain in every particular and such omission is not to relieve the Contractor from carrying out portions indicated on the Drawings only. B. Should items be required by these Specifications and not indicated on the Drawings, they are to be supplied even if of such nature that they could have been indicated thereon. In case of disagreement between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Drawings or Specifications, the better quality or greater quantity of work shall be estimated and the matter referred to the Architect or Engineer for review with a request for information and clarification at least 7 working days prior to bid opening date for issuance of an addendum. C. The listing of product manufacturers, materials and methods in the various sections of the Specifications, and indicated on the Drawings, is intended to establish a standard of quality only. It is not the intention of the Owner or Engineer to discriminate against any product, material or method that is the equivalent of the standards as indicated and/or specified, nor is it intended to preclude open, competitive bidding. The fact that a specific manufacturer is listed as an acceptable manufacturer should not be interpreted to mean that the manufacturer's standard product will meet the requirements of the project design, Drawings, Specifications and space constraints. D. The Architect or Engineer and Owner shall be the sole judge of quality and equivalence of equipment, materials and methods. E. Products by other reliable manufacturers, other materials, and other methods, will be accepted as outlined, provided they have equivalent capacity, construction, and performance. However, under no circumstances shall any substitution be made without the written permission of the Architect or Engineer and Owner. Request for prior approval must be made in writing 10 calendar days prior to the bid date without fail. F. Wherever a definite product, material or method is specified and there is not a statement that another product, material or method will be acceptable, it is the intention of the Owner or Engineer that the specified product, material or method is the only one that shall be used without prior approval. G. Wherever a definite material or manufacturer's product is specified and the Specification states that products of similar design and equivalent construction from the specified list of manufacturers may be substituted, it is the intention of the Owner or Engineer that products of DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 23 02 00-5 METHODS FOR HVAC 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop manufacturers that are specified are the only products that will be acceptable and that products of other manufacturers will not be considered for substitution without approval. H. Wherever a definite product, material or method is specified and there is a statement that"OR EQUIVALENT' product, material or method will be acceptable, it is the intention of the Owner or Engineer that the specified product, material or method or an "OR EQUIVALENT' product, material or method may be used if it complies with the Specifications and is submitted for review to the Engineer as outline herein. I. Where permission to use substituted or alternative equipment on the project is granted by the Owner or Engineer in writing, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor or Subcontractor involved to verify that the equipment will fit in the space available which includes allowances for all required Code and maintenance clearances, and to coordinate all equipment structural support, plumbing and electrical requirements and provisions with the Mechanical (HVAC) Design Documents and all other trades, including Division 26. J. Changes in architectural, structural, electrical, mechanical, and plumbing requirements for the substitution shall be the responsibility of the bidder wishing to make the substitution. This shall include the cost of redesign by the affected designer(s). Any additional cost incurred by affected Subcontractors shall be the responsibility of this bidder and not the Owner. K. If any request for a substitution of product, material or method is rejected, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the Specifications. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. L. The Owner or Engineer will investigate all requests for substitutions when submitted in accordance with the requirements listed above; and if accepted, will issue a letter allowing the substitutions. M. Where equipment other than that used in the design as specified or shown on the Drawings is substituted (either from an approved manufacturers list or by submittal review), it shall be the responsibility of the substituting Contractor to coordinate space requirements, building provisions and connection requirements with his trades and all other trades; and to pay all additional costs to other trades, the Owner, the Architect or Engineer, if any, due to the substitutions. 1.14 SUBMITTALS A. Coordinate with Division 01 for submittal timetable requirements, unless noted otherwise within thirty(30) days after the Contract is awarded. The Contractor shall submit an electronic copy of a complete set of shop drawings and complete data covering each item of equipment or material. The submittal of each item requiring a submittal must be received by the Architect or Engineer within the above thirty-day period. The Architect or Engineer shall not be responsible for any delays or costs incurred due to excessive shop drawing review time for submittals received after the thirty (30) day time limit. The Architect and Engineer will retain a copy of all shop drawings for their files. All literature pertaining to items subject to Shop Drawing submittal shall be submitted at one time. Submittals shall be placed in one electronic file in PDF 8.0 format and bookmarked for individual specification sections. Individual electronic files of submittals for individual specifications shall not be permitted. Each submittal shall include the following items: 1. A cover sheet with the names and addresses of the Project, Architect, MEP Engineer, General Contractor and the Subcontractor making the submittal. The cover sheet shall also contain the section number covering the item or items submitted and the item nomenclature or description. 2. An index page with a listing of all data included in the Submittal. 3. A list of variations page with a listing of all variations, including unfurnished or additional required accessories, items or other features, between the submitted equipment and the specified equipment. If there are no variations, then this page shall state "NO VARIATIONS". Where variations affect the work of other Contractors, then the Contractor shall certify on this page that these variations have been fully coordinated with the affected Contractors and that all expenses associated with the variations will be paid by the submitting Contractor. This page will be signed by the submitting Contractor. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 23 02 00-6 METHODS FOR HVAC 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 4. Equipment information including manufacturer's name and designation, size, performance and capacity data as applicable. All applicable Listings, Labels, Approvals and Standards shall be clearly indicated. 5. Dimensional data and scaled drawings as applicable to show that the submitted equipment will fit the space available with all required Code and maintenance clearances clearly indicated and labeled at a minimum scale of 1/4" = 1'-0", as required to demonstrate that the alternate or substituted product will fit in the space available. 6. Identification of each item of material or equipment matching that indicated on the Drawings. 7. Sufficient pictorial, descriptive and diagrammatic data on each item to show its conformance with the Drawings and Specifications. Any options or special requirements or accessories shall be so indicated. All applicable information shall be clearly indicated with arrows or another approved method. 8. Additional information as required in other Sections of this Division. 9. Certification by the General Contractor and Subcontractor that the material submitted is in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications, signed and dated in long hand. Submittals that do not comply with the above requirements shall be returned to the Contractor and shall be marked "REVISE AND RESUBMIT". B. Refer to Division 00 and Division 01 for additional information on shop drawings and submittals. C. Equipment and materials submittals and shop drawings will be reviewed for compliance with design concept only. It will be assumed that the submitting Contractor has verified that all items submitted can be installed in the space allotted. Review of shop drawings and submittals shall not be considered as a verification or guarantee of measurements or building conditions. D. Where shop drawings and submittals are marked "REVIEWED", the review of the submittal does not indicate that submittals have been checked in detail nor does it in any way relieve the Contractor from his responsibility to furnish material and perform work as required by the Contract Documents. E. Shop drawings shall be reviewed and returned to the Contractor with one of the following categories indicated: 1. REVIEWED: Contractor need take no further submittal action, shall include this submittal in the O&M manual and may order the equipment submitted on. 2. REVIEWED AS NOTED: Contractor shall submit a letter verifying that required exceptions to the submittal have been received and complied with including additional accessories or coordination action as noted, and shall include this submittal and compliance letter in the O&M manual. The contractor may order the equipment submitted on at the time of the returned submittal providing the Contractor complies with the exceptions noted. 3. NOT APPROVED: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material, equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is not approved. The Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the Specifications and/or Drawings. Contractor shall not order equipment that is not approved. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. 4. REVISE AND RESUBMIT: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material, equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is marked revise and resubmit. The Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the Specifications and/or provide as noted on previous shop drawings. Contractor shall not order equipment marked revise and resubmit. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. 5. CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION REQUIRED: Contractor shall resubmit submittal on material, equipment or method of installation. The Contractor's stamp is required stating that the submittal meets all conditions of the Contract Documents. The stamp shall be signed by the General Contractor. The submittal will not be reviewed if the stamp is not placed and signed on all shop drawings. 6. MANUFACTURER NOT AS SPECIFIED: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material, equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is marked DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 23 02 00-7 METHODS FOR HVAC 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop manufacturer not as specified. The Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the Specifications. Contractor shall not order equipment when submittal is marked manufacturer not as specified. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. F. Materials and equipment which are purchased or installed without submittal review shall be at the risk of the Contractor and the cost for removal and replacement of such materials and equipment and related work which is judged unsatisfactory by the Owner or Engineer for any reason shall be at the expense of the Contractor. The responsible Contractor shall remove the material and equipment noted above and replace with specified equipment or material at his own expense when directed in writing by the Architect or Engineer. G. Shop Drawing Submittals shall be complete and checked prior to submission to the Engineer for review. H. Submittals are required for, but not limited to, the following items subject to project requirements: 1. Coordination Drawings 2. Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment 3. Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping 4. Variable Frequency Motor Speed Control for HVAC Equipment 5. Hangers and Support for Piping and Equipment HVAC 6. Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment 7. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing 8. Duct Insulation 9. HVAC Equipment Insulation 10. HVAC Piping Insulation 11. Refrigerant Monitor System 12. Energy Management and Control System 13. Above Ground Hydronic Piping 14. Hydronic Specialties 15. Hydronic Pumps 16. Refrigerant Piping 17. Metal Ductwork 18. Ductwork Accessories 19. Duct Silencers 20. HVAC Fans 21. High-Volume Low-Speed Propeller Fans 22. Dust Collection Systems 23. Series Fan Powered Terminal Units 24. Single Duct VAV Terminal Box 25. Parallel Fan Powered Terminal Unit 26. Dual Duct Air Terminal Units 27. Air Distribution Devices 28. HVAC Gravity Ventilators 29. Air Filters 30. Air Purification Systems 31. Flue Pipe Systems 32. Non-Condensing Boilers 33. Condensing Boilers 34. Finned Water-Tube Boilers 35. Steel Water-Tube Boilers 36. Gas Fired Furnaces 37. Gas Fired Roof Mounted Make-up Air Unit Heaters 38. Shell and Tube Heat Exchanger 39. Plate-Type, Liquid-To-Liquid Heat Exchangers 40. Centrifugal Liquid Chiller DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 23 02 00-8 METHODS FOR HVAC 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 41. Rotary Screw Water Chillers 42. Air Cooled Rotary Liquid Chiller 43. Induced Draft Cooling Tower 44. Energy Recovery Ventilator 45. Modular Indoor Central Station Air Handling Units 46. Packaged Air Handling Unit 47. Modular Outdoor Central Station Air Handling Units 48. 100% Outside Air Rooftop Unit with Gas Heat 49. Self-Contained Air Conditioners 50. Rooftop Heating and Cooling Units Electric Cooling-Gas Heating 51. Rooftop Heating and Cooling Units Electric Cooling-Electric Heat 52. Variable Air Volume Rooftop Units 53. Split System Air-Conditioners-Wall-Mounted 54. Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF)for HVAC System 55. Water Source Heat Pump Unit 56. Fan Coil Unit 57. Unit Ventilators 58. Electric Unit Heaters 59. Electric Duct Heaters 60. Radiant Heating Electric Cables 61. Air Conditioning Unit for Swimming Pool Enclosures I. Refer to other Division 23 sections for additional submittal requirements. Provide samples of actual materials and/or equipment to be used on the Project upon request of the Owner or Engineer. 1.15 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Prepare coordination drawings to a scale of 1/4"=V-0" or larger; detailing major elements, components, and systems of mechanical equipment and materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and building components. Indicate locations where space is limited for installation and access, and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the Work, including (but not necessarily limited to)the following: 1. Indicate the proposed locations of pipe, duct, equipment, and other materials. Include the following: a. Wall and type locations. b. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation. c. Locations of light fixtures and sprinkler heads. d. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, including tube removal, filter removal, and space for equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance. e. Equipment connections and support details. f. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations. g. Routing of storm and sanitary sewer piping. h. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations. i. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases. j. Valve stem movement. k. Structural floor, wall and roof opening sizes and details. 2. Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction. 3. Prepare floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations. 4. Prepare reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installations, air distribution devices, light fixtures, communication systems components, and other ceiling-mounted items. B. This Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of all items that will affect the installation of the work of this Division. This coordination shall include, but not be limited to: voltage, DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 23 02 00-9 METHODS FOR HVAC 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop ampacity, capacity, electrical and piping connections, space requirements, sequence of construction, building requirements and special conditions. C. By submitting coordination drawings on the project, this Contractor is indicating that all necessary coordination has been completed and that the systems, products and equipment submitted can be installed in the building and will operate as specified and intended, in full coordination with all other Contractors and Subcontractors. 1.16 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Prepare Record Documents in accordance with the requirements of Division 00 and Division 01, in addition to the requirements specified in Division 23. B. The Contractor shall maintain a separate set of clearly and legibly marked Record Drawings on the job site to record all changes and modifications, including, but not limited to the following: work details, alterations to meet site conditions, and changes made by "Change Order" notices. Mark the drawings with colored pencil(s). These shall be available for review by the Owner, Architect or Engineer during the entire construction stage. C. The Record Drawings shall be updated concurrently as construction progresses, and in no case less frequently than a daily basis. They shall indicate accurate dimensions for all buried or concealed work, precise locations of all concealed pipe or duct, locations of all concealed valves, controls and devices and any deviations from the work shown on the Construction Documents. All dimensions shall include at least two dimensions to permanent structure points. D. Record Drawings shall indicate, at a minimum, the following installed conditions: 1. Duct mains and branches, size and location, for both exterior and interior; locations of dampers, fire dampers, duct access panels, and other control devices; filters, fuel fired heaters, fan coils, condensing units, and roof-top A/C units requiring periodic maintenance or repair. 2. Mains and branches of piping systems, with valves and control devices located and numbered, concealed unions located, and with items requiring maintenance located (i.e., traps, strainers, expansion compensators, tanks, etc.). Valve location diagrams, complete with valve tag chart. Indicate actual inverts and horizontal locations of underground piping. 3. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent building lines. 4. Approved substitutions, Contract Modifications, and actual equipment and materials installed. 5. Contract Modifications, actual equipment and materials installed. E. Engage the services of a Land Surveyor or Professional Engineer registered in the state in which the project is located as specified herein to record the locations and invert elevations of underground installations. F. If the Contractor does not keep an accurate set of Record Drawings, the pay request may be altered or delayed at the request of the Architect. Delivery of Record Documents is a condition of final acceptance. Record Drawings shall be furnished in addition to Shop Drawings. G. The Contractor shall submit an electronic copy of the record documents in PDF format and one (1)full size set of Record Drawing prints to the Architect or Engineer for review prior to scheduling the final inspection at the completion of the work. The drawings shall have the name(s) and seal(s)of the Engineer(s) removed or blanked out and shall be clearly marked and signed on each sheet as follows: CERTIFIED RECORD DRAWINGS DATE: (NAME OF GENERAL CONTRACTOR) BY: (SIGNATURE) (NAME OF SUBCONTRACTOR) DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 23 02 00- 10 METHODS FOR HVAC 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop BY: (SIGNATURE) 1.17 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Prepare operating and maintenance manuals in accordance with Division 00 and Division 01 and, in addition to the requirements specified in those Divisions, include the following information for equipment items: 1. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replacement parts. a. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions. b. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions. c. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules. 1.18 CERTIFICATIONS AND TEST REPORTS A. Submit a detailed schedule for completion and testing of each system indicating scheduled dates for completion of system installation and outlining tests to be performed and scheduled date for each test. This detailed completion and test schedule shall be submitted at least 90 days before the projected substantial completion date. B. Test result reporting forms shall be submitted for review no later than the date of the detailed schedule. C. Submit 4 copies of all certifications and test reports to the Architect or Engineer for review adequately in advance of substantial completion of the Work to allow for remedial action as required to correct deficiencies discovered in equipment and systems. D. Certifications and test reports to be submitted shall include, but not be limited to, those items outlined in Section 23 02 00. 1.19 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Prepare Operations and Maintenance manuals in accordance with the requirements of Division 01 and Division 23. In addition to the requirements of other Sections, this shall include the following information for equipment items: 1. Identifying names, name tags designations and locations for all equipment. 2. Valve tag lists with valve number, type, color coding, location and function. 3. Reviewed Shop Drawing submittals with exceptions noted compliance letter. 4. Fabrication drawings. 5. Equipment and device bulletins and data sheets clearly highlighted to show equipment installed on the project and including performance curves and data as applicable, i.e., description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and model numbers of replacement parts. 6. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions. 7. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions. 8. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules. 9. Equipment and motor name plate data. 10. Wiring diagrams. 11. Exploded parts views and parts lists for all equipment and devices. 12. Color coding charts for all painted equipment and conduit. 13. Location and listing of all spare parts and special keys and tools furnished to the Owner. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 23 02 00- 11 METHODS FOR HVAC 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 14. Furnish recommended lubrication schedule for all required lubrication points with listing of type and approximate amount of lubricant required. B. Coordinate with Division 01 for Operations and Maintenance manual requirements. Unless noted otherwise, bind together in "D ring" style three-ring binders (National model no. 79-883 or equivalent). Binders shall be large enough to allow'/4" of spare capacity. Include three (3)sets with all approved Shop Drawing submittals, fabrication drawings, bulletins, maintenance instructions, operating instructions and parts exploded views and lists for each and every piece of equipment furnished under this Specification. All sections shall be typed and indexed into sections with tabbed insertable dividers, labeled for easy reference. Utilize the individual specification section numbers shown in the Mechanical Specifications as an organization guideline. Bulletins containing information about equipment that is not installed on the project shall be properly marked up or stripped and reassembled. All pertinent information required by the Owner for proper operation and maintenance of equipment supplied by Division 23 shall be clearly and legibly set forth in memoranda that shall, likewise, be bound with bulletins. C. In addition to the bound "hard-copy" Operation and Maintenance manuals referenced above, provide an identical electronic copy in searchable PDF format, with all sections bookmarked within the file for easy reference. Provide a USB flash drive with the final manual to the Owner. D. Operating and Maintenance Manuals shall be turned over to the Owner or Engineer for review a minimum of fourteen (14)working days prior to the beginning of the operator training period. E. Operating and Maintenance Manuals which the Engineer deems incomplete, poorly organized, or otherwise unacceptable will be rejected in writing. The Contractor will subsequently be required to again turn over Operating and Maintenance Manuals, with all deficiencies corrected, until deemed acceptable by the Engineer. 1.20 OPERATOR TRAINING A. The Contractor shall furnish the services of factory trained specialists to instruct the Owner's operating personnel. The Owner's operator training shall include a minimum of 12 hours of onsite training in three (3) shifts of four(4) hours each. B. Before proceeding with the instruction of Owner Personnel, prepare a typed outline in triplicate, listing the subjects that will be covered in this instruction, and submit the outline for review by the Owner. At the conclusion of the instruction period, obtain the signature of each person being instructed on each copy of the reviewed outline to signify that he has a proper understanding of the operation and maintenance of the systems and resubmit the signed outlines. C. Refer to other Division 23 Sections for additional Operator Training requirements. 1.21 FINAL COMPLETION A. At the completion of the Work, all equipment and systems shall be tested and faulty equipment and material shall be repaired or replaced. Refer to Sections of Division 23 for additional requirements. B. Clean and adjust all air distribution devices and replace all air filters immediately prior to Substantial Completion. C. Touch up and/or refinish all scratched equipment and devices immediately prior to Substantial Completion. 1.22 CONTRACTOR'S GUARANTEE A. Use of the HVAC systems to provide temporary service during construction period will not be allowed without permission from the Owner in writing; and, if granted, shall not cause the warranty period to start, except as defined below. B. Contractor shall guarantee to keep the entire installation in repair and perfect working order for a period of one year after the date of the Substantial Completion, and shall furnish (free of additional cost to the Owner) all materials and labor necessary to comply with the above guarantee throughout the year beginning from the date of Substantial Completion, Beneficial Occupancy by the Owner, or the Certificate of Final Payment as agreed upon by all parties. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 23 02 00- 12 METHODS FOR HVAC 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop C. This guarantee shall not include cleaning or changing filters except as required by testing, adjusting and balancing. D. All air conditioning compressors shall have parts and labor guarantees provided by the equipment manufacturer for a period of not less than 5 years beyond the date of Substantial Completion. E. Refer to Sections in Division 23 for additional guarantee or warranty requirements. 1.23 TRANSFER OF ELECTRONIC FILES A. Project documents are not intended or represented to be suitable for reuse by Architect/Owner or others on extensions of this project or on any other project. Any such reuse or modification without written verification or adaptation by Engineer, as appropriate for the specific purpose intended, will be at Architect/Owner's risk and without liability or legal exposure to Engineer or its consultants from all claims, damages, losses and expense, including attorney's fees arising out of or resulting thereof. B. Because data stored in electronic media format can deteriorate or be modified inadvertently, or otherwise, without authorization of the data's creator, the party receiving the electronic files agrees that it will perform acceptance tests or procedures within sixty (60) days of receipt, after which time the receiving party shall be deemed to have accepted the data thus transferred to be acceptable.Any errors detected within the sixty (60)day acceptance period will be corrected by the party delivering the electronic files. Engineer is not responsible for maintaining documents stored in electronic media format after acceptance by the Architect/Owner. C. When transferring documents in electronic media format, Engineer makes no representations as to the long term compatibility, usability or readability of documents resulting from the use of software application packages, operating systems, or computer hardware differing from those used by Engineer at the beginning of the Project. D. Any reuse or modifications will be at the Contractor's sole risk and without liability or legal exposure to Architect, Engineer or any consultant. E. The Texas Board of Architectural Examiners (TBAE) has stated that it is in violation of Texas law for persons other than the Architect of record to revise the Architectural drawings without the Architect's written consent. 1. It is agreed that"MEP" hard copy or computer-generated documents will not be issued to any other party except directly to the Architect/Owner. The Contract Documents are contractually copyrighted and cannot be used for any other project or purpose except as specifically indicated in AIA B-141 Standard Form of Agreement Between Architect and Owner. 2. If the client, Architect or Owner of the project requires electronic media for"record purposes", then AutoCAD/ Revit documents will be prepared by Engineer on electronic media such as removable memory devices, flash drives or CD's. These documents can also be submitted via file transfer protocols. AutoCAD/ Revit files will be submitted with all title block references intact to permit the end user to only view and plot the drawings. Revisions will not be permitted in this configuration. 3. At the Architect/Owner's request, Engineer will assist the Contractor in the preparation of the submittals and prepare one copy of AutoCAD/ Revit files on electronic media or submit through file transfer protocols. The electronic media will be prepared with all indicia of documents ownership removed. The electronic media will be prepared in a ".rvt"or".dwg" format to permit the end user to revise the drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide materials and equipment manufactured by a domestic United States manufacturer and assembled in the United States for all local and Federal Government projects. These materials and equipment shall comply with "Buy American Act." B. Access Doors: Provide access doors as required for access to equipment, valves, controls, cleanouts and other apparatus where concealed. Access doors shall have concealed hinges DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 23 02 00- 13 METHODS FOR HVAC 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop and screw driver cam locks. C. All access doors located in wet areas such as restrooms, locker rooms, shower rooms, kitchen and any other wet areas shall be constructed of stainless steel. D. Access Doors: shall be as follows: 1. Plaster Surfaces: Milcor Style K. 2. Ceramic Tile Surface: Milcor Style M. 3. Drywall Surfaces: Milcor Style DW. 4. Install doors only in locations approved by the Architect. 2.02 EQUIPMENT PADS A. Provide 6-inch-high concrete pads for indoor floor mounted equipment. Pads shall conform to the shape of the equipment with a minimum extension of 6 inch beyond the equipment on all sides. Top and sides of pads shall be troweled to a smooth finish, equivalent to the floor. External corners shall be bullnosed to a 3/4" radius, unless shown otherwise. B. Provide 6-inch-high concrete pads for all exterior mounted equipment. Pads shall conform to the shape of the equipment with a minimum extension of 6 inch beyond the equipment on all sides. Provide a 4-foot monolithic extension to the pad in front of the equipment for service when mounted on a non-finished area (i.e. landscape, gravel, clay, etc.)Top and sides of pads shall be troweled to a smooth finish. External corners shall be bullnosed to a 3/4" radius, unless shown otherwise. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ROUGH-IN A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected via reviewed submittals. B. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 2 through 48 for additional rough-in requirements. 3.02 MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS A. General: Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of mechanical systems, materials, and equipment. Comply with the following requirements: 1. Coordinate mechanical systems, equipment, and materials installation with other building components. 2. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. 3. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations. 4. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured- in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. 5. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building. 6. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials, and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. 7. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service. 8. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with architectural action markings on submittal, including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, resolve conflicts and submit proposed solution to the Architect for review. 9. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, where installed exposed in finished spaces. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 23 02 00- 14 METHODS FOR HVAC 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 10. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as possible, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. Extend grease fittings to an accessible location and label. 11. Install access doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces. Refer to paragraph 2.1 in this section and architect for access doors specifications and location. 12. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required to be installed at a specified slope. 13. Provide roof curbs for all roof mounted equipment. Coordinate with roof construction for pitched roof. Provide roof curbs which match the roof slope and provides a level top for equipment installation. Refer to Architectural drawings and details. 14. The equipment to be furnished under these Specifications shall be essentially the standard product of the manufacturer. Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are required, these units shall be products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the system need not be the product of the same manufacturer. 15. The Architectural and Structural features of the building and the space limitations shall be considered in selection of all equipment. No equipment shall be furnished which will not suit the arrangement and space limitations indicated. 16. Lubrication: Prior to start-up, check and properly lubricate all bearings as recommended by the manufacturer. 17. Where the word "Concealed" is used in these Specifications in connection with insulating, painting, piping, ducts, etc., it shall be understood to mean hidden from sight as in chases, furred spaces or suspended ceilings. "Exposed" shall be understood to mean the opposite of concealed. 18. Identification of Mechanical Equipment: a. Mechanical equipment shall be identified by means of nameplates permanently attached to the equipment. Nameplates shall be engraved laminated plastic or etched metal. Submittals shall include dimensions and lettering format for approval. Attachment shall be with escutcheon pins, self-tapping screws, or machine screws. b. Tags shall be attached to all valves, including control valves, with nonferrous chain. Tags shall be brass and at least 1-1/2 inches in diameter. Nameplate and tag symbols shall correspond to the identification symbols on the temperature control submittal and the "as-built" drawings. 19. Provide construction filters for all air handling units, fan coil unit, VAV boxes, and all other air handling equipment during the entire construction period. 20. Provide temporary construction strains for all strainers in the hydronic systems during the initial flushing of the systems. 3.03 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Protection of Installed Work: During cutting and patching operations, protect adjacent installations. B. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of mechanical equipment and materials required to: 1. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work. 2. Remove and replace defective Work. 3. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing. 5. Install equipment and materials in existing structures. 6. Upon written instructions from the Engineer, uncover and restore Work to provide for Engineer/Owner's observation of concealed Work, without additional cost to the Owner. 7. Patch existing finished surfaces and building components using new materials matching existing materials and experienced Installers. Patch finished surfaces and building components using new materials specified for the original installation and experienced Installers; refer to the materials and methods required for the surface and building components being patched; Refer to Paragraph 1.11 1 for definition of"Installer." C. Cut, remove and legally dispose of selected mechanical equipment, components, and materials as indicated, including but not limited to removal of mechanical piping, mechanical ducts and DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 23 02 00- 15 METHODS FOR HVAC 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop HVAC units, and other mechanical items made obsolete by the new Work. D. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to be removed. E. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas. 3.04 WORK SEQUENCE, TIMING, COORDINATION WITH OWNER, ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER A. The Owner will cooperate with the Contractor, however, the following provisions must be observed: 1. A meeting will be held at the project site, prior to any construction, between the Owner's Representative, the General Contractor, the Sub-Contractors and the Engineer to discuss Contractor's employee parking space, access, storage of equipment or materials, and use of the Owner's facilities or utilities. The Owner's decisions regarding such matters shall be final. 2. During the construction of this project, normal facility activities will continue in existing buildings until renovated areas are completed. Plumbing, fire protection, lighting, electrical, communications, heating, air conditioning, and ventilation systems shall be maintained in service within the occupied spaces of the existing building. 3. Contractor shall not start-up any of the HVAC equipment unless the Owner, Architect and Engineer are signed off. 4. Start-up for major HVAC equipment such as chillers, cooling towers, variable frequency drives and hot water boilers shall be performed by a factory technician. The start-up shall include a written report signed off by Contractor, Engineer and Owner. 3.05 DEMOLITION AND WORK WITHIN EXISTING BUILDINGS A. In the preparation of these documents every effort has been made to show the approximate locations of, and connections to, the existing piping, duct, equipment and other apparatus related to this phase of the Work. However, this Contractor shall be responsible for verifying all of the above information. This Contractor shall visit the existing site to inspect the facilities and related areas. This Contractor shall inspect and verify all details and requirements of all the Contract Documents, prior to the submission of a proposal. All discrepancies between the Contract Documents and actual job-site conditions shall be resolved by the contractor, who shall produce drawings that shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for review. All labor and materials required to perform the work described shall be a part of this Contract. B. All equipment and/or systems noted on the Drawings "To Remain" shall be inspected and tested on site to certify its working condition. A written report on the condition of all equipment to remain, including a copy of the test results and recommended remedial actions and costs shall be made by this Contractor to the Architect/Engineer for review. C. All equipment and/or systems noted on the Drawings "To Be Removed" shall be removed including, associated pipe and duct, pipe and duct hangers and/or line supports. Where duct or pipe is to be capped for future or end of line use, it shall be properly tagged with its function or service appropriately identified. Where existing equipment is to be removed or relocated and has an electric motor or connection, the Electrical Contractor shall disconnect motor or connection, remove wiring to a safe point and this Contractor shall remove or relocate motor or connection along with the equipment. D. During construction and remodeling, portions of the Project shall remain in service. Construction equipment, material, tools, extension cords, etc., shall be arranged so as to present minimum hazard or interruption to the occupants of the building. None of the construction work shall interfere with the proper operation of the existing facility; or be so conducted as to cause harm or danger to persons on the premises. All fire exits, stairs or corridors required for proper access, circulation or exit shall remain clear of equipment, materials or debris. The General Contractor shall maintain barricades, other separations in corridors and other spaces where work is conducted. E. Certain work during the demolition and construction phases may require overtime or night time shifts or temporary evacuation of the occupants. Coordinate and schedule all proposed down DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 23 02 00- 16 METHODS FOR HVAC 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop time with the Owner at least seventy-two (72) hours in advance in writing. F. Any salvageable equipment as determined by the Owner, shall be delivered to the Owner, and placed in storage at the location of his choice. All other debris shall be removed from the site immediately. G. Equipment, piping or other potential hazards to the occupants of the building shall not be left overnight outside of the designated working or construction area. H. Make every effort to minimize damage to the existing building and the Owner's property. Repair, patch or replace as required any damage that occurs as a result of work at the site. Care shall be taken to minimize interference with the Owner's activities during construction and to keep construction disrupted areas to a minimum. Coordinate with the Owner and other trades in scheduling and performance of the work. I. Include in the contract price all rerouting of existing pipe, duct, etc., and the reconnecting of the existing equipment as necessitated by field conditions to allow the installation of the new systems regardless of whether or not such rerouting, reconnecting or relocating is shown on the Drawings. Furnish all temporary pipe, duct, controls, etc., as required to maintain heating, cooling, and ventilation services for the existing areas with a minimum of interruption. J. All existing pipe, duct, materials, equipment, controls and appurtenances not included in the remodel or alteration areas are to remain in place. K. Pipe, duct, equipment and controls serving mechanical and other Owner's equipment, etc., which is to remain but is served by pipe, duct, equipment and controls that are disturbed by the remodeling work, shall be reconnected in such a manner as to leave this equipment in proper operating condition. L. No portion of the fire protection systems shall be turned off, modified or changed in any way without the express knowledge and written permission of the Owner's representative in order to protect systems that shall remain in service. M. It is the intention of this Section of the Specifications to outline minimum requirements to furnish the Owner with a turn-key and operating system in cooperation with other trades with a minimum of disruption or downtime. N. Refer to Architectural Demolition and/or Alteration plans for actual location of walls, ceilings, etc., being removed and/or remodeled. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 23 02 00- 17 METHODS FOR HVAC 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SECTION 23 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. Section 23 02 00- Basic Materials and Methods for HVAC shall be included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE A. Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use. B. WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: 1. Painting 2. Automatic temperature controls 3. Power control wiring to motors and equipment 1.03 WARRANTY A. Warrant the Work specified herein for one year and motors for five years beginning on the date of substantial completion. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. IEEE 112- IEEE Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators; 2017. B. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; 2021. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Indicate size material, and finish. Show locations and installation procedures. Include details of joints, attachments, and clearances. B. PRODUCT DATA: Submit schedules, charts, literature, and illustrations to indicate the performance, fabrication procedures variations, and accessories. C. MOTOR NAMEPLATE INFORMATION: Manufacturer's name, address, utility and operating data. D. Refer to Division One for additional information. 1.06 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. DELIVERY: Deliver clearly labeled, undamaged materials in the manufacturers' unopened containers. B. TIME AND COORDINATION: Deliver materials to allow for minimum storage time at the project site. Coordinate delivery with the scheduled time of installation. C. STORAGE: Store materials in a clean, dry location, protected from weather and abuse. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ELECTRIC MOTORS A. APPROVED MANUFACTURERS: Provide motors by a single manufacturer as much as possible. 1. Baldor 2. Marathon 3. Siemens-Allis 4. General Electric 5. U.S. Motor B. TEMPERATURE RATING: Provide insulation as follows: 1. CLASS B: 40 degrees C maximum. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus COMMON MOTOR Christi 23 05 13- 1 REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop EQUIPMENT Re-Bid Construction Documents 2. CLASS F: a. Between 40 degrees C and 65 degrees C maximum. b. Totally enclosed motors. C. STARTING CAPABILITY: As required for service indicated five starts minimum per hour. D. PHASES AND CURRENT: Verify electrical service compatibility with motors to be used. 1. UP TO 3/4 HP: Provide electronically commutated brushless DC single phase motors with built-in inverter and microprocessor-based control. 2. 1 HP AND LARGER: Provide squirrel-cage AC induction polyphase motors. 3. Name plate voltage shall be the same as the circuit's nominal voltage, serving the motor. E. SERVICE FACTOR: 1.15 for polyphase; 1.35 for single phase. F. FRAMES: U-frames 1.5 hp. and larger. G. BEARINGS: Provide sealed re-greaseable ball bearings; with top mounted Zerk lubrication fittings and bottom side drains minimum average life 100,000 hours typically, and others as follows: 1. Design for thrust where applicable. 2. PERMANENTLY SEALED: Where not accessible for greasing. 3. SLEEVE-TYPE WITH OIL CUPS: Light duty fractional hp. motors or polyphase requiring minimum noise level. H. ENCLOSURE TYPE: Provide enclosures as follows, except where otherwise indicated: 1. CONCEALED INDOOR: ODP (Open Drip Proof). 2. EXPOSED INDOOR: Guard Protected. 3. OUTDOOR TYPICAL: Type II. TEFC. 4. OUTDOOR WEATHER PROTECTED: Type I. WPI. 5. EXPLOSION PROOF, XP: For use in hazardous locations. I. OVERLOAD PROTECTION: Built-in sensing device for stopping motor in all phase legs and signaling where indicated for fractional horse power motors. J. NOISE RATING: "Quiet" except where otherwise indicated. K. All motors that are to be operated by a variable frequency drive shall be inverter duty rated motors. L. All motors operated by variable frequency drive shall be equipped with a maintenance free, conductive microfiber, shaft grounding ring with a minimum of two rows of circumferential microfibers to discharge electrical shaft currents within the motor and/or its bearings. M. EFFICIENCY: Minimum full load efficiency listed in the following table, when tested in accordance with IEEE 112, Method B, including stray load loss measure. NEMA MG 1 Efficiency- 1800 RPM Synchronous Speed Motor horsepower Index Letter Minimum Efficiency 3 -5 G 89.5 7.5 G 91.0 10 F 91.7 15-20 E 93.0 25-30 E 93.6 40 D 94.1 50 C 95.0 60 C 95.0 75 C 95.0 100 - 125 B 95.4 150 -200 B 95.8 DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus COMMON MOTOR Christi 23 05 13-2 REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop EQUIPMENT NEMA MG 1 Efficiency- 1200 RPM Synchronous Speed Motor horsepower Index Letter Minimum Efficiency 3 -5 G 89.5 7.5 G 90.2 10 F 91.7 15 F 91.7 20 E 92.4 25-30 E 93.6 40 -50 D 94.1 60 D 94.5 75 C 94.5 100 - 125 C 95.0 150 -200 B 95.4 2.02 MOTOR CONTROLLERS (STARTERS) A. All motor controllers (for equipment furnished under Division 23)shall be furnished under Division 23 and installed under Division 26 unless otherwise noted on the plans. 1. Starters shall be provided for 3 phase motors 1 horsepower and greater. B. Motor starters shall be furnished as follows. 1. GENERAL: Motor starters shall be Square D Company Class 8536 across-the-line magnetic type, full-voltage, non-reversing (FAVOR) starter. All starters shall be constructed and tested in accordance with the latest NEMA standards, sizes and horsepower. ICE sizes are not acceptable. Starters shall be mounted in a general purpose dead front, painted steel enclosure and surface-mounted. Provide size and number of poles as shown and required by equipment served. Provide two speed, two winding or two speed, single winding motor starter as required for two speed motors. 2. CONTACTS: Magnetic starter contacts shall be double break solid silver alloy. All contacts shall be replaceable without removing power wiring or removing starter from panel. The starter shall have straight-through wiring. 3. OPERATING COILS: Operating coils shall be 120 volts and shall be of molded construction. When the coil fails, the starter shall open and shall not lock in the closed position. 4. OVERLOAD RELAYS: Provide manual reset, trip-free Class 20 overload relays in each phase conductor in of all starters. Overload relays shall be melting alloy type with visual trip indication. All 3 phase and single phase starters shall have one overload relay in each underground conductor. Relay shall not be field adjustable from manual to automatic reset. Provide 6 overload relays for two speed motor starters. 5. PILOT LIGHTS: Provide a red running pilot light for all motor starters. Pilot lights shall be mounted in the starter enclosure cover. Pilot lights shall be operated from an interlock on the motor starter and shall not be wired across the operating coil. 6. CONTROLS: Provide starters with HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC switches. Coordinate additional motor starter controls with the requirements of Division 23. Motor starter controls shall be mounted in the starter enclosure cover. 7. CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMER: Provide a single-phase 480 volt control power transformer with each starter for 120 volt control power. Connect the primary side to the line side of the motor starter. The primary side shall be protected by a fuse for each conductor. The secondary side shall have one leg fused and one leg grounded. Arrange transformer terminals so that wiring to terminals will not be located above the transformer. 8. AUXILIARY CONTACTS: Each starter shall have one normally open and one normally closed convertible auxiliary contact in addition to the number of contacts required for the "holding interlock", remote monitoring, and control wiring. In addition, it shall be possible to field-install three more additional auxiliary contacts without removing existing wiring or removing the starter from its enclosure. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus COMMON MOTOR Christi 23 05 13- 3 REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop EQUIPMENT 9. UNIT WIRING: Unit shall be completely pre-wired to terminals to eliminate any interior field wiring except for line and load power wiring and HVAC control wiring. 10. ENCLOSURES: All motor starter enclosures shall be NEMA 1, general purpose enclosures or NEMA-3R if mounted exposed to high moisture conditions. Provide NEMA 4X when located by cooling towers. 11. POWER MONITOR: Provide a square "D" 8430 MPS phase failure and under-voltage relay, base and wiring required for starters serving all 3 phase motors. Set the under- voltage setting according to minimum voltage required for the motor to operate within its range. C. APPROVED MANUFACTURERS: Controller numbers are based on first named manufacturer. Provide one of the following manufacturer's. 1. Siemens. 2. Square D. 3. General Electric. 4. Eaton. 2.03 COMBINATION MOTOR STARTERS A. GENERAL: Combination motor starters shall consist of a magnetic starter and a fusible or non- fusible disconnect switch in a dead front, painted steel NEMA 1 enclosure unless otherwise noted and shall be surface-mounted. Size and number of poles shall as shown and required by equipment served. Combination motor starters shall be as specified for motor starters in Paragraph 2.02-B, except as modified herein. B. DISCONNECT SWITCH: Disconnect switches shall be as specified in Section 26 28 16. C. APPROVED MANUFACTURERS: Controller numbers are based on first named manufacturer. Provide one of the following manufacturer's. 1. Siemens. 2. Square D. 3. General Electric. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations and printed installation instructions. B. All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Contractors' price shall include all items required as per manufacturers' requirements. C. Install in a professional manner. Any part or parts not meeting this requirement shall be replaced or rebuilt without extra expense to Owner. D. Install rotating equipment in static and dynamic balance. E. Provide foundations, supports, and isolators properly adjusted to allow minimum vibration transmission within the building. F. Correct objectionable noise or vibration transmission in order to operate equipment satisfactorily as determined by the Engineer. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus COMMON MOTOR Christi 23 05 13-4 REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop EQUIPMENT SECTION 23 05 26 VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR SPEED CONTROL FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Section 1.01 A in Section 23 05 13 B. Section 1.01 B in Section 23 05 13 C. Furnish and install a complete adjustable frequency motor speed control for the following items: 1. Variable volume air handling units. 2. Chilled water pumps 3. Condenser water pumps 4. Hot water pumps 5. Cooling tower fans. 6. Variable volume ventilation fans. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 02 00- Basic Materials and Methods for HVAC B. Section 23 05 13- Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment C. Section 230548 D. Section 23 05 93-Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing E. Section 23 09 63- Energy Management and Control System (EMCS) F. Section 232123 G. Section 237313 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASHRAE (HVACA)-ASHRAE Handbook- HVAC Applications; Most Recent Edition Cited by Referring Code or Reference Standard. B. ISO 9001 - Quality Management Systems— Requirements; 2015. C. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. D. UL 508- Industrial Control Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. E. UL 508A- UL Standard for Safety Industrial Control Panels; 2018. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division One. B. Certified noise data shall be submitted by drive manufacturer. Noise generated by variable frequency motor speed control drive shall not exceed preferred "RC" as listed in 2019 ASHRAE (HVACA), Chapter 49 Noise and Vibration Control, Table 2 Criteria for Acceptable HVAC Noise in Unoccupied Rooms. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Warranty shall be 24 months from the date of certified start-up, not to exceed 30 months from the date of shipment. The warranty shall include all parts, labor, travel time and expenses. There shall be 365/24 support available via a toll-free phone number. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Equipment shall be stored and handled per manufacturer's instructions. 1.07 OPERATIONS PERSONNEL TRAINING A. Provide a training session for the owner's operations personnel. Training session shall be performed by a qualified person who is knowledgeable in the subject system/equipment. Submit a training agenda two (2)weeks prior to the proposed training session for review and approval. Training session shall include at the minimum: DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR Christi 23 05 26- 1 SPEED CONTROL FOR HVAC 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop EQUIPMENT Re-Bid Construction Documents 1. Purpose of equipment. 2. Principle of how the equipment works. 3. Important parts and assemblies. 4. How the equipment achieves its purpose and necessary operating conditions. 5. Most likely failure modes, causes and corrections. 6. On site demonstration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. ABB B. Yaskawa/Magnetek C. Danfoss 2.02 ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY INVERTER A. The AFD package as specified herein shall be enclosed in a NEMA 12 enclosure for interior applications, a NEMA 3R enclosure for exterior locations and a NEMA 4X enclosure where located in a cooling tower yard or within 20 feet from cooling tower. All enclosures shall be completely assembled and tested by the manufacturer in an ISO 9001 facility. The AFD shall operate from a line of+30% over nominal and the under-voltage trip level shall be 35% under the nominal voltage as a minimum. B. The fused input shall utilize fast acting current limiting type per manufacturer recommendations. C. The variable frequency power and logic unit shall be completely solid state. The unit shall transform 480 Volt or 208 Volt(as indicated on plans), 3 phase, 60 hertz input power into frequency and voltage controlled, 3 phase output power suitable to provide positive speed and torque control to the fan motor. The speed control shall be step-less throughout the speed range under variable torque load on a continuous basis. The adjustable frequency control shall be of a pulse width modulated type utilizing a full wave diode bridge rectifier; and shall have a power factor of 0.95 or better at all motor loads. D. All AFD's shall have the same customer interface, including a backlit LCD two-line digital display, and keypad, regardless of horsepower rating. The keypad is to be used for local control, for setting all parameters, and for stepping through the displays and menus. The keypad shall be removable, capable of remote mounting, and shall have its own non-volatile memory. The keypad shall allow for uploading and downloading of parameter settings as an aid for the start-up of multiple AFD's. The keypad shall include Hand-Off-Auto membrane selections. When in "Hand", the AFD will be started and the speed will be controlled from the up/down arrows. When in "Off", the AFD will be stopped. When in "Auto", the AFD will start via an external contact closure and the AFD speed will be controlled via an external speed reference. E. The adjustable frequency inverter shall conduct no radio frequency interference (RFI) back to the input power line. F. The AFD shall have an integral 5% impedance line reactor to reduce the harmonics to the power line and to add protection from AC line transients. The inverter/reactor shall be a single wiring point. 2.03 SELF PROTECTION A. The following features for self-protection shall be included: 1. The overload rating of the drive shall be 110% of its normal duty current rating for 1 minute every 10 minutes. The minimum FLA rating shall meet or exceed the values in the NFPA 70-Table 430-150 for 4-pole motors. 2. Limit the output current in under 50 microseconds due to phase to phase short circuits or severe overload conditions. 3. Protect the inverter due to non-momentary power or phase loss. The undervoltage trip shall activate automatically when the line voltage drops 15% below rated input voltage. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR Christi 23 05 26-2 SPEED CONTROL FOR HVAC 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop EQUIPMENT 4. Protect the inverter due to voltage levels in excess of its rating. The overvoltage trip shall activate automatically when the DC bus in the controller exceeds 1000 VDC. 5. Protect the inverter from elevated temperatures in excess of its rating. An indicating light that begins flashing within 10 degrees C of the trip shall be provided to alert the operator to the increasing temperature condition. When the over temperature trip point is reached, this light shall be continuously illuminated. 6. The inverter shall be equipped such that a trip condition resulting from overcurrent, undervoltage, overvoltage or overtemperature shall be automatically reset, and the inverter shall be automatically reset, and the inverter shall automatically restart upon removal, or correction of the faulty condition. 7. Status lights for indication of conditions described above shall be provided. A SPDT contact for remote indication shall be provided. Additionally, status lights to show power on, zero speed, and drive enabled shall be provided. All status lights shall be self- contained in the front panel of the unit and shall be duplicated for ease of troubleshooting on the inside of the unit. 8. Current and voltage signals shall be isolated from logic circuitry. 9. Drive logic shall be microprocessor based. 10. In the event of a sustained power loss, the control shall shut down safely without component failure. Upon return of power, the system shall automatically return to normal operation if the start is in the"On" condition. 11. In the event of a momentary power loss, the control shall be shut down safely without component failure. Upon return of power, the system shall automatically return to normal operation (if the start is in the "On" position) being able to restart into a rotating motor regaining positive speed control without shutdown or component failure. 12. In the event of a phase to phase short circuit, the control shall shut down safely without component failure. 13. In the event that an input power contactor is opened or closed while the control is activated, no damage shall result. 14. To facilitate startup and troubleshooting, the control shall operate without a motor or any other equipment connected to the inverter output. 2.04 ELECTRICAL CONSTANT SPEED BYPASS A. Provide all components and circuitry necessary to provide manual full bypass of the inverter. The bypass package shall be mounted in a cabinet common with the inverter and shall be constructed in such a manner that the inverter can be removed for repair while still operating the motor in the "bypass" mode. Fast-acting semi-conductor with a fuse block shall be provided to isolate the drive for service. Bypass designs that have no such fuses must have a lockable disconnect that isolates the drive while running in bypass mode. The contactor device shall be NEC approved. A common start/stop signal shall be used for both the variable frequency drive mode and bypass mode. Manual bypass shall contain the following: 1. Two contactors mechanically interlocked via a three position through the door selector switch or keypad to provide the following controls: a. "Inverter" mode connects the motor to the output of the inverter. b. "Bypass" mode connects the motor to the input sine wave power. Transfer must occur with input disconnect open. Motor is protected via electronic overload. c. "Off' mode disconnects motor from all input power. d. A molded case circuit breaker with door interlocked handle (lock out type)that interrupts input power to both the bypass circuitry and the drive. e. Customer Interlock Terminal Strip- provide a separate terminal strip for connection of freeze, fire, smoke contacts, and external start command. All external safety interlocks shall remain fully functional whether the system is Hand, Auto, or Bypass mode. The remote start/stop contact shall operate in AFD and bypass modes. f. An electronic overload selectable for class 20 or 30 shall provide protection of the motor in Bypass mode. 2. The following indicating lights (LED type)shall be provided. A test mode or push to test feature shall be provided. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR Christi 23 05 26-3 SPEED CONTROL FOR HVAC 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop EQUIPMENT a. Power on b. External fault c. Drive mode selected d. Bypass mode selected e. Drive running f. Bypass running g. Drive fault h. Bypass fault i. Bypass-H-O-A mode j. Automatic transfer to bypass selected 3. The following relay(form C)outputs from the bypass shall be provided: a. System started b. System running c. Bypass override enabled d. Drive fault e. Bypass fault (motor overload or underload (broken belt)) f. Bypass H-O-A position 4. The AFD shall include a "run permissive circuit'that will provide a normally open contact any time a run command is provided (local or remote start command in AFD or bypass mode). The AFD system (AFD or bypass) shall not operate the motor until it receives a dry contact closure from a damper or valve end-switch). When the AFD systems safety interlock (fire detector, freezestat, high static pressure switch, etc.)opens, the motor shall coast to a stop and the run permissive contact shall open, closing the damper or valve. 5. There shall be an internal switch to select manual or automatic bypass. 6. There shall be an adjustable current sensing circuit for the bypass to provide loss of load indication when in the bypass mode. 7. The bypass mode must include an undervoltage and phase loss relay to protect the motor from single phase power and undervoltage conditions. a. Bypass shall be UL listed. b. Bypass shall carry a UL 508 label. 2.05 FEATURES AND SPECIFICATIONS A. Provide all drives and bypasses with an integral disconnect switch. The disconnect shall be door interlocked and lockable. All disconnect configurations shall be UL Listed by the drive manufacturer as a complete assembly and include a UL 508A label. B. Output frequency shall neither vary with load nor with any input frequency variations. Output frequency shall not vary within +/-10% input voltage changes. Output frequency shall not vary with temperature changes within the ambient specification. C. No auxiliary equipment shall be required. The output frequency shall be adjusted in proportion to 4-20 mA signal. D. A 0 to 10 Volt DC signal shall be provided for remote indication. This 0 to 10 Volt DC signal shall vary in direct proportion to the controller speed. E. The controller shall be started or stopped by a contact closure or through serial communications. F. A single pole, double throw contact shall be provided for remote indication. Contact will change state when any trip condition has occurred. (contact rated for 12-250 VAC-2 AMPS). G. A second single pole, double throw contact shall be provided for remote indication. Contact will state when the VFD receives a run command (contact rated for 12-250 VAC-24 AMPS). H. PID Setpoint controller shall be standard in the drive, allowing a pressure or flow signal to be connected to the AFD, using the microprocessor in the AFD for the closed loop control. The AFD shall have 250 ma of 24 VDC auxiliary power and be capable of loop powering a transmitter supplied by others. The PID setpoint shall be adjustable from the AFD keypad, analog inputs, or over the communications bus. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR Christi 23 05 26-4 SPEED CONTROL FOR HVAC 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop EQUIPMENT I. Unit to operate from a 4 to 20 mA input signal and shall have hand-off-auto switch and door mounted potentiometer controls for manual speed selection. J. Acceleration and deceleration times shall be adjustable from 30 to 300 seconds. K. The drive shall have the ability to invert the speed signal input, as well as having offset and gain controls for speed signal conditioning. L. Minimum and maximum speeds shall be adjustable in automatic and manual modes. M. Hazard inputs shall be provided, capable of up to two inputs (fire, freeze). These shall each be capable of safely shutting down the inverter and illuminating a front panel hazard light depicting that a hazard condition turned the inverter off. N. The inverter shall be a starter, containing a door interlocked input disconnect switch and manual reset motor electronic overloads, with accessible reset on front door, when a bypass is not specified. O. Solid state ground fault interrupt circuit. P. The LED display shall monitor and display four parameters on a single display (i.e. frequency command, output frequency, output current, and torque). Q. A N.O. auxiliary run-time contact shall be provided for control signaling to auxiliary equipment. Contact shall close when the pump is brought on line and open when the pump is taken off line. Contact shall be rated 20 amps at 120 volts. R. Inverter shall be UL listed. S. Certified factory start-up shall be provided for each drive by a factory authorized service center. A certified start-up form shall be filled out for each drive with a copy provided to the Owner, and a copy kept on file at the manufacturer T. Factory trained application engineering and service personnel that are thoroughly familiar with the AFD products offered shall be locally available at both the specifying and installation locations. A 24/365 technical support line shall be available on a toll-free line. U. A computer based training CD or 8-hour professionally generated video shall be provided to the Owner at the time of Substantial Completion. The training shall include installation, programming and operation of the AFD, bypass and serial communication. V. Provide a motor end surge control voltage suppressive filter if the VFD manufacturer cannot limit their voltage surges to under 1000 volt at 100 feet. W. Provide a motor acoustic noise reduction filter capable of approximately 12 dBA attenuation, if the VFD raises the dBa level above 3 dBa at a distance of 3 feet from the motor. X. Provide each unit with a 3% reactor which is mounted on both the positive and negative DC bus. The reactor shall be a single wiring point and mounted internally to the drive. Y. Adjustable frequency inverters shall have native BACnet protocol for integration with EMCS. If the inverter does not have native BACnet protocol, a BACnet interface card shall be provided. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install drives in accordance with manufacturer's published installation instructions. Installation location shall provide all required clearances around each drive. B. All wiring shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Variable frequency speed drives shall be located so that wiring to the associated motor does not exceed 100 feet. D. Separate metal conduits shall be provided for each of the following. None of these wiring categories shall be run within the same conduit. 1. Line side, input power wiring 2. Load side, motor power wiring 3. Control or communication wiring DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR Christi 23 05 26-5 SPEED CONTROL FOR HVAC 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop EQUIPMENT 4. Fire alarm system wiring 3.02 START-UP A. Start-up services shall be provided for each unit by a factory authorized service provider. 1. Complete installation inspection and start-up checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR Christi 23 05 26-6 SPEED CONTROL FOR HVAC 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop EQUIPMENT SECTION 23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PIPING AND EQUIPMENT- HVAC PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. Section 23 02 00- Basic Materials and Methods for HVAC shall be included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Pipe, and equipment hangers, supports and associated anchors. B. Sleeves and seals. C. Flashing and sealing equipment and pipe stacks. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Section 230548 B. Section 23 07 16- HVAC Equipment Insulation C. Section 23 07 19- HVAC Piping Insulation D. Section 23 21 13-Above Ground Hydronic Piping E. Section 232116 1.04 REFERENCES A. ASME B31.1 - Power Piping; 2022. B. ASME B31.9- Building Services Piping; 2020. C. MSS SP-58- Pipe Hangers and Supports- Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation; 2018, with Amendment (2019). 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping: In conformance with ASME B31.1 and ASME B31.9. B. Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping: In conformance with MSS SP-58. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division One. B. Indicate hanger and support framing and attachment methods. C. Provide delegated design submittal for equipment anchorage as required in specification 23 02 00— Part 1. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hangers for Pipes Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring. B. Hangers for Pipes Sizes 2 to 4 Inch: Carbon steel, adjustable clevis. C. Hangers for Pipes Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron roller, double hanger. D. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers, pre-formed manufactured saddles and hanger rods; cast iron roller and stand for pipe sizes 6 inches and over. E. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook. F. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and over: adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roller. G. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR Christi 23 05 29- 1 PIPING AND EQUIPMENT- 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop HVAC Re-Bid Construction Documents H. Floor Support for Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, locknut nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. I. Floor Support for Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Adjustable cast iron roller and stand, steel screws, and concrete pier or steel support. J. Roof Pipe Supports and Hangers: Galvanized Steel Channel System as manufactured by Portable Pipe Hangers, Inc. or approved equal. 1. For pipes 2-1/2" and smaller- Type PP10 with roller 2. For pipes 3"through 8"- Type PS 3. For multiple pipes-Type PSE- Custom K. Copper Pipe Support and Hangers: Electro-galvanized with thermoplastic elastomer cushions; Unistrut"Cush-A-Clamp" or equal. Hangers: Plastic coated; Unistrut or equal. L. Shields for Vertical Copper Pipe Risers: Sheet lead. M. Pipe Rough-In Supports in Walls/Chases: Provide preformed plastic pipe supports, Sioux Chief "Pipe Titan" or equal. 2.02 HANGER RODS A. Galvanized Hanger Rods: Threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded. 2.03 INSERTS A. Inserts: Malleable iron case with galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods. 2.04 FLASHING A. Metal Flashing: 20 gage galvanized steel. B. Lead Flashing: 4 lb. /sq. ft. sheet lead for waterproofing; 1 lb. /sq. ft. sheet lead for soundproofing. C. Caps: Steel, 20 gage minimum; 16 gage at fire resistant elements. D. Coordinate with roofing contractor/Architect for type of flashing on metal roofs. 2.05 EQUIPMENT CURBS A. Fabricate curbs of hot dipped galvanized steel. B. For metal roof construction, roof curbs shall be made of aluminum or stainless steel. Coordinate with Architectural Drawings and details. 2.06 SLEEVES A. Sleeves for Pipes through Non-fire Rated Floors: Form with 18 gage galvanized steel, tack welded to form a uniform sleeve. B. Sleeves for Pipes through Beams, Interior Walls, Exterior Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Form with steel pipe, Schedule 40, galvanized. C. Sleeves for Pipes through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Fireproofing: Prefabricated fire rated steel sleeves including seals, UL listed, manufactured by Hilti. D. Fire Stopping Insulation: Glass fiber type, non-combustible, UL listed. E. Caulk: Paintable 25-year acrylic sealant. F. Pipe Alignment Guides: Factory fabricated, of cast semi-steel or heavy fabricated steel, consisting of bolted, two-section outer cylinder and base with two-section guiding spider that bolts tightly to pipe. Length of guides shall be as recommended by manufacturer to allow indicated travel. 2.07 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS A. Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to continuously fill annular space between pipe and sleeve and create watertight seal. 1. Approved Manufacturers: DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR Christi 23 05 29-2 PIPING AND EQUIPMENT- 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop HVAC a. Link-Seal by Garlock Pipeline Technologies (GPT) b. Innerlynx by Advance Products&Systems, Inc. c. MetraSeal by Metraflex Co. 2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material, size of pipe, and service requirements. 3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element. 2.08 FABRICATION A. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping. B. Design hangers without disengagement of supported pipe. C. Design roof supports without roof penetrations, flashing or damage to the roofing material. 2.09 FINISH A. Exposed steel hangers, supports, and appurtenances shall be hot-dipped galvanized. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSERTS A. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. Coordinate with Structural Engineer for placement of inserts. B. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches. C. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, provide inserts to be flush with slab surface. D. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide thru-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut recessed into and grouted flush with slab. Verify with Structural Engineer prior to start of work. 3.02 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Support horizontal piping as follows: PIPE SIZE MAX. HANGER SPACING HANGER DIAMETER (Steel Pipe) 1/2 to 1-1/4 inch 7'-0" 3/8" 1-1/2 to 3 inch 10'-01, 3/8" 4 to 6 inch 10'-01, 1/2" 8 to 10 inch 10'-01, 5/8" 12 to 14 inch 10'-01, 3/4" 15 inch and over 10'-01, 7/8" (Copper Pipe) 1/2 to 1-1/4 inch 5'-01, 3/8" 1-1/2 to 2-1/2 inch 8'-0" 3/8" 3 to 4 inch 10'-01, 3/8" 6 to 8 inch 10'-01, 1/2" (Cast Iron Pipe) 2 to 3 inch 5-0" 3/8" 4 to 6 inch 10'-01, 1/2" 8 to 10 inch 10'-01, 5/8" 12 to 14 inch 10'-01, 3/4" DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR Christi 23 05 29- 3 PIPING AND EQUIPMENT- 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop HVAC 15 inch and over 10'-01, 7/8" (PVC Pipe) 1-1/2 to 4 inch 4'-0" 3/8" 6 to 8 inch 4'-0" 1/2" 10 inch and over 4'-0" 5/8" B. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. C. Place a hanger within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow, and at the vertical to horizontal transition. D. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. E. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet maximum spacing between hangers. F. Support vertical piping at every floor. G. For vertical shaft or chase applications where floor slab supported riser clamps cannot be provided to keep the pipe in alignment and to support the weight of the pipe and its contents, ensure to provide suitable fasteners, hardware, braces, unistrut, structural steel members, and appurtenances required to accommodate the pipe installation. Coordinate all such work with the project structural engineer to ensure that necessary members and attachment points are provided accordingly to bear the weight of the functioning piping. H. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. I. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. J. Install hangers with nut at base and above hanger; tighten upper nut to hanger after final installation adjustments. K. Portable pipe hanger systems shall be installed per manufacturer's instructions. L. Distances between supports are maximum distance. Supports shall be provided to carry the pipe/equipment load. 3.03 INSULATED PIPING A. Clamps: Attach galvanized clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps projecting through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ASME B31.9. B. Saddles: Install galvanized protection saddles MSS Type 39 where insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with segments of insulation that match adjoining pipe insulation. Secure the full contact area of the saddle to the pipe insulation with 1/8" thick coat of mastic. C. Shields: Install protective shields MSS Type 40 on cold and chilled water piping that has vapor barrier. Secure the full contact area of the shield to the pipe insulation with 1/8" thick coat of mastic. D. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees and shall have dimensions in inches not less than the following: Nominal Pipe Size Shield Length GaugeThickness 1/4 through 3-1/2 inch 12 18 4 inch 12 16 5 through 6 inch 18 16 8 through 14 inch 24 14 16 through 24 inch 24 12 E. Piping 2" and larger: provide galvanized sheet metal shields with calcium silicate insulation at hangers/supports. F. Insert material shall be at least as long as the protective shield. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR Christi 23 05 29-4 PIPING AND EQUIPMENT- 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop HVAC G. Thermal Hanger Shields: Install where indicated, with insulation of same thickness as piping. 3.04 EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS A. Provide equipment bases of concrete. B. Provide templates, anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment. C. Refer to specification 23 02 00— Part 1 for anchorage requirements for roof mounted equipment. D. Construct support of steel members. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure. E. Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed. 3.05 FLASHING A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counter flashing where piping and ductwork penetrate weather or waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs. B. Provide curbs for mechanical roof installations that extend minimum 8 inches above adjacent roofing surface. Contact Architect for all flashing details and roof construction. Seal penetrations watertight. 3.06 SLEEVES A. Sleeves shall be provided at the following locations: 1. Piping passing through rated and non-rated floor assemblies, rated ceiling assemblies, and roof assemblies. 2. Piping passing through concrete, masonry, and rated gypsum board walls and partitions. 3. Piping passing through exterior wall assemblies above and below grade. 4. Piping passing through non-rated gypsum board walls and partitions where indicated on the drawings or where exposed to view. 5. Piping passing through structural members where indicated on the drawings or where exposed to view. 6. Any other locations indicated on the drawings. B. Set sleeves in position in formwork. Provide reinforcing around sleeves. C. Extend sleeves through floors minimum one inch above finished floor level. Sleeves located in walls, ceilings, and structural members shall be flush with the outer surfaces of the assembly being penetrated. D. Where sleeved piping penetrates a floor, ceiling, or interior wall assembly, pack annular space between pipe and sleeve with UL listed fire stopping insulation and caulk seal airtight with fire barrier sealant. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of wall penetrations and exposed side of ceiling penetrations. E. Install all UL listed, prefabricated fire rated steel sleeves per the manufacturer's installation instructions to ensure fire rating is maintained. F. Sleeves at exterior walls below grade shall be sealed with mechanical sleeve seal. Install seal per manufacturer's installation instructions. Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material, pipe size, and service requirements. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seal and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. Locations above grade shall be provided with close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR Christi 23 05 29-5 PIPING AND EQUIPMENT- 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop HVAC SECTION 23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. Section 23 02 00- Basic Materials and Methods for HVAC shall be included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE A. Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use. B. Refer to Architectural Sections for additional requirements. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASME A13.1 -Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; 2023. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 VALVE AND PIPE IDENTIFICATION A. Valves: 1. All valves shall be identified with a 1-1/2" diameter brass disc wired onto the handle. The disc shall be stamped with 1/2" high depressed black filled identifying numbers. These numbers shall be numerically sequenced for all valves on the job. 2. The number and description indicating make, size, model number and service of each valve shall be listed in proper operational sequence, properly typewritten. Three copies to be turned over to Owner at completion. 3. Tags shall be fastened with approved meter seal and 4 ply 0.018 smooth copper wire. Tags and fastenings shall be manufactured by the Seton Name Plate Company or approved equal. 4. All valves shall be numbered serially with all valves of any one system and/or trade grouped together. B. Pipe Marking: 1. All interior visible piping located in accessible spaces such as above accessible ceilings, equipment rooms, attic space, under floor spaces, etc., shall be identified with all temperature pipe markers as manufactured by W.H. Brady Company, 431 West Rock Ave., New Haven, Connecticut, or approved equal. 2. All exterior visible piping shall be identified with UV and acid resistant outdoor grade acrylic plastic markers as manufactured by Set Mark distributed by Seton (Name plate Company Factory location 20 Thompson Road, Branford, Connecticut)or approved equal. 3. Generally, markers shall be located on each side of each and every partition, on each side of every tee, on each side of every valve and/or valve group, on each side of every piece of equipment, and, for straight runs, at equally spaced intervals not to exceed 75 feet. In congested area, marks shall be placed on each pipe at the points where it enters and leaves the area and at the point of connection of each piece of equipment and automatic control valve. All markers shall have directional arrows. 4. Provide pipe markers that meet labeling requirements of ASME A13.1 for all refrigerant piping located in areas other than the room or space where the associated equipment is located. Pipe markers shall be located at intervals not exceeding 20 feet on the refrigerant piping or pipe insulation. The minimum height of the identification lettering shall be 1/2". The pipe identification shall indicate the refrigerant designation and safety group classification of the refrigerant used in the piping system. For Group A2, A3, B2, and B3 refrigerants, the identification shall also include the following statement: "DANGER—Risk of Fire or Explosion. Flammable Refrigerant." For any Group B refrigerant, the identification shall also include the following statement: "DANGER—Toxic Refrigerant". DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC Christi 23 05 53- 1 PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 5. Markers shall be installed after final painting of all piping and equipment and in such a manner that they are visible from the normal maintenance position. Manufacturer's installation instructions shall be closely followed. 6. Markers shall be colored as indicated below per ASME A13.1. SYSTEM COLOR LEGEND Chilled Water Green Chilled Water Supply; Chilled Water Return Hot Water Reddish Orange Hot Water Supply; Hot Water Return Condenser Water Green Condenser Water Supply; Condenser Water Return Compressed Air Blue Compressed Air Pneumatic Control Yellow Pneumatic Controls Oxygen Yellow Oxygen Nitrogen Green Nitrogen Deionized Water Green Deionized Water Steam Yellow Steam Supply; Steam Return C. Pipe Painting: 1. All piping exposed to view shall be painted as indicated or as directed by the Architect in the field. Confirm all color selections with Architect prior to installation. 2. All piping located in mechanical rooms and exterior piping shall be painted as indicated below: SYSTEM COLOR Condenser Water Supply and Return Light Green Chilled Water Supply and Return Light Blue Heating Hot Water Supply and Return Reddish Orange 2.02 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Mechanical equipment shall be identified by means of nameplates permanently attached to the equipment. Nameplates shall be engraved laminated plastic or etched metal with minimum 1/2 inch high letters manufactured by Seton Company or approved equal. Submittals shall include dimensions and lettering format for approval. Attachment shall be with escutcheon pins, self- tapping screws, or machine screws. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All labeling equipment shall be installed as per manufacturer's printed installation instructions. B. Provide printable label on ceiling grids and access doors at all locations that provide access to mechanical equipment, valves, motorized dampers, and accessories located above ceiling. The label shall be white with black text with 1/4 inch high letters and shall identify the component that is accessible at that location. C. Provide printable label on ceiling grids and access doors at all locations that provide access to fire dampers, smoke dampers, and combination fire/smoke dampers located above ceiling. The label shall be white with red text with 1/2 inch high letters reading: FIRE/SMOKE DAMPER, SMOKE DAMPER, or FIRE DAMPER to identify the damper type that is accessible at that location. D. All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Contractor's price shall include all items required as per manufacturer's requirements. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC Christi 23 05 53-2 PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop E. All piping shall be cleaned of rust, dirt, oil and all other contaminants prior to painting. Refer to Division 9 for Architect's required paint system(s). END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC Christi 23 05 53-3 PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SECTION 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. Section 23 02 00- Basic Materials and Methods for HVAC shall be included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Approved submittal date on equipment installed, to accomplish the test procedures, outlined under paragraph 3.01 of this Section, will be provided by the Contractor. 1.03 DESCRIPTION A. The TAB of the air conditioning systems shall be performed by an impartial technical firm hired by the Contractor whose operations are limited only to the field of professional TAB. The TAB work will be done under the direct supervision of a qualified engineer employed by the TAB firm. B. The TAB firm will be responsible for inspecting, adjusting, balancing, and logging the date on the performance of fans, dampers in the duct system, and air distribution devices. The Contractor and the various Subcontractors of the equipment installed shall cooperate with the TAB firm to furnish necessary data on the design and proper applications of the system components and provide labor and material required to eliminate deficiencies or malperformance. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. QUALIFICATIONS OF CONTRACTOR PERSONNEL: Submit evidence to show that the personnel who shall be in charge of correcting deficiencies for balancing the systems are qualified. The Owner and Engineer reserve the right to require that the originally approved personnel be replaced with other qualified personnel if, in the Owner and Engineer's opinion, the original personnel are not qualified to properly place the system in condition for balancing. B. QUALIFICATIONS OF TAB FIRM PERSONNEL: 1. A minimum of one registered Professional Engineer licensed in the State, is required to be in permanent employment of the firm. 2. Personnel used on the jobsite shall be either Professional Engineers or technicians, who shall have been permanent, full time employees of the firm for a minimum of six months prior to the start of Work for that specified project. 3. Evidence shall be submitted to show that the personnel who actually balance the systems are qualified. Evidence showing that the personnel have passed the tests required by the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC)shall be required. C. CALIBRATION LIST: Submit to the Engineer for approval, a list of the gauges, thermometers, velometer, and other balancing devices to be used in balancing the system. Submit evidence to show that the balancing devices are properly calibrated before proceeding with system balancing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SERVICES OF THE CONTRACTOR A. The Drawings and Specifications have indicated valves, dampers, and miscellaneous adjustment devices for the purpose of adjustment to obtain optimum operating conditions. Install these devices in a manner that leaves them accessible, and provide access as requested by the TAB firm. B. Have systems complete and in operational readiness prior to notifying the TAB firm that the project is ready for their services, and certify in writing to the Architect and Owner that such a DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND Christi 23 05 93- 1 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop BALANCING Re-Bid Construction Documents condition exists. C. As a part of the Work of this Section, make changes in the sheaves, belts, and dampers or the addition of dampers required for correct balance of the new work as required by the TAB firm, at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Fully examine the existing system to be balanced, to determine whether or not sufficient volume dampers, balancing valves, thermometers, gauges, pressure and temperature taps, means of reading static pressure and total pressure in duct systems, means of determining water flow, and other means of taking data needed for proper water and air balancing are existing. Submit to the Engineer in writing a listing of omitted items considered necessary to balance existing systems. Submit the list and proposal as a cost add item. E. Verify that fresh air louvers are free of blockage, coils are clean and fresh air ducts to each air handling unit have individually adjustable volume regulating dampers. F. Provide, correct, repair, or replace deficient items or conditions found during the testing, adjusting, and balancing period. G. In order that systems may be properly tested, balanced, and adjusted as specified, operate the systems at no expense to the Owner for the length of time necessary to properly verify their completion and readiness for TAB period. H. Project construction schedules shall provide time to permit the successful completion of TAB services prior to Substantial Completion. Complete, operational readiness, prior to commencement of TAB services, shall include the following services of the Contractor: 1. Construction status of building shall permit the closing of doors, windows, ceilings installed and penetrations complete, to obtain project operating conditions. 2. AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS: a. Verify installation for conformity to design. Supply, return, and exhaust ducts terminated and pressure tested for leakage as specified. b. Volume and fire dampers properly located and functional. Dampers serving requirements of minimum and maximum outside air, return and relief shall provide tight closure and full opening, smooth and free operation. c. Supply, return, exhaust and transfer grilles, registers and diffusers shall be installed. d. Air handling systems, units and associated apparatus, such as heating and cooling coils, filter sections, access doors, etc., shall be blanked and sealed to eliminate excessive bypass or leakage of air. e. Fans (supply and exhaust) operating and verified for freedom from vibrations, proper fan rotation and belt tension; overload heater elements shall be of proper size and rating; record motor amperage and voltage and verify that these functions do not exceed nameplate ratings. f. Furnish or revise fan drives or motors as necessary to attain the specified air volumes. 3. WATER CIRCULATING SYSTEMS: a. Position valves pertinent to system design and require operation to permit full flow of water through system components. Operate hydronic systems under full flow conditions until circulating water is clean. Remove and clean strainers as required during this cycle of operation. b. For retrofit projects, record each existing pump motor amperage and voltage. Readings shall not exceed nameplate rating. c. Verify, on new equipment, electrical starter overload heater elements to be of proper size and rating. d. Ensure that water circulating systems shall be full of water and free of air; expansion tanks set for proper water level, and air vents installed at high points of systems and operating freely. Advise Engineer of deficiencies. e. Check and set operating temperatures of heat exchangers to design requirements. f. The various existing water circulating systems, including existing strainers, shall be cleaned, filled, purged of air, and put into operation before hydronic balancing. 4. AUTOMATIC CONTROLS: DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND Christi 23 05 93-2 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop BALANCING a. Verify that control components are installed in accordance with project documents and functional, electrical interlocks, damper sequences, air and water resets, fire and freeze stats. b. Controlling instruments shall be functional and set for design operating conditions. Factory precalibration of room thermostats and pneumatic equipment will not be acceptable. c. The temperature regulation shall be adjusted for proper relationship between the controlling instruments and calibrated by the TAB Contractor. Advise Engineer of deficiencies or malfunctions. I. Contractor shall repair any insulation removed from piping system by TAB Contractor during water balancing. 3.02 SERVICES OF THE TAB FIRM A. The TAB firm will act as liaison between the Owner, Engineer, and the Contractor and inspect the installation of mechanical piping system, sheet metal work, temperature controls and other component parts of the heating, air conditioning and ventilating systems being retrofitted, repaired, or added under this Contract. The reinspection of the Work will cover that part related to proper arrangement and adequate provision for the testing and balancing and will be done when the Work is 80 percent complete. B. Upon completion of the installation and start-up of the mechanical equipment, to check, adjust, and balance system components to obtain optimum conditions in each conditioned space in the building. Prepare and submit to the Engineer complete reports on the balance and operations of the systems. C. Measurements and recorded readings of air, water, and electricity that appear in the reports will be done by the permanently employed technicians or engineers of the TAB firm. D. Make an inspection in the building during the opposite season from that in which the initial adjustments were made. At the time, make necessary modifications to the initial adjustments required to produce optimum operation of system components to affect the proper conditions as indicated on the Drawings. At time of opposite season check-out, the Owner's representative will be notified before readings or adjustments are made. E. In fan systems, the air quantities indicated on the Drawings may be varied as required to secure a maximum temperature variation of two degrees within each separately controlled space, but the total air quantity indicated for each zone must be obtained. It shall be the obligation of the Contractor to furnish or revise fan drive and motors if necessary, without cost to the Owner, to attain the specified air volumes. F. Contractor shall utilize ultrasonic flow meter to balance water flow of existing water system if the original pressure drop data is not available. Contractor shall remove insulation as necessary to use flow meter. G. Participate in the commissioning process, which shall include but not be limited to attending commissioning meetings, coordinating work with and completing checklists as required by the commissioning team. 3.03 PROFESSIONAL REPORT A. Before the final acceptance of the report is made, the TAB firm will furnish the Engineer the following data to be approved by the Owner and Engineer: 1. Summary of main supply, return and exhaust duct pitot tube traverses and fan settings indicating minimum value required to achieve specified air volumes. 2. A listing of the measured air quantities at each outlet corresponding to the temperature tabulation as developed by the Engineer and TAB firm. 3. Air quantities at each return and exhaust air handling device. 4. Static pressure readings entering and leaving each supply fan, exhaust fan, filter, coil, balancing dampers and other components of the systems. Including the retrofit Work. These readings will be related to performance curves in terms of the CFM handled if available. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND Christi 23 05 93-3 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop BALANCING 5. Motor current readings at each equipment motor on load side of capacitors. The voltages at the time of the reading shall be listed. 6. The final report shall certify test methods and instrumentation used, final velocity reading obtained, temperatures, pressure drops, RPM of equipment, amperage of motors, air balancing problems encountered, recommendations and uncompleted punch list items. The test results will be recorded on standard forms. 7. A summary of actual operating conditions shall be included with each system outlining normal and ventilation cycles of operation. the final report will act as a reference of actual operating conditions for the Owner's operating personnel. 3.04 BALANCING AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM A. GENERAL: 1. Place all equipment into full operation, and continue operating during each working day of balancing and testing. If the air conditioning system is balanced during Off-Peak cooling season Contractor shall return to rebalance air side system as required to put system in proper balance at that season. 2. The Contractor shall submit detailed balancing and recording forms for approval. After approval by the Engineer, prepare complete set of forms for recording test data on each system. All Work shall be done under the supervision of a Registered Professional Engineer. All instruments used shall be accurately calibrated to within 1% of scale and maintained in good working order. 3. Upon completion of the balancing and testing, the TAB Contractor shall compile the test data in report forms, and forward five copies to the Engineer for evaluation. 4. The final report shall contain logged results of all tests, including such data as: a. Tabulation of air volume at each outlet. b. Outside dry bulb and wet bulb temperature. c. Inside dry bulb and wet bulb temperatures in each conditioned space room or area. d. Actual fan capacities and static pressures. Motor current and voltage readings at each fan. B. AIR SYSTEMS: Perform the following operations as applicable to balance and test systems: 1. Check fan rotation. 2. Check filters (balancing shall be done with clean filters). 3. Test and adjust blower rpm to design requirements. 4. Test and record motor full load amperes. 5. Test and record system static pressures, suction and discharge. 6. Test and adjust system for design cfm, return air and outside air(±2%). Change-out fan sheaves as required to balance system. 7. Test and record entering air temperatures, db and wb. 8. Test and record leaving air temperatures, db and wb. 9. Adjust all zones to design cfm (±2%). 10. Test and adjust each diffuser, grille, and register to within 5% of design. C. AIR DUCT LEAKAGE: (From SMACNA Duct Standards latest edition) Test all ductwork (designed to handle over 1000 CFM) as follows: 1. Test apparatus a. The test apparatus shall consist of: b. A source of high pressure air- a portable rotary blower or a tank type vacuum cleaner. c. A flow measuring device consisting of straightening vanes and an orifice plate mounted in a straight tube with properly located pressure taps. Each orifice assembly shall be accurately calibrated with its own calibration curve. Pressure and flow readings shall be taken with U-tube manometers. 2. Test Procedures a. Test for audible leaks as follows: 1) Close off and seal all openings in the duct section to be tested. Connect the test apparatus to the duct by means of a section of flexible duct. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND Christi 23 05 93-4 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop BALANCING 2) Start the blower with its control damper closed. 3) Gradually open the inlet damper until the duct pressure reaches 1.5 times the standard designed duct operating pressure. 4) Survey all joints for audible leaks. Mark each leak and repair after shutting down blower. Do not apply a retest until sealants have set. b. After all audible leaks have been sealed, the remaining leakage should be measured with the orifice section of the test apparatus as follows: 1) Start blower and open damper until pressure in duct reaches 50% in excess of designed duct operating pressure. 2) Read the pressure differential across the orifice on manometer No. 2. If there is no leakage, the pressure differential will be zero. 3) Total allowable leakage shall not exceed one (1) percent of the total system design air flow rate. When partial sections of the duct system are tested, the summation of the leakage for all sections shall not exceed the total allowable leakage. 4) Even though a system may pass the measured leakage test, a concentration of leakage at one point may result in a noisy leak which must be corrected. D. DX SYSTEMS: 1. Test and record suction and discharge pressures at each compressor and record ambient air temperature entering the condensing coils. 2. Test and record unit full load amps and voltage. 3. Test and record staging and unloading of unit required by sequence of operation or drawing schedule. E. Automatic temperature controls shall be calibrated; and all thermostats and dampers adjusted so that the control system is in proper operating condition, subject to the approval of the Engineer/Owner. F. The TAB Contractor shall report to Engineer all air distribution devices or other equipment that operate noisily so that corrective measures may be implemented by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner or Architect/Engineer. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND Christi 23 05 93-5 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop BALANCING SECTION 23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. Section 23 02 00- Basic Materials and Methods for HVAC shall be included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Ductwork system insulation. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 29- Hangers and Supports for Piping and Equipment- HVAC B. Section 23 05 53- Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment C. Section 23 31 13- Metal Ductwork 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASHRAE Std 90.1 I-P- Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. B. ASTM C1071 - Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining Insulation (Thermal and Sound Absorbing Material); 2019. C. ASTM C423- Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method; 2023. D. ASTM C916- Standard Specification for Adhesives for Duct Thermal Insulation; 2020. E. ASTM E136-Standard Test Method for Assessing Combustibility of Materials Using a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750 Degrees C; 2024. F. ASTM E1966- Standard Test Method for Fire-Resistive Joint Systems; 2015 (Reapproved 2019). G. ASTM E2336- Standard Test Methods for Fire Resistive Grease Duct Enclosure Systems; 2020. H. ASTM E84 -Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2023c. I. ASTM G21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi; 2015, with Editorial Revision (2021). J. ICC (IECC)- International Energy Conservation Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. K. NAIMA FGDLS - North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (NAIMA) Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standards; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. L. NFPA 90A- Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; 2024. M. NFPA 90B - Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air-Conditioning Systems; 2024. N. SCAQMD 1168 -Adhesive and Sealant Applications; 1989, with Amendment(2022). O. SMACNA(DCS)- HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible; 2020. P. UL 2824 - GREENGUARD Certification Program Method for Measuring Microbial Resistance from Various Sources Using Static Environmental Chambers; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 23 07 13 - 1 DUCT INSULATION 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents Q. UL 723-Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least 5 years successful installation experience on projects with mechanical insulations similar to that required for this project. B. All insulation shall be listed and labeled to have a composite (insulation,jacket or facing, and adhesive used to adhere the facing or jacket to insulation)flame spread index of not more than 25 and smoke-developed index of not more than 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 and UL 723. 1. Exception: Outdoor mechanical insulation may have flame spread index of 75 and smoke developed index of 150. C. Duct and plenum insulation shall comply with minimum R-value requirements of ICC (IECC)and ASHRAE Std 90.1 I-P unless greater values are indicated otherwise in the contract documents. D. Adhesive and other material shall comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B. Additionally, all adhesives and sealants used on the interior of the building (i.e., inside of the weatherproofing system and applied on-site) shall be comprised of low-emitting materials that comply with VOC limits prescribed by SCAQMD 1168. E. Insulations shall not contain formaldehyde, asbestos, lead, mercury, mercury compounds, or polybrominated diphenyl ether fire retardants. F. All glass mineral wool insulation shall be UL GREENGUARD Gold certified. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Warrant the Work specified herein for one year against becoming unserviceable or causing an objectionable appearance resulting from either defective, or nonconforming materials and workmanship. B. Defects shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Mildewing. 2. Peeling, cracking, and blistering. 3. Condensation on exterior surfaces. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Indicate size, material, and finish. Show locations and installation procedures. Include details of joints, attachments, and clearances. B. PRODUCT DATA: Submit schedules, charts, literature, and illustrations to indicate the performance, fabrication procedures, product variations, and accessories. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives, and coatings to site in unopened containers with manufacturer's stamp, clearly labeled with flame and smoke rating, affixed showing fire hazard indexes of products. B. Protect insulation against dirt, water and chemical and mechanical damage. Do not install damaged or wet insulation; remove such from project site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL DESCRIPTION A. The type of insulation and its installation shall be in strict accordance with these specifications for each service, and the application technique shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. All insulation types, together with adhesives and finishes shall be submitted and approved before any insulation is installed. B. A sample quantity of each type of insulation and each type of application shall be installed and approval secured prior to proceeding with the main body of the Work. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 23 07 13-2 DUCT INSULATION 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Glass mineral wool materials shall be as manufactured by Knauf Insulation, Certain-Teed, Johns-Manville or Owens-Corning and shall have the same thermal properties, density, fire rating, vapor barrier, etc., as the types specified herein, subject to review by the Engineer. B. Adhesives shall be as manufactured by 3M Company, Arabol, Benjamin-Foster, Armstrong or Insulmastic, Inc., and shall have the same adhesive properties, fire rating, vapor seal, etc., as the types specified herein, subject to review by the Engineer. C. Ceramic fiber materials shall be as manufactured by Primer Refractories, A.P. Green Refractories or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. To ensure that it will achieve its highest possible performance and serve its intended purpose, install duct insulation and all associated accessories in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions and industry standard practices detailed by NAIMA FGDLS and SMACNA(DCS). B. All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturer's requirements. 3.02 EXTERNAL DUCT INSULATION A. Fasten all longitudinal and circumferential laps with outward clinching staples 3" on center. On rectangular ducts over 24"wide apply as above and hold insulation in place on bottom side with mechanical pins and clips on 12" centers. B. Seal all joints, fastener penetrations and other breaks in vapor barrier with 3-inch wide strips of white glass fabric embedded between two coats of vapor barrier mastic. Vapor barrier mastic shall be Childers CP-33 or approved equal for ductwork located indoors and shall be Childers CP-35 or approved equal for ductwork located outdoors. C. All external duct insulation shall be Knauf Insulation Atmosphere Duct Wrap with ECOSE Technology, Johns Manville Microlite duct wrap insulation with FSK facing or approved equal. D. External duct wrap is required on all outside air ducts, supply and return air ducts that are not internally insulated. External duct wrap is also required on all exhaust and relief air ducts that are used in airside energy recovery systems. Any exhaust ductwork located in an unconditioned space that conveys air from conditioned spaces or vice versa shall also be provided with external duct wrap. Duct wrap shall be provided as follows: 1. 1'/2"thick, 1.0 pcf density minimum; minimum installed R-value of 4.5 when ducts are located in directly conditioned spaces. 2. 2"thick, 1.0 pcf density minimum; minimum installed R-value of 6.0 when ducts are located in indirectly conditioned spaces such as ceiling plenum space used for return air or located indoors concealed within chases or shafts. 3. 3"thick, 0.75 pcf density minimum; minimum installed R-value of 8.0 when ducts are located in unconditioned spaces. E. Any ductwork located in an air plenum that is comprised of materials that do not comply with the 25/50 flame and smoke rating per ASTM E84 testing requirements shall be provided with a single layer of duct wrap to establish a noncombustible rating per ASTM E136. Duct wrap products which are approved for such non-compliant combustible duct materials located in air plenums shall be 3M Fire Barrier Plenum Wrap 5A+ or Unifrax FyreWrap 0.5 Plenum. Insulation products for this application shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 DUCT LINER A. Duct liner shall be kept clean and dry during transportation, storage, installation, and throughout the construction process care should be taken to protect the liner from exposure to the elements or damage from mechanical abuse. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 23 07 13-3 DUCT INSULATION 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop B. All portions of duct designed to receive duct liner shall be completely covered with liner as specified. The smooth, black, mat facing or acrylic-coated surfaces with flexible glass cloth reinforcement shall face the airstream. All duct liner shall be cut to assure tight, overlapped corner joints. The top pieces shall be supported by the sidepieces. Duct liner shall be installed following the guidelines in the NAIMA FGDLS. C. The duct liner shall be tested according to erosion test method in ASTM C1071 and shall be guaranteed to withstand velocities in the duct system up to 6,000 fpm without surface erosion. D. Duct liner shall be adhered to the sheet metal with full coverage of an approved adhesive that conforms to ASTM C916, and all exposed leading edges and transverse joints shall be coated with Permacote factory-applied or field-applied edge coating and shall be neatly butted without gaps. Shop or field cuts shall be liberally coated with Johns Manville SuperSeal®duct butter and Edge Treatment or approved adhesive. E. Metal nosings shall be securely installed over transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream at forward discharge and at any point where lined duct is preceded by unlined duct. F. When velocity exceeds 4,000 fpm (20.3 m/sec), use metal nosing on every leading edge. Nosing may be formed on duct or be channel or zee attached by screws, rivets or welds. G. The liner shall further be secured with Graham welding pins and washers on not more than 18 inch centers both vertical and horizontal surfaces, and the pins and washers shall be pointed up with adhesive. H. Duct liner shall be Knauf Insulation Atmosphere Duct Liner with ECOSE Technology, Johns Manville Linacoustic RC duct liner with factory-applied edge coating and acrylic coating on the mat surface of airstream side or approved equal. The liner shall meet the Life Safety Standards as established by NFPA 90A and NFPA 9013, FHC 25/50 and Limited Combustibility and the air stream surface coating should contain an immobilized, EPA-registered, anti-microbial agent so it will not support microbial growth as tested in accordance with ASTM G21. The duct liner shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C1071, UL 2824, with an NRC not less than 0.70 as tested per ASTM C423 using a Type "A" mounting, and a thermal conductivity no higher than 0.24 BTU*in/(hr*ftz*°F) at 750F mean temperature. I. Line supply and return ductwork at connection of fan-powered HVAC units to a point of 15 feet upstream and downstream of the equipment, 15 feet downstream of fan powered terminal units, and in return air boots. Attach with full cover coat of cement, duct dimensions up to 16 inches; provide stick clips or screws and cap for dimensions over 16 inches, spaced 16 inches o.c. maximum. Provide sheet metal liner cap over all leading edges of internal insulation exposed to air stream. J. Duct liner shall be provided as follows: 1. 1"thick, 1.5 pcf density minimum, with a minimum installed R-value of 4.2 when ducts are located in directly conditioned spaces. 2. 1 '/2"thick, 1.5 pcf density minimum, with a minimum installed R-value of 6.0 when ducts are located in indirectly conditioned spaces such as ceiling plenum space used for return air. 3. 2"thick, 1.5 pcf density minimum, with with a minimum installed R-value of 8.0 when ducts are located in indoor, unconditioned spaces or located outdoors. 3.04 EXPOSED DUCTWORK LOCATED INDOORS A. Duct required to be insulated by any section of this specification that is routed exposed in occupied spaces shall be double wall. B. Duct routed exposed shall be double wall with perforated inner liner and glass mineral wool insulation. Provide 1"thick insulation when ductwork is located in conditioned spaces and 2" thick in unconditioned spaces, insulation density shall be a minimum of 1.0 PCF. Double wall duct shall be United McGill model Acousti-k27 for round or oval ducts and Rectangular-k27 for rectangular ducts or approved equal. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 23 07 13-4 DUCT INSULATION 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 3.05 EXPOSED DUCT LOCATED OUTDOORS A. All metal ductwork located outdoors shall be internally lined with fiberglass Duct Liner as specified and externally insulated with 2"thick, 6.0 pcf density fiberglass Insulation Board with FSK facing. The protective finish system shall be 0.016" minimum thickness aluminum jacketing. B. Paint non-insulated duct. Coordinate color with Architect. 3.06 AIR DEVICE AND MISCELLANEOUS DUCT INSULATION A. The backside of all supply air devices shall be insulated with taped and sealed external duct wrap matching the thickness, density, and R-value of the associated duct system. B. The contractor shall install an additional layer of 1-'/2 inch thick external glass mineral wool duct wrap on any portion of the supply air, return air, outside air, or exhaust air system that has condensation forming during any period of operation. The insulation shall be taped and vapor- sealed and located until all evidence of the condensation has been eliminated, at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.07 KITCHEN GREASE HOOD EXHAUST DUCT A. All type I kitchen range hood exhaust duct shall be enclosed with 2-hour fire rated enclosure. B. The duct enclosure shall be sealed around the duct at the points of penetration with an approved fire barrier sealant per ASTM E1966. Sealant shall be 3M CP 25WB+ or 303 fire barrier caulk and putty. C. The enclosure shall be separated from the duct by at least 3 inches and not more than 12 inches. D. Cleanout openings at exhaust duct with access openings at the fire rated enclosure and access doors shall be provided at each duct offset and as required for proper operation and maintenance. E. As an alternate method, the contractor may use two layers of 2-hour fire rated duct wrap such as 3M Fire Barrier Duct Wrap 615+ or Unifrax FyreWrap Elite 1.5 in lieu of the fire rated enclosure, provided that all the following constraints are satisfied: 1. Duct wrap system shall be tested per ASTM E2336 internal fire testing and have an achieved minimum fire resistance rating of 2 hours. 2. Product shall be approved by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). 3. Duct wrap system shall be mechanically attached to the duct using steel banding and/or weld pins per manufacturer's instructions. 4. Duct wrap system shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, including but not limited to zero clearance to combustibles at all locations on the wrap surface. F. Insulation and all other requirements shall be provided per local codes. 3.08 DRYER VENT DUCT A. All dryer vent duct routed within an air plenum shall be enclosed within a 1-hour fire rated enclosure. B. The duct enclosure shall be sealed around the duct at the points of penetration with an approved fire barrier sealant per ASTM E1966. Sealant shall be 3M CP 25WB+ or 303 fire barrier caulk and putty. C. The enclosure shall be separated from the duct by at least 3 inches and not more than 12 inches. D. Cleanout openings at exhaust duct with access openings at the fire rated enclosure and access doors shall be provided at each duct offset and as required for proper operation and maintenance. E. As an alternate method, the contractor may use a single layer of 1-hour fire rated duct wrap such as 3M Fire Barrier Duct Wrap 615+ or Unifrax FyreWrap Elite 1.5 in lieu of the fire rated enclosure, provided that all the following constraints are satisfied: DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 23 07 13 -5 DUCT INSULATION 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 1. Duct wrap system shall be tested per ASTM E2336 internal fire testing and have an achieved minimum fire resistance rating of 1 hour. 2. Product shall be approved by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). 3. Duct wrap system shall be mechanically attached to the duct using steel banding and/or weld pins per manufacturer's instructions. 4. Duct wrap system shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, including but not limited to zero clearance to combustibles at all locations on the wrap surface. F. Insulation and all other requirements shall be provided per local codes. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 23 07 13 -6 DUCT INSULATION 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SECTION 23 07 16 HVAC EQUIPMENT INSULATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. Section 23 02 00- Basic Materials and Methods for HVAC shall be included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE A. Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for Owner's use. B. Work specified elsewhere. 1. Basic materials and methods. 2. Piping systems. 3. Air distribution equipment. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASHRAE Std 90.1 I-P- Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. B. ASTM C1136- Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation; 2023. C. ASTM C553- Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications; 2013 (Reapproved 2019). D. ASTM C612- Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation; 2014 (Reapproved 2019). E. ASTM E84 -Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2023c. F. ICC (IECC)- International Energy Conservation Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. G. NFPA 90A- Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; 2024. H. NFPA 90B - Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air-Conditioning Systems; 2024. 1. SCAQMD 1168 -Adhesive and Sealant Applications; 1989, with Amendment (2022). J. UL 723-Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least 5 years successful installation experience on projects with mechanical insulations similar to that required for this project. B. All insulation shall be listed and labeled to have a composite (insulation,jacket or facing, and adhesive used to adhere the facing or jacket to insulation)flame spread index of not more than 25 and smoke-developed index of not more than 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 and UL 723. C. All HVAC equipment insulation shall comply with minimum requirements of ICC (IECC) and ASHRAE Std 90.1 I-P. D. Adhesives and other materials shall comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B. Additionally, all adhesives and sealants used on the interior of the building (i.e., inside of the weatherproofing system and applied on-site) shall be comprised of low-emitting materials that comply with VOC limits prescribed by SCAQMD 1168. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus HVAC EQUIPMENT Christi 23 07 16- 1 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop INSULATION Re-Bid Construction Documents 1.05 WARRANTY A. Warrant the Work specified herein for one year against becoming unserviceable or causing an objectionable appearance resulting from either defective or nonconforming materials and workmanship. B. Defects shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Mildewing. 2. Peeling, cracking, and blistering. 3. Condensation on exterior surfaces. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Indicate size, material, and finish. Show locations and installation procedures. Include details of joints, attachments, and clearances. B. PRODUCT DATA: Submit schedules, charts, literature, and illustrations to indicate the performance, fabrication procedures, product variations, and accessories. 1.07 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives, and coatings to site in unopened containers with manufacturer's stamp, clearly labeled with flame and smoke rating, affixed showing fire hazard indexes of products. B. Protect insulation against dirt, water and chemical and mechanical damage. Do not install damaged or wet insulation; remove such from project site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT INSULATION A. It is the intent of these specifications to secure superior quality workmanship resulting in an absolutely satisfactory installation of insulation from the standpoint of both function and appearance. Particular attention shall be given to valves, fittings, pumps, etc., requiring low temperature insulation to insure full thickness of insulation and proper application of the vapor seal. All flaps of vapor barrier jackets and/or canvas covering must be neatly and securely smoothed and sealed down. B. The type of insulation and its installation shall be in strict accordance with these specifications for each service, and the application technique shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. All insulation types, together with adhesives and finishes shall be submitted and reviewed before any insulation is installed. C. A sample quantity of each type of insulation and each type application shall be installed and reviewed prior to proceeding with the main body of the work. Condensation caused by improper installation of insulation shall be corrected by Installing Contractor. Any damage caused by condensation shall be made good at no cost to the Owner or Architect/Engineer. D. Glass mineral wool materials as manufactured by Knauf Insulation, Owens/Corning, Certain- Teed or Johns Manville will be acceptable, if they comply with the specifications. E. Accessories, such as adhesives, mastics and cements shall have the same component ratings as listed above. Additionally, all adhesives and sealants used on the interior of the building (i.e., inside of the weatherproofing system and applied on-site) shall be comprised of low-emitting materials that comply with VOC limits prescribed by SCAQMD 1168. F. All products or their shipping cartons shall have a label affixed, indicating flame and smoke ratings do not exceed the above requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All insulation shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and printed installation instructions. B. All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturer's requirements. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus HVAC EQUIPMENT Christi 23 07 16-2 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop INSULATION 3.02 CHILLED WATER PUMPS A. Shall be insulated with Knauf Insulation Board with ECOSE Technology, Certain-Teed IB-600 or equal, rigid insulation board, 2"thick, cut and formed into a box and secured in place with 3/4"wide x 0.020 galvanized bands spaced on 9" centers. Bands shall be pulled snug over sheets of insulation board. All joints shall be well and neatly fitted and so arranged that the assembly may be dismantled with ease permitting access to the pump. All voids on the interior of box shall be filled with glass mineral wool blanket insulation. Exterior shall be finished with a trowel coat of Foster's 30-35 vapor barrier mastic, a layer of 1" mesh galvanized wire, and a coat of Johns Manville CALCOAT-127 finishing cement. Final finish shall be an eight ounce canvas jacket, pasted and sealed in place with Foster's 30-36 Seafas. B. Insulation Board shall comply with ASTM C612 and ASTM C553. The associated FSK facing shall comply with ASTM C1136. C. Pipe insulation shall be extended over all cold parts of chilled water pumps not directly over drainage basin of pump base. 3.03 BOILER EXHAUST SYSTEM A. Insulate boiler stack, breaching and induced draft fan housing in contact with flue gases, with 1- inch thick high temperature, spun glass mineral wool semi-rigid board. Knauf Insulation Elevated Temperature Board with ECOSE Technology, Johns-Manville 1000 Spin-Glass or approved equal, secured between outer facing of 1-inch galvanized wire mesh. Calcium silicate insulation, Johns-Manville Thermo-12 Gold or approved equal, may be applied at the contractor's option followed by application of 1-inch galvanized wire mesh. B. In exposed areas, apply 1 1/4-inch coat of insulating and finishing cement, Ryder"V" One Coat or approved equal, troweled to a smooth surface. After cement has dried, surfaces shall be weatherproofed using 2 coats of mastic, Childers CP-10, with a layer of white glass cloth reinforcing embedded between coats. C. Insulation Board for elevated temperature applications shall comply with ASTM C612. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus HVAC EQUIPMENT Christi 23 07 16-3 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop INSULATION SECTION 23 07 19 HVAC PIPING INSULATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. Section 23 02 00- Basic Materials and Methods for HVAC shall be included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE A. Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for Owner's use. B. Furnish and install piping insulation to: 1. Chilled water and heating hot water piping. 2. Condensate drain piping. 3. Refrigerant piping. 4. All pipes subject to freezing conditions shall be insulated. C. Work specified elsewhere. 1. Painting. 2. Pipe hangers and supports. D. For insulation purpose piping is defined as the complete piping system including supplies and returns, pipes, valves, automatic control valve bodies, fittings, flanges, strainers, thermometer well, unions, reducing stations, and orifice assemblies. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 29- Hangers and Supports for Piping and Equipment- HVAC B. Section 23 05 53- Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment C. Section 23 21 13-Above Ground Hydronic Piping D. Section 23 23 00- Refrigerant Piping 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASHRAE Std 90.1 I-P- Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. B. ASTM C1126- Standard Specification for Faced or Unfaced Rigid Cellular Phenolic Thermal Insulation; 2019. C. ASTM C1136- Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation; 2023. D. ASTM C534/C534M - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form; 2023. E. ASTM C547- Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation; 2022a. F. ASTM E136-Standard Test Method for Assessing Combustibility of Materials Using a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750 Degrees C; 2024. G. ASTM E84 -Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2023c. H. ICC (IECC)- International Energy Conservation Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. I. SCAQMD 1168 -Adhesive and Sealant Applications; 1989, with Amendment(2022). J. UL 723 -Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 23 07 19 - 1 HVAC PIPING INSULATION 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 1.05 WARRANTY A. Warrant the Work specified herein for one year against becoming unserviceable or causing an objectionable appearance resulting from either defective or nonconforming materials or workmanship. B. Defects shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Mildewing. 2. Peeling, cracking, and blistering. 3. Condensation on exterior surfaces. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Indicate size, material, and finish. Show locations and installation procedures. Include details of joints, attachments, and clearances. B. PRODUCT DATA: Submit schedules, charts, literature, and illustrations to indicate the performance, fabrication procedures, project variations, and accessories. 1.07 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives, and coatings to site in unopened containers with manufacturer's stamp, clearly labeled with flame and smoke rating, affixed showing fire hazard indexes of products. B. Protect insulation against dirt, water and chemical and mechanical damage. Do not install damaged or wet insulation; remove such from project site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 HVAC PIPING INSULATION A. It is the intent of these specifications to secure superior quality workmanship resulting in an absolutely satisfactory installation of insulation from the standpoint of both function and appearance. Particular attention shall be given to valves, fittings, pumps, etc., requiring low temperature insulation to insure full thickness of insulation and proper application of the vapor seal. All flaps of vapor barrier jackets and/or canvas covering must be neatly and securely smoothed and sealed down. B. The type of insulation and its installation shall be in strict accordance with these specifications for each service, and the application technique shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. All insulation types, together with adhesives and finishes shall be submitted and reviewed prior to installation. C. A sample quantity of each type of insulation and each type application shall be installed and accepted prior to proceeding with the main body of the work. Condensation caused by improper installation of insulation shall be corrected by Installing Contractor. Any damage caused by condensation shall be made good at no cost to the Owner or Architect/Engineer. D. All insulation shall be listed and labeled to have a composite (insulation,jacket or facing, and adhesive used to adhere the facing or jacket to insulation)flame spread index of not more than 25 and smoke-developed index of not more than 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723. E. All HVAC piping insulation thicknesses shall comply with minimum requirements of ICC (IECC)and ASHRAE Std 90.1 I-P. F. Accessories, such as adhesives, mastics and cements shall have the same component ratings as listed above. Additionally, all adhesives and sealants used on the interior of the building (i.e., inside of the weatherproofing system and applied on-site) shall be comprised of low-emitting materials that comply with VOC limits prescribed by SCAQMD 1168. G. All products or their shipping cartons shall have a label affixed, indicating flame and smoke ratings do not exceed the above requirements. H. Any existing piping located in an air plenum that is comprised of materials that do not comply with the 25/50 flame and smoke rating per ASTM E84 testing requirements shall be provided with a single layer of high-temperature insulation to establish a noncombustible rating per DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 23 07 19-2 HVAC PIPING INSULATION 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop ASTM E136. Insulation products which are approved for such non-compliant combustible piping materials located air plenums shall be 3M Fire Barrier Plenum Wrap 5A+ or Unifrax FyreWrap 0.5 Plenum. Insulation products for this application shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 2.02 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Calcium silicate materials shall be as manufactured by Johns Manville. B. Glass mineral wool materials shall be as manufactured by Knauf Insulation, Johns Manville or Owens-Corning and shall have the same thermal properties, density, fire rating, vapor barrier, etc., as the types specified herein, subject to review by the Engineer. All glass mineral wool insulation shall be UL GREENGUARD Gold certified. C. Adhesives shall be as manufactured by Childers, Foster, HB Fuller or Armacell, and shall have the same adhesive properties, fire rating, vapor seal, etc., as the types specified herein, subject to review by the Engineer. D. Flexible elastomeric cellular thermal insulation by Armacell. E. Phenolic foam insulation shall be as manufactured by Resolco, Inc. (Insul-Phen)or Polyguard (Poly-phen). F. Metal jacketing and fitting covers shall be as manufactured by Childers or RPR Products. 2.03 MATERIALS A. CHILLED WATER PIPING: Provide phenolic foam in accordance with ASTM C1126 with ASJ jacket and all joints sealed. B. HEATING HOT WATER PIPING: Provide glass mineral wool pipe insulation in accordance with ASTM C547 with ASJ+ SSL+jacket or phenolic foam in accordance with ASTM C1126 with ASJ and all joints sealed. C. CONDENSATE DRAINAGE PIPING: Provide flexible elastomeric cellular thermal insulation in accordance with ASTM C534/C534M, model "Armaflex Ultra", fire rated for use in environmental air plenums; insulation not required when piping is exposed on roof. D. REFRIGERANT PIPING: Provide flexible elastomeric cellular thermal insulation in accordance with ASTM C534/C534M, model "Armaflex Ultra", fire rated for use in environmental air plenums.Apply manufacturers recommended finish and sealant for exterior applications. E. METAL JACKETING: Utilize Childers "Strap-On"jacketing. Provide preformed fitting covers for all elbows and tees. F. ALL SERVICE JACKETING (ASJ+): Vapor retarder jacket for interior applications shall be composed of an aluminum foil layer, reinforced with glass scrim, bonded to a layer of white kraft paper, interleaving with an outer polymer film leaving no paper exposed; complying with ASTM C1136. Vapor retarder jacket for exterior applications shall be composed of a 3-ply composite membrane consisting of a white 0.5 mil polyester film, 1.0 mil aluminum foil, and one 0.5 mil clear polyester film; complying with ASTM C1136. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. All insulation shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and printed installation instructions, including high density inserts at all hangers and pipe supports to prevent compression of insulation. B. All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturer's requirements. C. All heat recovery piping between air conditioning equipment and hydronic or domestic hot water piping shall be insulated per the High Temperature Surfaces Schedule below. D. All condenser water piping located in a ceiling plenum shall be insulated per the requirements for indoor chilled water piping as indicated in the Low Temperature Surfaces Schedule below. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 23 07 19-3 HVAC PIPING INSULATION 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop E. Pipes located outdoors or in tunnels shall be insulated same as concealed piping and shall have a jacket of 0.016 inch thick, smooth aluminum with longitudinal modified Pittsburg Z-Lock seam and 2 inch overlap. Jacketing shall be easily removed and replaced without damage.All insulation butt joints shall be sealed with gray silicone. Galvanized banding is not acceptable. F. All insulated piping located over driveways shall have an aluminum shield permanently banded over insulation to protect it from damage from car antennas. G. Provide all HVAC piping insulation to comply with the ASHRAE Std 90.1 I-P Minimum Thickness Schedule and as indicated below. 1. Minimum Insulation Thickness for Low Temperature Surfaces a. Condensate drain lines: 1 inch b. Chilled Water Piping: 1) Located outdoors: 2 inch 2) Located indoors: (a) 4 inch and smaller: 1-'/2 inch (b) Larger than 4 inch: 2 inch c. Refrigerant Piping 1) 1'/2" and smaller: 1 inch 2) Larger than 1'/2 inch: 1-'/2 inch 2. Minimum Insulation Thickness for High Temperature Surfaces a. Hot Water Piping: 1) Operating temperature 105°F or less: 1 inch 2) Operating temperature higher than 105°F and pipe size 1-'/4 inch or smaller: 1-'/ inch 3) Operating temperature higher than 105°F and pipe size greater than 1-'/4 inch: 2 inch b. Steam Piping: 1) Pipe size 1-'/2 inch and smaller: 2-'h inch 2) Pipe size more than 1-'h inch: 3 inch c. Refrigerant Piping 1) 1-'/2 inch and smaller: 1-'/2 inch 2) Larger than 1-'/2 inch: 2 inch 3.02 WATER PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. The insulation shall be applied to clean, dry pipes with all joints firmly butted together. Where piping is interrupted by fittings, flanges, valves or hangers and at intervals not to exceed 25 feet on straight runs, a vapor dam shall be formed between the vapor retarder jacket and the bare pipe. The seal shall be by the applications of vapor retarder mastic to the exposed insulation joint faces, carried continuously down to and along 4 inches of pipe and up to and along 2 inches of jacket. B. Pipe fittings and valves shall be insulated with pre-molded or shop fabricated glass mineral wool covers finished with two brush coats of vapor retarder mastic reinforced with glass fabric. C. All under lap surfaces shall be clean and free of dust, etc. before the joint is sealed. These laps shall be firmly rubbed to insure a positive seal. A brush coat of vapor retarder mastic shall be applied to all edges of the vapor retarder jacket. 3.03 STANDBY-GENERATOR ENGINE EXHAUST PIPING A. Entire engine exhaust pipe from exhaust manifold to outside terminal shall be enclosed in a 1" thick layer of calcium silicate insulation. B. A second insulating layer of 1"thick calcium silicate shall cover the first layer. C. Joints for the first and second layer shall be staggered. D. Apply aluminum jacket over outer layer of insulation. E. Insulate exhaust muffler in the same manner as the exhaust piping. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 23 07 19-4 HVAC PIPING INSULATION 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 3.04 FIRE RATED INSULATION A. All pipe penetrations through walls and concrete floors shall be fire rated by applying Owens Corning Thermafiber in the space between the concrete and the pipe. B. The penetration shall be additionally sealed by using 3M brand model CP 25 or 303 fire barrier caulk and putty. C. All fire rating material shall be insulated in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 23 07 19 -5 HVAC PIPING INSULATION 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SECTION 23 09 63 ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM (EMCS) PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. The Energy Management and Control System (EMCS)shall be comprised of a Local Area Network (LAN) infrastructure, Operator Workstations (OWS), Engineering Workstations (EWS), a Primary Network Server(PNS), Network Area Controllers (NAC), Application Specific Controllers (ASC), Unitary System Controllers (USC), and Field Devices installed within the facility. The EMCS Contractor shall provide a completely wired system. Wireless components and wireless communication are not acceptable. B. The Workstations, Primary Network Server, and Network Area Controllers shall be connected by a EMCS Contractor supplied and installed Local Area Network. The LAN shall comply with all IEEE Standards as outlined in the latest revision of IEEE 802: Local and Metropolitan Networks: Overview and Architecture. C. If the EMCS contractor wishes to connect to the Owner's Wide Area/Local Area Network as part of the control system network, the EMCS contractor shall acquire permission in writing and include the letter in the submittal. Any system that requires connection to the owner's network for communication between NAC, ASC, USC and/or field devices that is submitted without the written permission from the owner shall be rejected. The EMCS Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner and supply all required information. D. Access to the system, either locally in the building, or remotely from a central site or sites, shall be accomplished through standard web browsers, via the Internet and/or a local area network. E. All EMCS controllers and workstations shall communicate using the protocols and network standards as defined by ASHRAE Std 135, latest revision. Management level TCP/IP Ethernet network speeds shall be 1 Gbps minimum and the Automation Level MS/TP network speeds shall be 76.8 Kbps minimum. F. The Server shall gather data from the system and generate HTML pages accessible through a conventional web browser from all personal computers (PCs) connected to the network. System shall include any and all software and hardware to support at least 50 simultaneous users. The EMCS shall be compatible with all common web browsers. G. Facility Operators shall be able to view and configure systems through the standard web browser and all graphical/data representations shall appear identical, whether the user is on site or viewing via the Internet at a remote location. Standard operator functions such as control point manipulation, configuration and viewing of trends, schedules and alarms shall be performed through the standard browser. Each mechanical system and building floor plan shall be depicted on the operator workstation by point-and-click graphics. H. The EMCS shall directly control HVAC equipment as specified in the Sequence of Operations. Furnish Energy Conservation features such as Optimal Start/Stop, Night Setback, Setpoint Reset logic, and Demand Control Ventilation. I. The EMCS vendor shall provide the following additional services as part of this specification: warranty and service during the warranty period; submittals, samples and record documentation; comprehensive startup and testing of the EMCS with documentation; training services for the owner and facility operators; coordination with other contractors and suppliers; operator and technician training program, and shall cooperate fully with the Project Commissioning Agent. J. Products furnished under this specification but installed by other. 1. Mechanical devices installed under Division 23 by the mechanical contractor or other suppliers: a. Temperature sensing thermowells. b. Automatic control valves and actuators. c. Pipe taps for flowmeters. d. Water pressure sensors and switches. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND Christi 23 09 63- 1 CONTROL SYSTEM (EMCS) 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents e. Automatic control dampers and actuators not installed in air handling unit mixing boxes or louvers. f. Damper actuators for automatic control dampers installed in air handling unit mixing boxes. g. Damper actuators for variable air volume (VAV)terminal units. h. Mounting cost of controller and actuator for variable air volume (VAV)terminal units. 2. Electrical devices installed under Division 26 by the electrical contractor: a. 120 VAC power to controllers and control panels at locations indicated on the drawings. Review and verify that these locations are adequate for the proposed EMCS. b. Interlock wiring to duct mounted smoke detector or fire alarm shutdown relays to HVAC equipment motor starters and variable frequency drives (VFD). K. Provide and install all interconnecting cables between all operator's terminals and peripheral devices (such as printers, etc.) supplied under this section. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS & REFERENCES A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract documents, apply to this section including: 1. Division 01 for General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. 2. Division 21 for fire protection equipment. 3. Division 22 for plumbing equipment and domestic water systems. 4. Division 23 for mechanical equipment, ductwork, and piping systems. 5. Division 26 for electrical equipment, lighting control, and fire alarm systems. B. The latest edition of the following standards and codes in effect as approved by the authority having jurisdiction and amended as of supplier's proposal date, and any applicable subsections thereof, shall govern design and selection of equipment and material supplied: 1. ANSI MC85.1 -Terminology for Automatic Control. 2. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE). 3. ASHRAE Std 135- BACnet. 4. BTL Mark by the BACnet Testing Laboratories. 5. Uniform Building Code (UBC), including local amendments. 6. UL 916 - Underwriters Laboratories Standard for Energy Management Equipment. Canada and the US. 7. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 8. FCC Part 15, Subpart J, Class A. 9. National Institute of Standards and Technology(NIST). 10. IEEE 802: Local and Metropolitan Networks: Overview and Architecture. 1.03 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Refer to Division 00 and Division 01 for allowances and related contractual requirements. B. Refer to Division 21 for General Fire Protection Provisions and fire suppression pump. 1. The EMCS contractor shall provide communications integration via BACnet/IP interface to each installed system listed above. BACnet MS/TP is acceptable if IP interface is not available from equipment manufacturer. 2. The EMCS contractor shall coordinate with all vendors providing above systems to obtain communications requirements and points lists. Map all available points to EMCS. C. Refer to Division 22 for General Plumbing Provisions, domestic water heating systems, domestic water pumping systems, domestic water metering, and natural gas metering. 1. The EMCS contractor shall provide communications integration via BACnet/IP interface to each installed system listed above. BACnet MS/TP is acceptable if IP interface is not available from equipment manufacturer. 2. The EMCS contractor shall coordinate with all vendors providing above systems to obtain communications requirements and points lists. Map all available points to EMCS. D. Refer to Division 23 for General Mechanical Provisions for equipment such as chillers, cooling towers, boilers, pumps, air-handling units, terminal units, ventilation fans, variable frequency DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND Christi 23 09 63-2 CONTROL SYSTEM (EMCS) 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop drives, unitary AC units, etc. 1. The EMCS contractor shall provide communications integration via BACnet/IP interface to each installed system listed above. BACnet MS/TP is acceptable if IP interface is not available from equipment manufacturer. 2. The EMCS contractor shall coordinate with all vendors providing above systems to obtain communications requirements and points lists. Map all available points to EMCS. E. Refer to Section 26 for General Electrical Provisions for equipment such as electrical switchgear control, electrical power monitoring, emergency generators, lighting control system, etc. 1. The EMCS contractor shall provide communications integration via BACnet/IP interface to each installed system listed above. BACnet MS/TP is acceptable if IP interface is not available from equipment manufacturer. 2. The EMCS contractor shall coordinate with all vendors providing above systems to obtain communications requirements and points lists. Map all available points to EMCS. 1.04 ELECTRICAL POWER PROVISIONS A. Primary power will be provided under Division 26 by the electrical contractor to the panel locations indicated on the mechanical &electrical drawings. Provide step down transformers within panel enclosures. Provide all necessary fuses and circuit protection devices. B. Power will be provided to the controllers serving fan powered terminal units with electric heat via the control transformer provided with the unit. C. All components of the EMCS shall be powered from the sources above. Provide final terminations from the locations indicated on the Division 23 Drawings. D. The EMCS Contractor shall provide any additional control power that is required as part of this contract and not indicated by other. This shall include all conduit, cabling, circuit breakers, etc. 1.05 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS A. The EMCS Contractor shall: 1. Have a local staff of trained personnel capable of giving instructions and providing routine and emergency maintenance on the EMCS, all components and software/firmware and all other elements of the EMCS. 2. Have a proven record of experience in the supply and installation of equivalent BACnet systems over a minimum period of five years. Provide documentation of at least three equal and complexity, if so requested by the Owner's Representative. 3. Be a factory certified representative of the native BACnet EMCS manufacturer for design, installation, and service of the proposed system. 4. Have comprehensive local service, training and support facilities for the total EMCS as provided. Maintain local, supplies of essential expendable parts. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. ALL DOCUMENTS SUBMITTED SHALL BE IN NATIVE PDF FORMAT. NO SCANS. B. Shop Drawings: 1. The following information shall be included on the cover page for each shop drawing and equipment documentation submittal: a. Project name with date. Refer to the applicable specifications by name and number. b. Provide submittal number and re-submittal number and date as applicable. c. Provided name and address of Consulting Engineer, Mechanical Contractor, General Contractor 2. Shop drawings shall be CAD generated, plot size of 8-1/2" x 11" or 11"x 17". Drawings shall include diagrams, mounting instructions, installation procedures, equipment details and software descriptions for all aspects of the system to be installed. 3. Provide schematic of systems indicating instrumentation locations, all interconnecting cables between supplied cabinets on a mechanical floor plan. 4. Software specifications and descriptions including operating sequences. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND Christi 23 09 63-3 CONTROL SYSTEM (EMCS) 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 5. Provide a bill of material that indicates specific manufacturer, part number, part description and quantity of each device for all system components. 6. Provide a list of the wire labels to be installed on each end of the control wiring, at the device and the control panel terminal. Labels shall be machine generated, typed and legible with a maximum of 17 characters. The label description "AHU-1 SAT" shall indicate the supply air temperature of AHU-1. 7. Equipment Schematic: Provide an electronic equipment schematic for each piece of mechanical equipment. The schematic shall display all mechanical equipment characteristics including fans, dampers, valves, sensors and other applicable control devices. The schematic shall show wiring terminations to each control device as shown in the submittal and as-build documentation. Control devices shall be labeled by a symbol that can easily be identified in a bill of material that is shown on this graphic. The bill of material shall show the device symbol, description, manufacturer and part number. 8. Sequence of Operations: The control sequences shall be viewable for each piece of mechanical equipment and be in a text format as shown in the as built documentation. The sequence of operations shall be selectable at the applicable location for the control program. C. Control component submittals: 1. Component technical data sheets with mounting and installation details. 2. The documentation shall include comprehensive and complete details of the BIBB and automation level documentation including address, associated controller type, etc. as required and for the interface to the EMCS. 3. Details of networks/communications equipment, cabling and protocols proposed. Provide schedule of cabling including details of proposed cable types. 4. Module Drawing: Provide an electronic wiring diagram of each control module (as shown in submittal documentation). Diagram shall display wiring schematic and terminations to end devices. Diagram shall display each input and output terminals and label those that are used for the control application. Diagram shall display module type/name and network address. 5. Field sensor and instrumentation specification sheets. Provide complete manufacturer's specifications for all items that are supplied. Include vendor name of every item supplied. 6. Schedule and specification sheets for dampers, valves and actuators. 7. Design and provide layout of all components of panel mounted control devices, terminal strips and power supplies. D. Colorgraphics: Provide sample layout of color graphic representations of the systems for review. The submittal shall indicate the quality of the graphic to be provided with the system with a sample of the specific control points to be included. Control points shall as a minimum include points indicated in the input/output summary, control schematic and primary controlling points defined in the sequences of operation. Provide a sample of a floor plan layout, typical AHU, terminal unit, outside air pretreatment unit, variable frequency drive, exhaust/supply fan, chiller plant and hot water plant. For control points to be provided by equipment BACnet integration provide sample of the control points, up to 25 total. E. Verification Reports: The submittal shall include a sample of the verification reports to be utilized during the verification section of this specification. Sample reports shall be approved as submitted or be modified by the engineer or owner's representative. The verification reports shall be included in the final Operation & Maintenance Manuals. Reports shall be provided in electronic PDF format. 1. Project Systems Verification Form for each controller. a. General information for each form shall include: project name; associated equipment with mark number; control panel number and location; controller number and model number; controller device instance number(address); MS/TP LAN segment number; verifying technician and date. b. Each connected control point and device shall contain the following columns with a separate line for each connected physical point: point description (same as device label); input/output number for each connected control device (AI-XX, AO-XX, DI-XX, DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND Christi 23 09 63-4 CONTROL SYSTEM (EMCS) 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop or DO-XX). c. Check boxes confirming that the verification tasks have been completed: device location, proper termination at device; proper termination at control panel; sequence is verified; point trend is enabled. d. Data entry boxes indicating measured/confirmed values: preliminary control point value on the graphic; observed control point value; calibration or adjustment value to correct offset; final displayed point value on the color-graphic; date of verification; engineer or owner's representative verification. 2. Control Panel Verification Form for each control panel. a. General information: panel location and identification number; panel dimensions and NEMA rating; panel properly installed; Class 1 and Class 2 wiring are properly separated; correct voltage to the panel; no shorts or grounds in panel; no induce voltages in panel wiring; point to point termination match submittal; devices are mounted in the correct location; controller software revision number; address of controllers; panel device checkout is complete; panel startup is complete. 3. Sequence of Operation Verification Form per piece of equipment (AHU, VAV, chiller, boiler, etc.). a. General information: project name; system identifier; building area served; control panel and controller numbers; controller model number and instance number (address); MS/TP LAN segment number; name of verifying technician and date. b. Each step of the sequence of operation for each piece of equipment shall be documented shall include a "description of test", "input to trigger test" and "expected outcome". A pass/fail checkbox shall indicate each of these actions. Provide space for technician approval with associated date. F. Operating and Maintenance (O&M) manuals: Provide O&M manual with full information to allow the owner to operate, maintain and repair installed products. Include trade names with model numbers, color, dimensions and other physical characteristics. 1. Format: Produce on 8-1/2 x 11-inch pages, and bind in 3-ring/binders with durable plastic covers. Label binder covers with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL", title of project, and subject matter and "Number_of_" of binder. Provide substantial dividers tabbed and titled by section/component number. 2. Table of Contents for each volume: a. Part 1: Directory with name, address and telephone number of Designer, Contractor and Subcontractors and Suppliers for each Project Manual section. b. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by Project Manual Section number where practical and where not, by system. Include: 3. Product design criteria, functions, normal operating characteristic and limiting conditions. Installation, alignment, adjustment, checking instructions and troubleshooting guide. Operating instructions for start-up, normal operation, regulation and control, normal shutdown and emergency shutdown. Test data and performance curves. 4. Spare parts list for operating products, prepared by manufacturers including detailed drawings giving location of each maintainable part, lists of spares recommended for user- service inventory and nearest source of in-stock spares. G. Record Documentation: 1. Details of all alarm, diagnostic, error and other messages. Detail the Operator action to be taken for each instance. 2. Detail special programs provided and provide a complete programming instruction manual. Detail operation of all software applications. 3. Detailed list of the database for all installed devices. 4. Record drawings shall be CAD generated and shall include final locations and point ID for each monitored and controlled device. 5. In additional to the required hard-copies, provide a CD-ROM with all of the record documentation in PDF format and a CD-ROM containing backup copies of all installed software and graphics. 6. Online as-built documentation: provide digital replications of as-builts that shall be accessible from each equipment graphic controlled or monitored by the EMCS. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND Christi 23 09 63-5 CONTROL SYSTEM (EMCS) 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 1.07 WARRANTY A. Warranty work and the equipment provided under this contract shall be for a period of one year from the date of Substantial Completion. Warranty shall cover all components, system software, parts and assemblies supplied by this contractor and shall be guaranteed against defects in materials and workmanship for one (1)year from the date of Substantial Completion. Labor to troubleshoot, repair, reprogram or replace system components that have failed due to defects in materials and workmanship shall be provided by this contractor at no charge to the owner during the warranty period. All corrective software modifications made during warranty service periods shall be updated on all user documentation and on user and manufacturer archived software disks. All warranty work shall be performed by the EMCS contractor's local service group. B. Warranty shall not include routine maintenance, e.g., equipment cleaning, mechanical parts lubrication, pilot lamp replacement, operational testing, etc. Warranty shall not cover repair or replacement of equipment damaged by under-or over-voltage, misuse, lack of proper maintenance, lightning, water damage from weather or piping failure. C. Hardware and software personnel supporting this warranty agreement shall provide on-site or off-site service in a timely manner after failure notification to the EMCS contractor. The maximum acceptable response time to provide this service at the site shall be 24 hours, during normal working hours. 1.08 OPERATIONS PERSONNEL TRAINING A. Provide a training session for the owner's operations personnel. Training session shall be performed by a qualified person who is knowledgeable in the subject system/equipment. Submit a training agenda two (2)weeks prior to the proposed training session for review and approval. Training session shall include at the minimum: 1. Purpose of equipment. 2. Principle of how the equipment works. 3. Important parts and assemblies. 4. How the equipment achieves its purpose and necessary operating conditions 5. Most likely failure modes, causes and corrections. 6. On site demonstration that includes hands-on demonstration of the manipulation of setpoints, schedules and other adjustable elements of the system. 7. The demonstration shall be on the actual, completed graphic interface pages for the specific project. B. Provide a second training session 3 months after initial session for any follow-up or additional training requested by owner's personnel. Allow 3 hours for the second training session. 1.09 OPERATOR WORKSTATION (OWS) A. The Operator Workstation shall be any personal computer, connected to the LAN, with appropriate web browser software installed. 1.10 ENGINEERING WORKSTATION (EWS) A. The Engineering Workstation shall be any personal computer, connected to the LAN, with a registered copy of the EMCS contractor supplied engineering and/or programming software installed. The EMCS contractor shall provide at least one copy of all required software(s), to enable the Owner complete editing/programming functions of all controllers, graphics, and control logic. B. The EMCS shall provide one personal computer(PC)which is compatible with the performance required by the EMCS Engineering Software if an engineering workstation is specified for the system. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE EMCS VENDORS A. AUTOMATED LOGIC- Branch Office B. JOHNSON CONTROLS - Branch Office DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND Christi 23 09 63-6 CONTROL SYSTEM (EMCS) 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop C. Or other approved equals. 2.02 PRIMARY NETWORK SERVER (PNS) A. The EMCS Contractor shall provide and install the Primary Network Server as part of this system. The PNS shall utilize the Internet and provide efficient integration of standard open protocols. The PNS shall maintain comprehensive database management, alarm management and messaging services, and graphical user interface as follows: 1. Support an unlimited number of users over the Internet/intranet with a standard web browser to access alarms, trend logs, graphics, schedules and configuration data. Access to the PNS shall be password protected utilizing authentication and encryption techniques. An audit trail of database changes indicating user, time stamp, and audit action shall be provided. 2. Enterprise level information exchange using an SQL database and HTTP/HTML/XML text formats. 3. Synchronize controller databases, database storage scheduling, control and energy management routines 4. Alarm processing and routing which includes email, SMS text messages and paging. 5. HTML based help system that includes comprehensive online system documentation. 6. Support of multiple Network Area Controllers (NAC) connected to a Local Area Network. B. Server Functions 1. It shall be possible to access all Network Area Controllers (NAC)via a single connection to the server through the Ethernet LAN. In this configuration, each Network Area Controller can be accessed from a single user login. 2. The PNS shall provide the following functions, at a minimum: a. The server shall provide complete access to distributed global data. The server shall provide the ability to execute global control strategies based on control and data objects in any NAC in the network, local or remote. b. The server shall include a master clock service for its subsystems and provide time synchronization for all NACs. c. The server shall provide scheduling for all NACs and their underlying field control devices. d. The server shall provide demand limiting control that operates across all NACs. The network server shall be capable of multiple demand limiting programs for sites with multiple meters and or multiple sources of energy. Each demand program shall be capable of supporting separate demand shed lists for effective demand control. e. The server shall implement the BACnet Command Prioritization scheme (16 levels) for safe and effective contention resolution of all commands issued to NACs. Each Network Area Controller supported by the server shall have the ability to archive its log data, alarm data and database to the server, automatically. Archiving options shall be user-defined including archive time and archive frequency. f. The server shall provide central alarm management for all NACs supported by the server. Alarm management shall include: routing of alarms to a video display, a printer, an email and pager; view and acknowledge alarms; query alarm logs based on user-defined parameters g. The server shall provide central management of logged data for all NACs supported by the server. Logged data shall include process logs, runtime and event counter logs, audit logs and error logs. Log data management shall include: viewing and printing log data; exporting log data to other software applications; query log data based on user-defined parameters 3. The Primary Network Server shall be capable of supporting the following open system drivers; a. BACnet/IP b. Modbus TCP C. Network Server Platform Requirements DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND Christi 23 09 63-7 CONTROL SYSTEM (EMCS) 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 1. Rack-Mounted Server Computer Hardware: DELL PowerEdge R220 or equal, Intel Xeon Gold 3.0 GHz or higher, 32GB RAM, 2 TB hard drive, video card, 22" color monitor, and Ethernet adapter 1 Gbps or higher. 2. Operating system software shall be Microsoft Windows® 10 Professional or higher. 2.03 NETWORK AREA CONTROLLER (NAC) A. Provide one or more Network Area Controllers (NAC)to meet the sequence of operations and the type and quantity of devices being integrated into the system. The NAC shall provide the interface between the local area network and the field controllers. The NAC shall provide global supervisory control functions over the associated controllers and shall be capable of executing application control programs to provide: calendar functions; scheduling; trending; alarm monitoring and routing; time synchronization; integration of controller data for each applicable protocol; network management functions for all network devices. The user may view real-time information via web-based data. B. The Network Area Controller shall provide the following hardware features as a minimum: Ethernet Ports 100Mbps or higher, BACnet MS/TP ports, battery backup, DDR RAM memory, flash memory for long term data backup. C. Provide an uninterruptible power source (UPS) per network controller to maintain operation for 1 hours. D. The NAC shall be capable of operation over a temperature range of 32 to 122 °F and operation over a humidity range of 5 to 95% RH, non-condensing; storage temperatures of between 32 and 158 *F. E. The NAC shall provide multiple user access to the system and support for ODBC or SQL. A database resident on the NAC shall be an ODBC-compliant database or must provide an ODBC data access mechanism to read and write data stored within it. F. The NAC shall be capable of supporting the following open system drivers; 1. BACnet/IP 2. BACnet MS/TP 3. Modbus TCP 4. Modbus RTU G. Event Alarm Notification and actions: The NAC shall provide alarm recognition, storage; routing, management, and analysis to supplement distributed capabilities of equipment or application specific controllers. Alarm conditions shall be routed to any defined user location whether connected to a local or wide-area network. 1. Alarm generation shall be selectable for annunciation type and acknowledgement requirements including but limited to: alarm; return to normal; fault. 2. Provide for the creation of a minimum of eight alarm classes for the purpose of routing types and or classes of alarms, i.e.: security, HVAC, Fire, etc. Allow timed routing of alarms by class, object, group, or node. 3. Provide alarm generation from binary object"runtime" and/or event counts for equipment maintenance (i.e. filter status, fan run status). Authorized users shall be able to reset runtime or event count values with appropriate password control. 4. Control equipment and network failures shall be treated as alarms and annunciated. 5. Alarms shall be annunciated in any of the following manners as defined by the user: screen message text; e-mail of the complete alarm message to multiple recipients. Provide the ability to route and email alarms based on: day of the week, time of day and recipient. 6. Color-graphic shall have flashing alarm object(s). Printed message may be routed directly to a dedicated alarm printer. 7. The following shall be recorded by the NAC for each alarm (at a minimum): time and date; location (building, floor, zone, office number, etc.); associated equipment. Upon acknowledgement of the alarm the NAC shall document the time, date and authorized user. The number of alarm occurrences since the last acknowledgement shall be recorded. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND Christi 23 09 63-8 CONTROL SYSTEM (EMCS) 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 8. Defined users shall be given proper access to acknowledge any alarm, or specific types or classes of alarms defined by the user. Alarm actions may be initiated by user defined programmable objects created for that purpose. 9. Alarm archiving: A log of all alarms shall be maintained by the NAC and/or a server and shall be available for review by the user. Provide a "query"feature to allow review of specific alarms by user defined parameters. A separate log for system alerts (controller failures, network failures, etc.)shall be provided and available for review by the user. H. Data Collection and Storage: The NAC shall have the ability to collect data for any property of any object and store this data for future use. 1. The user shall designate the log as an interval log or deviation log. For an interval log, the object shall be configured for time of day, day of week and the sample collection interval. For deviation log, the object shall be configured for the deviation of a variable to a fixed value. This value, when reached, will initiate logging of the object. For all logs, provide the ability to set the maximum number of data stores for the log and to set whether the log will stop collecting when full, or rollover the data on a first-in, first-out basis. Each log shall have the ability to have its data cleared on a time-based event or by a user-defined event or action. 2. All log data shall be stored in a relational database in the NAC and the data shall be accessed from the server or a standard web browser. All log data, when accessed from the server, shall be capable of being manipulated using standard SQL statements. 3. All log data shall be available to the user in the following data formats: HTML, XML, plain text, comma separated values, as a minimum. 4. The NAC shall have the ability to archive its log data either locally or remotely to the server or other NAC on the network. I. Local Access: The NAC shall provide redundancy of system access to the local controllers at the remote building if the Primary Network Server should lose communication or be off-line. The NAC shall maintain setpoint and scheduling features, access to the color-graphic displays, maintain trend logs and reports. Upon restoration of communication with the PNS the archived information shall be transmitted to the server for archiving. 2.04 SOFTWARE FOR THE NAC A. The distributed architecture of the operating system for the PNS and NACs shall provide the operator a comprehensive interface to allow the operator to configure and customize the EMCS to optimize the HVAC system to save energy, schedule and maintain equipment and provide occupant comfort. The provided graphical toolset shall allow the operator to create applications in a drag and drop environment. 1. Input/output capability shall allow the operator to request the current value or status of the control point; command/override equipment to a specific state; add, change or delete control points, alarm limits and controllers; change descriptors to control points and equipment; modify parameters; create or modify DDC loops. B. Operator System Access: Via software password with five access levels at workstations and at each control unit. C. Color graphic tools shall allow the user to create equipment and floor plan graphics from a standard library of symbols; allow custom generation of symbols; utilize over 64 or more colors; create real-time dynamic data for the graphics. Up to 60 control points may be displayed on each graphic. 1. Provide a link between compatible graphics to minimize the paths to additional information. For example, provide the link from the zone sensor to the VAV terminal to the air handling unit and to the central plant. Web pages shall be provided to allow the operator to zoom into specific areas of the facility and then link the space to the floor plan to the overall building and then to the facility site plan. 2. Graphical tools shall allow the creation of bar graphs, pie graphs and other tools to visualize control information such as run time hours, energy consumed and occupant comfort. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND Christi 23 09 63-9 CONTROL SYSTEM (EMCS) 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop D. Alarm processing tools shall allow the operator to create alarm messages that include as a minimum: time of alarm, point descriptor, alarm condition and remote annunciation. Critical alarms shall be displayed, archived to a storage device or printed on a alarm printer. Alarms shall be displayed in order of occurrence and have an optional audible alarm indicator. 1. Print alarm messages, up to 60 characters in length, for each alarm point specified. 2. Alarms may be routed to other devices including web-enabled cell phones, pagers, tablet PCs and designated personal computers on the network or Internet. 3. Operator specifies when alarm requires acknowledgment. Continue to indicate unacknowledged alarms after return to normal. An alarm log shall be maintained to archive alarms for future reference with the above specified parameters as well as indicating the person acknowledging the alarm. 4. The graphical display shall indicate the number of the current unacknowledged alarms by individual building site or by sum of all campus-wide facilities. 5. The operator may create and forward an e-mail message to another user directly from the graphical interface so that the message can be read when the second user logs on to the system. E. Upon a power failure to equipment in the facility, the EMCS shall automatically start equipment upon the restoration of power. Program a time delay between individual equipment restart on a schedule to minimize demand charges from the utility company. F. Custom reports may be created by the operator with a requested time and date manually or automatically. All reports may be logged to a storage device for future reference. The data reports shall allow customization and scaling of the X-Y coordinates; plotting of tabular reports; provide multi-point graphical reports with not less than eight variables on the same report. Print reports on daily, weekly, monthly, yearly or scheduled basis as scheduled. G. The network server current operating system, database, color-graphics, custom reports shall be backed up automatically to a remote server or storage device as directed by the owner's representative. H. Maintenance Management capability shall allow the system to monitor and log the run-time for HVAC equipment; schedule maintenance reports that include recommended material and labor for the assigned task. 2.05 APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS (ASC) A. All devices required for single loop control shall be terminated on a single controller. (for example, CHW loop pressure control. The differential pressure sensor and the pump VFD ramp signal.) B. ASCs shall be capable of implementing control strategies for the system based on information from any or all connected inputs. The AC shall utilize factory pre-programmed global strategies that may be modified by field personnel on-site. Global control algorithms and automated control functions should execute via a 32-bit processor C. Programming shall be object-oriented using control program blocks that will support a minimum of 500 Analog Values and 500 Binary Values. Analog and binary values shall support standard BACnet priority arrays. Provide means to graphically view inputs and outputs to each program block in real-time as program is executing. D. Controller shall have adequate data storage to ensure high performance and data reliability. Battery shall retain static RAM memory and real-time clock functions for a minimum of 1 year (cumulative). Battery shall be a field-replaceable (non-rechargeable) lithium type. The onboard, battery-backed real time clock must support schedule operations and trend logs. E. The base unit of the ASC shall host various 1/0 combinations including universal inputs, binary outputs, and switch selectable analog outputs (0-10V or 0-20 mA). Inputs shall support thermistors, 0-5VDC, 0-10VDC, 4-20mA, dry contacts and pulse inputs directly. F. All binary outputs shall have onboard Hand-Off-Auto switches and a status indicator light. HOA switch position shall be monitored. The position of each HOA switch shall be available system wide as a BACnet object. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND Christi 23 09 63- 10 CONTROL SYSTEM (EMCS) 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop G. Controller shall be capable of BACnet communication. BACnet Conformance: 1. Standard BACnet object types supported shall include as a minimum: Analog Input, Binary Input, Analog Output, Binary Output, Analog Value, Binary Value, Device, File, Group, Event Enrollment, Notification Class, Program and Schedule object types.All necessary tools shall be supplied for working with proprietary information. H. Schedules: Each ASC shall support a minimum of 10 BACnet schedule objects. I. Logging Capabilities: Each controller shall support a minimum of 100 trend logs. Sample time interval shall be adjustable at the operator's workstation. Controller shall periodically upload trended data to system server for long term archiving if desired. Archived data stored in database format shall be available for use in third-party spreadsheet or database programs. J. Alarm Generation: Alarms may be generated within the system for any object change of value or state either real or calculated. This includes things such as analog object value changes, binary object state changes, and various controller communication failures. Alarm logs shall be provided for alarm viewing. Log may be viewed on-site at the operator's terminal or off-site via remote communications. Controller must be able to handle up to 200 alarm setups stored as BACnet event enrollment objects-system destination and actions individually configurable. 2.06 UNITARY SYSTEM CONTROLLERS (USC) A. All devices required for single loop control shall be terminated on a single controller. (for example, cooling coil control valve control. The temperature sensor and the valve control signal.) B. The EMCS Contractor shall provide all Unitary System Controllers. USCs shall be fully programmable or applications specific controllers with pre-packaged operating sequences maintained in Flash RAM. C. The USC shall be a node on the automation network and shall control its own communications so that the failure of any one node, shall not inhibit communications on the network between the remaining nodes. USCs shall be totally independent of other network nodes for their monitoring and control functions. D. Provide each USC with a battery back-up for the protection of volatile memory for a minimum of 72 hours. Batteries shall be rated for a seven-year life. E. All associated applications programs shall reside at the USC. The USC shall not require communication to any other panel for normal operating sequences other than time scheduled base commands. F. Control shall be based on algorithms, i.e. proportional plus integral plus derivative (PID), proportional plus integral (PI), or proportional to comply with the sequences of operation PID algorithms shall maintain the system operation within +/-2% of setpoint. G. The USC shall be configured with sufficient input/output capacity to achieve the required control points to meet the sequence of operations. 2.07 VAV TERMINAL UNIT CONTROLLER (TUC) A. All devices required for single loop control shall be terminated on a single controller. (for example, terminal unit air valve control. The flow sensor and the actuator control signal.) B. The EMCS Contractor shall provide all controllers required for all variable air volume (VAV) terminal units. The number and location of terminal units and airflow rates shall be as indicated on the mechanical drawings. C. The TUC shall be capable of monitoring and controlling the following parameters for VAV terminal units per the sequences of operation and input/output summary: space temperature; primary air flow rate; damper modulation; heating coil stage control, heating valve control, heating SCR control (as applicable); fan on/off control; supply air sensor; occupancy senor; carbon dioxide sensor or humidity sensor. D. Furnish primary damper actuators, for factory mounting, meeting the following requirements: direct shaft mounting; adequate torque, to properly operate the damper from fully open to fully closed without binding; locking "V" groove or similar means to prevent slippage between DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND Christi 23 09 63- 11 CONTROL SYSTEM (EMCS) 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop actuator and shaft. E. The EMCS Contractor shall field install the following components for each terminal unit: space temperature sensor; supply air temperature sensor; occupancy sensor, and carbon dioxide sensor as indicated on the Mechanical Drawings. F. The EMCS Contractor shall furnish to the terminal unit manufacturer the following components for factory installation and wiring for each terminal unit: VAV controller with integral differential pressure transducer and damper actuator. G. The terminal unit manufacturer may provide the following components for each terminal unit for interface and mounting of the TUC: primary air dampers; enclosure to house the TUC and associated components including suitable mounting brackets shall be NEMA 1 rating and located outside the terminal unit; multi-point averaging type flow sensor at the primary air inlet to the terminal unit; 24 VAC control transformer; 24 VAC fan control relay interface; 24 VAC heater control relay interface (up to two stages); 24 volt SCR heater input as scheduled (0-10 Vdc or 4-20 mA). H. Any items required for proper operation but not provided by TU vendor, shall be provided under this section. 2.08 AIR HANDLING UNIT CONTROLLER A. All devices required for single loop control shall be terminated on a single controller. (for example, AHU static pressure control. The differential pressure sensor and the VFD ramp signal.) B. The EMCS Contractor shall provide controllers required for chilled/hot water and DX/electric heat air handling units and fan coil units. Provide an enclosure to house the controller and associated components including suitable mounting brackets shall be NEMA 1 rated and located outside the FCUs. C. The controller shall be capable of monitoring and controlling the following parameters per the sequences of operation and input/output summary; space temperature; space relative humidity sensor; cooling/heating stage control or modulating valve control; fan on/off control and status; supply air sensor; occupancy sensor; carbon dioxide sensor; VFD control and monitoring. 2.09 EMCS CONTROLLER LEVEL NETWORK A. EMCS Automation Level Network shall consist of BACnet MS/TP (76.8 Kbps minimum). Data transfer rate and data throughput as required to meet the alarm annunciation requirements. 2.10 SOFTWARE OVERVIEW A. Dynamic Colored Floor plans: Dynamic colored floor plans that compare actual space conditions to setpoints shall be provided on all floorplan graphics displayed on the front-end. Floorplan enlargements shall also use the thermographs to display space conditions. Zones within the set point range shall appear transparent white. As the space gets warmer the zone color shall gradually modulate from transparent white to transparent red to identify a hot zone. As the space conditions get cooler the zone color shall gradually modulate from transparent white to transparent blue to identify a cold zone. Each zone shall indicate the current actual zone temperature within the zone. The floor plans shall use a dynamic scheduling icon to indicate schedule occupancy for each zone and provide direct one-click access to that zones unique schedule. Provide a designated icon or symbol indicating that the zone is in the occupied/unoccupied condition. From the floorplan graphic, the operator shall be able to click on any zone and go directly to the graphic for the piece of equipment controlling that zone. All dynamic floor plans shall be visible via web interface as well as on the LAN. The authorized system operator shall be able to change the zone or system identifier(or name)on the graphic and that change shall be distributed to other associated graphics and to the equipment controller. B. Pop up Trends: Provide trend logs that automatically pop up when the operator mouse clicks on the point from the graphic. Provide pop up trends for all dampers, control valves, temperature sensors, carbon dioxide sensors, humidity sensors, airflows, static pressures, flow meters, VFD speeds, etc. The EMCS contractor shall set up all trends for the owner. The pop-up trend shall DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND Christi 23 09 63- 12 CONTROL SYSTEM (EMCS) 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop include a trend tool that allows the operator to modify the trend time scale and sample interval for up to 10 sample values. The trends shall be graphical on the computer screen but shall provide an output as an .xIs, .csv, .pdf, HTML, or text file. C. Interactive Maps: Implement JAVA SCRIPT API 3.0 or newer, such as Google Interactive maps depicting the facility location to indicate the site plan. This is not a static image and must be completely interactive. D. Custom User HTML applications: The EMCS shall utilize HTML applications as an extra feature. At minimum, provide 7-day forecast, weather radar, traffic map and hurricane tracker. All of these features shall be imbedded into the EMCS system. E. Provided a web-based EMCS platform; contractor shall provide an Open License software. Licenses that are not open are not acceptable. There shall be no per seat or per user licensing fee charged to the owner by the contractor. F. System shall use the BACnet protocol for communication to the operator workstation or web server and for communication between control modules. Schedules, setpoints, trends, and alarms shall be BACnet Objects. G. User access shall include 50 assigned operators that shall include five levels of access within the web system. Each operator log-in shall have an expiration date to allow for temporary access to the system. The operator's access description shall include his e-mail address and cell/phone numbers. The operator access can be limited from 5 minutes to permanent access. The user shall be limited to eight bad login attempts before being locked out of the system. H. Global modification: Provide the capability for global modification of user definable parameters of all points shall be provided. Global modification is defined as the mass adjustment of user definable parameters across a defined group, area, facility, campus, or network. Parameters shall include, but not be limited to temperature set point(VAV boxes, AHU Discharge, VAV AHU Static Pressure Setpoints etc.), equipment start/stop, equipment status, valve output signal, VFD speed control signal, and damper position signal. User shall be able to lock the definable parameter to a set value, or adjust a set point to an operator adjustable value. This function shall be accomplished through the standard graphical user interface/workstation and is to be selectively applicable by the user to all controllers on the network, all controllers in a specific facility or all controllers in a specific zone within a specific facility. I. The system operator shall be able to override the output signal to the valves, dampers, variable frequency drives, etc. with the use of the PC mouse click on the device. The system override shall include a Hand-Off-Auto (HOA) capability. If the output is commanded to the hand position the operator shall designate an output value of 0-100% in 1% increments. The hand override position shall be permanent or expire after a designated time period and revert to the auto position. The color-graphic shall indicate the device that has been overridden by a color change of the output value. J. For non-emergency in-warranty events the system operator may submit a Service Request directly from the floor plan or system graphic. The web interface shall include the EMCS suppliers contact information including phone numbers and e-mail address. The service request will be logged into the EMCS suppliers service department. A non-response by the assigned technician shall elevate the request to the next highest manager or supervisor until the system operator receives an response that their request has been received and is scheduled for a resolution. All requests for service shall be maintained in the customer's database for future reference. The service request capability may be extended after the expiration of the warranty as part of a service agreement. K. The web-based system shall be accessible from Tablet PCs and provide the same functionality that is available from personal computers connected through the LAN or WAN to the system operator. The tablet PCs as a minimum shall include an Apple iPad and Google Android based tablet PC. Operation shall include touch screen capability and use of the tablet keyboard screen. The operator shall be able to view color-graphics, system trends, override setpoints, change time schedules, and override damper and valve positions. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND Christi 23 09 63- 13 CONTROL SYSTEM (EMCS) 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 2.11 ENERGY SAVING PROGRAMS A. Demand Limiting: Demand limiting programming and sequence shall include, but not be limited to the following: 1. Monitor total power consumption for each power meter and shed associated loads automatically to reduce power consumption to an operator set maximum demand level. 2. Integrate with lighting controls to reduce lighting power to an operator set maximum demand level. 3. Provide a means from the graphical user interface for the system operator to manually initiate or disable the demand limiting sequence. 4. Provide programming that will allow a demand response signal from an approved entity (electrical service provider)to remotely initiate or disable the demand limiting sequence. 5. Provide programming that will initiate demand limiting according to a schedule. 6. When demand limiting is initiated, the EMCS shall: a. Increase the space cooling temperature setpoint by 4 degrees F (adj), above the current operating setpoint. The rate of change for the temperature setpoint increase shall be operator adjustable. b. Decrease the space heating temperature setpoint by 4 degrees F (adj), below the current operating setpoint. The rate of change for the temperature setpoint decrease shall be operator adjustable. c. Automatically reduce lighting power on the circuits indicated on construction documents. 7. When demand limiting is disabled, the EMCS shall reset temperature setpoints and lighting power levels back to original operating setpoints. 8. Demand limiting shall be confined to"non-critical'zones. For purposes of planning, assume all zones are "non-critical" unless otherwise noted on the construction documents. All zones shall have the option to be added or removed from the demand limiting program, by the system operator. 9. The EMCS shall include a graphic"page" that shows all adjusted setpoints (original setpoints and demand limited setpoints) and the power meters being monitored to confirm the programming is operational and effective at shedding the associated loads. B. Duty Cycling: Periodically stop and start loads, based on space temperature, and according to various on/off patterns. C. Automatic Time Scheduling: Self-contained programs for automatic start/stop/scheduling of building loads. Support up to seven (7) normal day schedules, seven (7) "special day" schedules and two (2)temporary schedules. D. Optimal Start/Stop: Perform optimized start/stop as function of outside conditions, inside conditions, or both. Optimization shall be adaptive and self-tuning, adjusting to changing conditions by modifying occupancy period based upon the desired temperature at beginning and end of the occupancy period. Base optimization on occupancy schedules, outside air temperature, seasonal requirements, and interior room temperature. Employ adaptive model prediction for how long building takes to warm up or cool down under different conditions. E. Night-Setback Program: Reduce heating space temperature setpoint or raise cooling space temperature setpoint during unoccupied hours in conjunction with scheduled start/stop and optimum start/stop programs. F. Setpoint Reset: Setpoints for control of variable load systems shall be reset based on load demand, as described in the Sequence of Operations. G. Calculated Points: Define calculations and totals computed from monitored points (analog/digital points), constants, or other calculated points. H. Event Initiated Programming: Any data point capable of initiating event, causing series of controls in a sequence. I. Holiday Scheduling DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND Christi 23 09 63- 14 CONTROL SYSTEM (EMCS) 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop J. Direct Digital Control: Furnish software so operator is capable of customizing control strategies and sequences of operation by defining appropriate control loop algorithms and choosing optimum loop parameters. K. Trend logging shall be provided for all points per the input/output summary where there is a change in the analog or binary signal. Each controller shall be capable of storing trend values and then automatically transfer data to the NAC or the NS hard disk. Trend data shall be updated continuously per the operator assigned interval at intervals as low as one minute. Collect samples at intervals specified in minutes, hours, days, or month. Output trend logs as line-graphs or bar graphs. Binary points (input and output) shall only be logged upon a change of value (COV). Display trend samples on workstation in graphic format. Automatically scale trend graph with minimum 60 samples of data in plot of time versus data. 2.12 FIELD INSTRUMENTATION A. Temperature Sensors: All temperature sensors shall be thermistor type, factory-calibrated to within 0.5 °F, interchangeable with housing appropriate for application. Sensors shall have a temperature curve rated for the application. Sensor wiring terminations shall be in a galvanized box. 1. Outside air temperature sensors shall be installed in weather proof enclosure with ventilated sun-shied. 2. Duct mounted temperature sensors shall be averaging type for supply air, mixed air and low temperature applications for air handling units. Duct probe temperature sensor shall be acceptable for terminal units. 3. Space temperature sensors shall contain a backlit LCD digital display and user function keys along with temperature sensor, setpoint adjustment and after-hours override use. Override time may be set in one-hour increments. 4. Thermowell temperature sensors shall be stainless steel probe of length that is equivalent to a minimum of 50% of the pipe diameter. End-to-end accuracy shall be ± 0.5 deg. F. Connection box shall be moisture/water proof with conduit fitting. Furnish the stainless steel thermowell to the mechanical contractor for installation. A thermal conducting grease shall be installed in the thermowell to provide uniform temperature sensing. 5. Provide flat plate stainless steel space temperature sensors with no local setpoint adjustment as indicated on the drawings. B. Carbon Dioxide Sensors: The sensor shall be capable of monitoring carbon dioxide concentration with an accuracy of+/- 30 parts per million (PPM). The sensor shall produce a linear 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA signal over the range of 0 to 2000 PPM. The sensor shall measure using non-dispersed infrared (NDIR)technology to measure carbon dioxide gas and shall be: 1. Wall mounted carbon dioxide sensors shall be Veris CWE series or equivalent. 2. Duct mounted carbon dioxide sensor shall be Veris CWD series or equivalent. 3. The EMCS contractor shall utilize the required calibration devices to properly commission and calibrate the sensors per the manufacturer's requirements. C. Relative Humidity Sensors: relative humidity sensors shall be a two-wire type, 4-20 mA output proportional to the relative humidity range of 0-100%. The accuracy of the sensors shall be +/- 2% over a range of 10-90% RH. 1. Outdoor relative humidity sensors: provide non-corroding outdoor shield to minimize wind effects and solar heating. Install wall-mount weather proof enclosure with conduit fitting. Sensor shall be Veris HO series, or equivalent. 2. Wall-mounted relative humidity sensor: sensor shall be installed in a wall-mounted enclosure with white cover. Sensor shall be Veris HEW series or equivalent. 3. Duct-mounted relative humidity sensor: sensor shall be provided with a moisture resistant enclosure with conduit fitting. The probe length shall be 8" minimum. Sensor shall be Veris HED series or equivalent. D. Pressure Transducers: 1. Air pressure transducer: The pressure transducer shall have an input range compatible with the medium being measured. The proportional output signal shall be 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA. The accuracy shall be +/- 0.25% FS. Transducer shall be SETRA Model 264 or DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND Christi 23 09 63- 15 CONTROL SYSTEM (EMCS) 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop equivalent. Air pressure sensors and all associated tubing, hardware, and accessories shall be provided as appropriate for the application. a. Duct mounted pressure sensor shall be stainless steel and provided with mounting flange and hardware. The sensor probe length shall be appropriate for the associated duct dimensions. b. Wall mounted space pressure sensor shall include stainless steel wall plate, pressure pick up filter, and mounting hardware. c. Ceiling mounted space pressure sensor shall be paintable, low-profile type, with pressure pick up filter, integral surge dampener, and adhesive ring for ceiling mount. d. Outdoor pressure sensor shall include an outdoor rated sensor, 50 ft. of vinyl tubing, mounting bracket and hardware. A surge dampener shall also be provided for all outdoor pressure sensor applications to absorb pressure fluctuations. 2. Water pressure transducer: The pressure transducers shall have an input range compatible with the medium being measured. The proportional output signal shall be 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA. The accuracy shall be +/- 0.25% FS. Transducer shall be SETRA Model 230 or equivalent. Transducer shall be installed with a valved piping bypass and bleed off for each port. Water pressure sensors and all associated tubing, hardware, and accessories shall be provided as appropriate for the application. E. Freezestat: Provide freezestats for all chilled water air handling systems that receive more than 10% untreated outside air. Freezestats shall provide vapor tension elements, which shall serpentine the inlet face on all coils. Provide additional sensors, wired in series, to provide one linear foot per square foot of coil surface area. Freezestat shall be manually reset at the switch. Interlock to the associated fan so that fan will shut down when HOA switch is in hand or auto position. Provide time delay relays with a 0-10 minute time delay relay duration to minimize nuisance freezestat trips. Time delay relay shall be adjustable at the associated control panel. F. Air differential pressure switch: For fan shutdown, provide air differential pressure switches for all fans controlled by a variable frequency drive (VFD)to shut down the associated fan in the event of sensing high differential pressure. Air differential pressure switches shall have an adjustable setpoint with a range of 0-10 inches w.g. with manual reset at the switch. Provide '/4 inch copper tubing with compression fittings to mount to the side of the duct. Sensor shall be DWYER Series 1900 or equivalent. G. Momentary control relays: Provide momentary control relays as indicated. Relays shall have coil ratings of 120 VAC, 50 mA or 10-30 VAC/VDC, 40 mA as suitable for the application. Contact ratings shall be 10 amp. Provide complete isolation between the control circuit and the digital output. Relays shall be located in the UC or other local enclosures and have pin-type terminals. Relays shall have LED indication of status. H. Current sensing relay: Current sensing relays shall be rated for the applicable load. The output relay shall have an accessible trip adjustment over its complete operating range. Enclosure shall have an LED to indicate relay status. I. Photocell: Ambient light level shall by a photocell in a non-corroding in a weatherproof housing with sun shield suitable for exterior installation. The control signal output shall be 4-20 ma or binary contact closure as specified in the sequences of operation. Mount the photocell on the north side of the building on the roof. The sensor reading shall be 0-750 foot-candles. J. Occupancy Sensors 1. Occupancy sensors shall be dual-technology, ceiling mounted type. Sensors shall be capable of detecting presence in the control area by via Doppler shifts in transmitted ultrasound and passive infrared (PIR) heat changes. Sensor shall utilize Dual Sensing Verification Principle for coordination between ultrasonic and PIR technologies. Detection verification of both technologies must occur in order to activate lighting systems. Sensor shall have a retrigger feature in which detection by either technology shall retrigger the lighting system on within 5 seconds of being switched off. The sensor shall operate at 24 VDC/VAC. WattStopper DT-300 or approved equal. 2. Sensors shall have a time delay that is adjustable with configuration software or shall have a fixed time delay of 5 to 30 minutes, set by a DIP switch. Sensors shall feature a walk-through mode, where lights turn off 3 minutes after the area is initially occupied if no DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND Christi 23 09 63- 16 CONTROL SYSTEM (EMCS) 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop motion is detected after the first 30 seconds. 3. The sensor shall have an additional single-pole, double throw isolated relay with normally open, normally closed and common outputs. The isolated relay is for use with HVAC control, data logging, and other control options. The sensor shall have an LED indicator that remains active at all times in order to verify detection within the area to be controlled. 2.13 HVAC VENTILATION SHUTDOWN SWITCH A. The HVAC ventilation shutdown switch shall be a mushroom type switch, STI Series 2000 Stopper Station that complies with the following: 1. Color shall be coordinated with the Owner prior to ordering. 2. Latches when depressed. 3. Twist to reset. 4. Indoor/Outdoor flush type clear plastic cover. 5. Switch label shall read "HVAC VENTILATION SHUTDOWN" or other label approved by the Owner. Coordinate final label text with the Owner prior to ordering. B. Coordinate final location of shutdown switch with the Mechanical Drawings, the Architect, and the Owner prior to installation. 2.14 WATER FLOW METERS A. Insertion Electromagnetic Flow Meters shall be provided for HVAC metering and domestic water metering applications where indicated on mechanical drawings or in control diagrams in piping larger than 1 inch. The flow meter shall have a 316L stainless steel insertion probe with XAREC sensor head and weather-tight NEMA 4 electronics enclosure; +/- 1.0 % accuracy of actual reading from 2 to 20 ft/s and +/- 0.02 ft/s below 2 ft/s; flow range of 0.1 ft/s to 20 ft/s, turndown ratio of 200:1; pulse outputs proportional to flow rate. All wetted materials used in domestic water metering applications shall be NSF 61 and 372 compliant. The flow meter shall be installed with a minimum of 10 diameters of straight pipe upstream and 5 diameters of straight pipe downstream. Refer to meter manufacturer's installation manual for additional straight pipe length requirements. Provide full port valve to allow for removal and re-insertion without disruption to the water service. Meters provided for HVAC applications shall be furnished and installed by Division 23. Meters provided for Domestic water applications shall be furnished by Division 23 and installed by Division 22. Meter shall be ONICON F-3500 series or pre-approved substitution. Domestic water flow meters shall be approved by the associated Municipal Utility District(MUD). B. Inline Wetted Ultrasonic Flow Meters shall be provided for cooling tower make-up water metering and blow down metering applications in piping ranging from to 2 '/2". The flow meter shall consist of a drop forged corrosion resistant metal flow body with process connections, integral transducers, transmitter with LCD display and user interface. All wetted materials shall be NSF 372 compliant; +/- 1.0 % accuracy of actual reading over a 25:1 turndown ratio; overall flow range turndown of 500:1; pulse and analog outputs proportional to flow rate and native BACnet MS/TP. Contractor shall provide a y-strainer upstream of each meter and isolation valves upstream and downstream of each meter. Placement of the flow meter must meet or exceed the manufacturer's published placement requirements. Meters shall be furnished and installed by Division 23. Meter shall be ONICON F-4600 or pre-approved substitution. Cooling tower meters shall be approved by the associated Municipal Utility District (MUD). 2.15 NATURAL GAS FLOW METERS A. Inline Thermal Mass Flow Meters shall be provided for natural gas sub-metering applications where indicated on mechanical drawings or in control diagrams in piping larger than 3/4". Natural gas flow meters shall be separate from the natural gas meter provided by the utility company. The flow meter shall have a 316L stainless steel insertion probe, built-in flow conditioner, flanged or NPT connections to match adjoining piping system, and weather-tight NEMA 4X electronics enclosure with interface and display; +/-2.0 % accuracy of actual reading from 100 to 500 SFPM and +/- 1.0 % accuracy of actual reading from 500 to 7,000 SFPM; pulse and analog outputs proportional to flow rate and native BACnet MS/TP. The unit of measurement output from the meter shall be field selectable. The flow meter shall be installed DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND Christi 23 09 63- 17 CONTROL SYSTEM (EMCS) 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop with a minimum straight pipe run upstream and downstream of the flow meter as indicated in the manufacturer's installation manual. Refer to meter manufacturer's installation manual for additional requirements. Meters shall be furnished by Division 23 and installed by Division 22. Meter shall be ONICON F-5500 series or pre-approved substitution. 2.16 AIRFLOW MEASURING STATIONS (AFMS) A. Duct mounted airflow measuring stations with combination airflow and air temperature measurement devices shall have the following features: 1. Multi-point sensors in one or more probe assemblies with a maximum of one to sixteen sensor nodes per location, and a single remotely mounted microprocessor-based transmitter for each measurement location. Each sensor node shall consist of two hermetically sealed bead-in-glass thermistors. Each sensing point shall independently determine the airflow rate and temperature at each node, which shall be equally weighted in calculations by the transmitter prior to output as the cross-sectional average. Each ducted sensor probe shall have an integral, U.L. Listed, plenum rated cable. Each independent temperature sensor shall have a calibrated accuracy of+/-0.15' F (0.08° C) over the entire operating temperature range of-20° F to 160' F (-28.9° C to 71° C) and shall be calibrated at 3 temperatures against standards that are traceable to NIST. Acceptable manufacturer shall be EBTRON, Inc. GTx116-PC. 2. Each transmitter shall have a display capable of simultaneously displaying both airflow and temperature. Airflow rate shall be field configurable to be displayed as velocity or volumetric rates, selectable as IP or SI units. Each transmitter shall operate on 24 VAC and be fused and protected from over voltage, over current and power surges. 3. Each independent airflow sensor shall have a laboratory accuracy of+/-2% of Reading over the entire calibrated airflow range of 0 to 5,000 fpm (25.4 m/s) and shall be wind tunnel calibrated at 16 points against air velocity standards that are traceable to NIST. 2.17 DAMPERS A. Provide motorized volume control and shutoff dampers as detailed in 23 33 00- Ductwork Accessories. 2.18 DAMPER ACTUATORS A. Outside and exhaust air damper actuators shall be mechanical spring return. The actuator mounting arrangement and spring return feature shall permit normally open or normally closed positions of the damper as required. B. Outside and return air modulating actuators shall utilize analog (proportional) control 0-10 VDC. Actuators shall be driven in both the open and closed directions. C. Electric damper actuators shall be direct shaft mounted and use a V-bolt and toothed V-clamp causing a cold weld effect for positive gripping. Single bolt or setscrew type fasteners are not acceptable. D. Single section dampers shall have one electronic actuator direct shaft mounted. E. Multi-section dampers with electric actuators shall be arranged so that each damper section operates individually. One electronic actuator shall be direct shaft mounted per damper section. F. Damper actuators shall be BELIMO or equivalent. 2.19 CONTROL VALVES A. Furnish all valves controlled by the EMCS as shown on the Mechanical Drawings. Furnish all automated isolation valves as shown on the Mechanical Drawings. Control valves shall be factory fabricated of type, body material, and pressure class based on maximum pressure and temperature rating of piping system, unless otherwise indicated. EMCS contractor to size control valve with a maximum of 3 psi pressure drop. 2-position isolation valves shall be full- line size. 1. All chilled water, condenser water, and hot water valves shall meet, at minimum, the following ANSI Class 150 ratings. Valves 0.5 inch to 2 inches shall have NPT female screwed ends. Valves 2.5 inches and larger shall have flanged ends. 2. Equal Percentage control characteristic shall be provided for all water coil control valves. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND Christi 23 09 63- 18 CONTROL SYSTEM (EMCS) 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop B. Pressure Independent Characterized Control Ball Valves '/z"to 6", for two-way modulating applications shall have equal percentage characteristics and control the flow from 0 to 100% full rated flow with an operating pressure differential range of 5 to 50 PSI across the valve. The pressure independent control valve shall be provided and delivered from a single manufacturer as a complete assembly. The actuator shall be integrally mounted to the valve at the factory with a single screw on a direct coupled DIN mounting-base. All valve actuators shall be capable of being electronically programmed in the field by use of external computer software or a dedicated handheld tool for the adjustment of flow and/or temperature control. Programming using actuator mounted switches or multi-turn actuators are not acceptable. The control valves shall be sized for the scheduled flow and not pressure drop. Calibrated Balancing Valves and Automatic Flow-Control Valves shall be prohibited from use at coil circuit piping where pressure independent control valves are installed. Contractor shall provide a section of straight pipe five times the pipe diameter with respect to the nominal valve size upstream of the control valve assembly where utilizing integral flow sensor to guarantee sensor accuracy. 1. NPS 3/4" and Smaller: Belimo PIQCV or equal. Forged brass body rated at no less than 360 PSI, stainless steel ball and blowout-proof stem, characterizing disc integral to ball, PTFE ball seat, dual EPDM lubricated O-rings, and female NPT union ends. Close off pressure rating of 100 psi. Integral pressure regulator located upstream of ball to maintain a constant pressure differential. Replaceable cartridge type regulators are not permitted. 2. NPS 1"through 2": Belimo ePIV or equal. Forged brass, nickel-plated body rated at no less than 360 PSI, stainless steel ball and blowout-proof stem, PTFE ball seat, dual EPDM lubricated O-rings, stainless steel or TEFZEL characterizing disc, and female NPT union ends. Close off pressure rating of 200 psi. Valve shall be integrated with an electronic (ultra-sonic or electromagnetic)flow sensor(accuracy+/-2%) providing analog flow feedback. The valve shall reposition to maintain the required flow with a +/- 5% accuracy over a pressure differential range of 1 to 50 psi. 3. NPS 2-1/2"through 6": Belimo ePIV or equal. GG25 cast iron body according to ANSI 125, Class B, stainless steel ball and blowout-proof stem, PTFE ball seat, with a dual EPDM lubricated O-rings and a stainless steel flow characterizing disc. End connection pattern to match ANSI 125 flange. Close off pressure rating of 100 psi. Valve shall be integrated with an electronic (ultra-sonic or electromagnetic)flow sensor(accuracy+/- 2%) providing analog flow feedback. The valve shall reposition to maintain the required flow with a +/-5% accuracy over a pressure differential range of 1 to 50 psi. C. Characterized Control Ball Valves (CCV)for'/2' to 2": for 3-way modulating applications shall have equal percentage characteristics. Manufacturer shall be Belimo or approved equal. 1. Valve housing shall consist of forged brass rated at no less than 400 psi at 250 'F. Three- way valves shall have EPDM O-rings behind ball seals to allow for a minimum close-off pressure of 40 psi with an actuator that provides 35 in-lbs torque for to 2 in. sizes. Three-way valves shall be installed in a "tee" configuration with actuator perpendicular to the shaft. Confirm mixing or diverting application for correct valve selection. D. Globe Valves 2-1/2"to 6": for 3-way modulating applications shall have equal percentage characteristics. Manufacturer shall be Belimo G7 series or approved equal. 1. Valve housing shall consist of cast iron rated at no less than 125 psi at 300 'F. Valve shall have stainless steel stem, plug and seat. Three-way valves shall be installed in a "tee" configuration with actuator perpendicular to the shaft. Confirm mixing or diverting application for correct valve selection. E. Butterfly valves: For chiller and cooling tower isolation control valves, butterfly control valves may be provided. 1. Butterfly Isolation valves shall be line-size. Design velocity shall be less than 12 feet per second when used with standard EPDM seats. Butterfly valves shall have ductile iron body, 304 stainless steel disc and EPDM seat. The valve body close-off pressure rating shall be 150 psi over a range of-20 F to 250 F. The flange shall be ANSI 125/250. Belimo F6 and F7 series or approved manufacturer. F. Actuators for characterized control valves and globe valves: Provide electric actuators for all control valves that are furnished as part of the EMCS contract. Two-way and three-way control DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND Christi 23 09 63- 19 CONTROL SYSTEM (EMCS) 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop valve actuators shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements: 1. Motor driven type with gear assembly made of hardened steel. Actuator shall have an input voltage of 24 VAC. Provide visual mechanical position indication. 2. Actuators installed within the interior of the building envelope shall be provided with NEMA-2 rated housings. 3. Actuators installed exterior to the building envelope shall be provided with NEMA-4 rated housings or a weather shield. All penetrations through exterior actuator housings shall be provided with fittings that prevent water ingress. 4. Valves shall be sized to meet the shut-off requirements when operating at the maximum system differential pressure and with the installed system pump operating at shut-off head. Actuators shall control against system maximum working pressures. 5. Normal and failure positions shall be as indicated in the operating sequences. Provide spring return action per the sequences. 6. Manual declutch lever to enable manual operation of the valve. It shall be possible for an operator to manually modulate valves located in mechanical rooms in the event of loss of power. 7. Overload Protection: Actuators shall provide protection against actuator burnout by using an internal current limiting circuit or digital motor rotation sensing circuit. Circuit shall insure that actuators cannot burn out due to stalled damper or mechanical and electrical paralleling. End switches to deactivate the actuator at the end of rotation are acceptable only for butterfly valve actuators. 8. All actuators shall be capable of being electronically programmed in the field by use of external computer software or a dedicated handheld tool for the adjustment of flow. Programming using actuator mounted switches or multi-turn actuators are not acceptable. 9. Electric actuators shall be Belimo, compatible with the valves furnished. G. Butterfly Valve Industrial Actuators 1. Enclosure shall be NEMA 4 (weatherproof) enclosure and will have an industrial quality coating. 2. Actuator shall have a motor rated for continuous duty. The motor shall be fractional horsepower; permanent split capacitor type designed to operate on a 120 VAC, 1 phase, 60 Hz supply. Two adjustable cam actuated end travel limit switches shall be provided to control direction of travel. A self-resetting thermal switch shall be imbedded in the motor for overload protection. 3. Reduction gearing shall be designed to withstand the actual motor stall torque. Gears shall be hardened alloy steel, permanently lubricated. A self-locking gear assembly or a brake shall be supplied. 4. Actuator shall have a 6 ft wiring harness provided for ease in field wiring (above 1500 in- Ibs). Two adjustable SPDT cam-actuated auxiliary switches, rated at 250 VAC shall be provided for indication of open and closed position. Actuator shall have heater and thermostat to minimize condensation within the actuator housing. 5. Actuator shall be equipped with a hand wheel for manual override to permit operation of the valve in the event of electrical power failure or system malfunction. Hand wheel must be permanently attached to the actuator and when in manual operation electrical power to the actuator will be permanently interrupted. The hand wheel will not rotate while the actuator is electrically driven. 6. The actuator shall be analog, floating, or two position as called out in the control sequence of operation. All analog valves shall be positive positioning, and respond to a 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA, or adjustable signal as required. Analog actuators shall have a digital control card allowing any voltage input for control and any DC voltage feedback signal for position indication. 7. Butterfly valve actuators shall be Belimo furnished with specified butterfly valves. 2.20 REFRIGERANT LEAK DETECTION A. Refrigerant leak detection monitors shall be provided for the refrigerant and number of chillers installed. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND Christi 23 09 63- 20 CONTROL SYSTEM (EMCS) 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 1. Power consumption: AC- 325 mA, DC- 250 mA. Volt free contacts to indicate an alarm condition. 2. Operating temperature range of 32 °F to 105 'F. Operating humidity range of 0 to 95% non-condensing. 3. Measuring range of 0-1000 ppm proportional to 4 to 20mA output range for each sampling point. 4. System shall detect the presence of the types of refrigerants provided with the chillers using sequential sampling and multi-point monitoring method. 5. System shall annunciate to the EMCS through a contact closure and have a local alarm (audible and visual) Control panel shall have a silencing alarm button. Initial alarm shall comply with recommended Allowable Exposure Level (AEL). Adjustable 3 level alarm for each point shall be supplied with common alarm output contacts. Provide local digital indication of ppm level for a minimum of 1 sample point per chiller. A sample point shall be located close to each chiller and the refrigerant pump out unit location. Location to be approved by the engineer. Sample point if in alarm shall flash the associated LED. Provide local alarm horns and visual (stroboscopic) beacons at the following locations to activate upon alarm to an approved detail: a. Outside of entrance doors to chiller machine room. b. Inside rooms without an escape route other than through the chiller room. c. At each chiller location. d. At any other location in the chiller room as necessary to ensure that a person at any location in the chiller room and room that can be entered from the chiller room can see the visual alarm and hear the audible alarm and at any other location required to meet the applicable codes. 6. Emergency signs shall be provided in accordance with NFPA 704. Signs shall include a warning that the visual and audible alarms indicate a refrigerant leak has been detected and the monitored area should be evacuated. Sign material shall be engraved, laminated, UV resistant plastic or etched metal with self-adhesive backing. Submittals shall include sign material, dimensions, color, lettering format, and warning message for approval. Emergency signs shall be installed outside each exit door to monitored rooms. Install signs near alarms located at exits where they can be easily seen. Coordinate final locations with the Architect and Owner prior to installation. 7. System shall shut down all electrical equipment(chiller systems and associated pumps, AHU, FCU, etc.) and sequence emergency extract equipment as required to meet regulations. Where combustion equipment is employed, refrigerant vapor monitoring system shall automatically shut down the combustion process in event of refrigerant leakage if other alternative acceptable conditions are not applied. Ventilation system, chiller and associated pumps and other equipment shut down as a result of the refrigerant leak alarm shall return to normal operation when the refrigerant monitoring system is no longer detecting refrigerant levels above set points and alarms have been silenced. 8. System shall have self-diagnostics and supply common malfunction output. Loss of sample flow at either sample or ZERO line and electrical malfunction shall annunciate to the EMCS. 9. Provide two (2) additional particulate filters and zero gas filter cartridges. 10. Provide an emergency shut-off control button outside each chiller plant room entrance/exit door. Button shall be mounted at 48 inches above finished floor adjacent to refrigerant leak detection alarm light. Activation of any one of the buttons shall de-energize all chillers and other electrical equipment within the chiller plant room. Button shall be manually reset. 11. Provide BACnet MS/TP interface to EMCS. Provide Strobe/Horns and Emergency Push Buttons. 12. Maximum System Maintenance Requirements-The system shall require no periodic maintenance other than periodic checking. Periodic checking or adjustments of the unit shall be capable of being accomplished by one person at the unit location. 13. Manufacturer Capability Requirements-As a minimum, the Gas Monitoring Equipment manufacturer must meet the following requirements: DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND Christi 23 09 63- 21 CONTROL SYSTEM (EMCS) 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop a. Be capable of supplying all equipment used to check or calibrate the unit b. Be capable of providing onsite service with factory trained personnel c. Be capable of providing start-up assistance and training for the owner/operator 14. Gas Monitoring System shall be a Mine Safety Appliances Company Chillgard RT Refrigerant Monitor or equal. 2.21 PANELS AND ENCLOSURES A. Provide panels and enclosures for all components of the EMCS, which are susceptible to physical or environmental damage. B. Interior panels and enclosures shall meet be NEMA 1 rated painted steel panels with locking door. C. Exterior mounted panels and enclosures shall be NEMA 4 painted steel panels with locking door. D. Panels for USCs shall be mounted on the outside of all unit ventilators and fan coil units with three feet of wall clearance in front of them and no higher than 7 feet to the bottom of the panel. 2.22 LABELING AND WARNING NOTICES A. Provide labeling for all control panels and enclosures. B. Provide labeling of all control wires and input/output points at the controller and at the control device; the label at each end of the wire shall be the same Labels shall be machine generated, typed and clearly legible with a maximum of 17 characters. Hand written labels or labels written on the control wire jacket will not be acceptable. Each label shall be unique to its function and shall reference the applicable system. For example "AHU-1 SAT" will indicate the supply air temperature sensor for AHU-1. Improper labeling shall be removed and shall require re- commissioning of the control device and controller to document correct functionality. C. Provide high voltage warning notices at all equipment controlled by the EMCS and at all associated motor starters when used by equipment controller. 2.23 TUBING AND PIPING A. Provide tubing and piping as required for the field instrumentation. B. Tubing within equipment rooms, vertical risers, and penetrations to ductwork shall be either copper pipe or shall be plastic tubing within conduit. Tubing for all water-based instrumentation shall be copper pipe. Identify the type of tubing proposed in the shop drawing submittal. C. Provide suitable bulk head fittings for duct and panel penetrations. D. Tubing in plenum rated areas may be plastic tubing. Polyethylene tubing shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements: flame retardant; crack resistant; 300 psi burst pressure. 2.24 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. Provide all conduits, raceways and fittings for the EMCS monitoring, communication and control cabling. All work shall meet all applicable codes. B. Conduit, where required, shall meet, the requirements specified within Division 26. C. EMCS monitoring and control cable shall not share conduit with cable carrying voltages in excess of 90 VAC. 2.25 CABLING A. Provide all cables for the EMCS. Cable shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements: 1. Minimum 98% conductivity stranded copper. 2. Proper impedance for the application as recommended by the EMCS component manufacturer. 3. Monitoring and control cable shall be#18 AWG or larger, dependent on the application. Analog input and output cabling shall be shielded. 4. Management Level Network cable shall be CAT 6, 24 gauge unshielded. 5. Automation Level Network cable shall be#24 AWG shielded. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND Christi 23 09 63- 22 CONTROL SYSTEM (EMCS) 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 6. Shield shall be grounded at the CCP, UC, or control panel. Ground at one end only to avoid ground loops. 7. Identification of each end at the termination point. Identification should be indicated on and correspond to the record drawings. B. 120 VAC power wiring shall be of#12 AWG solid conductor or larger as required. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PRE-CONSTRUCTION A. The EMCS supplier shall provide a pre-construction coordination meeting with the affected trades to ensure a cooperative efficient process of installation. The invited trades shall include the general contractor, mechanical contractor, electrical contractor, test and balance contractor, commissioning provider, owner's representative, consulting engineer and others with a direct interest in the coordination of the affected systems. The EMCS contractor shall provide an outline of the meeting agenda highlighting the construction schedule, coordination with mechanical and electrical trades. Provide a sign-in sheet and submit it through the attendees along with a summary of the meeting notes for future reference. 3.02 INSPECTION DURING INSTALLATION A. Provide a technician to assist the Engineer or Owner's Representative with inspections made during the installation period that are required to review the progress and quality of ongoing work. The engineer/owner's representative shall generate field observation reports on the findings of the inspection. The engineer or owner's representative shall advise the EMCS contractor during the inspection of any concerns noted with respect to the installation and shall repeat the concerns in writing as soon as possible after the inspection is completed. The EMCS contractor shall take corrective action to meet the requirements of the specifications. Upon correction, the EMCS contractor shall submit written documentation through the contractors to the engineer. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF COMPONENTS A. Provide all interlock and control wiring. All wiring shall be installed in a neat and professional manner in accordance with specification Division 26 and all national, state and local electrical codes. B. Provide wire and wiring techniques recommended by equipment manufacturers. Control wiring shall not be installed in power circuit raceways. Magnetic starters and disconnect switches shall not be used as junction boxes. Provide auxiliary junction boxes as required. Coordinate location and arrangement of all control equipment with the Owner's Representative prior to rough-in. Provide auxiliary pilot duty relays on motor starters as required for control function. C. Electrical Contractor shall provide 120 or 277 volt power at a junction box within 48" of the controller. The BAS Contractor shall coordinate with the Electrical Contractor to identify locations of power requirements prior to the installation of the controls. D. Conduit for control wiring shall be provided whenever one of the following conditions exists: 1. Conduit is indicated on the drawings or specifically required by the specifications. 2. Cabling runs through inaccessible areas such as within partitions/walls, above closed in ceilings, under floor; within trenches and underground; on the exterior of the building; exposed on the surface of the building; when encased in concrete or other material that makes the cable inaccessible or when located such that access to the cable is not readily obtained. 3. Cable within mechanical, telecommunications and electrical equipment rooms and control rooms. 4. Conduit shall be installed, inside wall from sensor box to above the wall, for all wall mounted temperature, humidity and CO2 sensors. E. Control wiring located above an accessible ceiling space may be plenum rated cable. Plenum rated wire shall be bundled and routed at right angles to the building lines and secured to the building structure every 15 feet. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND Christi 23 09 63- 23 CONTROL SYSTEM (EMCS) 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop F. Control wiring located in underground conduits shall be provided with direct-burial-rated insulation. G. When communication bus enters or exits a building, a surge suppressor shall be installed. The surge suppressor shall be installed according to the controls manufacturer's instructions. H. Provide sleeves for all cable and conduit passing through walls, partitions, structural components, floors and roof. I. All sensor wiring shall be labeled to indicate the origination (at the device) and destination of data (at the control panel). The description shall indicate the type and location of the control device such as "AHU-1 SA temp" or"VAV 1-1 space temp". J. Wall temp sensors at 48" above the finished floor to comply with ADA requirements and to match the height of the light switches. Mount humidity sensor at equal height to wall temperature sensor. K. Outdoor pressure sensors shall be installed a minimum of five feet above the roof surface and shall be free of immediate obstructions and sources of turbulence that could affect pressure readings. Sensors shall be attached to the top of roof mounted equipment or provided with stand-alone vertical support if no roof mounted equipment is available. Sensor tubing shall be routed into the building through a sealed weathertight penetration. Provide a heat trap loop in the sensor tubing immediately below the roof. 3.04 VERIFICATION REQUIREMENTS A. Verification shall be provided by the EMCS contractor to demonstrate and confirm that the installed system complies with the specifications and the control sequences of operation herein specified. upon completion of the verification process the EMCS contractor shall demonstrate to the engineer or owner's representative the functionality of the control system devices are in compliance with the contract documents. B. Technicians provided by the EMCS contractor shall be factory trained and qualified in the operation of the provided control system. The EMCS contractor shall provide, if requested, the factory training certificates of the individuals providing the verification services on this project. C. Verification tools, applicable to the system provided, shall be utilized by the factory-trained technicians for proper verification of system operation and functionality. Temperature verification sensors shall be NIST certified within the last 12 months. Meters such as Fluke 52 series or better shall be utilized. Use of non-certified meters may require the system to be re- verified with certified meters at no cost to the owner. D. Documentation of the verification process shall be provided per the project general conditions in electronic PDF format as required. Documentation shall include the following forms: 1. Project System Verification Forms for each controller provided on the project to verify the proper function of each controller, control device and system component provided. 2. Panel Verification Forms for each control panel to document the proper installation and function of each control panel provided. 3. Sequence of Operation Verification Forms for each piece of controlled equipment to confirm compliance of the control system with the specified sequences of operation. 4. Not providing proper documentation for each control devices, panel, or system, upon request by the engineer or owner's representative, may require the EMCS contractor to re-verify the applicable systems at no additional cost to the owner. E. After completion of the verification, the EMCS contractor shall be able to demonstrate the sequence of operations for each system to the engineer and the owner's representative. F. Equipment checkout sheets are to be produced by this contractor showing checkboxes and compliance with the following procedures for each piece of equipment and turned over to the owner and/or mechanical engineer. 3.05 COLORGRAPHICS A. The colorgraphics shall be provided for the EMCS system prior to system acceptance and owner training. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND Christi 23 09 63- 24 CONTROL SYSTEM (EMCS) 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop B. The colorgraphics provided shall include the following as a template. Provide forward and backward links on the graphic. 1. Site plan with link to overall building plan including detached buildings. The site plan shall be referenced to an automatically updated aerial view or map view of the area such as Google Maps or Bing Maps. Provide link to proceed to the overall building floor plan. 2. The overall building plan shall indicate space temperature conditions referenced by the color of the zone. Specific details of the zone temperatures and equipment are not required. Provide a link to the floor plan wings, upper floors and remote buildings. 3. The floor plan colorgraphics shall indicate the space temperatures by color references. Additional information shall indicate the space temperature, the occupancy of the zone, air handling units, VAV terminals and ductwork with diffusers. A link at each terminal unit or AHU shall automatically connect the system operator to the equipment colorgraphic. 4. The colorgraphics for the equipment shall as a minimum be equal to the points from the input/output summary or control schematic. Primary control devices as required by the sequences of operation shall also be provided. 5. Control points from equipment that are integrated into the EMCS via BACnet shall be provided to convey the operating conditions of the attached equipment. Coordination of the integration points shall be accomplished during the submittal phase. The EMCS contractor shall provide a list of all integrated points on their submittal. 3.06 CONTROL SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION AND ACCEPTANCE A. Startup testing documentation: Prepare the checklist documenting startup testing of each input and output device, with technician's initials and date certifying each device has been tested and calibrated prior to acceptance testing. This document shall indicate proof that the following functions have been commissioned and shall be included in the as-built documentation: short to ground check, configuration of trends, confirmation that color-graphics are accurately representing actual systems, point to point checkout, all damper and valve actuators respond to input change, control modules are addressed and have functional descriptors, specified interlocks are functional, calibration report of all sensors, discrete outputs respond to time schedule or manual enable command. B. Demonstration. Prior to acceptance, demonstrate the following performance tests to demonstrate system operation and compliance with specifications. 1. Engineer, owner's representative and mechanical contractor shall be invited to observe and review system demonstration. Provide attendees at least 10 days notice. 2. Demonstration shall follow process approved as part of the submittal and shall include complete checklists and forms for each system as part of system demonstration. 3. Demonstrate actual field operation of each sequence of operation as specified. Demonstrate calibration and response of any input and output points requested by engineer or owner's representative. 4. Demonstrate complete operation of operator interface including review of color-graphics, time schedules, trend logs, alarm notification, functionality of tablet PC operation. a. PID loop response. Supply graphical trend data output showing each PID loop's response to a set point change representing an actuator position change of at least 25% of full range. Trend sampling rate shall be selectable from 10 seconds to 3 minutes, depending on loop speed. Each sample's trend data shall show set point, actuator position, and controlled variable values. b. Demand limiting. Supply trend data output showing demand-limiting algorithm action. Trend data shall document action sampled each minute over at least a 30-minute period and shall show building kW, demand limiting setpoint, and status of set points and other affected equipment parameters. c. Trend logs for each system. Trend data shall indicate set points, operating points, valve positions, and other data as specified. Logs shall be accessible through system's operator interface and shall be retrievable for use in other software programs. 5. Alarms and Interlocks. Check each alarm with an appropriate signal at a value that will trip the alarm. Trip interlocks using field contacts to check logic and to ensure that actuators DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND Christi 23 09 63- 25 CONTROL SYSTEM (EMCS) 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop fail in the proper direction. Alarm verification shall include temperatures exceeding alarm threshold (high and low), fan failure safety, duct high static pressure switch, freezestat, and smoke detector shutdown. 6. Tests that fail to demonstrate proper system operation to the engineer shall be repeated after contractor makes necessary repairs or revisions to hardware or software to successfully complete each test. C. Owner Acceptance. 1. After tests described in this specification are performed to the satisfaction of both engineer and owner's representative, the engineer shall accept the control system as meeting completion requirements. Engineer may exempt tests from completion requirements that cannot be performed due to circumstances beyond EMCS contractor's control. Engineer shall provide written statement of each exempted test. Exempted tests shall be performed as part of warranty. 2. System shall not be accepted until completed demonstration forms and checklists are submitted and approved by the engineer. 3.07 DEMONSTRATION AND OWNER TRAINING A. Furnish basic operator training for multiple persons on data display, alarm and status descriptors, requesting data, execution commands and log requests. Include a minimum of 16 hours: 8 hours instructor time for onsite training and 8 hours of hands on class environment training. Training sessions may be provided in 4-hour increments as approved by the owner's representative. 1. Change/modify temperature setpoints. 2. Change/modify time of day, holiday and override schedules. 3. Display, create, and modify trends of system points. 4. Update room numbers on the color-graphics. B. Demonstrate complete and operating system to Owner. Provide written documentation listing the attendees of the specified training with sign-in sheet and training time and date. 3.08 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS A. Refer to the Mechanical Drawings for project control schematics and sequence of operations. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND Christi 23 09 63- 26 CONTROL SYSTEM (EMCS) 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SECTION 23 21 13 ABOVE GROUND HYDRONIC PIPING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. Section 23 02 00- Basic Materials and Methods for HVAC shall be included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Pipe and pipe fittings. B. Flanges, unions, dielectric connections, and couplings C. Valves. D. Condensate drain piping. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Section 230516 B. Section 23 05 29- Hangers and Supports for Piping and Equipment- HVAC C. Section 230548 D. Section 23 05 53- Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment E. Section 23 07 19- HVAC Piping Insulation F. Section 232116 G. Section 23 21 19- Hydronic Specialties 1.04 REFERENCES A. ASME B16.1 - Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and 250; 2020. B. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: Classes 150 and 300; 2021. C. ASME B31.1 - Power Piping; 2022. D. ASME B31.3 - Process Piping; 2022, with Errata (2023). E. ASME B31.9- Building Services Piping; 2020. F. ASME BPVC-IX- Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX-Qualification Standard for Welding, Brazing, and Fusing Procedures; Welders; Brazers; and Welding, Brazing, and Fusing Operators; 2023. G. ASSE 1079 - Performance Requirements for Dielectric Pipe Unions; 2012. H. ASTM D1384- Standard Test Method for Corrosion Test for Engine Coolants in Glassware; 2005. I. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2022. J. ASTM F1476 -Standard Specification for Performance of Gasketed Mechanical Couplings for Use in Piping Applications; 2007 (Reapproved 2019). K. ISO 9001 - Quality Management Systems— Requirements; 2015. L. ANSI/AWWA C110 - Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings 3 in. through 48 in., for Water and Other Liquids. M. ASTM A123-Zinc(Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. N. ASTM B32 -Solder Metal. O. ASTM B88 -Seamless Copper Water Tube. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus ABOVE GROUND HYDRONIC Christi 2321 13- 1 PIPING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Foreign made pipes and fittings will not be acceptable. B. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. C. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME BPVC-IX and applicable state labor regulations. D. Welder's Certification: In accordance with ASME BPVC-IX. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Division One. B. Include data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. C. Include welder's certification of compliance with ASME BPVC-IX. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Division One. B. Store and protect products under provisions of Division One. C. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers with labeling in place. D. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. E. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, proper storage and dunnage, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system. Tape will not be allowed as an acceptable end cover. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT DRAINS AND OVERFLOWS A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Schedule 40 galvanized. 1. Fittings: Galvanized cast iron, or ASME B16.3 malleable iron. 2. Joints: Threaded, or grooved mechanical couplings. 2.02 FLANGES, UNIONS, DIELECTRIC CONNECTIONS, AND COUPLINGS A. Pipe Size 2 Inches and Under: Provide 150 psi malleable iron unions for threaded ferrous piping; bronze unions for copper pipe, soldered joints. B. Pipe Size Over 2 Inches: Provide 150 psi forged steel slip-on flanges for ferrous piping; bronze flanges for copper piping; 1/16 inch thick preformed neoprene bonded gasket. C. Dielectric connections for pipe sizes 2 inches and under: Provide dielectric unions, rated at 180°F at 250 psi in compliance with ASSE 1079. D. Dielectric connections for pipe sizes larger than 2 inches: Provide dielectric flanged pipe fittings, rated to 180°F at 175 psi in compliance with ASME B16.1. E. Grooved mechanical pipe couplings, fittings, valves and other grooved components may be used as an option to welding, threading or flanged methods. All grooved components shall be of one manufacturer, and conform to local code approval and/or is listed by ASME B31.1, ASME B31.3, ASME B31.9, ASME, UL/ULC. FM, IAPMO or BOCA. Grooved end manufacturer to be ISO 9001 certified. Grooved couplings shall meet the requirements of ASTM F1476. Manufacturer shall be Victaulic, Anvil Gruvlok, or Shurjoint. Can be utilized only in mechanical rooms or cooling tower areas. 2.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS -VALVES A. Milwaukee B. Crane C. Nibco D. Apollo E. Bray DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus ABOVE GROUND HYDRONIC Christi 2321 13-2 PIPING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop F. Kitz 2.04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS -VALVES (GROOVED ONLY) A. Victaulic B. Anvil Gruvlok C. Shurjoint 2.05 GATE VALVES A. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, inside screw, single wedge or disc, threaded ends. B. Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, OS&Y, single wedge, flanged ends. 2.06 GLOBE VALVES A. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem and handwheel, inside screw, renewable stainless steel disc, threaded ends, with back seating capacity. B. Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, hand wheel, OS&Y, plug-type disc, flanged ends, renewable seat and disc. 2.07 BALL VALVES A. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze two-piece body, 600 PSI full port, stainless steel ball and stem, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, lever handle, and balancing stops, threaded ends. B. Over 2 Inches: Cast steel body, chrome plated steel ball, teflon seat and stuffing box seals, lever handle, or gear drive hand wheel for sizes 10 inches (250 mm)and over, flanged. C. Ball valves installed in insulated lines shall have stem extensions compatible with up to 2"of insulation. Extensions shall be non-metallic equal to Nibco "nib-seal". 2.08 PLUG COCKS A. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze tapered plug, non-lubricated, teflon packing, threaded ends, with one wrench operator for every ten plug cocks. B. Over 2 Inches: Cast iron body and plug, pressure lubricated, teflon packing, flanged ends, with wrench operator with set screw. 2.09 BUTTERFLY VALVES A. Iron body, aluminum bronze or stainless steel disc, resilient replaceable seat for service to 180 degrees F lug or grooved ends, extended neck, infinite position lever handle with memory stop. Valve shall be rated at full working pressure with downstream flange removed in either direction. 2.10 SWING CHECK VALVES A. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze 45 degree swing disc, threaded ends. B. Over 2 Inches Iron body, bronze trim, 45 degree swing disc, renewable disc and seat, flanged or grooved ends. 2.11 SPRING LOADED CHECK VALVES A. Iron body, bronze trim, stainless steel spring, aluminum bronze disc, threaded, grooved, wafer or flanged ends. 2.12 RELIEF VALVES A. Bronze body, teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, capacities ASME certified and labeled. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus ABOVE GROUND HYDRONIC Christi 2321 13-3 PIPING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. D. After completion, fill, clean, and treat systems. E. Provide extended necks for all vents, thermometer wells, pressure gauge wells, pet cocks and pete's plugs. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure, and maintain gradient. B. Install piping to conserve building space, and not interfere with use of space and other work. C. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. D. Branch tap connections to piping mains shall be from the top of the pipe. E. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe,joints, or connected equipment. Refer to Section 230516. F. Provide clearance for installation of insulation, and access to valves and fittings. G. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. Coordinate size and location of access doors with Division 08. H. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers to maintain top of pipe level. I. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welds. J. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting. Refer to Division 09. K. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. L. All grooved components (couplings, fittings, valves, gaskets, and specialties)shall be of one manufacturer. M. Grooved manufacturer shall provide on-site training for contractor's field personnel by a factory trained representative in the proper use of grooving tools, application of groove, and the product installation. Factory trained representative shall periodically visit the job site and inspect installation. Contractor shall remove and replace any improperly installed products. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners only in mechanical rooms or cooling tower area. B. Install unions downstream of valves, and at equipment or apparatus connections. C. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever joining dissimilar metals. D. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Sweat solder adapters to pipe. E. Install ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers. F. Install plug valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services. G. Provide spring loaded check valves on discharge of condenser and chilled water pumps. H. Use plug cocks for throttling service. Use non-lubricated plug cocks only when shut-off or isolating valves are also provided. I. Use only butterfly valves in condenser water systems for throttling and isolation service. J. Use lug end butterfly valves to isolate equipment. K. Provide chain operated butterfly valve for installations at 12 feet or higher. L. Provide 3/4-inch ball (drain)valves equal to Nibco T-585-70-HC at main shut-off valves, low points of piping, bases of vertical risers, and at equipment and pipe to nearest drain. M. Provide automatic air vents at all high points and air pockets in the system. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus ABOVE GROUND HYDRONIC Christi 2321 13-4 PIPING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 3.04 CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING A. Drain piping from each unit shall be extended to the nearest floor drain or condensate drainage system. Drains shall be of the size indicated but not less than the full size of the drain pan connections. B. Use plugged tees in lieu of elbows. C. Slope all drain lines 1/8" per foot, minimum. D. Provide auxiliary drain pan on all AHU's above ceiling with auxiliary drain line routed to discharge in visually prominent area. Discharge location shall be coordinated with Architect. 3.05 PIPE FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION A. All pipes shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the site and shall be worked into place without springing or forcing. B. Piping layout and installation shall be made in the most advantageous manner possible with respect to headroom, valve access, opening and equipment clearance, and clearance from other work. Particular attention shall be given to piping in the vicinity of equipment; layout shall be made in such manner as to preserve maximum access to the various equipment parts for maintenance. C. All changes in directions shall be made with fittings; field bending and mitering of pipe is prohibited. D. Air vents and air chambers shall be installed as hereinafter specified. 3.06 OFFSETS AND FITTINGS A. Due to the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, etc. which may be required. The Contractor shall carefully investigate structural and finish conditions affecting the Work, and shall take such steps as may be required to meet such conditions at no additional cost to the Owner. B. All piping shall be installed close to walls, ceilings and columns, (consistent with the proper space for covering, removal of pipe and special clearances), so as to occupy the minimum of space, and all offsets, fittings, etc., required shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.07 SECURING AND SUPPORTING A. All piping shall be adequately supported to line and grade, with due provisions for expansion and contraction. B. Piping shall be supported on approved clevis type, split ring, or trapeze type hangers properly connected to the structural members of the building. C. All insulated piping shall be fitted with suitable steel protection saddles. D. Perforated bar hangers, straps, wire or chains will not be permitted. 3.08 ISOLATION VALVES A. All piping systems shall be provided with line size shut-off valves located at risers, at branch connections to mains, and at other locations as indicated and required. 3.09 TESTING OF PIPING SYSTEMS A. During the progress of the Work and upon completion, tests shall be made as specified herein and as required by Authorities Having Jurisdiction, including Inspectors, Owner or Engineer. The Engineer or duly authorized Construction Inspector shall be notified in writing at least 2 working days prior to each test or other Specification requirement which requires action on the part of the Construction Inspector. B. Tests shall be conducted as part of this Work and shall include all necessary instruments, equipment, apparatus, and service as required to perform the tests with qualified personnel. Submit proposed test procedures, recording forms, and test equipment for approval prior to the execution of testing. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus ABOVE GROUND HYDRONIC Christi 2321 13-5 PIPING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop C. Tests shall be performed before piping of various systems have been covered or furred-in. For insulated piping systems, testing shall be accomplished prior to the application of any insulation. D. All piping systems shall be tested and proved absolutely tight for a period of not less than 24 hours at a pressure of 150 psi(g) or 150% of design pressure, whichever is greater. Tests shall be witnessed by the Engineer or an authorized representative and pronounced satisfactory before pressure is removed or any water drawn off. E. Leaks, damage or defects discovered or resulting from test shall be repaired or replaced to a like new condition. Leaking pipe joints, or defective pipe, shall be removed and replaced with acceptable materials. Test shall be repeated after repairs are completed and shall continue until such time as the entire test period expires without the discovery of any leaks, damage, or defects. F. Wherever conditions permit, each piping system shall thereafter be subjected to its normal operating pressure and temperature for a period of no less than five 5 days. During that period, it shall be kept under the most careful observation. The piping systems must demonstrate the propriety of their installation by remaining absolutely tight during this period. 3.10 PIPE CLEANING, FLUSHING AND PURGING REQUIREMENTS AND PROCEDURES A. The hydronic system shall be flushed and purged by contractor: 1. All mains, branches and zones shall be cleaned and treated per steps indicated below. 2. Owner/Engineer shall be given 72-hour notice prior to each step being performed. B. Pre-flush requirements: Purpose is to get system ready for flushing and purging: 1. Piping must pass all required pressure testing and visual inspection for leaks. 2. All pumps shall be tested for rotation and properly aligned and lubricated. 3. Chemicals planning on being used must have certificate of assurance and product cut sheets presented to the owner/engineer prior to being used. All chemicals must be approved by the state prior to being added to the system, FDA approved and meet ASTM D1384. Automotive grade chemicals are not allowed. 4. Bypass all coils and heat exchangers by connecting the supply and return piping together. 5. Fill entire system with clean fresh potable water. C. The flush requirements: Purpose is to completely remove all debris, dirt and air from hydronic system. 1. Add system cleaner that contains detergent and emulsifying agents to properly remove grease, grime and other debris for steel pipe. Volume of cleaner used shall be about 10% of total volume. 2. System shall be circulated for a minimum of 48 hours with water velocities of a minimum of 5 ft/sec or greater. After completed all strainers shall be removed and cleaned thoroughly. House pumps are acceptable to circulate water. House pumps or pump seals that are damaged during the flushing process shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner. 3. The system shall be entirely drained and flushed out to remove all of the cleaner from the system as quickly as possible after cleaning to prevent debris from settling. All strainers shall be removed and thoroughly cleaned after no more dirt and cleaner is visible in the flushing water as it leaves the system. D. Final fill: 1. All air vents shall be opened to allow air to escape during filling. 2. Reconnect all flex connections to equipment. 3. System shall be drained and filled with a local domestic/softened water mixture as required by chemical treatment supplier. System shall be filled with pressure reducing valve at the specified fill pressure. E. Purging: Purpose is to remove all air from the system: 1. System shall be circulated for a minimum of one hour with water velocities of a minimum of 5 ft/sec or greater until all visible air is removed. F. Final chemical addition: Purpose is to install chemicals during inhibitor as required: DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus ABOVE GROUND HYDRONIC Christi 2321 13-6 PIPING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 1. After the above final fill and purging has been completed and accepted by the engineer/owner the final chemical addition can be done. 2. Chemical treatment shall be added to the system after thoroughly mixing water per the manufacturer's recommendations. Chemical treatment shall include inhibitors. Quantities and concentrations of inhibitor/chemicals should be applied per the manufacturer's specifications and approval submittals. 3. System water shall be tested for chemical inhibitor concentrations, reserve alkalinity and PH. Reports shall be submitted to engineer/owner. 4. All records and documentation shall be kept and given to the owner upon completion. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus ABOVE GROUND HYDRONIC Christi 2321 13-7 PIPING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SECTION 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. Section 23 02 00- Basic Materials and Methods for HVAC shall be included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE A. Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for Owner's use. 1.03 REFERENCES A. AHRI 710 - Performance Rating of Liquid-Line Driers; 2009. B. AHRI 730 (I-P)- Flow Capacity Rating of Suction Line Filters and Suction Line Filter Driers; 2013 (Reapproved 2014). C. ASHRAE Std 15-Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems; 2022, with Addendum (2024). D. ASHRAE Std 34 - Designation and Safety Classification of Refrigerants; 2022, with Errata (2024). E. ASHRAE Std 147 - Reducing the Release of Halogenated Refrigerants from Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Equipment and Systems; 2019, with Addendum (2024). F. ASME A13.1 -Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; 2023. G. ASME B16.22 -Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings; 2021. H. ASME B31.5- Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components; 2022. I. ASME BPVC-IX- Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX- Qualification Standard for Welding, Brazing, and Fusing Procedures; Welders; Brazers; and Welding, Brazing, and Fusing Operators; 2023. J. ASTM B280 -Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service; 2023. K. AWS A5.8M/A5.8 -Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding; 2019. L. AWS B2.2/B2.2M -Specification for Brazing Procedure and Performance Qualification; 2016. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of refrigeration piping system, including equipment, critical dimensions, and sizes. B. Piping: Submit data on pipe materials, fittings, and accessories. C. Valves: Submit manufacturers catalog information with valve data and ratings for each service. D. Refrigerant Specialties: Submit manufacturers catalog information including capacity, component sizes, rough-in requirements, and service sizes. E. Welding Certificates: Submit per AWS B2.2/B2.2M and ASME BPVC-IX. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Provide for the systems as shown. Submit shop drawings of piping systems showing all traps, pipe sizes, and accessories; drawing to be marked "Approved" and signed by a representative of the Application Engineering Department of the condensing unit manufacturer. Pipe sizes shall be as recommended by unit manufacturer. Refer to piping schematic on Drawings. 2.02 MATERIAL A. PIPE: Type ACR copper tubing, hard-drawn, per ASTM B280. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 23 23 00- 1 REFRIGERANT PIPING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents B. FITTINGS: Wrought copper per ASME B16.22. C. JOINTS: Brazed joints with Sil-Fos filler metal per AWS A5.8M/A5.8. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. All accessories shall be UL listed and rated in accordance with AHRI 710. B. On systems 7-1/2 tons and larger, each separate refrigerant circuit shall have a separate filter drier rated in accordance with AHRI 730 (I-P). Each filter drier shall have a replaceable core and a three valve bypass. The filter drier shall be full line size and installed in the refrigerant liquid line. The filter shall have a minimum 4-3/4 inches diameter shell with removable flange and gasket. Flange shall be tapped for 1/4 inch FPT access valve. Size filter-drier for maximum 2.0 psi pressure drop at evaporator operating temperature. Similar to Mueller Refrigeration model Drymaster micro-guard refillable filter series SD-485 through SD19217 or Sporlan catch- all. C. On systems less than 7-1/2 tons, the filter drier shall be the sealed type; sizes as above. One drier per refrigerant circuit. D. Liquid-Moisture Indicator shall be full line size, installed in liquid refrigerant line. Indicator shall be rated for the applicable refrigerant, system pressure and temperature; manufactured by Mueller Refrigeration or Sporlan. E. Thermostatic expansion valve shall have adjustable super heat and be as manufactured by Sporlan. F. Shut-off valves shall be bi-directional ball valves with welded body, brass ball with dual Teflon seals and integral relief port. Valves shall be rated for the applicable refrigerant, system pressure and temperature. Valves shall be manufactured by Mueller Refrigeration or Sporlan. 2.04 REFRIGERANT AND OIL A. Contractor shall leave the refrigeration system with a full charge of refrigerant and oil and shall be responsible for the maintenance of a full charge of refrigerant and oil in the systems for a period of one year from date of Substantial Completion. B. Should any leaks in the refrigeration system occur during the guarantee period, the Contractor shall eliminate such leaks and recharge system to a full charge of refrigerant and oil at no cost to the Owner. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All equipment and piping shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and printed installation instructions. B. All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the Drawings or in the Specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturer's requirements. C. Refrigerant piping shall be installed in accordance with ASHRAE Std 15 and ASHRAE Std 34. D. Arrange refrigerant piping to return oil to compressor. Provide traps and loops in piping, and provide double risers as required. E. Braze joints per AWS B2.2/B2.2M and AWS A5.8M/A5.8 requirements. F. Pipe shall be cut square, reamed and chamfered, and shall be free from burrs and obstruction. Pipe ends shall have full-bore openings and shall not be undercut. G. Refrigerant piping located in areas other than the room or space where the refrigerating equipment is located shall be identified with pipe markers that meet labeling requirements of ASME A13.1. Markers shall be manufactured by W.H. Brady Company or approved equal. The pipe identification shall be located at intervals not exceeding 20 feet on the refrigerant piping or pipe insulation. The minimum height of the identification lettering shall be 1/2". The pipe identification shall indicate the refrigerant designation and safety group classification of the refrigerant used in the piping system. For Group A2, A3, B2, and B3 refrigerants, the DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 23 23 00-2 REFRIGERANT PIPING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop identification shall also include the following statement: "DANGER— Risk of Fire or Explosion. Flammable Refrigerant." For any Group B refrigerant, the identification shall also include the following statement: "DANGER—Toxic Refrigerant". H. Refrigerant piping routed indoors shall be installed at a minimum of 7'-3" above finished floor when located above an area affording passage of occupants. I. Refrigerant piping located indoors shall be located within building elements such as a ceiling or wall space or within a protective enclosure unless installed a minimum of 7'-3" above finished floor, within 6'-0"of the associated equipment or within a refrigerant machinery room. J. Provide shield plates for refrigerant pipes containing Group A2L and B2L refrigerants that are located in concealed locations where piping is installed in studs,joists, rafters or similar member spaces, and are located less than 1-1/2 inches from the nearest edge of the member. Shield plates shall have a minimum thickness of 16 gage and shall extend two inches beyond the edge of the piping on each side. K. Refrigerant pipe and joints installed in the field shall be exposed for visual inspection and testing prior to being covered or enclosed. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test piping and refrigeration system in accordance with ASME B31.5, ASHRAE Std 147, and this section. B. The refrigerant piping system shall be tested as a whole or separate tests shall be conducted for the low-pressure side and high-pressure side of the piping system. 1. Pressure Test: a. Pressure test shall be performed using dry nitrogen. b. The means used to pressurize the refrigerant piping system shall have on its outlet side a test pressure measuring device and either a pressure-limiting device or a pressure-reducing device. The test pressure measuring device shall have an accuracy of+/- 3% or less of the test pressure and shall have a resolution of 5% or less of the test pressure. c. The system shall be pressurized for a period of not less than 60 minutes. Additional test gas shall not be added to the system after the start of the test. d. Test pressure shall be at least 110% of the system design pressure. e. Test pressure shall not exceed 130% of the design pressure of any component in the system. f. The system shall not show loss of pressure on the on the test measuring device throughout the entirety of the test. 2. Evacuation and Leak Test: a. Evacuate moisture completely by applying a commercial vacuum pump. Moisture indicator shall indicate a completely moisture-free condition at time of final inspection. b. The vacuum pump shall run until the system indicates a vacuum of 500 microns.- c. After achieving a vacuum, the system shall be isolated from the vacuum pump. The system pressure shall not rise for a minimum of 24 hours. d. The system shall be flushed with the operating refrigerant and the vacuum pump connected and rerun to repeat the evacuation. Evaluation shall be performed under supervision of the Engineer. C. Repair any and all leaks and retest as required. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 23 23 00-3 REFRIGERANT PIPING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SECTION 23 31 13 METAL DUCTWORK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Low pressure ductwork. B. Medium and high pressure ductwork. C. Casings. D. Underground buried ducts. E. Kitchen hood ductwork. F. Laboratory fume hood exhaust ductwork. G. Welding exhaust ductwork. H. Paint hood exhaust ductwork. I. Commercial dryer vent. J. Duct leakage testing. K. Duct system protection. L. Duct system cleaning. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 9- Finishes: Weld priming, weather resistant, paint or coating. B. Section 23 02 00- Basic Materials and Methods for HVAC C. Section 23 05 29- Hangers and Supports for Piping and Equipment- HVAC D. Section 23 05 93-Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing E. Section 23 07 13- Duct Insulation F. Section 23 33 00- Ductwork Accessories G. Section 23 37 13-Air Distribution Devices 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM A480/A480M -Standard Specification for General Requirements for Flat-Rolled Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip; 2023b. B. ASTM A653/A653M -Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)or Zinc- Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2023. C. ASTM B209-Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2014. D. NADCA ACR-The NADCA Standard for Assessment, Cleaning, and Restoration of HVAC System; 2021. E. NFPA 96- Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations; 2024. F. SMACNA(DCS)- HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible; 2020. G. UL 181 -Standard for Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. H. SMACNA(LEAK)- HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. I. ASHRAE (FUND)ASHRAE Handbook- Fundamentals; Chapter 21 - Duct Design. J. ASHRAE (HVACS)ASHRAE Handbook- HVAC Systems and Equipment; Chapter 19- Duct Construction. K. ASHRAE Std 90.1 I-P- Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings. L. NFPA 90A- Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 2331 13 - 1 METAL DUCTWORK 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents M. NFPA 90B - Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air-Conditioning Systems. N. ICC (IECC)- International Energy Conservation Code. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of metal ductwork products of types, materials and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Installer's Qualifications: Firms with least 3 years of successful installation experience on projects with metal ductwork systems similar to that required for project. 1.05 GENERAL DESCRIPTION A. Extent of metal ductwork is indicated on drawings and in schedules, and by requirements of this section. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings, duct fabrication standards and product data under provisions of Division One. B. Indicate duct fittings, particulars such as gauges, sizes, welds, and configuration prior to start of work. C. The contract documents are schematic in nature and are to be used only for design intent. The contractor shall prepare sheet metal shop drawings, fully detailed and drawn to scale, indicating all structural conditions, all plumbing pipe and light fixture coordination, and all offsets and transitions as required to permit the duct to fit in the space allocated and built. All duct revisions required as a result of the contractor not preparing fully detailed shop drawings will be performed at no additional cost. 1.07 DEFINITIONS A. Duct Sizes: Inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain indicated clear size inside lining. Where offsets or transitions are required, the duct shall be the equivalent size based on constant friction rate. B. Low Pressure: Low pressure ductwork shall be rated for an operating pressure of 2". Low pressure ductwork shall be defined as all return, exhaust, and outside air ducts, all supply ductwork associated with constant volume air handling units with a scheduled external static pressure of less than 2", and all supply ductwork downstream of terminal units in variable volume systems. C. Medium Pressure: Medium pressure ductwork shall be rated for an operating pressure of 4". Medium pressure ductwork shall be defined as all supply ductwork extending from variable volume air handling units to terminal units in variable volume systems with air handling units having a scheduled external static pressure of less than 4". The supply ductwork of constant volume air handling units having a scheduled external static pressure greater than 2" and less than 4"shall be rated for medium pressure. D. High Pressure: High pressure ductwork shall be rated for an operating pressure of 6", or the scheduled external pressure of the equipment it is connected to, whichever is greater. The supply ductwork of air handling units having a scheduled external static pressure greater than 4" shall be high pressure. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protection: Protect shop-fabricated and factory-fabricated ductwork, accessories and purchased products from damage during shipping, storage and handling. Prevent end damage and prevent dirt and moisture from entering ducts and fittings, use sheet metal end caps on any lined duct exposed to the weather. B. Storage: Where possible, store ductwork inside and protect from weather. Where necessary to store outside, store above grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 2331 13-2 METAL DUCTWORK 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCTWORK MATERIALS A. Exposed Ductwork Materials: Where ductwork is indicated to be exposed to view in occupied spaces, provide materials which are free from visual imperfections including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains and discolorations, and other imperfections, including those which would impair painting. B. Sheet Metal: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate ductwork from galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A653/A653M. C. Stainless Steel Sheet: Where indicated, provide stainless steel complying with ASTM A480/A480M; Type 316; with No. 4 finish where exposed to view in occupied spaces, No. 1 finish elsewhere. Protect finished surfaces with mill-applied adhesive protective paper, maintained through fabrication and installation. D. Aluminum Sheet: Where indicated, provide aluminum sheet complying with ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14. 2.02 MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK MATERIALS A. General: Non-combustible and conforming to UL 181, Class 1 air duct materials. B. Flexible Ducts: Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. Type 5M, Thermaflex MIKE, ATCO#036 or approved equal. 1. Flexible ducts shall be corrosive resistant galvanized steel formed and mechanically locked to inner fabric with minimum 1-1/2"thick, R-6 insulation. Flexible duct shall be rated up to at least 10 in.w.g. positive pressure and shall have reinforced metalized outer jacket to comply with UL 181, Class 1 air duct. C. Sealants: Hard-Cast"iron grip" or approved equal, non-hardening, water resistant, fire resistive and shall not be a solvent curing product. Sealants shall be compatible with mating materials, liquid used alone or with tape or heavy mastic. D. Ductwork Support Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hot-dipped galvanized steel fasteners, anchors, rods, straps, trim and angles for support of ductwork. 1. For exposed stainless steel ductwork, provide matching stainless steel support materials. 2. For aluminum ductwork, provide aluminum support materials. 2.03 LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK A. Fabricate and support in accordance with latest SMACNA(DCS) Standards and ASHRAE handbooks, except as indicated. Provide duct material, gauges, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated. B. Size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE table of equivalent rectangular and round ducts. No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by approved shop drawings. Obtain engineer's approval prior to using round duct in lieu of rectangular duct. C. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide airfoil-turning vanes. Where acoustical lining is indicated, provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation. D. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible. Divergence upstream of equipment shall not exceed 30 degrees; convergence downstream shall not exceed 45 degrees. E. Use crimp joints with bead for joining round duct sizes 6 inch smaller with crimp in direction of airflow. F. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports. 2.04 MEDIUM AND HIGH PRESSURE DUCTS A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA(DCS) Standards and ASHRAE handbooks, except as indicated. Provide duct material, gauges, reinforcing, and sealing for DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 2331 13 -3 METAL DUCTWORK 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop operating pressures indicated. B. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1'/2 times width of duct on centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide airfoil-turning vanes. Where acoustical lining is required, provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation. Weld in place. C. Transform duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence and 30 degrees convergence. D. Fabricate continuously welded medium and high pressure round and oval duct fittings two gauges heavier than duct gauges indicated in SMACNA Standard. Joints shall be minimum 4 inch cemented slip joint, brazed or electric welded. Prime coat welded joints. E. Provide standard 45 degree lateral wye takeoffs unless otherwise indicated where 90 degree conical tee connections may be used. 2.05 CASINGS A. Fabricate casings in accordance with SMACNA(DCS) Standards and SMACNA High Pressure Duct Construction Standards and construct for operating pressures indicated. B. Mount floor mounted casings on 4 inch high concrete curbs. At floor, rivet panels on 8 inch centers to angles. Where floors are acoustically insulated, provide liner of 18 gauge galvanized expanded metal mesh supported at 12 inch centers, turned up 12 inches at sides with sheet metal shields. C. Reinforce doorframes with steel angles tied to horizontal and vertical plenum supporting angles. Install hinged access doors where indicated or required for access to equipment for cleaning and inspection. Provide clear wire glass observation ports, minimum 6 X 6 inch size. D. Fabricate acoustic casings with reinforcing turned inward. Provide 16 gauge back facing and 22 gauge perforated front facing with 3/32 inch diameter holes on 5/32 inch centers. Construct panels 3 inches thick packed with 4.5 lb./cubic foot minimum glass fiber media, on inverted channels of 16 gauge. 2.06 BURIED UNDERGROUND DUCTS A. Buried ducts may be concrete encased sheet metal or fiberglass reinforced plastic as indicated. 2.07 EXPOSED DUCTWORK LOCATED INDOORS A. Where ductwork is indicated to be exposed to view in occupied spaces, provide round or flat oval, double wall galvanized steel construction with spiral lockseam, United McGill Corporation model Acousti-k27 or approved equal. 2.08 KITCHEN HOOD EXHAUST DUCTWORK A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA(DCS) Standards, and NFPA 96. B. Construct of 16 gauge carbon steel or 18 gauge stainless steel, using continuous external welded joints. C. Slope all duct toward the kitchen hood or a grease reservoir so that grease cannot collect in any portion of duct per mechanical code. 2.09 DOMESTIC RANGE HOOD EXHAUST DUCTWORK A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA(DCS) Standards. B. Construct of minimum 26 gauge galvanized steel. 2.10 DISHWASHER/SHOWER/LOCKER ROOM EXHAUST DUCTWORK A. All ductwork shall be stainless steel, one gauge heavier than that required for galvanized steel duct. B. Slope all duct to drain out grilles or provide drain line to floor drain. 2.11 LABORATORY FUME HOOD EXHAUST DUCTWORK A. Construct of 18 gauge type 316 stainless steel. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 2331 13-4 METAL DUCTWORK 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop B. All welded construction. 2.12 CHLORINE STORAGE AREA A. 18 gauge minimum galvanized steel. B. Three coat minimum, acid resistance, epoxy paint, minimum 6 mil dry film thickness total, inside of duct and outside of duct. C. Paint after fabrication including all taps and grilles. 2.13 DUCT EXPOSED IN POOL ROOM OR POOL EQUIPMENT ROOM A. 18 gauge minimum galvanized steel. B. Two coat galv-grip primer. C. Three coat minimum, acid resistant epoxy paint, minimum 6 mil dry film thickness total, exterior of duct, color to be selected by architect in the field. D. Paint after fabrication, including all hangers, taps, grilles, return air grilles and louvers. 2.14 WELDING EXHAUST DUCTWORK A. Construct of 18 gauge carbon steel. B. All welded construction. 2.15 PAINT HOOD EXHAUST DUCTWORK A. Construct of 18 gauge, Type 316 stainless steel. B. All welded construction. 2.16 COMMERCIAL DRYER VENT A. Construct of 18 gauge, Type 316 stainless steel. B. All welded construction. C. Provide hard duct connection to dryer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Obtain manufacturer's inspection and acceptance of fabrication and installation of ductwork at beginning of installation. B. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers. Provide pitot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring. C. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities. D. Connect terminal units to medium or high pressure ducts with four feet maximum length of flexible duct. Do not use flexible duct to change direction. E. Connect diffusers or troffer boots to low pressure ducts with 5 feet maximum, 4 feet minimum, length of flexible duct. Hold in place with strap or clamp. F. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system. G. The interior surface of all ductwork shall be smooth. No sheet metal parts, tabs, angles, or anything else may project into the ducts for any reason, except as specified to be so. All seams and joints shall be external. H. All ductwork located exposed on roof shall be "crowned"to prevent water from ponding. Ref: Insulation for additional requirements. I. Where ducts pass through non-rated floors, provide structural angles for duct support. Where ducts pass through non-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 2331 13-5 METAL DUCTWORK 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches. Where ducts pass through rated interior partitions, rated exterior walls, or rated floors, install fire dampers or smoke dampers as required. Provide sleeves for dampers not provided with factory sleeve. Refer to Section 23 33 00- Duct Accessories for fire and smoke damper requirements. J. All angles shall be carried around all four sides of the duct or group of ducts. Angles shall overlap corners and be welded or riveted. K. All ductwork shall be fabricated in a manner to prevent the seams or joints being cut for the installation of grilles, registers, or ceiling outlets. L. All duct hangers shall be attached to building structure. Cutting slots in roof or floor decking for hanger straps to be cast in concrete is not acceptable. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE DUCTS A. Maximum Length: For any duct run using flexible ductwork, do not exceed 5'-0" extended length. B. Installation: Install in accordance with Section III of SMACNA(DCS). 3.03 REQUIREMENTS FOR DUCTS BURIED UNDERGROUND A. Slope underground ducts to plenums or low pump-out points at 1:500. Provide access doors for inspection. B. Coat buried, metal ductwork without factory jacket with one coat and seams and joints with additional coat of asphalt base protective coating. C. Insulate buried supply duct runs over 50 feet long with one inch thick insulation covered with plastic vapor barrier. D. Encase buried metal ductwork in 3 inch minimum of concrete. Provide adequate tie-down points to prevent ducts from floating during concrete placement. Introduce no heat into ducts for 20 days following placement of concrete. 3.04 REQUIREMENTS FOR UNIT CASINGS A. Set plenum doors 6 to 12 inches above floor. Arrange door swings so that fan static pressure holds door in closed position. 3.05 REQUIREMENTS FOR KITCHEN HOOD EXHAUST DUCTWORK A. Provide residue traps in kitchen hood exhaust ducts at base of vertical risers with provisions for cleanout. B. Provide access openings in each change in direction, located on sides of duct 1'/2" minimum from bottom, and fitted with grease-tight covers of same material as duct C. Use stainless steel for ductwork exposed to view. 3.06 DUCTWORK APPLICATION SCHEDULE A. Ductwork materials shall be provided to comply with the following: AIR SYSTEM MATERIAL Low Pressure Supply Galvanized Steel, Aluminum Buried Supply or Return Concrete, Glass Fiber Reinforced Plastic Medium and High Pressure Supply Galvanized Steel Return and Relief Galvanized Steel, Aluminum General Exhaust Galvanized Steel, Aluminum Kitchen Hood Exhaust Carbon Steel, Stainless Steel Dishwasher/Shower/Locker Room/Dryer Stainless Steel Vent/Paint Hood Exhaust Fume Hood Exhaust Carbon Steel, Stainless Steel, Glass Fiber Reinforced Plastic if not in air plenum Welding Exhaust Carbon Steel DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 2331 13- 6 METAL DUCTWORK 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Outside Air Intake Galvanized Steel Combustion Air Galvanized Steel Emergency Generator Ventilation Carbon Steel 3.07 DUCTWORK HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. All ductwork shall be properly suspended or supported from the building structure. Hangers shall be galvanized steel straps or hot-dipped galvanized rod with threads pointed after installation. Strap hanger shall be attached to the bottom of the ductwork, provide a minimum of two screws one at the bottom and one in the side of each strap on metal ductwork. The spacing, size and installation of hangers shall be in accordance with the recommendations of the latest SMACNA edition. B. All duct risers shall be supported by angles or channels secured to the sides of the ducts at each floor with sheet metal screws or rivets. The floor supports may also be secured to ducts by rods, angles or flat bar to the duct joint or reinforcing. Structural steel supports for duct risers shall be provided under this Division. 3.08 AIR DUCT LEAKAGE: (FROM SMACNA DUCT STANDARDS LATEST EDITION) TEST ALL DUCTWORK(DESIGNED TO HANDLE OVER 1,000 CFM) AS FOLLOWS: A. Test apparatus 1. A source of high pressure air-a portable rotary blower or a tank type vacuum cleaner. 2. A flow measuring device consisting of straightening vanes and an orifice plate mounted in a straight tube with properly located pressure taps. Each orifice assembly shall be accurately calibrated with its own calibration curve. Pressure and flow readings shall be taken with U-tube manometers. B. Test Procedures 1. Test for audible leaks as follows: 2. Close off and seal all openings in the duct section to be tested. Connect the test apparatus to the duct by means of a section of flexible duct. a. Start the blower with its control damper closed. b. Gradually open the inlet damper until the duct pressure reaches 1.5 times the standard designed duct operating pressure. c. Survey all joints for audible leaks. Mark each leak and repair after shutting down blower. Do not apply a retest until sealants have set. 3. After all audible leaks have been sealed, the remaining leakage should be measured with the orifice section of the test apparatus as follows: a. Start blower and open damper until pressure in duct reaches 50% in excess of designed duct operating pressure. b. Read the pressure differential across the orifice on manometer No. 2. If there is no leakage, the pressure differential will be zero. c. Total allowable leakage shall not exceed one (1) percent of the total system design air flow rate. When partial sections of the duct system are tested, the summation of the leakage for all sections shall not exceed the total allowable leakage. d. Even though a system may pass the measured leakage test, a concentration of leakage at one point may result in a noisy leak which, must be corrected. 4. Testing Report a. Contractor shall provide a testing report for each air system to the engineer. The report shall indicate the completion of testing and compliance with testing specification. b. All duct testing reports shall be included in the final close out documents. 3.09 DUCT SYSTEM PROTECTION A. Provide temporary closures at the ends of ducts which are not connected to equipment or air distribution devices at time of ductwork installation; provide temporary closure of polyethylene film or other covering which will prevent entrance of dust and debris until time connections are to be completed. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 2331 13- 7 METAL DUCTWORK 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop B. Provide temporary construction filters on air handling equipment and/or return air ductwork during construction to protect ductwork and equipment from dust. C. Any ductwork stored on site with observable dirt or debris inside shall be cleaned by a third party. D. If the air handling system has been operated without temporary construction filters or if the integrity of the temporary closures has been compromised, the contractor shall have the duct system cleaned per the following section. 3.10 DUCT SYSTEM CLEANING A. For renovation projects and HVAC retrofit applications wherein existing duct systems are scheduled to be re-used, or where required by the Duct System Protection section above, the contractor shall have the existing duct systems cleaned in accordance with the current published standards of ASHRAE, NADCA ACR and as indicated below. B. Duct system cleaning method used shall incorporate the use of vacuum collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. A vacuum device shall be connected to the downstream end of the section being cleaned through a predetermined opening. The vacuum collection device must be of sufficient power to render all areas being cleaned under negative pressure, such that containment of debris and the protection of the indoor environment is assured. C. All vacuum devices exhausting air inside the building shall be equipped with HEPA filters (minimum efficiency), including hand-held vacuums and wet-vacuums. D. All vacuum devices exhausting air outside the facility shall be equipped with Particulate Collection including adequate filtration to contain debris removed from the HVAC system. Such devices shall exhaust in a manner that will not allow contaminants to re-enter the facility. Release of debris outdoors must not violate any outdoor environmental standards, codes or regulations. E. Fibrous glass thermal or acoustical insulation elements present in any equipment or ductwork shall be thoroughly cleaned with HEPA vacuuming equipment, while the HVAC system is under constant negative pressure, and not permitted to get wet in accordance with applicable NADCA and NAIMA standards and recommendations. F. Duct cleaning method used shall not damage the integrity of the ductwork, nor damage porous surface materials such as liners inside the ductwork or system components. G. Replace the fiberglass material if there is any evidence of damage, deterioration, delamination, friable material, mold or fungus growth, or moisture such that fibrous glass materials cannot be restored by cleaning or resurfacing with an acceptable insulation repair coating. H. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances which might cause corrosive deterioration of metal or, where ductwork is to be painted, might interfere with painting or cause paint deterioration. I. Strip protective paper from stainless ductwork surfaces, and repair finish wherever it has been damaged. J. Cleaning Report: Contractor shall provide a report to the Owner indicating the completion of duct cleaning per specification and areas of the duct system found to be damaged and/or in need of repair. 3.11 DUCT JOINTS AND SEAMS A. All ductwork shall be constructed to Seal Class A, as referenced in SMACNA(DCS). B. All non-welded joints and seams shall be sealed. This includes but is not limited to: 1. Transverse joints. 2. Longitudinal seams. 3. Duct wall penetrations. 4. Spin-ins, taps, and other branch connections. 5. Access doors, access panels, and duct connections to equipment. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 2331 13-8 METAL DUCTWORK 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop C. Openings for rotating shafts shall be sealed with bushings. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 2331 13 -9 METAL DUCTWORK 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SECTION 23 33 00 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Volume control dampers. B. Shutoff Dampers. C. Round Duct Taps. D. Conical Duct Taps. E. Fire dampers. F. Combination fire and smoke dampers. G. Back draft dampers. H. Air turning devices. I. Flexible duct connections. J. Duct access doors. K. Duct test holes. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 23 02 00- Basic Materials and Methods for HVAC B. Section 230548 C. Section 23 31 13- Metal Ductwork 1.03 REFERENCES A. AMCA 500-D - Laboratory Methods of Testing Dampers for Rating; 2018. B. ASHRAE Std 90.1 I-P- Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. C. ICC (IECC)- International Energy Conservation Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. D. NFPA 90A- Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; 2024. E. SMACNA(DCS)- HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible; 2020. F. UL 33- Safety Heat Responsive Links for Fire-Protection Service; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. G. UL 555-Standard for Fire Dampers; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. H. UL 555S -Standard for Smoke Dampers; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division One. B. Provide shop drawings for shop fabricated assemblies indicated, including volume control dampers duct access doors duct test holes. Provide product data for hardware used. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Division 1, for fire dampers and combination fire and smoke dampers. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA(DCS), and as indicated. B. Fabricate splitter dampers of material same gauge as duct to 24 inches size in either direction, and two gauges heavier for sizes over 24 inches. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 23 33 00 - 1 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents C. Fabricate splitter dampers of double thickness sheet metal to streamline shape. Secure blade with continuous hinge or rod. Operate with minimum 1/2 inch diameter rod in self aligning, universal joint, action flanged bushing, with set screw. D. Fabricate single blade dampers for duct sizes to 9-1/2 x 24 inch. E. Fabricate multi-blade damper of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 12 x 72 inch. 1. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with suitable hardware. 2. On outside air, return air, and all other dampers required to be low leakage type, provide galvanized blades and frames, seven inches wide maximum, with replaceable vinyl, EPDM, silicone rubber seals on blade edges and stainless steel side seals. Provide blades in a double sheet corrugated type construction for extra strength. Provide hat channel shape frames for strength and blade linkage enclosure to keep linkage out of the air stream. Construction leakage not to exceed 1/2%, based on 2,000 fpm and 4 inch static pressure. F. Except in round ductwork 12 inches and smaller, provide end bearings. On multiple blade dampers, provide oil-impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings. G. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers. Where rod lengths exceed 30 inches provide regulator at both ends. H. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters. 2.02 SHUTOFF DAMPERS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA(DCS), and as indicated. B. Provide Class I multi-blade damper of parallel blade pattern for all ductwork systems which penetrate the building thermal envelope in accordance with ICC (IECC) and ASHRAE Std 90.1 I-P. 1. Damper shall be constructed of one-piece 16 ga. roll-formed galvanized steel hat-shaped channel frame. Blades shall be 14 ga. roll-formed galvanized steel, airfoil type. Blade edge seals shall be neoprene gaskets mechanically locked to blade edge. Bearings shall be 304 stainless steel, oil-impregnated and self-lubricating sleeve type, turning in extruded holes in damper frame. C. Shutoff dampers shall have an air leakage rate not greater than 4 cfm/ft2 of damper surface area at 1.0 in.w.g. and shall be labeled by an approved agency when tested in accordance with AMCA 500-D for such purpose. 2.03 ROUND DUCT TAPS A. Taps to trunk duct for round flexible duct shall be spin-in fitting with locking quadrant butterfly damper, model no. FLD-B03 by Flexmaster or approved equal. 2.04 CONICAL DUCT TAPS A. Taps to trunk duct for primary air inlet to all VAV terminal units shall be conical fitting, model no. CB by Flexmaster or approved equal. 2.05 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - FIRE DAMPERS AND COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS A. Greenheck. B. Louvers and Dampers Inc. C. Ruskin. D. Nailor Industries. E. Pottorff. 2.06 FIRE DAMPERS A. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL 555, and as indicated. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 23 33 00-2 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop B. Provide curtain type dampers of galvanized steel with interlocking blades. Provide stainless steel closure springs and latches for horizontal installations. Configure with blades out of air stream. Provide factory sleeve for each damper. C. Fabricate multiple blade fire dampers per UL with 16 gauge minimum galvanized steel frame and blades, oil-impregnated bronze or stainless steel sleeve bearings and plated steel axles, 1/8 x 1/2 inch plated steel concealed linkage, stainless steel closure spring, blade stops, and lock. D. Fusible links, UL 33, shall separate at 165 degrees F. Provide adjustable link straps for combination fire/balancing dampers. 2.07 COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS A. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A, UL 555, UL 555S and as indicated. B. Provide factory sleeve for each damper. Install damper operator on exterior of sleeve and link to damper operating shaft. C. Fabricate with multiple blades with 16 gauge galvanized steel frame and blades, oil- impregnated bronze or stainless steel sleeve bearings and plated steel axles, stainless steel jamb seals, 1/8 x 1/2 inch plated steel concealed linkage, stainless steel closure spring, blade stops, and lock, and 1/2 inch actuator shaft. 1. Operators shall be spring return electric type suitable to operate on 120 VAC, 60 cycle. 2. Operators shall be UL listed and labeled. 2.08 SMOKE DAMPERS A. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL 555, UL 555S and as indicated. B. Motorized Smoke Dampers: multi-blade type, normally open with power on, close automatically when power is interrupted, UL-listed and labeled damper and damper operator. 2.09 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - BACKDRAFT DAMPERS A. Greenheck. B. American Warming and Vent. C. Louvers and Dampers Inc. D. Ruskin. E. Pottorff. F. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division One. 2.10 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS A. Gravity back draft dampers, size 18 x 18 inches or smaller, furnished with air moving equipment, may be air moving equipment manufacturers standard construction. B. Fabricate multi-blade, parallel action gravity balanced back draft dampers of 16 gauge galvanized steel, or extruded aluminum, with blades of maximum 6 inch width, with felt or flexible vinyl sealed edges, linked together in rattle-free manner with 90 degree stop, steel ball bearings, and plated steel pivot pin; adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure. C. Gravity backdraft dampers shall have an air leakage not greater than 20 cfm/ft2 where not less than 24 inches in either dimension and 40 cfm/ft2 where less than 24 inches in either dimension. The rate of air leakage shall be determined at 1.0 in.w.g. when tested in accordance with AMCA 500-D for such purpose. 2.11 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS -AIR TURNING DEVICES A. Young Regulator. B. Titus. C. Tuttle and Bailey. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division One. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 23 33 00-3 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 2.12 AIR TURNING DEVICES A. On duct sizes less than 12 x 12, multi-blade device with blades aligned in short dimension; steel or aluminum construction; with individually adjustable blades, mounting straps. B. Multi-blade device with radius blades attached to pivoting frame and bracket, steel or aluminum construction, with worm drive mechanism with 18 inch long removable key operator. 2.13 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS A. Metaledge. B. Ventglass. C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division One. 2.14 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS TO AIR MOVING EQUIPMENT A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA(DCS)and as indicated. B. UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A, minimum density 20 oz. per sq. yd., approximately 6 inches wide, crimped into metal edging strip. 2.15 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - DUCT ACCESS DOORS A. Greenheck. B. American Warming and Vent. C. Ruskin. D. Titus. E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division One. 2.16 DUCT ACCESS DOORS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA(DCS)and as indicated. B. Review locations prior to fabrication. C. Fabricate rigid and close-fitting doors of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quick fastening locking devices. For insulated ductwork, install minimum one inch thick insulation with sheet metal cover. Insulation shall be replaceable without field cutting or patching. D. Access doors smaller than 12 inches square may be secured with sash locks. E. Provide two hinges and two sash locks for sizes up to 18 inches square, three hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside handles for sizes up to 24 x 48 inches. Provide an additional hinge for larger sizes. F. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable. 2.17 DUCT TEST HOLES A. Cut or drill temporary test holes in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps. B. Permanent test holes shall be factory fabricated, air tight flanged fittings with screw cap. Provide extended neck fittings to clear insulation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Balancing Dampers 1. Provide at points on low pressure supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches are taken from larger ducts and as required for air balancing. Use splitter dampers only where indicated. 2. All regulators mounted on externally insulated ductwork shall have 16 gauge elevated platforms at least 1/8 inch higher than the thickness of the insulation. Damper shaft shall have Ventlock No. 607 bearing mounted on ductwork within elevated platform. If duct is inaccessible the operating handle shall be extended and the regulator installed on the DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 23 33 00 -4 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop face of the wall or ceiling. Where regulators are exposed in finished parts of the building, they shall be flush type, Ventlock No. 666. All regulators shall be manufactured by Ventlock, or approved equal. 3. All dampers in lined ductwork shall have bushing to prevent damper damage to liner. C. Provide fire dampers at locations indicated, where ducts and outlets pass through fire rated components, and where required by authorities having jurisdiction. Install with required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections, corrosion resistant springs, bearings, bushings and hinges. D. Demonstrate re-setting of fire dampers to authorities having jurisdiction and Owner's representative. E. Provide gravity backdraft dampers or motorized shutoff dampers in accessible location nearest to exterior wall/roof penetrations and where indicated for all outdoor air intake and exhaust systems to automatically shut when the associated systems or spaces served are not in use. F. Provide flexible duct connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and motorized equipment. Provide at least one inch slack at all flexible duct connections. G. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans, automatic dampers, and elsewhere as indicated. Provide minimum 8 x 8 inch size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch size for shoulder access, and as indicated. H. Provide duct access doors for inspection and maintenance of all fire dampers, smoke dampers, and combination fire/smoke dampers. Provide minimum 12 x 12 inch size access opening where duct size permits. All duct sizes that cannot accommodate a minimum 12 x 12 inch access opening shall be provided with a removable duct section to permit inspection and maintenance of the damper and its operating parts. Removable duct sections shall match the pressure class of the associated duct system, maintain 100 percent of the duct free area, and utilize gaskets and clamp type draw latches to allow removal and reinstallation without the use of tools. I. Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 23 33 00 -5 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SECTION 23 34 00 HVAC FANS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. Section 23 02 00- Basic Materials and Methods for HVAC shall be included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Centrifugal roof ventilators B. Ceiling and inline ventilators C. Roof supply fans 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 02 00- Basic Materials and Methods for HVAC B. Section 23 05 13- Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment C. Section 230548 D. Section 23 05 93-Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing E. Section 23 09 63- Energy Management and Control System (EMCS) F. Section 23 33 00- Ductwork Accessories 1.04 REFERENCES A. AMCA 204 - Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans; 2020. B. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Certified Aerodynamic Performance Rating; 2016, with Errata (2018). C. AMCA 211 -Certified Ratings Program Product Rating Manual for Fan Air Performance; 2022, with Editorial Revision (2023). D. AMCA 300 - Reverberation Room Methods of Sound Testing of Fans; 2024. E. AMCA 301 - Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data; 2022. F. AMCA 311 -Certified Ratings Program Product Rating Manual for Fan Sound Performance; 2016. G. ASCE 7-16 - Minimum Design Loads and Associated Criteria for Buildings and Other Structures; 2016. H. ASHRAE Std 90.1 I-P- Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. 1. ASTM E330/E330M -Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2014 (Reapproved 2021). J. FLA(FBC-B)- Florida Building Code: Building (8th Edition); 2023. K. ICC (IBC)- International Building Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. L. ICC (IECC)- International Energy Conservation Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. M. Miami (APD)-Approved Products Directory; Miami-Dade County; Current Edition. N. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 23 34 00 - 1 HVAC FANS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents O. NFPA 90A- Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; 2024. P. NFPA 96- Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations; 2024. Q. UL 705- Power Ventilators; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. UL Compliance: Fans shall be designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with UL 705. B. UL Compliance: Fans and components shall be UL listed and labeled. C. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory Compliance (NRTL): Fans and components shall be NRTL listed and labeled. The term "NRTL" shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. D. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards. E. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70. F. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301. Test fans in accordance with AMCA 300. Fans shall be licensed to bear the AMCA 300 Seal. G. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings in accordance with AMCA 210. H. Motors for fans that are not less than 1/12 hp (0.082 kW)and less than 1 hp (0.746 kW) shall be electronically commutated motors per ICC (IECC)and ASHRAE Std 90.1 I-P. I. High Wind models shall be analyzed and stamped by a state license P.E. to the ASCE 7-16 Standard which meets the ICC (IBC), FLA(FBC-B), and Miami (APD) codes. J. Each High Wind model is subject to be certified by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory to ASTM E330/E330M. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections: B. Product data for selected models, including specialties, accessories, and the following: 1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. 2. Certified fan sound power ratings. 3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics plus motor and fan accessories. 4. Materials, gages and finishes, include color charts. 5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators. 6. Full color paint samples. C. Shop drawings from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, components, and location and size of field connections. D. Coordination drawings, in accordance with Division 23, Section "Basic Materials and Methods", for roof penetration requirements and for reflected ceiling plans drawn accurately to scale and coordinating penetrations and units mounted above ceiling. Show the following: 1. Roof framing and support members relative to duct penetrations. 2. Ceiling suspension members. 3. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. 4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 5. Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinkler heads, access panels, and special moldings. E. Wiring diagrams that detail power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer installed wiring and field installed wiring. F. Product certificates, signed by manufacturer, certifying that their products comply with specified requirements. G. Maintenance data for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1 and Division 23, Section "Basic Materials and Methods". DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 23 34 00 -2 HVAC FANS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop H. Provide delegated design submittal for equipment anchorage as required in specification 23 02 00— Part 1. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Fans shall be stored and handled in accordance with the unit manufacturer's instructions. B. Lift and support units with the manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points. C. Disassemble and reassemble units as required for movement into the final location following manufacturers written instructions. D. Deliver fan units as a factory-assembled unit to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with protective crating and covering. 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation. 1.09 OPERATIONS PERSONNEL TRAINING A. Provide a training session for the owner's operations personnel. Training session shall be performed by a qualified person who is knowledgeable in the subject system/equipment. Submit a training agenda two (2)weeks prior to the proposed training session for review and approval. Training session shall include at the minimum: 1. Purpose of equipment. 2. Principle of how the equipment works. 3. Important parts and assemblies. 4. How the equipment achieves its purpose and necessary operating conditions. 5. Most likely failure modes, causes and corrections. 6. On site demonstration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Greenheck Fan Corporation B. Loren Cook Company C. Pennbarry D. ACME E. Twin City Fan and Blower 2.02 GENERAL DESCRIPTION A. Provide fans that are factory fabricated and assembled, factory tested, and factory finished with indicated capacities and characteristics. B. Fans and Shafts shall be statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous operation at the maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower. C. Provide factory baked-enamel finish coat after assembly. Color for roof mounted fans shall be chosen by Architect during the submittal process. 2.03 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS A. Fan shall be a spun aluminum, centrifugal, roof mounted, direct driven or belt driven as indicated. B. Fan shall be UL 705 listed. Fan shall bear the AMCA certified ratings seal for sound and air performance. C. The fan shall be of bolted and welded construction utilizing corrosion resistant fasteners. The spun aluminum structural components shall be constructed of minimum 16 gauge marine alloy aluminum, bolted to a rigid aluminum support structure. D. The aluminum base shall have continuously welded curb cap corners for maximum leak protection. A discharge baffle conduit chase shall be provided through the curb cap and into the DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 23 34 00-3 HVAC FANS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop motor compartment to facilitate wiring connections. E. The motor, bearings and drives shall be mounted on a minimum 14 gauge steel power assembly, isolated from the unit structure with rubber vibration isolators. These components shall be enclosed in a weather-tight compartment, separated from the exhaust airstream. Unit shall bear an engraved aluminum nameplate and shall be shipped in transit tested packaging. F. Wheel shall be centrifugal backward inclined, constructed of 100% aluminum, including a precision machined cast aluminum hub. Wheel inlet shall overlap an aerodynamic aluminum inlet cone to provide maximum performance and efficiency. Wheel shall be balanced in accordance with AMCA 204, balance quality and vibration levels for fans. G. Motor shall be heavy duty type with permanently lubricated sealed ball bearings. H. Bearings shall be designed and individually tested specifically for use in air handling applications. Construction shall be heavy duty re-greaseable ball type in a cast iron housing selected for a minimum L50 life in excess of 200,000 hours at maximum cataloged operating speed. I. Accessories: The following accessories are required. 1. Disconnect Switch: Non-fusible type, with thermal overload protection, mounted inside fan housing, factory-wired through an internal aluminum conduit. 2. Bird Screens: Removable ''/2 inch mesh, 16 gauge, aluminum or brass wire. 3. Dampers: Gravity backdraft damper or motorized shutoff damper mounted in accessible location. Refer to 23 33 00- Ductwork Accessories. 4. Roof Curbs: Prefabricated, minimum 12 inch high, heavy-gauge, galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 2 inch thick, rigid, fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; built- in cant and mounting flange for flat roof decks; and 2 inch wood nailer. Curb heights shall be increased as required to maintain a minimum height of 8 inches above adjacent roofing surface. Size as required to suit roof opening and fan base. Roof curb shall match roof slope so that the curb is level. 5. Provide unit with components and cladding for anchoring from the 'Texas Windostrom Approved Catalog'. Components and claddings not listed will require certification that they meet or exceed the design requirements of this specification section by the owner. Prior to installing and covering/concealing the fasteners and connectors the contractor shall notify the architect and engineer. The structural engineer shall inspect these fasteners and anchors prior to contractor covering any components. Contractor shall include in their bid amount the cost of windstorm-related contruction observations and windstorm certification by an approved professional engineer licensed in the State of Texas. 2.04 CEILING AND INLINE VENTILATORS A. Ceiling and inline ventilators shall be direct drive or belt drive as indicated, centrifugal blower type. Fan wheel shall be constructed of galvanized steel and shall be dynamically balanced. The housing shall be constructed of minimum 20 gauge corrosion resistant galvanized steel and acoustically insulated for quiet operation. Blower and motor assembly shall be easily removable from the housing without disturbing the ductwork. The motor shall be permanently lubricated with built-in thermal overload protection and shall be factory tested prior to shipment. The ceiling ventilators shall be furnished standard with a powder-painted white steel grille. B. Ventilators shall be certified and licensed to bear the AMCA Seal for Air and Sound Performance. Ventilator performance shall be based on tests and procedures performed in accordance with AMCA 211 and comply with the requirements of the AMCA Certified Ratings Program. Fan sound power level ratings shall be based on tests and procedures performed in accordance with AMCA 311 and comply with the requirements of the AMCA Certified Ratings Program. Ventilators shall be UL listed and CSA certified. C. Accessories: The following accessories are required. 1. Dampers: a. Aluminum backdraft damper. b. Motor-operated volume control damper. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 23 34 00-4 HVAC FANS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop C. L listed ceiling radiation damper for ceiling fans comply with NFPA 90A rated for 3 hours 2. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type with thermal overload protection. 3. Speed Controls: Fan mounted, solid state speed controller. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Refer to specification 23 02 00— Part 1 for anchorage requirements for roof mounted equipment. C. All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturer's requirements. D. Refer to 230548 for additional installation requirements. E. Flexible duct connections and shutoff dampers are prohibited from being installed in duct systems conveying grease laden exhaust air per NFPA 96 requirements. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 23 34 00 -5 HVAC FANS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SECTION 23 36 13 SERIES FAN-POWERED TERMINAL UNITS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Series type fan-powered terminal unit. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 02 00- Basic Materials and Methods for HVAC B. Section 23 05 13- Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment C. Section 230548 D. Section 23 05 93-Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing E. Section 23 08 00- Commissioning of HVAC Systems F. Section 23 09 63- Energy Management and Control System (EMCS) G. Section 23 31 13- Metal Ductwork H. Section 23 33 00- Ductwork Accessories I. Section 23 34 00- HVAC Fans J. Section 237313 K. Section 238119 1.03 REFERENCES A. AHRI 410 - Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils; 2001, with Addenda (2011). B. AHRI 880 (I-P)- Performance Rating of Air Terminals; 2017 (Reaffirmed 2023). C. AHRI 885- Procedure for Estimating Occupied Space Sound Levels in the Application of Air Terminals and Air Outlets; 2008, with Addendum (2011). D. ASHRAE Std 130 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Air Terminal Units; 2016. E. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. F. NFPA 90A- Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; 2024. G. UL 181 -Standard for Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Terminal Units shall be AHRI 880 (I-P) certified and carry the AHRI Seal. B. The terminal units shall be designed, built and tested as a single unit including fan motor and fan assembly, primary air damper assembly, water or electric heating coils and accessories. C. The entire terminal unit and all electrical components shall be UL listed and installed in accordance with the NFPA 70. 1.05 GENERAL DESCRIPTIONS A. Furnish, and install fan powered terminal units of the sizes and capacities shown on the plans. B. Terminal Unit shall ship as a complete assembly requiring no field assembly (including accessories). Terminal unit manufacture shall factory mount EMCS controls, provided by Section 23 09 63 (EMCS contractor). 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division 01. B. Shop drawings shall indicate assembly, unit dimensions, weight loading, required clearances, construction details, and field connection details. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus SERIES FAN-POWERED Christi 23 36 13- 1 TERMINAL UNITS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents C. Product data shall indicate dimensions, weights, capacities, ratings, fan performance, motor electrical characteristics, and gauges and finished of materials. D. Submit product data or filter media and filter performance data. E. Submit electrical requirements for power supply wiring including wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring, clearly indicating factory installed and field installed wiring. F. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Division 01. G. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 23 02 00. H. Include instructions for lubrication, filter replacement, motor and drive replacement, spare parts lists, and wiring diagrams. I. Terminal units shall include a QR code tag to link directly to the specific IOM for the terminal unit to be accessed by mobile device. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Unit shall be stored and handled in accordance with the unit manufacturer's instructions. 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation. 1.09 OPERATIONS PERSONNEL TRAINING A. Provide a training session for the owner's operations personnel. Training session shall be performed by a qualified person who is knowledgeable in the subject system/equipment. Submit a training agenda two (2)weeks prior to the proposed training session for review and approval. Training session shall include at the minimum: 1. Purpose of equipment. 2. Principle of how the equipment works. 3. Important parts and assemblies. 4. How the equipment achieves its purpose and necessary operating conditions. 5. Most likely failure modes, causes and corrections. 6. On-site demonstration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. TITUS B. M ETALAI RE C. KRUEGER D. NAILOR INDUSTRIES E. PRICE 2.02 TERMINAL CASING A. The terminal casing shall be minimum 20 gauge galvanized steel, internally lined with 1" natural fiber or fiberglass free insulation which complies with UL 181 with regard to resistance to erosion and mold growth and NFPA 90A. Insulation shall have R-values of 4.0. Exposed fiberglass is not acceptable. The insulation shall be mechanically fastened to the unit casing. The fasteners shall be weld pins. Lining material glued in place without mechanical fasteners are not acceptable. Any exposed insulation edges shall be coated with NFPA 90A approved sealant, or covered with galvanized brackets or foil tape. The terminal shall have round duct collars for the primary air connections and a rectangular discharge suitable for flanged duct connection. The casing shall be provided with mounting brackets for hanging from structure. B. The terminal casing shall have a bottom or side access panel, which allows removal of fan and servicing of terminal without disturbing duct connections. C. The terminal casing shall have a filter rack/bracket for securing the air filter over the return air inlet. This filter rack shall be sized so that standard sized filters can be installed by the owner as DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus SERIES FAN-POWERED Christi 23 36 13-2 TERMINAL UNITS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop part of ongoing maintenance. 2.03 FAN AND FAN MOTOR A. The fan shall be constructed of steel and have a forward curved dynamically balanced wheel with direct drive motor. B. The terminal unit shall utilize an ECM variable-speed DC brushless motors specifically designed for use with single phase, 277 volt, 60 hertz electrical input. Motor shall be complete and operated by a single-phase integrated controller/inverter that operates the wound stator and senses rotor position to electronically commutate the stator. All motors shall be designed for synchronous rotation. Rotor shall be permanent magnet type with near zero rotor losses. Motor shall have built-in soft start and soft speed change ramps. Motor shall be able to be mounted with shaft in horizontal or vertical orientation. Motor shall be permanently lubricated with ball bearings. Motor shall be directly coupled to the blower. Motor shall maintain a minimum of 70 percent efficiency over its entire operating range. Provide a motor that is designed to overcome reverse rotation and not affect life expectancy. C. The terminal unit manufacturer shall provide a factory-installed controller for digitally controlled automatic fan cfm adjustment. The remote PWM controller shall be capable of receiving a 0-10 Vdc signal from the DDC controller(provided by the controls contractor)to control the fan cfm. 2.04 CONTROL DAMPER A. Cooling inlet shall have a damper assembly with factory set and calibrated pressure independent control. The damper shall be heavy gauge steel with shaft rotating in Delrin (Polyoxymethylene) self-lubricating bearings. Nylon bearings are not acceptable. Shaft shall be clearly marked on the end to indicate damper position. Stickers or other removable markings are not acceptable. The damper shall incorporate a mechanical stop to prevent over-stroking and a synthetic seal to limit close-off leakage. B. Damper and casing leakage shall be tested in accordance with ASHRAE Std 130 and shall not exceed 2% of rated airflow based on a nominal inlet velocity of 2000 fpm at 2.0 in.w.g. of static pressure. C. Terminals with interior actuator linkage connection must include gasketed access panel, removable without disturbing ductwork. 2.05 HOT WATER HEATING COILS A. Hot water heating coils shall be enclosed in a minimum 20 gauge galvanized steel casing with flanged construction for attachment to metal ductwork. Coils shall be factory installed on the terminal. Fins shall be rippled and corrugated heavy gauge aluminum, mechanically bonded to tubes. Tubes shall be copper with minimum wall thickness of 0.016", with male solder header connections. Coils shall be leak tested to 500 psi, with an operating pressure of 360 psi and a minimum burst pressure of 2000 psi at ambient temperature. Number of coil rows and circuits shall be selected to provide performance as required per the plans. Coil performance data shall be based on tests run in accordance with AHRI 410. 2.06 ELECTRIC HEATING COILS A. Modulating electric coils shall be supplied and installed on the terminal unit by the manufacturer. Coils shall be ETL listed. Coils shall be housed in an attenuator section integral with the terminal with element grid recessed from unit discharge a minimum of 5 inches to prevent damage to elements during shipping and installation. Elements shall be 80/20 nickel chrome, supported by ceramic isolators a maximum of 3'/2 inches apart, staggered for maximum thermal transfer and element life, and balanced to ensure equal output per step. The integral control panel shall be housed in a NEMA 1 enclosure with a hinged access door for access to all controls and safety devices. B. Electric coils shall contain a primary automatic reset thermal cutout, a secondary replaceable heat limiter per element, differential pressure airflow switch for proof of flow, and line terminal block. Coil shall include an integral door interlock type disconnect switch, which will not allow the access door to be opened while power is on. Non-interlocking type disconnects are not acceptable.All individual components shall be UL listed or recognized. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus SERIES FAN-POWERED Christi 23 36 13-3 TERMINAL UNITS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop C. Heaters shall be equipped with modulating control (Lynergy Comfort Controller(LCC) or equal) to control heater coil firing. The control panel shall include an interface to control heater coil firing in proportion to the EMCS signal. The EMCS signal shall connect to low voltage universal signal interface circuitry supplied and installed by the terminal manufacturer. The universal interface shall be selected for either 0-10 VDC or 0-20 mA interface options, without additional interface circuitry. D. Discharge air temperature limit shall be provided through the modulating controller incorporating a downstream air temperature sensor. When invoked, the discharge air from the heater shall not exceed an adjustable maximum temperature setpoint. 2.07 FAN INTAKE FILTER A. The filter shall be 1"thick, disposable construction type mounted in a rack on the fan air inlet and designed for ease of service. B. Filter size shall be based on standard sizes that are readily available. 2.08 SOUND CRITERIA A. Sound ratings for the terminals shall not exceed 40 NC in the occupied space at 1.0 inch w.g. inlet static pressure, and discharge static pressure of 0.25 inch w.g. NC estimations shall be calculated per AHRI 885, Appendix E. The terminal shall be provided with factory installed internal and external attenuators if sound requirements are not met. The external attenuator shall be shipped internal to the unit to protect it from shipping damage. The external attenuator shall be slid into the operation position and secured without the need for additional screws. Factory provided attenuators that require field installation are not acceptable. 2.09 CONTROLS AND SENSORS A. The terminal shall mount the pressure independent electronic controls that are provided by Section 23 09 63. B. The terminal unit shall incorporate a multi-point, center-averaging velocity sensor. A minimum of four measuring ports must be parallel to the takeoff point from the sensor. Sensors with measuring ports in series are not acceptable. The sensor must provide a minimum differential pressure signal of 0.03 in.w.g. at an inlet velocity of 500 fpm. The sensor must provide airflow control signal accuracy of± 5%, with a hard 45' or 90' elbow attached directly to the inlet. C. The terminal unit manufacturer shall provide, mount and wire fan relay, 24-volt transformer, and disconnect switch. D. Flow measuring taps and flow curves shall be supplied with each terminal for field balancing airflow. Each terminal shall be equipped with labeling showing unit location, size, minimum and maximum cfm setpoints, damper fail position, QR code label as per submittal section, and thermostat action. E. All electronic accessories, including switches for activation of fan shall be supplied and calibrated by the terminal manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Terminal units shall be installed with all required service clearances, according to manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Terminal units with electric heat shall be installed with clearance that meets NFPA 70. C. All equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and printed installation instructions. D. Space limitation shall be reviewed carefully to ensure that all terminals will fit the available space. E. All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturers requirements. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus SERIES FAN-POWERED Christi 23 36 13-4 TERMINAL UNITS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SECTION 23 37 13 AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Ceiling air diffusers. B. Wall registers and grilles. C. Louvers. D. Other air devices indicated on drawings and schedules. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08 91 00- Louvers B. Section 23 02 00- Basic Materials and Methods for HVAC C. Section 23 05 93-Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing D. Section 23 07 13- Duct Insulation E. Section 23 31 13- Metal Ductwork F. Section 23 33 00- Ductwork Accessories 1.03 REFERENCES A. AHRI 880 (I-P)- Performance Rating of Air Terminals; 2017 (Reaffirmed 2023). B. AMCA 500-L- Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating; 2023. C. AMCA 540 -Test Method for Louvers Impacted by Wind Borne Debris; 2013. D. AMCA 550 -Test Method for High Velocity Wind Driven Rain Resistant Louvers; 2022. E. ASHRAE Std 70 - Method of Testing the Performance of Air Outlets and Air Inlets; 2023. F. ASTM 13117-Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray(Fog)Apparatus; 2019. G. ASTM B209-Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2014. H. ASTM B221 -Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2021. I. ASTM D2794- Standard Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact); 1993 (Reapproved 2019). J. ASTM D870- Standard Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings Using Water Immersion; 2015. K. ICC (IBC)- International Building Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. L. NFPA 90A- Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; 2024. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of air distribution devices of types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Codes and Standards: 1. AHRI Compliance: Test and rate air distribution devices in accordance with AHRI 880 (I- P). 2. ASHRAE Compliance: Test and rate air distribution devices in accordance with ASHRAE Std 70. 3. AMCA Compliance: Test and rate louvers in accordance with AMCA 500-L. 4. AMCA 540 -Test Methods for Louvers Impacted by Wind Borne Debris with Enhanced Protection Approval. 5. AMCA 550 -Test Method for High Velocity Wind Driven Rain Resistant Louvers. 6. AMCA Seal: Provide louvers bearing AMCA Certified Rating Seal. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 23 37 13 - 1 AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 7. NFPA Compliance: Install air distribution devices in accordance with NFPA 90A- Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 8. ASTM B209-Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. 9. ASTM B221 -Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. 10. IBC- International Building Code. 11. IMC- International Mechanical Code. 12. UMC- Uniform Mechanical Code. 1.05 DEFINITIONS A. Hurricane-prone regions: 1. The U.S. Atlantic Ocean and Gulf of Mexico coasts where the ultimate design wind speed for Risk Category II Buildings is greater than 115 mph; 2. Hawaii, Puerto Rico, Guam, Virgin Islands and American Samoa. B. Wind-borne debris region: Areas within hurricane-prone regions located: 1. Within 1 mile of the coastal mean high water line where the ultimate design wind speed is 130 mph or greater; or 2. In areas where the ultimate design wind speed is 140 mph or greater. For Risk Category II buildings and structures and Risk Category III building and structures, except health care facilities, the wind-borne debris region shall be based on Figure 1609.3(1). For Risk Category IV buildings and structures and Risk Category III health care facilities, the wind- borne debris region shall be based on Figure 1609.3(2). C. Ultimate design wind speed -The ultimate design wind speed for the determination of the wind loads shall be determined by Figures 1609.3(1), 1609.3(2)and 1609.3(3)of ICC (IBC). 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for the following: 1. Air Distribution Devices a. Schedule of air distribution devices indicating drawing designation, room location, number furnished, model number, size, and accessories furnished. b. Data sheet for each type of air distribution devices, and accessory furnished; indicating construction, finish, and mounting details. c. Performance data for each type of air distribution devices furnished, including aspiration ability, temperature and velocity traverses; throw and drop; and noise criteria ratings. Indicate selections on data. 2. Louvers a. Manufacturer's product data including performance data. b. Preparation instructions and recommendations. c. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. d. Installation methods. B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawing for each type of air distribution device and louver, indicating materials, construction, dimensions, accessories, and installation details. C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data, including cleaning instructions for finishes, and spare parts lists. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manuals; in accordance with requirements of Division 1. 1.07 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver air distribution devices wrapped in factory-fabricated fiber-board type containers. Identify on outside of container type of outlet or inlet and location to be installed. Avoid crushing or bending and prevent dirt and debris from entering and settling in devices. B. Store air distribution devices and louvers in original cartons and protect from weather and construction work traffic in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Where possible, store indoors; when necessary to store outdoors, store above grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 23 37 13 -2 AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop C. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Warrant the installation of the work specified herein for one year against becoming unserviceable or causing an objectionable appearance resulting from defective or nonconforming workmanship. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS -AIR DEVICES A. Titus Company B. Metalaire Industries, Inc. C. Nailor Industries D. Krueger E. Price 2.02 AIR DEVICES A. Unless otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard air devices when shown of size, shape, capacity, type and accessories indicated on drawings and schedules, constructed of materials and components as indicated and as required for complete installation and proper air distribution. B. Provide air devices that have, as minimum, temperature and velocity traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings for each size device and listed in manufacturer's current data. C. Unless noted otherwise on drawings, the finish shall be#26 white. The finish shall be an anodic acrylic paint, baked at 315°F for 30 minutes. The pencil hardness must be HB to H. The paint must pass a 100-hour ASTM B117 Corrosive Environments Salt Spray Test without creepage, blistering, or deterioration of film. The paint must pass a 250-hour ASTM D870 Immersion Test. The paint must also pass the ASTM D2794 Reverse Impact Cracking Test with a 50 inch-pound force applied. D. Provide air device with border styles that are compatible with adjacent ceiling or wall system, and that are specially manufactured to fit into the wall construction or ceiling module with accurate fit and adequate support. Refer to architectural construction drawings and specifications for types of wall construction and ceiling systems. E. Provide integral volume damper with roll formed steel blades where indicated on drawings or schedules. Dampers shall be opposed blade design with a screwdriver slot or a concealed lever operator for adjustment through the face of the air device. F. Air devices designated for fire rated systems shall be pre-assembled with UL classified radiation damper and thermal blanket. Fire rated air devices shall be shipped completely assembled, one assembly per carton; each assembly shall be enclosed in plastic shrink wrap with installation instructions. 2.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - LOUVERS A. Ruskin Manufacturing Company B. Greenheck Company C. Louvers and Dampers, Inc. D. Pottorff E. Arrow 2.04 LOUVERS A. Louvers not located in hurricane-prone regions or wind-borne debris regions shall meet the requirements of AMCA 500-L for Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating and be drainable stationary type louvers. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 23 37 13-3 AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop B. Louvers located in hurricane-prone regions shall meet the requirements of AMCA 550 for High Velocity Wind Driven Rain without the use of a control damper. C. Louvers located in wind-borne debris regions within 30 feet of grade shall meet the requirements of AMCA 540 for Large Missile Impact. D. Provide louvers where shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and components as indicated, and as required for complete installation. E. Provide louvers that have minimum free area and maximum pressure drop as indicated on drawings. F. Provide louvers with frame and sill styles that are compatible with adjacent substrate, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into construction openings with accurate fit and adequate support, for weatherproof installation. Refer to architectural construction drawings and specifications for types of substrate. G. Coordinate with Architect for finish and color. H. Louver Screens: On inside face of exterior louvers, provide 1/2" square mesh anodized aluminum wire bird screens mounted in removable extruded aluminum frames. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All interior surfaces of all air devices shall be painted flat black. B. See floor plans for type, neck size and CFM of air for all air distribution devices. C. Install all air distribution devices as detailed on plans and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. D. The backside of all air devices shall be insulated with taped and sealed external duct wrap to match the insulation thickness and R-value of the ductwork connecting to the air device. Refer to 23 07 13 - Duct Insulation. E. Inspect areas to receive louvers. Notify the Architect of conditions that would adversely affect the installation or subsequent utilization of the louvers. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. F. If opening preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. G. Install louvers at locations indicated on the drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. H. Install louvers plumb, level, in plane of wall, and in alignment with adjacent work. I. Touch-up, repair or replace any damaged products prior to substantial completion. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 23 37 13 -4 AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SECTION 23 41 00 AIR FILTERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. Section 23 02 00- Basic Materials and Methods for HVAC are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE A. Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASHRAE Std 52.2- Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size; 2017, with Addendum (2022). B. ASHRAE Std 62.1 -Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FILTERS A. Air filters shall be high efficiency ASHRAE pleated panels consisting of synthetic media, welded wire media support grid, and beverage board enclosing frame, AAF PREpleat M13, 2-inch thick or approved equal. B. APPROVED MANUFACTURERS 1. American Air Filter. 2. Camfil. 3. Airguard Industries, Inc. 4. Cambridge. 5. Filtration Group 2.02 LOW VELOCITY FILTER SECTION A. Filters shall be of the throwaway cartridge type in 2-inch frames. When installing multiple filters into slide-in frames tape adjacent filters together with duct tape to prevent bypassing of air around the filter. Media shall be rated at 500 feet per minute. B. Filtering media shall be formed of non-woven reinforced synthetic type filtering media bonded to 96% open area media support grid folded into a non-creased radial pleat design. The filter pack shall be bonded to the enclosing frame to prevent air bypass. Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value of MERV 13 when evaluated under the guidelines of ASHRAE Std 52.2. Initial resistance shall not exceed 0.30 inches water gauge at 500 fpm face velocity. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Filters shall be provided upstream of all cooling coils or other devices with wetted surfaces through which air is supplied to occupiable spaces per ASHRAE Std 62.1. B. Install differential pressure switch to activate "Filter Dirty" light when pressure difference across filters reaches 0.5 inches w.g. (adjustable). Locate "filter dirty" lights in mechanical rooms with identifying label. C. Refer to Section 23 02 00 for additional filter information. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 2341 00- 1 AIR FILTERS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 23 62 13 AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. Section 23 02 00- Basic Materials and Methods for HVAC is included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE A. Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for Owner's use. 1.03 REFERENCES A. AHRI 210/240- Performance Rating of Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment; 2023. B. AHRI 340/360 (I-P)-Standard for Performance Rating of Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning and Heat Pump Equipment; 2022. C. ASHRAE Std 15-Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems; 2022, with Addendum (2024). D. ASHRAE Std 90.1 I-P- Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. E. ICC (IECC)- International Energy Conservation Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. F. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Unit shall be factory tested, shall be UL-labeled and rated in accordance with AHRI 340/360 (1- P). B. Unit construction shall comply with ASHRAE Std 15. C. Unit wiring shall comply with NFPA 70. D. Unit shall meet or exceed minimum efficiency requirements in accordance with ICC (IECC)and ASHRAE Std 90.1 I-P. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division One. B. Shop drawings shall indicate components, dimensions, weights, required service clearances, and location and sizes of field connections. Indicate equipment, piping and connections and accessories required for complete system. C. Product data shall include rated capacities, weights, specialties and accessories, electrical requirements and wiring diagrams. D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. E. For roof mounted units provide delegated design submittal for equipment anchorage as required in specification 23 02 00— Part 1. 1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit operation data. B. Include start-up instructions, maintenance data, controls, and accessories. Include trouble- shooting guide. C. Submit maintenance data. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus AIR COOLED CONDENSING Christi 23 62 13- 1 UNITS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions for rigging, unloading and transporting units. B. Accept products on site and inspect for damage. C. Protect units from physical damage. Factory shipping covers and skids shall be kept in place until installation. Store in a clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Provide the entire condensing unit with parts and labor warranty by the equipment manufacturer for one year from start-up or 18 months from date received on site. B. Provide all components of the refrigeration circuit with parts and labor warranty by the equipment manufacturer for five years. 1.09 OPERATIONS PERSONNEL TRAINING A. Provide a training session for the owner's operations personnel. Training session shall be performed by a qualified person who is knowledgeable in the subject system/equipment. Submit a training agenda two (2)weeks prior to the proposed training session for review and approval. Training session shall include at the minimum: 1. Purpose of equipment. 2. Principle of how the equipment works. 3. Important parts and assemblies. 4. How the equipment achieves its purpose and necessary operating conditions. 5. Most likely failure modes, causes and corrections. 6. On site demonstration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 AIR-COOLED CONDENSING UNITS A. Air-cooled condensing unit shall be designed for use with split system having a remote direct- expansion (DX) cooling coil mounted in evaporator fan unit and rated in accordance with either AHRI 210/240 or AHRI 340/360 (I-P). Capacity shall be as called for on the Drawings when matched to the appropriate evaporator coil. B. Condensing unit shall consist of high-efficiency hermetic compressor, air-cooled condenser with quiet fan, factory wired controls, R410A or R407C refrigerant and refrigeration circuit and valves. C. Cabinet shall be heavy-gauge galvanized steel with bonding primer and baked-enamel finish coat. The entire cabinet shall be protected from rust. D. Compressor shall be protected from excessive current and temperatures and shall be provided with a thermostatically controlled crankcase heater to operate only when needed for protection of the compressor. Compressor shall be mounted on resilient rubber isolators. Compressor shall be located in compartment isolated from condenser fan and coil. Provide a high-capacity dryer in the system to remove moisture and dirt. E. Condenser fan shall be directly connected to a weather-protected, quiet, high-efficiency motor. Fan guard shall be provided and shall be protected from rust by PVC finish. Condenser coil shall be aluminum fin with copper tube. F. Connections for refrigerant suction and liquid lines shall be extended outside the cabinet and provided with service valves with gauge connections. G. Power connections shall be made to the connectors located inside the electrical connection box. H. Standard operating and safety controls shall include high-pressure switch, low pressure switch, compressor overload service, and solid-state timed-off control. I. Provide unit with components and cladding for anchoring from the 'Texas Windostrom Approved Catalog'. Components and claddings not listed will require certification that they meet DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus AIR COOLED CONDENSING Christi 23 62 13-2 UNITS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop or exceed the design requirements of this specification section by the owner. Prior to installing and covering/concealing the fasteners and connectors the contractor shall notify the architect and engineer. The structural engineer shall inspect these fasteners and anchors prior to contractor covering any components. Contractor shall include in their bid amount the cost of windstorm-related contruction observations and windstorm certification by an approved professional engineer licensed in the State of Texas. 2.02 AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT A. Auxiliary equipment shall consist of refrigerant lines prepared for the unit involved. These lines shall be cleaned, dried, and pressurized at the factory. B. Low ambient kit to allow operation at outside temperature below 35 deg. F (2 deg. C) shall be provided. C. Expansion valve shall be provided with the evaporator coil. D. Provide thermostat to match the requirements of the job. Thermostat shall provide subbase with Heat-Cool-Off and Fan On-Auto switch. See section on controls for other related requirements. E. Provide polyethylene structural base designed for that service, and intended to support the unit and eliminate vibration transmission. F. Provide hard-start kit with unit. G. Provide guards for condenser coils. 2.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Carrier B. York C. Trane D. Aaon E. Daikin PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All HVAC equipment shall be installed as per manufacturer's printed installation instructions. B. Refer to specification 23 02 00— Part 1 for anchorage requirements for roof mounted equipment. C. All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the Drawings or in the Specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturer's requirements. D. Install the condensing unit on proper foundation as shown on the Drawings, and in location that will not restrict the air entry or discharge from the unit. E. Install refrigerant lines as recommended by the manufacturer, taking care not to lose the refrigerant charge contained in the lines, or allow air to enter the lines or equipment. Locate the lines in such a way as to not obstruct access to the condensing unit or other equipment. Lines located underground or under concrete shall be installed in a PVC sleeve for protection. F. Provide electrical connections as required by the applicable codes. Provide control wiring required. All power wiring and control wiring shall be in conduit and located so as not to obstruct access to the unit or other equipment. 3.02 TESTING A. Operate the condensing unit and the system to assure that unit is operating properly and without excessive noise and vibration. B. Read and record the power draw and the refrigeration suction and liquid pressures as required by Section 23 05 93 -Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus AIR COOLED CONDENSING Christi 23 62 13-3 UNITS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SECTION 23 74 19 ROOFTOP UNITS (COOLING ONLY) PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. Section 23 02 00- Basic Materials and Methods for HVAC shall be included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE A. Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use. 1.03 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Section 23 09 63- Energy Management and Control System (EMCS) 1.04 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 02 00- Basic Materials and Methods for HVAC B. Section 23 05 13- Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment C. Section 23 05 26-Variable Frequency Motor Speed Control for HVAC Equipment D. Section 230548 E. Section 23 05 93-Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing F. Section 23 33 00- Ductwork Accessories G. Section 23 41 00-Air Filters 1.05 REFERENCES A. AHRI 210/240- Performance Rating of Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment; 2023. B. AHRI 270 -Sound Performance Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment; 2015, with Addendum (2016). C. AHRI 340/360- Performance Rating of Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning and Heat Pump Equipment; 2019. D. AHRI 410 - Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils; 2001, with Addenda (2011). E. AMCA 300 - Reverberation Room Methods of Sound Testing of Fans; 2024. F. AMCA 500-D - Laboratory Methods of Testing Dampers for Rating; 2018. G. ASHRAE Std 15-Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems; 2022, with Addendum (2024). H. ASHRAE Std 62.1 -Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. I. ASHRAE Std 90.1 I-P- Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. J. ICC (IECC)- International Energy Conservation Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. K. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. L. NFPA 90A- Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; 2024. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Unit shall be factory-charged and tested, shall be UL-labeled and certified by AHRI 210/240 or AHRI 340/360. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus ROOFTOP UNITS (COOLING Christi 23 74 19- 1 ONLY) 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents B. Unit shall comply with ASHRAE Std 15. C. Unit shall meet or exceed minimum efficiency requirements in accordance with ICC (IECC)and ASHRAE Std 90.1 I-P. D. Unit shall be rated for sound performance in accordance with AHRI 270 and AMCA 300. E. Coil performance shall be certified in accordance with AHRI 410. F. Insulation and insulation adhesive shall comply with NFPA 90A requirements or flame spread and smoke generation. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division One. B. Shop drawings shall indicate components, dimensions, weights, required service clearances, and location and sizes of field connections. Indicate equipment, piping and connections and valves required for complete system. C. Product data shall include rated capacities, weights, specialties and accessories, electrical requirements and wiring diagrams. D. Provide fan curves with specified operating point clearly identified. E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. F. Provide delegated design submittal for equipment anchorage as required in specification 23 02 00— Part 1. 1.08 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit operation data. B. Include start-up instructions, maintenance data, controls, and accessories. Include trouble- shooting guide. C. Submit maintenance data. 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions for rigging, unloading and transporting units. B. Accept products on site and inspect for damage. C. Protect units from physical damage. Factory shipping covers and skids shall be kept in place until installation. Store in a clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Provide a full parts and labor warranty by the equipment manufacturer for one year from start- up or 18 months from shipment, whichever occurs first. B. Provide five-year warranty by equipment manufacturer for compressors parts and labor. 1.11 OPERATIONS PERSONNEL TRAINING A. Provide a training session for the owner's operations personnel. Training session shall be performed by a qualified person who is knowledgeable in the subject system/equipment. Submit a training agenda two (2)weeks prior to the proposed training session for review and approval. Training session shall include at the minimum: 1. Purpose of equipment. 2. Principle of how the equipment works. 3. Important parts and assemblies. 4. How the equipment achieves its purpose and necessary operating conditions. 5. Most likely failure modes, causes and corrections. 6. On site demonstration. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus ROOFTOP UNITS (COOLING Christi 23 74 19-2 ONLY) 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ROOFTOP UNIT A. Rooftop unit shall be packaged and include electric cooling and electric heat with capacity and modulating cooling and heating as shown on the drawings. B. Unit shall be factory-charged and tested, shall be UL-labeled, AHRI 210/240 and AHRI 270 certified, and shall be AGA-certified. C. Unit casing shall be heavy-gauge galvanized steel or heavy-gauge aluminum with protective coat of baked enamel. Weatherproof access panels shall be provided for access to all parts requiring service. D. Compressor(s)shall be hermetic scroll type and shall be resiliently mounted to avoid vibration and noise. Compressor shall be provided with anti-slugging protection, crankcase heater, and time delay on recycling of the compressor. Two internal compressor motor thermal cutouts and a hot gas cutout shall protect the compressor in addition to high-pressure and low-pressure safeties. Standard controls shall permit operation down to 35 deg. F (2 deg. C) and compressor shall be locked out below this temperature. E. Condenser fan(s) shall be direct-driven on the shaft of the slow-speed motor, which shall be designed to operate exposed to the weather. F. Condenser coils shall have a sub-cooling section. G. Refrigerant circuit shall include filter dryer, moisture indicator, sight glass, and gauge ports. H. Filter rack shall be provided for filters 2 in. thick and shall filter both outdoor air and return air. See Section 23 41 00-Air Filters for type of filters and the number of filter changes to be furnished with the equipment. I. Evaporator fan shall be quiet-type centrifugal blower, directly connected to an adjustable-speed motor or belt driven with an adjustable-pitch pulley on the motor. J. The drain pan shall be stainless steel and positively sloped. The slope of the drain pan shall be in two directions and comply with ASHRAE Std 62.1. The drain pan shall have a minimum slope of 1/8" per foot to provide positive draining. The drain pan shall extend beyond the leaving side of the coil. The drain pan shall have a threaded drain connection. 2.02 ELECTRICAL A. Unit wiring shall comply with NFPA 70 requirements and with all applicable UL standards. All electrical components shall be UL recognized where applicable. All wiring and electrical components provided with the unit shall be number and color-coded and labeled according to the electrical diagram provided for easy identification. The unit shall be provided with a factory wired weatherproof control panel. Unit shall have a single point power terminal block for main power connection. Unit shall have a minimum short circuit current rating (SCCR)of 10,000 AIC. A terminal board shall be provided for low voltage control wiring. Branch short circuit protection, 115-volt control circuit transformer and fuse, system switches, and a high temperature sensor shall also be provided with the unit. Each compressor and condenser fan motor shall be furnished with contactors and inherent thermal overload protection. Supply fan motors shall have contactors and external overload protection. Knockouts shall be provided in the bottom of the main control panels for field wiring entrance. 2.03 ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT A. Unit shall be provided with hot gas reheat option for dehumidification. Hot gas reheat coil shall be located on the leaving air side of the evaporator coil and fully piped and circuited at the factory. B. Condenser coil hail guards shall be provided. C. A prefabricated heavy gauge galvanized steel, mounting curb shall be provided for field assembly on the roof decking prior to unit shipment. The roof curb shall be a full perimeter type with complete perimeter support of the air handling section and condensing section. The curb shall be a minimum of 14" high and include a nominal 2" x 4"wood nailing strip. Curb height shall be increased as required to maintain a minimum height of 8 inches above adjacent roofing DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus ROOFTOP UNITS (COOLING Christi 23 74 19-3 ONLY) 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop surface. Gasket shall be provided for field mounting between the unit base and roof curb. D. Provide unit with components and cladding for anchoring from the 'Texas Windostrom Approved Catalog'. Components and claddings not listed will require certification that they meet or exceed the design requirements of this specification section by the owner. Prior to installing and covering/concealing the fasteners and connectors the contractor shall notify the architect and engineer. The structural engineer shall inspect these fasteners and anchors prior to contractor covering any components. Contractor shall include in their bid amount the cost of windstorm-related contruction observations and windstorm certification by an approved professional engineer licensed in the State of Texas. E. Provide "power saver" dampers and controls to provide "free cooling"from 0 to 100% outdoor air(OA)when the outside air humidity and temperature are acceptable. Provide OA, return air, and relief air dampers in a factory-provided enclosure. All air shall be filtered and bird screen shall be installed. Dampers shall have an air leakage rate not greater than 4 cfm/ft2 of damper surface area at 1.0 in.w.g. and shall be labeled by an approved agency when tested in accordance with AMCA 500-D for such purpose. F. A solid-state enthalpy changeover control shall determine the capability of the outside air to provide free cooling. The control package shall include a differential enthalpy sensor in the return air duct to compare the enthalpy of the outside air and return air and use the air with the lowest enthalpy for free cooling or assisting the mechanical cooling. The cooling control sequence is as follows: 1. The changeover control determines if the outdoor air is suitable for free cooling. 2. The space thermostat determines if cooling is needed in the building. If so: 3. The actuator modulates the outdoor air and return air dampers to maintain the desired mixed air temperature. 4. The second cooling stage of the space thermostat energizes the compressor to assist the economizer if required. 5. If the outdoor air is not suitable for free cooling, the outdoor air damper remains in the minimum ventilation position and the compressor is energized when space cooling is required. G. Provide a warm-up thermostat to prevent the OA dampers from opening if the return air temperature is below the set point (65 deg. F) (18 deg. C). H. Provide necessary controls for operation of the compressor below the normal temperature of the compressor cutout. Operation shall be permitted down to temperature specified on drawings. I. Provide factory-trained service person to check out the system, calibrate the controls, and see that the RTU is operating properly. The service person making the settings shall make a written report to the engineer and the owner with all set points listed for future reference. J. Rooftop units mounted on slabs or other fixed locations shall be provided with adapters for end discharge and return to the unit. K. Provide programmable combination thermostat/hu mid istat and other controls required to produce the control functions called for. L. Manufacturer shall provide BACnet interface card for communication with EMCS. 2.04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Carrier B. Trane C. York D. Aaon E. Daikin DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus ROOFTOP UNITS (COOLING Christi 23 74 19-4 ONLY) 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install the curb as required by the job conditions and as recommended by the manufacturer, and install proper flashing and counterflashing. See details on the drawings. B. Refer to specification 23 02 00— Part 1 for anchorage requirements for roof mounted equipment. C. Set the unit in place, taking care to protect the adjacent roofing, and connect the supply and return ductwork. D. Make electrical connections, taking care that these do not block access to any part of the equipment requiring service. E. Unit wiring shall comply with NFPA 70 and all applicable UL standards. F. Connect full size condensate drain pipe to roof top unit and extend to nearest drain, pipe shall be schedule 40 galvanized with malleable iron fittings. G. Unit installation shall comply with NFPA 90A requirements. 3.02 MANUFACTURER START-UP SERVICES A. Provide authorized representative of the manufacturer to inspect the assembly and installation of each unit. Perform no start-up, tests, or adjustments on a unit until the representative determines that the unit has been properly assembled and installed. B. The representative shall start-up, test, and adjust units. The representative shall perform operational checks to make certain that all equipment and controls of the systems are operating properly. If defects or improper adjustments are found, they shall be corrected and tests repeated. C. The representative shall prepare and provide a written start-up report to include any measurements taken, test results obtained, or corrective actions required. D. In addition to start-up, the manufacturer's representative shall attend a separate meeting on- site with the EMCS contractor to coordinate and execute programming between the packaged equipment controls and the EMCS. 3.03 BALANCING AND TEST A. Operate the roof top unit and check for proper supply air quantity, noise, and proper operation. B. Report the airflow, static pressure, voltage and current draw of each item, refrigerant pressure readings, etc., as required by Section 23 05 93-Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing. This system is not complete until these readings have been made, submitted to the engineer, and accepted. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus ROOFTOP UNITS (COOLING Christi 23 74 19-5 ONLY) 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SECTION 23 81 26 SPLIT SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. Section 23 02 00- Basic Materials and Methods for HVAC shall be included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Indoor air conditioning units with microprocessor-based controls. B. Outdoor remote mounted air-cooled condensing units C. The system shall have a total cooling capacity and a sensible cooling capacity as indicated in the Mechanical Schedules. D. The unit is to be supplied for operation on a power supply as indicated in the Mechanical Schedules and the Electrical drawings. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 02 00- Basic Materials and Methods for HVAC B. Section 23 05 29- Hangers and Supports for Piping and Equipment- HVAC C. Section 23 05 13- Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment D. Section 230548 E. Section 23 07 19- HVAC Piping Insulation F. Section 23 23 00- Refrigerant Piping G. Section 23 41 00-Air Filters H. Section 23 05 93-Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing I. Section 23 21 13-Above Ground Hydronic Piping J. Section 23 21 19- Hydronic Specialties 1.04 REFERENCES A. AHRI 210/240- Performance Rating of Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment; 2023. B. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Certified Aerodynamic Performance Rating; 2016, with Errata (2018). C. AMCA 300 - Reverberation Room Methods of Sound Testing of Fans; 2024. D. AMCA 301 - Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data; 2022. E. ISO 9001 - Quality Management Systems— Requirements; 2015. F. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. G. NFPA 90A- Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; 2024. H. NFPA 90B - Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air-Conditioning Systems; 2024. I. UL 1995- Heating and Cooling Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. J. UL 705- Power Ventilators; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The unit shall be approved and listed by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. Unit performance shall be certified in accordance with AHRI 210/240. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus SPLIT SYSTEM AIR- Christi 2381 26- 1 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop CONDITIONERS Re-Bid Construction Documents B. The specified system shall be factory-tested before shipment. Testing shall include, but shall not be limited to: Quality Control Checks, "Hi-Pot"Test (two times rated voltage plus 1000 volts, per NRTL agency requirements), and Metering Calibration Tests. The system shall be designed and manufactured according to world-class quality standards. The manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 certified. C. System shall be supplied with CSA Certification to the harmonized U.S. and Canadian product safety standard CSA C22.2 No 236/UL 1995 for"Heating and Cooling Equipment" and marked with the CSA c-us logo (60Hz only). D. UL Compliance: Fans shall be designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with UL 705. E. UL Compliance: Fans and components shall be UL listed and labeled. F. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory Compliance (NRTL): Fans and components shall be NRTL listed and labeled. The term "NRTL" shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. G. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards. H. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70. I. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301. Test fans in accordance with AMCA 300. Fans shall be licensed to bear the AMCA Certified Sound Ratings Seal. J. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings in accordance with AMCA 210. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections: B. Product data for selected models, including specialties, accessories, and the following: 1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. 2. Certified fan sound power ratings. 3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics plus motor and fan accessories. 4. Materials, gages and finishes, include color charts. C. Shop drawings from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, components, and location and size of field connections. D. Wiring diagrams that detail power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer installed wiring and field installed wiring. E. Product certificates, signed by manufacturer, certifying that their products comply with specified requirements. F. Maintenance data for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1 and Division 23, Section "Basic Materials and Methods". G. For roof mounted outdoor units provide delegated design submittal for equipment anchorage as required in specification 23 02 00— Part 1. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Equipment shall be stored and handled in accordance with the unit manufacturer's instructions. B. Lift and support units with the manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points. C. Disassemble and reassemble units as required for movement into the final location following manufacturer's written instructions. D. Deliver units as a factory-assembled unit to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with protective crating and covering. 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until filters are in place, bearings lubricated, refrigeration piping has been tested and charged and fan has been test run under observation. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus SPLIT SYSTEM AIR- Christi 2381 26-2 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop CONDITIONERS 1.09 OPERATIONS PERSONNEL TRAINING A. Provide a training session for the owner's operations personnel. Training session shall be performed by a qualified person who is knowledgeable in the subject system/equipment. Submit a training agenda two (2)weeks prior to the proposed training session for review and approval. Training session shall include at the minimum: 1. Purpose of equipment. 2. Principle of how the equipment works. 3. Important parts and assemblies. 4. How the equipment achieves its purpose and necessary operating conditions. 5. Most likely failure modes, causes and corrections. 6. On site demonstration. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Provide a full parts, labor, and refrigerant warranty by the equipment manufacturer for one year from start-up or 18 months from shipment, whichever occurs first. B. Provide a full parts warranty by the equipment manufacturer for five years, effective from date of factory start-up and certification. C. Provide a compressor parts warranty by the equipment manufacturer for seven years, effective from date of factory start-up and certification. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Provide an indoor wall-mounted, factory assembled, pre-charged, pre-wired, tested and ready to operate air conditioning unit. 2.02 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Daikin B. Trane/Mitsubishi C. York/JCI 2.03 WALL-MOUNTED INDOOR UNIT A. GENERAL 1. The unit shall be a wall-mounted style indoor unit with outlet vane and return inlet grille. The indoor unit shall be factory assembled, wired and run tested. Contained within the unit shall be all factory wiring, piping, electronic modulating linear expansion device, control circuit board and fan motor. The unit shall have a self-diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism, an auto restart function, an emergency operation function, a test run switch, and the ability to adjust airflow patterns. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes shall be charged with dehydrated air before shipment from the factory. B. UNIT CABINET 1. The cabinet shall be formed from high strength molded high impact, non-metallic material with smooth finish, flat front panel design with access for filter. Cabinet color shall be white. The unit shall be wall mounted by means of a factory supplied, pre-drilled, mounting plate. 2. The cabinet shall be designed so all components are easily accessible for service and maintenance through either the front or rear of the unit. Units that are not fully accessible from front and rear or not serviceable in place shall be unacceptable. C. FAN AND AIR DISTRIBUTION 1. The air distribution system shall be constructed with a quiet, cross flow direct-drive fan assembly. The single fan motor shall be high-efficiency type, equipped with permanently lubricated bearings. The fan shall be capable of a minimum of three speeds for airflow modulation (High, Med, Low) and Sleep. Dehumidification shall utilize the lower fan speed. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus SPLIT SYSTEM AIR- Christi 2381 26-3 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop CONDITIONERS 2. Unit shall be provided with an integral, motorized, multi-position, air sweep vane to provide uniform, adjustable vertical air distribution. Air sweep vane operation shall be user selectable using the unit controller. 3. Unit shall be provided with a manually adjustable guide vane for horizontal air distribution. D. FILTER 1. The filter shall be an integral part of the system, located within the cabinet and serviceable from the front. The filters shall be half-inch thick, washable type. E. COIL 1. The indoor coil shall be of nonferrous construction with smooth plate fins on copper tubing. 2. The tubing shall have inner grooves for high efficiency heat exchange. 3. All tube joints shall be brazed with phos-copper or silver alloy. 4. The coils shall be pressure tested at the factory. 5. A condensate pan and drain shall be provided under the coil. 6. The unit shall be provided with an integral condensate lift mechanism that will be able to raise drain water 33 inches above the condensate pan. 7. Both refrigerant lines to the indoor units shall be insulated. F. ELECTRICAL 1. The unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 1-phase, 60 hertz. 2. The system shall be equipped to allow the indoor unit to be powered directly from the associated outdoor unit using 3-wire, 14 gauge AWG connections plus ground. 2.04 4-WAY CEILING-RECESSED CASSETTE WITH GRILLE INDOOR UNIT A. GENERAL 1. The unit shall be a four-way cassette style indoor unit that recesses into the ceiling with a ceiling grille. The indoor unit shall be factory assembled, wired and run tested. Contained within the unit shall be all factory wiring, piping, electronic modulating linear expansion device, control circuit board and fan motor. The unit shall have a self-diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism, an auto restart function, an emergency operation function, a test run switch, and the ability to adjust airflow patterns for different ceiling heights. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes shall be charged with dehydrated air before shipment from the factory. B. UNIT CABINET 1. The cabinet shall be space-saving ceiling-recessed cassette. Unit cabinet shall be constructed of zinc-coated steel. Unit air distribution grille shall be constructed of high impact non-metallic material. 2. The cabinet panel shall have provisions for a field installed filtered outside air intake. 3. Branch ducting shall be allowed from cabinet. 4. Four-way grille shall be fixed to bottom of cabinet allowing two, three or four-way blow. 5. The grille vane angles shall be individually adjustable from the wired remote controller to customize the airflow pattern for the conditioned space C. FAN 1. The indoor fan shall be an assembly with a turbo fan direct driven by a single motor. 2. The indoor fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced to run on a motor with permanently lubricated bearings. 3. The indoor fan shall consist of five (5)speed settings, Low, Mid 1, Mid2, High and Auto. 4. The fan shall have a selectable Auto fan setting that will adjust the fan speed based on the difference between controller set-point and space temperature. 5. The indoor unit shall have an adjustable air outlet system offering 4-way airflow, 3-way airflow, or 2-way airflow. 6. The indoor unit shall have switches that can be set to provide optimum airflow based on ceiling height and number of outlets used. 7. The indoor unit vanes shall have 5 fixed positions and a swing feature that shall be capable of automatically swinging the vanes up and down for uniform air distribution. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus SPLIT SYSTEM AIR- Christi 2381 26-4 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop CONDITIONERS 8. The vanes shall have an Auto-Wave selectable option in the heating mode that shall randomly cycle the vanes up and down to evenly heat the space. 9. The grille shall have an optional sensor that will measure room temperature variations and adjust the airflow accordingly to evenly condition the space. D. FILTER 1. The filter shall be an integral part of the system, located within the cabinet and serviceable from the bottom. The filters shall be half-inch thick, washable type. E. COIL 1. The indoor coil shall be of nonferrous construction with smooth plate fins on copper tubing. 2. The tubing shall have inner grooves for high efficiency heat exchange. 3. All tube joints shall be brazed with phos-copper or silver alloy. 4. The coils shall be pressure tested at the factory. 5. A condensate pan and drain shall be provided under the coil. 6. The unit shall be provided with an integral condensate lift mechanism that will be able to raise drain water 33 inches above the condensate pan. 7. Both refrigerant lines to the indoor units shall be insulated. F. ELECTRICAL 1. The unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 1-phase, 60 hertz. 2. The system shall be equipped to allow the indoor unit to be powered directly from the associated outdoor unit using 3-wire, 14 gauge AWG connections plus ground. 2.05 CEILING-SUSPENDED INDOOR UNIT A. GENERAL 1. The unit shall be a one-way ceiling suspended style indoor unit that installs flush to the underside of the ceiling. The indoor unit shall be factory assembled, wired and run tested. Contained within the unit shall be all factory wiring, piping, electronic modulating linear expansion device, control circuit board and fan motor. The unit shall have a self-diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism, an auto restart function, an emergency operation function, a test run switch, and the ability to adjust airflow patterns for different ceiling heights. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes shall be charged with dehydrated air before shipment from the factory. B. UNIT CABINET 1. Unit cabinet shall be constructed of pre-coated steel with white finish. The discharge components shall be coated to prevent condensation. The unit inlet grille shall be constructed of high impact non-metallic material. The inlet grille shall be hinged to allow access to the filters, indoor fan motor, and control box. 2. The cabinet panel shall have provisions for a field installed filtered outside air intake. 3. The unit shall include an integral, motorized, multi-position, horizontal air sweep louver at the unit discharge. C. FAN 1. The indoor fan shall be an assembly of multiple fans direct driven by a single motor. 2. The indoor fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced to run on a motor with permanently lubricated bearings. 3. The indoor fan shall consist of five (5)speed settings, Low, Mid 1, Mid2, High and Auto. 4. The fan shall have a selectable Auto fan setting that will adjust the fan speed based on the difference between controller set-point and space temperature. 5. The motorized horizontal air sweep louver shall provide uniform air distribution up and down from the unit discharge. Five fixed positions and an auto swing feature shall be provided and controllable from the unit controller. D. FILTER 1. The filter shall be an integral part of the system, located within the cabinet and serviceable from the bottom. The filters shall be half-inch thick, washable type. E. COIL DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus SPLIT SYSTEM AIR- Christi 2381 26-5 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop CONDITIONERS 1. The indoor coil shall be of nonferrous construction with smooth plate fins on copper tubing. 2. The tubing shall have inner grooves for high efficiency heat exchange. 3. All tube joints shall be brazed with phos-copper or silver alloy. 4. The coils shall be pressure tested at the factory. 5. A condensate pan and drain shall be provided under the coil. 6. The unit shall be provided with an integral condensate lift mechanism that will be able to raise drain water 33 inches above the condensate pan. 7. Both refrigerant lines to the indoor units shall be insulated. F. ELECTRICAL 1. The unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 1-phase, 60 hertz. 2. The system shall be equipped to allow the indoor unit to be powered directly from the associated outdoor unit using 3-wire, 14 gauge AWG connections plus ground. 2.06 CEILING-CONCEALED DUCTED INDOOR UNIT A. GENERAL 1. The unit shall be a ceiling-concealed ducted indoor fan coil design that mounts above the ceiling. The unit shall be rated for installation within ceiling plenums. 2. The indoor unit shall be factory assembled, wired and run tested. Contained within the unit shall be all factory wiring, piping, electronic modulating linear expansion device, control circuit board and fan motor. The unit shall have a self-diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism, and an auto restart function. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes shall be charged with dehydrated air before shipment from the factory. B. UNIT CABINET 1. The unit cabinet shall be constructed of zinc-coated steel. 2. The cabinet panel shall have provisions for a field installed filtered outside air intake. C. FAN 1. The unit shall feature external static pressure settings from 0.14 to 0.60 in. WG. 2. The indoor unit fan shall be an assembly with one or two fan(s) direct driven by a single motor. 3. The indoor fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced and run on a motor with permanently lubricated bearings. 4. The indoor fan shall consist of a minimum of three (3)speeds, High, Mid, and Low plus the Auto-Fan function. 5. The indoor unit shall have a ducted air outlet system and ducted return air system. D. FILTER 1. Return air shall be filtered by means of a standard factory installed return air filter. 2. Return filter box with high-efficiency filter shall be provided for all indoor units. Filter efficiency ratings shall be as scheduled. E. COIL 1. The indoor coil shall be of nonferrous construction with smooth plate fins on copper tubing. 2. The tubing shall have inner grooves for high efficiency heat exchange. 3. All tube joints shall be brazed with phos-copper or silver alloy. 4. The coils shall be pressure tested at the factory. 5. A condensate pan and drain shall be provided under the coil. 6. The condensate shall be gravity drained from the fan coil. 7. Both refrigerant lines to the indoor units shall be insulated. F. ELECTRICAL 1. The unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 1-phase, 60 hertz. 2. The system shall be equipped to allow the indoor unit to be powered directly from the associated outdoor unit using 3-wire, 14 gauge AWG connections plus ground. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus SPLIT SYSTEM AIR- Christi 2381 26-6 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop CONDITIONERS 2.07 MULTI-POSITION DUCTED INDOOR UNIT A. GENERAL 1. The unit shall be a vertical or horizontal, multi-position ducted indoor fan coil design that mounts above the ceiling or in a mechanical space. The unit shall be rated for installation within ceiling plenums. 2. The indoor unit shall be factory assembled, wired and run tested. Contained within the unit shall be all factory wiring, piping, electronic modulating linear expansion device, control circuit board and fan motor. The unit shall have a self-diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism, and an auto restart function. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes shall be charged with dehydrated air before shipment from the factory. B. UNIT CABINET 1. The unit cabinet shall be constructed of painted, zinc-coated, steel. 2. The unit shall include a fixed return and fixed discharge. C. FAN 1. The unit fan shall be an assembly with a single, statically and dynamically balanced direct drive fan with a high efficiency DC motor with permanently lubricated bearings. 2. The unit shall have a minimum of three speeds with the selectable capability to operate with external static pressure from 0.3 to 0.80 in. WG. D. FILTER 1. The unit shall include a filter rack for 1"thick replaceable filter. 2. Filter efficiency ratings shall be as scheduled. E. COIL 1. The indoor coil shall be of nonferrous construction with smooth plate fins on copper tubing. 2. The tubing shall have inner grooves for high efficiency heat exchange. 3. All tube joints shall be brazed with phos-copper or silver alloy. 4. The coils shall be pressure tested at the factory. 5. A condensate pan and drain shall be provided under the coil. 6. The condensate shall be gravity drained from the fan coil. 7. Both refrigerant lines to the indoor units shall be insulated. F. ELECTRICAL 1. The unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 1-phase, 60 hertz. 2. The system shall be equipped to allow the indoor unit to be powered directly from the associated outdoor unit using 3-wire, 14 gauge AWG connections plus ground. G. OPTIONAL AUXILIARY ELECTRIC HEATER 1. The unit shall be provided with a manufacturer supplied electric heat kit accessory. The electric heater shall provide the capacity and number of stages as scheduled. The heater shall be designed to work with the associated indoor unit without requiring modifications to the indoor unit or to the control sequence. 2. The electric heater shall be provided with a dedicated power supply separate from power to the indoor unit. 2.08 MICROPROCESSOR CONTROL A. The control system shall be microprocessor-based, factory-wired into the system and tested prior to shipment. The wall-mounted control enclosure shall be 4.75"x 4.75" and white in color with include a light-blue LCD providing continuous display of operating status and alarm condition. There shall be a built-in weekly schedule with up to 5 scheduled event settings per day. B. A 5-key membrane keypad for setpoint/program control, increase/decrease temperature set point, fan speed selection and unit operation mode shall be located below the display. The controller shall have a built-in temperature sensor. Temperature shall be displayed in either Fahrenheit(°F)or Celsius (°C), and Temperature changes shall be by increments of±3.6°F (±2°C). DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus SPLIT SYSTEM AIR- Christi 2381 26-7 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop CONDITIONERS C. The control display shall be field-wired to the control board using factory-supplied thermostat wire with plugs. The control voltage from the wired controller to the indoor unit shall be 12 volts, DC. Field wiring shall run directly from the indoor unit to the wall mounted controller with no splices. Communication cable can be extended to a maximum of 164 feet, between controller and indoor unit. D. The control shall be able to be programmed for a temperature set point between 64-86°F (18- 30°C)with a sensitivity of±3.6°F (±2°C). E. The control system shall prevent compressor short-cycling by a 3-minute timer from compressor stop to the next start. F. For startup after power failure, the system shall provide automatic restart with a programmable (up to 9.9 minutes in 6-second increments)time delay. Programming can be performed at the wall mounted controller. G. The control system shall monitor unit operation and activate a visual alarm in the event of an alarm condition. H. Unit controls shall be capable of interfacing the EMCS via BACnet communication protocol. If BACnet protocol is not a native communication protocol to the factory controls, then a separate gateway shall be provided as required. 2.09 OUTDOOR AIR-COOLED PROP FAN CONDENSING UNIT A. Condensing unit components shall include a condenser coil, a brush-less digitally controlled variable propeller-type fan, an inverter driven twin rotary compressor, electronic expansion valve, 4-way reversing valve. B. All components shall be factory-assembled, charged with R-410A refrigerant and sealed. No internal piping, brazing, dehydration or charging shall be required. C. The condenser coil shall be constructed of copper tubes and aluminum fins. D. The condensing unit shall be designed to operate at a sound level less than 57 dBA. E. The casing shall be constructed from galvanized steel plate, finished with a white electrostatically applied, thermally fused acrylic or polyester powder coating for corrosion protection. Mounting feet shall be provided and shall be welded to the base of the cabinet and be of sufficient size to afford reliable equipment mount and stability. Easy access shall be afforded to all serviceable parts by means of removable panel sections. The fan grill shall be constructed of polypropylene. F. The condensing unit shall be furnished with a single DC fan motor. The fan blade shall be of aerodynamic design for quiet operation, and the fan motor bearings shall be permanently lubricated. The outdoor unit shall have horizontal discharge airflow. The fan shall be mounted in front of the coil, pulling air across it from the rear and dispelling it through the front. The fan shall be provided with a raised guard to prevent external contact with moving parts. G. The condensing unit coil shall be of copper tubing with louvered aluminum fins. The coil shall be protected with an integral metal guard. The coil shall have an anti-corrosive coating designed to prevent natural surface corrosion of the aluminum fins, maintaining heat transfer properties of the coil and extending service life. Refrigerant flow from the condenser shall be controlled by means of an electronic expansion valve (EEV) metering device. The EEV shall be controlled by a microprocessor step motor. H. The compressor shall be a DC twin-rotor rotary compressor with Variable Speed Inverter Drive Technology. The compressor shall be driven by inverter circuit to control compressor speed. The compressor speed shall dynamically vary to match the room load for significantly increasing the efficiency of the system which shall result in significant energy savings. To prevent liquid from accumulating in the compressor during the off cycle, a minimal amount of current shall be automatically, intermittently applied to the compressor motor windings to maintain sufficient heat to vaporize any refrigerant. No crankcase heater is to be used. The outdoor unit shall have an accumulator and high-pressure safety switch. The compressor shall be mounted to avoid the transmission of vibration. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus SPLIT SYSTEM AIR- Christi 2381 26-8 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop CONDITIONERS I. Provide unit with components and cladding for anchoring from the 'Texas Windostrom Approved Catalog'. Components and claddings not listed will require certification that they meet or exceed the design requirements of this specification section by the owner. Prior to installing and covering/concealing the fasteners and connectors the contractor shall notify the architect and engineer. The structural engineer shall inspect these fasteners and anchors prior to contractor covering any components. Contractor shall include in their bid amount the cost of windstorm-related contruction observations and windstorm certification by an approved professional engineer licensed in the State of Texas. 2.10 ACCESSORIES A. The unit shall be provided with a wind baffle low ambient operation kit. The wind baffle shall be constructed on 20 gauge sheet metal and painted to prevent corrosion. Unit shall be able to provide 100% capacity when operating at 0°F outdoor air temperature and a wind baffle is used. B. The unit shall be provided with a cooling coil condensate pump. The condensate pump shall be complete with integral float switch, pump, motor assembly and reservoir. C. The unit shall be provided with a BACnet gateway for integration with the EMCS. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF AIR CONDITIONING UNIT A. General 1. Install air conditioning unit in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Install unit plumb and level, firmly anchored in location indicated, and maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. 2. Refer to specification 23 02 00— Part 1 for anchorage requirements for roof mounted equipment. 3. Install unit and all field mounted accessories in accordance with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B. B. Electrical Wiring 1. Install and connect electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's electrical connection diagram submittal to electrical contractor. Install and wire per local and national codes. C. Piping Connections 1. Install and connect devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory- mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's piping connection diagram submittal to piping contractor. D. Drain Water Piping 1. Connect drain line to air conditioning unit. Unit drain shall be trapped internally. E. Field-Supplied Pan 1. A field-supplied pan with drain shall be installed beneath cooling units installed above a ceiling and heat pumps. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Startup air conditioning unit in accordance with manufacturer's startup instructions. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements. Provide system start-up services by manufacturer's authorized service representative confirming all system equipment and components have been installed in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. Provide formal report for engineer and owner review and approval. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus SPLIT SYSTEM AIR- Christi 2381 26-9 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop CONDITIONERS SECTION 23 82 19 FAN COIL UNIT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. Section 23 02 00- Basic Materials and Methods for HVAC shall be included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE A. Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use. 1.03 REFERENCES A. AHRI 210/240- Performance Rating of Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment; 2023. B. AHRI 260 (I-P)-Sound Rating of Ducted Air Moving and Conditioning Equipment; 2017. C. AHRI 340/360 (I-P)-Standard for Performance Rating of Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning and Heat Pump Equipment; 2022. D. AHRI 410 - Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils; 2001, with Addenda (2011). E. AHRI 430 (I-P)- Performance Rating of Central Station Air-handling Unit Supply Fans; 2020. F. ASHRAE Std 90.1 I-P- Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. G. ASTM B75/B75M - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube; 2020. H. ASTM B117-Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray(Fog)Apparatus; 2019. I. ASTM E84 -Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2023c. J. ICC (IECC)- International Energy Conservation Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. K. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. L. NFPA 90A- Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; 2024. M. NFPA 90B - Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air-Conditioning Systems; 2024. N. SCAQMD 1168 -Adhesive and Sealant Applications; 1989, with Amendment(2022). O. UL 723 -Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. P. UL 1995- Heating and Cooling Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects with mechanical installations similar to that required for this project. B. All insulation shall be listed and labeled to have a composite (insulation,jacket or facing, and adhesive used to adhere the facing or jacket to insulation)flame spread index of not more than 25 and smoke-developed index of not more than 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, UL 723 and NFPA 90A. 1. Exception: Outdoor mechanical insulation may have a flame spread index of 75 and smoke-developed index of 150. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 23 82 19 - 1 FAN COIL UNIT 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents C. Duct and plenum insulation shall comply with minimum R-value requirements of ICC (IECC)and ASHRAE Std 90.1 I-P unless greater values are indicated otherwise in the contract documents. D. Adhesive and other material shall comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B. All adhesives and sealants used on interior of building shall comply with VOC limits prescribed by SCAQMD 1168. E. Unit fan(s)shall comply with the maximum allowable fan motor horsepower per ICC (IECC)and ASHRAE Std 90.1 I-P. F. Unit shall meet or exceed minimum efficiency ratings in accordance with ICC (IECC)and ASHRAE Std 90.1 I-P per testing standards prescribed by AHRI 210/240 or AHRI 340/360 (I- P). G. Units shall be tested and certified with AHRI 430 (I-P)and AHRI 260 (I-P). H. All coils shall be constructed to meet the requirements of AHRI 410. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Provide entire unit with parts and labor warranty by the equipment manufacturer for one year from start-up or 18 months from date received on site. B. For units with DX coils, provide all components of the refrigeration circuit with parts and labor warranty by the equipment manufacturer for five years. 1.06 OPERATIONS PERSONNEL TRAINING A. Provide a training session for the owner's operations personnel. Training session shall be performed by a qualified person who is knowledgeable in the subject system/equipment. Submit a training agenda two (2)weeks prior to the proposed training session for review and approval. Training session shall include at the minimum: 1. Purpose of equipment. 2. Principle of how the equipment works. 3. Important parts and assemblies. 4. How the equipment achieves its purpose and necessary operating conditions. 5. Most likely failure modes, causes and corrections. 6. On site demonstration. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Carrier B. JCl/York C. Trane D. AAON E. Daikin 2.02 GENERAL A. Fan coil units shall be factory built, manufactured as scheduled on Drawings. Contractor shall field verify exact clearances required for fan coil units. Units shall be field located as required and shop drawings shall indicate final location for approval by Architect/Engineer. B. Furnish and install fan coil units of the type, capacities, ratings and drive motor horsepower shown on the Drawings. 2.03 CASING A. Unit casing shall be constructed of minimum 18-gauge galvanized steel, able to withstand a 125 hour salt spray test per ASTM 13117. Unit shall have access panels on each side constructed of minimum 18-gauge galvanized steel. B. Unit casing shall be insulated with single wall, 1 inch thick, foil-faced fiberglass insulation with a minimum rating of R-4 and shall be rated for a maximum air velocity of 5,000 feet per minute. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 23 82 19 -2 FAN COIL UNIT 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop C. All access panels shall be fully insulated and attached with fasteners. No piping or conduit shall pass through any access panel. D. All units shall be provided with hanger rod holes in top and bottom panels for suspension installations. 2.04 DRAIN PAN A. All units shall be provided with one-piece stainless steel drain pan with welded corner construction. Drain pan shall be insulated with closed cell foam insulation. B. For units installed above an accessible ceiling, provide secondary drain pan. Drain pan shall be galvanized steel and shall slope at a minimum of 1/8" per foot to drain connection. The drain pan shall extend 3" larger on all sides than unit footprint. 2.05 HYDRONIC COILS A. Coils shall be aluminum plate fin type and shall be bonded to copper tubes by mechanical expansion. The use of soldering or tinning during the fin-to-tube bonding process will not be accepted. Copper tubes shall have a minimum outside diameter of 0.5 inches and shall have a minimum thickness of 0.016 inches. B. Copper tubes shall comply with ASTM B75/B75M. C. Maximum face velocity across cooling coils shall be 500 FPM, unless noted otherwise on equipment schedule. D. All coils shall be hydrostatically tested with air under water at 300 psig minimum pressure and rated for a maximum of 450 psig working pressure at 200°F. 2.06 DIRECT EXPANSION COIL A. Direct expansion coils shall be furnished with a brass distributor with solder type connections, Suction and discharge connections shall be on the same end regardless of row depth. Coils shall have intertwined circuits for equal operation on each circuit. Provide the number of distributors equal to the number of refrigerant circuits to the associated condensing unit. Refrigerant piping connections shall be clearly labeled on outside of unit. B. Direct expansion coils shall be selected to match the saturated suction temperature and capacity of the associated condensing unit. C. Maximum face velocity across cooling coil shall be 500 FPM, unless noted otherwise on equipment schedule. 2.07 ELECTRIC HEATING COIL A. The unit manufacturer shall furnish an electric resistance heating assembly with heating capacity, voltage and stages as scheduled. The heater assembly shall be factory wired and installed with over temperature protection. B. The heater assembly shall be designed and rated for installation in a blow through configuration. C. The heater assembly shall be furnished with an incoming power distribution block capable of accepting at least 125% of the calculated current load. D. The heater assembly shall be listed for zero clearance meeting all NFPA 70 requirements and shall be cETL listed in compliance with UL 1995. 2.08 FAN AND MOTOR ASSEMBLY A. Units shall be furnished with double inlet, forward curved centrifugal blower that shall be statically and dynamically balanced as an assembly. B. Fan and motor assembly shall be in a direct drive, draw-through configuration. Belt drive units are not acceptable. C. Fan motors shall be electronically commutated with thermal overload protection and constant torque operation. The motor shall be programmed in the factory to meet the specified airflow value. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 23 82 19 -3 FAN COIL UNIT 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop D. Fan motors shall be permanently lubricated and sealed bearings and shall operate on single or three phase power. E. Fan motors shall be installed, factory programmed and wired to the control panel. Motor wiring shall be terminated in a junction box external to unit casing. F. Fan motors shall be internally isolated from unit casing. 2.09 FILTERS A. All units shall be furnished with a flat filter rack with hinged access on both sides designed for a 2" nominal standard sized filter. B. Factory shall provide one complete set of spare throwaway filters for each unit. C. Refer to 23 41 00-Air Filters for additional information. 2.10 MIXING PLENUM A. Mixing plenum shall be field fabricated and insulated as shown on drawings. 2.11 CONTROLS A. The unit fan motor shall be completely factory wired to an external electrical enclosure. An external main incoming power non-fused disconnect switch shall be factory furnished and wired by the unit manufacturer for single point power connection. B. Each unit shall include a 24 VAC control circuit transformer, motor control board, motor circuit fusing and terminal strip for connection of field wiring. C. The unit shall be factory run tested and end devices shall be factory wired to terminal strip and tested for wiring continuity. D. Each unit shall include a low voltage fan speed control device. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All HVAC equipment shall be installed as per manufacturer's printed installation instructions. B. All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the Drawings or in the Specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturer's requirements. C. Locations of equipment shown on the drawings are approximate. Locate units so that they may be adequately serviced and maintained. D. During construction, provide temporary closures of taped polyethylene on openings to prevent construction dust and debris from entering unit. E. Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings lubricated, and fans have been test run under observation. F. Set each unit level and straight. G. Remove all shipping blocks and restraints. H. Make condensate drain connection. Verify that drain is properly trapped, vented and sloped to condensate termination location as shown on the drawings. I. Make duct connections using flexible connectors. Verify that duct is independently and adequately supported. 3.02 MANUFACTURER START-UP SERVICES A. Provide authorized representative of the manufacturer to inspect the assembly and installation of each unit. No start-up, testing or adjusting may be performed until the representative has determined that the unit has been properly installed. B. The representative shall start-up, test and adjust units. The representative shall perform operational checks to make certain that all equipment and controls of the systems are operating properly. If defects or improper adjustments are found, they shall be corrected and tested again. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 23 82 19-4 FAN COIL UNIT 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop C. The representative shall prepare and provide a written start-up report to include any measurements taken, test results obtained or corrective actions required. D. If unit has packaged controls, the manufacturer's representative shall attend a separate meeting on-site with the EMCS contractor to coordinate and execute programming between the packaged equipment controls and the EMCS. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 23 82 19 -5 FAN COIL UNIT 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SECTION 23 82 39 ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electric unit heaters. 1.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. Section 23 02 00- Basic Materials and Methods for HVAC shall be included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. C. The scope of the work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this section, with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use. 1.03 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Section 23 09 63- Energy Management and Control System (EMCS): Installation of thermostats and other controls components. B. Section 26 29 26- Miscellaneous Electrical Controls and Wiring: Installation and wiring of thermostats and other controls components. 1.04 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 02 00- Basic Materials and Methods for HVAC B. Section 23 05 13- Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment 1.05 REFERENCES A. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. B. NFPA 90B - Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air-Conditioning Systems; 2024. C. UL 1278- Movable and Wall-or Ceiling-Hung Electric Room Heaters; 2014. D. UL 1995- Heating and Cooling Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. E. UL 2021 - Fixed and Location Dedicated Electric Room Heaters; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL 1995, UL 1278, and UL 2021 as applicable), Intertek (ETL), or other third-party national recognized testing laboratory acceptable to Authority Having Jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose indicated. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Unit shall be stored and handled per unit manufacturer's recommendations. 1.08 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division One. B. Submit shop drawings indicating components, assembly, dimensions, weights, and loadings, required clearances, and location and size of field connections. Indicate equipment, piping and connections, valves, strainers, and electronic valves required for complete system. C. Submit product data indicating rated capacities, weights, accessories, electrical nameplate data, and wiring diagrams. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate rigging, assembly, and installation instructions. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's warranty one-year parts and labor warranty. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 23 82 39 - 1 ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 1.10 OPERATIONS PERSONNEL TRAINING A. Provide a training session for the owner's operations personnel. Training session shall be performed by a qualified person who is knowledgeable in the subject system/equipment. Submit a training agenda two (2)weeks prior to the proposed training session for review and approval. Training session shall include at the minimum: 1. Purpose of equipment. 2. Principle of how the equipment works. 3. Important parts and assemblies. 4. How the equipment achieves its purpose and necessary operating conditions. 5. Most likely failure modes, causes and corrections. 6. On site demonstration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Q-mark B. Reznor C. Modine Manufacturing Company D. TPI Corporation (Markel, Raywall, Redd-i) 2.02 CABINET A. Construct casing of 18 gage steel and threaded pipe connections for hanger rods. B. The control enclosure compartment factory installed to the bottom of heater shall be Nprovided with hinged and latched access door that opens from bottom to simplify wiring installation and maintenance. C. Provide discharge louvers which are adjustable in both horizontal and vertical directions. Provide baked enamel finish to louvers. 2.03 FAN A. Manufacture fan blades from anodized aluminum. B. Provide quiet, propeller-blade fan, connected directly to drive motor. C. Statically and dynamically balanced fans and equip with substantial fan guard. D. Horizontal models with permanently lubricated sleeve bearings. E. Vertical models with grease lubricated ball bearings. 2.04 MOTOR A. Motors shall be totally enclosed, permanently lubricated, and thermally protected. B. Motor shall be factory wired to control enclosure compartment. C. Both motor and fan blade shall be factory installed within heater casing on rubber isolators to minimize vibration and noise. 2.05 ELECTRIC HEATING ELEMENTS A. Element shall consist of a nickel-chromium resistance wire surrounded with magnesium oxide and sheathed in steel spiral-finned tubes. B. Elements shall have kilowatt rating as scheduled in drawings. 2.06 THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION A. Equip heaters with auto reset thermal overloads that are sealed to prevent moisture to enclosure. B. Thermal overload protection shall shut down element and motor if safe operating temperatures are exceeded. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 23 82 39 -2 ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 2.07 CONTROLS A. Provide heaters with 24-volt transformer and control circuit, NEC required fusing, power-on indicator, thermostat with stainless steel capillary sensor and three position switch factory- installed and wired in the control enclosure compartment to the terminal block for ease of wiring. B. Thermostat shall be field adjustable from 40 to 70°F. 2.08 MOUNTING HARDWARE A. Provide with universal mounting bracket and all necessary accessory hardware. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that space is ready for installation of units as indicated on shop drawings. B. Verify that proper power supply is available. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install unit heaters in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install unit heaters in accordance with NFPA 70 and NFPA 90B. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 23 82 39 -3 ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SECTION 26 02 00 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR ELECTRICAL PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all Work herein. B. The Contract Drawings indicate the extent and general arrangement of the systems. If any departure from the Contract Drawings are deemed necessary by the Contractor, details of such departures and the reasons therefore, shall be submitted to the Architect for approval as soon as practicable. No such departures shall be made without the prior written approval of the Architect. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Work included under this Contract consists of the furnishing and installation of all equipment and material necessary and required to form the complete and functioning systems in all of its various phases, all as shown on the accompanying Drawings and/or described in these Specifications. The contractor shall review all pertinent drawings, including those of other contracts prior to commencement of Work. B. This Division requires the furnishing and installing of all items Specified herein, indicated on the Drawings or reasonably inferred as necessary for safe and proper operation; including every article, device or accessory(whether or not specifically called for by item) reasonably necessary to facilitate each system's functioning as indicated by the design and the equipment specified. Elements of the work include, but are not limited to, materials, labor, supervision, transportation, storage, equipment, utilities, all required permits, licenses and inspections. All work performed under this Section shall be in accordance with the Project Manual, Drawings and Specifications and is subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract. C. The approximate locations of Electrical items are indicated on the Drawings. These Drawings are not intended to give complete and accurate details in regard to location of outlets, apparatus, etc. Exact locations are to be determined by actual measurements at the building, and will in all cases be subject to the Review of the Owner or Engineer, who reserves the right to make any reasonable changes in the locations indicated without additional cost to the Owner. D. Items specifically mentioned in the Specifications but not shown on the Drawings and/or items shown on Drawings but not specifically mentioned in the Specifications shall be installed by the Contractor under the appropriate section of work as if they were both specified and shown. E. All discrepancies within the Contract Documents discrepancies between the Contract Documents and actual job-site conditions shall be reported to the Owner or Engineer so that they will be resolved prior to the bidding, where this cannot be done at least 7 working days prior to bid; the greater or more costly of the discrepancy shall be bid. All labor and materials required to perform the work described shall be included as part of this Contract. F. It is the intention of this Section of the Specifications to outline minimum requirements to furnish the Owner with a turn-key and fully operating system in cooperation with other trades. G. It is the intent of the above "Scope"to give the Contractor a general outline of the extent of the Work involved; however, it is not intended to include each and every item required for the Work. Anything omitted from the "Scope" but shown on the Drawings, or specified later, or necessary for a complete and functioning electrical system shall be considered a part of the overall "Scope". H. The Contractor shall rough-in fixtures and equipment furnished by others from rough-in and placement drawings furnished by others. The Contractor shall make final connection to fixtures and equipment furnished by others. I. Contractor shall participate in the commissioning process; including but not limited to meeting attendance, completion of checklists and participation in functional testing. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 26 02 00- 1 METHODS FOR ELECTRICAL 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. General Conditions B. Supplementary Conditions C. Division One 1.04 COOPERATION WITH TRADES A. Cooperation with trades of adjacent, related, or affected materials or operations shall be considered a part of this work in order to affect timely and accurate placing of work and bring together in proper and correct sequence, the work of such trades. 1.05 REFERENCES A. National Electrical Code (NEC) B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) C. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL) D. Insulated Cable Engineer's Association (ICEA). E. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA). F. Institute of Electrical and Electronic's Engineers (IEEE). G. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). H. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). I. International Energy Conservation Code (IECC). 1.06 COMPLETE FUNCTIONING OF WORK A. All work fairly implied as essential to the complete functioning of the electrical systems shown on the Drawings and Specifications shall be completed as part of the work of this Division unless specifically stated otherwise. It is the intention of the Drawings and Specifications to establish the types of the systems, but not set forth each item essential to the functioning of the system. In case of doubt as to the work intended, or in the event of amplification or clarification thereof, the Contractor shall call upon the Architect for supplementary instructions, Drawings, etc. B. Contractor shall review all pertinent Drawings and adjust his work to all conditions shown there on. Discrepancies between Plans, Specifications, and actual field conditions shall be brought to the prompt attention of the Architect. 1. Approximate location of transformers, feeders, branch circuits, outlets, lighting and power panels, outlets for special systems, etc., are indicated on the Drawings. However, the Drawings, do not give complete and accurate detailed locations of such outlets, conduit runs, etc., and exact locations must be determined by actual field measurement. Such locations will, at all times, be subject to the approval of the Architect. 2. Communicate with the Architect and secure his approval of any outlet (light fixture, receptacle, switch, etc.) location about which there may be the least question. Outlets obviously placed in a location not suitable to the finished room or without specific approval, shall be removed and relocated when so directed by the Architect. Location of light fixtures shall be coordinated with reflected ceiling plans. C. Additional coordination with mechanical contractor may be required to allow adequate clearances of mechanical equipment, fixtures and associated appurtenances. Contractor to notify Architect and Engineer of unresolved clearances, conflicts or equipment locations. 1.07 SCHEMATIC NATURE OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The contract documents are schematic in nature in that they are only to establish scope and a minimum level of quality. They are not to be used as actual working construction drawings. The actual working construction drawings shall be the approved shop drawings. 1.08 CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATIONS A. An approved contractor for the work under this division shall be: DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 26 02 00-2 METHODS FOR ELECTRICAL 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 1. A specialist in this field and have the personnel, experience, training, and skill, and the organization to provide a practical working system. 2. Able to furnish evidence of having contracted for and installed not less than 3 systems of comparable size and type that have served their Owners satisfactorily for not less than 3 years. 3. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality. Persons performing electrical work shall be required to be licensed. Onsite supervision, journeyman shall have minimum of journeyman license. Helpers, apprentices shall have minimum of apprentice license. 1.09 DATE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. The date of final acceptance shall be the date of owner occupancy, or the date all punch list items have been completed or final payment has been received. Refer to Division One for additional requirements. B. The date of final acceptance shall be documented in writing and signed by the architect, owner and contractor. 1.10 DEFINITIONS AND SYMBOLS A. General Explanation: A substantial amount of construction and Specification language constitutes definitions for terms found in other Contract Documents, including Drawings which must be recognized as diagrammatic and schematic in nature and not completely descriptive of requirements indicated thereon. Certain terms used in Contract Documents are defined generally in this article, unless defined otherwise in Division 1. B. Definitions and explanations of this Section are not necessarily either complete or exclusive, but are general for work to the extent not stated more explicitly in another provision of the Contract Documents. C. Indicated: The term "Indicated" is a cross-reference to details, notes or schedules on the Drawings, to other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications and to similar means of recording requirements in Contract Documents. Where such terms as "Shown", "Noted", "Scheduled", "Specified" and "Detailed" are used in lieu of"Indicated", it is for the purpose of helping the reader locate cross-reference material, and no limitation of location is intended except as specifically shown. D. Directed: Where not otherwise explained, terms such as "Directed", "Requested", "Accepted", and "Permitted" mean by the Architect or Engineer. However, no such implied meaning will be interpreted to extend the Architect's or Engineer's responsibility into the Contractor's area of construction supervision. E. Reviewed: Where used in conjunction with the Engineer's response to submittals, requests for information, applications, inquiries, reports and claims by the Contractor the meaning of the term "Reviewed"will be held to limitations of Architect's and Engineer's responsibilities and duties as specified in the General and Supplemental Conditions. In no case will "Reviewed" by Engineer be interpreted as a release of the Contractor from responsibility to fulfill the terms and requirements of the Contract Documents. F. Furnish: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term "Furnish" is used to mean supply and deliver to the project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, etc., as applicable in each instance. G. Install: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term "Install" is used to describe operations at the project site including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protection, cleaning and similar operations, as applicable in each instance. H. Provide: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term "Provide" is used to mean "Furnish and Install", complete and ready for intended use, as applicable in each instance. I. Installer: Entity (person or firm)engaged by the Contractor or its subcontractor or Sub- contractor for performance of a particular unit of work at the project site, including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 26 02 00-3 METHODS FOR ELECTRICAL 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop curing, protection, cleaning and similar operations, as applicable in each instance. It is a general requirement that such entities (Installers) be expert in the operations they are engaged to perform. J. Imperative Language: Used generally in Specifications. Except as otherwise indicated, requirements expressed imperatively are to be performed by the Contractor. For clarity of reading at certain locations, contrasting subjective language is used to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor, or when so noted by other identified installers or entities. K. Minimum Quality/Quantity: In every instance, the quality level or quantity shown or specified is intended as minimum quality level or quantity of work to be performed or provided. Except as otherwise specifically indicated, the actual work may either comply exactly with that minimum (within specified tolerances), or may exceed that minimum within reasonable tolerance limits. In complying with requirements, indicated or scheduled numeric values are either minimums or maximums as noted or as appropriate for the context of the requirements. Refer instances of uncertainty to Owner or Engineer via a request for information (RFI) for decision before proceeding. L. Abbreviations and Symbols: The language of Specifications and other Contract Documents including Drawings is of an abbreviated type in certain instances, and implies words and meanings which will be appropriately interpreted. Actual word abbreviations of a self- explanatory nature have been included in text of Specifications and Drawings. Specific abbreviations and symbols have been established, principally for lengthy technical terminology and primarily in conjunction with coordination of Specification requirements with notations on Drawings and in Schedules. These are frequently defined in Section at first instance of use or on a Legend and Symbol Drawing. Trade and industry association names and titles of generally recognized industry standards are frequently abbreviated. Singular words will be interpreted as plural and plural words will be interpreted as singular where applicable and where full context of Contract Documents so indicate. Except as otherwise indicated, graphic symbols and abbreviations used on Drawings and in Specifications are those recognized in construction industry for indicated purposes. Where not otherwise noted symbols and abbreviations are defined by 1993 ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook, chapter 34 "Abbreviations and Symbols", ASME and ASPE published standards. 1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and other information needed for identification. B. Deliver products to the project at such time as the project is ready to receive the equipment, pipe or duct properly protected from incidental damage and weather damage. C. Damaged equipment shall be promptly removed from the site and new, undamaged equipment shall be installed in its place promptly with no additional charge to the Owner. 1.12 SUBMITTALS A. Coordinate with Division 01 for submittal timetable requirements, unless noted otherwise within thirty(30) days after the Contract is awarded. The Contractor shall submit an electronic copy of a complete set of shop drawings and complete data covering each item of equipment or material. The submittal of each item requiring a submittal must be received by the Architect or Engineer within the above thirty day period. The Architect or Engineer shall not be responsible for any delays or costs incurred due to excessive shop drawing review time for submittals received after the thirty (30) day time limit. The Architect and Engineer will retain a copy of all shop drawings for their files. All literature pertaining to items subject to Shop Drawing submittal shall be submitted at one time. Submittals shall be placed in one electronic file in PDF 8.0 format and bookmarked for individual specification sections. Individual electronic files of submittals for individual specifications shall not be permitted. Each submittal shall include the following items: 1. A cover sheet with the names and addresses of the Project, Architect, MEP Engineer, General Contractor and the Subcontractor making the submittal. The cover sheet shall also contain the section number covering the item or items submitted and the item DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 26 02 00-4 METHODS FOR ELECTRICAL 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop nomenclature or description. 2. An index page with a listing of all data included in the Submittal. 3. A list of variations page with a listing all variations, including unfurnished or additional required accessories, items or other features, between the submitted equipment and the specified equipment. If there are no variations, then this page shall state "NO VARIATIONS". Where variations affect the work of other Contractors, then the Contractor shall certify on this page that these variations have been fully coordinated with the affected Contractors and that all expenses associated with the variations will be paid by the submitting Contractor. This page will be signed by the submitting Contractor. 4. Equipment information including manufacturer's name and designation, size, performance and capacity data as applicable. All applicable Listings, Labels, Approvals and Standards shall be clearly indicated. 5. Dimensional data and scaled drawings as applicable to show that the submitted equipment will fit the space available with all required Code and maintenance clearances clearly indicated and labeled at a minimum scale of 1/4" = 1'-0", as required to demonstrate that the alternate or substituted product will fit in the space available. 6. Identification of each item of material or equipment matching that indicated on the Drawings. 7. Sufficient pictorial, descriptive and diagrammatic data on each item to show its conformance with the Drawings and Specifications. Any options or special requirements or accessories shall be so indicated. All applicable information shall be clearly indicated with arrows or another approved method. 8. Additional information as required in other Sections of this Division. 9. Certification by the General Contractor and Subcontractor that the material submitted is in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications, signed and dated in long hand. Submittals that do not comply with the above requirements shall be returned to the Contractor and shall be marked "REVISE AND RESUBMIT". B. Refer to Division 1 for additional information on shop drawings and submittals. C. Equipment and materials submittals and shop drawings will be reviewed for compliance with design concept only. It will be assumed that the submitting Contractor has verified that all items submitted can be installed in the space allotted. Review of shop drawings and submittals shall not be considered as a verification or guarantee of measurements or building conditions. D. Where shop drawings and submittals are marked "REVIEWED", the review of the submittal does not indicate that submittals have been checked in detail nor does it in any way relieve the Contractor from his responsibility to furnish material and perform work as required by the Contract Documents. E. Shop drawings shall be reviewed and returned to the Contractor with one of the following categories indicated: 1. REVIEWED: Contractor need take no further submittal action, shall include this submittal in the O&M manual and may order the equipment submitted on. 2. REVIEWED AS NOTED: Contractor shall submit a letter verifying that required exceptions to the submittal have been received and complied with including additional accessories or coordination action as noted, and shall include this submittal and compliance letter in the O&M manual. The contractor may order the equipment submitted on at the time of the returned submittal providing the Contractor complies with the exceptions noted. 3. NOT APPROVED: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material, equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is not approved, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the Specifications and/or drawings. Contractor shall not order equipment that is not approved. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. 4. REVISE AND RESUBMIT: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material, equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is marked revise and resubmit, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the Specifications and/or provide as noted on previous shop drawings. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 26 02 00-5 METHODS FOR ELECTRICAL 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Contractor shall not order equipment marked revise and resubmit. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. 5. CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION REQUIRED: Contractor shall resubmit submittal on material, equipment or method of installation. The Contractor's stamp is required stating the submittal meets all conditions of the contract documents. The stamp shall be signed by the General Contractor. The submittal will not be reviewed if the stamp is not placed and signed on all shop drawings. 6. MANUFACTURER NOT AS SPECIFIED: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material, equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is marked manufacturer not as specified, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the specifications. Contractor shall not order equipment where submittal is marked manufacturer not as specified. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. F. Materials and equipment which are purchased or installed without shop drawing review shall be at the risk of the Contractor and the cost for removal and replacement of such materials and equipment and related work which is judged unsatisfactory by the Owner or Engineer for any reason shall be at the expense of the Contractor. The responsible Contractor shall remove the material and equipment noted above and replace with specified equipment or material at his own expense when directed in writing by the Architect or Engineer. G. Shop Drawing Submittals shall be complete and checked prior to submission to the Engineer for review. H. Furnish detailed shop drawings, descriptive literature, table of contents listing all items being submitted at the beginning of each submittal package, physical data and a specification critique for each section indicating "compliance" and/or"variations"for the following items: 1. Switchboards 2. Distribution Panelboards 3. Panelboards 4. Wiring Gutters 5. Heavy Duty Disconnect Switches 6. Lighting Fixtures 7. Lighting Contactors 8. Time Clocks 9. Lighting Control System 10. Photocells 11. Wiring Devices and Plates 12. Conduit and Fittings 13. Wire 14. General Purpose Dry Type Transformers 15. Harmonic Mitigating Type Transformers 16. Emergency Generator 17. Automatic Transfer Switches 18. Sound Reinforcing System 19. Fire Alarm System 20. Surge Protection Devices (SPD) 21. Lightning Protection I. Refer to each specification section for additional requirements. 1.13 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Division 1 and in addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, include the following information for equipment items: 1. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replacement parts. 2. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 26 02 00-6 METHODS FOR ELECTRICAL 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions. 3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions. 4. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules. 1.14 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Prepare coordination drawings to a scale of 1/4"=V-0" or larger; detailing major elements, components, and systems of mechanical equipment and materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and building components. Indicate locations where space is limited for installation and access and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the Work, including (but not necessarily limited to)the following: 1. Indicate the proposed locations of pipe, duct, equipment, and other materials. Include the following: a. Wall and type locations. b. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation. c. Locations of light fixtures and sprinkler heads. d. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, including tube removal, filter removal, and space for equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance. e. Equipment connections and support details. f. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations. g. Routing of storm and sanitary sewer piping. h. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations. i. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases. j. Valve stem movement. k. Structural floor, wall and roof opening sizes and details. 2. Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction. 3. Prepare floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations. 4. Prepare reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installations, air distribution devices, light fixtures, communication systems components, and other ceiling-mounted items. B. This Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of all items that will affect the installation of the work of this Division. This coordination shall include, but not be limited to: voltage, ampacity, capacity, electrical and piping connections, space requirements, sequence of construction, building requirements and special conditions. C. By submitting shop drawings on the project, this Contractor is indicating that all necessary coordination has been completed and that the systems, products and equipment submitted can be installed in the building and will operate as specified and intended, in full coordination with all other Contractors and Subcontractors. 1.15 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Prepare Record Documents in accordance with the requirements of Division 00 and Division 01, in addition to the requirements specified in Division 26. B. The Contractor shall maintain a separate set of clearly and legibly marked Record Drawings on the job site to record all changes and modifications, including, but not limited to the following: work details, alterations to meet site conditions, and changes made by "Change Order" notices. Mark the drawings with colored pencil(s). These shall be available for review by the Owner, Architect or Engineer during the entire construction stage. C. The Record Drawings shall be updated concurrently as construction progresses, and in no case less frequently than a daily basis. They shall indicate accurate dimensions for all buried or concealed work, precise locations of all concealed pipe or duct, locations of all concealed valves, controls and devices and any deviations from the work shown on the Construction Documents. All dimensions shall include at least two dimensions to permanent structure points. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 26 02 00-7 METHODS FOR ELECTRICAL 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop D. Engage the services of a Land Surveyor or Professional Engineer registered in the state in which the project is located as specified herein to record the locations and invert elevations of underground installations. E. If the Contractor does not keep an accurate set of Record Drawings, the pay request may be altered or delayed at the request of the Architect. Delivery of Record Documents is a condition of final acceptance. Record Drawings shall be furnished in addition to Shop Drawings. F. The Contractor shall submit an electronic copy of the record documents in PDF format and one (1)full size set of Record Drawing prints to the Architect or Engineer for review prior to scheduling the final inspection at the completion of the work. The drawings shall have the name(s) and seal(s)of the Engineer(s) removed or blanked out and shall be clearly marked and signed on each sheet as follows: CERTIFIED RECORD DRAWINGS DATE: (NAME OF GENERAL CONTRACTOR) BY: (SIGNATURE) (NAME OF SUBCONTRACTOR) BY: (SIGNATURE) 1.16 CERTIFICATIONS AND TEST REPORTS A. Submit a detailed schedule for completion and testing of each system indicating scheduled dates for completion of system installation and outlining tests to be performed and schedule date for each test. This detailed completion and test schedule shall be submittal at least 90 days before the projected Project completion date. B. Test result reporting forms shall be submitted for review no later than the date of the detailed schedule submitted. C. Submit 4 copies of all certifications and test reports to the Architect or Engineer for review adequately in advance of completion of the Work to allow for remedial action as required to correct deficiencies discovered in equipment and systems. D. Certifications and test reports to be submitted shall include, but not be limited to those items outlined in Section of Division 26. 1.17 MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Coordinate with Division 1 for maintenance manual requirements, unless noted otherwise bind together in "D ring type" binders by National model no. 79-883 or equal, binders shall be large enough to allow 1/4" of spare capacity. Three (3) sets of all approved shop drawing submittals, fabrication drawings, bulletins, maintenance instructions, operating instructions and parts exploded views and lists for each and every piece of equipment furnished under this Specification. All sections shall be typed and indexed into sections and ed for easy reference and shall utilize the individual specification section numbers shown in the Electrical Specifications as an organization guideline. Bulletins containing information about equipment that is not installed on the project shall be properly marked up or stripped and reassembled. All pertinent information required by the Owner for proper operation and maintenance of equipment supplied by Division 26 shall be clearly and legibly set forth in memoranda that shall, likewise, be bound with bulletins. B. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Special Project Conditions, in addition to the requirements specified in Division 26, include the following information for equipment items: 1. Identifying names, name tags designations and locations for all equipment. 2. Fault Current calculations and Coordination Study. 3. Reviewed shop drawing submittals with exceptions noted compliance letter. 4. Fabrication drawings. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 26 02 00-8 METHODS FOR ELECTRICAL 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 5. Equipment and device bulletins and data sheets clearly highlighted to show equipment installed on the project and including performance curves and data as applicable, i.e., description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and model numbers of replacement parts. 6. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions. 7. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions, servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules. 8. Equipment name plate data. 9. Wiring diagrams. 10. Exploded parts views and parts lists for all equipment and devices. 11. Color coding charts for all painted equipment and conduit. 12. Location and listing of all spare parts and special keys and tools furnished to the Owner. 13. Furnish recommended lubrication schedule for all required lubrication points with listing of type and approximate amount of lubricant required. C. Refer to Division 1 for additional information on Operating and Maintenance Manuals. D. Operating and Maintenance Manuals shall be turned over to the Owner or Engineer a minimum of 14 working days prior to the beginning of the operator training period. 1.18 OPERATOR TRAINING A. The Contractor shall furnish the services of factory trained specialists to instruct the Owner's operating personnel. The Owner's operator training shall include 12 hours of onsite training in three 4 hour shifts. B. Before proceeding with the instruction of Owner Personnel, prepare a typed outline in triplicate, listing the subjects that will be covered in this instruction, and submit the outline for review by the Owner. At the conclusion of the instruction period obtain the signature of each person being instructed on each copy of the reviewed outline to signify that he has a proper understanding of the operation and maintenance of the systems and resubmit the signed outlines. C. Refer to other Division 26 Sections for additional Operator Training requirements. 1.19 SITE VISITATION A. Visit the site of the proposed construction in order to fully understand the facilities, difficulties and restriction attending the execution of the work. B. Before submitting a bid, it will be necessary for each Contractor whose work is involved to visit the site and ascertain for himself the conditions to be met therein in installing his work and make due provision for same in his bid. It will be assumed that this Contractor in submitting his bid has visited the premises and that his bid covers all work necessary to properly install the equipment shown. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with this requirement shall not be considered justification for the omission or faulty installation of any work covered by these Specifications and Drawings. C. Understand the existing utilities from which services will be supplied; verify locations of utility services, and determine requirements for connections. D. Determine in advance that equipment and materials proposed for installation fit into the confines indicated. 1.20 WARRANTY A. The undertaking of the work described in this Division shall be considered equivalent to the issuance, as part of this work, of a specific guarantee extending one year beyond the date of completion of work and acceptance by Owner, against defects in materials and workmanship. Materials, appliances and labor necessary to effect repairs and replacement so as to maintain said work in good functioning order shall be provided as required. Replacements necessitated DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 26 02 00-9 METHODS FOR ELECTRICAL 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop by normal wear in use or by Owner's abuse are not included under this guarantee. B. All normal and extended warranties shall include parts, labor, miscellaneous materials, travel time, incidental expenses, freight/shipping, refrigerant, oils, lubricants, belts, filters and any expenses related to service call required to diagnose warranty problems. 1.21 TRANSFER OF ELECTRONIC FILES A. Project documents are not intended or represented to be suitable for reuse by Architect/Owner or others on extensions of this project or on any other project. Any such reuse or modification without written verification or adaptation by Engineer, as appropriate for the specific purpose intended, will be at Architect/Owner's risk and without liability or legal exposure to Engineer or its consultants from all claims, damages, losses and expense, including attorney's fees arising out of or resulting thereof. B. Because data stored in electric media format can deteriorate or be modified inadvertently, or otherwise without authorization of the data's creator, the party receiving the electronic files agrees that it will perform acceptance tests or procedures within sixty (60) days of receipt, after which time the receiving party shall be deemed to have accepted the data thus transferred to be acceptable. Any errors detected within the sixty(60) day acceptance period will be corrected by the party delivering the electronic files. Engineer is not responsible for maintaining documents stored in electronic media format after acceptance by the Architect/Owner. C. When transferring documents in electronic media format, Engineer makes no representations as to the long-term compatibility, usability or readability of documents resulting from the use of software application packages, operating systems, or computer hardware differing from those used by Engineer at the beginning of the Project. D. Any reuse or modifications will be Contractor's sole risk and without liability or legal exposure to Architect, Engineer or any consultant. E. The Texas Board of Architectural Examiners (TBAE) has stated that it is in violation of Texas law for persons other than the Architect of record to revise the Architectural drawings without the Architect's written consent. 1. It is agreed that"MEP" hard copy or computer-generated documents will not be issued to any other party except directly to the Architect/Owner. The contract documents are contractually copyrighted and cannot be used for any other project or purpose except as specifically indicated in AIA B-141 Standard Form of Agreement Between Architect and Owner. 2. If the client, Architect or Owner of the project requires electronic media for"record purposes", then AutoCAD/ Revit documents will be prepared by Engineer on electronic media such as removable memory devices, flash drives or CD's. These documents can also be submitted via file transfer protocols. AutoCAD/ Revit files will be submitted with all title block references intact to permit the end user to only view and plot the drawings. Revisions will not be permitted in this configuration. 3. At the Architect/Owner's request, Engineer will assist the Contractor in the preparation of the submittals and prepare one copy of AutoCAD/ Revit files on electronic media or submit through file transfer protocols. The electronic media will be prepared with all indicia of documents ownership removed. The electronic media will be prepared in a ".rvt"or".dwg" format to permit the end user to revise the drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SUBSTITUTIONS A. The names and manufacturers and model numbers have been used in the Contract documents to establish types of equipment and standards of quality. Where more than one manufacturer is named for a specific item of equipment, only one of the specified manufacturers will be considered for approval. Where only one manufacturer is mentioned with the phrase "or approved equal", Contractor may submit an alternate manufacturer for consideration, provided the following conditions are met: 1. Submit alternate equipment with complete descriptive data in shop drawing form. Provide sample of equipment upon request for review by Architect. Samples will be returned if DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 26 02 00- 10 METHODS FOR ELECTRICAL 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop requested in writing. 2. Alternate equipment must be equal from the standpoint of materials, construction and performance. 3. Alternate submittal must be presented to the Engineer/Architect ten (10) days prior to bid date for approval. B. The Architect and Engineer shall be the sole judge of quality and equivalence of equipment, materials and methods. 2.02 PRODUCT LISTING A. Products used on this project shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories. 2.03 ACCESS DOORS A. Wherever access is required in walls or ceilings to concealed junction boxes, pull boxes, equipment, etc., installed under this Division, furnish a hinged access door and frame with flush latch handle to another Division for installation. Doors shall be as follows: 1. Plaster Surfaces: Milcor Style K. 2. Ceramic Tile Surfaces: Milcor Style M. 3. Drywall Surfaces: Milcor Style DW. 4. Install panels only in locations approved by the Architect. 2.04 EQUIPMENT PADS A. Provide 4-inch-high concrete pads for indoor floor mounted equipment. Pads shall conform to the shape of the equipment with a minimum of 6 inch beyond the equipment. Top and sides of pads shall be troweled to a smooth finish, equivalent to the floor. External corners shall be bullnosed to a 3/4" radius, unless shown otherwise. B. Provide 6-inch-high concrete pads for all exterior mounted equipment. Pads shall conform to the shape of the equipment with a minimum of 6 inch beyond the equipment. Provide a 4-foot monolithic extension to the pad in front of the equipment for service when mounted on a non- finished area (i.e. landscape, gravel, clay, etc.)Top and sides of pads shall be troweled to a smooth finish. External corners shall be bullnosed to a 3/4" radius, unless shown otherwise. C. Provide a minimum 6-inch-high, steel reinforced concrete pad for generators. Pads shall be sized 6" larger that the outside perimeter dimensions. Provide a 4-foot monolithic extension to the pad around the equipment for service when mounted on a non-finished area (i.e. landscape, gravel, clay, etc.). Refer to structural details. Top and sides of pads shall be troweled to a smooth finish. External corners shall be bullnosed to a 3/4" radius, unless shown otherwise. The generator shall be bolted to the concrete pad per the manufacturers details. D. Provide steel reinforced concrete pad for utility transformers. Pads shall comply with Utility Company Standards. 2.05 ESCUTCHEONS A. Provide heavy chrome or nickel plated plates, of approved pattern, on conduit passing through walls, floors and ceilings in finished areas. Where conduit passes through a sleeve, no point of the conduit shall touch the building construction. Caulk around such conduit with sufficient layers of two hour rated firesafing by Thermafiber 4.0 P.C.F. density, U.S.G. fire test 4/11/78 and seal off openings between conduit and sleeves with non-hardening mastic prior to application of escutcheon plate. Escutcheons shall be Gravler Sure-Lock, or approved equal. 2.06 SPACE LIMITATIONS A. Equipment shall be chosen which shall properly fit into the physical space provided and shown on the drawings, allowing ample room for access, servicing, removal and replacement of parts, etc. Adequate space shall be allowed for clearances in accordance with Code requirements. Physical dimensions and arrangement of equipment shall be subject to the approval of the Architect. 2.07 PAINTING A. All factory assembled equipment for electrical work, except light fixtures, that normally is delivered with a factory applied finish shall be delivered with a hard surface factory applied DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 26 02 00- 11 METHODS FOR ELECTRICAL 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop finish such as baked-on machinery enamel which will not require additional field painting. The finish shall consist of not less than 2 coats of medium gray color paint USA No. 61 Munsell Notation 8-3G, 6. 10/0.54 enamel. This Contractor shall protect this finish from damage due to construction operations until acceptance of the building. He shall be responsible for satisfactorily restoring any such finishes or replacing equipment that becomes stained or damaged. 2.08 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION A. Conduit Systems: Provide adequate marking of major conduit which is exposed or concealed in accessible spaces to distinguish each run as either a power or signal/communication conduit. Except as otherwise indicated, use orange banding with black lettering. Provide self-adhesive or snap-on type plastic markers. Indicate voltage for that raceway. Locate markers at ends of conduit runs, on pull boxes, on junction boxes, near switches and other control devices, near items of equipment served by the conductors, at points where conduit passes through walls or floors, or enters non-accessible construction and at spacings of not more than 50 feet along each run of conduit. Switch-leg conduit and short branches for power connections do not have to be marked, except where conduit is larger than 3/ inch. Branch circuit conduits,junction boxes and pull boxes shall be marked with a permanent marker indicating panel name and branch circuit numbers. B. Underground Cable Identification: Bury a continuous, preprinted, bright colored plastic ribbon cable marker with each underground cable (or group of cables), regardless of whether conductors are in conduit, duct bank, or direct buried. Locate each directly over cables, 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. C. Identification of Equipment: 1. All major equipment shall have a manufacturer's label identifying the manufacturer's address, equipment model and serial numbers, equipment size, and other pertinent data. Care shall be taken not to obliterate this nameplate in any way. Provide black back plate with white letters and numbers for normal equipment. Provide red back plate with white letters and numbers for optional emergency equipment. Provide yellow back plate with white letters and numbers for Life safety equipment. 2. A black-white-black laminated plastic engraved identifying nameplate shall be secured by stainless steel screws to each automatic transfer switch, switchboard, distribution panel, motor control center, motor starter panels and panelboards. a. Identifying nameplates shall have inch high engraved letters and shall contain the following information: 1) Name 2) Voltage 3) Phase 4) "3" or"4"wire, and 5) Where it is fed from. b. An example of a panelboard nameplate is: Center Panel— 1 HB 480/277 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire Center Fed from DP2 c. An example of an automatic transfer switch nameplate is: Center ATS#2 480/277 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire, 4 pole Center Fed from MSB and DPE 3. Each feeder device in a switchboard, distribution panel, and motor control center device shall have a nameplate showing the load served in Y2 inch high engraved letters. 4. A black-white-black laminated plastic engraved identifying nameplate shall be secured by screws to each transformer, safety switch, disconnect switch, individual motor starter, enclosed circuit breaker, wireway, and terminal cabinet. a. Identifying nameplates shall have 1/4 inch high engraved letters and shall indicate the equipment served. b. An example of a disconnect switch is: AHU-1. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 26 02 00- 12 METHODS FOR ELECTRICAL 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 5. Prohibited Markings: Markings which are intended to identify the manufacturer, vendor, or other source from which the material has been obtained are prohibited for installation within public, tenant, or common areas within the project. Also, prohibited are materials or devices which bear evidence that markings or insignias have been removed. Certification, testing (example, Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.), and approval labels are exceptions to this requirement. 6. Warning Signs: Provide warning signs where there is hazardous exposure associated with access to or operation of electrical facilities. Provide text of sufficient clarity and lettering of sufficient size to convey adequate information at each location; mount permanently in an appropriate and effective location. Comply with recognized industry standards for color and design. 7. Operational Tags: Where needed for proper and adequate information on operation and maintenance of electrical system, provide tags of plasticized card stock, either preprinted or hand printed. Tags shall convey the message, example: "DO NOT OPEN THIS SWITCH WHEN BURNER IS OPERATING." D. Identification of Wiring Devices 1. Contractor shall indicate the circuit serving each wiring device. Provide a typewritten label located on the inside face of the coverplate for all recessed mounted devices and on the outside face of the coverplate on all surface mounted devices. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING A. Trenching and backfilling and other earthwork operations required to install the facilities specified herein shall conform to the applicable requirements of Division 2 (95% of maximum standard density). Where trenching or excavation is required in improved areas, the backfill shall be compacted to a condition equal to that of adjacent undisturbed earth and the surface of the area restored to the condition existing prior to trenching or excavating operations. Provide a minimum of 3"of sand underneath all conduits. The plans indicate information pertaining to surface and sub-surface obstructions; however, this information is not guaranteed. Should obstructions be encountered whether or not shown, the Contractor shall alter routing of new work, reroute existing lines, remove obstructions where permitted, or otherwise perform whatever work is necessary to satisfy the purpose of new work and leave existing surfaces and structures in a satisfactory and serviceable condition. All work shall comply with OSHA Standards. 3.02 WORKMANSHIP AND CONCEALMENT A. The work of this Section shall be performed by workman skilled in their trade. Installation shall be consistent in completeness whether concealed or exposed. Each item of electrical work shall be concealed in walls, chases, under floors and above ceilings except: 1. Where shown to be exposed. 2. Where exposure is necessary to the proper function. 3.03 SLEEVES, CUTTING AND PATCHING A. This section shall be responsible for placing sleeves for all conduit passing through walls, partitions, sound walls, beams, floors, roof, etc. Sleeves through below-grade walls shall use water-tight fitting manufactured by O-Z/Gedney. B. Contractor shall install underground raceways including but not limited to feeders, service laterals, branch circuit and telecommunications. Contractor shall saw cut existing hard surfaces, when required for installation. Contractor shall patch surface to match existing conditions. Contractor shall replace all landscaping material when raceways are installed in these areas. Submit proposed method for patching for review. C. All cutting and patching will be done under another Division, but this Section will be responsible for timely performance of this work and layout of holes and setting sleeves. D. All un-used sleeves shall be sealed with 2 hour UL approved fire sealant manufactured by"3M" or approved equal. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 26 02 00- 13 METHODS FOR ELECTRICAL 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop E. Refer to 26 05 33 for additional requirements. 3.04 ELECTRICAL GEAR A. Install all electrical equipment in accordance with the National Electrical Code and as shown on the drawings. B. Lighting contactors, time clocks, fire alarm equipment, security equipment disconnect switches, etc. mounted in mechanical/electrical rooms shall be mounted at a working height not requiring a ladder, when wall space is available. Installation of these devices at greater elevations shall be approved by the Engineer. Contractor shall provide a coordination sketch of each mechanical/electrical room noting locations and mounting heights of all electrical devices (note bottom and top elevations) shown to be installed. Sketches shall be provided to the Engineer for review and the general contractor for coordination with other trades working in these rooms. C. Fire retardant back boards secured to drywall studs may be used for contactors, time clocks, fire alarm equipment, security equipment, and disconnect switches 60 amp or smaller.All other wall mounted devices shall be mounted to unistrut. Unistrut shall be securely mounted to the floor and structural ceiling. Toggle bolts or anchor bolts attached to drywall is not acceptable. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean lighting fixtures and equipment. B. Touch-up and refinish scratches and marred surfaces on panels, switches, starters, and transformers. 3.06 CORROSIVE AREAS A. In areas of a corrosive nature, which include but are not limited to the following: pool equipment rooms, cooling towers and areas subject to salt air, etc., provide NEMA 4 X stainless steel or fiberglass reinforced enclosures for contactors, panel boards, controllers, starters, disconnects and materials used as supporting means (i.e. plastibond unistrut, pipe, fittings). The use of spray on coating may be acceptable in some applications. 3.07 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Tests and inspection requirements shall be coordinated with Division I. B. Date for final acceptance test shall be sufficiently in advance of completion date of contract to permit alterations or adjustments necessary to achieve proper functioning of equipment prior to contract completion date. C. Conduct re-tests as directed by Architect on portions of work or equipment altered or adjusted as determined to be necessary by final acceptance test. No resultant delay or consumption of time as a result of such necessary re-test beyond contract completion date shall relieve Contractor of his responsibility under contract. D. Put circuits and equipment into service under normal conditions, collectively and separately, as may be required to determine satisfactory operation. Demonstrate equipment to operate in accordance with requirements of these specifications. Perform tests in the presence of Architect. Furnish instruments and personnel required for tests. E. Final Inspection: 1. At the time designated by the Architect, the entire system shall be inspected by the Architect and Engineer. The contractor or his representative shall be present at this inspection. 2. Panelboards, switches, fixtures, etc., shall be cleaned and in operating condition. 3. Certificates and documents required hereinbefore shall be in order and presented to the Architect prior to inspection. 4. Panel covers,junction box covers, etc., shall be removed for visual inspection of the wire, bus bars, etc. 5. After the inspection, any items which are noted as needing to be changed or corrected in order to comply with these specifications and the drawings shall be accomplished without delay. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 26 02 00- 14 METHODS FOR ELECTRICAL 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop F. The contractor shall provide a thermographic test using an independent testing laboratory using an infrared scanning device. This test shall include but not limited to all switchboards, distribution panelboards, panelboards, automatic transfer switches and other electrical distribution devices. This test shall be conducted to locate high temperature levels. This test shall be conducted between 3 to 8 months after occupancy, but not beyond the one year warranty period. Submit test to the architect and engineer using test reporting forms. All unacceptable conditions shall be corrected prior to the end of the warranty period. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 26 02 00- 15 METHODS FOR ELECTRICAL 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SECTION 26 05 19 WIRE, CABLE AND RELATED MATERIALS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Provide 600 volt building wire, cable and connectors and 300 volt wire, cable and connectors. B. WORK INCLUDED: Include the following Work in addition to items normally part of this Section. 1. Wiring for lighting, dimming controls and power. 2. Automatic Control Wiring. 3. Connection of equipment shown. 4. Fire Alarm System. 5. Voice Communications and Sound System. 6. Mineral Insulated Cable (MI) C. WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: 1. Heating, ventilating, and air conditioning equipment. 2. Structured cabling system. 3. Coaxial cables 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. UL 83-Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables B. ASTM B3 -Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire C. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code D. All wire cable and connectors shall be UL approved. E. NEMA F. NEMA Bulletin 119 1.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. 600 VOLT WIRE AND CABLE 1. Southwire 2. Encore 3. Cerro B. 300 VOLT WIRE AND CABLE 1. Westpenn 2. Beldon 3. Alpha 4. Tappan -Southwire C. FLEXIBLE CABLE SYSTEMS 1. AFC Modular Cable Systems 2. Kaf-Tech D. CONNECTORS 1. Ilsco 2. Cooper 3. AMP -TYCO 4. Burndy 5. Ideal 6. 3M 7. O.Z. Gedney 8. Thomas & Betts 9. Buchanan DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus WIRE, CABLE AND RELATED Christi 26 05 19- 1 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop MATERIALS Re-Bid Construction Documents 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings shall include, but not limited to: 1. Cutsheets of wire, cable and connectors to indicate the performance, fabrication procedures, product variations, and accessories. 1.05 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH: A. National Electrical Code. B. Local, municipal, or state codes that have jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 WIRING A. All wire shall be new and continuous without weld, splice, or joints throughout its length. It must be uniform in cross-section, free from flaws, scales and other imperfections. B. WIRE MATERIAL: Conductors shall be soft drawn, annealed copper. Aluminum wiring is not acceptable unless otherwise noted on drawings. C. TYPES: 1. Provide type "THHN/THWN-2" insulation for all buried feeders and service entrance conductors. 2. Provide type "THHN/THWN-2" insulation for all branch circuits and above grade feeders. 3. All wire No. 8 and larger shall be stranded.All wire No. 10 and smaller shall be stranded or solid. 4. Provide type "XHHW" or other 90 degrees insulation wiring for branch circuit wiring installed through continuous rows of fixture bodies. 5. All 300-volt cable including but not limited to telephone, fire alarm, data, CATV and security shall be UL listed for use in return air plenums. 6. All dimming conductors shall be 300 volt, 75 C plenum rated. Dimming conductors shall be solid. Stranded conductors are not acceptable. D. CONDUCTOR SIZES 1. Feeder conductors shall be sized for a maximum of 2% drop in rated voltage at scheduled load. 2. Branch circuit conductors shall be sized for a maximum 3% drop in the rated voltage to the longest outlet on the circuit. 3. Minimum wire shall be 12 AWG, unless otherwise shown on Drawings or required by Code. 4. Minimum wire size for 0-10v dimming controls shall be 18 AWG for conductors not exceeding 300 feet circuit length (one-way)and 16 AWG for those exceeding 300 feet (one-way). E. COLOR CODING: No. 6 or larger shall use tape for color coding. No. 8 and smaller wire shall be color coded in accordance with the governing authority requirements or as follows: 120/208 Volt Neutral: White Phase A: Black Phase B: Red Phase C: Blue Ground: Green 277/480 Volt Neutral: Gray Phase A: Brown Phase B: Purple Phase C: Yellow Ground: Green 120/240 Volt Neutral: White DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus WIRE, CABLE AND RELATED Christi 26 05 19-2 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop MATERIALS Phase A: Black Phase B: Orange Phase C: Blue Ground: Green 0-10 Volt dimming conductors Purple (source) Pink(common) 2.02 GROUNDING A. Permanently connect all conduit work, motors, starters, and other electrical equipment to grounding system in accordance with NFPA 70. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 WIRE A. Do not pull wire into conduit until Work of an injurious nature is completed. Where two or more circuits run to a single outlet box, each circuit shall be properly tagged. Wyreze or approved equal may be used as a lubricant where necessary. B. Splices shall be fully made up in outlet boxes with compression crimp-on type splice connectors. C. Joints and splices will not be permitted in service entrance or in feeders. Joints in branch circuits will be permitted where branch circuits divide, and then shall consist of one through- circuit to which the branch shall be spliced. Joints shall not be left for the fixture hanger to make. Connect joints and splices with Buchanan Series "2000" solderless connectors complete with insulating caps or properly sized twist on wire nuts. "Wago" push-in connectors are not acceptable. D. All stranded conductors shall be furnished with lugs or connectors. E. Connectors furnished with circuit breakers or switches shall be suitable for copper wire termination. F. "Sta-Cons" shall be used to terminate stranded conductors on all switches and receptacles. G. All stranded #10 and small conductors shall be terminated with an approved solderless terminal if the device or light fixture does not have provisions for clamp type securing of the conductor. H. The jacket for all travelers used on 3-way and 4-way switches shall be pink. I. Route conductors for 480Y/277 systems in a separate raceway. Do not combine with 208Y/120 volt or 120/240 volt systems. J. Emergency circuits shall not be routed with normal conductors. 3.02 BALANCING SYSTEM A. The load on each distribution and lighting panel shall be balanced to within 10% by proper arrangement of branch circuits on the different phase legs. Provide written documentation showing results. Submit with O & M manuals. 3.03 LOW VOLTAGE WIRING A. Low voltage wiring, including dimming conductors, shall be plenum rated. All wiring in mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, drywall ceiling, inaccessible areas, underground, plaster ceiling, inside concealed walls areas exposed to occupant view, and other areas subject to physical damage shall be run in conduit. B. Low voltage wiring shall be routed in separate raceways from power wiring systems. C. Sleeves shall be placed in the forms of concrete, masonry and fire rated walls, floor slabs and beams, for the passage of wiring. Sleeves should be set in place a sufficient time ahead of the concrete work so as not to delay the work. Sleeves shall be rigid galvanized steel. D. Provide Caddy J-hooks supported independently from other system to support cable at 4-foot on center or closer if required by manufacturer. E. Provide a junction box to make up all joints and splices. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus WIRE, CABLE AND RELATED Christi 26 05 19-3 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop MATERIALS F. Provide dimming conductors for all lighting circuits located in spaces with dimmer switches and theatrical lighting as indicated on the drawings and as specified. 3.04 CABLE SUPPORTS A. Provide cable supports in all vertical raceways in accordance with Article 300-19 of NFPA 70. 3.05 DEFECTS A. Defects shall include, but are not to limited to, the following: 1. Tripping circuit breakers under normal operation. 2. Improperly connected equipment. 3. Damaged, torn, or skinned insulation. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus WIRE, CABLE AND RELATED Christi 26 05 19-4 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop MATERIALS SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. 1.02 SCOPE A. WORK COMBINED WITH OTHER SECTIONS: Combine the work specified herein with the following Sections to form a single responsibility for the Work: 1. Electrical. 2. Basic materials and methods. B. Provide electrical service, equipment and wiring device grounding as shown, scheduled and as specified. C. The types of grounding include, but not limited to, the grounding bonding of all equipment devices, building steel piping, and as required by the National Electrical Code, Local Inspection Department and Power Company. 1.03 STANDARDS A. National Electrical Code (NFPA-70) B. Local municipal and State codes that have jurisdiction. C. NECA 1.04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURES A. Provide grounding products manufactured by Copperweld and Cadweld. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings shall include, but not limited to the following: 1. Cut sheets of ground rods, clamps and connectors. 2. Grounding system diagram. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Provide all materials required to construct a complete grounded electrical system. B. GROUND RODS: Ground rods shall be 3/4" inch diameter by 10 feet long construction with copper jacket and a steel core. C. CLAMPS: Ground clamps shall be copper except for steel or iron pipes in which the clamps shall be galvanized iron. D. CONDUCTORS: Conductors shall be connected by means of an approved pressure connector or clamp. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. GENERAL: Install grounding system as shown and specified to ensure a properly grounded system. B. SERVICE ENTRANCE GROUNDING SYSTEM: Provide a main bonding jumper between the neutral and ground bus of each switchboard. Route a separate grounding electrode conductor in conduit from each main gutter to the ground rod grid, incoming cold water piping system, and to the 'lightning protection system" (250- 106 of NEC) under ground bonding loop. Provide a bonding jumper around water meter. The grounding electrode conductor shall be stranded copper, 98% conductivity and shall be run continuous without splices or joints and installed at least 12" below grade. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 26 05 26- 1 GROUNDING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents C. BUILDING STEEL AND PIPING SYSTEM: Install a bonding jumper between building steel and metallic piping systems to bond them to the electrical grounding system. D. NEUTRAL: The neutral shall be grounded only at the service entrance and other separately derived systems. The neutral shall be kept separate from the grounding system and shall not be used as a ground. E. GROUNDING SEPARATELY DERIVED ALTERNATING CURRENT SYSTEM 1. TRANSFORMERS: The center point(neutral) of each wye connected transformer shall be bonded to the case and the grounding electrode conductor shall be connected to the grounded conductor(neutral). 2. STANDBY EMERGENCY GENERATOR: The generator neutral shall be bonded to the generator when a 4-pole switched neutral automatic transfer switch is specified. F. GROUNDING CONDUCTOR: A grounding conductor and metallic conduit system shall bond all equipment served by the electrical system. Provide a flexible bonding jumper for isolated metallic piping and ductwork and around expansion fittings and joints. G. CONDUIT GROUNDING BUSHING: Conduit terminating in equipment that has a ground bus such as switchboards, panelboards, etc., shall have grounding bushings installed. Ground each conduit by means of a grounding bushing and to the ground bus in the equipment. H. MOTORS: The frame of all motors shall be grounded. I. SPECIAL GROUNDING: Provide a#6 AWG copper grounding conductor for each telephone board, television system, etc. Terminate the grounding conductor on ground bus and to the building electrical grounding system. Refer to 800-40(d)and 820-40(d)of the NEC. J. REMOTE PANELBOARDS: Provide a grounding electrode conductor all remote panels as required by the NEC and shown on drawings. K. LIGHTING FIXTURES: Flexible fixture whips containing a green grounding conductor shall be used to connect light fixtures. Flexible fixture whips shall not exceed ten feet. L. RECEPTACLES: All receptacles shall be grounded using the branch circuit grounding conductor. Receptacles shall use an approved grounding yoke. 3.02 TESTING A. Perform a ground resistance test using a biddle analog or digital portable earth/ground resistance tester. The system resistance shall not exceed 5 Ohms. Provide additional electrodes as required (refer to 250-84 and 250-56 of the most current edition NEC). Test shall not be conducted following wet weather. Provide personal instruments to conduct these tests and submit certified test for review. Test shall be verified by Engineer. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 26 05 26 -2 GROUNDING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAYS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Provide electrical raceways and fittings as shown, scheduled and specified. B. The types of raceways and fittings required are as follows: 1. Rigid hot-dipped galvanized steel conduit (GRC) (RMC) 2. Intermediate hot-dipped galvanized steel conduit(IMC) 3. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) 4. PVC (Sch. 40 &80) 5. Flexible metal conduit (FMC) 6. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit(LFMC) 7. PVC coated rigid galvanized steel conduit (GRCC) 8. Rigid Aluminum Conduit (RAC) 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI C80.1 -American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC); 2020. B. ANSI C80.3-American National Standard for Electrical Metallic Tubing-- Steel (EMT-S); 2020. C. ANSI C80.5-American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit--Aluminum (ERMC-A); 2020. D. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. E. UL 6- Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. F. UL 6A- Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Aluminum, Red Brass, and Stainless Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. G. UL 360 - Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. H. UL 651 -Schedule 40, 80, Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. I. UL 797 - Electrical Metallic Tubing-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. J. UL 1242 - Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. K. NEMA FB-1 L. NEMA TC3 1.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Raceways 1. Allied 2. Republic 3. Prime Conduit (Carlon) 4. Wheatland Tube 5. Cantex 6. Western Tube 7. Robroy Industries B. Fittings 1. Appleton 2. Crouse Hinds 3. Steel City 4. O.Z. Gedney 5. Carton 6. Raco, Inc. 7. Bridgeport DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 26 05 33 - 1 RACEWAYS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents C. Boxes 1. RACO 2. Thomas and Betts 3. EATON 4. Crouse-Hinds 5. Appleton D. Surface 1. Hubbell 2. Wiremold 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product data shall include but not be limited to: 1. Cutsheets for raceways, fitting, solvents, primers, etc. 1.05 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH A. NFPA 70 B. Local, municipal, or state codes that have jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit (GRC/RMC) 1. Construction, Materials, Codes, Standards: a. Article 344- NFPA 70. b. Hot-dip galvanized rigid steel conduit, galvanized after fabrication. Products shall comply with UL 6 and ANSI C80.1. All threads shall be galvanized after cutting. A uniform zinc coating shall be applied to the inner and outer walls. c. Fittings shall be threaded and shipped with thread protectors. Set Screw are not acceptable. Die Cast Fittings are not acceptable. 2. Permitted for use in the following locations: a. Outdoor or Exterior(Exposed) b. Indoors, Conditioned Spaces c. Unconditioned Spaces d. Underslab (Void Form Slab): where not in contact with earth—only permitted where indicated on plan. e. Underslab (Suspended Slab): Permitted—only where indicated on plan. 3. Prohibited Locations: Underground, Corrosive environments, Underslab (Slab on Grade), Foundation penetrations. 4. Specific Uses: Exposed Exterior installations, where within or attached to masonry or concrete, where subject to damage. B. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC) 1. Construction, Materials, Codes, Standards: a. Article 342 - NFPA 70. b. Conduit shall be similar to rigid steel conduit except thinner wall. c. Fittings shall be threaded hot-dipped galvanized and shipped with thread protectors. Set Screw or Die Cast Fittings are not acceptable d. Products shall comply with UL 1242. 2. Permitted for use in the following locations: a. Outdoor or Exterior(Exposed) b. Indoors, Conditioned Spaces c. Unconditioned Spaces d. Underslab (Void Form Slab): not in contact with earth only as indicated on plan. e. Underslab (Suspended Slab): only where indicated on plan. 3. Prohibited Locations: Corrosive Environment, Underground, Underslab (Slab on Grade), Foundation Penetrations DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 26 05 33 -2 RACEWAYS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 4. Specific Uses: Exposed exterior locations, Rooftops exposed to sunlight C. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) 1. Construction, Materials, Codes, Standards: a. Article 358- NFPA 70. b. EMT shall be made of hot-dip galvanized strip steel. The interior shall be coated with a corrosion-resistant lubricant for ease of wiring pulling. c. Shall utilize steel insulated throat, set-screw connectors and steel set-screw couplings in all indoor conditioned spaces. d. Shall utilize steel insulated throat, threadless, watertight compression type connectors and steel threadless watertight compression type coupling in all non-conditioned spaces and in grout filled CMU walls. e. Products shall comply with UL 797 and ANSI C80.3. 2. Permitted for use in the following locations: a. Indoors, Conditioned Spaces b. Unconditioned Spaces 3. Prohibited Locations: Corrosive Environment, Underground, Underslab (all types), Wet or Damp Locations, Exteriors, Within Concrete, foundation penetrations. 4. Specific Uses: Primary use conduit for indoor spaces, where conditioned. Unconditioned locations shall require use of insulated throat water tight fittings. D. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit(PVC Schedule 40 &80) 1. Construction, Materials, Codes, Standards: a. Article 352 and 300.6- NFPA 70. b. Conduit shall be schedule 40 or 80 polyvinyl chloride (PVC), UV stabilized, rated for 90°C conductors. c. Fittings shall be solvent weld socket type. d. Products shall comply with UL 651. 2. Permitted for use in the following locations: a. Underground (Earth, outside foundation perimeter) b. Underslab (Slab on Grade): only where indicated on plan. c. Under Driveways, roadways, or vehicular crossings, and where required by Utility Company: PVC Schedule 80 1) PVC Schedule 40 allowed where concrete encased. 3. Prohibited Locations: return air Plenums, interstitial spaces, Outdoor or Exterior (Exposed), Unconditioned spaces, corrosive environments, underslab (suspended or void form), foundation penetrations. 4. Specific Uses: For use underground or underslab (Slab on grade). Underground use is approved for all locations where transiting a project site, not underneath any foundation. For locations under the footprint of building/foundation, use only authorized where indicated on drawings. E. Flexible Metal Conduit(FMC/Greenfield) 1. Construction, Materials, Codes, Standards: a. Article 348- NFPA 70. b. Spirally wound continuously interlocked zinc coated strip steel. c. Fittings shall be one screw for smaller than 1-1/2-inch, two screw for 1-1/2-inch and larger, double clamp steel or malleable iron, either cadmium plated or hot-dip galvanized. d. Products shall comply with UL 360. 2. Permitted for use in the following locations: a. Indoors, Conditioned Spaces. 3. Prohibited Locations: outdoors/Exterior, unconditioned spaces, Corrosive, Wet, Concrete, underslab(all types), underground, foundation penetrations. 4. Specific Uses and Applications: For use in connection to rotating equipment within conditioned spaces, including plenums. Also permitted for use with empty raceways in walls for use with Low Voltage, AV, telecom cabling. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 26 05 33-3 RACEWAYS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop F. Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit (LFMC/Seal Tite) 1. Construction, Materials, Codes, Standards a. Article 350- NFPA 70. b. Spirally wound continuously interlocked zinc coated strip steel with a UV stabilized polyvinyl chloride (PVC)outer jacket bonded to the conduit. c. Fittings shall be compression type, malleable iron, with insulated throat, either cadmium plated or hot-dip galvanized. Plastic is not acceptable. 2. Permitted for use in the following locations: a. Outdoor or Exterior(Exposed) b. Indoors, Conditioned Spaces c. Unconditioned Spaces 3. Prohibited Locations: Concrete, corrosive, underground, underslab (all types), foundation penetrations. 4. Specific Uses and Applications: Primary use is connection to rotating equipment at unconditioned spaces. Transformer Primaries and Secondaries (excluding service transformer). G. PVC Coated Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit (GRCC/Plastibond) 1. Construction, Materials, Codes, Standards: a. Article 344 and 300.6- NFPA 70. b. Conduit shall be same as rigid metal conduit with a factory-applied 40-mil-thick covering of polyvinyl chloride (PVC) bonded to the metal, coated inside and outside. 2. Permitted for use in the following locations: a. Outdoor or Exterior(Exposed): except for stub-ups and penetrations. b. Corrosive Environment: required throughout 1) Where corrosive environments exist, such as pools, pool pump room, corrosive chemical storage, GRCC shall be provided throughout, up to the point of sealed penetration into a non-corrosive environment. c. Underground (Earth, outside foundation perimeter): Required at bends of 15' or greater, Penetrations through concrete, Stub-ups through foundation or grade at concrete. d. Foundation Penetrations 3. Prohibited Locations: extended runs exposed to sunlight, Plenums, Underslab except for penetrations (all foundation types). 4. Specific Uses: For use at Cooling Towers, Pools, Pool Decks, Pool pump rooms, chemical storage, corrosive environments. H. Rigid Aluminum Conduit (RAC) 1. Construction, Materials, Codes, Standards: a. Article 344- NFPA 70. b. Rigid aluminum (alloy 6063-T1) conduit shall be manufactured using 6063 Alloy in temper designation T-1. c. Fittings for rigid aluminum conduit shall be threaded aluminum shipped with thread protectors. Set Screw or Die Cast Fittings are not acceptable d. Products shall comply with UL 6A and ANSI C80.5. 2. Permitted for use in the following locations: a. Outdoor or Exterior(Exposed) b. Indoors, Conditioned Spaces c. Unconditioned Spaces 3. Prohibited Locations: Corrosive environments, underground, within concrete, underslab (all types), foundation penetrations. 4. Specific Uses and Applications: Exposed Exterior such as rooftops or canopies. 2.02 PULL BOXES A. Exterior in-ground pull boxes shall be concrete or polymer as manufactured by Brooks, Dalworth, Hubbell Quazite, or approved equivalent. Covers shall include identification of systems contained. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 26 05 33 -4 RACEWAYS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop B. Where located in Roadways, Parking Lots, or Traffic zones, Pullboxes shall be rated to accept a minimum 25,000 lb. load. C. All Pullboxes shall be sized based on NEC wire-bending requirements at each individual location. D. Covers shall include identification of systems contained, such as: 1. Electrical 2. Telecom 3. Communications 4. Others, as required. E. Pull boxes in pole bases shall be as manufactured by Carlon. F. Pullboxes shall be provided in all raceway systems upon exceeding the following conditions: 1. The equivalent of 270' in conduit bends, or after(3) 90' bends. 2. Any 400ft of linear conduit or duct bank continuous segments. 3. Where required to make transitions to prevent the damaging of conductor insulation. 2.03 WIREWAYS A. Wireways shall be made of not less than 16-gauge sheet steel for 4 inch and 6 inch square sizes and 14 gauge steel for 8 inch and 12 inch square sizes. Couplings end plates, and knockouts shall be furnished as required. Each section of wireways shall be rigidly supported. B. The finish shall be ANSI-49 gray epoxy paint applied by a cathodic electrode position paint process over a corrosion resistant phosphate preparation for NEMA 1 wireways. Provide galvanized steel for NEMA 3R wireways. NEMA 3R wireways and auxiliary gutters are for horizontal mounting only. 2.04 BUSHINGS A. Provide nylon bushing on end of all low voltage cabling system conduits (sleeves, rough-ins, etc.). B. Provide Grounding Bushing as required in 26 05 26 -Grounding. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PROVIDE CONDUIT AS FOLLOWS: A. GENERAL: The Drawings are diagrammatic and are intended to show the general location of outlets, devices, fixtures, and arrangement and control of circuits. The Contractor shall determine exact locations by actual measurement of the building or by reference to the Architectural Drawings. B. Raceways shall not be routed below or within slab-on-grade, foundations, or below grade of suspended slab structures, unless specifically noted or indicated otherwise on plan. C. EMT in sizes up to 4 inches when concealed or not exposed to damage and located indoors only. (EMT is not acceptable in wet and damp location.) D. MINIMUM SIZE: 3/4 inch. E. Flexible conduit of any type shall not be used except for connections to rotating or vibrating equipment, or where use for low voltage raceways. All conduit shall be provided as a rigid type conduit for homeruns, runs between termination boxes, outlets, etc. F. Fixture whips: Refer to 26 51 19 for additional information. G. Of such size, and so installed that conductors may be drawn in without injury or excessive strain. H. Where entering panels, pull boxes,junction boxes, or outlet boxes, shall be secured in place with lock nuts inside and outside, and insulated bushings inside. I. Have Red seal type VCC or approved equal cable supports in risers, as required by NFPA 70. J. Have ends reamed after cutting and application of die. K. Keep conduit corked and dry during construction and swab out before conductors are pulled. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 26 05 33 -5 RACEWAYS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop L. Have bends and offsets made with approved tools. Bends or offsets in which the pipe is crushed or deformed shall not be installed. M. Have O.Z. Gedney or approved equal expansion fittings where crossing building expansion joints. N. Fixtures in finished areas having suspended acoustical ceilings shall be connected to outlet boxes of lighting grid by flexible metal conduit; length not to exceed ten feet(six feet if using 3/8" manufactured fixture "whips"). O. Outlet boxes in partitions shall never be set back-to-back. They shall be offset to prevent undue noise transmission from room to room. P. Each entire conduit system shall be installed complete before any conductors are drawn in. Every run of conduit shall be finished before covering up to guard against obstructions and omissions. Q. Sleeves shall be placed in the forms of concrete, masonry and fire rated walls, floor slabs and beams, for the passage of conduits. Sleeves should be set in place a sufficient time ahead of the concrete work so as not to delay the work. Sleeves shall be rigid galvanized steel with a minimum thickness of 1.07MM and set to extend 4"above slab. R. All pipe penetrations through walls and concrete floors shall be fire rated by applying USG Thermafiber in the space between the concrete and the pipe. The fire rating shall be additionally sealed by using 3M brand model CP 25 or 303 fire barrier caulk and putty. All fire rating material shall be installed in accordance with manufacturers printed instructions. S. All conduit shall be cleaned and swabbed to remove all foreign matter and moisture prior to pulling wire and cable. All boxes in which conduits terminate shall be cleaned of all concrete mortar and other foreign matter. T. Provide#30 nylon pulling line in all conduits in which permanent wiring is not installed. U. All conduit shall be securely fastened and supported using hot galvanized malleable iron one- hole pipe straps, clamps, hanger or other means approved by the engineer. Supports shall be as required per NEC. Tie wire shall not be used as support or securing means. Support conduit independently of ceiling hanger wire. Use all thread rods to support outlet boxes,junction boxes and conduit. V. Contact the Architect and Engineer for an installation review before covering any below grade or above grade conduit. W. All new outlets shall be flush mounted. In remodeled areas where wall construction prohibits flush mounting, provide Hubbell 2400 series, unless noted otherwise. Verify exact location and routing with architect before installation. X. Contractor shall not penetrate waterproof barriers without using proper fitting to maintain barriers. This shall include exterior walls and slabs. Coordinate with Architect for proper methods. 3.02 CONDUIT ROUTING A. Conduit shall be concealed and by using the shortest practicable route between outlets, including where located on CMU walls. B. Conduit may be exposed in electrical and mechanical rooms, and central plants, or other industrial type facilities such as warehouses or production plants. C. Install risers, drops, offsets to avoid ductwork and structural components. Ductwork and structural systems shall take precedence to conduit. D. Any exposed and visible conduit shall be parallel and perpendicular based on the lines of the building (such as ceiling lines, wall blocking lines, or architectural feature lines) using structural systems to conceal conduit visibility at all opportunities. E. Concealed conduit shall be run in as direct manner as possible, using long bends. All bend radii shall be 12x conduit diameter. Condulets in lieu of elbows where ease of installation and appearance warrant their use—confirmation with architect is required for this use. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 26 05 33-6 RACEWAYS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop F. Conduit shall be continuous, with no more than (4) quarter bends between terminals, cabinets, boxes, or pullboxes is acceptable. Contractor is expected to provide wireway or boxes at appropriate intervals, in accordance with NFPA 70 for wire bending space. All conduit shall be electrically continuous throughout, including across boxes and cabinets. Terminals of all conduit shall be provided with double lock nuts and bushing, or terminated on conduit hubs. Use of Running Threads prohibited. 3.03 CONDUIT CORROSION PROTECTION A. Branch circuit conduits installed in concrete slabs on fill or grade shall be positioned in a manner to ensure complete concrete cover. In no case shall such conduits be exposed below or above the slab surfaces, or penetrate the waterproof membrane. B. At locations where metallic conduits pass through slabs on grade or transitions below grade, PVC coated rigid galvanized conduit shall be used. C. Conduit installed in the air gap between the water-resistant barrier and finish brick shall not exceed 2-ft. in length. 3.04 EXPANSION JOINTS A. Install approved expansion fitting in all conduit runs in excess of 150 feet or when crossing building expansion joints. 3.05 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Provide an approved galvanized outlet box with adequate volume for number of conductors installed. B. Provide standard galvanized switch boxes of the required number of gangs. Switch boxes where conduit is exposed shall be handy boxes or approved equal. C. Outlet boxes for receptacles shall be similar to Universal 52151 with suitable raised cover. Receptacle boxes where conduit is exposed shall be handy boxes or approved equal. D. Weatherproof boxes shall be FS or FD. Provide these boxes in all non-conditioned areas, exterior areas and natatoriums. E. Outdoor boxes shall be NEMA 3R, with conduit connections made by Myers Hubs. F. See notes and details on Drawings for special box requirements. G. Provide junction boxes required to facilitate installation of the various conduit systems. Provide support boxes required for risers, each complete with approved cable supports as described elsewhere in this Division. H. Outlet boxes for drywall shall be standard galvanized 4" square boxes with the appropriate device cover. Secure all outlet boxes with a backing brace connected to two adjacent studs. Mounting brackets with a single ear to rest against the backing sheet rock are not acceptable. I. Provide floor outlet fittings for telephone to match fittings for duplex floor receptacles. J. Provide 3-1/2" deep gangable masonry boxes in all masonry wall (CMU). Steel City GW-135- G or approved equal. K. Provide shallow 4"x4" boxes in all demountable partitions. L. Metallic boxes located in fire rated walls or partitions shall be separated by a minimum horizontal distance of 24 in. This minimum separation distance between metallic boxes may be reduced when "Wall Opening Protective Materials" (CLIV) are installed according to the requirements of their Classification. Metallic boxes shall not be installed on opposite side of walls or partitions of staggered stud construction unless "Wall Opening Protective Materials"are installed with the metallic boxes in accordance with Classification requirements for the protective materials. M. Junction, pull boxes, condulets, gutters, disconnects, contactors, etc., above 2-foot x 2-foot grid ceilings shall be mounted within 18-inches of ceiling grid. Above 2-foot x 4-foot grid ceiling they shall be mounted within 30-inches of ceiling grid. All junction box, pull box, gutter openings shall be side or bottom accessible. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 26 05 33-7 RACEWAYS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop N. Junction boxes are prohibited above drywall or plaster ceilings except for lighting; and those must be mounted directly over light fixture opening. Route power, PA, fire alarm conduits to nearest lay-in ceiling. 3.06 THRU-WALL SEALS A. Provide O.Z. Gedney"Thru-wall" seals for all conduits passing through concrete structure below grade, above grade, and floor penetrations below grade. These prevent moisture from entering the building. B. Straight sleeves are not acceptable. 3.07 PULL BOXES A. Interior Pull boxes shall be provided for conduit systems as required and shall be constructed of galvanized steel of not less than gauge and size specified by National Electrical Code. Size pull boxes per Article 314.28 - NFPA 70. B. Where two or more feeders pass through a common pull box, they shall be tagged to indicate clearly their electrical characteristics, circuit number, and panel designation. C. Exterior in-ground pull boxes shall have open bottoms with sand and rock beds below box for drainage of water. Provide closed bottom boxes where specified. Closed bottom boxes shall be provided with sumps for portable pump to allow for extracting water. Refer to details on the drawings. D. Pull boxes mounted in pole bases shall be coordinated with the pour of the pole base and shall be flush with finished footing. 3.08 WIREWAYS A. Wireways shall be installed as indicated or required and locations shall be coordinated with architect. B. Wiring in wireways shall be neatly bundled, tied and suitably tagged. 3.09 UNDERGROUND DUCTBANK SYSTEM A. DUCT SYSTEM 1. The duct system shall consist of Schedule 40 PVC or type 1-EB PVC conduits encased in red concrete as detailed on the drawings. Use rigid conduit for stub-ups and the last ten feet at the end of each ductbank. Duct lines shall be laid to a minimum grade of 4 inches per 100 feet and shall be free from either horizontal or vertical waves. Duct lines shall be straight unless otherwise noted on the drawings. Duct lines shall be installed so that the top of concrete in encased duct lines is not less than 24 inches below finished grade or finished paving at any point. Changes in direction or runs exceeding a total of 10 degrees, either vertical or horizontal, shall be accomplished by long sweep bends having a minimum radius of curvature of 5 feet. The long sweep bends may be made up of one or more curved or straight sections and/or combinations thereof using five degree angle couplings. Conduit shall be thoroughly cleaned before using or laying. During construction and after the duct line is completed, the ends of the conduit shall be plugged to prevent water washing mud into the conduits. Particular care shall be taken to keep the conduits clean of concrete, dirt, and any other substance during the course of construction. 2. Each single conduit of the duct bank shall be completely encased in steel reinforced concrete as indicated. The thickness of concrete encasement indicated is the minimum thickness, and may be increased to fit the actual shape of trench. 3. Concrete for duct bank envelopes shall be standard 2000 psi concrete mix as described in Division 03, and be colored deep red for permanent marking of underground electrical work. The concrete red pigment shall be pure inorganic natural metallic base pigment, approved by the Engineer before use. Organic pigments will not be permitted. The approved pigments shall be mixed four pounds per yard of cement. a. Envelopes may be poured directly against sides of trenches if the "cut" is clean, even and free of loose material. All loose dirt and extraneous material shall be removed from the trenches before and during the pouring of concrete to ensure sound envelopes. Concrete shall be carefully spaded during pouring to eliminate all voids DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 26 05 33-8 RACEWAYS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop under and between the conduit and honeycombing of the exterior surfaces. Power driven tampers of agitators shall not be used, unless specifically designed for the application, in order to ensure that the water-tightness of the conduits is not destroyed. b. Generally, each run of envelopes shall be poured in one continuous operation. Where more than one pour is necessary, each pour shall terminate in a vertical plane. Partial pours shall not terminate in horizontal or angular planes. B. For normal underground installation see Section 26 02 00, paragraph 3.1 for Excavating and Backfilling. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 26 05 33-9 RACEWAYS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SECTION 26 05 73 SHORT CIRCUIT COORDINATION STUDY ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. The Contractor shall furnish short-circuit and protective device coordination studies for the electrical power system, including all existing and newly installed electrical equipment. The analysis and study shall include all distribution branches, and begin at the main overcurrent protective device. B. Provide a complete short circuit study, equipment interrupting or withstand evaluation, and protective device coordination study for the power distribution system. Normal operating method, alternate operation, and operations which could result in maximum fault conditions shall be thoroughly addressed in the study. The study shall assume all motors operating at rated voltage and speed. Electrical equipment bus impedance shall be assumed as zero. Short circuit momentary duties and interrupting duties shall be calculated on the basis of maximum available fault current at the switchboard busses and motor control centers (where installed). C. A protective device coordination study shall be performed to determine appropriate relay settings. The study shall include all distribution switchboards, motor control centers (where installed, and panel board main circuit breakers. Panel board branch circuit devices need not be considered. The phase over current and ground fault protection shall be included as well as setting for all other adjustable protective devices. D. An equipment evaluation study shall be performed to determine the adequacy of circuit breakers, controllers, surge arresters, busways, switches, and fuses by tabulating and comparing the short circuit ratings of these devices with the available fault currents. E. Any problem areas or inadequacies shall be promptly brought to the ENGINEERS attention. F. The Contractor shall furnish an Arc Flash Hazard Analysis Study per NFPA 70E- Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace, reference Article 130.5 and Annex D. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE): 1. IEEE 141 - Recommended Practice for Electric Power Distribution and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems 2. IEEE 242- Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems 3. IEEE 399- Recommended Practice for Industrial and Commercial Power System Analysis 4. IEEE 241 - Recommended Practice for Electric Power Systems in Commercial Buildings 5. IEEE 1015 - Recommended Practice for Applying Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers Used in Industrial and Commercial Power Systems. 6. IEEE 1584 -Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. ANSI C57.12.00—Standard General Requirements for Liquid-Immersed Distribution, Power, and Regulating Transformers 2. ANSI C37.13—Standard for Low Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures 3. ANSI C37.010—Standard Application Guide for AC High Voltage Circuit Breakers Rated on a Symmetrical Current Basis 4. ANSI C37.41 —Standard Design Tests for High Voltage Fuses, Distribution Enclosed Single-Pole Air Switches, Fuse Disconnecting Switches and Accessories. C. The National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code, latest edition 2. NFPA 70E - Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace 1.03 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW/APPROVAL A. The short-circuit and protective device coordination studies shall be submitted to the design Engineer prior to receiving final approval of the distribution equipment shop drawings and/or DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus SHORT CIRCUIT Christi 26 05 73- 1 COORDINATION STUDY ARC 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS Re-Bid Construction Documents prior to release of equipment drawings for manufacturing. If formal completion of the studies may cause delay in equipment manufacturing, approval from the Engineer may be obtained for preliminary submittal of sufficient study data to ensure that the selection of device and characteristics will be satisfactory. 1.04 SUBMITTALS FOR CONSTRUCTION A. The results of the short-circuit, protective device coordination and arc flash hazard analysis studies shall be summarized in a final report. No more than five (5) bound copies of the complete final report shall be submitted. For large system studies, submittals requiring more than five (5) copies of the report will be provided without the section containing the computer printout of the short-circuit input and output data. Additional copies, where required, shall be provided on CD in PDF format. B. The report shall include the following sections: 1. One-line diagram 2. Descriptions, purpose, basis and scope of the study 3. Tabulations of circuit breaker, fuse and other protective device ratings versus calculated short circuit duties 4. Protective device time versus current coordination curves, tabulations of relay and circuit breaker trip unit settings, fuse selection 5. Fault current calculations including a definition of terms and guide for interpretation of the computer printout 6. Incident energy and flash protection boundary calculations 7. Recommendations for system improvements, where needed 8. Executive Summary. 9. Equipment manufacturer's information used to prepare study 10. Assumptions made during study. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. The short-circuit, protective device coordination and arc flash hazard analysis studies shall be conducted under the supervision and approval of a Registered Professional Electrical Engineer skilled in performing and interpreting the power system studies. The Registered Professional Electrical Engineer shall be a full-time employee of the Engineering Services Organization. PART2 - PRODUCT 2.01 DATA COLLECTION A. The Contractor shall furnish all data as required by the power system studies. The Engineer performing the short-circuit, protective device coordination and arc flash hazard analysis studies shall furnish the Contractor with a listing of required data immediately after award of the contract. The Contractor shall expedite collection of the data to assure completion of the studies as required for final approval of the distribution equipment shop drawings and/or prior to the release of the equipment for manufacturing. B. Source combination may include present and future motors and generators. C. Load data utilized may include existing and proposed loads obtained from Contract Documents provided by Owner or Contractor. D. Include fault contribution of existing motors in the study, with motors <100 hp grouped together. The Contractor shall obtain required existing equipment data, if necessary, to satisfy the study requirements. 2.02 SHORT-CIRCUIT AND PROTECTIVE DEVICE EVALUATION STUDY A. Use actual conductor impedances if known. If unknown, use typical conductor impedances based on IEEE 141. B. Transformer design impedances shall be used when test impedances are not available. C. Provide the following: 1. Calculation methods and assumptions 2. Selected base per unit quantities DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus SHORT CIRCUIT Christi 26 05 73-2 COORDINATION STUDY ARC 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS 3. One-line diagram of the system being evaluated 4. Source impedance data, including electric utility system and motor fault contribution characteristics 5. Typical calculations 6. Tabulations of calculated quantities 7. Results, conclusions, and recommendations. D. Calculate short-circuit momentary and interrupting duties for a three-phase bolted fault at each: 1. Electric utility's supply termination point 2. Incoming switchgear 3. Low voltage switchgear 4. Motor control centers 5. Branch circuit panelboards 6. Other significant locations throughout the system. E. For grounded systems, provide a bolted line-to-ground fault current study for areas as defined for the three-phase bolted fault short-circuit study. F. Protective Device Evaluation: 1. Evaluate equipment and protective devices and compare to short circuit ratings 2. Adequacy of switchgear, motor control centers, and panelboard bus bars to withstand short-circuit stresses 3. Adequacy of transformer windings to withstand short-circuit stresses 4. Cable and busway sizes for ability to withstand short-circuit heating 5. Notify Owner in writing of any new or existing circuit protective devices improperly rated for the calculated available fault current. 2.03 PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY A. Proposed protective device coordination time-current curves shall be graphically displayed on log-log scale paper. B. Include on each curve sheet a complete title and one-line diagram with legend identifying the specific portion of the system covered. C. Terminate device characteristic curves at a point reflecting maximum symmetrical or asymmetrical fault current to which device is exposed. D. Identify device associated with each curve by manufacturer type, function, and, if applicable, tap, time delay, and instantaneous settings recommended. E. Plot the following characteristics on the curve sheets, where applicable for this project: 1. Electric utility's protective device 2. Medium and low voltage fuses including manufacturer's minimum melt, total clearing, tolerance, and damage bands 3. Low voltage equipment circuit breaker trip devices, including manufacturer's tolerance bands 4. Transformer full-load current, magnetizing inrush current, and ANSI transformer withstand parameters 5. Conductor damage curves 6. Ground fault protective devices, as applicable 7. Pertinent motor starting characteristics and motor damage points 8. Other system load protective devices for the largest branch circuit and the largest feeder circuit breaker in each motor control center. F. Provide adequate time margins between device characteristics such that selective operation is provided, while providing proper protection. 2.04 ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS A. The arc flash hazard analysis shall be performed according to the IEEE 1584 equations that are presented in NFPA 70E, Annex D. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus SHORT CIRCUIT Christi 26 05 73-3 COORDINATION STUDY ARC 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS B. When appropriate, the short circuit calculations and the clearing times of the phase overcurrent devices will be retrieved from the short-circuit and coordination study model. Alternative methods shall be presented in the proposal. C. The flash protection boundary and the incident energy shall be calculated at all significant locations in the electrical distribution system (switchboards, switchgear, motor-control centers, panelboards, busway and splitters)where work could be performed on energized parts. D. The Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis shall include all significant locations in 240 volt and 208 volt systems fed from transformers equal to or greater than 75 kVA. E. Safe working distances shall be specified for calculated fault locations based upon the calculated arc flash boundary considering an incident energy of 1.2 cal/cm2. F. The Arc Flash Hazard analysis shall include calculations for maximum and minimum contributions of fault current magnitude. The minimum calculation shall assume that the utility contribution is at a minimum and shall assume a minimum motor load. Conversely, the maximum calculation shall assume a maximum contribution from the utility and shall assume motors to be operating under full-load conditions. G. Arc flash computation shall include both line and load side of main breaker calculations, where necessary. H. Arc Flash calculations shall be based on actual overcurrent protective device clearing time. Maximum clearing time will be capped at 2 seconds based on IEEE 1584 section B.1.2. 2.05 REPORT SECTIONS A. Input Data: 1. Short-circuit reactance of rotating machines 2. Cable and conduit materials 3. Transformers 4. Circuit resistance and reactive values. B. Short-Circuit Data: 1. Source fault impedance and generator contributions 2. X to R ratios 3. Asymmetry factors 4. Motor contributions 5. Short circuit kVA 6. Symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents. C. Recommended Protective Device Settings: 1. Phase and Ground Relays: a. Current transformer ratio b. Current setting c. Time setting d. Instantaneous setting e. Specialty non-overcurrent device settings f. Recommendations on improved relaying systems, if applicable 2. Circuit Breakers: a. Adjustable pickups and time delays (long time, short time, ground) b. Adjustable time-current characteristic c. Adjustable instantaneous pickup d. Recommendations on improved trip systems, if applicable. D. Incident energy and flash protection boundary calculations 1. Arcing fault magnitude 2. Device clearing time 3. Duration of arc 4. Arc flash boundary 5. Working distance DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus SHORT CIRCUIT Christi 26 05 73-4 COORDINATION STUDY ARC 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS 6. Incident energy 7. Hazard Risk Category 8. Recommendations for arc flash energy reduction PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 FIELD ADJUSTMENT A. The Contractor shall adjust relay and protective device settings according to the recommended settings table provided by the coordination study. Field adjustments shall be completed by the engineering service division of the equipment manufacturer under the Startup and Acceptance Testing contract portion. B. Make minor modifications to equipment as required to accomplish conformance with short circuit and protective device coordination studies. C. Notify Owner in writing of any required major equipment modifications. D. Following completion of all studies, acceptance testing and startup by the field engineering service division of the equipment manufacturer, a 2-year warranty shall be provided on all components manufactured by the engineering service parent manufacturing company. 3.02 ARC FLASH WARNING LABELS A. The vendor shall provide a 3.5 in. x 5 in. thermal transfer type label of high adhesion polyester for each work location analyzed. B. The label shall have an orange header with the wording, "WARNING, ARC FLASH HAZARD", and shall include the following information: 1. Location designation 2. Nominal voltage 3. Flash protection boundary 4. Hazard risk category 5. Incident energy 6. Working distance 7. Engineering report number, revision number and issue date. C. Labels shall be machine printed, with no field markings. D. Arc flash labels shall be provided in the following manner and all labels shall be based on recommended overcurrent device settings. 1. For each 600, 480 and applicable 208 volt panelboards, one arc flash label shall be provided. 2. For each motor control center, one arc flash label shall be provided. 3. For each low voltage switchboard, one arc flash label shall be provided. E. Labels shall be field installed by the engineering service division of the equipment manufacturer under the Startup and Acceptance Testing contract portion. 3.03 ARC FLASH TRAINING A. The equipment vendor shall train personnel of the potential arc flash hazards associated with working on energized equipment (minimum of 4 hours). Maintenance procedures in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70E shall be provided in the equipment manuals. The training shall be certified for continuing education units (CEUs) by the International Association for Continuing Education Training (IACET). END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus SHORT CIRCUIT Christi 26 05 73-5 COORDINATION STUDY ARC 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS SECTION 26 06 34 LOW VOLTAGE RACEWAY SYSTEM PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install a complete raceway system for telephone system, consisting of cabinets, conduit,junction boxes, etc. This shall include but not limited to fire alarm, access control, structured cabling, audio-video, intercommunications, sound reinforcing, intrusion detection, telephone. 1.03 WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 26 02 00- Basic Materials and Methods for Electrical B. Section 26 05 33- Raceways C. Section 26 05 19-Wire, Cable and Related Materials 1.04 WORK NOT INCLUDED A. Cabling B. Equipment C. Division 27 D. Division 28 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 COMPONENTS A. Conduit- Refer to Section 26 05 33. B. Backboards- 3/4"X 4'X 8'fire rated plywood painted white. C. Outlet Boxes- Refer to Section 26 05 33. D. Pull and junction boxes- Refer to Section 26 05 33. E. Floor Boxes- Refer to Section 26 05 33. F. Cabinets-Consult low voltage system installer/supplier. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 26 05 33 for underground service entrance. B. Provide pull boxes in telephone conduit runs spaced not greater than 100 ft. apart, and on backboard side of runs with more than two right angle bends. C. Place telephone label on pull and junction boxes. D. Provide pull wire in each telephone run. E. Provide plywood backboards and duplex receptacle in the telephone equipment room. Confirm location on jobsite prior to installation. F. All terminal cabinets/backboards and conduit shall be sized per the recommendations of the telephone system installer. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus LOW VOLTAGE RACEWAY Christi 26 06 34- 1 SYSTEM 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 26 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract Documents, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specifications, apply to this section. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 91 00- General Commissioning Requirements B. Section 23 09 63- Energy Management and Control System (EMCS) 1.03 SUMMARY A. The commissioning of the lighting system and associated controls as well as the service and distribution equipment shall be performed by an impartial technical firm hired by the owner or shall be performed by the installing contractor if the owner has not hired a commissioning firm. The commissioning provider shall be certified under one or more of the following certifications: 1. CxA- Certified Commissioning Authority-ACG 2. CBCP- Certified Building Commissioning Professional -AEE 3. CCP- Certified Commissioning Professional - BCA 4. CPMP -Certified Process Management Professional -ASHRAE 5. BSC- Building System Commissioning Certification - NEBB B. The commissioning provider (Commissioning authority)shall be responsible for leading the entire construction team through the commissioning process including, but not limited to, conducting the commissioning kick-off meeting, preparing the commissioning plan, preparing pre-functional checklists, preparing functional test scripts, participation in functional testing and preparation of required documentation and reports. 1.04 RESPONSIBILITIES A. Contractor: Responsibilities of the Contractor as relate to Commissioning Process include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Facilitate coordination of Commissioning work by Commissioning authority. 2. Attend Commissioning meetings or other meetings called by Commissioning authority to facilitate the Commissioning Process. 3. Review Functional Performance Test procedures for feasibility, safety, and impact on warranty, and provide Commissioning authority with written comment on same. 4. Provide all documentation relating to manufacturer's recommended performance testing of equipment and systems. 5. Provide Operations & Maintenance data to Commissioning authority for preparation of checklists and training manuals. 6. Provide As-built drawings and documentation to facilitate Testing. 7. Assure and facilitate participation and cooperation of Sub Contractors and equipment suppliers as required for the Commissioning Process. 8. Certify to Commissioning authority that installation work listed in Pre-Functional Checklists has been completed. 9. Install systems and equipment in strict conformance with project specifications, manufacturer's recommended installation procedures, and Pre-Functional Checklists. 10. Provide data concerning performance, installation, and start-up of systems. 11. Provide copy of manufacturers filled-out start-up forms for equipment and systems. 12. Ensure systems have been started and fully checked for proper operation prior to arranging for Testing with Commissioning authority. Prepare and submit to Commissioning authority written certification that each piece of equipment and/or system has been started according to manufacturer's recommended procedure, and that system has been tested for compliance with operational requirements. a. Contractor shall carry out manufacturer's recommended start-up and testing procedures, regardless of whether or not they are specifically listed in Pre-Functional DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus COMMISSIONING OF Christi 26 08 00- 1 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents Checklists. b. Contractor is not relieved of obligation for systems/equipment demonstration where performance testing is required by specifications, but a Functional Performance Test is not specifically designated by Commissioning authority. 13. Coordinate with Commissioning authority to determine mutually acceptable date of Functional Performance Tests. 14. Provide qualified personnel to assist and participate in Commissioning. 15. Provide test instruments and communications devices, as prescribed by Commissioning authority, required for carrying out Testing of systems. 16. Proprietary test equipment required by the manufacturer, whether specified or not, shall be provided by the manufacturer of the equipment. Manufacturer shall provide the test equipment, demonstrate its use, and assist in the commissioning process. Proprietary test equipment shall become the property of the Owner upon completion of commissioning. 17. Ensure deficiencies found in the Commissioning Issues Log are corrected within the time schedule shown in the Commissioning Plan. 18. Provide Commissioning authority with all submittals, start-up instructions manuals, operating parameters, and other pertinent information related to Commissioning Process. This information shall be routed through Architect. 19. Provide commissioning authority with a certificate of readiness to show systems are ready to schedule functional testing. 20. Prepare and submit to Commissioning authority proposed Training Program outline for each system. 21. Coordinate and provide training of Owner's personnel. 22. Prepare Operation & Maintenance Manuals and As-Built drawings in accordance with specifications; submit copy to Commissioning authority in addition to other contractually required submissions. Revise and resubmit manuals in accordance with Design Professionals and Commissioning authority's comments. 23. Commissioning requires participation of this Division Subcontractors to ensure that systems are operating in manner consistent with Contract Documents. All costs associated with the participation of Contractor, Sub-Contractors, Design Professionals, and Equipment Vendors in the Commissioning Process shall be included as part of the Construction Contract. B. Subcontractors and vendors shall prepare and submit to Commissioning Agent proposed Startup procedures to demonstrate proper installation of systems, according to these specifications and checklists prepared by Commissioning authority. C. Electrical contractor shall provide a letter certifying the installed lighting controls meet documented performance criteria specified in the commissioning plan within 90 days of substantial completion. 1.05 COMMISSIONING PLAN A. Commissioning Process tasks and activities: 1. Commissioning kick-off meeting: Conducted by commissioning authority and attended by construction team and design team. 2. Pre-functional checklists: Prepared by the commissioning authority and filled out by subcontractors performing the work that is applicable. 3. Site visits to review installation of applicable systems and progress of checklist documentation performed and reported by commissioning authority. 4. Functional testing: Commissioning authority shall conduct functional testing with assistance of applicable subcontractors and document successful results as well as deficiencies (issues). Functional performance testing shall demonstrate the installation and operation of components, systems, and system-to-system interfacing in accordance with plans and specifications. 5. Preliminary commissioning report: Commissioning authority shall issue a preliminary commissioning report to the owner that has results of the first round of functional testing including deficiencies discovered. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus COMMISSIONING OF Christi 26 08 00-2 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 6. Systems manual: Commissioning authority shall compile the systems manual using submittal data provided by the general contractor and applicable subcontractors. 7. Final commissioning report: Commissioning authority shall issue final commissioning report documenting the entire process and final results of functional testing. Report shall include final testing and balancing report. B. Electrical System Equipment to be tested 1. Occupancy sensors. 2. Time switch controls 3. Daylighting controls. 4. Electrical Service and Distribution System. C. Testing functions and conditions 1. Daylighting control devices a. Verify the devices have been calibrated, properly located and adjusted. b. Loads adjust to light level set points in response to daylight. c. Location of calibration equipment is accessible to authorized personnel only. 2. Time switches a. Verify schedule, time, date and programming is accurate. b. Verify override time limit is set, battery is installed and switch operates the lights that are specified in the design documents. c. All specified lights can be turned on and off by area control switch. d. Manual override switch allows only the lights in the space where the switch is located turn on or remain on until next scheduled shut off. 3. Occupant sensors: a. Certify the sensor has been located and aimed in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. b. For projects with fewer than seven sensors, each sensor shall be tested. c. Fore projects with more than seven occupant sensors, testing shall be done for each unique combination of sensor type and space geometry. Where multiples of each combination are provided not less than 10 percent shall be tested. d. Verify correct operation of status indicators. e. Controlled lights turn off or down to the permitted level with in the required time. f. For auto-on sensor, the lights turn-on to the permitted level when an occupant enters space. g. Verify the lights are not incorrectly turned-on by movement in adjacent areas or by HVAC operation. 4. Electrical Service and Distribution System a. Document the ground resistance testing performed by contractors. b. Document electrical subcontractor has adjusted breakers to setting recommended by coordination study. c. Document that any required infrared studies are performed. d. Document testing of transformer insulation and voltage drop. e. Document any other testing requirements have been fulfilled as required within specifications. D. Performance criteria 1. Daylighting controls shall maintain specified light levels within 5% of design. 2. All time switches shall be accurate to time on cellular network devices. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 NO PRODUCTS SUPPLIED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. This Division has startup responsibilities and are required to complete sub-systems so COMPLETE SYSTEMS are fully functional. Insuring they meet design requirements of Contract DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus COMMISSIONING OF Christi 26 08 00-3 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Documents. Commissioning procedures and testing do not relieve or lessen this responsibility or shift this responsibility, in whole or in part, to Commissioning Agent or Owner. B. Coordinate with other Sub-Contractors and equipment vendors to set aside adequate time to address Pre-Functional Checklists, Functional Performance Tests, Operations & Maintenance Manual creation, Owner Training, and associated coordination meetings. C. Commissioning authority will also conduct site inspections at critical times and issue Cx Field Reports with observations on installation deficiencies so that they may be issued by Architect as deemed appropriate. 3.02 WORK PRIOR TO COMMISSIONING A. Complete all phases of the work so the systems can be started, adjusted, balanced and otherwise tested. B. See pertinent specification sections in this Division, which outline responsibilities for start-up of equipment with obligations to complete systems, including all sub-systems so that they are fully functional. C. Assist Commissioning Agent with all information pertaining to actual equipment and installation as required complete the full commissioning scope. D. Contractor shall prepare startup procedures to demonstrate compliance with pre-functional checklists, and coordinate scheduling for completion of these checklists. E. A minimum of seven (7) days prior to date of system startup, submit to Commissioning Agent for review, detailed description of equipment start-up procedures which contractor proposes to perform to demonstrate conformance of systems to specifications and Checklists. 3.03 PARTICIPATION IN COMMISSIONING A. Attend meetings related to the Commissioning Process; arrange for attendance by personnel and vendors directly involved in the project, prior to testing of their systems. B. Provide skilled technicians to startup and test all systems, and place systems in complete and fully functioning service in accordance with Contract Documents. C. Provide skilled technicians, experienced and familiar with systems being commissioned, to assist Commissioning authority in commissioning process. 3.04 WORK TO RESOLVE DEFICIENCIES A. Complete corrective work in a timely manner to allow expeditious completion of Commissioning Process. If deadlines pass without resolution of identified problems, Owner reserves the right to obtain supplementary services and/or equipment to resolve the problem. Costs thus incurred will be Contractor's responsibility. 3.05 PRE-FUNCTIONAL CHECKLISTS (PFC) A. Contractor shall complete Pre-Functional Checklists to validate compliance with Contract Documents installation and start-up requirements, for this Division's systems. B. Refer to commissioning plan for detailed list of equipment to be commissioned. 3.06 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING (FPT) A. Contractor, in cooperation with Commissioning Agent, shall conduct Functional Performance Testing to validate compliance with Contract Documents. B. Refer to commissioning plan for detailed list of equipment to be commissioned. C. Provide commissioning authority with a certificate of readiness to show systems are ready to schedule functional testing. D. Assist Commissioning authority in Functional Testing by removing equipment covers, opening access panels, etc. Furnish ladders, flashlights, meters, gauges, or other inspection equipment as necessary. E. Sampling 1. Multiple identical pieces of non-life-safety or otherwise non-critical equipment may be functionally tested using a sampling strategy. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus COMMISSIONING OF Christi 26 08 00-4 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 2. Significant application differences and significant sequence of operation differences in otherwise identical equipment invalidates their common identity. A small size or capacity difference, alone, does not constitute a difference. It is noted that no sampling by Subs is allowed in pre-functional checklist execution. 3. A common sampling strategy is the "xx% Sampling -yy% Failure Rule", defined by the following example. a. xx= the percent of the group of identical equipment to be included in each sample. b. yy= the percent of the sample that if failing, will require another sample to be tested. c. The example below describes a 20% Sampling - 10% Failure Rule. d. Randomly test at least 20% (xx) of each group of identical equipment. In no case test less than three units in each group. This 20%, or three, constitute the "first sample." e. If 10% (yy) of the units in the first sample fail the functional tests, test another 20% of the group (the second sample). f. If 10% of the units in the second sample fail, test all remaining units in the whole group. g. If at any point, frequent failures are occurring and testing is becoming more troubleshooting than verification, the CxA may stop the testing and require the responsible Sub to perform and document a checkout of the remaining units, prior to continuing with functionally testing the remaining units. F. Re-Testing And Failure To Remedy Deficiencies 1. Despite Contractor's best efforts to ensure systems are problem-free, it is expected that some deficiencies will be found during initial inspection of Pre-functional Checklist, and during initial Functional Testing; such deficiencies are expected to be minimal. 2. It is Contractor's responsibility to remedy identified deficiencies, both in Pre-functional Checklist and in Functional Testing phases of work, in a timely and thorough manner. 3. It is Contractor's responsibility to ensure that all deficiencies are corrected prior to requesting a re-inspection or re-test of systems and equipment. Do not request re- inspection or re-test until deficiencies are corrected. a. At his discretion, CxA may agree to re-testing systems or equipment where deficiencies remain which are beyond Contractor's control to resolve expeditiously. b. Typically such re-testing of incomplete systems and equipment will take place only if remaining deficiencies are minor in scope and nature, and are of such nature that they cannot be resolved in a timely manner(such as those due to difficulties in obtaining parts, or where Owner has requested a change that has delayed work, etc.) 4. CxA will carry out a second re-inspection or re-test of systems and equipment subsequent to receiving Contractor's request. a. If CxA finds deficiencies identified in initial inspection or test have not been remedied (with exception of un-resolvable deficiencies in 3.b. above), and such remaining deficiencies are significant enough to require additional inspection or re-testing, Contractor will be back-charged for CxA's expenses, and time at a rate of$150.00 per hour and $100.00 expenses, for a third and any subsequent re-inspections and re-tests. G. Deferred Testing 1. "Seasonal Commissioning" pertains to testing during peak heating or cooling seasons when HVAC equipment is operating at full-load or heavy-load conditions. Initial commissioning will be done as soon as contract work is completed, regardless of season. Seasonal Commissioning under full- or heavy-load conditions other than the current season will be handled at later time by GC and CxA. 2. If adequate load may be artificially placed upon heating or cooling equipment, CxA, at his discretion, may perform functional testing during non-peak load periods. 3. GC is to provide services of personnel and participate in seasonal testing process in the same manner as he would in non-seasonal testing. 4. Until off-season commissioning can be accomplished, Owner may retain an amount from GC's payment sufficient to cover the cost of off-season testing. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus COMMISSIONING OF Christi 26 08 00-5 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 5. Unforeseen Deferred Tests: If any check or test cannot be completed due to building structure, required occupancy condition, or other reason, execution of checklists and functional testing may be delayed upon approval of Owner. Tests shall be conducted in same manner as seasonal tests, as soon as possible. Services of required parties will be negotiated. Make final adjustments to Operation and Maintenance Manuals and record drawings due to unforeseen deferred tests. 6. GC is to provide services of personnel and participate in deferred testing in the same manner as he would for normal commissioning. 3.07 TRAINING A. The following requirements are in addition to Operations & Maintenance requirements specified elsewhere in this specifications manual. B. Contractor shall be responsible for training coordination and scheduling, and ultimately to ensure that training is completed. C. The training agenda (plan) shall include, at a minimum, the following elements: 1. Purpose of equipment. 2. Principle of how the equipment works. 3. Important parts and assemblies. 4. How the equipment achieves its purpose and necessary operating conditions. 5. Most likely failure modes, causes and corrections. 6. On site demonstration. D. Commissioning Agent shall be responsible for overseeing and approving content and adequacy of training of Owner personnel for all installed systems. Provide Commissioning Agent with training plan two weeks before planned training. 3.08 OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. The following requirements are in addition to Operations & Maintenance requirements specified elsewhere in this specifications manual. B. Contractor shall compile and prepare documentation for equipment and systems specified in this Division, and shall deliver documentation to Contractor for inclusion in Operation & Maintenance Manuals, in accordance with requirements of Division 01, prior to training Owner personnel. C. Provide Commissioning authority with a single, electronic copy of Operation & Maintenance Manuals for review. Commissioning authority's copy of O&M manuals shall be submitted through Architect. D. Operation and maintenance manuals shall include, service agency contact information, maintenance requirements, controls system settings and a narrative of how each system is intended to operate, including set points. 3.09 DOCUMENTATION A. Commissioning authority shall provide documentation of process as follows: 1. Preliminary commissioning report including test procedures, results of testing, itemization of deficiencies, deferred tests and climatic conditions required for performance of deferred tests. Preliminary commissioning report shall be issued to owner to demonstrate the first pass of testing has occurred and to demonstrate compliance with applicable codes. 2. Final commissioning report shall include the final test and balance report, final results of functional testing, disposition of deficiencies discovered during testing, including the details of corrective measures used and functional testing procedures used for repeatability of testing in the future. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus COMMISSIONING OF Christi 26 08 00-6 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SECTION 26 09 13 ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Provide quantity of monitoring devices as shown on drawings. B. Monitoring devices shall include all necessary accessories to be fully functional as described by this specification. C. Provide a 4 year warranty on devices. D. Devices shall be UL listed and CE marked. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI C12.20 -American National Standard for Electricity Meters- 0.1, 0.2, and 0.5 Accuracy Classes; 2022. B. IEC 62053-22- Electricity Metering Equipment- Particular Requirements- Part 22: Static Meters for AC Active Energy (Classes 0,1S,0,2S and 0,5S); 2020. C. IEEE C37.90.1 - IEEE Standard for Surge Withstand Capability (SWC)Tests for Relays and Relay Systems Associated with Electric Power Apparatus; 2012, with Errata (2013). 1.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Electro Industries/GaugeTech. B. Products judged to be equal by the engineer. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings shall include, but not be limited to: 1. Cutsheets of devices with ratings, physical dimensions and all accessories clearly labeled. 2. Device labels shall be clearly indicated in cutsheets. 3. All standards and listings, as specified in section 1.2A, shall be clearly labeled in cutsheets provided. 4. Cutsheets shall clearly outline that design requirements of this specification have been met. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DESIGN A. Power meter shall be designed for Multifunction Electrical Measurement on 3 phase power systems. 1. Meter shall support 3 element Wye, 2.5 element Wye, 2 element Delta, 4 wire Delta systems. 2. The meter shall accept universal voltage input. 3. Surge withstand shall conform to IEEE C37.90.1. 4. The meter shall be user programmable for voltage range to any PT ratio. 5. Meter shall accept a burden of up to 0.36VA per phase, Max at 600V, 0.014VA at 120 Volts. 6. The meter shall accept a voltage input range of up to 416 Volts Line to Neutral, and a range of up to 721 Volts Line to Line. 7. Meter shall accept a current reading of up to 11 Amps continuous. B. The meter shall include a three line, bright red, 0.56" LED display. 1. The meter shall fit in both DIN 92mm and ANSI C39.1 Round cut-outs. 2. The meter must display a % of Load Bar on the front panel to provide an analog feel. The % Load bar shall have not less than 10 segments. C. The meter shall support power supply of 90 to 265 Volts AC and 100 to 370 Volts DC. Universal AC/DC Supply shall be available. 1. Meter power supply shall accept burden of 1 OVA max. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus ELECTRICAL POWER Christi 26 09 13- 1 MONITORING AND CONTROL 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 2. Meter shall provide upgrade rate of 100msec for Watts, Var and VA. All other parameters shall be 1 second D. Meter shall be available in transducer only version, which shall not include a display. The meter shall mount directly to a DIN rail. 2.02 OPERATION A. Power meter shall use a dual input method for current inputs. Method one shall allow the CT to pass directly through the meter without any physical termination on the meter, ensuring the meter cannot be a point of failure on the CT circuit. The second method shall provide additional termination pass-through bars, allowing the CT leads to be terminated on the meter. The meter must support both termination methods. 1. Fault Current Withstand shall be 100 Amps for 10 seconds, 300 Amps for 3 seconds, and 500 Amps for 1 second. 2. Meter shall be programmable for current to any CT ratio. DIP switches or other fixed ratios shall not be acceptable 3. Meter shall accept burden of 0.005VA per phase, Max at 11 Amps. 4. Meter shall begin reading at a 5mA pickup current. 5. Pass through wire gauge dimension of 0.177"/4.5 mm shall be available. 6. All inputs and outputs shall be galvanically isolated to 2500 Volts AC. 7. The meter shall accept current inputs of class 10: (0 to 11)A, 5 Amp Nominal, and class 2 (0 to 2)A, 1A Nominal Secondary. 2.03 ACCURACY REQUIREMENTS A. The meter shall have an accuracy of+/- 0.1% or better for volts and amps, and 0.2%for power and energy functions. The meter shall meet the accuracy requirements of IEC 62053-22 and ANSI C12.20. 1. The meter shall provide true RMS measurements of voltage, phase to neutral and phase to phase; current, per phase and neutral. 2. The meter shall provide sampling at 400+ samples per cycle on all channels measured readings simultaneously. 3. The meter shall utilize 24 bit Analog to Digital conversion. 4. Meter shall provide Harmonics %THD (% of total Harmonic Distortion). B. Meter shall be a traceable revenue meter, which shall contain a utility grade test pulse allowing power providers to verify and confirm that the meter is performing to its rated accuracy. 2.04 STANDARD FEATURES A. The meter shall include 2 independent communications ports on the back and face plate, with advanced features. 1. One port, through backplate, shall be an RJ45 port, providing 100BaseT Ethernet communication speaking BACnet/IP protocol and Modbus TCP, and a Web server. 2. The meter shall provide an optical IrDA port (through faceplate), as the second communication port, which shall allow the unit to be set up and programmed using a remote laptop PC without need for a communication cable. B. The meter shall provide user configured fixed window or rolling window demand. This shall allow user to set up the particular utility demand profile. 1. Readings for kW, kVAR, kVA and PF shall be calculated using utility demand features. 2. All other parameters shall offer max and min capability over the user selectable eaveraging period. 3. Voltage shall provide an instantaneous max and min reading displaying the highest surge and lowest sag seen by the meter. C. The meter shall have native BACnet/IP protocol. 1. The meter shall provide 40 embedded BACnet Objects consisting of standard voltage, current, and power parameters. The Objects shall be named such that they can be readily identified. 2. The meter shall have an embedded Web interface for configuration and viewing. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus ELECTRICAL POWER Christi 26 09 13-2 MONITORING AND CONTROL 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop a. The Web interface shall have a Home page with power and energy snapshot information. b. The Web interface shall have a page for configuring the BACnet/IP settings, including IP address, Network mask, Default Gateway, and the like. c. The Web interface shall allow the user to activate the new configuration and reboot the meter. d. The Web interface shall have a feature that lets the user download BACnet Object data as a .csv file that can be viewed in MS Excel©or saved as an MS Excel©file. e. The Web interface shall have a webpage that displays the BACnet objects, their readings, and information about the objects. f. The Web interface shall have a webpage displaying statistics for the unit, e.g., the number of meter reboots, and the number of BACnet/IP packets sent and received. g. The Web interface shall allow the user to discard any changes and return to the saved configuration, or return to the factory default configuration. h. The Web interface shall be viewable with any standard Internet browser. 3. The meter shall be configurable on the Host PC through LAN configuration. 4. The meter's BACnet/IP shall integrate with any BACnet applications or servers. 5. The meter shall also have an open socket for Modbus TCP that shall be simultaneously available through the LAN interface. 2.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Power meter shall be able to be stored in (-20 to +70)degrees C. B. Operating temperature shall be (-20 to +70)degrees C. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Unless otherwise shown on drawings, meters for monitoring single panel or feeder shall be Shark 100B. B. Provide 6x6x6 NEMA 1 enclosure for meters that are not mounted within electrical gear enclosures. C. Provide start-up/commissioning by factory representative. Start-up/commissioning shall be coordinated with Engineer or Owner's representative so they may observe. 3.02 OPERATIONS PERSONNEL TRAINING A. Provide a training session for the owner's operations personnel. Training session shall be performed by a qualified person who is knowledgeable in the subject/equipment. Submit a training agenda two (2)weeks prior to the proposed training session for review and approval. Training session shall include at the minimum: 1. Purpose of equipment. 2. Principle of how the equipment works. 3. Important parts and assemblies. 4. How the equipment achieves its purpose and necessary operating conditions. 5. Most likely failure modes, causes and corrections. 6. On site demonstration. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus ELECTRICAL POWER Christi 26 09 13-3 MONITORING AND CONTROL 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SECTION 26 09 36 LIGHTING CONTROLS (STAND-ALONE) PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Electrical contractor shall provide a complete lighting control system that controls all interior and exterior lighting fixtures, including emergency fixtures. All lighting controls shall be stand-alone, and shall not have any communication with adjacent spaces. It is the contractor's responsibility to provide a complete and functional system, including, but not limited to all room controllers, switch packs, power packs, occupancy sensors, low voltage control stations, emergency bypass controllers, low voltage control cable, even if not specifically called out on the plans. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Digital Occupancy and Daylighting Sensor Control 2. Emergency Lighting Control 3. Control Intent—Control Intent includes, but is not limited to: a. Defaults and initial calibration settings for such items as time delay, sensitivity, fade rates, etc. b. Initial sensor and switching zones c. Initial time switch settings d. Task lighting and receptacle controls e. Emergency Lighting control 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Drawings and general provision of the Contact, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section B. Section 26 02 00- Basic Materials and Methods for Electrical C. Section 26 05 19-Wire, Cable and Related Materials: line and low voltage conductors, dimming conductors, securement requirements. D. Section 26 27 26-Wiring Devices E. Section 26 29 26- Miscellaneous Electrical Controls and Wiring F. Section 26 51 19- Lighting Fixtures- Light Emitting Diode (LED) 1.04 REFERENCES A. ASHRAE Std 90.1 I-P- Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. B. ICC (IECC)- International Energy Conservation Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. C. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. D. UL 94-Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. E. UL 773A- Nonindustrial Photoelectric Switches for Lighting Control; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. F. UL 924- Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. G. UL 1008-Transfer Switch Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. H. UL 1598- Luminaires; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION & OPERATION A. The Lighting Control system as defined under this section covers the following equipment: DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus LIGHTING CONTROLS (STAND- Christi 26 09 36- 1 ALONE) 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 1. Room Controllers—Self-configuring and field-configurable, one, two or three relays controllers, 0-10 volt control for drivers (if applicable). 2. Low Voltage Occupancy/Vacancy Sensors—Self-configuring or field-configurable, Low Voltage, calibrated occupancy sensors, Dual technology or PIR as described by this specification. 3. Low Voltage On/Off Switches—Self-configuring or field-configurable, Low Voltage pushbutton switches, that may contain one, two, three, or four control zone capability per device. 4. Low Voltage On/Off Dimmer Switches—Self-configuring or field-configurable, Low Voltage pushbutton switches, Dimmer and scene switches that may contain one, two, three, or four control zone capability per device. 5. Photosensors—Low Voltage Single-zone closed loop daylighting sensors with switching or dimming control for daylight harvesting. 6. Configuration Tools— Handheld remote for room configuration provides twoway infrared (IR)communications to digital devices and allows complete configuration and reconfiguration of the device/ room from up to 30 feet away. Unit to have, at a minimum, simple pushbutton interface and allow send/receive of room variables and occupancy/vacancy/photo/daylight sensor settings. 7. Emergency Lighting Control Unit (ELCU)—allows a standard lighting control device to control emergency lighting in conjunction with normal lighting in any area within a building. Under loss of normal power, the ELCU shall bypass any control device and ensure fixtures are enabled at 100% light output. Comply with UL 924 and UL 1008 as applicable for each instance. Comply with 26 51 19. B. System shall accommodate the square-footage coverage requirements for each area controlled, utilizing power packs, occupancy and vacancy sensors, switches, daylighting sensors and accessories that suit the required lighting and electrical system parameters. C. System shall conform to requirements of NFPA 70. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals Package: Submit the shop drawings, and the product data specified below at the same time as a package. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Composite wiring and/or schematic riser diagram of each control circuit as proposed to be installed (standard diagrams will not be accepted). 2. Scale drawing for each area showing exact location of each sensor, room controller, and digital switch. 3. Riser diagrams to express lighting control hardware and wiring required to meet lighting control sequence of operations. C. Product Data: Catalog sheets, specifications and installation instructions. D. Include data for each device which: 1. Indicates where sensor is proposed to be installed. 2. Prove that the sensor is suitable for the proposed application. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Minimum 7 years experience in manufacture of lighting controls, unless specifically listed in this specification. B. Lighting controls shall meet the minimum requirements of ICC (IECC)and ASHRAE Std 90.1 I- P as applicable. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not install equipment until following conditions can be maintained in spaces to receive equipment: 1. Ambient temperature: 0° to 40' C (32' to 104' F). 2. Relative humidity: Maximum 90 percent, non-condensing. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus LIGHTING CONTROLS (STAND- Christi 26 09 36-2 ALONE) 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 1.09 WARRANTY A. Provide a five year complete manufacturer's warranty on all products to be free of manufacturers' defects. 1.10 MAINTENANCE A. Spare Parts: 1. Provide 5 spares of each product listed below to be used for maintenance. a. Room Controllers b. Power packs c. Occupancy Sensors d. Emergency Bypass controllers e. Low voltage on/off switches f. Low voltage on/off/dimmer switches g. Low voltage wall sensor switch h. Daylighting harvesting photocells PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. WattStopper B. Acuity Brands C. Cooper/I LC/G ree n gate D. Sensorworx E. Steinel F. ETC 2.02 ALL OCCUPANCY SENSORS (CEILING OR WALL SWITCH) A. Where specified, vandal resistant wall switch sensors shall utilize a hard lens with a minimum 1.0mm thickness. Products utilizing a soft lens will not be considered. B. Passive infrared sensors shall utilize Processing protocols to respond only to those signals caused by human motion. C. Passive infrared sensors shall provide high immunity to false triggering from RFI (hand-held radios)and EMI (electrical noise on the line). D. Where specified, passive infrared ultrasonic and dual technology sensors shall offer daylighting footcandle adjustment control and be able to accommodate dual level lighting. E. Dual technology sensors shall consist of passive infrared and ultrasonic technologies for occupancy detection. Products that react to noise or ambient sound shall not be considered. F. Ultrasonic operating frequency shall be crystal controlled at 25 kHz within ± 0.005% tolerance, 32 kHz within ± 0.002% tolerance, or 40 kHz ± 0.002% tolerance to assure reliable performance and eliminate sensor cross-talk. Sensors using multiple frequencies are not acceptable. G. All sensors shall be capable of operating normally with electronic ballasts, PL lamp systems and rated motor Ioads.Coverage of sensors shall remain constant after sensitivity control has been set. No automatic reduction shall occur in coverage due to the cycling of air conditioner or heating fans. H. In the event of failure, a bypass manual override shall be provided on each sensor. When bypass is utilized, lighting shall remain on constantly or control shall divert to a wall switch until sensor is replaced. This control shall be recessed to prevent tampering. I. All sensors shall provide an LED as a visual means of indication at all times to verify that motion is being detected during both testing and normal operation. J. Where specified, sensor shall have an internal additional isolated relay with Normally Open, Normally Closed and Common outputs for use with HVAC control, Data Logging and other DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus LIGHTING CONTROLS (STAND- Christi 26 09 36-3 ALONE) 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop control options. Sensors utilizing separate components or specially modified units to achieve this function are not acceptable. K. All sensors shall have UL 94V-0 rated plastic enclosures. L. Outdoor sensors shall have UL 773A ratings. EWF outdoor sensors shall additionally have UL 1598 ratings. M. Outdoor sensors shall have an operating temperature range of-40°F to +130°F N. To ensure complete protection from weather elements and exposure, outdoor sensors shall be rated and listed for outdoor use. O. Multiple occupancy sensors may be installed in a room by simply connecting them to the free topology room system. No additional configuration will be required. P. All devices shall be hard wired. No wireless devices shall be permitted. 2.03 WALL-SWITCH OCCUPANCY SENSOR A. Manual-ON, Automatic-OFF dual technology(passive infrared and ultrasonic)wall switch occupancy sensor. Furnish the Company's model which suits the electrical system parameters, and accommodates the square-foot coverage and wattage requirement for each area (and type of lighting)controlled; B. Wall switch sensors shall be capable of detection of occupancy at desktop level up to 300 square feet, and gross motion up to 1000 square feet. C. Wall switch sensors shall accommodate loads from 0 to 800 watts at 120 volts; 0 to 1200 watts at 277 volts and shall have 180' coverage capability. D. Wall switch products shall utilize Zero Crossing Circuitry which increases relay life, protects from the effects of inrush current, and increases sensor's longevity. E. Where specified, wall switch sensors shall provide a field selectable option to convert sensor operation from automatic-ON to manual-ON. 2.04 WALL OR CEILING MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSOR SYSTEM A. Ceiling mounted (to suit installation) passive infrared (PIR), ultrasonic or dual technology digital (passive infrared and ultrasonic) occupancy sensor. provide the Company's system which accommodates the square-foot coverage requirements for each area controlled, utilizing room controllers, occupancy sensors and accessories which suit the lighting and electrical system parameters. Passive infrared only sensors shall not be used for classroom applications. B. Occupancy Sensors shall provide Features include the following: digital or analog calibration and pushbutton/dip-switch/dial programming for the following variables: 1. Sensitivity—0-100% in 10% increments 2. Time delay— 1-30 minutes in 1 minute increments 3. Test mode—Five second time delay 4. Detection technology—PIR, Ultrasonic or Dual Technology activation and/or re-activation. 5. Walk-through mode 6. Load parameters including Auto/Manual-ON, and daylight enable/disable when photosensors C. Device Status LEDs including: 1. PIR Detection 2. Ultrasonic detection 3. Configuration mode 4. Load binding D. Manual override of controlled loads. 2.05 WALL SWITCHES A. Low voltage momentary pushbutton switches in 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 button configuration; available in white, light almond, ivory, grey and black; compatible with wall plates with decorator opening. Wall switches shall include the following features: DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus LIGHTING CONTROLS (STAND- Christi 26 09 36-4 ALONE) 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 1. Two-way infrared (IR)transceiver for use with configuration remote controls. 2. Removable buttons for field replacement with engraved buttons and/or alternate color buttons. Button replacement may be completed without removing the switch from the wall. 3. Configuration LED on each switch that blinks to indicate data transmission. B. RJ-45 ports, or other manufacturer provided wiring method, for connection of devices on a common system. C. Plug and play technology. Devices in the same room may be interconnected together and operate in default mode without any programming. Devices in a common space may be connected together, in a manner to be described and installed by the manufacturer's installation guidelines and requirements. 2.06 ROOM CONTROLLERS A. Room Controllers automatically bind the room loads to the connected devices in the space without commissioning or the use of any tools. Room Controllers shall be provided to match the room lighting load and control requirements. The controllers shall be simple to install and may contain dip switches, potentiometers, or other easily adjustable field devices to allow for easy modification. All shall include the following features: 1. Automatic room configuration to the most energy-efficient sequence of operation based upon the devices in the room. 2. Simple replacement— Using the default automatic configuration capabilities, a room controller may be replaced with an off-the-shelf unit without requiring any configuration or setup. 3. Quick installation features including: a. Standard junction box mounting b. Quick low voltage connections using standard RJ-45 patch cable 4. Plenum rated 5. Manual override and LED indication for each load 6. Dual voltage (120/277 VAC, 60 Hz) 7. Zero cross circuitry for each load. B. On/Off/Dimming enhanced Room Controllers shall include: 1. Real time current monitoring 2. One, two or three relay configuration 3. Efficient 250 mA switching power supply 4. RJ-45 local ports or other manufacturer provided wiring connection methods for connection to other devices on the same system. 5. One 0-10 volt analog output per relay for control of compatible ballasts and LED drivers. 6. The following dimming attributes may be changed or selected using a wireless configuration tool: a. Establish preset level for each load from 0-100% b. Set high and low trim for each load c. Set lamp burn in time for each load up to 100 hours 7. Discrete model listed for connection to receptacles, for occupancy-based control of plug loads within the space. a. One relay configuration only b. Automatic-ON/OFF configuration 2.07 PHOTOSENSORS A. Digital photosensors work with room controllers or dimming relay packs to provide automatic switching or dimming daylight harvesting capabilities for any load type connected to a room controller/relay pack. Closed loop photosensors measure the ambient light in the space and control a single lighting zone. Open loop photosensors measure incoming daylight in the space and are capable of controlling up to three lighting zones. Photosensors shall be interchangeable without the need for rewiring. B. Digital photosensors include the following features: DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus LIGHTING CONTROLS (STAND- Christi 26 09 36-5 ALONE) 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 1. An internal photodiode that measures only within the visible spectrum and has a response curve that closely matches the photopic curve. The photodiode shall not measure energy in either the ultraviolet or infrared spectrums. The photocell shall have a sensitivity of less than 5% for any wavelengths less than 400 nanometers or greater than 700 nanometers. 2. Sensor light level range shall be from 1-1,000 footcandles (fc). 3. The capability of switching one-third, one-half or all lighting ON and OFF, or raising or lowering lighting levels, for each controlled zone, depending on the selection of room controller(s) and load binding to room controller(s). 4. For switching daylight harvesting, the photosensor shall provide a deadband or a separation between the "ON SetpoinY' and the "OFF SetpoinY' that will prevent the lights from cycling after they turn off. 5. For dimming daylight harvesting, the photosensor shall provide the option, when the daylight contribution is sufficient, of turning lights off or dimming lights to a user-selectable minimum level. 6. Infrared (IR)transceiver for configuration and/or commissioning with a handheld configuration tool, to transmit detected light level to wireless configuration tool, and for communication with personal remote controls. C. Closed loop digital photosensors include the following additional features: 1. An internal photodiode that can be located within a space to remove unwanted light collection from the diode. Wide open light receptors are not permitted. Sensors must be sensitive enough to only detect ambient lighting in the intended detection zone. 2. Automatic self-calibration, initiated from the photosensor, a wireless configuration tool or a PC with appropriate software. 3. Automatically establishes setpoints following self-calibration. 4. A sliding setpoint control algorithm for dimming daylight harvesting with a "Day Setpoint" and the "Night SetpoinY' to prevent the lights from cycling. D. Open loop digital photosensors include the following additional features: 1. An internal photodiode that can be located within a space to remove unwanted light collection from the diode. Wide open light receptors are not permitted. Sensors must be sensitive enough to only detect ambient lighting in the intended detection zone. 2. Automatically establishes setpoints following calibration using a wireless configuration tool or a PC with appropriate software. 3. A proportional control algorithm for dimming daylight harvesting with a "SetpoinY'to be maintained during operation. 2.08 EMERGENCY LIGHTING A. Emergency Lighting Control Unit-A UL 924 listed device that monitors a switched circuit providing normal lighting to an area. The unit provides normal ON/OFF control of emergency lighting along with the normal lighting. Upon normal power failure the emergency lighting circuit will close, forcing the emergency lighting ON until normal power is restored. Features include: 1. 120/277 volts, 50/60 Hz., 20 amp ballast rating 2. Push to test button 3. Auxiliary contact for remote test. B. Include fire alarm interface with all UL 924 and UL 1008 devices. 2.09 POWER PACKS A. Control Units- For ease of mounting, installation and future service, control unit(s) shall be able to externally mount through a 1/2" knock-out on a standard electrical enclosure and be an integrated, self-contained unit consisting internally of an isolated load switching control relay and a transformer to provide low-voltage power. Control unit shall provide power to a minimum of five (5)sensors. B. Relay Contacts shall have ratings of 20A, 16A continuous, LED Lighting loads, switched receptacle and associated common motor loads that can be fed by common 5-20R receptacles. C. Control wiring between sensors and controls units shall be Class II, 18-24 AWG, stranded U.L. Classified, PVC insulated or TEFLON jacketed cable suitable for use in plenums, where DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus LIGHTING CONTROLS (STAND- Christi 26 09 36-6 ALONE) 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop applicable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Do not begin installation until measurements have been verified and work areas have been properly prepared. B. If preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. C. Verify that required pre-installation meeting specified in Part 1 of this specification has been completed, recorded meeting minutes have been distributed and all outstanding issues noted have been resolved prior to the start of installation. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Contractor must arrange virtual or phone meeting with the manufacturer before project rough-in to ensure the hardware, cabling, and overall system requirements are understood and met. B. All line voltage connections shall be tagged to indicate circuit and switched legs. C. Test all devices to ensure proper communication. D. Electrical contractor shall calibrate all sensor time delays and sensitivity to guarantee proper detection of occupants and energy savings. Adjust time delay so that controlled area remains lighted while occupied. E. Tighten all panel Class I conductors from both circuit breaker and to loads to torque ratings as marked on enclosure UL label. F. All Class 11 cabling shall enter enclosures from within low-voltage wiring areas and shall remain within those areas. No Class I conductors shall enter a low-voltage area. G. Run separate neutrals for any phase dimmed branch load circuit. Different types of dimming loads shall have separate neutral. H. Contractor shall provide to the manufacturer all quantities for system including but not limited to relays, room controllers, relay panels, plug load controllers, switches, sensors and wire lengths and configurations for device cable at least 1 week before bid. I. Install all devices as required by manufacturer submitted shop drawings and installation guidelines. Wiring details included with the construction documents are for general scope of work, and exact wiring and connections may vary by manufacturer. J. The contractor shall coordinate rough-in size and quantity with the number of devices necessary. Since many control devices may accommodate multiple switch legs in a single gang, there may be an indirect relationship between number of devices and number of control zones. K. Provide J-hooks for supporting all low-voltage cabling at a spacing not to exceed 5 ft. between hooks. L. Provide dimming conductors for all dimming zones, as indicated by presence of dimmer devices on the plans. M. The lighting control system must function within the guidelines stated in the lighting control sequence of operation notes, details, matrices, and narratives on the plans. 3.03 COMMISSIONING A. Upon completion of the installation, the system shall be commissioned by a commissioning agent representative who will verify a complete fully functional system is installed as required by plans and specifications. B. Provide a training session for the owner's operations personnel. Training session shall be performed by a qualified person who is knowledgeable in the subject/equipment. Submit a training agenda two (2)weeks prior to the proposed training session for review and approval. Training session shall include at the minimum: 1. Purpose of equipment. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus LIGHTING CONTROLS (STAND- Christi 26 09 36-7 ALONE) 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 2. Principle of how the equipment works. 3. Important parts and assemblies. 4. How the equipment achieves its purpose and necessary operating conditions. 5. Most likely failure modes, causes and corrections. 6. On site demonstration. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus LIGHTING CONTROLS (STAND- Christi 26 09 36-8 ALONE) 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SECTION 26 21 13 ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. Power company fees shall be paid by Owner. C. Provide electrical service to comply with contract documents and the power company standards. 1.02 SCOPE A. RELATED WORK: 1. Basic Electrical Materials and Methods. 2. Earthwork 3. Division 1 B. Permanent Power: Contractor shall coordinate with the power company to provide electrical service to the building or campus as shown on the drawings. Contractor shall coordinate with power company and submit all required documentation; and shall establish the sequence of work to obtain permanent power. C. Temporary Power: Provided by the contractor. 1.03 PERMITS, CODES, LAWS AND ORDINANCES A. NFPA-70, NEC, State and local. 1.04 MINIMUM COMPLIANCE STANDARDS A. Easements required by power company. B. Duct bank required by power company. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ELECTRICAL SERVICE A. SERVICE TRANSFORMER: Exterior Pad Mounted. B. Terminal pole shall be provided by the power company. C. Pad mounted switch shall be provided by the power company. D. POWER COMPANY: Power company serving this region. E. SOURCE VOLTAGE: 480Y/277 volt, three phase, four wire system. 2.02 CABLE TAP BOX A. Provide when required by the power company for terminating additional conductors in which the power company transformers terminations are exceeded or for metering. 2.03 METERS A. Provide metering as required by Electric Utility Company Standards and requirements which may include self-contained meters and sockets, current transformers (CT's)and CT enclosures, bussed CT enclosures, transockets, meter modules, and bussed gutters and meter assemblies. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SERVICE LATERIAL A. Route service lateral underground to main service disconnect. B. Route service lateral underground to cable tap box and underground to main service disconnect. C. Route service lateral underground from weather head to main service disconnect. D. Route service lateral over head to main service disconnect. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus ELECTRICAL SERVICE Christi 2621 13- 1 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop ENTRANCE Re-Bid Construction Documents E. Route service lateral busway over head to main circuit breaker. F. Provide cable-tap box with above ground wireway with underground service laterals from tap- box to all points of service delivery, as shown on plan. G. Route service lateral to Service distribution equipment. Service distribution equipment without a main shall not possess more than 6 means of disconnection (6 separate laterals). H. Route service lateral underground to the C/T Can to serve the fire pump. 3.02 COORDINATION A. Confirm with power company exact locations of service entry and other requirements. B. Provide all service laterals, whether above ground or below ground, in accordance with utility company engineered drawings. Information shown on contract documents may vary slightly from utility company engineered drawings and all utility company drawings and specifications shall supersede these contract drawings. C. All electrical service infrastructure, up to the point of delivery, shall be installed per utility company standards. Plans and details included in these contract documents do not depict exact installation details as they may be required by the utility company. 3.03 CONCRETE PADS A. Provide steel reinforced concrete pads with leave outs for conduits to comply with power company standards. Refer to Basic Materials and Methods. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Provide concrete encased Primary ductbank, including any and all steel reinforcement, conduit spacers and straps B. Provide concrete encased secondary service lateral ductbank, including any and all steel reinforcement, conduit spacers and straps C. All unmetered conductors shall be installed in rigid steel conduit, where installed above grade. 3.05 STEEL STRUCTURES A. Provide galvanized steel structure embedded in concrete to support metering equipment and disconnect switches. 3.06 FIRE PUMPS A. Provide a separate concrete encased service lateral to the fire pump controller. B. Provide current transformer(CT) can and meter for fire pump service. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus ELECTRICAL SERVICE Christi 2621 13-2 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop ENTRANCE SECTION 26 22 13 LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTIONS TRANSFORMERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Provide 480 volt primary step down transformers as shown, scheduled and as specified. B. The type of transformers required includes dry-type general purpose transformers. 1.02 STANDARDS A. Products shall be designed, manufactured, tested and installed in compliance with applicable ANSI/IEEE and NEMA standards. B. All low voltage transformers shall be UL listed and labeled. C. All low voltage transformers 15 kVA and larger shall meet or exceed post-January 1, 2016 U.S. DOE efficiency requirements Energy, 10 C.F.R. §431.196(a)(2) (2015) regardless of whether transformer date of manufacture is pre or post January 1, 2016. D. All low voltage transformers 15 kVA and larger shall be tested for efficiency in accordance with U.S. DOE test methods Energy, 10 C.F.R. §431, Subpart K, Appendix A (2015). 1.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Provide one of the following manufacturers for general purpose use: 1. General Electric Company 2. Square D Company 3. Power Quality International 4. Eaton 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings shall include, but not be limited to: 1. Cutsheets of transformers with sound and load ratings, dimensions, weights, impedance rating, insulation type, temperature rise and tap configurations. 1.05 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. National Electrical Code. B. Local, municipal, and/or state codes that have jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL PURPOSE A. Provide dry type, two-winding transformers with primary and secondary voltages and KVA ratings as shown on plans. Transformers shall operate at 60 hertz. All transformers shall be manufacture with standard materials and components. 2.02 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS FOR GENERAL PURPOSE TRANSFORMERS A. All cores shall be constructed of high grade, non-aging silicon steel with high magnetic permeability, and low hysteresis and eddy current losses. Magnetic flux densities are to be kept well below the saturation point. The core laminations shall be clamped together with structural steel angles. The completed core and coil shall be isolated from the base by means of rubber, vibration-absorbing mounts. There shall be no metal-to-metal contact between the core and coil and the enclosure. The vibration isolating system shall be designed to provide a permanent fastening of the core and coil to the enclosure. Sound isolating system requiring the complete removal of all fastening devices will not be accepted. Windings shall be copper or electrical grade aluminum terminated on tin plated or copper bars. Foil windings are not acceptable. B. The transformer core shall be visibly grounded to the enclosure by means of a flexible grounding conductor sized in accordance with NEMA, IEEE and ANSI standards. C. Transformer coils shall be of continuous-wound type construction and shall be impregnated with non-hygroscopic, thermo-setting varnish. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTIONS Christi 26 22 13- 1 TRANSFORMERS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents D. Transformers shall be enclosed in drip-proof, metallic enclosures designed to provide for air cooling and prevent accidental contact with live conductors. Wiring compartment shall be located below the core and coil and cooled by air circulation or insulated from the core and coil by means of a suitable thermal insulation barrier. Transformer exposed to weather or installed in a sprinkled area shall have rain shields on all openings. Entire transformer enclosure shall be cleaned, phosphatized, primed and painted with a gray, baked enamel. E. Transformers shall operate at 100% nameplate KVA rating continuously while in a 40 degree C ambient without exceeding the rated average winding temperature rise of the ANSI insulation system as described below. Temperature rating shall be as follows: RATING PHASE INSULATION-TEMP. RISE 0.025 through 3 KVA SingleType B -801 C 5 through 25 KVA SingleType F- 1150 C 3 through 15 KVA ThreeType F- 1150 C 37'/2 KVA and larger SingleType H - 1501 C 30 KVA and larger ThreeType H - 1501 C F. Transformers shall have minimum full load rated taps in the primary windings as follows: RATING TAPS 3 through 25 KVA 2 -5% FCBN 15 through 300 KVA 6-2-'/2% TAPS, 2 above and 4 below nominal G. Maximum sound ratings shall be as follows: KVA dBA 0 to 9 40 10 to 50 45 51 to 150 50 151 to 300 55 301 to 500 60 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Install transformer in accordance with manufacturers written instructions, and recognized industry practices. B. Housekeeping Pad: Provide a nominal 3-'/2' high, 2500 PSI (28 Day) concrete reinforced pad with number 6 welded wire mesh. The pad shall conform to the shape of the transformer and extend at least 3 inches beyond the length and width of the transformer. All corners of the pad shall be rounded. C. Mounting: Install floor mounted transformers on properly sized rubber-in-shear vibration isolators. Trapeze mounted transformers shall use rubber-in-shear hangers. Wall mounted transformers shall not be mounted directly to the wall without vibration isolation. D. Connection: Route conductors in a minimum of 2 feet of flexible steel conduit to transformer enclosure. Provide grounding conductor sized per NEC, connected to the building grounding electrode system. 3.02 TESTING A. Insulation, Tests: Prior to energization, check transformers windings for continuity and test the insulation resistance. Tests shall be made using a Biddle Megger or equivalent test instrument, per manufacturers' recommendations. Provide written documentation of testing. Submit with O & M manuals. B. Tap Setting: Measure current and voltage under load conditions to provide correct tap settings. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTIONS Christi 26 22 13-2 TRANSFORMERS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SECTION 26 22 22 LOW VOLTAGE HARMONIC MITIGATING DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Provide 480 -208Y/120 volt 3 phase, 4 wire transformers as shown, scheduled and as specified. B. The type of transformers required are dry-type harmonic mitigating transformers. 1.02 STANDARDS A. Products shall be designed, manufactured, tested and installed in compliance with applicable ANSI/IEE and NEMA standards. 1. All low voltage transformers shall be UL listed and labeled. 2. All low voltage transformers 15 kVA and larger shall meet or exceed post-January 1, 2016 U.S. DOE efficiency requirements Energy, 10 C.F.R. §431.196(a)(2) (2015) regardless of whether transformer date of manufacture is pre or post January 1, 2016. 3. All low voltage transformers 15 kVA and larger shall be tested for efficiency in accordance with U.S. DOE test methods Energy, 10 C.F.R. §431, Subpart K, Appendix A(2015). 1.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Power Quality International, Inc. (PQI) 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings shall include, but not be limited to: 1. Cutsheets of transformers with sound and load ratings, dimensions, weights, impedance rating, insulation type, temperature rise, phase displacement and tap configurations. 1.05 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. National Electrical Code. B. Local, municipal, and/or state codes that have jurisdiction. 1.06 DESIGN OBJECTIVES A. The design of the electrical distribution system, as described by this specification and detailed in the accompanying electrical drawings, provides for control of the harmonic currents that are generated by non-linear electronic loads. These design objectives, and the various standards that apply, are detailed herein as follows: 1. To reduce the `penalty losses' that are produced by harmonic currents, which would otherwise result in an increase in the cost-of-power, apparatus heating and the cost of air- conditioning, within economic limits. 2. To limit harmonic current injection into the Point of Common Coupling (PCC), as required in IEEE 519 , Section 10.4, Table 10.3. 3. To limit positive, negative and zero sequence harmonic currents in the distribution system so that the Individual Harmonic Distortion of Voltage (IHDv) levels do not exceed 3% at the loads and the Total Harmonic Distortion of Voltage (THDv) levels do not exceed 5% at the loads, as recommended in IEEE 519, Section 6.6, Paragraph 2. 4. To limit zero sequence harmonic currents in the neutral conductors so that their ratings are not exceeded and Common Mode Noise (CMN) neutral-ground voltage levels do not exceed 5 volts at the loads, as recommended by CBEMA. Where computers and/or audio/visual devices are interconnected into a communications `network', to limit the difference in CMN to < 2 volts at all loads, as recommended by EPRI. 1.07 FACTORY TESTING A. The manufacturer shall provide linear and non-linear efficiency test on each transformer. Transformers not meeting the following criteria will not be used on this job. The data shall be included in the Operations and Maintenance Manuals. The tests shall be conducted between 0% and 100%full load and shall be plotted for each transformer. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus LOW VOLTAGE HARMONIC Christi 26 22 22- 1 MITIGATING DISTRIBUTION 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop TRANSFORMERS Re-Bid Construction Documents 1. Linear Load Efficiency: Transformer shall meet or exceed post-January 1, 2016 U.S. DOE efficiency requirements Energy, 10 C.F.R. §431.196(a)(2) (2015) regardless of whether transformer date of manufacture is pre or post January 1, 2016. Proof of compliance Type Tests, for each transformer type and rating, must be based on U.S. DOE test methods Energy, 10 C.F.R. §431, Subpart K, Appendix (2015). Type Test are required with each submission. 2. Non-Linear Load Efficiency: This requirement is defined as meeting the efficiency requirements of NEMA TP1-2002 under non-linear loading, which has 100% THDI and a harmonic profile that is based on IEEE 519, Table 4.3- 'Spectrum of Typical Switch Mode Power Supplies'. Proof of compliance Type Tests, for each transformer type and rating, must be based on the Voltage and Current Difference Loss Measurement Method using laboratory grade CTs and 0.1% accuracy Wattmeters OR shall be calculated in accordance with IEEE C57.110. Type Tests are required with each submission. The Power In— Power Out Measurements Method is not an acceptable test method due to the limitations associated with CT, PT and WattMeter accuracy. 1.08 FACTORY NAME PLATES A. Provide two (2)—name plates per transformer indicating all code required items (i.e. kVA voltage, phase etc.). Name plates shall also include, phase shift and a name as indicated on transformer schedule or one-line diagram. The name plates shall be located on a non removable section of the outer shell. 1.09 ALTERNATES A. In the event the contractor wishes to propose an alternative to the specified Harmonic Mitigating Transformers and/or Zero Sequence Harmonic Filters, the contractor shall provide the engineer with a detailed alternate Harmonic Mitigation Plan, which includes a schedule of proposed replacement devices that will meet all of the requirements described in this specification. The equipment proposal from the non-specified vendor(s) shall include the following information: 1. Evidence of significant relevant application experience. 2. Quantitative performance data including before/after effect on voltage distortion at the loads that demonstrates the vendor's capability to achieve the harmonic treatment called for in this specification. 3. Product technical specification and installation wiring diagram. 4. Pertinent product application information. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Type `DV', Single Output, Harmonic Filtering Distribution Transformers (Dry Type) shall be provided for all transformers indicated with a zero (0), thirty(30), fifteen (15), forty-five (45), twenty(20) and forty (40)degree primary to secondary phase shifts. B. Harmonic mitigating transformers with Wye configured primary windings are not acceptable. C. Harmonic mitigating transformers without zig-zag configured secondary windings that completely cancel zero-sequence flux under balanced load conditions are not acceptable. 2.02 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION A. The design of the harmonic filtering transformers, described in this Specification, shall be optimized for harmonic rich environments that are characterized by high neutral currents. These transformers shall: 1. Provide an ultra-low zero sequence impedance path for all load-generated zero sequence harmonic currents, including 13, 19, 115, 121, etc. 2. Provide for the cancellation of the 5th, 7th, etc. positive and negative sequence harmonic currents, at the units' primary bus, when 0° and 30' (15' and 45°) phase-shifting units are used in combination. 3. Provide for the cancellation of the 5th, 7th, 11th, 13th, etc. positive and negative sequence harmonic currents, at the units' primary bus, when 0°, 20' and 40' phase-shifting units are DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus LOW VOLTAGE HARMONIC Christi 26 22 22-2 MITIGATING DISTRIBUTION 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop TRANSFORMERS used in combination. 4. Provide for the cancellation of 5th, 7th, 11 th, 13th, 17th, 19th, etc. positive and negative sequence harmonic currents, at the units' primary bus, when 0°, 15°, 30' and 45' phase- shifting units are used in combination. 5. Harmonic cancellation shall be by electromagnetic means only. No capacitors or electronics shall be used. 6. Reduce voltage and current distortion and imbalance at the primary terminals of the unit. 7. Reduce current crest factor at the primary terminals of the unit. 8. Reduce average and peak phase current on the primary terminals of the unit. 9. Reduce system losses. 10. Improve system power factor. 11. Reduce voltage distortion in the secondary sub-system. 2.03 DEVICE CONFIGURATION A. Type: ANN B. Insulation Class: 220°C C. Temperature Rise: 150°C D. System Frequency: 60 Hertz E. Primary Voltage: 480 Volts Delta (Wye configured primary is not acceptable) F. Secondary Voltage: 208/120 Volts Zig-Zag with two (2)windings per core leg for 0 degree phase shift and 208/120 Volt modified zig-zag with three (3)windings per core leg for 30, 15, 45, 20 and 40 degree phase shifts. G. Phase: Three Phase H. Rating: as scheduled on drawings I. Primary-Secondary Phase-Shift: as scheduled on drawings 2.04 TRANSFORMER CHARACTERISTICS A. Key Requirements 1. Positive & negative sequence impedance: standard % 2. Zero sequence reactance at 60Hz: < 0.3 % 3. Zero sequence impedance at 60Hz: < 0.9 % 4. Crest Factor suitability: 5 5. BIL: 10,000 Volts (windings 1000V 6. Capability to deliver full nameplate kVA to loads of K-factor up to: 30 7. Neutral connection shall be rated at two times the ampacity of the secondary phase current. B. Basic Requirements: 1. Built to the following Standards: CSA C9-M1981, CSA22.2 No.47-1977, UL 506, IEEE C57.110, and NEMA ST 20 2. Three-phase, common core construction 3. Convection air-cooled 4. Copper or Aluminum Windings 5. Insulation Class: R(200 degree C) 6. Magnetic field at 1.5 feet: max. 0.1 Gauss 7. Full load Efficiency at 170°C 8. Magnetizing Inrush Current: max. 10 times full load rating 9. Taps: 2 x±2.5% 10. Sound level: per C57.12.91 11. Enclosure: ventilated, drip-proof NEMA-1 totally enclosed 12. Finish: PQI white power coat 13. Anti-vibration pads shall be used between the core and the enclosure DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus LOW VOLTAGE HARMONIC Christi 26 22 22-3 MITIGATING DISTRIBUTION 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop TRANSFORMERS 2.05 VENDOR INFORMATION A. Evidence of significant relevant application experience. B. Quantitative performance data including before/after effect on voltage distortion at load panels that demonstrates the capability to achieve the harmonic mitigation called for in this specification. C. Product technical specification. D. Pertinent product application information. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Install transformer in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and recognized industry practices. B. Housekeeping Pad: Provide a nominal 3-'/2' high, 2500 PSI (28 Day) concrete reinforced pad with number 6 welded wire mesh. The pad shall conform to the shape of the transformer and extend at least 3 inches beyond the length and width of the transformer. All corners of the pad shall be rounded. C. Mounting: Install floor mounted transformers on properly sized rubber-in-shear vibration isolators. Trapeze mounted transformers shall use rubber-in-shear hangers. Wall mounted transformers shall not be mounted directly to the wall without vibration isolation. D. Connection: Route conductors in a minimum of 2 feet of flexible steel conduit to transformer enclosure. Provide grounding conductor sized per NEC, connected to the building grounding electrode system. 3.02 FIELD TESTING A. Insulation, Tests: Prior to energization, check transformers windings for continuity and test the insulation resistance. Tests shall be made using a Biddle Megger or equivalent test instrument, per manufacturers' recommendations. Continuity Check Primary Pass/ Fail Secondary Pass/ Fail H,-HZ X,-X, HZ H, X2 X, H3 X, X3 X, Insulation Resistance Test (1000V, DC) Connections Megohms High to Low, Gnd Low to High, Gnd High, Low to Gnd B. Tap Setting: Measure current and voltage under load conditions to provide correct tap settings. Tap Setting Primary Voltage Reading Secondary Voltage Reading Hi-H, X,-X, HZ H, XZ Xa H3 X, X3 X, C. Receptacle Tests: At the furthest receptacle from each panel serving a computer or copier, a power quality meter shall be used to determine the following: Receptacle Test Panel Name (Fed From) Circuit Number Room Name or Number DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus LOW VOLTAGE HARMONIC Christi 26 22 22-4 MITIGATING DISTRIBUTION 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop TRANSFORMERS Location Inside Room Voltage (Line-Neutral) THD, Voltage (Neutral-Ground) Current (Phase) THD, D. Conduct all tests 3 to 6 months after building occupation. Submit all tests for Engineer's review. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus LOW VOLTAGE HARMONIC Christi 26 22 22- 5 MITIGATING DISTRIBUTION 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop TRANSFORMERS SECTION 26 2416 PANELBOARDS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Provide panelboards as shown, scheduled and as specified herein. B. The types of panelboards include: 1. Panelboards. 2. Power distribution panelboards. 3. Load centers 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI C12.1 - Electric Meters- Code for Electricity Metering; 2022. B. ANSI C12.20 -American National Standard for Electricity Meters- 0.1, 0.2, and 0.5 Accuracy Classes; 2022. C. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. D. UL 50- Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. E. UL 67- Panelboards; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. F. UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit Breaker Enclosures; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. G. UL 943 -Ground fault Circuit Interrupters H. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards I. NEMA PB 1.1 - General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less J. NEMA, ABI, Molded Car Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches K. Federal Spec W-P 115, Rev C, Panel, Power Distribution L. NEMA KSI, Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600V) 1.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Provide one of the following manufacturers: 1. General Electric Company/ABB 2. Square D Company 3. Siemens 4. Eaton 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings shall include, but not be limited to: 1. Cutsheets of all enclosures, circuit breakers, fusible switches, bussing, rating, schedules and all accessories clearly labeled. 1.05 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH: 1. NFPA 70 2. Local, municipal, or state codes that have jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS A. General 1. Provide power distribution and panelboards as indicated in the panelboard schedule and as shown on the plans. Load centers are acceptable for use in dwelling units. Power DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 26 24 16 - 1 PANELBOARDS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents distribution panelboards shall be equipped with fusible switches or circuit breakers as shown on the schedule. Panelboards shall be equipped with thermal-magnetic, molded case circuit breakers of frame and trip ratings as shown on the schedule. B. Busing Assembly and Temperature Rise 1. Panelboard bus structure and main lugs or main breaker shall have current ratings as shown on the panelboard schedule. Such ratings shall be established by heat rise tests with maximum hot spot temperature on any connector or bus bar not to exceed 65°C. rise above 400C ambient. Heat rise test shall be conducted in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 67. The use of conductor dimensions will not be accepted in lieu of actual heat tests. All current carrying parts of the bus shall be tin or silver plated copper. 2. Bus structure shall be isolated. Bus bar connections to the branch circuit breakers shall be distributed phase or phase sequence type and shall accept bolt-on circuit breakers for lighting and appliance panelboards. 3. The lugs for terminating conductors shall be rated at 75°C on all panel boards and circuit breakers. 4. Provide a non-insulated bare copper ground bus. Provide an isolated ground copper bus in each panel serving isolated ground circuits as indicated on panel schedule or one-line diagram. Provide a full size copper neutral bus in each panelboard enclosure. Provide a 200% neutral buss when served by a harmonic mitigating transformer and any K4 or higher rated transformers. C. Distribution Panelboards 1. Provide arc energy reduction switch for each overcurrent device rated 1,200 amps or larger to comply with 240.87 of the NEC. Switch shall be equipped with a pad lockable cover with a blue LED pilot light that illuminates when system is activated. Locate switch and cover recessed mounted adjacent to the switch it serves or remote as indicated on the plans. Provide label and all required hardware. Remote switch(es)shall be flush mounted in wall near entry to the room. 2. Circuit breakers shall be equipped with individually insulated, braced and protected connectors. The front faces of all circuit breakers shall be flush with each other. Large, permanent, individual circuit numbers shall be affixed to each breaker in a uniform position. Tripped indication shall be clearly shown by the breaker handle taking a position between "ON" and "OFF". Provisions for additional breakers shall be such that no additional connectors will be required to add breakers. Circuit breakers shall be of the frame size, trip setting and interrupting capacity as indicated on the drawings. Circuit breakers shall be rated 65,000 AIC unless otherwise noted on plans. 3. All fusible switches shall be quick-make, quick-break with visible blades and dual horsepower ratings. Switch handles shall physically indicate "ON" and "OFF" positions. Switches shall be lockable only in the "OFF" position and accept three industrial type heavy duty padlocks. Switch covers and handles shall be interlocked to prevent opening in the "ON" position. A means shall be provided to permit authorized personnel to release the interlock for inspection purposes. Switches shall include positive pressure rejection type fuse clips for use with UL Class R fuses or Class J fuses and be UL labeled for 200,000 AIC. D. 480/277 Volt Panelboards 1. Main breakers shall be vertically mounted. Branch mounted main breakers are not acceptable. Provide electronic trip mains with long term, short term and instantaneous trips as indicated on drawings and required for selective coordination. 2. Circuit breakers shall be bolt-on thermal-magnetic, molded case circuit breakers. Breakers shall be 1, 2 or 3 pole with an integral crossbar to assure simultaneous opening of all poles in multiple circuit breakers. Breaker shall have an over-center, trip-free, toggle-type operating mechanism with quick-make, quick-break action and positive handle indication. Handles shall have "ON", "OFF" and "TRIPPED" positions. Circuit breakers shall be UL listed in accordance with UL Standard 489 and shall be rated 277 volt ac (single pole, 15-30 amperes)or 480Y/277 volts ac (2 and 3 pole)with continuous current ratings as noted on the plan. Interrupting ratings shall be a minimum of 18,000 rms DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 26 24 16 -2 PANELBOARDS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop symmetrical amperes at 277 volts ac(single pole)or 480Y/277 volts ac(2 and 3 pole) unless otherwise noted on plans. E. 240 Volt Panelboards 1. Main breakers shall be vertically mounted. Branch mounted main breakers are not acceptable. Provide electronic trip mains with long term, short term and instantaneous trips as indicated on drawings and required for selective coordination. 2. Circuit breakers shall be bolt-on thermal-magnetic, molded case circuit breakers. Breakers shall be 1, 2, or 3 pole with an integral crossbar to assure simultaneous opening of all poles in multiple circuit breakers. Breakers shall have an overcenter, trip-free, toggle-type operating mechanism with quick-make, quick-break action and positive handle indication. Handles shall have "ON", "OFF" and "TRIPPED" positions. 3. Circuit breakers shall be UL listed in accordance with UL 489 and shall be rated 240 volts ac maximum with continuous current rating as noted on the plans. 4. Branch circuit breakers feeding convenience outlets shall have sensitive instantaneous trip settings of not more than 10 times the trip settings of the breaker to prevent repeated arcing short resulting from frayed appliance cords. Single pole 15 and 20 ampere circuit breakers shall be UL listed as "Switching Breakers" at 120V ac and carry the SWD marking. 5. UL Class A 5mA ground fault circuit protection shall be provided on all receptacle circuits serving wet areas and on all 120V ac branch circuits as specified on the plans or panelboard schedule. This protection shall be an integral part of the branch circuit breaker which also provides overload and short circuit protection for branch circuit wiring. Tripping of a branch circuit breaker containing ground fault circuit interruption shall not disturb the feeder circuit to the panelboard. A single pole circuit breaker with integral ground fault circuit interruption shall require no more panelboard branch circuit space than a conventional circuit breaker. 6. UL Class B 30mA ground fault circuit protection (GFEP) shall be provided on all equipment circuits requiring ground fault protection. This protection shall be an integral part of the branch circuit breaker which also provides overload and short circuit protection for branch circuit wiring. 7. Provide Shunt Trip Breakers including control power for circuits under cooking hoods and other equipment having this requirement. 8. Provide Breakers with Switched Neutral circuits with common trip for gasoline pumps and other equipment having this requirement. 9. Circuit breakers shall be rated 10,000 AIC at 240V unless otherwise noted on plans or served by transformers greater than 150 kVA. 10. Provide 200% sized neutral bus with panels served from a non-linear transformer and any K4 or higher rated transformers. This shall be a UL approved assembly. F. Cabinets and Fronts 1. The panelboard bus assembly shall be enclosed in a steel cabinet. The rigidity and gauge of steel to be as specified in UL 50 for cabinets. Wiring gutter space shall be in accordance with UL 67 for panelboards. The box shall be fabricated from galvanized steel or equivalent rust resistant steel. Provide stainless steel front cover for all panels located in all Pool Equipment rooms, Food Labs, Snack Bars, Culinary Arts, Kitchens and Life Skills rooms.All NEMA-1 panels shall have hinged front covers. The front cover shall have a door with hinges, latch and a lock. The piano hinged front covers door-in-door shall allow full access to the circuit breaker gutter area without having to remove the entire front cover. All panelboard lock shall be keyed alike. Circuit breaker and fusible distribution panels shall have four-piece trims. A welded circuit directory frame and card with a clear plastic covering shall be provided on the inside of the door. Provide NEMA 1 enclosure where installed indoors unless otherwise noted. Provide NEMA 3R enclosure where installed outside or in a sprinkled area. G. Safety Barrier 1. The distribution panelboard interior assembly shall be dead front with panelboard cover removed. Main lugs or main breakers shall have a barrier. The barrier in front of the main lugs shall be hinged to a fixed part of the interior. The end of the bus structure opposite DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 26 24 16-3 PANELBOARDS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop the mains shall have barriers. H. Integrated Equipment Short Circuit Rating 1. Each panelboard, as a complete unit, shall have a short circuit current rating equal to or greater than the integrated equipment rating shown on the panelboard schedule or on the plans. This rating shall be established by testing with the over-current devices mounted in the panelboard. The short circuit tests on the over-current devices and on the panelboard structure shall be made simultaneously by connecting the fault to each over-current device with the panelboard connected to its rated voltage source. Method of testing shall be per UL 67. The source shall be capable of supplying the specified panelboard short circuit current or greater. Testing of panelboard over-current devices for short circuit rating only while individually mounted is not acceptable. Also, testing of the bus structure alone is not acceptable. Panelboards shall be marked with their maximum short circuit current rating at the supply voltage and shall be UL listed. I. Metering 1. Provide a branch circuit meter to meter the branch circuits indicated on the drawings. It shall provide kW, kVA, kWh and kVAh. It shall be mounted in the panelboard or externally mounted next to the panel. Communication protocol shall include BACnet and Modbus TCP over ethernet. Connect to the Building Automation System. Program to notify building owner if the load exceeds values set by the energy code indicated on the load analysis. This shall comply with 220.12 Exception No. 1 of the 2020 NEC. 2. Provide a panelboard meter to meter the entire panel as indicated on the drawings. It shall include per phase and total kW, kVA, accumulated kWh, kVAh, power factor, peak demand, frequency, current and voltage It shall be mounted in the panel board or externally mounted next to the panelboard. Communication protocol shall include BACnet and Modbus TCP over ethernet. Connect to the Building Automation System. Program to notify building owner if the load exceeds values set by the energy code indicated on the load analysis. This shall comply with 220.12 Exception No. 1 of the adopted version of the NEC. Connect the meter to the building automation system before entergizing.1 3. Meters shall be provided with an accuracy of 1.0% and shall be certified to ANSI C12.1 or ANSI C12.20 as applicable. J. Load Centers 1. Provide load centers where indicated. 2. Load centers shall have mains ratings and branch circuit breaker ratings of the size and number as indicated on drawings. Load centers shall be plug-on type construction. All current carrying parts of the bus assembly shall be plated copper. Terminals for feeder conductors to mains and branch neutral shall be UL listed as suitable for the type conductor specified. The load center bus assembly shall be enclosed in steel cabinet. The size of the wiring gutters and gauge steel shall be in accordance with UL 50 and UL 67. Fronts shall include door and be provided with a directory for circuit identification. Load center boxes and fronts shall have corrosion resisting phosphate treatment and a gray baked enamel finish. Load centers shall be UL listed and meet Federal Specification W- P-115B as Type I, Class 2. 3. All breakers shall be full width, plug-on-type, toggle action with quick-make, quick-break mechanism. Provide Square D 'QO', GE 'THQL' breakers or approved equal. Piggy-back or half width breakers are not acceptable. Trip indication shall be clearly shown by the breaker handle taking a position between "ON"and "OFF" when the breaker is tripped.All multi-pole breakers shall be single operating handle, common trip variety. Branch circuit breakers feeding convenience outlets shall have sensitive, instantaneous trip in order to give "flash protection"for frayed, stranded wire cords. QWIK-CARD circuit breakers with ground fault circuit interrupters shall be used in accordance with the National Electrical Code. Circuit breakers shall be UL listed and meet the requirements of Federal Specification W-C-375B/GEN, Class 1. Provide ARC Fault circuit interrupter breaker to comply with 210.12 of the NEC. 4. Provide Surge Protection Device with a minimum of 100 kA. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 26 24 16-4 PANELBOARDS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Install panelboards, including electrical connections, in accordance with manufacturers written instructions, NFPA 70 and recognized industry practices. B. All panels shall be mounted to unistrut. Unistrut shall be securely mounted to the floor and structural ceiling. Toggle bolts or anchor bolts attached to drywall is not acceptable. C. Housekeeping Pads: Mount floor mounted panelboards on 4 inch high concrete housekeeping pads. D. Fuses: Install fuses of the rating and class as shown in each fusible distribution panel scheduled on drawings. E. Conduits: Stub up three one inch conduits to an accessible location above the ceiling for each recessed panelboard. 3.02 IDENTIFICATION A. Nameplate: Each panelboard shall have an engraved bakelite nameplate. Nameplates shall be white with black letters and show panel designation. Nameplates shall be attached with stainless steel screws. Refer to Section 26 02 00, paragraph 2.8(C). B. Directory Card: Cardholders and directory cards shall be furnished for circuit identification in panelboards. Cardholder shall be located on inside of panel door and shall be in a metal frame with clear plastic front. Circuit lists shall be typewritten. Circuit descriptions shall include location and name of each item of equipment served. Spares and spaces shall be written in erasable pencil for future use. Circuit directory shall show the room served by each circuit. The final graphs/signage room numbers shall be used. Do not use Architectural numbering on plans. C. Replacement Components: Where circuit breakers or fuses are applied in compliance with the series combination ratings marked on the equipment by the manufacturers, the equipment enclosure(s)shall be legibly marked in the field to indicate the equipment has been applied with a series combination rating. The marking shall be readily visible and state "caution - Series Rated System." (NEC 110-22). Nameplate shall also identify replacement components. D. Replacement Components: Nameplate shall identify replacement components. 3.03 INFRARED SCANNING A. After Substantial Completion by not more than 2 months after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove fronts if not equipped with viewing ports to make joints and connections accessible to a portable scanner. Submit a copy the owner and engineer for review. If O&M manuals are submitted prior to performance of infrared scan, contractor shall submit a signed letter to verify the scan has been arranged. Letter shall indicate the scan provider and the date It will be performed. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 26 24 16-5 PANELBOARDS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Provide wiring devices as shown, scheduled, required and as specified. B. The types of wiring devices required include: 1. Switches 2. Receptacles 3. Occupancy Sensors 4. Digital Timer Switches 5. Coverplates 6. Floor Boxes 7. Fire Rated Poke Through Devices 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. FS W-C-596 -Connector, Electrical, Power, General Specification for; 2014h, with Amendments (2017). B. FS W-S-896 -Switches, Toggle (Toggle and Lock), Flush Mounted (General Specification); 2014g, with Amendment(2017). C. NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2020). D. NEMA WD 6-Wiring Devices- Dimensional Specifications; 2021. E. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. F. UL 20- General-Use Snap Switches; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. G. UL 498 -Attachment Plugs and Receptacles; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. H. UL 943 -Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. I. UL 1310 -Class 2 Power Units; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. J. UL 1699-Arc-Fault Circuit-Interrupters; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All wiring devices shall comply with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6 as well as FS W-C-596 and FS W-S-896 as applicable. B. All switches shall comply with UL 20 as applicable. C. All receptacles shall comply with UL 498 as applicable. D. All GFCI receptacles shall comply with UL 943. E. All USB charging receptacles shall comply with UL 1310. F. All AFCI receptacles shall comply with UL 1699. 1.04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Hubbell B. Leviton C. Pass &Seymour 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings shall include but not be limited to: 1. Cut sheets of all devices indicating NEMA configuration, rating, materials, color, and all accessories. 2. Cut sheets of all coverplates indicating materials, color and any engraving specified on drawing or in the specifications. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 26 27 26 - 1 WIRING DEVICES 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 1.06 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH A. National Electric Code. B. Local, municipal, or state codes that have jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS A. GENERAL 1. Provide factory assemble wiring devices with the rating type and color as required and specified for the service indicated. 2. Provide matching one-piece multiple gang plates where switches are ganged. 3. Provide wall plates for each receptacle furnished. 4. Architect reserves the right to select wiring device styles and colors to match wall finish. 5. Wall plates shall be of same manufacturer as devices. 2.02 SWITCHES A. Provide specification grade White toggle switches where indicated on the Drawings. Provide "Red" switches for switching emergency lighting circuits where switching is indicated. Coordinate exact locations with architect. 1. Wall switches shall be 20 amp, 120-277 volt and shall be Hubbell, Leviton or P&S as follows: TOGGLE SWITCHES HUBBELL LEVITON P&S SINGLE POLE HBL1221 1221-2 PS20AC1 DOUBLE POLE HBL1222 1222-2 P320AC2 THREE WAY HBL1223 1223-2 PS20AC3 FOUR WAY HBL1224 1224-2 PS20AC4 MOMENTARY CONTACT HBL1557 1257 1251 THREE POSITION, TWO CIRCUIT HBL1385 1285 1225 MAINTAINED CONTACT KEY TYPE LOCKABLE BARREL KEY HBL1221-RKL 1221-2KL PS20AC1-KL OR CORBIN STYLE PROVIDE WITH EXTRA KEYS HBL1209RKL 2KL 4609 DISCONNECT SWITCH / INSTA HOT HBL781ODS MS303-DSS 7803 2. Dwelling units shall use Hubbell CS1151, CS1201, P&S CS15AC1, and CS20AC1. 3. Dimmers: Provide Lutron DIVA or equal as shown on drawings. Wall box dimmers shall be sized to handle the load served. Provide phase dimmers to control LED lamps when 0-10 volt dimming drivers are not provided. 4. Light Handle Switches: Provide Hubbell HBL1221-IL, Leviton 1221-LHC, P&S PS20AC1- ISI lighted handles to switch emergency lights where noted on the drawings. 2.03 RECEPTACLES A. Provide specification grade White receptacles where indicated on the drawings. Provide "Red" receptacles for receptacles on emergency power. Coordinate exact location with architect. 1. Receptacles shall be Hubbell, Leviton or Pass &Seymour as follows: CONVENTIONAL RECEPTACLES HUBBELL LEVITON P&S HEAVY DUTY BRASS MOUNTING YOKE HBL5352 5362 5362 NEMA 5-20R DUPLEX HEAVY DUTY BRASS MOUNTING YOKE HBL5361 5361 5361 NEMA 5-20R SIMPLEX ISOLATED GROUND 20A, 125V ORANGE IG5352 53621G IG5362 NEMA 5-20R DUPLEX CLOCK HANGER 15A-125V BROWN WITH HBL5235 5361-CH S3733-SS DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 26 27 26-2 WIRING DEVICES 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop STAINLESS STEEL PLATE WITH HANGER GFCI DUPLEX 20A, 125V SELF TESTING, FEED THRU CAPABLE, TAMPER RESISTANT FOR LOCATIONS REQUIRING GFRST20 GFTR2 2097TR TAMPER RESISTANT INSTALLATION OR AS INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS GFCI DUPLEX 20A, 125V SELF TESTING, FEED THRU CAPABLE, TAMPER/WEATHER RESISTANT FOR INSTALLATION IN GFTWRST20 GFWR2 2097TRWR DAMP/WET LOCATION OR AS INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS HEAVY DUTY TAMPER RESISTANT BRASS HBL5362WTR 5362-SG --- MOUNTING YOKE TAMPER RESISTANT 20A, 125V DUPLEX BR20WHITR 8300-SG TR63-H SURGE PROTECTION 20A, 125V DUPLEX, HBL5362SA 7380-B 5362SP BLUE NEMA 5-20R WITH AUDIBLE ALARM USB CHARGER TYPE DUPLEX 20A, 125V TAMPER RESISTANT, DUAL USB TYPE A USB20A5x T5832* 3.6A 2097TRUSBA4* PORTS MIN. OF 5A USB OUTPUT, TAMPER 5A OUTPUT OUTPUT 2.1A OUTPUT RESISTANT PLUG LOAD CONTROLLED RECEPTACLES 20A, 125V TAMPER RESISTANT WITH TWO BR20C2WHITR TBR20-S2W TR5362CDW CONTROLLED FACES PLUG LOAD CONTROLLED RECEPTACLES 20A, 125V TAMPER RESISTANT WITH ONE BR20C1WHITR TBR20-S1W TR5362CHW CONTROLLED FACE ARC FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER AF20TRW AFTR2-W AF202TRW RECEPTACLES GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER/ AFGF20TR AGTR2-W AFGF202TR ARC FAULT DUAL FUNCTION 2.04 OCCUPANCY SENSORS A. Provide White dual technology wall mounted sensors, provide one of the following: 1. Single Pole: a. Wattstopper#DSW301 2. Double Pole: a. Wattstopper# DSW302 3. Dimmer: a. Wattstopper#DW311 B. Provide dual technology ceiling sensor with low voltage controlling switch and power pack. 1. Single Button: a. Wattstopper# DT300 Sensor, BZ150 Power Pack and LVSW101 Digital Switch C. Provide Ultra Sonic Ceiling sensor for restrooms. 1. Wattstopper#UT3000, BZ150 Power Pack 2.05 DIGITAL TIMER SWITCHES A. Provide Wattstopper TS-400-G digital timer. Locate in mechanical, electrical, MDF, and IDF rooms. B. The time switch shall provide audible notification and visual notification (blink the room lights) prior to turning lights off. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 26 27 26- 3 WIRING DEVICES 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop C. The time switch shall have a 12-hour manual override setting. 2.06 COVERPLATES A. Furnish and install coverplates on all outlet boxes. Oversize (Jumbo) coverplates are not acceptable. B. Coverplates shall be smooth nylon and 302/304 smooth stainless steel in kitchen and coffee bar areas. C. Provide Hubbell WP Series, Bell, Carlon or Leviton NEMA 3R weatherproof coverplates on all exterior wiring devices. Enclosure shall be suitable for wet locations when in use. D. Coverplates shall be Hubbell SS Series, Leviton, Pass &Seymour 302/304 smooth stainless steel on all receptacles 30 amps and larger. E. Stainless steel device plates shall be provided at locations with tile or stone walls. 2.07 FLOOR BOXES A. Floor boxes with surface activation shall be cast iron as manufactured by Hubbell or equal by Wiremold 880CS/CM series and as indicated below: 1. Slab at grade (dual level, fully adjustable type 1). a. Single gang: #B-2436 w/#SB-3083 carpet flange. b. Two gang: #B-4233 w/#SB-3084 carpet flange. c. Three gang: #B-4333 w/#SB-3085 carpet flange. 2. Slab above grade (shallow, fully-adjustable, type II) a. Single gang: #B-2421 w/#SB-3083 carpet flange. b. Two gang: #13-2422 w/#SB-3084 carpet flange. c. Three gang: #B-2423 w/#SB-3085 carpet flange. 3. Cover plates shall have brass finish as follows: a. #S-3825 for duplex flap for duplex receptacles. b. #S-3826 for data/communications. B. PVC floor boxes manufactured by Hubbell or equal shall be as follows: 1. Provide CFBS1 R4CFB dual service cast iron body floor box with PVC riser. Provide CFBS1 R4CUP adjustable mounting cup, S1 R4SP2X2DUPLEX sub-plate for(1) Duplex and (2) RJ-45 Keystone jacks OR S1 R4SP2X2STYLE for(1) GFCI duplex, USB or Surge Device & (2) Keystone jacks, OR S1 R4SPQUAD sub-plate with (4)20A simplex receptacles, single and dual circuit wiring capability. Provide with CFBS1 R4CVR cover, Color to be chosen by Architect. a. Maximum finished floor thickness (above top of box collar)with maximum adjustability is 1-1/2-inches at 5-inch, at 6-inches maximum adjustability is 1/2". C. Floor boxes, recessed activation type, meet UL 514A scrub water requirements, shall be stamped steel with corrosion resistant finish, UL Listed for slab-on-grade installations, or stamped steel for above-grade installations as manufactured by Hubbell or equal by Wiremold RFB2-11 series and as indicated below: 1. Recessed Activation Slab at grade: a. Two gang: #CFB2G30CR or CFB2G30RCR (provisions for round cover), capable of up to 2" entry per gang. Flush flange, Surface flange and Furniture Feed cover availability. Surface Type Covers shall not exceed 0.15" rise. Covers with provisions for cable egress, when in use, shall not exceed/extend past 0.15" rise b. Four Gang: #CFB4G30CR or CFB4G30RCR (provisions for round cover), capable of up to 2" entry per gang. Flush flange, Surface flange availability. Cover shall not exceed 0.15" rise. Surface Type Covers shall not exceed 0.15" rise. Covers with provisions for cable egress, when in use, shall not exceed/extend past the 0.15" rise. c. Six Gang: #CFB6G30CR or CFB6G30RCR (provisions for round cover), capable of up to 2" entry per gang. Flush flange, Surface flange availability. Surface Type Covers shall not exceed 0.15" rise. Covers with provisions for cable egress, when in use, shall maintain the 0.15" rise. Covers with provisions for cable egress, when in use, shall not exceed/extend past the 0.15" rise. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 26 27 26-4 WIRING DEVICES 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop d. Ten Gang AV: #CFB10G55CR or CFB10G55RCR (provisions for round cover), with minimum (2)2" KO's, multiple front and back 1/4" to 1-1/2" concentric KO's.. Flush flange, Surface flange availability. Cover shall not exceed 0.15" rise. Covers with provisions for cable egress, when in use, shall not exceed/extend past the 0.15" rise. 2. Recessed Activation Slab above grade a. Two Gang: #CFB2G30 or CFB2G30R(provisions for round cover), capable of up to 2" entry per gang. Flush flange, Surface flange and Furniture Feed cover availability. Surface Type Covers shall not exceed 0.15" rise. Covers with provisions for cable egress, when in use, shall not exceed/extend past the 0.15" rise. b. Four Gang: #CFB4G30 or CFB4G30R(provisions for round cover), capable of up to 2" entry per gang. Flush flange, Surface flange availability. Cover shall not exceed 0.15" rise. Surface Type Covers shall not exceed 0.15" rise. Covers with provisions for cable egress, when in use, shall not exceed/extend past 0.15" rise. c. Six Gang: #CFB6G30 or CFB6G30R(provisions for round cover), capable of up to 2" entry per gang. Flush flange, Surface flange availability. Surface Type Covers shall not exceed 0.15" rise. Covers with provisions for cable egress, when in use, shall maintain the 0.15" rise. Covers with provisions for cable egress, when in use, shall not exceed/extend past the 0.15" rise d. Ten Gang AV: #CFB10G55 or CFB1OG55R (provisions for round cover), with minimum (2)2" KO's, multiple front and back 1/4" to 1-1/2" concentric KO's.. Flush flange, Surface flange availability. Cover shall not exceed 0.15" rise. Covers with provisions for cable egress, when in use, shall not exceed/extend past the 0.15" rise. 3. Service Fittings a. Surface Style Rectangular for use with carpet, tile, VCT and other engineered floors, available with or without carpet insert and offer system's furniture feed type cover providing (1) 1-inch and (1) 2-inch threaded openings b. Flush Style Rectangular for use with tile, finished concrete or Terrazzo floors, available with or without carpet insert and offer system's furniture feed type cover providing (1) 1-inch and (1) 2-inch threaded openings c. Rectangular covers shall be powder coated in variety of common finishes, Aluminum, Black, Brass, Bronze and Satin Nickel. d. Round Covers for use with all floor types Shall provide cable egress doors and systems furniture feed type cover providing (1)1/4-inch and (1) 2-inch threaded openings Round covers shall be plated metal in variety of finishes except Black (powder coated) Brushed Aluminum, Brass Plated, Bronze Plated, Satin Nickel Plated. 2.08 FIRE RATED POKE THROUGH DEVICES A. Installations requiring 4-inch cored openings, poke thru devices shall be manufactured by Hubbell or approved equal, Hubbell S1 R4PTFIT Recessed Activation poke thru with either S1 R4SP2X2STYLE or S1 R4SP2X2DUPLEX sub-plate for(1)20A Duplex, GFCI OR USB 2 Port Duplex with (2) openings for(2) RJ-45 Jacks with S1 R4CVR- color to be chosen by Architect. B. Installations requiring 6-inch cored openings, with duplex power, shall be manufactured by Hubbell or Wiremold 6AT, Hubbell S1 R6PTWZ-XXX Recessed Activation poke thru which includes S1 R6SPW and S1 RSSPZ sub plates and S1 R6CVR cover, where XXX is finish. Color to be chosen by Architect. This includes (1) pre-wired 20A, 125 V duplex receptacle and (2) NEMA configured rectangular Decorator openings for telephone, signal or up to (12) Category 5e/Cat 6 RJ-45 Jacks. C. Installations requiring 6-inch cored openings, with quad power, shall be manufactured by Hubbell or Wiremold 6AT, Hubbell S1 R6PTDEH-XXX Recessed Activation poke thru which includes S1 R6SPH and S1 R6SPE sub-plates and S1 R6CVR cover where XXX is finish. Color to be chosen by Architect. This includes (2) pre-wired 20A, 125 V duplex receptacles (quad) single, dual circuit capable and (1) NEMA configured rectangular Decorator opening for telephone, signal or up to (6) Category 5e/Cat 6 RJ-45 Jacks plus (2)additional Keystone openings for a total of(8) Category 5e/Cat 6 RJ-45 Jacks for this sub-plate DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 26 27 26 -5 WIRING DEVICES 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop D. Installations requiring 8-inch cored openings, shall be manufactured by Hubbell or Wiremold 8AT, Hubbell S1 R8PTFIT3 Recessed Activation poke thru offering (2) perimeter(outer) sub- plate locations and (3) standard NEMA configured openings in center sub-plate location allowing multiple combinations for power, data and A/V connectivity devices including acceptance for third party AV devices such as Crestron, FSR, Extron. E. Poke thru devices with above floor service fittings shall be Hubbell PT7XC Series or Wiremold RC9 approved equal for 3-inch cored openings with FR280BKA Pedestal Service Fitting for(1) 20A, 125V duplex receptacle and (1) NEMA configured Decorator opening for telephone, signal or Cat 5e/Cat 6 data cables with RJ-45 jacks. F. Poke Thru devices for furniture feed applications shall be Hubbell S1 R6PTFF-XXX or Wiremold 6AFTT where XXX is finish, to be chosen by Architect. Provides (1) %"threaded entry for Power feed and (1)2-0"threaded opening for Data/AV Cables. Installed in 6-inch cored openings. G. Poke Thru devices for furniture feed applications shall be Hubbell S1 PTFF-XX or Wiremold 4FF or approved equal where XX is finish, to be chosen by Architect. Provides (1)1/"threaded entry for Power feed and (1) 1-1/2" threaded opening for Data/AV Cables. Installed in 4-inch cored openings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 WIRING DEVICE MOUNTING HEIGHTS A. Unless noted to the contrary on plans, or directed otherwise during the progress of the Work, wiring devices shall be set as follows: 1. Switches 42" above finished floor. 2. Wall mounted receptacles shall be installed vertically at 15 inches to the bottom outlet above finished floor unless otherwise noted or as required by local codes. 3. Wall telephone outlets shall be mounted 15 inches to the bottom above finished floor unless otherwise noted. Mount even with wall mounted receptacles. 4. At locations above counters, set devices at 6 inches above to the centerline counter tops, verify exact mounting height with the architect. 3.02 INSTALLATION (REFER TO 26 05 33 FOR OUTLET BOX SPECIFICATIONS) A. Wall switches shall be set in a suitable steel box and shall be installed on the strike side of the door as finally hung, whether so indicated on the Drawings or not. B. Receptacles shall be installed in a suitable steel box. C. The Architect reserves the right to relocate wiring device up to a distance of 5 feet from the location shown, before rough-in, without additional cost. D. Provide multi-gang device covers at locations where devices gang together. E. Device locations are indicated schematically on the drawings along with the type and mounting height. Final locations and mounting heights shall be coordinated with the Architect on the jobsite, and with shop drawings of equipment; including equipment to be furnished and installed by the Owner. Devices installed in walls covered with vinyl, fabric wallpaper or other special finishes shall be coordinated and verified with the Architect on the job site. F. Stranded wire termination to switches, receptacles, devices and miscellaneous control devices shall be with an approved solderless terminal if clamp type securing is not possible (i.e. Sta- Con crimp on fork tongue connectors; Burndy Type TP-F). G. Provide keyed switches in all common areas not monitored by the faculty (i.e. gym, corridors, cafeteria, commons natatoriums). H. All 15 amp and 20 amp receptacles shall be tamper-resistant type. I. All 20A, 120V receptacles in food service areas shall be GFCI. J. Provide GFCI circuit breakers for all drinking fountain branch circuits where GFCI receptacles are not indicated on plan. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 26 27 26-6 WIRING DEVICES 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop K. Provide ARC Fault circuit interrupters (AFCI) as required to comply with article 210.12 of NFPA 70. This shall include but not be limited to dwelling units and dormitories. AFCI breakers may be used. L. Provide ground fault circuit interrupter(GFCI)/ARC Fault circuit interrupter(AFCI)dual function receptacles to comply with articles 210.8, 210.12 and 406.4 of NFPA 70. M. Contractor shall indicate the circuit serving each wiring device. Provide a typewritten label located on the inside face of the coverplate for all recessed mounted devices and on the outside of the coverplate on all surface mounted devices. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 26 27 26 -7 WIRING DEVICES 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SECTION 26 28 13 FUSES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Provide fuses as shown and scheduled and indicate by this specification section and other specifications sections. B. The type of fuses include: 1. 600 volt current limiting. 2. 250 volt current limiting. 1.02 STANDARDS A. ANSI B. UL 1.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Eaton Bussmann B. Mersen 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings shall include, but not be limited to: 1. Cutsheets of all fuses showing ratings and fuse curves. 1.05 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH: 1. National Electrical Code. 2. Local, municipal, or state codes that have jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CURRENT- LIMITING FUSES A. General: Provide 200,000 amp interrupting capacity current limiting fuses of the ampacity and voltage indicated and scheduled. B. Mains, Feeders and Branch Circuits 1. Circuits 601 to 6000 ampere shall be protected by current limiting BUSSMANN HI-CAP Time Delay Fuses KRP-C. Fuses shall employ"O" ring as positive seals between the end bells and the glass melamine fuse barrel. The terminals shall be peened. Fuses shall be time-delay and must hold 500% of rated current for a minimum of 4 seconds, clear 20 times rated current in .1 seconds or less and be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories Inc., with an interrupting rating of 200,000 amperes r.m.s. symmetrical. The fuses shall be UL Class L. C. Class J Fuses 1. Circuits 0 to 600 ampere shall be protected by current limiting BUSSMANN LOW-PEAK Dual Element Fuses LPJ. All dual-element fuses shall have separate overload and short- circuit elements. Fuse shall incorporate a spring activated thermal overload element having a 284 degree Fahrenheit melting point alloy and shall be independent of the short- circuited clearing chamber. The fuse must hold 500% of rated current for a minimum of 10 seconds and listed by Underwriters' Laboratories Inc., with an interrupting rating of 200,000 amperes rRMS symmetrical. The fuses shall be UL Class J. 2. Motor Circuits-All individual motor circuits rated 600 amperes or less shall be protected by BUSSMANN LOW-PEAK LPJ. The fuses for 1.15 service factor motors shall be installed in ratings approximately 125% of motor full current except where high ambient temperatures prevail, or where the motor drives a heavy revolving part which cannot be brought up to full speed quickly, such as large fans. Under such conditions the fuse should be 150% to 200% of the motor full load current. Larger H.P. Motor shall be protected by BUSSMANN Type KRP-C HI-CAP Time-Delay Fuses of the rating shown on DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 26 28 13 - 1 FUSES 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents the drawings. 1.0 service factor motors shall be protected by BUSSMANN LOW-PEAK Dual-Element Fuses LPJ installed in ratings approximately 115% of the motor full load current except as noted above. The fuses shall be UL Class LPJ or L. Circuit breaker panels shall be protected by BUSSMANN LOW-PEAK Dual-Element LPJ as shown on the drawings. The fuses shall be UL Class J. D. Class RK1 Fuses 1. Circuits 0 to 600 ampere shall be protected by current limiting BUSSMANN LOW-PEAK Dual Element Fuses LPN-RK (250 volts)or LPS-RK(600 volts). All dual-element fuses shall have separate overload and short-circuit elements. Fuse shall incorporate a spring activated thermal overload element having a 284 degree Fahrenheit melting point alloy and shall be independent of the short-circuited clearing chamber. The fuse must hold 500% of rated current for a minimum of 10 seconds and listed by Underwriters' Laboratories Inc., with an interrupting rating of 200,000 amperes RMS symmetrical. The fuses shall be UL Class RK1. 2. Motor Circuits-All individual motor circuits rated 600 amperes or less shall be protected by BUSSMANN LOW-PEAK Dual Element Fuses LPN-RK(250 volts)or LPS-RK(600 volts). The fuses for 1.15 service factor motors shall be installed in ratings approximately 125% of motor full current except where high ambient temperatures prevail, or where the motor drives a heavy revolving part which cannot be brought up to full speed quickly, such as large fans. Under such conditions the fuse should be 150% to 200% of the motor full load current. Larger H.P. Motor shall be protected by BUSSMANN Type KRP-C HI-CAP Time-Delay Fuses of the rating shown on the drawings. 1.0 service factor motors shall be protected by BUSSMANN LOW-PEAK Dual-Element Fuses LPN-RK (250 volts) or LPS- RK(600 volts) installed in ratings approximately 115% of the motor full load current except as noted above. The fuses shall be UL Class RK1 or L. 3. Circuit breaker panels shall be protected by BUSSMANN LOW-PEAK Dual-Element LPN- RK(250 volts) or LPS-RK (600 volts) as shown on the drawings. The fuses shall be UL Class RK1. 2.02 SPARES A. Upon completion of the building the contractor shall provide the owner with spare fuses as shown below. 1. 10% (minimum of 3) of each type and rating of installed fuses shall be supplied as spares. 2. BUSSMANN spare fuse cabinets- Catalog No. SFC- shall be provided to store the above spares. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Fuses: Fuses shall not be installed until equipment is ready to be energized. This measure prevents fuse damage during shipment of the equipment from the manufacturer to the job-site or from installation. All fuses shall be furnished and installed by the electrical contractor. All fuses shall be of the same manufacturer. B. All fuses shall be installed in fuse holders. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 26 28 13-2 FUSES 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SECTION 26 28 16 SAFETY AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Provide safety and disconnect switches as shown, scheduled and as specified herein. 1.02 STANDARDS A. Products shall be designed, manufactured, tested and installed in compliance with applicable standards. 1. NEMA KS1 - Enclosed switches 2. Federal specification W-S-865C-Heavy duty switches B. Products shall conform all applicable UL standards, including UL98 (standard for safety, enclosed and dead front switches)and shall be UL-labeled. 1.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Provide one of the following manufacturers: 1. General Electric Company/ABB 2. Square D Company 3. Siemens 4. Eaton 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings shall include, but not be limited to: 1. Cutsheets of switches with ratings, physical dimensions and all accessories clearly labeled. 1.05 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH: 1. National Electrical Code. 2. Local, municipal, or state codes that have jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Furnish and install heavy duty type safety switches with the number of switched poles as indicated on the plans and specifications. All safety switches shall be NEMA Heavy Duty Type HD, and Underwriters Laboratories listed. 2.02 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS A. Switch Interior 1. All switches shall have switch blades that are fully visible in the "OFF" position when the door is open. Switches shall have removable are suppressor where necessary, to permit easy access to line side lugs. Lugs shall be front removable and UL listed for 60°C and 750C copper or aluminum cables. All switches blades and contacts shall be plated copper. Adjust fuse block to accept Class J fuses. B. Switch Mechanism 1. Switches shall have a quick-make and quick-break operating handle and mechanism, which shall be an integral part of the box, not the cover. Padlocking provisions shall be provided for locking in the "OFF" position with at least three padlocks. Switches shall have a dual cover interlock to prevent unauthorized opening of the switch door when the handle is in the "ON" position, and to prevent closing of the switch mechanism with the door open. A means shall be provided to permit authorized personnel to release the interlock for inspection purposes. Handle position shall indicate if switch is "ON" or"OFF". C. Neutral 1. Provide a solid neutral with the safety switch where a neutral is present in the circuit. D. Ratings DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 26 28 16- 1 SAFETY AND DISCONNECT 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SWITCHES Re-Bid Construction Documents 1. Switches shall be horsepower rated for ac and/or do as indicated by the plans. The fused switches shall have Class R rejection fuse clips or adjusted for Class J fuses. UL listed short circuit ratings of the switches, when equipped with Class R fuses, shall be 200,000 symmetrical amperes. E. Enclosures 1. Indoor switches shall be furnished in NEMA 1 enclosures. 2. Outdoor switches, switches located in wet areas or sprinkled areas shall be furnished in NEMA 3R enclosures. 3. Switches installed in wet areas such as cooling tower areas shall be NEMA 4X stainless steel or fiberglass reinforced polyester. 4. Switches installed in kitchens shall be stainless steel. 5. Switches installed in areas of a corrosive nature and subjected to salt air shall be NEMA 4X stainless steel or fiberglass reinforced polyester. F. Electrical Interlock Contacts 1. Provide electrical interlock contacts on all disconnect switches serving motors in which remote VFDs are serving the motor. Provide conductors from contacts to the safe circuit inside the VFD. De-energizing the disconnect switch shall signal VFD to stop. G. Service Entrance 1. Switch shall be suitable for use as service entrance equipment when installed in accordance with the National Electrical Code. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Install safety and disconnect switches, including electrical connections, and fuses in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, NEC and recognized industry practices. B. Location: Install switches within sight of controllers. C. Hubs: Provide bolt-on hubs for rainproof or wet area applications. 3.02 IDENTIFICATION A. Nameplate: Each disconnect switch shall have an engraved bakelite nameplate. Nameplates shall be white with black letters and show equipment served. Nameplates shall be attached with stainless steel screws. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 26 28 16-2 SAFETY AND DISCONNECT 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SWITCHES SECTION 26 29 01 MOTORS AND STARTERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Provide manual motor starters as shown, scheduled and as specified herein. B. All integral motor starters furnished under Division 23 requirements shall be installed under Division 26 requirements unless noted otherwise on the plans. C. Refer to 26 29 13 for motor starter specifications. 1.02 STANDARDS A. Products shall be designed, manufactured, tested and installed in compliance with applicable standards. B. Products shall conform to all applicable UL standards and shall be UL-labeled. 1.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Provide one of the following manufacturers: 1. General Electric Company/ABB 2. Square D Company 3. Siemens 4. Eaton 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings shall include, but not be limited to: 1. Cutsheets of all enclosures, switches, overloads, ratings, and all accessories clearly labeled. 1.05 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH: 1. National Electrical Code. 2. Local, municipal, or state codes that have jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. GENERAL: Refer to the Drawings for starter requirements for each motor. 2.02 MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS A. GENERAL: Manual starters shall consist of a manually operated toggle switch equipped with melting alloy type thermal overload relay. Thermal unit shall be of one-piece construction and interchangeable. Starter shall be inoperative if thermal unit is removed. Contacts shall be double break, silver alloy, visible from both sides of starter. Manual starters shall be square "D" class 2510 or 2512 or approved equal. Provide the size and number of poles shall be as shown and required by equipment served. Furnish red pilot light as indicated. B. ENCLOSURES: All manual motor starter enclosures shall be NEMA 1, general purpose enclosures, unless shown otherwise. Provide NEMA 3R enclosure where installed outside or in a sprinkled area. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF MOTORS A. GENERAL: Mount electric motors which are not factory installed. B. MOTOR CONNECTIONS: Provide electrical and grounding connections to motors as indicated. Connections as follows: 1. Not less than 18 inch length of Sealtite, extending from motor connection box to motor branch circuit conduit on outdoor and wet locations. Provide Greenfield for inside dry locations. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 26 29 01 - 1 MOTORS AND STARTERS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 2. Install connections mechanically secure, assuring electrical continuity, proper and effective grounding. C. INSTALLATION OF MOTOR STARTER 1. Install motor starters in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, the applicable requirements of the NEC and the NECA's "Standard of Installation", and recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve the intended function. 2. Combination starter disconnects and starters mounted in ceiling plenums shall be installed 18" above ceiling grid. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus Christi 26 29 01 -2 MOTORS AND STARTERS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SECTION 26 29 26 MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL CONTROLS AND WIRING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. 1.02 SCOPE A. Provide the various miscellaneous control devices, wiring and additional branch circuits as required, shown and specified. B. The types of miscellaneous control devices and wiring include but not limited to the following. 1. Contactors 2. Relays 3. Photocells 4. Time switches 5. Relay Panels 6. Additional control wiring and safety devices as shown and specified 7. Connect power from fire alarm relays to starters to shut down air handling units 8. Elevator power module switches 9. Motorized Dampers 10. Smoke Dampers and Combination Fire/Smoke Dampers C. WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: 1. Various control devices, of an electrical nature, for the safe operation and temperature control of the heating, ventilating, air conditioning and plumbing systems provided under Division 22 and Division 23. 2. All control wiring and conduit shall be furnished under Division 23. All power wiring 120 volt or larger shall be provided by Division 26. 3. Refer to building controls specification, Division 23 for scope of work required to be performed by Division 26 (electrical contractor). 4. Specification 26 05 19-Wire, Cable and Related Materials. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASME A17.1 -Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators Includes Requirements for Elevators, Escalators, Dumbwaiters, Moving Walks, Material Lifts, and Dumbwaiters with Automatic Transfer Devices; 2022. B. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems Controllers, Contactors and Overload Relays Rated 600 Volts; 2008 (Reaffirmed 2020). C. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. D. NFPA 72- National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code; Most Recent Edition Cited by Referring Code or Reference Standard. E. UL 98- Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. F. UL 508- Industrial Control Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. G. UL 916- Energy Management Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. H. UL 924- Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH: 1. NFPA 70 2. Local municipal or state codes that have jurisdiction. 3. UL 916 4. UL 924 DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL Christi 26 29 26- 1 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop CONTROLS AND WIRING Re-Bid Construction Documents 1.05 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Provide one of the following manufacturers: 1. LIGHTING CONTACTORS AND RELAYS a. General Electric Company/ABB b. Square D Company c. Automatic Switch Company d. Eaton e. Siemens 2. PHOTOCELLS AND TIME SWITCHES a. Tork, Inc. b. Intermatic time controls 3. RELAY PANELS a. Wattstopper 1) LMCP b. Cooper/Eaton 1) ControlKeeper 4. ELEVATOR POWER MODULE SWITCHES a. Eaton-Bussmann PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL A. GENERAL: This Section shall outline the basic installation of electric devices, conduit, boxes, fittings, and wiring required for complete interconnection of several systems, this may not reflect every required appurtenance. It does not cover integral parts of mechanical equipment. B. CONTACTORS AND RELAYS: Provide control wiring, contactors, and relays with the ampere- rating and number of poles as shown, specified, and required for a complete and functioning system: 1. Rated at 600 volts, 60 hertz. 2. Continuously rated contacts for all types of ballast and tungsten lighting, resistance and motor loads. Contacts shall be sized as scheduled or noted. 3. Shall have totally enclosed, double-break silver-cadmium-oxide power contacts. Auxiliary arcing contacts are not acceptable. Contact inspection and replacement shall be possible without disturbing line or load wiring. 4. The contactor shall have straight-through wiring with all terminals clearly marked. 5. The contactor shall be approved per UL 508 and/or CSA, and be designed in accordance with NEMA ICS 2-21 1 B. 6. They shall be industrial-duty rated for applications to 600 volts maximum. 7. The contactor shall have provisions for factory or field addition of: a. Four(4) N.O. or N.C. auxiliary contacts rated 6 amperes continuous at 600 volts. b. Single or double circuit, N.O. or N.C., 30 or 60 ampere 600 volt power-pole adder. 8. The contactor shall have a NEMA type 1 enclosure unless otherwise noted. 9. Control power to the contactor 120V control circuit shall be provided from the nearest panelboard 120V circuit. If the 120V control power circuit is not shown, provide a control power transformer for 120 volt control power and a 120 volt coil when required for control. Provide primary and secondary fuses on the control power transformer. 10. Electrically Held Lighting- Contactor coils shall be continuously rated and encapsulated. Electrically held contactors are not to be used unless specifically shown on the plans. 11. Mechanically Held Lighting Contactors- Coil-clearing contacts shall be supplied so that the contactor coils shall be energized only during the instance of operation. Both latch and unlatch coils shall be encapsulated. All contactors shall be mechanically held unless noted otherwise on the plans. 12. Provide 2-wire or 3-wire control modules as required to operate lighting contactors. 13. Provide hand-off-automatic controls (H-O-A)for each lighting contactor. 14. Provide relays and contactors to shut down air handling units. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL Christi 26 29 26-2 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop CONTROLS AND WIRING C. Photocells for Stand-alone controls (not part of relay panel controls): Provide a specification grade self-contained, weatherproof, photoelectric control that shall be mounted on an FS type weatherproof junction box. The photocell shall: 1. Switch "ON" at dusk and "OFF" at dawn. 2. Adjustable from 2 to 50 foot-candles. 3. Rated at 2,000 watts. 4. Use 1" diameter cadmium sulphide cell. 5. Have a 2-minute delay to prevent false switching. D. TIME SWITCHES: Provide a 7-day digital time clock with battery back-up feature installed in a NEMA 3R enclosure. E. Control wiring shall be not less than #14 AWG type THWN/THHN and shall be color coded and labeled with Brady markers throughout. Bundle multiple conductors with Ty-Raps. F. Relay Panels 1. Rated 277V, 60Hz. 2. Panel operating voltage of 120-277V 3. Uses any of the following relays: a. Mechanically Latching Relays b. Multi-pole Relays 4. 15A, 20A, and 30A rated relays available 5. Basic Capabilities: a. 7-Day Clock b. Capable of being set for 7 different day types per week c. Includes automatic holiday shutoff feature d. Has program backup to restore operations after power failure e. Can be expanded to include override switches f. On-board programming and processing 6. Each individual relay can be individually or group programmable to operate based on user-provided parameters, manual switch operation, photocells and sensors, or automatic program routines. 7. Rated for minimum of 10 million operations. 8. Contains occupant warning features to flash relays prior to time-out to notify occupants of change of state. 9. Capable of interfacing with other systems via RS-232, RS-485, or Ethernet. 10. Capable of interfacing with occupancy sensors for zone control. 11. Capable of Switch-Masking or Lockout features for user-operated switches. 12. Provide Locking Hinged Enclosures as suitable for relay panel environment. At a minimum, all relay panels shall be NEMA 1, and may be included with the relay panel assembly from the manufacturer. Provide enclosures to house relay panels where NEMA 1 is insufficient, as follows: a. Outdoors and unconditioned spaces: NEMA 3R b. Central Plants, or any plant with process water systems: NEMA 4/12 c. Outdoors, Within 50-miles of saltwater coastlines: NEMA 4X 13. Dimming Modules shall be furnished with each relay panel, where dimming is required, per plan. 14. Pushbutton switches manufactured as compatible with the relay panel to either be used as override switches, or general control switches. 15. Provide photocells for use by relay panels for exterior ambient light monitoring: a. 1 per relay panel, when relay panels are stand alone b. 1 per building, when relay panels are networked G. Elevator Power Module Switches 1. NEMA 3R enclosure 2. Key to Test Switch 3. "ON" Pilot Light (Green, Red, or White) DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL Christi 26 29 26-3 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop CONTROLS AND WIRING 4. Isolated Full Capacity Neutral Lug 5. 1 P NC Mechanical Interlocked Auxiliary Contact (required for hydraulic elevators with automatic recall) 6. Fire Alarm Voltage Monitoring Relay(required to comply with NFPA 72) 7. Control Power Transformer with primary and secondary fuses 8. Isolation Fuses 9. Isolation Relays 10. 120 Volt Coil 11. Shunt trip Solenoid connected to the fire alarm panel 12. Class J Fuses 13. U L 98 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install miscellaneous electrical controls and wiring to provide a functioning system. B. Install contactor and relays in electrical/mechanical rooms unless otherwise noted. C. Install photocells on the roof unless otherwise directed by the architect. Coordinate any roof penetrations with all other trades and shield from other light sources. Install photocells high on North facing walls, or in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. D. Provide miscellaneous connections including disconnect switches for signs and other furnished equipment as shown on the Drawings. E. Provide NEMA 3R/4/4X/12 enclosures where located outside. F. Provide low-voltage cabling between relay panels and all control devices. Cabling shall be furnished by contractor as required by panel manufacturer, including Cats, Cat6, Belden, dimming pairs, or other as required by the manufacturer. Pre-terminated cabling by manufacturer is acceptable. G. All Low-Voltage cabling, for all systems, shall be neatly routed using J-Hooks. Cabling is installed above a hard ceiling, conduit shall be used to traverse the hard-ceiling segments. H. Install elevator power module switches in an elevator machine room, control room, machinery space, or control space in accordance with ASME A17.1. Other installation locations that are readily accessible to qualified persons such as electrical or mechanical rooms may be permissible in the event that machine roomless (MRL) elevators are provided with a control space of inadequate size to accommodate the power module switches. 3.02 DIVISION 22, 23, 27 AND 28 MISCELLANEOUS POWER AND CONTROLS A. Install electrical devices not an integral part of system equipment providing conduit, boxes, fittings, wiring, circuit breakers, disconnecting means and other devices. B. Contractor is responsible for providing all line voltage power to devices that require electrical power to operate. This shall include but not be limited to motorized dampers, smoke dampers, combination fire/smoke dampers, motorized gates, overhead rolling doors, and building control panels. Contractor shall terminate line voltage power to termination points. Contractor shall coordinate between all trades to determine sizing and quantities of line voltage circuits to adequately power and control devices. Provide circuits from nearest low voltage panel using spare circuits provided, if device requires power not already available or indicated. C. Provide GFCI receptacle with weather proof cover within 25 feet of all heating, air conditioning and refrigeration equipment per NFPA 70. 3.03 OPERATIONS PERSONNEL TRAINING A. All relay panels require manufacturer technician time to meet with owner, set programming conditions, time of day operations, and ensure owner-intended operations are met, based on whichever is most appropriate based on project size: 1. 8-Hours per relay panel 2. The amount of time required to successfully meet the criteria of this section and result in a fully working system, accepted by the Owner. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL Christi 26 29 26-4 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop CONTROLS AND WIRING B. A one-time recommissioning site visit, 4 Hours in time, by a manufacturer technician anytime between 90 and 120 days of building occupancy to adjust and reprogram (as required)the system based on owner input. This meeting shall be scheduled by the manufacturer and can only be declined by the owner. C. Provide a training session for the owner's operations personnel. Training session shall be performed by a qualified person who is knowledgeable in the subject/equipment. Submit a training agenda two (2)weeks prior to the proposed training session for review and approval. Training session shall include at the minimum: 1. Purpose of equipment. 2. Principle of how the equipment works. 3. Important parts and assemblies. 4. How the equipment achieves its purpose and necessary operating conditions. 5. Most likely failure modes, causes and corrections. 6. On site demonstration. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL Christi 26 29 26-5 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop CONTROLS AND WIRING SECTION 26 41 13.13 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. The General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Division 1 and the Section entitled "Electrical Work- General Requirements" apply to all work herein. B. Objective: To provide safety for the building and occupants by preventing damage to building structure caused by lightning. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Comply with these following specifications and standards of the latest issue form a part of this specification: 1. Lightning Protection Institute Installation Standard, LPI-175 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Installation Requirements, UL 96A 3. National Electrical Code (NEC), NFPA 70 4. National Fire Protection Association Installation Standard, NFPA 780 5. U.S. Bureau of Standards 1.03 SCOPE A. The work covered in this section of the specifications consists of providing all labor, materials, and items of service required for a complete lightning protection system. Provide Class I materials for roof levels less than 75 feet and Class II for roof levels 75 feet or greater. B. If any departure from the Contract Drawings or submittal drawings covered below are deemed necessary by the Contractor, details of such departures and reasons therefore shall be submitted as soon as practical to the engineer for approval. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The lightning protection system shall conform to the requirements and standards for lightning protection systems of the LPI, UL, NFPA and NEC. Upon completion, application shall be made to the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for inspection and certification. B. The system to be furnished under this specification shall be the standard product of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of lightning protection equipment and shall be the manufacturer's latest approved design. The equipment shall be UL listed and properly UL labeled. 1.05 QUALIFIED MANUFACTURERS: A. Robbins Lightning, Inc. B. Advanced Lightning Technology C. Thompson Lightning Protection D. Harger Lightning Protection E. East Coast Lightning Equipment F. nVent ERICO 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Complete shop drawings showing the type, size and locations of all grounding, down conductors, through-wall assemblies, roof conductors and air terminals shall be submitted to the engineer for approval. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 LIGHTNING PROTECTION EQUIPMENT A. All materials shall be copper and bronze and of the size, weight and construction to suit the application and used in accordance with LPI, UL, NEC and NFPA. Class I sized components are required for roof levels not exceeding 75 feet in height Class II size components shall be required for roof levels over 75 feet in height. Bolt-type connectors and splicers shall be utilized DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus LIGHTNING PROTECTION Christi 26 41 13.13 - 1 SYSTEM 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents on Class I and Class II structures. Pressure squeeze clamps are not acceptable. All mounting hardware on the roof shall be stainless steel and on the facade shall be brass and/or copper. B. Aluminum Components-Aluminum materials may not be used except on roofs that utilize aluminum roofing components. The entire roof lightning protection system shall utilize aluminum components to insure compatibility on aluminum metal roofs or aluminum parapet caps. However, the downleads and grounding shall utilize copper with bimetal transition occurring at the through roof assembly with and approved bimetal through roof assembly. Copper is acceptable as a bimetal transition. 2.02 MATERIALS A. All equipment used in this installation shall be UL listed and properly UL labeled. All equipment shall be new, and of a design and construction to suit the application where it is used in accordance with accepted industry standards and LPI, UL, NFPA and NEC code requirements. B. Air terminals shall be nickel-tipped copper, having a copper base. Air terminals shall be spaced not more than twenty feet apart. Provide flathead air terminals on the roof in areas where accidental implement may occur. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The installation shall be accomplished by an experienced installation company that is UL listed, a member of the Lightning Protection Institute, United Lightning Protection Association qualified, and an employer of Certified Master Installers of lightning protection systems. A Certified Master Installer shall directly supervise the work. B. All equipment shall be installed in a neat, workmanlike manner. The system shall consist of a complete conductor network at the roof and include air terminals, connectors, splicers, bonds, copper down leads and proper ground terminals. C. Copper downlead cables shall be utilized. D. Provide a ground test well at all ground rod locations. E. Where conductors are run in metal conduit for protection, the conductor shall be bonded to the entrance and exit point of the conduit or approved methods to maintain electrical continuity. F. Down conductors shall be attached to ground devices in accordance with the specific provisions of the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., Code.All-down conductors shall be concealed. Any exposed conductors shall be approved by Architect. G. All metals of conductance within six feet of the lightning protection system shall be securely bonded and made a part thereof. Where stack or chimney is present, tinned covered non- corrosive air terminals and conductors shall be used. Metal water pipes shall be bonded to the grounding system. 3.02 COORDINATION A. The lightning protection installer will work with any other trades present to insure a correct, neat and unobtrusive installation. B. It shall be the responsibility of the lightning protection installer to assure a solid bond to the main water service and to assure interconnection with other ground systems. 3.03 COMPLETION A. Upon completion of the installation, the lightning protection installer shall secure and deliver to the owner the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Master Label certification or the Lightning Protection Institute Certified System certification. The system will not be accepted without the UL Master Label plate or the LPI certification certificate. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus LIGHTNING PROTECTION Christi 26 41 13.13 -2 SYSTEM 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SECTION 26 43 13.13 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPD) -STANDARD INTERRUPTING LPART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Specify the electrical and mechanical requirements for a non-modular high-energy surge protective device system (SPD). The specified system shall provide effective high energy surge current diversion and be suitable for application in {RS#2447) Category A, B and C3 environments, as tested by{RS#2446), IEEE C62.45. B. The system shall be constructed using multiple surge current diversion modules utilizing metal oxide varistors (MOV) computer matched to +/- 1-volt variance and tested for manufacturer's defects. The modules shall be designed and constructed in a manner that ensures surge current sharing. Use of gas tubes, silicon avalanche diodes or selenium cells are unacceptable. Devices shall utilize a minimum of three (3) MOV's fuse links pair per phase. This will allow greater than 50% redundant protection in if a MOV fails. C. Third Party Test Report verifying surge current rating, longevity, testing, and filtering capabilities shall be provided with submittal. 1.02 STANDARDS A. The specified system shall be designed, manufactured, tested and installed in compliance with the following codes and standards: 1. Canadian Standards Association (CSA or CUL) 2. American National Standards Institute and 3. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers ({RS#2446), {RS#2447), IEEE C62.41.2 and IEEE C62.45) 4. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers 1100 Emerald Book 5. Federal Information Processing Standards Publication 94 (FIPS PUB 94) 6. National Electrical Manufacturer Association (NEMA LS-1 1992) 7. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA 20, NFPA 70, NFPA 75 and NFPA 780) 8. National Electric Code 9. Underwriters Laboratories (UL 1449 and UL 1283) 10. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC 801) 11. International Standards Organization (ISO) Company certified ISO 9001 for manufacturing, design and service 12. EMC Directive 89/336/EEC- CE compliant B. The systems individual units shall be UL/ANSI Listed and labeled under UL 1449 (Fourth Edition) Standard for Surge Protection Devices Type 2 20kA with a nominal discharge current of 20kA and the surge ratings shall be permanently affixed to the SPD. The units shall also be listed and labeled to UL 1283 for type 2 locations Standard for Electromagnetic Interference Filters, and CSA/CUL Listed. 1.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Southern Tier Technologies 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings shall include, but not be limited to: 1. Cutsheets of surge protection devices with ratings, physical dimensions and all accessories clearly labeled. 2. Device labels shall be clearly indicated in cutsheets. 3. All standards and listings, as specified in section 1.2A-B, shall be clearly labeled in cutsheets provided. 4. Cutsheets shall clearly outline that design requirements of this specification have been met. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES Christi 26 43 13.13 - 1 (SPD)- STANDARD 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop INTERRUPTING Re-Bid Construction Documents 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 certified. The specified system shall be tested at the component and fully assembled level, under surge conditions with AC power applied for a minimum of 1 hour. Testing shall include but not be limited to quality control checks, dielectric voltage withstand test per UL and CSA requirements, UL ground continuity tests and operational and calibration tests. B. The unit shall be designed and manufactured in the USA by a qualified manufacturer of surge protection equipment and Active Tracking Filters. The manufacturer shall have been engaged in the design and manufacture of such products for a minimum of 10 years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ENCLOSURE A. The specified system shall be provided in a heavy duty NEMA 4 or better dust-tight, drip-tight enclosure with no ventilation openings. 2.02 OVERCURRENT PROTECTION (FUSING) A. Individual surge components shall be fused to prevent violent failure. The fusing shall be UL listed and shall be capable of interrupting up to 200kA symmetrical fault current with 480VAC applied. Replaceable fusing is unacceptable. Overcurrent protection that limits specified surge currents is not acceptable. Devices that utilize a single fuse to protect two or more suppression paths are not accepted. 2.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Protection Modes: 1. The SPD shall provide protection as follows: All modes, L-N or L-L, L-G and N-G (where applicable) Note: L = Line, G = Ground, N = Neutral B. UL 1449 Ratings: 1. The maximum UL 1449 listed surge ratings for each and/or all of the specified protection modes shall not exceed the following in any mode of protection: System Voltage Voltage Protection Rating L-N L-L N-G L-L 120/240 600-volts 700-volts 700-volts 1200-volts 120/208 600-volts 700-volts 700-volts 1200-volts 240 1200-volts 1000-volts 277/480 1200-volts 1200-volts 1200-volts 1800-volts 480 1800-volts 1800-volts C. Noise Attenuation: 1. The unit shall be UL 1283 Listed as an electromagnetic interference filter in type 2 locations. The filter shall provide insertion loss with a maximum of 60 dB from 100 KHz to 100 MHz per 50 Ohm Insertion Loss Methodology from MIL 220A. The system shall provide up to 120 dB insertion loss from 100 KHz to 100 MHz when used in a coordinated facility system. D. Life Cycle Testing: 1. The SPD system shall be duty life cycle tested to survive 6,000 20kV, 10kA Surges, per {RS#2447) Category C3 surge current with less than 5% degradation of clamping voltage. 2.04 CONNECTIONS A. Provide 60"wire leads#10 AWG or UL 1449 tested size. 2.05 STANDARD FEATURES A. Unit Status Indicators: 1. Red and green solid state indicators with printed labels shall be provided on the front cover to redundantly indicate on-line unit status including N-G monitoring. The absence of the green light and the presence of the red light shall reliably indicate that surge protection DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES Christi 26 43 13.13-2 (SPD)- STANDARD 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop INTERRUPTING is reduced and service is needed to restore full operation. B. Dry Contacts for remote monitoring: 1. Electrically isolated Form C dry contacts, one normally open and one normally closed set standard on all units for remote monitoring. C. Undervoltage detection: 1. Unit shall be equipped with 70% undervoltage detection capability. D. Phase Loss Monitoring: 1. Unit shall be equipped with phase loss monitoring. E. Power Loss Monitoring: 1. Unit shall be equipped with power loss monitoring. 2.06 TESTING A. Component Testing and Monitoring: 1. Unit shall include an on-line circuit which tests and redundantly monitors individual components in all protection modes including neutral to ground (where applicable). Units that require external test sets or equipment are not acceptable. 2.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Storage Temperature: -55 to +85 C (-67 to +187 F) B. Operating Temperature: -40 to +60 C (40 to 140 F) C. Relative Humidity: 0% to 95% D. Audible Noise: less than 45 dBa at 5 feet(1.5 m). E. Operating Altitude: 0 to 18,000 feet above sea level. 2.08 WARRANTY A. The manufacturer shall provide a full 10 year parts and a 5 year labor warranty from date of shipment against any part failure when installed in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions, UL Listing requirements and any applicable national, state or local electrical codes. Direct, factory trained, ISO 9001 certified employees must be available for 48 hour assessment. A 24 hour 800 number must be available to support warranty. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install the parallel SPD with short and straight conductors as practically possible. Locate adjacent to the switchboard or panel it is serving. The contractor shall twist the SPD input conductors together to reduce input conductor inductance. The contractor shall follow the SPD manufacturer's recommended installation practices as found in the installation, operation and maintenance manual and comply with all applicable codes. Provide STT Tierguide cable if the cable length exceeds 5 feet from the circuit breaker servicing the SPD. B. Provide Flush Mount Stainless Steel Cover Kit for kitchen areas. C. Provide Flush Mount Cover Kit for residential units and hotel suites. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES Christi 26 43 13.13 -3 (SPD)- STANDARD 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop INTERRUPTING SECTION 26 43 13 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE (SPD) -SERVICE ENTRANCE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Provide electrical and mechanical requirements for a modular high-energy surge protective device system (SPD). The system shall provide effective high energy surge current diversion and be suitable for application in {RS#2447) Category A, B and C3 environments, as tested by {RS#2446), IEEE C62.45. B. The system shall be constructed using multiple surge current diversion modules utilizing metal oxide varistors (MOV) computer matched to +/- 1-volt variance and tested for manufacturer's defects. The modules shall be designed and constructed in a manner that ensures surge current sharing. Use of gas tubes, silicon avalanche diodes or selenium cells are unacceptable. Device shall utilize a minimum of three (3) MOV's fuse link pair per phase. This will allow redundant protection in the event that MOV's fail. C. Third Party Test Report verifying surge current rating, longevity, testing, and filtering capabilities shall be provided with submittal. 1.02 STANDARDS A. The specified system shall be designed, manufactured, tested and installed in compliance with the following codes and standards: 1. Canadian Standards Association (CSA or CUL) 2. American National Standards Institute and 3. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers ({RS#2446), {RS#2447), IEEE C62.41.2, IEEE C62.45) 4. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers 1100 Emerald Book 5. Federal Information Processing Standards Publication 94 (FIPS PUB 94) 6. National Electrical Manufacturer Association (NEMA LS-1 1992) 7. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA 20, NFPA 75 and NFPA 780) 8. National Electric Code (NFPA 70) 9. Underwriters Laboratories (UL 1449 and UL 1283) 10. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC 801) 11. International Standards Organization(ISO) Company certified ISO 9001 for manufacturing, design and service 12. EMC Directive 89/336/EEC- CE compliant B. The systems individual units shall be UL/ANSI Listed and labeled under UL 1449 (Fourth Edition) Standard for Surge Protection Device type 1 nominal discharge current of 20kA and the surge ratings shall be permanently affixed to the SPD. The units shall also be listed and CSA or CUL Listed. 1.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Southern Tier Technologies 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings shall include, but not be limited to: 1. Cutsheets of surge protection devices with ratings, physical dimensions and all accessories clearly labeled. 2. Device labels shall be clearly indicated in cutsheets. 3. All standards and listings, as specified in section 1.2A-B, shall be clearly labeled in cutsheets provided. 4. Cutsheets shall clearly outline that design requirements of this specification have been met. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 certified. The specified system shall be tested at the component and fully assembled level, under surge conditions with AC power applied for a DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE Christi 26 43 13- 1 (SPD)- SERVICE ENTRANCE 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents minimum of 1 hour. Testing shall include but not be limited to quality control checks, dielectric voltage withstand test per UL and CSA requirements, UL ground continuity tests and operational and calibration tests. B. The unit shall be designed and manufactured in the USA by a qualified manufacturer of line conditioning equipment and Active Tracking Filters. The manufacturer shall have been engaged in the design and manufacture of such products for a minimum of 10 years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ENCLOSURE A. The specified system shall be provided in a heavy duty NEMA 4 or better dust-tight, drip-tight enclosure with no ventilation openings. The cover of the enclosure shall be hinged on the left side and require a tool for access to internal components. A drawing pocket shall be provided inside the door for storage of unit drawings and installation/operation manual. All monitoring indication must be visible without opening the door. The enclosure maximum dimensions shall be (16) inches/(406) millimeters high, (16) inches/(406) millimeters wide and (8) inches/(203) millimeters deep. 2.02 OVERCURRENT PROTECTION (FUSING) A. Individual surge components shall be fused to prevent violent failure. The fusing shall be UL listed and shall be capable of interrupting up to 200kA symmetrical fault current with 480VAC applied. Replaceable fusing is unacceptable. Overcurrent protection that limits specified surge currents is not acceptable. Devices that utilize a single fuse to protect two or more suppression paths are not accepted. 2.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Protection Modes: 1. The SPD shall provide protection as follows: All modes, L-N or L-L, L-G and N-G (where applicable) Note: L = Line, G = Ground, N = Neutral B. UL 1449 Ratings: 1. The maximum UL/ANSI 1449 listed surge ratings for each and/or all of the specified protection modes shall not exceed the following: System Voltage Voltage Protection Rating L-N L-G N-G L-L 120/240 700-volts 700-volts 700-volts 1200-volts 120/208 700-volts 700-volts 700-volts 1200-volts 240 1200-volts 1000-volts 277/480 1000-volts 1000-volts 1000-volts 1800-volts 480 1800-volts 1800-volts C. Noise Attenuation: 1. The unit shall be UL 1283 Listed as an electromagnetic interference filter for type 2 locations. The filter shall provide 41dB at 100kHz, 31clB at 1MHz, 35dB at 10MHz, 53dB at 100MHz, per 50 Ohm Insertion Loss Methodology from MIL 220A. The system shall provide up to 120-dB insertion loss from 100 kHz to 100 MHz when used in a coordinated facility system. D. Life Cycle Testing: 1. The SPD system shall be duty life cycle tested to survive, 10kA (8x20?s), 20kV (1.2x50ps), {RS#2447) Category C surge current with less than 5% degradation of clamping voltage. The minimum numbers of surges the unit shall be able to protect against are: Model Surge Rating Number of Life Cycle Surges Per Mode Per Phase L-N L-G N-G L-N+L-G DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE Christi 26 43 13-2 (SPD)- SERVICE ENTRANCE 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 250kA per phase 12000 12000 12000 24000 500kA per phase 24000 24000 24000 48000 2.04 CONNECTIONS A. The terminals shall be provided to accommodate wire sizes up to#1/0 AWG. 2.05 INTERNAL CONNECTIONS AND SERVICEABILITY A. All surge current diversion module intra-unit connections shall be by way of low impedance copper. Surge current diversion modules shall use bolted connections to the plates for reliable, low impedance connections. The system shall be designed for simple change out of any or all SPD component modules by a qualified electrician. Designs that require factory service are not acceptable. All connections, conductors and terminals must be appropriately sized for specified surge current capacity. 2.06 STANDARD FEATURES A. Component Testing and Monitoring: 1. The monitoring circuitry must continually verify the protection status during operation, and display this information on the front cover status panel. The SPD must also contain a built- in-test circuit that will verify the integrity of all fuse links and each associated MOV. The built-in-test circuit must cycle through all phase banks and the neutral-ground bank sending test signals to all modules including N-G. The integrity of all fuses in test must be indicted on the status panel. All testing must be able to be performed without disconnecting power to the SPD. Units that require external test sets or equipment are unacceptable. B. Unit Status Indicators: 1. Red and green solid state indicators with printed labels shall be provided on the hinged front cover to redundantly indicate on-line unit status. The absence of the green light and the presence of the red light shall reliably indicate that surge protection is reduced and service is needed to restore full operation. C. Surge Counter: 1. Provide up to 7-digit LED/LCD surge counter to total transient voltage surges. D. Dry Contacts for remote monitoring: 1. Electrically isolated Form C dry contacts, one normally open and one normally closed set standard on all units for remote monitoring. E. Undervoltage detection: 1. Unit shall be equipped with 70% undervoltage detection capability. F. Phase Loss Monitoring: 1. Unit shall be equipped with phase loss monitoring. G. Power Loss Monitoring: 1. Unit shall be equipped with power loss monitoring. 2.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Storage Temperature: -55 to +85 C (-67 to +187 F) B. Operating Temperature: -40 to +60 C (-40 to 140 F) C. Relative Humidity: 0% to 95% D. Audible Noise: less than 45 dBa at 5 feet (1 5 m) E. Operating Altitude: 0 to 18,000 feet above sea level 2.08 WARRANTY A. The manufacturer shall provide a full 10 year parts and 5 year on site labor warranty from date of shipment against any part failure when installed in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions, UL Listing requirements and any applicable national, state or local electrical codes. Direct, factory trained, ISO 9001 certified employees must be available for 48-hour assessment. A 24 hour 800 number must be available to support warranty. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE Christi 26 43 13- 3 (SPD)- SERVICE ENTRANCE 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The contractor shall install the parallel SPD with short and straight conductors as practically possible. Locate adjacent to the switchboard or panel it is serving. The contractor shall twist the SPD input conductors together to reduce input conductor inductance. The contractor shall follow the SPD manufacturer's recommended installation practices as found in the installation, operation and maintenance manual and comply with all applicable codes. Provide STT Tierguide cable low impedance cable when long lead lengths are needed. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE Christi 26 43 13-4 (SPD)- SERVICE ENTRANCE 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SECTION 26 51 19 LIGHTING FIXTURES- LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (LED) PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Provide general and emergency lighting fixtures as noted on the drawings. Fixtures shall be completely wired with lamps installed and shall be in perfect operating condition at the time of substantial completion. B. The types of lighting fixtures required for this project include: 1. LED 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 47 CFR 15- Radio Frequency Devices; current edition. B. ASTM B117-Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray(Fog)Apparatus; 2019. C. NEMA JSC 10410- Performance Testing for Lighting Controls and Switching Devices with Electronic Drivers and Discharge Ballasts; 2023. D. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. E. UL 924- Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. F. UL 1008-Transfer Switch Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. G. UL 1012 -Safety Power Units Other Than Class 2; 2010. H. UL 1310 -Class 2 Power Units; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. I. NFPA 101 J. NEMA-LE K. TM-21 L. LM-80 M. LM-79 N. L70 O. DLC 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All fixtures shall conform to all applicable UL standards and shall be UL label including damp and wet location ratings. "ETL listed" is an acceptable listing. B. All LED drivers shall be UL recognized Class 2 per UL 1310 or non-Class 2 per UL 1012 as applicable. C. All LED drivers shall comply with applicable requirements of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules and regulations, Title 47 CFR 15, for Non-Consumer Equipment. D. All LED drivers shall be RoHS compliant. 1.04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Provide lighting fixtures produced by manufacturers as shown and scheduled. B. LED DRIVER: 1. Provide one of the following manufacturers a. Eldo b. Lutron c. Osram d. Philips C. LAMPS: 1. Provide one of the following LED Chip manufacturers DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus LIGHTING FIXTURES - LIGHT Christi 2651 19- 1 EMITTING DIODE (LED) 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents a. Cree b. Nichia c. North American Philips d. Seoul e. Lumileds 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings shall include a brochure with a separate cut sheet for each fixture type arranged in alphabetical order with fixture and all accessories/options clearly labeled. Provide performance data for each fixture. Provide an independent test lab report for each fixture if requested by the Architect/Engineer. B. Provide driver and LED module data brochures for each fixture type. C. Provide air handling and heat removal data for light fixtures specified with these requirements. D. All components and cladding listed in the Texas Windstorm Approved Materials Catalog shall have the appropriate product evaluation number indicated on the submittal. E. Components and cladding not listed will require certification that they meet or exceed the design requirements of this section by manufacturer. 1.06 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH: 1. National Electrical Code. 2. Local, municipal, or state codes that have jurisdiction. 3. UL fire resistance directory. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS A. General: 1. Provide the size, type and rating of each light fixture shown and scheduled. All light fixtures shall complete with reflectors, lens, trim rings, flanges, LED modules, lamp holders, drivers, fuses, wiring, earthquake clips, etc. to provide a complete functioning light fixture. B. Lighting Fixture Types: 1. LED Fixtures a. Fixtures shall be pre-wired with frame-in kit and integral thermal management system for fixtures. Driver shall be encased in metal-can construction for optimal thermal performance. b. Total fixture lumen output is dependent on the chip, thermal management, driver current and optical system. LED fixtures shall be tested as a complete unit or system. Only DOE recognized CALIPER testing laboratory results shall be utilized. c. Interior LED fixtures shall have integral common mode and differential mode surge protection of 3kV(1.2/50ps, 2 ohm combination wave). d. Exterior LED fixtures shall have integral common mode and differential mode surge protection of 10kV/10kA(1.2/50ps, 2 ohm combination wave). 2. Exit signs a. Exit signs shall meet all federal, state and local codes. b. Provide fire alarm interface relay when required to flash exit signs. c. Provide battery packs for emergency operation when not connected to emergency generator power. 2.02 LED MODULES AND DRIVERS - COORDINATE WITH LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE A. LED 1. Driver manufacturer shall have a 10-year history producing electronic drivers for the North American market. 2. Driver shall carry a five year limited warranty from date of manufacture against defects in material or workmanship (including replacement)for operation at a maximum case DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus LIGHTING FIXTURES - LIGHT Christi 2651 19-2 EMITTING DIODE (LED) 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop temperature of 80 degrees Celsius. 3. Drivers shall not contain any Polychlorinated Biphenyl (PCB). 4. Provide driver with integral color-coded leads. 5. Driver shall operate from 50/60 Hz input source of 120 Volt through 277 Volt or 347 Volt through 480 Volt with sustained variations of+/- 10% (voltage)with no damage to the driver. 6. Driver output shall be regulated to +/- 5% across published load range. And shall have a power factor greater than .90 for primary application to 50% of full load rating with an input current Total Harmonic Distortion (THD)of less than 20% to 50% of full load rating. 7. Provide drivers with a Class A sound rating. 8. Provide LED drivers for outdoor fixtures with a minimum operating temperature of-40 degrees Celsius (40 F). Provide LED drivers for indoor fixtures with a minimum operating temperature of-20 degrees Celsius (-2F). 9. Drivers shall tolerate sustained open circuit and short circuit output conditions without fail and auto-resetting without need for external fuses or trip devices. 10. Driver output ripple current shall be less than 15% measured peak-to-average, with ripple frequency being greater than 100Hz. 11. Driver performance requirements shall be met when operated to 50% of full load rating. 12. Driver shall have integral thermal foldback to reduce driver power above rated case temperature to protect the driver if temperatures reach unacceptable levels. 13. Drivers shall comply with NEMA JSC 10410 for in-rush current limits. 14. Dimmable drivers shall be controlled by a Class 2 low voltage 0-10VDC controller with dimming range controlled between 1 and 8VDC with source current 150pA. 2.03 LAMPS- COORDINATE WITH LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE A. LED Lamps shall be appropriately matched to the driver with junction-down design for improved thermal management. Maximum DC Forward Current. 2.04 EMERGENCY LED BATTERY BACKUP A. Provide Bodine#BSL310M for emergency light fixtures in 9 or 10-foot ceiling. B. Provide Bodine#BSL20 for emergency LED driver for emergency light fixtures in ceiling heights greater than 12 feet. C. Provide Bodine#BSL17-C2 for emergency LED driver for LED downlights. D. Provide unswitched hot leg. Hot leg shall originate from the same branch circuit as required in article 700.12 (F) of NFPA 70. 2.05 POLES A. Provide poles for area lighting fixtures as specified. Poles shall be one piece, anchor base, with 2-piece steel bolt cover and vibration dampers. Poles shall be round straight steel as specified on the Lighting Fixture Schedule. B. Provide all poles with appropriate mounting accessories including arms, tenons, or bullhorns as required. Anchor bolts shall be hot dipped galvanized, sized as required by the manufacturer of the pole. C. All poles shall have a normal 3"x 5" hand hole at 18" above the base flange and grounding provision. D. Poles shall be prime painted interior and exterior. The exterior shall be finished with polyester powder coating and architectural finish as specified by the Architect. The interior with 3 mil thermoplastic hydrocarbon resin, or equivalent to meet 1000-hour salt spray exposure (ASTM B117). E. All site lighting poles are to be designed to meet Windstorm Requirements. 2.06 BRANCH CIRCUIT EMERGENCY TRANSFER SWITCH (BCELTS) A. Provide 20 amp, 120-277 Volt, UL 1008 listed Branch Circuit Emergency Transfer Switch to control emergency light fixtures transferring from normal to emergency branch circuits Provide Bodine GTD 20A or ETC SC 1008 UL 924 Devices are not acceptable DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus LIGHTING FIXTURES - LIGHT Christi 2651 19-3 EMITTING DIODE (LED) 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 2.07 AUTOMATIC LOAD CONTROL RELAY(ALCR) A. Provide 3 amp, 120-277 volt UL 924 listed. Relay to bypass switching controlling emergency branch circuit light fixtures Provide Bodine GTD or Wattstopper ELCU. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATIONS A. General 1. Install the type of lighting fixture where shown and indicated in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Provide earthquake clips on all recessed lay-in lighting fixtures as required by building code. 3. Adjust all adjustable lighting fixtures, as directed by the Architect. 4. Provide safety chains and wire guards for lighting fixtures located in gymnasium, multi- purpose rooms, play areas, etc. B. Coordination 1. The contractor shall verify the type of fixtures with the ceiling types as indicated on the drawings. Any discrepancies shall immediately be brought to the architect's attention before the contractor places his order and accepts delivery. Fixtures shall fit exact in the type of ceiling scheduled. Provide plaster frames, trim rings and other accessories required for a correct fit. 2. Provide supports attached to structural member to support fixtures when the ceiling system cannot maintain support. Provide separate supports for all recessed ceiling mounted HID fixtures. 3. Refer to architectural reflected ceiling plan for the exact location of all lighting fixtures. Notify the architect for any discrepancies or conflicts with structural, architectural, mechanical piping or ductwork before installation. C. Mounting 1. Provide support channels to support outlet boxes used support surface mounted lighting fixtures such as exit signs or downlights. 2. Pendant or surface mounted fixture shall be provided with required mounting devices and accessories, including hickeys and stud-extensions, ball-aligners, canopies and stems. Locations of fixtures in mechanical areas shall be coordinated with mechanical contractor. Mounting stems of pendant fixtures shall be of the correct length to uniformly maintain the fixture heights shown on the drawings or established in the field. The allowable variation tolerance in mounting individual fixtures shall not exceed 1/4 inch and shall not vary more than 1/2 inch from the floor mounting height shown on the Drawings. Fixtures hung in continuous runs shall be installed absolutely level and in line with each other. Hanging devices shall comply with Code requirements. Fixtures shall employ single- not twin - stem hangers unless otherwise noted. 3. All structure mounted fixtures (i.e. bracket mounted, pipe mounted and surface mounted) shall be provided with cables of suitable size and weight to support the weight of the fixture. Cables shall be fastened around or fastened to the housing of the fixture. On pendant fixtures, one safety cable of suitable size and weight to support the weight of the fixture assembly shall connect the top of the pendant to the supporting structure by means of welding or bolting, and one safety cable shall connect the housing of the fixture to the bottom of the pendant. Where more than one pendant per fixture occurs, only one pendant must be cabled. Track fixtures for pendant mounted track shall also be supplied with clip-on safety cables of suitable size and weight to support the weight of the fixture. 4. Provide secondary support wires from all four(4)corners of the lay-in fixtures to the structure above. Do not support fixtures from ceiling grid wire supports, piping, conduit, side walls, or mechanical equipment. Ceiling specifications do not supersede this requirement. 5. Where pole mounted luminaries are provided, provide appropriate anchor base pole as specified with manufacturer's recommended anchor bolts. Verify exact location on site for poles with Architect, Civil, and Landscape documents. Poles shall be installed on proper DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus LIGHTING FIXTURES - LIGHT Christi 2651 19-4 EMITTING DIODE (LED) 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop footing. Refer to details on the drawings. Provide grounding connection to a separately driven ground rod, outside of the footing. Where indicated provide pole with identification plate indicating pole number. 6. Prior to installing and prior to covering or concealing the fasteners or connectors for site lighting poles, the contractor shall notify the architect and engineer. Do not cover up fasteners without having them reviewed by the structural engineer. 7. Contractor shall include in their bid amount the cost of windstorm-related construction observations and windstorm certification by an approved Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Texas. D. Electrical Connection 1. All light fixtures shall be connected from a branch circuit junction box using 1/2"flexible metal conduit or MC cable fixture pigtails not exceeding 8'-0". Provide#12 AWG conductors. All fixtures must be grounded by using a grounding conductor. Fixture to fixture wiring of fixtures installed in accessible ceiling is not permitted. Fixture whips shall not lay-on ceiling tile or grid. Provide caddy clips to provide additional support. E. Fire Rated Ceiling 1. Provide fire rated canopy or enclosure for all fixtures recessed in a fire rated ceiling. The fire rated canopy or enclosure shall be as required by the UL design number listed in the UL fire resistance directory. Refer to architectural drawing for the UL design number. Coordinate with ceiling installer and manufacturer. Provide proper rated drivers for lighting fixtures installed within these rated enclosures. F. Air Handling Fixtures 1. Install all air handling light fixtures with return air slot in the open position, if it is to be as an air handling fixture. Coordinate with mechanical contractor. 3.02 FINAL INSPECTION A. Remove all plastic and protective coating from all fixtures. Fixtures shall be thoroughly cleaned. Replace any damaged fixture or fixture parts including reflectors, louvers, lens and metal parts that show signs of corrosion. B. Replace all other defective fixtures showing signs of excessive usage. C. Demonstrate proper operation of all fixtures and controls. Refer to other sections and details on the drawings for lighting controls. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus LIGHTING FIXTURES - LIGHT Christi 2651 19-5 EMITTING DIODE (LED) 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SECTION 27 02 00 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all Work herein. B. The Contract Drawings indicate the extent and general arrangement of the systems. If any departure from the Contract Drawings are deemed necessary by the Contractor, details of such departures and the reasons therefore, shall be submitted to the Architect and Engineer for approval as soon as practicable. No such departures shall be made without the prior written approval of the Architect and Engineer. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Work included under this Contract consists of the furnishing and installation of all labor, material, tools, equipment and services necessary and required to form the complete and functioning systems in all of its various phases, all as shown on the accompanying Drawings and/or described in these Specifications. The contractor shall review all pertinent drawings, including those of other contracts prior to commencement of Work. B. This Division requires the furnishing and installing of all items Specified herein, indicated on the Drawings or reasonably inferred as necessary for safe and proper operation; including every article, device or accessory(whether or not specifically called for by item) reasonably necessary to facilitate each system's functioning as indicated by the design and the equipment specified. Elements of the work include, but are not limited to, materials, labor, supervision, transportation, storage, equipment, utilities, all required permits, licenses and inspections. All work performed under this Section shall be in accordance with the Project Manual, Drawings and Specifications and is subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract. C. The approximate locations of Communications items are indicated on the Drawings. These Drawings are not intended to give complete and accurate details in regard to location of outlets, apparatus, etc. Exact locations are to be determined by actual measurements at the building, and will in all cases be subject to the Review of the Owner or Engineer, who reserves the right to make any reasonable changes in the locations indicated without additional cost to the Owner. D. Items specifically mentioned in the Specifications but not shown on the Drawings and/or items shown on Drawings but not specifically mentioned in the Specifications shall be installed by the Contractor under the appropriate section of work as if they were both specified and shown. E. All discrepancies within the Contract Documents discrepancies between the Contract Documents and actual job-site conditions shall be reported to the Owner or Engineer so that they will be resolved prior to the bidding, where this cannot be done at least seven (7)working days prior to bid; the greater or more costly of the discrepancy shall be bid. All labor and materials required to perform the work described shall be included as part of this Contract. F. It is the intention of this Section of the Specifications to outline minimum requirements to furnish the Owner with a turn-key and fully operating system in cooperation with other trades. G. It is the intent of the above "Scope"to give the Contractor a general outline of the extent of the Work involved; however, it is not intended to include each and every item required for the Work. Anything omitted from the "Scope" but shown on the Drawings, or specified later, or necessary for a complete and functioning Communications system shall be considered a part of the overall "Scope". H. Coordinate with other contractors on items required for the proper functioning of communications system and indicated as provided by others, such as power, backboxes, conduits, sleeves, air conditioning, structural support, etc.. I. Contractor shall participate in the commissioning process; including but not limited to meeting attendance, completion of checklists and participation in functional testing. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 27 02 00- 1 METHODS FOR 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Re-Bid Construction Documents 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Div 1 and conditions of the contract B. Div 26 Electrical C. Div 28 Electronic Safety and Security 1.04 COOPERATION WITH TRADES: A. Cooperation with trades of adjacent, related, or affected materials or operations shall be considered a part of this work in order to affect timely and accurate placing of work and bring together in proper and correct sequence, the work of such trades. 1.05 REFERENCES A. National Electrical Code (NEC) B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) C. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL) D. Insulated Cable Engineer's Association (ICEA). E. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA). F. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). G. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). H. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). I. International Energy Conservation Code (IECC). J. BICSI (Building Industry Consulting Services International) K. Owner's Design Guidelines and Construction Standards L. Local, county, state and federal regulations and codes in effect as of date of installation. 1.06 COMPLETE FUNCTIONING OF WORK A. All work fairly implied as essential to the complete functioning of the electrical systems shown on the Drawings and Specifications shall be completed as part of the work of this Division unless specifically stated otherwise. It is the intention of the Drawings and Specifications to establish the types of the systems, but not set forth each item essential to the functioning of the system. In case of doubt as to the work intended, or in the event of amplification or clarification thereof, the Contractor shall call upon the Architect for supplementary instructions, Drawings, etc. B. Contractor shall review all pertinent Drawings and adjust his work to all conditions shown there on. Discrepancies between Plans, Specifications, and actual field conditions shall be brought to the prompt attention of the Architect. 1. Approximate location of communications outlets, devices, equipment cabinets, cable trays, conduits and sleeves, etc., are indicated on the Drawings. However, the Drawings, do not give complete and accurate detailed locations of such items and exact locations must be determined by actual field measurement. Such locations will, at all times, be subject to the approval of the Architect. 2. Communicate with the Architect and secure his approval of any location about which there may be the least question. Outlets obviously placed in a location not suitable to the finished room or without specific approval, shall be removed and relocated when so directed by the Architect. Location of ceiling devices shall be coordinated with reflected ceiling plans. C. Additional coordination with mechanical, electrical, plumbing contractor may be required to allow adequate clearances for all building components. Contractor to notify Architect and Engineer of unresolved clearances, conflicts or equipment locations. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 27 02 00-2 METHODS FOR 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 1.07 SCHEMATIC NATURE OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The contract documents are schematic in nature in that they are only to establish scope and a minimum level of quality. They are not to be used as actual working construction drawings. The actual working construction drawings shall be the approved shop drawings. 1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor shall have a complete working knowledge of the communications system being installed. B. Contractor shall have installed similar-sized systems in at least ten (10) other projects in the last five (5)years prior to this bid and be regularly engaged in the business of installation of the types of systems specified in this document. C. Contractor and individual installation crew members shall be experienced and qualified to perform the work specified herein at time of bid submission. All onsite supervision personnel that will be assigned to this project shall be listed in the Pre-Installation Submittal. 1. 80% shall have a minimum of three (3)years of experience in the installation of the types of systems, equipment, and cables specified in this document prior to this bid. 2. All installation team members must demonstrate knowledge and compliance with all applicable methods, standards, and codes. 3. All members of the Structured Cabling System installation team shall be certified by the Structured Cabling System Assurance Warranty provider as having completed the necessary training to complete their part of the installation and capable of an installation that falls under manufacturer's guidelines necessary to obtain the Manufacturer's System Assurance Warranty. 4. Any personnel substitutions shall be noted in writing to the Owner. D. A BICSI RCDD shall supervise and approve all on-site structured cabling work as a recognized member of the Contractor's installation team. E. Contractor shall obtain Communications system product manufacturer's certification if applicable. F. Refer to General Conditions for other requirements. 1.09 CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS A. In order to accomplish the conditions of this agreement, the Contractor shall perform the specific duties listed herein. B. Contractor shall provide and pay for all labor, supervision, tools, equipment, test equipment, tests and services to provide and install a complete communications cabling infrastructure system. Pay all required sales, gross receipts, and other taxes. C. Insurance 1. The Contractor shall procure, submit for review, and maintain for the duration of this agreement, insurance against claims for injuries to persons or damages to property which may arise from, or in connection with, the performance of work hereunder by the Contractor, his agents, representatives, employees or subcontractor. The Contractor shall pay the cost of such insurance. 2. The Owner, its directors, officers, representatives, agents and employees, respectively, shall have no responsibility to the Contractor with respect to any insurance in accordance with the provisions set forth herein. D. Regulatory Requirements 1. Communications Contractor shall supply all city, county, and state telecommunication cabling permits required by Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). 2. Communications Contractor shall be licensed and/or bonded as required for telecommunications/low voltage cabling systems. E. Privacy and Confidentiality 1. The Contractor will respect and protect the privacy and confidentiality of Owner, its employees, processes, products, and intellectual property to extent necessary, consistent DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 27 02 00-3 METHODS FOR 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS with the legal responsibilities of the Owner policies. 2. Contractors shall sign a non-disclosure agreement and abide by the requirements to keep confidential all information concerning bid documents and this project. F. Use of Subcontractors 1. Successful bidder shall inform the Owner's contact and General Contractor in writing about the intention to use Subcontractors and the scope of work for which they are being hired. 2. The Owner or Owner's designated contact must approve the use of Subcontractors in writing prior to the Subcontractor's hiring and start of any work. G. The Contractor's designated Project Manager will be recognized as the single point of contact. The Project manager shall oversee all work performed to ensure compliance with specifications as outlined in bid documents (which includes all specifications, references, and drawings)to ensure a quality installation and attend project meetings with the telecommunication consultant, the Owner and others. H. Coordination 1. Coordinate installation work with other trades (examples include ceiling grid contractors, HVAC and sheet metal contractors, etc.)to resolve procedures and installation placement for cable trays and cable bundle pathways. 2. The goal of this coordination will be to establish priority pathways for critical data/voice network cable infrastructure, materials, associated hardware, as well as mitigate delays to the project and to allow service access for communications components. 3. Exchange information and agree on details of equipment arrangements and installation interfaces. 4. Coordinate with electrical contractors and plan for the pathway routes used communications cabling to minimize cable lengths. Report any potential over distance cable runs for approval before pulling the cables. 5. Record agreements with other trades and distribute record to other participants, Owner and telecommunication consultant. 1.10 DATE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. The date of final acceptance shall be the date of owner occupancy, or the date all punch list items have been completed or final payment has been received. Refer to Division One for additional requirements. B. The date of final acceptance shall be documented in writing and signed by the architect, owner and contractor. 1.11 DEFINITIONS AND SYMBOLS A. General Explanation: A substantial amount of construction and Specification language constitutes definitions for terms found in other Contract Documents, including Drawings which must be recognized as diagrammatic and schematic in nature and not completely descriptive of requirements indicated thereon. Certain terms used in Contract Documents are defined generally in this article, unless defined otherwise in Division 1. B. Definitions and explanations of this Section are not necessarily either complete or exclusive, but are general for work to the extent not stated more explicitly in another provision of the Contract Documents. C. Indicated: The term "Indicated" is a cross-reference to details, notes or schedules on the Drawings, to other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications and to similar means of recording requirements in Contract Documents. Where such terms as "Shown", "Noted", "Scheduled", "Specified" and "Detailed" are used in lieu of"Indicated", it is for the purpose of helping the reader locate cross-reference material, and no limitation of location is intended except as specifically shown. D. Directed: Where not otherwise explained, terms such as "Directed", "Requested", "Accepted", and "Permitted" mean by the Architect or Engineer. However, no such implied meaning will be interpreted to extend the Architect's or Engineer's responsibility into the Contractor's area of DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 27 02 00-4 METHODS FOR 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS construction supervision. E. Reviewed: Where used in conjunction with the Engineer's response to submittals, requests for information, applications, inquiries, reports and claims by the Contractor the meaning of the term "Reviewed"will be held to limitations of Architect's and Engineer's responsibilities and duties as specified in the General and Supplemental Conditions. In no case will "Reviewed" by Engineer be interpreted as a release of the Contractor from responsibility to fulfill the terms and requirements of the Contract Documents. F. Furnish: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term "Furnish" is used to mean supply and deliver to the project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, etc., as applicable in each instance. G. Install: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term "Install" is used to describe operations at the project site including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protection, cleaning and similar operations, as applicable in each instance. H. Provide: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term "Provide" is used to mean "Furnish and Install", complete and ready for intended use, as applicable in each instance. I. Installer: Entity (person or firm)engaged by the Contractor or its subcontractor or Sub-contractor for performance of a particular unit of work at the project site, including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protection, cleaning and similar operations, as applicable in each instance. It is a general requirement that such entities (Installers) be expert in the operations they are engaged to perform. J. Imperative Language: Used generally in Specifications. Except as otherwise indicated, requirements expressed imperatively are to be performed by the Contractor. For clarity of reading at certain locations, contrasting subjective language is used to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor, or when so noted by other identified installers or entities. K. Minimum Quality/Quantity: In every instance, the quality level or quantity shown or specified is intended as minimum quality level or quantity of work to be performed or provided. Except as otherwise specifically indicated, the actual work may either comply exactly with that minimum (within specified tolerances) or may exceed that minimum within reasonable tolerance limits. In complying with requirements, indicated or scheduled numeric values are either minimums or maximums as noted or as appropriate for the context of the requirements. Refer instances of uncertainty to Owner or Engineer via a request for information (RFI) for decision before proceeding. L. Abbreviations and Symbols: The language of Specifications and other Contract Documents including Drawings is of an abbreviated type in certain instances and implies words and meanings which will be appropriately interpreted. Actual word abbreviations of a self- explanatory nature have been included in text of Specifications and Drawings. Specific abbreviations and symbols have been established, principally for lengthy technical terminology and primarily in conjunction with coordination of Specification requirements with notations on Drawings and in Schedules. These are frequently defined in Section at first instance of use or on a Legend and Symbol Drawing. Trade and industry association names and titles of generally recognized industry standards are frequently abbreviated. Singular words will be interpreted as plural and plural words will be interpreted as singular where applicable and where full context of Contract Documents so indicate. Except as otherwise indicated, graphic symbols and abbreviations used on Drawings and in Specifications are those recognized in construction industry for indicated purposes. Where not otherwise noted symbols and abbreviations are defined by 1993 ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook, chapter 34 "Abbreviations and Symbols", ASME and ASPE published standards. 1.12 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and other information needed for identification. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 27 02 00-5 METHODS FOR 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS B. Deliver products to the project at such time as the project is ready to receive the equipment, pipe or duct properly protected from incidental damage and weather damage. C. Damaged equipment shall be promptly removed from the site and new, undamaged equipment shall be installed in its place promptly with no additional charge to the Owner. 1.13 SUBMITTALS A. Coordinate with Division 01 for submittal timetable requirements, unless noted otherwise within thirty(30) days after the Contract is awarded. The Contractor shall submit an electronic copy of a complete set of shop drawings and complete product data covering each item of equipment or material. The submittal of each item requiring a submittal must be received by the Architect or Engineer within the above thirty-day period. The Architect or Engineer shall not be responsible for any delays or costs incurred due to excessive shop drawing review time for submittals received after the thirty-day (30)time limit. The Architect and Engineer will retain a copy of all shop drawings for their files. All literature pertaining to items subject to Shop Drawing submittal shall be submitted at one time. Submittals shall be placed in one electronic file in PDF format and bookmarked for individual specification sections. Individual electronic files of submittals for individual products shall not be permitted. Each submittal shall include the following items: 1. A cover sheet with the names and addresses of the Project, Architect, Engineer, General Contractor and the Subcontractor making the submittal. The cover sheet shall also contain the section number covering the item or items submitted and the item nomenclature or description. 2. An index page with a listing of all data or drawings ncluded in the Submittal. 3. Product Data and Shop Drawings shall be submitted in separate submittals, to avoid rejection of one due to errors in the other. B. Shop Drawings 1. Communications Contractor shall submit, for approval, floor plans that identify all device locations, device ID, cable routes and quantities, cable types, riser locations, and references to installation details and diagrams. a. Communication Contractor shall notify A&E team of any cable routes that will exceed the permanent link distance limit and get approval before work to start. Without advance notice and approval from A&E team, the contractor shall be fully responsible for make corrections as needed to bring all installed cables within the distance limit. 2. Communications Contractor shall submit, for approval, diagrams that show communications room layouts, rack layouts (including wall and rack elevations), cabling riser and interconnection diagrams, etc. 3. Communications Contractor shall submit, for approval, labelling scheme for all communications devices and cabling components (faceplates, horizontal cables, riser cables, inter-building cables, racks, patch panels, etc.) installed. 4. The Contractor shall make any corrections as required by the Engineer and submit revised shop drawings to the team for approval. 5. Approval by the Engineer of such drawings or schedules shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for deviations from the drawings or specifications, nor shall it relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors of any sort in shop drawings or schedules. Requests to deviate shall be submitted in writing to the Architect. 6. Drawings shall show the proposed firestop systems and locations, (stamped/embossed by the PE)to restore/maintain the designed fire rating of the building structure (walls, ceilings, floors, etc). 7. Shop Drawings shall be newly prepared and not reproduced from the Contract Documents. Drawings shall be prepared by a draftsman skilled in this type of work. Submitting copy of the engineering drawings or engineering drawings with contractor's markup as shop drawings is NOT ACCEPTABLE. 8. Shop drawings shall be developed in coordination with other trades (MEP, Architecture, Structural, etc.)to avoid any collision or conflict and to meet all industry standards best practices, codes and regulation requirements. By submitting shop drawings on the project, this Contractor is indicating that all necessary coordination has been completed and that DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 27 02 00-6 METHODS FOR 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS the systems, products and equipment submitted can be installed in the building and will operate as specified 9. Additional coordination with other trade contractors may be required to allow adequate clearances and meet code requirements. All transitions, offsets and relocations as required by actual field conditions shall be performed by the contractor at no additional cost to the owner C. Product Data Submittals 1. Communications Contractor shall submit catalogue cutsheets that include manufacturer, trade name, and complete model number for each product specified. Model number shall be handwritten and/or highlighted to indicate exact selection. 2. Communications Contractor shall identify applicable specification section reference for each product performance for each component specified for approval prior to purchase and installation. 3. Product information sheets for the proposed system test equipment to include certification of test equipment calibration. Installer is to use test equipment with a calibration date within one year of test date. Installer is to recalibrate and resubmit if necessary. 4. All data sheets shall be organized by specification sections and provided with table of contents.All products required in the spec section shall be included in one submittal. 5. Provide specification variations pages with a listing all variations, including unfurnished or additional required accessories, items or other features, between the submitted equipment and the specified equipment. If there are no variations, then this specification page shall state "NO VARIATIONS". Where variations affect the work of other Contractors, then the Contractor shall certify on this page that these variations have been fully coordinated with the affected Contractors and that all expenses associated with the variations will be paid by the submitting Contractor, and this page shall be signed by the submitting Contractor. 6. Equipment information including manufacturer's name and designation, size, performance and capacity data as applicable. All applicable Listings, Labels, Approvals and Standards shall be clearly indicated. 7. Dimensional data and scaled drawings as applicable to show that the submitted equipment will fit the space available with all required Code and maintenance clearances clearly indicated and labeled at a minimum scale of 1/4" = 1'-0", as required to demonstrate that the alternate or substituted product will fit in the space available. 8. Identification of each item of material or equipment matching that indicated on the Drawings. 9. Sufficient pictorial, descriptive and diagrammatic data on each item to show its conformance with the Drawings and Specifications. Any options or special requirements or accessories shall be so indicated. All applicable information shall be clearly indicated with arrows or another approved method. 10. All product substitutions shall be submitted in advance for review and approval before being included in product submittal package. 11. Certification by the General Contractor and Subcontractor that the material submitted is in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications, signed and dated in longhand. D. Structured Cabling System Warranty 1. The Communications Contractor shall submit appropriate documentation from the certifying manufacturer showing the project is registered and qualified for the System Assurance Warranty. 2. All subsequent work shall be in accordance with approved submittals. The Communications Contractor shall not perform any portion of the work requiring approval of the System Assurance Warranty manufacturer's warranty registration qualification procedures that would disqualify any part or all of the wiring system from that warranty qualification. E. Qualifications 1. Communications Contractor shall submit a list of the Contractor's previous projects that demonstrate qualification for this project. This list shall include, but not be limited to: a. At least ten (10) other projects in the last five (5)years DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 27 02 00-7 METHODS FOR 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS b. Name and location of project c. Project contacts, email addresses, and phone numbers d. Total square footage e. Total number of cables/drops f. Types of media 2. Communications Contractor shall submit an up-to-date and valid statement of qualifications for those assigned to perform the work specified herein at time of bid submission. a. Communications Contractor Employees b. Subcontractors 3. Manufacturer certifications for Contractor and installers. F. Cable Testing Plan 1. The Contractor shall provide a complete and detailed test plan for approval of the cabling system specified herein, including a complete list of test equipment for copper and fiber components and accessories prior to beginning cable testing. 2. The following minimal items shall be submitted for review: a. A testing plan that clearly describes procedures and methods. b. Product data for test equipment. c. Certifications and qualifications of all persons conducting the testing. d. Calibration certificates indicating that equipment calibration meets National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST)standards and has been calibrated at least once in the previous year of the testing date. e. Examples of test reports, including all graphs, tables, and charts necessary for display of testing results. G. Samples 1. For workstation outlet connectors,jack assemblies, housings and faceplates for color selection and evaluation of technical specifications and requirements. Confirm with Architect, interior designer, and Owner representative for color before purchasing materials. H. Refer to Division 1 for additional information on shop drawings and submittals. I. Where shop drawings and submittals are marked "REVIEWED", the review of the submittal does not indicate that submittals have been checked in detail nor does it in any way relieve the Contractor from his responsibility to furnish material and perform work as required by the Contract Documents. J. Submittals shall be reviewed and returned to the Contractor with one of the following categories indicated: 1. REVIEWED: Contractor does not need to take further submittal action, shall include this submittal in the O&M manual, and verify with Architects and other parties (Owner, etc) reviewing the submittals that no other correction is required before placing orders and starting installations. 2. REVIEWED AS NOTED: Contractor shall submit a letter verifying that required exceptions to the submittal have been received and complied with including additional accessories or coordination action as noted, and shall include this submittal and compliance letter in the O&M manual. The contractor may order the equipment submitted on at the time of the returned submittal providing the Contractor complies with the exceptions noted, and verifed with Architects and other parties (Owner, etc) reviewing the submittals that no other correction is required before placing orders and starting installations. 3. NOT APPROVED: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material, equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is not approved, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the Specifications and/or drawings. Contractor shall not order equipment that is not approved. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. 4. REVISE AND RESUBMIT: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material, equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is marked revise and DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 27 02 00-8 METHODS FOR 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS resubmit, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the Specifications and/or provide as noted on previous shop drawings. Contractor shall not order equipment marked revise and resubmit. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. 5. CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION REQUIRED: Contractor shall resubmit submittal on material, equipment or method of installation. The Contractor's stamp is required stating the submittal meets all conditions of the contract documents. The stamp shall be signed by the General Contractor. The submittal will not be reviewed if the stamp is not placed and signed on all shop drawings. 6. MANUFACTURER NOT AS SPECIFIED: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material, equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is marked manufacturer not as specified, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the specifications. Contractor shall not order equipment where submittal is marked manufacturer not as specified. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. K. Materials and equipment which are purchased or installed without shop drawing review shall be at the risk of the Contractor and the cost for removal and replacement of such materials and equipment and related work which is judged unsatisfactory by the Owner or Engineer for any reason shall be at the expense of the Contractor. The responsible Contractor shall remove the material and equipment noted above and replace with specified equipment or material at his own expense when directed in writing by the Architect or Engineer. L. Refer to each specification section for additional requirements. 1.14 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Before submit shop drawings, Contractor shall prepare coordination drawings to a scale of 1/4"=1'-0" or larger; detailing major elements, components, and systems of mechanical equipment and materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and building components. Indicate locations where space is limited for installation and access and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the Work, including (but not necessarily limited to)the following: 1. Indicate the proposed locations of communications conduits/sleeves, cable trays, equipment, cabinet and other materials. Include the following: a. Wall and type locations. b. Clearances from other building structure and MEP equipment. c. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment and cabling, and space for equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance. d. Equipment connections and support details. e. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations. f. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations. g. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases. h. Structural floor, wall and roof opening sizes and details. 2. Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction. 3. Prepare floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations. 4. Prepare reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installations, air distribution devices, light fixtures, communication systems components, and other ceiling-mounted items. B. This Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of all items that will affect the installation of the work of this Division. This coordination shall include, but not be limited to: cable routing, equipment location, clearance, space requirements, sequence of construction, building requirements and special conditions. C. By submitting shop drawings on the project, this Contractor is indicating that all necessary coordination has been completed and that the systems, products and equipment submitted can DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 27 02 00-9 METHODS FOR 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS be installed in the building and will operate as specified and intended, in full coordination with all other Contractors and Subcontractors. 1.15 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Division 1 and in addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, include the following information for equipment items: 1. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replacement parts. 2. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions. 3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions. 4. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules. 5. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Special Project Conditions, in addition to the requirements specified in Division 27, include the following information for equipment items: a. Identifying names, name tags designations and locations for all equipment. b. Fault Current calculations and Coordination Study. c. Reviewed shop drawing submittals with exceptions noted compliance letter. d. Fabrication drawings. e. Equipment and device bulletins and data sheets clearly highlighted to show equipment installed on the project and including performance curves and data as applicable, i.e., description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and model numbers of replacement parts. f. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions. g. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions, servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules. h. Equipment name plate data. i. Wiring diagrams. j. Exploded parts views and parts lists for all equipment and devices. k. Color coding charts for all painted equipment and conduit. I. Location and listing of all spare parts and special keys and tools furnished to the Owner. m. Furnish recommended lubrication schedule for all required lubrication points with listing of type and approximate amount of lubricant required. 6. The Communications Contractor shall deliver the Installer's Extended Product Warranty and Manufacturer's signed System Assurance Warranty of installed cabling system to include all components that comprise the complete cabling system. a. Delivery shall be completed within two (2)weeks of the time of final punch list review. 7. Product Certificates shall be signed by manufacturers of cables, connectors, and terminal equipment certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. 8. Cable Testing Report Requirements a. Submit certified test reports of Contractor-performed tests. Contractor shall submit the required Test Reports in the format and media specified, upon completion of testing the installed system. 9. The tests shall clearly demonstrate that the media and its components fully comply with the requirements specified herein. 10. Three (3)sets of electronic and hardcopy versions of test reports shall be submitted together and clearly identified with cable designations. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 27 02 00- 10 METHODS FOR 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 11. Cable inventory data shall be submitted for all fiber, copper, and coaxial cabling and termination components. Include products furnished: a. Manufacturer's name b. Manufacturer's part numbers c. Cable designations d. Location and riser assignments e. Product Data 12. The Contractor's BICSI Registered Communications Distribution Designer(RCDD) supervisor shall review, approve and stamp all documents prior to submitting. The Contractor's RCDD shall warrant in writing that 100% of the installation meets the requirements specified herein upon completion of all work. 13. Supply Owner with training manuals with instructions on methods of adding or removing cabling to/from firestopped sleeves and chases. 1.16 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Maintain a continuous record during the course of construction of all changes and deviations in the work from the contract drawings. Upon completion of the work, purchase a set of"Auto Positive Tracings" on vellum and make corrections as required to reflect the electrical systems as installed. Location and size of all conduit shall be accurately shown to dimension. Submit three prints of the tracings for approval. Make corrections to tracings as directed and deliver "Auto Positive Tracings"to the Architect. Record drawings shall be furnished in addition to shop drawings. Symbols on the Record drawings shall correspond to the identification symbols on the contract drawings and equipment identification plates and tags. B. The Contractor shall maintain a set of clearly marked black line record "AS-BUILT" prints on the job site on which he shall mark all work details, alterations to meet site conditions and changes made by"Change Order" notices. These shall be kept available for inspection by the Owner, Architect or Engineer at all times. C. Refer to Division 1 for additional requirements concerning record drawings. If the Contractor does not keep an accurate set of as-built drawings, the pay request may be altered or delayed at the request of the Architect. Mark the drawings with a colored pencil. Delivery of as-built prints and reproducibles is a condition of final acceptance. D. The record prints shall be updated on a daily basis and shall indicate accurate dimensions for all buried or concealed work, precise locations of all concealed device and cabling, and any deviations from the work shown on the Construction Documents which are required for coordination. All dimensions shall include at least two dimensions to permanent structure points. E. Submit three prints of the tracings for approval. Make corrections to tracings as directed and delivered "Auto Positive Tracings"to the architect. "As-Built" drawings shall be furnished in addition to shop drawings. F. For all cables and devices served from a wall mounted equipemnt enclosure, provide printed as-built wiring diagram showing all the cable route and type, device IDs and locations, and brand and models of all system components inside the enclosure, and attach the wiring diagram to the interior face of the enclosure's front door. G. When the option described in paragraph E., above is not exercised then upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall transfer all marks from the submit a set of clear concise set of reproducible record "AS-BUILT" drawings and shall submit the reproducible drawings with corrections made by a competent draftsman and three (3) sets of black line prints to the Architect or Engineer for review prior to scheduling the final inspection at the completion of the work. The reproducible record "AS-BUILT" drawings shall have the Engineers Name and Seal removed or blanked out and shall be clearly marked and signed on each sheet as follows: CERTIFIED RECORD DRAWINGS DATE: (NAME OF GENERAL CONTRACTOR) BY: DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 27 02 00- 11 METHODS FOR 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS (SIGNATURE) (NAME OF SUBCONTRACTOR) BY: (SIGNATURE) 1.17 CERTIFICATIONS AND TEST REPORTS A. Submit a detailed schedule for completion and testing of each system indicating scheduled dates for completion of system installation and outlining tests to be performed and schedule date for each test. This detailed completion and test schedule shall be submittal at least 90 days before the projected Project completion date. B. Test result reporting forms shall be submitted for review no later than the date of the detailed schedule submitted. C. Submit 4 copies of all certifications and test reports to the Architect or Engineer for review adequately in advance of completion of the Work to allow for remedial action as required to correct deficiencies discovered in equipment and systems. D. Certifications and test reports to be submitted shall include, but not be limited to those items outlined in Section of Division 27. 1.18 OPERATOR TRAINING A. The Contractor shall furnish the services of factory trained specialists to instruct the Owner's operating personnel. The Owner's operator training shall include 12 hours of onsite training in three 4-hour shifts. B. Before proceeding with the instruction of Owner Personnel, prepare a typed outline in triplicate, listing the subjects that will be covered in this instruction, and submit the outline for review by the Owner. At the conclusion of the instruction period obtain the signature of each person being instructed on each copy of the reviewed outline to signify that he has a proper understanding of the operation and maintenance of the systems and resubmit the signed outlines. C. Refer to other Division 27 Sections for additional Operator Training requirements. 1.19 SITE VISITATION A. Visit the site of the proposed construction in order to fully understand the facilities, difficulties and restriction attending the execution of the work. B. Before submitting a bid, it will be necessary for each Contractor whose work is involved to visit the site and ascertain for himself the conditions to be met therein in installing his work and make due provision for same in his bid. It will be assumed that this Contractor in submitting his bid has visited the premises and that his bid covers all work necessary to properly install the equipment shown. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with this requirement shall not be considered justification for the omission or faulty installation of any work covered by these Specifications and Drawings. C. Understand the existing utilities from which services will be supplied; verify locations of utility services and determine requirements for connections. D. Determine in advance that equipment and materials proposed for installation fit into the confines indicated. 1.20 WARRANTY A. The undertaking of the work described in this Division shall be considered equivalent to the issuance, as part of this work, of a specific guarantee extending one year beyond the date of completion of work and acceptance by Owner, against defects in materials and workmanship. Materials, appliances and labor necessary to effect repairs and replacement so as to maintain said work in good functioning order shall be provided as required. Replacements necessitated by normal wear in use or by Owner's abuse are not included under this guarantee. B. All normal and extended warranties shall include parts, labor, miscellaneous materials, travel time, incidental expenses, freight/shipping, refrigerant, oils, lubricants, belts, filters and any DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 27 02 00- 12 METHODS FOR 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS expenses related to service call required to diagnose warranty problems. C. Structured System Warranty 1. The Contractor shall be a certified Manufacturer's Value Added Reseller(VAR) and/or Authorized Installer and provide an end-to-end product warranty, adhere to the industry standard engineering, installation and testing procedures and utilize the authorized manufacturer components and distribution channels in provisioning this project. 2. Contractor shall coordinate with manufacturer for warranty paperwork and procedures prior to the start of the project. 3. Contractor shall provide a minimum one (1)year warranty on installation and workmanship PLUS an Extended Product Warranty and System Assurance Warranty for this wiring system and shall commit to make available local support for the product and system during the Warranty period. a. The Extended Product Warranty shall apply to all passive structured cabling system components and shall cover the replacement or repair of defective products and labor for the replacement or repair of such defective products for a minimum of one (1) year. b. The System Assurance Warranty provides a complete system and product warranty that will be extended to the end-user, ensuring the structured cabling system will be free of defects in materials and workmanship, will meet or exceed applicable performance requirements defined in the contract documents, and support all current and future network applications for a minimum of twenty (20)years. 4. System Certification: Upon successful completion of the installation and subsequent inspection, the customer shall be provided with a numbered certificate, from the manufacturer, registering the installation. 1.21 TRANSFER OF ELECTRONIC FILES A. Project documents are not intended or represented to be suitable for reuse by Architect/Owner or others on extensions of this project or on any other project. Any such reuse or modification without written verification or adaptation by Engineer, as appropriate for the specific purpose intended, will be at Architect/Owner's risk and without liability or legal exposure to Engineer or its consultants from all claims, damages, losses and expense, including attorney's fees arising out of or resulting thereof. B. Because data stored in electric media format can deteriorate or be modified inadvertently, or otherwise without authorization of the data's creator, the party receiving the electronic files agrees that it will perform acceptance tests or procedures within sixty (60) days of receipt, after which time the receiving party shall be deemed to have accepted the data thus transferred to be acceptable. Any errors detected within the sixty(60) day acceptance period will be corrected by the party delivering the electronic files. Engineer is not responsible for maintaining documents stored in electronic media format after acceptance by the Architect/Owner. C. When transferring documents in electronic media format, Engineer makes no representations as to the long term compatibility, usability or readability of documents resulting from the use of software application packages, operating systems, or computer hardware differing from those used by Engineer at the beginning of the Project. D. Any reuse or modifications will be Contractor's sole risk and without liability or legal exposure to Architect, Engineer or any consultant. E. The Texas Board of Architectural Examiners (TBAE) has stated that it is in violation of Texas law for persons other than the Architect of record to revise the Architectural drawings without the Architect's written consent. 1. It is agreed that"MEP" hard copy or computer-generated documents will not be issued to any other party except directly to the Architect/Owner. The contract documents are contractually copyrighted and cannot be used for any other project or purpose except as specifically indicated in AIA B-141 Standard Form of Agreement Between Architect and Owner. 2. If the client, Architect or Owner of the project requires electronic media for"record purposes", then AutoCAD/ Revit documents will be prepared by Engineer on electronic DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 27 02 00- 13 METHODS FOR 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS media such as removable memory devices, flash drives or CD's. These documents can also be submitted via file transfer protocols. AutoCAD/ Revit files will be submitted with all title block references intact to permit the end user to only view and plot the drawings. Revisions will not be permitted in this configuration. 3. At the Architect/Owner's request, Engineer will assist the Contractor in the preparation of the submittals and prepare one copy of AutoCAD/ Revit files on electronic media or submit through file transfer protocols. The electronic media will be prepared with all indicia of documents ownership removed. The electronic media will be prepared in a ".rvt"or".dwg" format to permit the end user to revise the drawings. 1.22 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Communications Contractor shall attend and/or arrange a scheduled pre-installation conference prior to beginning any work of this section. This venue is to ask and clarify questions in writing with consultant and/or project manager/Owner representative. B. Agenda 1. Safety 2. Work to be performed 3. Scheduling 4. Coordination 5. Other topics as necessary C. Attendance 1. Communications project manager/supervisor shall attend meetings arranged by General Contractor, Owner's representatives, and other parties affected by work of this document. 2. All individuals who will serve in an on-site supervisory capacity, including project managers, site supervisors, and lead installers, shall be required to attend the pre- installation conference. Individuals who do not attend the conference will not be permitted to supervise the installation and testing of communications cables on the project. 1.23 CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION A. The Engineer may perform site visits and provide job field reports upon inspection of Contractor's installation, materials, supporting hardware, coordination with other trades and progress to schedule to the client. B. Job Field Report outline: 1. General: The general installation progress in relation to scheduled work made by the Contractor up to that date. 2. Deficiencies and/or Items of Note: Documents observations of the cable installation that may require corrective action by the Contractor. 1.24 POST INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. At the time of substantial completion the contractor shall call and arrange for a post installation meeting to present and review all submittal documents to include but not be limited to As-Built Drawings, Test reports, Warranty paperwork, etc. B. Attendees shall include 1. Communications Contractor 2. Project Manager/Owner Representative 3. General Contractor 4. Communications Engineer. 5. Other trades that the GC deems appropriate. C. At this meeting the Communications Contractor shall present and explain all documentation. D. Any discrepancies or deviations noted by and agreed to by participants shall be remedied by the Communications Contractor and resubmitted within one (1)week of the meeting. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 27 02 00- 14 METHODS FOR 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SUBSTITUTIONS A. The names and manufacturers and model numbers have been used in the Contract documents to establish types of equipment and standards of quality. Where more than one manufacturer is named for a specific item of equipment, only one of the specified manufacturers will be considered for approval. Where only one manufacturer is mentioned with the phrase "or approved equal", Contractor may submit an alternate manufacturer for consideration, provided the following conditions are met: 1. Submit alternate equipment with complete descriptive data in shop drawing form. Provide sample of equipment upon request for review by Architect. Samples will be returned if requested in writing. 2. Alternate equipment must be equal from the standpoint of materials, construction and performance. 3. Alternate submittal must be presented to the Engineer/Architect ten (10) days prior to bid date for approval. B. Where only one manufacturer is mentioned without the phrase "or approved equal". No substitution is allowed. If the product specified is discontinued,. Contractor shall submit an alternate product of equal or better performance at no additionla cost for review and approval. C. The Architect and Engineer shall be the sole judge of quality and equivalence of equipment, materials and methods. 2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All materials and products used on this project shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories. B. Equipment and materials shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of telecommunications cabling products and shall be the manufacturer's latest standard design in satisfactory use for at least one year prior to bid opening. C. All material and equipment, as provided, should be the standard Commercial-Off-The-Shelf (COTS) products of a manufacturer engaged in the manufacturing of such products. 1. All shall be typical commercial designs that comply with the requirements specified. 2. All material and equipment shall be readily available through manufacturers and/or distributors. D. Installer is to comply in every way with the requirements of local laws, ordinances, and rules, , the National Board of Fire Underwriters, and the National Electrical Code. E. In the event of any conflicts between documents referenced herein and the contents of this specification, the Installer is to notify in writing to the Architect/Engineer of any such occurrences before the purchasing of any equipment, materials and/or installation by the Installer. The Architect/Engineer will notify the Installer of any actions required to resolve these conflicts. F. No change in the plans or in the specifications is to be made without written instruction to do so from the Owner or Architect/Engineer. G. Materials are to be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and best industry practices. H. The Installer is to promptly correct all discrepancies and/or defects for which the Installer is responsible. 1. The Installer is to maintain a set of working specifications and drawings on site at all times and to make this set available for inspection during site visits. I. All materials are to be new and of the highest quality. J. All products installed in the above ceiling space are to meet or exceed the Underwriters Laboratories (UL)fire rated cable insulation requirements and are to be Plenum rated. K. The Installer is to seal ALL penetrations, conduits, sleeves, cable trays, etc., where cabling has been installed through rated walls/floors with Wiremold Flamestopper intumescent fire-stop DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 27 02 00- 15 METHODS FOR 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS system (or approved equivalent)where they pass through rated walls. The Installer is responsible for returning any and all penetrations through rated walls or floors made for communications cable to their pre-penetration rating. L. All material used to dress cable bundles shall be applied loosely to allow the dressing material to slide around the bundle. Tension of dressing materials shall not deform the cable sheath. Dressing materials should be limited to the telecommunications rooms only. Cabling shall be placed unbundled in cable tray and/orj hooks in the above ceiling spaces. No bundling materials are to be used above ceiling. All j hooks installed shall include the corresponding clip provided by the hook manufacturer. Plastic cable ties will not be permitted. M. Any discrepancy in the contract documents is to be remedied by the Installer providing and installing the newer, greater quality or quantity of the item or items in question. N. Horizontal cabling is to have minimum ten (10)feet of service loop coiled and stored above the ladder rack in the telecommunication room. O. Horizontal cabling is to have no less than twelve (12) and no more than eighteen (18) inches of maintenance loop coiled and stored as close to the entrance to the workstation outlet as possible. P. Horizontal cabling is to have no less than six (6)and no more than twelve (12) inches of maintenance loop coiled and stored inside the back box at the workstation outlet. Q. Horizontal cable lengths for individual links shall not exceed 90 m (295 ft)from the point of termination at the connector to the point of termination at the patch panel. R. A pull cord (nylon; 1/8" minimum)shall be co-installed with all cable installed in any conduit. S. Provide nylon bushings for all conduit openings. T. All horizontal cables not in a cable tray or conduit shall be supported at a maximum of 48 to 60 inch intervals. Cable support system is to be independent of supports for other trades. At no point shall cable(s) make contact with acoustic ceiling supports, grids, panels, electrical conduits, water pipes or HVAC ductwork or supports. U. Any cable damaged or exceeding recommended installation parameters during installation shall be replaced by the installer prior to final acceptance at no cost to the Owner. V. Pair untwist at the termination shall not exceed 3.18mm. W. Bend radius of the cable in the termination area shall not be less than 4 times the outside diameter of the cable. X. The cable jacket shall be maintained to within 25mm (one inch)of the termination point. 2.03 ACCESS DOORS A. Wherever access is required in walls or ceilings to concealed junction boxes, pull boxes, equipment, etc., installed under this Division, furnish a hinged access door and frame with flush latch handle to another Division for installation. Doors shall be as follows: 1. Plaster Surfaces: Milcor Style K. 2. Ceramic Tile Surfaces: Milcor Style M. 3. Drywall Surfaces: Milcor Style DW. 4. Install panels only in locations approved by the Architect. 2.04 FIRE STOPPING A. Contractor shall restore the fire rating of penetrations to rated walls, ceiling, flooring after cable pulling. Fire stopping products shall be as follows: 1. Hilti 2. SpecSeal 3. 3M 4. Owner approved alternate DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 27 02 00- 16 METHODS FOR 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 2.05 IDENTIFICATION (LABELING) SYSTEM A. Contractor shall label al communications system components installed. Labeling products shall be as follows: 1. Brady (LAT-19-361-4) 2. Dymo 3. Hellerman-Tyton 4. Owner approved alternate 2.06 ESCUTCHEONS A. Provide heavy chrome or nickel plated plates, of approved pattern, on conduit passing through walls, floors and ceilings in finished areas. Where conduit passes through a sleeve, no point of the conduit shall touch the building construction. Caulk around such conduit with sufficient layers of two hour rated firesafing by Thermafiber 4.0 P.C.F. density, U.S.G. fire test 4/11/78 and seal off openings between conduit and sleeves with non-hardening mastic prior to application of escutcheon plate. Escutcheons shall be Gravler Sure-Lock, or approved equal. 2.07 SPACE LIMITATIONS A. Equipment shall be chosen which shall properly fit into the physical space provided and shown on the drawings, allowing ample room for access, servicing, removal and replacement of parts, etc. Adequate space shall be allowed for clearances in accordance with Code requirements. Physical dimensions and arrangement of equipment shall be subject to the approval of the Architect. 2.08 PAINTING A. All factory assembled equipment shall be delivered with a hard surface factory applied finish such as baked-on machinery enamel which will not require additional field painting. The finish shall consist of not less than 2 coats of medium gray color paint USA No. 61 Munsell Notation 8-3G, 6. 10/0.54 enamel. This Contractor shall protect this finish from damage due to construction operations until acceptance of the building. He shall be responsible for satisfactorily restoring any such finishes or replacing equipment that becomes stained or damaged. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Field Measurements 1. Verify dimensions in areas of installation by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the work. B. Established Dimensions 1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the work, coordinate with the General Contractor to establish dimensions. 2. When approved in writing, proceed with fabricating units without field measurements. 3. Coordinate supports, adjacent construction, and fixture locations to ensure actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. C. Pre-installation inspection 1. The Contractor shall visually inspect all cables, cable reels, and shipping cartons to detect possible cable damage incurred during shipping and transport. 2. Visibly damaged goods are not acceptable and shall be replaced by the contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.02 DEMOLITION AND REMODELING A. Where only portions of the existing Communications system are to be modified as part of the renovation and addition project, devices related to or part of this system outside of the renovation area shall be kept in operations. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 27 02 00- 17 METHODS FOR 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS B. The Drawings do not show all demolition work required. The Contractor shall make himself familiar with the required scope of work to accomplish the work required by these documents. All demolition work implied or required shall be included in the scope of this contract. C. Utility service outages required by the new installation will be permitted but only at a time approved by the Owner. The Contractor shall allow the Owner two (2)weeks in order to schedule required outages. The time allowed for outages will not be during normal working hours unless otherwise approved by the Owner. All costs of outages, including overtime charges, shall be included in the contract amount. D. The contractor shall perform a preconstruction walk thru of the site to observe and test the existing systems for operation. The owner assumes that the system is 100% operational and functioning prior to the commencement of construction. If any portion of the system observed or tested to be non-functional or inoperable at the commencement of the project will be noted by the contractor. A written report will be generated by the contractor noting their findings and submitted to the project team for review and handling. The owner will determine if the items found to be non-functional are to be repaired by contractor or repaired by the owner. If this repair of the equipment found to be non-functional is to be added to the contractor's scope of work the contract amount for the Work shall be adjusted accordingly. E. Work Sequence and Timing. The Owner will cooperate with the Contractor; however, the following provisions must be observed: 1. During the construction of this project, normal facility activities will continue in existing buildings until new buildings or renovated areas are completed. Plumbing, fire protection, lighting, electrical, communications, heating, air conditioning, and ventilation systems shall be maintained in service within the occupied spaces of the existing building. 2. A meeting will be held at the project site, prior to any construction, between the Owner's Representative, the General Contractor, the Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors, and the Engineer to discuss Contractor's employee parking space, access, storage of equipment or materials, and use of the Owner's facilities or utilities. The Owner's decisions regarding such matters shall be final. F. In the preparation of these documents every effort has been made to show the approximate locations of, and connections to the existing Local Area Network(LAN) and Wide Area Network (WAN) infrastructure and workstation outlets. However, this Contractor shall be responsible for verifying all of the above information. This Contractor shall visit the existing site to inspect the facilities and related areas. This Contractor shall inspect and verify all details and requirements of all the Contract Documents, prior to the submission of a proposal. All discrepancies between the Contract Documents and actual job-site conditions shall be resolved by the contractor, who shall produce drawings which shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for review. All labor and materials required to perform the work described shall be a part of this Contract. G. All equipment and/or systems noted on the Drawings "To Remain" shall be inspected and tested on site to certify its working condition. A written report on the condition of all equipment to remain, including a copy of the test results and recommended remedial actions and costs shall be made by this Contractor to the Architect/Engineer for review. H. All equipment and/or systems noted on the Drawings "To Be Removed" should be removed including, associated pipe and duct, pipe and duct hangers and/or line supports. Where duct or pipe is to be capped for future or end of line use, it shall be properly tagged with its function or service appropriately identified. Where existing equipment is to be removed or relocated and has an electric motor or connection, the Electrical Contractor shall disconnect motor or connection, remove wiring to a safe point and this Contractor shall remove or relocate motor or connection along with the equipment. I. During construction and remodeling, portions of the Project shall remain in service. Construction equipment, material, tools, extension cords, etc., shall be arranged so as to present minimum hazard or interruption to the occupants of the building. None of the construction work shall interfere with the proper operation of the existing facility; or be so conducted as to cause harm or danger to persons on the premises. All fire exits, stairs or corridors required for proper access, circulation or exit shall remain clear of equipment, DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 27 02 00- 18 METHODS FOR 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS materials or debris. The General Contractor shall maintain barricades, other separations in corridors and other spaces where work is conducted. J. Certain work during the demolition and construction phases may require overtime or night time shifts or temporary evacuation of the occupants. Coordinate and schedule all proposed down time with the Owner at least seventy-two (72) hours in advance in writing. K. Any salvageable equipment as determined by the Owner, shall be delivered to the Owner, and placed in storage at the location of his choice. All other debris shall be removed from the site immediately. L. Equipment, piping or other potential hazards to the occupants of the building shall not be left overnight outside of the designated working or construction area. M. Make every effort to minimize damage to the existing building and the Owner's property. Repair, patch or replace as required any damage which occurs as a result of work at the site. Care shall be taken to minimize interference with the Owner's activities during construction and to keep construction disrupted areas to a minimum. Coordinate with the Owner and other trades in scheduling and performance of the work. N. When applicable, Include in the contract price all rerouting of existing backbone cabling, , etc., and the reconnecting of the existing equipment as necessitated by field conditions to allow the installation of the new systems regardless of whether or not such rerouting, reconnecting or relocating is shown on the drawings. Furnish all temporary pipe, duct, controls, etc., as required to maintain heating, cooling, and ventilation services for the existing telecommunications rooms in areas scheduled to remain operational with a minimum of interruption. O. All existing cabling, equipment, controls and appurtenances not included in the remodel or alteration areas are to remain in place. P. Cabling and equipment s serving technology and communications, etc., which is to remain but which is served by pipe, duct, equipment and controls that are disturbed by the remodeling work, shall be reconnected in such a manner as to leave this equipment in proper operating condition. Q. It is the intention of this Section of the Specifications to outline minimum requirements to furnish the Owner with a turn-key and operating system in cooperation with other trades with a minimum of disruption or downtime. R. Refer to Architectural Demolition and/or Alteration plans for actual location of walls, ceilings, etc., being removed and/or remodeled. S. Field verify measurements, and cabling arrangements are as shown on Drawings. T. Verify that scheduled cabling and equipment serving only those abandoned devices to be demolished and removed in its entirety. U. Demolition Drawings are based on casual field observation and existing Record Documents. Report discrepancies to Architect and Engineer before disturbing existing installation. V. Beginning of demolition means that the contractor accepts existing conditions. W. Demolish and extend existing communications work under provisions of Division 02 and this Section. X. Remove, relocate, and extend existing systems to accommodate new construction. Y. Remove abandoned cabling to source of origination point. Remove racks and other equipment as scheduled on the drawings. Z. Remove exposed /abandoned cabling systems, including abandoned systems above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut systems flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces. AA. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work. BB. Maintain access to existing systems which remain active. Modify installation or provide access doors as appropriate. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 27 02 00- 19 METHODS FOR 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS CC. Extend existing systems using materials and methods compatible with existing systems, or as specified. DD. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment which remain or are to be reused. The Contractor shall modify, remove, and/or relocate all materials and items so indicated on the Drawings or required by the installation of new facilities.All removals and/or dismantling shall be conducted in a manner as to produce maximum salvage. Salvage materials shall remain the property of the Owner and shall be delivered to such destination as directed by the Owner. Materials and/or items scheduled for relocation and which are damaged during dismantling or reassembly operations shall be repaired and restored to good operating condition. The Contractor may, at his discretion and upon the approval of the Owner, substitute new materials and/or items of like design and quality in lieu of materials and/or items to be relocated. EE. All items which are to be relocated shall be carefully removed in reverse to original assembly or placement and protected until relocated. The contractor shall clean and repair and provide all new materials, fittings, and appurtenances required to complete the relocations and to restore to good operative order. All relocations shall be performed by workmen skilled in the work and in accordance with standard practice of the trades involved. FF. When items scheduled for relocation are found to be in damaged condition before work has been started on dismantling, the Contractor shall call the attention of the Owner to such items and receive further instructions before removal. Items damaged in repositioning operations are the Contractor's responsibility and shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor as approved by the Owner, at no additional cost to the Owner. GG. Service lines and wiring to items to be removed, salvaged, or relocated shall be removed to points indicated on the Drawings, specified, or acceptable to the Owner. Service lines and wiring not scheduled for reuse shall be removed to the points at which reuse is to be continued or service is to remain. Such services shall be sealed, capped, or otherwise tied-off or disconnected in a safe manner acceptable to the Owner. All disconnections or connections into the existing facilities shall be done in such a manner as to result in minimum interruption of services to adjacent occupied areas. Services to existing areas or facilities which must remain in operation during the construction period shall not be interrupted without prior specific approval of the Owner as hereinbefore specified. HH. The Contractor shall be responsible for loss or damage to the existing facilities caused by him and his workmen and shall be responsible for repairing such loss or damage. The Contractor shall send proper notices, make necessary arrangements, and perform other services required for the care, protection and in-service maintenance of all electrical services for the new and existing facilities. The Contractor shall erect temporary barricades, with necessary safety devices, as required to protect personnel from injury, removing all such temporary protection upon completion of the work. II. Where existing construction is removed to provide working and extension access to existing utilities, Contractor shall remove doors, piping, conduit, outlet boxes, wiring, light fixtures, air conditioning ductwork and equipment, etc., to provide this access and shall reinstall same upon completion of work in the areas affected. JJ. Where partitions, walls, floors, or ceilings of existing construction are being removed, all contractors shall remove and reinstall in locations approved by the Architect all devices required for the operation of the various systems installed in the existing construction. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Contractor shall install work in accordance with specifications, drawings, manufacturer's instructions and approved submittal data. B. Allowable cable bend radius and pull tension: 1. In general, communications cable cannot tolerate sharp bends or excessive pull tension during installation. 2. Refer to cable manufacturer's bend radius recommendations for the maximum allowable limits. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 27 02 00- 20 METHODS FOR 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 3. After installation, exposed cable and other surfaces must be cleaned free of lubricant residue. Use only lubricants specifically designed for cable installation. C. Pull Strings 1. Provide pull strings in all new conduits, including all conduits with cable installed (trailer strings)as part of this contract. 2. Data and video cables can be pulled in tandem with pull strings. 3. The pull strings must move freely to prevent cable jacket/cable damage during pulls. 3.04 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING A. Trenching and backfilling and other earthwork operations required to install the facilities specified herein shall conform to the applicable requirements of Division 2 (95% of maximum standard density). Where trenching or excavation is required in improved areas, the backfill shall be compacted to a condition equal to that of adjacent undisturbed earth and the surface of the area restored to the condition existing prior to trenching or excavating operations. Provide a minimum of 3"of sand underneath all conduits. The plans indicate information pertaining to surface and sub-surface obstructions; however, this information is not guaranteed. Should obstructions be encountered whether or not shown, the Contractor shall alter routing of new work, reroute existing lines, remove obstructions where permitted, or otherwise perform whatever work is necessary to satisfy the purpose of new work and leave existing surfaces and structures in a satisfactory and serviceable condition. All work shall comply with OSHA Standards. 3.05 WORKMANSHIP AND CONCEALMENT A. The work of this Section shall be performed by workman skilled in their trade. Installation shall be consistent in completeness whether concealed or exposed. Each item of Communications work shall be concealed in walls, chases, under floors and above ceilings except: 1. Where shown to be exposed. 2. Where exposure is necessary to the proper function. 3.06 SLEEVES, CUTTING AND PATCHING A. This section shall be responsible for placing sleeves for all conduit passing through walls, partitions, sound walls, beams, floors, roof, etc. Sleeves through below-grade walls shall use water-tight fitting manufactured by O-Z/Gedney. B. All cutting and patching will be done under another Division, but this Section will be responsible for timely performance of this work and layout of holes and setting sleeves. C. All un-used sleeves shall be sealed with 2 hour UL approved fire sealant manufactured by"3M" or approved equal. 3.07 LABELING A. All communications system field devices, faceplates, cables, termination devices, equipment enclosures (racks, cabinets, wall mounted boxes, etc) shall be clearly labelled with printed labels showing the device/cable ID, type, and the origination and destination location for cables. B. All labelling shall conform to Owner's labelling standard and industry standards. Submit labelling scheme as part of the shop drawing for review and approval before work to start. C. Cable labels: Self-adhesive vinyl or vinyl-cloth wraparound tape markers, machine printed with alphanumeric cable designations. D. Flat-surface labels: Self-adhesive vinyl or vinyl-cloth labels, machine printed with alphanumeric cable designations. E. Provide transparent plastic label holders, and 4-pair marked colored labels. F. In accordance with ANSI/TIA-606-B "Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications Infrastructure": 1. Install colored labels according to the type of field as per color code designations. 2. Use "designation strip color-code guidelines for voice, data, cross-connect, riser, and backbone fields". DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 27 02 00- 21 METHODS FOR 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS G. Pathway Labels and Labeling System 1. Labeling system shall consist of a hand-held portable printer 2. Conduits: General-purpose label designed for powdered coated surfaces with an ultra- aggressive adhesive. Label size shall be appropriate for the conduit size. Font size shall be legible from the finished floor. 3. Inner duct: Polyethylene general-purpose tagging material attached using tie wraps. 4. Junction boxes: General-purpose label designed for powdered coated surfaces with an ultra-aggressive adhesive, trade name. Font size shall be easily visible from the finished floor. 5. All labels shall be permanent, i.e. will not fade, peel, or deteriorate due to environment or time. 6. Identification a. All conduits,junction boxes, gutters, and pull boxes shall have machine-generated labels easily visible from the finished floor. b. Conduits shall be labeled with the word "communications" and the conduit's origination room number and destination room number. c. The Contractor shall label conduit at each wall and floor penetration and at each conduit termination, such as outlet boxes, pull boxes, and junction boxes, or as otherwise specified in other sections. d. Junction boxes, gutters and pull boxes shall be labeled with identification name or number as determined by contractor and submitted for approval. e. The Contractor shall label conduit sleeves at each wall and floor penetration. 3.08 FIRESTOPPING A. Provide approved fire-resistant materials to restore originally-designed fire-ratings to all wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations used in the distribution and installation for communications cabling system. B. Install and seal penetrations (conduit, sleeves, slots, chases) in fire-rated barriers created for communications infrastructure to prevent the passage of smoke, fire, toxic gas, or water through the penetrations. C. The firestopping material shall maintain/establish the fire-rated integrity of the wall/barrier that has been penetrated. D. All through penetrations in a fire rated surface require a sleeve, regardless of penetration diameter or penetrating cable count. E. Using a "ring and string" method of installing cabling for membrane penetrations in a wall cavity is acceptable, provided the solution was accepted by the Owner in writing. Code-compliant firestopping rules still apply. F. Coordinate firestopping procedures and materials with General Contractor. G. Sharing the pathway of other trades/utilities through compliant and non-compliant penetrations does not remove the requirement to maintain code-compliant firestopping. H. Provide and install removable, intumescent mechanical systems in floor chases for all openings greater than 0'-4". I. Provide and install removable, intumescent, firestop bricks for all openings greater than 0'-4" where there are penetrations through walls. J. Bricks shall be listed for insertion in fire-rated openings and require restraining materials or apparatus as needed per manufacturers' specifications. K. Provide manufacturer recommended material for rated protection for any given barrier. L. Laminate and permanently affix adjacent to chases the following information: 1. Manufacturer of firestop system. 2. Date of installation/repair. 3. Part and model numbers of system and all components. 4. Name and phone numbers of local distributor and manufacturer's corporate headquarters. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 27 02 00- 22 METHODS FOR 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS M. Solutions and shop drawings/submittals for firestop materials and systems shall be presented to the General Contractor for written approval of materials/systems prior to purchase and installation. N. Materials shall be installed per manufacturer instructions, be UL-listed for intended use, and meet NEC and locals codes for fire stopping measures. O. The material chosen shall be distinctively colored to be clearly distinguishable from other materials, adhere to itself, and maintain the characteristics for which it is designed to allow for the removal and/or addition of communication cables without the necessity of drilling holes in the material. P. Develop training manuals with instructions on methods of adding or removing cabling to/from firestopped sleeves and chases. Q. Within the normal environment, the installed systems shall not generate nor be susceptible to any harmful electromagnetic emission, radiation, or induction that degrades, or obstructs any equipment. R. Expansion Capability: Unless otherwise indicated, provide spare conductor pairs in cables, positions in patch panels, cross connects, and terminal strips, and space in cable pathways and backboard layouts to accommodate 20% future increase in structure cable system capacity. S. In the event of a breach of the representations and warranties contained herein, the Contractor, at their own expense, shall take all measures necessary to make the cabling system work and comply with the applicable manufacturer written technical recommendations and standards. 3.09 TESTING CABLING SYSTEM A. Upon completion of the installation of the communications infrastructure systems, including all pathways and grounding, the Contractor shall test the system. 1. Cables and termination modules shall be affixed, mounted or installed to the designed/specified permanent location prior to testing. 2. Any removal and reinstallation of any component in a circuit, including faceplates, shall require retesting of that circuit and any other disturbed or affected circuits. 3. Approved instruments, apparatus, services, and qualified personnel shall be utilized. 4. The Contractor must verify that the requirements of the specifications are fully met through testing with an approved tester(rated for testing parameters listed elsewhere), and documentation as specified below. 5. This includes confirmation of requirements by demonstration, testing and inspection. Demonstration shall be provided at final walk-through in soft copy and printed test data. B. Non-Compliant Cabling 1. Testing that shows some or all pairs of a cable do not comply with specifications, without written approval by the Owner, shall be replaced at Contractor's expense (including respective connectors). 2. With the Owner's written approval, the over-length cable(s) shall be excluded from requirements to pass standardized tests and shall be explicitly identified. a. Testing is still required for non-compliant cabling. b. The tests shall be for wire-mapping, opens, cable-pair shorts, and shorts-to-ground. c. The test results must be within acceptable tolerances and shall be submitted with the Owner's acceptance document. C. Failed Tests 1. If tests fail, Contractor shall correct as required to produce a legitimate passing test. 2. Manipulation of tester parameters on a failing test in order to achieve a passing test is unacceptable. 3. If the Contractor is found to have manipulated or falsified any failing test result to show a "PASS"for any reason (without written notice and prior approval of the Owner), the Contractor shall be required to employ a Third-Party Testing Agent selected by the Owner to retest the complete cable plant and shall be required to pay all costs associated with this retesting. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 27 02 00- 23 METHODS FOR 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS D. Owner reserves the right to be present during any or all testing. 3.10 WALL MOUNTED EQUIPMENT A. Install all wall mounted equipment in accordance with the National Electrical Code, industry standards and as shown on the drawings. B. Unless noted otherwise, all wall mounted equipment that need to be accessed for operation or maintenance shall be mounted at a working height not requiring a ladder when wall space is available. Installation of these devices at greater elevations shall be approved by the Engineer. Contractor shall provide a coordination sketch of each mechanical/electrical room noting locations and mounting heights of all electrical devices(note bottom and top elevations)shown to be installed. Sketches shall be provided to the Engineer for review and the general contractor for coordination with other trades working in these rooms. 3.11 CLEANING A. The Contractor will clean all surfaces of equipment and devices prior to final acceptance by Owner. 3.12 CORROSIVE AREAS A. In areas of a corrosive nature, which include but are not limited to the following: pool equipment rooms, cooling towers and areas subject to salt air, etc., provide NEMA 4X stainless steel or fiberglass reinforced enclosures for contactors, panel boards, controllers, starters, disconnects and materials used as supporting means (i.e. plastibond unistrut, pipe, fittings). The use of spray on coating may be acceptable in some applications. 3.13 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Tests and inspection requirements shall be coordinated with Division I. B. Date for final acceptance test shall be sufficiently in advance of completion date of contract to permit alterations or adjustments necessary to achieve proper functioning of equipment prior to contract completion date. C. Conduct re-tests as directed by Architect on portions of work or equipment altered or adjusted as determined to be necessary by final acceptance test. No resultant delay or consumption of time as a result of such necessary re-test beyond contract completion date shall relieve Contractor of his responsibility under contract. D. Put circuits and equipment into service under normal conditions, collectively and separately, as may be required to determine satisfactory operation. Demonstrate equipment to operate in accordance with requirements of these specifications. Perform tests in the presence of Architect. Furnish instruments and personnel required for tests. E. Final Inspection: 1. At the time designated by the Architect, the entire system shall be inspected by the Architect and Engineer. The contractor or his representative shall be present at this inspection. 2. All devices, equipment, equipment cabinets and enclosure shall be cleaned and in operating condition. 3. Certificates and documents required hereinbefore shall be in order and presented to the Architect prior to inspection. 4. Panel covers,junction box covers, etc., shall be removed for visual inspection of the wire, bus bars, etc. 5. After the inspection, any items which are noted as needing to be changed or corrected in order to comply with these specifications and the drawings shall be accomplished without delay. 3.14 ACCEPTANCE A. Once all work has been completed, test documentation has been submitted, and Owner is satisfied that all work is in accordance with contract documents, the Owner shall notify Contractor in writing of formal acceptance of the system. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 27 02 00- 24 METHODS FOR 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS B. Contractor must warrant in writing that 100% of the installation meets the requirements specified herein (Standards Compliance &Test Requirements). C. Acceptance shall be subject to completion of all work, successful post-installation testing which yields 100% PASS rating, and receipt of full documentation soft and hard copies as described herein. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 27 02 00- 25 METHODS FOR 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS SECTION 27 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This section includes grounding and bonding products, design requirements and installation for communications systems. 1.02 GENERAL A. The publications referenced in Section 27 02 00 form a part of this specification. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. B. Specific reference in specifications to codes, rules, regulations, standards, manufacturer's instructions, or requirements of regulatory agencies shall mean the latest printed edition of each in effect at the date of contract unless the document is shown dated. C. Conflicts 1. Refer to Section 27 02 00. D. Codes and Standards 1. Refer to Section 27 02 00. E. SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS 1. General a. Grounding shall be installed in accordance with the latest published edition of TIA-607. b. Install one (1) Primary Bonding Busbar(PBB) in the MDF and one (1) Secondary Bonding Busbar(SBB) in each IDF. c. Install a Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB) no smaller than #3/0 AWG stranded green insulated copper conductor in a star topology between the PBB and each SBB in each building. When IDFs are stacked, a single TBB can be daisy chained between SBBs back to the PBB. d. Install an Equipment Bonding Conductor(EBC), #6 AWG green insulated conductor from the PBB or SBB as applicable to each cable runway system, equipment rack, cabinet, lightning protector or multi pair cable with a metallic element. 1) Install no smaller than #4/0 AWG stranded green insulated copper conductor from the PBB to the main building electrical service ground in each building. 2) In a metal frame (structural steel) building, where the steel framework is readily accessible within or external to the room; each SBB and PBB shall be bonded to the vertical steel metal frame using a minimum #6 AWG conductor. The connection to building steel does not eliminate the requirement for the TBB or TBC to the service ground. e. Install a Backbone Bonding Conductor(BBC), a stranded copper green-insulated conductor sized as equal to the gauge of the TBB, to interconnect multiple TBBs on the top floor and every 3rd floor when required by the latest published edition of TIA-607. f. When exceeding 13 feet in length, the conductors shall be sized at 2kcmil per linear foot of conductor length no smaller than #2 AWG. g. All conductor wire, busbars and conduit shall be UL listed. h. The communications ground system shall be independent from all power grounding except for the connection to the building's electrical service main grounding electrode system. i. Power grounding and/or bonding shall not be allowed to interfere or provide any back feed or be a conductor to the separate communications ground system source or to any communications bonded materials or equipment. 2. Primary Bonding Busbar(PBB) and Telecommunication Bonding Conductor(TBC) a. The main ground source feed for the Primary Bonding Busbar (PBB) in the MC (MDF) shall be an independent feed from the building's electrical service main grounding DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus GROUNDING AND BONDING Christi 27 05 26- 1 FOR COMMUNICATIONS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SYSTEMS electrode system, known as the Telecommunication Bonding Conductor (TBC). b. The TBC shall be a stranded copper ground wire from the building ground system to the PBB in the MC (MDF)sized at #4/0 AWG unless otherwise sized by the Electrical Engineer of Record. c. The TBC connections shall be low emission exothermic welds at the connecting ends. 3. Telecommunication Bonding Backbone (TBB) and Secondary Bonding Busbar(SBB) a. The Telecommunication Bonding Backbone (TBB)originates at the PBB and shall be extended from the PBB within the MC (MDF)throughout the building along the same route as the telecommunications backbone pathways, to the SBBs in each TR (IDF). b. Size the TBB according to the following table: TBB Length in Linear meters (feet) TBB Size AWG Less than 4 (13) 6 4-6 (14-20) 4 6-8 (21-26) 3 8-10 (27-33) 2 10-13 (34-41) 1 13-16 (42-52) 1/0 16-20 (53-66) 2/0 Greater than 20 (66) 3/0 4. Backbone Bonding Conductor(BBC) a. Whenever two or more TBBs are used in a multistory building, the TBBs shall be bonded together with a BBC (by low-emission exothermic welds)at the top floor and at a minimum of every third floor in between with a copper conductor equal to the wire gauge of the TBB. b. The BBC must be at least the same size as the largest TBB it is connected to. 5. TEBC and RBC a. All cabinets and racks shall be connected by the Telecommunications Equipment Bonding Conductor (TEBC). The TEBC is a stranded copper#4 AWG conductor from the PBB/SBB extending along each row of racks within the room. Bond each rack with a Rack Bonding Conductor(RBC). The RBC is a stranded copper#6 AWG conductor connected to the vertical rack bonding terminal. All connections shall be irreversible crimp connections. Route conductor so as to minimize the quantity of sweeping bends. 6. Rack Bonding Busbar(RBB) a. A bonding busbar within a cabinet, frame, or equipment rack. F. SUBMITTALS 1. Refer to Section 27 02 00. 2. Shop Drawings a. Provide scaled drawings (floor plans not less than 1/16" = V-0") indicating the location and size, dimensions, type of connection (e.g., compression, exothermic weld) of each bonding busbar (e.g., PBB, SBB), conductor(e.g., TBC, TBB, TBB), connections (e.g., lugs), and splice points. b. Provide scaled plan and elevation drawings of telecommunications rooms (not less than 1/4" = V-0") indicating locations of busbars (e.g., PBB, SBB, UBC, RBB). c. Bonding and Grounding shall have its own separate drawing(s). 3. Record Drawings a. Provide scaled drawings (floor plans not less than 1/16" = V-0") indicating actual location and size/length of PBB, SBBs, TBC, BBC and TBB conductors and all splice points. b. Provide scaled plan and elevation drawings of telecommunications rooms (not less than 1/4" = V-0") indicating actual locations of PBB and SBBs. 1) Bonding and Grounding shall have its own separate drawing(s). DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus GROUNDING AND BONDING Christi 27 05 26-2 FOR COMMUNICATIONS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SYSTEMS C. Provide a letter from the contractor Project RCDD stating that the grounding system has been installed in accordance with the project documents and the referenced codes, standards, and guidelines. This letter is to also specifically acknowledge that the telecommunications grounding system has been fully tested according to these specifications. The required contents of this letter may be incorporated into the letter required from the Project RCDD in Section 27 02 00. G. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Refer to Section 27 02 00. H. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 1. Refer to Section 27 02 00. 2. The Contractor shall ship on manufacturers standard reel sizes of one continuous length. Where cut lengths are specified, mark reel quantity accordingly. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers that may be incorporated in the work, include: B. Cable Manufacturers 1. Houston Wire and Cable Company 2. Okonite Company 3. General Cable 4. Pirelli Cable Corporation 5. Triangle Wire and Cable 6. Owner Approved Alternate C. Electrical Service Entrance Bonding Conductor and Connector Manufacturers 1. Copperweld 2. Thomas & Betts 3. Blackburn 4. Owner Approved Alternate D. Exothermic Connector Manufacturers 1. Erico Products (Cadweld) 2. Continental Industries (thermOweld) 3. Harger 4. Owner Approved Alternate E. Crimp Connector Manufacturers 1. Chatsworth 2. Panduit 3. Owner Approved Alternate F. Telecommunication Grounding Busbars 1. Chatsworth 2. Panduit 3. Owner Approved Alternate G. Bonding Straps 1. Chatsworth 2. Panduit 3. Harger 4. Brundy 5. Owner Approved Alternate H. C-Type Compression Taps 1. Brundy 2. Harger 3. Panduit DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus GROUNDING AND BONDING Christi 27 05 26-3 FOR COMMUNICATIONS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SYSTEMS 4. Owner Approved Alternate I. Antioxidant Joint Compound 1. Chatsworth 2. Panduit 3. Owner Approved Alternate J. Labeling 1. Panduit 2. Chatsworth K. Firestopping 1. Refer to Section 27 02 00. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Communications Grounding Conductors: Copper American Wire Gauge (AWG)wire of the following sizes: 1. Telecommunications Bonding Conductor(TBC): #4/0 AWG (unless otherwise sized by the Electrical Engineer of Record) 2. Telecommunication Bonding Backbone (TBB): #3/0 AWG (unless otherwise sized by the Electrical Engineer of Record) 3. Backbone Bonding Conductor(BBC): equal AWG as the TBB (unless otherwise sized by the Electrical Engineer of Record) 4. Telecommunications Equipment Bonding Conductor(TEBC): #4 AWG 5. Rack Bonding Conductor(RBC): #6 AWG B. Grounding Connectors 1. Connectors shall be a copper alloy material and two-hole, double-crimp compression lug type at the connecting ends. 2. Chatsworth Compression Lug— Part#40162-901 or approved equal. C. Primary Bonding Busbar(PBB) 1. Use pre-drilled copper busbar with standard NEMA bolt hole sizing and spacing for the type of connectors. 2. Sized for the immediate requirements and allow for 25% growth. 3. The minimum dimensions shall be '/-inch thick X four(4) inches wide X twenty (20) inches long. 4. Contain two (2)tiers of pre-drilled holes for use with standard sizes of two-hole copper compression lugs. 5. ASTM B187-C11000 Copper bar suitable for use with two-hole compression-type copper lugs. 6. Chatsworth #40153-020 or approved equal. D. Secondary Bonding Busbar(SBB) 1. Use pre-drilled copper busbar with standard NEMA bolt hole sizing and spacing for the type of connectors. 2. Sized for the immediate requirements and allow for 25% growth. 3. The minimum dimensions shall be 1/4-inch thick X four(4) inches wide X ten (10) inches long. 4. Contain two (2)tiers of pre-drilled holes for use with standard sizes of two-hole copper compression lugs. 5. ASTM B187-C11000 Copper bar suitable for use with two-hole compression type copper lugs. 6. Chatsworth # 13622-010 or approved equal. E. Grounding Busbar for EquipmentRacks and Cabinets 1. Within each equipment cabinet and rack, provide a tinned copper busbar to serve as an extension of the PBB or SBB for the equipment in the cabinet. 2. Shall be manufactured from copper alloy. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus GROUNDING AND BONDING Christi 27 05 26-4 FOR COMMUNICATIONS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SYSTEMS 3. Horizontal Busbars shall be at least 0.75 inches (19 mm)wide, 19 inches (483 mm) long, and 0.1875 inches (5 mm)thick. 4. Have at least 14, factory—provided #12-24 threaded holes. 5. Have pre—punched EIA 310 D mountings, which match that of the vertical rail, for attachment to the mounting rail. 6. Vertical Busbars shall be at least 0.67 inches (17 mm)wide, 78.65 inches (2 m) long, and 0.05 inches (1.27 mm)thick and come in threaded rail and cage nut versions. 7. Include a hardware kit with rack installation hardware and with screws for bonding equipment to the busbar. 8. Vertical bonding busbar for use with threaded rails: Panduit# RGS134-1Y, or approved equal. 9. Vertical bonding busbar for use with cage nut rail fasteners: Panduit# RGS13413-1, or approved equal. 10. Horizontal bonding busbar: Panduit RGRB19U or approved equal. F. Labelling 1. Comply with TIA-606 and UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers. 2. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV—resistant seal for label. 3. Panduit#S10OX075YAJ/Sl00X075VAC/Sl00X075VAT— 18-14 AWG conductor labels, or approved equal. 4. Panduit#S100X125YAJ/S100X125VAC/Sl00X125VAT— 12-10 AWG conductor labels., or approved equal. 5. Panduit#S100X225YAJ/S1 0OX225VAC/Sl 0OX225VAT—8-4 AWG conductor labels., or approved equal. 6. Panduit#S100X400YAJ/310OX400VAC/S100X400VAT—2-1 AWG conductor labels., or approved equal. 7. Panduit#S100X650YAJ/S10OX650VAC/S100X650VAT— 1/0-250 MCM conductor labels, or approved equal. 8. Panduit# C400X200YJJ/C200X100YPC/C400X200YPT—PBB and SBB labels, or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Refer to Section 27 02 00. B. Examine the AC grounding electrode system and equipment grounding for compliance with requirements for maximum ground—resistance level and other conditions affecting performance of grounding and bonding of the electrical system. C. Inspect the test results of the ac grounding system measured at the point of BCT connection. D. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. E. Proceed with connection of the BCT only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Refer to Section 27 02 00. B. Copper and copper alloy connections should be cleaned prior to connection. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 27 02 00. B. The Contractor shall install the work in accordance with the specifications, drawings, manufacturer's instructions and approved submittal data. C. All work shall be supervised and reviewed by the Contractor's on-site RCDD. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus GROUNDING AND BONDING Christi 27 05 26-5 FOR COMMUNICATIONS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SYSTEMS D. Installation plans and Requests For Information (RFIs)shall be reviewed by the Contractor's RCDD. E. Maintain a minimum of 2" separation between bonding conductors and all other types of cables — power or communications. F. This Specification document describes a generic enterprise communications bonding and grounding system for the construction of a complete and functioning grounding system without prior knowledge of the particular facilities where it will be used. It is the responsibility of the installing contractor to adapt these general guidelines and principles to the requirements of the actual environments where the systems are to be implemented. G. Contractors shall provide equipment ground connections (bonds)from the premises entrance facility and outside—plant earthing system to each telecommunication room telecommunication ground busbar, through the racking systems to bond the network equipment. H. Entire grounding link from equipment to earth should be visually verifiable except where hidden by walls, conduit or pathways. I. Installing contractor shall label all elements of the communications bonding network according to guidelines defined in TIA-607 and TIA-606 J. It is the responsibility of the installer to be knowledgeable of all previously cited Standards and Codes and to bring to the attention of Owner and A&E team any conflicts or discrepancies to achieve a fully functioning, standards—compliant earthing system. K. Contractors working around or adding to existing legacy systems shall bring to the attention of Owner and A&E team previously installed network elements that may not comply with modern grounding requirements for possible remediation. L. General 1. Bonding and grounding procedures and components shall comply with the latest published edition of TIA-607. "Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing)and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications". 2. Bonding should be accomplished such that the bonding system is integrated and compliant with NEC specifications. 3. Bonding conductors shall be routed with minimum bends or changes in direction and should be made directly to the points being bonded. 4. Bonding connections should be made by using compression copper lugs. However, for parts of the ground electrode system that are subject to corrosion, must carry high currents reliably, or for locations that require minimum maintenance, connections are made with low emission exothermic welding (see NEC Article 250). 5. Make connections to dry surfaces only. 6. Remove paint, rust, oxides, scales, grease and dirt from surfaces before making connection. 7. Burnish clean a one (1) inch x one (10 inch area, drill, tap, apply an adequate amount of antioxidant joint compound mixed for the metal surface types affected, and bolt conductor and connector to burnished and compounded area. Ensure proper conductivity. 8. Route bonding conductor(s)the shortest distance between bonding contact points. 9. The ground-wire connecting ends shall have a minimum amount of insulation removed at the ground lug. 10. Do not connect ground wire in power cable assemblies to the telecommunications ground system. 11. All grounding and bonding conductors shall be copper and may be insulated. If bare- bonding conductors are used, isolate bonding conductors and prevent contact. 12. Antioxidant material shall be installed to separate dissimilar metals and prevent corrosion. 13. If multiple systems are involved (lightning protection systems, communications, radio and TV, CATV, etc.), those systems shall be bonded together to minimize potential differences between the systems, per NEC 250.94. M. Telecommunication Bonding Conductors DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus GROUNDING AND BONDING Christi 27 05 26-6 FOR COMMUNICATIONS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SYSTEMS 1. Each telecommunications grounding and bonding conductor shall be labeled at each end detailing the function and room number of its opposite end. Labels shall be located on conductors as close as practicable to their point of termination in a readable position. Labels shall be nonmetallic and include the following text, "TELECOMMUNICATIONS GROUND- DO NOT REMOVE. IF THIS CONNECTOR OR CABLE IS LOOSE OR MUST BE REMOVED, PLEASE CALL THE BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS MANAGER". 2. Furnish and install all required bonding material, hardware, and utilize tools manufactured for this purpose. 3. The connections of the TBC, TBB, BBC, TEBC, and RBC shall be made using low emission exothermic welding or hydraulically crimped with a double crimp connector. Two- hole grounding lugs are preferred for connection to the grounding bus bars. a. All low emission exothermic welding shall be by Division 26. b. Coordinate with the building services personnel in occupied spaces to prevent the smoke from the exothermic weld process from potentially setting off smoke/fire alarms. 4. Grounding and bonding conductors should not be placed in ferrous metallic conduit. If it is necessary to place grounding and bonding conductors in a ferrous metallic conduit that exceeds 1 m (3ft) in length, the conductors shall be bonded to each end of the conduit using a grounding bushing or a #6 AWG conductor, minimum. 5. The bonding conductors should be installed without splices. a. Where splices are necessary, the number of splices should be minimized, be accessible, and be located within the telecommunications spaces. b. Joined segments of a bonding conductor shall be connected using exothermic welding, irreversible compression-type connectors, or equivalent. All joints shall be adequately supported and protected from damage. c. Bonding conductors at the primary bonding busbar(PBB) and the secondary bus bar (SBB) shall maintain a minimum bend radius of eight(8) inches. For the other bonding conductors, the inside bend radius should be as large as practical and should maintain a minimum of 10X of the bonding conductor diameter. In all cases, a minimum angle of 90 degrees is required. d. Backbone bonding conductors (BBC) must be at least the same size as the largest telecommunications bonding backbone (TBB) it is connected to. N. Equipment Cabinets and Racks 1. The busbar shall be installed at the base and back of each cabinet/rack for floor fed cabinets/racks. 2. The busbar shall be installed at the top and back of each cabinet/rack for top fed cabinets/racks. 3. Each cabinet and rack shall be provided with a minimum #6 AWG ground wire. 4. Do not loop from cabinet/rack to cabinet/rack. 5. Each cabinet or rack bay against the wall shall be bottom/side ground fed from the wall. a. Wall ground feeds/raceways to racks shall not be exposed on the walls. b. Exception: Some cabinet or rack bays will require the ground to be fed from the ceiling raceway. 6. All ground raceways within each cabinet/rack or cabinet base and adjacent-ganged cabinet base shall be an insulated metallic flex type raceway and shall not interfere with equipment mounting frames or equipment mounting brackets. O. Cable Runway, Cable Raceway and Support System Grounding 1. The Contractor shall provide communications cable tray and cable runway systems with a communications dedicated ground from the SBB. 2. All cable tray needs to be electrically continuous per NEC 250.96. a. Metal raceways, wire-mesh cable trays, cable armor, cable sheath, enclosures, frames, fittings, and other metal non-current-carrying parts that are to serve as an alternate grounding path, with or without the use of supplementary equipment grounding conductors, shall be effectively bonded where necessary to ensure DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus GROUNDING AND BONDING Christi 27 05 26-7 FOR COMMUNICATIONS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SYSTEMS electrical continuity and the capacity to conduct safely any fault current plausibly to be imposed on them. b. Any nonconductive paint, enamel, or similar coating shall be removed at the threads, contact points, and contact surfaces. c. Grounding or bonding conductors shall be connected by fittings designed for that purpose to ensure adequate bonding. 3. The Contractor shall provide and install a#6 AWG ground wire to bond one end of each cable tray/runway system to the SBB. 4. For electrically non-continuous conduits that contain only grounding conductor, the Contractor shall bond the conduit and conductor together at both ends to ground to the nearest SBB with grounding bushings or ground clamps. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing 1. Upon completion of the electrical system, including all grounding, the Electrical Contractor shall test the system for stray currents, ground shorts, etc. Provide test results in printed form 2. Approved instruments, apparatus, services, and qualified personnel shall be utilized. 3. If stray currents, shorts, etc., are detected, eliminate or correct as required. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus GROUNDING AND BONDING Christi 27 05 26-8 FOR COMMUNICATIONS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SYSTEMS Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 27 05 28 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Hangers and Supports, including open-top supports (cable hooks)for communications systems. 2. Conduits and Pull Boxes for communications systems. 3. Cable Tray and Cable Runway with associated accessories and fittings for communications systems. B. Related Sections 1. Section 27 02 00- Basic Materials and Methods for Communications Systems 2. Section 270526 3. Section 27 11 00- Communications Room Fittings 4. Section 27 15 00- Communications Horizontal Cabling 5. Section 27 13 00- Communications Backbone Cabling 6. Section 27 05 43- Underground Ducts and Raceways for Communications Systems 1.02 REFERENCES A. The publications referenced in Section 27 02 00 form a part of this specification. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. B. Specific reference in specifications to codes, rules, regulations, standards, manufacturer's instructions, or requirements of regulatory agencies shall mean the latest printed edition of each in effect at the date of contract unless the document is shown dated. C. Conflicts 1. Refer to Section 27 02 00. D. Codes and Standards 1. Refer to Section 27 02 00. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 27 02 00. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to Section 27 02 00. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 27 02 00. B. Conduit Storage 1. Package conduits in bundles maximum 10'-0" long, with conduit and coupling thread protectors for indoor/outdoor storage. 2. Package fittings in manufacturer's standard quantities and packaging suitable for indoor storage. 3. Protect coating on plastic-coated rigid conduit, fittings, and bodies from damage during shipment and storage. 4. Store conduit above ground on horizontal racks to prevent corrosion and entrance of debris. 5. Equipment and components shall be protected from the weather, humidity, temperature variations, dirt, dust, or other contaminants. Protect plastic conduit and inner duct from sunlight. Equipment damaged prior to system acceptance shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus PATHWAYS FOR Christi 27 05 28- 1 COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers that may be incorporated in the work, include: B. Cable Hooks 1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Erico 3. Caddy 4. Owner approved alternate C. Polyethylene Cable Support System 1. Erico 2. Owner approved alternate D. Innerduct 1. Carlon Riser Guard Flexible Raceway (corrugated innerduct) 2. Owner approved alternate E. Measured pull tape (pull tape printed with sequential footage markings) 1. Fibertek 2. Condux International 3. Owner approved alternate F. Labeling 1. Refer to Section 27 02 00. G. Firestopping 1. Refer to Section 27 02 00. 2.02 CABLE HOOKS A. Cable hooks shall be factory assembled for direct attachment to walls, hanger rods, beam flanges, purlins, strut, floor posts, etc. to meet job conditions. B. Features 1. Cable hooks shall have a flat bottom and provide a minimum of 0'-1.625" cable-bearing surface. 2. Cable hooks shall have 90' radius edges to prevent damage while installing cables. 3. Cable hooks shall be designed so that the mounting hardware is recessed to prevent cable damage. 4. Cable hooks for non-corrosive areas shall be pre-galvanized steel. Where additional strength is required, cable hooks shall be spring steel with a zinc-plated finish. 5. Cable hooks for corrosive areas shall be stainless steel. 6. Cable hooks shall have a stainless steel cable latch retainer to provide containment of cables within the hook. 7. The retainer shall be removable and reusable. C. Factory assembled multi-tiered cable hooks shall be used where required to provide separate cabling compartments, or where additional capacity is needed. D. Load cable hooks in accordance with manufacturer requirements and recommendations. E. Provide capacity for 25% growth, add additional hooks as needed. 2.03 PULL BOXES, JUNCTION BOXES, AND GUTTERS A. All junction boxes, gutters and pull boxes shall be UL listed and comply with NEC requirements. B. All junction boxes, gutters and pull boxes shall meet the following minimum material requirements: 1. 16-gauge steel or heavier 2. Seams shall be continuously welded and grounded smooth 3. External screws and clamps DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus PATHWAYS FOR Christi 27 05 28-2 COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 4. External mounting feet (where applicable) 5. Oil-resistant gasket and adhesive 6. ANSI 61 gray polyester powder coating inside and out over phosphatized surface C. All junction boxes, gutters and pull boxes shall be provided with bushings for conduits and/or cabling. D. All junction boxes, gutters and pull boxes shall be securely installed. 2.04 CONDUITS A. All conduits shall be UL listed and comply with NEC requirements. B. Conduit Fittings 1. All fittings shall be compression or threaded. 2. Fittings shall provide a secure connection for pulling communications cables. 3. Setscrew fittings are not permitted. 4. Conduit"condulets" are not permitted. C. Non-metallic conduits are not permitted in above ground installations. Conversion fittings are required for non-metallic(below ground)to metallic (above ground)transitions. D. Innerduct: 1. All fiber shall be installed in innerduct unless fiber cabling is armored. 2. Shall be constructed of non-metallic material. E. Only manufacturer's fittings, transition adapters, terminators and fixed bends shall be used. F. Measured Pull Tape 1. Pre-lubricated, woven polyester, low friction, and high abrasion resistant yarn with footage markers printed on the tape. 2. Minimum average tensile strength shall be 1130 lbs. for 0'-1.5" and smaller conduits and innerduct. 3. Minimum average tensile strength shall be 1800 lbs. for conduits larger than 0'-1.5". G. Fill and Bend Radius 1. Conduit fill shall comply with NEC requirements. 2. The minimum bend radius is 6 X the conduit inside diameter (ID)for 0'-2" conduit or less. 3. The minimum bend radius is 10 X the conduit ID for a conduit greater than 0'-2". 4. There shall be no more than two 90' bends (180' total) between conduit pull boxes. 5. Changes in direction shall be accomplished with sweeping bends observing minimum bend radius requirements above. 6. Do not use pull boxes for direction changes unless specifically designated otherwise in the drawings. 7. Unless otherwise noted in the drawings, conduits entering pull boxes shall be aligned with exiting conduits. H. Routing 1. Conduits shall be routed in the most direct route possible, with the fewest number of bends possible. 2. There shall be no continuous conduit sections longer than 100'-0"for premises conduits. For runs that total more than 100'-0", insert junction or pull boxes so that no continuous run between pull boxes is greater than 100'-0". I. Penetrations 1. All conduit penetrations shall comply with all applicable fire codes. 2. All conduit penetrations in fire-rated walls or floors shall be sealed and fire-proofed to meet or exceed the designed rating of the penetration area. 2.05 CABLE TRAY A. Cable tray systems are defined to include, but are not limited to, straight sections of cable trays, bends, tees, elbows, reducers, crosses, wyes, vertical bends, up/down tees, cable support fittings, drop-outs, supports and accessories. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus PATHWAYS FOR Christi 27 05 28-3 COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop B. Install all tray types utilizing manufacturer recommended installation instructions and applicable standards. C. Load cable tray and cable runway in accordance with manufacturer requirements and applicable standards. D. Cable Tray Materials 1. Aluminum 2. Pre-galvanized Steel 3. Hot-dip Galvanized Steel 4. Stainless Steel 5. Yellow Zinc Dichromate 6. Pre-Galvanized Zinc 7. Electro-Galvanized Zinc E. Cable Tray Systems 1. Wire basket (mesh) of types and sizes indicated on the drawings; with connector assemblies, clamp assemblies, connector plates, splice plates, cable drop outs, bonding accessories, and splice bars. Construct units with rounded edges and smooth surfaces. 2. Continuous mesh polyethylene cable-support system: with connector assemblies and appropriate support components. All parts shall be UL-listed. Plastic (non-metallic) parts shall have a zero detectable halogen content as substantiated by an independent test laboratory. 3. Ladder type trays shall consist of two longitudinal members (side rails)with transverse members (rungs) welded to the side rails. Rungs shall be spaced 0'-9" on center. Spacing in radius fittings shall be 0'-9" as measured at the center of the trays width. Rungs shall have a minimum cable-bearing surface of 0'-.875"with radius edges. No portion of the rungs shall protrude below the bottom plane of the side rails. 4. Ventilated trough type trays shall consist of two longitudinal members (side rails)with a corrugated bottom welded to the side rails. 5. Solid bottom trough type trays shall consist of two longitudinal members welded to the side rails. F. Cable trays shall have sufficient depth and width so as not to exceed a maximum 50%fill ratio, including 25% capacity for anticipated growth. G. All straight sections shall be supplied in minimum 8'-0" lengths, except where shorter lengths are permitted to facilitate tray assembly lengths. 2.06 HANGERS AND SUPPORT A. Steel support brackets shall be galvanized steel and capable of supporting a minimum of 200 Ibs with a safety factor of 3. B. Steel support brackets shall have a removable galvanized steel retaining strap. C. Steel support brackets shall accept 0'-3/8" (10mm)threaded rod for attachment to building structure or sub structure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Refer to Section 27 02 00. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Refer to Section 27 02 00. B. Verify system is properly sized for cables before installation. C. Verify that the manufacturer recommended loads are not exceeded. D. Verify general routing and coordinate locations with other trades before installation. Layout cable runs in advance to determine quantities of cable to be installed along pathways, and to ensure non-interference from other trade installations. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus PATHWAYS FOR Christi 27 05 28-4 COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 27 02 00. B. Cable Hooks 1. Provide cable hook 0-hook) cable support system for horizontal and/or riser cabling in accessible ceiling space. Assemblies shall be complete with mounting hardware. 2. Provide threaded rod for supporting hangers when hanging from floor deck and deck members. 3. Follow manufacturers fill capacities. 4. Locate cable hooks on 4' to 5' centers to adequately support and distribute the cable's weight. 5. Suspended cables shall be installed with at least 0'-3" of clear vertical space above the ceiling tiles and support channels. 6. For larger quantities of cables, provide special supports that are specifically designed to support the required cable weight and volume. 7. Do not support pathways or cables with the ceiling suspension system or use electrical, plumbing, or other pipes for support. 8. Cable supports shall be permanently anchored to building structure or substrates. Provide attachment hardware and anchors designed for the structure to which attached, and that are suitably sized to carry the weight of the cables to be supported. 9. Secure and support exposed horizontal cable at intervals not exceeding 5-0" and not less than V-4" (16")from cabinets, pack pole, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals. 10. Cable sag between vertical supports for horizontal pathway shall not exceed 0'-6". Provide at least 0'-3" cable sag between supports. 11. Painted J-hooks shall meet or exceed NEC requirements for the environment in which the product is installed. C. Conduit and Pull Boxes 1. The Contractor shall route the conduit in approximate locations unless drawing is dimensioned for precise placement. 2. Conduit cuts shall be square. Ream ends of burrs, and remove metal shavings and cutting lubricants before conduit is connected to the conduit system. 3. For conduit embedded in concrete, coat threaded connections in conduits with colloidal rust and corrosion inhibitor and sealant. Conduit must be clean and dry and must pass standard sizing test after concrete is poured. 4. Cap unused conduits with watertight caps 5. Make conduit connections with appropriate fittings and tighten securely. 6. Use appropriate tools to install PVC coated conduit; avoid damage to exterior coating. 7. Install liquid-tight flexible metal conduit where exposed to weather, water, or other liquids. S. Use IMC, PVC conduit, or rigid galvanized steel conduit in underground installations. 9. The Contractor shall provide fabric innerduct in all underground conduits, as indicated on the drawings. a. The Contractor shall use pre-lubricated, woven polyester, low friction, and high abrasion resistant fabric. b. The Contractor shall be trained for proper installation technique by the innerduct manufacturer. The Contractor shall coordinate with the owner to demonstrate that pull ropes in each inner duct cell move freely from end to end. D. Cable Tray and Cable Runway 1. Cut wire basket tray members square with approved cable tray cutting tool as to not leave sharp edges at cut point. Remove burrs and smooth the ends before the cut is connected to wire-mesh tray system. 2. Ensure that standard splices are designed to have less than 1 milliohm (0.0001 0)of resistance between connections and provide bonding between sections. Painted wire mesh tray requires the outer mask of the non-conductive surface be removed at each end of the tray prior to installing the splice to provide continuity between painted tray sections. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus PATHWAYS FOR Christi 27 05 28-5 COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 3. Threaded rod (minimum 0'-'/z" diameter)or equivalent and slotted channel shall be used for hanging cable tray between floor deck and deck members E. Fiber Support: 1. Support vertical fiber optic cable with basket weave wire/cable grips. Support fiber riser with single weave support grip with a single offset eye. 2. Mount/attach pulling eye to a wall or ceiling deck secured hook to support/provide strain relief to riser cable. Provide a minimum 3'-0" loop of fiber prior to entering fire stopped floor sleeve. 3. Where required coil up slack fiber cable into pull box and secure with single weave support grip. F. Clearances 1. A minimum of 1'-0" access headroom shall be provided above a cable tray. Ensure that other building components do not restrict access to the cable trays from the sides. 2. Power outlets shall not be installed in or mounted to cable tray or cable runway. 3. Provide 3'-0" of unencumbered space for every 10'-0" segment of tray. 4. Cable tray clearances a. Motors or transformers: 4'-0" b. Power cables and conduit: 1'-0" c. Fluorescent lighting: 0'-5" d. Halide lights: 1'-0" e. Above the ceiling tiles: 0'-3" f. Access above and on one side of the cable tray: 1'-0" 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test system to ensure electrical continuity of bonding and grounding connections. B. Ensure compliance with specified maximum ground resistance. C. Refer to NFPA 70B Chapter 18 for testing and test methods. 3.05 CLEANING A. Remove all unnecessary tools and equipment, unused materials, packing materials, and debris from each area where Work has been completed unless designated for storage. B. Wipe clean all cable trays and apply appropriate manufacturer's paint to areas that have been scratched. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus PATHWAYS FOR Christi 27 05 28-6 COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SECTION 27 05 43 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This section includes underground communications duct banks, hand-holes and maintenance holes B. Related Sections 1. Section 26 02 00- Electrical (including related sub-sections) 2. Section 27 02 00- Basic Materials and Methods for Communications Systems 3. Section 27 05 26- Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems 4. Section 27 05 28- Pathways for Communications Systems 5. Section 27 11 00- Communications Room Fittings 6. Section 27 13 00- Communications Backbone Cabling 1.02 REFERENCES A. Refer to section 27 02 00. B. Conflicts 1. Refer to section 27 02 00. C. Codes and Standards (Most recent editions or as required in contract) 1. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) a. RN1 Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Electrical metallic Tubing b. TC2 Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit(EPC-40 and EPC-80) c. TC3 PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC conduit and tubing 2. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) a. UL 651 -Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC conduit b. UL 651A-Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and HDPE Conduit 3. ANSI/TIA-569-A Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces 4. ANSI/TIA-758-A Customer-owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Standard. 5. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM) 6. Standard for Riser Application for Optical Fiber Raceway 7. BICSI Customer Owned Outside Plant(CO-OSP) Design Manual 8. Local, county, state and federal regulations and codes in effect as of date of installation 9. Equipment of foreign manufacture must meet U.S. codes and standards. a. It shall be indicated in the proposal the components that may be of foreign manufacture, if any, and the country of origin. 10. IEEE C2, National Electrical Safety Code (NESC). D. Related Documents 1. Refer to section 27 02 00. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to section 27 02 00. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to section 27 02 00, and IEEE C2. B. Follow Annex B of National Electrical Code (NEC) C. Items of the same classification shall be identical. This requirement includes equipment, assemblies, parts, and components. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver ducts to Project site with ends capped. 1. Store nonmetallic ducts with supports to prevent bending, warping, and deforming DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND Christi 27 05 43- 1 RACEWAYS FOR 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS Re-Bid Construction Documents B. The contractor shall endeavor to make the site ready for installation of manholes when delivered so that they can be placed off of the truck into final position. 1. When this is not possible, store precast concrete and other factory-fabricate underground utility structures as Project site as recommended by manufacturer to prevent physical damage.Arrange so identification markings are visible. C. Lift and support precast concrete units only at designated lifting or supporting points. D. Clearly mark containers "For Communications Duct Banks Only". E. Refer also to section 27 02 00. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Refer to IEEE C2. B. Refer also to section 27 02 00. 1.07 MAINTENANCE A. Refer to IEEE C2. B. Refer also to section 27 02 00. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Ducts 1. Use owner approved solution B. Hand Holes 1. Christy Concrete Products 2. Cretex Concrete Products West, Inc.; Riverton Division 3. Oldcastle Precast Group 4. Oldcastle Precast Inc/; Utility Vault Division 5. Utility Concrete Products, LLC 6. Owner Approved equivalent C. Maintenance (Man) Holes 1. Christy Concrete Products 2. Cretex Concrete Products West, Inc.; Riverton Division 3. Oldcastle Precast Group 4. Oldcastle Precast Inc/; Utility Vault Division 5. Utility Concrete Products, LLC 6. Owner Approved equivalent 2.02 MATERIALS A. Continuous Tape for Underground Conduit 1. The Contractor shall use orange warning ribbon, PVC tape (detectable, i.e., containing metallic tracings), three inches wide, permanently imprinted with "CAUTION--BURIED COMMUNICATIONS LINE BELOW" in black letters, minimum 0'-1" high. B. Labeling 1. Refer to section 27 02 00. C. Firestopping 1. Refer to section 27 02 00. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Where necessary, Contractor shall provide all excavation, boring, trenching, backfill and restoration of grounds for all OSP pathways. 1. In addition, Contractor shall include all labor, materials, and equipment. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND Christi 27 05 43-2 RACEWAYS FOR 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS B. The owner of the property has the option to obtain a testing laboratory to ensure proper soil compaction. C. All work shall comply with all city, county and State Codes, NEC, EIA/TIA, OSHA, and BICSI TDMM requirements, codes and standards. D. The above referenced codes and standards are to be considered as a minimum requirement. 1. If the plans or specifications call for material and/or methods of construction higher than the standard, the plans or specification shall govern. E. All holes, trenches and/or any other excavation shall be covered, fenced, and/or taped off to make the area safe at all times. 1. Conform to general Contractor requirements. F. The Contractor will visit the job site prior to submitting a proposal to determine existing conditions. 1. Contractor shall evaluate the site for materials, and any other information that may affect the work to be performed. G. The Contractor shall locate and protect all existing conduits. 1. Should damage occur notify the appropriate utility. 2. Damage costs are the responsibility of the Contractor. H. The Contractor shall CALL BEFORE YOU DIG, One Call Directory Telephone Numbers (Texas: 1-800-245-4545, 1-800-344-8377)to locate any existing conduits (Power, Gas, Telephone, and other utilities) prior to start of work. I. Any proposed re-routing of all trenches/pole lines shall be reviewed and approved by the owner/consultant. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Refer to Section 27 02 00. B. The Contractor shall verify materials are on-site in proper condition and of sufficient quantity. C. The Contractor shall verify proper excavation depth (minimum 4'-0" below finished grade), width, route and support of work. 1. Verify proper location of hand-holes and maintenance holes (minimum every 350'-0"). 2. Communications facilities must be placed in separate hand-holes and maintenance holes from electrical facilities. D. Trenches greater than or equal to 5-0" deep shall: 1. Be shored to prevent cave-in. 2. Have 2'-0" clearance from the dirt pile. E. Directional boring is a suitable option when trenching is impractical or impossible. 1. Locating existing underground utilities is crucial when directional boring is planned because of the potential for the drilling unit to encounter high voltages. 2. Although directional boring machines are manufactured with electrical strike sensing capabilities, which can warn the operator of any contact with a high voltage source, accidents may still occur. 3. Operators of directional boring machines require special protection due to the potential for exposure to high voltage. a. Therefore, operators must always have a ground mat grid underfoot as insulation protection. b. In addition, operators must wear insulating boots and gloves, along with hard hats and safety glasses. F. Minimum separation between electrical and communications underground cable (measured from conduit sidewall: 1. Concrete: 0'-3" 2. Masonry: 0'-4" 3. Well-tamped earth: 1'-0" DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND Christi 27 05 43-3 RACEWAYS FOR 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS G. Before encasement, the Contractor shall: 1. Prove and verify all ducts are free of debris and properly installed in support and spacer system. 2. Verify the system is properly fitted together and hold-down hardware is properly installed. 3. Verify ducts are capped at both ends 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Refer to section 27 02 00. B. Hand Holes 1. Unless otherwise shown, Hand-holes shall be at least 4'-0" X 4'-0" and shall be constructed of 0'-2"thick cement covered with 0'-3/8" steel plate. 2. The hand-hole or maintenance hole shall rest on a 0'-4" blanket of sand, and 0'-4" around the sidewalls shall be filled with sand. 3. Each hand-hole or maintenance hole which contains a pedestal shall have four bollards installed V-6" (18")diagonally from each corner, with a cross member welded at 2'-6" (30") connecting the four corners. a. These barriers will be constructed of 0'-4" ridged conduit filled with concrete, driven 4'-0" in the ground and extending 3'-0" above the protective cover. 4. All Hand-holes shall have a hasp and locking plate installed so they can be locked with padlock. C. Maintenance (Man) Holes 1. Precast concrete maintenance hole components shall be in accordance with ASTM C478/C478M. 2. Maintenance hole components shall be designed for H-20 highway wheel loading and specific site conditions. 3. Maintenance hole bases may be either precast or cast-in-place, as appropriate for the application, with a formed recess shaped to match the first precast shaft section. a. The maintenance hole base shall extend 0'-10" below the bottom of the lowest pipe and 0'-6" above the top of the largest pipe. 4. Maintenance hole shafts shall be fabricated only from precast shaft sections, eccentric cone sections and grade rings. 5. Precast maintenance holes shall utilize either an integrally cast embedded pipe connector, or a boot-type connector installed in a circular block out opening in accordance with ASTM C923/C923M. a. Connections to existing maintenance holes shall utilize a boot-type connector per ASTM C923/C923M installed in a cored opening. b. Cast-in-place bases shall incorporate a ring-type seal on the pipe to be imbedded in the concrete. D. Concrete and Reinforcing Steel for Encasement 1. Furnish products following Division 03, except strengths as follows: a. Compressive Strength: 2,500 psi at 28 days, class A b. Flexural Strength: 500 psi at 28 days c. Dye concrete encasement"orange"to identify communications conduit E. The Contractor shall install conduit in excavations following drawings. 1. If directional boring is utilized, cable or flexible conduits can be attached to the unit and pulled back to the origination point(after the drilling unit reaches its destination). F. The Contractor shall install watertight penetrations through foundation, hand-hole and maintenance-hole walls. 1. Wherever a hand-hole is used to simply pass through, the conduit entrances and exits will be situated at opposite ends of the hand-hole instead of 90' angles. G. The Contractor shall assemble duct banks with non-magnetic saddles, spacers and separators. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND Christi 27 05 43-4 RACEWAYS FOR 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 1. Position separators for 0'-2" minimum concrete separation between outer surfaces of adjacent ducts, and: a. Make uniform required bends with a minimum 2'-0" radius for conduits less than 0'-3" diameter, and a minimum 4'-0" radius for conduits 0'-3" and larger. b. Maintain vertical or horizontal separations of 1'-0" of well-packed topsoil from any electrical service conduit run parallel to communications conduits. H. Install concrete encasement fully surrounding reinforcing steel and ducts I. Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, reinforce with longitudinal #5 steel bars placed at each corner and along each face at maximum parallel spacing of 1'-0" on center, and #5 tie- bars transversely placed at 1'-0" on center maximum longitudinal. 1. Maintain maximum clearance of 0'-2"from bars to edge of forms and ducts. J. For duct banks that are being installed for future use, extend rebar well past end of concrete for future tie-in to future concrete pour to ensure that both sections are firmly tied together to prevent slippage between the two pours. K. Add orange colorants at mixing site at the rate of 10 Ibs per cubic yard for voice and data cable. L. Place concrete with minimum 0'-2" cover surrounding ducts and reinforcement. M. Maintain ducts in proper place during concrete placement. N. For duct banks that are being installed for future use, all conduits shall be extended minimum of 1'-0" past the end of the concrete and capped. O. Transition from nonmetallic to metallic conduit where duct banks enter structures or turn upward for continuation above grade 1. Where ducts enter structures such as hand-holes, maintenance holes, pull boxes, or buildings, terminate ducts in proper end bells, insulated L-bushings, Meyers hubs or couplings on steel conduits. 2. Ducts shall be sealed to prevent water and debris from entering the building. P. Extend below grade conduits to 0'-4" above the finished floor inside a building. 1. Cover or temporarily seal open conduit ends to prevent water and other foreign matter from entering conduit. Q. Tag conduits entering pull boxes with stamped stainless steel tags following cable and conduit schedule. R. Backfill after concrete cures 24 hours. S. The Contractor shall pull a 1'-0" long mandrel (0'-'/" smaller than duct diameter)through ducts. 1. Pull a rag swab or sponge through to remove debris, until it shows clean. T. Where fiber optic cables will be used and/or where indicated in the drawings, innerduct shall be provided. U. The Contractor shall provide a metered pull tape in all underground conduits and innerduct: 1. Pre-lubricated, woven polyester, low friction, and high abrasion resistant yarn. 2. Minimum average tensile strength shall be 1,130 Ibs for 0'-1.5" and smaller conduits and innerduct. 3. Minimum average tensile strength shall be 1,800 Ibs for conduits larger than 0'-1.5". 3.04 CLEANING A. Refer to section 27 02 00. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND Christi 27 05 43-5 RACEWAYS FOR 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS SECTION 27 11 00 COMMUNICATIONS ROOM FITTINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This section includes basic communications and equipment room design requirements and fittings including: 1. Equipment cabinets, racks, frames and enclosures 2. Cable management and ladder racks 3. Telecommunications service entrance pathways 4. Rack mounted power protection and power strips B. Related Sections 1. Section 27 02 00- Basic Materials and Methods for Communications Systems 2. Section 27 05 26- Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems 3. Section 27 05 28- Pathways for Communications Systems 4. Section 27 15 00- Communications Horizontal Cabling 5. Section 27 13 00- Communications Backbone Cabling 6. Section 27 05 43- Underground Ducts and Raceways for Communications Systems 1.02 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. B. Specific reference in specifications to codes, rules, regulations, standards, manufacturer's instructions, or requirements of regulatory agencies shall mean the latest printed edition of each in effect at the date of contract unless the document is shown dated. C. Conflicts 1. Refer to section 27 02 00. D. Codes and Standards (Most recent editions or as required in contract) 1. Refer to section 27 02 00. 1.03 COMMUNICATIONS ROOMS A. Communications rooms must be dedicated to designated equipment and services: 1. Space shall not be used for storage of equipment not related to designated equipment and services. 2. Hazardous or corrosive materials shall not be stored in the space. 3. Piping, ductwork and distribution of power, not related to designated equipment and services shall not pass through or be located within the space. a. Foreign piping such as water pipes, steam pipes, soil pipes, sanitary drains, storm drains, A/C ducts, and other unrelated systems utilized for or containing liquids, or gases shall not be installed or pass through communication rooms. b. With the exception of fire sprinklers, all water pipes shall be routed around communications room. B. Each communication room shall be equipped with fire detection, fire-extinguishing system and prevention devices. Connect detection devices to base building fire alarm system. A minimum of one (1)smoke detector shall be installed in each communications room. C. Walls shall be covered with 0'-3/4"X 4'-0"X 8'-0"AC-grade plywood backboard 1'-0"AFF (smooth side to interior of room mounted vertically), capable of supporting mounted hardware and equipment. 1. Plywood shall be affixed to the studs in the walls with screws that penetrate the studs a minimum of 0'-1", are spaced not greater than 1'-6" (18") apart in each stud, and with screws 0'-0"from the top and bottom of plywood. 2. Plywood shall be sealed against the wall and painted on all exposed sides with two coats of flat white non-reflective paint. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus COMMUNICATIONS ROOM Christi 2711 00- 1 FITTINGS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 3. If applicable fire-treatment verification stamps on plywood shall be left unpainted to be readable. D. Communications room walls shall extend from floor slab to ceiling deck, with no drop ceilings installed. E. Cable tray or ladder rack should be used to distribute cables between rooms through finished wall penetrations. F. Cable ladder rack should be used to distribute cables within rooms, complete with cable bend limiters (drop outs). G. To reduce static, floors should not have carpet, but be sealed concrete to prevent concrete dust from forming. H. Communications rooms shall have only one lockable entrance door, a minimum of 3'-0"wide and 7'-0" high, that opens towards the outside of the room, and does not open into another room. 1. Doors shall be provided with a Iockset for the appropriate technology key with pinned hinges and anti-pry guards. 2. Doors should have no windows or door seals. 3. Communications rooms should have no exterior identifying markings. I. Mechanical 1. Install monitoring sensors with dedicated environmental controls operating 24 hours a day, 365 days a year in the communications rooms. 2. Provide ventilation in the communications rooms to dissipate heat generated by active devices. 3. Temperature and Humidity requirements: a. Maintain communication rooms at an average of 60°F to 70°F, with a relative non- condensing humidity of 30% to 50%. b. The temperature range should be maintained within ±9° J. Plumbing 1. If"wet"fire suppression is used, install wire cages on sprinkler heads to prevent accidental operation. 2. Do not place sprinkler heads over equipment or cabling. In the event of a leak this will protect the equipment and cabling. 3. Drainage troughs are also recommended for leakage protection. K. Electrical 1. One manufacturer's product is recommended for each type of installation. The mixing of different manufacturer products for one item is not acceptable. 2. No electrical feeders/branch circuits shall be placed in or run through any communications room except as required to service those rooms. 3. The Contractor shall install a slot (a UL-approved fire-rated assembly)to accommodate cable runway entry from corridor and a fire-retardant system (bricks, boards, mechanical, etc). The formed slot shall have no burrs or sharp edges. This opening in the wall will be used to pass data and voice cabling from the corridor cable tray into the communications room. 4. The Contractor shall provide uniform illumination of at least 50 foot-candles (fc) 3'-0"AFF for communications rooms located a minimum of 8'-6"AFF. a. Light fixtures in communications rooms are to be positioned for maximum lighting. Do not install over cable tray, ladder rack, or 1'-7" (19") standing racks. b. Provide enough power receptacles to support equipment and service. Coordinate power requirements of active equipment with electrical designer. L. Relay Racks 1. 1'-7" (19")X 7'-0" relay racks are to be used for mounting and termination of inter-building and intra-building fiber optic/copper cables and components. a. The racks shall have adequate horizontal and vertical cable management for the 8P8C patch panels and switches. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus COMMUNICATIONS ROOM Christi 2711 00-2 FITTINGS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop b. Racks with active electronics shall have rack mounted power strips. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to section 27 02 00. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to section 27 02 00. B. Product Standards 1. Equipment and materials shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of telecommunications cabling products and shall be the manufacturer's latest standard design in satisfactory use for at least one year prior to bid opening. 2. Items of the same classification shall be identical. This requirement includes equipment, modules, assemblies, parts, and components. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to section 27 02 00. B. Coordinate layout and installation of equipment with owner's communications and LAN equipment and service suppliers. Coordinate service entrance arrangement with local exchange carrier. 1.07 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Refer to section 27 02 00. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Refer to section 27 02 00. B. At the start of the project, contractor shall register the project with the manufacturer to help insure and facilitate manufacturer's warranty process. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Equipment Cabinet(OFOI) B. Horizontal Runway and Support Components (ladder tray in MDF/IDF) 1. Chatsworth 12" Universal Cable Runway(CPI #10250-712) 2. Chatsworth 18" Universal Cable Runway(CPI #10250-718) 3. Owner approved alternate C. Horizontal Runway Radius Drop 1. Chatsworth 12" Radius Drop (CPI #12100-712) 2. Chatsworth 18" Radius Drop (CPI #12100-712) 3. Owner approved alternate D. Cable Runway Elevation Kit 1. Black Rack Elevation Kit(CPI #10506-706) 2. Black Cabinet Elevation Kit(CPI #10506-716) 3. Owner approved alternate E. Vertical Rack-Mount Cable Management 1. Chatsworth (CPI CCS, #30162-703; 7'-0"H x 6"W, #30163-703; 7'-0"H x 10"W) 2. Owner approved alternate F. Labeling 1. Refer to section 27 02 00. G. Firestopping 1. Refer to section 27 02 00. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Rack-mounted Uninterruptible Power Supply(UPS) DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus COMMUNICATIONS ROOM Christi 2711 00-3 FITTINGS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 1. Owner furnished owner installed. B. Rack-mounted Power Strips 1. Owner furnished owner installed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Refer to Section 27 02 00. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Refer to section 27 02 00. B. Meet jointly with telecommunications and LAN equipment suppliers, local exchange carrier representatives, and Owner to exchange information and agree on details of equipment arrangements and installation interfaces. C. Adjust arrangements and locations of equipment with distribution frames, cross-connects, and patch panels of cabling systems of other communications, electronic safety and security, and related systems that share space in the equipment room. D. Coordinate location of power raceways and receptacles with locations of communications equipment requiring electrical power to operate. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Refer to section 27 02 00. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to section 27 02 00. 3.05 CLEANING A. Refer to section 27 02 00. 3.06 ACCEPTANCE A. Refer to section 27 02 00. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus COMMUNICATIONS ROOM Christi 2711 00-4 FITTINGS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 27 13 00 COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This section includes the backbone cabling portion of a structured cabling system including: 1. Copper backbone cabling 2. Fiber backbone cabling 3. Splicing 4. Termination and patch cables B. Provide all backbone cabling, terminating hardware, adapters, and cross-connecting hardware necessary to interconnect all system equipment including equipment located in Telecommunications rooms. C. Related Sections 1. Section 26 02 00- Electrical (including related sub-sections) 2. Section 27 02 00- Basic Materials and Methods for Communications Systems 3. Section 27 05 26- Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems 4. Section 27 05 28- Pathways for Communications Systems 5. Section 27 05 43- Underground Ducts and Raceways for Communications Systems 6. Section 27 11 00- Communications Room Fittings 7. Section 27 15 00- Communications Horizontal Cabling 1.02 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. B. Specific reference in specifications to codes, rules, regulations, standards, manufacturer's instructions, or requirements of regulatory agencies shall mean the latest printed edition of each in effect at the date of contract unless the document is shown dated. C. Conflicts 1. Refer to section 27 02 00. D. Codes and Standards (Most recent editions or as required in contract) 1. ANSI/TIA-568-C: Commercial Building Telecommunications Wiring Standard 2. ANSI/TIA-569-B: Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces 3. ANSI/TIA-606-A: Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications Infrastructure 4. ANSI/NECA/BICSI-607-A: Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications 5. TIA/EIA-758-A: Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard 6. National Electrical Code (NEC), based upon year approval by local codes or AHJ 7. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM) 8. Local, county, state and federal regulations and codes in effect as of date of purchase 9. Equipment of foreign manufacture must meet U.S. codes and standards. It shall be indicated in the proposal the components that may be of foreign manufacture, if any, and the country of origin. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to section 27 02 00. B. Cable Pulling Plan 1. The contractor shall submit a cable pulling plan prior to installation. 2. Submittal requirements: a. Indicate the installed backbone conduit layout in schematic format, including junction boxes and distances between junction boxes. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE Christi 27 13 00- 1 CABLING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop b. Indicate contents of each conduit. c. Indicate the cable pulling calculations, conduit fill ratios and actual cable runs and tensions. d. Include detail and schedule showing the construction sequence of communications rooms. e. Installation of cabling shall not commence prior to approval of the pulling plan and calculations by the engineer. C. Splice Plan 1. The contractor shall submit shop drawings indicating the intended cable splice points, mounting method and equipment list prior to installation D. Cable Testing Plan 1. Refer to Section 27 02 00. E. Cable Testing Reports 1. Refer to Section 27 02 00. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to section 27 02 00. B. Cable splicing personnel shall have a minimum of five years splicing experience and shall have completed a minimum of five major splicing projects. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to section 27 02 00. B. Storage temperature range: -40°F to 149°F (-40°C to 65°C) C. Fiber cables shall be shipped on reels in lengths as specified with a minimum overage of 10%: 1. The cable shall be wound on the reel so that unwinding can be done without kinking the cable. 2. Two meters of cable at both ends of the cable shall be accessible for testing. a. All fiber shall be tested on the reel for continuity and distance compliance before installation. 3. Each reel shall have a permanent label attached showing length, cable identification number, cable size, cable type, attenuation, bandwidth, and date of manufacture. a. Labels shall be water resistant and the writing on the labels shall be indelible. 1.06 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Refer to section 27 02 00. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Refer to section 27 02 00. 1.08 MAINTENANCE AND SUPPORT A. Refer to section 27 02 00. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE FIBER CABLE MANUFACTURERS A. OSP (Outside Plant)Armored cable OS2 Singlemode, 24 Strands 1. Corning 2. Berk-tek 3. Superior Essex 4. Owner approved alternate 2.02 ACCEPTABLE COMPONENT MANUFACTURERS A. Fiber Connectors (LC) 1. Leviton FASTCAM Pre-Polished a. Part#49991-SLC 2. Owner approved alternate DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE Christi 27 13 00-2 CABLING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents B. Fiber Duplex Patch Cables (Type SM) 1. Levtion 2. Owner approved alternate C. Fiber adapter panels (24-port) 1. Leviton SDX 24 Strands, Blue a. Part#5F100-4LL 2. Owner approved alternate D. Fiber Termination Shelf(Rack-Mounted) 1. Leviton SDX 2RU a. Part#5R2UM-F06 2. CommScope 3. Owner approved alternate E. Labeling 1. Refer to section 27 02 00. F. Firestopping 1. Refer to section 27 02 00. 2.03 FIBER BACKBONE CABLING A. Fiber General Requirements 1. Fiber shall be certified to meet all parts of TIA-455 and comply with TIA-492, ANSI/ICEA S-83-596 and ANSI/ICEA S-83-640 and the NEC. 2. Fibers shall have D-LUX coating or approved equivalent to ensure color retention, minimize micro bending losses and improve handling. The coating shall be mechanically strippable. 3. Cable installed in plenums or air-handling spaces shall meet UL 910 and shall be marked OFNP (optical fiber non-conductive plenum) in accordance with the NEC. a. Plenum Fiber rated cable consisting of multiple fibers shall have a Plenum PVC outer jacket. 1) Each group of fibers shall have a color-coded Low Smoke PVC buffer. 2) The buffered fibers are organized in subunits of fibers, reinforced with aramid yarn for extra strength and surrounded with a color-coded low smoke tube. b. Within the premises, all fiber shall be placed in plenum rated innerduct the entire length of the cable for protection. Use manufacturer plenum rated couplings for all connections. 4. Riser cable shall meet UL 1666 and be marked OFNR (optical fiber nonconductive riser) in accordance with the NEC. a. Non-plenum, riser rated cable consisting of multiple fibers, shall have an orange, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) outerjacket. 5. OSP (Outside Plant) Fiber a. Stranded loose tube dielectric fiber cable shall be utilized for underground conduit, direct buried, or aerial applications. b. Underground cable, including cable installed in conduits or duct banks, shall contain an additional moisture barrier in the form of a flooding compound. c. All OSP fiber strength members shall be dielectric without any metallic elements. 6. Fiber conductors shall follow standard color code schemes. Fiber numbers and binders shall correspond to the following color codes: a. Fiber/Binder No. 1 - blue b. Fiber/Binder No. 2- orange c. Fiber/Binder No. 3- green d. Fiber/Binder No. 4- brown e. Fiber/Binder No. 5- slate f. Fiber/Binder No. 6-white g. Fiber/Binder No. 7- red h. Fiber/Binder No. 8- black DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE Christi 27 13 00-3 CABLING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop i. Fiber/Binder No. 9- yellow j. Fiber/Binder No. 10 -violet k. Fiber/Binder No. 11 - rose I. Fiber/Binder No. 12 - aqua 7. Cable Minimum Bending Radius: a. During Installation: 20X cable diameter b. After Installation: 10X cable diameter 8. Operating temperature range: -76°F to 185°F (-60°C to 85°C) B. Multi-mode Fiber Requirements 1. Fibers shall have dual wavelength capability; transmitting at 850 and 1300 nm ranges. 2. 50/125 pm ± 2.5 pm core (OM 4) 3. Core non-circularity: = 5% 4. 125 pm ± 1 pm cladding diameter 5. Cladding non-circularity: =1% 6. Colored fiber diameter: 254 pm ± 7 pm 7. Buffering diameter: 890 mm ± 50 mm 8. Minimum tensile strength: 100,000 psi 9. Maximum Attenuation: 3.5 dB/km at 850 nm and 1.5 dB/km at 1300 nm 10. Minimum Bandwidth: 2000 MHz per km with laser launch at 850 nm ensured by differential mode delay at 850 nm" in TIA-492AAAC and 500 MHz at 1300 nm. 11. Additional component and transmission requirements for a 50/125 pm fiber cable capable of supporting 10 Gb/s serial transmission up to 984'-0" (300m) using 850 nm nominal wavelength lasers. These cables are suitable for use in accordance with ANSI/TIA-568- B.1. C. Single Mode Fiber Requirements 1. Fibers shall have dual wavelength capability, transmitting at 1310 and 1550 nm ranges. 2. 8.3 pm core 3. 125 pm ± 1 pm cladding diameter 4. Cladding non-circularity: = 1% 5. Core/cladding concentricity error: _ .5 pm 6. Colored fiber diameter: 254 pm ± 7 pm 7. Maximum Attenuation: 1.0 dB/km at 1310 and 1550 nm (inside premises) and 0.5 dB/km at 1310 and 1550 nm (OSP) 8. Minimum Bandwidth: 20 GHz 9. The mechanical and environmental specifications for OSP fiber cable shall be in accordance with ANSI/ICEA S-87-640. OSP fiber cables shall be of a water-block construction and meet the requirements for compound flow and water penetration as established by ANSI/ICEA S-87-640. Outdoor cable shall have minimum pull strength of 2670 N (600 IV). 2.04 COPPER BACKBONE CABLING A. Copper Cable Requirements 1. 100 0 balanced twisted-pair 2. Plenum-rated cabling: Cable installed in plenums or air-handling spaces shall meet UL 910 and shall be marked CMP (communications multipurpose plenum) in accordance with the NEC. a. Plenum cable shall consist of#24-AWG solid copper conductors insulated with color- coded FEP 3. Non-plenum riser-rated cabling shall meet UL 1666 and be marked CMR(communications multipurpose riser) in accordance with the NEC, and shall consist of 24 AWG copper conductors insulated with color-coded PVC copper cables. 4. ASP-filled multi-pair copper cables shall be utilized for underground conduit or direct buried applications. a. All OSP copper cable shall be transitioned to inside cable within 50'-0" of building entry. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE Christi 27 13 00-4 CABLING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop b. The metallic portion of the cables, if present, must be bonded to the building ground upon entry. 5. The bending radius and pulling strength requirements of all backbone cables shall be observed during handling and installation. B. Coaxial Cable Requirements 1. All cable must be plenum-rated 0.500 hard line or RG-11 2. All cable shall be shielded, with a copper clad aluminum center conductor; expandable polyethylene dielectric; continuous aluminum outer conductor, and a flame retardant jacket. 3. All cable shall be tested and marked to comply with the NEC requirements for(CATVR) riser rating. 2.05 COPPER PATCH CABLES A. Refer to Section 27 15 00. 2.06 FIBER PATCH CABLES A. Verify exact quantities and lengths with Owner prior to purchase B. Provide the appropriately-rated (matched to the installed cable plant) Modular Patch Cords for the appropriate location and equipment. C. Multi-mode patch cables shall be a buffered, graded-index fiber with a 50 pm core and a 125 micron cladding D. Single Mode patch cables shall be a stepped-index 8.3 pm core with a 125 pm cladding. E. Duplex SC connectors shall meet the following specifications: 1. Made and warranted by the manufacturer of the cabling system installed in this project and shall meet or exceed patch cord specifications as outlined in TIA standards. 2. Patch cords shall be in original packaging when presented to the Owner. F. Aramid yarn and a jacket of flame-retardant PVC shall cover the fiber cladding. G. Multi-mode patch cables additional requirements: 1. Mated Connector Loss: p = 0.3 dB, o = 0.2 dB 2. Connection Repeatability: 0.20 dB maximum changes per 100 reconnects H. Single Mode patch cable additional requirements: 1. Return Loss: -50 dB maximum 2. Mated Connector Loss: p = 0.35 dB, 6 = 0.2 dB 3. Connection Repeatability: 0.20 dB maximum changes per 200 re-connects. I. The Multi-mode connector(visible portion) and adapter/outlet shall be identified by the color beige. J. The Single Mode connector(visible portion) and adapter/outlet shall be identified by the color blue. 2.07 LABELING A. Refer to Section 27 15 00. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Refer to Section 27 02 00. B. Verify the following before proceeding: 1. Conduits, cable trays and pull boxes are properly installed following section 270528 2. Backboards in communications rooms are properly installed following section 271100 3. Grounding system is properly installed and tested following section 270526 4. Liquid-carrying pipes are not installed in or above voice and data system communications rooms. a. Do not proceed with installation in affected areas until removed. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE Christi 27 13 00-5 CABLING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 3.02 PREPARATION A. Refer to section 27 02 00. 3.03 COPPER INSTALLATION A. Backbone Cable 1. The Contractor shall install riser cables according to manufacturer's instructions for compliance to warranty requirements. B. OSP Cable 1. The Contractor shall verify pulling material (pull rope, mule tape, etc.) average breaking strength based on cable type and size, pulling distance and pathway, and other pertinent factors. C. Copper Cable and Connectors 1. The Contractor shall install connectors according to manufacturer's instructions for compliance to warranty requirements. 3.04 TERMINATION FOR COPPER BACKBONE A. Copper 1. 110-type Wiring Blocks using C5 clips, Insulation Displacement Connector Systems, with proper patch cord a. Compatible with all voice and data circuits b. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) listed 2. Protector Panels shall be provided for all outside plant installed copper circuits. The protectors shall provide pair-for-pair protection and be mounted on a 0'-3/4"fire-rated wallboard. 3.05 FIBER INSTALLATION A. Fiber Cable Installation 1. Fiber cable shall be installed in innerduct from near end termination point to far end termination point. a. Only UL-approved plenum-rated innerduct shall be installed in all plenum areas. b. Metallic conduit may be used in lieu of innerduct in plenum-rated ceilings if it is bonded and grounded correctly. 2. Only technicians certified by the product manufacturer shall perform terminations. a. Terminations shall be made in a controlled environment. b. Cables may be assembled off-site, although testing must be completed with the cable in its final installed condition. c. Test optical fiber on the reel for distance and continuity verification before installation. 3. At each location where fiber cable is exposed to human intrusion, it shall be marked with warning tags. a. These tags shall be yellow or orange in color, and shall contain the warning "CAUTION FIBER OPTIC CABLE". b. The text shall be permanent, black, block characters, and at least 0'-.1875" high. c. A warning tag shall be permanently affixed to each exposed cable or bundle of cables, at intervals of not less than 5-0". d. Any section of exposed cable that is less than 5-0" in length shall have at least one warning tag affixed to it. B. Fiber Distribution Center 1. Contractor shall provide sufficient spare adapter plates to fill the appropriate-sized FDC. 3.06 FIBER TERMINATION AND SPLICING A. Interconnect Units and Distribution Shelves 1. Modular in design and used in fiber interconnection, cross-connection, and splicing applications 2. 1'-7" (19") rack-mountable 3. Accept 12-strand, 24-strand, 48-strand or 72-strand terminations DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE Christi 27 13 00-6 CABLING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 4. Owner approved industry standard connector B. Splicing and closures 1. Fiber splice modules shall be utilized for all OSP terminations. 2. The link shall consist of: a. Fiber cable b. Splice c. Splice tray holder/closure d. Fiber panel/coupler e. Pre-manufactured fiber pigtail with pre-polished fiber connector f. Fiber jumper to connect the pigtail-coupled link to the appropriate electronic switch C. Fiber Fusion Splice 1. Fusion splices shall be mounted in protective trays within the closure. 2. Fusion splices shall not exceed a maximum optical attenuation of 0.3 dB when measured in accordance with ANSI/TIA-455-34, Method a (factory testing)or ANSI/TIA-455-59 (field testing). a. Fiber splices shall have a minimum return loss of 20 dB for Multi-mode b. Fiber splices shall have a minimum return loss of 26 dB for Single Mode 1) Minimum Single Mode return loss for broadband analog video (CATV) applications is 55 dB. 3.07 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. All installation shall be done in conformance with ANSI/TIA-568-B standards, BICSI methods, and industry standard installation guidelines. 1. The Contractor shall ensure that the maximum pulling tensions of the specified distribution cables are not exceeded and cable bends maintain the proper radius during the placement of the facilities. 2. Failure to follow the appropriate guidelines shall require the Contractor to provide in a timely fashion the additional material and labor necessary to properly rectify the situation. 3. This shall also apply to any and all damages sustained to the cables by the Contractor during the implementation. B. The Contractor shall provide service loops for cables terminating in the communications rooms. 1. A 10'-0" service loop shall be provided and secured in a neat and standards-compliant manner above the equipment racks or cable trays unless specified otherwise. 2. This allows for future changes or expansion without installing new cables. C. Documentation 1. All cable inventory data documentation shall be submitted in format coordinated with and approved by owner so that data can be incorporated into existing databases. 2. Documentation shall include cable identification number, source and destination, type of cable, length of cable and number of pairs or fibers. 3. Complete cross connect documentation is required. It shall include detailed documentation of each pair of all copper backbone cable and strand of fiber. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to section 27 02 00. 3.09 COPPER POST-INSTALLATION TESTING A. Contractor shall test each pair or strand of every cable prior to acceptance. B. Refer to Sections 27 02 00 and 27 15 00. C. Copper Test Documentation 1. Refer to Section 27 15 00. D. Copper testing requirements 1. Refer to Section 27 15 00. 2. Copper backbone shall exceed ANSI/TIA-568-B.2 Backbone Cabling requirements and meet the manufacturer's specifications for the installed product. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE Christi 27 13 00-7 CABLING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 3. OSP cabling test equipment shall be capable of making frequency sweeps at an impedance of 135 0 at the following frequencies (kHz): 20, 30, 50, 69, 90, 110, 138, 276, 400, 600, 800, 1000, and 1100. a. A far-end device shall be used for all frequency measurements. b. The loss at 138 kHz shall not exceed 46 dB. c. The test set shall have the ability to store 100 tests and be able to upload to a PC. d. The test set shall be able to measure resistance between the following conductors: tip to ring, tip to ground, and ring to ground. e. All measurements shall be greater than 999 Q. E. Copper Test Equipment 1. Refer to Section 27 02 00. 3.10 FIBER POST-INSTALLATION TESTING A. Provide all labor, materials, tools, field-test instruments and equipment required for the complete and proper test measurements of the installed fiber cabling. B. Contractor shall have successfully attended a fiber testing training program, which includes testing with an OLTS and an OTDR and have obtained a certificate as proof thereof. C. All outlets, cables, patch panels and associated components shall be fully assembled and labeled prior to field-testing. 1. Any testing performed on incomplete systems shall be redone on completion of the work. D. Dust caps shall be placed on fiber endfaces or adapters for each optical fiber link after all testing is complete on the fiber link. E. Pre-test Submittals 1. Manufacturers catalog sheets and specifications for the fiber cable field-test instruments including a. OLTS (Optical Loss Test Set) b. OTDR (Optical Time Domain Reflectometer) c. End-face inspection capture device 2. A schedule (list)of all fiber cables to be tested 3. Fiber testing training program certificate 4. Sample test reports F. Fiber testing standards 1. The Contractor shall meet or exceed the following standards and guidelines: a. ANSI/TIA-568-C.0 Optical Fiber Transmission/Test Requirements, and Annex E: Optical Fiber Field Test Guidelines (Tier 2) 1) Tier 2 testing is a higher level of testing that provides qualitative measures of the installed condition and performance of the cabling system b. ANSI/TIA-568-B.3 Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard c. TIA/TSB-140 Additional Guidelines for Field-Testing Length, Loss and Polarity of Optical Fiber Cabling Systems 2. Multi-mode requirements a. ANSI/TIA-526-14-A, Method B b. ANSI/TIA-455-50B 3. Single Mode requirements a. ANSI/TIA-526-7, Method A.1: Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Single Mode Fiber Cable Plant-OFSTP-7 4. The cable installers shall have a copy of these references in their possession and be familiar with the contents G. In order to conform to the overall project event schedule, the contractor shall survey and coordinate the optical fiber testing with other applicable trades. H. In addition to the test regiment detailed in this document, the contractor shall notify the Owner of any additional tests that are deemed necessary to guarantee a fully functional system. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE Christi 27 13 00-8 CABLING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 1. The contractor shall carry out and record any additional measurement results at no additional charge. I. The contractor shall provide all test measurement results two (2)weeks prior to substantial completion in spreadsheet format and native file format from the test instrument. 1. Software shall also be provided to view the native results. J. All tests performed on optical fiber cabling that use a laser or LED in a test set shall be carried out with safety precautions in accordance with ANSI Z136.2. 1. A visible fault locator(VFL) normally uses a Class 2 or 3 light source and should not be directly viewed. 2. Safe usage of the tool requires indirect viewing of the light source by pointing the end of the fiber at an adjacent surface (or introducing another surface in front of a fixed mounted connector) until the presence of light is determined. K. Link attenuation measurement and allowance calculation 1. The measured link attenuation shall be less than the link attenuation allowance. The link attenuation allowance is calculated as: a. Link Attenuation Allowance (dB) = Cable Attenuation Allowance (dB) + Connector Insertion Loss Allowance (dB) + Splice Insertion Loss Allowance (dB) 1) Connector Insertion Loss Allowance (dB) = Number of Connector Pairs X 0.4dB 2) Splice Insertion Loss Allowance (dB) = Number of Splices X 0.15dB 3) Cable Attenuation Allowance (dB) = Maximum Cable Attenuation Coefficient (dB/km)X Length (km) L. Fiber Testing Requirements 1. All installed fiber links shall be field-tested and pass the following tests: a. OLTS (Optical Loss Test Set) length and dual wavelength attenuation b. OTDR (Optical Time Domain Reflectometer)traces and event tables c. Image captures of connector end-faces 2. OLTS (Optical Loss Test Set) a. The length and attenuation of each installed fiber link shall be measured and documented. b. System loss measurements requirements: 1) 850 and 1300 nanometers for Multi-mode 2) 1310 and 1550 nanometers for Single Mode c. Reflective events (connections) shall not exceed 0.75 dB. d. Non-reflective events (splices) shall not exceed 0.3 dB. e. The acceptable link attenuation for Multi-mode horizontal fiber is based on the maximum distance of 295'-0". f. A horizontal link in a network with a consolidation point may be tested using a fixed upper limit for attenuation of 2.75 dB. g. Optical sources shall be turned on for a minimum of 5 minutes prior to referencing. h. Fiber links shall be measured and reported for attenuation in each direction and attenuation bi-directionally (averaged in both directions) i. Polarity shall be verified for duplex connector systems j. Mandrels 1) Mandrels shall be used when testing attenuation of Multi-mode fiber cabling 2) Where mandrels are used, secure the mandrel to the light source by some means such as a cable tie or tape. 3) Care should be taken to ensure that the fiber jacket is not deformed or damaged when using a cable tie or tape. 4) The light source shall be referenced to the meter a minimum of twice daily (i.e., in the morning and noon). 3. OTDR (Optical Time Domain Reflectometer) a. An OTDR trace shall be taken of each fiber link in one direction to ensure uniformity of cable attenuation and connector insertion loss DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE Christi 27 13 00-9 CABLING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop b. Testing shall consist of a bi-directional end to end OTDR trace performed per TIA 455-61 c. Individual connector, splice and fiber insertion loss shall be evaluated using the OTDR trace. d. Fibers shall be inspected at 250X for Multi-mode and 400X for Single Mode 4. End-face Image Capture a. An image of each fiber optic connector end-face shall be taken, recorded and provided as part of the records. 5. Maximum Attenuation a. Single Mode ISP (inside) 1.0 dB/km at 1310 nm and 1550 nm b. Single Mode OSP (outside) 0.5 dB/km at 1310 nm and 1550 nm c. Multi-mode 3.5 dB/km at 850 nm and 1.5 dB/km at 1300 nm 6. Test Cords (Jumpers) a. Testing of the cabling shall be performed using high-quality test cords of the same fiber type and core size as the cabling under test. Use a single patch cord reference for fiber testing. 1) OLTS test cords shall be between 3'-3" (1 m)and 16'-4" (5m). 2) OTDR testing shall be approximately 328'-0" (100m)for the launch cable and at least 82'-0" (25m)for the receive cable. . OTDR testing shall be Bidirectional with Pigtails installed. b. The test jumper, the adapters, and fiber under test shall be cleaned immediately prior to each fiber being tested. 1) After cleaning, cleaning solutions shall be given sufficient time to evaporate (approximately 30 seconds) prior to the mating of fiber test jumper to the fiber under test. 7. Test Failure a. Any fiber link that fails these requirements shall be diagnosed and corrected. b. Any corrective action that must take place shall be documented and followed with a new test to prove that the corrected link meets performance requirements 8. Acceptable Testers a. Fluke DTX CableAnalyzer b. Owner Approved equivalent M. The Owner or the Owner's representative shall be invited to witness, review or both witness and review field-testing. 1. The Owner or the Owner's representative shall be notified of the testing start date, five (5) business days before testing commences. 2. The Owner or the Owner's representative will select a random sample of 5% of the installed links and test that sample. a. The measured results obtained from the random sample shall be compared to the data provided by the contractor. b. If more than 2% of the sample results differ in terms of the pass/fail determination, the contractor under supervision of the Owner or Owner's representative shall repeat 100% of the testing at no cost to the Owner. N. Test Results 1. The detailed test results documentation data is to be provided in an electronic database for each tested fiber strand and shall contain the following information: a. Identification of the customer site as specified by the end-user b. Name of the test limit selected to execute the stored test results c. Name of the personnel performing the test d. Date and time the test results were saved e. The manufacturer, model and serial number of the test instrument. f. The version of the test software and the version of the test limit database held within the test instrument. g. Fiber identification number h. Length for each optical fiber DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE Christi 27 13 00- 10 CABLING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop i. Index of refraction used for length calculation when using a length capable OLTS. j. Test results to include OLTS attenuation link and channel measurements at the appropriate wavelength(s) and the margin (difference between the measured attenuation and the test limit value). k. Test results to include OTDR link and channel traces and event tables at the appropriate wavelength(s). I. Length for each optical fiber as calculated by the OTDR m. Overall Pass/Fail evaluation of the link-under-test for OLTS and OTDR measurements n. Circuit IDs reported by the test instrument should match the specified label ID 3.11 CLEANING A. Refer to section 27 02 00. 3.12 ACCEPTANCE A. Refer to Section 27 15 00. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE Christi 27 13 00- 11 CABLING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SECTION 27 15 00 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This section of the horizontal cabling portion of a structured cabling system includes: 1. UTP Copper cabling 2. Termination and patch cables B. Provide all horizontal cabling, terminating hardware, adapters, and cross-connecting hardware necessary to interconnect all system equipment including equipment located in communications rooms. C. Related Sections 1. Section 27 02 00- Basic Materials and Methods for Communications Systems 2. Section 27 05 26- Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems 3. Section 27 05 28- Pathways for Communications Systems 4. Section 27 11 00- Communications Room Fittings 1.02 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. B. Specific reference in specifications to codes, rules, regulations, standards, manufacturer's instructions, or requirements of regulatory agencies shall mean the latest printed edition of each in effect at the date of contract unless the document is shown dated. C. Conflicts 1. Refer to section 27 02 00. D. Codes and Standards 1. Refer to section 27 02 00. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to sections 27 02 00 and 27 13 00. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to section 27 02 00. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to sections 27 02 00 and 27 13 00. B. Storage temperature range: -40°F to 149°F (-40°C to 65°C) 1.06 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Refer to section 27 02 00. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Refer to section 27 02 00. 1.08 MAINTENANCE AND SUPPORT A. Refer to section 27 13 00 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Labeling 1. Refer to section 27 02 00. B. Firestopping 1. Refer to section 27 02 00. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus COMMUNICATIONS Christi 27 15 00- 1 HORIZONTAL CABLING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 2.02 ACCEPTABLE COPPER MANUFACTURERS A. UTP Plenum Rated Cable Cat6 (blue) 1. Berk-tek LANmark 1000 2. General Cable- Genspeed 6000 3. Hitachi-Supra 660 4. Owner approved alternate B. Data/Voice Outlet Components Cat 6 1. Leviton (Blue) a. Part#61110-RL6 2. Owner approved alternate C. Patch Panels 1. Leviton 48 Port, 2RU a. Part#69270-U48 2. Leviton 24 Port, 1 RU a. Part#69270-U24 3. Owner approved alternate D. Copper Patch Cords Cat6 Pre-assembled 1. Leviton (Non-booted) a. 1 Foot- Part#6D460-1 L b. 15 Feet- Part#6D460-15L 2. Owner approved alternate E. Faceplates 1. Leviton Single Gang 4-Port with ID Windows a. Part#42080-4WS 1) Coordinate with Div. 26 contractor to match color of recepticle faceplates prior to purchase. 2. Owner approved alternate 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Mount one laminated full-size hard copy in color of an as-built floor plan designating workstation locations, pathways, and communications room locations. Confirm hard copy size with Owner. B. Provide clear plastic lamination serving each communication room. C. Install the laminated drawings within a protective Plexiglas encasement on the wall of the servicing communications rooms. To ease accessibility the Plexiglas encasement shall be in either flip-down format or file folder format. 2.04 HORIZONTAL COPPER CABLING A. Recognized cabling for providing the signal medium from the work area to the communications room shall include the following: 1. Category 6 UTP cable B. Category 6 UTP Cable Requirements 1. 23/24 AWG solid bare copper. 2. Cable jacket shall comply with NEC Article 800 for use as a plenum cable and shall be UL and c (UL) Listed Type CMP (communications multipurpose plenum). 3. Cable shall terminate on an eight-pin modular jack at each outlet. All horizontal cabling shall meet or exceed the ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard, Part 2: Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Components. 4. Cables shall be marked as UL verified with a minimum of Category 6 rating. 5. The cable shall support Voice, Analog Base band Video/Audio, Fax, Modem, Switched-56, T-1, ISDN, RS-232, RS-422, RS-485, 10BASE-T Ethernet, Token Ring, 100Mbps TP-PMD, 100BASE-T Ethernet, 155 Mbps ATM, AES/EBU Digital Audio, 270 Mbps Digital Video, 622 Mbps 64-CAP ATM and emerging high-bandwidth applications, including 1 Gbps Ethernet, gigabit ATM, as well as all 77 channels (550 Mhz)of analog DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus COMMUNICATIONS Christi 27 15 00-2 HORIZONTAL CABLING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop broadband video. 6. The maximum horizontal cable tested length for Category 6 copper cable from the termination of the cable in the communications room to the outlet is 295-0". It's contractor's responsibility to reroute as necessary to bring all cable runs within distance limit without additional cost to the project. Plan ahead and get approval or exception from Owner before pulling the cables that would ne over the distance limit. 7. Cable shall meet or exceed the following electrical characteristics: a. Cable shall be specified to 250 MHz. Cable shall meet the manufacturer's guaranteed electrical performance and physical specifications. 2.05 TERMINATION HARDWARE A. Patch panels 1. Patch panels shall be rated to match installed cable plant 2. The wiring block shall accommodate#23 AWG cable conductors. 3. All modular cross connect panels shall be UL-listed. B. Work Area Outlet Cat6 1. Universal eight-position jack pin/pair assignments 2. Jack Color: a. Data: Blue (or approved alternate). C. Work Area Outlet Faceplates: 1. White or ivory to match electrical outlets. 2.06 PATCH CABLES A. Verify exact quantities and lengths with Owner prior to purchase B. Patch Cable requirements: 1. Category 6, stranded UTP cable 2. Standard modular non-keyed, 8-position 8-conductor plug 3. 94V-0 rated 4. UL listed 5. Meets FCC Part 68 C. Provide 3'-0", 5-0", 7'-0", and 10'-0" Patch Cords at the communications room for each installed port. 1. Coordinate with Owner on the active equipment layout prior to purchase to ensure correct sizing of patch cords from patch panels to switching equipment. 2. When connecting voice ports to a copper riser, provide a one-pair stranded 8P8C connector on one end and 110GS on the other end and shall be of appropriate length for application. D. Provide a 10'-0" Station Cord for each work area outlet port. E. Place each size/length patch cord in a separate container, and mark the containers that hold the patch cords with the length of patch cords contained within. F. All cords shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard, Horizontal Cabling Section, and be part of the UL LAN Certification and Follow-up Program. G. Cords shall be equipped with an eight-pin modular connector on each end, wired straight through and shall be of appropriate length for application. H. All rated patch cords shall be round, and consist of#23 AWG copper, stranded conductors, tightly twisted into individual pairs. I. Patch cords shall be made and warranted by the manufacturer of the cabling system installed in this project and shall meet or exceed patch cord specifications as outlined in TIA standards. 2.07 IDENTIFICATION (LABELING) SYSTEM A. Refer to sections 27 02 00 and 27 13 00. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus COMMUNICATIONS Christi 27 15 00-3 HORIZONTAL CABLING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION 3.02 PREPARATION A. Refer to section 27 02 00. B. The Contractor shall check pathways, raceways, and other elements for compliance with space allocations, installation tolerances, debris, hazards to cable installation, and other conditions affecting installation prior to installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to section 27 02 00. B. All installation shall be done in conformance with ANSI/TIA-568-C standards, BICSI methods, industry standards and manufacturer's installation guidelines. 1. The Contractor shall ensure that the maximum pulling tensions of the specified distribution cables are not exceeded and cable bends maintain the proper radius during the placement of the facilities. 2. Failure to follow the appropriate guidelines shall require the Contractor to provide in a timely fashion the additional material and labor necessary to properly rectify the situation. 3. This shall also apply to any and all damages sustained to the cables by the Contractor during the implementation. C. Install cable using techniques, practices, and methods that are consistent with specified data cabling and the installed components and that ensure specified performance levels of completed and linked signal paths, end to end. 1. Pull cables in smooth and regular motions using methods that prevent cable kinking. 2. Pull cables simultaneously if more than one is being installed in the same raceway/pathway. 3. If necessary, use approved cable pulling lubricant 4. Use fish tape, cable, rope, basket weave wire/cable grips, and other tools that will ensure no damage to the media or raceway. 5. Install open cabling parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or structural members following surface contours where possible. 6. Do not bend cable greater than a bend radius of 0'-1". D. Provide a 10'-0" service loop at the communications room and shall provide a 3'-0" service loop above the access ceiling or cable trays unless specified otherwise. 1. All service loops shall be a minimum of 1'-6" (18") in diameter and be accessible for maintenance. E. Coordinate loop placement and orientation with the technology consultant. 1. This allows for future changes or expansion without installing new cables. F. Install cables in continuous "home run" lengths from work station outlet to specified patch panel. 1. No intermediate punch down blocks or splices may be installed or utilized between the communications rooms and the workstation outlet without written Owner permission. G. All cable must be handled with care during installation so as not to change performance specifications. 1. Factory twists of each individual pair must be maintained up to the connection points at both ends of the cable. 2. There shall never be more than 0'-1/2"of unsheathed cable at either the wiring closet or the workstation termination locations. H. All cabling and associated hardware shall be placed so as to make efficient use of available space. 1. All cabling and associated hardware shall be placed so as not to impair equipments efficient use of their full capacity. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus COMMUNICATIONS Christi 27 15 00-4 HORIZONTAL CABLING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 3.04 CABLING METHODS A. The Contractor shall provide cabling in accessible spaces, cable tray, (surface and/or enclosed raceway), conduits, and/or J-Hook cable support system. 1. Within consoles, racks, cabinets, desks, and counters, in accessible ceilings spaces and in gypsum board partitions where open cable method may be used. 2. Use UL or ETL listed plenum rated cable in all spaces. 3. Provide all necessary installation materials, hardware, tools and equipment to perform insulation displacement type terminations at all data outlets, patch panels, and voice termination materials. B. Conceal raceway and cabling except in unfinished spaces as is practical. C. Exposed Cable 1. All station cabling shall be installed inside walls or ceiling spaces whenever possible. 2. Exposed station cable will only be run where indicated on the drawings and will only be allowed when no other options exist. a. Owner must approve all exceptions. D. The Contractor shall utilize conduits/cable tray as indicated on the drawings. E. All cabling placed above drop ceilings must be supported by cable tray, J-hooks, caddy bags or conduit. 1. The Contractor shall permanently affix cable supports to the building structure or substrates and provide attachment hardware and anchors designed for the structure to which attached and are suitably sized to sustain the weight of the cables to be supported. a. Attaching cable to pipes or other mechanical items is not permitted. b. Cabling shall not be attached to ceiling grid wires. 2. Multiple cables are to be dressed every 5-0"to 7'-0". a. Maximum cable sag between cable hooks is Y-6". F. The Contractor shall route data and voice cables separately in a neat and orderly fashion. 1. No cable ties or wraps shall be used to secure the cables in the runway outside of the communications rooms. Cable ties shall be rated for the environment. G. Keep all items protected before and after installation with dust and moisture proof barrier materials/envelopes. H. If wiring is terminated on patch panels, data, voice jacks prior to painting, carpet installation, and general finish clean up, these jacks shall be placed in a protective envelope to ensure dust, debris, moisture, and other foreign material do not settle onto jacks' contacts. 1. Envelope will be removed on final trim out after other trades have completed their finish work. 2. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to ensure the integrity of these protective measures throughout the life/installation of the project. a. Cable bundles brought into the communications rooms shall be routed and dressed in such a manner that prior to termination the cables are not subject to damage and misuse such as installers walking on the bundles that are on the floor. b. Cable pulling force shall not exceed 25 Ibs of pulling tension or cable manufacturer's recommended pulling tensions. c. Do not leave cables on the floor unprotected or cable bundles hanging from the ceilings. Coil them up in a temporary manner and protect them from damage. I. Communications room cables shall be combed and dressed in a manner as to prevent twists, "braiding" and crossed cables in the cable bundle from the communication room entrance to the termination point at the rear of the patch panel. 1. Behind the patch panel, the cable bundle shall be attached to the rear cable support bar, and shall drop out each cable in a neat, cascading manner to prevent crossed and/or interwoven cables to each patch panel port termination point. a. Use Velcro wraps instead of cables ties for all bundling in the communications rooms. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus COMMUNICATIONS Christi 27 15 00-5 HORIZONTAL CABLING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop b. Plastic/nylon tie-wraps are not allowed to permanently secure cables inside the communications room. 3.05 CABLING SEPARATION A. Comply with TIA rules for separating unshielded copper communication and data-processing equipment cables from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment. B. Maintain a minimum spacing of 1'-6" (18")from electrical feeders and/or branch circuit wiring including, but not limited to, light fixtures, sources of heat and EMI sources. C. Maintain a minimum spacing of 1'-0"from auxiliary systems cabling. D. Maintain a 1'-0" separation where cables must pass perpendicularly to electrical, plumbing, or other wiring, conduit, or piping systems. 1. Use non-conduit bushings, if necessary to maintain separation, which allow for the addition of a reasonable number of cables in the future. E. Maintain communications pathways away from electrical apparatus such as motor driven equipment and transformers, minimum separation distance of 10'-0" is recommended. 3.06 CABLING TERMINATION A. Terminate cables in consistent consecutive order. B. Terminate cables onto 8P8C modular patch panels without damaging twisted pairs or jacket. C. Arrange cables on patch panels and voice termination hardware in ascending order of room numbers and outlet numbers within rooms. D. Provide a 10'-0" service loop for horizontal cables at each rack in communications rooms. 1. Locate loop at ceiling deck or on bottom of cable runway in minimum 1'-6" (18") diameter. E. Provide a 3' service loop for horizontal cables at work area outlets. Locate service loop above or below data/voice outlet were vertical cable run transitions to horizontal run. F. Maintain twists in cable pairs to within 0'-1/2" of termination. G. Building Systems Cabling (BAS, FA, elevator line, etc) 1. Coordinate exact placement and connectivity requirements with applicable trade prior to installation. 2. Group all building systems cables in one group. 3. Clearly label cable number and function, in the last positions on the horizontal cabling blocks in each communications room. H. Limit cable-bending radius to 20X the cable diameter during installation, and 15X the cable diameter after installation. I. Start numbering at the left of the main door to the room and continue in a clockwise direction around the room. 1. The cables within the room will be terminated starting with the cables located to the left of the main door to the room and continue around the room in a clockwise direction. 3.07 TERMINATION HARDWARE A. Station Hardware 1. Flush mount jacks shall be mounted in a faceplate with back box. 2. Outlets shall not be mounted on temporary, movable, or removable surfaces, doors, or access hatches without prior Owner approval. 3. 8P8C Jack Pin Assignments for work area outlets shall match the T-568B wiring scheme. B. Patch panels 1. Copper cables shall be terminated in eight position/eight conductor (8P8C) modular patch panels. 2. All Modular jack panels shall match the T-568B wiring scheme. C. Work Area Outlet 1. 8P8C non-keyed modular outlets for applications up to one Gbps and ANSI/TIA-568-C compliant for the specified transmission requirements DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus COMMUNICATIONS Christi 27 15 00-6 HORIZONTAL CABLING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop D. Work Area Outlet Faceplates: 1. Furnish and install blank plates in all unused ports. 3.08 SPECIAL CIRCUITS A. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner on the cable termination plan for special circuits, including cables to wireless access point locations, security, elevators, fire alarms, etc. B. Wireless Access Points 1. Install two (2) cable(s)from dedicated wireless patch panel(s) in communications room to outlets having 8P8C connectors within a BISCUIT box. 2. Enclosures shall be NEMA rated for the environment to which they are exposed. 3. 30'-0" of cable slack shall be coiled and hung on a "X-hook at the enclosure location. 3.09 IDENTIFICATION AND LABELING A. Labeling system shall consist of a hand-held portable printer and labels appropriate to the application. Handwritten labels are not acceptable. B. Labelling scheme shall meet Owner's IT cabling standard and industry standards and best practices. Submit labelling scheme for approval before work to start. C. Fiber termination hardware (designation strip)shall have a 0'-3/4" x 0'-1/4"thermal transfer printable label with a permanent acrylic adhesive D. All labels shall be permanent and shall not fade, peel, or deteriorate due to environment or time. E. The Contractor shall provide a copy of the finalized plan in writing to the Owner representative and DBR for review and authorization to proceed. 1. Coordinate with Owner for specifications on labeling of all hardware, cabling, and related equipment prior to any testing. F. Labeling requirements: 1. Label cable terminations on designation strips 2. Label all cable at each terminating point. 3. Label each port of the work area outlet. 4. Cable identification numbers shall not be duplicated. 5. Label patch panels in the communications rooms to match those on the corresponding voice and data outlets. a. The font shall be at least 0'-1/8" in height. 6. Where a wireless access point is installed above an acoustical ceiling, label the ceiling grid frame below the access point, displaying the data port number and, if applicable, the access point identification number. Coordinate labeling of grid with Owner and Architect prior to application of labels. 7. Label each distribution rack, block and other terminating equipment unit and field within that unit within 0'-4"from the block or patch panel termination. Keep labels in a neat and orderly lineup. S. Label each connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting hardware within connector fields, in wiring closets and equipment rooms. a. Where similar jacks and plugs are used for both communication and data-processing equipment, use a different color for jacks and plugs of each service. 9. Post the cable schedule in a prominent location in each wiring closet and equipment room. List incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. G. Location and termination field description 1. Room location 2. Rack-mount or Wall mount 3. Termination field type a. Specific patch panel ports versus a separate dedicated patch panel H. Unique identifiers 1. Segregation and position on equipment rack DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus COMMUNICATIONS Christi 27 15 00-7 HORIZONTAL CABLING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 2. Port color-coding 3. Unique labeling I. Documentation 1. Provide electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules for project in software and format selected by Owner. a. All labels shall correspond to as-built drawings and to final test reports. 2. All cable inventory data documentation shall be submitted in format coordinated with and approved by Owner so that data can be incorporated into existing databases. 3. Documentation shall include cable identification number, source and destination, type of cable, length of cable and number of pairs or fibers. 4. Complete cross connect documentation is required. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to section 27 02 00. 3.11 POST-INSTALLATION TESTING A. Contractor shall test each pair or strand of every cable prior to acceptance. (100% PASS) B. Contractor shall submit acceptance documentation as defined below. No cabling installation is considered complete until test results have been completed, submitted and approved. C. Standards Compliance and Test Requirements: 1. Cabling shall meet ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 Category 6 Horizontal cabling requirements. D. Attenuation, NEXT, PSNEXT, Return Loss, ELFEXT, and PSELFEXT data that indicate the worst case result, the frequency at which it occurs, the limit at that point, and the margin. 1. These tests shall be performed in a swept frequency manner from 1 MHz to highest relevant frequency, using a swept frequency interval that is consistent with TIA and ISO requirements. 2. Information shall be provided for all pairs or pair combinations and in both directions when required by the appropriate standards. 3. Length, propagation delay, and delay skew relative to the relevant limit. a. Length, propagation delay, and delay skew shall be tested relative to the relevant limit. b. Test shall also include mutual capacitance and characteristic impedance. 1) Any individual test that fails the relevant performance specification shall be marked as a 'FAIL". E. Cable Test Documentation: 1. Cable test documentation shall be submitted in hard copy and electronic formats. a. If proprietary software is used, disk or CD shall contain any necessary software application required to view test results. b. Electronic reports shall be accompanied by a Certificate signed by an authorized representative of the Contractor warranting the truth and accuracy of the electronic report. c. Certificate shall reference traceable circuit numbers that match the electronic record. 2. Each test record shall contain the cable ID as follows: a. "MEDIA TYPE—SOURCE ROOM— DESTINATION ROOM— STRAND/PAIR#", e.g. MM-MC-HC23-001. 3. Test results saved within the field-test instrument shall be transferred into an accessible database utility that allows for the maintenance, inspection and archiving of the test records. a. These test records shall be uploaded to the PC unaltered, i.e., "as saved in the field- test instrument". b. The file format, CSV (comma separated value), does not provide adequate protection of these records and shall not be used. 4. Test reports shall include the following information for each cabling element: DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus COMMUNICATIONS Christi 27 15 00-8 HORIZONTAL CABLING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop a. Wire map results that indicate that 100% of the cabling has been tested for shorts, opens, miss-wires, splits, polarity reversals, transpositions, presence of AC voltage and end-to-end connectivity. b. Length, propagation delay, and delay skew relative to the relevant limit. Any individual test that fails the relevant performance specification shall be marked as a FAIL. c. Cable manufacturer, cable model number/type, and NVP d. Tester make & model, serial number, hardware version, and software version. e. Cable ID and project name f. Auto-test specification used g. Overall pass/fail indication h. Date of test F. Cable Test Equipment 1. Contractor shall supply all of the required test equipment used to conduct acceptance tests. 2. Test equipment used under this contract shall be from manufacturers that have a minimum of 5 years experience in producing field test equipment. Manufacturers shall be ISO 9001 certified. 3. Testing equipment shall be UL-verified to meet Level III accuracy. a. The cable installers shall have a copy of this reference in their possession and be familiar with the contents. 4. Testing equipment shall be within the calibration period recommended by the manufacturer. 5. Testing equipment shall have the latest software and firmware installed. 6. Testing equipment of a given type shall be from the same manufacturer, and have compatible electronic results output. 7. Test adapter cables shall be approved by the manufacturer of the test equipment. a. Adapter cables from other sources are not acceptable. b. Adapter cables must be replaced after 1000 tests to ensure accuracy. 8. Test equipment must have a dynamic range of at least 100 dB to minimize measurement uncertainty. 9. Test equipment must be capable of storing full frequency sweep data for all tests and printing color graphical reports for all swept measurements. 10. Test equipment must include S-Band time domain diagnostics for NEXT and return loss (TDNXT and TDRL)for accurate and efficient troubleshooting. 11. Test equipment must be capable of running individual NEXT, return loss, etc measurements in addition to auto tests. Individual tests increase productivity when diagnosing faults. 12. Test equipment must include a library of cable types, sorted by major manufacturer. 13. Test equipment must be able to internally group auto tests and cables in project folders for good records management. a. Test equipment must store at least 1000 auto tests in internal memory. 14. Test equipment must include DSP technology for support of advanced measurements. 15. Test equipment must make swept frequency measurements in compliance with TIA standards. 16. The measurement reference plane of the test equipment shall start immediately at the output of the test equipment interface connector. 17. There shall not be a time domain dead zone of any distance that excludes any part of the link from the measurement. 18. Acceptable testers: a. Fluke DTX CableAnalyzer b. Owner approved equivalent 3.12 CLEANING A. Refer to section 27 02 00. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus COMMUNICATIONS Christi 27 15 00-9 HORIZONTAL CABLING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 3.13 ACCEPTANCE A. Once all work has been completed, test documentation has been submitted and approved, and the Owner is satisfied that all work has been completed in accordance with contract documents, the Owner will notify Contractor in writing of formal acceptance of the system. B. Contractor's RCDD shall warrant in writing that 100% of the installation meets the requirements specified herein. C. Acceptance shall be subject to completion of all work, successful post-installation testing which yields 100% PASS rating, and submittal and approval of full documentation as described above. Tests with the "* PASS" (asterisk)will not be acceptable. 1. These circuits must be repaired to meet"PASS". END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus COMMUNICATIONS Christi 27 15 00- 10 HORIZONTAL CABLING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SECTION 28 05 00 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR FIRE ALARM PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all Work herein. B. The Contract Drawings indicate the extent and general arrangement of the systems. If any departure from the Contract Drawings are deemed necessary by the Contractor, details of such departures and the reasons, therefore, shall be submitted to the Architect for approval as soon as practicable. No such departures shall be made without the prior written approval of the Architect. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Work included under this Contract consists of the furnishing and installation of all equipment and material necessary and required to form the complete and functioning systems in all of its various phases, all as shown on the accompanying Drawings and/or described in these Specifications. The contractor shall review all pertinent drawings, including those of other contracts prior to commencement of Work. B. This Division requires the furnishing and installing of all items Specified herein, indicated on the Drawings or reasonably inferred as necessary for safe and proper operation; including every article, device or accessory(whether or not specifically called for by item) reasonably necessary to facilitate each system's functioning as indicated by the design and the equipment specified. Elements of the work include, but are not limited to, materials, labor, supervision, transportation, storage, equipment, utilities, all required permits, licenses and inspections. All work performed under this Section shall be in accordance with the Project Manual, Drawings and Specifications and is subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract. C. The approximate locations of Electrical items are indicated on the Drawings. These Drawings are not intended to give complete and accurate details in regard to location of outlets, apparatus, etc. Exact locations are to be determined by actual measurements at the building, and will in all cases be subject to the Review of the Owner or Engineer, who reserves the right to make any reasonable changes in the locations indicated without additional cost to the Owner. D. Items specifically mentioned in the Specifications but not shown on the Drawings and/or items shown on Drawings but not specifically mentioned in the Specifications shall be installed by the Contractor under the appropriate section of work as if they were both specified and shown. E. All discrepancies within the Contract Documents discrepancies between the Contract Documents and actual job-site conditions shall be reported to the Owner or Engineer so that they will be resolved prior to the bidding, where this cannot be done at least 7 working days prior to bid; the greater or more costly of the discrepancy shall be bid. All labor and materials required to perform the work described shall be included as part of this Contract. F. It is the intention of this Section of the Specifications to outline minimum requirements to furnish the Owner with a turn-key and fully operating system in cooperation with other trades. G. It is the intent of the above "Scope"to give the Contractor a general outline of the extent of the Work involved; however, it is not intended to include each, and every item required for the Work. Anything omitted from the "Scope" but shown on the Drawings, or specified later, or necessary for a complete and functioning heating, ventilating and air conditioning system shall be considered a part of the overall "Scope". H. The Contractor shall rough-in fixtures and equipment furnished by others from rough-in and placement drawings furnished by others. The Contractor shall make final connection to fixtures and equipment furnished by others. I. Contractor shall participate in the commissioning process; including but not limited to meeting attendance, completion of checklists and participation in functional testing. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 28 05 00- 1 METHODS FOR FIRE ALARM 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents J. Refer to 260313 for demolitions requirements. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. General Conditions B. Supplementary Conditions C. Division One 1.04 COOPERATION WITH TRADES A. Cooperation with trades of adjacent, related, or affected materials or operations shall be considered a part of this work in order to affect timely and accurate placing of work and bring together in proper and correct sequence, the work of such trades. 1.05 REFERENCES A. National Electrical Code (NEC) B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) C. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL) D. Insulated Cable Engineer's Association (ICEA) E. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) F. Institute of Electrical and Electronics' Engineers (IEEE) G. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) H. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) I. International Energy Conservation Code (IECC) 1.06 COMPLETE FUNCTIONING OF WORK A. All work fairly implied as essential to the complete functioning of the electrical systems shown on the Drawings and Specifications shall be completed as part of the work of this Division unless specifically stated otherwise. It is the intention of the Drawings and Specifications to establish the types of the systems, but not set forth each item essential to the functioning of the system. In case of doubt as to the work intended, or in the event of amplification or clarification thereof, the Contractor shall call upon the Architect for supplementary instructions, Drawings, etc. B. Contractor shall review all pertinent Drawings and adjust his work to all conditions shown there on. Discrepancies between Plans, Specifications, and actual field conditions shall be brought to the prompt attention of the Architect. 1. Approximate location of transformers, feeders, branch circuits, outlets, lighting and power panels, outlets for special systems, etc., are indicated on the Drawings. However, the Drawings, do not give complete and accurate detailed locations of such outlets, conduit runs, etc., and exact locations must be determined by actual field measurement. Such locations will, at all times, be subject to the approval of the Architect. 2. Communicate with the Architect and secure his approval of any outlet (light fixture, receptacle, switch, etc.) location about which there may be the least question. Outlets obviously placed in a location not suitable to the finished room or without specific approval, shall be removed and relocated when so directed by the Architect. Location of light fixtures shall be coordinated with reflected ceiling plans. C. Additional coordination with mechanical contractor may be required to allow adequate clearances of mechanical equipment, fixtures and associated appurtenances. Contractor to notify Architect and Engineer of unresolved clearances, conflicts or equipment locations. 1.07 SCHEMATIC NATURE OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The contract documents are schematic in nature in that they are only to establish scope and a minimum level of quality. They are not to be used as actual working construction drawings. The actual working construction drawings shall be the approved shop drawings. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 28 05 00-2 METHODS FOR FIRE ALARM 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 1.08 CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATIONS A. An approved contractor for the work under this division shall be: a. A specialist in this field and have the personnel, experience, training, and skill, and the organization to provide a practical working system. b. Able to furnish evidence of having contracted for and installed not less than 3 systems of comparable size and type that have served their Owners satisfactorily for not less than 3 years. c. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality. Persons performing electrical work shall be required to be licensed. Onsite supervision,journeyman shall have minimum of journeyman license. Helpers, apprentices shall have minimum of apprentice license. 1.09 DATE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. The date of final acceptance shall be the date of owner occupancy, or the date all punch list items have been completed or final payment has been received. Refer to Division One for additional requirements. B. The date of final acceptance shall be documented in writing and signed by the architect, owner and contractor. 1.10 DEFINITIONS AND SYMBOLS A. General Explanation: A substantial amount of construction and Specification language constitutes definitions for terms found in other Contract Documents, including Drawings which must be recognized as diagrammatic and schematic in nature and not completely descriptive of requirements indicated thereon. Certain terms used in Contract Documents are defined generally in this article, unless defined otherwise in Division 1. B. Definitions and explanations of this Section are not necessarily either complete or exclusive but are general for work to the extent not stated more explicitly in another provision of the Contract Documents. C. Indicated: The term "Indicated" is a cross-reference to details, notes or schedules on the Drawings, to other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications and to similar means of recording requirements in Contract Documents. Where such terms as "Shown", "Noted", "Scheduled", "Specified" and "Detailed" are used in lieu of"Indicated", it is for the purpose of helping the reader locate cross-reference material, and no limitation of location is intended except as specifically shown. D. Directed: Where not otherwise explained, terms such as "Directed", "Requested", "Accepted", and "Permitted" mean by the Architect or Engineer. However, no such implied meaning will be interpreted to extend the Architect's or Engineer's responsibility into the Contractor's area of construction supervision. E. Reviewed: Where used in conjunction with the Engineer's response to submittals, requests for information, applications, inquiries, reports and claims by the Contractor the meaning of the term "Reviewed"will be held to limitations of Architect's and Engineer's responsibilities and duties as specified in the General and Supplemental Conditions. In no case will "Reviewed" by Engineer be interpreted as a release of the Contractor from responsibility to fulfill the terms and requirements of the Contract Documents. F. Furnish: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term "Furnish" is used to mean supply and deliver to the project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, etc., as applicable in each instance. G. Install: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term "Install" is used to describe operations at the project site including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protection, cleaning and similar operations, as applicable in each instance. H. Provide: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term "Provide" is used to mean "Furnish and Install", complete and ready for intended use, as applicable in each instance. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 28 05 00-3 METHODS FOR FIRE ALARM 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop I. Installer: Entity (person or firm)engaged by the Contractor or its subcontractor or Sub-contractor for performance of a particular unit of work at the project site, including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protection, cleaning and similar operations, as applicable in each instance. It is a general requirement that such entities (Installers) be expert in the operations they are engaged to perform. J. Imperative Language: Used generally in Specifications. Except as otherwise indicated, requirements expressed imperatively are to be performed by the Contractor. For clarity of reading at certain locations, contrasting subjective language is used to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor, or when so noted by other identified installers or entities. K. Minimum Quality/Quantity: In every instance, the quality level or quantity shown or specified is intended as minimum quality level or quantity of work to be performed or provided. Except as otherwise specifically indicated, the actual work may either comply exactly with that minimum (within specified tolerances) or may exceed that minimum within reasonable tolerance limits. In complying with requirements, indicated or scheduled numeric values are either minimums or maximums as noted or as appropriate for the context of the requirements. Refer instances of uncertainty to Owner or Engineer via a request for information (RFI) for decision before proceeding. L. Abbreviations and Symbols: The language of Specifications and other Contract Documents including Drawings is of an abbreviated type in certain instances and implies words and meanings which will be appropriately interpreted. Actual word abbreviations of a self- explanatory nature have been included in text of Specifications and Drawings. Specific abbreviations and symbols have been established, principally for lengthy technical terminology and primarily in conjunction with coordination of Specification requirements with notations on Drawings and in Schedules. These are frequently defined in Section at first instance of use or on a Legend and Symbol Drawing. Trade and industry association names and titles of generally recognized industry standards are frequently abbreviated. Singular words will be interpreted as plural and plural words will be interpreted as singular where applicable and where full context of Contract Documents so indicate. Except as otherwise indicated, graphic symbols and abbreviations used on Drawings and in Specifications are those recognized in construction industry for indicated purposes. Where not otherwise noted symbols and abbreviations are defined by ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook, chapter 39 "Abbreviations and Symbols", ASME and ASPE published standards. 1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and other information needed for identification. B. Deliver products to the project at such time as the project is ready to receive the equipment, pipe or duct properly protected from incidental damage and weather damage. C. Damaged equipment shall be promptly removed from the site and new, undamaged equipment shall be installed in its place promptly with no additional charge to the Owner. 1.12 SUBMITTALS A. Coordinate with Division 01 for submittal timetable requirements, unless noted otherwise within thirty(30) days after the Contract is awarded. The Contractor shall submit an electronic copy of a complete set of shop drawings and complete data covering each item of equipment or material. The submittal of each item requiring a submittal must be received by the Architect or Engineer within the above thirty day period. The Architect or Engineer shall not be responsible for any delays or costs incurred due to excessive shop drawing review time for submittals received after the thirty (30) day time limit. The Architect and Engineer will retain a copy of all shop drawings for their files. All literature pertaining to items subject to Shop Drawing submittal shall be submitted at one time. Submittals shall be placed in one electronic file in PDF 8.0 format and bookmarked for individual specification sections. Individual electronic files of submittals for individual specifications shall not be permitted. Each submittal shall include the following items: DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 28 05 00-4 METHODS FOR FIRE ALARM 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 1. A cover sheet with the names and addresses of the Project, Architect, MEP Engineer, General Contractor and the Subcontractor making the submittal. The cover sheet shall also contain the section number covering the item or items submitted and the item nomenclature or description. 2. An index page with a listing of all data included in the Submittal. 3. A list of variations page with a listing all variations, including unfurnished or additional required accessories, items or other features, between the submitted equipment and the specified equipment. If there are no variations, then this page shall state "NO VARIATIONS". Where variations affect the work of other Contractors, then the Contractor shall certify on this page that these variations have been fully coordinated with the affected Contractors and that all expenses associated with the variations will be paid by the submitting Contractor. This page will be signed by the submitting Contractor. 4. Equipment information including manufacturer's name and designation, size, performance and capacity data as applicable. All applicable Listings, Labels, Approvals and Standards shall be clearly indicated. 5. Dimensional data and scaled drawings as applicable to show that the submitted equipment will fit the space available with all required Code and maintenance clearances clearly indicated and labeled at a minimum scale of 1/4" = 1'-0", as required to demonstrate that the alternate or substituted product will fit in the space available. 6. Identification of each item of material or equipment matching that indicated on the Drawings. 7. Sufficient pictorial, descriptive and diagrammatic data on each item to show its conformance with the Drawings and Specifications. Any options or special requirements or accessories shall be so indicated. All applicable information shall be clearly indicated with arrows or another approved method. 8. Additional information as required in other Sections of this Division. 9. Certification by the General Contractor and Subcontractor that the material submitted is in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications, signed and dated in long hand. Submittals that do not comply with the above requirements shall be returned to the Contractor and shall be marked "REVISE AND RESUBMIT". B. Refer to Division 1 for additional information on shop drawings and submittals. C. Equipment and materials submittals and shop drawings will be reviewed for compliance with design concept only. It will be assumed that the submitting Contractor has verified that all items submitted can be installed in the space allotted. Review of shop drawings and submittals shall not be considered as a verification or guarantee of measurements or building conditions. D. Where shop drawings and submittals are marked "REVIEWED", the review of the submittal does not indicate that submittals have been checked in detail nor does it in any way relieve the Contractor from his responsibility to furnish material and perform work as required by the Contract Documents. E. Shop drawings shall be reviewed and returned to the Contractor with one of the following categories indicated: 1. REVIEWED: Contractor need take no further submittal action, shall include this submittal in the O&M manual and may order the equipment submitted on. 2. REVIEWED AS NOTED: Contractor shall submit a letter verifying that required exceptions to the submittal have been received and complied with including additional accessories or coordination action as noted, and shall include this submittal and compliance letter in the O&M manual. The contractor may order the equipment submitted on at the time of the returned submittal providing the Contractor complies with the exceptions noted. 3. and/or drawings. Contractor shall not order equipment that is not approved. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. 4. REVISE AND RESUBMIT: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material, equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is marked revise and resubmit, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the Specifications and/or provide as noted on previous shop drawings. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 28 05 00-5 METHODS FOR FIRE ALARM 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Contractor shall not order equipment marked revise and resubmit. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. 5. CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION REQUIRED: Contractor shall resubmit submittal on material, equipment or method of installation. The Contractor's stamp is required stating the submittal meets all conditions of the contract documents. The stamp shall be signed by the General Contractor. The submittal will not be reviewed if the stamp is not placed and signed on all shop drawings. 6. MANUFACTURER NOT AS SPECIFIED: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material, equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is marked manufacturer not as specified, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the specifications. Contractor shall not order equipment where submittal is marked manufacturer not as specified. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. F. Materials and equipment which are purchased or installed without shop drawing review shall be at the risk of the Contractor and the cost for removal and replacement of such materials and equipment and related work which is judged unsatisfactory by the Owner or Engineer for any reason shall be at the expense of the Contractor. The responsible Contractor shall remove the material and equipment noted above and replace with specified equipment or material at his own expense when directed in writing by the Architect or Engineer. G. Shop Drawing Submittals shall be complete and checked prior to submission to the Engineer for review. H. Furnish detailed shop drawings, descriptive literature, physical data and a specification critique for each section indicating "compliance" and/or"variations"for the following items: 1. Fire Alarm System 2. Intrusion System I. Refer to each specification section for additional requirements. 1.13 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Division 1 and in addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, include the following information for equipment items: 1. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replacement parts. 2. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions. 3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions. 4. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules. 1.14 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Prepare coordination drawings to a scale of 1/4"=1'-0" or larger; detailing major elements, components, and systems of mechanical equipment and materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and building components. Indicate locations where space is limited for installation and access and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the Work, including (but not necessarily limited to)the following: 1. Indicate the proposed locations of pipe, duct, equipment, and other materials. Include the following: a. Wall and type locations. b. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation. c. Locations of light fixtures and sprinkler heads. d. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, including tube removal, filter removal, and space for equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance. e. Equipment connections and support details. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 28 05 00-6 METHODS FOR FIRE ALARM 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop f. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations. g. Routing of storm and sanitary sewer piping. h. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations. i. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases. j. Valve stem movement. k. Structural floor, wall and roof opening sizes and details. 2. Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction. 3. Prepare floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations. 4. Prepare reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installations, air distribution devices, light fixtures, communication systems components, and other ceiling-mounted items. B. This Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of all items that will affect the installation of the work of this Division. This coordination shall include, but not be limited to: voltage, ampacity, capacity, electrical and piping connections, space requirements, sequence of construction, building requirements and special conditions. C. By submitting shop drawings on the project, this Contractor is indicating that all necessary coordination has been completed and that the systems, products and equipment submitted can be installed in the building and will operate as specified and intended, in full coordination with all other Contractors and Subcontractors. 1.15 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Prepare Record Documents in accordance with the requirements of Division 00 and Division 01, in addition to the requirements specified in Division 26 and Division 28. B. The Contractor shall maintain a separate set of clearly and legibly marked Record Drawings on the job site to record all changes and modifications, including, but not limited to the following: work details, alterations to meet site conditions, and changes made by "Change Order" notices. Mark the drawings with colored pencil(s). These shall be available for review by the Owner, Architect or Engineer during the entire construction stage. C. The Record Drawings shall be updated concurrently as construction progresses, and in no case less frequently than a daily basis. They shall indicate accurate dimensions for all buried or concealed work, precise locations of all concealed pipe or duct, locations of all concealed valves, controls and devices and any deviations from the work shown on the Construction Documents. All dimensions shall include at least two dimensions to permanent structure points. D. Engage the services of a Land Surveyor or Professional Engineer registered in the state in which the project is located as specified herein to record the locations and invert elevations of underground installations. E. If the Contractor does not keep an accurate set of Record Drawings, the pay request may be altered or delayed at the request of the Architect. Delivery of Record Documents is a condition of final acceptance. Record Drawings shall be furnished in addition to Shop Drawings. F. The Contractor shall submit an electronic copy of the record documents in PDF format and one (1)full size set of Record Drawing prints to the Architect or Engineer for review prior to scheduling the final inspection at the completion of the work. The drawings shall have the name(s) and seal(s)of the Engineer(s) removed or blanked out and shall be clearly marked and signed on each sheet as follows: CERTIFIED RECORD DRAWINGS DATE: (NAME OF GENERAL CONTRACTOR) BY: (SIGNATURE) (NAME OF SUBCONTRACTOR) BY: (SIGNATURE) DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 28 05 00-7 METHODS FOR FIRE ALARM 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 1.16 CERTIFICATIONS AND TEST REPORTS A. Submit a detailed schedule for completion and testing of each system indicating scheduled dates for completion of system installation and outlining tests to be performed and schedule date for each test. This detailed completion and test schedule shall be submittal at least 90 days before the projected Project completion date. B. Test result reporting forms shall be submitted for review no later than the date of the detailed schedule submitted. C. Submit 4 copies of all certifications and test reports to the Architect or Engineer for review adequately in advance of completion of the Work to allow for remedial action as required to correct deficiencies discovered in equipment and systems. D. Certifications and test reports to be submitted shall include, but not be limited to those items outlined in Section of Division 26. 1.17 MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Coordinate with Division 1 for maintenance manual requirements, unless noted otherwise bind together in "D ring type" binders by National model no. 79-883 or equal, binders shall be large enough to allow'/" of spare capacity. Three (3)sets of all approved shop drawing submittals, fabrication drawings, bulletins, maintenance instructions, operating instructions and parts exploded views and lists for each and every piece of equipment furnished under this Specification. All sections shall be typed and indexed into sections and labeled for easy reference and shall utilize the individual specification section numbers shown in the Electrical Specifications as an organization guideline. Bulletins containing information about equipment that is not installed on the project shall be properly marked up or stripped and reassembled. All pertinent information required by the Owner for proper operation and maintenance of equipment supplied by Division 26 shall be clearly and legibly set forth in memoranda that shall, likewise, be bound with bulletins. B. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Special Project Conditions, in addition to the requirements specified in Division 26 and Division 2, include the following information for equipment items: 1. Identifying names, name tags designations and locations for all equipment. 2. Reviewed shop drawing submittals with exceptions noted compliance letter. 3. Fabrication drawings. 4. Equipment and device bulletins and data sheets clearly highlighted to show equipment installed on the project and including performance curves and data as applicable, i.e., description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and model numbers of replacement parts. 5. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions. 6. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions, servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules. 7. Equipment name plate data. 8. Wiring diagrams. 9. Exploded parts views and parts lists for all equipment and devices. 10. Color coding charts for all painted equipment and conduit. 11. Location and listing of all spare parts and special keys and tools furnished to the Owner. 12. Furnish recommended lubrication schedule for all required lubrication points with listing of type and approximate amount of lubricant required. C. Refer to Division 1 for additional information on Operating and Maintenance Manuals. D. Operating and Maintenance Manuals shall be turned over to the Owner or Engineer a minimum of 14 working days prior to the beginning of the operator training period. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 28 05 00-8 METHODS FOR FIRE ALARM 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 1.18 OPERATOR TRAINING A. The Contractor shall furnish the services of factory trained specialists to instruct the Owner's operating personnel. The Owner's operator training shall include 12 hours of onsite training in three 4 hour shifts. B. Before proceeding with the instruction of Owner Personnel, prepare a typed outline in triplicate, listing the subjects that will be covered in this instruction, and submit the outline for review by the Owner. At the conclusion of the instruction period obtain the signature of each person being instructed on each copy of the reviewed outline to signify that he has a proper understanding of the operation and maintenance of the systems and resubmit the signed outlines. C. Refer to other Division 26 Sections for additional Operator Training requirements. 1.19 SITE VISITATION A. Visit the site of the proposed construction in order to fully understand the facilities, difficulties and restriction attending the execution of the work. B. Before submitting a bid, it will be necessary for each Contractor whose work is involved to visit the site and ascertain for himself the conditions to be met therein in installing his work and make due provision for same in his bid. It will be assumed that this Contractor in submitting his bid has visited the premises and that his bid covers all work necessary to properly install the equipment shown. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with this requirement shall not be considered justification for the omission or faulty installation of any work covered by these Specifications and Drawings. C. Understand the existing utilities from which services will be supplied; verify locations of utility services and determine requirements for connections. D. Determine in advance that equipment and materials proposed for installation fit into the confines indicated. 1.20 WARRANTY A. The undertaking of the work described in this Division shall be considered equivalent to the issuance, as part of this work, of a specific guarantee extending one year beyond the date of completion of work and acceptance by Owner, against defects in materials and workmanship. Materials, appliances and labor necessary to effect repairs and replacement so as to maintain said work in good functioning order shall be provided as required. Replacements necessitated by normal wear in use or by Owner's abuse are not included under this guarantee. B. All normal and extended warranties shall include parts, labor, miscellaneous materials, travel time, incidental expenses, freight/shipping, refrigerant, oils, lubricants, belts, filters and any expenses related to service call required to diagnose warranty problems. 1.21 TRANSFER OF ELECTRONIC FILES A. Project documents are not intended or represented to be suitable for reuse by Architect/Owner or others on extensions of this project or on any other project. Any such reuse or modification without written verification or adaptation by Engineer, as appropriate for the specific purpose intended, will be at Architect/Owner's risk and without liability or legal exposure to Engineer or its consultants from all claims, damages, losses and expense, including attorney's fees arising out of or resulting thereof. B. Because data stored in electric media format can deteriorate or be modified inadvertently, or otherwise without authorization of the data's creator, the party receiving the electronic files agrees that it will perform acceptance tests or procedures within sixty (60) days of receipt, after which time the receiving party shall be deemed to have accepted the data thus transferred to be acceptable. Any errors detected within the sixty(60) day acceptance period will be corrected by the party delivering the electronic files. Engineer is not responsible for maintaining documents stored in electronic media format after acceptance by the Architect/Owner. C. When transferring documents in electronic media format, Engineer makes no representations as to the long term compatibility, usability or readability of documents resulting from the use of DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 28 05 00-9 METHODS FOR FIRE ALARM 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop software application packages, operating systems, or computer hardware differing from those used by Engineer at the beginning of the Project. D. Any reuse or modifications will be Contractor's sole risk and without liability or legal exposure to Architect, Engineer or any consultant. E. The Texas Board of Architectural Examiners (TBAE) has stated that it is in violation of Texas law for persons other than the Architect of record to revise the Architectural drawings without the Architect's written consent. 1. It is agreed that"MEP" hard copy or computer-generated documents will not be issued to any other party except directly to the Architect/Owner. The contract documents are contractually copyrighted and cannot be used for any other project or purpose except as specifically indicated in AIA B-141 Standard Form of Agreement Between Architect and Owner. 2. If the client, Architect or Owner of the project requires electronic media for"record purposes", then AutoCAD/ Revit documents will be prepared by Engineer on electronic media such as removable memory devices, flash drives or CD's. These documents can also be submitted via file transfer protocols. AutoCAD/ Revit files will be submitted with all title block references intact to permit the end user to only view and plot the drawings. Revisions will not be permitted in this configuration. 3. At the Architect/Owner's request, Engineer will assist the Contractor in the preparation of the submittals and prepare one copy of AutoCAD/ Revit files on electronic media or submit through file transfer protocols. The electronic media will be prepared with all indicia of documents ownership removed. The electronic media will be prepared in a ".rvt"or".dwg" format to permit the end user to revise the drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SUBSTITUTIONS A. The names and manufacturers and model numbers have been used in the Contract documents to establish types of equipment and standards of quality. Where more than one manufacturer is named for a specific item of equipment, only one of the specified manufacturers will be considered for approval. Where only one manufacturer is mentioned with the phrase "or approved equal", Contractor may submit an alternate manufacturer for consideration, provided the following conditions are met: 1. Submit alternate equipment with complete descriptive data in shop drawing form. Provide sample of equipment upon request for review by Architect. Samples will be returned if requested in writing. 2. Alternate equipment must be equal from the standpoint of materials, construction and performance. 3. Alternate submittal must be presented to the Engineer/Architect ten (10) days prior to bid date for approval. B. The Architect and Engineer shall be the sole judge of quality and equivalence of equipment, materials and methods. 2.02 UL LISTING A. All materials and products used on this project shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories. 2.03 ACCESS DOORS A. Wherever access is required in walls or ceilings to concealed junction boxes, pull boxes, equipment, etc., installed under this Division, furnish a hinged access door and frame with flush latch handle to another Division for installation. Doors shall be as follows: 1. Plaster Surfaces: Milcor Style K. 2. Ceramic Tile Surfaces: Milcor Style M. 3. Drywall Surfaces: Milcor Style DW. 4. Install panels only in locations approved by the Architect. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 28 05 00- 10 METHODS FOR FIRE ALARM 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 2.04 ESCUTCHEONS A. Provide heavy chrome or nickel plated plates, of approved pattern, on conduit passing through walls, floors and ceilings in finished areas. Where conduit passes through a sleeve, no point of the conduit shall touch the building construction. Caulk around such conduit with sufficient layers of two hour rated firesafing by Thermafiber 4.0 P.C.F. density, U.S.G. fire test 4/11/78 and seal off openings between conduit and sleeves with non-hardening mastic prior to application of escutcheon plate. Escutcheons shall be Gravler Sure-Lock, or approved equal. 2.05 SPACE LIMITATIONS A. Equipment shall be chosen which shall properly fit into the physical space provided and shown on the drawings, allowing ample room for access, servicing, removal and replacement of parts, etc. Adequate space shall be allowed for clearances in accordance with Code requirements. Physical dimensions and arrangement of equipment shall be subject to the approval of the Architect. 2.06 PAINTING A. All factory assembled equipment for electrical work, except light fixtures, that normally is delivered with a factory applied finish shall be delivered with a hard surface factory applied finish such as baked-on machinery enamel which will not require additional field painting. The finish shall consist of not less than 2 coats of medium gray color paint USA No. 61 Munsell Notation 8-3G, 6. 10/0.54 enamel. This Contractor shall protect this finish from damage due to construction operations until acceptance of the building. He shall be responsible for satisfactorily restoring any such finishes or replacing equipment that becomes stained or damaged. 2.07 RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION A. Conduit Systems: Provide adequate marking of major conduit which is exposed or concealed in accessible spaces to distinguish each run as either a power or signal/communication conduit. Use red banding with black lettering except as otherwise indicated. Provide self-adhesive or snap-on type plastic markers. Locate markers at ends of conduit runs, on pull boxes, on junction boxes and other control devices, near items of equipment served by the conductors, at points where conduit passes through walls or floors or enters non-accessible construction and at spacings of not more than 50 feet along each run of conduit. B. Underground Cable Identification: Bury a continuous, preprinted, bright colored plastic ribbon cable marker with each underground cable (or group of cables), regardless of whether conductors are in conduit, duct bank, or direct buried. Locate each directly over cables, 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. C. Identification of Equipment: 1. All major equipment shall have a manufacturer's label identifying the manufacturer's address, equipment model and serial numbers, equipment size, and other pertinent data. Care shall be taken not to obliterate this nameplate in any way. 2. Prohibited Markings: Markings which are intended to identify the manufacturer, vendor, or other source from which the material has been obtained are prohibited for installation within public, tenant, or common areas within the project. Also, prohibited are materials or devices which bear evidence that markings or insignias have been removed. Certification, testing (example, Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.), and approval labels are exceptions to this requirement. 3. Warning Signs: Provide warning signs where there is hazardous exposure associated with access to or operation of facilities. Provide text of sufficient clarity and lettering of sufficient size to convey adequate information at each location; mount permanently in an appropriate and effective location. Comply with recognized industry standards for color and design. 4. Operational Tags: Where needed for proper and adequate information on operation and maintenance of electrical system, provide tags of plasticized card stock, either preprinted or hand printed. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 28 05 00- 11 METHODS FOR FIRE ALARM 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING A. Trenching and backfilling and other earthwork operations required to install the facilities specified herein shall conform to the applicable requirements of Division 2 (95% of maximum standard density). Where trenching or excavation is required in improved areas, the backfill shall be compacted to a condition equal to that of adjacent undisturbed earth and the surface of the area restored to the condition existing prior to trenching or excavating operations. Provide a minimum of 3"of sand underneath all conduits. The plans indicate information pertaining to surface and sub-surface obstructions; however, this information is not guaranteed. Should obstructions be encountered whether or not shown, the Contractor shall alter routing of new work, reroute existing lines, remove obstructions where permitted, or otherwise perform whatever work is necessary to satisfy the purpose of new work and leave existing surfaces and structures in a satisfactory and serviceable condition. All work shall comply with OSHA Standards. 3.02 WORKMANSHIP AND CONCEALMENT A. The work of this Section shall be performed by workman skilled in their trade. Installation shall be consistent in completeness whether concealed or exposed. Each item of electrical work shall be concealed in walls, chases, under floors and above ceilings except: 1. Where shown to be exposed. 2. Where exposure is necessary to the proper function. 3.03 SLEEVES, CUTTING AND PATCHING A. This section shall be responsible for placing sleeves for all conduit passing through walls, partitions, sound walls, beams, floors, roof, etc. Sleeves through below-grade walls shall use water-tight fitting manufactured by O-Z/Gedney. B. All cutting and patching will be done under another Division, but this Section will be responsible for timely performance of this work and layout of holes and setting sleeves. C. All un-used sleeves shall be sealed with 2 hour UL approved fire sealant manufactured by"3M" or approved equal. D. Refer to 26 05 33 for additional requirements. 3.04 CONTROL PANELS A. Install all Panels in accordance with the National Electrical Code, industry standards and as shown on the drawings. B. Panels mounted in telecom, MDF, IDF, mechanical/electrical rooms shall be mounted at a working height not requiring a ladder when wall space is available. Installation of these devices at greater elevations shall be approved by the Engineer. Contractor shall provide a coordination sketch of each mechanical/electrical room noting locations and mounting heights of all electrical devices (note bottom and top elevations) shown to be installed. Sketches shall be provided to the Engineer for review and the general contractor for coordination with other trades working in these rooms. 3.05 CLEANING A. Touch-up and refinish scratches and marred surfaces on panels. 3.06 CORROSIVE AREAS A. In areas of a corrosive nature, which include but are not limited to the following: pool equipment rooms, cooling towers and areas subject to salt air, etc., provide NEMA 4X stainless steel or fiberglass reinforced enclosures for contactors, panel boards, controllers, starters, disconnects and materials used as supporting means (i.e. plastibond unistrut, pipe, fittings). The use of spray on coating may be acceptable in some applications. 3.07 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Tests and inspection requirements shall be coordinated with Division 01. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 28 05 00- 12 METHODS FOR FIRE ALARM 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop B. Date for final acceptance test shall be sufficiently in advance of completion date of contract to permit alterations or adjustments necessary to achieve proper functioning of equipment prior to contract completion date. C. Conduct re-tests as directed by Architect on portions of work or equipment altered or adjusted as determined to be necessary by final acceptance test. No resultant delay or consumption of time as a result of such necessary re-test beyond contract completion date shall relieve Contractor of his responsibility under contract. D. Put equipment into service under normal conditions, collectively and separately, as may be required to determine satisfactory operation. Demonstrate equipment to operate in accordance with requirements of these specifications. Perform tests in the presence of Architect. Furnish instruments and personnel required for tests. E. Final Inspection 1. At the time designated by the Architect, the entire system shall be inspected by the Architect and Engineer. The contractor or his representative shall be present at this inspection. 2. Panels shall be cleaned and in operating condition. 3. Certificates and documents required hereinbefore shall be in order and presented to the Architect prior to inspection. 4. Panel covers,junction box covers, etc., shall be removed for visual inspection of the wire, bus bars, etc. 5. After the inspection, any items which are noted as needing to be changed or corrected in order to comply with these specifications and the drawings shall be accomplished without delay. END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus BASIC MATERIALS AND Christi 28 05 00- 13 METHODS FOR FIRE ALARM 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SECTION 28 46 09 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM WITH VOICE EVACUATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. The contractor shall provide a complete distributed microprocessor based 24VDC, electrically supervised, MULTIPLEX, integrated fire alarm with voice evacuation system as specified and required by applicable codes. The system shall include, but not be limited to, all control equipment, remote transponders, printer, power supplies, signal initiating and signaling devices, conduit, wire, fittings, and all other accessories required to provide a complete and operable system. B. All equipment, materials, accessories, devices, etc. covered by the specifications shall be new and unused and shall be U.L. listed for their intended use. C. The system shall operate as a non-coded, continuous sounding system which will sound alarm devices until manually silenced, as herein specified. D. The system shall be wired as a Class B supervised system for all circuits. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ADA Standards -2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design; 2010. B. ICC (IBC)- International Building Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. C. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. D. NFPA 72- National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code; Most Recent Edition Cited by Referring Code or Reference Standard. E. NFPA 90A- Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; 2024. F. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. G. NFPA 262 -Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables for Use in Air-Handling Spaces; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. H. UL 38- Standard for Manual Signaling Boxes for Fire Alarm Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. I. UL 228-Safety Door Closers-Holders, with or without Integral Smoke Detectors; 2008. J. UL 268-Standard for Smoke Detectors for Fire Alarm Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. K. UL 268A-Standard for Smoke Detectors for Duct Application; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. L. UL 464-Standard for Audible Signaling Devices for Fire Alarm and Signaling Systems, Including Accessories; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. M. UL 521 -Standard for Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. N. UL 864-Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. O. UL 1638-Standard for Visible Signaling Devices for Fire Alarm and Signaling Systems, Including Accessories; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. P. UL 1971 -Standard for Signaling Devices for the Hearing Impaired; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. Q. UL 2034 -Standard for Single and Multiple Station Carbon Monoxide Alarms; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus FIRE ALARM SYSTEM WITH Christi 28 46 09- 1 VOICE EVACUATION 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop R. UL 2075-Standard for Gas and Vapor Detectors and Sensors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.03 INSTALLING CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY A. The installing fire alarm contractor is responsible for the design of a code compliant system, which meets the intent of all State and Local Authority Having Jurisdiction Codes and their adopted amendments along all permitting of such plans and associated permit fees. Reference and coordinate with all contract specifications and plans. 1.04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Provide one of the following manufacturers: 1. Notifier Fire Systems Inspire Series 2. Siemens Cerberus Pro Modular 3. Edwards System Technology(EST 4) 4. Silent Knight Farenhyt IFP 2100 ECS Series B. Alternate Manufacturers 1. Equipment from other manufacturer's or supplier's may be considered as an equal to that specified provided that completely marked and identified catalog sheets of all proposed equipment is provided to the architect/engineer for review ten (10)days prior to the date of bid for evaluation. In addition, a list of the contractor's qualifications and any exceptions to the specifications must be provided for review. Approval for any such substitution of equipment must be obtained in writing from the architect/engineer for five (5) days prior to bid. 1.05 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Contractor Qualifications: 1. The equipment supplier shall be an authorized and designated representative of the Fire Alarm Manufacturer to sell, install, and service the proposed manufacturer's equipment. 2. The equipment supplier and installing contractor shall be licensed by the State Fire Marshal to sell, install, and service fire alarm systems as required by State Insurance Code. 3. The installing contractor and/or equipment supplier shall have on his staff a minimum of three (3) installation superintendents who are licensed by the State Fire Marshall's office for such purpose and under whose supervision installation, final connections, and check out will take place as required by the State Insurance Code. 4. The installing contractor or equipment supplier shall have on staff a minimum of one (1) certified NICET Level III state licensed fire alarm planner under whose supervision system design shall take place. 5. The installing contractor shall provide 24 hour, 365 days per year emergency service with qualified and state licensed service technicians. 6. The installing contractor shall have been actively engaged in the business of selling, installing, and servicing fire alarm systems for at least ten (10) years. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. The installing contractor and/or equipment manufacturer shall provide complete and detailed shop drawings and include: 1. Control panel configuration including wiring and interconnection schematics. 2. Complete point to point wiring diagram showing terminal connections to all system devices. 3. Riser wiring diagram and associated zoning/addressing configurations with associated conduit sizes. 4. Complete floor plan drawings locating all devices associated with the fire alarm system. Floor plan drawings shall include conduit and wiring routing complete with conduit sizing and number of conductors by type. Floor plans shall be on AutoCAD v.12. 5. Factory data sheets on each piece of equipment to be used and so marked as to model, dimensions, size, voltage, and configuration. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus FIRE ALARM SYSTEM WITH Christi 28 46 09-2 VOICE EVACUATION 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 6. Detailed system description in this specification format describing system functions and operation. All specification variations and deviations shall be clearly noted and marked. 7. Complete Bill of Material for reference. 8. Programming matrix defining all input/output functions and zoning. 9. Power supply and battery calculations. 10. A written certification from the manufacturer stating that the distributor is authorized to sell, service and install the proposed fire alarm system. B. Submittal shall include documentation confirming all qualifications have been met. Submittals without qualification documentation shall be returned "Revise and Resubmit". C. All submittal data will be in bound form with contractor's name, supplier's name, project name, and state fire alarm license number adequately identified. 1.07 COORDINATION A. It shall be the responsibility of the installing contractor to coordinate all requirements surrounding installation of the fire alarm system with all trades including, but, not exclusive of: elevator, electrical contractor, sprinkler contractor, and HVAC/controls contractor and intercom system. Adequate coordination shall be provided to insure proper installation and interface to all peripheral items required to interact with the fire alarm and communication system to provide a complete and functional life safety system. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL OPERATION A. ALARM DETECTION 1. When a fire alarm condition is detected via the main fire control panel by any of the system alarm initiating devices, the following functions shall occur: a. The system common alarm LED on the CPU Module shall flash The internal audible trouble device shall sound Acknowledging the alarm condition shall silence the audible trouble device and revert the flashing common alarm LED's to a steady state b. A multi-character back-lit LCD Display shall indicate all applicable information associated with the alarm condition including: zone, device type, device location, and time of alarm Location and zoning messages shall be custom field programmed to respective premises c. Any remote annunciator LCD display associated with the alarm zone shall be activated as herein specified d. All automatic events programmed to the alarm point shall be executed and the associated indicating devices and/or outputs activated e. Alarm tones shall sound throughout the facility. Upon expiration of the alert tone, a digitized predetermined voice evacuation message shall be automatically transmitted throughout the facility The system shall have the capability to generate multiple distinct digital messages as determined by event initiated programs f. Activate all visual alarm notification devices throughout the facility g. Unlock all electrically locked doors h. De-activate HVAC systems over 2,000 cfm i. Release all smoke doors, fire doors, fire coiling doors, fire smoke dampers and fire shutters. B. System Trouble Detection 1. When a trouble condition is detected by the CPU, one of the system initiating, alarm or SLC circuits, the following functions shall immediately occur: a. The system trouble LED on the CPU module shall flash and the internal audible trouble device shall sound. Acknowledgment of the trouble condition shall silence the audible trouble device and cause all trouble LED's to illuminate steady. b. The multi-character alphanumeric LCD annunciator shall display all applicable information via the alphanumeric display associated with the respective trouble condition and its location. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus FIRE ALARM SYSTEM WITH Christi 28 46 09-3 VOICE EVACUATION 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop c. The system common trouble indicator on associated remote annunciators shall be illuminated as specified herein. C. Auxiliary Control 1. All designated "non-silenceable" auxiliary control functions shall remain in operation (even upon silencing of audible alarms) until such time as the control panel is cleared and reset manually (i.e. fan control outputs, central station interface, elevator recall interface, etc.). 2. Activation of duct smoke detectors associated fans shall shutdown their respective units immediately in addition to identifying the condition as herein specified. Duct detectors shall be programmed as a supervisory condition per NFPA 72. D. System Supervisory Detection 1. When a supervisory condition is detected by the fire alarm control panel, the following functions shall occur: a. The fire alarm control panel supervisory indicator shall flash and the internal audible device shall sound Acknowledgment of the supervisory condition shall silence the audible device and cause the supervisory indicator to illuminate steady b. The multi-character liquid crystal display shall display all applicable information associated with the respective supervisory condition. c. Display the system status change on the remote annunciators E. Remote Off-site Monitoring 1. The remote off-site monitoring system shall transmit point specific alarm, trouble and supervisory signals to an Approved Central Supervising Station (Central Station connection, phone lines or cellular connectivity service provided by Owner). F. Fire Drill Control 1. Provide a fire drill switch located on the Fire Alarm Control Panel. When activated, this switch will activate all horns and visual devices (strobes)for a fire drill. It shall not release fire shutter, shut down air handling equipment or recall elevators. If a fire alarm condition is detected, the system shall operate as defined in part A- "Alarm Detection" of this section. 2.02 ZONING A. The system shall have the inherent capability to employ"Intelligent" smoke detectors and addressable interface devices capable of being recognized and annunciated at the main control panel on an individual basis. All zoning/device location information shall be totally field programmable to exact job requirements as approved by the architect/engineer. B. The system shall utilize remote amplifier cabinets for distributed voice communications (if needed), notification appliance circuits, and auxiliary control output circuits. Remote transponder panels shall communicate with the main CPU via the SLC data loop and be capable of being intermixed on the same loop as intelligent smoke detection and control modules. 2.03 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL A. The fire alarm control panel shall be provided with adequate number of SLC points to the building plus 50% spare. The control panel shall be modular in design utilizing DISTRIBUTED solid state MICROPROCESSORS and be capable of future expansion. The microprocessor based CPU shall be completely FIELD PROGRAMMABLE. CPU module shall provide for programmable non-volatile RAM memory utilizing integral lithium based memory IC chips.All circuitry shall be U.L. listed for power-limited application. System shall be capable of being networked for future expansion. B. Central Processing Unit Module (CPU) 1. The CPU shall contain and execute all custom time control functions or control-by-event programs for specified events including 'Holiday' exceptions. Time control events/programs shall be automatically overridden by priority fire alarm events. All programs shall be held in non-volatile programmable memory and shall not be lost even if both system primary and secondary power failure occurs. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus FIRE ALARM SYSTEM WITH Christi 28 46 09-4 VOICE EVACUATION 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 2. System CPU shall also provide for non-alarm points for non-fire, low priority building functions. The CPU shall provide capability of multi-stage signaling, tornado warning, emergency radio communication enhancement system, positive alarm sequencing as well as remote control system operation. C. Display Interface Board (DIA) 1. The DIA shall provide a multi-character back-lit, super-twist Liquid Crystal Display(LCD). It shall provide Light-Emitting Diodes (LED's)for AC POWER; SYSTEM ALARM; SYSTEM TROUBLE; DISPLAY TROUBLE; and DISABLE. 2. The DIA shall provide a 25-key membrane keypad with control capability to command all system functions, status readouts, manual control action, and entry of any alphabetic or numeric information. The keypad shall include means to enter multiple five digit passwords to prevent unauthorized manual control or programming. D. Control Switches 1. Acknowledge/step Switch 2. Signal Silence Switch 3. System Reset Switch 4. System Test Switch 5. Lamp Test E. System Outputs 1. The system shall provide the following outputs: a. One port for lap top and/or modem b. One port for supervised remote LCD annunciators (RS-485) F. Loop Interface (SLC) 1. The CPU shall communicate and provide power to all devices on its loop over a single pair of wires. The CPU shall receive digital/ANALOG information from all "intelligent" detectors and shall process this information to determine normal, alarm, trouble, and sensitivity conditions. The analog information may be used for automatic test and determination of maintenance requirements, and be U.L. listed for such use. The CPU module shall individually monitor all "intelligent" detectors for sensitivity variation initiating a trouble condition should detector sensitivity"drift" become excessive. The system control unit shall have the capability to remotely read each detector's sensitivity in % obscuration, and if need be, electronically adjust the detector sensitivity as required for existing conditions within U.L. recommended limits. In addition, the system shall incorporate a "day/night" sensitivity feature. The system shall provide capability to program each individual detector for multiple 'pre-alarm' conditions. Each 'pre-alarm' level shall be field programmable as a function of the programmed alarm level. The system shall allow designated control-by- event actions to occur as may be required prior to any sensor reaching the designated alarm point. G. Non-Lock Walk Test 1. The system shall include a special non-lock "walk test" mode. The walk test mode shall incorporate a time-out feature to return system to normal. Test results shall be capable of being generated and displayed on the LCD annunciator. H. Automatic Detector Test 1. The system shall include a special automatic detector test feature which permits reading and adjustment of the sensitivity of all intelligent detectors from the main control panel. In addition, the automatic test feature shall also permit the functional testing of any "intelligent" detector or addressable interface device individually from the main control panel. An automatic detector test shall occur automatically fourteen times each twenty- four hour period or be initiated manually from the FACP as desired. Automatic detector test sequencing shall be terminated upon receipt of a true alarm condition. I. Special System Reports 1. The system shall have the ability to generate and print, upon command, system and point status reports. Selection of'system' read status provides the operator with global system programming information. Selection of'point' read status provides the operator with DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus FIRE ALARM SYSTEM WITH Christi 28 46 09-5 VOICE EVACUATION 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop selected individual point programming data. The system shall also provide the capability to print out a detailed 'history' report from system history file upon command. J. Field Programming 1. The system shall be 100%field programmable without the need for external computers or PROM programmers, and shall NOT require replacement of memory IC's. Systems requiring factory programming/re-programming OR REPLACEMENT OF MEMORY I.C. CHIPS shall not be acceptable. All programs shall be stored in non-volatile RAM memory. Programming shall be accomplished only after entering an appropriate and pre- selected five digit password security code. System programming mode shall not require the system to be taken off-line nor prohibit the system from performing its normal operations and routines. The system shall be capable of revising/changing programmed functions or system expansion at anytime subsequent to initialization as described herein without factory modifications or factory programming. Field programming via the use of external computers may be considered provided programming can be accomplished on- site and the owner permanently furnished with required programming apparatus and software as part of this contract. K. Event History 1. The main fire alarm panel shall have the resident ability to store a minimum of 600 system events in chronological order of occurrence. Event history shall include all system alarms, troubles, operator actions, unverified alarms, circuit/point alterations, and component failures. Events shall be time and date stamped. Events shall be stored in non-volatile buffer memory. Access to history buffer shall be secured via five digit password security code. L. Power Supply 1. The power supply shall provide all control panel and peripheral power needs with filtered power as well as regulated 24VDC power for external audio-visual devices. The audio- visual power may be increased as needed by adding additional modular expansion power supplies. All power supplies shall be designed to meet U.L. and NFPA requirements for POWER-LIMITED operation on all external signaling lines, including initiating circuits and indicating circuits. 2. Input power shall be 120VAC 60Hz. The power supply shall provide internal supervised batteries and automatic charger. The power supply shall provide both positive and negative ground fault supervision, battery/charger fail condition, A.C. power fail indicators. The power supply shall also provide supervision of modular expansion power supplies as may be required. 3. Batteries shall have 24 hours of standby capacity and 15 minutes of alarm capacity. Battery charger shall recharge batteries from full discharge to full charge over a 24-hour period. Switching from normal power to battery power and back shall occur automatically. 2.04 VOICE COMMUNICATIONS A. The voice communications panel shall be modular in design utilizing solid state MICROPROCESSOR circuitry. The voice evacuation system shall integrate with the main fire alarm control panel. Side car voice evacuation systems are not acceptable. B. Communications Controls: The communications control panel shall incorporate the following controls and indicators: 1. All call 2. General alarm 3. Audio trouble LED 4. AUDIO LEVEL LED 5. Manual tone/MESSAGE select switches with LED indicators 6. Communications zone select switches and select indicators 7. Communications monitor speaker with volume control 8. Dynamic paging microphone C. Paging DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus FIRE ALARM SYSTEM WITH Christi 28 46 09-6 VOICE EVACUATION 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 1. The microprocessor based one way paging system shall be provided with a means to selectively activate voice, tones or digitized messages to any or all zones in the system via electronic membrane touch-pad controls. In addition, visual indication by zone will be provided. 2. Each audio/speaker circuit will be totally supervised for opens, shorts or grounds with direct shorts prohibiting selection of the respective zone. All audio circuits shall be POWER LIMITED. Each speaker zone shall be provided with an amber trouble LED for circuit trouble conditions and an active/on LED indicator. 3. Alarm/Paging zones shall be provided as required. D. Alarm Electronics 1. The voice communications center shall be a microprocessor based, supervised, multi- function, audio generator. The communications generator shall contain: a. Independent Voice communications CPU b Non-volatile RAM memory b. One custom digitized message circuits c. Up to four selectable tone generator/oscillators d. Each sub-circuit of the communications center shall be fully supervised and failure of any tone oscillator or digital message generator shall revert the system to the default standby generator 2. The system shall be provided with a custom field programmable digitized message. 3. The system shall provide adequate audio amplification. The system shall be capable of amplifier capacity and expansion as required. Each amplifier shall be continuously monitored electronically for proper output level. Each unit shall be equipped with diagnostic indicators. Each amplifier shall provide a minimum of 50 watts of 25 VRMS of power. Each unit shall be equipped with its own individual power/pilot LED, audio input trouble LED, battery input trouble LED, and amplifier trouble/fail LED. Provide amplification for 1/2 watt per speaker plus 25% spare capacity. Electrical Contractor shall provide and install a 120 VAC dedicated circuit to each remote amplifier cabinet(if needed). 2.05 FIELD DEVICES A. Multi Criteria Smoke Heat and Infrared Detector: 1. Provide intelligent multi criteria detector. The intelligent multi criteria detector shall be an addressable device that is designed to monitor a minimum of photoelectric and thermal technologies in a single sensing device. The design shall include the ability to adapt to its environment by utilizing a built-in microprocessor to determine its environment and choose the appropriate sensing settings. The detector design shall allow a wide sensitivity window, no less than 1 to 4% per foot obscuration. This detector shall utilize advanced electronics that react to slow smoldering fires and thermal properties all within a single sensing device. 2. The microprocessor design shall be capable of selecting the appropriate sensitivity levels based on the environment type it is in (office, manufacturing, kitchen etc.)and then have the ability to automatically change the setting as the environment changes (as walls are moved or as the occupancy changes). 3. The intelligent multi criteria detection device shall include the ability to combine the signal of the thermal sensor with the signal of the photoelectric signal in an effort to react hastily in the event of a fire situation. It shall also include the inherent ability to distinguish between a fire condition and a false alarm condition by examining the characteristics of the thermal and smoke sensing chambers and comparing them to a database of actual fire and deceptive phenomena. 4. The detector shall be semi-flush ceiling mounted and be provided with modular detector head with twist-lock base. B. Air Sampling Smoke Detector(for atriums or other high volume areas) 1. Provide VESDA air sampling addressable smoke detection system to provide proper coverage in areas where ceiling heights exceed 18 feet. Fire alarm contractor shall include pipe layout as well as pipe calculations in the fire alarm system shop drawings. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus FIRE ALARM SYSTEM WITH Christi 28 46 09-7 VOICE EVACUATION 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 2. The air sampling smoke detection system shall integrate into the fire alarm system as an addressable device residing on the signaling line circuit. Each VESDA detector shall be interfaced to the fire alarm system via four separate points (one trouble and three distinct alarm points). Each VESDA detector shall be provided with its own battery backup system as required by NFPA 72. VESDA smoke detector shall be located in a non-public area such as a mechanical, telephone, IDF, or storage room in the vicinity of the atrium. All VESDA air sampling shall be supported every five feet. C. Linear Beam Detector 1. Provide a Linear Beam Detector using a single unit containing the transmitter and receiver in the same enclosure. This detector can operate over a range from 17ft to 280ft(5m to 85m). The detector shall have three sensitivity settings, shall have high immunity to extraneous light, and have automatic and comprehensive test. Unit shall be monitored and interconnected to the main fire alarm control panel. D. Intelligent Duct Detector 1. Provide duct mounted "intelligent" photoelectric smoke detectors. Detectors shall operate on the same principles and exhibit the same basic characteristics as area type "intelligent" photoelectric smoke sensors. The unit shall be capable of interchanging/accepting either photo-electronic or ionization type sensors. The detector shall operate in air velocities of 300 FPM to 4,000 FPM. Each detector shall interface directly to the system SLC loop without the requirement of interface zone modules. 2. The unit shall consist of a clear molded plastic enclosure with integral conduit knockouts. The unit shall be provided with clear faceplate cover to provide visual viewing of detector/sensor for monitoring sensor operation and chamber condition. The duct housing shall be provided with gasket seals to insure proper seating of the housing to the associated ductwork. Each unit's sampling tubes shall extend the width of the duct and be provided with porosity filters to reduce sensor/chamber contamination. Detectors shall be installed per NFPA 90A and be listed with the fire alarm control panel. A remote LED shall be located on the corridor ceiling adjacent to the respective detector where detectors are not plainly visible or concealed from view. E. Intelligent Thermal Detectors 1. Provide analog, fixed temperature, thermal detectors. The detectors shall use dual electronic thermostats to measure temperature levels in the chamber and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the analog temperature level. 2. The detectors shall provide dual alarm and power/status LED's. Status LED's shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the detector is operational and in regular communication with the control panel. Both LED's may be placed into steady illumination by the control panel, indicating that an alarm condition has been detected. An output connection shall also be provided in the base to connect an external remote alarm LED. 3. The detector shall be semi-flush ceiling mounted and be provided with modular detector head with twist-lock base. F. Conventional Weatherproof Thermal Detector 1. Provide when heat detection devices are located in harsh and/or moist environments, such as showers and similar areas, which are subject to high humidity, the following device shall be provided. Weatherproof Heat Detector 135°F Rate Compensated shall be provided. The detector shall mount in a weatherproof 4" electrical box with 1/2" NPT threaded hub. This detector shall be connected to an addressable monitor module. G. Addressable Manual Stations 1. Provide Manual stations. a. The manual stations shall contain the intelligence for reporting address, identity, alarm and trouble to the fire alarm control panel b. The manual pull station shall be constructed of durable molded polycarbonate material and shall be RED in color with raised white lettering Stations shall be of the dual action type DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus FIRE ALARM SYSTEM WITH Christi 28 46 09-8 VOICE EVACUATION 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop c. All manual pull stations shall be provided with an STI-1100 series clear plastic cover with integral horn. H. Monitor Module 1. Provide addressable monitor modules shall be provided where required to interface to contact alarm devices. The monitor module shall be used to connect a supervised zone of conventional initiating devices to an intelligent SLC loop. I. Control Module 1. Provide control/relay modules where required to provide audible alarm interface and/or relay control interface. The control module shall be used to connect a supervised zone of conventional indicating devices to an intelligent loop. The zone may be wired class A or class B -field selected. The control module may be optionally wired as dry contact (form C) relay. 2. The control module shall provide address-setting means using rotary decimal switches. No binary coding shall be required. A status LED shall be provided which shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the control module is operational and in regular communication with the control panel. The LED shall illuminate steady when the device is actuated via the fire alarm control panel. J. Remote LCD Alpha-Numeric Annunciators with Remote Microphone and Switches 1. Provide a multi-character remote LCD alpha-numeric annunciator or approved equal to annunciate all system events and duplicate the displayed status at the main FACP. The annunciator shall be a backlit eighty-character LCD display and operate via the system RS485 or RS232 serial output terminal from the main FACP. The LCD display shall automatically illuminate upon receipt of an alarm or trouble condition. The illumination source shall extinguish during normal/standby mode to conserve power. The unit shall operate from FACP 24VDC power and function during system power failure while the system resides on standby batteries. The remote LCD annunciator shall include: a. Integral time-date clock b. Time-date select switch c. Time-date/contrast adjust d. Display/step switch e. System reset f. System silence g. System acknowledge h. Integral trouble buzzer i. Point enable/disable capability j. Full QWERTY keypad for system programming 2. Annunciator shall upon command display the first system alarm, last alarm, and system alarm count. The unit shall be equipped with an integral lamp test feature. The unit shall be semi flush mounted where shown. 3. Provide enclosure with a remote microphone with selector switches. K. Speakers 1. Speakers shall be UL 1480 listed, meet all specifications of the Life Safety Code and be capable of reproducing both tone alerts and voice communication instructions. Speakers shall have built in matching transformer, field selectable multiple power taps and circuitry for speaker/line supervision. Speakers shall be provided with screw terminal connection points. 2. Speakers shall be 4" square or round with textured white decorative grill. Speakers shall be tapped to produce a minimum sound-pressure level of 87 dBA at 10 feet. Speakers shall be ceiling mounted. L. Speakers with Integral Visual Signal 1. Speakers shall be UL 1480 listed, meet all specifications of the Life Safety Code and be capable of reproducing both tone alerts and voice communication instructions. Speakers/strobe units shall be System Sensor L Series of equal by Wheelock. Speakers shall have built in matching transformer, field selectable multiple power taps and circuitry DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus FIRE ALARM SYSTEM WITH Christi 28 46 09-9 VOICE EVACUATION 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop for speaker/line supervision. Speakers shall be provided with screw terminal connection points. Speaker/Strobes shall be white. Each speaker/strobe shall be equipped with an integral high intensity visual alarms shall be Xenon strobe type producing a minimum of 15 candela on a 24 VDC limited energy supervised circuit. Each strobe light shall be capable of providing multi candela output.Alarm devices shall be designated to be ceiling mounted. Signals shall operate in unison with audible alarm appliances. High intensity visual signals shall be of solid state low current design and listed to UL 1971. All strobe lights shall be synchronized. M. High Intensity Visual Signals 1. Provide high intensity visual strobe lights as required by the Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA Standards Public Law 101-336), local codes and NFPA 72, Chapter 6. Strobe lights shall be white. 2. High intensity visual alarms shall be Xenon strobe type producing a minimum of 15 candela on a 24 VDC limited energy supervised circuit. Each strobe light shall be capable of providing multi candela output. Alarm devices shall be ceiling mounted. Signals shall operate in unison with audible alarm appliances. High intensity visual signals shall be of solid state low current design and listed to UL 1971. All strobe lights shall be synchronized. N. Exterior Audio Visual Devices 1. All audio visual devices located outside or labeled weatherproof shall be weatherproof. 2. All devices shall be provided with a weather proof type back box. O. Sprinkler Waterflow Switch 1. Sprinkler waterflow switches shall be installed where indicated on the drawings. Each unit shall contain one set of SPDT alarm contacts. Water low switches shall be provided and installed by the fire protection contractor and connected by the fire alarm contractor. P. Sprinkler Valve Supervisory Switch 1. Sprinkler valve supervisory switches shall be installed on each valve. Each unit shall contain on set of SPDT contacts. Sprinkler valve supervisory switches shall be provided, installed, and adjusted by the fire protection contractor, and connected by the fire alarm contractor. Q. Auxiliary Air Handling Unit (AHU) Relays 1. Provide relays for HVAC and AHU control and interface. Relays shall be heavy duty type and rated up to 10 amps at 24 VDC, 60 HZ. Relays shall be provided with NEMA I dust cover assembly and be provided with SPDT contacts as well as activated LED indicator. All interface relays shall be connected to a supervised notification appliance circuit. R. Field Charging Power Supplies 1. Provide power supplies with battery backup as required. Electrical Contractor shall provide and install a 120 VAC dedicated circuit to each power supply. S. Digital Alarm Transmitter Communicator 1. Provide a four-channel digital communicator to transmit alarm, trouble, supervisory and an undefined alarm signals to an approved Central Station. (Telephone lines, Service and Connection by owner). Location to be coordinate with Owner. T. Protective Covers 1. Provide protective covers on all wall mounted fire alarm devices located in student restrooms, corridors and in the cafeteria. These protective covers shall be manufactured by Safety Technology International, Inc. (STI). These covers shall be provided on all devices including but not limited to smoke detectors, heat detectors, audible and visual devices, pull stations, etc. The mounting of a device shall be reinforced to enable the protective covers to protect the fire alarm devices. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 DESIGN CRITERIA A. The contractor shall provide drawings for Owner, Engineer and Fire Marshall's approval. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus FIRE ALARM SYSTEM WITH Christi 28 46 09- 10 VOICE EVACUATION 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop B. Drawings shall be prepared by a state licensed alarm planning superintendent. C. Drawings shall comply with all local, state and federal code. These include but are not limited to NEC, UL, NFPA, etc. D. Locate the fire alarm control panel in the MDF unless otherwise directed by Owner. E. Locate a remote annunciator with remote microphone at the main entrance foyer unless otherwise directed by Owner. F. Provide additional items required above minimum codes include the following: 1. Manual pull stations shall be located not more than 5 feet from the entrance to each exit. Additional manual stations shall be located so that the travel distance to the nearest manual station does not exceed 200 feet. Provide Stopper II covers on all manual pull stations 2. Manual pull station heights shall be a minimum of 42" and a maximum of 48" measured vertically, from the finished floor level to the activating handle or lever. 3. Smoke Detectors— Paths of egress, electrical rooms, mechanical rooms, MDF, IDF, elevator lobby, storage rooms, top of stairs, elevator machine room, top of elevator shaft, above each fire alarm panel and remote power supplies terminal cabinets. Smoke detectors shall also be provided in each room/area that can be occupied by kindergarten and pre-kindergarten children, which shall include cafeteria, gymnasiums, daycares, libraries, classrooms and similar areas. Provide a VESDA air sampling smoke detection system in paths of egress where ceiling heights exceed 18 feet. 4. Duct type smoke detectors—all air handling units over 2,000 CFM in duct work or return air paths. 5. Heat Detectors—Shops, kitchens, coffee bars, central plants, boiler room, garages, truck bays and other non conditioned areas when detection is required. 6. Flow switches—Sprinkler riser. 7. Speakers-throughout the building. 8. Strobes—throughout the building. 9. Remote Power supplies: Locate in mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, MDF or other areas approved by Owner. 10. System Carbon Monoxide Detectors- Provide one in each sleeping room, kitchen, and the first room of each mechanical system where gas furnaces are serving spaces. Combination CO and smoke detector may be utilized in sleeping rooms. Provide CO detection in locations where gas water heaters are provided. Locate near the door; do not locate over the bed. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Wiring: 1. All wiring shall be in accordance with NFPA 72 and NFPA 70. All wiring sizes shall conform to recommendations of the equipment manufacturer, and as indicated on the engineered shop drawings. 2. All wire shall be plenum rated, U.L. Listed, limited energy(300 volt) FPLP or MPP wire and shall be run open in return air ceiling plenums. The wire shall comply with NFPA 262 for such applications, shall be of the low smoke producing fluorocarbon type and shall comply with NEC Article 760 if so approved by the local authority having jurisdiction. Provide conduit in all inaccessible locations, inside concealed wall, all mechanical/electrical rooms, or other areas where wiring might be exposed and subject to damage. 3. Support wire clear of knock out panels, access panels, and maintenance spaces for equipment. Wire and cable shall be run using wire management techniques supporting cable as close as possible to within one foot of the floor or roof rafters. Wire supports shall be directly fastened to the structure on a maximum of five foot centers. Wire routing shall be parallel and perpendicular to building lines. The wire and cable shall be secured with tie wraps or carrier wire. Sagging in excess of three inches will not be allowed nor will bending of the supporting ring structure. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus FIRE ALARM SYSTEM WITH Christi 28 46 09- 11 VOICE EVACUATION 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 4. All wiring for SLC signaling circuits shall be of the twisted low capacitance type to guard against outside RF and EMF interference and induced noise. 5. All wiring shall be run in a supervised fashion (i.e. no branch wiring or dog-legged wiring) per NFPA requirements such that any wiring disarrangement will initiate the appropriate trouble signals via the main control panel per NFPA. 6. Wiring splices shall be kept to a minimum with required splices to be made in designated terminal boxes or at field device junction boxes. Transposing or color code changes of wiring will not be permitted. End-of-line supervisory devices shall be installed with the last device on the respective circuit. Devices shall be appropriately marked designating it as the terminating device on the respective circuit. 7. No A.C. wiring or any other wiring shall be run in the same conduit as fire alarm wiring. 8. All insulation on conductors shall be RED with traces to identify circuits. B. Open Wiring 1. Systems utilizing open wiring techniques shall use low smoke plenum cable. 2. Support wire clear of knock out panels access panels and maintenance spaces for equipment. Wire and cable shall be run using wire management techniques supporting cable as close as possible to within one foot of the floor or roof rafters. Wire supports shall be directly fastened to the structure on a maximum of five foot on centers. Wire routing shall be parallel and perpendicular to building lines. The wire and cable shall be secured with tie wraps or carrier wire. Sagging in excess of three inches will not be allowed nor will bending of the supporting ring structure. 3. Provide Caddy J-hooks supported independently from other system to support cable at 4- foot on center or closer if required by manufacturer. 4. Provide a junction box to make up all joints and splices. 5. Provide cable supports in all vertical raceways in accordance with Article 300-19 of NFPA 70. C. Conduit/Raceway 1. All wire shall be installed in an approved conduit/raceway system (except where permitted by NEC and the local authority having jurisdiction). Maximum conduit"fill" shall not exceed 40% per NEC. 2. Conduit and raceway system shall be installed as specified in division 26 specifications and per National Electrical Code. 3. Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4" EMT. Install conduit per engineered shop drawings. 4. All wiring in mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, drywall ceiling, inaccessible areas, underground, plaster ceiling, inside concealed walls areas exposed to occupant view, and other areas subject to physical damage shall be run in conduit. 5. Sleeves shall be placed in the forms of concrete, masonry and fire rated walls, floor slabs and beams for the passage of wiring. Sleeves should be set in place a sufficient time ahead of the concrete work so as not to delay the work. Sleeves shall be rigid galvanized steel. D. Minimum Wire Sizes Shall Be As Follows: 1. Signaling Line Circuit: 18 AWG 2. Notification Appliance Circuit: 14 AWG 3. Relay Control Circuits: 18 AWG E. 120 VAC Power wiring 1. Contractor shall provide all required dedicated 20 amp, 120 VAC power circuits for the fire alarm system including but not limited to the main fire alarm panel, remote amplifier panels, and remote strobe light power supplies. Connect to emergency power when available in the building. F. Minimum Wire Sizes Shall Be As Follows: 1. Signaling Line Circuit: 18 AWG 2. Notification Appliance Circuit: 14 AWG 3. Relay Control Circuits: 18 AWG G. Sprinkler Valves DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus FIRE ALARM SYSTEM WITH Christi 28 46 09- 12 VOICE EVACUATION 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 1. Contractor shall connect all tamper switches and post indicator valves to the supervisory circuit. Connect all water flow switches to the alarm circuit. Coordinate exact locations of water vaults valves and flow switches with sprinkler contractor. 3.03 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE CIRCUITS SYNCHRONIZATION A. All visual and audible devices shall be synchronized per the current state adopted version of NFPA 72. Provide all components required. 3.04 SMOKE AND COMBINATION FIRE SMOKE DAMPERS A. Provide duct type smoke detectors in ductwork downstream of each smoke damper and fire smoke damper. Locate within 5 feet on the damper. Provide a remote smoke detector reset device. Provide access panel when not located above an accessible ceiling. Interlock with HVAC unit serving the ductwork to shut down. 3.05 MISCELLANEOUS SYSTEMS A. Monitor all fire suppression systems, carbon monoxide system panels and refrigerant system control panels. 3.06 TEST AND REPORTS A. A state licensed and factory trained technical representative of the manufacturer shall supervise the final control panel connections and testing of the system. Upon completion of the acceptance tests, the owner and/or his representatives shall be instructed in the proper operation of the system. Instruction shall be 4 hours minimum. B. The installing contractor shall functionally test each and every device in the entire system for proper operation and response. In addition, each circuit in the system shall be fully tested for wiring supervision. Any items found not properly installed or non-functioning shall be replaced or repaired and re-tested. C. The installing contractor shall provide a complete written report on the functional test of the entire system. A copy of the test report shall be provided with maintenance manuals. The test report shall be signed and dated by the licensed fire alarm superintendent responsible for supervising the final system test and checkout. D. The installing contractor's fire alarm superintendent shall test the entire system in the presence of the local authorities having jurisdiction. The contractor shall be responsible for making any changes, adjustments, or corrections as may be required by the local authorities. E. It is the intent of these specifications and of the architect/engineer that a continued program of system maintenance be continued by the owner in compliance with NFPA 72, Chapter 7. It is mandatory that the installing contractor shall provide such services and make available these services to the owner upon completion of the project. 3.07 WARRANTY A. The fire alarm system, including labor and material, shall be free from defects in workmanship and materials, under normal use and service, for a period of one year from the date of acceptance or beneficial occupancy, whichever shall occur first. Any equipment or workmanship shown to be defective shall be repaired, replaced or adjusted during normal working hours at no cost to the owner. B. The equipment manufacturer shall be represented by a local service organization and the name of such shall be furnished to the Owner, Architect, and Engineer. 3.08 GRAPHIC FLOOR PLANS A. Provide (2) 1/16" = V-0"floor plan on each floor showing all devices and zoning. Zoning shall correspond to the zone on the fire alarm control panel and remote annunciator. The floor plans shall be framed with a glass cover and located by the fire alarm control panel and by each remote annunciator. Provide a sample for approval. 3.09 SPARE PARTS AND ATTIC STOCK A. Provide 5% spare field devices including labor to install them. Devices not used shall be given to the Owner at time of job completion. DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus FIRE ALARM SYSTEM WITH Christi 28 46 09- 13 VOICE EVACUATION 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop B. The fire alarm contractor shall include in his bid the cost to provide and install the additional spare parts and attic stock and associated cabling. All devices not used during construction shall be turned over to the owner at the time of job completion END OF SECTION DBR 236051.000-City of Corpus FIRE ALARM SYSTEM WITH Christi 28 46 09- 14 VOICE EVACUATION 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SECTION 3110 00 SITE CLEARING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Clearing and protection of vegetation. B. Removal of existing debris. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 015713 -Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control. B. Section 02 4100.10-Site Demolition. C. Section 31 1000.10-Tree Protection. D. Section 312200-Grading. E. Section 312323 - Fill. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS-- NOT USED 1.04 SUBMITTALS-- NOT USED 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Clearing Firm: Company specializing in the type of work required. B. State and local laws and code requirements shall govern the hauling and disposal of trees, shrubs, stumps, roots, rubbish, debris and other matter. C. Contractor shall not clear site until a permit is obtained from the authorized regulatory agency. D. Air pollution caused by dust and dirt shall be controlled and comply with governing regulations. PART 2 PRODUCTS-- NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SITE CLEARING A. Remove from site and satisfactorily dispose of all trees, shrubs, stumps, roots, brush, masonry, rubbish, scrap, debris, pavement, curbs, fences and miscellaneous other structures required to permit construction of new work. B. Minimize production of dust due to clearing operations; do not use water if that will result in ice,flooding, sedimentation of public waterways or storm sewers, or other pollution. 3.02 EXISTING UTILITIES AND BUILT ELEMENTS A. Coordinate work with utility companies; notify before starting work and comply with their requirements; obtain and pay for required permits. B. Protect existing utilities to remain from damage. C. Do not disrupt public utilities without permit from authority having jurisdiction. D. Protect existing structures and other elements that are not to be removed. 3.03 VEGETATION A. Scope: Remove trees, shrubs, brush, and stumps in areas to be covered by building structure, paving, landscape areas, and planting beds. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 31 10 00-1 SITE CLEARING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents B. Do not begin clearing until vegetation to be relocated has been removed. C. Do not remove or damage vegetation beyond the limits indicated on drawings. D. Install substantial, highly visible chain link or orange mesh fences at least 4 feet high to prevent inadvertent damage to vegetation at the removal limits. Reference tree protection detail in drawings. E. In areas where vegetation must be removed but no construction will occur, remove vegetation with minimum disturbance of the subsoil. F. Vegetation Removed: Do not burn, bury, landfill, or leave on site, unless indicated on drawings. 1. Chip,grind, crush, or shred vegetation for mulching, composting, or other purposes; preference should be given to on-site uses. 2. Trees: Sell if marketable; if not,treat as specified for other vegetation removed. 3. Existing Stumps: Treat as specified for other vegetation removed; completely remove stumps and roots to depth of 6 inches below subgrade. 4. Fill holes left by removal of stumps and roots, using suitable fill material, with top surface neat in appearance and smooth enough not to constitute a hazard to pedestrians. G. Dead Wood: Remove all dead trees (standing or down), limbs, and dry brush on entire site; treat as specified for vegetation removed. H. Restoration: If vegetation outside removal limits or within specified protective fences is damaged or destroyed due to subsequent construction operations, replace at no cost to Owner. Contractor shall warrant damaged vegetation for 18 months. 3.04 DEBRIS A. Remove debris,junk, and trash from site. B. Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work. C. Clean up spillage and wind-blown debris from public and private lands. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 31 10 00-2 SITE CLEARING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 31 13 30 TREATMENT OF EXISTING TREES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Operations concerning existing trees in connection with: 1. Protection. 2. Mulching. 3. Pruning. 4. Feeding. 5. Refer to Section 01 56 39- Landscape Protection concerning installation of tree protection barricade fence and tree armor. B. Scope within this section applies to all construction trades on the project site. Any work taking place adjacent to a preserved tree and also where work must occur within the dripline of a tree shall adhere to requirements herein. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements: Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples B. Section 01 56 39 - Landscape Protection C. Section 32 84 32 - Landscape Irrigation Systems/Design Requirements D. Section 32 91 13 -Soil Preparation E. Section 32 92 19 -Seeding F. Section 32 92 23 -Sodding G. Section 32 93 00 - Exterior Plants H. Section 32 93 10 - Landscape Maintenance I. City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction, Jacking, Boring, or Tunneling (most recent edition). 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The most current edition of the publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The following publications by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. 1. ANSI Z60.1 Nursery Stock. 2. ANSI Z133.1 Tree Care Operations- Pruning, Trimming, Repairing, Maintaining, and Removing Trees and Cutting Brush. 3. ANSI A300 Tree, Shrub and Other Woody Plant Maintenance- Standard Practices. 1.04 SITE CONDITIONS A. Inspection: 1. After layout of the improvements is accomplished, Contractor and Arborist shall review impact of new construction and need for compensatory pruning. 2. Report to Owner and Landscape Architect the extent of pruning work and treatments required prior to initiating any work. 3. Contractor, Arborist, Owner and Landscape Architect shall review pruning work and treatments to be completed a minimum one (1)week prior to initiating work. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 31 13 30- 1 TREATMENT OF EXISTING TREES Re-Bid Construction Documents 1.05 QUALITY CONTROL A. Employ qualified Arborist approved by the Landscape Architect. Arborist shall have, at a minimum, the following qualifications: 1. Five (5)years documented experience. 2. Five (5) year period Tree Maintenance License (TRM)as regulated by the City of Corpus 3. Christi, Department of Development Services, Tree and Landscape Section. 4. Membership in: a. TCIA-Tree Care Industry Association b. ISA- International Society of Arborists 5. Meet contract requirements for insurance. a. Maintain liability insurance in the amount of$1,000,000 or more. 6. Licensed for application and use of pesticides. 7. Bonded. 1.06 SCOPE A. Services of the Arborist shall include: 1. Complete pruning as may be necessary to repair damage from any construction related activity. 2. Survey the condition of existing trees and other landscape vegetation at the site indicated to remain. a. Before initiation of construction any activities at the site, document and report condition of landscape vegetation with photographs which include readily identifiable objects which indicate the size of the plant in height and width of canopy. 3. Inspection of all existing trees scheduled for preservation in order to determine: a. Initial overall health of the tree. 4. Pruning and feeding of trees. 5. Monitoring construction activities impacting trees. a. Review and approve routing of underground and overhead utilities to be staked in the field by the Contractor; reference Section 01 56 39 - Landscape Protection. b. Inspect landscape protection barriers before commencement of demolition and excavation activities. 1) Observe excavation in the vicinity of existing trees from commencement until conclusion. 2) Direct excavation which occurs near major root systems. 3) Prescribe additional measures or protection required to provide optimal growth conditions at the construction site. 6. Periodically inspect the construction site for possibly dangerous or damaging practices, in relation to the existing trees, occurring or developing at the site. a. Inform Contractor of such conditions and develop plan to repair damage that has occurred and prevent further damage. b. Complete all repairs. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish at Landscape Architect's office, prior to installation, the following: 1. Qualifications: Arborist's name, company and qualifications. 2. Mulch: Label from bag (Supplier's statement of analysis if bulk). 3. Fertilizer: Label from bag or Supplier's brochure. B. Furnish at Landscape Architect's office, prior to close-out of Project, the following: 1. Proof of Compliance with Specifications a. Demonstrate compliance by providing invoices to prove purchase of all products in sufficient quantity to cover the project at the rates recommended by the manufacturer or as specified. Include project name, date of purchase of product and name of contact. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 31 13 30-2 TREATMENT OF EXISTING TREES Re-Bid Construction Documents PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Fertilizer: 1. Mycor Plant Saver 4-7-4; www.planthealthcare.com; John Deere Landscapes, San Antonio, Texas; (210)656-8100. 2. Fertilizer for Trees: Refer to Section 32 93 00- EXTERIOR PLANTS for material and supplier. 3. Davey Arbor Green, 30-10-7 for liquid suspended application, distributed by The Davey Company in San Antonio, Texas (210) 698-0515 or approved substitute. B. Tree Barricade Fencing: Refer to Section 01 56 39- LANDSCAPE PROTECTION. C. Tree Armor: Refer to Section 01 56 39- LANDSCAPE PROTECTION. D. Mulch: 1. Native Mulch - Refer to Section 01 56 39- LANDSCAPE PROTECTION. E. Tree Wound Paint: Black enamel-based spray paint or asphaltic based tree paint such as Treeheal or Ortho. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PROTECTION FOR EXISTING TREES TO BE PRESERVED A. Coordination with drawings: 1. Trees to be preserved are represented by a solid line. 2. Trees to be removed are represented by a ghosted line with an "X". 3. Trees to be planted are graphically differentiated from existing trees. B. All trees to be preserved on the property shall be protected against damage from construction operations. 1. Tree protection fencing and armor protection must be in-place and approved prior to beginning any clearing, demolition or construction activity; coordinate with Section 01 56 39 LANDSCAPE PROTECTION. 2. I.D. Tags - Maintain the existing tree identification tags throughout construction; replace missing tags match the existing system/tag type. C. All tree protection shall be installed by Contractor prior to initiation of clearing operation or construction activity. D. Protect all trees/vegetation that are to remain from the following: 1. Compaction of root area by equipment or material storage: a. Construction materials shall not be stored closer to trees than the farthest extension of their limbs (dripline). b. Do not store, stockpile or dump any job material, equipment or supplies, soil or rubbish under the spread of the tree branches. c. Do not park vehicles or place portable toilets under the spread of the tree branches. 2. Do not clear, fill or grade in the RPZ of any tree. a. The proposed finished grade within the root protection zone of any preserved tree shall not be raised or lowered more than three (3) inches without review by Arborist . 3. Trunk damage by moving equipment, material storage, nailing or bolting. a. Do not nail or attach temporary signs, meters, switches, wires, bracing or any other item to the trees. 4. Strangling by tying ropes or guy wires to trunks or large branches. 5. Poisoning by pouring solvents, gas, paint, etc., on or around trees and roots. a. Do not permit runoff from waste materials including solvents, concrete washouts, asphalt tack coats (MC-30 oil), etc. to enter the RPZ. b. Provide barriers to prevent such runoff substances from entering the RPZ whenever possible, including in an area where rain or surface water could carry such materials to the root system of the tree. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 31 13 30-3 TREATMENT OF EXISTING TREES Re-Bid Construction Documents 6. Cutting on roots by excavating, ditching, etc. 7. Damage of branches by improper pruning. 8. Drought from failure to water or by cutting or changing normal drainage pattern past roots. Contractor shall provide means as necessary to ensure positive drainage. 9. Changes of soil pH factor by disposal of lime base materials such as concrete, plaster, lime treatment at pavement subgrade, etc. a. When installing concrete adjacent to the root zone of a tree, use a minimum 6 mil. plastic vapor barrier behind the concrete to prohibit leaching of lime into the soil. 10. Protect all existing trees near areas to be stabilized from underground contaminations: a. Place a 6 mil. Plastic film barrier along exposed vertical cut extending a minimum 12" into undisturbed subgrade below depth of stabilization. b. Protect all existing trees when installing concrete adjacent to the root zone of a tree, use a plastic vapor barrier behind the concrete to prohibit leaching of lime into the soil. 11. No vehicular traffic shall occur within the drip line of any tree. 12. Do not set up any construction operations under the spread of the tree branches. (e.g. pipe cutting and threading, mortar mixing, painting or lumber cutting) 13. No soil shall be spread, spoiled or otherwise disposed of under any tree within the drip line. 14. Dust Accumulation: Spray tree crowns periodically to reduce dust accumulation on the leaves. a. Pending natural rainfall, complete monthly or as directed by Arborist or Landscape Architect. E. Any damage done to existing tree crowns and root systems shall be repaired by the Arborist to the satisfaction of the Owner and Landscape Architect. 1. Broken branches shall be cut cleanly. 2. Any roots broken or exposed shall be cut cleanly with a saw other means approved by the Landscape Architect. F. Repairs to the trees necessitated by damage caused through negligence of Contractor or his employees will be completed at the Contractor's expense. 1. When trees other than those approved for removal are destroyed or killed, or badly damaged as a result of construction operations, the contract sum will be reduced by the value of the tree as determined by using the accepted International Society of Arboriculture's formula. 3.02 ROOT PROTECTION ZONE A. The root protection zone (RPZ) is measured with a radius from the trunk of 1 foot for each caliper inch of trunk measured at four and one-half(4-1/2')feet above grade or at the point where the smallest diameter closest to the branching occurs. 1. No disturbance shall occur closer to the tree than one-half the radius of the RPZ or within five (5)feet of the tree whichever is greater for trees 10 inch caliper or less. 3.03 ROOT PROTECTION ZONE IMPACTS A. Those trees to remain which have any encroachment on their root protection zone shall have the following maximum allowable impacts: 1. Minimum Protection Criteria `A': a. No disturbance of natural grade: 1) Trenching - Can occur no closer to the tree than 12" minimum offset from the limit of the RPZ. Within the RPZ boring shall be required. See Article INSTALLATION OF UTILITIES. 2) Excavation - Can occur no closer to the tree than one-half the radius of the RPZ or within five (5)feet of the tree whichever is greater in no more than 30 percent of the area of the RPZ. See Article EXCAVATING ADJACENT TREES RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 31 13 30-4 TREATMENT OF EXISTING TREES Re-Bid Construction Documents B. Mulching: 1. Trees impacted shall have a minimum of a six (6) inch layer of mulch placed and maintained over the root protection zone and the undisturbed area within the dripline. a. This six (6) inch depth of mulch shall be maintained throughout construction. 2. In critical root zone areas that cannot be protected during construction (outside of barricade fencing) and where heavy traffic is anticipated, cover those areas with eight(8) inches of mulch to minimize soil compaction. a. This eight(8) inch depth of mulch shall be maintained throughout construction. C. Pruning and Fertilization: Immediate pruning and fertilization shall occur per the pruning and fertilization sections of this specification. D. Watering: Provide water in a slow drip manner to impacted trees as approved by the Owner and Landscape Architect. 1. Provide water to apply equivalent to 1 inch once per week to deeply soak in over the area within the dripline of the tree during periods of hot, dry weather. a. Coordinate with Section- LANDSCAPE PROTECTION. 2. Spray tree crowns periodically to reduce dust accumulation on the leaves. a. Pending natural rainfall, complete monthly or as directed by Arborist or Landscape Architect. 3.04 DEMOLITION OF EXISTING SITE IMPROVEMENTS ADJACENT TREES A. Protect tree roots exposed upon removal of existing site improvements (structures, paving, curbs walls, etc.). B. Complete root pruning to direct root growth into the new expanded landscape area to be established with natural material soil from site. 1. Minimize damage to root systems. 2. Use narrow tine spading forks and comb soil (or utilize #3 air spade)to expose roots. C. Upon demolition and removal of existing site improvements, complete within 12 hours of initial exposure: 1. Cover roots by benching exposed face with backfill of natural material soil, bark mulch or several layers of burlap fabric. 2. Keep roots moist. 3. Maintain protective cover and adequate moisture level until procedure can be completed. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF UTILITIES A. Encompasses installation of utility piping, electrical conduit and irrigation piping. 1. Utility Routing: a. Contractor shall stake the routing of all underground and overhead utility work to avoid impacting existing trees and vegetation to remain. b. Proposed route shall be reviewed and approved by the Landscape Architect, Arborist and Engineer prior to initiation of any installation related activity, e.g. trenching, drilling or boring. 2. Trenching: a. Applicable when utility work can be accomplished outside limits of RPZ. 1) When installation encroaches RPZ, utility installation shall be completed by boring. b. All trenching within the drip line of trees shall be done only by hand or with utilization of air spade. c. Complete excavation for trenching to minimize damage to root systems as directed by Arborist: 1) Do not cut roots 1" in diameter or over without approval of Arborist and Landscape Architect. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 31 13 30-5 TREATMENT OF EXISTING TREES Re-Bid Construction Documents 3. Boring: a. Applicable to instances utility work encroaches within RPZ. b. Comply with City of Corpus Christi Standard Specifications for Construction, Jacking, Boring, or Tunneling. c. Work to be performed under observation of Arborist. 3.06 EXCAVATING ADJACENT TREES A. Excavate within the dripline of trees only where required and when absolutely necessary. 1. Any excavation within the dripline of trees shall be under the direction of the Arborist. a. Arborist shall be at site at all times while excavation is occurring within the dripline. Refer to ROOT PROTECTION ZONE. 2. Prior to excavation within the tree driplines, make a clean cut between the disturbed and undisturbed root zones with a rock saw or similar equipment to minimize root damage of trees remaining in place. a. Scope includes the removal of trees adjacent to other trees that are to remain, 3. Complete an initial cut for an excavation or trench when located within the dripline of existing tree with rockwheel trencher at the side of the excavation or trench in the direction towards the tree trunk. a. Cut to a minimum depth of 30 inches. 4. Cover exposed roots at the end of each day with natural material, soil, mulch or several layers of burlap. a. Keep roots moist. b. Maintain protective cover and adequate moisture level until construction of improvements and backfill is complete. c. Reference article- Demolition of Existing Site Improvements Adjacent Trees. B. Where existing grade at tree is to be above new finish grade: 1. To be completed as directed by Arborist and reviewed by Landscape Architect. 2. Carefully excavate within the dripline to the new finish grade. 3. Complete initial cut within the dripline of existing tree with rockwheel trencher to cleanly sever portion of root system being removed with excavation. a. Cut to a minimum depth of 30 inches 4. Prune and treat the cut roots as specified. 5. Keep the exposed roots damp across face of cut subgrade. a. Cover exposed roots at the end of each day with soil, mulch or burlap. 1) Reference article- Excavating Adjacent Trees 2) Reference article- Demolition of Existing Site Improvements Adjacent Trees. 6. Temporarily support and protect roots immediately after cut in grade against damage until permanently covered with approved landscape material or new improvements. a. Acceptable landscape materials include mulch, approved soil from site, or sandbags. b. Retain exposed grade with placement of sandbags. c. Maintain sandbags in place until initiation of formwork installation for permanent improvement/structure. d. Pending limit of excavation allows in consideration of cut distance from trunk of tree and RPZ requirements, sandbags may be left in place with the construction of new improvements, e.g. retaining wall (confirm with Structural Engineer if sand bags can serve as the form for the inside face of the wall). 7. Work includes protection and treatment of roots from trees on adjacent property (trees off- site with canopy overlapping the property line). C. Cleanly cut all exposed roots and broken branches one (1) inch in diameter or greater. 1. In the case of oak species, in order to prevent infection by oak wilt spores, wounds must be painted with an acceptable wound dressing within thirty (30) minutes. 2. Use pruning saw, loppers or sharp axe as appropriate to cut roots approximately three (3) inches back from new construction. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 31 13 30-6 TREATMENT OF EXISTING TREES Re-Bid Construction Documents D. At locations where face of the existing subgrade condition is to remain exposed (i.e. no other treatment is to be constructed to cover exposed cut face): 1. Bench /slope back topsoil strata to the angle of repose of the material per the full thickness of the soil layer as to be confirmed in field. 2. Start toe of bench/slope six (6) inches back from the face of the exposed competent subgrade strata. 3. Complete pruning by hand of all roots encountered; use of backhoe or any other such mechanical means that would tear or break roots is prohibited. 4. Immediately following completion of root pruning, place mulch to 6" depth starting from face cut of the exposed subgrade strata to cover the benched /sloped soil profile extending a minimum two feet past the limit of the undisturbed grade. 5. Within 24 hours of placing mulch, apply water to thoroughly drench the mulched area to restore moisture to the soil profile and settle mulch. 6. Maintain adequate moisture level within this area through final acceptance of the project. 3.07 PRUNING A. Governing Standards: 1. Work procedures will be guided by the current provisions found in the ANSI references listed; and "Structural Pruning: A Guide for the Green Industry," published by Urban Tree Foundation, Visalie, CA; most current edition. 2. The two basic objectives of the pruning operation shall include: a. Hazard Reduction Pruning: Completed to remove visible hazards in a tree. Consists of one or more of the maintenance pruning types. b. Maintenance Pruning: Completed to maintain and improve tree health and structure; includes hazard reduction pruning. B. Provide pruning of existing trees: 1. Only pruning to be completed shall be pruning necessary for the repair of damage caused by any construction related activity. a. Includes pruning of canopy to compensate for root loss resulting from excavation operations. 2. Refer to Article- PRUNING SCHEDULE for specifics regarding pruning requirements. 3. At trees which new improvements, including grading/earthwork, encroach within an area demarcated by dripline of tree. 4. At trees where the removal of limbs and branches is needed to provide clearance for work or to repair damage to trees. 5. At trees to improve overall natural character and openness of the canopies. 6. Removal of dead and broken branches, correction of structural defects: a. Remove diseased wood, or structurally weak limbs that may cause a safety hazard. 7. Remove branches that extend over buildings endangering roofs (e.g. branches rubbing against or touching roof). 8. Remove branches in front of windows and which obstruct traffic signs or street intersections. 9. Provide clearance for emergency vehicles, buses, moving vans and similar vehicles along the streets. 10. Prune trees according to their natural growth characteristics leaving trees well shaped and balanced. 11. Provide clearance to allow sight distance/visual access within clear vision areas of street and driveway intersections as required by City of Corpus Christi Unified Development Code. 12. Pruning shall be completed to the satisfaction of the Owner and Landscape Architect. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 31 13 30-7 TREATMENT OF EXISTING TREES Re-Bid Construction Documents 3.08 PRUNING TYPES A. Both hazard reduction pruning and maintenance pruning shall consist of one or more of the following pruning types: 1. Crown Cleaning: Crown cleaning shall consist of the selective removal of one or more of the following items: dead, dying, or diseased branches, weak branches, water sprouts and stubbed branches. 2. Crown Raising: a. Crown raising shall consist of the removal of the lower branches of a tree to provide clearance for vehicles at drives/streets and parking areas to clear height of 13' - 6". b. Crown raising shall consist of the removal of the lower branches of a tree to provide clearance for pedestrians along walkways to clear height of 8' - 6". 3. Vista Pruning: Vista pruning shall consist of selective thinning of framework limbs or specific areas of the crown. 4. Crown Restoration: Crown restoration pruning shall improve the structure, form and appearance of a tree which has been severely headed, vandalized, storm damaged or improperly pruned. 3.09 PAINT CUTS: PAINT CUTS MORE THAN 1 INCH IN DIAMETER WITH AN APPROVED TREE WOUND PAINT ON TREES OF OAK SPECIES. A. Paint immediately after cutting; in no instance no longer than 30 minutes. 3.10 FERTILIZATION OF PRESERVED TREES A. All existing trees shall be fertilized. B. Fertilize existing trees that will be impacted by construction activities taking place within the dripline, including but not limited to trenching and grading. C. Apply fertilizer as a vertimulch using a 2.5 inch auger. Inoculate within and fertilize beyond the drip line on 2.5 foot centers. (reference manufacturer's directions). 1. Application rate to provide 6#'s nitrogen per 1000 s.f. 2. Remove mulch from immediate area to be drilled. 3. Apply 4 ounces directly onto soil forming a small pile. 4. Drill directly through small pile of product to an 8" depth. 5. Mix product and soil by drilling up and down 2 or 3 times. 6. All soil and product mixture shall be put in the hole. 7. Step on the hole to pack the mixed material. 8. Replace mulch. 9. Water to soil saturation. D. Feeding of existing trees through liquid injection shall be accomplished in accordance with the following: 1. Complete prior to construction of permanent improvements adjacent to all trees including site fill or paving including trenching operations. 2. Apply with a standard hydrant sprayer at a pressure of 100 to 200 psi injected in slightly slanted holes approximately twelve (12) inches in depth. 3. Concentration of suspension to provide six (6) pounds of actual nitrogen per 1,000 square feet of area under drip-line. 4. Holes are to be made in concentric circles and 3' on center around the tree with the last ring located at the dripline of the foliage of the trees. 5. Area beneath the dripline of the trees is to be well watered after the fertilization is placed. E. Granular broadcast surface application: 1. Apply at rate to provide 6#'s nitrogen per 1000 s.f. 2. Thoroughly water area to saturate ground after fertilizer is placed. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 31 13 30-8 TREATMENT OF EXISTING TREES Re-Bid Construction Documents 3.11 PLACEMENT OF MULCH A. Mulch base of all existing trees over area covering fifty (50) percent of the tree RPZ with six (6) inch deep mulch layer. 1. If existing trees are grouped, the entire area is to be mulched in between the trees. 2. Layout of mulched area to be approved by Landscape Architect. 3. Applies to trees located within new landscape areas (planting beds and turf areas). 4. Keep mulch 12" clear of base of trunk and off root flares. B. Mulch base of all existing trees the distance of four(4)feet radius from the trunk with six (6) inch deep mulch layer. 1. If existing trees are grouped, the entire area is to be mulched in between the trees. 2. Layout of mulched area to be approved by Landscape Architect. 3. Keep mulch 12" clear of base of trunk and off root flares. C. Mulch base of all existing trees the distance to the limit of the dripline with six (6) inch deep mulch layer. 1. If existing trees are grouped, the entire area is to be mulched in between the trees. 2. Layout of mulched area to be approved by Landscape Architect. 3. Keep mulch 12" clear of base of trunk and off root flares. 3.12 CLEANUP A. Wood and debris shall become property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the site. Cost of disposal to be paid by Contractor. 1. Contractor's option - Wood from tree removal and pruning activities can be double shredded/ground and used on site as mulch at locations as approved by Landscape Architect pending site conditions can accommodate. B. If acceptable to Owner and Landscape Architect, wood from tree removal and pruning activities can be double shredded/ground and used on site as mulch at locations as approved by Landscape Architect. 1. Unused material is to be disposed of off-site by contractor pending location to stockpile material on-site is approved by Owner and Landscape Architect. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 31 13 30-9 TREATMENT OF EXISTING TREES Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 3122 00 GRADING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Removal of topsoil. B. Rough grading the site. C. Finish grading. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 311000-Site Clearing. B. Section 31 1000.10-Tree Protection. C. Section 312316- Excavation. D. Section 312323 - Fill. E. Project Geotechnical Report. 1.03 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Topsoil: 1. Measurement Method: By the cubic yard. 2. Includes: scarifying substrate surface, placing where required, and compacting. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of utilities remaining by horizontal dimensions, elevations or inverts, and slope gradients. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with available geotechnical engineering and landscape specifications. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Topsoil: Topsoil excavated on-site; friable loam, imported borrow; local borrow. 1. Graded. 2. Free of roots, rocks larger than 1/2 inch, subsoil, debris, large weeds and foreign matter. B. Other Fill Materials: See Section 312323. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that survey bench mark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated. B. Verify the absence of standing or ponding water. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum. B. Stake and flag locations of known utilities. C. Locate, identify, and protect from damage above-and below-grade utilities to remain. D. Notify utility company to remove and relocate utilities. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 31 22 00-1 GRADING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents E. Provide temporary means and methods to remove all standing or ponding water from areas prior to grading. F. Protect site features to remain, including but not limited to bench marks, survey control points, existing structures,fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs,from damage by grading equipment and vehicular traffic. G. Protect trees to remain. Reference Section 31 1000.10. H. Protect features to remain as a portion of final landscaping. 3.03 ROUGH GRADING A. Remove topsoil from areas to be further excavated, without mixing with foreign materials. B. Do not remove topsoil when wet. C. Remove subsoil from areas to be further excavated. D. Do not remove wet subsoil, unless it is subsequently processed to obtain optimum moisture content. E. When excavating through roots, perform work by hand and cut roots with sharp axe. F. See Section 312323 for filling procedures. G. Benching Slopes: Horizontally bench slopes greater than 4:1 to key fill material to slope for firm bearing. H. Stability: Replace damaged or displaced subsoil to same requirements as for specified fill. I. Remove and replace soils deemed unsuitable by classification and which are excessively moist due to lack surface water control. 3.04 SOIL REMOVAL A. Stockpile topsoil to be re-used on site; remove remainder from site. B. Stockpile subsoil to be re-used on site; remove remainder from site. C. Stockpiles: Use areas designated on site; pile depth not to exceed 8 feet; protect from erosion. 3.05 FINISH GRADING A. Before Finish Grading: 1. Verify building and trench backfilling have been inspected. 2. Verify subgrade has been contoured and compacted. B. Remove debris, roots, branches, stones, in excess of 1-1/2 inch in size. Remove soil contaminated with petroleum products. C. Where topsoil is to be placed, scarify surface to depth of 3 inches. D. In areas where vehicles or equipment have compacted soil, scarify surface to depth of 3 inches. E. Place topsoil in areas indicated on drawings. F. If not otherwise indicated, place topsoil to the following compacted thicknesses: 1. Areas to be Seeded with Grass: 4 inches. 2. Areas to be Sodded: 4 inches. G. Place topsoil during dry weather. H. Remove roots,weeds, rocks, and foreign material while spreading. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 31 22 00-2 GRADING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents I. Near plants, buildings, and curbs spread topsoil manually to prevent damage. J. Fine grade topsoil to eliminate uneven areas and low spots. Maintain profiles and contour of subgrade. K. Lightly compact placed topsoil. L. Maintain stability of topsoil during inclement weather. Replace topsoil in areas where surface water has eroded thickness below specifications. 3.06 TOLERANCES A. Top Surface of Subgrade: Plus or minus 0.10 foot(1-3/16 inches)from required elevation. B. Top Surface of Finish Grade: Plus or minus 0.04 foot (1/2 inch). 3.07 REPAIR AND RESTORATION A. Existing Facilities, Utilities, and Site Features to Remain: If damaged due to this work, repair or replace to original condition. B. Trees to Remain: If damaged due to this work, trim broken branches and repair bark wounds; if root damage has occurred, obtain instructions from Engineer as to remedy. C. Other Existing Vegetation to Remain: If damaged due to this work, replace with vegetation of equivalent species and size. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 312323 for compaction density testing. 3.09 CLEANING A. Remove unused stockpiled topsoil and subsoil. Grade stockpile area to prevent standing water. B. Leave site clean and raked, ready to receive landscaping. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 31 22 00-3 GRADING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 3123 16 EXCAVATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Excavating for site grading, paving, structures. B. Trenching for utilities from 5 feet outside the building to utility main connections. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 015713 -Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control. B. Section 312200-Grading. C. Section 312323 - Fill. D. Section 31 2316.13 -Trenching. E. Section 31 2316.14-Trench Excavation Protection. F. Project Geotechnical Report. 1.03 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Excavating Soil Materials: 1. Measurement method: By the cubic yard measured before removal. PART 2 PRODUCTS PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that survey bench mark and intended elevations for the work are as indicated. B. Verify that existing topography is as shown in the plans. Coordinate with the engineer for any discrepancies prior to start of excavation. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations. B. Excavate and backfill, in advance of construction,test pits to determine conditions or location of existing utilities. C. Locate, identify, and protect utilities that remain and protect from damage. D. Notify utility company to remove and relocate utilities. E. Protect bench marks, survey control points, existing structures,fences, sidewalks, paving, curbs, and existing utilities from excavating equipment and vehicular traffic. Repair damage at no additional charge to Owner, including utility company charges. F. Protect plants, lawns, rock outcroppings, and other features to remain. G. Grade top perimeter of excavation to prevent surface water from draining into excavation. Provide temporary means and methods, as required,to maintain surface water diversion until no longer needed, or as directed by Engineer. 3.03 EXCAVATING A. Excavate to accommodate construction operations and to lines and grades indicated on the drawings. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 31 23 16-1 EXCAVATION 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents B. Notify Engineer of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected Work in area until notified to resume work. C. Excavate to provide adequate work space and clearance for concrete forms. Do not undercut excavation face for extended footings. D. Steep slope and trench excavations shall conform with OHSA standards for shoring and safety protection. E. Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundations. F. Cut utility trenches wide enough to allow inspection of installed utilities. Reference Sections 31 2316.13 and . G. Remove lumped subsoil, boulders, and rock up to 1/3 cu yd measured by volume. H. Provide temporary means and methods, as required,to remove all water from excavations until directed by Engineer. Remove and replace soils deemed suitable by classification and which are excessively moist due to lack of dewatering or surface water control. I. Stockpile excavated material to be re-used in area designated on site. J. Remove excess excavated material from site. Transport and place in accordance with all applicable regulations. Do not dispose of excess material in any stream or watercourse. Do not dump excess material on public property. Do not dispose of excess material on private property unless authorized by Owner. K. Structure and Roadway Excavations: 1. Subgrade shall be firm, dense, and compacted to 95 percent maximum density at a moisture content between optimum and optimum plus or minus 4 percent unless otherwise indicated in the Project Geotechnical Report. 2. Bottom of excavations for footings and slabs shall be level, clean, dry, and clear of loose material. 3. Remove unsuitable material and replace with suitable material as required or directed by Testing Laboratory. 4. Refill over-excavated areas with properly compacted select backfill material. 5. Extend excavation 5 feet minimum on each side of structure or footing unless otherwise indicated on drawings. 6. Proof roll exposed design subgrade using a 25 ton pneumatic tire roller, maintaining a minimum tire pressure of 75 psi. Proof rolling operation shall be inspected by Testing Laboratory. Any soft or unconsolidated zones or areas detected by proof rolling operations shall be undercut as directed by the Engineer or the Testing Laboratory. Undercut subgrade shall be scarified to a minimum depth of six inches and compacted to a minimum of 95 percent maximum density at a moisture content between optimum and optimum plus 4 percent unless otherwise indicated in the Project Geotechnical Report. After the undercut subgrade has been scarified and compacted, the undercut shall be backfilled with select backfill to the design subgrade elevation. The final subgrade shall be reviewed by the Engineer or the Testing Laboratory. 7. The surface of the subgrade for street excavations shall be finished to the lines and grades as established, and be in conformity with the typical sections shown on the plans. Any deviation in excess of one-half inch in cross section, and in a length of sixteen feet, measured longitudinally, shall be corrected by loosening, adding, or removing material, reshaping and compacting by sprinkling and rolling. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 31 23 16-2 EXCAVATION 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide for visual inspection of load-bearing excavated surfaces by Engineer before placement of foundations. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Divert surface flow from rains or water discharges from the excavation. B. Prevent displacement of banks and keep loose soil from falling into excavation; maintain soil stability. C. Protect open excavations from rainfall, runoff,freezing groundwater, or excessive drying so as to maintain foundation subgrade in satisfactory, undisturbed condition. D. Protect bottom of excavations and exposed soil against physical disturbance, rain, and freeze. E. Keep excavations free of standing water and completely free of water during concrete placement. F. Protect footing excavations; construct concrete footings same day excavation is made wherever possible. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 31 23 16-3 EXCAVATION 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 3123 16.13 TRENCHING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Excavating, backfilling and compacting for utilities outside of any structure to utility main connections or storm drainage outfalls. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Project Geotechnical Report. B. Section 03 3000.10-Controlled Low Strength Backfill. C. Section 312200-Grading. D. Section 312316- Excavation. E. Section 312323 - Fill. F. Section 31 2316.14-Trench Excavation Protection. G. Section 33 4600-Subdrainage. 1.03 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Excavating Soil Materials: 1. Measurement method: By the cubic yard. 2. Includes: Excavating to required elevations, loading and placing materials in stockpile or removing from site. 3. Does Not Include Over-Excavation: Payment will not be made for over-excavated work nor for replacement materials. B. General Fill: 1. Measurement Method: By the cubic yard. 2. Includes: Excavating existing soil, stockpiling, scarifying substrate surface, placing where required, compacting, and dewatering. C. Structural Fill: 1. Measurement Method: By the cubic yard. 2. Includes: Excavating existing soil, stockpiling, scarifying substrate surface, placing where required, and compacting. D. Granular Fill: 1. Measurement Method: By the cubic yard. 2. Includes: Excavating existing material, stockpiling, scarifying substrate surface, placing where required, compacting, and dewatering. E. Aggregates: 1. Measurement Method: By the cubic yard. 2. Includes: Excavating existing material, stockpiling, scarifying substrate surface, placing where required, compacting, and dewatering. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Finish Grade Elevations: Top of paving or proposed contours indicated on drawings. B. Subgrade Elevations: Bottom of paving section indicated on drawings. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 3123 16.13-1 TRENCHING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AASHTO T 180-Standard Specification for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 4.54 kg (10-Ib) Rammer and a 457 mm (18 in.) Drop; 2010. B. ASTM C136/C136M -Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates; 2014. C. ASTM D698-Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-Ibf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)); 2012. D. ASTM D1556-Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand- Cone Method; 2007. E. ASTM D1557-Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort(56,000 ft-Ibf/ft3 (2,700 kN m/m3)); 2012. F. ASTM D2167-Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Rubber Balloon Method; 2008. G. ASTM D2487-Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System); 2011. H. ASTM D 2922-Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth); 2005. I. ASTM D4318-Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils; 2010. J. TxDOT TEX-113-E- Laboratory Compaction Characteristics and Moisture-Density Relationship of Base Materials; 2010. K. TxDOT TEX-114-E- Laboratory Compaction Characteristics and Moisture-Density Relationship of Subgrade, Embankment Soils, and Backfill Material; 2005. L. NFPA 24- Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and their appurtenances. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: sample of each type of fill; submit each material sample in three 5-gallon air-tight containers to testing laboratory. B. Materials Sources: Submit name of imported materials source. C. Fill Composition Test Reports: Results of laboratory tests on proposed and actual materials used. D. Compaction Density Test Reports. 1.07 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. When necessary, store materials on site in advance of need. B. When fill materials need to be stored on site, locate stockpiles where designated. 1. Separate differing materials with dividers or stockpile separately to prevent intermixing. 2. Prevent contamination. 3. Protect stockpiles from erosion and deterioration of materials. 4. Provide positive drainage away from stockpiled material. 5. Install erosion control measures around stockpiles as needed. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 3123 16.13-2 TRENCHING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FILL MATERIALS A. General Fill: Subsoil excavated on-site or imported borrow. 1. For imported borrow, gradation less than 15 percent passing No. 200 sieve as determined by ASTM D 1140. 2. For imported borrow, plasticity index less than 20 percent as determined by ASTM D 4318. 3. No organic matter or debris. 4. For subsoil excavated onsite, reference Geotechnical Engineering Report. B. Structural Fill: 1. Reference Geotechnical Engineering Report. 2. If a Geotechnical Engineering Report is not available then comply with TxDOT Item 247 Type A Grade 2 Base. 3. Graded in accordance with the following limits unless otherwise indicated: a. 1-3/4 inch sieve: 90-100 percent passing. b. No. 4 sieve: 25-55 percent passing. c. No. 40 sieve: 15-40 percent passing. 4. Mixture shall be crushed stone and contain no clay lumps or organic matter. 5. Fraction passing No.40 sieve shall have a liquid limit less than 40 and a plasticity index less than 12 as determined by ASTM D 4318. C. Concrete for Fill: As specified in Section 03 3000.10-Controlled Low Strength Backfill. D. Granular Fill : Crushed limestone or pea gravel ;free of shale, clay, friable material and debris. 1. Graded in accordance with ASTM C136/C136M, within the following limits: a. 1/2 inch sieve: 95 percent passing. b. No. 4 sieve: 5 percent passing. E. Select Initial Backfill or Bedding Material: Clean, well graded crushed stone or gravels, crushed screenings or sand. 1. Modified Grade 5: a. 1/2 inch sieve: 100 percent passing. b. 3/8 inch sieve: 100 to 95 percent passing. c. No. 4 sieve: 80 to 20 percent passing. d. No. 10 sieve: less than 25 percent passing. e. No. 20 sieve: less than 2 percent passing. 2. Plasticity index 12 or less as determined by TxDOT Test Method TEX-106-E. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Geotextile Fabric: Non-biodegradable. 2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Where fill materials are specified by reference to a specific standard,test and analyze samples for compliance before delivery to site. B. If tests indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change material and retest. C. Provide materials of each type from same source throughout the Work. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 3123 16.13-3 TRENCHING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that survey bench marks and intended elevations for the work are as indicated. B. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Locate, identify, and protect utilities that remain and protect from damage. B. Notify utility company to remove and relocate utilities as indicated on plans. C. Protect bench marks, survey control points, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from excavating equipment and vehicular traffic. D. Protect other features to remain. E. Grade top perimeter of trenching area to prevent surface water from draining into trench. Provide temporary means and methods, as required,to maintain surface water diversion until no longer needed, or as directed by the Engineer. 3.03 TRENCHING A. Notify Engineer of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected Work in area until notified to resume work. B. Banks of excavations may be cut back on slopes to angle of repose or less until shored. Slope shall not extend lower than 12 inches above top of pipe. C. Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundations. D. Cut trenches wide enough to allow proper installation,jointing, embedment, and inspection of utilities. See drawing details for minimum trench width. E. Hand trim excavations. Remove loose matter. F. Remove large stones and other hard matter that could damage piping or impede consistent backfilling or compaction. G. Remove lumped subsoil, boulders, and rock up to 1/3 cubic yard measured by volume. See Section 31 2316.26 for removal of larger material. H. Excavate pipe trenches six inches (6") below the underside of the pipe to provide for the installation of a granular fill pipe foundation material except where otherwise required. I. Where in earth,trench bottoms for pipe six inches (6") or smaller, may be graded to provide uniform and continuous support (between bell holes or end joints) of the installed pipe. J. Remove excavated material that is unsuitable for re-use from site. K. Stockpile excavated material to be re-used in area designated on site. Stockpile material a sufficient distance from the banks of the trench to avoid overloading and to prevent slides or cave-ins. L. Remove excess excavated material from site. M. Provide temporary means and methods, as required,to remove all water from trenching until directed by the Engineer. Remove and replace soils deemed unsuitable by classification and which are excessively moist due to lack of dewatering or surface water control. N. Determine the prevailing groundwater level prior to trenching. If the proposed trench extends less than 1 foot into the prevailing groundwater, control groundwater intrusion with perimeter drains routed to sump pumps, or as directed by the Engineer. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 3123 16.13-4 TRENCHING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 3.04 PREPARATION FOR UTILITY PLACEMENT A. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill with properly compacted structural fill. B. Backfill over-depths in trench excavation with properly compacted structural fill. C. Compact subgrade to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent fill material. D. Provide adequate clearance at bell holes for tools and methods used in installing pipe. No part of any bell or coupling shall be in contact with the trench bottom,trench walls, or granular embedment when the pipe is jointed. E. Where existing piping constructed by others cross the new pipeline trench excavation,the existing piping or ductbank shall be adequately supported and protected from damage due to construction. All methods for supporting and maintaining these facilities shall be subject to review by the Engineer or the Testing Laboratory. Backfill between utility crossings shall meet the requirements of standard backfill compact. See Section 03 3000.10 for low strength flowable fill option. F. Until ready to backfill, maintain excavations and prevent loose soil from falling into excavation. Prevent surface water from flowing into trenches. Any water accumulating in trenches shall be removed by pumping or other approved methods. G. If this project is within the Edwards Aquifer Recharge Zone, follow all requirements and recommendations of approved Water Pollution Abatement Plan (WPAP) and Sewer Collection System (SCS), including, plans, reports, and TCEQ approval letters. If, during construction, any recharge features are found, all activities near the feature must be suspended immediately and the Engineer must be notified. No activities near the feature may proceed until TCEQ has approved a plan to address the feature. If any sanitary sewer lines cross geologic fault lines, as indicated in the SCS plans and report, contact the Engineer 48 hours prior to excavating in the vicinity of the fault. The Engineer's geologist is required to assess such faults during excavation. 3.05 BACKFILLING A. See Section 312323 for general backfill requirements. B. Backfill is divided into three (3) separate zones: 1. Bedding: The material in trench bottom in direct contact with the bottom of the pipe. 2. Initial backfill: The backfill zone extending from the surface of the bedding to a point one foot(1') above the top of the pipe. 3. Secondary backfill: The backfill zone extending from the initial backfill surface to the top of the trench. Placement of materials for each of the zones is described herein. C. Bedding 1. When unacceptable materials such as water, silt, muck, trash or debris, or rock boulder or coarse gravel (particle size greater than 1 % inch) exist at the bearing level or for pipes with a nominal inner diameter greater than six inches (6"), use a bedding of granular embedment material. 2. Unstable materials shall be removed at the direction of the Engineer and replaced to a minimum depth of four inches (4") or one-eighth (1/8) of the outside diameter of the pipe, whichever is greater,with granular embedment material. Extend this material up to the sides of the pipe sufficiently to embed the lower quadrant of the pipe. If stability RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 3123 16.13-5 TRENCHING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents is not accomplished by using the above procedure,the Engineer may require additional granular embedment. 3. Spread and grade granular embedment to provide a uniform and continuous bedding zone beneath the pipe at all points between bell holes or pipe joints. It will be permissible to slightly disturb the finished subgrade surface to withdraw pipe slings or other lifting tackle. After each pipe has been graded, aligned, and shoved home, deposit and compact sufficient pipe embedment material under and around each side of the pipe and back of the bell or end thereof to hold the pipe in proper position and alignment during subsequent pipe jointing and embedment operations. Deposit and compact embedment material uniformly and simultaneously on each side of the pipe to prevent lateral displacement. 4. Compact each layer of embedment material by at least two complete coverages of all portions of the surface of each lift using adequate compaction equipment. One coverage is defined as the conditions reached when all portions of the lift fill have been subjected to the direct contact of the compacting surface of the compactor. 5. The method of compaction and the equipment used shall be appropriate for the material to be compacted and shall not transmit damaging shocks to the pipe. D. Initial Backfill: Initial backfill is defined as backfill having a thickness in its compacted state from the surface of the bedding to a point one foot (1') above the top of the pipe. Initial backfill shall be constructed in accordance with details shown on the plans and these specifications. 1. Select Initial Backfill: Where pipe is to be laid in a rock cut or where rock in boulder ledge or coarse gravel (particle size larger than 1% inch) formations exist in the initial backfill zone, or where trench walls or conditions are unstable or where the pipe to be laid is flexible pipe, use granular embedment for initial backfill. 2. For conduits less than twenty-four inches (24") in diameter select initial backfill material shall be placed in two (2) lifts. The first lift shall be spread uniformly and simultaneously on each side and under the shoulders of the pipe to the mid-point or spring line of the pipe. The first lift of select initial backfill shall be inspected and approved prior to placement of the second lift. The second lift of select initial backfill material shall extend from the spring line of the pipe to a depth sufficient to produce a compacted depth of material a minimum of one foot (1') above the top of the pipe. The second lift shall be evenly spread in a similar manner as the first lift. 3. For conduits twenty-four (24") in diameter and larger, select initial backfill material shall be evenly and simultaneously spread alongside, under the shoulders or haunches of the pipe and over the pipe in six-inch (6") lifts to a point sufficient to produce a compacted depth of material a minimum of one foot(1') above the top of the pipe. 4. Natural Initial Backfill: Where the pipe to be laid is rigid pipe and where stable materials and laying conditions exist at the pipe bearing level and initial backfill zone and existing excavated materials are acceptable to the Engineer, such excavated natural materials may be utilized as initial backfill material. 5. For dedicated water lines used for fire protection and trenched in rock, tamped initial backfill and bedding material shall be used for at least 6 inches under and around the pipe and for at least 2 feet above the pipe. E. Secondary Backfill: Secondary backfill is defined as backfill from one foot (1') above the top of the pipe of the trench. Secondary backfill shall be constructed in accordance with details shown on the plans and these specifications. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 3123 16.13-6 TRENCHING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 1. Secondary backfill shall generally consist of materials removed from the trench and shall be free of trash brush and other debris. No rock or stones having any dimension larger than one half of the trench width, or four inches (4"), whichever is less, shall be used in the secondary backfilling zone. In special cases where excessive width and/or depth of the trench permit, and only with approval of the Engineer, larger rocks up to six inches (6") in diameter may be incorporated into the backfill provided that the surrounding compactable soil may be properly and adequately compacted. F. Restore the surface of the backfilled trench, if not disturbed by surrounding construction, to match previous existing conditions. G. Compaction Density unless otherwise indicated in the project Geotechnical Report: 1. Compaction to meet the requirements of TxDOT TEX-114-E. 2. Lift Thickness: 8 inches. 3. Moisture Content: Between optimum and optimum +4 percent. 4. Testing laboratory will perform density tests at completion of each lift. 5. If the tests indicate unsatisfactory compaction, the Contractor shall provide the additional compaction necessary to obtain the specified degree of compaction. All additional compaction work shall be performed by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner until the specified compaction is obtained. This work shall include complete removal of unacceptable (as determined by the Testing Laboratory)fill areas and replacement and recompaction until acceptable fill is provided. 3.06 BEDDING AND FILL AT SPECIFIC LOCATIONS A. Use general fill unless otherwise specified or indicated. 3.07 TOLERANCES A. Top Surface of General Backfilling: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations. 3.08 CLEANING A. Leave unused materials in a neat, compact stockpile. B. Remove unused stockpiled materials, leave area in a clean and neat condition. Grade stockpile area to prevent standing surface water. C. Leave borrow areas in a clean and neat condition. Grade to prevent standing surface water. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 3123 16.13-7 TRENCHING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 3123 16.14 TRENCH EXCAVATION PROTECTION PARTI -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Trench Excavation Protection required for the construction of all trench excavation protection systems to be utilized in the project and including all additional excavation and backfill necessitated by the protection and backfill necessitated by the protection system. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Trench Excavation Protection is to be included in the cost of installation of trenched underground utilities. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Trench Excavation Protection shall be accomplished as required by the provisions of Part 1926, Subpart P- Excavations,Trenching, and Shoring of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration Standards and Interpretations. B. A copy of the Document is available for review at the office of the Engineer. It shall be construed that this document is included in this Project Manual and shall apply to every Section as if written in full therein. PART 2- PRODUCTS -- NOT USED PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTION METHODS A. Trench Excavation Protection shall be accomplished as required by the provisions of, Part 1926, Subpart P- Excavations,Trenching, and Shoring of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration Standards and Interpretations. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 3123 16.14-1 TRENCH EXCAVATION PROTECTION 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 31 23 16.16 STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Excavating for building volume below grade, footings, pile caps, slabs-on-grade, paving, site structures, and utilities within the building. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Geotechnical report; bore hole locations and findings of subsurface materials. B. Section 31 23 23.16-Structural Fill: Fill materials, filling, and compacting. 1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify that survey bench mark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations. B. Locate, identify, and protect utilities that remain and protect from damage. 3.02 EXCAVATING A. Excavate to accommodate new structures and construction operations. B. Notify Architect/Structural Engineer of Record of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected Work in area until notified to resume work. C. Slope banks of excavations deeper than 4 feet to angle of repose or less until shored. D. Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundations. E. Cut utility trenches wide enough to allow inspection of installed utilities. F. Hand trim excavations. Remove loose matter. G. Correct areas that are over-excavated and load-bearing surfaces that are disturbed; see Section 31 23 23. H. Grade top perimeter of excavation to prevent surface water from draining into excavation. I. Remove excavated material that is unsuitable for re-use from site. J. Remove excess excavated material from site. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 40 00 -Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection and testing. B. Provide for visual inspection of load-bearing excavated surfaces before placement of foundations. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Prevent displacement of banks and keep loose soil from falling into excavation; maintain soil stability. B. Protect bottom of excavations and soil adjacent to and beneath foundation from freezing. END OF SECTION LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 31 23 16.16- 1 Structural Excavation 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 3123 23 FILL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Filling, backfilling, and compacting for building volume below grade,footings, slabs-on-grade, paving, and utilities within the building. B. Filling holes, pits, and excavations. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 312200-Grading. B. Section 312316- Excavation. C. Section 31 2316.13 -Trenching. D. Section 32 9119- Landscape Grading. E. Project Geotechnical Report. 1.03 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. General Fill: 1. Measurement Method: By the cubic yard. 2. Includes: Excavating existing soil, stockpiling, scarifying substrate surface, placing where required, compacting, and dewatering. B. Structural Fill: 1. Measurement Method: By the cubic yard. 2. Includes: Excavating existing soil, stockpiling, scarifying substrate surface, placing where required, compacting, and dewatering. C. Granular Fill: 1. Measurement Method: By the cubic yard. 2. Includes: Excavating existing material, stockpiling, scarifying substrate surface, placing where required, compacting, and dewatering. D. Aggregates: 1. Measurement Method: By the cubic yard. 2. Includes: Excavating existing material, stockpiling, scarifying substrate surface, placing where required, compacting, and dewatering. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Finish Grade Elevations: Indicated on drawings. B. Subgrade Elevations: Indicated on drawings. 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AASHTO T 180-Standard Specification for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 4.54 kg (10-Ib) Rammer and a 457 mm (18 in.) Drop; 2010. B. ASTM C136/C136M -Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates; 2014. C. ASTM D698-Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-Ibf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)); 2012. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 31 23 23-1 FILL 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents D. ASTM D1556-Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand- Cone Method; 2007. E. ASTM D1557-Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort(56,000 ft-Ibf/ft3 (2,700 kN m/m3)); 2012. F. ASTM D2167-Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Rubber Balloon Method; 2008. G. ASTM D2487-Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System); 2011. H. ASTM D 2922-Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth); 2005. I. ASTM D4318-Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils; 2010. J. TxDOT TEX-113-E, Laboratory Compaction Characteristics and Moisture-Density Relationship of Base Materials, using 5.5 lb rammer and 12-inch drop. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: sample of each type of fill; submit each material sample in three 5-gallon air-tight containers to testing laboratory. B. Materials Sources: Submit name of imported materials source. C. Fill Composition Test Reports: Results of laboratory tests on proposed and actual materials used, including manufactured fill. D. Compaction Density Test Reports. 1.07 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. When necessary, store materials on site in advance of need. B. When fill materials need to be stored on site, locate stockpiles where designated. 1. Separate differing materials with dividers or stockpile separately to prevent intermixing. 2. Prevent contamination. 3. Protect stockpiles from erosion and deterioration of materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FILL MATERIALS A. General Fill: Subsoil excavated onsite, imported borrow. 1. For imported borrow, gradation less than 15 percent passing No. 200 sieve as determined by ASTM D 1140. 2. For imported borrow, plasticity index less than 20 percent as determined by ASTM D 4318. 3. No vegetative matter or debris. 4. No rocks larger than half of the lift thickness. B. Structural Fill: 1. Refer to Geotechnical Engineering Report. 2. If a Geotechnical Engineering Report is not available then comply with TxDOT Item 247 Type A Grade 2 Base. 3. Graded in accordance with the following limits unless otherwise indicated: a. 1-3/4 inch sieve: 90-100 percent passing. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 31 23 23-2 FILL 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents b. No. 4 sieve: 25-55 percent passing. c. No. 40 sieve: 15-40 percent passing. 4. Mixture shall be crushed stone and contain no clay lumps or organic matter. 5. Fraction passing No.40 sieve shall have a liquid limit less than 40 and a plasticity index less than 12 as determined by ASTM D 4318. C. Granular Fill : Crushed limestone or pea gravel ;free of shale, clay, friable material and debris. 1. Graded in accordance with ASTM C136/C136M, within the following limits: a. 1/2 inch sieve: 95 percent passing. b. No. 4 sieve: 5 percent passing. D. Sand - Fill: Natural river or bank sand; free of silt, clay, loam,friable or soluble materials, and organic matter. 1. Graded in accordance with ASTM C136/C136M; within the following limits: a. No. 4 sieve: 100 percent passing. b. No. 200 sieve: 0 to 10 percent passing. E. Drain Gravel: Washed gravel. 1. Material shall have an LA abrasion number of 3S or less. 2. Graded within the following limits: a. 2 inch sieve: 100 percent passing. b. 1-1/2 inch sieve: 90-100 percent passing. c. 1 inch sieve: 25-55 percent passing. d. 1/2 inch sieve: 0-10 percent passing. e. 1/4 inch sieve: 0-5 percent passing. F. Topsoil: See Section 32 9119. 2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Where fill materials are specified by reference to a specific standard,test and analyze samples for compliance before delivery to site. B. If tests indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change material and retest. C. Provide materials of each type from same source throughout the Work. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that survey bench marks and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated. B. Verify that existing topography is as shown in the plans. Coordinate with the engineer for any discrepancies prior to start of excavation. C. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations. D. See Section 312200 for additional requirements. E. Verify subdrainage, dampproofing, or waterproofing installation has been inspected. F. Verify structural ability of unsupported walls to support imposed loads by the fill. G. Verify areas to be filled are not compromised with surface or ground water. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Scarify and proof roll subgrade surface to a depth of 6 inches to identify soft spots. B. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill with general fill. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 31 23 23-3 FILL 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents C. Compact subgrade to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent fill material. D. Until ready to fill, maintain excavations and prevent loose soil from falling into excavation. E. Record locations of underground utilities. F. If required, remove concrete formwork. G. Remove trash and debris. 3.03 FILLING A. Fill to contours and elevations indicated using suitable materials. B. All select backfill, backfill and fill required for structures and trenches and required to provide the finished grades shown and as described herein shall be furnished, placed and compacted by the Contractor. C. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage other work. D. Systematically fill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not fill over porous,wet, frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces. E. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density. F. Slope grade away from building minimum 2 percent, unless noted otherwise. Make gradual grade changes. Blend slope to transition at grade changes. G. Correct areas that are over-excavated. H. All material shall be placed in horizontal loose lifts not exceeding eight inches (8") in thickness and shall be mixed and spread in a manner assuring uniform lift thickness after placing. Each lift shall be compacted by not less than two complete coverages of the specified compactor. Select backfill shall be placed to the underside of all concrete slabs or paved areas.The fill material shall extend a minimum of five feet (5') outside the face of each structure and be twelve inches (12") below finished grade. The maximum slope of select backfill to the subgrade shall be one vertical to one and one half horizontal. I. Backfill around and outside of structures and over select backfill shall be deposited in layers not to exceed eight inches (8") in uncompacted thickness and mechanically compacted, using platform type tampers. Compaction of structural backfill, by rolling will be permitted provided the desired compaction is obtained and damage to the structure is prevented. Compaction of select backfill and/or backfill by inundation with water will not be permitted. All materials shall be deposited as specified herein and as shown on the drawings. J. Unless otherwise indicated in the Geotechnical Report, all material shall be placed at a moisture content that falls in the range of laboratory optimum moisture content and laboratory optimum +4%. It shall be compacted to a density of 95 percent (95%) of the maximum laboratory dry density for that material as determined by TxDOT TEX-113-E. The Contractor shall provide equipment capable of adding measured amounts of water to the material to bring it to a condition within the range of the required moisture content. The Contractor shall provide equipment capable of discing, aerating, and mixing the soil to insure reasonable uniformity of moisture content throughout the material and to reduce the moisture content of the material by air drying if necessary. If the subgrade material must be moisture conditioned before compaction,the material shall be sufficiently mixed or worked on the subgrade to insure a uniform moisture content throughout the lift of material to be RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 31 23 23-4 FILL 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents compacted. Materials at moisture content in excess of the specified limit shall be dried by aeration or stockpiled for drying. K. No material shall be placed when free water is standing on the surface of the area where the material is to be placed. No compaction of material will be permitted with free water on any portion of the material to be compacted. No material shall be placed or compacted in a frozen condition or on top of frozen material. Any material containing organic materials or other unacceptable material previously described shall be removed and replaced with acceptable material prior to compaction. L. Each lift of compacted material shall be compacted by the designated number of coverages of all portions of the surface of each lift by a smooth drum vibratory roller for granular material having a static weight not less than 5,500 pounds, a sheepsfoot roller for cohesive material exerting a pressure of 250 psi on the surface of the feet, or equivalent equipment, prior to commencement of the work. One coverage is defined as the condition obtained when all portions of the surface of the backfill material have been subjected to the direct contact of the compactor. The compactor shall be operated at a forward speed not exceeding 40 feet per minute. M. Compaction shall be performed with equipment suitable for the type of material being placed. The contractor shall select equipment which is capable of providing the minimum density required by these Specifications.The gross weight of compacting equipment shall not exceed 7,000 pounds within a distance of ten feet (10')from the wall of any existing structure or completed structure under this contract. Equipment shall be provided that is capable of compacting in restricted areas next to structures and around piping. The effectiveness of the equipment selected by the Contractor shall be tested at the commencement of compacted material work by construction of a small section of material within the area where material is to be placed. If tests on this section of backfill show that the specified compaction is not obtained,the Contractor shall increase the amount of coverages, decrease the lift thicknesses or obtain a different type of compactor. N. Particular care shall be taken to compact structure backfill which will be beneath pipes, roads, or other surface construction or structures. In addition, wherever a trench passes through structure backfill,the structure backfill shall be placed and compacted to an elevation twelve inches (12") above the top of the pipe before the trench is excavated. Compacted areas, in each case, shall be adequate to support the item to be constructed or placed thereon. O. The compaction requirements specified are predicated on the use of normal materials and compaction equipment. In order to establish criteria for the placement of a controlled fill so that it will have compressibility and strength characteristics compatible with the proposed structural loadings, a series of laboratory compaction and/or compressive strength tests will be performed on the samples of materials submitted by the Contractor. From the results of the laboratory tests,the final values of the required percent compaction,the allowable compaction moisture content range, and the maximum permissible lift thickness will be established for the fill material and construction equipment proposed. P. Compaction Density, unless otherwise specified or indicated: 1. Standard: TxDOT TEX-113-E. 2. Required Density: 95 percent of the maximum dry density. 3. Lift Thickness: 8 inches. 4. Moisture Content: Between optimum and optimum +4 percent. 5. Testing laboratory will perform density tests at completion of each lift. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 31 23 23-5 FILL 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 6. If the tests indicate unsatisfactory compaction, the Contractor shall provide the additional compaction necessary to obtain the specified degree of compaction. All additional compaction work shall be performed by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner until the specified compaction is obtained. This work shall include complete removal of unacceptable (as determined by the Testing Laboratory)fill areas and replacement and recompaction until acceptable fill is provided. 7. Pit Run Sand Placement: Pit run sand shall be placed and compacted to the limits shown on the drawings. 8. Drainage Gravel: Drain gravel shall be compacted in maximum 8-inch lifts with a minimum of two passes of a hand operated vibratory plate compactor weighing between 150 and 500 pounds. Q. Reshape and re-compact fills subjected to vehicular traffic. R. Maintain temporary means and methods, as required, to remove all water while fill is being placed as required, or until directed by the Engineer. Remove and replace soils deemed unsuitable by classification and which are excessively moist due to lack of dewatering or surface water control. 3.04 FILL AT SPECIFIC LOCATIONS 3.05 TOLERANCES A. Top Surface of General Filling: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to the Geotechnical Engineer for general requirements for field inspections and testing. 3.07 CLEANING A. See Section 017419-Construction Waste Management and Disposal,for additional requirements. B. Leave unused materials in a neat, compact stockpile. C. Remove unused stockpiled materials, leave area in a clean and neat condition. Grade stockpile area to prevent standing surface water. D. Leave borrow areas in a clean and neat condition. Grade to prevent standing surface water. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 31 23 23-6 FILL 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 31 23 23.16 STRUCTURAL FILL PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Filling, backfilling, and compacting for building volume below grade. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Geotechnical report; bore hole locations and findings of subsurface materials. B. Section 31 23 16.16-Structtural Excavation: Removal and handling of soil to be re-used. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D698- Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort(12,400 ft-Ibf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)); 2012. B. ASTM D2487- Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System); 2011. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Materials Sources: Submit name of imported materials source. C. Fill Composition Test Reports: Results of laboratory tests on proposed and actual materials used. D. Compaction Density Test Reports. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. When necessary, store materials on site in advance of need. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FILL MATERIALS A. General Fill: Subsoil excavated on-site. 1. Graded. 2. Free of lumps larger than {CH#10000698}, rocks larger than {CH#10000699}, and debris. 3. Conforming to ASTM D2487 Group Symbol . 4. Plasticity Index (PI) maximum 20 percent, with moisture content between minus two (-2) and plus three (+3) points of the optimum. B. Structural Fill- Fill Type Item 247, Type "A", Grade 2: Conforming to State of Texas Highway Department standard. C. Granular Fill- Fill Type 57 Rock: Coarse aggregate, conforming to State of Texas Highway Department standard. 2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 40 00 -Quality Requirements, for general requirements for testing and analysis of soil material. B. Where fill materials are specified by reference to a specific standard, test and analyze samples for compliance before delivery to site. C. If tests indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change material and retest. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations. LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 31 23 23.16- 1 Structural Fill 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3.02 PREPARATION A. In the area occupied by the foundation , plus a distance show on the drawings, remove topsoil including all organic materials, roots, etc. from the site per drawings. Do not use for underfloor fill. Remove additional material as necessary to provide minimum fill per drawings. B. The resulting surface shall be proof rolled with a sufficiently heavy roller (15 TONS)to locate and densify weak and compressible zones. A minimum of 6 passes of the roller is required. Any soft sposts shall be removed and replaced with compacted structural fill. C. The rolled subgrade shall be scarified just prior to fill placement to a minimum depth of 6" and recompacted to a mimimum of 95% of the maximum density as determined by ASTM D 698 compaction test, maintaining moisture content between -1 and +3 percentage points until covered. 3.03 FILLING A. Granular Fill: Place and compact materials in equal continuous layers not exceeding 6 inches compacted depth. B. Beginning at low end, build up to the bottom of the slab with structural fill. Refer to plan for minimum thicknesses. NO DIRT FILL SHALL BE USED UNDER THE BUILDING FOUNDATION. Submit written certification of compliance with requirements above by test preformed on field sample. C. All fill shall be placed in 8" loose horizontal lifts and compacted to a minimum of 95% of the maximum density as detemined by ASTM D 698 compaction test. 3.04 FILL AT SPECIFIC LOCATIONS A. Under Interior Slabs-On-Grade: 1. Use structural fill. B. At Foundation Walls and Footings: Use general fill. 1. Fill up to subgrade elevation. 2. Compact each lift to 90 percent of maximum dry density. 3. Do not backfill against unsupported foundation walls. 4. Backfill simultaneously on each side of unsupported foundation walls until supports are in place. C. At Foundation Walls and Footings with concrete or paving above fill: 1. Use Select Fill. 2. Fill up to subgrade elevation. 3. Compact each lift to 95 percent of maximum dry density. 4. Do not backfill against unsupported foundation walls. 5. Backfill simultaneously on each side of unsupported foundation walls until supports are in place. D. Over Subdrainage Piping at Foundation Perimeter and Under Slabs: 1. Drainage fill and geotextile fabric: Section 33 46 00. 2. Cover drainage fill with structural fill or flowable fill. LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 31 23 23.16-2 Structural Fill 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 3. Fill up to subgrade elevation. 4. Compact to 95 percent of maximum dry density. E. Over Buried Utility Piping, Conduits, and Duct Bank in Trenches 1. Bedding: Use sand. 2. Cover with structural fill or flowable fill. 3. Fill up to subgrade elevation. 4. Compact in maximum 8 inch lifts to 95 percent of maximum dry density. 3.05 TOLERANCES A. Top Surface of General Filling: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 40 00 -Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection and testing. 3.07 CLEANING A. Leave unused materials in a neat, compact stockpile. B. Remove unused stockpiled materials, leave area in a clean and neat condition. Grade stockpile area to prevent standing surface water. C. Leave borrow areas in a clean and neat condition. Grade to prevent standing surface water. END OF SECTION LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 31 23 23.16-3 Structural Fill 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 3137 00 RIPRAP PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Riprap rock. B. Cement sacks. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 312323 - Fill. 1.03 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Riprap: By the square yard of riprap area; summing the areas of individual layers, of riprap sacks. Includes supply and placing riprap mix in sacks, moist cured. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with Texas Department of Transportation. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Riprap: Provide in accordance with State of Texas Highways standards. B. Riprap: Limestone type; broken stone or irregular shaped rock; solid and nonfriable; 4 inch minimum size, 12 inch maximum size, or as indicated on drawings. C. Aggregate: Granular fill, see Section 312323. D. Bags: Woven jute or geotextile fabric. E. Binder: Portland cement. F. Geotextile: Non-biodegradable, woven. 2.02 BAGGED RIPRAP A. Mix riprap, cement, sand and aggregate dry. Limit quantity of cement to 10 percent of dry mixed materials by volume. B. Fill bags with dry ingredients to 70 percent capacity and close by sewing or stapling to a straight seam. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not place riprap over frozen,wet or soft subgrade surfaces. 3.02 PLACEMENT A. Place geotextile over substrate, lap edges and ends. B. Place riprap at culvert pipe ends, embankment slopes, or as indicated on drawings. C. Place bags into position. Knead, ram, or pack filled bags to fit with the contour of adjacent material and other bags previously placed. D. Place bags in a staggered pattern. Remove foreign matter from bag surfaces. E. After placement, spray with water to moisten the bagged mix. Maintain moist for 24 hours. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 31 37 00-1 RIPRAP 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents F. Installed Thickness: As indicated on drawings. G. Place rock into position in an interlocking manner to preclude disturbance or displacement of substrate. H. Place rock at location and depth indicated on drawings. 3.03 SCHEDULES A. Culvert Pipe Ends: Bagged, placed one layer thick, 6 inch average thickness, concealed with topsoil fill. B. Sloped Grade At Retaining Wall: Individual riprap units, 6 inch thickness; placed prior to finish topsoil. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 31 37 00-2 RIPRAP 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 31 63 29 DRILLED CONCRETE FOOTINGS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Machine drilled shaft and belled base. B. Concrete and reinforcement. C. Casing, if required. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 20 00- Concrete Reinforcing: Requirements for concrete reinforcement. B. Section 03 30 00- Cast-in-Place Concrete: Requirements for concrete. 1.03 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. See Section 01 22 00 - Unit Prices, for additional unit price requirements. B. Designed Footings: 1. Design Footing Quantity: Determined by the quantity of footings indicated in the Contract Documents. 2. Design Footing Length: By the linear foot measured from bearing to top of footing elevation as indicated. 3. Footing Casings: By the linear foot. 4. Footing Reinforcement: By the linear foot of full footing. C. Actual Footings: 1. Actual Footing Quantity: Determined by quantity of footings identified in the Project Record Documents. 2. Actual Footing Length: Determined by length of footings identified in Project Record Documents. D. Adjustments to the Contract Sum/Price will be made if the Actual Footing Quantity or Length differs from Design Footing Quantity or Length, based on unit prices established in the Agreement and as follows: 1. Unit price per unit length. To calculate cost adjustment, multiply unit price by difference between Design Footing Length and Actual Footing Length. E. Determination of Unit Measurements: Identified by site measurements and verified by the Architect/Structural Engineer of Record . 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AASHTO M 36 -Standard Specification for Corrugated Steel Pipe, Metallic-Coated, for Sewers and Drains; 2016 (Reapproved 2020). B. ACI 336.1 -Specification for the Construction of Drilled Piers; 2001. C. ASTM A252 -Standard Specification for Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe Piles; 2010 (Reapproved 2018). 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of footings, footing diameter, and footing length. Accurately record the following: 1. Sizes, lengths, and locations of footings and footing groups. LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 31 63 29- 1 Drilled Concrete Footings 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 3 years of documented experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Casing: ASTM A 252, Grade 1; single length steel pipe, with plain ends , of diameter and wall thickness indicated. B. Concrete Materials and Mix: Specified in Section 03 30 00. C. Reinforcement: Specified in Section 03 20 00; spiral wound. D. Equipment: Appropriate for dewatering excavated shaft. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Construct footings in accordance with ACI 336.1. B. Drill vertical pier shafts and belled bases to diameters and depths indicated. C. Place steel casings immediately after drilling. Set firmly in place. If casing is to be temporary, install shaft liner with sufficient strength to withstand concrete pressures. D. Clean shaft and bottom of loose material. Maintain shafts free of water. E. Allow inspection of shaft and liner prior to placement of reinforcement and concrete. F. Place reinforcing steel in accordance with Section 03 20 00. G. Place concrete in single pour, in accordance with Section 03 30 00 with equipment designed for vertical placement of concrete. H. Progressively raise casing during concrete placement. Do not permit top of footing to deform to a mushroom shape due to premature removal of liner. I. Extend reinforcement for connection of caps. 3.02 TOLERANCES A. Install footings with maximum variation from location, plumbness, bottom area, diameter, and anchorage locations as specified in ACI 336.1. B. Maximum Variation From Vertical: 1 in 240. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01 40 00. 3.04 UNACCEPTABLE FOOTINGS A. Unacceptable Footings: Footings that fail, are placed out of position, are below elevations, or are damaged. B. Provide additional footings or replace footings failing to conform to specified requirements. END OF SECTION LFE#25-712-00-City of Corpus Christi 31 63 29-2 Drilled Concrete Footings 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop RE-BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SECTION 32 1123 AGGREGATE BASE COURSES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Aggregate base course. B. Paving aggregates. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 312200-Grading. B. Section 312323 - Fill. C. Section 32 1250-Site Pavement. D. Project Geotechnical Report. 1.03 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Coarse Aggregate Type as specified in the Geotechnical Report: By the cubic yard. Includes supplying aggregate material, stockpiling, scarifying substrate surface, placing, and compacting. B. Fine Aggregate Type as specified in the Geotechnical Report : By the cubic yard. Includes supplying aggregate material, stockpiling, scarifying substrate surface, placing where required, and compacting. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AASHTO M 147-Standard Specification for Materials for Aggregate and Soil-Aggregate Subbase, Base and Surface Courses; 1965 (2004). B. AASHTO T 180-Standard Specification for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 4.54 kg (10-Ib) Rammer and a 457 mm (18 in.) Drop; 2010. C. ASTM C136/C136M -Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates; 2014. D. ASTM D698-Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-Ibf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)); 2012. E. ASTM D1556-Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand- Cone Method; 2007. F. ASTM D1557-Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort(56,000 ft-Ibf/ft3 (2,700 kN m/m3)); 2012. G. ASTM D2167-Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Rubber Balloon Method; 2008. H. ASTM D2487-Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System); 2011. I. ASTM D 2922-Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth); 2005. J. ASTM D4318-Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils; 2010. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 32 11 23-1 AGGREGATE BASE COURSES 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents K. ASTM D6938-Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil- Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth); 2010. L. TxDOT TEX-113-E- Laboratory Compaction Characteristics and Moisture-Density Relationship of Base Materials. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: 10 lb sample of each type of aggregate; submit in air-tight containers to testing laboratory. B. Materials Sources: Submit name of imported materials source. C. Aggregate Composition Test Reports: Results of laboratory tests on proposed and actual materials used. D. Compaction Density Test Reports. 1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. When necessary, store materials on site in advance of need. B. Aggregate Storage, General: 1. Separate differing materials with dividers or stockpile separately to prevent intermixing. 2. Prevent contamination. 3. Protect stockpiles from erosion and deterioration of materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Limestone, coarse, crushed rock meeting the requirements of 2004 TxDOT Item 247,Type A, Grade 1 or 2. 2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Where aggregate materials are specified using ASTM D2487 classification,test and analyze samples for compliance before delivery to site. B. If tests indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change material and retest. C. Provide materials of each type from same source throughout the Work. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that survey bench marks and intended elevations for the work are as indicated. B. Verify substrate has been inspected,gradients and elevations are correct, and is dry. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Correct irregularities in substrate gradient and elevation by scarifying, reshaping, and re- compacting. B. Do not place aggregate on soft, muddy, or frozen surfaces. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Spread aggregate over prepared substrate to a total compacted minimum thickness of 6 inches or as indicated on the drawings. B. Under Bituminous Concrete Paving: 1. Place coarse aggregate to a total compacted minimum thickness of 6 inches or as indicated on the drawings. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 32 11 23-2 AGGREGATE BASE COURSES 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 2. Compact to 95 percent of maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D 1557 at a moisture content ranging from -2 to+3 percent of the optimum moisture content unless otherwise indicated on the geotechnical report. C. Under Portland Cement Concrete Paving: 1. Place coarse aggregate to a total compacted minimum thickness of 6 inches or as indicated on the drawings. 2. Compact to 95 percent of maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D 1557 at a moisture content ranging from -2 to+3 percent of the optimum moisture content unless otherwise indicated on the geotechnical report. D. Roller compact to specified density. E. Level and contour surfaces to elevations and gradients indicated. F. Add small quantities of fine aggregate to coarse aggregate as appropriate to assist compaction. G. Add water to assist compaction. If excess water is apparent, remove aggregate and aerate to reduce moisture content. H. Use mechanical tamping equipment in areas inaccessible to compaction equipment. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Flatness: Maximum variation of 1/4 inch measured with 10 foot straight edge. B. Scheduled Compacted Thickness: Within 1/4 inch. C. Variation From Design Elevation: Within 1/4 inch. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Compaction density testing will be performed on compacted aggregate base course in accordance with ASTM D1556,ASTM D2167, or ASTM D6938. B. Results will be evaluated in relation to compaction curve determined by testing uncompacted material in accordance with AASHTO T 180,ASTM D698 ("standard Proctor"), or ASTM D1557 ("modified Proctor"). C. If tests indicate work does not meet specified requirements, remove work, replace and retest. D. Frequency of Tests: To be determined by the Owner's Construction Materials Testing Contractors. E. Proof roll compacted aggregate at surfaces that will be under slabs-on-grade, pavers, and paving. 3.06 CLEANING A. Remove unused stockpiled materials, leave area in a clean and neat condition. Grade stockpile area to prevent standing surface water. B. Leave borrow areas in a clean and neat condition. Grade to prevent standing surface water. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 32 11 23-3 AGGREGATE BASE COURSES 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 32 12 50 SITE PAVEMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope 1. Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to provide hot mix-hot laid bituminous paving, as shown and specified for roadways. 2. The work includes the following: a. Lime Stabilized Subbase b. Flexible Base c. Cement Stabilized Base d. Asphalt Stabilized Base e. Surface Treatments f. Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete g. Portland Cement Concrete Pavement h. Testing As Specified 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 312200-Grading. B. Section 312316- Excavation. C. Section 312323—Fill. D. Section 32 1123—Aggregate Base Course. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Services 1. General: Testing of materials and of compaction requirements for compliance with technical requirements of the Specifications shall be the duty of a testing laboratory as provided for by the specifications for this Project. 2. Testing Services: a. The testing laboratory shall: 1) Test the Contractor's proposed materials in the laboratory and field for compliance with the Specifications. 2) Perform field density tests to assure that the specified compaction of surface and base course materials has been obtained. 3) Report all test results to the Engineer and the Contractor. 4) Perform concrete testing in accordance with the Project specifications. 3. Authority and Duties of Testing Laboratory: a. Technicians representing the testing laboratory shall inspect the materials in the field and perform compaction tests, and shall report their findings to the Engineer and the Contractor. When the materials furnished or work performed by the Contractor fails to fulfill Specifications requirements,the technician will direct the attention of the Engineer and the Contractor to such failure. b. The technician shall not act as foreman or perform other duties for the Contractor. Work will be checked as it progresses, but failure to detect any defective work or materials shall not in any way prevent later rejection when such defect is RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 32 12 50-1 SITE PAVEMENT 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents discovered, nor shall it obligate the Engineer for final acceptance. Technicians are not authorized to revoke, alter, relax, enlarge, or release any requirements of the Specifications, nor to approve or accept any portion of the Work. 4. Responsibilities and Duties of Contractor: a. The use of testing services shall in no way relieves the Contractor of his responsibility to furnish materials and construction in full compliance with the Drawings and Specifications. To facilitate testing services,the Contractor shall: 1) Secure and deliver to the Testing Laboratory, representative samples of the materials he proposes to use and which are required to be tested. 2) Furnish such casual labor as is necessary to obtain and handle samples at the project or at other sources of material. 3) Advise the testing laboratory and Engineer sufficiently in advance of operations (24 hrs. minimum)to allow for completion of quality tests and for the assignment of personnel. B. Referenced Standards 1. Comply with the applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, unless otherwise shown or specified. a. Texas Department of Transportation 2004, Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets and Bridges. b. Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, City of San Antonio,Texas. c. TxDOT TEX-113E - Laboratory Compaction Characteristics and Moisture-Density Relationship of Base Materials; 2010. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Certificates: Submit certificates of compliance with these specifications for the following materials: 1. Lime. 2. Flexible Base. 3. Asphalt Stabilized Base. 4. Cement. 5. Curing Seal Coat. 6. Tack Coat. 7. Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete. 8. Aggregates for Surface Treatments. 9. Reinforcing Steel. B. Shop Drawings 1. Submit the following: a. Detailed reinforcing steel layout. b. Detailed construction and control joint layout. C. Laboratory Test Reports 1. Submit copies of laboratory test reports for optimum lime content for subgrade stabilization, and mix designs for Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete and Portland Cement Concrete. D. All paving and base course materials shall be tested and approved prior to delivery to the site. Samples of materials proposed for use as pavement and base course should be submitted by RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 32 12 50-2 SITE PAVEMENT 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents the Contractor to the Testing Laboratory for testing. Samples of materials shall be submitted at least 14 days in advance of its use. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. The source of materials shall be acceptable to the Engineer. Materials shall conform to the following: 1. Flexible Base a. Base material shall be crushed or uncrushed as necessary to meet the requirements hereinafter specified, and shall consist of durable stone or gravel, crushed and/or screened to the required particle size, with or without other approved fine sized materials. The material shall be from approved sources. 1) Testing of flexible base material shall be in accordance with the following standard laboratory test procedures: (a) Preparation of Soil (b) Constants and Sieve Analysis: TxDOT TEX-110-E (c) Liquid Limit: TxDOT TEX-104-E (d) Plastic Limit: TxDOT TEX-10S-E (e) Plasticity Index: TxDOT TEX-106-E (f) Linear Shrinkage: TxDOT TEX-107-E (g) Sieve Analysis: TxDOT TEX-110-E (h) Wet Ball Mill: TxDOT TEX-116-E (i) Los Angeles Abrasion: ASTM C 131 (Grad. A) 2) Samples for testing the material shall be taken prior to compaction operations. 3) The material shall be well graded and when properly tested shall meet the following requirements of Texas Department of Transportation Specifications for Type A Grade 2 Flexible Base: (a) Retained on 2% inch sieve: 0% (b) Retained on 1% inch sieve: 0-10% (c) Retained on No. 4 sieve: 45-75% (d) Retained on 40 mesh sieve: 60-85% 4) The material passing the 40 mesh sieve shall be known as "Soil Binder" and shall meet the following requirements: (a) The liquid limit shall not exceed 40. (b) The plasticity index shall not exceed 12. (c) The linear shrinkage shall not exceed 10. (Note: The linear shrinkage shall be calculated from the volumetric shrinkage at the liquid limit.) 5) The crushed stone or crushed gravel shall have an abrasion of no more than 40 when subjected to the Los Angeles Abrasion Test. 2. Asphalt Treated Base a. This item shall consist of a compacted mixture of mineral aggregate and asphaltic material mixed hot in a mixing plant. The asphalt stabilized base shall be constructed on an approved subgrade, as herein specified and in accordance with details shown on the plans. Unless otherwise specified in this Section, all asphalt stabilized base materials shall conform to TxDOT, Item 292 "Asphalt Treatment (Plant Mixed)". RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 32 12 50-3 SITE PAVEMENT 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 1) Mineral Aggregate: (a) Description: The material shall be crushed or uncrushed and shall be screened as necessary to meet the requirements hereinafter specified and shall consist of durable aggregate particles. Unless otherwise specified on the plans, one or more mineral aggregates may be used to produce the specified mixture. (b) Grades: The grading of the mineral aggregate shall conform to the limitations as shown below: GRADE 1: Sieve Percent Retained 1-1/2 inches 0% 1 inch 0-10% 3/8 inch 30-55% No. 4 45-70% No.40 70-85% (c) Tests: (1) Unless otherwise specified on the plans, the mineral aggregate for Grade 1 shall meet the following physical requirements: Los Angeles Abrasion: 50 Max.* Plasticity Index: 10 Max. Liquid Limit: 40 Max. Decantation: 5% Max. Crushed Faces: 60% Max. Sand equivalent value shall not be less than 40. *Wet Ball Mill may be used in lieu of Los Angeles Abrasion when shown on the plans. A maximum Wet Ball Mill value of 50 is allowed. (2) Testing of the mineral aggregates shall be as required and in accordance with the following Texas Department of Transportation Standard Test Methods: Preparation of Soil Constants and Sieve Analysis: TEX-110-E Liquid Limit: TEX-104-E Plastic Limit: TEX-105-E Plasticity Index: TEX-106-E Sieve Analysis: TEX-110-E Wet Ball Mill: TEX-116-E Los Angeles Abrasion: TEX-410-A Sand Equivalent: TEX-203-F Decantation: TEX-406-A Crushed Faces: TEX-460-A (3) Samples for testing the material shall be taken prior to the mixing operations. Where more than one material is used,tests will be on the combined material unless otherwise shown on the plans. (d) Additives: RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 32 12 50-4 SITE PAVEMENT 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents (1) Additives to facilitate mixing and/or improve the quality of the asphaltic mixture shall be used when noted on the plans or may be used upon written authorization by the Engineer. (e) Material Sources: (1) All materials shall be obtained from sources reviewed by the Engineer. (2) The mineral aggregate sources shall be opened up in such manner as to immediately expose the vertical faces of all the various strata of acceptable material and, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, the material shall be secured in successive vertical cuts extending through all the exposed strata in order that a uniformly mixed material will be secured. (3) Unless otherwise shown on the plans, one or more types of mineral aggregate or binder may be used to produce the specified mixture. (4) Recycled Materials, including reclaimed asphalt concrete pavement (RAP), are allowed when shown on plans and are to be in accordance with Item 292 of the Texas Department of Transportation Standard Specifications. Stockpile aggregates for each source and type separately. Do not add material to an approved stockpile unless approved by the Engineer. 2) Asphaltic Material: (a) Asphaltic material shall be of the type determined by the Engineer and shall meet the requirements of Item No. 300, "Asphalt, Oils and Emulsions" of the Texas Department of Transportation Standard Specifications. The grade of asphalt shall be PG 70-22 unless otherwise designated on the plans. When RAP is allowed by plan note, use no more than 30% RAP in TxDOT Type A or B HMA, and use no more than 20% RAP for TxDOT Type C or D unless otherwise shown on the plans. 3) Asphaltic Stabilized Mixture: (a) Paving Mixture: (1) The mixture shall consist of a uniform mixture of mineral aggregate and asphaltic material. The mineral aggregate will conform to the gradation requirements specified.The asphaltic material shall form from 4.0 to 9.0 percent of the mixture by weight unless otherwise shown on the plans. The design percent asphalt shall be determined in accordance with Test Method TEX-126-E or Test Method TEX-204F and procedures outlined in the TxDOT Bulletin C-14. The required method of control along with any required strength, laboratory density shall be specified on the plans. The percent asphalt in the mix shall be determined by either Extraction,Test Method TEX-210-F, or Pressure Pycnometer,Test Method TEX-126-E. (b) Tolerances: (1) The Engineer will designate the asphalt content to be used in the mixture after design tests have been made with the aggregate to be used in the project. When tested as determined by the Engineer, samples of the mixture shall not vary from the asphalt content RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 32 12 50-5 SITE PAVEMENT 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents designated by the Engineer by more than 0.5 percent dry weight (based on total mixture). 3. Water a. Water shall be free from substances deleterious to the hardening of the treated base and shall be reviewed by the Engineer. 4. Cement for Stabilized Base a. Cement shall be Type 1 Portland Cement of a standard brand and shall conform to the requirements of ASTM Designation C-150. 1) One bag, containing one (1) cubic foot of cement shall be considered as weighing 94 pounds net. One (1) barrel of cement shall be considered as weighing 376 pounds net, and containing four(4) cubic feet. 2) Contractors, as their option, may use bulk cement, provided the apparatus for handling and spreading the cement is reviewed by the Engineer. Bulk cement shall be weighed on platform scales or standard plant batch weighing equipment reviewed by the Engineer. 3) Cement delivered in bags shall be plainly marked with the brand name of the manufacturer. All bags shall be in good condition at the time of delivery. Cement salvaged from discharge or used bags shall not be permitted. 5. Asphalt Oils and Emulsions a. RC-250 Liquid Asphalt and SS-1/SS-1H Emulsion used as a seal shall meet the requirements set forth in Item 300 "Asphalts, Oils and Emulsions," of the Texas Department of Transportation Standard Specifications. b. Where Emulsified Asphalts are used, the amount of emulsified asphalt as a percentage by volume of the total mixture shall be within the limits shown on the plans, or shall be of a percentage as directed by the Engineer. 1) Prime Coat: (a) Unless the type and grade are shown on the plans, utilize an MC-30 or AE- P asphalt cement in accordance with Item 300, "Asphalts, Oils and Emulsions" of the Standard Specifications of the Texas Department of Transportation for prime coat. Emulsified asphalts as a percentage by volume of the total mixture shall be used within the limits shown on the plans or as directed/approved by the Engineer. 2) Tack Coat: (a) The asphaltic material used for Tack Coat shall meet the requirements for "Asphalt Cement", "Cut-Back Asphalt", or "Emulsified Asphalt", in Item No. 300 "Asphalts, Oils and Emulsions," of the Texas Department of Transportation Standard Specifications. The asphaltic material used for Tack Coat shall be that type or grade shown on the plans, or shall be as directed, or approved by the Engineer. 3) Asphaltic Materials for Surface Treatments: (a) The asphaltic material used for surface treatments shall meet the requirements for"Asphaltic Cement" in Item No. 300 "Asphalts, Oils and Emulsions" of the Texas Department of Transportation Standard Specifications. The asphaltic material used shall be AC-10 or equal, or shall be as approved by the Engineer. 6. Aggregates for Surface Treatments RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 32 12 50-6 SITE PAVEMENT 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents a. Aggregates shall meet all the requirements of Item No. 302, "Aggregates for Surface Treatments" of the Texas Department of Transportation Standard Specifications and subsequent revisions thereto. b. The percent of wear, as determined by Test Method TEX-410-A for the material shall not exceed 15 percent. The aggregate shall be Grade 3, in accordance with the following gradation requirements when tested by Test Method TEX-200. 1) Retained on 3/4" sieve: 0% 2) Retained on 5/8" sieve: 0-2% 3) Retained on 1/2" sieve: 5-20% 4) Retained on 3/8" sieve: -- 5) Retained on No. 4 sieve: 90-100% 6) Retained on No. 10 sieve: 98-100% 7. Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete a. Materials used in Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement shall meet the requirements as set forth in Item 340, "Dense-Graded Hot Mix Asphalt (Method)" or Item 341, "Dense-Graded Hot Mix Asphalt(QC/QA)" of the Texas Department of Transportation Standard Specifications. b. Paving Mixture used shall be Type D. This mixture shall conform to the requirements of Paragraph 4 of Item 340, "Dense-Graded Hot Mix Asphalt (Method)" of the Texas Department of Transportation Standard Specifications. 1) Part (1) of Paragraph 4 shall be revised as follows, and no other requirements are waived or changed hereby. (a) Density (1) Minimum: 94% (2) Maximum: 99% (3) Optimum: 97% 8. Lime for Stabilized Subgrade a. Lime for this item shall conform to the requirements of TxDOT Item No. 260, "Lime- Treatment- Road Mixed" of the TxDOT Standard Specifications (Latest Edition). Acceptable forms of lime shall be: 1) "Type A, Hydrated Lime" 2) "Type B, Commercial Lime Slurry" 3) "Type C, Quicklime" b. The Contractor shall select, prior to construction, the grade to be used and shall notify the Engineer in writing before changing from one grade to another. Lime shall be placed in slurry form only, unless written permission is granted by the Engineer and a safety and containment plan is submitted to the Engineer by the Contractor seven days prior to use. In circumstances where it would be beneficial to utilize lime for"drying" subgrade materials to expedite construction, the Contractor may request approval from the Engineer to use pelletized lime. c. Materials are too be provided in conformance with the following items and requirements: 1) Lime: TxDOT DMS-6350 "Lime and Lime Slurry" 2) Mix Design: The Engineer will determine the target lime content and optimum moisture content in accordance with TxDOT TEX-121-E. 3) When treating existing materials, limit the amount of asphalt concrete pavement to no more than 50%of the mix. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 32 12 50-7 SITE PAVEMENT 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 9. Forms a. Formwork shall conform to the provisions of TxDOT Item 360 "Concrete Pavement". Forms shall be constructed of wood or steel, profiled to suit condition. 10. Concrete Pavement a. Concrete and concrete materials shall conform to the provisions of the TxDOT Standard Specifications Item 360, "Concrete Pavement", unless otherwise stated in this specification. 1) Coarse aggregate will conform to the gradation requirements of Aggregate Grade No. 2. 2) Fine aggregates will conform to the gradation requirements of Aggregate Grade No. 1. 3) Portland Cement shall be Type I. b. Air content shall be 4%± 1%. c. Slump shall range from 2 to 5 inches. d. Provide concrete design per Geotechnical Report. If not specified, provide Class P concrete designed to meet a minimum average compressive strength of 4,000 psi at 28-days (75%strength at 7 days). Test in accordance with TxDOT TEX-448-A or TxDOT TEX-418-A. e. For concrete curbs that are placed separately from the pavement, refer to specification Section 32 1313.10 (use Class A or P concrete for curbs that are placed separately from the pavement). 11. Steel Expansion Joint Dowels a. Dowel bars shall be round smooth steel conforming to ASTM A 36, Grade 60. Coat dowels with an approved de-bonding material. 12. Reinforcing Steel a. Reinforcing steel bars shall conform to TxDOT Item 440, "Reinforcing Steel",ASTM A 615 Grade 60, deformed bars. All reinforcing steel shall be new billet steel. 2.02 CUTTING AND REPLACING PAVEMENTS A. All materials used for cutting and replacing pavements shall conform to the requirements of this section. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. The drives and parking areas shall be constructed to the lines, and typical section shown on the drawings. 3.02 SUBGRADE PREPARATION A. Preparation of the subgrade including compaction shall be completed for the full width of the roadways and parking areas, or as shown on plans. 1. The subgrade shall be compacted to at least 95 percent (95%) of maximum density between optimum moisture content and optimum moisture content+4%as determined by TxDOT TEX-114-E. B. No materials shall be placed on subgrades which are muddy or have water thereon. 3.03 CONSTRUCTION OF HOT MIX ASPHALTIC CONCRETE ROADWAYS,AND PARKING AREAS A. General RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 32 12 50-8 SITE PAVEMENT 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 1. The roadways, and parking areas shall be constructed to the lines,grades, and typical section shown on the Drawings. 2. Conform to all applicable requirements of the Texas Department of Transportation Standard Specifications. B. Flexible Base Course 1. Equipment: a. All equipment necessary to properly perform and complete the work shall be on the project prior to beginning the work, shall be subject to the review of the Engineer, and shall be maintained in a satisfactory condition at all times. 1) Motor graders shall be self-propelled, shall have tandem or four-wheel drive, shall have a blade length of not less than 12 feet, shall have a wheel base length (the distance between front and rear axles) of not less than 16 feet, and shall be tight and in good operating condition and reviewed by the Engineer. 2) Compaction equipment shall be of sufficient weight and adequately loaded to accomplish the required compaction. 3) Water distributors shall be equipped with positive and rapidly working cut-off valves, approved spray bars equipped with bituminous nozzles and a power pump that will insure distribution of water in a uniform and controllable rate of application. Spray bars shall be so constructed that the effective length may be quickly and easily altered. 4) All equipment shall meet these specifications and be reviewed by the Engineer. Equipment may be eliminated or substituted only upon review of the Engineer. 5) Nothing in this section shall relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for producing finished work of the quality specified. 2. Construction Methods: a. General: 1) It is the intent of this specification to obtain a complete course, or courses, of Flexible Base of uniform moisture and density, with a closely-knit surface free from laminations, cracks, ridges, or loose material, and to the surface requirements hereinafter specified. b. Placing of Flexible Base Material: 1) The Flexible Base material shall be placed on the approved subgrade in courses not to exceed six inches (6") compacted depth. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor that the required amount of material be delivered and uniformly spread and shaped. All material shall be moved from the place where it is dumped by cutting into windrows. After the material has been cut into windrows, it shall be sprinkled, spread, shaped, and rolled in proper sequence to prevent segregation, and as necessary for required compaction. c. Compaction and Finishing: 1) Flexible Base shall be compacted to an apparent dry density of not less than 95 percent of the maximum dry density, as determined in accordance with TxDCT Test Method TEX-113-E. Tests for density will be made within 24 hours after compaction operations are completed. If the material fails to meet the density specified, it shall be reworked as necessary to meet the density required. Just prior to the placing of any succeeding course of Flexible Base, surfacing on any previously completed course, the density and moisture of the top three inches (3") of Flexible Base shall be checked and if tests show the density to be more RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 32 12 50-9 SITE PAVEMENT 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents than 2 percent below the specified minimum, or the moisture content to be more than 3 percent above or below the optimum, the course shall be reworked as necessary to obtain the specified compaction and moisture content. 2) The surface upon completion shall be smooth and in conformity with the typical sections and to the established lines and grades. Any deviation in excess of 1/4 inch in cross-section and in length of 16 feet measured longitudinally, shall be corrected. All irregularities, depressions, or weak spots which develop shall be corrected. C. Asphalt Stabilized Base Course 1. Equipment: a. All equipment for the handling of all materials and mixing and placing of the mixture shall be maintained in good repair and operating condition and subject to review by the Engineer. Any equipment found to be defective and affecting the quality of the mixture will be replaced. b. Mixing Plants: 1) Mixing plants that will not consistently produce a paving mixture meeting all the requirements of this specification will be condemned. Mixing plants may be of the weight-batching type,the continuous mixing type or the dryer-drum type meeting all the requirements of Item 345, "Asphalt Stabilized Base (Plant Mix)" of the Texas Department of Transportation Standard Specifications and subsequent revisions and Special Provisions thereto. c. Asphalt Material Heating Equipment: 1) Asphalt material heating equipment shall conform to Paragraph 345.4 of Item 345, "Asphalt Stabilized Base (Plant Mix)" of the Texas Department of Transportation Standard Specifications and subsequent revisions and Special Provisions thereto. d. Spreading and Finishing Machine: 1) The spreading and finishing machine shall be of a type reviewed by the Engineer and shall be capable of producing a surface that will be smooth and true to the established line, grade and cross-section and acceptable to the Engineer. Unacceptable finish shall be corrected by the addition of mixture placed and finished at the entire expense of the Contractor. 2. Construction Methods: a. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to produce transport, place and compact the specified mixture in accordance with these specifications and as reviewed by the Engineer. b. The asphaltic mixture, when placed with a spreading and finishing machine shall not be placed when the air temperature is below 507, and is falling, but it may be placed when the air temperature is above 40°F and is rising. The mixture when placed with a motor grader shall not be placed when the air temperature is below 60°F, and is falling, but may be placed when the air temperature is above 50°F and is rising. The air temperature shall be taken in the shade away from artificial heat. It is further provided that the prime coat, tack coat or asphalt stabilized base shall be placed only when the humidity, general weather conditions and temperature and moisture conditions of the subbase or subgrade, in the opinion of the Engineer are suitable. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 32 12 50-10 SITE PAVEMENT 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents c. If, after being discharged from the mixer and prior to placing, the temperature of the asphaltic mixture is 50°F or more below the temperature reviewed by the Engineer all or any part of the load may be rejected and payment will not be made for the rejected material. 1) Prime Coat: (a) If a prime coat is required it shall be applied and paid for as a separate item conforming to the requirements of Texas Department of Transportation Item 300 "Prime Coat", except the air temperature for application shall be as provided above for asphaltic mixture to be laid by a spreading and finishing machine. The tack coat or asphalt stabilized base shall not be applied on a previously primed course until the prime coat has completely cured to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 2) Tack Coat: (a) Before the asphaltic mixture is laid,the surface upon which the tack coat is to be placed shall be cleaned thoroughly to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The surface shall be given a uniform application of tack coat using asphaltic materials of this specification. This tack coat shall be applied, as directed by the Engineer, with an approved sprayer at a rate not to exceed 0.10 gallon per square yard of surface. Where the mixture will adhere to the surface on which it is to be placed without the use of a tack coat, the tack coat may be eliminated by the Engineer. All contact surfaces of curbs and structures and all joints shall be painted with a thin uniform coat of the asphaltic material meeting the requirements for a tack coat. The tack coat shall be rolled with a pneumatic tire roller when directed by the Engineer. 3) Transporting: (a) The asphaltic mixture, prepared as specified above shall be hauled to the site in tight vehicles previously cleaned of all foreign material. The dispatching of the vehicles shall be arranged so that all material delivered may be placed, and all rolling shall be completed during daylight hours. The inside of the truck body may be given a light coat of oil, lime slurry or other material satisfactory to the Engineer, if necessary,to prevent mixture from adhering to the body. In cool weather or for long hauls, canvas covers and insulating of truck bodies may be required. 4) Placing: (a) Generally,the asphaltic mixture shall be dumped and spread on the approved prepared surface with the specified spreading and finishing machine, in such a manner that when properly compacted, the finished course will be smooth, of uniform density, and will conform with the typical sections shown on the plans and to the lines and grades established by the Engineer. During the application of asphaltic material, care shall be taken to prevent splattering of adjacent pavement, curb and gutter and structures. Any unsightly splattering of surroundings shall be clean and restored to original condition at the sole cost of the Contractor. (b) The mixture shall be spread and compacted in layers or lifts as specified on the plans or as directed by the Engineer. The sequence of compacting shall be such that undue displacement of the edge of the course does not RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 32 12 50-11 SITE PAVEMENT 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents occur. On deep lifts,the edge of the course may be rolled with a motor grader wheel or similar equipment or supported by blading a roll of earth against the edge of the course prior to compacting the surface. (c) When the asphaltic mixture is placed in a narrow strip along the edge of an existing pavement, or used to level up small areas of an existing pavement or placed in small irregular areas when the use of a finishing machine is not practical, the finishing machine may be eliminated when authorized by the Engineer, provided a satisfactory surface can be obtained by other acceptable methods. 5) Compacting: (a) As directed by the Engineer the asphalt stabilized base shall be compacted thoroughly and uniformly with the specified rollers. In lieu of the rolling equipment specified, the Contractor may, upon written authorization from the Engineer, operate other compacting equipment that will provide equivalent relative compaction as the specified equipment. If the substituted compaction equipment fails to produce the desired compaction as would be expected of the specified equipment, as determined by the Engineer, its use shall be discontinued. When directed by the Engineer, the initial compaction shall be accomplished with the pneumatic tire roller. (b) When rolling with the three-wheel,tandem, or vibratory rollers, rolling shall start longitudinally at the sides and proceed toward the center of the pavement, overlapping on successive trips by at least half the width of the rear wheel unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Alternate trips of the roller shall be slightly different in length. When roller with vibratory steel-wheel rollers,the manufacturer's recommendation shall be followed unless directed otherwise by the Engineer. Rolling with pneumatic-tire roller shall be done as directed by the Engineer. Roller shall be continued until no further increase in density can be obtained and all roller marks are eliminated. The motion of the roller shall be slow enough at all times to avoid displacement of the mixture. If any displacement occurs, it shall be corrected at once by the use of a rake, and of fresh mixtures where required. The roller shall not be allowed to stand on any portion of the mixture pavement which has not been fully compacted. To prevent adhesion of the mixture to the roller, the wheels shall be kept thoroughly moistened with water, but an excess of water will not be permitted. All rollers must be in good mechanical condition. Necessary precautions shall be taken to prevent the dropping of gasoline, oil,grease or other foreign matter on the roadway, either when the rollers are in operation or when standing. (c) Hand Tamping: (1) The edges of the pavement along curbs, headers and similar structures, and all places not accessible to the roller, or in such positions as will not allow thorough compaction with the rollers, shall be thoroughly compacted with lightly oiled tamps. (d) Surface Finish: RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 32 12 50-12 SITE PAVEMENT 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents (1) The compacted material shall conform to the typical cross sections, lines and grades as shown on plans and directed by the Engineer and shall have a surface smoothness as specified below and with a reasonably uniform texture acceptable to the Engineer. Unacceptable finished surfaces may be corrected by the placement of additional mixture, all at the expense of the Contractor. (e) Surface Smoothness: (1) Test finished surface of each bituminous concrete course for smoothness, using a 10-foot straightedge applied parallel to and at right angles to centerline of paved areas. (2) Check surfaced areas at intervals as directed by Engineer. (3) Surfaces will not be acceptable if exceeding the following: Sub-base Courses: 3/8 inch in 10 feet Surface Course: % inch in 10 feet Crowned Surfaces: Test crowned surfaces with a crown template, centered and at right angle to the crown. Surfaces will not be acceptable if varying more than %"from the template. Protection of the Work and Opening to Traffic: (4) The completed asphalt stabilized base course shall be opened to traffic as provided by the plans and as directed by the Engineer. All construction traffic allowed on the base course shall comply with the State laws governing traffic, unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer. When another roadway surface is provided for the traveling public and construction traffic through the project,the Engineer may prohibit traffic on the completed base course. 3. In Place Density: a. When in-place density is required, it is the intent of this specification that the material be placed and compacted to 96 percent of the maximum molded gyrated density as determined by Test Method TEX-126-E or as specified on the plans. The maximum molded gyrated density shall be determined from material sampled from the mixing plant and molded in accordance with Test Method TEX-126-E. Procedures and methods outlined in Test Method TEX-126-E shall also be used in determining the in-place density unless determined otherwise by the Engineer. The field specimens utilized for the in-place density testing may be either cores or sections of asphalt stabilized base tested according to Test Method TEX-207-F. Other methods of determining in-place density which correlate satisfactorily with those results obtained through use of Test Method TEX-126-E may be used. In-place density tests are intended for control tests. If the in-place density of the mixture produced has a value lower than that specified and, in the opinion of the Engineer is not due to a change in the quality of the material, production may proceed with subsequent changes in the mix and/or construction operations until the in-place density equals or exceeds the specified density. Requirements specifying air temperature limitations for placing and types of rollers to be furnished are not applicable when in-place density is specified. Regardless of the method of RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 32 12 50-13 SITE PAVEMENT 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents compaction control followed, all rolling shall be completed before the mixture temperature drops below 175°F. D. Cement Stabilized Base Course 1. Equipment: a. All equipment necessary to properly perform and complete the work shall be on the project prior to beginning the work, shall be subject to the review of the Engineer, and shall be maintained in a satisfactory condition at all times. b. The following list of equipment shall be considered the minimum necessary for cement stabilized base work: 1) A single pass traveling mixing plant may be used if it can be made to meet the exact requirements of this Specification. 2) In lieu of a traveling mixing plant, the following equipment shall be used for the "Mixed-in-Place" method of processing: (a) 1-Motor Grader (b) 1-7-foot self-powered, self-propelled, heavy-duty rotary speed mixer. c. Motor graders shall be self-propelled, shall have tandem or four-wheel drive, shall have a blade length of not less than 12 feet, shall have a wheel base length (the distance between front and rear axles) of not less than 16 feet, and shall be tight and in good operation condition and reviewed by the Engineer. d. Cement shall be distributed by cement spreaders equipped with hoppers of adequate capacity to prevent spillage.The proportioning and distributing devices shall be positive in action and capable of necessary adjustments in quantity of cement spread and width of lane spread. The spreader shall be so designed that its accuracy is not varied by changing conditions of the surface over which it operates. The cement spreader shall distribute cement to an accuracy of five percent (5%) of theoretical quantity per square yard and shall be approved by the Engineer. e. Compaction equipment shall be of sufficient weight and adequately loaded to accomplish the required compaction. f. Water distributors shall be equipped with positive and rapidly working cut off valves, approved spray bars equipped with bituminous nozzles and a power pump that will insure distribution of water in a uniform and controllable rate of application. Spray bars shall be so constructed that the effective length may be quickly and easily altered. g. All equipment shall meet these specifications and be reviewed by the Engineer. Equipment may be eliminated or substituted only upon review by the Engineer. h. Nothing in this section shall relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for producing finished work of the quality specified. 2. Test Section: a. If the Contractor has had no previous experience in construction of"Cement Stabilized Base", he shall be required to construct a "Test Section" in accordance with the following: b. The first section of each cement treated course shall serve as a test section. Its length (not less than 350 linear feet or more than 500 linear feet) shall be determined by the capability of the equipment to perform the work. In case it is found that the work is not satisfactory with respect to the specification requirements,the Contractor shall revise his procedures and augment or replace equipment as necessary to assure work completed in accordance with the RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 32 12 50-14 SITE PAVEMENT 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents Specifications. Additional test sections may be required as directed by the Engineer. Test sections not conforming to the requirements of the Specifications shall be reconstructed. 3. Construction Methods: a. General: 1) It is the intent of this specification to obtain a complete course or courses of cement stabilized base of uniform moisture and density, containing a uniform mixture of cement; a closely knit surface free from laminations, cracks, ridges, or loose material and to the surface requirements hereinafter specified. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish adequate equipment and regulate his sequence of operation in such a manner as to provide a cement treated course or courses with the proper amount of cement for the depth as shown on the plans and to maintain or reconstruct the course or courses as necessary to conform to the specific requirements specified. b. Placing of Base Material: 1) After approval of the subgrade, base material shall be delivered on the road and placed in windrows of uniform sections,then accurately bladed and shaped to required crown and grade to provide a base of compacted depth required by the plans. c. Final Preparation of Section: 1) On the day immediately preceding processing, water, as required, shall be added and uniformly mixed full depth with the base material. This operation shall precede cement spreading by at least 12 hours. The section shall then be accurately bladed and shaped to required grade and section. d. Application of Cement: 1) The specified quantity of Portland Cement required for the full depth of treatment shall be uniformly spread over the surface. Each pass of the cement spreader shall be positioned by either the curb line or a string line. Cement shall be applied only to such areas as can be completed as herein specified within the daylight hours of the same day. No equipment, except that used in spreading and mixing, will be allowed to pass over the freshly spread cement until it is mixed with the base material. e. Mixing and Processing: 1) Either method (1) or(2) below may be used at the option of the Contractor. Method (3) shall be used only on sections less than 200 linear feet in length. (a) Multiple-Pass Traveling Mixing Plant: (1) After the cement has been applied, it shall be mixed with the base or subbase material. Mixing shall continue until the cement has been sufficiently blended with the base or subbase material to prevent the formation of cement balls when water is applied. Any mixture that has not been compacted and finished shall not remain undisturbed for more than 30 minutes. (2) Immediately after the mixing of base or subbase material and cement is completed, water, as necessary, shall be uniformly applied and incorporated into mixture. Proper care shall be exercised to insure proper moisture distribution at all times. After the last increment of RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 32 12 50-15 SITE PAVEMENT 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents water has been added, mixing shall continue until a thorough and uniform mix has been obtained. (b) Single-Pass Traveling Mixing Plant: (1) After the cement has been applied, it shall be sufficiently mixed with the base or subbase material to prevent the formation of cement balls when water is applied. Unpulverized soil lumps in mixture will not be allowed. Should this condition prevail, the Contractor shall "pre-wet" the raw base or subbase material as necessary to correct this condition. The mixer shall be provided with means for visibly and accurately gauging the water application. The water shall be applied uniformly through a pressure spray bar. After cement is spread, mixing operations shall proceed as follows: (2) The mixer shall, in one continuous operation, mix the base or subbase material and cement full depth, add the required moisture uniformly, thoroughly moist-mix the material, cement, and water, spread the completed mixture evenly over the machine processed width of the subgrade, and leave it in a loose condition ready for immediate compaction. (3) The mixture shall not remain undisturbed, after mixing and before compacting, for more than 30 minutes. (c) Blade Mixing: (1) On sections of street of 200 linear feet or less and authorization by the Engineer,the requirements for mixing equipment may be waived and the cement mixed with a mortar grader. (2) Immediately after the cement has been distributed,the material shall be scarified full depth and the cement mixed with the loose base material for the full depth of the treatment by blading into windrows. Mixing shall continue until the cement has been sufficiently blended with the base material to percent formation of cement balls when water is applied. (3) Immediately after the mixing of base material and cement is complete, water as necessary shall be uniformly applied and incorporated into the mixture. Pressurized equipment and supply provided shall be adequate to insure continuous application of the required amount of water to the section being processed. Proper care shall be exercised to insure proper moisture distribution at all times. After the last increment of water has been added, mixing shall continue until thorough and uniform mix has been obtained. f. Compaction and Finishing: 1) The material shall be compacted to not less than 95 percent of the maximum dry density as determined by TxDOT TEX-113-E. At the start of compaction,the percentage of moisture in the mixture shall be less than that quantity which will cause the mixture to become unstable during compaction and finishing. 2) The surface upon completion shall be smooth and in conformity with typical sections and to the established lines and grades. Any deviation in excess of inch in cross section and in a length of 16 feet measured longitudinally shall be RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 32 12 50-16 SITE PAVEMENT 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents corrected. All irregularities, depressions, or weak spots which develop shall be corrected. 3) All sections of cement stabilized base shall be processed full width each day without longitudinal construction joints. 4) The density of the cement stabilized base shall be determined by the Engineer after construction. Any portion which has a density below that specified herein and which has not properly hardened after a suitable time interval shall be removed and replaced to meet this Specification at the expense of the Contractor. g. Protection and Cover: 1) The completed cement treated base course shall be protected against rapid drying by applying a minimum of 0.20 gallons per square yard of RC-2 Liquid Asphalt, or a minimum of 0.15 gallons per square yard of EA-11M Emulsion. The actual amounts may be varied in the field by the Engineer to insure that a complete and adequate seal is achieved. 2) This curing seal shall be applied as soon as practicable, but not later than eight (8) hours after the completion of final compaction. The surface shall be kept moist until the curing seal is applied. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to protect the asphalt membrane from being picked up by traffic by either sanding or dusting the surface. 3) The curing period shall be a minimum of 14 days (24 hours each) with a minimum temperature of 407 unless waived by the Engineer. h. Weather Limitations: 1) Cement stabilized base construction shall not begin unless the temperature is at least 407 in the shade and rising or when the wind velocity exceeds 15 MPH. The Contractor is responsible for the quality of the base under any weather conditions. i. Traffic: 1) The Contractor shall not be permitted to drive heavy equipment over completed portions, but pneumatic-tired equipment required for hauling cement and water may be permitted after the surface has hardened sufficiently to prevent the equipment from marring the surface, provided protection and cover specified herein are not impaired. The cement stabilized base may be opened to local traffic as soon as the RC-2 has been applied and dusted or sanded as necessary to prevent it from being picked up by traffic. It may be opened to all traffic after 7 days. j. Maintenance: 1) The Contractor shall be required to maintain at his own expense the entire cement stabilized base within the limits of his contract in good condition satisfactory to the Engineer from the time he first starts work until all work shall have been completed. 2) Maintenance shall include immediate repairs of any defect that may occur after construction, which work shall be done by the Contractor at his own expense and repeated as often as necessary to keep the area continuously intact. Repairs are to be made in a manner to insure restoration of a uniform surface of good quality cement stabilized base. Faulty work shall be replaced for the full depth of base. Any low area shall be remedied by replacing the material for RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 32 12 50-17 SITE PAVEMENT 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents the full depth of treatment, rather than adding a thin layer of base material to the completed work. E. Prime Coat 1. When the area and/or base is satisfactory to receive the prime coat, the surface shall be cleaned by sweeping or other acceptable methods. If necessary, the surface shall be lightly sprinkled with water just prior to application of the asphaltic material. The asphaltic material shall be applied on the clean surface by an acceptable type of self- propelled pressure distributor so operated as to distribute the prime coat at a rate not to exceed 0.20 gallon per square yard of surface, evenly and smoothly, under a pressure necessary for proper distribution. During the application of prime coat, care shall be taken to prevent splattering of adjacent pavement, curb and gutters or structures. 2. Prime Coat shall not be applied when the air temperature is below 60' F and falling, but it may be applied when the air temperature is above SO' F and is rising;the air temperature being taken in the shade away from artificial heat. 3. Asphaltic material shall not be placed when general weather conditions, in the opinion of the Engineer, are not suitable. F. Tack Coat 1. Before the tack coat is applied,the surface shall be cleaned thoroughly. The asphaltic material shall be applied on the clean surface by an acceptable type of self-propelled pressure distributor so operated as to distribute the tack coat at a rate not to exceed 0.10 gallon per square yard of surface, evenly and smoothly under a pressure necessary for proper distribution. Where the pavement mixture will adhere to the surface on which it is to be placed without the use of a tack coat, the tack coat may be eliminated by the Engineer. All contact surfaces of curbs and structures and all joints shall be painted with a thin uniform coat of the asphaltic material used for tack coat. The tack coat shall be rolled with a pneumatic tire roller. During the application of tack coat, care shall be taken to prevent splattering of adjacent pavement, curb and gutters or structures. G. Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete 1. Construction methods used in laying Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement shall meet the requirements as set forth in Item 340 "Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement" of the Texas Department of Transportation Standard Specifications, with the following exception: 2. Application of Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement shall not begin unless the air temperature is at least sixty degrees Fahrenheit (60' F) and rising. H. Surface Treatments 1. The area to be treated shall be cleaned of dirt, dust, or other deleterious matter by sweeping or other approved methods. If it is found necessary by the Engineer the surface shall be lightly sprinkled just prior to the first application of asphaltic material. 2. Asphaltic material shall be applied on the clean surface by an acceptable type of self- propelled distributor so operated as to distribute the material at the rate as shown on the plans, evenly and smoothly, under pressure necessary for proper distribution. The Contractor shall provide all necessary facilities for determining the temperature of the asphaltic material in all of the heating equipment and in the distributor,for determining the rate of which it is applied, and for securing uniformity at the junction of two distributor loads. The distributor shall have been recently calibrated. Asphaltic materials shall not be applied until immediate covering is assured. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 32 12 50-18 SITE PAVEMENT 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 3. Aggregate shall be immediately and uniformly applied and spread by an acceptable self- propelled continuous feed aggregate spreader, unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer. The aggregate shall be applied at a rate as directed by the Engineer. 4. The entire surface shall then be broomed or raked as required and shall be thoroughly rolled as soon as practicable after its application. The cover material shall be rolled for its entire width with a multiple wheel self-propelled pneumatic tired traffic roller with provisions for loading to 8 tons. Rolling shall begin longitudinally at the edges of the mat and progress toward the center, uniformly lapping each preceding track by at least 1/2 the width of the roller and be repeated as often as necessary to thoroughly key the cover material into the bitumen over the entire surface.The roller shall be in first class operating condition. 5. Surface treatment or treatments shall not be applied when the air temperature is below 60°F and is falling, but is may be applied when the air temperature is above 50°F and is rising. Air temperature shall be taken in the shade and away from artificial heat. Asphaltic material shall not be placed when general weather conditions, in the opinion of the Engineer, are not suitable. 6. The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of the surface until the work is acceptable to the Engineer. I. Construction Joints 1. Construction joints shall be made in such a manner as to ensure a neat junction, thorough compaction, and bond throughout. 2. A transverse joint extending over the full width of the strip being laid and at right angles to its centerline shall be constructed at the end of each day's work and at any other times when the operations of placing the hot mixture are suspended for a period of time which will permit the mixture to chill. The forward end of a freshly laid strip shall be thoroughly compacted by rolling before the mixture has become chilled. When work is resumed,the end shall be cut vertically for the full depth of the layer. 3. When new pavement is to join pavement installed by others or previously laid pavement by the Contractor, the in-place pavement shall be neatly and carefully edged to allow for overlapping and feathering of the new surface course material. A tack coat of bituminous prime coat material shall be placed at the interface of new and previously laid material. J. Traffic Maintenance 1. The pavement shall be opened to traffic when directed by the Engineer. Construction traffic on the pavement shall be held to a minimum and shall be acceptable to the Engineer. Adequate protection methods as reviewed by the Engineer shall be utilized when crossing roadways is required. K. Field Quality Control 1. Contractor will employ a testing laboratory to perform field quality control. The testing laboratory will make compaction testing of flexible base. The testing laboratory will test the HMAC for Asphalt Extraction, Gradation, Bitumen Content, Stability and laboratory density. Contractor shall furnish all necessary assistance required by the testing laboratory. Contractor shall also furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary for sampling. Contractor shall furnish all necessary transportation to the Owner's Testing Laboratory required by the testing. 2. Quality Control Testing During Construction: RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 32 12 50-19 SITE PAVEMENT 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents a. The testing laboratory will perform sampling and testing for field quality control during the placement of materials as follows: 1) HMAC shall be tested as described in these Specifications, at least once for every 500 tons of materials placed or fraction thereof. 2) Density: (a) Compare density of in-place material against laboratory specimen or certificated on same for bituminous concrete mixture. (b) Acceptable densities of in-place materials shall conform to applicable State Standard Requirements. 3) Thickness: (a) In-place compacted thickness shall average not less than the thickness specified. 4) Surface Smoothness: (a) Test finished surface of each bituminous concrete course for smoothness, using a 10-foot straight edge applied parallel to and at right angles to centerline of paved areas. (b) Check surfaced areas at intervals as directed by Engineer. (c) Surfaces will not be acceptable if exceeding the following: (1) Base Courses: 3/8 inch in 10 feet. (2) Surface Course: 1/4 inch in 10 feet. (3) Crowned Surfaces: Test crowned surfaces with a crown template, centered and at right angle to the crown. Surfaces will not be acceptable if varying more than 1/4"from the template. 3.04 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING A. General 1. Unless otherwise noted in these Specifications, construction methods used to place all Portland Cement Concrete Paving are specified by TxDOT Standard Specifications Item 360, "Concrete Pavement". B. Inspection 1. Verify subgrade is ready to support paving and imposed loads. 2. Verify gradients and elevations of subgrade are correct. C. Preparation 1. Moisten subgrade to minimize absorption of water from fresh concrete. 2. Notify Engineer minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of concreting operations. D. Forming 1. Place and secure forms to correct location, dimension, and profile. 2. Assemble formwork to permit easy stripping and dismantling without damaging concrete. 3. Place joint fillers vertical in position, in straight lines. Secure to form work during concrete placement. E. Reinforcement 1. Reinforcing steel shall be grade 60 and shall be placed as shown on the plans. All concrete shall be continuously reinforced as shown on the plans. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 32 12 50-20 SITE PAVEMENT 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents F. Formed Joints 1. Transverse and longitudinal joints shall be constructed in accordance with the details on the plans and Texas Department of Transportation Specifications. 2. Joints shall be filled in accordance with the construction drawings. G. Placing Concrete 1. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts and formed joints are not disturbed during concrete placement. 2. Place concrete continuously between predetermined construction joints. Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur. H. Finishing 1. All concrete pavement shall be finished in accordance with Texas Department of Transportation Item 360. I. Curing 1. The Contractor shall select one of the methods of curing stated in TxDOT Standard Specifications, Item 360, Paragraph 360.11, "Curing". 2. If the Contractor elects to use Membrane Curing,the curing compound must be reviewed by the Engineer. J. Field Quality Control 1. Field inspection and testing will be performed according to the requirements of Division 1- "General Requirements" of this project manual. 2. Maintain records of placed concrete items. Record date, location of pour, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken. K. Protection 1. Immediately after placement, protect concrete under provisions of Section 03 3000 from premature drying excessive hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. 3.05 PAVEMENT REPLACEMENT A. Cutting of Pavements 1. Concrete and Asphaltic Concrete Pavements: a. All concrete and asphaltic concrete pavements shall be cut with a concrete saw. The depth of the cut shall be such that upon removal of concrete and/or asphaltic concrete the sides of the cut will be straight and square. Care shall be taken,when cutting concrete pavement, not to cut transverse reinforcing steel. B. Removal of Bases 1. Concrete and Cement Stabilized Bases: a. Concrete and cement stabilized bases shall be removed by means of hand-held pneumatic pavement breakers with acceptable cutting bits. It is the intent of this specification that the base shall be removed in a manner that will leave the sides of the cut straight and square. b. Where reinforcement is encountered in concrete bases, a minimum of one (1)foot shall be cleaned of all old concrete and left in place to tie to new reinforcement in the new concrete base. 2. Flexible Base: a. Flexible bases shall be removed by normal trenching operations. C. Replacement of Bases RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 32 12 50-21 SITE PAVEMENT 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 1. Concrete Bases: a. Concrete bases shall be replaced with Class "A" concrete conforming to the provisions of Item No. 300 "Concrete" of the City of San Antonio Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction. If existing concrete is steel reinforced, the reinforcing steel shall be replaced in accordance with Item No. 301, "Reinforcing Steel". The concrete shall have a slump of not more than three inches (3") and shall be spaded, tamped and finished to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Immediately following finishing operations, the surface shall be cured in accordance with the provisions of Item No. 305, "Membrane Curing". The concrete shall be protected from traffic for seventy-two (72) hours. 2. Cement Stabilized Bases: a. Cement stabilized base shall be replaced with cement stabilized base in accordance with Item No. 201, "Cement Stabilized Base" of the City of San Antonio Standard Specifications for Public Work Construction where width of trench permits, or with Class "C" concrete conforming to the requirements of Item No. 300, "Concrete". The concrete shall have a slump of not more than three inches (3") and shall be spaded,tamped, and finished to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The concrete shall be protected from traffic for seventy-two (72) hours prior to replacement of the surfacing. 3. Flexible Base: a. Flexible base shall be replaced with 1,000 psi (@ 28 days) concrete.The concrete shall have a slump of no more than three (3) inches and shall be spaded,tamped and finished to the satisfaction of the Inspector. The concrete shall be protected from traffic for seventy-two (72) hours prior to replacement of the surface. 4. Asphalt Treated Base: a. Asphalt treated base shall be furnished, placed and compacted in accordance with this Section. D. Replacement of Pavements 1. Pavements shall be replaced under this item with either hot mix asphaltic concrete pavement, or Portland Cement concrete pavement in the thickness and type shown on the plans. 2. When hot mix asphaltic concrete is shown on the plans as replacement of pavement, it shall be furnished and placed in accordance with TOOT Item 340, "Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement". Flexible bases shall be primed with asphalt or emulsion in accordance with the provision of TOOT Item 310, "Prime Coat" prior to the placement of hot mix asphaltic concrete. All concrete bases shall receive a tack coat of asphalt or emulsion in accordance with the provisions of TOOT Item 300, "Tack Coat" prior to replacement of hot mix asphaltic concrete. 3. When the replacement pavement is Portland Cement concrete as indicated on the plans, "Class A" Concrete shall be furnished and placed in accordance with TOOT Item 360, "Concrete Pavement". The concrete shall be placed, spaded, tamped and finished to the line,grade and texture of the surrounding concrete pavement. 4. Prime Coat and Tack Coat: a. Prime and Tack coats shall be applied in accordance with the Texas Department of Transportation Standard Specifications Item 340. 5. Surface Course Applications: RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 32 12 50-22 SITE PAVEMENT 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents a. The construction of all surface course shall conform to the applicable requirements of Item 340 of the TxDOT Standard Specifications. 3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Cleaning 1. After completion of paving operations, clean surfaces of excess or spilled bituminous materials and all foreign matter. B. Protect newly finished pavement until it has become properly hardened by cooling. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 32 12 50-23 SITE PAVEMENT 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 32 13 13.10 CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS AND SIDEWALKS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete sidewalks, stair steps, curbs and gutters. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03 3000-Cast-in-Place Concrete. B. Section 312323 - Fill. C. Section 32 1123 -Aggregate Base Courses. D. Section 32 1250-Site Pavement. 1.03 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Sidewalks: By the square foot. Includes preparation of substrate, sand bedding, steel reinforcement, concrete sidewalk,jointing, and finishing. B. Concrete Curbs and Gutters: By the linear foot. Includes trenching, steel reinforcement, concrete curb installation, and cleaning. C. Stair Steps: By the unit price. Includes preparation of substrate, sand bedding, steel reinforcement, stair steps,jointing, and finishing. 1.04 REFERENCES A. ASTM D 1190, Concrete Joint Sealer Hot Poured Elastic Type. B. ASTM D 994-71 (R1977), Preformed Expansion Joint Filler For Concrete (Bituminous Type). C. ASTM D 1751-73 (R1978) Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for concrete Paving Structural Construction. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit for review samples, applicable manufacturer's product data,test reports and material certifications. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Detailed Reinforcing Steel Layout. 2. Detailed Construction And Control Joint Layout. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The testing laboratory shall sample and test concrete in accordance with Section 03 3000- Cast-In-Place Concrete. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Unless otherwise specified in this Section, all concrete and concrete materials shall conform to TxDOT, Item 529, "Concrete Curb, Gutter and Combined Curb and Gutter" and Item 531 "Sidewalks". B. Bituminous Joint Filler: Bituminous type conforming to ASTM D 994 or D 1751 unless otherwise indicated on drawings. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 32 13 13.10-1 CONCRETE CURBS,GUTTERS AND SIDEWALKS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 1. Reinforcing steel shall be ASTM A 615 grade 60, deformed and conform to the provisions of TxDOT Standard Specifications, Item No. 529, "Concrete Curb, Gutter and Combined Curb and Gutter" and Item 531 "Sidewalks". 2. All reinforcing steel to be new billet steel. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 SUBGRADE PREPARATION A. Preparation of the subgrade including compaction shall be completed two feet(2') beyond the limits of the work: 1. Where the subgrade is constructed by excavation of existing grade,the top six inches (6") of the subgrade shall be compacted to at least 95 percent of maximum density as determined by TxDOT TEX-113-E at a moisture content between optimum and optimum +4 percent unless otherwise indicated. 2. The subgrade shall be brought to the final lines and grades utilizing select backfill. 3. Pit Run Sand or Granular Embedment: a. Pit run sand or granular embedment shall be provided as shown on drawings. b. The material shall be as specified in Section 312323 and compacted as specified. 3.02 FORM CONSTRUCTION A. Forms shall be in conformance with TxDOT Standard Specification, Item 529, "Concrete Curb, Gutter and Combined Curb and Gutter" and Item 531 "Sidewalks". B. Set forms to line and grade. Install forms over full length of curbs, gutters and sidewalks. 3.03 REINFORCEMENT A. Locate, place, and support reinforcement as specified in TxDOT Standard Specifications, Item 529, "Concrete Curb, Gutter and Combined Curb and Gutter" and Item 531 "Sidewalks", unless otherwise shown on drawings. 3.04 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. General: Comply with the requirements of TxDOT Standard Specifications, Item 529, "Concrete Curb, Gutter and Combined Curb and Gutter" and Item 531 "Sidewalks". B. Machine Formed/Hand Formed: 1. Automatic curb, gutter and sidewalk machine may be used in lieu of hand formed methods for forming and placing. 2. Concrete shall have properties as previously specified, except that maximum slump shall be 2-1/2 inches (2 1/2") and air content shall be two percent (2%). 3. Machine forming shall produce curbs, gutters and sidewalks to the required cross- section, lines, and grades,finish and jointing, as specified for conventionally formed concrete. 4. Unacceptable work will be removed and replaced at Contractor's expense. 3.05 JOINTS A. General: 1. Construct expansion, contraction, and construction joints with faces perpendicular to surface of the curb, gutter and sidewalk. 2. Construct transverse joints at right angles to the work centerline and as shown. B. Control Joints: RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 32 13 13.10-2 CONCRETE CURBS,GUTTERS AND SIDEWALKS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 1. Provide these joints at ten feet (10') on centers for curbs and gutters and five feet(5') on centers for sidewalks. C. Construction Joints 1. Place joints at locations where placement operations are stopped for a period of more than 1/2 hour, except where such pours terminate at expansion joints. D. Expansion Joints 1. Provide 1/2 inch expansion joint filler where work abuts structures; at returns; and at 50- foot spacing for straight runs. 2. Where gutter and sidewalk are not poured monolithically, provide expansion joints where each abuts the other. 3. Place top of expansion joint filler not less than 1/2 inch or more than one inch (1") below concrete surface. 4. Apply joint sealer on top of expansion joint material flush with concrete surface, and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.06 CONCRETE FINISHING A. Smooth the exposed surface by screeding and floating. B. Work edges of gutter and sidewalks, back top edge of curb, and transverse joints; and round to 1/4-inch radius. C. Complete surface finishing by drawing a fine-hair broom across surface, perpendicular to line of traffic unless alternative finish is indicated on drawings. 3.07 CURING A. Protect and cure finished concrete curbs, gutters and sidewalks, complying with applicable requirements of TxDOT Standard Specifications, Item 529, "Concrete Curb, Gutter and Combined Curb and Gutter" and Item 531 "Sidewalks". 3.08 REPAIR AND CLEANING A. Broken or defective curb, gutters and sidewalks shall be repaired or replaced as directed by the Engineer at the Contractor's expense. B. Sweep work and wash free of stains, discolorations, dirt or other foreign material. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 32 13 13.10-3 CONCRETE CURBS,GUTTERS AND SIDEWALKS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 32 17 13 PARKING BUMPERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Precast concrete parking bumpers and anchorage. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Parking Bumpers: 1. Basis of Measurement: By the unit. 2. Basis of Payment: Includes bumper unit, installed. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A 615/A 615M -Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2007. B. ASTM C 33 -Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2007. C. ASTM C 150-Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2007. D. ASTM C 260-Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 2006. E. ASTM C 330-Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete; 2005. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's literature and installation instructions. Show compliance of these specifications. Show location, methods of support, method of anchoring, and finish. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Parking Bumpers: Precast concrete, conforming to the following: 1. Nominal Size: 5 inches high, 9 inches wide, 6 feet long. 2. Profile: Rectangular cross section with sloped vertical faces, square ends with beveled edges. 3. Cement: ASTM C 150, Portland Type I - Normal; white color. 4. Concrete Materials: ASTM C 330 aggregate, water, and sand. 5. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615/A 615M, deformed steel bars; unfinished finish, strength and size commensurate with precast unit design. 6. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C 260. 7. Concrete Mix: Minimum 3000 psi, 28 day strength. 8. Use rigid molds, constructed to maintain precast units uniform in shape, size and finish. Maintain consistent quality during manufacture. 9. Embed reinforcing steel, and drill or sleeve for two dowels. 10. Cure units to develop concrete quality, and to minimize appearance blemishes such as non-uniformity, staining, or surface cracking. B. Dowels: Steel, unfinished; #4 bar, 14 inch long, pointed tip. C. Adhesive: Epoxy anchoring adhesive per manufacturer's requirements.. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 32 17 13-1 PARKING BUMPERS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Verify locations of parking bumpers with pavement marking layout. B. Thoroughly clean paving surface to receive wheel stop free of dirt, sand, oil, grease or other foreign material. C. Install units without damage to shape or finish. Replace or repair damaged units. D. Install units in alignment with adjacent work,typically 2 feet from face of curb and centered on each parking stall or as indicated on drawings. E. On asphalt paving,fasten units in place with 2 dowels per unit. F. On concrete,fasten units in place with 2 dowels per unit. Drill 3/4-inch anchoring holes 7 inches deep into concrete pavement. Anchor dowels in concrete paving with epoxy anchoring adhesive. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 32 17 13-2 PARKING BUMPERS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 32 17 23.13 PAVEMENT MARKINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Parking lot markings, including parking bays, crosswalks, arrows, handicapped symbols, curb markings, and fire lanes. B. Roadway lane markings and crosswalk markings. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 32 1250-Site Paving. 1.03 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Parking Lot Striping: By the linear foot. Includes preparation of substrate, painting, clean up. B. Roadway Lane Marking: By the linear foot. Includes preparation of substrate, painting, clean up. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. FS TT-P-1952- Paint,Traffic Black, and Airfield Marking,Waterborne; Rev. E, 2007. B. MPI (APL)- Master Painters Institute Approved Products List; Master Painters and Decorators Association; current edition,www.paintinfo.com. C. FHWA MUTCD- Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways; U.S. Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration; Current Edition. 1.05 SUBMITTALS-- NOT APPLICABLE 1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store paint and materials in manufacturer's containers in a suitable storage facility until use. B. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. C. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Line and Zone Marking Paint: MPI (APL) No. 97 Latex Traffic Marking Paint; color(s) as indicated. 1. Roadway Markings: As required by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Parking Lots: Yellow on concrete pavements or white on bituminous pavements or as indicated on drawings. 3. Handicapped Symbols: Blue. B. Paint For Obliterating Existing Markings: FS TT-P-1952; black for bituminous pavements,gray for portland cement pavements. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 32 17 13.13-1 PAVEMENT MARKINGS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents C. Temporary Marking Tape: Preformed, reflective, pressure sensitive adhesive tape in color(s) required; Contractor is responsible for selection of material of sufficient durability as to perform satisfactorily during period for which its use is required. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Engineer of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Allow new pavement surfaces to cure for a period of not less than 14 days before application of marking materials. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. C. Obliteration of existing markings using paint is acceptable in lieu of removal; apply the black paint in as many coats as necessary to completely obliterate the existing markings. Thermoplastic markings must be completely removed by scraping, sandblasting, or mechanical abrasion. D. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. 1. Remove dust, dirt, and other granular surface deposits by sweeping, blowing with compressed air, rinsing with water, or a combination of these methods. 2. Completely remove rubber deposits, existing paint markings, and other coatings adhering to the pavement, by scraping, wire brushing, sandblasting, mechanical abrasion, or approved chemicals. 3. Sandblasting: Use equipment of sufficient size and capacity. E. Where oil or grease are present, scrub affected areas with several applications of an approved detergent or degreaser, and rinse thoroughly after each application; after cleaning, seal oil- soaked areas with cut shellac to prevent bleeding through the new paint. F. Establish survey control points to determine locations and dimensions of markings; provide templates to control paint application by type and color at necessary intervals. G. Temporary Pavement Markings: When required or directed by Engineer or Owner, apply temporary markings of the color(s),width(s) and length(s) as indicated or directed. 1. After temporary marking has served its purpose, remove temporary marking by carefully controlled sandblasting, approved grinding equipment, or other approved method so that surface to which the marking was applied will not be damaged. 2. At Owner's option,temporary marking tape may used in lieu of temporary painted marking; remove unsatisfactory tape and replace with painted markings at no additional cost to Owner. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Begin pavement marking as soon as practicable after surface has been cleaned and dried. B. Do not apply paint if temperature of surface to be painted or the atmosphere is less than or greater than manufacturer's instructions. C. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions using an experienced technician that is thoroughly familiar with equipment, materials, and marking layouts. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 32 17 13.13-2 PAVEMENT MARKINGS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents D. Comply with FHWA MUTCD manual (http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov)for details not shown. E. Apply markings in locations determined by measurement from survey control points; preserve control points until after markings have been accepted. F. Apply uniformly painted markings of color(s), lengths, and widths as indicated on drawings true, sharp edges and ends. 1. Apply paint in one coat only or as indicated on the drawings. 2. Wet Film Thickness: 0.015 inch, minimum. 3. Length Tolerance: Plus or minus 1 inch. 4. Width Tolerance: Plus or minus 1/8 inch. G. Roadway Traffic Lanes: Use suitable mobile mechanical equipment that provides constant agitation of paint and travels at controlled speeds. 1. Conduct operations in such a manner that necessary traffic can move without hindrance. 2. Place warning signs at the beginning of the wet line, and at points well in advance of the marking equipment for alerting approaching traffic from both directions. Place small flags or other similarly effective small objects near freshly applied markings at frequent intervals to reduce crossing by traffic. 3. If paint does not dry within expected time, discontinue paint operations until cause of slow drying is determined and corrected. 4. Skip Markings: Synchronize one or more paint "guns"to automatically begin and cut off paint flow; make length of intervals as indicated. 5. Use hand application by pneumatic spray for application of paint in areas where a mobile paint applicator cannot be used. 6. Distribute glass beads uniformly on the paint lines within ten seconds without any waste, applied at rate of 6 pounds per gallon of paint; if the marking equipment does not have a glass bead dispenser, use a separate piece of equipment adjusted and synchronized with the paint applicator; remove and replace markings having faulty distribution of beads. H. Parking Lots: Apply parking space lines, entrance and exit arrows, painted curbs, and other markings indicated on drawings. 1. Mark the International Handicapped Symbol at indicated parking spaces. 2. Hand application by pneumatic spray is acceptable. I. Symbols: Use a suitable template that will provide a pavement marking with true, sharp edges and ends, of the design and size indicated. 3.04 DRYING, PROTECTION,AND REPLACEMENT A. Protect newly painted markings so that paint is not picked up by tires, smeared, or tracked. B. Provide barricades, warning signs, and flags as necessary to prevent traffic crossing newly painted markings. C. Allow paint to dry at least the minimum time specified by the applicable paint standard and not less than that recommended by the manufacturer. D. Remove and replace markings that are applied at less than minimum material rates; deviate from true alignment; exceed length and width tolerances; or show light spots, smears, or other deficiencies or irregularities. E. Remove markings in manner to avoid damage to the surface to which the marking was applied, using carefully controlled sand blasting, approved grinding equipment, or other approved method. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 32 17 13.13-3 PAVEMENT MARKINGS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents F. Replace removed markings at no additional cost to Owner. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 32 17 13.13-4 PAVEMENT MARKINGS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents ADDENDUM NO. 4 SECTION 32 31 13 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Posts, rails, and frames. B. Wire fabric. C. BaFbed WiFe. D. Accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 30 00 -Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete anchorage for posts. 1.03 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Allowances: See Section 01 21 00-Allowances, for cash allowances affecting this section. B. Unit Prices: See Section 01 22 00- Unit Prices, for additional unit price requirements. 1. Gates: Measurement and payment by square foot. Includes frame posts, fabric, accessories, and hardware. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM Al53/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2023. B. ASTM A392 -Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric; 201 la (Reapproved 2022). C. ASTM A428/A428M - Standard Test Method for Weight [Mass] of Coating on Aluminum-Coated Iron or Steel Articles; 2021. D. ASTM F567- Standard Practice for Installation of Chain-Link Fence; 2023. E. CLFMI CLF-SFR0111 - Security Fencing Recommendations; 2014. F. CLFMI WLG 2445-Wind Load Guide for the Selection of Line Post and Line Post Spacing; 2023. G. FS RR-F-191/1 D - Fencing, Wire and Post Metal (Chain-Link Fence Fabric); 1990. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on fabric, posts, accessories, fittings and hardware. C. pest fe-upd-atieR di hardware „ Gh,,,-age d Sehedu le ,f + c r0�nni r�� eFRn111 fee plaRRORg r,o , a�lcr �rx'c-^vrC�mpvncT,iS�eev �viry nd d8Gi R D. Design Calculations: For high wind load areas, provide calculations for fence panels and accessory selection as well as line post spacing and foundation details. See CLFMI WLG 2445 for line post and spacing guidance. E. Shop Drawings; Fences: 1. Indicate plan layout, spacing of components, post foundation dimensions, hardware anchorage, gates, and schedule of components. 2. Foundation details, concrete design mix and reinforcing schedule for anti-ram barrier system. F. Samples: Submit one samples of fence fabric, slat infill, 12 inch by 12 inch in size illustrating construction and colored finish. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 3231 13- 1 Chain Link Fences and Gates Re-Bid Construction Documents ADDENDUM NO. 4 G. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation requirements, post foundation anchor bolt templates, and colored finish. H. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of property perimeter posts relative to property lines and easements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 COMPONENTS A. Line Posts: 2.38 inch outside diameter. B. Corner and Terminal Posts: 2.88 inch outside diameter. C. Fabric: 2 inch diamond mesh interwoven wire, core -6 gauge, 0.1920 inch thick, top selvage knuckle end closed, bottom selvage twisted tight, PVC coated in compliance with ASTM F668, Class 1 extruded. D. Tension Wire: 6 gauge, 0.1920 inch thick steel, single strand. E. Tie Wire: Aluminum alloy steel wire. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Posts, Rails, and Frames: ASTM F 1083 Schedule 40 hot-dipped galvanized steel pipe, welded construction, minimum yield strength of 30 ksi, 50 ksi for sizes NPS 5 and larger.: 1. Line Posts: Type I round in accordance with FS RR-F-191/1D. 2. Terminal, Corner, Rail, Brace, and Gate Posts: Type I round in accordance with FS RR-F- 191/1 D. B. Wire Fabric: 1. ASTM A392 zinc coated steel chain link fabric. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Caps: Malleable iron galvanized; sized to post diameter, set screw retainer. B. Fittings: Sleeves, bands, clips, rail ends, tension bars, fasteners and fittings; steel. C. Extension Arms: Cast steel galvanized, to accommodate 3 strands of barbed wire, single arm, sloped to 45 degrees. D. Hardware for Single Swing Gates: 180 degree hinges, 2 for gates up to 60 inches high, 3 for taller gates; fork latch with gravity drop and padlock hasp; keeper to hold gate in fully open position. E. Hardware for Double Swinging Gates: 180 degree hinges, 2 for gates up to 60 inches high, 3 for taller gates; drop both on inactive leaf engaging socket stop set in concrete, active leaf latched to inactive leaf preventing raising of drop bolt, padlock hasp; keepers to hold gate in fully open position. 2.04 FINISHES A. Components (Other than Fabric): Aluminum coated at 0.40 ounces per square foot, when measured in accordance with ASTM A428/A428M. B. Components and Fabric: Vinyl coated over coating of 1.8 ounces per square foot galvanizing. C. Hardware: Hot-dip galvanized to weight required by ASTM Al53/A153M. D. Accessories: Same finish as framing. E. Color(s): Black. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 3231 13-2 Chain Link Fences and Gates Re-Bid Construction Documents ADDENDUM NO. 4 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install framework, fabric, accessories and gates in accordance with ASTM F567. B. Place fabric on outside of posts and rails. C. Set intermediate posts plumb , in concrete footings with top of footing 2 inches above finish grade. Slope top of concrete for water runoff. D. Line Post Footing Depth Below Finish Grade: 2 feet. E. Brace each gate and corner post to adjacent line post with horizontal center brace rail and diagonal truss rods. Install brace rail one bay from end and gate posts. F. Provide top rail through line post tops and splice with 6 inch long rail sleeves. G. Install center brace rail on corner gate leaves. H. Do not stretch fabric until concrete foundation has cured 28 days. I. Fasten fabric to top rail, line posts, braces, and bottom tension wire with tie wire at maximum 15 inches on centers. J. Attach fabric to end, corner, and gate posts with tension bars and tension bar clips. K. Install bottom tension wire stretched taut between terminal posts. L. Do not attach the hinged side of gate to building wall; provide gate posts. M. Install hardware and gate with fabric to match fence. N. Provide concrete center drop to footing depth and drop rod retainers at center of double gate openings. O. Ground fence in accordance with State and local standards. 3.02 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch. B. Maximum Offset From True Position: 1/2 inch. C. Do not infringe on adjacent property lines. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 3231 13-3 Chain Link Fences and Gates Re-Bid Construction Documents ADDENDUM NO. 4 SECTION 32 31 19 DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Decorative steel fences. B. Automatic gate operators. C. Sliding gates and related hardware. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc- Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2023. B. ASTM B117 -Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray(Fog)Apparatus; 2019. C. ASTM D523-Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss; 2014 (Reapproved 2018). D. ASTM D714 -Standard Test Method for Evaluating Degree of Blistering of Paints; 2002 (Reapproved 2017). E. ASTM D822/D822M -Standard Practice for Filtered Open-Flame Carbon-Arc Exposures of Paint and Related Coatings; 2013 (Reapproved 2018). F. ASTM D1654- Standard Test Method for Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens Subjected to Corrosive Environments; 2008, with Editorial Revision (2017). G. ASTM D2244- Standard Practice for Calculation of Color Tolerances and Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates; 2023. H. ASTM D2794- Standard Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact); 1993 (Reapproved 2024). I. ASTM D3359- Standard Test Methods for Rating Adhesion by Tape Test; 2023. J. ASTM F2200- Standard Specification for Automated Vehicular Gate Construction; 2020. K. ASTM F2408- Standard Specification for Ornamental Fences Employing Galvanized Steel Tubular Pickets; 2016 (Reapproved 2023). L. CLFMI WLG 2445-Wind Load Guide for the Selection of Line Post and Line Post Spacing; 2023. M. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. N. UL 325- Standard for Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. C. Design Calculations: For high wind load areas, provide calculations for fence panels and accessory selection as well as line post spacing and foundation details. See CLFMI WLG 2445 for line post and spacing guidance. D. Shop Drawings; Fences: 1. Indicate plan layout, spacing of components, post foundation dimensions, hardware anchorage, gates, and schedule of components. 2. Foundation details, concrete design mix and reinforcing schedule for anti-ram barrier system. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 3231 19- 1 Decorative Metal Fences and Gates Re-Bid Construction Documents ADDENDUM NO. 4 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store materials in a manner to ensure proper ventilation and drainage. Protect against damage, weather, vandalism and theft. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Decorative Metal Fences and Gates: 1. Ameristar Perimeter Security, USA; Montage II Geees+sClassic and PassPort II Classic Commercial Gate: www.ameristarfence.com/#sle. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.02 FENCES AND GATES A. Fences and gates: Complete factory-fabricated system of posts and panels, accessories, fittings, and fasteners; finished with electrodeposition coating, and having the following performance characteristics: B. El ectro-Deposition Coating: Multistage pretreatment/wash with zinc phosphate, followed by epoxy primer and acrylic topcoat. 1. Total Coating Thickness: 2 mils, minimum. 2. Coating Performance: Comply with general requirements of ASTM F2408. a. Adhesion: ASTM D3359 (Method B); Class 3B with 90 percent or more of coating remaining in tested area. b. Corrosion Resistance: ASTM B117, ASTM D714 and ASTM D1654; 1/8 inch coating loss or medium No.8 blisters after 1,500 hours. c. Impact Resistance: ASTM D2794; 60 inch pounds. d. Weathering Resistance: ASTM D523, ASTM D822/D822M and ASTM D2244; less than 60 percent loss of gloss. C. Steel: ASTM A653/A653M; tensile strength 45,000 psi, minimum. 1. Hot-dip galvanized; ASTM A653/A653M, G90. 2.03 WELDED STEEL FENCE A. Provide fence meeting requirements for Industrial class as defined by ASTM F2408. B. Fence Panels: Fusion welded; 8 feet high by 8 feet long. 1. Panel Style: Two rail. 2. Attach panels to posts with manufacturer's standard panel brackets. C. Posts: Steel tube. 1. Size: 3 inches square by 12 gage, 0.109 inch, with manufacturer's standard cap. D. Rails: Manufacturer's standard, double-wall steel channel 1-3/4 inch square by 12 gage, 0.1094 inch with prepunched picket holes. 1. Picket Retaining Rods: 0.125 inch galvanized steel. 2. Picket-to-Rail Intersection Seals: PVC grommets. E. Pickets: Steel tube. 1. Spacing: 3-3/4 inch clear. 2. Size: 1 inch square by 14 ga. 3. Style: Pickets with finial extend above top rail. F. Flexibility: Capable of following variable slope of up to 1:2. G. Color: Black. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 3231 19-2 Decorative Metal Fences and Gates Re-Bid Construction Documents ADDENDUM NO. 4 2.04 DECORATIVE STEEL ROLLING GATES A. Manufacturer Basis of Design: Ameristar Perimeter Security USA; PassPort II Classic Commercial Gate. B. Material: 1. Steel: ASTM A653/A653M; tensile strength 45,000 psi, minimum. C. Ornamental picket material must be 1 inch square x 14 ga. tubing. Picket spacing must 4.715 inches on center. Material for toprails, uprights, and diagonal rails must be 2 inches square x 12 ga. Material for the bottom rail must be 2 x 4 inches x 11 ga. Posts shall be a minimum of 4" square x 11 ga. D. Fabrication: 1. Pickets, rails, uprights and posts must be precut to specified lengths. Diagonals must be precut to specified lengths and angles. Frame materials must be joined by welding. Pickets must be face welded to roll gate frame. 2. The manufactured roll gates and bolt-on panels must be subjected to the manufacturer's PermaCoat thermal stratification coating process (high temperature, in-line, multi-stage, multi-layer) including, as a minimum, a six-stage pre-treatment/wash with zinc phosphate, an electrostatic spray application of an epoxy base, and a separate electrostatic spray application of a polyester finish. The base coat must be a thermosetting epoxy powder coating (gray in color) with a minimum thickness of 2 mils. The topcoat must be a "no- mar"TGIC polyester powder coat finish with a minimum thickness of 2 mils. The color must be black to match fence. The stratification-coated framework must meet the performance requirements in paragraph 2.02. 3. Completed gates must be capable of supporting a 200 lb. load applied at mid-span without permanent deformation. 2.05 AUTOMATIC GATE OPERATORS A. Operator: Comply with UL 325, Class I and ASTM F2200. 1. Operation must be by means of a metal rail passing between a pair of reinforced composite wheels with polyurethane treads. Operator motors shall be hydraulic, geroller type, and system shall not include belts, gears, pulleys, roller chains or sprockets to transfer power from operator to gate panel. The operator shall generate a minimum horizontal pull of 300 lb (136 kg)without the drive wheels slipping and without distortion of supporting arms. Operator shall be capable of handling gates weighing up to 1,500 lb (680 kg). Gate panel velocity shall not be less than 1 ft/s (304 mm/s) and shall be stopped gradually to prevent shock loads to the gate and operator assembly. Gate sensors capable of reversing gate direction upon sensing an obstruction. 2. Following options to be included in Gate Operator: a. Weather-stripped drive rail slot in chassis. b. Factory drive rail. C. Lock for operator cover. d. Fire release: Fire and emergency access lock box. 3. Minimum standard electrical components: a. Pump motor: 1 hp, 3600 RPM, 56C, 24 VDC motor. b. All components shall have overload protection. c. Electrical enclosure: Type 1, metal, with hinged lid gasketed for protection from intrusion of foreign objects. d. Control circuit: 24VDC, with built-in power surge/lightning strike protection, compatible with owner required card reader. e. Backup power batteries, with 50A, fully automatic, regulated battery charger. 4. Operator Manufacturer: HySecurity gate operator model SlideDriver 15. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 3231 19-3 Decorative Metal Fences and Gates Re-Bid Construction Documents ADDENDUM NO. 4 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Set fence posts in accordance with the manufacturer recommended spacing. C. Space gate posts according to the manufacturers' drawings, dependent on standard out-to-out gate leaf dimensions and gate hardware selected. D. Set gate, with 6 inch wheels bolted to the gate, upright with the v-groove wheels positioned over the pre-installed steel v-track. E. Install operator in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and in accordance with NFPA 70. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean jobsite of excess materials; scatter excess material from post hole excavations uniformly away from posts. Remove excess material if required. B. Clean fence with mild household detergent and clean water rinse well. 3.04 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Demonstrate proper operation of equipment to Owner's designated representative. B. Demonstration: Demonstrate operation of system to Owner's personnel. 1. Use operation and maintenance data as reference during demonstration. 2. Briefly describe function, operation, and maintenance of each component. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 3231 19-4 Decorative Metal Fences and Gates Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 32 84 00 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Furnish all labor, material, equipment related services, permits, fees and supervision necessary to complete a functioning automatic underground irrigation system as shown and specified. 1. Work Specified in this Section: Installation of an automatic irrigation system 2. Related Work Specified in other Sections: a. Trees, Shrubs, and Groundcovers -Section 32 93 00 b. Seeding—Section 32 92 19 C. Sodding—Section 32 92 23 3. Definition: The word Architect as used herein shall refer to the Owner's authorized repre- sentative or the Landscape Architect. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND REQUIREMENTS A. Permits and Fees: The Contractor shall obtain and pay for any and all permits and all observa- tions as required. B. Manufacturer's Directions: Manufacturer's directions and detailed drawings shall be followed in all cases where the manufacturers of articles used in this contract furnish directions covering points not shown in the drawings and specifications. C. Ordinances, Codes and Regulations: All local, municipal, and state laws, and rules and regula- tions governing or relating to any portion of this work are hereby incorporated into and made a part of these specifications, and their provisions shall be carried out by the Contractor. Any- thing contained in these specifications shall not be construed to conflict with any of the above rules and regulations and requirements of the same. However, when these specifications and drawings call for or describe materials, workmanship, or construction of a better quality, higher standard, or larger size than is required by the above rules and regulations, these specifications and drawings shall take precedence. 1.03 SCHEDULE OF MATERIALS: A. Material List: 1. All equipment manufacturers and model numbers shall be as noted on the plans. 2. The Contractor shall furnish the articles, equipment, materials, or processes specified by name in the drawings and specifications. No substitution will be allowed without prior written approval of the Architect. 3. Complete material list shall be submitted prior to performing any work. Material list shall include the manufacturer, model number and description of all materials and equipment to be used. 4. Equipment or materials installed or furnished without prior approval of the Architect may be rejected and the Contractor required to remove such materials from the site at his own expense. 5. Approval of any item, alternate or substitute indicates only that the product or products apparently meet the requirements of the drawings and specifications on the basis of the information or samples submitted. 6. Manufacturer's warranties shall not relieve the Contractor of his liability under the guaran- tee. Such warranties shall only supplement the guarantee. B. Record and As-built Drawings: 1. The Contractor shall provide and keep up to date and complete "as-built" record set of black line prints which shall be corrected daily and show every change from the original drawings and specifications and the exact"as-built" locations, sizes, and kinds of equip- ment. Prints for this purpose may be obtained from the Architect at cost. This set of drawings shall be kept on the site and shall be used only as a record set. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 32 84 00-1 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 2. These drawings shall also serve as work progress sheets and shall be the basis for measurement and payment for work completed. These drawings shall be available at all times for inspection and shall be kept in a location designated by the Architect. Should the record black line as-built progress sheets not be available for review or not up-to- date at the time of any inspection (refer to Section 3.10 - Inspection Schedule), it will be assumed no work has been completed and the Contractor will be assessed the cost of that site visit at the current billing rate of the Architect. No other observations shall take place prior to payment of that assessment. 3. The Contractor shall make neat and legible notations on the as-built progress sheets dai- ly as the work proceeds, showing the work as actually installed. All such notations shall be dated by the Contractor as they are recorded. 4. Before the date of the final inspection, the Contractor shall provide to the Architect the record drawing. All work shall be legible and completed in waterproof India ink and ap- plied to the original drawing as obtained by the Contractor. Contractor shall use symbols and notation consistent with original drawings. All notations shall be recorded on a single original black line copy. 5. The Contractor shall dimension from two (2) permanent points of reference, building cor- ners, sidewalk, or road intersections, etc., the location of the following items: a. Connection to existing water lines. b. Connection to existing electrical power. C. Gate valves. d. Routing of sprinkler pressure lines (dimensions max. 100' along routing). e. Sprinkler control valves. f. Routing of control wiring. g. Quick coupling valves. h. Other related equipment as directed by the Architect. C. Controller Charts: 1. As-built drawings shall be approved by the Architect before controller charts are pre- pared. a. Index sheet stating Contractor's address and telephone number, list of equipment with name and addresses of local manufacturer's representative. b. Catalog and parts sheets on every material and equipment installed under this contract. C. Guarantee statement. d. Complete operating and maintenance instruction on all major equipment. 2. In addition to the above mentioned maintenance manuals, provide the Owner's mainte- nance personnel with instructions for major equipment and show evidence in writing to the Architect at the conclusion of the project that this service has been rendered. D. Equipment to be Furnished: 1. Supply as a part of this contract the following tools: a. Quick coupling keys with swivel hose connections at noted on the plan. b. Two (2) keys for each automatic controller. 2. The above mentioned equipment shall be turned over to the Owner at the conclusion of the project. Before final inspection can occur, evidence that the Owner has received ma- terial must be shown to the Architect. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Handling of PVC Pipe and Fittings: The Contractor is cautioned to exercise care in handling, loading, unloading, and storing of PVC pipe and fittings. Any section of pipe that has been dented or damaged will be discarded and, if installed, shall be replaced with new piping. 1.05 SUBSTITUTIONS A. If the Irrigation Contractor wishes to substitute any equipment or materials for those equipment or materials listed on the irrigation drawings and specifications, he may do so by providing the following information to the Owner's authorized representative for approval: RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 32 84 00-2 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 1. Provide a statement indicating the reason for making the substitution. Use a separate sheet of paper for each item to be substituted. 2. Provide descriptive catalog literature, performance charts and flow charts for each item to be substituted. 3. Provide the amount of cost savings if the substituted item is approved. B. Owner's authorized representative shall have the sole responsibility in accepting or rejecting any substituted item as an approved equal to those equipment and materials listed on the irri- gation drawings and specifications. 1.06 GUARANTEE A. The guarantee for the sprinkler irrigation system shall be made in accordance with the attached form. The Standard Form of Agreement and the General Conditions of these specifications shall be filed with the Owner or his representative prior to acceptance of the irrigation system. B. A copy of the guarantee form shall be included in the operations and maintenance manual. C. The guarantee form shall be re-typed onto the Contractor's letterhead and contain the following information: D. GUARANTEE FOR SPRINKLER IRRIGATION SYSTEM E. We hereby guarantee that the sprinkler irrigation system we have furnished and installed is free from defects in materials and workmanship, and the work has been completed in accordance with the drawings and specifications. We agree to repair or replace any defects in material or workmanship which may develop during the period of one year from date of acceptance and also to repair or replace damage resulting from such warranty work at no additional cost to the Owner. We shall make such repairs or replacements within a reasonable time, as deter- mined by the Owner, after receipt of written notice from the Owner. If we are unable to make such repairs and/or replacements within the given time frame, we authorize the Owner to pro- ceed to have said repairs or replacements made at our expense and we will pay the costs and charges therefore upon demand. PROJECT: LOCATION: SIGNED: ADDRESS: PHONE: DATE OF ACCEPTANCE: PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Refer to construction documents. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Site Conditions: 1. All scaled dimensions are approximate. The Contractor shall check and verify all size dimensions and receive Architect's approval prior to proceeding with work under this sec- tion. 2. Exercise extreme care in excavating and working near existing utilities. Contractor shall be responsible for damages to utilities which are caused by his operations or neglect. Check existing utilities drawings for existing utility locations. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 32 84 00-3 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 3. Coordinate installation of sprinkler irrigation materials including pipe, so there shall be NO interference with utilities or other construction or difficulty in planting trees, shrubs, and ground covers. Coordinate work other site contractors. 4. The Contractor shall carefully check all grades to satisfy himself that he may safely pro- ceed before starting work on the sprinkler irrigation system. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Physical Layout: 1. Piping and head layout is shown on plans in schematic form only. All pipes to be in- stalled directly behind curbs, walks, and walls wherever possible. 2. All spacing of heads and pipe from adjacent hardscape surfaces shall comply with local codes and ordinances. 3. No spacing or layout of any product or equipment shall exceed the manufacturer's rec- ommended or specified application of that product. 4. Prior to installation, the Contractor shall stake out all pressure supply lines, routing and location of sprinkler heads. 5. All layouts shall be approved by Architect prior to installation. B. Water Supply: 1. Sprinkler Irrigation system shall be connected to water supply points-of- connection as indicated on the drawings. 2. Connections shall be made at approximate locations as shown on drawings. Contractor is responsible for minor changes caused by actual site conditions. 3. Contractor is responsible for verifying on-site water pressure at the source prior to begin- ning installation. If on-site pressure exceeds the static pressure used in design docu- ments by 10 percent or more a pressure regulating device shall be installed. If static pressure is lower that the minimum static pressure of the design documents, the Con- tractor shall notify Architect prior to beginning work. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Trenching: 1. Dig trenches straight 6" wide with near vertical side and support pipe continuously on bot- tom of trench. Lay pipe to an even grade. Trenching excavation shall follow layout indi- cated on drawings and as noted above, 3.02. A.1. 2. Provide for a minimum of eighteen (18) inches cover for all pressure supply lines. 3. Provide for a minimum cover of twelve (12) inches for all non-pressure lines. 4. Provide for a minimum cover of eighteen (18) inches for all control wiring. 5. No machine trenching, unless approved by Architect, is to be done within drip line of trees. Trenching is done by hand, tunneling, boring, air-spade or other methods ap- proved by Architect. It is understood that the piping layout is diagrammatic and piping shall be routed around trees and shrubs in such manner to avoid damage to plants. B. Backfilling: 1. The trenches shall not be backfilled until all required tests are performed. Trenches shall be carefully backfilled with the excavated materials approved for backfilling, consisting of earth, loam, sandy clay, sand, or other approved materials, free from large clods of earth or stones. Backfill shall be mechanically compacted in landscaped areas to a dry density equal to adjacent undisturbed soil in planting area. Backfill will conform to adjacent grades without dips, sunken areas, humps or other surface irregularities. 2. A fine granular material backfill will be initially placed on all lines (minimum 4" depth). No foreign matter larger than one (1) inch in size will be permitted in the initial backfill. 3. Where rock is encountered in trenching, 3" of sand above the pipe and 3" of sand below the pipe will be used as the initial backfill. 4. Flooding of trenches will be permitted only with approval of Architect. 5. If settlement occurs and subsequent adjustments in pipe, valves, sprinkler heads, lawn or planting, or other construction are necessary, the Contractor shall make all required ad- justments without cost to the Owner. C. Trenching and Backfill Under Paving: RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 32 84 00-4 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 1. All irrigation main lateral lines, or wiring located under areas where paving, asphaltic pav- ing, or concrete will be located shall be installed in schedule 40 PVC sleeves shall be a minimum of twice the diameter of the pipe being installed in said sleeve. 2. Trenches located under areas where paving, asphaltic concrete or concrete, will be in- stalled shall be backfilled with sand (a layer six(6) inches below the pipe and three (3) inches above the pipe) and compacted in layers to 95 percent compaction, using manual or mechanical tamping devices. Trenches for piping shall be compacted to equal the compaction of the existing adjacent undisturbed soil and shall be left in a firm unyielding condition. All trenches shall be left flush with the adjoining grade. The sprinkler Irriga- tion Contractor shall set in place, cap and pressure test all piping under paving prior to the paving work. 3. Provide for a minimum cover of eighteen (18) inches between the top of the pipe and the bottom of the aggregate base for all pressure and non-pressure piping installed under asphaltic concrete paving. D. Assemblies: 1. Routing of sprinkler irrigation lines as indicated on the drawings is diagrammatic. Install lines (and various assemblies) in such a manner as to conform to the details per plans. 2. Install NO multiple assemblies in plastic lines. Provide each assembly with its own outlet. 3. Install all assemblies specified herein in accordance with respective detail. In absence of detail drawings or specifications pertaining to specific items required to complete work, perform such work the manufacturer's specifications or in accordance with best standard practice with prior approval of Architect. 4. PVC pipe and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned of dirt, dust and moisture before instal- lation. Installation and solvent welding methods shall be as recommended by the pipe and fitting manufacturer. 5. On PVC to metal connections, the Contractor shall work the metal connections first. Tef- lon tape or approved equal, shall be used on all threaded PVC to PVC, and on all threaded PVC to metal joints. Light wrench pressure is all that is required, use threaded PVC adaptors into which the pipe may be welded. E. Line Clearance: All lines shall have a minimum clearance of six (6) inches from each other and from lines of other trades. Parallel lines shall not be installed directly over one another. F. Automatic Controller: Must meet the CALSENSE Certification Checklist and be approved by a CALSENSE representative prior to final acceptance. Installation shall be per manufacturer's instructions. Remote control valves shall be connected to controller in numerical sequence as shown on the drawings. Each remote control valve shall be wired to one station of the con- troller, unless otherwise noted on plans. G. High Voltage Wiring for Automatic Controller: 1. Provide for connection per plans/details and manufacturer's specification. 2. 120-volt power connection to the automatic controller shall be provided by the Irrigation Contractor. 3. All electrical work shall conform to local codes, ordinances, and union authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Controllers are to be grounded per manufacturer's specifications. H. Remote Control Valves: Install where shown on drawings and details. When grouped together, allow at least twelve (12) inches between valves. Install each remote control valve in a sepa- rate valve box. Each valve number and its controller letter shall be stenciled inside valve box top with exterior paint. I. Flushing of System: 1. After all new sprinkler pipe lines and risers are in place and connected, all necessary di- version work has been completed, and prior to installation of sprinkler heads/nozzles, the control valves shall be opened and full head of water used to flush out the system. 2. Sprinkler heads/nozzles shall be installed only after flushing of the system has been ac- complished to the complete satisfaction of the Architect. J. Sprinkler Heads: RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 32 84 00-5 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 1. Install the sprinkler heads as designated on the drawings. Make appropriate adjustments in head layout to accommodate for actual field conditions. Notify Architect should need for major adjustments arise. 2. Spacing of heads shall not exceed the maximum indicated on the drawings. In no case shall the spacing exceed the maximum recommended by the manufacturer. 3. All sprinklers to attach to lateral lines with flexible connectors - ref. details on drawings. 3.04 TEMPORARY REPAIRS A. The Owner reserves the right to make temporary repairs as necessary to keep the sprinkler sys- tem equipment in operating condition. The exercise of this right by the Owner shall not re- lieve the Contractor of his responsibilities under the terms of the guarantee as herein speci- fied. 3.05 EXISTING TREES A. Do not trench within the drip line of an existing tree. Should construction within root zone seem unavoidable, contact Architect for direction prior to any trenching. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Adjustment of the System: 1. The Contractor shall flush and adjust all sprinkler heads for optimum performance and to prevent overspray onto walks, roadways, and buildings as much as possible. 2. The Contractor shall adjust all pressure regulated valves on a zone by zone basis. Pres- sure regulated valves shall be adjusted to 25-30 pounds per square inch for spray zones. Pressure shall be tested at farthest head from zone valve. 3. If it is determined that adjustment in the irrigation equipment will provide proper and more adequate coverage, the Contractor shall make such adjustments prior to planting. Ad- justments may also include changes in nozzle sizes and degrees of arc as required. 4. Lowering raised sprinkler heads by the Contractor shall be accomplished within ten (10) days after notification by Owner. 5. All sprinkler heads shall be set perpendicular to finished grades unless otherwise desig- nated on the plans. 6. All sprinkler heads shall be installed to comply with local codes and ordinances of local governing jurisdictions. B. Testing of Irrigation System: 1. The Contractor shall request the presence of the Architect in writing at least 48 hours in advance of testing. 2. Test all pressure lines under hydrostatic pressure of 150 pounds per square inch, and prove water tight. 3. All piping under paved areas shall be tested under hydrostatic pressure of 100 pounds per square inch, and proved water tight, prior to paving. 4. Sustain pressure in lines for not less than two (4) hours. If leaks develop, replace joints and repeat test until entire system is proved water tight. 5. All hydrostatic tests shall be made only in the presence of the Architect, or other duly au- thorized representative of the Owner. No pipe shall be backfilled until it has been in- spected, tested and approved in writing. 6. Furnish necessary force pump and all other test equipment. 7. When the sprinkler irrigation system is completed, perform a coverage test in the pres- ence of the Architect, to determine if the water coverage for planting areas is complete and adequate. Furnish all materials and perform all work required to correct any inade- quacies of coverage due to deviations from plans, or where the system has been willfully installed as indicated on the drawings when it is obviously inadequate, without bringing this to the attention of the Architect. This test shall be accomplished before any ground- cover is planted. 8. Upon completion of each phase of work, entire system shall be tested and adjusted to meet site requirements. 3.07 MAINTENANCE RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 32 84 00-6 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents A. During the one year warranty period following final acceptance, provide periodical maintenance of the system including but not limited to the following: 1. Raise or lower heads to compensate for settling of lawn areas. 2. Clean nozzles and adjust spray arcs and radii to provide proper coverage and prevent overspray onto roadways. 3. Raise shrub risers to compensate for shrub growth. 3.08 CLEAN-UP A. Clean-up shall be made as each portion of work progresses. Refuse and excess dirt shall be removed from the site, all walks and paving shall be broomed or washed down, and any damage sustained on the work of others shall be repaired to original conditions. B. The Contractor shall show evidence to the Architect that the Owner has received all accesso- ries, charts, record drawings, and equipment as required before final inspection can occur. 3.09 OBSERVATION SCHEDULE A. Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the Architect in advance for the following observa- tion meetings, according to the time indicated. 1. Pre-Job Conference- 7 days. 2. Pressure supply line installation and testing -48 hours. 3. Automatic controller installation -48 hours. 4. Control wire installation -48 hours. 5. Lateral line and sprinkler installation -48 hours. 6. Coverage test-48 hours. 7. Final inspection -7 days. B. When observations have been conducted by other than the Architect, show evidence in writing of when and by whom these observations were made. C. No site observations will commence without as-built drawings. In the event the Contractor calls for a site visit without as-built drawings, without completing previously noted corrections, or without preparing the system for said visit, he shall be responsible for reimbursing the Archi- tect at his current billing rates per hour(plus transportation costs)for inconvenience. No fur- ther site visits will be scheduled until this charge has been paid and received. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 32 84 00-7 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 32 91 13 SOIL PREPARATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Landscape soil placement and finish grading for landscape work. 1. Turf/grass areas. 2. Planting bed areas. 3. Reconditioning of site damaged by any construction related activities. B. Extent of soil preparation work as addresses entire site. C. Refer to Earthwork section. Subcontractors shall coordinate with General Contractor on responsibility for earthwork. D. Subgrade Elevations: Excavation, filling and grading are not specified in this section. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Earthwork/Grading - Coordinate with Civil Sections. B. Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements C. Section 01 56 39 - Landscape Protection D. Section 31 13 30 -Treatment of Existing Trees E. Section 32 84 32 - Landscape Irrigation Systems/Design Requirements F. Section 32 92 19 -Seeding G. Section 32 92 23 -Sodding H. Section 32 93 00 - Exterior Plants I. Section 32 93 10 - Landscape Maintenance 1.03 SITE CONDITIONS A. Verification of Dimensions: 1. All scaled and figured dimensions are given for estimate purposes only. 2. Before proceeding with any work, the Contractor shall carefully check and verify all dimensions and sizes, etc., and shall assume full responsibility for the correctness of all such items. B. Existing Conditions: 1. New work shall be tied to existing conditions and controls such as existing grades. 2. Finished grades shall bear proper relationship to such controls. C. The Contractor shall adjust new work as necessary and as directed to meet existing conditions and fulfill intent of the plans. D. Obstructions: If any unknown utilities and obstacles are encountered during the construction period, stop work and immediately contact the Landscape Architect before proceeding. 1. Such obstructions shall be removed or relocated or the work adjusted as directed by the Landscape Architect. 2. If work proceeds without contacting the Landscape Architect, the Contractor shall be held liable for any and all damages. E. Underground Utilities: 1. Prior to initiating any work of this section, the Contractor shall contact the appropriate authorities in order that their personnel can locate underground utilities that may be encountered. 2. Coordinate with other trades on project concerning installation of new utilities that may be affected. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 3291 13- 1 SOIL PREPARATION Re-Bid Construction Documents F. Existing Vegetation: 1. Portions of the existing vegetation shall remain as indicated on the drawings. 2. The Contractor shall take all means necessary to protect the existing vegetation. Any existing vegetation to remain that is damaged shall be replaced. 3. New work shall be tied to existing conditions and controls. G. Subgrade Elevations: 1. Excavation, filling and grading required to establish elevations shown on drawings are not specified in this section. 2. Subgrade elevations shall be established prior to placement of landscape soils to allow for placement to depths as indicated/required. a. Contractor is responsible to coordinate establishment of subgrade elevations as required for landscape soils. b. Conditions in which subgrade elevations have not been provided, Contractor is responsible to complete excavation required and properly dispose of resulting spoils off-site. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Landscape installation or maintenance must be supervised by a staff member of the Contractor who possesses at least one of the following current certifications/designations: 1. Texas Certified Landscape Professional (TCLP)as administered by Texas Nursery& Landscape Association (TNLA). B. It is the obligation of the bidder to provide the Owner or Landscape Architect with documentation that the above qualification is met. 1.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Analysis and Standards: 1. Package standard products: a. Packaged and sealed standard products accompanied by manufacturer's or vendors' analysis, complying with specification requirements, will be acceptable. 2. For other materials, provide analysis by recognized laboratory made in accordance with methods established by the Association of Official Agricultural Chemists, wherever applicable. B. Certified Analysis: 1. Certified analysis by a recognized laboratory acceptable to the Landscape Architect of topsoil shall be submitted by the Contractor, at his own expense, for the Landscape Architect's approval before delivery to the site. a. Control Standard: 1) Non-hydric soil. 2) Minimum shrink-swell potential. 3) Minimal salt content. 4) No heavy metals. 5) Sand content shall not exceed 50 percent, 6) Clay particles 7 to 27 percent. 7) Silt particles 28 to 50 percent, oven dry weight. 8) Range 4 percent to 8 percent natural organic content by oven dry weight as measured by the "wet digestion" method. 9) pH within the range of 6.0- 7.8. b. The samples tested shall consist of a representative mixture from each source. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 3291 13-2 SOIL PREPARATION Re-Bid Construction Documents c. The Contractor shall have any topsoil (material stripped from site and imported) tested to provide data regarding: 1) Mechanical analysis. 2) Percentage of organic content. 3) pH factor and recommendations on type and quantity of additives required to establish satisfactory pH factor. 4) Recommendations on type and quantity of additives required to reduce salt level content. 5) Supply of nutrients to bring nutrients to satisfactory level for planting including type of fertilizer required and for rates of application of fertilizer in turf/grass areas. d. Soil tests shall be run prior to topsoil sample approval and at Landscape Architect's discretion throughout topsoil installation. e. Note Contractor's option to utilize commercially prepared garden/landscape soil specified in Products section negates requirement of testing soil for incorporation of additives while recommendations for fertilizer application remain. f. Testing soil for incorporation of additives while recommendations for fertilizer application do not apply to commercially prepared garden/landscape soil specified in Products. 2. Analysis requirements apply to topsoil stripped and stockpiled on-site. 3. Analysis requirements apply to undisturbed topsoil on-site. C. Topsoil Source: 1. Topsoil to be furnished shall be subject to inspection at its source to determine whether or not it meets with requirements specified and to approved depth to which it may be stripped. 2. At time of inspection, Contractor may be required to take additional representative soil samples, under Landscape Architect's observation, to proposed stripping depth from several locations under consideration. 3. If additional samples are required, herein before procedures shall be adhered to. 4. Other references to this requirement found in topsoil description of this Section - Materials of the specifications. D. Presence of Non-specified Grasses and Weeds: 1. The Landscape Architect reserves the right to inspect landscape areas from time of installation to Final Acceptance. 2. Any evidence of non-specified grasses or weeds will be cause for rejection and replacement of the unacceptable areas. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish at Landscape Architect's office, prior to installation, the following information/samples: 1. Supervisor Qualifications. 2. Soil: a. Soil analysis with fertilizer and conditioner/amendment recommendations. b. Particle analysis. c. Includes both on-site and imported material. 3. Soil Conditioner: MSOS Product Sheets; label from bag (Supplier's statement of analysis if bulk). 4. Soil Amendment: MSOS Product Sheets; label from bag (Supplier's statement of analysis if bulk). 5. Prepared Topsoil: Supplier's product analysis. 6. Manufactured Soil Mix: Supplier's product analysis. 7. Planting Bed Soil Mix: Supplier's product analysis. 8. Particle Analysis. 9. Herbicide: Label from container or Supplier's brochure. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 3291 13-3 SOIL PREPARATION Re-Bid Construction Documents B. Furnish Proof of Compliance with Specifications to Landscape Architect's office, the following: 1. With each pay application- a. Demonstrate compliance by providing invoices to prove purchase of all products in sufficient quantity to cover the project at the rates recommended by the manufacturer or as specified. Include project name, date of purchase of product and name of contact. 1.07 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packaged Materials: 1. Deliver packaged materials in original containers showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. 2. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery, and while stored at site. 1.08 ABBREVIATIONS A. C.Y. Cubic Yard B. S.Y. Square Yard C. S.F. Square Feet D. L.F. Linear Feet 1.09 JOB CONDITIONS A. Basic Regulations: 1. Soil preparation operations shall be conducted under favorable weather conditions during the seasons which are normal for such work as determined by acceptable practice in the locality. B. Contractor is hereby notified of active utilities and caution shall be exercised to avoid interruption of services. C. The Contractor is responsible for replacement of any buried utilities, irrigation lines, etc., if they are broken during the soil preparation operations. 1. Contact the appropriate utility to get the locations of underground utilities. 2. The replacement costs are at the Contractor's expense. D. When it is necessary to cross paved areas, curbing or walks, protection against damage shall be provided by the Contractor. E. When conditions detrimental to landscape work are encountered during soil preparation, such as rubble fill, adverse drainage conditions, or obstructions, notify Landscape Architect before initiating work. 1. Such obstructions shall be removed or relocated or the work adjusted as directed by the Landscape Architect. 2. If work proceeds without contacting the Landscape Architect, the Contractor shall be held liable for any and all revisions necessary. 1.10 WARRANTY& GUARANTEES A. Repair: 1. When any portion of the surface becomes gullied or otherwise damaged or treatment is destroyed during the Project's warranty period, the affected portion shall be repaired to reestablish condition and grade of soil to as it was prior to injury as directed. 2. Repair work required shall be performed without cost to the Owner. B. Repair shall be made within 10 days of notification or as soon as weather conditions are satisfactory. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 3291 13-4 SOIL PREPARATION Re-Bid Construction Documents PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SOIL MATERIALS A. Prepared Topsoil: Four-way mix (topsoil, sand, compost and cedar), screened, acceptable manufacturers: 1. New Earth Soils & Compost, San Antonio, Texas , (210) 661-5180. 2. Fertile Garden Supply, San Antonio, Texas, (210) 688-9435. 3. Gardenville, San Antonio, Texas, (210) 651-6115. 4. Quality Organic Products, San Antonio, Texas, (210) 651-0200. 5. Urban Land Clearing Soils & Compost, San Antonio, Texas, (210)240-6249. B. Planting Bed Soil Mix: Garden Soil Mix (composted topsoil, sand, compost and cedar), screened. 1. Acceptable manufacturers: a. New Earth Soils & Compost, San Antonio, Texas , (210) 661-5180. b. Fertile Garden Supply, San Antonio, Texas, (210)688-9435. c. Gardenville, San Antonio, Texas, (210) 651-6115. d. Quality Organic Products, San Antonio, Texas, (210) 651-0200. e. Urban Soils &Compost, San Antonio, Texas, (210)240-6249. 2.02 SOIL ADDITIVES A. Soil Conditioner: 1. Leaf Mold Compost, Fungal Based Compost: Vegetative material or other organic residue, without dust, objectionable odors, viable weed seed; aerobic and friable composted for a minimum of 9 months. Compost derived from animal manure and stable bedding is not acceptable. a. Product shall be OMRI (Organic Materials Review Institute) certified organic. b. Prior approved manufacturer: New Earth Soils and Compost, San Antonio, Texas; (210) 661-5180. B. Top Dressing: Compost, composted for a period of eight(8)weeks or longer, organic, derived from animal manure, wood shavings, hay, seed hulls, stable bedding, or other organic residue, without dust, objectionable odors, viable weed seed; aerobic and friable. 1. Approved Manufacturers a. New Earth Soils and Compost, San Antonio, Texas, (210)661-5180. b. Stone &Soil Depot, San Antonio, Texas, (210) 688-9435. c. Garden-Ville, San Antonio, Texas, (210)651-6115. d. Quality Organic Products, San Antonio, Texas, (210) 651-0200. e. Urban Soils &Compost, San Antonio, Texas, (210) 240-6249. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS A. Post-Emergence Herbicide: Round-Up by Monsanto Corp., or approved substitute. B. Water: Furnished by the Contractor. Hose and other watering equipment to be provided by Contractor. C. Geotextile Fabric: Filter fabric Mirafi 140N or approved substitute. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 WEED TREATMENT A. All site locations to receive planting where weeds exist, shall be treated with post-emergent herbicide. 1. Repeat treatment as required that no weeds are present at the beginning of work on the landscape planting of the Project. B. No weeds shall be present at the date of inspection for Substantial Completion of the Project and at the conclusion of the maintenance and establishment period following acceptance of the Contractor's work. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 3291 13-5 SOIL PREPARATION Re-Bid Construction Documents C. Post-emergent weed treatment includes: 1. Removal of weeds and other undesirable ground cover vegetation in turf/grass and planting areas shall be accomplished a minimum of 14 days prior to soil preparation for planting operations. 2. Care shall be taken not to affect existing trees or shrubs to be saved on the site. 3. Care shall be taken to not affect plants on adjacent site. D. Weed Treatment Procedure 1. Mow grass and/or existing weeds to 3-inch height. 2. Spray herbicide on a day that is not rainy, not windy and adequately warm. a. Within 24 hours of cutting grass/weeds. 3. Do not disturb soil for 14 days. If live, green weeds remain, repeat as required to kill all weeds, before disturbing soil. 4. After 14 days, scalp and mechanically rake soil when the soil is not excessively hard or dry (water the soil if necessary)to remove 85% of dead foliage above grade. 5. The remaining dead material shall be allowed to accumulate in place and shall be incorporated into the soil through the rototilling of the soil preparation work. 3.02 SUBGRADE PREPARATION PRIOR TO PLACEMENT OF LANDSCAPE SOILS A. Areas disturbed by new construction and grading. B. Confirm establishment of subgrade elevations to achieve positive drainage after placement of landscape soils and completion of finish grading. C. The Contractor is to report immediately upon his awareness, any site condition or situation of the contiguous landscape that would cause flooding, washing or concentration of excess surface water to the areas receiving planting or turf/grass. D. Irrigation work shall be completed after rototilling and compaction, herbicide spraying, scalping and removal of vegetative debris and rough grading, but prior to finish grading. E. Prior to placement of landscape soils, cultivate subgrade to a minimum of 4 inches. Remove stones over 2-inch diameter and sticks, roots, rubbish and other extraneous debris of any dimension. F. Regrade site as required, if disturbed by weed removal, for positive drainage. G. Excavate subsoil to depth required to allow for placement of landscape soils and associated preparation. H. After the irrigation system is in place, the entire area shall be raked smooth and all rocks, roots and debris 1 inch in diameter or larger removed. 3.03 SOIL PLACEMENT A. The Contractor is to report immediately upon his awareness, any site condition or situation of the contiguous landscape that would cause flooding, washing or concentration of excess surface water to the planting areas. B. Landscape soils are to be placed to achieve the compacted depth to the specified elevation relative to site elements (e.g. curbs, paving and walls). 1. Contractor is responsible to coordinate establishment of subgrade elevations as required for landscape soils. 2. Conditions in which subgrade elevations have not been provided, Contractor is responsible to complete excavation required and properly dispose of resulting spoils off- site. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 3291 13-6 SOIL PREPARATION Re-Bid Construction Documents C. Place landscape soils to obtain uniform site grade and the minimum compacted depth required. 1. The site shall be free from irregular surface changes and shall vary uniformly between fixed elevations. 2. Restore landscape areas to above specified condition if any eroded places, ruts or depressions exist or otherwise disturbed after fine grading and prior to planting. 3. Complete irrigation work prior to finish grading. D. If 6" depth of topsoil exists in turf areas, there is no need to excavate that soil and bring in new soil. The existing 6" shall be amended per the soil analysis. E. If 12" depth of topsoil exists in planting bed areas, there is no need to excavate that soil and bring in new soil. The existing 12" shall be amended per the soil analysis. F. Depth placement(compacted) schedule: 1. Turf Areas: Six (6) inches of topsoil or manufactured soil mix in turf/grass areas unless noted otherwise on plan. a. Use of manufactured soil mix waives requirement of Certified Analysis. 2. Planting Beds: Twelve (12 inch)depth of manufactured soil mix in planting bed areas unless noted otherwise on plan. 3.04 TURF/GRASS AREA SOIL PREPARATION A. Protection: 1. Take care and preparation in work to avoid conditions which will create hazards. Post signs or barriers as required. 2. Provide adequate means for protection from damage through excessive erosion, flooding, heavy rains, etc. Repair or replace damaged areas. 3. Keep site well drained and landscape excavations dry. B. Surface Preparation: 1. Seven (7) days maximum prior to turf installation, loosen area 6 inches deep, dampen thoroughly, and cultivate to properly break up clods and lumps. 2. In areas where topsoil will not be placed (e.g. areas not disturbed by grading), loosen area 4 inches deep, dampen thoroughly, and cultivate to properly break up clods and lumps. Incorporate 2 inches of soil conditioner into the top 6 inches (refer to RECONDITIONING SITE for additional direction. 3. Coordinate with general cultivation required of overall area for placement of landscape soils; coordinate with civil work. 4. Rake area to remove clods, rocks, weeds, roots, and debris. 5. Place topsoil to depth specified. C. Incorporation of Soil Conditioners and Soil Amendments as prescribed by the Certified Analysis: 1. Prior to fine grading, incorporate soil conditioners, soil amendments, as well as other additives as indicated by the soils analysis, to modify the topsoil within content ranges specified by the soils analysis by rototilling or cultivating into the top six (6) inches of the soil in turf/grass areas. (See RECONDITIONING SITE this section, for additional direction.) 2. Cultivate the top six (6) inches of the soil in turf/grass areas. 3. Prior to fine grading and seeding/sodding of turf/grass areas, incorporate a minimum of 2 inches of soil conditioner and 200 pounds of gypsum, plus 20 pounds of Ironite per 1000 square feet of site area over the entire site. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 3291 13-7 SOIL PREPARATION Re-Bid Construction Documents D. Fine grade planting areas to smooth, even surface with loose, uniformly fine texture. 1. Roll, rake and drag planting areas, remove ridges and fill depressions, as required to meet finish grade. a. Rake area to remove clods, rocks, weeds, roots, and debris. 2. Compact the entire area to a maximum dry density not less than 80 percent and not more than 85 percent. 3. Limit fine grading to areas which can be planted immediately after grading. 4. Allow for grass thickness in areas to be sodded or seeded. Finish grade of soil shall be: a. Two (2) inches below top of pavement in sodded areas. b. One and one half(1-1/2) inches below top of pavement in areas to be seeded. E. Grade and shape area to receive turf/grass to bring surface to true uniform planes free from irregularities and to provide drainage and proper slope to catch basins. F. After turf/grass areas have been prepared, take no heavy objects over them except turf/grass rollers. G. Rake or scarify and cut or fill irregularities that develop as required until area is true and uniform, free from lumps, depressions, and irregularities. 3.05 PLANTING BED SOIL PREPARATION A. The Contractor is responsible that soil preparation is accomplished in the manner and to the depth detailed on the plans and specified. 1. Coordinate with other trades as required to establish subgrade elevation to accommodate depth of planting bed soil specified. 2. Prior to placement of planting bed soil, cultivate subgrade to four(4) inch minimum depth. 3. Contractor shall be held responsible to insure proper depth and finish grade of plant soil mixture. a. Planting Bed Soil Mix to be placed to provide compacted depth scheduled in SOIL PLACEMENT. b. Refer to Section - Exterior Plants for additional planting requirements. 4. The finish grade of the soil preparation shall be 2 inches below the finished elevation of walks, curbs, etc., that washing of the mulch is minimized. B. Planting Bed Soil Mix 1. Mix specified soil conditioner in the following ratio: a. 70% topsoil -30% soil conditioner. 2. Before mixing, clean topsoil of roots, plants, sods, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful or toxic to plant growth (maximum acceptable lump size is 1 inch). 3. Contractor may be required to mix all ingredients of the planting soil mix in the presence of the Landscape Architect. 4. All ingredients shall be thoroughly blended to provide a homogeneous mixture. a. Mixing shall be in one cubic yard or greater batches using mechanical mixing equipment approved by the Landscape Architect. 5. Mixing may be done in a designated on-site area or it may be accomplished off-site if approved by the Landscape Architect and the finished material transported to the site. a. Samples of at least one cubic foot (1 CF)for each ten cubic yards (10 CY)of planting soil mix used on the site shall be submitted to the Landscape Architect for approval. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 3291 13-8 SOIL PREPARATION Re-Bid Construction Documents 6. In the event deficiencies are found in the planting mix, they shall be corrected immediately. a. If the material is rejected on the project site by the Landscape Architect for any reason, all of the rejected material shall be immediately removed from the site and disposed of by the contractor at his expense. b. If any of the rejected material has been used in the planting operations, the Landscape Architect, at his discretion, may require the Contractor to remove and replace the soil mix with an approved mixture. c. Any testing required by the Landscape Architect to verify planting mixture characteristics shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be considered subsidiary to the work and no additional compensation shall be awarded. C. New Planting Beds 1. Place planting soil mix to compacted depth specified. 2. Apply pre-emergent herbicide to beds after planting. 3. Contractor shall be held responsible to insure proper depth and finish grade of resulting plant soil mix. 3.06 RECONDITIONING SITE A. Reconditioning site includes: 1. Existing turf/grass areas damaged by Contractor's operations including storage of materials and equipment and movement of vehicles. 2. Recondition existing planting beds. 3. Areas not damaged by construction or disturbed by grading that are indicated to receive new landscape treatment. 4. Areas where grading occurs with adequate in-situ topsoil remaining (as approved by Landscape Architect). 5. Incorporating a minimum of 2 inches of soil amendment/soil conditioner without changing the elevation of the soil contiguous to curbs and sidewalks, beneath canopies of trees and other fixed features. B. Process sequence for preparation of the soils prior to the turf/grass planting including herbiciding, excavation and placement: 1. The entire area to receive soil conditioner to be reconditioned shall be treated to kill weeds; weeds shall be completely dead. 2. The weed treatment shall be inspected and approved by the Landscape Architect prior to beginning this work. See WEED TREATMENT this section. 3. If rainfall has not been sufficient to loosen soil, the entire area shall be watered beginning a minimum of one week prior to cultivating operation and continued until enough moisture is present to enable cultivating. 4. Cultivate or rototill the entire area where turf/grass is to be reconditioned to a minimum 4- inch depth. a. Remove rocks and debris. b. Compact to a maximum dry density not less than 80 percent and not more than 85 percent. c. Work within dripline of trees to be done by hand. C. Remove diseased and unsatisfactory turf/grass areas; do not bury into soil. 1. Remove topsoil containing foreign materials including materials resulting from Contractor's operations including oil drippings, stone, gravel and other loose building materials. 2. Replace with approved topsoil as required. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 3291 13-9 SOIL PREPARATION Re-Bid Construction Documents D. Excavate 2 inches of the existing soil contiguous to the walks, curbs, and other site improvements. Taper the excavation to meet existing grade 15 feet away from the beginning edge. 1. Where existing trees are within the area to be excavated and tapered and when existing grade is below the elevation of the walk, wall or etc., being tapered away from, the soil around the tree roots shall be loosened to a depth of 3 inches being careful not to damage roots. 2. When existing grade is at or above the elevation of walk, wall or etc., being tapered away from, the soil around the tree roots shall be loosened and removed to a depth corresponding to the depth of taper where the tree is, being careful not to damage roots. 3. This work shall be done by hand, unless otherwise approved by Landscape Architect, to protect the tree roots. E. Excavated soil may be deposited within the turf/grass areas spread smooth and tapered to existing grades to follow existing drainage patterns. 1. No area shall receive more than a 3-inch depth of re deposited excavated soil at its deepest point. 2. When existing trees occur within an area where excavated soils are being spread no excavated soil shall be spread inside of the dripline of the trees. F. Soil shall not be deposited in a manner which creates ponding in any area. G. When excavation and redistribution of excavated soil is complete, a minimum of 2 inches of soil conditioner shall be placed over the entire area to receive soil preparation. 1. Refer to Article 3.04 Turf/Grass Area Soil Preparation for turf/grass area requirement. 2. Refer to Article 3.05 Planting Bed Soil Preparation for planting bed requirements. H. Irrigation work shall be completed after rototilling and compaction but prior to finish grading. I. After the irrigation system is in place, the entire area shall be raked smooth removing all rocks, roots and debris 1 inch in diameter or larger. J. The site shall be free from irregular surface changes and shall vary uniformly between fixed elevations. K. Finish grading shall be below the top of concrete walks and other site features affected by grade: 1. Two (2) inches in sodded areas. 2. One and a half(1-1/2) inches in seeded areas. 3. Two (2) inches at planting beds. 4. The site shall be ready for planting, inspected and approved by the Landscape Architect. 3.07 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION A. During soil preparation work, all rocks, clods and other debris, shall be removed daily and the site kept neat at all times. B. Any excess excavated subsoil or topsoil shall be removed from the site. C. After soil preparation operations are finished, all paved areas which may have become strewn with soil or other material shall be thoroughly cleaned by sweeping, and if necessary, power washing. 3.08 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE A. Review of the soil preparation is required prior to initiating any planting work; work will not be accepted otherwise. B. When soil preparation is completed, Landscape Architect will, upon written request by the Contractor, make an inspection to determine acceptability. C. Where inspected soil preparation work does not comply with requirements, replace rejected work until reinspected by the Landscape Architect and found to be acceptable. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 3291 13- 10 SOIL PREPARATION Re-Bid Construction Documents END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 3291 13- 11 SOIL PREPARATION Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 32 92 19 SEEDING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Extent of seeding work is shown on drawings and in schedules. B. Seeding or hydroseeding; mulching and fertilizer. C. Maintenance. D. Seeding work encompasses any and all areas disturbed by construction operations not indicated to be sodded. E. Finish Grade Elevations: 1. Work to establish finish grades is not specified in this section; refer to Section -Soil Preparation. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements: Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples B. Earthwork/Grading - Refer to Civil Sections C. Section 31 13 30 -Treatment of Existing Trees D. Section 32 84 32 - Landscape Irrigation Systems/Design Requirements E. Section 32 91 13 - Soil Preparation F. Section 32 92 23 - Sodding G. Section 32 93 00 - Exterior Plants H. Section 32 93 10 - Landscape Maintenance 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Weeds: Include Dandelion, Jimsonweed, Quackgrass, Horsetail, Morning Glory, King Ranch Bluestem, Rush Grass, Mustard, Lambsquarter, Chickweed, Cress, Crabgrass, Canadian Thistle, Nutgrass, Poison Oak, Blackberry, Tansy Ragwort, Bermuda Grass, Johnson Grass, Poison Ivy, Nut Sedge, Nimble Will, Bindweed, Bent Grass, Wild Garlic, Perennial Sorrel, and Brome Grass; or any species identified as invasive or introduced by USDA. 1.04 SITE CONDITIONS A. Verification of Dimensions: 1. All scaled and figured dimensions are given for estimate purposes only. 2. Before proceeding with any work, the Contractor shall carefully check and verify all dimensions and sizes, etc., and shall assume full responsibility for the correctness of all such items. B. Existing Conditions: 1. New work shall be tied to existing conditions and controls such as existing grades. 2. Finished grades shall bear proper relationship to such controls. 3. The Contractor shall adjust new work as necessary and as directed to meet existing conditions and fulfill intent of the plans. C. Underground Utilities : 1. Prior to initiating any work of this section, the Contractor shall contact the appropriate authorities in order that their personnel can locate existing underground utilities that may be encountered. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 3292 19- 1 SEEDING Re-Bid Construction Documents D. Existing Vegetation: 1. Portions of the existing vegetation shall remain as indicated on the drawings. 2. The Contractor shall take all means necessary to protect the existing vegetation. Any existing vegetation to remain that is damaged shall be replaced. 3. New work shall be tied to existing conditions and controls such as existing planting beds. 4. Bed expansions shall bear proper relationship to such controls. 5. The Contractor shall adjust new work as necessary and as directed to meet existing conditions and fulfill intent of the plans. 1.05 SITE CONDITIONS A. Verification of Dimensions: Refer to Section 32 91 13, Soil Preparation. B. Existing Conditions: Refer to Section 32 91 13, Soil Preparation. C. Obstructions: Refer to Section 32 91 13, Soil Preparation. D. Underground Utilities: Refer to Section 32 91 13, Soil Preparation. E. Existing Vegetation: Refer to Section 32 91 13, Soil Preparation. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Supervisor Qualifications: Refer to Section 32 91 13 - Soil Preparation, for qualifications of Supervisor of landscape work. 1.07 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. General: Seeding materials shall meet or exceed the Specifications of Federal, State and local laws requiring inspection for plant disease and insect control. B. Analysis and Standards: 1. Package standard products with manufacturer's certified analysis. 2. For other materials, provide analysis by recognized laboratory made in accordance with methods established by the Association of Official Agricultural Chemists, wherever applicable. C. Inspections: 1. All necessary state, federal, and other inspection certificates shall accompany the invoice for each shipment or order for seeding materials as may be required by law. 2. The Landscape Architect reserves the right to reject, at any time or place, prior to final Acceptance of the work, any or all of the seeding materials which fail to meet requirements of these specifications. 3. The Landscape Architect reserves the right to inspect seeded areas from time of installation to Final Acceptance. 4. The time of inspection shall be after the grass has gone unmowed for a minimum of two weeks. 5. Any evidence of non-specified grasses or weeds will be cause for rejection and replacement of the unacceptable seeded areas. 1.08 PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. The Landscape Architect is to provide one inspection trip to establish the Substantial Completion of a Project and a second inspection trip to establish the Final Acceptance of the project. 1. Any additional cost to the Landscape Architect required because the Contractor has failed to adequately complete or correct the Contract work before requesting an inspection shall be invoiced to the Owner and back charged to the Contractor for payment by deduction from Contractor's payment application. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 3292 19-2 SEEDING Re-Bid Construction Documents 1.09 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish at Landscape Architect's office, prior to installation, the following information/samples: 1. Supervisor Qualifications. 2. Seed: Submit seed supplier's sample with certification of grass species. Identify source location and seed tag per Texas Seed Law. 3. Commercial Fertilizer: Product Label and Supplier's brochure. 4. Commercial Starter Fertilizer: Product Label and Supplier's brochure. 5. Soil Modifiers: Product Label and Supplier's brochure. 6. Erosion Control Netting: Supplier's brochure. 7. Herbicide: Product Label and Supplier's brochure. 8. Pesticide applicator's license for individual responsible for site. 9. Erosion Control Blanket: Supplier's brochure and 12" x 12" section of material. B. Furnish at Landscape Architect's office, prior to close-out of Project, the following: 1. Maintenance Instructions: See Section - LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE for requirements. 2. Watering Schedule: See Section - LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE for requirements. a. Certification of Seed - Submit the actual certificates delivered with each unit of seed mix, plus the species-specific tag for each species in the mix. 1.10 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with regulatory agencies for fertilizer and herbicide composition, handling, and application. 1.11 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver seed mixture in sealed containers. 1. Seed in damaged packaging is not acceptable. 2. Labeling shall indicate percentage of seed mix, year of production, net weight, date of packaging, and location of packaging. B. Deliver fertilizer in waterproof bags showing weight, chemical analysis, and name of manufacturer. C. Packaged Materials: 1. Deliver packaged materials in original containers showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. 2. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery, and while stored at site. 1.12 ABBREVIATIONS A. S.Y. Square Yard B. S.F./sq.ft. Square Feet C. #(s) Pound(s) 1.13 JOB CONDITIONS A. Basic Regulations: 1. Seeding operations shall be conducted under favorable weather conditions during the seasons which are normal for such work as determined by acceptable practice in the locality. 2. Contractor is hereby notified of active utilities and caution shall be exercised to avoid interruption of services. a. Contractor is responsible for replacement of any buried utilities, irrigation lines, etc. if they are broken during seeding operation. b. It is recommended that he contact the appropriate utility to get the locations of underground utilities. The replacement costs are at the Contractor's expense. 3. When it is necessary to cross paved areas, curbing or walks, protection against damage shall be provided by the Contractor. Broken pavement shall be replaced by the Contractor at Contractor's expense. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 3292 19-3 SEEDING Re-Bid Construction Documents 4. When conditions detrimental to turf/grass growth are encountered during seeding , such as rubble fill, adverse drainage conditions, or obstructions, notify Landscape Architect before seeding. a. Such obstructions shall be removed or relocated or the work adjusted as directed by the Landscape Architect. b. If work proceeds without contacting the Landscape Architect, the Contractor shall be held liable for any and all revisions necessary. B. Planting Sequence: 1. Plant turf/grass after final grades are established. a. If planting of trees and shrubs occurs after lawn work, protect lawn areas and promptly repair damage to lawns resulting from planting operations. C. Time Period of Seeding Operation: 1. Seeding of turf/grass areas shall occur within the periods specified in Section - Lawn Materials. 2. Any additional work required, e.g. repair of erosion, weed control, temporary winter seeding, reseeding and any other work associated with the installation and germination/establishment of the turf/grass, due to not completing the turf/grass in this time period shall be fully borne by the Contractor. D. Maintenance: 1. Refer to Section 32 93 10 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE for duration of maintenance period. 1.14 WARRANTY& GUARANTEES A. Contractor shall guarantee that at the end of the project warranty period, all turf/grass areas have established vegetation, are uniform in color and quality, and are reasonably free from visible imperfections, including exotic and invasive species or bare spots. 1. Any turf/grass areas not in this condition will be replaced at no expense to the Owner. B. The Contractor shall not be held responsible for damages to turf/grass areas due to the Owner's neglect, the general building or other contractors working on the site, application of fertilizers, pesticides or other materials not applied by him, or for damage caused by theft or vandalism. C. Inspection to determine the condition of the turf/grass areas prior to final acceptance of Project will be made by the Landscape Architect upon receiving such a written request from the Contractor at a minimum of 2 months following acceptance of initial planting. 1. Correction shall be as herein specified, and repeated until turf/grass is thoroughly established at all designated locations. D. Repair: 1. When any portion of the surface becomes gullied, washed out, damaged, or the installation is destroyed, the affected portion shall be repaired to reestablish condition and grade of soil to as it was prior to injury as directed. 2. Repair work required shall be performed without cost to the Owner. 3. Repair shall be made within 10 days or as soon as weather conditions are satisfactory for planting. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 32 92 19-4 SEEDING Re-Bid Construction Documents PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SOIL ADDITIVES A. Commercial Fertilizer: 1. Complete organic fertilizer, part of the element of which is derived from organic sources. 2. Type percentages and applied at the rate specified in the soil analysis; Refer to Section - SOIL PREPARATION. 3. Deliver mixed as specified in standard size bags, showing weight, analysis, and name of manufacturer. 4. Store in a weatherproof storage place, and in such a manner that it will be kept dry and its effectiveness will not be impaired. 5. Provide the following product(s): a. Broadcast/Drill Seeding: "Premium Lawn Fertilizer" 7-2-2 manufactured by Gardenville (210) 651-6115. b. Starter Fertilizers (Hydromulch Seeding): 13-13-13 or 15-15-15 water soluble fertilizer. c. Fertilizer: "Premium Lawn Fertilizer", 7-2-2, manufactured by Gardenville, 210-651- 6115. d. Maintenance Fertilizer: 5-3-2 manufactured by Gardenville (210) 651-6115. B. Soil Modifiers: 1. Biostimulant: Turf Blend manufactured by AgPro Systems, Inc., Big Sandy, Texas (800) 946-5545; www.agprosystems.com 2. Soil Conditioner: RECLAIM manufactured by AgPro Systems, Inc., Big Sandy, Texas (800) 946-5545; www.agprosystems.com 3. Soil Penetrant: AIM manufactured by AgPro Systems, Inc., Big Sandy, Texas (800)946- 5545; www.agprosystems.com 4. Biostimulant: Agri-Gro Turf Formula, manufactured by Agri-gro Marketing, Inc., Doniphan, MO 63935; 800-881-8801; contact Shannon Smith 417-234-6873; www.agrigro.com. 5. Liquid Calcium: Agri-Gro Super-Cal, manufactured by Agri-gro Marketing, Inc., Doniphan, MO 63935; 800-881-8801; contact Shannon Smith 417-234-6873; www.agrigro.com. 6. Biostimulant: Agri-Gro Ultra, manufactured by Agri-gro Marketing, Inc., Doniphan, MO 63935; 800-881-8801; contact Shannon Smith 417-234-6873; www.agrigro.com. 2.02 LAWN MATERIALS A. Conform with "Quality Assurance" and "Source Quality Control' stated above, this section. B. Seed Mixture: 1. Provide fresh, clean, new-crop seed complying with tolerance for purity and germination established by the U.S. Department of Agriculture Rules and Regulations under the Federal Seed Act and the Texas Seed Law. a. Seed which has become wet, moldy or otherwise damaged in transition in storage will not be accepted. b. The seed shall not contain any objectionable foreign material that will hinder proper distribution. c. All seed shall have been treated with an approved fungicide by commercial or state laboratory not more than six months prior to date of planting. d. Seed rate to be pure Live Seed (PLS) at 90% minimum. 2. All seeding rates indicated are based on Pure Live Seed (PLS). Contractor is to calculate the number of pounds of seed to achieve the PLS rate specified based on the seed PLS percentage certified by the seed supplier(EXAMPLE - seeding rate 10#s PLS per 1000 s.f.; seed from supplier certified at 65% PLS; amount of seed to be applied calculated as 10#s/65% PLS = 15.38#s; 15.38#s per 1000 s.f. required to achieve 10#s PLS per 1000 s.f.). The seeds planted per area unit shall be of the type specified with the mixture, rate and planting conditions specified. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 3292 19-5 SEEDING Re-Bid Construction Documents C. Warm Season Grass (permanent turf): 1. Application period: March 30 to September 15. a. The period September 1 to March 15 is not considered suitable for seeding warm season grass. During this period the soil will be stabilized by one seeding of cool season grass. Refer to Article COOL SEASON GRASS. 2. Bermudagrass (Cynodon dactylon - 3#PLS/1000SF. D. Cool Season Grass (temporary turf cover): 1. The period September 1 to March15 is not considered suitable for seeding warm season grass. During this period the soil will be stabilized by one seeding of cool season grass. a. After March 15 the areas seeded with cool season grass are to be reseeded with the specified warm season grass after preparation. b. Cool season grass is to be closely mowed and to be allowed to burn out. c. After the cool season grass is dead, the area is to be lightly scarified and overseeded with warm season grass and reestablished prior to acceptance by the Owner. See warm season grass requirements. d. All costs for seeding shall be borne by Contractor. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Water: Furnished by the Contractor. Hose and other watering equipment to be provided by Contractor. B. Mulching Agent(Type 1 and Type 2): Provide Weyerhauser virgin wood fiber mulch, Silva- Fiber, distributed by James Lincoln Corp., Garland, Texas, (972)840-2440 or approved substitute. C. Anti-Erosion Mat: Miramat (ECRM)as manufactured by Mirafi Inc.; Charlotte, N.C. or approved substitute. D. Erosion Control Netting: "Soil Saver", a heavy, woven jute mesh with one inch openings as manufactured by Jim Walls, Co., Dallas, Texas or approved substitute. E. Herbicide: 1. Non-selective Post-Emergence Herbicide (spot treatment): Round-Up by Monsanto Corp. or approved substitute. 2. Selective Post-Emergence Herbicide: Certainty by Monsanto Corp., or approved substitute. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that prepared soil base is ready to receive the work of this Section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare subgrade in accordance with Section 32 91 13. B. Placement and finish grading of seed bed in accordance with Section 32 91 13. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Seeding Schedule: 1. The period September 1 to March 1 is not considered suitable for seeding warm season grass. a. During this period, the soil will be stabilized by one seeding of cool season grass. b. The period of March 30 to September 1, the cool season grass is to be treated as stated and the seed bed prepared according to this section. B. Site Tolerances: Final grade of soil after seeding of turf/grass areas is complete shall be one and one-half(1-1/2) inches below top of adjacent pavement of any kind. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 3292 19-6 SEEDING Re-Bid Construction Documents 3.04 FERTILIZING A. Fertilizer: 1. Apply fertilizer per the following rate: a. Application rate as recommended by the soils analysis. 2. Apply after smooth raking of topsoil and prior to roller compaction. 3. Mix thoroughly into upper 2 inches of topsoil. 4. Do not apply fertilizer at same time or with same machine as will be used to apply seed. 5. Do not fertilize native grass and wildflower areas. 3.05 SOIL MODIFIERS: A. Apply the following soil treatments and stimulants- 1. Broadcast Seeding Application: Apply by means recommended by manufacturer prior to top dressing, placement of erosion blanket and/or reinforcement mat at the following rates: 2. Hydromulch Slurry Seeding Application: Incorporate products within the slurry at the following rates: 3. Biostimulant: 4 oz./1000 s.f. 4. Soil Conditioner: 1-4 oz./1000 s.f. 5. Soil Penetrant: 1-2 oz./1000 s.f. 6. Biostimulant: 1 qt./acre. 7. Liquid Calcium: 3 -6 gal./acre. 8. Biostimulant: 32 oz./acre. 9. Biostimulant: a. Water in. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect seeded slopes against erosion with erosion netting or other methods acceptable to Landscape Architect. 3.07 HYDROMULCH SLURRY SEEDING APPLICATION A. Do not use wet seed or seed which is moldy or otherwise damaged in transit or storage. B. After turf/grass areas are graded, apply slurry evenly. C. Mix starter fertilizer, soil modifiers and mulching agent in water, using equipment specifically designed for hydromulch application. 1. Continue mixing until uniformly blended into homogenous slurry suitable for hydraulic application. D. Apply slurry uniformly to all areas to be seeded. 1. Rate of application as required to obtain specified seed sowing rate. 2. Hydromulch slurry mix type dependent on slope and conditions. 3. Hydromulch slurry mix type dependent on slope and conditions per the following: a. Type 1- Standard mix for slopes less than 4:1 to flat. b. Type 2 - Enhanced mix for slopes greater than 4:1 and Problem Areas. c. Type 3: 1) Slope condition 4:1 and steeper. 2) Conditions where sheet flow occurs over large, paved areas (areas exceeding 500 square feet). Slurry to extend 20'-0" minimum from edge of paving. E. Type 1 hydro-mulching slurry: 1. Place in single application. 2. Grass seed as specified. 3. 45#s/1000 sq.ft. mulching agent. 4. 20#s/1000 sq.ft.. water soluble fertilizer: 13-13-13 at 7.6#s/1000sf. a. Application of starter fertilizer is not applicable in seeding native grasses. 5. Soil Modifiers as specified. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 3292 19-7 SEEDING Re-Bid Construction Documents F. Type 2 hydro-mulching slurry: 1. Place in single application. 2. Grass seed as specified. 3. 50#s/1000 sq. ft. mulching agent. 4. 20#s/1000 sq. ft. water soluble fertilizer: 15-15-15 at 6.6#s/1000 sq. ft. or 13-13-13 at 7.6#s/1000 sq. ft. a. Application of starter fertilizer is not applicable in seeding native grasses. 5. 1.5#s/1000 sq. ft. glue agent. 6. Soil Modifiers as specified. G. Type 3 hydro-mulching slurry: 1. Reference product specifications of manufacturer for complete specification on application for high performance flexible growth medium. 2. Place in two applications. 3. Flexterra: a. Place flexible growth medium applications/passes to attain: 1) Total 3,000#'s per acre slopes less than 3:1. 2) Total 3,500#'s per acre slopes 3:1 and greater. b. 1st application hydro-mulching slurry to consist of: 1) Grass seed as specified; 50% of quantity required. 2) 750#s/acre mulching agent. (875#s @ slopes 3:1 and steeper) 3) 20#s/1000 sq. ft. water soluble fertilizer: 15-15-15 at 6.6#s/1000 sq. ft. or 13- 13-13 at 7.6#s/1000 sq. ft. (a) Application of starter fertilizer is not applicable in seeding native grasses. 4) Soil Modifiers as specified. 5) Mix with water per manufacturer's product specifications. 6) Apply slurry per manufacturer's product specifications. c. 2nd application hydro-mulching slurry to consist of: 1) Balance of remaining seed quantity 2) 2,250#s/acre mulching agent. (2,625#s @ slopes 3:1 and steeper) 3) Mix with water per manufacturer's product specifications. 4) Apply slurry per manufacturer's product specifications. d. Overall thickness of completed application shall be 1/8 inch minimum (3/16 inch minimum @ slopes 3:1 and steeper). 4. Earthguard: a. Hydro-mulching slurry to consist of: 1) Grass seed as specified. 2) Place fiber reinforced matrix medium applications/passes to attain: (a) Total 2000#'s minimum per acre mulching agent slopes less than 5:1. (1) 100% minimum coverage (overall thickness of completed application). (b) Total 2,500#'s minimum per acre mulching agent slopes greater than 5:1 to 4:1. (1) No exposed soil; thickness approximately 1/8" minimum (overall thickness of completed application). (c) Total 3,000#'s minimum per acre mulching agent slopes greater than 4:1. (1) No exposed soil; thickness approximately 1/4" minimum (overall thickness of completed application). 3) 20#s/1000 sq. ft. water soluble fertilizer: 15-15-15 at 6.6#s/1000 sq. ft. or 13- 13-13 at 7.6#s/1000 sq. ft. (a) Application of starter fertilizer is not applicable in seeding native grasses. 4) Soil Modifiers as specified. 5) Mix with water per manufacturer's product specifications. 6) Apply slurry per manufacturer's product specifications. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 3292 19-8 SEEDING Re-Bid Construction Documents H. Seed any areas beyond the areas indicated to be seeded or sodded which are disturbed as a result of construction operations. I. Apply water with a fine spray immediately after each area has been mulched. Saturate to 4 inches of soil. J. Maintain watering as required to germinate and establish grass. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: 1. Seeded areas will be accepted at final inspection if: a. Seeded areas are properly established. b. Turf/grass is free of bare and dead spots and without weeds; see Section - Inspection and Acceptance. c. No surface soil is visible when grass has been cut to height of 2 inches. d. Seeded areas have been mowed a minimum of twice (native grass areas are excluded from mowing). e. Do not mow native grass/wildflower areas. 3.09 MISCELLANEOUS LANDSCAPE WORK A. Watering: 1. Keep surface of soil from drying out watering lightly and frequently through complete germination. 2. When grass seedlings have 3 to 5 blades per sprout, reduce watering frequency to 2 to 3 hours per week applying approximately 1 inch per week. 3. Increase duration of water application to achieve deep soil penetration to facilitate development of deeper, healthy root systems. 4. Alternate soil moisture from good deep soakings to moderately dry in between waterings. 5. Reduce frequency of waterings after establishment of plants. 6. Coordinate supplemental waterings after 3 month established period with seasonal rainfall. 3.10 MAINTENANCE: REFER TO SECTION 32 9310 -LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE. 3.11 MAINTENANCE A. Begin maintenance immediately after seeding. Maintenance shall continue for a total period of 1. Until final acceptance of the project. 2. 30 days following final acceptance of project. 3. 60 days following final acceptance of project. 4. 90 days from the date of final acceptance of the project. B. Requirements: 1. Maintain turf/grass areas by watering, fertilizing, weeding, trimming, and other operations such as rolling, regrading and replanting as required to establish a smooth, acceptable turf, free of eroded or bare areas (no one bare area greater than 2 percent of total area). a. Mowing shall be accomplished to maintain grass at a 1) 1-3/8-to 1-1/2-inch height. 2) 4 inch height (short growth habit native grass). Allow grass to go to seed one time per year prior to mowing. 3) Mowing shall not remove more than 1/3 height of the grass at each mowing. b. Water turf/grass areas until final acceptance of project. 1) Water to provide an equivalent of 1 inch water per week for the establishment of all turf/grass areas to the satisfaction of the Architect. 2) Water to prevent grass and soil from drying out. 3) For short growth habit native grass, refer to Watering - MISCELLANEOUS LANDSCAPE WORK. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 3292 19-9 SEEDING Re-Bid Construction Documents c. Keep turf relatively free of thatch, woody plant roots, diseases, nematodes, soil-borne insects, stones larger than 2 inches in diameter and other materials detrimental to grass growth. d. Roll surface to remove minor depressions or irregularities. e. Control growth of weeds. Apply herbicides in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remedy damage resulting from improper use of herbicides. 1) Apply herbicide biweekly or as required to control weeds. 2) Use only post emergent herbicide for spot treatment in native grass and wildflower areas. (a) Immediately reseed areas which show bare areas. 3) Limit broadleaf weeds and patches of foreign grass to a maximum of 2 percent of the total area. 4) Physically remove weeds (including the root)to minimize herbicide impacts to native vegetation as soon as appear; complete prior to going to seed. 2. Fertilize all turf/grass areas within the project limits, 30 days following initial installation as per recommendation of fertilizer analysis. 3. Fertilize all lawn areas within the project limits, including any renovated lawn areas, 30 days following initial installation with lawn maintenance fertilizer at rate of 10#s/1000 square feet. 4. Native Grasses/Wildflowers: Do not require fertilization. 5. Three (3)weeks following completion of seeding, Contractor shall complete one additional application of Biostimulant as per manufacturer's recommendations. C. Maintenance Instructions: 1. Submit typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be established by the Owner for the landscape maintenance over the first year. 2. Instructions shall present maintenance procedures/activities to be implemented over a one year period on a month by month basis. D. Watering Schedule: 1. The watering schedule is to include the duration and frequency each irrigation zone will run per week. 2. This will be worked out jointly with the Landscape Irrigation Contractor and shall be programmed on to the controller after review by Landscape Architect. 3. Program shall be submitted to the Owner as part of the final acceptance process. 3.12 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION A. Protect existing vegetation, pavements, and facilities from damage due to seeding activities; restore damaged items to original condition or replace, at no extra cost to{GT#0}. B. During seeding work, all debris shall be removed daily and the site kept neat at all times. C. After seeding operations are finished, all paved areas, structures and etc. which may have become strewn with seeding materials shall be thoroughly cleaned by sweeping. D. Protect seeded areas with warning signs during maintenance period. E. Protect other landscape work and materials from damage due to seeding operations, operations by other contractors and trades and trespassers. 1. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. 2. Treat, repair or replace damaged seeding work as directed. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 3292 19- 10 SEEDING Re-Bid Construction Documents 3.13 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE A. When seeding work is completed, including maintenance, Landscape Architect will, upon written request by the Contractor, make an inspection to determine acceptability. 1. Turf/grass shall have an average number of established live plants per square foot of 20. 2. Ten representative readings will be randomly taken in each individual seeded area within the project limits. The total number of plants counted will be divided by 10 to determine the square foot average. 3. The evaluation will be made no earlier than 2 months after planting and when in the opinion of the Landscape Architect, the ground cover is near 70%. B. Final Acceptance: 1. A satisfactory stand of grass plants from the seeding operation for turf/grass areas shall be a minimum 100 grass plants per square foot. 2. Bare spots shall be a maximum 12 inches square. 3. The total bare spots shall be a maximum 2 percent of the total seeded area. C. Seeding work may be inspected for acceptance in parts agreeable to the Landscape Architect, provided work offered for inspection is complete, including maintenance. D. Where inspected seeding work does not comply with requirements, replace rejected work and continue specified maintenance until reinspected by the Landscape Architect and found to be acceptable. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 3292 19- 11 SEEDING Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 32 92 23 SODDING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Extent of sodding work is shown on drawings and in schedules. B. Finish Grade Elevations: Work to establish finish grades is not specified in this section; refer to Section -Soil Preparation. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements: Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples B. Earthwork/Grading - Refer to Civil Sections C. Section 31 13 30 -Treatment of Existing Trees D. Section 32 84 32 - Landscape Irrigation Systems/Design Requirements E. Section 32 91 13 -Soil Preparation F. Section 32 92 19 -Seeding G. Section 32 93 00 - Exterior Plants H. Section 32 93 10 - Landscape Maintenance 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Weeds: Include Dandelion, Jimsonweed, Quackgrass, Horsetail, Morning Glory, Rush Grass, Mustard, Lambsquarter, Chickweed, Cress, Crabgrass, Canadian Thistle, Nutgrass, Poison Oak, Blackberry, Tansy Ragwort, Bermuda Grass, Johnson Grass, Poison Ivy, Nut Sedge, Nimble Will, Bindweed, Bent Grass, Wild Garlic, Perennial Sorrel, and Brome Grass. 1.04 SITE CONDITIONS A. Verification of Dimensions: Refer to Section 32 91 13, Soil Preparation. B. Existing Conditions: Refer to Section 32 91 13, Soil Preparation. C. Obstructions: Refer to Section 32 91 13, Soil Preparation. D. Underground Utilities: Refer to Section 32 91 13, Soil Preparation. E. Existing Vegetation: Refer to Section 32 91 13, Soil Preparation. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Supervisor Qualifications: Refer to Section 32 91 13 - Soil Preparation, for qualifications of Supervisor of landscape work. 1.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. General: 1. Materials shall meet or exceed the Specifications of Federal, State and local laws requiring inspection for plant disease and insect control. 2. Comply with American Sod Producers Association (ASPA) classes of sod materials. B. Testing: 1. Test topsoil to provide data regarding type of fertilizer required and for rates of application of fertilizer in turf/grass areas; refer to Section- Soil Preparation. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 32 92 23-1 SODDING Re-Bid Construction Documents C. Inspections: 1. All necessary state, federal, and other inspection certificates shall accompany the invoice for each shipment or order for sod as may be required by law. 2. All sod shall be subject to inspection and approval at the site or elsewhere. 3. The Landscape Architect reserves the right to reject, at any time or place, prior to final acceptance of the work, any or all of the sod which fail to meet requirements of these specifications. 4. The Landscape Architect reserves the right to inspect turf areas from time of installation to Final Acceptance and during the Project warranty period. a. The time of inspection shall be after the grass has gone unmowed for a minimum of two weeks. b. Any evidence of non-specified grasses or weeds will be cause for rejection and replacement of the unacceptable turf/grass areas. D. Conditions where the placement and planting of sod creates voids between strips and where the site is left at an irregular grade are not acceptable. 1. Deficient conditions shall be corrected by Contractor by means acceptable to Landscape Architect. 1.07 PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. The Landscape Architect is to provide one inspection trip to establish the Substantial Completion of a Project and a second inspection trip to establish the Final Acceptance of the project. 1. Any additional cost to the Landscape Architect required because the Contractor has failed to adequately complete or correct the Contract work before requesting an inspection shall be invoiced to the Owner and back charged to the Contractor for payment by deduction from Contractor's payment application. 1.08 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish at Landscape Architect's office, prior to installation, the following information/samples: 1. Certification: Submit a sample certification identifying the grass species and location of sod source. 2. Commercial Fertilizer: Label from bag or Supplier's brochure. 3. Soil Modifiers: Supplier's brochure. 4. Reinforcement Mat: Supplier's brochure and 12" x 12" section of material. 5. Top Dressing: 1 quart sample and Supplier's brochure. a. Campus. b. Sports field. 6. Herbicide: Label from container or Supplier's brochure. B. Furnish at Landscape Architect's office, prior to close-out of Project, the following: 1. Maintenance Instructions: See Section - LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE for requirements. 2. Watering Schedule: See Section - LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE for requirements. 3. Proof of Compliance with Specifications a. Demonstrate compliance by providing invoices to prove purchase of all products in sufficient quantity to cover the project at the rates recommended by the manufacturer or as specified. Include project name, date of purchase of product and name of contact. b. Certification of Sod: Submit the actual certificate delivered with each unit of sod. The certificate shall identify the grass species and source of sod. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 32 92 23-2 SODDING Re-Bid Construction Documents 1.09 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packaged Materials: 1. Deliver packaged materials in original containers showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. 2. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery, and while stored at site. B. Sod: 1. Time delivery so that sod will be placed within 24 hours after stripping. 2. Protect sod against drying and breaking of strips. 3. Do not harvest or transport sod when moisture content may adversely affect sod survival. 4. Protect sod from sun, wind and dehydration prior to installation. 5. Do not tear, stretch, or drop sod during handling and installation. 1.10 ABBREVIATIONS A. O.C.On Center B. S.Y.Square Yard C. S.F.Square Feet 1.11 JOB CONDITIONS A. Basic Regulations: 1. Sodding operations shall be conducted under favorable weather conditions during the seasons which are normal for such work as determined by acceptable practice in the locality. 2. Contractor is hereby notified of active utilities and caution shall be exercised to avoid interruption of services. 3. The Contractor is responsible for replacement of any buried utilities, irrigation lines, etc., if they are broken during the sodding operations. a. It is recommended that he contact the appropriate utility to get the locations of underground utilities. b. The replacement costs are at the Contractor's expense. 4. When it is necessary to cross paved areas, curbing or walks, protection against damage shall be provided by the Contractor. 5. When conditions detrimental to sod growth are encountered during soil preparation or planting, such as rubble fill, adverse drainage conditions, or obstructions, notify Landscape Architect before planting. a. Such obstructions shall be removed or relocated or the work adjusted as directed by the Landscape Architect. b. If work proceeds without contacting the Landscape Architect, the Contractor shall be held liable for any and all revisions necessary. 1.12 WARRANTY& GUARANTEES A. Contractor shall guarantee that at the end of 1-year following Final Acceptance, all turf/grass areas have established grass, are uniform in color and quality, and are reasonably free from visible imperfections. 1. Any turf/grass areas not in this condition will be replaced at no expense to the Owner. B. Inspection to determine the condition of the turf/grass areas will be made by the Landscape Architect upon receiving such a request from the Contractor at a minimum of 2 months following initial planting. 1. Correction shall be as herein specified, and repeated until turf/grass is thoroughly established at all designated locations. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 32 92 23-3 SODDING Re-Bid Construction Documents C. Repair: 1. When any portion of the surface becomes gullied or otherwise damaged or treatment is destroyed, the affected portion shall be repaired to reestablish condition and grade of soil to as it was prior to injury as directed. 2. Repair work required shall be performed without cost to the Owner. 3. Repair shall be made within 10 days or as soon as weather conditions are satisfactory for planting. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SOIL ADDITIVES A. Commercial Fertilizer: 1. The substitution shall be authorized by the Landscape Architect by change order. 2. Complete organic fertilizer, part of the element of which is derived from organic sources. 3. Store in a weather proof storage place and in such a manner that it will be kept dry and its effectiveness will not be impaired. 4. Provide the following product(s): a. Fertilizer of the type, percentages and applied at the rate specified in the soil analysis. b. Starter Fertilizer: "Veggiescape" 5-3-2 Soil Food manufactured by Gardenville, San Antonio, Texas, (210)651-6115. c. Maintenance Fertilizer: "Veggiescape" 6-2-2 Soil Food manufactured by Gardenville, San Antonio, Texas, (210)651-6115. B. Soil Modifiers: 1. Biostimulant: Agri-Gro Ultra, manufactured by Agri-gro Marketing, Inc., Doniphan, MO 63935; 800-881-8801; contact Shannon Smith 417-234-6873; www.agrigro.com. 2. Biostimulant: Agri-Gro Turf Formula, manufactured by Agri-gro Marketing, Inc., Doniphan, MO 63935; 800-881-8801; contact Shannon Smith 417-234-6873; www.agrigro.com. 3. Liquid Calcium: Agri-Gro Super-Cal, manufactured by Agri-gro Marketing, Inc., Doniphan, MO 63935; 800-881-8801; contact Shannon Smith 417-234-6873; www.agrigro.com. 4. Biostimulant: Turf Blend manufactured by AgPro Systems, Inc., Big Sandy, Texas (800) 946-5545; www.agprosystems.com 5. Soil Conditioner: RECLAIM manufactured by AgPro Systems, Inc., Big Sandy, Texas (800) 946-5545; www.agprosystems.com 6. Soil Penetrant: AIM manufactured by AgPro Systems, Inc., Big Sandy, Texas (800)946- 5545; www.agprosystems.com C. Top Dressing: Sand and compost soil mix, screened, manufactured by New Earth, LLC, (210) 661-5180, Gardenville (210) 651-6115 or Urban Soils and Compost (210) 651-2000. 2.02 LAWN MATERIALS A. Sod: Provide strongly rooted sod, free of weeds and undesirable native grasses and machine cut to pad thickness of 3/4" (plus or minus 1/4"), excluding top growth and thatch. Provide only sod capable of vigorous growth and development when planted (viable, not dormant). Provide the following type of sod- 1. As indicated on drawings. B. Substitutions: Permitted only upon submission of proof at least sixty (60)days prior to planting that the sod specified is not reasonably obtainable. 1. The substitution shall be authorized by the Landscape Architect by change order. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 32 92 23-4 SODDING Re-Bid Construction Documents 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS LANDSCAPE MATERIALS A. Water: Furnished by the Contractor. Hose and other watering equipment to be provided by Contractor. B. Anti-Erosion Mat: Miramat (ECRM)as manufactured by Mirafi Inc.; Charlotte, N.C. or approved substitute. C. Reinforcing Mat: P300 permanent erosion control turf reinforcement mat manufactured by North American Green, 1-800-772-2040, or approved substitute. D. Post- emergence Herbicide: 1. Non-selective: Round-Up by Monsanto Corp., or approved substitute. 2. Selective: Certainty by Monsanto Corp., or approved substitute. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SODDING NEW LAWNS A. Installation: 1. Site Tolerances - a. Soil shall be prepared prior to sodding. b. Finish grade of soil prior to placement of sod shall be two (2) inches below top of adjacent pavement of any kind. c. Final grade after sodding is complete shall be one and one-half(1-1/2) inches below top of adjacent pavement of any kind (to top of sod mat). d. Refer to Section 32 9113- SOIL PREPARATION for additional requirements. 2. Prior to placement of sod apply commercial fertilizer at the rate recommended in the analysis of the topsoil; refer to Section 32 9113 - SOIL PREPARATION B. Laying of Sod: 1. Lay sod during growing season. Sodding during dry summer period, at freezing temperatures, or over frozen soil is not acceptable. 2. Lay sod within 24 hours from time of stripping. Do not plant dormant sod if ground is frozen. 3. Lay sod in rows with joints staggered. Butt sections closely without overlapping or leaving gaps between sections. Cut out irregular or thin sections with a sharp knife. 4. Lay sod flush with adjoining existing turf surfaces. 5. Anchor sod on slopes 3:1 and steeper with wood pegs or approved substitute to prevent slippage. C. After Sodding Is Complete: 1. Water sod thoroughly with a fine spray immediately after planting to obtain at least two (2) inches penetration into the soil below the sod. Firmly press sod into contact with sod bed by rolling with roller weighing 100-150 pounds per lineal foot of roller. 2. Water sodded areas immediately after sod laying to obtain moisture penetration through sod into top 4 inches of topsoil. 3. Roll horizontal surface areas in two directions perpendicular to each other. 4. Repair and re-roll areas with depressions, lumps, or other irregularities. a. Heavy rolling to correct irregularities in grade will not be permitted. b. Provide 1 top dress application at rate of 1.5 cubic yards per 1000 square feet. 1) Complete process after turf has been mowed at least two times. 2) Spread top dressing material evenly over turf. 3) Drag top dressing with a leveling bar attachment to level uneven surfaces. 5. Utilize top dressing where required and approved to fill in gaps between sod pads. D. Coordinate planting with incorporation of SOIL MODIFIERS. E. Weed Control: Utilize selective herbicide to eradicate weeds. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 32 92 23-5 SODDING Re-Bid Construction Documents 3.02 SPOT SODDING NEW LAWNS A. Soil shall be prepared prior to spot sodding: 1. Site Tolerances - a. Finish grade of soil prior to placement of sod shall be two (2) inches below top of adjacent pavement of any kind. b. Final grade after spot sodding is complete shall be one and one-half(1-1/2) inches below top of adjacent pavement of any kind (to top of sod mat). c. Soil shall be prepared prior to sodding; refer to Section 032 9113- SOIL PREPARATION. 3.03 MAINTENANCE A. Begin maintenance immediately after sodding. Maintenance shall continue until final acceptance of the project. Refer to Section- LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE. 3.04 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION A. During sodding work, all rope, wire, burlap, empty containers, rocks, clods and other debris, shall be removed daily and the site kept neat at all times. B. Any excess excavated subsoil or topsoil shall be removed from the site. C. After sodding operations are finished, all paved areas which may have become strewn with soil or other material shall be thoroughly cleaned by sweeping, and if necessary, power washing. D. Protect landscape work and materials from damage due to sodding operations, operations by other contractors and trades and trespassers. 1. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. 2. Treat, repair or replace damaged landscape work as directed. 3.05 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE A. When sodding work is completed, including maintenance, Landscape Architect will, upon written request by the Contractor, make an inspection to determine acceptability. 1. Sod shall be well rooted and contain new growth to demonstrate establishment. B. Where inspected landscape work does not comply with requirements, replace rejected work and continue specified maintenance until reinspected by the Landscape Architect and found to be acceptable. 1. Remove rejected turf and materials promptly from the project site. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 32 92 23-6 SODDING Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 32 93 00 EXTERIOR PLANTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Extent of landscape work is shown on drawings and in schedules. B. Subgrade Elevations: 1. Excavation, filling and grading required to establish elevations shown on drawings are not specified in this section; refer to Earthwork sections. 2. Subcontractors shall coordinate with General Contractor on responsibility for earthwork. C. Finish Grade Elevations: Work to establish finish grades is not specified in this section; refer to Section -Soil Preparation. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements B. Section 31 13 30 -Treatment of Existing Trees C. Section 32 84 32 - Landscape Irrigation Systems/Design Requirements D. Section 32 91 13 -Soil Preparation E. Section 32 92 19 -Seeding F. Section 32 92 23 -Sodding G. Section 32 93 10 - Landscape Maintenance 1.03 SITE CONDITIONS A. Verification of Dimensions: 1. All scaled and figured dimensions are given for estimate purposes only. 2. Before proceeding with any work, the Contractor shall carefully check and verify all dimensions and sizes, etc., and shall assume full responsibility for the correctness of all such items. B. Existing Conditions: 1. New work shall be tied to existing conditions and controls such as existing grades. Finished grades shall bear proper relationship to such controls. 2. The Contractor shall adjust new work as necessary and as directed to meet existing conditions and fulfill intent of the plans. C. Obstructions: 1. If any unknown utilities and obstacles are encountered during the construction period, stop work and immediately contact the Landscape Architect before proceeding. 2. Such obstructions shall be removed or relocated or the work adjusted as directed by the Landscape Architect. 3. If work proceeds without contacting the Landscape Architect, the Contractor shall be held liable for any and all damages. D. Underground Utilities : 1. Prior to initiating any work of this section, the Contractor shall contact the appropriate authorities in order that their personnel can locate existing underground utilities that may be encountered. E. Existing Vegetation: 1. Portions of the existing vegetation shall remain as indicated on the drawings. 2. The Contractor shall take all means necessary to protect the existing vegetation. 3. Any existing vegetation to remain that is damaged shall be replaced. 4. The Contractor shall adjust new work as necessary and as directed to meet existing conditions and fulfill intent of the plans. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 32 93 00- 1 EXTERIOR PLANTS Re-Bid Construction Documents 1.04 SITE CONDITIONS A. Verification of Dimensions: Refer to Section 32 91 13, Soil Preparation. B. Existing Conditions: Refer to Section 32 91 13, Soil Preparation. C. Obstructions: Refer to Section 32 91 13, Soil Preparation. D. Underground Utilities: Refer to Section 32 91 13, Soil Preparation. E. Existing Vegetation: Refer to Section 32 91 13, Soil Preparation. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Supervisor Qualifications: Refer to Section 32 91 13 - Soil Preparation, for qualifications of Supervisor of landscape work. 1.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. General: Planting materials shall meet or exceed the Specifications of Federal, State and local laws requiring inspection for plant disease and insect control. B. Plant material shall conform to the following documents which are to be considered part of these Specifications: 1. "Standardized Plant Names,"American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature, latest edition. a. Names of varieties not listed conform generally with names accepted by the nursery trade. b. Provide stock true to botanical name and legibly tagged. 2. "American Standard for Nursery Stock,"American Association of Nurserymen, Inc., latest edition. A plant shall be dimensioned as it stands in its natural position. 3. "Grades and Standards for Nursery Stock,"Texas Association of Nurserymen. 4. All plants shall be nursery grown under climatic conditions similar to those in the locality of the project. C. Stock furnished shall be at least the minimum size indicated. 1. Larger stock is acceptable, at no additional cost and providing that the larger plants will not be cut back to size indicated. 2. Provide plants indicated by two measurements so that only a maximum of 25% are of the minimum size indicated and 75% are of the maximum size indicated. 3. Stock indicated as only"container"without container size indicated, provide containerized stock sized as needed to attain or exceed the measurements specified. 4. Provide sufficient photographs or video of the proposed plants for approval. D. Provide "specimen" plants with a special height, shape or character of growth. 1. Tag specimen trees or shrubs at the source of supply. 2. At Landscape Architect's discretion, Landscape Architect may inspect specimen selections at the source of supply for suitability and adaptability to selected location. 3. When specimen plants cannot be purchased locally or when requested by Landscape Architect, provide sufficient photographs or video of the proposed specimen plants for approval. 4. Contractor shall provide written notice of request for inspection to the Landscape Architect a minimum of two (2) weeks prior to date of inspection. 5. Such approval shall not impair the right of inspection and rejection upon delivery at the site or during the progress of the work. E. Plants may be inspected and approved at the place of growth for compliance with specification requirements for quality, size and variety. 1. Such approval shall not impair the right of inspection and rejection upon delivery at the site or during the progress of the work. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 32 93 00-2 EXTERIOR PLANTS Re-Bid Construction Documents F. Analysis and Standards: 1. Package standard products with manufacturer's certified analysis. 2. For other materials, provide analysis by recognized laboratory made in accordance with methods established by the Association of Official Agricultural Chemists, wherever applicable. G. Label at least one plant of each variety in each delivery with a securely attached waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name. 1. Same species with different flower color varieties shall have a label on each plant. 2. Tags shall be removed at Substantial Completion. H. Inspections: 1. All necessary state, federal, and other inspection certificates shall accompany the invoice for each shipment or order for plant materials as may be required by law. 2. All plants shall be subject to inspection and approval at the site or elsewhere. 3. The Landscape Architect reserves the right to reject, at any time or place, prior to final acceptance of the work, any or all of the plants which fail to meet requirements of these specifications. I. Trees, shrubs, perennials and annuals that are undersized or in poor and unviable condition, if planted, shall not be accepted and must be replaced to accomplish the landscape contract. J. Conditions where the site is left at an irregular grade are not acceptable. 1.07 EXPLANATION OF DRAWINGS A. Due to the scale of drawings, it is not possible to indicate all conditions affecting work. 1. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finished conditions affecting all of his work and plan his work accordingly, furnishing such elements as may be required to meet such conditions. 2. Drawings are generally diagrammatic and indicative of the work to be installed. 3. The work shall be installed in such a manner as to avoid conflicts between irrigation systems, existing planting and trees and other construction on site. B. All work called for on the drawings by notes or details shall be furnished and installed whether or not specifically mentioned in the specifications. C. The Contractor shall not willfully install the planting as shown on the drawings when it is obvious in the field that obstructions, grade differences or discrepancies in area dimensions exist that might not have been considered in design. 1. Such obstructions or differences should be brought to the attention of the Owner's authorized representative and Landscape Architect. 2. In the event this notification is not performed, the contractor shall assume full responsibility for any revisions necessary. 3. Contractor shall be responsible for all costs involved with work. 1.08 PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. The Landscape Architect is to provide one inspection trip to establish the Substantial Completion of a Project and a second inspection trip to establish the Final Acceptance of the project. 1. Any additional cost to the Landscape Architect required because the Contractor has failed to adequately complete or correct the Contract work before requesting an inspection shall be invoiced to the Owner and back charged to the Contractor for payment by deduction from Contractor's payment application. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 32 93 00-3 EXTERIOR PLANTS Re-Bid Construction Documents 1.09 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish at Landscape Architect's office, prior to installation, the following information/samples: 1. Supervisor Qualifications. 2. Soil Conditioner: Label from bag (Supplier's statement of analysis if bulk). 3. Soil Amendment: Label from bag (Supplier's statement of analysis if bulk). 4. Mulch: Label from bag (Supplier's statement of analysis if bulk). 5. Fertilizer: Label from bag or Supplier's brochure. 6. Mycchorizal Fungi Treatment: Label from container or Supplier's brochure. 7. Herbicide: Label from container or Supplier's brochure. 8. Erosion Control Netting: Supplier's brochure. 9. Edging: Supplier's brochure. 10. Aggregates: 1-pound sample. 11. Decomposed Granite: One (1) quart container. 12. Soil Separation Fabric: Suppliers brochure. 13. Tree Guard: Supplier's brochure. 14. Protective Cap: Supplier's brochure. 15. Plant Schedule: Indicate quantities and species of plant material, with complete source information (nursery name, address, phone number). a. Photos of specimen plant materials. b. Photos of plant materials. B. Furnish at Landscape Architect's office, prior to close-out of Project, the following: 1. Record Drawings. 1.10 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packaged Materials: 1. Deliver packaged materials in original containers showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. 2. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery, and while stored at site. B. Trees and Shrubs: 1. Do not prune prior to delivery unless otherwise approved by Landscape Architect. 2. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such manner as to damage bark, break branches or destroy natural shape. 3. Provide protective covering during delivery to prevent wind burn. 4. Spray deciduous plants in foliage with approved anti-desiccant immediately after digging to prevent dehydration. C. Deliver plant materials after preparations for planting have been completed and plant immediately. 1. Protect all plants from drying out. 2. Use all means necessary to protect plant materials before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. D. Do not remove container grown stock from containers until planting time. Do not drop stock during delivery; broken and loose balls shall not be accepted. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 32 93 00-4 EXTERIOR PLANTS Re-Bid Construction Documents 1.11 ABBREVIATIONS A. B&B - Balled & Burlapped B. GAL. - Gallon Container Size as Indicated C. M.T. - Multi-Trunk D. O.C. - On Center E. S.Y. - Square Yard F. S.F. - Square Feet G. CAL. - Caliper H. L.F. - Linear Feet I. T.F. - Tree-form J. HT. - Height K. SPR. - Spread 1.12 JOB CONDITIONS A. Basic Regulations: 1. Planting operations shall be conducted under favorable weather conditions during the seasons which are normal for such work as determined by acceptable practice in the locality. 2. Contractor is hereby notified of active utilities and caution shall be exercised to avoid interruption of services. 3. The Contractor is responsible for replacement of any buried utilities, irrigation lines, etc., if they are broken during the planting operations. 4. It is recommended that he contact the appropriate utility to get the locations of underground utilities. The replacement costs are at the Contractor's expense. 5. When it is necessary to cross paved areas, curbing or walks, protection against damage shall be provided by the Contractor. 6. When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered during soil preparation or planting, such as rubble fill, adverse drainage conditions, or obstructions, notify Landscape Architect before planting. a. Such obstructions shall be removed or relocated or the work adjusted as directed by the Landscape Architect. b. If work proceeds without contacting the Landscape Architect, the Contractor shall be held liable for any and all revisions necessary. B. Work Sequence: 1. Plant trees and shrubs after final grades are established and prior to planting of turf, unless otherwise acceptable to Landscape Architect. 2. If planting of trees and shrubs occurs after turf work, protect turf areas and promptly repair damage to turf resulting from planting operations. 1.13 WARRANTY& GUARANTEES A. TREE, SHRUB AND GROUNDCOVER: 1. Warranty trees and shrubs and groundcovers for a period of one (1)year following the date of final acceptance to be alive and in satisfactory growth at the end of the warranty period. a. Plants damaged or killed as a result of hail, winds over 75 miles per hour, lightning, fire, winter kill caused by extreme cold and severe winter conditions not typical of the planting area, theft, vandalism, occupancy of the building, or Owner neglect of proper maintenance are not covered by the warranty. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 32 93 00-5 EXTERIOR PLANTS Re-Bid Construction Documents 2. Replacement: a. By the end of the guarantee period, any plant that is dead or 50 percent or more of the main branch structure dead, or not in satisfactory growth as determined by the Owner or the Landscape Architect, shall be removed from the site and shall be replaced. b. All replacements shall be plants of the same kind and size as specified in the plant list and shall be furnished and planted as originally specified. c. Cost of such replacements shall be borne by the Contractor. d. Replacement plants shall be guaranteed for one (1) year or as noted in the warranty. e. Replacement shall be made within 10 days after notification, or as soon as weather conditions are satisfactory for planting. B. TREE STAKING: 1. Within 10 days of the close of the Warranty Period, remove and dispose of all tree staking assemblies and properly dispose of off-site unless directed otherwise by the Owner. 2. Any damage to the plant material or landscape caused by the staking removal shall be repaired by the Contractor meeting the approval of the Owner. All associated costs shall be borne by the Contractor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SOIL ADDITIVES A. Soil Conditioner: 1. Bacterial based compost: Composted for a period of eight(8)weeks or longer, organic, derived from animal manure, wood shavings, hay, seed hulls, stable bedding, or other organic residue, without dust, objectionable odors, viable weed seed; aerobic and friable. a. A maximum of 10% cedar flakes/shavings is allowed in conditioner. b. Approved manufacturers: 1) New Earth, San Antonio, Texas; (210) 661-5180. 2) Gardenville, San Antonio, Texas, (210) 651-6115. B. Soil Amendment (turf/grass): Lawn Dressing (sand and compost), screened, manufactured by Gardenville, San Antonio, Texas, (210) 651-6115, or approved substitute. C. Planting Bed Soil Mix: Composted four-way mix(topsoil, sand, compost and cedar), screened, manufactured by Gardenville, San Antonio, Texas, (210) 651-6115, or approved substitute. D. Fertilizer for Trees: 1. Davey Arbor Green, 30-10-7 for liquid suspended application, distributed by The Davey Company in San Antonio, Texas (210) 698-0515 or approved substitute. 2. Healthy Start 12-8-8 Macro Tabs; www.planthealthcare.com, Site One Landscape Supply, LLC, (210) 656-8100 or approved substitute. E. Fertilizer for Shrubs and Groundcovers: 1. Agriform 10 and 21 gram tablets manufactured by Sierra Chemical Co. Composition by weight 20-10-5 tablet form, dry and unbroken or approved substitute. F. Herbicides: 1. Pre-Emergence Weed Control (for use after cultivation): XL-2G by Dow Elanco or approved substitute. 2. Post-Emergence Weed Control: Round-Up by Monsanto Corp., or approved substitute. G. Root Stimulator: Up Start by Ortho, or approved substitute. H. Mycchorizal Fungi Treatment: 1. Mycchorizal Fungi available from Gardenville, San Antonio, Texas, (210)651-6115, or approved substitute. 2. Mycor Tree Saver; www.planthealthcare.com, Site One Landscape Supply, LLC, (210) 656-8100, or approved substitute. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 32 93 00-6 EXTERIOR PLANTS Re-Bid Construction Documents 2.02 PLANT MATERIALS A. Plant Schedule: 1. The quantities as shown in the Plant Schedule are solely for the convenience of the landscape contractor. 2. Provides a summary indicating plant material, common and botanical name and size specifications indicated on the drawings. 3. The contractor is to verify the quantities as shown in the plant schedule with those quantities as shown on the planting plan. 4. In the event that quantity discrepancies or material omissions occur in the plant materials list, the Contractor is responsible for planting those quantities as required to complete the design as intended on the plans. B. Plant Quantities: 1. This project does not employ a unit price bid on contract. 2. The quantities of plants calculated and shown on the plans and schedule defines only the general magnitude of plants required. 3. The Contractor shall furnish the number of plants at the specified spacing required to accomplish the planting. C. Quality: 1. Provide plant materials of size, genus, species and variety shown and scheduled for landscape work as per the following: a. Provide plants typical of their species or variety; with normal, densely-developed branches and vigorous, fibrous root systems. b. Provide only sound, healthy, vigorous plants free from defects, disfiguring knots, sunscald injuries, frost cracks, abrasions of the bark, plant diseases, insect eggs, borers, and all forms of infestation. c. All plants shall have a fully developed form without voids and open spaces. 2. Dig balled and burlapped plants with firm, natural balls of earth sufficient diameter and depth to encompass the fibrous and feeding root system necessary for full recovery of the plant. Provide ball sizes complying with the latest edition of the "American Standard for Nursery Stock". a. Cracked or mushroomed balls are not acceptable. b. Provide well-cured stock. 3. All plant materials and trees shall be nursery grown; field collected materials are not acceptable without prior approval of Landscape Architect. 4. All plant materials and trees shall be nursery grown; field collected materials are not acceptable. D. Bare root plants are not acceptable. E. Container Grown stock: Grown in a container for sufficient length of time for the root system to have developed to hold its soil together, firm and whole. 1. No plants shall be loose in the container. 2. Container stock shall not be pot bound. F. Height of branching should bear a relationship to the size and variety of tree specified and with the crown in good balance with the trunk. 1. Trees shall not be "poled" or the leader removed; do not"head-back"the central leader. 2. All trees specified as single trunk shall have a single dominant trunk to attain at least 2/3 of the tree's ultimate mature height. a. At conditions when only approved by the Landscape Architect, a tree with multiple leaders shall be structurally pruned by the Contractor to eliminate multiple secondary and codominant trunks. b. On the condition the structural pruning results in a malformed tree not representative of the species, the tree shall be replaced at no additional cost. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 32 93 00-7 EXTERIOR PLANTS Re-Bid Construction Documents G. Trunk shall be reasonably straight and symmetrical with crown and have a persistent main leader for single-stem trees. 1. For trees less than 4 inch caliper, caliper measurement is taken six (6) inches from top of root ball. 2. For trees 4 inch caliper and larger, caliper measurement is taken twelve (12) inches from top of root ball. 3. Provide tree species that mature at heights over 25'-0" with a single main trunk. H. For multi-stem trees: 1. All countable stems, in aggregate, shall average the size specified as calculated by adding the caliper of the largest trunk to the average of the sum of the remaining/smaller trunks. 2. To be considered a stem, there should be no division of the trunk which branches more than six (6) inches from ground level. I. For single trunk trees, a plant shall be provided that is well branched and pruned naturally according to the species. 1. The form of growth desired, which may not be in accordance with natural growth habit, shall be as indicated. J. Plants planted in rows shall be matched in form. K. Plants larger than those specified in the plant list may be used when acceptable to the Landscape Architect. 1. If the use of larger plants is acceptable, increase the spread of roots or root ball in proportion to the size of the plant. L. The height of the trees, measured from the crown of the roots to the top of the top branch, shall not be less than the minimum size designated in the plant list. M. Shrubs and small plants shall equal or exceed the requirements for spread and height indicated in the plant list. 1. The measurements for height shall be taken from the ground level (top of root ball) to the average height of the top of the plant and not the longest branch. 2. Single stemmed or thin plants will not be accepted. 3. Side branches shall be generous, well-twigged and the plant as a whole well-bushed to the ground. 4. Plants shall be in a moist, vigorous condition, free from dead wood, bruises, or other root or branch injuries. N. No pruning wounds shall be present with a diameter of more than one (1) inch and such wounds must show vigorous bark on all edges. O. Evergreen coniferous trees shall be branched to the ground. P. Matched: Plants labeled as matched on plans or plant schedule shall select stock chosen for uniform height, spread and general character; label with number to assure symmetry in planting. Q. Substitutions: 1. Permitted only upon submission of proof at least sixty(60) days prior to planting that the plant specified is not reasonably obtainable. 2. The substitution shall be authorized by the Owner or Landscape Architect by change order. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 32 93 00-8 EXTERIOR PLANTS Re-Bid Construction Documents 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS LANDSCAPE MATERIALS A. Dress Mulch: Regular, double shredded, unscreened hardwood. B. Wound Dressing: Black ename-based spray paint or asphaltic based paint or tree wound paint such as Treeheal or Ortho. C. Water: 1. Furnished by the Contractor. 2. Hose and other watering equipment to be provided by Contractor. D. Soil Separation Fabric (Geotextile): 1. Mirafi 140N as manufactured by TenCate Geosynthetics, Pendergrass, Georgia (www.mirafi.com); tel. 888.795.0808 or approved substitute. E. Metal Edging: 1. 10 gauge, 1/8" x 4" commercial steel edging fabricated in sections to receive stakes. 2. Provide tapered steel stakes 16" long. 3. Finish shall be manufacturer's standard green paint. F. Aggregates: 1. Decomposed Granite: Hard, durable particles or fragments of Texas Hill Country decayed granite gravel with fines evenly mixed throughout the aggregate. a. Provide color samples for selection. b. Size gradation 1/4" to minus. 2. Stone: Hard, durable stone, washed free of soil, sand, clay and other foreign substances. Provide the following stone, color and size range: a. As indicated on the drawings. G. Anti-Desiccant: Emulsion type, film forming agent designed to permit transpiration but retard excessive loss of moisture from plants. H. Deterrent Fencing: Game deterrent fencing shall be model 25466 Economy Barrier Fencing, UV stabilized, 4'x100' (9 lbs.) available from Forestry Suppliers, Inc., 800/647-5368 or approved substitute. I. Erosion Control Netting: "Soil Saver", a heavy, woven jute mesh with one inch openings as manufactured by Jim Walls, Co., Dallas, Texas or approved substitute. 1. Erosion Control Netting: Polyjute, open weave geotextile as distributed by A.M. Leonard, Inc., 800/543-8955. J. Tree Guard: Arbor-Guard polyethylene with U.V. inhibitors (minimum eight inch high for up to four inch caliper tree) by Deep Root Corporation, Westminster, California, 714-898-0563 or approved substitute. K. Materials for Staking Trees: 1. Stakes: a. Six (6)foot height studded steel T-posts with painted finish for rust protection. 1) Exposed portions of post to be painted with rust inhibiting paint. 2) Color to be selected by Landscape Architect from manufacturer's samples. 2. Guy Ties: a. Plastic Chain Ties: Adj-A-Tye, as manufactured by A.M. Leonard, Inc., Piqua, Ohio, or approved substitute. b. Tree Ties: ARBOR TIE by Deep Root Partners, L.P. San Francisco, CA or approved substitute. 3. Protective End Cap: Stake-Safe; 4"x 2"white plastic fence T-post safety cap manufactured by Stake-Safe, Glendale, CO 80246-1245; service@stakesafe.com. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 32 93 00-9 EXTERIOR PLANTS Re-Bid Construction Documents PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 PLANTING DETAILS A. Planting details regarding tree planting, shrub pit planting, shrub and groundcover planting, and planting bed soil preparations are included on the drawings. 3.02 PLANTING A. Layout individual tree and shrub plantings. 1. Stake tree and shrub locations. 2. The Landscape Architect reserves the right to inspect all layouts prior to the start of, during, and after planting work. 3. Make adjustments as may be requested at no additional cost to the contract. B. Layout plant material and planting bed locations before preparing beds . 1. The Landscape Architect reserves the right to adjust plant material locations prior to the start of, during, and after planting work at no additional cost to the contract. 2. Do not plant closer than '/2 the placement spacing distance of the particular plant variety indicated in the plant schedule to a building wall, pavement edge, fence or wall edge and other similar structures. C. Set plant material in the planting pit to proper grade and alignment. 1. Set plants upright, plumb, and faced to give the best appearance or relationship to each other or adjacent structure. 2. No filling will be permitted directly over root ball or around trunks or stems. 3. Do not use frozen or muddy mixtures for backfilling. 4. Form a ring of soil around the edge of each planting pit to retain water. D. After plants are in place, muddle planting soil mixture around sides of balls and fill all voids. E. Prior to backfilling with planting soil mixture, remove all burlap, ropes, and wires from the top 1/3 of balls on all balled and burlapped plant material. 3.03 PLANTING GROUNDCOVER AND SHRUBS IN BEDS A. Space groundcover plants in accordance with indicated dimensions providing the quantity of plants necessary to evenly fill planting bed area. 1. Plant layout is to be equidistantly triangular spaced. 2. Plant to within 12 inches of the trunks of trees and shrubs within planting bed and to within 6 inches of edge of bed but in no instance less than '/2 the mature diameter growth habit of the plant. B. All plant material shall be set at a level that, after settlement, they shall bear the same relationship to the finish grade that they bore to the soil from which they were dug/grown. C. When plants are set at proper elevation, planting soil shall be replaced around the ball and compacted, avoiding injury to the roots and filling all voids. 1. Absolutely no topsoil or planting soil shall be placed over top of any rootball or portion of rootball. D. Place fertilizer tablets, at rate shown in table under fertilization section, when approximately half the backfill is in place. E. Planting beds shall be raked smooth and thoroughly watered and then water allowed to soak away. F. After settlement, add planting soil as necessary to bring bed to finish grade and again thoroughly water entire plant bed. G. After planting operation and prior to mulching, pre-emergent weed control shall be applied to the entire bed area according the manufacturer's recommendations. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 32 93 00- 10 EXTERIOR PLANTS Re-Bid Construction Documents H. Prune in accordance with Standard Horticultural Practice if deemed necessary by Landscape Architect. 1. Prune shrubs to retain natural character. 2. Pruning shall be limited to the minimum necessary to remove injured twigs and branches. I. Following a minimum two (2)week waiting period after planting is completed, all beds shall be inspected by the Contractor and treated as required with an appropriate post-emergent herbicide to remove weed growth. 1. Treatment shall be continued as necessary to remove weeds. 2. No beds shall be accepted with weeds. 3.04 PREPARATION FOR SHRUB AND TREE PITS A. Excavate pits with sloped sides and with bottom of excavation slightly raised at center to provide proper drainage. B. Shrubs, Multi-Trunk Trees and Trees Under 2-1/2" Caliper: 1. Minimum depth allows rootballs (containers)to sit on 6 inches of compacted planting mixture with top of ball (container)flush with finish soil grade. 2. Minimum diameter at the bottom of the planting pit is twice the diameter of rootball or size pit to receive rootball. C. Trees 2-1/2" Caliper and Over: 1. Minimum depth allows rootballs to sit on pit bottom with top of ball 2 to 3 inches above finish soil grade. 2. Minimum diameter at the bottom of the planting pit is twice the diameter of the rootball or size pit to receive rootball; slope side wall of pit. D. Utilize excavated parent soil in the backfill mixture in the planting pit for trees; refer to BACKFILL MATERIAL (PLANTING SHRUBS AND TREES IN PITS). E. Prior to planting, fill excavations for trees and shrubs with water and allow to percolate out before planting. 1. Provide drainage holes if water does not percolate from pit within a 24 hour period after filling per the following: a. Where tree pits are dug in rock, a 4-inch diameter drainage hole will be drilled to drainage material or rock fracture and filled with gravel. b. Where tree pits are dug in clay, a 4-inch diameter drainage hole will be drilled to drain and backfill with gravel when required to insure proper drainage. 2. The drain hole must meet the test of draining the pit filled with water within a 24 hour period of time. 3. Additional drain holes shall be drilled if required to meet drainage test herein described. 4. Prior to planting, place soil separation fabric over drainage holes. 5. Cost for drainage holes to be based on an agreed upon unit price prior to commencing work. 3.05 PLANTING SHRUBS AND TREES IN PITS A. Elevation: 1. Set shrubs at a level so that, after settlement, they shall bear the same relationship to the finished grade of the surrounding soil from which they were dug or from the container they were grown in. 2. Set trees to place top of root ball 2 to 3 inches above finish grade. B. Setting Plants: 1. After placing the plant in the specified pit, planting soil shall be placed around the ball and compacted to avoid injury to the roots and to fill all voids. 2. When pits are nearly filled with soil, add water and allow to soak away. 3. Fill the pit to finished grade with planting soil allowing for mulching material. 4. Form a shallow saucer around each plant by placing a ridge of planting soil around the edge of each pit to retain water. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 32 93 00- 11 EXTERIOR PLANTS Re-Bid Construction Documents C. Backfill Material: 1. Utilize excavated parent soil in the backfill mixture of the planting pit. Mix parent soil at 80:20 ratio with soil conditioner. 2. The Backfill Material shall contain both backfill mixture as specified and Mycchorizal Fungi Treatment. 3. Mycchorizal Fungi Treatment to be used shall be submitted to the Landscape Architect not less than 2 weeks prior to the treatments intended use. 4. A copy of the printed instructions shall be furnished to the Landscape Architect before applying the Mycchorizal Fungi Treatment. 5. Mycchorizal Fungi Treatment not approved by the Landscape Architect shall not be used. D. Absolutely no topsoil or planting mixture shall be placed over top of rootball. E. Do not set trees and shrubs plumb by adjusting the ball. F. When plants are set at proper elevation, planting soil shall be replaced around the ball and compacted, avoiding injury to the roots and filling all voids. G. Place fertilizer tablets, at rate shown in table under fertilization section, when approximately half the backfill is in place. H. Planting pits shall be raked smooth and thoroughly watered and then water allowed to soak away. I. After planting operation and prior to mulching, pre-emergent weed control shall be applied to the entire pit/basin area according the manufacturer's recommendations. J. When pit planted plants are in a mass two or more rows in depth, the entire bed area shall receive pre-emergent herbicide and mulch as specified for planting beds. K. Prune, thin out and shape trees and shrubs in accordance with standard horticultural practice. 1. Prune trees to retain required height and spread; only when directed by Landscape Architect. 2. Unless otherwise directed by Landscape Architect, do not cut tree leaders, and remove only injured or dead branches, if any. 3. Prune shrubs to retain natural character. 4. Cuts on plants over 3/4-inch in diameter to be cut back to sound tissue, smoothed and shaped so as not to hold rain water and painted with an approved tree wound paint. 5. Remove and replace excessively pruned or misformed stock resulting from improper pruning. L. Maintain a minimum 3'-0" diameter saucer at base of trees within turf/grass areas clear of any grass. M. All tree and shrub pits are to receive a treatment of pre-emergent herbicide just prior to placement of mulch. N. Staking trees: 1. Stake trees immediately after planting. a. Only when required to maintain a plumb condition due to wind, weight of plant material, etc. 2. Under no circumstances is a tree to be plumbed with extreme tautness of guy ties. 3. Locate and drive stakes at equal spaced intervals outside the tree pit(s). a. Provide guy ties from each stake to encircle trunk at 40% to 50% of the tree's height. b. Provide three (3) stakes when required to keep trees plumb on slopes or in varying wind conditions. c. Flag wires for visibility with bright colored surveyor flagging tape. 4. Place protection end cap on all stakes. O. PVC Tree Guard: Provide tree guards at all trees located within turf/grass areas. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 32 93 00- 12 EXTERIOR PLANTS Re-Bid Construction Documents 3.06 FERTILIZATION OF TREES A. Accomplish fertilization of trees after soil preparation work is complete. B. When plant pit has been backfilled 50% place fertilizer tablets, equally spaced around rootball in accordance with the following schedule: 1. 1 gallon 1 tablet 2. 3 gallon 2 tablets 3. 5 gallon 3 tablets 4. 10 gallon 4 tablets 5. 15 gallon 5 tablets 6. 20-24 inch rootball 5 tablets 7. 30-36 inch rootball 6 tablets 8. 42-48 inch rootball 8 tablets 9. 54-60 inch rootball 10 tablets 10. Larger Size For each 1/2 caliper, use 2 tablets 3.07 FERTILIZATION FOR SHRUBS AND GROUND COVER A. For Shrubs and Ground Cover-Agriform: When plant pit has been backfilled 50% place fertilizer tablets, equally spaced around rootball in accordance with the following schedule: 1. 1 gallon 3 tablets 10 gram 2. 5 gallons 3 tablets 21 gram 3. 7 gallons 4 tablets 21 gram 4. 15 gallons 8 tablets 21 gram a. * Reduce number of tablets as per manufacturer's recommendation for plants less than 1 gallon. B. For Shrubs and Ground Cover- Healthy Start: When plant pit has been backfilled 50% place fertilizer tablets, equally spaced around rootball in accordance with the following schedule: 1. 1 gallon 1 tablet 2. 3 gallon 2 tablets 3. 5 gallon 3 tablets 4. 10 gallon 4 tablets 5. 15 gallon 5 tablets 6. 20-24 inch rootball 5 tablets 7. 30-36 inch rootball 6 tablets 8. 42-48 inch rootball 8 tablets 9. 54-60 inch rootball 10 tablets 10. Larger Size For each 1/2 caliper, use 2 tablets 3.08 MULCHING: A. Dress Mulching: 1. Place within two days after planting. 2. Coordinate with placement with pre-emergent herbicide. 3. Place at not less than four(4) inches depth on entire area of planting beds, and not less than four(4) inches over shrub and tree pits. 4. Place at not less than four (4) inches depth over shrub and tree pits/basins. 5. Keep mulch six(6) inches away from tree trunk. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 32 93 00- 13 EXTERIOR PLANTS Re-Bid Construction Documents 3.09 MISCELLANEOUS LANDSCAPE WORK A. Metal Edging: 1. Install metal edging where shown. 2. Anchor with steel stakes spaced not more than 3 feet o.c., and driven at least 1 inch below top elevation of edging or as directed by manufacturer. 3. Provide edged to separate bed areas and turf/grass areas. B. Deterrent Fencing: Place deterrent fencing over all planting beds; staple to grade at 6' intervals maximum. C. Erosion Control Matting: 1. Install erosion mat on slopes of greater than 3:1. 2. Install according to manufacturer's instructions for the particular situation, including method of attachment and overlapping required. D. Aggregate Mulch: 1. Place aggregate beds where shown. 2. Compact soil subgrades before placing aggregate. 3. Place soil separation fabric over compacted subgrade prior to placing aggregate. 4. Place aggregate over entire area as indicated, rake smooth using steel tine rake to grade and cross section as indicated. E. Decomposed Granite: 1. Place decomposed granite over entire area as indicated, rake smooth using steel tine rake to grade and cross section as indicated. 2. Compact soil subgrades before placing decomposed granite. 3. Place soil separation fabric over compacted subgrade prior to placing decomposed granite. 4. Place decomposed granite over entire area of the tree well or as indicated, rake smooth using steel tine rake to grade and cross section as indicated. 5. Place to avoid segregation of aggregate. 6. Compact to 80-85% maximum dry density. 3.10 MAINTENANCE A. Begin maintenance immediately after each plant is planted. Maintenance shall continue until final acceptance of the project unless indicated otherwise. Refer to Section 32 93 10 - LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE. 3.11 RECORD DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall keep up-to-date, a complete "as-built" record set of prints, corrected daily, showing any change from the original plans and indicating horizontal and vertical locations referenced to permanent surface improvements. 1. Identify field changes of dimension and detail and changes made by Change Order. 2. Upon completion of the project, provide the Landscape Architect with the "as-built" record drawings of changes to the work. a. The changes shall be recorded in a legible and workman-like manner in a reproducible format as directed by the Landscape Architect. 3.12 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION A. During landscape work, all rope, wire, burlap, empty containers, rocks, clods and other debris, shall be removed daily and the site kept neat at all times. B. Any excess excavated subsoil or topsoil shall be removed from the site. C. After planting operations are finished, all paved areas which may have become strewn with soil or other material shall be thoroughly cleaned by sweeping, and if necessary, power washing. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 32 93 00- 14 EXTERIOR PLANTS Re-Bid Construction Documents D. Protect landscape work and materials from damage due to landscape operations, operations by other contractors and trades and trespassers. 1. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. 2. Treat, repair or replace damaged landscape work as directed. 3.13 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE A. Immediately prior to request for Substantial Completion, inspect the work and replace all materials or portions of the construction that are damaged, defaced, eroded, or in any manner does not comply with requirements, replace rejected work and continue specified maintenance until reinspected by Landscape Architect and found to be acceptable. B. When Contractor considers work or designated portion of the work is substantially complete, submit: 1. Request for Substantial Completion inspection with a list of items to be completed or corrected, one of which shall not be cleaning, 2. Record Documents as required below, 3. Written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, work has been inspected and that work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents. C. Submit to Landscape Architect with written request for review Certificate of Occupancy or evidence that request for Certificate of Occupancy has been sent to the authority having jurisdiction and that Certificate of Occupancy has been denied or is being withheld through no fault of the Contractor. D. After receipt of required submittals, Landscape Architect will schedule inspection. E. Should Landscape Architect review find work that is not substantially complete, he will promptly notify Contractor in writing, listing observed deficiencies. F. Contractor shall remedy deficiencies and send a second written notice for review. G. Landscape Architect will re-review the work. H. When Landscape Architect finds work is substantially complete, he will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion in accordance with provisions of General Conditions with a revised tentative list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list). I. Complete modifications or corrections required by punch list within 14 days from date of receipt of punch list. J. If the Architect is required to make multiple trips to the site because the Contractor's claims exceed the project's state of completion: 1. the Owner will pay the Landscape Architect for each additional trip as an additional service in accordance with the requirements of the Architect/ Owner Agreement, 2. and an equal amount will be deducted from contract amount as reimbursement to the Owner. K. When landscape work is completed, including maintenance, Landscape Architect will, upon written request by the Contractor, make an inspection to determine acceptability. L. Landscape work may be inspected for acceptance in parts agreeable to the Landscape Architect, provided work offered for inspection is complete, including maintenance. M. Where inspected landscape work does not comply with requirements, replace rejected work and continue specified maintenance until reinspected by the Landscape Architect or Landscape Architect and found to be acceptable. 1. Remove rejected plants and materials promptly from the project site. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 32 93 00- 15 EXTERIOR PLANTS Re-Bid Construction Documents N. Final Review: Prior to project turnover, the Contractor will be required to conduct a final walk- thru with the Owner or their representative. 1. The walk-thru is to establish 100% completion and Final Acceptance of the landscape work according to specifications. 2. After three (3) uncompleted items from Substantial Completion punch list or installation discrepancies occur, the walk-thru will be stopped and rescheduled for a later date at the Contractor's liability. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 32 93 00- 16 EXTERIOR PLANTS Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 32 93 10 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Maintenance of the landscape to be provided. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 30 00 -Administrative Requirements: Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples B. Section 31 10 00 -Site Clearing C. Section 31 13 30 -Treatment of Existing Trees D. Section 32 84 32 - Landscape Irrigation Systems/Design Requirements E. Section 32 91 13 -Soil Preparation F. Section 32 91 19 -Seeding G. Section 32 92 23 -Sodding H. Section 32 93 00 - Exterior Plants 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The most current edition of the publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The following publications by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. 1. ANSI Z60.1 Nursery Stock. 2. ANSI Z133.1 Tree Care Operations- Pruning, Trimming, Repairing, Maintaining, and Removing Trees and Cutting Brush. 3. ANSI A300 Tree, Shrub and Other Woody Plant Maintenance- Standard Practices. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Supervisor Qualifications: Refer to Section 32 9113 - Soil Preparation, for qualifications of Supervisor of landscape work. 1.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Analysis and Standards: 1. Package standard products with manufacturer's certified analysis. 2. For other materials, provide analysis by recognized laboratory made in accordance with methods established by the Association of Official Agricultural Chemists, wherever applicable. B. Certified Analysis: 1. Certified analysis by a recognized laboratory acceptable to the Landscape Architect of topsoil shall be submitted by the Contractor, at his own expense, for the Landscape Architect's approval. 2. Topsoil shall be analyzed to determine the type of fertilizer required for turf areas and for rates of application of fertilizer. 3. The analysis shall be made by an approved laboratory or government agency of samples taken and submitted by the Contractor according to laboratory or agency instructions. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish at Landscape Architect's office, prior to installation, the following samples: 1. Mulch: Label from bag (Supplier's statement of analysis if bulk). 2. Fertilizer: Label from bag or Supplier's brochure and fertilizer analysis for sodded lawn areas. 3. Herbicide: Label from container or Supplier's brochure. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 32 93 10- 1 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE Re-Bid Construction Documents B. Furnish at Landscape Architect's office, prior to close-out of Project, the following: 1. Maintenance Instructions. 2. Watering Schedule. 3. Proof of Compliance with Specifications a. Demonstrate compliance by providing invoices to prove purchase of all products in sufficient quantity to cover the project at the rates recommended by the manufacturer or as specified. Include project name, date of purchase of product and name of contact. 1.07 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packaged Materials: 1. Deliver packaged materials in original containers showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. 2. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery, and while stored at site. 1.08 ABBREVIATIONS A. B&B Balled & Burlapped B. Gal. Gallon Container Size as Indicated C. M.T. Multi-Trunk D. O.C. On Center E. S.Y. Square Yard F. S.F. Square Feet G. Cal. Caliper H. L.F. Linear Feet I. T.F. Tree-form J. Ht. Height K. Sp. Spread 1.09 JOB CONDITIONS A. Maintenance operations shall be conducted under favorable weather conditions during the seasons which are normal for such work as determined by acceptable practice in the locality. B. Maintenance operations shall be conducted until Final Acceptance of Project(or otherwise specified). C. Maintenance operations shall be conducted for a total period of 90 days from the date of Final Acceptance of Project(or otherwise specified). PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS- REFER TO RESPECTIVE LANDSCAPE SECTIONS FOR APPLICABLE MATERIALS. 2.02 SOIL ADDITIVES A. Soil Conditioner: 1. Bacteria Based compost, composted for a period of eight(8)weeks or longer, organic, derived from animal manure, wood shavings, hay, seed hulls, stable bedding, or other organic residue, without dust, objectionable odors, viable weed seed; aerobic and friable. a. A maximum of 10% cedar flakes/shavings is allowed in conditioner. b. Approved Manufacturers 1) New Earth Soils and Compost, San Antonio, Texas, (210) 661-5180. 2) Stone &Soil Depot, San Antonio, Texas, (210) 688-9435. 3) Garden-Ville, San Antonio, Texas, (210) 651-6115. 4) Quality Organic Products, San Antonio, Texas, (210) 651-0200. 5) Urban Soils & Compost, San Antonio, Texas, (210)240-6249416-7204. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 32 93 10-2 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE Re-Bid Construction Documents B. Fertilizers: 1. Commercial Lawn Fertilizer: a. Complete organic fertilizer, part of the element of which is derived from organic sources. b. Type percentages and applied at the rate specified in the soil analysis. 2. Maintenance Fertilizer: "Veggiescape" 6-2-2 Soil Food manufactured by Gardenville, San Antonio, Texas, (210)651-6115. 3. Fertilizer for Trees: a. Davey Arbor Green, 30-10-7 for liquid suspended application, distributed by The Davey Company in San Antonio, Texas (210)698-0515 or approved substitute. 4. Fertilizer for Shrubs and Groundcovers: a. Agriform 10 and 21 gram tablets manufactured by Sierra Chemical Co. Composition by weight 20-10-5 tablet form, dry and unbroken or approved substitute. b. Healthy Start 12-8-8 Macro Tabs (21 gram tablet); www.planthealthcare.com, Site One Landscape Supply, LLC, (210) 656-8100 or approved substitute. C. Soil Modifiers: 1. Biostimulant: Turf Blend manufactured by AgPro Systems, Inc., Big Sandy, Texas (800) 946-5545; www.agprosystems.com 2. Soil Conditioner: RECLAIM manufactured by AgPro Systems, Inc., Big Sandy, Texas (800) 946-5545; www.agprosystems.com 3. Soil Penetrant: AIM manufactured by AgPro Systems, Inc., Big Sandy, Texas (800)946- 5545; www.agprosystems.com 4. Biostimulant: Agri-Gro Turf Formula, manufactured by Agri-gro Marketing, Inc., Doniphan, MO 63935; 800-881-8801; contact Shannon Smith 417-234-6873; www.agrigro.com. 5. Liquid Calcium: Agri-Gro Super-Cal, manufactured by Agri-gro Marketing, Inc., Doniphan, MO 63935; 800-881-8801; contact Shannon Smith 417-234-6873; www.agrigro.com. 6. Biostimulant: Agri-Gro Ultra, manufactured by Agri-gro Marketing, Inc., Doniphan, MO 63935; 800-881-8801; contact Shannon Smith 417-234-6873; www.agrigro.com. 7. Soil Probiotic: Biota Max; Custom Biologicals, Inc, 561-998-1699. No substitution. 8. Soil Acidifier: Magno Pelletized Iron, Zinc and Sulphasoil distributed by Magnolia Seed Company, Houston or San Antonio, Texas or approved substitute. D. Pre-Emergence Weed Control : XL-2G by Dow Elanco or approved substitute. E. Post-Emergence Herbicide: Round-Up by Monsanto Corp., or approved substitute. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS LANDSCAPE MATERIALS A. Dress Mulch: 1. Regular, double-shredded, unscreened hardwood or approved substitute. B. Wound Dressing: Cabot Tree Paint or approved substitute. C. Water: Furnished by the Contractor. Hose and other watering equipment to be provided by Contractor. D. Anti-Desiccant: Emulsion type, film forming agent designed to permit transpiration but retard excessive loss of moisture from plants. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE -GENERAL A. Obtain and follow the maintenance instructions provided by the installer of new plant materials. B. Watering, Soil Erosion, and Sedimentation Control: Comply with Federal, state, local, and other regulations in force; prevent over-watering, run-off, erosion, puddling, and ponding. 1. Site grading and planting have been designed to resist erosion once fully grown, with temporary measures in place during establishment period. 2. Repair temporary erosion control mechanisms provided by others. 3. Repair eroded areas and replant. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 32 93 10-3 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE Re-Bid Construction Documents 4. Repair eroded areas and replant, when caused by inadequate maintenance. 5. Prevent sediment from entering storm drains. C. Drought Restrictions: Pending the requirements of the applicable water purveyor serving the area the project is located in, drought restrictions may be in place to proactively manage the region's water resource. At a minimum, this will entail: 1. It is the Contractor's responsibility to be aware of and comply with any watering rules instituted by the water purveyor. 2. Coordinate with the construction schedule to submit a variance application for approval prior to of the time the watering period is to commence. 3. Complete a water management plan for establishment of the landscape to comply with water regulations in place. 4. Submit the watering management plan and watering schedule for Owner and Landscape Architect review. 5. Contractor is responsible for any violations and penalties that may be assessed by the water purveyor. 6. Pending conditions the variance award is revoked by the water purveyor or the allotted time frame expired, it is the Contractor's responsibility to provide the means to water to provide for the establishment and final acceptance of the work in compliance with the requirements of the water purveyor. D. General Cleanup: Remove debris from all landscape areas at least once a week and from turf areas before each mowing. 1. Debris consists of trash, rubbish, dropped leaves, downed branches and limbs of all sizes, dead vegetation, rocks, and other material not belonging in landscaped areas. a. Includes clean-up of entire site including selectively cleared and native/natural areas. 2. Remove debris from site and dispose of properly. E. Fertilizing: Apply fertilizer as indicated. F. Fertilizing: Apply fertilizer only when necessary. G. Earth Mound Watering Basins: Maintain in good condition and as required to permit efficient application of water without waste; reapply mulch if soil surface shows maintaining depth required. H. Drainage Channels: Remove obstructions in gutters, catch basins, storm drain inlets, yard drains, swales, ditches, and overflows. 1. Remove grates from catch basins to clean. 2. Prevent encroachment of other vegetation on turfed surface drainage channels. I. Health Maintenance: Inspect all plants regularly for health: 1. Eradicate diseases and damaging pests, regardless of severity or speed of effect. 2. Treat accidental injuries and abrasions. 3. Inspect and treat all fire ant mounds. 4. If a plant is unhealthy but not yet dead, according to specified definitions, determine reason(s)and take remedial action immediately. 5. Remove dead plants immediately upon determining that they are dead. J. Pesticide and Herbicide Application: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and applicable regulations. 1. Obtain Client's approval prior to each application. 2. Obtain Landscape Architect's approval prior to each application. 3. Apply in manner to prevent injury to personnel and damage to property due to either direct spray or drifting, both on and off Client's property. 4. Use backflow preventers on hose bibbs used for mixing water; prevent spills. 5. Inspect equipment daily before application; repair leaks, clogs, wear, and damage. 6. Do not dispose of excess mixed material, unmixed material, containers, residue, rinse water, or contaminated articles on site; dispose of off site in legal manner. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 32 93 10-4 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE Re-Bid Construction Documents 7. Rinse water may be used as mix water for next batch of same formulation. 8. Contractor is responsible for all recordkeeping, submissions, and reports required by laws and regulations. K. Urban Deer: In the event a local urban deer population is present or moves into the site, Contractor shall 1. Be solely responsible for protecting all newly-installed plants through the maintenance period to final acceptance of the project. 2. Apply"Liquid Fence" (or approved substitute)and /or polypropylene (or plastic) mesh netting to all plants as needed to discourage browsing by deer. 3. Replace any newly-installed plants eaten or browsed by deer prior to the expiration of the maintenance period at no cost to the Owner. 3.02 MAINTENANCE A. Maintain trees, shrubs and other plants by pruning removal of dead wood, cultivating, watering, weeding and mulching as required for normal, healthy growth. 1. Restore planting saucers. 2. Dress Mulching: a. Maintain not less than four(4) inches of dress mulch shall be maintained on entire area of planting beds, and not less than four(4) inches over shrub and tree pits. b. Keep mulch six (6) inches away from tree trunk. 3. Tighten and repair stake and guy supports and reset trees and shrubs to proper grades or vertical position as required. 4. Treat as required to keep plant materials free of insects and disease. 5. Exercise care to avoid girdling trees; provide protective collars. 6. Pruning: Refer to Section 31 13 30 -Treatment of Existing Trees. 7. Watering Schedule: a. Through 8 week establishment period - Fill 15 gallon watering system once every four days. b. First(1)year - Fill 15 gallon watering system once a week per tree. c. Second (2) year- Fill 15 gallon watering system twice a month per tree. d. Third (3)year- Fill 15 gallon watering system once a month per tree. e. Contractor to deviate from the watering schedule as necessary to maintain the health of the tree. Contractor to take local weather into consideration. B. Maintain turf/grass areas by watering, fertilizing, weeding, trimming, and other operations such as rolling, regrading and replanting as required to establish a smooth, acceptable turf, free of eroded or bare areas (total bare area no greater than 2 percent of total area). 1. Mowing shall be accomplished to maintain grass at a 1-3/8-to 1'Y--inch height. 2. Mowing shall not remove more than 1/3 height of the grass at each mowing. 3. Water turf/grass areas until Final Acceptance of project. 4. Water to provide an equivalent of 1 inch water per week for the establishment of all turf/grass areas to the satisfaction of the Landscape Architect. 5. Keep turf free of thatch, woody plant roots, diseases, nematodes, soil-borne insects, stones 1 inch and larger in diameter, and other materials detrimental to grass growth. 6. Keep turf relatively free of thatch, woody plant roots, diseases, nematodes, soil-borne insects, stones 1 inch and larger in diameter, and other materials detrimental to grass growth. 7. Eliminate all broadleaf weeds, sedges and patches of foreign grass. 8. Limit broadleaf weeds, sedges and patches of foreign grass to a maximum of 2 percent of the total area. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 32 93 10-5 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE Re-Bid Construction Documents C. Maintain turf/grass areas by watering, fertilizing, weeding, trimming, and other operations such as rolling, regrading and replanting as required to establish a smooth, acceptable turf, free of eroded or bare areas. 1. Mowing of Density Buffalograss and Habiturf Thunderturf areas shall be accomplished with rotary mower to maintain grass at no less than 4 inch height. a. Do not mow wildflower areas. 2. Water turf/grass and wildflower areas until Final Acceptance of project. 3. Water to provide a total equivalent of 1 inch water per week in conjunction with natural rainfall for the establishment of all turf/grass areas to the satisfaction of the Landscape Architect. 4. Keep areas free of woody plant roots, diseases, nematodes, soil-borne insects and other materials detrimental to grass growth including all stones 1 inch and larger in diameter. 5. Eliminate all broadleaf weeds, sedges and patches of foreign grass. D. Fertilize all turf/grass areas within the project limits, 30 days following initial installation at rate to provide 1# nitrogen/1000 s.f. 1. Fertilization does not apply to native grass and wildflower plantings. E. Application of Soil Modifiers: Three (3)weeks following completion of landscaping/seeding and sodding, Contractor shall complete one additional application of soil modifiers as per manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Biostimulant: 4 oz. /1000 s.f. 2. Soil Penetrant: 4 oz. /1000 s.f. 3. Soil Conditioner: 4 oz. /1000 s.f. F. Application of Soil Modifiers: At three (3)week intervals following completion of landscaping/seeding and sodding, Contractor shall complete two additional applications of soil modifiers as per manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Biostimulant: 4 oz. /1000 s.f. 2. Soil Penetrant: 4 oz. /1000 s.f. 3. Soil Conditioner: 4 oz. /1000 s.f. G. Soil Probiotic 1. After placement of landscape soils, complete soil treatment with soil probiotic application one (1)week before planting. 2. Mix tablets with water at rate prescribed by manufacturer. 3. Soak soil by spray application one (1)week after planting. 3.03 ITEMS TO BE FURNISHED A. Maintenance Instructions: 1. Submit typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be established by the Owner for the landscape maintenance over the first year. 2. Instructions shall present maintenance procedures/activities to be implemented over a one year period on a month by month basis. B. Watering Schedule: 1. The watering schedule is to include the duration and frequency each irrigation zone will run per week. 2. This will be worked out jointly with the Landscape Irrigation Contractor and shall be programmed on to the controller after review by Landscape Architect. 3. Program shall be submitted to the Owner as part of the final acceptance process. 3.04 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION A. Protect existing vegetation, pavements, and facilities from damage due to maintenance activities/operations, operations by other contractors and trades and trespassers; restore damaged items to original condition or replace, at no extra cost to Owner. 1. Treat, repair or replace damaged landscape work as directed. B. Remove fallen deciduous leaves in Fall; remove at least once a week. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 32 93 10-6 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE Re-Bid Construction Documents C. Clean adjacent pavements of plant debris and other debris generated by maintenance activities. D. Remove and dispose of general cleanup debris and biodegradable debris in a proper manner.. OR USE BELOW PARAGRAPHS E. Remove and dispose of general cleanup debris and biodegradable debris in a proper manner. 1. Biodegradable Debris: Owner's trash collection facilities may not be used; dispose of off site in accordance with applicable regulations. 2. Branches and Bark: Owner will designate a wood chip storage area; machine-chip all branch and bark debris. 3. Non-Biodegradable Debris: Owner's trash collection facilities may not be used; dispose of off site in accordance with applicable regulations. F. During maintenance period, all debris shall be removed daily and the site kept neat at all times. G. After maintenance operations are finished, all paved areas which may have become strewn with soil or other material shall be thoroughly cleaned by sweeping, and if necessary, power washing. 3.05 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE A. When maintenance period is complete, Landscape Architect will, upon written request by the Contractor, make an inspection to determine acceptability. B. Where inspected landscape work does not comply with requirements, replace rejected work and continue specified maintenance until reinspected by the Landscape Architect and found to be acceptable. 3.06 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE A. Immediately prior to request for Substantial Completion, inspect the work and replace all materials or portions of the construction that are damaged, defaced, eroded, or in any manner does not comply with requirements, replace rejected work and continue specified maintenance until reinspected by Landscape Architect and found to be acceptable. B. When contractor considers work or designated portion of the work is substantially complete, submit: 1. Request for Substantial Completion Inspection with a list of items to be completed or corrected, one of which shall not be cleaning; 2. Record documents as required below; 3. Written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed; work has been inspected and that work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents. C. Submit to Landscape Architect with written request for review Certificate of Occupancy or evidence that request for Certificate of Occupancy has been sent to the authority having jurisdiction and that Certificate of Occupancy has been denied or is being withheld through no fault of the Contractor. D. After receipt of required submittals, Landscape Architect will schedule inspection. E. Should Landscape Architect review and find work that is not substantially complete, he will promptly notify Contractor in writing, listing observed deficiencies. F. Contractor shall remedy deficiencies and send a second written notice for review. G. Landscape Architect will re-review the work. H. When Landscape Architect finds work is substantially complete, he will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion in accordance with provisions of General Conditions with a revised tentative list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list). I. Complete modifications or corrections required by punch list within 14 days from date of receipt of punch list. RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 32 93 10-7 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE Re-Bid Construction Documents J. If the Landscape Architect is required to make multiple trips to the site because the Contractor's claims exceed the project's state of completion: 1. the Owner will pay the Landscape Architect for each additional trip as an additional service in accordance with the requirements of the Landscape Architect/Owner Agreement. 2. and an equal amount will be deducted from contract amount as reimbursement to the Owner. K. When landscape work is completed, including maintenance, Landscape Architect will, upon written request by the Contractor, make an inspection to determine acceptability. L. Landscape work may be inspected for acceptance in parts agreeable to the Landscape Architect provided work offered for inspection is complete, including maintenance. M. Where inspected landscape work does not comply with requirements, replace rejected work and continue specified maintenance until reinspected by the Landscape Architect and found to be acceptable. Remove rejected plants and materials promptly from the project site. N. Final Review: Prior to project turn over, the Contractor will be required to conduct a final walk- thru with the Owner or their representative. 1. The walk-thru is to establish 100% completion and Final Acceptance of the landscape work according to specifications. 2. After three uncompleted items from Substantial Completion punch list or installation discrepancies occur, the walk-thru will be stopped and rescheduled for a later date at the Contractor's liability. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0—City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 32 93 10-8 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 33 01 10.58 DISINFECTION OF WATER UTILITY PIPING SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Disinfection of site domestic water lines and site fire water lines specified in Section 33 1416. B. Testing and reporting results. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 33 1416-Site Water Utility Distribution Piping. 1.03 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Disinfection: By the linear foot. Includes preparing, disinfecting,testing, and reporting. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AWWA B300- Hypochlorites; 2011. B. AWWA C651- Disinfecting Water Mains; 2005. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Test Reports: Indicate results comparative to specified requirements. B. Certificate: From authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of water system. C. Disinfection report: 1. Type and form of disinfectant used. 2. Date and time of disinfectant injection start and time of completion. 3. Test locations. 4. Initial and 24 hour disinfectant residuals (quantity in treated water) in ppm for each outlet tested. 5. Date and time of flushing start and completion. 6. Disinfectant residual after flushing in ppm for each outlet tested. D. Bacteriological report: 1. Date issued, project name, and testing laboratory name, address, and telephone number. 2. Time and date of water sample collection. 3. Name of person collecting samples. 4. Test locations. 5. Initial and 24 hour disinfectant residuals in ppm for each outlet tested. 6. Coliform bacteria test results for each outlet tested. 7. Certification that water complies, or fails to comply, with bacterial standards of the City of Corpus Christi. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Firm: Company specializing in testing potable water systems, approved by governing authorities of the State in which the Project is located. B. Submit bacteriologist's signature and authority associated with testing. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DISINFECTION CHEMICALS A. Chemicals: AWWA B300, Hypochlorite. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 33 0110.58-1 DISINFECTION OF WATER UTILITY PIPING SYSTEMS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that piping system has been cleaned, inspected, and pressure tested. B. Schedule disinfecting activity to coordinate with start-up,testing, adjusting and balancing, demonstration procedures, including related systems. 3.02 DISINFECTION A. Use method prescribed by the applicable state or local codes, or health authority or water service purveyor having jurisdiction, or in the absence of any of these follow AWWA C651. B. Provide and attach equipment required to perform the work. C. Inject treatment disinfectant into piping system. D. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours. E. Flush, circulate, and clean until required cleanliness is achieved; use municipal domestic water. F. Replace permanent system devices removed for disinfection. G. Pressure test system to 200 psi. Repair leaks and re-test. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test samples in accordance with AWWA C651. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 33 0110.58-2 DISINFECTION OF WATER UTILITY PIPING SYSTEMS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 33 02 30 JACKING, BORING OR TUNNELING PIPE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Furnishing and installation of pipe by the methods of jacking, boring, or tunneling. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 312316- Excavation. B. Section 31 2316.14-Trench Excavation Protection. C. Section 33 1116-Site Water Utility Distribution Piping. D. Section 33 3111 -Site Sanitary Sewer Utility Piping. E. Section 33 4111-Site Storm Utility Drainage Piping. 1.03 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Jacking, Boring, or Tunneling: 1. Basis of Measurement: By the linear foot. 2. Basis of Payment: Includes excavation; casing, liner plate,jacking pipe with accessories; and grout. 1.04 REFERENCES A. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) 2004 Standard Specifications for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets and Bridges. B. Specification and standards of local authority having jurisdiction. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide casing, liner plate,jacking pipe plus accessories data. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate plan layout, spacing of components, grouting procedures, and schedule of components. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: All products covered under this Section shall be produced by a single manufacturer unless otherwise specified. B. Testing: The Contractor shall coordinate all testing required by this Section with the Engineer prior to commencement. 1.07 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and handle products in exact accordance with manufacturer's latest published requirements and specifications. PART 2 PRODUCT 2.01 MATERIALS A. Pipe: 1. Types and sizes shown on the plans and shall conform to these specifications. 2. All shipments of pipe shall be accompanied by a certificate of compliance to these specifications prepared by an independent testing laboratory and signed by a registered professional engineer. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 33 02 30-1 JACKING,BORING OR TUNNELING PIPE 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents B. Liner Plate: As shown on the project plans. C. Grout: 1. Sand cement slurry containing a minimum of seven (7) sacks of Portland Cement per cubic yard of slurry. 2. All slurry shall be plant batched and transit mixed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 JACKING A. Jacking Pits 1. Suitable pits or trenches shall be excavated for the purpose of jacking operations for placing end joints of the pipe. 2. When trenches are cut in the side of embankment such work shall be securely sheeted and braced. 3. Backfilled immediately upon completion of jacking operations. B. Jacking Operations 1. Jacking operations shall in no way interfere with the operation of railroads, streets, highways or other facilities. 2. Barricades and lights shall be furnished as directed by the Engineer to safeguard traffic and pedestrians. C. The pipe to be jacked shall be set on guides to support the section of pipe being jacked and to direct it in the proper line and grade. D. Excavation 1. Embankment material shall be excavated just ahead of the pipe and material removed through the pipe, and the pipe forced through the opening thus provided. 2. The excavation for the underside of the pipe,for at least one-third (1/3) of the circumference of the pipe, shall conform to the contour and grade of the pipe. 3. A clearance of not more than two inches (2") may be provided for the upper half of the pipe. E. The distance that the excavation shall extend beyond the end of the pipe shall depend on the character of the material, but it shall not exceed two feet (2') in any case. F. Generally, pipe shall be jacked from downstream end. G. Permissible lateral or vertical variation in the final position of the pipe from line and grade will be as shown on the plans or as determined by the Engineer. H. Any pipe damaged in jacking operations shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. 3.02 BORING A. Boring Pits: Excavation for pits and installation of shoring shall be as outlined under"Jacking Pits". B. Boring Operations: 1. A pilot hole shall be used. 2. The pilot hole shall be bored the entire length of the crossing and shall be used as a guide for the larger hole to be bored. 3. Water or drilling fluids may be used to lubricate cuttings. C. Variation in line and grade shall apply as specified under"Jacking". RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 33 02 30-2 JACKING,BORING OR TUNNELING PIPE 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 3.03 TUNNELING A. Tunneling may be used when the size of the proposed pipe or the use of a monolithic system would make the use of tunneling more satisfactory than "Jacking" or"Boring". B. The excavation for pits and the installation of shoring shall be as specified under"Jacking". C. The lining of the tunnel shall be of the material shown on the plans. D. Access holes for grouting shall be spaced a maximum of ten feet (10'). 3.04 PIPE JOINTS A. Shall conform to local specification and standards having jurisdiction for work being performed, or as shown on the project plans or shop drawings. B. Steel Joints 1. Shall be mill or fabricated steel pipe conforming to AWWA M-11. 2. Shall be welded in accordance with procedures established by the AWS. 3.05 GROUTING OF BORES OR TUNNELS A. Space between pipe and liner, pipe and limits of excavation, and liner and limits of excavation shall be pressure grouted, unless otherwise specified on the plans. 3.06 CLEANING A. Properly dispose of all excess material, all debris,trash, containers, residue, remains and scraps which result from the work of this Section. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 33 02 30-3 JACKING,BORING OR TUNNELING PIPE 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 33 02 73 SITE CONCRETE ENCASEMENT,CRADLES,SADDLES AND COLLARS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. All work required to install and complete all concrete encasements, cradles, saddles and collars. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 312316- Excavation. B. Section 31 2316.13 -Trenching. C. Section 33 0561-Concrete Manholes D. Section 33 3113 -Site Sanitary Sewerage Gravity Piping. 1.03 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Encasement, Cradles, Saddles, and Collars: By the cubic yard. Includes formwork, concrete, placement accessories, consolidating and curing. 1.04 REFERENCES A. Texas Department of Transportation Standard Specification, Item 420—Concrete for Structures. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on manufactured products showing compliance with specified requirements. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation procedures and interface required with adjacent construction for concrete accessories. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The testing laboratory shall sample and test concrete in accordance with geotechnical report unless otherwise indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Concrete: Shall conform to Class B in accordance with Item 420, "Concrete for Structures", TxDOT Standard Specifications. B. Reinforcement: If required, shall be Grade 60, deformed bars, new billet steel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Concrete Encasement 1. The trench shall be excavated and fine graded to a depth conforming with details and sections shown on the plans. 2. The pipe shall be securely tied down to prevent flotation and supported by precast concrete blocks of the same strength as the concrete for encasement. 3. Encasement shall then be placed to a depth and width conforming with details and sections shown on the plans. B. Concrete Cradles RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 33 02 73-1 SITE CONCRETE ENCASEMENT,CRADLES, 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SADDLES AND COLLARS Re-Bid Construction Documents 1. The trench shall be prepared and the pipe supported in the same manner as described in this Section. 2. Concrete cradles shall be constructed in accordance with details and sections shown on the plans. C. Concrete Saddles 1. Pipe to receive concrete saddle shall be backfilled in accordance with Section 312316.13 —Trenching to the spring line. 2. Concrete placed to a depth and width conforming with details and sections shown on the plans. D. Concrete Collars 1. Concrete collars shall be constructed in accordance with details and sections shown on the plans. 3.02 CLEANING A. Properly dispose of all debris,trash containers, residue, remnants and scraps which result from the work of this Section. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 33 02 73-2 SITE CONCRETE ENCASEMENT,CRADLES, 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop SADDLES AND COLLARS Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 33 05 61 CONCRETE MANHOLES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 Section Includes A. Monolithic concrete manholes with masonry transition to lid frame, covers, anchorage, and accessories. B. Modular precast concrete manhole sections with tongue-and-groove joints, covers, anchorage, and accessories. 1.02 Related Requirements A. Section 03 3000-Cast-in-Place Concrete. B. Section 04 0511- Masonry Mortaring and Grouting. 1.03 Price and Payment Procedures A. Manhole: By the unit. Includes excavating, concrete base pad, concrete manhole sections, FRP manhole sections, brick masonry manhole construction, brick masonry transition to cover frame, cover frame and cover,to indicated depth,forming and sealing pipe inlets and outlets. 1.04 Reference Standards A. AASHTO HB-Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges; Seventeenth Edition. B. ASTM A48/A48M -Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings; 2003 (Reapproved 2012). C. ASTM C478/C478M -Standard Specification for Circular Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections; 2020. D. ASTM C923/C923M -Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures, Pipes, and Laterals; 2020. E. ASTM D3753 -Standard Specification for Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Polyester Manholes and Wetwells; 2012. F. ACI 530/530.1/ERTA- Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures and Related Commentaries; 2011. G. Local Municipal Specifications. H. Local Public Service Provider Specifications. 1.05 Submittals A. Shop Drawings: Indicate manhole locations, elevations, piping sizes and elevations of penetrations. B. Product Data: Provide manhole covers, component construction,features, configuration, and dimensions. 1.06 Quality Assurance A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section. 1.07 Field Conditions A. Cold and Hot Weather Requirements: Comply with requirements of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA or applicable building code, whichever is more stringent. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 33 05 61-1 CONCRETE MANHOLES 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 Concrete Manholes A. Weight Rating: H 10 according to AASHTO HB. 2.02 MANHOLES A. Manhole Sections: Reinforced precast concrete in accordance with ASTM C478/C478M,with resilient connectors complying with ASTM C923/C923M. B. Manhole Sections: ASTM D 3753, glass-fiber reinforced polyester (only if indicated on drawings) . C. Concrete: As specified in Section 03 3000. D. Concrete Reinforcement: As specified in Section 03 3000, Class A. 2.03 Accessories A. Lid and Frame: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30B Cast iron construction, machined flat bearing surface, removable boltable lid, closed lid design; heavy duty suitable for H-20 loading . B. Throat Rings: Reinforced concrete rings, maximum thickness of 2 inches, minimum width 5 inches, and internal diameter not less than 30 inches. C. Inside Epoxy Coating: Raven 805 Series High Build Epoxy Liner(125 mils thickness) or Spray Wall Polyurethane System (150 mils thickness) or approved equivalent. D. Manhole Insert: Rainstopper as manufactured by Southwestern Packing and Seals, or approved equivalent. E. Water tight manhole rings and covers shall be Trane-TEX A77 "O" ring or approved equivalent. 2.04 CONFIGURATION A. Shaft Construction: Concentric with concentric cone top section; lipped male/female dry joints; sleeved to receive pipe sections. B. Shape: Cylindrical. C. Clear Inside Dimensions: 48 inches diameter. D. Design Depth: As indicated on drawings. E. Clear Lid Opening: 30 inches diameter. F. Pipe Entry: Provide openings as indicated on drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 Examination A. Verify items provided by other sections of work are properly sized and located. B. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into Work. C. Verify excavation for manholes is correct. 3.02 Preparation A. Coordinate placement of inlet and outlet pipe or duct sleeves required by other sections. 3.03 Installation A. Establish elevations and pipe inverts for inlets and outlets as indicated in drawings. 3.04 MANHOLES A. Place concrete base pad,trowel top surface level. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 33 05 61-2 CONCRETE MANHOLES 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents B. Place manhole sections plumb and level,trim to correct elevations, anchor to base pad. C. Form and place manhole cylinder plumb and level,to correct dimensions and elevations. D. Cut and fit for pipe. E. The minimum angle of flow for a connecting sewer to the direction of flow by a collection system is 90 degrees. F. Inverts shall conform accurately to the size and elevation of the adjoining pipes. Side inverts shall be curved and main inverts, where direction changes, shall be laid out in smooth curves of the longest possible radius which is tangent to the centerlines of adjoining pipelines. G. Grout base of shaft sections to achieve slope to exit piping. Trowel smooth. Contour as required. H. Set cover frames and covers level without tipping,to correct elevations. I. A minimum of 2 and a maximum of 4 throat rings shall be used to adjust the manhole top. J. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location. K. Install manhole inserts in each vented sanitary sewer manhole in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. L. Vacuum test manholes for water tightness. M. All new sanitary sewer manholes shall be watertight and coated with an approved sewer structural coating. 1. Epoxy coating: With specified thickness application. a. Raven 405 Series High Build Epoxy Liner: Required thickness 125 mils. b. Spray Wall Polyurethane System: Required thickness 150 mils. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 33 05 61-3 CONCRETE MANHOLES 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 33 1416 SITE WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Water pipe for site conveyance lines. B. Pipe valves. C. Fire hydrants. D. Valves, Fire Hydrants, Backflow Preventer, and Accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 3000-Cast-in-Place Concrete. B. Section 211100- Facility Fire-Suppression Water-Service Piping. C. Section 312316- Excavation. D. Section 31 2316.13 -Trenching. E. Section 312323 - Fill. F. Section 33 0110.58- Disinfection of Water Utility Piping Systems: Disinfection of site service utility water piping. G. Section 33 1300- Disinfecting of Water Utility Distribution. 1.03 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Pipe and Fittings: By the linear foot. Includes excavation, pipe and fittings, bedding,thrust blocks, restraint joints, connection to building service piping, and to municipal utility water source. B. Valves: By the unit. Includes valve,fittings and accessories. C. Hydrant: By the unit. Includes excavation, gravel sump, hydrant,valve, connection, and accessories. D. Fittings: By the ton. Includes installation and accessories. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Standards and specifications of local authority having jurisdiction over private potable water systems. B. Standards and specifications of local authority having jurisdiction over public potable water systems. C. ASME B16.18-Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; 2012. D. ASME B16.22-Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings; 2013. E. ASTM B88-Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2014. F. ASTM D1785 -Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120; 2015. G. ASTM D2466-Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40; 2013. H. ASTM D2855 -Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings; 1996 (Reapproved 2010). RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 33 14 16-1 SITE WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents I. ASTM D3139-Standard Specification for Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes using Flexible Elastomeric Seals; 1998 (Reapproved 2011). J. AWS A5.8M/A5.8-Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding; 2011-AMD 1. K. AWWA C105/A21.5 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems; 2010. L. AWWA C111/A21.11- Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings; 2012. M. AWWA C502- Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrants; 2014. N. AWWA C504- Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves 3 In. (75 mm)Through 72 In. (1,800 mm); 2010. O. AWWA C508-Swing-Check Valves for Waterworks Service, 2 In. (50 mm)Through 24 In. (600 mm) NPS; 2011. P. AWWA C509- Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service; 2009. Q. AWWA C600- Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances; 2010. R. AWWA C900- Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe,4 In. Through 12 In. (100 mm Through 300 mm),for Water Transmission and Distribution; 2007. S. UL 246- Hydrants for Fire-Protection Service; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves and accessories. B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of piping mains, valves, connections, thrust restraints, and invert elevations and provide to the Engineer. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities. D. Provide Owner with two valve keys for each type of valve. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with water service purveyor requirements. B. Perform Work in accordance with requirements of local authority having jurisdiction of private water systems. 1.07 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers with labeling in place. 1.08 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for materials and installation of the Work of this section. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WATER PIPE A. Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151/A21.51: 1. Fittings: Ductile iron, standard thickness. 2. Joints: AWWA C111/A21.11, Styrene butadiene rubber(SBR) or vulcanized SBR gasket with rods. 3. Jackets: AWWA C105/A21.5 polyethylene jacket. B. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88,Type K,Annealed: 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper, or ASME B16.22, wrought copper. 2. Joints: Compression connection or AWS A5.8M/A5.8, BCuP silver braze. C. PVC Pipe: ASTM D1785, Schedule 40. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 33 14 16-2 SITE WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 1. Fittings: ASTM D2466, PVC. 2. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld. D. PVC Pipe greater than 4 inches in diameter: AWWA C900 Class 150: 1. Fittings: AWWA C110, gray iron and ductile iron. 2. Joints: ASTM D3139 compression gasket ring. E. Trace Wire: Magnetic detectable conductor, brightly colored plastic covering, imprinted with "Water Service" (14-gauge insulated) in large letters. 2.02 VALVES A. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. B. All mechanical joint valves shall be supplied with glands, bolts, and gaskets. Bolts for mechanical joints shall be high strength low allow steel meeting requirements of the latest revision of AWWA Standard C111. C. All valves shall open right (clockwise) unless otherwise specified. D. Valve ends shall be either flanged, mechanical joint, hub-end, push-on joint ("Ring-Tite"), or any combination thereof. E. Valves shall have a minimum 10 YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY from the manufacturer on material and workmanship. F. Gate Valves Up To 3 Inches: 1. Brass or Bronze body, non-rising stem, inside screw, single wedge or disc, compression ends,with control rod, post indicator, valve key, and extension box. G. Gate Valves 3 Inches and Over: 1. AWWA C509, iron body, bronze trim, non-rising stem with square nut, single wedge, resilient seat,flanged ends, control rod, post indicator, valve key, and extension box. 2. Coatings: All coatings in contact with potable water shall be approved for potable water immersion service per ANSI/NSF Standard 61. H. Butterfly Valves From 24 Inches to 48 Inches: 1. AWWA C504, iron body, bronze disc, resilient replaceable seat, water or lug ends,ten position lever handle. 2.03 VALVE BOXES A. Each valve box assembly shall be of cast-iron and shall consist of a base, top section, and lid as required by local authority. B. All valve boxes shall be of a single size with a nominal diameter of 6 inches. C. The valve box lid shall be so designed so that it will remain firmly seated in place when subjected to vehicular traffic. D. The valve box assembly shall be coated with a bituminous coating of either coal tar or asphalt basic applied to all inside and outside surfaces. 2.04 HYDRANTS A. Hydrants: AWWA C502, UL 246, dry barrel type or as required by water service purveyor or local authority having jurisdiction of private water systems. 1. Inside dimension: 7 inches minimum, with minimum 5 inches diameter valve seat opening. 2. 6 inch bell or mechanical joint inlet connection with accessories, gland bolts, and gaskets. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 33 14 16-3 SITE WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 3. Open: Right B. Hydrant Extensions: Fabricate in multiples of 6 inches with rod and coupling to increase barrel length. C. Hose and Streamer Connection: Match sizes with water service purveyor, two hose nozzles with a 2-1/2 inch nominal inside diameter, one pumper nozzle with a 4 inch nominal inside diameter. Nozzle threads to conform with ASA B-26 National Standard Fire Hose Coupling Screw Thread. D. Hydrants shall have at least one untapped drain opening. When the main valve is in fully opened position leakage through the drain opening shall be cause for rejection. E. All gaskets shall be of rubber composition, copper asbestos, lead or impregnated fiber composition. F. All fire hydrants having mechanical joint inlets shall be supplied with glands, bolts, and gaskets. Bolts shall be high strength low alloy steel meeting requirements of AWWA Specification C111. G. Hydrant shall have non-rising stems. H. Hydrants shall be equipped with a breakable coupling on the barrel section and the stem. These couplings shall be at least two inches above the finished grade line. The breakable coupling shall be so designed that in case of traffic collision,the barrel safety flange and steam safety collar will break before any other part of the hydrant. The coupling shall be designed to afford the hydrant to rotate 360°. I. Valve stems shall have a diameter of 1-1/4 inch for hydrants up to and including a 5'-0" bury. Hydrants with a bury of greater than 5-'0" shall have a stem diameter of not less than 1-3/8 inch. J. Hydrant shall have a limited warranty from the manufacturer against defects in materials or workmanship for a period of ten (10)years from date of manufacture. Original Manufacturer repair and replacement parts must be used to maintain valid warranty. K. Finish: Primer and two coats of enamel in color required by utility company. 2.05 BEDDING AND COVER MATERIALS A. Bedding: As specified in Section 31 2316.13. B. Cover: As specified in Section 31 2316.13. 2.06 REDUCED PRESSURE PRINCIPLE BACKFLOW PREVENTER A. Two check valve assemblies, relief valve assembly,two shutoff valves, and four test codes. B. Check Valve and Relief Valve Assemblies: Single cast body with replaceable seats, capable of being serviced independent of each other. C. Relief Valve Assembly: Between check valves, supply pressure via a sensing package integral to main body. D. Shutoff Valves: Each end of assembly, resilient seated. E. Four Test Codes: Supply side of supply shutoff valve, relief valve cover(sensing supply pressure), after first check valve (sensing zone pressure), and after second check valve (sensing demand pressure). F. Meet requirements of USC-FCCHR,ASSE 1013,AWWA, UL(2-1/2"-10" models), and FM (2- 1/2"-10" models). RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 33 14 16-4 SITE WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents G. Product: Must comply with water service purveyor specifications. 2.07 ACCESSORIES A. Concrete for Thrust Restraints: Concrete type specified in Section 03 3000. B. Permanent and Temporary Blowoff Assemblies: As shown on plans. 1. Permanent Blowoff Assembly: 2-inch galvanized iron pipe, ball valve, fittings, 6-inch valve box assembly, and concrete collar around valve box where subjected to vehicular traffic. 2. Temporary Blowoff Assembly: 2-inch galvanized iron pipe, ball valve, and fittings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that building service connection and water service purveyor main size, location, and invert are as indicated. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Cut pipe ends square, ream pipe and tube ends to full pipe diameter, remove burrs. B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly. C. Prepare pipe connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.03 TRENCHING A. See Section 31 2316.13 for additional requirements. B. Form and place concrete for pipe thrust restraints at each change of pipe direction. Place concrete to permit full access to pipe and pipe accessories. C. Backfill around sides and to top of pipe with cover fill,tamp in place and compact, then complete backfilling. 3.04 INSTALLATION - PIPE A. Maintain separation of water main from sewer piping in accordance with Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ) requirements. Minimum 9 ft separation when in parallel with sewer piping. B. Group piping in the same trench as other site piping work whenever practical. C. Establish elevations of buried piping to ensure not less than 3 feet of cover. D. Install ductile iron piping and fittings to AWWA C600. E. Route pipe in straight line. F. Install pipe to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe or joints. G. Install access fittings to permit disinfection of water system performed under Section 33 0110.58. H. Slope water pipe and position drains at low points. I. Install trace wire taped to pipe, coordinate with Section 31 2316.13. 3.05 Installation-Valves, Hydrants, Backflow Preventers A. Set valves on solid bearing. Concrete pad required for valves 12 inches and larger. B. Center and plumb valve box over valve. Set box cover flush with finished grade. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 33 14 16-5 SITE WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents C. Set hydrants plumb; locate pumper nozzle perpendicular to and facing roadway, no less than 18 inches nor more than 7 feet from face of curb. D. Set hydrants to grade, with nozzles at least 20 inches above ground in accordance with Section 211100. E. Provide a drainage pit 36 inches square by 24 inches deep filled with 2 inches washed gravel. Encase elbow of hydrant in gravel to 6 inches above drain opening. Do not connect drain opening to sewer. F. Paint hydrants in accordance with water service purveyor standards and specifications or for private hydrants with standards and specifications of local authority. 3.06 SERVICE CONNECTIONS A. Provide water service to utility company requirements . 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 014000-Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. B. Flush mains to remove all dust, debris, or foreign matter. C. Pressure test water piping to 200 pounds per square inch. D. Pressure test duration shall be a minimum of 4 hours. E. Leakage allowance shall be no greater than listing in table at end of this section. F. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest at no cost to Owner. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 33 14 16-6 SITE WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents HYDROSTATIC TEST LEAKAGE ALLOWANCES (MAXIMUM) @ 200 PSI ALLOWABLE LEAKAGE IN GALLONS PER HOUR(GPH)* NOMINAL 100 200 300 400 500 LF 600 700 LF 800 900 1000 DIAMETER& LF LF LF LF LF LF LF LF TYPE PIPE 6" DI** 0.13 0.25 0.38 0.51 0.64 0.6 0.89 1.02 1.14 1.27 8" DI** 0.17 0.34 0.51 0.68 0.85 1.02 1.19 1.36 1.53 1.7 12" DI** 0.26 1 0.51 0.77 1 1.02 1.28 1.53 1 1.79 2.04 2.3 2.55 16" DI** 0.34 0.68 1.02 1.36 1.7 2.04 2.38 2.72 3.06 3.4 20" DI** 0.43 0.85 1.28 1.7 2.13 2.55 2.98 3.4 3.83 4.25 20" CSC 0.08 0.16 0.24 0.32 0.4 0.47 0.55 0.63 0.71 0.79 24" DI** 0.51 1.02 1.53 2.04 2.55 3.06 3.57 4.08 3.59 5.1 24" CSC 0.1 0.19 0.29 0.38 0.48 0.57 0.67 0.76 0.86 0.95 30" DI** 0.64 1.27 1.91 2.55 3.19 3.82 4.46 5.1 5.73 6.37 30" CSC 0.12 0.24 0.35 0.47 0.59 0.71 0.83 0.94 1.06 1.18 36" DI** 0.76 1.53 2.29 3.06 3.82 4.58 5.35 6.11 6.88 7.64 36" CSC 0.14 0.28 0.43 0.57 0.71 0.85 0.99 1.14 1.28 1.42 42" DI** 0.89 1.78 2.68 3.57 4.46 5.35 6.24 7.14 8.03 8.92 42" CSC 0.17 0.33 0.5 0.66 0.83 1 1.16 1.33 1.49 1.66 48" DI** 1.02 2.04 3.06 4.08 5.1 6.11 7.13 8.15 9.17 10.19 48" CSC 0.19 0.38 0.7 0.76 0.95 1.13 1.32 1.51 1.7 1.89 54" CSC 0.21 0.42 0.63 0.84 1.05 1.26 1.47 1.68 1.89 2.1 60" CSC 0.23 0.46 0.69 0.92 1.15 1.38 1.61 1 1.84 2.07 2.3 *PVC pipe shall be tested to DI pressures. GPH for CSC pipe are manufacturer's maximum. **DI pipe includes mechanical and push-on joints. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 33 14 16-7 SITE WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 33 3113 SITE SANITARY SEWERAGE GRAVITY PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sanitary sewerage drainage piping,fittings, and accessories. B. Connection of building sanitary drainage system to public sanitary sewers. C. Cleanout access. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 3000-Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete for cleanout base pad construction. B. Section 312316- Excavation: Excavating of trenches. C. Section 31 2316.13 -Trenching: Excavating, bedding, and backfilling. D. Section 33 0561 -Concrete Manholes. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Bedding: Fill placed under, beside and directly over pipe, prior to subsequent backfill operations. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A74-Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings; 2015. B. ASTM A746-Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Gravity Sewer Pipe; 2009 (Reapproved 2014). C. ASTM C12 -Standard Practice for Installing Vitrified Clay Pipe Lines; 2014. D. ASTM C14-Standard Specification for Nonreinforced Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and Culvert Pipe; 2015. E. ASTM C14M -Standard Specification for Nonreinforced Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and Culvert Pipe (Metric); 2015. F. ASTM C76-Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe; 2015. G. ASTM C76M -Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe (Metric); 2014. H. ASTM C425 -Standard Specification for Compression Joints for Vitrified Clay Pipe and Fittings; 2004 (Reapproved 2013). I. ASTM C443 -Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber Gaskets; 2012. J. ASTM C443M -Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber Gaskets (Metric); 2011. K. ASTM C564-Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings; 2014. L. ASTM C700-Standard Specification for Vitrified Clay Pipe, Extra Strength, Standard Strength, and Perforated; 2013. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 33 31 13-1 SITE SANITARY SEWERAGE GRAVITY PIPING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents M. ASTM D1785 -Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120; 2015. N. ASTM D2321-Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications; 2014. O. ASTM D2680-Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) and Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Composite Sewer Piping; 2001 (Reapproved 2014). P. ASTM D2729-Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings; 2011. Q. ASTM D3034-Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings; 2015. R. ASTM D3350-Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fittings Material; 2012. S. AWWA C111/A21.11- Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings; 2012. 1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: Coordinate the installation of the sanitary sewer with the local authority having jurisdiction for permits and inspections with regard to size, location and installation of service utilities. B. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting one week prior to the start of the work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers, and local inspection authorities. C. Sequencing: Ensure that utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data indicating pipe and pipe accessories. B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. C. Field Quality Control Submittals: Document results of field quality control testing. D. Project Record Documents: 1. Record location of pipe runs, connections, manholes, and invert elevations. 2. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SEWER PIPE MATERIALS A. Provide products that comply with applicable code(s). B. Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 3034, SDR 26,Type PSM, Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) material, inside nominal diameter as shown on drawings, bell and spigot style joint end with the exception that solvent cement joints shall not be used. C. Fittings: Same material as pipe molded or formed to suit pipe size and end design, in required tee, bends, elbows, cleanouts, reducers, traps and other configurations required. 2.02 PIPE ACCESSORIES A. Trace Wire: Magnetic detectable conductor, clear plastic covering, imprinted with "Sewer Service " in large letters, if required. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 33 31 13-2 SITE SANITARY SEWERAGE GRAVITY PIPING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 2.03 BEDDING AND COVER MATERIALS A. Pipe Bedding Material: As specified in Section 31 2316.13. B. Pipe Cover Material: As specified in Section 31 2316.13. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Perform work in accordance with applicable code(s) of local or state jurisdictional authority. 3.02 TRENCHING A. See Section 31 2316.13 for additional requirements. B. Backfill around sides and to top of pipe with cover fill,tamp in place and compact, then complete backfilling. 3.03 INSTALLATION - PIPE A. Verify that trench cut is ready to receive work and excavations, dimensions, and elevations are as indicated on layout drawings. B. Install pipe,fittings, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Seal watertight. C. Lay pipe to slope gradients noted on drawings; with maximum variation from true slope of 1/8 inch in 10 feet. D. Connect to building sanitary sewer outlet and public sanitary sewer system. E. Install cleanouts a minimum of every 100 linear feet unless otherwise indicated on drawings. See drawings for cleanout detail. F. Install trace wire 6 inches above top of pipe, if required. Coordinate with Section 31 2316.13. 3.04 WATER MAIN CROSSINGS A. Requirements of Texas Commission on Environmental Quality, 30 TAC§ 217.5 shall be met. 3.05 INSTALLATION -CLEANOUTS A. Form bottom of excavation clean and smooth to correct elevation. B. Establish elevations and pipe inverts for inlets and outlets as indicated. C. Mount cap and frame to match slope of finished grade. Secure to top of pipe at elevation indicated. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field inspection and testing. B. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest at no cost to Owner. C. Pressure Test: Pressure test in accordance with sewer service purveyor standards or local authority having jurisdiction of private sanitary sewer systems. D. Deflection Test: Deflection test in accordance with sewer service purveyor or local authority having jurisdiction of private sanitary sewer systems. E. Obtain inspections from sewer service purveyor or local authority having jurisdiction. Do not bury pipe until inspection is approved. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 33 31 13-3 SITE SANITARY SEWERAGE GRAVITY PIPING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 3.07 PROTECTION A. Protect pipe and bedding cover from damage or displacement until backfilling operation is in progress. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 33 31 13-4 SITE SANITARY SEWERAGE GRAVITY PIPING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 33 42 11 STORMWATER GRAVITY PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Stormwater drainage piping. B. Stormwater pipe accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 3000-Cast-in-Place Concrete. B. Section 312316- Excavation. C. Section 31 2316.13 -Trenching. D. Section 31 2316.14-Trench Excavation Protection. E. Section 312323 - Fill. F. Section 33 0561-Concrete Manholes. G. Section 33 4213 - Pipe Culverts. 1.03 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Pipe and Fittings: 1. Basis of Measurement: By the linear foot. 2. Basis of Payment: Includes hand trimming excavation, bedding and backfilling, pipe and fittings, connection to building service piping and to municipal system. B. Catch Basins and Cleanouts: 1. Basis of Measurement: By the unit. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A74-Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings; 2015. B. ASTM C76-Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe; 2015. C. ASTM D 667-Standard Specification for Large Diameter Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings. D. ASTM C443 -Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber Gaskets; 2012. E. ASTM C564-Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings; 2014. F. ASTM D1785 -Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120; 2015. G. ASTM D2321-Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications; 2014. H. ASTM D2729-Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings; 2011. I. ASTM F 2648-Standard Specification for 2 to 60-inch Annular Corrugated Profile Wall Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 33 42 11-1 STORMWATER GRAVITY PIPING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: Coordinate the installation of storm drains with local authority having jurisdiction for permits and inspections with regard to size, material, location and installation of service utilities. B. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting one week prior to the start of the work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers and local inspection authorities. C. Sequencing: Ensure that utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data indicating pipe and pipe accessories . B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures required to install Products specified. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that materials meet or exceed specified requirements. D. Project Record Documents: 1. Record location of pipe runs, connections, and invert elevations. 2. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 STORM SEWER PIPE MATERIALS A. Cast Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM A 74, Extra Heavy grade, hub and spigot end. B. Concrete Pipe Joint Devices: ASTM C443 (ASTM C443M) rubber compression gasket joint. C. Concrete Pipe: Reinforced,ASTM C 76 (ASTM C 76M), Class II with Wall type A; mesh reinforcement; bell and spigot end joints. D. Reinforced Concrete Pipe Joint Device: ASTM C443 (ASTM C443M) rubber compression gasket joint. E. Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 2751, SDR 35, Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) material; bell and spigot style solvent sealed joint end. F. Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 2729, Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) material; bell and spigot style solvent sealed joint end. G. Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 3034,Type PSM, Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) material; bell and spigot style solvent sealed joint end. H. Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40, Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) material; bell and spigot style solvent sealed joint end. I. Corrugated Steel Pipe: AASHTO M 36M Type I; helical lock seam; coated inside and out with 0.050 inch thick bituminous coating. J. Coupling Bands: Galvanized steel, 0.052 inches thick x 10 inches (250 mm) wide; connected with two neoprene "O" ring gaskets and two galvanized steel bolts. K. ADS N-12 WT 1B Pipe: ASTM F 2648; 4 inches to 60 inches High Density Polyethylene; bell and spigot ends with a gasket seal. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 33 42 11-2 STORMWATER GRAVITY PIPING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 2.02 PIPE ACCESSORIES A. Fittings: Same material as pipe molded or formed to suit pipe size and end design, in required tee, bends, elbows, cleanouts, reducers, traps and other configurations required. B. Filter Fabric: Non-biodegradable, woven. 2.03 CATCH BASIN,TRENCH DRAIN, CLEANOUT,AND AREA DRAIN COMPONENTS A. Lids and Drain Covers: Cast iron. 1. Catch Basin: a. H-20loaded. b. Nominal Lid and Frame Size: As shown on drawings. 2. Cleanout: a. Lid Design: As shown on drawings. b. H-20loaded. c. Nominal Lid and Frame Size: As shown on drawings. 3. Area Drain: a. Lid Design: As shown on drawings. b. H-20loaded. c. Nominal Lid and Frame Size: As shown on drawings. B. Trench Drain System: Trench drain system assembled from factory fabricated, concrete castings in standard lengths; with or without built in slope; with integral joints and optional grating support rails; includes grating. 1. Grating Material and Style: Slotted cast iron. 2. Trench Width: As shown on the drawings. 3. Trench Section Length: As shown on the drawings. 2.04 BEDDING AND COVER MATERIALS A. Bedding: As specified in Section 31 2316.13. B. Cover: As specified in Section 31 2316.13. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TRENCHING A. See Section 31 2316.13 for additional requirements. B. Hand trim excavation for accurate placement of pipe to elevations indicated. C. Backfill around sides and to top of pipe with cover fill,tamp in place and compact, then complete backfilling. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Verify that trench cut or excavation base is ready to receive work and excavations, dimensions, and elevations are as indicated on drawings. B. Install pipe,fittings, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Seal watertight. 1. Plastic Pipe: Also comply with ASTM D2321. C. Lay pipe to slope gradients noted on layout drawings; with maximum variation from true slope of 1/8 inch in 10 feet. D. Connect to building storm drainage system, foundation drainage system, and utility/municipal system. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 33 42 11-3 STORMWATER GRAVITY PIPING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents E. Make connections through walls through sleeved openings, where provided. 3.03 INSTALLATION -CATCH BASINS,TRENCH DRAINS AND CLEANOUTS A. Form and place cast-in-place concrete base pad,with provision for storm sewer pipe end sections. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest at no cost to Owner. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect pipe and bedding cover from damage or displacement until backfilling operation is in progress. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 33 42 11-4 STORMWATER GRAVITY PIPING 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 33 42 13 STORMWATER CULVERTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Installation of pipe culvert,joints and accessories. B. Bedding and slope protection at pipe end. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 3000-Cast-in-Place Concrete. B. Section 312316- Excavation. C. Section 31 2316.13 -Trenching. D. Section 31 2316.14-Trench Excavation Protection E. Section 312323 - Fill. F. Section 313700- Riprap. G. Section 33 4111-Site Storm Utility Drainage Piping. 1.03 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Pipe Culvert: By the total linear foot invert length of pipe including tapered ends and the diameter in inches. Includes excavating; removing soft subsoil, bedding fill, compacting; pipe, catch basins,junction boxes, fittings and accessories assembled; repair of damaged coating and connection to existing pipe culverts. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A929/A929M -Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process for Corrugated Steel Pipe; 2001 (Reapproved 2013). B. ASTM C14-Standard Specification for Nonreinforced Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and Culvert Pipe; 2015. C. ASTM C14M -Standard Specification for Nonreinforced Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and Culvert Pipe (Metric); 2015. D. ASTM C76-Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe; 2015. E. ASTM C443 -Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber Gaskets; 2012. F. ASTM F 2698-Standard Specification for 2 to 60-inch Annular Corrugated Profile Wall Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings for Land Drainage Applications. 1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Handle all pipe,fittings and accessories carefully with handling devices. Do not drop or roll pipe off trucks. Do not otherwise drop, roll or skid pipe. Chains or cables will not be allowed to load or unload pipe. Materials cracked, gouged, chipped, dented or otherwise damaged will not be allowed for use on the project. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 33 42 13-1 STORMWATER CULVERTS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents B. Store pipe and fittings on heavy wood blocking or platforms so they are not in contact with the ground. C. Pipe,fittings and specials shall be loaded opposite to or as close to the place where it is to be laid as is practical to avoid unnecessary handling. Interior shall be kept completely free from dirt and foreign matter. D. Obtain each type of pipe and fittings from a single manufacturer. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data on pipe, fittings and accessories. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures required to install Products specified. C. Accurately record actual locations of pipe runs, connections, and invert elevations. D. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities. 1.08 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable or municipal code for materials and installation of the work of this section. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CULVERT PIPE A. Pipe 1. Pipe for culverts shall be of the following types, manufactured in accordance with the requirements of the specifications for each type: a. Corrugated Steel Pipe: Fabricated of ASTM A 929/A 929M galvanized steel sheet: 1) Helical lock seam. 2) Coated inside and out with 0.050 inch thick bituminous coating. 3) Shape: Circular. 4) Tapered Ends: Same material as pipe, machine cut,for joining to pipe end. 5) Coupling Bands: Galvanized steel, 0.052 inches thick x 10 inches wide; connected with two neoprene "0" ring gaskets and two galvanized steel bolts. b. Reinforced Concrete Culvert Pipe: Reinforced concrete culvert pipe shall conform to all requirements of ASTM Standard Specification C-76. The minimum "D-Load"for design of the pipe under Specification C-655, or the selection of pipe class under Specification C-76. c. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe: Polyvinyl chloride pipe and fittings PVC 1120, conforming to ASTM D1785-76. d. PVC Pipe and Fittings: Standard and perforated PVC pipe and fittings conforming to ASTM D2729 sewer piping or D2665 DWV piping. e. Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings: Ductile iron pipe and fittings shall conform to all requirements of AWWA C 151 and C 111 and shall be equivalent to a class 150 pipe. f. High Density Polyethylene Pipe (HDPE): High Density Polyethylene double wall pipe and fittings conforming to all requirements of ASTM F 2698;ADS N-12 or equivalent. B. Joints 1. Reinforced Concrete Pipe Jointing Materials: Jointing material shall be either a plastic type joint or cement grouted joint. Where cement grouted joints are specified, the RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 33 42 13-2 STORMWATER CULVERTS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents Contractor may, at his expense, substitute plastic type joints after review by the Engineer. a. Rubber Gasket Joints: Where rubber gasket pipe joints are required,the joint assembly shall be made according to the recommendations of the gasket manufacturer. Water tight joints will be required when using rubber gaskets. b. Plastic Joints: Plastic joints for reinforced concrete culvert pipe of all kinds shall meet the requirements covered in either Paragraph (13)(b) or Paragraph (13)(d), Section 464.2, of Item 464, "Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culverts", of the Texas Department of Transportation Standard Specifications. c. Cement Mortar Grouted Joints: Pipe joints shall be made with Portland Cement Mortar. All joints of concrete pipe shall be filled with stiff mortar composed of one part Portland Cement and not more than two parts sand. The mortar shall be used within 30 minutes from the time that the ingredients are mixed with water. d. Diaper Bands: Diaper bands shall be placed at every joint when the pipe is laid on a curve. Gauze or cloth fabric bands top hold grout in place at joints shall be made and used as follows: 1) The fabric bands shall be cut into such lengths that they will extend the full circumference of the pipe. The longitudinal edges of fabric bands shall be rolled and stitched around two (2) pieces of wire. The width of the fabric bands shall be such that after being filled with mortar, a band will be formed. The wires shall be cut into such lengths that they pass around the pipe with sufficient extra length for the ends to be twisted at the top of the pipe to hold the fabric securely in place, and shall be accurately centered around the joint. 2. PVC Joints: Materials and methods shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 2.02 BEDDING AND COVER MATERIALS A. Bedding: As specified in Section 31 2316.13. B. Cover: As specified in Section 31 2316.13. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Filter Fabric: Non-biodegradable, woven. B. Fill at Pipe Ends: Riprap as specified in Section 313700. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATING A. All excavation shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 31 2316.13 and 31 2316.14 except where tunneling or jacking methods are shown on the plans or permitted by the Engineer.The Contractor shall make such temporary provision as may be necessary to insure adequate drainage of the trench and bedding during the construction operation. 3.02 INSTALLATION - PIPE A. Verify that trench cut is ready to receive work and excavations, dimensions, and elevations are as indicated on layout drawings. B. Install pipe and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions C. Lift or roll pipe into position. Do not drop or drag pipe over prepared bedding. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 33 42 13-3 STORMWATER CULVERTS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents D. Shore pipe to required position; retain in place until after compaction of adjacent fills. Ensure pipe remains in correct position and to required slope. E. Repair surface damage to pipe protective coating with two coats of compatible bituminous paint coating. F. Install culvert end gratings. 3.03 JOINTING A. Reinforced Concrete Pipe 1. Application of the jointing material and construction methods recommended by the manufacturer shall be strictly adhered to. 2. Rubber Gasket Joints: a. Rubber gasket joints shall be made with materials specifically intended for the purpose intended and installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Plastic Joints: a. Plastic joints shall be made with Cold Applied Plastic Asphalt Sewer Joint Compound of Cold Applied Preformed Plastic Gaskets meeting the requirements as set forth earlier in these sections. 4. Mortar Joints: a. All pipe shall be joined tight and sealed with stiff mortar, composed of one part Portland and not more than two parts sand, so placed as to form a durable water tight joint. b. The ends of the pipe shall be cleaned thoroughly and wetted before making the joint. c. After any section of pipe is laid an even layer of mortar shall be thoroughly troweled onto the lower half of the bell or groove of the last laid section. d. Mortar shall be applied to the upper portion of the tongue or spigot of the pipe section being laid. The spigot or tongue end of the next section of pipe shall then be inserted and the joint pulled up tight, taking care that the inner surfaces of the abutting pipe sections are flush and even. e. After the section is laid and uniformly matched and fitted as close as the construction of the pipe will permit,the lower half of the inner circumference of the joints shall be sealed and packed with mortar and finished smooth and even with the adjacent section of pipe. f. Before this mortar has attained initial set, additional mortar then shall be applied from the outside and forced into the unfilled portion of the bell or groove to fill completely the annular space around the spigot or tongue. g. For bell and spigot pipe, a bead shall be formed on the outside by troweling on mortar downward at an angle of 45 degrees from the outer edge of the bell to the spigot of the last laid section. h. For tongue and groove pipe, a bead shall be formed extending at least 1 inch on either side of the joint and of approximately semi-circular cross-section. i. After the initial set, the mortar on the outside shall be protected from air and sun with thoroughly wetted earth or burlap cover or acceptable equivalent, and shall be kept wet for a minimum of 48 hours or until the backfill has been completed. No jointing shall be done when the atmospheric temperature is at or below 407, and when necessary, because of a sudden drop in temperature,joints shall be protected against freezing for at least 24 hours. RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 33 42 13-4 STORMWATER CULVERTS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents 5. Diaper Bands: a. After diaper bands have been secured in place,grout, composed of one (1) part Portland Cement and not more than two (2) parts sand, shall be poured between the gauze band and the pipe,to insure a thorough sealing of the joint. b. The completed joints shall immediately be protected from the air and sun with proper covering and shall be kept protected for such period as necessary to secure satisfactory curing of the mortar. c. The placing of this type joint shall be kept at least five joints behind the actual laying of the pipe. d. No backfilling around joints shall be done until the joints have cured for a minimum of 24 hours. B. PVC Pipe 1. PVC pipe less than six inches (6") in diameter shall be joined with PVC solvent cement conforming to ASTM D 2564, or manufacturer's recommendations. 2. PVC pipe six inches (6") in diameter and larger shall be joined with gasket type connections in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation. C. HDPE Pipe 1. Shall be joined with gasket type connections in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.04 PIPE ENDS A. Place fill at pipe ends, at embankment slopes. 3.05 TOLERANCES A. Lay pipe to alignment and slope gradients noted on layout drawings; with maximum variation from true slope of 1/8 inch in 10 feet. B. Maximum Variation From Intended Elevation of Culvert Invert: 1/4 inch. C. Maximum Offset of Pipe From True Alignment: 1 inch. D. Maximum Variation in Profile of Structure From Intended Position: 0.25 percent. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect pipe and bedding from damage or displacement until backfilling operation is in progress. 3.07 BACKFILL A. After the pipe has been placed, bedded, and jointed as specified filling and/or backfilling shall be done in accordance with the requirements of Section 31 2316.13 -Trenching. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.C-City of Corpus Christi 33 42 13-5 STORMWATER CULVERTS 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop Re-Bid Construction Documents SECTION 41 22 13.13 SINGLE GIRDER BRIDGE CRANE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Single Girder Bridge Crane and Rail Assembly. 2. Designing, manufacturing, shipping, installation and field testing of a complete bridge crane as described in this specification. 3. System components are to include, but not limited to the following: a. Bridge girder b. End trucks with drives and associated motors, bumpers, limit switches. c. Hoist and trolley and associated motors. d. Controls e. Power supply, cross bridge and runway electrification. f. Rails as indicated. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design Criteria: 1. To ensure long term availability and reasonability for crane parts, ALL crane components shall be of ONE major recognized brand from one OEM source. OEM source must be a CMAA/ HMI member. 2. Crane design, including stress limitations, factors of safety, bearing life and contactor rating, shall be in accordance with applicable provisions of CMAA specification #74/2015, Class C (moderate service). 3. Equipment shall be in accordance with all safety features required by OSHA standards and NEC. 4. Components of each top running bridge single girder crane shall be designed for the capacity indicated. 5. Crane rail length, hook and trolley travel limits shall be coordinated with the plans and as specified herein. B. Factory Test: Hoist shall be factory load tested. Equipment shall be fully assembled, subjected to no-load running tests and dismantled only as required to facilitate shipment. C. Manufacturer shall have documented experience for ten (10)years, having successfully de- signed and built installations of similar scope. D. Manufacturer's Representative for Startup and Testing: The services of the Manufacturer's technical representative shall be provided for installation checks, startup start-up and commissioning of the crane. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: AGMA American Gear Manufacturer's Association ANSI B30.16 Safety Code for Overhead Hoists ANSI B30.2 American National Standards Institute— Cranes ASTM American Society of Testing and Materials AWS American Welding Society CMAA Spec. #70 Crane Manufacturer's Association of America NEC National Electrical Code 500 RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 41 22 13.13- 1 Single Girder Bridge Crane Re-Bid Construction Documents NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association OSHA Section 1910.179 Overhead and Gantry Cranes 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: For each type of structural, mechanical and electrical product which is a component of the crane. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Include General Arrangement drawing in plan and elevation view a. Include details of equipment, indicate dimensions, weight, wheel loads and required clearances 2. Electrical component descriptions including runway electrification system and electrical power and control schematics B. Test Results: Factory Acceptance Test Report, and Site Acceptance Test Upon final commissioning. 1.02 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard 2-year warranty against defects in materials and workmanship. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE AND QUALITY REQUIREMENTS A. Single Girder Bridge Crane and Rail Assembly shall be designed and manufactured by a company with a minimum of 10 years of specialized experience in designing and manufacturing the type of overhead crane required. B. Pre-Delivery Inspection: Perform manufacturer's standard quality control inspection, testing and documentation of steel fabrications and castings and hook assembly and submit data recorded on appropriate test record forms suitable for retention for the life of the crane. 2.02 SINGLE GIRDER BRIDGE CRANE A. Crane Technical Data: 1. Type: Single girder crane 2. Capacity Crane: 20,000 Ibs 3. Span: 45'-4" 4. Duty Group Steel Structure: CMAA Class C 5. Crane weight with hoist: 10,495 Ibs 6. Structure Finishing: Yellow Epoxy Paint 7. Crane Voltage: Ph /460 V/60 Hz, 115 V Contral 8. Hoist: Duty Group hoist; ISO M5 9. Hoist: Lifting height; 14'- 1 5/8"from floor to hook 10. Hoist Reeving type: True lift 11. Hoisting speed: 20/3.2 ft/min 2—speed 12. Bridge traveling speed: 100 ft/min VFD B. Installation and Transportation 1. Crane design 2. Crane factory test and in-house quality control 3. Packing and loading on truck in crane factory 4. Measuring the building dimensions 5. Transportation of crane to site 6. Crane installation 7. Crane commissioning RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 41 22 13.13-2 Single Girder Bridge Crane Re-Bid Construction Documents C. Crane to be controlled with Pendant control— Freely movable along crane girders. D. Crane Girders to be manufactured from hot rolled wide flange profile sections or welded from certified steel plates to form a BOX type girder. The vertical deflection due to maximum load (SWL)to be better than stated by national standards. Before welding, all material is carefully inspected and cleaned. Welding to be done with automatic or semiautomatic welding machines. Assemble in special assembly jigs that properly align the crane. E. Hoisting motor, gearbox and drum to form a compact and sturdy package offering efficient use of floor space under the crane. Machinery to have smooth and silent operation. Hoisting motor to be located inside the drum to minimize the hoists outside dimensions and to increase the cooling effect of the hoisting motor. Enclose hoist housing to protect the rope drum, rope guide and limit switch equipment from dirt and climatic conditions. Paint hoist and trolley frame with epoxy paint. F. Crane and Hoist features and performance typical to the specified model of crane are made a part of this product's specification. This includes gearing; trolley and hoist motors; brakes; rope drum, rope guide and pulleys; limit switches and buffers; overload protection; control unit; hook blocks; end carriages; electrification system and features; certification compliances; labeling and placarding. 2.03 BRIDGE A. The crane bridge shall consist of a single steel girder carried by end trucks. The girder construction shall either by rolled structural shapes or fabricated type sections with reinforcing and stiffeners as required by design. B. Bridge shall be designed/rated for indoor use. 2.04 END TRUCKS A. The end trucks shall be designed. The trucks shall be precision bored or otherwise assembled to provide perfect alignment of wheel bearing assemblies. The wheels shall be centrally located in each truck to distribute equal loading to each truck side. B. Bumpers shall be installed at each end of the end trucks. These bumpers shall operate against the runway stops which shall be furnished with the crane. Rail sweeps shall be provided in front of bridge wheels. 2.05 WHEEL AND AXLES A. Bridge wheels shall be forged and flame hardened or rim-toughened spheroidal cast work hardened steel and shall be machined to an accuracy meeting CMAA requirements. B. Bridge drive to be rotating axle type precision splined fit. Gears shall be AGMA quality class 10 helical or spur type hardened and precision ground. Horsepower ratings shall be in accordance with AGMA Standards, as described in CMAA specifications. C. Bearing shall be combined radial and thrust type, signle row, spherical ball bearings, either pre- lubricated and sealed, or fitted for pressure lubrication. D. Bridge brakes shall be electrically operated, adjustable, suitable for the service class indicated, and shall have rated torque capacities as specified in CMAA specifications. 2.06 TROLLEY SPECIFICATIONS A. Trolley drive to be rotating axle type precision splined fit. Gears shall be AGMA quality class 10 helical or spur type hardened and precision ground. Horsepower ratings shall be in accordance with AGMA Standards, as described in CMAA Specifications. Wheels shall be forged and flame hardened or rim-toughened spheroidal cast work hardened steel and shall be machined to an accuracy meeting CMAA requirements. Clearances, wheel loads, and the Manufacturer's tolerances shall be in accordance with CMAA Specifications. B. Bearings shall be combined radial and thrust type, single-row, spherical ball bearings. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 41 22 13.13-3 Single Girder Bridge Crane Re-Bid Construction Documents 2.07 HOIST A. Hoists shall be top running single girder electric, wire rope type, as specified herein. B. The hoisting machinery shall consist of a rope drum, driven through suitable gear reductions by an electric motor operator, load blocks, hooks, hoisting rope, sheaves, and hoist braking. C. Hoist bearings and gears shall be lubricated by semi-fluid grease or oil, and bearings selected to provide a B-10 life to equal or exceed CMAA requirements. D. Hoist gearing shall be helical or spur type made AGMA quality class 12 machine cut teeth. Pin- ions shall be made from alloy steel and shall be heat-treated. E. The hoist drum shall be cast or welded steel, grooved to take the full length of each cable in one layer. At least two wraps of rope shall remain on the drum when the bottom block is in the lowest position. Standard use in application for TRUE lift(less than 1/8" horizontal travel per ft. of lift. F. The diameter of the rope drums shall not be less than 24 times the diameter of the hoisting cable which shall be extra flexible improved plow steel. Groove depth shall be at least 35% of rope diameter. See Special Note 2. Regarding wire ropes. G. The load block shall be furnished with ball or roller bearing sheaves and a roller type hook thrust bearing. Hook block sheaves and running sheaves shall be rolled or forged steel, furnished with anti-friction type bearings. Pitch diameter of the running sheaves to be minimum 24 times the rope diameter. H. Hooks shall have sufficient ductility to open noticeably before hook failure as a result of abuse or overload. The load hook shall be equipped with safety latch and shall be free to rotate 360 degrees with rated load, and shall be positively held in place with locknuts, collars, or other suitable devices. I. A mainline three pole fused safety type disconnect switch per NEC 610 shall be provided on the bridge panel. In addition, a mainline contactor shall be furnished which will cut all power circuits to the crane. The contactor is to be operable from the pendant. The mainline contactor shall also provide low voltage protection for the crane. J. Bridge, trolley, and hoist motions shall be controlled from a pushbutton station, meeting NEC 610, festooned and suspended from a track running the full length of the bridge permitting operation from any point along the span independent of trolley location. Flat multi-conductor cables shall be suspended from ball bearing trolleys with swiveling hangers and support brackets to prevent sharp bends. K. A control circuit, rotary cam type limit switch with 4 micro switches shall provide upper and lower limit of hoist travel, slow down prior to reaching upper limit and phase supervision at up- per limit shall be provided. L. Hoist name plate is to carry a CSA c/us rating. 2.08 BRAKES A. The hoist shall have a DC type disc brake adequate torque to stop and hold over 125% of rated load. B. Use of any type of device that can limit duty cycle, add heat and foul lubrication, such as brake or lining clutch device mounted in hoist gear box i.e. Weston Type (Basis of Design) or other mechanical load brake is NOT acceptable. C. The bridge and trolley shall be provided with disc brakes with a 75 percent torque rating on the bridge and a 75 percent torque rating on the trolley RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 41 22 13.13-4 Single Girder Bridge Crane Re-Bid Construction Documents 2.09 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. The electrical equipment shall be furnished in accordance with the applicable requirements of Article 610 of the latest issue of the National Electrical Code. B. Motors shall be squirrel-cage type and shall be built in accordance with IEC Standards, class F insulation rated for 40 or 60% ED ratings, with temperature rise in accordance with the latest IEC & NEC Standards for the class of insulation and enclosure used, and shall be provided with anti-friction bearings. Squirrel-cage motors shall high starting torque, low starting current and high slip at full load. Overload relays shall be provided for motors. C. Festooned flat cable conductors shall consist of flexible conductor cable, to meet the requirements of NEC article 610 D. Grounding on the equipment and provisions for grounding the equipment to external grounding systems shall be in accordance with the requirements of the NEC and state and local regulations. E. Electric cranes shall be equipped with a pendant control having 2 step momentary contact pushbuttons. Electric cranes shall be equipped with a pendant control having 2 step momentary contact pushbuttons. Under voltage protection shall be provided as a function of each motor controller, or by a magnetic main line contactor. Hosting Controls shall be fully magnetic of the plain reversing type, 2 speed. Trolley and Bridge traversing controls shall be VFD controlled. Provide control transformers to supply 115 volts AC to the pushbutton control stations. The pushbutton control stations shall be of heavy duty, oil-tight construction and suspended from the bridge supported on trolleys carried on galvanized C track full length of bridge. The control station shall contain pushbuttons for control of the crane, hoist, and trolley and an ON/OFF switch to operate a main line contactor which shall remove all power from the control station. 2.10 CRANE INTERCONNECTION WIRING A. The crane shall be wired in accordance with Article 610 of the latest issue of the National Electric Code. Bridge conductors shall be festooned type using top quality and proper- ly sized flat multi-conductor cables. Cables shall be supported from trolleys by means of hangers and brackets which prevent sharp cable bends. 2.11 RUNWAY ASCE RAIL A. Rail to be new ASCE rail as sized by crane manufacturer and supplied with hook bolt attachments to accommodate runway structure as designed and installed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide installation by a qualified installer who has been successfully trained in the Manufacturer's contractor training course and who is familiar with all available installation instructions. Employ licensed electricians to install electrical connections within the crane assembly and to the building's electrical system. B. Inspect structure and rail erection for conformance with reviewed shop drawings and contract documents prior to installation of equipment. Non-conforming runway structure or installation must be corrected prior to load testing of the crane. C. Bridge crane shall be installed in strict accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations and as indicated on the plans. D. Maintain an ongoing checklist of installation conformance points indicating conformance with Manufacturer's installation requirements throughout the installation process. E. Handle the crane components in accordance with the applicable provisions of the manufacturer's installation instructions and procedure. Install the crane in accordance with all locally applicable codes, ordinances and standards typically applied to work of this nature. RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 41 22 13.13-5 Single Girder Bridge Crane Re-Bid Construction Documents F. The crane shall be provided with the necessary lubrication. Before initial startup at final installation, lubricate bearings, gears, etc., in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations. G. Upon completion of crane installation, commission crane in accordance with the applicable provisions of the manufacturer's installation instructions and procedure, and provide Owner with written instruction manual. END OF SECTION RVK 21270.0-City of Corpus Christi 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 41 22 13.13-6 Single Girder Bridge Crane Re-Bid Construction Documents APPENDIX 1 Greenwood Wastewater Treatment Plant - Proposed Building Geotechnical Engineering Report March 11, 2024 1 Terracon Project No. CD245000 Prepared for: City of Corpus Christi 1201 Leopard Street Corpus Christi, Texas 78401 ierracon Explore with us Nationwide ' Facilities ■ Environmental ■ Geotechnical Terracon.com ■ Materials Wrerracon 3606 WOW Road Corpus Christi, TX 78413 P (361) 420-6023 Terracon.com March 11, 2024 City of Corpus Christi 1201 Leopard Street Corpus Christi, Texas 78401 Attn: Mr. Brent McClanahan E.I.T. Re: Geotechnical Engineering Report Greenwood Wastewater Treatment Plant — Proposed Building Greenwood Drive and Saratoga Corpus Christi, Texas Terracon Project No. CD245000 Dear Mr. McClanahan: We have completed the scope of Geotechnical Engineering services for the above referenced project in general accordance with Terracon Proposal No. PCD245000, dated January 23, 2024. This report presents the findings of the subsurface exploration and provides geotechnical recommendations concerning the design and construction of a new wastewater treatment building. We appreciate the opportunity to work with you on this project and look forward to contributing to the ongoing success of this project by providing Materials Testing services during construction. If you have any questions concerning this report, or if we may be of further service, please contact us Sincerely, Terracon (Firm Registration No. F3272) titttiil Luke E. Kingsbury Gregory P. Stiff*:', ...�...........................l Senior Project Manager Senior Cor sult} EGORY IEBEN r 1............................... 59536 l •.;Af' �..r I�i°• Jronn,entRp&JdQ�f rl�is 1 WaY9s 0 5 09:04 CDT) Geotechnical Engineering Report y� Greenwood Wastewater Treatment Plant - Proposed Building I Corpus Christi, Texas ■erracon March 11, 2024 1 Terracon Project No. CD245D00 Table of Contents Introduction.................................................................................................... 1 ProjectDescription.......................................................................................... 1 SiteConditions................................................................................................ 2 Geotechnical Characterization ......................................................................... 2 Subsurface Conditions ............................................................................... 2 Groundwater Conditions............................................................................. 3 SeismicSite Class............................................................................................ 3 GeotechnicalOverview .................................................................................... 4 ExpansionPotential................................................................................... 4 Earthwork....................................................................................................... 4 General Site Preparation ............................................................................ 4 Slab on Grade Pad Preparation.................................................................... 5 FillMaterial Types..................................................................................... 6 Fill Placement and Compaction Requirements ................................................ 7 Grading and Drainage................................................................................ 7 Earthwork Construction Considerations ........................................................ 7 ShallowFoundations ....................................................................................... 8 Slabon Grade .......................................................................................... 8 Foundation Construction Considerations ....................................................... 9 DeepFoundations.......................................................................................... 10 Drilled Piers Design .................................................................................. 10 Drilled Pier Construction Considerations ...................................................... 12 GradeBeams .......................................................................................... 14 Pavements .................................................................................................... 14 Subgrade Preparation ............................................................................... 14 Design Recommendations ......................................................................... 14 Pavement Section Materials....................................................................... 16 Pavement Joints and Reinforcement............................................................ 17 GeneralComments ........................................................................................ 20 Attachments Exploration and Testing Procedures Site Location and Exploration Plans Exploration and Laboratory Results Supporting Information Facilities i Environmental i Geotechnical i Materials i Geotechnical Engineering Report y� Greenwood Wastewater Treatment Plant - Proposed Building I Corpus Christi, Texas ■erracon March 11, 2024 1 Terracon Project No. CD245000 Introduction This report presents the results of our subsurface exploration and Geotechnical Engineering services performed for the wastewater treatment plant building to be located near the intersection of Greenwood Drive and Saratoga in Corpus Christi, Texas. The purpose of these services was to provide information and geotechnical engineering recommendations relative to: ■ Subsurface soil conditions ■ Groundwater conditions ■ Seismic site classification per IBC ■ Site preparation and earthwork ® Foundation design and construction The Geotechnical Engineering Scope of Services for this project included drilling, laboratory testing, engineering analysis, and preparation of this report. The field program for this project included the advancement of five (5) test borings two of which were drilled to a depth of about 30 feet below existing site grade and three (3) of which were drilled to approximately 5 feet below existing site grade. Drawings showing the site and boring locations are shown on the and exploration Plar, respectively. The results of the laboratory testing performed on soil samples obtained from the site during our field exploration are included on the boring logs and separate graphs in the Exploration Results section. Project Description Our final understanding of the project conditions is as follows: Item Description An email request for this proposal was provided by Mr. McClanahan on January 16, 2024. The request included a Project general location of the project stating that a wastewater Description treatment plant building of approximately 11,000 S.F. of conditioned space and 5,000 S.F. of non-conditioned space will be built on site. A detailed site plan was not available. Proposed Structures associated with the project include 16,000 square foot Structure building structure. racilities i Environmental i Geotechnical i Materials Geotechnical Engineering Report y� Greenwood Wastewater Treatment Plant - Proposed Building I Corpus Christi, Texas ■erracon March 11, 2024 1 Terracon Project No. CD245000 Item Description Building We anticipate that the addition will be constructed as a pre- Construction engineered metal building that may be supported on a slab on grade or on drilled shafts, of unspecified loading. A preferred pavement surfacing has not been identified to us as part of the preliminary information. Asphalt surfacing is common Pavements in the area for projects of this nature and is the assumed preference. However, consideration will also be given to concrete pavement. Terracon should be notified if any of the above information is inconsistent with the planned construction, as modifications to our recommendations may be necessary. Site Conditions The following description of site conditions is derived from our site visit in association with the field exploration and our review of publicly available geologic and topographic maps. Item Description Parcel The project is located at Greenwood Drive and Saratoga in Information Corpus Christi, Texas on approximately 14 acres. 27.7163960 / -97.4584280 (See Exhibit D) See Site Location Existing The site is adjacent to the existing wastewater treatment facility. Improvements Current Ground Soil, some grass and light brush. Cover Geotechnical Characterization Subsurface Conditions We have developed a general characterization of the subsurface conditions based upon our review of the subsurface exploration, laboratory data, geologic setting and our understanding of the project. As part of our analyses, we identified the following soil types within the subsurface profile. Facilities I Environmental I Geotechnical I Materials 2 Geotechnical Engineering Report y� Greenwood Wastewater Treatment Plant - Proposed Building I Corpus Christi, Texas ■erracon March 11, 2024 1 Terracon Project No. CD245000 No Soil Type General Description 1 Sandy Lean Clay, Lean Light Brown, Brown to Yellowish Brown, Clay' Gray, Tan; Medium Stiff to Hard 2 Fat Clay, Sandy Fat Clayz Tan and Light Gray; Stiff to Very Stiff, Hard 3 Silty Sandi Yellow brown to light gray; Medium Dense 1/ The SANDY LEAN CLAY, LEAN CLAY materials could undergo low to moderate volumetric changes (shrink/swell) should they experience changes in their in-place moisture content. 2/ The FAT CLAY, SANDY FAT CLAY materials could undergo high volumetric changes (shrink/swell) should they experience changes in their in-place moisture content. 3/ The SILTY SAND materials are considered volumetrically stable with regards to change in moisture content due to their granular nature. These strata are typically water bearing and prone to sloughing. The individual logs can be found in the Exploration Results section of this report. It should be emphasized the stratification boundaries on the boring logs represent the approximate location of changes in native soil types; in situ, the transition between materials may be gradual. Groundwater Conditions The borings were advanced to the required depths using dry drilling techniques to evaluate groundwater conditions at the time of our field program. The boreholes were observed for the presence of groundwater during and after completion of drilling. Groundwater was observed at a depth of 22 feet in boring B-1 and 28 feet in boring B-2. Seasonal variations such as amount of rainfall and runoff, climatic conditions and other factors generally result in fluctuations of the groundwater level over time. A relatively long period may be necessary for groundwater level to develop and stabilize in a borehole. Therefore, groundwater levels during construction or at other times in the life of the structure may be higher or lower than the levels indicated on the boring logs. The foundation contractor should check the groundwater conditions just before foundation excavation activities. Seismic Site Class Site Classification is required to determine the Seismic Design Category for a structure. The Site Classification is based on the upper 100 feet of the site profile defined by a weighted average value of either shear wave velocity, standard penetration resistance, or undrained shear strength in accordance with 1613.2.2 in the 2021 IBC and Table 20.3-1 in the 2016 ASCE-7. Based on the soil properties observed at the site and as described on the exploration logs and results, our professional opinion is for that a Seismic Site Facilities i Environmental i Geotechnical i Materials Geotechnical Engineering Report y� Greenwood Wastewater Treatment Plant - Proposed Building I Corpus Christi, Texas ■erracon March 11, 2024 1 Terracon Project No. CD245000 Classification of D be considered for the project. Subsurface explorations at this site were extended to a maximum depth of 30 feet. The site properties below the boring depth to 100 feet were estimated based on our experience and knowledge of geologic conditions of the general area. Geotech n ica I Overview The foundations being considered must satisfy two independent engineering criteria with respect to the subsurface conditions encountered at this site. One criterion is the foundation system must be designed with an appropriate factor of safety to reduce the possibility of a bearing capacity failure of the soils underlying the foundation when subjected to axial and lateral load conditions. The other criterion is that the movement of the foundation system due to compression (consolidation or shrinkage) or expansion (swell) of the underlying soils must be within tolerable limits. Expansion Potential Based on our findings, the near-surface soils at this site generally exhibit moderate to moderately high shrink/swell potential and are underlain by soils with a low to moderate shrink/swell potential. Based on the information developed from our field and laboratory programs and on method TEX-124-E of the Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Manual of Testing Procedures, we estimate that the subgrade soils at this site exhibit a Potential Vertical Rise (PVR) in the range of 3 to 31/2 inches in their present condition. This PVR value should be considered in the design of slab on grade foundations and spread footings. It should be emphasized that the actual movements could be greater than the values presented in this report because of inadequate drainage, ponded water and moisture infiltration beneath the structures after construction. Earthwork Earthwork is anticipated to include clearing and grubbing, excavations, and engineered fill placement. The following sections provide recommendations for use in the preparation of specifications for the work. Recommendations include critical quality criteria, as necessary, to render the site in the state considered in our geotechnical engineering evaluation for foundations, and pavements. General Site Preparation Prior to construction, the work area should be cleared off loose topsoil and any otherwise unsuitable materials. After stripping and grubbing, the exposed subgrade should be proof- rolled where possible to aid in locating loose or soft areas. Proof-rolling can be performed with a fully loaded dump truck or comparable pneumatic tired vehicle. Soils that are racilities i Environmental i Geotechnical i Materials Geotechnical Engineering Report y� Greenwood Wastewater Treatment Plant - Proposed Building I Corpus Christi, Texas ■erracon March 11, 2024 1 Terracon Project No. CD245000 observed to rut or deflect excessively (typically greater than 1-inch) under the moving load should be overexcavated to provide a firm, uniform bearing layer. The proof rolling and overexcavation activities should be witnessed by a representative of the Geotechnical Engineer and should be performed during a period of dry weather. Subgrade stabilization may also be performed as described below if the exposed subgrade exhibits yielding or pumping under construction traffic. ■ Removal and replacement with select fill. ■ Chemical treatment of the soil to dry and increase the stability of the subgrade. ■ Drying by natural means if the schedule allows. Slab on Grade Pad Preparation The following pad preparation recommendations should be performed for the proposed tank prior to foundation construction. As previously mentioned, the existing PVR at this site is about 3 to 31/2 inch. Recommendations for at-grade pad preparation to reduce the PVR to about 1 inch and provide uniform support to the grade supported slabs and flatwork for this project site are provided in the following sections. ■ After completing stripping operations as discussed in the Site Preparation section, excavate about 5 feet of the onsite soil from the pad area. The pad area is defined as the area that extends at least 3 feet (horizontal) beyond the perimeter of the proposed and to the outside edge of any movement sensitive flatwork. The limits of the pad should be indicated on the drawings for the project. ■ After excavating to the depth specified above, the exposed subgrade should be proof rolled with a fully loaded dump or water truck to evidence any weak yielding zones. A Terracon geotechnical engineer or their representative should be present to observe proof rolling operations. Hand probe if too small to proof-roll. ■ Over-excavate any confirmed weak yielding zones, both vertically and horizontally, to expose competent soil. The exposed subgrade should be moisture conditioned between 0 and +4 percentage points of the optimum moisture content and then compact to at least 95 percent of the maximum dry density determined in accordance with ASTM D 698. ■ After proof-rolling or probing and the replacement of weak yielding zones, place of select fill as needed to achieve the Finished Pad Elevation (FPE). The onsite soil should be placed in loose lifts of about 8 inches and compacted thickness not exceeding 6 inches. The select fill should be moisture conditioned between -2 and +3 percentage points of the optimum moisture content and then compacted to at least 95 percent of the maximum dry density determined in accordance with ASTM D 698. Facilities i Environmental i Geotechnical i Materials Geotechnical Engineering Report y� Greenwood Wastewater Treatment Plant - Proposed Building I Corpus Christi, Texas ■erracon March 11, 2024 1 Terracon Project No. CD245DD0 ■ If additional fill is necessary to raise grade, we recommend it consist of a compacted select fill. ■ We recommend the upper 6 inches of the pad be constructed with a granular select fill cap to provide an all-weather surface course. This layer is to provide a working surface during wet weather conditions. ■ This method should result in 5 feet of compacted select fill beneath the grade supported mat. Details regarding select fill materials, placement and compaction are presented in the following sections Fill Material Types and Fill Compaction Requirements. Fill Material Types Fill required to achieve design grade should be classified as Select Fill and General Fill. Material property requirements for General Fill and Select Fill are noted in the table below: Fill Type USCS Classification Comments CL, SC Select Fill ➢ LL:540 and 7<PI:520 Note 1 passing #200 sieve >_35% Maximum particle size 11/2" General Fill (Onsite Soils) GC, CL, SC, CH Note 2 1/Prior to any filling operations, samples of the proposed Select Fill and on-site materials should be obtained for laboratory moisture-density testing. The tests will provide a basis for evaluation of fill compaction by in-place density testing. A qualified soil technician should perform sufficient in-place density tests during the filling operations to ensure that proper levels of compaction, including dry unit weight and moisture content are attained. 2/ Onsite CL and SC soils can be used as Select Fill if they meet the criteria of Select Fill. The onsite soils, if selected to be used as Select Fill, should be stockpiled and tested prior to their use. Facilities i Environmental i Geotechnical i Materials 6 Geotechnical Engineering Report y� Greenwood Wastewater Treatment Plant - Proposed Building I Corpus Christi, Texas ■erracon March 11, 2024 1 Terracon Project No. CD245000 Fill Placement and Compaction Requirements Structural and general fill should meet the following compaction requirements. Item Structural Fill All fill should be placed in thin, loose lifts of about Fill Lift Thickness 8 inches, with compacted thickness not exceeding 6 inches. Compaction of On-Site Soil 95 percent of the material's Standard Proctor and Select Fill maximum dry density (ASTM D 698) Moisture Content of On-Site Between -2 and +3 percentage points of the optimum Soil and Select Fill moisture content. Grading and Drainage Effective drainage should be provided during construction and maintained throughout the life of the new improvements. After pad construction, we recommend verifying final grades to document that effective drainage has been achieved. Grades around the structure should also be periodically inspected and adjusted as necessary, as part of the structure's maintenance program. Proper site drainage should be maintained during the entire construction phase so that ponding of surface runoff does not occur and cause construction delays and/or inhibit site access, particularly in cut areas. During construction, it is possible that the surficial soils may become excessively wet because of inclement weather conditions. When the moisture content of these clay soils elevates above what is considered to be the optimum range of moisture for compaction operations, they can become difficult to handle and compact. If such conditions create a hindrance to compaction operations or site access, lime or cement may be mixed with these soils to improve their workability. The additive can be mixed as per 2014 TxDOT Item 260 and Item 264 (lime). The subgrade should be tested for sulfates prior to the use of lime or cement. The purpose of the additive is to dry out the subgrade and improve sire access. The strict requirements for curing and actual quantity of additive can be at the discretion of the contractor. Earthwork Construction Considerations It is anticipated that excavations for the proposed construction can be accomplished with conventional earthmoving equipment. Based upon the subsurface conditions determined from the geotechnical exploration, subgrade soils exposed during construction are anticipated to be relatively stable. However, the stability of the subgrade may be affected by precipitation, repetitive construction traffic or other factors. If conditions develop, workability may be improved by scarifying and drying. Facilities i Environmental i Geotechnical i Materials Geotechnical Engineering Report y� Greenwood Wastewater Treatment Plant - Proposed Building I Corpus Christi, Texas ■erracon March 11, 2024 1 Terracon Project No. CD245000 Upon completion of filling and grading, care should be taken to maintain the subgrade water content prior to construction of foundation elements and pavements. Construction traffic over the completed subgrades should be avoided. The site should also be graded to prevent ponding of surface water on the prepared subgrades or in excavations. Water collecting over or adjacent to construction areas should be removed. If the subgrade freezes, desiccates, saturates, or is disturbed, the affected material should be removed, or the materials should be scarified, moisture conditioned, and recompacted prior to construction. As a minimum, excavations should be performed in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR, Part 1926, Subpart P, "Excavations" and its appendices, and in accordance with any applicable local, and/or state regulations. Construction site safety is the sole responsibility of the contractor who controls the means, methods, and sequencing of construction operations. Under no circumstances shall the information provided herein be interpreted to mean Terracon is assuming responsibility for construction site safety, or the contractor's activities; such responsibility shall neither be implied nor inferred. Shallow Foundations If the site has been prepared in accordance with the requirements noted in , the following design parameters are applicable. Slab on Grade Conventional Method Parameters Value Net Allowable Bearing Pressures 1 2,000 psf Subgrade Modulus (k) 90 pci Potential Vertical Rise (PVR) 1 inch WRI Method Parameters Design Plasticity Index (PI) 26 Climatic Rating (Cw) 17 Soil — Climate Support Index (1-C) 0.12 1. The net allowable bearing pressure includes a factor of safety of 3. The allowable bearing pressure may be increased by up to one-third for wind or seismic loads We recommend that exterior grade beams be at least 30 inches below the finished exterior grade. Interior grade beams (If any) should be designed by the Structural Engineer. These recommendations are for a proper development of bearing capacity for the continuous beam sections of the foundation system and to reduce the potential for water to migrate beneath the slab foundation. These recommendations are not based on structural considerations. Grade beam depths may need to be greater than recommended herein for Facilities I Environmental I Geotechnical I Materials _ Geotechnical Engineering Report Greenwood Wastewater Treatment Plant - Proposed Building I Corpus Christi, Texas erracon March 11, 2024 1 Terracon Project No. CD245D00 structural considerations and should be properly evaluated and designed by the Structural Engineer. The grade beams or slab portions may be thickened and widened to serve as spread footings at concentrated load areas. For a slab foundation system designed and constructed as recommended in this report, post construction settlements should be about 1 inch. Settlement response of a select fill supported slab is influenced more by the quality of construction than by soil-structure interaction. Therefore, it is essential that the recommendations for foundation construction be strictly followed during the construction phases of the pad and foundation. The use of a vapor retarder should be considered beneath concrete slabs-on-grade that will be covered with wood, tile, carpet or other moisture sensitive or impervious coverings, or when the slabs will support equipment sensitive to moisture. When conditions warrant the use of a vapor retarder, the slab designer and slab contractor should refer to ACI 302 for procedures and cautions about the use and placement of a vapor retarder. Foundation Construction Considerations As noted in , the grade beam footing excavations should be evaluated under the direction of the Geotechnical Engineer. The base of all foundation excavations should be free of water and loose soil, prior to placing concrete. Concrete should be placed soon after excavating to reduce bearing soil disturbance. Care should be taken to prevent wetting or drying of the bearing materials during construction. Excessively wet or dry material or any loose/disturbed material in the bottom of the footing excavations should be removed/reconditioned before foundation concrete is placed. If unsuitable bearing soils are encountered at the base of the planned footing excavation, the excavation should be extended deeper to suitable soils, and the footings could bear directly on these soils at the lower level or on lean concrete backfill placed in the excavations. This is illustrated on the sketch below. DESIGN FOOTING LEVEL LEAN CONCRETE RECOMMENDED 0 — — — — _III_ EXCAVATION LEVEL -' "'-- LEAN CONCRETE BACKFILL NOTE:EXCAVATIONS ARE SHOWN VERTICAL;HOWEVER,THE SIDEWALLS SHOULD BE SLOPED AS NECESSARY FOR SAFETY Facilities i Environmental Geotechnical Materials Geotechnical Engineering Report y� Greenwood Wastewater Treatment Plant - Proposed Building I Corpus Christi, Texas ■erracon March 11, 2024 1 Terracon Project No. CD245000 Over-excavation for structural fill placement below footings should be conducted as shown below. The over-excavation should be backfilled up to the footing base elevation, with select fill placed, as recommended in the Earthwork section. —I ----7717 i� ZpD .•W... V31) III DESIGN FOOTING LEVEL STRUCTURAL 0 rJ�rl�I�rl FILL III" RECOMMENDED EXCAVATION LEVEL OVER-EXCAVATION/BACKFILL ZONE NOTE:EXCAVATIONS ARE SHOWN VERTICAL;HOWEVER,THE SIDEWALLS SHOULD BE SLOPED AS NECESSARY FOR SAFETY Deep Foundations Drilled Piers Design Drilled piers may be used to support the building columns, light standards, and canopies. Straight-sided Drilled piers should bear at a depth of 18 feet below existing grade. Drilled and underreamed (belled) piers should bear at a depth of 12 feet. Drilled piers may be designed for net allowable bearing pressure of 9,000 psf. This bearing pressure include factor of safety against a bearing capacity failure of approximately 3. An allowable side shear value of 540 psf, with an assumed factor of safety of at least 2, may be used to aid in resisting axial compressive loads on the piers. The side shear should be neglected for the upper 2 feet of soil in contact with the pier shaft. Piers should not extend deeper than 30 feet below the existing grades at the time of our geotechnical field activities without contacting our office. Note that piers extending below the groundwater level will experience installation difficulties. Piers should be designed with a shaft diameter at least 18 inches to facilitate inspection. The allowable end bearing and skin friction values presented in this report are based on center-to-center spacing of the pier foundations no closer than a horizontal distance of three shaft diameters (using the larger bearing diameter). A closer spacing may be considered but may effect (reduce) the axial capacity of the foundation depending on the spacing pattern of the foundations. Terracon can assist in evaluating the possibility of a closer spacing once a foundation layout has been determined. For the straight-sided drilled piers, the uplift force due any axial tension forces due to structural loading conditions can be resisted by the allowable side-shear of the drilled pier. Facilities i Environmental i Geotechnical i Materials Geotechnical Engineering Report y� Greenwood Wastewater Treatment Plant - Proposed Building I Corpus Christi, Texas ■erracon March 11, 2024 1 Terracon Project No. CD245D00 The allowable uplift resistance of the straight sided drilled piers can be evaluated using the following equation: Qar = 3.0 • d • Dp + 0.9Wp + PDL Where: Qar = Allowable uplift resistance of pier in kips (k) d = Diameter of pier shaft in feet (ft) Dip = Founding depth of pier in natural soils minus the upper 2 feet of shaft in contact with the soil in feet (ft) Wp = Weight of the drilled pier in kips (k) PDL = Dead Load acting on the drilled pier in kips (k) The structural engineer may want to factor the dead load value based on their degree of certainty. The allowable uplift resistance of underreamed piers can be evaluated using the following equation: Qr = 4 (D2 — d2) + Wp + PDL Where: Qr = Ultimate uplift resistance of pier in kips (k) d = Diameter of pier shaft in feet (ft) Dp = Founding depth of pier in natural soils minus five (5) feet Wp = Weight of the drilled pier in kips (k) PDL = Dead Load acting on the drilled pier in kips (k) It should be noted that the diameter of the underream should be large enough to overcome the uplift forces induced on the pier without causing a localized soil failure to the soils immediately overlying the underream. For underreamed piers, we recommend that the ratio of underream diameter to shaft diameter be between 2:1 and 3:1 to reduce the likelihood of problems developing during construction. Improper pier installation could result in differential settlements significantly greater than we have estimated. In addition, larger magnitudes of settlement should be expected if the soil is subjected to bearing pressures higher than the allowable values presented in this report. Settlement — For piers, total settlements, based on the indicated bearing pressures, should be about 1 inch or less for properly designed and constructed drilled piers. Settlement beneath individual piers will be primarily elastic with most of the settlement occurring during construction. Differential settlement may also occur between adjacent piers. The amount of differential settlement could approach 50 to 75 percent of the total pier settlement. For properly designed and constructed piers, differential settlement between adjacent piers is estimated to be less than 3/4 of an inch. Settlement response of drilled piers is impacted more by the quality of construction than by soil-structure interaction. Facilities i Environmental i Geotechnical i Materials Geotechnical Engineering Report y� Greenwood Wastewater Treatment Plant - Proposed Building I Corpus Christi, Texas ■erracon March 11, 2024 1 Terracon Project No. CD245000 Lateral Loading - The piers supporting the structures may be subjected to lateral loading. The criteria for lateral load analysis is presented in Table 1 are for use with the computer program LPILE. A number of methods, including hand solutions and computer programs, are available for calculating the lateral behavior of piles and drilled piers. The majority of these methods rely on "key" soil parameters such as soil elastic properties (E and ks), strain at 50 percent of the principal stress difference (cso), undrained shear strength (c), and load-deflection (p-y) criteria. The p-y criteria, which are commonly used to model soil reaction, were developed from instrumented load tests and are generally considered to provide the best model of soil behavior under short-term lateral loading. Alternatively, the lateral resistance may be taken as 300 pcf. Factors of safety are not generally applied to the lateral load analysis. A performance criteria, or "limit state", are usually considered. For most foundations subjected to lateral loads, the pier foundation is designed with a limit of 1 inch of deflection at the top of the pier and 1 degree of rotation as measured from the vertical axis of the pier. The analysis is generally conducted using the working loads and the limit state values. The applied loads are then doubled to evaluate the deflection and rotation at the top of the pier to determine if the foundation will topple over under extreme overload. This overload condition may indicate that the foundation would deflect or rotate such that the tower will tilt but the foundation will not experience failure. Structural limits, such as moment capacity and shear, may control the design and should be evaluated by the Structural Engineer. Drilled Pier Construction Considerations The pier excavations should be augered and constructed in a continuous manner. Steel and concrete should be placed in the pier excavations immediately following drilling and evaluation for proper bearing stratum, embedment, and cleanliness. In no circumstances should the pier excavations remain open overnight. Subsurface water was encountered in the borings at depths of about 22 and 28 feet. Therefore, the contractor should be prepared to use temporary casing or slurry techniques to reduce the water flow into the excavation and/or sloughing of the excavation sidewalls should this occur. The casing and slurry methods are discussed in the following paragraphs. Casing Method- Casing will provide stability of the excavation walls but may not completely eliminate subsurface water influx potential or stability of the pier excavation bottom unless the casing penetrates below any pervious soils. Casing that terminates in pervious soils may generate 'boils" due to the head differential between the inside and outside of the casing and require that the casing be extended until the excess seepage or boils are eliminated. The drilling subcontractor should determine casing depths and casing procedures. Water that accumulates in excess of six (6) inches in the bottom of the pier excavation should be pumped out prior to steel and concrete placement. If the water is not pumped out, a long closed- end tremie should be used to place the concrete completely to the bottom of the pier excavation in a controlled manner to effectively displace the water during Facilities i Environmental i Geotechnical i Materials Geotechnical Engineering Report y� Greenwood Wastewater Treatment Plant - Proposed Building I Corpus Christi, Texas ■erracon March 11, 2024 1 Terracon Project No. CD245DDD concrete placement. If this operation is not successful or to the satisfaction of the foundation contractor and engineer, the pier excavation should be flooded with fresh water to offset the differential water pressure caused by the unbalanced water levels inside and outside of the casing. If water is not a factor, concrete should be placed with a short tremie so that the concrete is directed to the bottom of the pier excavation. The concrete should not be allowed to ricochet off the walls of the pier excavation nor off reinforcing steel. When the pier excavation depth is achieved, and the bearing area has been cleaned, steel and concrete should then be placed immediately in the excavation. Removal of casing should be performed with extreme care and under proper supervision to reduce mixing of the surrounding soil and water with the fresh concrete. Rapid withdrawal of casing or the auger may develop suction that could cause the soil to intrude into the excavation. An insufficient head of concrete in the casing during its withdrawal could also allow the soils to intrude into the wet concrete. Both of these conditions may induce "necking", a section of reduced diameter, in the pier. Slurry Method- As an alternate to the use of casing to install the pier foundations, water or a weighted drilling fluid may be considered. Slurry displacement drilling can only prevent sloughing and water influx but cannot control sloughing once it has occurred. Therefore, slurry displacement drilling techniques must begin at the ground surface, not after sloughing materials are encountered. Typical drilling fluids include those which contain polymers or bentonite. If a polymer is used with "hard" mixing water, a water softening agent may be required to achieve intimate mixing and the appropriate viscosity. The polymer manufacturer should be consulted concerning proper use of the polymer. If bentonite slurry is used, the bentonite should be mixed with water several hours before placing in the pier excavation. Prior mixing gives the bentonite sufficient time to hydrate properly. The drilling fluid should only be of sufficient viscosity to control sloughing of the excavation walls and subsurface water flow into the excavation. Care should be exercised while extracting the auger so that suction does not develop and cause disturbance or create "necking" in the excavation walls as described above. Casing should not be employed in conjunction with the slurry drilling technique due to possible trapping of loose soils and slurry between the concrete and natural soil. The use of weighted drilling fluid when installing drilled pier foundations requires extra effort to ensure an adequate bearing surface is obtained. A clean-out bucket should be used just prior to pier completion in order to remove any cuttings and loose soils which may have accumulated in the bottom of the excavation. Steel and concrete should be placed in the excavation immediately after pier completion. A closed-end tremie should be used to place the concrete completely to the bottom of the excavation in a controlled manner to effectively displace the slurry during concrete placement. The concrete should be placed completely to the bottom of the Facilities i Environmental i Geotechnical i Materials Geotechnical Engineering Report y� Greenwood Wastewater Treatment Plant - Proposed Building I Corpus Christi, Texas ■erracon March 11, 2024 1 Terracon Project No. CD245000 excavation with a closed-end tremie in the pier excavation if more than six (6) inches of water is ponded on the bearing surface or the water should be pumped from the excavation. A short tremie may be used if the excavation has less than 6 inches of ponded water. The fluid concrete should not be allowed to strike the pier reinforcement, temporary casing (if required) or excavation sidewalls during concrete placement. All aspects of concrete design and placement should comply with the American Concrete Institute (ACI) 318 Code Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete, ACI 336.1 Standard Specification for the Construction of Drilled Piers, and ACI 336.3R entitled Suggested Design and Construction Procedures for Pier Foundations. Grade Beams The grade beam should be structurally connected to the piers. The perimeter grade beams spanning over the piers should have at least 8 inches of void space. If the grade beams are earth formed, the void can be created using trapezoidal-shaped carton forms. If the beams are formed, the void should be maintained with properly sized non-yielding fill retainers. Pavements Both flexible and rigid pavement systems may be considered for the project. Based on our knowledge of the project, we anticipate that traffic loads will be produced primarily by automobile traffic, delivery and trash removal trucks. Subgrade Preparation Prior to construction, any vegetation, loose topsoil and any otherwise unsuitable materials should be removed from the new pavement areas. After stripping, the subgrade should be proof-rolled where possible to aid in locating loose or soft areas. Proof-rolling can be performed with a fully loaded dump truck. Wet, soft, low-density or dry material should either be removed or moisture conditioned and recompacted to the moisture contents and densities described in section Fill Compaction Requirements prior to placing fill. Design Recommendations For this project Light and Heavy pavement section alternatives have been provided. Light is for areas expected to receive only car traffic. Heavy assumes areas with heavy traffic, such as trash pickup areas, delivery areas and main access drive areas. The flexible pavement section was designed in general accordance with the National Facilities i Environmental i Geotechnical i Materials Geotechnical Engineering Report y� Greenwood Wastewater Treatment Plant - Proposed Building I Corpus Christi, Texas ■erracon March 11, 2024 1 Terracon Project No. CD245000 Asphalt Pavement Association (NAPA) Information Series (IS-109) method (Class 1 for Light and Class 2 for Heavy). The rigid pavement section was designed using the American Concrete Institute (ACI 330R-01) method (Traffic Category A (ADTT=1) for Light and A-1 (ADTT=10) for Heavy). If heavier traffic loading is expected, Terracon should be provided with the information and allowed to review these pavement sections. FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT SYSTEM (inches) Raw Subgrade Modified Subgrade Light Heavy Light Heavy Duty Duty Duty Duty Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete 2.0 3.0 2.0 3.0 Granular Base Material 10.0 14.0 6.0 10.0 Lime Treated Subgrade --- --- 6.0 6.0 Moisture Conditioned Raw 6.0 6.0 --- --- Subgrade RIGID PAVEMENT SYSTEM (inches) Raw Subgrade Modified Subgrade Light Heavy Light Heavy Duty Duty Duty Duty Reinforced Concrete 5.5 6.5 5.0 6.0 Lime Treated Subgrade --- --- 6.0 6.0 Moisture Conditioned Raw 6.0 6.0 --- --- Subgrade I/ Dumpster pad should be constructed as heavy-duty rigid section. Pavement areas that will be subjected to heavy wheel and traffic volumes, such as waste bin or "dumpster" areas, entrance/exit ramps, and delivery areas, should be a heavy-duty rigid pavement section constructed of reinforced concrete. The concrete pavement areas should be large enough to properly accommodate the vehicular traffic and loads. For example: ■ The dumpster pad should be large enough so that the wheels of the collection truck are entirely supported on the concrete pavement during lifting of the waste bin; and Facilities i Environmental i Geotechnical i Materials Geotechnical Engineering Report y� Greenwood Wastewater Treatment Plant - Proposed Building I Corpus Christi, Texas ■erracon March 11, 2024 1 Terracon Project No. CD245000 ■ The concrete pavement should extend beyond any areas that require extensive turning, stopping, and maneuvering. ■ The pavement design engineer should consider these and other similar situations when planning and designing pavement areas. Waste bin and other areas that are not designed to accommodate these situations often result in localized pavement failures. The pavement section has been designed using generally recognized structural coefficients for the pavement materials. These structural coefficients reflect the relative strength of the pavement materials and their contribution to the structural integrity of the pavement. If the pavement does not drain properly, it is likely that ponded water will infiltrate the pavement materials resulting in a weakening of the materials. As a result, the structural coefficients of the pavement materials will be reduced and the life and performance of the pavement will be shortened. The Asphalt Institute recommends a minimum of 2 percent slope for asphalt pavements. The importance of proper drainage cannot be overemphasized and should be thoroughly considered by the project team. Pavement Section Materials Presented below are selection and preparation guidelines for various materials that may be used to construct the pavement sections. Submittals should be made for each pavement material. The submittals should be reviewed by the Geotechnical Engineer and appropriate members of the design team and should provide test information necessary to verify full compliance with the recommended or specified material properties. ■ Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course - The asphaltic concrete surface course should be plant mixed, hot laid Type C or D Surface. Each mix should meet the master specifications requirements of 2014 TXDOT Standard Specifications Item 341, Item SS 3224 (2011) and specific criteria for the job mix formula. The mix should be compacted between 91 and 95 percent of the maximum theoretical density as measured by TEX-227-F. The asphalt cement content by percent of total mixture weight should fall within a tolerance of f0.3 percent asphalt cement from the specific mix. In addition, the mix should be designed so 75 to 85 percent of the voids in the mineral aggregate (VMA) are filled with asphalt cement. The grade of the asphalt cement should be PG 70-22 or higher performance grade. Aggregates known to be prone to stripping should not be used in the hot mix. If such aggregates are used measures should be taken to mitigate this concern. The mix should have at least 70 percent strength retention when tested in accordance with TEX-531-C. Pavement specimens, which shall be either cores or sections of asphaltic pavement, will be tested according to Test Method TEX-207-F. The nuclear-density gauge or other methods which correlate satisfactorily with results obtained from project pavement specimens may be used when approved by the Engineer. Unless Facilities i Environmental i Geotechnical i Materials Geotechnical Engineering Report y� Greenwood Wastewater Treatment Plant - Proposed Building I Corpus Christi, Texas ■erracon March 11, 2024 1 Terracon Project No. CD245000 otherwise shown on the plans, the Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining the required pavement specimens at their expense and in a manner and at locations selected by the Engineer. ■ Concrete - Concrete should have a minimum 28-day design compressive strength of 4,000 psi. ■ Granular Base Material - Base material may be composed of crushed limestone base meeting all of the requirements of 2014 TxDOT Item 247, Type A, Grade 1-2; including triaxial strength. The material should be compacted to at least 95 percent of the maximum dry density as determined in accordance with ASTM D 1557 at moisture contents ranging from -2 and +3 percentage points of the optimum moisture content. ■ Lime Treated Subgrade - Due to the presence of clay at this site, the subgrade may be modified with hydrated lime in accordance with TxDOT Item 260 in order to improve its strength and improve its load carrying capacity. We anticipate that approximately 4 percent hydrated lime will be required. This is equivalent to about 25 pounds of hydrated lime per square yard for a 6-inch treatment depth. However, the actual percentage should be determined by laboratory tests on samples of the clayey subgrade prior to construction. The optimum lime content should result in a soil-lime mixture with a pH of at least 12.4 when tested in accordance with ASTM C 977, Appendix XI and should reduce the Plasticity Index to 20 or less. The lime should initially be blended with a mixing device such as a Pulvermixer, sufficient water added, and be allowed to cure for at least 48 hours. After curing, the lime-soil should be remixed to meet the in-place gradation requirements of Item 260 and compacted to at least 95 percent of the maximum dry density determined in accordance with ASTM D 698 at moisture contents ranging from optimum and 4 percentage points above the optimum moisture content. ® Moisture Conditioned Subgrade - The subgrade should be scarified to a depth of 6 inches and then moisture conditioned and compacted as recommended in the Compaction Requirements section of this report. Details regarding subgrade preparation, fill materials, placement and compaction are presented in Earthwork section under subsections Material Types and Compaction Requirements. Pavement Joints and Reinforcement The following is recommended for all concrete pavement sections in this report. Refer to ACI 330 "Guide for Design and Construction of Concrete Parking Lots" for additional information. Facilities i Environmental i Geotechnical i Materials 17 Geotechnical Engineering Report y� Greenwood Wastewater Treatment Plant - Proposed Building I Corpus Christi, Texas ■erracon March 11, 2024 1 Terracon Project No. CD245000 Item Description No. 3 reinforcing steel bars at 18 inches on-center-each- Distributed Reinforcing way, Grade 60. Steel It is imperative that the distributed steel be positioned accurately in the pavement cross section, namely 2 inches from the top of the pavement. 12.5 feet each way for pavement thickness of 5 to 5.5 inches. Contraction Joint 15 feet each way for pavement thickness of 6 inches or Spacing greater. Saw cut control joints should be cut within 6 to 12 hours of concrete placement. Contraction Joint Depth At least 1/4 of pavement thickness. Contraction Joint Width One-fourth inch or as required b q y joint sealant manufacturer. Construction Joint To attempt to limit the quantity of joints in the pavement, Spacing consideration can be given to installing construction joints at contraction joint locations, where it is applicable. Construction Joint Full depth of pavement thickness. Construct sealant Depth/Width reservoir along one edge of the joint. Width of reservoir to be 1/4 inch or as required by joint sealant manufacturer. Depth of reservoir to be at least 1/4 of pavement thickness. Isolation Joint Spacing As required to isolate pavement from structures, etc. Isolation Joint Depth Full depth of pavement thickness. Isolation Joint Width 1/2 to 1 inch or as required by the joint sealant manufacturer. In this locale, drying shrinkage of concrete typically significantly exceeds anticipated expansion due to thermal affects. As a result, the need for expansion joints Expansion Joint is eliminated provided all joints (including saw cuts) are sealed. Construction of an unnecessary joint may be also become a maintenance problem. All joints should be sealed. If all joints, including sawcuts, are not sealed then expansion joints should be installed. Facilities i Environmental i Geotechnical i Materials Geotechnical Engineering Report y� Greenwood Wastewater Treatment Plant - Proposed Building I Corpus Christi, Texas ■erracon March 11, 2024 1 Terracon Project No. CD245000 All construction joints have dowels. Dowel information varies with pavement thickness as presented as follows: Parameter 5 to 51/2 inches 6 to 61/2 inches Dowels 5/s inch diameter 3/4 inch diameter Dowel Spacing 12 inches on center 12 inches on center Dowel Length 12 inches long 14 inches long Dowel Embedment 5 inches 6 inches Pavement Drainage and Maintenance Pavements should be sloped to provide rapid drainage of surface water. Water allowed to pond on or adjacent to the pavements could saturate the subgrade and contribute to premature pavement deterioration. In addition, the pavement subgrade should be graded to provide positive drainage within the granular base section. Long-term pavement performance will be dependent upon several factors, including maintaining subgrade moisture levels and providing for preventative maintenance. The following recommendations should be implemented to help promote long-term pavement performance: ■ The subgrade and the pavement surface should be designed to promote proper surface drainage, preferably at a minimum grade of 2 percent. ® Install joint sealant and seal cracks immediately. ■ Extend curbs into the subgrade for a depth of at least 4 inches to help reduce moisture migration into the subgrade soils beneath the pavement section. ® Place compacted, low permeability clayey backfill against the exterior side of the curb and gutter. ■ Slope subgrade in landscape islands to low points should drain to an appropriate outlet. ■ Edge drains are recommended along pavement/ landscape borders. Facilities I Environmental I Geotechnical I Materials 19 Geotechnical Engineering Report y� Greenwood Wastewater Treatment Plant - Proposed Building I Corpus Christi, Texas ■erracon March 11, 2024 1 Terracon Project No. CD245000 General Comments Our analysis and opinions are based upon our understanding of the project, the geotechnical conditions in the area, and the data obtained from our site exploration. Variations will occur between exploration point locations or due to the modifying effects of construction or weather. The nature and extent of such variations may not become evident until during or after construction. Terracon should be retained as the Geotechnical Engineer, where noted in this report, to provide observation and testing services during pertinent construction phases. If variations appear, we can provide further evaluation and supplemental recommendations. If variations are noted in the absence of our observation and testing services on-site, we should be immediately notified so that we can provide evaluation and supplemental recommendations. Our Scope of Services does not include either specifically or by implication any environmental or biological (e.g., mold, fungi, bacteria) assessment of the site or identification or prevention of pollutants, hazardous materials or conditions. If the owner is concerned about the potential for such contamination or pollution, other studies should be undertaken. Our services and any correspondence are intended for the sole benefit and exclusive use of our client for specific application to the project discussed and are accomplished in accordance with generally accepted geotechnical engineering practices with no third-party beneficiaries intended. Any third-party access to services or correspondence is solely for information purposes to support the services provided by Terracon to our client. Reliance upon the services and any work product is limited to our client and is not intended for third parties. Any use or reliance of the provided information by third parties is done solely at their own risk. No warranties, either express or implied, are intended or made. Site characteristics as provided are for design purposes and not to estimate excavation cost. Any use of our report in that regard is done at the sole risk of the excavating cost estimator as there may be variations on the site that are not apparent in the data that could significantly effect excavation cost. Any parties charged with estimating excavation costs should seek their own site characterization for specific purposes to obtain the specific level of detail necessary for costing. Site safety and cost estimating including excavation support and dewatering requirements/design are the responsibility of others. Construction and site development have the potential to affect adjacent properties. Such impacts can include damages due to vibration, modification of groundwater/surface water flow during construction, foundation movement due to undermining or subsidence from excavation, as well as noise or air quality concerns. Evaluation of these items on nearby properties are commonly associated with contractor means and methods and are not addressed in this report. The owner and contractor should consider a preconstruction/precondition survey of surrounding development. If changes in the nature, design, or location of the project are planned, our conclusions and recommendations shall not be considered valid unless we review the changes and either verify or modify our conclusions in writing. Facilities i Environmental i Geotechnical i Materials Geotechnical Engineering Report Greenwood Wastewater Treatment Plant - Proposed Building I Corpus Christi, Texas 6-rerracon March 11, 2024 1 Terracon Project No. CD245DDD Attachments Facilities I Environmental I Geotechnical I Materials Geotechnical Engineering Report y� Greenwood Wastewater Treatment Plant - Proposed Building I Corpus Christi, Texas ■erracon March 11, 2024 1 Terracon Project No. CD245000 Exploration and Testing Procedures Field Exploration Number of Planned Boring Depth (feet) Planned Location Borings B-1 and B-2 30 Building area B-3 through B-5 6 Parking/driveway area Boring Layout and Elevations: Terracon personnel provided the boring layout using handheld GPS equipment (estimated horizontal accuracy of about ±10 feet) and referencing existing site features. Subsurface Exploration Procedures: We advanced the soil borings with a truck-mounted drill rig using continuous flight augers (solid stem and/or hollow stem, as necessary, depending on soil conditions). Soils were sampled by means of split barrel sampling procedure. In the split barrel sampling procedure, a standard 2-inch outer diameter split barrel sampling spoon was driven into the ground by a 140-pound automatic hammer falling a distance of 30 inches. The number of blows required to advance the sampling spoon the last 12 inches of a normal 18-inch penetration was recorded as the Standard Penetration Test (SPT) resistance value. The samples were removed from the samplers in the field, visually classified, and appropriately sealed in sample containers to preserve in-situ moisture contents. We observed and recorded groundwater levels during drilling, coring and sampling. For safety purposes, all borings were backfilled with auger cuttings after their completion. Our exploration team prepared field boring logs as part of the drilling operations. The sampling depths, visual classification of the materials encountered, SPT values, pocket penetrometer readings, other pertinent sampling information were recorded on the field boring logs. Laboratory Testing Samples retrieved during the field exploration were taken to the laboratory for further observation by the project geotechnical engineer and were classified in accordance with the Unified Soil Classification System (USCS) described in this Appendix. At that time, the field descriptions were confirmed or modified as necessary and an applicable laboratory testing program was formulated to determine engineering properties of the subsurface materials. Facilities i Environmental i Geotechnical Geotechnical Engineering Report y� Greenwood Wastewater Treatment Plant - Proposed Building I Corpus Christi, Texas ■erracon March 11, 2024 1 Terracon Project No. CD245000 Laboratory tests were conducted on selected soil samples and the test results are presented in this appendix. The laboratory test results were used for the development of foundation and earthwork recommendations. Laboratory tests were performed in general accordance with the applicable ASTM, local or other accepted standards. Selected soil samples obtained from the site were tested for the following engineering properties: ■ Water content ■ Atterberg limits ■ Grain size analysis ■ California Bearing Ratio Final boring logs that were prepared represented the Geotechnical Engineer's interpretation of the field logs and include modifications based on observations and tests of the samples in our laboratory. Facilities i Environmental i Geotechnical Geotechnical Engineering Report IFIerracon Greenwood Wastewater Treatment Plant - Proposed Building I Corpus Christi, Texas March 11, 2024 1 Terracon Project No. CD245DDD Site Location and Exploration Plans Facilities I Environmental I Geotechnical I Materials Geotechnical Engineering Report Wrerracon Greenwood Wastewater Treatment Plant — Proposed Building Corpus Christi, Texas March 11, 2024 1 Terracon Project No. CD245000 Site Location cSe 4 > Sp r. �r 4, k�f4�� a Fern sr Las 60, 1414" 41 mentary l # hool •,for DsO Cret`k Historical Terracon Project ' 2500 feet .:D 2024 Mi3msoft Corpearaiian ? 2023 To DIAGRAM IS FOR GENERAL LOCATION ONLY,AND IS NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES MAP PROVIDED BY MICROSOFT BING MAPS Facilities i Environmental i Geotechnical i Materials Geotechnical Engineering Report Werracon Greenwood Wastewater Treatment Plant - Proposed Building Corpus Christi, Texas March 11, 2024 1 Terracon Project No. CD245000 Exploration Plan t vp t rf'• / / B � Y F � B-5 i N _ rR DIAGRAM IS FOR GENERAL LOCATION ONLY,AND IS NOT INTENDED FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES MAP PROVIDED BY MICROSOFT BING MAPS Facilities I Environmental I Geotechnical Materials Exploration and Laboratory Results Boring Logs (B-1 through B-5) CBR Test Results Lime Test Results Facilities i Environmental i Geotechnical Greenwood Wastewater Treatment Plant Proposed ■ ��� �`��' Building Greenwood Drive&Saratoga Blvd. I Corpus Christi,TX 3606 Wow Rd Terracon Project No.CD245000 Corpus Christi,TX Boring Log No. B-1 o Location: See Exploration Plan Atterberg = a o Limits T n Latitude: 27.71630 Longitude: -97.45920 -@ ~ ° v r a a w 6 i E EL @ y E ° LL-PL-PI a" cz C7 i o O U Depth Ft. FAT CLAY(CH), light brown to gray,very stiff to hard,with sand 2(HP) 25.2 4.5 (HP) 25.1 68-21-47 78 5 3.5 (HP) 24.0 3.5 (HP) 29.7 58-20-38 79 3(HP) 30.0 10.0 1 LEAN CLAY(CL),grayish brown to yellowish brown, hard,with sand 4.5 (HP) 22.3 45-17-28 84 15.0 1 SILTY SAND(SM),yellowish brown, medium dense 3.5 (HP) 13.2 2 7-6-9 25.8 N=15 2 5-9-12 23.4 NP 12 30.0 N=21 Boring Terminated at 30 Feet 3 See Exploration and Testing Procedures for a description of field and laboratory procedures Water Level Observations Drill Rig used and additional data(If any). CME 75 See Supporting Information for explanation of symbols and abbreviations. Hammer Type Automatic Driller Johnny Notes Advancement Method Logged by Hollow Stem Auger Jose Boring Started 02-12-2024 Abandonment Method Boring Completed Boring backfilled with auger cuttings upon 02-12-2024 completion. Facilities Environmental Geotechnical I Materials Greenwood Wastewater Treatment Plant Proposed Building Greenwood Drive&Saratoga Blvd. I Corpus Christi,TX 3606 Wow Rd Terracon Project No.CD245000 Corpus Christi,TX Boring Log No. B-2 o Location: See Exploration Plan Atterberg = a o Limits T n Latitude: 27.71600 Longitude: -97.45880 _@ ~ ° v r a a w 6 i E EL @ y E ° LL-PL-PI a" cz C7 i o O U ,Depth Ft. LEAN CLAY(CL),gray to brown, hard 4.5 (HP) 22.3 41-19-22 53 4.5 (HP) 14.1 4.0 FAT CLAY(CH),with sand, light brown to yellow brown, hard 5 4.5 (HP) 24.9 60-25-35 79 4.5 (HP) 28.6 4.5 (HP) 25.7 54-23-31 84 1 -stiff to very stiff below 12 feet 4-6-8 20.8 1 N=14 18.5 SANDY FAT CLAY(CHI, light gray,stiff to very stiff 6-6-9 N=15 23.6 20- X 4-5-6 24.8 61-21-40 68 25.0 N=11 SILTY SAND(SM),yellow brown to light gray, medium dense 2 7-6-9 24.7 30.0 N=15 Boring Terminated at 30 Feet 3 See Exploration and Testing Procedures for a description of field and laboratory procedures Water Level Observations Drill Rig used and additional data(If any). CME 75 See Supporting Information for explanation of symbols and abbreviations. Hammer Type Automatic Driller Johnny Notes Advancement Method Logged by Hollow Stem Auger Jose Boring Started 02-12-2024 Abandonment Method Boring Completed Boring backfilled with auger cuttings upon 02-12-2024 completion. Facilities Environmental Geotechnical I Materials Greenwood Wastewater Treatment Plant Proposed ■ ��� �`��' Building Greenwood Drive&Saratoga Blvd. I Corpus Christi,TX 3606 Wow Rd Terracon Project No.CD245000 Corpus Christi,TX Boring Log No. B-3 o Location: See Exploration Plan Atterberg = a o Limits T n Latitude: 27.71650 Longitude: -97.45910 -@ ~ ° v r ? a a 6 i E EL @ y E ° LL-PL-PI a" cz C7 i o O U ,Depth Ft. SANDY LEAN CLAY(CLI, light brown to gray, hard 2(HP) 28.8 very stiff to 2 feet 4.5 (HP) 22.6 40-14-26 69 5 4.5 (HP) 25.6 6.0 Boring Terminated at 6 Feet See Exploration and Testing Procedures for a description of field and laboratory procedures Water Level Observations Drill Rig used and additional data(If any). No free water observed CME 75 See Supporting Information for explanation of symbols and abbreviations. Hammer Type Automatic Driller Johnny Notes Advancement Method Logged by Hollow Stem Auger Jose Boring Started 02-12-2024 Abandonment Method Boring Completed Boring backfilled with auger cuttings upon 02-12-2024 completion. Facilities Environmental Geotechnical I Materials Greenwood Wastewater Treatment Plant Proposed ■ ��� �`��' Building Greenwood Drive&Saratoga Blvd. I Corpus Christi,TX 3606 Wow Rd Terracon Project No.CD245000 Corpus Christi,TX Boring Log No. B-4 o Location: See Exploration Plan Atterberg = a o Limits T n Latitude: 27.71580 Longitude: -97.45860 -@ ~ ° v r ? a a 6 i E EL @ y E ° LL-PL-PI a" cz C7 i o O U Depth Ft. FAT CLAY(CH), light brown to gray,stiff to very stiff 1.5 (HP) 35.5 63-31-32 100 2.5 (HP) 18.9 4.0 FAT CLAY(CH),dark brown, hard,with sand 5 4.5 (HP) 24.6 65-25-40 77 6.0 Boring Terminated at 6 Feet See Exploration and Testing Procedures for a description of field and laboratory procedures Water Level Observations Drill Rig used and additional data(If any). No free water observed CME 75 See Supporting Information for explanation of symbols and abbreviations. Hammer Type Automatic Driller Johnny Notes Advancement Method Logged by Hollow Stem Auger Jose Boring Started 02-12-2024 Abandonment Method Boring Completed Boring backfilled with auger cuttings upon 02-12-2024 completion. Facilities Environmental Geotechnical I Materials Greenwood Wastewater Treatment Plant Proposed ■ ��� �`��' Building Greenwood Drive&Saratoga Blvd. I Corpus Christi,TX 3606 Wow Rd Terracon Project No.CD245000 Corpus Christi,TX Boring Log No. B-5 o Location: See Exploration Plan Atterberg = a o Limits T n Latitude: 27.71610 Longitude: -97.45980 -@ ~ ° v r ? a a 6 i E EL @ y E ° 0� LL-PL-PI a" cz C7 i o O U Depth Ft. FAT CLAY(CH),with gravel,gray, medium stiff to stiff 1-2-2 N=4 34.1 2-2-2 34.0 67-23-44 79 N=4 5 X5-6-10 23.1 16.0 N=16 Boring Terminated at 6 Feet See Exploration and Testing Procedures for a description of field and laboratory procedures Water Level Observations Drill Rig used and additional data(If any). No free water observed CME 75 See Supporting Information for explanation of symbols and abbreviations. Hammer Type Automatic Driller Johnny Notes Advancement Method Logged by Hollow Stem Auger Jose Boring Started 02-12-2024 Abandonment Method Boring Completed Boring backfilled with auger cuttings upon 02-12-2024 completion. Facilities Environmental Geotechnical I Materials Greenwood Wastewater Treatment Plant Proposed Building Greenwood Drive&Saratoga Blvd. I Corpus Christi,TX FQ /� V rracon Terracon Project No.CD245000 Corpus Christi,TX California Bearing Ratio 3606 Wow Rd ASTM D1883-072 2.6 Source of BULK 0.0 Material 2.4 Description of 2.2 Material FAT CLAY with SAND(CH) _ I Percent Fines 81.2 2.0 I a 1.8 j Atterberg Limits LL PL PI v 71 17 54 ------------------ 1.6 Remarks: 1.4 o I I u 1.2 I_ I v 1.13 fu ---- 0.8 I I I I I 0.6 I I I 0.4 I I I I I j I I j 0.2 I I 0 84 86 88 90 92 94 96 Dry Density(pcf) 40 Sample No. 1 2 3 35 ......:......:......:.............:........ .. Sample Condition Soaked Compaction Method ASTM 698A 30 .....................:...... Maximum Dry Density,(pcf) 95.34 95.34 95.34 a 25 Optimum Moisture Content,(%) 23.1 23.1 23.1 C Dry Density before Soaking,(pcf) 84.18 93.64 95.95 20 Moisture Content,(%) c 15 ..... ... ............:......:...... After Compaction 24.9 25 25.6 L Top 1"After Soaking 37.4 32.6 31.5 v a 10 .. ... ............:......:............:...... Surcharge,(lbs) 10.00 10.00 10.00 Swell,(%) 3.89 1.11 2.97 5 ....:... ......:......:......:......:..............:......:...... Bearing Ratio,(%) 0.5 2.1 2.4 0 0 0.10 0.20 0.30 0.40 0.50 Penetration (in) Dry Density @ 90% 85.8 pCf CBR @ 90%Density 0.9 Dry Density @ 95% 90.6 pCf CBR @ 95%Density 1.7 Dry Density @ 100% 95.3 pcf CBR @ 100%Density 2.3 Laboratory tests are not valid if separated from original report. Facilities I Environmental I Geotechnical I Materials „rlr �erracon rxFic>rc wilt, „ Greenwood Wastewater Project Name: Treatment Plant Proposed Lime Series Results Building Project# CD245000 % Lime pH Series Plasticity Index(PI) Soil Type I Bore Bulk Sample 0 8.1 54 2 12.4 45 4 12.6 16 6 13.0 14 8 13.1 13 60 7.0 50 8.0 9.0 40 — x 10.0 = c n 30 U a 11.0 a 20 12.0 10 � 13.0 0 14.0 0 2 4 6 8 %lime treatment — —PI Series pH Series Supporting Information Facilities I Environmental I Geotechnical I Materiah Ferracon 3606 Wow Rd Corpus Christi,TX General Notes Sampling Water Level Field Tests N Standard Penetration Test Water Initially Resistance(Blows/Ft.) Encountered 'Shelby Split Spoon (HP) Hand Penetrometer Tube p p Water Level After a Specified Period of Time Water Level After (T) Torvane V a Specified Period of Time gm Cave In (DCP) Dynamic Cone Penetrometer Encountered Water levels indicated on the soil boring logs are the UC Unconfined Compressive Strength levels measured in the borehole at the times indicated. Groundwater level variations will occur over (PID) Photo-Ionization Detector time. In low permeability soils, accurate determination of groundwater levels is not possible with short term water level observations. (OVA) Organic Vapor Analyzer Descriptive Soil Classification Soil classification as noted on the soil boring logs is based Unified Soil Classification System. Where sufficient laboratory data exist to classify the soils consistent with ASTM D2487"Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes"this procedure is used.ASTM D2488"Description and Identification of Soils(Visual-Manual Procedure)" is also used to classify the soils, particularly where insufficient laboratory data exist to classify the soils in accordance with ASTM D2487. In addition to USCS classification, coarse grained soils are classified on the basis of their in-place relative density, and fine-grained soils are classified on the basis of their consistency. See"Strength Terms"table below for details. The ASTM standards noted above are for reference to methodology in general. In some cases, variations to methods are applied as a result of local practice or professional judgment. Location And Elevation Notes Exploration point locations as shown on the Exploration Plan and as noted on the soil boring logs in the form of Latitude and Longitude are approximate. See Exploration and Testing Procedures in the report for the methods used to locate the exploration points for this project. Surface elevation data annotated with +/- indicates that no actual topographical survey was conducted to confirm the surface elevation. Instead,the surface elevation was approximately determined from topographic maps of the area. Strength Terms Relative Density of Coarse-Grained Soils Consistency of Fine-Grained Soils (More than 50% retained on No. 200 sieve.) (50%or more passing the No. 200 sieve.) Density determined by Standard Penetration Consistency determined by laboratory shear strength testing,field visual-manual Resistance procedures or standard penetration resistance Standard Penetration or Unconfined Compressive Strength Standard Penetration or Relative Density N-Value Consistency Qu(tsf) N-Value (Blows/Ft.) (Blows/Ft.) Very Loose 0-3 Very Soft less than 0.25 0- 1 Loose 4-9 Soft 0.25 to 0.50 2-4 Medium Dense 10-29 Medium Stiff 0.50 to 1.00 4-8 Dense 30-50 Stiff 1.00 to 2.00 8- 15 Very Dense > 50 Very Stiff 2.00 to 4.00 15- 30 Hard > 4.00 > 30 Relevance of Exploration and Laboratory Test Results Exploration/field results and/or laboratory test data contained within this document are intended for application to the project as described in this document. Use of such exploration/field results and/or laboratory test data should not be used independently of this document. Facilities I Environmental I Geotechnical 1 mazeriais Geotechnical Engineering Report Wierracon Greenwood Wastewater Treatment Plant — Proposed Building I Corpus Christi, Texas March 11, 2024 1 Terracon Project No. CD245000 Unified Soil Classification System Criteria for Assigning Group Symbols and Group Names Using Soil Classification Laboratory Tests Group Symbol Group Name B Gravels: Clean Gravels: Cu>-4 and 1<—Cc<-3 E GW Well-graded gravel F More than 50% of Less than 5%fines c Cu<4 and/or [Cc<1 or Cc>3.0] E GP Poorly graded gravel F coarse fraction Fines classify as ML or MH GM Silty gravel F,G,H retained on No. 4 Gravels with Fines: Coarse-Grained Soils: sieve More than 12%fines C Fines classify as CL or CH GC Clayey gravel F,G,H More than 50% retained on No. 200 sieve Cu>_6 and 1<<—Cc<<-3 E SW Well-graded sand I Sands: Clean Sands: o Less than 5%fines D Cu<6 and/or [Cc<1 or Cc>3.0] E SP Poorly graded sand I 50% or more of coarse fraction Fines classify as ML or MH SM Silty sand G,H,I passes No. 4 sieve Sands with Fines: More than 12%fines D Fines classify as CL or CH SC Clayey sand G,H,I Silts and Clays: Inorganic: PI > 7 and plots above"A"line CL Lean clay K,L,M PI < 4 or plots below"A"line I ML Silt K,L,M Liquid limit less than 50 organic clay K,L,M,N Fine-Grained Soils: Organic: OL Organic silt K,L,M,o 509% or more passes the No. 200 sieve PI plots on or above "A"line CH Fat clay K,L,M Silts and Clays: Inorganic: PI plots below"A"line MH Elastic silt K,L,M Liquid limit 50 or more Organic clay K,L,M,a Organic: OH Organic silt K,L,M,Q Highly organic soils: Primarily organic matter, dark in color, and organic odor PT Peat A Based on the material passing the 3-inch (75-mm) sieve. H If fines are organic, add "with organic fines"to group name. B If field sample contained cobbles or boulders, or both, add"with I If soil contains >: 15% gravel, add "with gravel"to group name. cobbles or boulders, or both"to group name. ' If Atterberg limits plot in shaded area, soil is a CL-ML, silty clay. c Gravels with 5 to 12%fines require dual symbols: GW-GM well- K If soil contains 15 to 29% plus No. 200, add"with sand"or graded gravel with silt, GW-GC well-graded gravel with clay, GP-GM "with gravel,"whichever is predominant. poorly graded gravel with silt, GP-GC poorly graded gravel with clay. L If soil contains >: 30% plus No. 200 predominantly sand, add D Sands with 5 to 12%fines require dual symbols: SW-SM well- "sandy"to group name. graded sand with silt, SW-SC well-graded sand with clay, SP-SM M If soil contains >_ 30% plus No. 200, predominantly gravel, add poorly graded sand with silt, SP-SC poorly graded sand with clay. "gravelly"to group name. E Cu = D6o/Dio Cc = (D,J2 N PI >— 4 and plots on or above "A"line. D PI < 4 or plots below"A"line. Duo x Ds. P PI plots on or above "A"line. F If soil contains >— 15% sand, add"with sand"to group name. Q PI plots below"A"line. If fines classify as CL-ML, use dual symbol GC-GM, or SC-SM. 60 For classification of fine-grained soils and fine-grained fraction 50 of coarse-grained soils Equation of"A"-line Horizontal at PI=4 to LL=25.577 .1 ix 40 then PI=0.73(LL-20) , pEquation of"U"-line �o Z Vertical at LL=16 to PI=7, CJ 30 then PI=0.9(LL-8) C) Q 20 _J MH or OH 10 4 _ L-ML ML or OL 0 0 10 16 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 LIQUID LIMIT LL Facilities Environmental Geotechnical Materials aE se •w.AV-On pP-W-ft X30NI u x e; y arxu LU a o � 119WID f11A10.7 M A1p Slb8Lsexal'pspypsn[P99 f z � a4 poomuaaa�j lbS9 �P a= 6uippng aaueuaIuieW aalennalsaM 6Z�ZZ o� oa�o LL p. m dz O _ o Uo tio� w � � O tiPmmmmm gm �Gmm� S2 o LLI � CD LLI � � - Q�mmv�w�LLoo°oo�3�° jz°m.au�m���u�mmu�.���v,°zuaaaaa Uam ti�pzrcrcaawm3 w�ar�rcrcao. �ww U��=�� Uwwwwwwww �aaaaaaaa w F� �a`u Z _Z �L > ❑� __ ��� rvq"l��']^ .�qh ¢�c 20 paa a`o F" m`o O a°o °_ Goo°°°°°°oo°°°°° 2mwwmwwm°°mww°hhhyhh�°Hhh° Faa �d�===aaa>>»���aaa> a�� U:rr�� wywwwwwww jaaaaaaaa 00 Cl] °U�ti .-.d oh,��_mm_'_�______« &���rvr«ry r.,..,..,a,.,,.,m e,dddB&a indd ¢bb�hhhrh�ee�eae���� �62 iNa�ti.� W��_.ti..mm amm�mmmmm �V mma��,,,a�m�eao_� � mo�r�e�e�moo��mdhe .� o�rym rm.��o� �dhm�mm o W� W� � Wo �W �• �� � \ y0 rrj 4 \ o l � Lu i W Lu Qc z z �. _. o z, U O 9 �Q� o W11 M 0 Ln U� CZ o CZO m 3 u o N 3 In w b�HN�b Q aAtNE O O Q O U) ��� O Z W U CL- Q CL �ltl°a W 'L W NOI1tl9NtlN � a N'�'b � 2 a � y O O O Q �N vu 00 Q O�' O�' o a �Or � Deno ntl�tleN 1 Oo EOM � tlamo 0o rau a��. / f ova � Ntl�dow oNtla Z w �ZSO CL J o S 0 7�oN W O0O� ��, 99Z HS U 0 O> O o s ol��es eu�xeu.eu3�o wewt,odea G'_Lu JJL-,' pk��E �"d+x, - aani>aiix>av Svx31 j LLI a o } aI1SIaHO sn idioo }o Ally SlbBL sexal'gpyp s sndlop O ��s .S5i poomuaa.E)[I k r� 6uipling 9OUeua}uieW JGWm@ISeM 6Z�ZZ ` s U) w � ws 3 U 81 0 m w _ o a o w pw cc IL (e) Ln k Z a�- p Z > LU Q W TVs W- W a Fw 53 N wn_ Lo �o 0 > - a LL12- __ °a wee mU O O wazsxxoazo�x�,<< J 1 L/ iw —Jl o k��E �"d+x, aani>aiix>av 5J svx31 j Lll a o allslaHO sn idioo }o Ally SlbBL sexal'gspyp sndjop} O .Si "'�' a'Clpoomuaaa�j lVS9 w � k r� 5 6uipling 9OUeua}uieW JGWmaIseM 6Z�ZZ ZQU U) ?� z O W R' C m o G o a � U o z w w o ?aa g - -� F z 06 _-- _ ---- --- O L° - 13 a om� C C Z --O 4 F Q � w� O rr6 e g �t C t3 a a) ououJ � o �LL I T z A A w O Wd 0{.6509ZOL9L/l l CO C/) M \ / �+�/ aXi10 In N .c N J & > ry of 'aiH O z z N Mw �w _ �_ W �� o N CL) a Cw Cw ■� nr m0 c N ?U N � c W C .00 G G O it Q U N Q O w Q m -� 0 — m ■ � O N ❑ U 00 (j) 3 o +� L `s27) U') -r- Of a M d U UU U) L A Q C/) o z z � ■� U oo ._ U w � 4.0U c� .4 + II a--+ >1y U) co f N N �i SVX31 �IHO sni�ioo jo ),iio LLI lisi 'ilsijqo sndjoZ)'Cl Po s 5uipl!ng 9OUeuGluleVl JGWm@ISL-AA 6Z�Zz U) z Lij U) z 2 LU M, .2 E i y y a x 30 Z aJMMN=HS 's U) JJI ...... ....Md � — E) E NI�AoNnN=H z O C) 0 op w 1. IN F C, (D E7 ;H O N R 0 H, 0 b� z td 0 �H nias 6uuaaui6�3;o;uawyodaQ Il51JHJ S�/1da0i Jo ADO O a e$ e 5 LbBL SRXa2P onwaa End 9 6uippq @3ueu@1u1eW J91efA@1seM 6Z�ZZ F - b�'rok d Z CO z "�Ays bah Ua � Z LU o F • 0 N ga�a@aegg 5R8'QBp 9<K y p8' �3gR� pW $g■§p$ w W e SE z 4 @tlyy;;eW�gv�,n 8€w�a 6664 -O° @EW,tl:@ $9 W Y ro d Cl)�•3q'§K'3 w 3ai QKE gg€ 3g W3� g8 o tz ogm$ gQC�bt�66aQa J ppp �F ` E' @W °4§§g W g "'gym 0 z €€n.¢ aAW SE�3g iPgA �''EFWp €3W a zop p Eb LZ Igo 8.i 11 a .z W w �@8g $ 1W w Al �: R€�b bb Wed k3 P �y gp p S$l 2i R Rb W3'SP $ $ @W tb y E Qg �� �� � R c iR R fi �.6 �€��i chi � 2� R � k•R g E' �Ra�� W' xB k�. gg=_€`g i K 8 W € @ W b4p3 €� ag 46 [ €R "€;Ill $fig i ° �§ :.:Pljl i�' @..ie W9 $E 8 g3 b W g .'I .Q Ak sI 8 i1E b k E s's E $ a ghs� A@ W6gb@ a W W a�W e ggA W W g Ap s g €i k A �$='i @ E�y�ie gyg Bell g R3�q� � �Wa`4 €�� �55§V �3'sW �yQ K€gg�� g€� �C€,� a �'$$g �@�� $ �p �`83A R E E W Q gga G b�_ R.c SWa�e��@.4P` jig a�RW $ �€ gig33 $ €5 WK&@W W a8 8 gp b W � ¢ W a$a 8 W E@ W ii bg WE m i �' a @` E �W QW g RE a E� dap Z iEWWA 9�a33 ga. 3 yy;gE a Rik i; Qd O W wQk WSRA !�W �� € @_ i � 33AWE o I8gyoQ k i ya'yaE 3 ggF W EEK yy 3 d a 3 F PPbW ec €a7 Et b�3 6k Wi• Peg@ W W Q pg W b" c� $€Yb R #5 €Wgg EE W $ 5'' O nFeEe eW Wi P Y ES„g g 0A Q 8 F ¢ ggc4 Q €W€Q 3 • z 7 a a 3@ Qy$Q Q 36 bR8aal R ® a4 �� •$ga O 'Kk�W�• pi&A$$aRsd g@� �W k k knpp Q8'n Qp @ gA RK k g $=W @p@p •x 5 E'e w eg�@s< A Q$ii p€$ 6 E @@S WAW: g W kQRkS Ss °� 6#i QJQ� Q$$ A3 3 �23 3 I 9 1 �..®W i@ I€iQ@ iQ ai d€ iai�a $ a@= i A€ A3$�3 3 EW€ s= a 9 9 3AW„iQ ag°€xR€ fpp W3 E < W a $M z x91911$ A°�$ E Wg A W W QbQ g F §� $ Q E WbE 4aW 8 i z4y @ W 8 g'R @ @3 R WlA� 3tl 3 € pW a i k W Eli€9 °b 'K �$ b a @ E +- F QR E" 55 , W hisEd YY a$ p A �a iup 1g pWp$ yyAg 3 =W 4g €`>Qa Q a i a gg'�a €gi E.€� � °8AE €iA 8 s p b b =q t i i$E Jae, p � $ $�� a� :B�W vR �„E• Wa = � gWg g W 3 $1JRim Q b R �� - O ®® �� ®3" aOft �9 � 1§ ae WA E g p���e� g §A�� `zER6 w E �Q W tl € W €�Ee �P P " 2 1 5y Y £ -91 =R €b Q" E iMMM $ W gg RC F 3 p£E •33 3 € WE Rzb E A k R 3 i F d Q o WAR °a pp@`n ER�€_ @ ;ps$ 433@ aE 9g9•�d• @ -g'$E i o €a INI kqR€ €A g�g �Ip� P" a WW2; r Milo ,"i Q Aa_=p�.y�� z$$g i R aEa W� �'�iN IR'b �Etlp E R kb� tl iW iF flip, € F � � g" �'" � �®• �k y�a�g pyw3$ EE Ar g} W �6R gg Qtl =Y CW E€E1:<"�e P�q EA R3 E4 4 aFs F E'6 W`W ai3 C a a EE g� Al i�O A E 3 3 e I btll' $ tla 6 15"1 `111 €$K ���� � ��` iE � W� >� ��p.� � a bab �", �� Wa ��y ��W ��' ��= tlE kA iaR 8 € .19 E� W2€2 "' $A9 44 ip$$Eg@g W y �E WaW �R ag@§ @s gg qE=�®° R@Q8§ ° a w �F $ WW$ J8 as a "�i 8 €e g 19 eQ 1E€ e W pen 1'111 Wey% H 8J� N� $ a g• �§ g e$ g• W WWR g= b$Q 1W Re 5 R 'g$ ° o a lipi tl° � �� i it gE F E� aid W E�@ �� W. z �� tl R $ E A' $ g rp I $ p k$� p 4 a ZEQ EiEi EyyW gb iR4W 8 y gQRE $ a�F¢ sW8 y dE# k By$3Q3= a�i ERtl �Egg5 W E a 8R G N8� WS ' 8 Q € G 3 kd AWW p�� ¢ E'Ag e5R��. � w�w3 3 a E •<y$ W E'�F �€ �2 €� 3Y� �'�W,� Q�W�p��$ ip A®Qp� ��� a� WW (1 9 9E W ¢€ G R�EE a ZgW y9x� F $F ul a E 1p E Y�^ Z g4¢ iFWAi W 33 3 w 8 Kc A 04 1a i ° z 3 Sc' Q @ $ ga EBb, € � E 3$€ Ag� K I j'IN"I Al JJ €€,gig I ��l,3�e��tl��tl�R ��� ,� a g �` 9 a a € g�= R$R gW ib iW :" $8 g $_ €R 4Wi 8$ 7" E°g € $"€€: 's Wa 8W W• k€E€ WE € gQ W$z W €°1 �� $i W§ W._ a35 WWi B7E b� g IR NINE ai4�� R a@s a fig`g 1WAtl� AR ;0 @ §§pp pc, •b •aBA $ is �gi p €€3W ®®8 A i .11 e as @ F E€� W E W 8 a 94, 88E 'syy •y3 jig!e• W3e� ¢W $ $€ w R € a8 €"W ;J€ GKb €aeeea a g€ 3 s `C AW 'Wda c! WR Wp 6 ¢F ERR RWII 2Wi a'. k• @S e� F ii b @Xe ai WR E $W 9 R� EF Ogg F$'. R € �. 88 R $ ii a KW$ "€< O a a pp Q .Ra $E § 1d RQ1 aiW �a6a Q +iE K k 3 K EA8 z 8=E Ega FAEAi €@5'�s8k i ggp s'WEQ Ea E� rs n Eba W 'Wqp Q§ a �S"g @=K Q � g i$ " e €$ pip g Q W A $ �ER @ 5a �$ I €= sgp99€W ER 55 1 gg E`p,,p Na€B 6 4 A go zd a s 5 A €@ - `�•Aa 815ca,•l �€ "� W •Y R "a•E EIS E 1.1 M [€€€$ I gb. W ¢ A WQ ,W a A o =5 1 14 4 w � $gE€'€$ s g 8 eaQ, a 6 i$E i6sA 8 i z i$ � R s A s i'W8 O $°y$ a.Eb Q g8, dg�€,'R; a 5§a W €A a@ § i a i € KE Arc€ W j AeQQ ® ° a'b pa 3 pQ A�CgCg33 R8a °F a$i' e as g•$ 5W Sp g` E �a' � pp sW€$�` 6 g4e i 9g - Z Wg WA & .Fdg b3 E A' E Q R _ "i8A EP SAW$gW$ A° b <AR 3 E 4 €R'E��P EQg°E $ tl� € i p€ z 4AWWE Nip. W s 6y'g a �p R � $s 9 WBig Wa a tQ s 8 :� Rp EQ 4 Q a W o f R A A 3 € Qc W W 8�'� + i z ppgpg €g A §¢A 1F g - @" • $� •d ggA a yA:'$R EFa3 3�iag i@ 8g€ k bn E<� o % g A W €ii E�S=1€ bs g"@ r�g8g§ _ b€ b s a W@ R K ", °'Ig c W-Q_ K Wg EA x g E W E gg 1b i e 4g� i g d A€gv z Age �Wg aA QQ€e a kK -.8„! a $ x�C 1,11 33 9 p 55 8�g A, ■■ pppp € € @ @kQk aQ� �4 ¢pg A aa A£ ss q=q w gE i gp3 yy €pFy€A�ppk¢W p$p 5aa ill w 4'33 W 8W 5 9 6ii �R$ iE E 6S Bb l < $ a1Q3 WQi R5 661�d'< �k 3 k 3 Sa AA�Q'1H$�B ,EE 6 keEA E Q 3a& d i9 t'8@E - _ -0 0 9 0 niaS buuaau16u3;o auaw}ioda� ,�_ -,l/ l _L�1 �,. ��.,�� ? rtY a31�ry� 115121HJ S/ndaOJ f- AIIJ s- VOL .j gsµ —,aJ-d �0 paonnuaw�j 1b99 �� - v 6ulppng aDueua}uieW JOIeMOISW 6Z6ZZ LU a � w am o =oo m= N bay -N- - - oraw eff o Q� 0L O w� �BeF a� _ w --—---------- --- $ �ID '�- 1 aai—om am ao, —am am am am—am am—om—Oal Oal—am —am— —am—1.AIw ,\�1-1111-1 U=11-1\7 _U�ISL\L1La11L (I D?l o3 nd HiOIN 38VIilV�3o 1 , T- _ 1 i •i -------- tl I - ------------ ----------------------------------------------- = ua0 3MI-0 ; 1 ._ ---- ----- r I I I i o w I \ J E 1 1 , I 1 1 , �1 %mom _ A ➢ a�,���--tip,� � � ,�� ,�� ., I ' - i �r----------- 1 -�_- LL 00 _ P a idx31 mrv33as -- 4 nias 6uuaaui6�3;o;uawyodaQ _ sndao� ADOa� � � _ O a $ e— SLbBL Seoap om Endt� 6uippq a3ueuaIuieN J91em@lseM 6Z�ZZ F - b�'rok d Z CO LU "�Ays bah Ua � Z o F � Z U wNo¢ weN m o a. � o 1zN€o w Cl) Wdh �f.JQS a bw� 5 ML 0 E b 4 2.0 O m dj 2 A8 3 w ? 2 y o B 2 F €g am II N fn w9 g£. a ¢ w = me o a go ' a§ a Imo �y 4 m :B o �m W a �z8 £��� g _� �d EP - o S W 3 3 WB ffa �5 Fed hw a m e .o ¢ F£ wzu 4•p � �"od�am G (wJ<=a a�`Q va s. �S� £ d""".. O� a " C7 go og Lj €d S e d 8 — „s w�p L Z =p I d z=g od z3"a 5M1w mwb oS Adtl "mS e .To 3 J hod p, _ T _ON - a Y :wy6¢Ozd— q n^ met No i V R " ae Q 43ppt - ¢og,o, nias 6uuaaui6�3;o;uawyodaQ _ MusiaHJ s iij o ndaoi a� OSea�om E)[t, � buippq @3ueualuieW aa}efA@IseM� 6Z�ZZ F d �e�pou O o C,Lo Y O z�3 U H Z O U W cc sA z¢ C s a ge a om€ e o= E T O5 8 �€8R :oBRw ow� oz Eo W¢ �o w€me �. to tlN€ m'd „. �03 w. "g6m moa oa = m gyp` Z O - and- ak y5,p so Ht s € no m 4=op o gym �8�. g S a M. m4 zb pNq o: e 00 8 X [ wog`w_9 Ie t 9M W R Bp w ob b� Z < 0.,.�38�d,�`,� Q `B:o HK Z d � g"z & o W m o z N s w 5 < 3 e3 nias 6uuaau16�3;o;uawyodaQ sari _ uslaHJ sndaoi ao ADO O a e SLbBL sjo p om End 9 6uippq @3ueualuieW J91efA@IseM 6Z�ZZ F a � c d7 y�so Z z Uo 880 CO I o Illd o w z H U H 0 O ----------------------—------------- m o w Ia -------- — K (MO A OMN Hd5neI(1lV V) n � _ - =--------------- - _ - ----- -- 1 _--------_ -- — -- ------------------------------- ------------- zor e *V- (� — — a � a.� v. l x _ � a 1 _ n,aS 6uuaaui6�3;o;uawyodaQ V_ _ a sa'111SfaHO Snd?100 P ,1110 =i v ae e= 9LbBL sexa 1'lsiaq3sndao0 I� 'Cl PooMuaa��j 11,99 a 6uippma @3ueu@1u1eW aa}emOlseM 6UZZ z bzov Oo = H LL ens o i. O nu nm H�U M z 000000000 O ffe a ,p r a w_ 63 caJ p��Sgi€�66go�a�i E CO m w Ir $ R --------------------- --- --- ------------------------------------------- ----------------------------- --------------- ------------- ---------------------------- -- --- — ------------ - --------- o � m�M a a 31 adA> 3 c sd ��b aooMN33� LIM AM —1� v l a° eeee° e I 1 ♦ 1 ° � °�—� e 1 M �♦ �� e t a G� a oaf 0, Offjl ♦ °1 f � �° ♦ l O ♦. �__� � _ ram\° F € g l �a3,M3,s11 aoamN33� niaS 6uuaaui6�3;o;uawyodaQ sndao3 uslaHJ ao olio J seG P. buippma eoueualuieW as}ennalseM 6Z�ZZ z CO W ° d x ada d a O y� m a aV C a I� x U b w Z� o w w ¢ w =, wb acr aye o mo Cl) 1. O 3€ U 00 LU Ir e _ --------------------------------------------------------------l -T --- - R ------ ----------- �( as o3,ev1a >�v� a,vH dsv) p �w I ° _ o II 1TE---------------- , I I � a111VM aoornv33as 4 p� .vaS 6vuaaui6�3;o;uawyodaQ _ N � ... I151?JHO 5/ld?J0o )o ,lllO sxa P oMlUaa End[1799 a ci 6uippma OOueuOluieW a61emOlseM 6UZZ F z °+ z iii ❑ "0lsoy p d - ❑ m CO �5 w► w H ¢ Z z W z 0 o a u, O in �. aea: e U Waa m z Z �d z w g a a o e w wwoa cr Cl) ZO w U S Q LL _ m W Ir 8 w o� m Wp W tj atemUw E-9 ~ z a aoag Z O z z r-L a€oe ra z soap ¢ F F o„ac w d 5 v cg b� Z 3 Z W ogmG ¢ o ezm w per= O O U z Z O IN/ ¢ z �~ N Y �� z w p m O: �, W oa z F pp O ❑ w wmm a w0l N zg g rP _ z z � �� � � cs mr] N. a a 3 o k cgg,£, J ge�z =gg Gg .w ¢ F gm w g� dam JN m 5 -.Vti ?8 S.� Y w❑'� K Wz pd�¢ dl 'dam _ u)Z� p� U ¢ Cm� Oq mg a a ma ��z o� �// 1 J w1 ; ¢, age £ '2s� Qo a 3= 0w _ Mcwi nias 6uuaaui6�3 p;uawyodaQ _ N �2 / usiaHJ sndaoj sjop om End 9 i. 6uippq @3ueualuieW J91efA@IseM 6Z�ZZ � F 3 z b Z IG3 s sb''�h U V y C) U goo, q Z �{ O o � � D Cc r fn z O U 0 m w !{ i $ no $!I +1 it F = ' p+l���f iie:fE i,i i?fi E! PE r ?±°S6 4 iS F 4ii4e fe eF 4-1i `—'��j ! =P _ iiF$i; e;P�-`St:3 9 'i� F 4!fF(�`• lE €�. filE E;jZP{F 9 flil:i_=el i{�IFpI ijI tii �P ��� 1}ijtlF 1-=sie# 9f:,�_ B IEY:}g; i�Y�A` �t�:S��9a�l,9iPli5$G°PF=98P o if°F=9$F Rl ! =e P [ O a °91i eta}!=b= IP®— l19F1!}i!f9P9 cc zr _ j F 5f FI .i 35& c a a - m..=w�:'u'cv-: i.- �n xvn xz ¢g m ¢ g b U , 1 S i Z Y lr _ Q w = - - w YmwW `060 a a � � F s tias 6u�,o,Aaw�odaa CDsndao Jo ,;Irk 1�!Iuljgo saa,o� $ t 5Lb8L seta w N a0 PooMuaag LbS9 0 � o buI In eoueua uIe aaIennalse pl 8 W M U: ZZ I I co o„ z o LU =o�o,�a=�= o b I � �� Z i l I�m w i❑®a a� �.�m��9 g H g 3 3 4 �tl�+ Ny � O g t H�o�w c z LU I m I rr I I ------------------- I I I I I � I I � I I — ____________________________________________J — I 7 R :k I I T � 1 B"H ♦ $2 1 7_r, ' d V - - - a a �s irvme � � nsnvxais�un aoomn33e1 '—_ I � I £ I I I I I I � I niaS 6uuaau,6"3;o;uawyodaQ uslaHJ sndaoo ao A11j sndaoo I? ae e= 9LbBL sexal'gsiaq� JQ PooMU—E)11799 a 6uippma aOueuaIuieW aa}emOlseM 6UZZ Cl) LU @G 3e^n N .M.0% ` e�¢OH €6 W R R Bc 1 W F - � 8 V..aw a pe6p aa¢oQa o o d d - e �ws W Qaza a o� _wwwaadad "s d � � a �o¢aawd=� 1 F 8 i } § g Jim ------- -------°"------- ="----------e l � Q $ 0 HdSV)3"i10 000 �^, l r 1� y --- _ -- - - --- , �a 77 vi o LL egn m - NN e�d=m�arse- i o_ jV i „pil a , �dM _ ------ m nias 6uuaaui6�3;o;uawyodar) aq,alslaHJ S�/1da0i Jo ADO M a e$ e S LbBL sjo p om—E)db 9 6uippq a3ueua1uieW J91enna1seM 6ZI,ZZ F `seer � - bP�'rok d Z CO LU lip if ji ilk¢ W E U °? 61 a eEi f ! a•e i',1 Ei k i'I$!.ja e i lfle N i o di , E_ _• ! �'� ail i ,E a�I�;ttii !E I gg iPi i � � ��•_' F{{� �� fIr O P€ � ! � I + I � i .ts i E i of• I+ dtSli!u Ej, !,a [[l e �re'F•pp ..I t tip 1 a E i �i._ � 6 f � d� I' E .tic$ ';'Iit!x i" ° {(a E °' " ��'?Ei E,'�'i��¢E$:I.°•'�"'!�l+y � Slift il � !� Cl)3�in, ilia El�i @ iEilii!5k;1�12ii111l�iale �`siE©000$6!l:io ii;a z $! ' tl •$ it ! i 5 �q bi the ki �- hei ° dal E $tl . ,e ` as o 1. ! .'e 47 SesB 3 ie g i e M i a .e�r�i p E iii �— I'I L J P$I ! Fgd3 S itlGa' j l a a e e e i _;lii F k it tl$is aP:x iiii E _ I L — k E , M ,i2 if S. $le, li t;a t is ,`t�� i,i s a �� � !�9e I��EaFS � rial •� ., iF !!e� �" i edii a S� fY � a i a via8i€•, a' Ei !eitl.is ii" 3 IM if e • g :° �f e '� a�� r � laiilii€Pill '9'�' � • a �I�fil°lil@ii .�S.+,gk s x ��€ ��_� 'i �i.�,u• 14i d0iii�il�l re�� h' iiit i'a 1 i€ i F li iii' lilti al J.c a ii ii .e i it �% sp �Pa 5 gB ,� � YS !iitlSiSliiFY i tl niaS bui�aaui6u3;o)uaw}ioda�CD ✓'� CD �,. ��.,�� rtY aellga a��IlSRIH� S/1d?lOJ f� AlIJ = _ — 9[VOL s .j gsµaC s d1.3 6uippe OOueuO}uieW JOIeMOISW 6Z6ZZ a 6 g g �s �1► = _ 0s0 -H-U..o I €3 4 =Sm�<€saso-s, 9�b Q k Pe'F W 84 'Etl� yy m .5�:8 III '1 5 y;yW O. Z I 1� ©� $W E $ 8 ' oil3`@j H I 1 o dl a 6�[ as € 'gP z q 3 BZ go k �P §, 11oa��b�� Z (Il W d S g 3 W e fia a e Q a AS € E $ a3'� q e o�a m ao=a`= � o a W= a B .y a W @� i c $ W Er Z �� Q� B 'd¢G 2 Ctl W It��h W d =,�.� F- ' } RN'� V} k b• Wd - q W� R€�€A e a Q 3aaz ��g � �� Q.k S�� py�� 6gcrq�.� �kE�€� eaa"w O _ 14 1! E=H -aij`,, U gS aaatF W -m22 =�Nw`go� 2'e��,de8. o�N>8 py>2o�pa p B Z e lea q °i k a� S u`i— ---- --- ------__"_— W— — — — — --_ —_---- tot onm z ( dSV)3h 0 QOOMN3321� _ TI � 11 _ a a ����� 1 II I &a p a mF a zw w> ( a p I 1------- _N' o se=oa„a I s P ago-=w a J gym. R � nias 6uuaaui6�3;o;uawyodaQ _ - r' vx snlaoi Jo ADO Sjopom—E)db9 m c> `. � �'�•//� «, 6uippq a3ueua1u1elN J91em@1seM 6ZI-ZZ F az = 1�A���yyAAI - b�'rok d Z CO z "�Ays bah Ua ZZ LU o F � Z Z E I S 3 on d I oilrvT A •F !�8 y l i € Its! I A aS xqISiI �I 3S ` �IIS S ,� it d il.eS dgiS P — �Ii i f � 8 8 I� s lot a�I11.+Id+Ix�"I,,dPE+, i IdS�E9la" Y€PI S�S°v�.l k31d ,I I+ + 63 Ig!� d I ( �I{S+s I4 SI ii� _ _ _ + q tp� +i � �= J li i`AA!PA(y'v Pi � ii $�+ i EI ! „ iEE 1 I{�+8-'i'§'if;16 i I+0�4l 1 E i.� � sii� d, 'i ��i�dl;€,++ill?�; � E !'i' �'' f !°+'I"•'I nPdlhllE IIiEE:I � � 1�A it Y i 3 1 '�✓�.; �' S.E�ES +IE@�6i7�P§ YlY alhi°!C{NV'Si[SSS!tIf E Y 4Y J�3 Idi d. p+ !Id)iEld� lii I ;I�t III+i °i�iIEI dii i EI { E° +; �!} It t y 9+I� t{9�+lld II;It! dlLiillplP� .E ! !+II ! Ex ,I x II i 9l ddy I d.l,d y 9i1 5+'llvl+i;'lod; IE I Iikletlii°IIIiiiell,! ii+E!! IE�iafli �'s! � +I I b n:as 6uuaaui6�3;o;uawyodaQ L�LOAHO AM vo Am SLbBL SeQaP onnuaa sndb 9 m c> `. � �'�•//� «, 6uippq @3ueu@1uieW J91efA@1seM 6Z�ZZ F - b�'rok t' Up �g�si0g!�i:f a� a �i a a! �' j �•, {'# ��i!°!i,i'I{#3�d# � a{dil s?!#I§;a§e{3#[a a!"''`III U E q z lb "I a 401t {� 9#1lPF{EP a Ilk ale f g 816?I I # q ie !3 d!F ig la4g ai{➢Q'I �1� '� [i'!. Y t id{- � �°'s�e is v F��' Y g tii [P d akd it i�7fd a,d�.�dl9 Eg`19i { el $ € P #Erika P €!� {# P€�#€I:.E �aY z. — � Jill aiB[E{#:i9 !I� [ �� ai#ea a pY �{! e�ielm 12 A !�€3{a{!9!da' .�Wd DEfar # {![E9Pd �`§€�19a aW d gc. # [ a^ [ { P d9ga NIP, o l I tias b�aaa�,6u�,o,uaw,�odaa N ' '" � a usraH� sndao� o ul� i J 5L48L sezal'RsiJusndJM w ad poomuaa0 lJ S9 0 6uippq aoueuejuien as M91seM 6Z�ZZ Is z� � N 01 F Z H 3a � 0 I list MINIM INW ty 5I< a s10 �88 Wo o az > > � :a�a�b� +ah> a+ � �+ =h� �� �os hh + 8 ra - -- -- - -„ ---- --� - ^_R F FIA KiRFAtB R P)RXRRWild l 121 film i�a - Rd d �o-d gin Nul 511 61, a 3- s a m to M i n r'1 �5������Nrc'nCoo b ?�J��R�, R In nuv x N � a• a I.,. A 774 O R z $imo aM ma�l x y Men TTT 77 r n c .,1TV OWK51 zo pl I - _ - y �IN iF b m;d did did did did m b-P-1513 . SVX31 CD ISRJHD snd800 to ),iio 9 6 b8/--i ljsllqo Snd,.Z) 9 buipl!ng aoueuejuieN jelemalseAA 6Z�ZZ Q, dSj U) z po LLJ V; RM M D D II LU C) Q t U) I 6 ... ... 'n. mE 0 V E, 3 MY, ........... z Z g 0 0 0 uj 6,-- Sp W. H C) W�l awe mD MH I., 2� E,�` Ht d 8�.5— tR F— U) z A, 0 N R. 0 z o LLI N" I ,���--- M HEM. "Eq, H- m H-6 0_ 0 n" �g JM. M.- it HE U, S, g-nM� NM A H-s m H -W-M M 0, q-, w 'M m En M V, A -H 'E, Nnw Q,- T 'g F#= F 77 wH. 'K, W 2-g� --MH ..... .. M-E M Mq, UJ M 6 6-H E N H u-fth 42, " uiLL—LTJ- Wr---- < < < LU LU LU LU� -0 LU 8 C,LL, o.6 U) - z L x 0 < uj,6 !"PIPI Imes 5u��xew q 0 naW4.0 SNO11O3dSNl 7VIO3dS Kul CD mom 4e I1SIaH� mom 0 Ally SlbBL Poomuaaa�j lbS sexal'gsayp9M9 ch 6uippng aaueuepeW aalemalseM 6Z�ZZ a a ' w E m - 0 U _ ns� m o zN WHIP wz �• � _ - _ _ _ O_ oil tFuM zz V jL Sm MKIN g � J Mow 2 � @ _ .,em L—Ly s mad r 5-Y-1513 .)—,od.o NV7d NO11 VJNnO-4 SVX31 CD 119RJHD snd800 o ),iio 9��8/--i II sl�d,.Z) 9 cn yet 1 buippng aoueuejuieN jejemalseAA 6Z�ZZ dSj U) Ji z y IR 0 lip glo uffll� 9 (:��---------------------- ---------------- - --- - -- --- -------- -- ---------------- U) T� --- z C) 0---------------- tj TT----- --------------- ------ ------- --- ---- ---------- LL ------------- ---------------------- -------- — ---------- ------ ------- IT, --- --- --------------- mD C� —--------- - ------ ----------- - ---III ---- I ------- �j A----------- W II 4� 4:------------ ------ ---------- 42- --J I ---------- --------------- -------- ---- ---- ------------------ U-i -S 6-P-1513 .puaml10da4NV-7d DNIYVW4J-400a n I>a I....I i',i 5J SVX31 CD ISRJHD snd800 to ),iio 9 8/--i lj�,Iqo S�d,.Z) 9 buippng aoueuejuieN jelemalseAA 6Z�ZZ Q, ......... LLI. O I I CT, 1 ------ 0 z L4 0 < gg 4�1=aC 10 lip 0 D ------------------- --------------- ----------------- ----------- - ----------- -------- --------------- 010 O ------------- -------- - ------------------- ui I------ -Ai-- ----- -------- -- ------- -- ----------- ------------------- I--------------- -— -- -- ----------- ----------- - - --- - --------- ------------------ ------- ----- ------------ 0 ---- _________- --- —--------------- ---------- u U o- D�- 4-1-------------------- A ---- ------ -- ------------ ------ TQ� - - - - - ---------------------------L -- -- - - - --- (i(f 4- (Ai,)4a) CrJ ; Has e��,aau�,6�3�o w ,,.d., NV7d JNOW4=1 B N(1 OON'N NOI-LVO03 3°JVNOls na>aaix>xr '="t 5J SVX31CD LLSIaHO sn id ioo to Ally SlbBL sexal'9siayp snd,op cn :, 6uippng aaueuajuieW aa}ema}seM 6Z�ZZ a L j LU ns N a a � pw lam- O w y = Z 0 z , _� — c 0 o O ry W a ass �z LU C7 3 m rZ71 n'a M 4 a 3� _ LI D W H U) z O U m w 1 ( \Ii W I III III I g J �Ij I j�lj I j�lj I j�l o h I I,I III I,I III I II m _ Ii I I _ili I I i i I it a Ii I I I I�� I I I W i'i I I it N II I III I III I II I. ` I� I I JIB I i � I Jll I I JI �ml ---- ----1----------------------- - —`------ _= -==1----1-- ----1----- _=====J- -\`------ ------ - =—J- (2) (z) z --- -- - ---- —i,---- ------------- ----- - ---------- _ — — --- -----i,—_ z a= I a zw LLO O _ W V. - - a K I I o N m� ------- ---------- --II -------- ———— ---- ------------ — — — —— — ---------- ----------II—— —— — — (2) 51P—�5�3 .)-. .d.o S71V130'N SNO1103S SVX31 CD llsidHO snd8oz) to ),iio 9 �8/--i S�d,.Z) C0 lbS9 W, buipl!ng aoueuejuieN jalemalseM 6Z�ZZ J-5 w - - -- --------- ------- -------- --------------- -------------- ----------- LLI fr_ :05 LU H i q z ------ - --- -------- ------ ------------------------------ III ----------- -- - - 2—--------------------------- z All 1 0 LLJ z uj ICILU W H b-P-1513 . SNOIIJ-9S C\l SVX31 lis CD RJHD snd800 to ),iio 9 co [pq buipl!ng aoueuejuieN jelemalseAA 6Z�ZZ Q, U) ..........�"z,-" ui D L z D 5 - ----------- -------I U) z ------------------------------ ----------------- z z — ------------ ----------- -- ---- ---------- ----------- II TT - ------------------------------- --------- --------------- LU 41-P3 I SN MA-0 O113-9S VX31 I- k !KIM maw p AID g am-0 T-W-W. W--9 I PS ch bu!pl!ng eoueuepeN jelemalseAA 6ZZ 9 \ \ ( 's i'�E ui to ])�\ <' . / — — — — — — — — -- -- VAR - - - - - - - - - UI) z 0 ^ \ \ LU ---------------- a), Iva -0 ` � \ � j \ / \ ( ` �\ . PAVIA; inn) \ \ - \ \ ------------------------------- - mmJ : / % \ s q\ —:\ a« ( © : J ��� 2 ^ \ } [ ! @ - Bggmga ueumgeRjmmmm�M\Z Z )) ! ( @ ± � U O O j4 j§ : e ` G 2 O ?«»©. U . . . . \ \ w » � ) � ! y ) -\ -..T \ . . . 0 51P—�5�3 . SNO113-9S LO SVX31 CD llsidHO snd8oz) io ),iio lj�llqo S�d,.Z) co 9 buippng aoueuejuieN jelemalseM 6ZZZ \ \ ( U) z Lij > _ � \ y � )�/ z , 2 O ]4j§ . } \ ` \ / R, U) ------- -------- 0 w C), Lu U) r � § / \ } -------------/ � . . .L „gas b���aa��e�3�o i�awvoaaa SN01103S nioaiixoar �°l s>� SVX31 CD e IISIJHO snd8oz) to Ally SlbBL sexal'gsiayp snd,op �. N co ,# == a0 P. —Ej lbS9 U, 6uipling aaueuajuieW aalemalseM 6Z�ZZ a a U) Lij J� O I . s (n Z I m w r � i .� m g` ago LL6 I F a w 4. J \ ¢o� r ram, �5 A w � I ya �a Us w` N „gas 51P—a 5� 3 o)-.w .daa SNO1103S nioaiixoar �°l s>� SVX31 CD e IISIJHO snd8oz) to Ally SlbBL sexal'gsiayp snd,op �. N co ,# == a0 Poomuaa,Ej lbS9 U, 6uippng aaueuajuieW aalemalseM 6Z�ZZ a a _ Q Ji as � w Z m CCC � IL , Qq I zo U§ w �a Q li c3 3- r 1 y rc e LLa �9 Ills t Ua Z O w U N mmJ-9S ( \ _� \/ a«p ( © : Bggmga ueumgeRjmmmmse M6Z Z \ \ ( m @ 2x z ± _ )�\ _ 2 O R _ / ! \ : 1 G 2 Ft _ 3 - w --- . \\\\ ®~ . . . , m<�m . aawsr». ,a+•: ,\ . » . . . . . . .. / . \\\ d . . . . . . �. ^< � ) 51 f { . / � ( + „gas 51P—a 5� 3 o)-.w .daa SN01103S nioaiix oars°l s>� SVX31 CD e IISIJHO snd8oz) to Ally SlbBL sexal'gsiayp snd,op �. N co ,# == a0 Poomuaa,Ej lbS9 U, 6uipling aaueuajuieW aalemalseM 6Z�ZZ a a U) q Lij O U) Z O wy ' U _J � If �o U� W' - za sl^ oy i9 r Go 3 w� wd �r III S H- U W' Um 7,2 �� za I _ I a and war s� Z Oo W` Um I M mmJ-9S _�SVX\/ � a«� ( © : \ �� � 9 \ } [ ! @ - Bggmga ueumgeRjmmmmse M\Z Z )) ! ( f @ z (� _ ± � . . � _ O |,| V. c . g G ©©© 2v .. z • , - - - - - g : e _ - 3 \ ( � f \ \ \ � { ( � s>111 ag 51P—a 5� 3 o)-.w .daa SN01103S n 1 o a 11xoar �°� SVX31 - IsidHO snd8oz) to Ally S6g8L sexal'gsiayp snd,.Z) �� t 9 buippng aoueuejuieN jelemalseAA m 6Z�ZZ a s 4 � s ui R. gal v Z I 41 LLa I I I a I I 1 oy W �a 4 W sg - p � �w o � J � I I I a a� F ----------------- --------- (F�— -—-—-——-—-—-—-—-—-—-——-—-—-—-—-—— -- -- -- - -- -- - -- - -- -- --------- - — wy — — ---------- --- ------ --- -- -- -- �M N «;«mae SVX( co _� \/ � a«p ( © : Bggmga ueumgeRjmmmmse M6Z Z \ \ ( z ± � . . � _ _ g O ,|! c O 4 Q§ \ , ^ — -- - -- --- - -- / . U : « � - _ 3 w \ / / } ° { : y \£ ----- --- ------------------------------ \ � y \ ^ � \£ --------- - ---------------- \ � ) [: e y / + 6-P-1513 . S 71VL-gG'g S310N;03HJS YVV39 313PONOO SVX31 CD RJHD snd800 to ),iio 9 �8/--i S�d,.Z) 9 buipl!ng aoueuejuieN jalemalseM 6Z�ZZ Q, U 0 ui z LU D > t C) C) n6 Nip N� N -M" jr F z F LU LU LLI LU U) LLI < ca �3 LU Z LLI C) 0 11 z t L L ui Lu w < U) ca < 0 5s U) L Z Lu -a —[� s —,,.d., S-IIVL-9(7 GNV'(7-3HOS-91V-Il(73EIPV3'S3-LON svx I CD ii [aHO sniaoo jo Aiio LO buipl!ng aoueuejuieN jelemalseAA 6Z�ZZ QQ U) Lij ui U) -En. '5- H !n UH+l U) z w - = 1 = - -�T 1.1 i X LLI 5, ELL, LU CA q TIaz T L.>Zlg I' LIJ LU aw Li ------------T ---------- my I-u L LU 09 -0 S-73NVd SVX31 CD RJHD snd800 to ),iio 9 �8/--i ljsllqo S�d,.Z) LO - C]P.—i �) V99 Q) buipl!ng aoueuejuieN jelemalseAA 6Z�ZZ Q, U) wt LLI A ui PENH LLI ON-0 �g �l 'AHN y LL, 0 0 -5a H. U) 0 ui Iw —d 4 q.a —[s —,,.d., S73NVd svx I CD [aHO sni ioo to Aiio Snd,.Z)P.--E)[pq 9 Ch buipl!ng aoueuejuieN jelemalseAA 6Z�ZZ QQ U) I--- 'p Fp� n 0 LU M 3 �z Z -,2 Z 0 2 4 LU 0-1 U) z LLI �T - -—-—-—-—-—-—--- -q, T -------ET ------ -Ea- o ---------- 4� ------- on- -EEF- q.a —[s —,,.d., S73NVd svx I CD [aHO sni ioo to Aiio Z)S�d,.P...-.,E)[pq 9 Ch buipl!ng aoueuejuieN jelemalseAA 6Z�ZZ QQ U) H LU nu-, LU m I A C) AP .. 0 N W ale Lug ---------- U) C) w tj =c -------- -------- -- T'l -------Ea- q.a —[� s —,,.d., S-73NVd LO svx I CD [aHO sni ioo to Aiio Snd,.Z)P.--E)[pq 9 Ch buipl!ng aoueuejuieN jelemalseAA 6Z�ZZ QQ U) HN LU -UM 9 MH 2 �Lu F- N MPH.- 0 Lu D HHw ............ F- U) z 0 C) 4�1 ---------- LU -E F�l Ij —-—-—-—-—- x I ri I---------- ------- - -EEI� 4> q.a —[s —,,.d., S73NVd CD svx I CD P...-.,E)[pq [�IHO sni ioo to Aiio Snd,.Z) 9 buipl!ng aoueuejuieN jelemalseAA 6Z�Z QQ U) Lij 26 LL, C0 oaf k !L�Ll R N HH p H LCU, co E i LL, .—M U) z w -Ml L;L §1 ------ ----------- ZI-L rci Ali ------ --- J J 51 .d 3Nd C q Hsvo —io . -h bupngaueueueNjeemaeA 6ZZ q 9 Q U) Lij E'.A : ; : : \ / : »: _ , _ _WM I;-V W L HR - Lu N HN-mil mg Hl N2 P LU A U) z \ \ � \ \ \\ ` \ 3 El w N A / \ > \ > —� � \ � \ < � 67 } , �\ . : � �/ \ \} 14 SVX31 11918HO snd8oz) to )xo ijsij<)sndjoZ)�3 Po ps; 5uipl!n9 9OUL-uOlUIEVI JGWmE)ISL-AA 6Z�ZZ9 U) F- z Lij O a _ - 4// I� III,; - 08 0 - U) z --------------------------- Lb LL z 0 ------------------ 1 cope co— co ig F fA 0 Ed LIU LD UW Lu C\j J I (2) -Z-J L svx�l lisl 9[�V/--i gswqz) tp '(]p....... �IHO sni�ioo io Aiio 3 5uipl!ng 9OUI?uGluIeVl JGWm@lSL-AA 16Z ^ \( ?\ ZZ U) z Lij z 0 F U) z Lb 00 2 } \ \ Lu. CD- Lu Lu�- CY) -ej \ (.0 F- w LU 0) m q ffli HE \ LO ( \� ) } \ \/} / \ / } / : \ F� Z < LU Ol o \ \ as } - - � > LU C) Lu Tru= Lu W-A I 00 svx3l tp USIaHO sni ioo io Aiio 9 bV/suxai ilsijqo sn C? ...... ..s 5uipl!ng 9OUeuGlUIL-Vl JGWm@ISL-AA 6Z�ZZ 77 777 U) 00 LL 0 z 0 �-TH U z Ft Z 0,<o 0 U)o -7 0 Lu LL LLJ F)(D U) z 0 C) ui —-—-—- -—-—-— 0-7 _ I��es 5u�xeu.5u3 fo naw�roaea 'J_';i- _�`/L/ �r�c �"d+x, - aani>aiix>av gg 5J Sv%31 j aUSIaHO sn id ioo }o Allo SlbV/sexal'gsuyp snd�op 9' k P,sm tp 'Cl Poomuaaa�J Q �_. 6uipling 9OUeua}uieW JOIL- ISeM 6Z�ZZ 1 QY U) w O o � o V a� 0 s0 00' ~ s U) Z 0E2 VD O <� U 3 0 w rc� - ' m m - o L ;r VU� FIN mm �_-—------------ - ow � s0 0 II - - - - o - - - =m0 3� w 0 Ll oz r r P r — — — — — — —�— — — — .O Wd Se L05 bZOL9L/l l n�a5 6u�aau 6u3�o�uau,l�oeap a�`E`T e nioaiixo v a� SVX31 o a a a IS18Ho SfldJoo to )xo SlbBL sexal'gsuyp snd�op 'Cl Poomuaaa�j lbS9 MI '! 6uipling 9OUeua}uieW JGIE ISeM 6Z�ZZ 8 (n v z W O a o oL o m w F_ 000 00 <� 3� O y q — m T. o L Jerre rc.^. p os.a El wg ix.i. � .Deers n i 'i i rx d ❑ u— n F ,s r w E 0 wu _ o vay w y ph I � � i i i _ P 3 z 0 5 O ova r ° m 'N T svx3l USIaHO sni ioo jo Aiio SlbBL lisli �cl P....qo s Vl nd,oZ) Kz 5uipl!ng 9OUeuGlule JGIEWISM 6" z U) z ui O F— U) z ---------------------------- ------------------- ---------- 2s SVx3l aUSIaHO sn id ioo to Allo SIbV/sexal'gsuyp snd�op 1 }€I a0 Poomua..E)lbS9 Q �_. a � .af 5ui in aaueua uie as enna Se .PI. 9 � W � � M 6Zl-ZZ U) 3a z yo w (� - -� z = - z w la U lip El EH 0 _ z O 3J_` _ w o ro �w a� �M 14 I IX £m 1010 3w_ 01 Eldi - e po LL ❑ ❑ ❑ >❑ -_❑ ❑ w ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ' =N ❑ ❑ ❑ 41 ❑ ❑ z 5 iEl ElI a s W � LU w U Wa Lu-- Wd SbZ054ZOL9Wll _ I��es 5u�xeu.5u3 fo naw�roaea J"_,.J L_���d o k��E �"d+x, - aani>aiix>av gg 5J svx31 j cn a o qp -5 aI1SIaH� Sf1da0� 1> Ally 9[bV/suxal'gsuyp snd�op 9' k�P,sm }55i a0 Poomuaaa�J lbS9 ��_. 6uipling 9OUeua}uieW JGIE ISeM 6Z�ZZ U) z w U O z O U ,op z o w A 5> I 'u w se°Grp; c U) w — s a = p z _ w O a N e: o0 a a9 C 5 W w off. sHn EMS � p K ON soz £ gs LLz-. C SJ w UUU d I�/e5 5u/aeu,5u3 fo waw//oaea i d 11` 'c �r`�E �d'd+�, _ aani>aiixory -gg so SVx3l aUSIaHO sn id ioo }o Allo SlbV/sexal'gsuyp snd�op k �m a0 Poomua..E)lbS9 Q �_. -k 6uipling 9OUeua}uieW aalemOlseM 6Z�ZZ U) F- z w O GD - - - -� z I O o o0 a0 F- 00 .� FD 0 00 0 Lb a�l r� a� Wa� o� Ali O OFEl E�0 3yry we Nab 00 p0 -F I II m0 II II � I I I I I w li li i i I i i li w=� ar �a I I I I as�o oLLw Wd ObC05 bZOL9l/l l I�/es eu/xeu.eu3�o wewt,oaea _ 'J SVx31 aUSIaHO Sn id ioo }o Allo SlbV/sexal'gsuyp sn, 8' ti. /0 Poomua..E)lbS9 Q �s. a fi ..af 6uipling 9OUeua}uieW aalemOlseM 6Z�ZZ _ qq U) =4 o a = UJ o >w LL p n C = Jm U O o-- - z 2gm T r v J OZ -H O y Q LU LU 72< co U � oy N U. p. d _ 4 2 _ a of O 2z „o I �3 d 'd 12" S dJ 1 � � 1 � a T Y_ 4 _ 1 I n. , 7 \1. - - z z z z J J J a� > W W W a J J J 77771 �� < W W W W LU 2 W W W Xen X H X H o-�- - - �m IYI/ W Wes@ H F 9 Sdz � z - n _ L-L, o -W w= 1^ uJ V ¢Vcoo - _ Wd FlF059ZOL9Wll �r�c �"d+x, aani>ailx>av gg 5J Svx31 j aUSIaHO sn id ioo }o Allo SlbV/sexal gsuyp' snd�op 3ifrf Sul IIl aaueua uie Ja eMa SeaPoomuaaa�ZZ .PI. 9 � W � � M 6Z�ZZ Q z IG " aIW w -------------- LL I I e1 o LLI w I o- T o III O 3yM o F- $ I (n 0 ui BE 3w� U�v w Z w — Q U� H F ww U U . �-' w w w N r<o >M, z �rt 07 <1 mN LL LL� _ m a o �- I I N I o- w ------ ------------- I— ----------------a --= E o o p� ws �oa w _ _ G-- - - o— R. W C.) -- W N i Ce/ _____________ T v \"Jp a t� Y/ Wd Ob005 bZOL9Wll SVX31 sndjo 9 �V/suxai ijsw<) Z) -18HO Sr�d8_00 to A110 p.......E)[PS9 M- 5uipl!ng 9OUeuGluleVl JOlemOISEM 6Z�ZZ 777� U) H M� z h On - ui 522 it -r LU 0� J�. z --------------- LO C) D z U) z Qws 0 -zo L) q Lij A. M M �E z N/6 0 co� T-7 Ce) P, o ry OD gt H. 'F2 o LF1 0 z fw 0 n of Et'e jt� 9 zl 2 2! r 20 2! 15 Fn o�z 2 SVX31 9 bV/suxai ijsij<)sndjoo -18HO Sr�d800 P A110 p.......E)[PS9 5uipl!ng 9OUeuGluleVl JOIEME)ISEM 6Z�ZZ 77 777777777777 y y y U) z ui-s z z 0 0 z 0 a to■i 0 LU LU LU LU R fr Q. ZE, Lu D LU L Kzg� D O C\j 0 OC) 0 LU F— U) L) z O C) t 0 U) rn LU C) C) 77 T 7 < LU z z z 0 2 > 0 < > < LU > LU w w --- LU w LC. ........ Ir, Ir L4 ........... ......... E. cr LU2_ LU Lul Z, LO r rn r co ............... Ll L 2 0 d A z z fr Lu z C\j u o�� cz3U ry � m � o m �2 zl '4 c6l I WIN LMU < (D y) 0 z z z 0 D 0 0 C5 T� C) < < x x t ` .\ io s\ a« \ \ \ \ ; �® ^ DugOBa ueumgeaJm©©mom M/Z Z » � m e ) 2 : ± } � U (= O c Z O Q U _ � e 2 2 O U g $ ± NHE / } tMlm /} \ \ { n lw / a «_ - y \ 2 © } ^ + ƒ ` $» � SVX31 L9 -18HO Sr1d8 _suxai_O Z) to Ally 9[bV/ ijsij<)snd,.Z)p.......E)[P99 5uipl!ng 9OUeuGlUlL-Vl JGWm@lSL-AA 6Z�ZZ 77 77777777777777, U) z ui C)- 0 LU Js <m z a- LD u -a n HE H W= z 0 LU z ui 00 co H T t —H p LU J Wu cq LU �E CY) at Lu'� LU LU- Z�G -a C\j CO hE H M irP7po F- - F- i LU Lu F-. LU zs-� z z -M LO C) SVX31 SIHHO sndjo Sr�d suxai ijsij<) Z)_00 P A110 < p.......E)[PS9 M- 5uipl!ng 9OUeuGluleVl JOlemOlseAA 6Z�ZZ 777� U) z Lij 54°� � � WU ��� w � s U �E ME t ue z LUE LU w LU F— F- K V U)z co C\j CD w 2, Lut E 0' w < C, Z` Z, ,L LU Q^ LU Fa Z. g? z Q m W T Lu ; LO N - --H H W s LUg LU O� g 02 z 0-� co, F'�� Lu� 0-� WE �, LL, W E CVCD man 0 LU w LU cl Z' Z Z� LD. H" Uo O� WR W-, wee P,Y LO m (Y) svx3l USIaHO sni ioo to Aiio 9 bV/suxai I sn tp p.......E) < 5uipl!ng 9OUeuGlUlL-Vl JGWm@lSL-AA 6Z�ZZ 7 77 U) z ui D z D IV w 1, z ILU 0 0 (D.-- U 03 �HH oN9 C)cil C) LU LLam 0,5 (Y) (0 Lud 0 ..... ...... ,2 '0 C, H 00 H LLI Ha LU op n 02 ot 0"'0' ap� LO CID ` .\ ^ { \\ / S /~ a«- ƒ ,mom me \ y \ DugOBa ueumgeaJm©©mom M�Z Z » m - e . 2 : ± U (= O c Z = O Q , g - _ � § e 2 )(} 2 co0 U g $ ± � ±), A . \ ): _ \ 0) ± y. \ - _ It J SVX31 . IS18HO Sr�d800 toA110 91�9/ sndjoZ) :9 'Cl Po 9 < ......E)[Ps 5uipl!ng 9OUeuGluleVl JOlemOISEM 6Z�Zz dd dd- S E E E E 1 1 0 0 E E E E E E E E I E EEE E E E E EEEEE E E E y ui LLJ IL lu 0 z Vr 8 -M— 'HM An In I I I I I I I I I < 0oo LLI oa LU 03 LU a. P LU z 0 Lt z rr kk 0 �W, 0 P— dM� Z o NINO c==ej M"M LU 0 LU 00 C) ZO LL M a. HE LU z Lt I z �la C-a5 .11 >A « « « ,c« mw ` .HO q :\ a« \ ] J [ : me \ y \ 3 , k 7 ,/ . m DugOBa ueumgeaJm©©mS M 6Z Z » m e e 1 \ \}/ 3 . ` FF � O c 2 � e U) 2 / : � 3 w /�� � /�� \ > • \ , , ® ( w LU \ 3 2 \ / \�-:.---��-::---��---- ---------------------------- , ,. :; 0.� «222222222222------2222332 SVX31 IS18HO Sr1d iI sndjoZ)_800 P A110 S I�V/--i 'Cl P� M- 5uipl!ng 9OUeuGluleVl JOIL-WISM 6Z�ZZ -7777-7 U) z LU Ld 1:1 M ILE] FN E z z Of Lu H WXXX w WE Lu Lu 0) P IF- cl co CID M LLg 0. 0 C\j N --L JJ VX31 moo MAN to AID 9[Iq/ P.......E)[PS9 doqS 9oueuaju!eVj jale MOISEM 6Z ZZ Thu d ro loO ------------------------------ ------------------- -------------- ti ---------------------------- --------------- b4- 77[ --- --- -------- O r s a,ea a 3 o f awaroaaa SVX31 = _ - ° as n,�aiix� 1 fiv, ;e arc a ISRJHD Sr d800 to ALd Slb8L sexal'gspyO snd op W /0 Poomuaa/�J 4` ! doyg aouL-U9lU Vl JIGIEMaISeM 6Z�ZZ Q � - a e c - �$N=m v O U) w O z - -----— -- - ---------- - ----- - m -—Y— —-------------- a 92, -- - -- -- ----------1 --------------------- ' ---------- Q z 0. Z w g w ---------- _-_-_-_-_-_-_---------_ _ ----------Y————-———-_ Z �w - w —-—-—-—-—— -—-—-—-—-—-—-— _ _ w a, e r € 0 J w K d Y d" U m a w _-_---_-_-- _-_-_-_-_-_-_-_---_-_-_ ----------------- -------- Q w o----------- -- --------I—------------------IL--- -- — I I 1 1 I I Q r a,as a�,ea�VX�o l�awi,oaaa / "�. n,oailxo so S31 e�, rc v auslVD sndaw to ALo 9[bV/sexal'gsuyp Poo lbS9 doyg aouL-UGIU VI JOIL-MaIseM 6Z�ZZ m � U) z w s s U w �000 Z O 2 fA O a m W = w q,H U J e O 000�00000000000 g_ _ x � Coe w N 0 > IIII e G 0 Z - s s -..�»Mm � z ..FL 3 Q w m Apr V ¢ G W Z .�4 I 0 5 S 4 5 � - - -M.w�S��ww..§ o W ca c0000..o.. 00000..6 Q ea Lo89ZOLkL/ll S VX "§. as n,oaiixo so 31 j aI191VD Sflaw to Alld04 Slb8L sexal'gspyp snd�op d __ a4 poomuaaa�j�bS9 U"f do aoueua uie as enna se �I � - US W M 6Z�ZZ F �\ o 17 - � ) Z Z Lo �o _ -rvc II'a. -�V wN EW Y s R. O� ❑ Io �F a g R - o U R V - O II o o� _ e o o _ a ❑ av ---- _ o d Z 21 o--------- o � �IJ �J=o �J' o n I — — — — — _ o g o� m —-— = - - -0 5 �- w - I ¢ e O �- -� e _ ®_ w dk e..� 0 0 �- Ion Ela o —__— --- - — -__ I - �. oI_ _ (D N A.1 — — l0 ------------ m u d J .e.. o — — .I I o I w �T I ". ni>ailx> 5J SVX31 j �} g t. rc ausiaNn sndao� to ALA SlbBL sexal'gsuyp snd�op Poo lbS9 doyg aouL-UGIU VI JOIL-MaIseM 6Z�ZZ z 4 $ - w UO m _ - � O " n 5 m W Ni k € � - I In lo Nz o -7r E'R -J �k Fibtu IM a a - - - R k 8 g 'oe 6 T%'M- dm Zs:La:89ZaLkL/ll ". nioailxo 5J SVX31 j auS�VD sndaoz) to ALo 9I V/sexal'gsuyp sndLO �op Poomua..Ej I's, 0 doyg aoueua}uieW JGWMaIseM 6Z�ZZ r a u = MA Z w � U W gs w � boo hs �s o N a a g� q $ LL u E dddddd C, S _ se:ba:a 10"I/ll SVX31 suS�VD sndaoz) to ALo 9I V/sexal'gyp su snd,op .� poomuaa/Ej 11,99 4` ! doyg aoueua}uieW JOWME)IS M 6Z�ZZ m � U) z o — g w 4� d R Z W _ - PRE 2 3 5 5 - E 95 w -gEn-am- -Rt Sal 1 � I Eq �Q = 4 k - 8 s y9 x [sLa89ZaLkL/ll - n,oaiix> �= SVX31 _ o ;e rc ausiaNn snd800 to A110 SIbV/sexal'gspyp snd op a4 poomuaaa�j[PS9 LU doyS aouL-UGIU VI JOIL-MOISeM 6Z�ZZ m � U) z w o � w Y Z U � § w c w - i ` 0 a- (n m a Z .so a ¢ s^ o c w1J ¢ QJ O U U I I o a T LL 0000 OOO00000�8®800®Oo�404 _ QJ FIE] Off o a z Q w = z = z - z ¢ w g c7 z o V/z v 4 1 w1 HkAF 0 04;R44 4 °a o �o�oo T 0 m � a m _ - - a � U $s a v wm w i Z �4 Y 4 5 SN - J ❑ ' �s o� g - z aR 5 - ¢ - PrR � Z o w s O xk�N �oAImli�i�� y�©84 004 (D m } Z 3¢ O m u� m ¢ M�,��...�=�ss,� wvao,�asvzaWv��u _ ni>ai�x> 5J SVX31 8;. rc auSRJHD Sr=dK=D to A110 9[bV/sua4xa l'gsup�sjn dj op poomuaaalj9 .� of doyS aouL-UGIU N JOIL-MOISeM 6Z�ZZ UV w < �m 3p - w b r ® w Z w 3 a F © w Z P w tY ® ❑ ® I w 21fit a z j z Fl < U o 1 -kg Q - - - - - - ---- sI1 mn MAN to Ally SIbBL sexal'gsuyp snd�op .� d a4 poomuaa.E)LbS9 `1 -- of ! dot's a�ueua}uieW JOWMaISeM 6Z�ZZ Q o lid, I I ro��ae o =o �I v O -----/ U 9g Z 1 W E 1 g O I �so ----------� —— — ----------- ° W w _ o W ---------- -------------- - '— ---------- - - --------- Y ' Q U --- --_ _—-------- F U W — W �J ---------6LL -- ---- _—_—_ _——_ ------ ------ --- ---------- — = 5 a w U TOu J. I z w g I$ ED FE14 # I - w - - -d- u I - o- - o -IF-- -_- - -- - - --_---_--- -------------- -- II I I ' w r/ W ❑ W i ICI � I ICI i I a I Z 0 w wP -S 511-1 �o rvawaroaaa J r/_ J,' / _ VJ J� U 613 svx31 cl LLSI?JHO sf1d80z) to AL3 9lb8L sexal'gspyp sn1op a0 d Poomuaaa°j lbS9 0 w w ,et doyS aoueua}uieW JGIL-ME)IS M 6Z�ZZ y@ o z Y & w o U M O d o � aexi ; w & z ffN oil 4@10 _� � I fib En �g$ 5 S Tin � o a MM 4 Y Y Y 3 S e chhwwtr,,c.rr4_.: � e a s� a �a o � n,-S 6u,aau513�o puawl,otlap / __ � /J fr �' aniaaiixo v SVX31 CD sa LLSINHO Sr±OZ) to AiO 9I V/s-i ljsuyp sndaop /7,i a yF — a4 poomuaa.Ej[PS9 w w j°4 doyS aoueua}uieW aajemalseM 6Z ZZ zt z rc 5 s,azza�o zo w ,q aw (n W 12 z O tl 3 PIP P PA � .w _ rvoaiNa�Nsvi irv3�v nmds soa jv��33����,�w�.v, w� Hoiin�s aswwia ivnrvvw 8 H�iwns aHG'rvo vdnNvw w aiNOO Noiiona--is,nNv UYY aio HAM wa snonrvirvoo oln U) s' w --_ M1., ow�aa �soHIlM,oaINmeassoin 0 o ws � X - -_- -NO 13301011 aO DIwONoaia CD z .: x o aso aw � U W U U J rva 3wi W (XVWN F)sanOH—V aHO Olntl > H -- sanoH wwaoN iv ago wuava W nw w (wn Niwoz)aao oinv zz OF (.aNvoeNNo—Nvw 44 U w � F s O rvo oinv -yy ssa a _ $ ss�gg CW7 's -€ V 111 z it 0 W O W LL O a € a a W)z7O� S a ]' Q C1 _ m a e N~111 d oa�osvzozrv�<< ni>ai�x> 5J LO a 'gspyp sndiopCD SVX3�ndao o ALA SlbBLsexalpoomuaa.E)[V99 j doyS aouL-UGIU VI JOIL-MOISeM 6Z�ZZ rota Z ® v ® w W __ _ m _ � O p��r cn Z O s g g m w 3 _ B a Sg w� 5 2 C La Lo89ZOLkL/ll y �,as b�,ss�a�3�o l�awy,oaaa -l SVX31 ausiaNn snd800 to A110 SIbV/sexal'gsuyp snd op a4 poomuaaa�j lbS9 `� ! doyS aouL-UGIU VI JOIL-MOISeM 6Z�ZZ n �o U _= Z Eddi Lh ass s$ a r f di L m LI IS IN Fo a H oe� L Z 5 Q W z - Q 8A Wn Ed it 1N Ni O - aG �E 0 0 NroSa L089ZOLkL/ll < : v \_ � - -N- °/ m ' �/doUS aueua\ma Ja MID Se Z Z `/ . , z wt § 2 \ « 2 \ �� � � Ed ail z o \ \ � -- � r ) ) /as 6�/ear a�3�o ixawa,oaaa J, L,J J 17J- _ L ) ni>ailx> 5J SVX31 j CDausiaNn sndao� to ALA 9[bV/sexal'gspyp snd op a4 poomuaa.E)[PS9 doyS aouL-UGIU VI JOIL-MOISeM 6Z�ZZ m � CL U) z w UO lq El HE H w w � z a a dN = O Z ax O K- W �a r - O p Y N 9 �� prep pr��x �..,me�..�...tee❑wwa ..E.£ .... .- f/1 - w 9 <sa«assa�s D) Q FbL08 bZOLkWII SVX31 ISidHO Sr±00 P A110 9 �V/suxai ijsij<)sndj.z) p.......E)1P99 CL doqS 9OUL-UGIUMVI JOIL-MOISL-AA 6Z�ZZ t z ;2 U) Hl H H� w uE2 H 2 Ho I w w 1F C) O w 2,n AL LLI�j w .......... El w T wKI J � r IIm �Idr ^m � H � J a s t T -El 4 ------------ L7 T 7�j W iI T T 777 Ti TI 0 y n,ag b�,ea�a�3�o i�awaroaaa J—L — n,oaiixo SVX3CD ' 8;. rc a ISRJHD sndaoo to ALo 9[bV/sexal'gsuyp sndiop .� Poomua..E)[Ps ro 4` ! doyg aouL-UGIU VI JOIL-MOIS M 6Z�ZZ w r - u i Z ?§ - o U) w w Y O Z Lh T—�F J J w a w N T �\ j \ / / / / / av:�osvaoWv�ia J—L ° ni>ai�x> 5J SVX31 j ' 8;. rc ausiaNn sndao� to ALA SIbBL sexal'gsuyp snd�op Poomuaaa�j lb99 ro V� 4` ! doyg aouL-UGIU VI JOIL-MOISeM 6Z�ZZ fie W p W o Z Z /��� \ W L_ 7 5 � e \\ v \ z \\\ o \ m \ w ell W ----------- a F f . �,-----------' / / / v�----------1----------- r Y i a :------------ —1---�-- w ------------- ------------- / ` l -------------\ �I \I : « / » «:ez SVX ISRJHD ~\/ �� m 99 doUS aueua Uea Ja eMe SeM/ \- :\ ) \ \ \ ( � ) / \ / @ ƒ y z / 2 � 2 � : < 4 ) � , / [ sa 11 S up—on�o loema,oaaQ �uJ SVX31 O a ,�hh aani>aiix> fj ,g ; _ J� LLSI?Jm Sf1dJm to AL3 g�ggA sexal`gsuyp sndaa,7 LO doyg GOUeua}UPA aaWmOISeM 6Z3ZZ z dw _ ro nil sit mff �s m z 5 al LL Z f g b a$ 'v ZQ � W e i rr 3 ,- - - - - - a _ - N 11,im, LIMA a I oil! 4�4- 4 d _ r—Jou .. .. - m �gm� � �y�'�. � s33 3� -z ��y4���. es4 a PHI 0 0 a H x � �si� 3y 3 � 1�. H .o E .h s a o `� g£�tdaa x�De�szozr�z�� - sa 1s -S up—on P rvawaroaaa O ��y'hh aani>aiix> € SVX31 LLSwo SUM to MID v S�ggL s _L`gsuyp sndAoo doyS 00MU91UPA aaWM01SeM 6Z3. Z 4lot 1 "Mylx �I h & �`a na. a H a Hi Rim FoTe�) � -- M Q � � MET- ea st��� ��5 �a a�$ > a � 3 0 m `-�J �C� I m Y O �O M H U �4 G _ s sK 3.��� y 3s" s s sm- �8 H €_ ae ____— l $ eP w - j w. e, 5 - �G e _I_=C '� �m �v > R, t � �$� � a a�e o §, 0 Q O 00 O 0 0 0 O Cr r € €^= 3 aM�` Z �: - HIM U 19 M,1 n m IL J 41 u ` � _ �o❑,��0000❑ ❑:000 T Ds D � w - h I out ga „A a - S . »5 - - sj iG o IN W� Has US S rc t - -, e, o wd rozsesezozr�zW� � h - s>In.es 6u�aau 6u3 ao�uew�oeep _ a>aa..aan € SVX31 ge4 aI1SIa HJ sn88oJ to A11J sexa isu sodaoo w� —— v SLbBL ap poomuaa E,l 9 CL doyS GOULRU ILIA aaI6M@ISeM 6Z3. Z �=z4 LLI 1 H96 w_ s €- y - �� + Z So "33 4ina as U � D �F a 3 o o co H9 w ® 3r� _ af G� S 3 h 4 5. NET s, fee 'v Fo O 1s I Nfi I J a3 - _p�k� aIn W a 19 wi �g�wao a =mFH 0 3� t e s"e a ik N_ T7 e F O APRO _ 6 a Ywpw 33b'fi oj Mu ffi i2 E8- wd 6'zs&�SZo.?JLZiL 11/14/20248 05 41. RE -BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS DEVICES GROUP DEVICES GROUP 5552,A p''EP 2 ;4 PEr EriT 0,,i 0. DEVICES GROUP TECHNOLOGY LEGEND SYMBOL I DESCRIPTION q ar 99 808 g a 2;"2 f'122T2 M H Id .8 IA INTRUSION DETECTION LEGEND SYMBOL I DESORPTION Eg "E F4 m H (1!) ! VIDEO SURVEILLANCE LEGEND SYMBOL I DESORPTION 49 439,492. ga a 94559,AA 2_ 4: ,,, 2 7 2 L0; — '61 1 12 5 4E5 4 ' ; . ; 0, 54; 3'9 5' 55 5 i F T DEVrE8 GROUP DEVICES GROUP AUDIONIDEO LEGEND SYMBOL' DESNRIPTION MB I0 IACE M kl El S ACCESS CONTROL LEGEND SYMBOL DESCRIPTION m i m m 50558 08 88 28,R. ;25 208"82820 28 1m , . 4 , " " • - 865 , 8-88 28 i.L, 2,2 2 •',,g, d 8 ',?: •'' '1 20 2 2 so a pp, 0 20 d20 0 :'i, g41 2 8 I0;•0 P 'E 2a 0r 0 gEmEga H En, 0 , ir apmg, 2 2 Er R , V7,7v, ,,, "39 3 9 9 2 8 2 1 SUBSCRIPTS LEGEND - EXISTING DEVICES DEVICES GROUP 0 r GENERAL NOTES 8 2 2 8 TYPICAL SUBSCRIPTS LEGEND TEXT I DESCRIPTION I] E Hi EH E° m — a m LOCAL SOUND SYSTEM LEGEND SYMBOL I DESCRIPTION d ,,"'d 6 '5, 5 g A L1n ; p, 7 Er, 2, 9955 5353 rig, f,,E,1 528g 2.1 ;§2M5;B".8W,,,0", 55 39 gg 0 1d5P '22520, 5 - 539 F0',0026 "1" 058 CI. .9,, 5539 00- f--,41 0r2.1" 50 9 995 9 359 '; '188 i ",,,,4 0 1224 8 21 233 6 A.B,t„tt 51 q ET55 ; 44, g " 'z, MI 282 g .P g : rt: ,,,. rgN V2k M .,,;Fe,', 0t, W 't0, q,, 6 r; E7!E; FiYj NOTES TO CONTRACTOR SECURITY GENERAL NOTES 2007. 22 =V, B B; :4B-; , = - = ' - . v ; . . 7. , , 55 . . - B „ 7 . = - , 9 = I; . 0 3 , 4 - _ . m 2 BB = ,.9 5 0 . „ . , r 8 ' v 2 B. t , ; 0 0 -< 2 ;. g g . - - ; - . . . - . ; ; . .• - ,, :V; ; ,, , 7; ,, , , , v 7 G) m M 2,, ; ; ;70 . `I; V ;r4, ; :Bn, 0 m CD Go2,20.8662,0, , . 2 2' - '', ', 007 . . 8.-2.27;rt 2522.02oo2 . ".2-44-,, 2,7gRoB77;t -2. . 2"2,86 = = 8 2 : . . ......,......"..:-... , , .' O 2 22 = 0. , .--] •,;, . . On ;, , 2,v;;,. 220,-, 2 ' , 2 2 G 2 2 P R IBV2.BB.012,-;23 q - 2 820t=t,o.==.2; 2 2 RESPONSIBILITY MATRIX 2 / g 2 . , 2 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 6541 Greenwood Dr Corpus Christi, Texas 78415 CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Deportment of Engineering Services ARCI.112FCTU 6 LLS du MAN to AID OM sexal`gsuyp sndaa,7 aO Poom... lbS9 doyS GOueua}u!2A aalennalseM 6Zl.ZZ ADA �ay x R RION a H I w � wl € 8- YAM RE Hu Hl 0 Nollsack , I � s�� w ? W 5 U' Z U 3Ndo aoo�,v33d� � oz Z af ro � II 'I I I n 77M Ell IMSES 3 I a I I 0 I J O I Z§ 2 I W I� wa se re�ezozr�zr� SbX31 \•V i;; # aI1SiHHO Sf1dHOZ) to Ally S 2 SlbBL sea0xa l'gsuy PWMua.AE)[Ps jst doyS aouL-UGIU N JGI8MGISeM 6Z�ZZ 9 m � Q Y z W II II o 0 O 0 o WoFl 21- U ~JE-1o _ F J - -o J -o z J o U { } �o o w o w Y _---------a - _ ---_—_—---_ ----------- U 11 — — a. a a e ao - - --0M1 ED LI � 111111 -—-—-—-—— --— —— -o——— '- 0 ——— -—-—-— ----------- o —-—-—-—-—— —— —— — — —— — --------------- ---------- o-- ------ - _-__ - - -- - - --- b w — w o---- ----------- -- -- ------------ u `w Jo ] _ O x w F w G � --- -- _ ---- ---- --- J u ------ -- - - - - JY2 ullJ �o Z w -----------r--- -eo——_- ,o F --Ir----- o —I—— ----------- =a w o oo g F z z; o z z I W P 3 II � u I � o w i w w z: w w u g� so.p. ' e w 7 - w w p (D CD_ 2« ( 2SVX ' 1 ( G _, mm PAS a« ) 7 ! / " 6 'Cl: m, dogS a ueumgeaJm©©mom AA Z Z \ ? } fie1.:! ) ° ( � ) /, n [ } ) / } \ Y ri k �� aa�,-S 6u, u 6u3�°puewl,otlaQ / � � h aniaailxo v SVX31 dIISINHO Sr±oz) to ALA SIbBL sexal'gsuyp snd op a0 Poomuaaa�J lbS9 dogs aouL-UGIU VI JOIL-MOISeM 6Z�ZZ U) $_ w — a F a ' mi lw g U m W w' o� m ao3=v�" 000000 Ed Ed - � 4 c �r [b 5089ZOLkWII RE -BID CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS OBRNVO OROO OBINOOW 1l0MB S CONTROL • STORE FRONT SINGLE DOOR SS CONTROL • STORE FRONT DOUBLE DOOR 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Shop 6541 Greenwood Dr Corpus Christi, Texas 78415 CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS Deportrrie-e o rgln ering Services 11 8) m �% m r :z 2 ! sndA- \ \ S A aa, S�p , . 6 } : ! ^ doSS �u�mgeR «mom M�\L \ \ \ ) } § : (, 2 ( : ) ), ) CO \ } 0 2 2 m \ \ } w2j z - LU \ ) � § � / ) � ) � \ \ � \ : \ ( aaoitias s�,aa�a�3�o waw��oda� -1 'c ��ri�4 t' O USINHO SndbOD 10 sex AilD Slb8L al'q-qo snd op = °� z� ��� e _— �,- • a0 Po.....ag i,p" 6uippE] aaueuOlUMN JGlu-malseM 6Z�ZZ Na1HC- 1M iA ]N Il0•i __ __ ---------------------------------------------------- e _U x t i i z = pw �'aaa o < < o c - w z U a o�o�o - W Ek Z EA - QO H co Z !r U - U i o H o o N w - 5 z ~ a O a a ¢. U vi, N c s w z = N ` 0 N ¢ z o �1 > Q� CD--'g Ln m! a= ,p an Rn�I z t _ a Ja w a I � ♦...vh tii�i �.^ Z_ _ ~ III � M GN3931(INV SMON NOUVE)NUI CD SVX31 A M USI�JHO �d±00 i ADO 9 H. buippnE] GOUL-UGIUMN Jalu-malsL-AA 6Z�Zz U) z LU H� D C) z R sM C) D R H H s E z 1313 El 7M boo J LU yo MU N st Ha, -4 T8W Hi M v, 5�Ti2 rw, gm N �,E M Plu H., H —wY M, Uz ME� H H QOW W M, H THW" g CD up 5. R"u H, R H-� H 's-'. N m _0 WP, < s A N—M W= H. k- A —H. 1�OA cy') SVX31 3 a awa�cac NV�d NOUVE)Ndl i JR €t aI15R1HO Sf1d oo o Ally Slb8L sexal'psuyp snd�op """ a0 Poomuaaa°j 6bS9 a9 6uippn9 aaueuaIUMN aalemalseM 6Z�ZZ U) z v O LU 3s. F ------- — - -- —————— --go// r 0 TT T U D F- z O U 0 777 W x� N --------- ----- S�W134 NOUVE)IdUl SVX31 0 A USI�JHO S�d±00 i ADO j'ijq3d,.0 .F '2� ps 9 Ho buippnE] GOIJEUGIUM N Jalu-malsL-AA 15Z�ZZ U) z LU D H z > 7 CD I—fl C) F_ z C) C*"i ui CD ee00000e N CD CD < C-) 02 CD C-) L-C CO m C:) CD CD CD CD T IF C/) H9 z co21- CD C CNJ gw W MW -In I 11/20/2024 10 04 40 AM HILVOIONI NOL1VH3d0 m co 0 0 0 z cn 0 5 0 z 0 m z cn CO 01 3A1VA HSITH 3NIIIIHO CT) SONI111d 3N11:1190 DRIPLINE INSTALLATION (CENTER FEED) PC,I0 CO,FRLICT ION DOCUMENTS' 22129 Wastewater Maintenance Building 6541 Greenwood Dr Corpus Christi, Texas 78415 IRRIGATION DETAILS CITY of CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS irgIneering ServIces TIE1 ar.:e3 ARCHITECTURE